diff --git a/en_tn_02-EXO.tsv b/en_tn_02-EXO.tsv
index 819a14552c..dd298402b5 100644
--- a/en_tn_02-EXO.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_02-EXO.tsv
@@ -1,11 +1,11 @@
 Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNote
-EXO	front	intro	b4pp			0		# Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of Exodus\n\n1. Israel in Egypt; preparing to depart from slavery (1–12)\n    *   First genealogy (1:1–6)\n    *   Israel as slaves in Egypt (1:7–22)\n    *   Moses’ history to the time of the Exodus (2:1–4:26)\n    *   Israel suffers in Egypt (4:27–6:13)\n    *   Second genealogy (6:14–27)\n    *   Moses and Aaron go to Pharaoh (6:28–7:25)\n    *   The plagues (8:1–11:10)\n2. Instructions for celebrating the Passover (12:1–30)\n3. From Egypt to Mount Sinai (12:31–18:27)\n    *   The Passover; preparing to leave Egypt; leaving Egypt (12:31–50, 13:1–22)\n    *   Journey from Egypt to Mount Sinai (14:1–18:27)\n4. Mount Sinai and the Law (19-40)\n    *   Preparing for the covenant (19:1–25)\n    *   The Ten Commandments (20:1–17)\n    *   The covenant described (20:18–23:33)\n    *   The people agree to the covenant; Moses returns to Mount Sinai (24:1–18)\n    *   Design of the tabernacle and its furnishings; what was required of those who serve in it; tabernacle functions (25:1–31:18)\n    *   The golden calf; Moses prays for the people (32:1–33:22)\n    *   The covenant described again (34:1–35)\n    *   Making of the ark and its furnishings (35:1–38:31) and priestly garments (39:1–43, 40:1–33)\n    *   The cloud (40:34–38)\n\n### What is the book of Exodus about?\n\nExodus continues the story of the previous book, Genesis. The first half of Exodus is about how Yahweh made Abraham’s descendants into a nation. This nation, which would be called “Israel,” was meant to belong to Yahweh and worship him. The second half of Exodus describes how God gave the Israelites his law through Moses. The law of Moses told the Israelites how to obey and worship Yahweh properly.\n\nThe book of Exodus tells how the Israelites were to build the tabernacle. The tabernacle was a tent where Yahweh would be among his people. The Israelites worshiped and sacrificed animals to Yahweh at the tabernacle. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]])\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\n“Exodus” means “exit” or “departure.” Translators may translate this title in a way that can communicate its subject clearly, for example, “About the Israelites Leaving Egypt” or “How the Israelites Left the Land of Egypt.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n### Who wrote the book of Exodus?\n\nThe writers of both the Old and New Testaments present Moses as being very involved with writing the book of Exodus. Since ancient times, both Jews and Christians have thought that Moses wrote Genesis, Exodus, Leviticus, Numbers, and Deuteronomy.\n\n### Why did Moses write so much about God delivering or rescuing the people of Israel?\n\nMoses wrote much about God rescuing his people from the Egyptians to show that Yahweh is very powerful. Egypt was the most powerful nation at that time, but Yahweh was still able to free the Israelites from the Egyptians. Also, by rescuing the Israelites, Yahweh showed that he had chosen them as his people, and they should worship him.\n\n### How does the book of Exodus show the fulfillment of the promises given to Abraham?\n\nThe book of Exodus shows God beginning to fulfill his promise to Abraham. In Genesis, God promised Abraham that he would have many descendants and that they would become a large nation. When God rescued the Israelites from the Egyptians, he took them to Mount Sinai. There he made a covenant with them, and they became the nation that belonged to Yahweh.\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What was the Jewish Passover?\n\nThe Jewish Passover was a religious festival. Yahweh commanded the Israelites to celebrate it every year. Passover was a time to remember how God rescued Israel from the Egyptians. The first Passover meal was eaten in the evening just before they left Egypt.\n\n### What was the law of Moses to the people of Israel?\n\nThe law of Moses instructed the people of Israel about what Yahweh required them to do as his people. In the law, God told the people how they should live so that they would honor him. He also instructed them about their need to offer animal sacrifices. God required these sacrifices so that he could forgive their sins and continue living among them. The law also described the duties of the priests and told how to build the tabernacle.\n\n### What did it mean that Israel was to be a “kingdom of priests and a holy nation” ([19:6](../19/06.md) ULT)?\n\nIsrael was a holy nation because Yahweh separated them from all other nations to belong to him. They were to honor and worship him only. This made them different from all the other nations of the world; the other nations worshiped many false gods.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### Thus says Yahweh\n\nThis phrase is used many times in the Old Testament to introduce Yahweh’s speech. Your team should pick a standard translation. See [4:intro](../04/intro.md) for more.\n\n### Pharaoh’s stubborn heart\n\nBetween chapters 4 and 14, there are 18 cases where Pharaoh’s heart is described as strong (11x), heavy (6x), or hard (1x), and one case where the Egyptians’ hearts are described as strong. These are metaphors for being stubborn, that is, being unwilling to obey Yahweh or even to do what is clearly in his own and Egypt’s best interest. Many cultures have similar metaphors, but not all will use the same body part. Within these cases, six times there is a neutral description that Pharaoh was stubborn, without saying anyone made him so ([7:13](../07/13.md), [7:14](../07/14.md), [7:22](../07/22.md), [8:19](../08/19.md), [9:7](../09/07.md), [9:35](../09/35.md)); three times Pharaoh makes himself stubborn ([8:15](../08/15.md), [8:32](../08/32.md), [9:34](../09/34.md)); and ten times Yahweh makes Pharaoh/the Egyptians stubborn ([4:21](../04/21.md), [7:3](../07/03.md), [9:12](../09/12.md), [10:1](../10/01.md), [10:20](../10/20.md), [10:27](../10/27.md), [11:10](../11/10.md), [14:4](../14/04.md), [14:8](../14/08.md), [14:17](../14/17.md)).\n\n### Why are the details of the construction of the tabernacle in Exodus 25–32 repeated in Exodus 35–40?\n\nIn Exodus 25–32, God describes exactly how the tabernacle was to be built. The details were repeated in Exodus 35–40 in the description of the actual construction. This showed that the people were to be careful to do exactly as God commanded.\n\n### Are the events in the order that they actually happened?\n\nMost, but not all, of the events in the book of Exodus are told in the order that they actually happened. Translators may need to make it clear when the events are in an unusual order.\n\n### What does it mean that God “lived” among his people?\n\nThe book of Exodus presents God as living in the tabernacle among the nation of Israel. God is everywhere, but he lived among the Israelites in a special way. God dwelled with the Israelites because they belonged to him. He promised to lead them and bless them. In return, the people were to worship him and honor him.
-EXO	1	intro	cj55			0		# Exodus 01 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>This chapter is intended to form a smooth transition from the last chapter of the book of Genesis.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Israel’s growth<br><br>Israel grew in number. This was in fulfillment of the covenant God made with Abraham. It also caused the Egyptians great concern that there would be more Israelites than Egyptians, with the result that the Egyptians would be unable to defend themselves against such a large number of people. Pharaoh tried to kill all of the male babies so they would not become soldiers who fought against him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fulfill]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])<br><br>### End of the famine<br><br>It is obvious that some time has passed since the beginning of the famine which brought the Israelites into Egypt. Yahweh appears to be punishing the Hebrews for not returning to the Promised Land but instead choosing to stay in Egypt. No return attempt is recorded to have been made. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### “All of the descendants of Jacob were 70 in number”<br><br>This number included both Jacob’s children and grandchildren. It may cause confusion, but it is important to remember Jacob only had 12 sons.
+EXO	front	intro	b4pp			0		# Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of Exodus\n\n1. Israel in Egypt; preparing to depart from slavery (1–12)\n    *   First genealogy (1:1–6)\n    *   Israel as slaves in Egypt (1:7–22)\n    *   Moses’ history to the time of the Exodus (2:1–4:26)\n    *   Israel suffers in Egypt (4:27–6:13)\n    *   Second genealogy (6:14–27)\n    *   Moses and Aaron go to Pharaoh (6:28–7:25)\n    *   The plagues (8:1–11:10)\n2. Instructions for celebrating the Passover (12:1–30)\n3. From Egypt to Mount Sinai (12:31–18:27)\n    *   The Passover; preparing to leave Egypt; leaving Egypt (12:31–50, 13:1–22)\n    *   Journey from Egypt to Mount Sinai (14:1–18:27)\n4. Mount Sinai and the Law (19-40)\n    *   Preparing for the covenant (19:1–25)\n    *   The Ten Commandments (20:1–17)\n    *   The covenant described (20:18–23:33)\n    *   The people agree to the covenant; Moses returns to Mount Sinai (24:1–18)\n    *   Design of the Dwelling and its furnishings; what was required of those who serve in it; dwelling functions (25:1–31:18)\n    *   The golden calf; Moses prays for the people (32:1–33:22)\n    *   The covenant described again (34:1–35)\n    *   Making of the ark and its furnishings (35:1–38:31) and priestly garments (39:1–43, 40:1–33)\n    *   The cloud (40:34–38)\n\n### What is the book of Exodus about?\n\nExodus continues the story of the previous book, Genesis. The first half of Exodus is about how Yahweh made Abraham’s descendants into a nation. This nation, which would be called “Israel,” was meant to belong to Yahweh and worship him. The second half of Exodus describes how God gave the Israelites his law through Moses. The law of Moses told the Israelites how to obey and worship Yahweh properly.\n\nThe book of Exodus tells how the Israelites were to build the Dwelling. The dwelling was a tent where Yahweh would be among his people. The Israelites worshiped and sacrificed animals to Yahweh at the Dwelling. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]])\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\n“Exodus” means “exit” or “departure.” Translators may translate this title in a way that can communicate its subject clearly, for example, “About the Israelites Leaving Egypt” or “How the Israelites Left the Land of Egypt.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n### Who wrote the book of Exodus?\n\nThe writers of both the Old and New Testaments present Moses as being very involved with writing the book of Exodus. Since ancient times, both Jews and Christians have thought that Moses wrote Genesis, Exodus, Leviticus, Numbers, and Deuteronomy.\n\n### Why did Moses write so much about God delivering or rescuing the people of Israel?\n\nMoses wrote much about God rescuing his people from the Egyptians to show that Yahweh is very powerful. Egypt was a very powerful nation in the region at that time, but Yahweh was still able to free the Israelites from the Egyptians. Also, by rescuing the Israelites, Yahweh showed that he had chosen them as his people and that they should worship him.\n\n### How does the book of Exodus show the fulfillment of the promises given to Abraham?\n\nThe book of Exodus shows God beginning to fulfill his promise to Abraham. In Genesis, God promised Abraham that he would have many descendants and that they would become a large nation. When God rescued the Israelites from the Egyptians, he took them to Mount Sinai. There he made a covenant with them, and they became the nation that belonged to Yahweh.\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What was the Jewish Passover?\n\nThe Jewish Passover was a religious festival. Yahweh commanded the Israelites to celebrate it every year. Passover was a time to remember how God rescued Israel from the Egyptians. The first Passover meal was eaten in the evening just before they left Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])\n\n### What was the law of Moses to the people of Israel?\n\nThe law of Moses instructed the people of Israel about what Yahweh required them to do as his people. In the law, God told the people how they should live so that they would honor him. He also instructed them about their need to offer animal sacrifices. God required these sacrifices so that he could forgive their sins and continue living among them. The law also described the duties of the priests and told how to build the Dwelling.\n\n### What did it mean that Israel was to be a “kingdom of priests and a holy nation” ([19:6](../19/06.md) ULT)?\n\nIsrael was a holy nation because Yahweh separated them from all other nations to belong to him. They were to honor and worship him only. This made them different from all the other nations of the world; the other nations worshiped many false gods.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### Thus says Yahweh\n\nThis phrase is used many times in the Old Testament to introduce Yahweh’s speech. Your team should pick a standard translation. See [4:intro](../04/intro.md) for more.\n\n### Pharaoh’s stubborn heart\n\nBetween chapters 4 and 14, there are 18 cases where Pharaoh’s heart is described as strong (11x), heavy (6x), or hard (1x), and one case where the Egyptians’ hearts are described as strong. These are metaphors for being stubborn, that is, being unwilling to obey Yahweh or even to do what is clearly in his own and Egypt’s best interest. Many cultures have similar metaphors, but not all will use the same body part. Within these cases, six times there is a neutral description that Pharaoh was stubborn, without saying anyone made him so ([7:13](../07/13.md), [7:14](../07/14.md), [7:22](../07/22.md), [8:19](../08/19.md), [9:7](../09/07.md), [9:35](../09/35.md)); three times Pharaoh makes himself stubborn ([8:15](../08/15.md), [8:32](../08/32.md), [9:34](../09/34.md)); and ten times Yahweh makes Pharaoh/the Egyptians stubborn ([4:21](../04/21.md), [7:3](../07/03.md), [9:12](../09/12.md), [10:1](../10/01.md), [10:20](../10/20.md), [10:27](../10/27.md), [11:10](../11/10.md), [14:4](../14/04.md), [14:8](../14/08.md), [14:17](../14/17.md)).\n\n### Why are the details of the construction of the Dwelling in Exodus 25–32 repeated in Exodus 35–40?\n\nIn Exodus 25–32, God describes exactly how the Dwelling was to be built. The details were repeated in Exodus 35–40 in the description of the actual construction. This showed that the people were careful to do exactly as God commanded.\n\n### Are the events in the order that they actually happened?\n\nMost, but not all, of the events in the book of Exodus are told in the order that they actually happened. Translators may need to make it clear when the events are in an unusual order.\n\n### What does it mean that God “lived” among his people?\n\nThe book of Exodus presents God as living in the Dwelling among the nation of Israel. God is everywhere, but he lived among the Israelites in a special way. God dwelled with the Israelites because they belonged to him. He promised to lead them and bless them. In return, the people were to worship him and honor him.\n
+EXO	1	intro	cj55			0		# Exodus 01 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter is intended to form a smooth transition from the last chapter of the book of Genesis.\n\n- v. 1-7: Jacob’s family grows\n- v. 8-22: Pharaoh oppresses the Israelites and tries to limit the Israelites’ growth\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Israel’s growth\n\nIsrael grew in number. This was the beginning of God’s fulfilling his promises to Abraham. It also caused the Pharaoh to worry that there would be more Israelites than Egyptians, with the result that the Egyptians would be unable to defend themselves against so many people. Pharaoh tried to kill all of the male babies so they would not become soldiers who fought against him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fulfill]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n-  “All of the descendants of Jacob were 70 in number”\nThis number included both Jacob’s children and grandchildren. It may cause confusion, but it is important to remember Jacob only had 12 sons.\n- Starting from verse 7, the terms **Hebrews** and **sons of Israel** both refer to the Israelite nation or people group.\n- God blesses the Hebrew midwives for lying to the wicked Pharaoh. Translators should not attempt to hide this. They showed that they feared God by disobeying a wicked order in order to preserve the lives of God’s people. They “acted wisely toward him” (or shrewdly, see [1:10](../01/10.md)) by lying to foil Pharaoh.\n- Pharaoh is a specifically Egyptian word for their kings (and queens).
 EXO	1	1	h51f	writing-background		0		Verses 1–7 are background information for the story. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 EXO	1	1	fxbx	figs-go	הַ⁠בָּאִ֖ים…בָּֽאוּ	1		The words translated as **came in** could also be translated as “went in.” Use whichever form is most natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 EXO	1	1	e65z	translate-names	יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל…יַעֲקֹ֔ב	1		**Jacob** and **Israel** are two names for the same man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EXO	1	1	g89k	figs-metonymy	וּ⁠בֵית֖⁠וֹ	1	household	Here, **house** refers to all of the people who live together, usually a large family with servants. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “and his household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-EXO	1	5	uk67	figs-metonymy	וַֽ⁠יְהִ֗י כָּל־נֶ֛פֶשׁ יֹצְאֵ֥י יֶֽרֶךְ־יַעֲקֹ֖ב שִׁבְעִ֣ים נָ֑פֶשׁ	1	household	Here, **lives** refers to people (specifically, men); **going out of the loins of Jacob** is a reference to these people as being in his seed or semen and produced through his sexual acts–therefore meaning they are his descendants. See also Hebrews 7:9-10. Alternate translation: “And all the male descendants of Jacob numbered 70.”
+EXO	1	5	uk67	figs-metonymy	וַֽ⁠יְהִ֗י כָּל־נֶ֛פֶשׁ יֹצְאֵ֥י יֶֽרֶךְ־יַעֲקֹ֖ב שִׁבְעִ֣ים נָ֑פֶשׁ	1	household	Here, **lives** refers to people (specifically, men); **going out of the loins of Jacob** is a reference to these people as being in his seed or semen and produced through his sexual acts–therefore meaning they are his descendants. See also Hebrews 7:9-10. Alternate translation: “And all the male descendants of Jacob numbered 70.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	1	6	sh42	grammar-connect-time-sequential	וַ⁠יָּ֤מָת	1		They did not die immediately. Jacob and his sons spent the rest of their lives in Egypt and died there. If necessary, use a transition word that conveys that some time passed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 EXO	1	6	g5qg	translate-kinship	וְ⁠כָל־אֶחָ֔י⁠ו	1	all his brothers	**All his brothers** includes ten older brothers and one younger brother. If your language has different words for those, you can say, “his ten older brothers and his younger brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
 EXO	1	7	c368	figs-metonymy	וּ⁠בְנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל	1		This is the first of many times in this book that **sons of Israel** refers to the Israelite nation or people. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And the people of Israel” or “And the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ EXO	1	9	t7s1		עַמּ֑⁠וֹ	1		There is some ambiguity as to whom exactly Ph
 EXO	1	9	jik8		מִמֶּֽ⁠נּוּ	1		Use a way that is natural in your language to compare non-specific sizes of groups of people. Alternate translation: “more than we are”
 EXO	1	9	njuf	figs-quotemarks	הִנֵּ֗ה	1		Beginning from **behold** and extending to the end of [verse 10](../01/10.md) is a direct quote of what the king said. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	1	10	hiq4	figs-exclusive	נִֽתְחַכְּמָ֖ה…שֹׂ֣נְאֵ֔י⁠נוּ…בָּ֖⁠נוּ	1	let us	The word **us** is inclusive and refers to the king and his people, the Egyptians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-EXO	1	10	wkvf	grammar-collectivenouns	ל֑⁠וֹ…יִרְבֶּ֗ה…וְ⁠נוֹסַ֤ף…הוּא֙…וְ⁠נִלְחַם…וְ⁠עָלָ֥ה	1	let us	Here, **him, he**, and **himself** refer to the Israelite people. The pronouns agree grammatically with the singular “people” in the original. This occurs in many places in Exodus. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the plural, as in the UST.
+EXO	1	10	wkvf	grammar-collectivenouns	ל֑⁠וֹ…יִרְבֶּ֗ה…וְ⁠נוֹסַ֤ף…הוּא֙…וְ⁠נִלְחַם…וְ⁠עָלָ֥ה	1	let us	Here, **him, he**, and **himself** refer to the Israelite people. The pronouns agree grammatically with the singular “people” in the original. This occurs in many places in Exodus. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the plural, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 EXO	1	10	il4u	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	פֶּן־יִרְבֶּ֗ה וְ⁠הָיָ֞ה כִּֽי־תִקְרֶ֤אנָה מִלְחָמָה֙	1		The king suggests a combination of two hypothetical events: 1. There are even more Israelites, 2. There is a battle. These are followed by a series of undesirable consequences: 3. The Israelites join an enemy, 4. The Israelites attack the Egyptians, 5. The Israelites leave Egypt. While the series of consequences is also technically hypothetical, the king’s language indicates that if 1-2 happen, then 3-5 are certain. Use language that makes it clear that the first two events are hypothetical and that the next three are consequences that could be expected if the first two events happen. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 EXO	1	10	jc1h		וְ⁠עָלָ֥ה מִן־הָ⁠אָֽרֶץ	1	leave the land	Alternate translation: “and he leaves Egypt”
 EXO	1	10	ni77	figs-quotemarks	הָ⁠אָֽרֶץ	1		After this phrase, the direct quote of what the king said comes to an end. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ EXO	1	13	j1q6	figs-abstractnouns	וַ⁠יַּעֲבִ֧דוּ מִצְרַ֛י
 EXO	1	14	mx6v	figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יְמָרְר֨וּ אֶת־חַיֵּי⁠הֶ֜ם	1	made their lives bitter	The difficult lives of the Israelites are spoken of as if their daily lives were bitter food that was difficult to eat. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “And they made their lives difficult” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	1	14	jre2	figs-abstractnouns	בַּ⁠עֲבֹדָ֣ה קָשָׁ֗ה	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind **slavery** in another way. Alternative translation: “by making them work hard as slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 EXO	1	14	cuq7	translate-unknown	בְּ⁠חֹ֨מֶר֙	1	mortar	This was a wet glue or mud put between bricks or stones that held them together when it dried. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-EXO	1	14	h5dx	translate-unknown	וּ⁠בִ⁠לְבֵנִ֔ים	1		**Bricks** are hardened rectangular blocks of mud, clay etc., used for building. (Source: Wiktionary) The clay or mud was hardened in the sun or by heating it to higher temperatures in other ways. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+EXO	1	14	h5dx	translate-unknown	וּ⁠בִ⁠לְבֵנִ֔ים	1		**Bricks** are blocks made of clay or mud with straw in them. They are hardened in the sun or in another manner before they are used for building.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	1	14	gzq7		אֵ֚ת כָּל־עֲבֹ֣דָתָ֔⁠ם אֲשֶׁר־עָבְד֥וּ בָ⁠הֶ֖ם בְּ⁠פָֽרֶךְ׃	1	All their required work was hard	See how you translated this in [verse 13](../01/13.md). Alternate translation: “the Egyptians made them work very hard” or “the Egyptians forced them to work very hard”
 EXO	1	14	ct02	writing-pronouns	וַ⁠יְמָרְר֨וּ…בָ⁠הֶ֖ם	1		These two pronouns refer to the Egyptians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 EXO	1	14	acj5	writing-pronouns	חַיֵּי⁠הֶ֜ם…עֲבֹ֣דָתָ֔⁠ם…עָבְד֥וּ	1		These three pronouns refer to the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ EXO	1	21	jx9c		בָּתִּֽים	1	he gave them families	Alternate translation:
 EXO	1	22	ld1j	figs-explicit	כָּל־הַ⁠בֵּ֣ן הַ⁠יִּלּ֗וֹד הַ⁠יְאֹ֨רָ⁠ה֙ תַּשְׁלִיכֻ֔⁠הוּ	1	You must throw every son…into the river	This order was given in order to drown the male Hebrew children. The full meaning of this may be made explicit. Alternate translation: “You must dispose of each new baby boy in the river so he will drown” or “Drown each baby boy in the river when he is born” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EXO	1	22	a6b2	figs-quotations	וַ⁠יְצַ֣ו פַּרְעֹ֔ה לְ⁠כָל־עַמּ֖⁠וֹ לֵ⁠אמֹ֑ר כָּל־הַ⁠בֵּ֣ן הַ⁠יִּלּ֗וֹד הַ⁠יְאֹ֨רָ⁠ה֙ תַּשְׁלִיכֻ֔⁠הוּ וְ⁠כָל־הַ⁠בַּ֖ת תְּחַיּֽוּ⁠ן	1		From **You shall** to the end of the verse is a direct quote of Pharaoh’s speech. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. However, it could be translated as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “And Pharaoh commanded all of his people to throw every baby boy into the river, but to let every girl live.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 EXO	1	22	stag	figs-youdual	תַּשְׁלִיכֻ֔⁠הוּ…תְּחַיּֽוּ⁠ן	1		The uses of the word **you** here refer to all the Egyptians. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
-EXO	2	intro	rwf3			0		# Exodus 02 General Notes<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br><br>### Covenant<br><br>God begins to relate to the Israelites based on his covenant with Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob.<br><br><br>### Moses’ heritage<br><br>In the first part of this chapter, Pharaoh’s daughter recognizes Moses as being a Hebrew, but in the last part of this chapter, the Midianites believe him to be an Egyptian.<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Identification of participants<br><br>* Moses is the only participant named in most of this chapter. This is because many of the participants play very minor roles and because this part of the story is focusing on Moses’ life.<br><br>### Ironic situations<br>* While Pharaoh tried to diminish the power of the Israelites by killing all of their baby boys, God used Pharaoh’s own daughter to save Moses.<br>* Moses believes he is meant to be the rescuer of his people, but they reject him. Ultimately, Moses was correct, but God had not yet sent him for that mission.
+EXO	2	intro	rwf3			0		# Exodus 02 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n- v. 1-10: Moses’ birth and early life\n- v. 11-15: Moses’ attempted intervention and flight\n- v. 16-22: Moses settles in Midian\n- v. 23-25: God sees the Israelites’ plight\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Covenant\n\nAt the end of the chapter, God begins to relate to the Israelites based on his covenant with Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob.\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Identification of participants\n\n* Moses is the only participant named in most of this chapter. This is because many of the participants play very minor roles and because this part of the story is focusing on Moses’ life.\n\n### Moses’ heritage\n\nIn the first part of this chapter, Pharaoh’s daughter recognizes Moses as being a Hebrew, but in the last part of this chapter, the Midianites believe him to be an Egyptian. \n\n### Ironic situations\n\n* While Pharaoh tried to diminish the power of the Israelites by killing all of their baby boys, God used Pharaoh’s own daughter to save Moses.\n* Moses believes he is meant to be the rescuer of his people, but they reject him. Ultimately, Moses was correct, but the people rejected him at this point (see Acts 7).
 EXO	2	1	wvj9	writing-newevent	וַ⁠יֵּ֥לֶךְ	1	Now	A new scene begins here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 EXO	2	1	riy7	writing-participants	אִ֖ישׁ…בַּת	1		These are new participants. They remain unnamed until [Exodus 6:20](../06/20.md) where they are identified as Amram and Jochebed. For now it is best to leave them unnamed in your language, if possible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 EXO	2	1	mp7m	figs-idiom	וַ⁠יִּקַּ֖ח אֶת־בַּת־לֵוִֽי	1		Here, **took a daughter** is an idiom for marrying. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -87,8 +87,8 @@ EXO	2	3	t2gj	translate-unknown	תֵּ֣בַת גֹּ֔מֶא	1	papyrus basket	Th
 EXO	2	3	tn3y	figs-explicit	וַ⁠תַּחְמְרָ֥⁠ה בַ⁠חֵמָ֖ר וּ⁠בַ⁠זָּ֑פֶת	1	sealed it with bitumen and pitch	You could explicitly state that this was to keep out water. Alternate translation: “and she daubed it with bitumen and with pitch to keep water from getting into it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EXO	2	3	wpb6	translate-unknown	וַ⁠תַּחְמְרָ֥⁠ה	1	sealed	This means that she applied a waterproof coating. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	2	3	ym3k	translate-unknown	בַ⁠חֵמָ֖ר	1	bitumen	This is a sticky black substance made from oil. It can be used to keep out water. Alternate translation: “with tar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-EXO	2	3	v825	translate-unknown	וּ⁠בַ⁠זָּ֑פֶת	1	pitch	This is a sticky brown or black substance that can be made from tree sap or from oil. Therefore, **pitch** would include not only bitumen but also plant-based resins. It too can be used to keep out water. Alternate translation: “and with tar” or “and with resin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-EXO	2	3	y8gq	translate-unknown	בַּ⁠סּ֖וּף	1	reeds	These **reeds** were a type of tall grass that grew in flat, wet areas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+EXO	2	3	v825	translate-unknown	וּ⁠בַ⁠זָּ֑פֶת	1	pitch	This is a sticky brown or black substance that can be made from tree sap. It too can be used to keep out water. Alternate translation: “and with tar” or “and with resin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+EXO	2	3	y8gq	translate-unknown	בַּ⁠סּ֖וּף	1	reeds	These **reeds** were a type of tall grass with wide blades that formed a flat surface when woven together. They grew in flat, wet areas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	2	4	av8b		וַ⁠תֵּתַצַּ֥ב אֲחֹת֖⁠וֹ מֵ⁠רָחֹ֑ק	1	at a distance	This means she stood far enough away so that she would not be noticed, but close enough to see the ark. Use a word that expresses this sort of distance in your language.
 EXO	2	4	uf14	figs-abstractnouns	מֵ⁠רָחֹ֑ק	1		This probably means somewhere in the reeds where she could see the basket, but no one would see her. If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **distance** in another way. Alternate translation: “not far away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 EXO	2	4	ruvb	translate-kinship	אֲחֹת֖⁠וֹ	1		Here, the actions of **his sister** show that she was older. If your language uses a different term for siblings based on their relative ages or the gender of the siblings or both, use one that means “a boy’s older sister.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])<br>
@@ -128,25 +128,25 @@ EXO	2	13	wqrm	translate-ordinal	הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֔י	1		The ordinal number he
 EXO	2	13	rgn1	figs-exclamations	וְ⁠הִנֵּ֛ה	1	behold	Here, **behold** shows that Moses was surprised by what he saw. You can use a word in your language that will give this meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
 EXO	2	13	i4d6		לָֽ⁠רָשָׁ֔ע	1	the one who was in the wrong	Based on Moses’ question, this means the aggressor or the man wrongfully attacking his neighbor. Alternate translation: “the man who was guilty of starting the fight”
 EXO	2	13	duob	figs-quotemarks	לָ֥⁠מָּה תַכֶּ֖ה רֵעֶֽ⁠ךָ	1		This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-EXO	2	14	qb2n	figs-rquestion	מִ֣י שָֽׂמְ⁠ךָ֞ לְ⁠אִ֨ישׁ שַׂ֤ר וְ⁠שֹׁפֵט֙ עָלֵ֔י⁠נוּ	1	Who made you a leader and judge over us?	The man used this question to rebuke Moses for intervening in the fight. Alternate translation: “You are not our leader and have no right to judge us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+EXO	2	14	qb2n	figs-rquestion	מִ֣י שָֽׂמְ⁠ךָ֞ לְ⁠אִ֨ישׁ שַׂ֤ר וְ⁠שֹׁפֵט֙ עָלֵ֔י⁠נוּ	1	Who made you a leader and judge over us?	The man is not asking a question, he is using this question to rebuke Moses for intervening in the fight. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are not our leader and have no right to judge us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 EXO	2	14	afne	figs-quotemarks	מִ֣י שָֽׂמְ⁠ךָ֞ לְ⁠אִ֨ישׁ שַׂ֤ר וְ⁠שֹׁפֵט֙ עָלֵ֔י⁠נוּ הַ⁠לְ⁠הָרְגֵ֨⁠נִי֙ אַתָּ֣ה אֹמֵ֔ר כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר הָרַ֖גְתָּ אֶת־הַ⁠מִּצְרִ֑י	1		This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	2	14	k6s5	figs-irony	הַ⁠לְ⁠הָרְגֵ֨⁠נִי֙ אַתָּ֣ה אֹמֵ֔ר כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר הָרַ֖גְתָּ אֶת־הַ⁠מִּצְרִ֑י	1	Are you planning to kill me as you killed that Egyptian?	The man used a question here to be sarcastic. Alternate translation: “We know that you killed an Egyptian yesterday. You had better not kill me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
-EXO	2	14	l62d	figs-rquestion	הַ⁠לְ⁠הָרְגֵ֨⁠נִי֙ אַתָּ֣ה אֹמֵ֔ר כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר הָרַ֖גְתָּ אֶת־הַ⁠מִּצְרִ֑י	1		The man asks a question that is intended to make a statement. Alternate translation: “Do you think you can kill me without anyone finding out? We know what you did to the Egyptian” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+EXO	2	14	l62d	figs-rquestion	הַ⁠לְ⁠הָרְגֵ֨⁠נִי֙ אַתָּ֣ה אֹמֵ֔ר כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר הָרַ֖גְתָּ אֶת־הַ⁠מִּצְרִ֑י	1		Again, the man asks a question that is intended to make a statement. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Do you think you can kill me without anyone finding out? We know what you did to the Egyptian” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 EXO	2	14	d2ja		הַ⁠לְ⁠הָרְגֵ֨⁠נִי֙ אַתָּ֣ה אֹמֵ֔ר	1		Alternate translation: “Are you planning to kill me” or “Are you threatening to kill me”
 EXO	2	14	lyqh	figs-aside	אָכֵ֖ן נוֹדַ֥ע הַ⁠דָּבָֽר	1		It is likely this is something Moses said to himself, that is, he thought it to himself rather than speaking to the men in front of him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]])
-EXO	2	14	vfw5	figs-quotations	וַ⁠יֹּאמַ֔ר אָכֵ֖ן נוֹדַ֥ע הַ⁠דָּבָֽר	1		It may be clearer to present as an indirect quotation what was likely a thought Moses had. Alternative translation (as indirect quotation): “because he thought that everyone knew what he had done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+EXO	2	14	vfw5	figs-quotations	וַ⁠יֹּאמַ֔ר אָכֵ֖ן נוֹדַ֥ע הַ⁠דָּבָֽר	1		It may be clearer to present what was likely a thought Moses had as an indirect quotation. Alternative translation (as indirect quotation): “because he thought that everyone knew what he had done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 EXO	2	15	yutr		וַ⁠יְבַקֵּ֖שׁ לַ⁠הֲרֹ֣ג אֶת־מֹשֶׁ֑ה	1		Pharaoh most likely delegated this task. Alternative translation: “and he sought to have Moses killed” (note that the passive form will not work in every language)
 EXO	2	15	l5rc	figs-metonymy	מִ⁠פְּנֵ֣י	1		His **face** means his presence. Alternate translation: “from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-EXO	2	15	otsl		וַ⁠יֵּ֥שֶׁב…וַ⁠יֵּ֥שֶׁב	1		These are the same verb. This could mean: (1) Moses lived in Midian. He sat by this well one day. This may have been the well for the town he lived in. (2) Moses lived in Midian. His home was by this well. (3) Moses was a wanderer. He was in Midian and sat by this well when the next event occurred.
+EXO	2	15	otsl		וַ⁠יֵּ֥שֶׁב…וַ⁠יֵּ֥שֶׁב	1		In Hebrew, these are the same verb. In English, they could be translated as “settle,” which can mean to dwell in a certain place, but it can also mean to lower one’s body into a seated position. This could mean: (1) Moses lived in Midian. He sat by this well one day. This may have been the well for the town he lived in. (2) Moses lived in Midian. His home was by this well. (3) Moses was a wanderer. He was in Midian and sat by this well when the next event occurred.
 EXO	2	16	shg5	writing-background	וּ⁠לְ⁠כֹהֵ֥ן מִדְיָ֖ן שֶׁ֣בַע בָּנ֑וֹת	1	Now the priest of Midian had seven daughters	This sentence is background information. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-EXO	2	16	pjzc	writing-newevent	וּ⁠לְ⁠כֹהֵ֥ן מִדְיָ֖ן שֶׁ֣בַע בָּנ֑וֹת	1		This sentence is used to mark a transition. However, the last clause of the previous verse (“and he sat down by a well”) seems to be related to this new scene, so you may want to make your transition there, as is done in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
+EXO	2	16	pjzc	writing-newevent	וּ⁠לְ⁠כֹהֵ֥ן מִדְיָ֖ן שֶׁ֣בַע בָּנ֑וֹת	1		This sentence marks a scene transition. However, the last clause of the previous verse (“and he sat down by a well”) seems to be related to this new scene, so you may want to make your transition before that, as is done in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 EXO	2	16	cfe5	writing-participants	בָּנ֑וֹת	1		The **daughters** are new participants. Use the natural form in your language for introducing new characters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
-EXO	2	16	sm8f	figs-go	וַ⁠תָּבֹ֣אנָה	1		The perspective of the narrative is set at the well. The daughters came from elsewhere to the well. They were probably on foot. Here each language will need to choose the appropriate word. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+EXO	2	16	sm8f	figs-go	וַ⁠תָּבֹ֣אנָה	1		The perspective of the narrative is set at the well. The daughters came from elsewhere to the well. They were probably on foot. Here each language will need to choose the appropriate motion word. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 EXO	2	16	esdm	translate-numbers	שֶׁ֣בַע	1		7 (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 EXO	2	16	i2jh		וַ⁠תִּדְלֶ֗נָה	1	drew water	This means that they brought up water from a well.
 EXO	2	16	g1e6	translate-unknown	הָ֣⁠רְהָטִ֔ים	1	troughs	The **troughs** were long, narrow, open containers for animals to eat or drink out of. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	2	17	k5yc	figs-go	וַ⁠יָּבֹ֥אוּ	1		A group of **men came**. They may not have been far away before coming and driving the women away. Use an appropriate form of moving verb. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
-EXO	2	17	zksv	writing-participants	הָ⁠רֹעִ֖ים	1		These are new, very brief, characters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
+EXO	2	17	zksv	writing-participants	הָ⁠רֹעִ֖ים	1		These are new characters only seen briefly.  (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 EXO	2	17	z17m	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	וַ⁠יָּ֤קָם	1	helped them	Use an expression that communicates that what Moses did was unexpected. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 EXO	2	18	omzv	figs-go	וַ⁠תָּבֹ֕אנָה	1		The daughters came from the well to their father, probably on foot. You can use either come or go, whichever is more natural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 EXO	2	18	t78y	translate-names	רְעוּאֵ֖ל	1		**Reuel**, a name or perhaps a title, is used of the man only here and in Numbers 10:29. He is otherwise called “Jethro.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ EXO	2	19	r01g	figs-quotemarks	אִ֣ישׁ מִצְרִ֔י הִצִּילָ֖
 EXO	2	19	w57e		אִ֣ישׁ מִצְרִ֔י	1		Jethro’s daughters assume Moses was Egyptian. When you translate it, you should be clear that this refers to Moses.
 EXO	2	19	hvb4	figs-metonymy	מִ⁠יַּ֣ד	1		Here, **hand** figuratively refers to the power, control, or actions of the shepherds. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternative translation: “from the strength of” or “from the harm of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	2	19	a7v2	figs-idiom	דָּלֹ֤ה דָלָה֙	1		This expresses surprise or emphasizes the magnitude of Moses’ act of kindness to the women. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-EXO	2	20	x9yb	figs-rquestion	וְ⁠אַיּ֑⁠וֹ לָ֤⁠מָּה זֶּה֙ עֲזַבְתֶּ֣ן אֶת־הָ⁠אִ֔ישׁ	1	Why did you leave the man?	These questions are a mild rebuke to the daughters for not inviting Moses into their home according to the normal hospitality of that culture. Alternate translation: “You should not have left this man at the well!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+EXO	2	20	x9yb	figs-rquestion	וְ⁠אַיּ֑⁠וֹ לָ֤⁠מָּה זֶּה֙ עֲזַבְתֶּ֣ן אֶת־הָ⁠אִ֔ישׁ	1	Why did you leave the man?	These questions are a mild rebuke to the daughters for not inviting Moses into their home according to the normal hospitality of that culture. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not have left this man at the well!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 EXO	2	20	p6xh	figs-quotemarks	וְ⁠אַיּ֑⁠וֹ לָ֤⁠מָּה זֶּה֙ עֲזַבְתֶּ֣ן אֶת־הָ⁠אִ֔ישׁ קִרְאֶ֥ן ל֖⁠וֹ וְ⁠יֹ֥אכַל לָֽחֶם׃	1		This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	2	20	mb8w	writing-pronouns	ל֖⁠וֹ	1		Here, **him** refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 EXO	2	20	hal8	figs-synecdoche	לָֽחֶם	1		Here, **bread** is used to refer to food in general. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternative translation: “food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@@ -166,19 +166,19 @@ EXO	2	21	y3q7	translate-names	צִפֹּרָ֥ה	1	Zipporah	**Zipporah** is Reue
 EXO	2	22	l3xg	figs-quotemarks	גֵּ֣ר הָיִ֔יתִי בְּ⁠אֶ֖רֶץ נָכְרִיָּֽה	1		Only this portion is a quotation. As a possibility for clarity, the UST includes both speech events as one quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	2	22	f76m	translate-names	גֵּרְשֹׁ֑ם	1		His name, **Gershom**, sounds somewhat like the Hebrew for “a stranger here.” You may consider using a footnote to explain that. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EXO	2	22	q7d8		גֵּ֣ר הָיִ֔יתִי בְּ⁠אֶ֖רֶץ נָכְרִיָּֽה	1	resident in a foreign land	Alternate translation: “stranger in a foreign land”
-EXO	2	23	fjkt	writing-newevent	וַ⁠יְהִי֩ בַ⁠יָּמִ֨ים הָֽ⁠רַבִּ֜ים הָ⁠הֵ֗ם	1		This introduces a new section and series of events. A large amount of time went by. According to Stephen’s sermon in Acts 7:30, Moses was in Midian 40 years. Alternative translation: “This is what happened during the many days Moses was in Midian.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
+EXO	2	23	fjkt	writing-newevent	וַ⁠יְהִי֩ בַ⁠יָּמִ֨ים הָֽ⁠רַבִּ֜ים הָ⁠הֵ֗ם וַ⁠יָּ֨מָת֙ מֶ֣לֶךְ מִצְרַ֔יִם	1		This introduces a new section and series of events. A large amount of time went by. According to Stephen’s sermon in Acts 7:30, Moses was in Midian 40 years. Alternative translation: “This is what happened during the many days Moses was in Midian. The king of Egypt died.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 EXO	2	23	ym88	writing-background		0		Verses 23-25 give a summary of what happened in Egypt and with the Israelites and God while Moses was in exile. These verses give background information to set the scene. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 EXO	2	23	csg2		וַ⁠יֵּאָנְח֧וּ	1	groaned	They **groaned** because of their sorrow and misery. Alternate translation: “sighed deeply”
 EXO	2	23	x84a	figs-personification	וַ⁠תַּ֧עַל שַׁוְעָתָ֛⁠ם	1	their pleas went up to God	The cries of the Israelites are spoken of as if they were a person and were able to travel up to where God is. Alternate translation: “and their cries arose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 EXO	2	24	sja4	figs-idiom	וַ⁠יִּזְכֹּ֤ר אֱלֹהִים֙	1	God called to mind his covenant	This a common biblical way of saying that God thought about what He had promised. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternate translation: “and God recalled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-EXO	3	intro	n6ze			0		# Exodus 03 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>This chapter records one of the most important events in the history of the Israelite people: the revelation of the name Yahweh at the burning bush. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### God’s holiness<br><br>God is so holy that people could not look upon him without dying. This is why Moses covered his eyes. It is also why he took off his shoes. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])<br><br>### Yahweh<br><br>The name Yahweh is sacred in the Hebrew religion. It is the personal name of God, which he revealed to Moses. It is by this name that he is known. Yahweh means “I am.” Some translations use all capitals to set this apart, “I AM.” Great care must be taken in translating the phrase “I am that I am.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/yahweh]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Participants<br><br>“The angel of Yahweh,” “Yahweh,” and “God” all appear to be speaking to Moses and interacting with him from the burning bush. Furthermore, God says that his name is “I AM.” (See note above on Yahweh and I AM.) Yahweh and God are the same, while there is speculation about who the angel of Yahweh is.
+EXO	3	intro	n6ze			0		# Exodus 03 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n\nThis chapter is one conversation in which Yahweh begins to commission and send Moses to rescue the Israelites.\n\nThis chapter records one of the most important events in the history of the Israelite people: the revelation of the name Yahweh at the burning bush. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### God’s holiness\n\nGod is so holy that people can not look upon him without dying. This is why Moses covered his eyes. It is also why he took off his shoes. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n\n### Yahweh\n\nThe name Yahweh is the personal name of God, which he revealed to Moses. Yahweh is probably related to the phrase “I am” which he tells Moses in verse 14. Some translations use all capitals to set this apart: “I AM.” Great care must be taken in translating the phrase “I am that I am.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/yahweh]])\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Participants\n\n“The angel of Yahweh,” “Yahweh,” and “God” all appear to be speaking to Moses and interacting with him from the burning bush. Furthermore, God says that his name is “I AM.” (See note above on Yahweh and I AM.) Yahweh and God are the same, while there is speculation about who the angel of Yahweh is.\n
 EXO	3	1	gqvh	writing-newevent	וּ⁠מֹשֶׁ֗ה הָיָ֥ה רֹעֶ֛ה	1		This phrase brings the story focus back to Midian and Moses. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 EXO	3	1	oqcr	writing-background		0		Verse 1 provides immediate background context, setting the scene for Moses’ interaction with Yahweh. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 EXO	3	1	l7x6	figs-possession	כֹּהֵ֣ן מִדְיָ֑ן	1		This is a possessive of social relationship. **Jethro** is a **priest** who serves the Midianites. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 EXO	3	1	v97t	figs-go	וַ⁠יָּבֹ֛א אֶל	1		Alternate translation: “and he arrived at” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 EXO	3	1	p27s	figs-possession	הַ֥ר הָ⁠אֱלֹהִ֖ים	1		This is an associative possessive. This mountain was associated with God in some way. In [Exodus 3:12](../03/12.md) God tells Moses that he and the Israelites will serve him on this mountain. Later in the story, this promise is fulfilled, and it is where God makes his covenant with Israel and gives them the 10 Commandments. So it may have been called **the mountain of God** in retrospect (as Moses probably wrote this book sometime after the Israelites were wandering in the wilderness). However, it is possible that the mountain was already somehow associated with God’s presence or worship before Moses went there with the flock. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 EXO	3	2	p0nt		וַ֠⁠יֵּרָא מַלְאַ֨ךְ יְהֹוָ֥ה אֵלָ֛י⁠ו בְּ⁠לַבַּת־אֵ֖שׁ מִ⁠תּ֣וֹךְ הַ⁠סְּנֶ֑ה	1		This is a summary of what happened. The next few verses tell the story of how this happened and how Moses discovered what was happening.
-EXO	3	2	x5ci		יְהֹוָ֥ה	1	Yahweh	This is the name of God that he revealed to his people in the Old Testament. See the translationWord page about “Yahweh” for information concerning how to translate this.
+EXO	3	2	x5ci		יְהֹוָ֥ה	1	Yahweh	This is the name of God that he revealed to his people in the Old Testament. See the translationWord page about Yahweh concerning how to translate this.
 EXO	3	2	d3tf	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	וְ⁠הִנֵּ֤ה הַ⁠סְּנֶה֙ בֹּעֵ֣ר בָּ⁠אֵ֔שׁ וְ⁠הַ⁠סְּנֶ֖ה אֵינֶ֥⁠נּוּ אֻכָּֽל	1	behold	The word **behold** here shows that Moses saw something that was very different from what he expected. He expected the bush to be burnt up completely by the fire. Consider using an interjection in your language that expresses that what follows is a surprise. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 EXO	3	2	jmz0	figs-metonymy	אֻכָּֽל	1		Here, **being consumed** means being eaten completely until gone. In the case of fire, this is a metonym for burning completely until gone. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “destroyed by the fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	3	3	fpww	figs-quotemarks	אָסֻֽרָה־נָּ֣א וְ⁠אֶרְאֶ֔ה אֶת־הַ⁠מַּרְאֶ֥ה הַ⁠גָּדֹ֖ל הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה מַדּ֖וּעַ לֹא־יִבְעַ֥ר הַ⁠סְּנֶֽה	1		This is a direct quote. It’s not specified who Moses spoke to; he may have been alone or with a group of shepherds or his family. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
@@ -187,38 +187,38 @@ EXO	3	4	ue8v		יְהוָ֖ה…אֱלֹהִ֜ים	1		These terms both refer to t
 EXO	3	5	jg97	figs-quotemarks	אַל־תִּקְרַ֣ב הֲלֹ֑ם שַׁל־נְעָלֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ מֵ⁠עַ֣ל רַגְלֶ֔י⁠ךָ כִּ֣י הַ⁠מָּק֗וֹם אֲשֶׁ֤ר אַתָּה֙ עוֹמֵ֣ד עָלָ֔י⁠ו אַדְמַת־קֹ֖דֶשׁ הֽוּא	1		This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	3	5	prv9	grammar-connect-logic-result	כִּ֣י הַ⁠מָּק֗וֹם אֲשֶׁ֤ר אַתָּה֙ עוֹמֵ֣ד עָלָ֔י⁠ו אַדְמַת־קֹ֖דֶשׁ הֽוּא	1	set apart	This is the reason Moses must stop coming close to the burning bush and take off his sandals. Your language may need to put the reason before the commands, as in, “The place on which you are standing, it is holy ground, so you must not come close to here. Take your sandals off from on your feet.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 EXO	3	6	sxk8		אָנֹכִי֙ אֱלֹהֵ֣י אָבִ֔י⁠ךָ אֱלֹהֵ֧י אַבְרָהָ֛ם אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִצְחָ֖ק וֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֣י יַעֲקֹ֑ב	1	the God of your father, the God of Abraham, the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob	All of these men worshiped the same God. Alternate translation: “the God of your father, of Abraham, of Isaac, and of Jacob”
-EXO	3	6	fgym	figs-quotemarks	אָנֹכִי֙ אֱלֹהֵ֣י אָבִ֔י⁠ךָ אֱלֹהֵ֧י אַבְרָהָ֛ם אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִצְחָ֖ק וֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֣י יַעֲקֹ֑ב	1		This a direct quotation. The UST continues the quotation from verse 5 rather than including an additional “he said.” This may be more natural in some languages. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-EXO	3	6	l5sy		אָבִ֔י⁠ךָ	1	your father	This could mean: (1) “your ancestor” or (2) “your father.” If it means “your ancestor,” then the phrases following it clarify who “your father” refers to: it refers to Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob. If it means “your father,” then it refers to Moses’ own father. It most cases it will be best to translate it as “your father,” i.e. Amram, Moses’ father.
+EXO	3	6	fgym	figs-quotemarks	אָנֹכִי֙ אֱלֹהֵ֣י אָבִ֔י⁠ךָ אֱלֹהֵ֧י אַבְרָהָ֛ם אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִצְחָ֖ק וֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֣י יַעֲקֹ֑ב	1		This a direct quotation. The UST continues the quotation from verse 5 rather than including an additional “he said.” This may be more natural in some languages. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate the direct quotation with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+EXO	3	6	l5sy		אָבִ֔י⁠ךָ	1	your father	This could mean (1) “your father,” if it means “your father,” then it refers to Moses’ own father (2) “your ancestor,” if it means “your ancestor,” then the phrases following it clarify who “your father” refers to: it refers to Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob. In most cases, it will be best to translate it as “your father,” i.e. Amram, Moses’ father.
 EXO	3	6	lfbb	grammar-connect-logic-result	וַ⁠יַּסְתֵּ֤ר מֹשֶׁה֙ פָּנָ֔י⁠ו כִּ֣י יָרֵ֔א מֵ⁠הַבִּ֖יט אֶל־הָ⁠אֱלֹהִֽים	1		Reason: **for he was afraid from staring toward God** Result: **And Moses hid his face** Some languages may need to put the reason before the result. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]] and [Exodus 33:20](../33/20.md))
 EXO	3	7	nl33	figs-quotemarks	וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר יְהוָ֔ה	1		After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues through the end of [verse 10](../03/10.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-EXO	3	7	xoz0	figs-idiom	רָאֹ֥ה רָאִ֛יתִי	1		The repetition of **see** expresses the intensity, certainty, or clarity of Yahweh’s seeing. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+EXO	3	7	xoz0	figs-idiom	רָאֹ֥ה רָאִ֛יתִי	1		The Hebrew practice of verb repetition for intensification cannot be directly translated into English. Here, “see” is repeated in Hebrew. This expresses the intensity, certainty, or clarity of Yahweh’s having **seen** how his people were suffering. Use a natural form of strengthening a verb from your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EXO	3	7	tpk0	figs-possession	אֶת־עֳנִ֥י עַמִּ֖⁠י	1		There are two possessives here: 1) “affliction of … people”: This is an event-related possessive where the people are the objects of affliction. They are treated badly as slaves. 2) “my people”: This one is more difficult as it involves both ownership and the possessive of social relationship. God views his people as his possession, and he is also in relationship with them as their God because they are descended from Abraham, though at this time they may not know God as theirs. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 EXO	3	7	nbft	figs-abstractnouns	עֳנִ֥י עַמִּ֖⁠י אֲשֶׁ֣ר בְּ⁠מִצְרָ֑יִם	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **affliction** in another way. Alternate translation: “how my people who are in Egypt are afflicted” or “how the Egyptians afflict my people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 EXO	3	7	p3tx	figs-metonymy	מִ⁠פְּנֵ֣י נֹֽגְשָׂ֔י⁠ו	1		Here, **faces** refers to the whole person or the presence of the person(s) who were oppressing the Israelites. If this image is used in your language, you may translate it. If a similar image is used, you may consider using it. If neither is the case, you may omit the word “face” and translate the meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	3	7	xx7r		נֹֽגְשָׂ֔י⁠ו	1	taskmasters	Alternate translation: “his oppressors”
-EXO	3	7	ofxt		כִּ֥י	1		The conjunction is intensifying the expression of Yahweh’s knowledge. Your translation should express Yahweh’s knowing with certainty or strength.
+EXO	3	7	ofxt		כִּ֥י	1		Here, **surely** is intensifying the expression of Yahweh’s knowledge. Your translation should express Yahweh’s knowing with certainty or strength.
 EXO	3	7	mfn2	grammar-collectivenouns	נֹֽגְשָׂ֔י⁠ו…מַכְאֹבָֽי⁠ו	1		These pronouns, **him** and **his**, refer to the Israelites as a group in the singular. They agree with “people” as a collective noun in [3:6](../03/06.md). Some languages may have to use plural pronouns. Others may have to match the pronoun’s gender to the grammatical gender of the word for “people” in their language. If necessary, change “him” to “them” or change “his” to “hers” or “its” (depending on grammatical gender of “people.”) Alternate translation: “those who oppress them … their anguish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
-EXO	3	7	hkcj	figs-possession	מַכְאֹבָֽי⁠ו	1		This is an event-related possessive where the people (as a group: **his**) are the subjects of anguish. Your translation should express that they are in deep mental and emotional distress (anguish). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-EXO	3	7	ui28	figs-explicit	מַכְאֹבָֽי⁠ו	1		It is implied that they are in deep mental and emotional distress (anguish) because they are treated badly as slaves. You may make this explicit. Alternate translation: “his anguish from his slavery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+EXO	3	7	hkcj	figs-possession	מַכְאֹבָֽי⁠ו	1		This is an event-related possessive where the people (as a group: **his**) are the subjects of **anguish.** Your translation should express that they are deeply distressed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+EXO	3	7	ui28	figs-explicit	מַכְאֹבָֽי⁠ו	1		It is implied that they are deeply distressed because they are treated badly as slaves. You may make this explicit. Alternate translation: “his anguish from his slavery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EXO	3	7	zth8	figs-abstractnouns	מַכְאֹבָֽי⁠ו	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **anguish** in another way. Alternate translation: “how distressed they are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 EXO	3	8	a1yv	grammar-connect-logic-result		0		Verse 8 contains God’s intended result from his acts of seeing and hearing, expressed in both verses 7 and 9. You may need to expressly mark this, for instance by introducing verse 8 with something like “Therefore,” and verse 9 with something like “Again, because.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 EXO	3	8	xy36	figs-go	וָ⁠אֵרֵ֞ד	1		God is figuratively expressing that he is descending from heaven to earth to intervene. God is always everywhere, but this phrase means that his special attention will be directed to this situation. Use whatever form of come or go is appropriate in your language for this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 EXO	3	8	nahb	grammar-collectivenouns	לְ⁠הַצִּיל֣⁠וֹ…וּֽ⁠לְ⁠הַעֲלֹת⁠וֹ֮	1		Here, **him** refers in the singular to the Israelites as a group. It is agreeing with “people” as a collective noun in [3:6](../03/06.md). Some languages may have to use plural pronouns. Others may have to match the pronoun’s gender to the grammatical gender of the word for “people” in their language. See what you did in the [previous verse](../03/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 EXO	3	8	bi4e	figs-metaphor	מִ⁠יַּ֣ד	1		Someone’s **hand** is a common Biblical metaphor for power and control. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	3	8	djbz	figs-possession	מִ⁠יַּ֣ד מִצְרַ֗יִם	1		This is a possessive where the Egyptians are the subject of **the hand**, which means power. The Egyptians used their power and control to oppress the Israelites. Use a phrase in your language that expresses the idea of a group of people having power. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-EXO	3	8	mqyp	figs-parallelism	אֶל־אֶ֤רֶץ טוֹבָה֙ וּ⁠רְחָבָ֔ה אֶל־אֶ֛רֶץ זָבַ֥ת חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָ֑שׁ	1		There are multiple levels of parallelism here. First, the statements, **to a good and wide land** and **to a land flowing with milk and honey** are in parallel with each other. Within each of those, **good** and **wide** are in parallel with each other, and **milk** and **honey** are in parallel with each other. Each of these levels is meant to reinforce and expand upon one another. These are not examples of synonymous parallelism, and each part of the statement should be translated. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+EXO	3	8	mqyp	figs-parallelism	אֶל־אֶ֤רֶץ טוֹבָה֙ וּ⁠רְחָבָ֔ה אֶל־אֶ֛רֶץ זָבַ֥ת חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָ֑שׁ	1		There are multiple levels of parallelism here. First, the statements, **to a good and wide land** and **to a land flowing with milk and honey** are in parallel with each other. Within each of those, **good** and **wide** are in parallel with each other, and **milk** and **honey**are in parallel with each other. Each of these levels is meant to reinforce and expand upon one another. These are not examples of synonymous parallelism, and each part of the statement should be translated. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 EXO	3	8	xs87	figs-metonymy	חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָ֑שׁ	1		Here, **milk** is a metonym for domestic animals and the food products obtained from them; **honey** is a metonym for the food obtained from growing plants. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. See UST and [the next note]([[rc://en/tn/help/exo/03/08/pxy8]]) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	3	8	pxy8	figs-metaphor	אֶ֛רֶץ זָבַ֥ת חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָ֑שׁ	1	a land flowing with milk and honey	God spoke of the land being good for animals and plants as if the milk and honey from those animals and plants were flowing through the land. If this metaphor makes sense in your language, you may translate it. If your language has metaphors that mean a land is good for producing healthy livestock and good crops, you may consider using those. If neither is the case, you may translate the meaning. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	3	8	dtz9		זָבַ֥ת	1	flowing with	Alternate translation: “full of” or “with an abundance of”
 EXO	3	8	q94i	figs-metonymy	חָלָ֖ב	1	milk	Since milk comes from cows and goats, this represents food produced by livestock. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “food from livestock” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	3	8	l1as	figs-metonymy	וּ⁠דְבָ֑שׁ	1	honey	Since honey is produced from flowers, this represents food from crops. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “food from crops” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-EXO	3	9	a2kf	grammar-connect-logic-result	וְ⁠עַתָּ֕ה	1		This functions as a discourse marker expressing logical conclusion. “Therefore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+EXO	3	9	a2kf	figs-parallelism		0		This verse parallels [verse 7](../03/07.md). Yahweh is restating that the Israelite’s plight has gotten his attention. This creates emphasis and connection to what Yahweh will do with what Moses will do as Yahweh’s appointed leader. If this repetition would confuse your readers consider a paragraph break at the start of this verse to separate the two parallel statements or use some other strategy of emphasis and connection that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 EXO	3	9	tp2v	figs-exclamations	הִנֵּ֛ה	1		This is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation, or you can use an alternate translation like “certainly.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
 EXO	3	9	uup9	figs-personification	צַעֲקַ֥ת בְּנֵי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל בָּ֣אָה אֵלָ֑⁠י	1	the shouts of the people of Israel have come to me	Here, **the cry** is spoken of as if it were a person who is capable of moving on his own. Alternate translation: “I have heard the cries of the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 EXO	3	9	gwou	figs-abstractnouns	רָאִ֨יתִי֙ אֶת־הַ⁠לַּ֔חַץ אֲשֶׁ֥ר מִצְרַ֖יִם לֹחֲצִ֥ים אֹתָֽ⁠ם	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **oppression** in another way. Alternate translation: “I have seen how the Egyptians are oppressing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-EXO	3	10	y4m1	grammar-connect-logic-result	וְ⁠עַתָּ֣ה	1		**And now** functions as a discourse marker expressing logical conclusion. “Therefore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+EXO	3	10	y4m1	grammar-connect-logic-result	וְ⁠עַתָּ֣ה	1		**And now** functions as a discourse marker expressing logical conclusion. “So then,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 EXO	3	10	spwh	figs-quotemarks	מִ⁠מִּצְרָֽיִם	1		After this phrase, the direct quote of what the Yahweh said starting in [3:7](../03/07.md) ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-EXO	3	11	y8cr	figs-rquestion	מִ֣י אָנֹ֔כִי כִּ֥י אֵלֵ֖ךְ אֶל־פַּרְעֹ֑ה וְ⁠כִ֥י אוֹצִ֛יא אֶת־בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מִ⁠מִּצְרָֽיִם	1	Who am I, that I should go to Pharaoh…Egypt?	Moses uses this question to tell God that he, Moses, is not the right person for the task. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+EXO	3	11	y8cr	figs-rquestion	מִ֣י אָנֹ֔כִי כִּ֥י אֵלֵ֖ךְ אֶל־פַּרְעֹ֑ה וְ⁠כִ֥י אוֹצִ֛יא אֶת־בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מִ⁠מִּצְרָֽיִם	1	Who am I, that I should go to Pharaoh…Egypt?	Moses uses this question to tell God that he, Moses, is not the right person for the task. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 EXO	3	11	ax7w	figs-quotemarks	מִ֣י אָנֹ֔כִי כִּ֥י אֵלֵ֖ךְ אֶל־פַּרְעֹ֑ה וְ⁠כִ֥י אוֹצִ֛יא אֶת־בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מִ⁠מִּצְרָֽיִם	1		This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	3	12	ykp3	figs-quotemarks	כִּֽי־אֶֽהְיֶ֣ה עִמָּ֔⁠ךְ וְ⁠זֶה־לְּ⁠ךָ֣ הָ⁠א֔וֹת כִּ֥י אָנֹכִ֖י שְׁלַחְתִּ֑י⁠ךָ בְּ⁠הוֹצִֽיאֲ⁠ךָ֤ אֶת־הָ⁠עָם֙ מִ⁠מִּצְרַ֔יִם תַּֽעַבְדוּ⁠ן֙ אֶת־הָ֣⁠אֱלֹהִ֔ים עַ֖ל הָ⁠הָ֥ר הַ⁠זֶּֽה	1		This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	3	12	xugf	figs-youdual	תַּֽעַבְדוּ⁠ן֙	1		If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
@@ -233,20 +233,21 @@ EXO	3	13	bkei	grammar-connect-logic-result	מָ֥ה אֹמַ֖ר אֲלֵ⁠הֶ
 EXO	3	14	cli8		אֶֽהְיֶ֖ה אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶֽהְיֶ֑ה	1	God said to Moses, “I AM THAT I AM.”	This is God’s response to Moses’ question about God’s name. This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “God said to Moses, ‘Tell them that God says his name is “I AM THAT I AM.”’”
 EXO	3	14	b6vk		אֶֽהְיֶ֖ה אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶֽהְיֶ֑ה	1	I AM THAT I AM	This could mean: (1) this whole sentence is God’s name or (2) God is not telling his name but something about himself. By saying this, God is teaching that he is eternal; he has always lived and always will live.
 EXO	3	14	s62u		אֶֽהְיֶ֖ה…אֶֽהְיֶ֑ה…אֶֽהְיֶ֖ה	1	I AM	Languages that do not have an equivalent to the verb “am” may need to render this as “I LIVE” or “I EXIST.”
-EXO	3	14	t745		וַ⁠יֹּ֗אמֶר	1		This is still God speaking. It may make more sense to omit this in some languages.
+EXO	3	14	t745		וַ⁠יֹּ֗אמֶר	1		This indicates that God is still speaking. It may make more sense to omit this in some languages.
 EXO	3	14	vigc	figs-quotesinquotes	אֶֽהְיֶ֖ה שְׁלָחַ֥⁠נִי אֲלֵי⁠כֶֽם	1		This is a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation inside a quotation. However, you may also choose to translate it as an indirect quotation, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 EXO	3	15	ubw7		וַ⁠יֹּאמֶר֩ ע֨וֹד אֱלֹהִ֜ים אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֗ה	1		As God is still speaking, it may make more sense to omit this in some languages.
 EXO	3	15	i6lg	figs-quotemarks	אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֗ה	1		After this phrase, a direct quotation begins that continues until [the end of chapter 3 at verse 22](../03/22.md). This section contains four levels of quotations as God tells Moses to tell the Israelite elders a specific message from God. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	3	15	l962	figs-quotesinquotes	יְהוָ֞ה אֱלֹהֵ֣י אֲבֹתֵי⁠כֶ֗ם אֱלֹהֵ֨י אַבְרָהָ֜ם אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִצְחָ֛ק וֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֥י יַעֲקֹ֖ב שְׁלָחַ֣⁠נִי אֲלֵי⁠כֶ֑ם זֶה־שְּׁמִ֣⁠י לְ⁠עֹלָ֔ם וְ⁠זֶ֥ה זִכְרִ֖⁠י לְ⁠דֹ֥ר דֹּֽר	1		This is a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation. It may be possible to translate it as an indirect quotation, but you will need to be careful to correctly change the pronoun persons. Alternative translation: “You must tell the Israelites that Yahweh, the God of their fathers, the God of Abraham, the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob, sent you to them. This is his name forever, and this is his memorial from generation to generation.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 EXO	3	15	d91k	figs-metonymy	אֱלֹהֵ֣י אֲבֹתֵי⁠כֶ֗ם	1		Here, **fathers** figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “the God of your ancestors” or “the God whom your ancestors worshiped” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-EXO	3	15	ixcb	figs-merism	לְ⁠דֹ֥ר דֹּֽר	1		The repetition of **generation** means something like “to each and every generation,” which means "for all people at all times." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
+EXO	3	15	ixcb	figs-merism	לְ⁠דֹ֥ר דֹּֽר	1		The repetition of **generation** is indicating “to each and every generation” which figuratively means "for all people at all times.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
 EXO	3	16	ec3v	figs-quotemarks	יְהוָ֞ה	1	General Information:	This begins a second-level quotation that continues until the end of [verse 17](../03/17.md). It contains a third-level quotation that begins at “I have certainly” and also continues to the end of verse 17. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation. The closing marks for both the second and third-level quotations should not occur until the end of verse 17. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	3	16	usas	figs-metonymy	אֱלֹהֵ֤י אֲבֹֽתֵי⁠כֶם֙	1		Here, **fathers** figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “the God of your ancestors” or “the God whom your ancestors worshiped” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	3	16	xqy9		אַבְרָהָ֛ם יִצְחָ֥ק וְ⁠יַעֲקֹ֖ב	1	the God of your ancestors, the God of Abraham, of Isaac, and of Jacob	Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob were three of the Israelites’ ancestors. They all worshiped the same God.
 EXO	3	16	dvsz	figs-quotemarks	פָּקֹ֤ד פָּקַ֨דְתִּי֙	1		This begins a third-level quotation that continues until the end of [verse 17](../03/17.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening third-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation that is within a quotation. The closing marks for both the second-level and third-level quotations should not occur until the end of verse 17. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-EXO	3	16	efhh	figs-idiom	פָּקֹ֤ד פָּקַ֨דְתִּי֙	1		The Hebrew word meaning **attended,** visited, or observed is repeated here for emphasis. This word often means God is coming to take action. Translate this phrase in a way that communicates God’s focused, caring observation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+EXO	3	16	efhh	figs-idiom	פָּקֹ֤ד פָּקַ֨דְתִּי֙	1		The word translated **attended** often means God is coming to take action. Translate this phrase in a way that communicates God’s focused, caring observation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+EXO	3	16	p258	figs-idiom	פָּקֹ֤ד פָּקַ֨דְתִּי֙	1		Here, **attended** is repeated in Hebrew. The Hebrew practice of verb repetition for intensification cannot be directly translated into English. This expresses the intensity, certainty, or clarity of Yahweh’s having **attended to** how his people were suffering. Use a natural form of strengthening a verb from your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EXO	3	16	fv77	figs-youdual	אֶתְ⁠כֶ֔ם	1	I have indeed observed you	The word **you** refers to the people of Israel. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
-EXO	3	16	q4en	figs-activepassive	הֶ⁠עָשׂ֥וּי	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+EXO	3	16	q4en	figs-activepassive	הֶ⁠עָשׂ֥וּי	1		The focus of this passive is the mistreatment being **done to** the Israelites, not on who is doing it. In fact, **in Egypt** further dissociates the actors from this sentence. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	3	16	johw	figs-metonymy	בְּ⁠מִצְרָֽיִם	1		The phrase **in Egypt** is a metonym for the Egyptian oppressors. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternative translation: “by the Egyptians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	3	17	eloj	figs-quotemarks		0		If you are using direct quotations, at the end of this verse you should have three closing markers. In English, it looks like ’ ” ’ (without spaces). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	3	17	c54k	figs-quotesinquotes	אַעֲלֶ֣ה אֶתְ⁠כֶם֮ מֵ⁠עֳנִ֣י מִצְרַיִם֒ אֶל־אֶ֤רֶץ הַֽ⁠כְּנַעֲנִי֙ וְ⁠הַ֣⁠חִתִּ֔י וְ⁠הָֽ⁠אֱמֹרִי֙ וְ⁠הַ⁠פְּרִזִּ֔י וְ⁠הַ⁠חִוִּ֖י וְ⁠הַ⁠יְבוּסִ֑י אֶל־אֶ֛רֶץ זָבַ֥ת חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָֽשׁ	1		This is a fourth-level quotation. It should be marked in some manner that distinguishes it from the outer three levels. Alternatively, it can be translated as an indirect quotation, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
@@ -257,7 +258,7 @@ EXO	3	17	pwn5	figs-metaphor	אֶ֛רֶץ זָבַ֥ת חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְב
 EXO	3	17	za9l		זָבַ֥ת	1	flowing with	Alternate translation: “full of” or “with an abundance of”
 EXO	3	17	rtr5	figs-metonymy	חָלָ֖ב	1	milk	Since milk comes from cows and goats, this represents food produced by livestock. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “food from livestock” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	3	17	msf8	figs-metonymy	וּ⁠דְבָֽשׁ	1	honey	Since honey is produced from flowers, this represents food from crops. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “food from crops” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-EXO	3	18	cy2z	figs-idiom	וְ⁠שָׁמְע֖וּ	1		**Listen** often means “hear and do/obey.” If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternative translation: “heed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+EXO	3	18	cy2z	figs-idiom	וְ⁠שָׁמְע֖וּ לְ⁠קֹלֶ֑⁠ךָ	1		**Listen** often means “hear and do/obey.” If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternative translation: “And they will pay attention to your voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EXO	3	18	j24k	writing-pronouns	לְ⁠קֹלֶ֑⁠ךָ…אַתָּה֩	1	They will listen to you	The word **you** refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 EXO	3	18	w742	figs-synecdoche	לְ⁠קֹלֶ֑⁠ךָ	1		This phrase means the elders will listen to the message Moses brings from God. Alternative translation: “to your message” or “to my message which you tell them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 EXO	3	18	r74o	figs-possession	וְ⁠זִקְנֵ֨י יִשְׂרָאֵ֜ל	1		This is a possessive of social relationship. Alternative translation: “elders in charge of the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -266,12 +267,12 @@ EXO	3	18	ot9r	figs-metonymy	מִצְרַ֗יִם	1		Here, **Egypt** refers to th
 EXO	3	18	idp7	figs-youdual	וַ⁠אֲמַרְתֶּ֤ם	1	General Information:	If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
 EXO	3	18	i47o	figs-exclusive	עָלֵ֔י⁠נוּ…נֵֽלֲכָה…וְ⁠נִזְבְּחָ֖ה	1		These instances of **us** are exclusive; they include Moses, the elders, and all the Israelites, but exclude the king of Egypt. If your language makes this distinction, verify that you used the correct form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 EXO	3	18	d85b	translate-numbers	שְׁלֹ֤שֶׁת	1		Alternate translation: “3” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-EXO	3	19	qf46	figs-metonymy	וְ⁠לֹ֖א בְּ⁠יָ֥ד חֲזָקָֽה	1	unless his hand is forced	The word **hand** is a metonym for the power of the owner of the hand. This could mean: (1) “only if he sees that he has no power to do anything else,” where the **hand** belongs to Pharaoh (2) “only if I force him to let you go,” where the **hand** belongs to Yahweh (3) “not even if I force him to let you go.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]
+EXO	3	19	qf46	figs-metonymy	וְ⁠לֹ֖א בְּ⁠יָ֥ד חֲזָקָֽה	1	unless his hand is forced	The word **hand** is a metonym for the power of the owner of the hand. There are two further difficulties: (1) Whose hand (power) is being referred to, (2) does the negative mean “not unless” or “not even?” Possible meanings include: (1) “only if he sees that he has no power to do anything else,” where the **hand** belongs to Pharaoh (2) “only if I force him to let you go,” where the **hand** belongs to Yahweh, taking “not unless” for the negative (3) “not even if I force him to let you go,” where the **hand** belongs to Yahweh, taking “not even” for the negative (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	3	20	nuzx	grammar-connect-logic-result	וְ⁠שָׁלַחְתִּ֤י	1		God says this will be a result of the king of Egypt’s stubbornness. Alternate translation: “Therefore, I will send out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 EXO	3	20	yds5	figs-metonymy	וְ⁠שָׁלַחְתִּ֤י אֶת־יָדִ⁠י֙	1	I will reach out with my hand and attack	Here, **hand** refers to God’s power. Alternate translation: “I will use my strength” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	3	20	dzsp	figs-metonymy	מִצְרַ֔יִם	1		**Egypt** refers to both the land and the people group, and then, by extension, to Pharaoh as well. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	3	20	c9a3		מִצְרַ֔יִם…בְּ⁠קִרְבּ֑⁠וֹ	1		Here, **him** refers to Egypt as a collective.
-EXO	3	20	g0i9	figs-abstractnouns	נִפְלְאֹתַ֔⁠י	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **wonders** in another way. Alternate translation: “my amazing things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+EXO	3	20	g0i9	figs-abstractnouns	נִפְלְאֹתַ֔⁠י	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **wonders** in another way. Alternate translation: “my amazing acts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 EXO	3	20	sqmt	grammar-connect-time-sequential	וְ⁠אַחֲרֵי־כֵ֖ן	1		Here the sequential nature of these happenings is emphasized. Consider using a stronger sequential connective term than usual here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 EXO	3	20	ay53	writing-pronouns	יְשַׁלַּ֥ח	1		Here, **he** refers to the Pharaoh, the king of Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 EXO	3	20	awxs	figs-youdual	אֶתְ⁠כֶֽם	1		Here, **you** refers to the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
@@ -285,7 +286,7 @@ EXO	3	21	kt7b	figs-litotes	לֹ֥א תֵלְכ֖וּ רֵיקָֽם	1	will not g
 EXO	3	22	w2av		וּ⁠מִ⁠גָּרַ֣ת בֵּיתָ֔⁠הּ	1	any women staying in her neighbors’ houses	The word, **sojourning** means living somewhere other than one’s native land, usually temporarily. It is unclear both who the sojourning (visiting) women are and in whose house they are sojourning, leaving several possibilities. Most translations which make a decision about who they are identify both the temporary resident and her host home as Egyptian. This makes sense as the Israelites will be plundering the Egyptians. If it is possible to leave this ambiguous in your translation, that would be best.
 EXO	3	22	fmfu	figs-youdual	וְ⁠שַׂמְתֶּ֗ם עַל־בְּנֵי⁠כֶם֙ וְ⁠עַל־בְּנֹ֣תֵי⁠כֶ֔ם וְ⁠נִצַּלְתֶּ֖ם	1		Each of these is a plural **you.** If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
 EXO	3	22	h38j	figs-quotemarks	מִצְרָֽיִם	1		After this phrase, the direct quote of Yahweh’s word which started in [verse 15](../03/15.md) ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-EXO	4	intro	kap5			0		# Exodus 04 General Notes<br><br>## Potential Translation Issues<br><br>### Quotations<br><br> * There is a difficult transition between [4:4](../04/04.md) and [4:5](../04/05.md) because the quotation stops in the middle to inject a bit of narrative. When it resumes in [4:5](../04/05.md),the sentence seems incomplete (even if merged directly with the quotation fragment in [4:4](../04/04.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])* Yahweh’s instructions to Moses are complex, and there are up to four levels of quotations in this chapter. Translators will need to decide if some of these need to become indirect quotations (if that is possible in their language) and take great care to use the proper quotation markings in the proper locations.<br><br>### Order of events<br><br>* The order of events is not always clear. In [4:14](../04/14.md) Yahweh tells Moses that Aaron is coming to meet him, but Yahweh telling Aaron to go meet Moses in the wilderness is not recorded until [4:27](../04/27.md).<br>* The timing of the events in [4:18](../18/.md)\\-[4:27](../04/27.md), especially verses 18-19 and 27 in relation to the rest of the events of the chapter, is unclear.<br><br>### Thus says Yahweh<br><br>The first of over 400 occurrences throughout the Old Testament of a standard phrase used to introduce direct, authoritative instruction from Yahweh occurs in [4:22](../04/22.md). It occurs ten times in the book of Exodus; nine of these are between chapters 4–11. It would be good for your team to have a standard way to translate this that makes it clear that the words that come next are directly from God. If your language has a standard way of introducing a new message from your leader that alerts the hearers that these are the words of the leader, that would be a good phrase to consider.<br><br>### Yahweh’s attempt to kill someone<br><br>The encounter recorded from [4:24](../04/24.md) to [4:26](../04/26.md) is one of the strangest and most difficult passages in the entire book. Difficulties include:<br><br>* To whom do the pronouns refer? Masculine pronouns are used throughout the section, but there are two possible antecedents, Moses (who is not named in the narrative) and Zipporah’s son (who was presumably also Moses’ son, but this is how he is referred to in this text. For why, see below on why Yahweh did this). Most commentators believe the pronouns refer to Moses.<br>* Circumcision is described in fairly graphic detail. Different cultures will need to approach this differently. Some may have terms for circumcision, while others may be comfortable translating mostly literally, and others will need to use euphemisms or other strategies to translate. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/circumcise]])* The meaning of the phrase **a bridegroom of blood** (ULT) is unknown.<br>* Why did Yahweh attack Moses? Many commentators conclude that Moses had neglected to circumcise one of his sons because it displeased Zipporah, and Yahweh was holding Moses responsible before he returned to lead the Israelites (who should have been circumcised). When Zipporah repented by circumcising the son herself and touching the foreskin to Moses’ feet, Yahweh relents. These conclusions should help inform translation but should not be made explicit in the text.<br><br>## Study Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Moses does not understand<br><br>Although Moses believes in Yahweh, he does not trust in him. This is because Moses lacks understanding. Moses tries to believe the things he is asked to do are done by his own power. Yahweh is trying to get Moses to trust that these things are Yahweh’s doing. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/trust]])<br><br>### Children of God<br><br>This chapter introduces the concept that Israel, the people group, is the chosen people of God and God’s firstborn son. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/elect]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/peopleofgod]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/firstborn]])<br><br>### Yahweh hardened Pharaoh’s heart<br><br>Scholars are divided over how to understand this statement. There is debate over whether Pharaoh plays an active or passive role in the hardening of his own heart. Translators should simply follow the text. In Exodus 4-14 there are ten statements that Yahweh hardens Pharaoh’s heart, and ten statements that Pharaoh hardens his own heart. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+EXO	4	intro	kap5			0		# Exodus 04 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n- v. 1-17: Moses hesitates to obey so Yahweh gives Moses signs to prove his commission\n- v. 18-28: Moses goes back to Egypt\n- v. 29-31: Moses and Aaron meet with the Israelite leaders and tell them what Yahweh said\n\n## Potential Translation Issues\n\n### Quotations\n\n * There is a difficult transition between [4:4](../04/04.md) and [4:5](../04/05.md) because the quotation stops in the middle to inject a bit of narrative. When it resumes in [4:5](../04/05.md),the sentence seems incomplete (even if merged directly with the quotation fragment in [4:4](../04/04.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])* Yahweh’s instructions to Moses are complex, and there are up to four levels of quotations in this chapter. Translators will need to decide if some of these need to become indirect quotations (if that is possible in their language) and take great care to use the proper quotation markings in the proper locations.\n\n### Order of events\n\n* The order of events is not always clear. In [4:14](../04/14.md) Yahweh tells Moses that Aaron is coming to meet him, but Yahweh telling Aaron to go meet Moses in the wilderness is not recorded until [4:27](../04/27.md).\n* The timing of the events in [4:18](../18/.md)\\-[4:27](../04/27.md), especially verses 18-19 and 27 in relation to the rest of the events of the chapter, is unclear.\n\n### Thus says Yahweh\n\nThe first of over 400 occurrences throughout the Old Testament of a standard phrase used to introduce direct, authoritative instruction from Yahweh occurs in [4:22](../04/22.md). It occurs ten times in the book of Exodus; nine of these are between chapters 4–11. It would be good for your team to have a standard way to translate this that makes it clear that the words that come next are directly from God. If your language has a standard way of introducing a new message from your leader that alerts the hearers that these are the words of the leader, that would be a good phrase to consider.\n\n### Yahweh’s attempt to kill someone\n\nThe encounter recorded from [4:24](../04/24.md) to [4:26](../04/26.md) is one of the strangest and most difficult passages in the entire book. Difficulties include:\n\n* To whom do the pronouns refer? Masculine pronouns are used throughout the section, but there are two possible antecedents, Moses (who is not named in the narrative) and Zipporah’s son (who was presumably also Moses’ son, but this is how he is referred to in this text. For why, see below on why Yahweh did this). Most commentators believe the pronouns refer to Moses.\n* Circumcision is described in fairly graphic detail. Different cultures will need to approach this differently. Some may have terms for circumcision, while others may be comfortable translating mostly literally, and others will need to use euphemisms or other strategies to translate. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/circumcise]])\n* The meaning of the phrase **a bridegroom of blood** (ULT) is unknown.\n* Why did Yahweh attack Moses? Many commentators conclude that Moses had neglected to circumcise one of his sons because it displeased Zipporah, and Yahweh was holding Moses responsible before he returned to lead the Israelites (who should have been circumcised). When Zipporah repented by circumcising the son herself and touching the foreskin to Moses’ feet, Yahweh relents. These conclusions should help inform translation but should not be made explicit in the text.\n\n## Study Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Children of God\n\nThis chapter introduces the concept that Israel, the people group, is the chosen people of God and God’s firstborn son. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/elect]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/peopleofgod]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/firstborn]])\n\n### Yahweh hardened Pharaoh’s heart\n\nScholars are divided over how to understand this statement. There is debate over how Pharaoh has an active or passive role in the hardening of his own heart. Translators should simply follow the text. In Exodus 4-14 there are ten statements that Yahweh hardens Pharaoh’s heart, and ten statements that Pharaoh hardens his own heart. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	4	1	j4yg		וַ⁠יַּ֤עַן מֹשֶׁה֙ וַ⁠יֹּ֔אמֶר	1	if they do not believe	Here, **answered and said** is a Hebrew expression which does not convey any extra information. Unless your language naturally uses a similar structure, it is better to translate one verb and omit the other. Alternate translation: “Moses answered”
 EXO	4	1	b3xv	figs-quotemarks	וְ⁠הֵן֙ לֹֽא־יַאֲמִ֣ינוּ לִ֔⁠י וְ⁠לֹ֥א יִשְׁמְע֖וּ בְּ⁠קֹלִ֑⁠י כִּ֣י יֹֽאמְר֔וּ לֹֽא־נִרְאָ֥ה אֵלֶ֖י⁠ךָ יְהוָֽה	1		This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	4	1	pq8x	figs-metonymy	בְּ⁠קֹלִ֑⁠י	1		See [3:18](../03/18.md). Alternate translation: “to what I say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -319,16 +320,16 @@ EXO	4	9	jsvb	figs-metonymy	לְ⁠קֹלֶ֔⁠ךָ	1		See [3:18](../03/18.md).
 EXO	4	9	hlym	figs-quotemarks	וְ⁠הָי֥וּ לְ⁠דָ֖ם בַּ⁠יַּבָּֽשֶׁת	1		After this phrase, the direct quote of Yahweh’s speech from the previous verse ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	4	10	aazp	figs-quotemarks	בִּ֣י אֲדֹנָ⁠י֒ לֹא֩ אִ֨ישׁ דְּבָרִ֜ים אָנֹ֗כִי גַּ֤ם מִ⁠תְּמוֹל֙ גַּ֣ם מִ⁠שִּׁלְשֹׁ֔ם גַּ֛ם מֵ⁠אָ֥ז דַּבֶּרְ⁠ךָ אֶל־עַבְדֶּ֑⁠ךָ כִּ֧י כְבַד־פֶּ֛ה וּ⁠כְבַ֥ד לָשׁ֖וֹן אָנֹֽכִי	1		This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	4	10	t8i9		בִּ֣י	1		This word is used by a speaker to beg a superior to allow him to speak. Alternate translation: “Please”
-EXO	4	10	w12a		לֹא֩ אִ֨ישׁ דְּבָרִ֜ים אָנֹ֗כִי גַּ֤ם מִ⁠תְּמוֹל֙ גַּ֣ם מִ⁠שִּׁלְשֹׁ֔ם	1	have never been eloquent	Alternate translation: “I have never been an excellent speaker”
+EXO	4	10	w12a		לֹא֩ אִ֨ישׁ דְּבָרִ֜ים אָנֹ֗כִי גַּ֤ם מִ⁠תְּמוֹל֙ גַּ֣ם מִ⁠שִּׁלְשֹׁ֔ם	1	have never been eloquent	Alternate translation: “I have never been an excellent speaker, not now, not before”
 EXO	4	10	opes		אִ֨ישׁ דְּבָרִ֜ים	1		This expression means “a man who uses words well,” in other words, an eloquent man who can speak well and convincingly.
 EXO	4	10	pk0l	figs-merism	גַּ֤ם מִ⁠תְּמוֹל֙ גַּ֣ם מִ⁠שִּׁלְשֹׁ֔ם	1		These phrases simply mean “in the past.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
 EXO	4	10	wsl4	figs-123person	עַבְדֶּ֑⁠ךָ	1		Moses refers to himself as God’s servant to lower his status before God (and perhaps by doing so to make his argument of inability stronger). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 EXO	4	10	bv64	figs-doublet	כְבַד־פֶּ֛ה וּ⁠כְבַ֥ד לָשׁ֖וֹן	1	I am slow of speech and slow of tongue	These phrases mean basically the same thing. Moses uses them to emphasize that he is not a good speaker. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “not good at public speaking”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 EXO	4	10	zm3y	figs-metonymy	לָשׁ֖וֹן	1	slow of tongue	Here, **tongue** refers to Moses’ ability to speak. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “speech” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	4	11	xpgf	figs-quotemarks	וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר יְהוָ֜ה אֵלָ֗י⁠ו	1		After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues to the end of the [next verse](../04/12.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-EXO	4	11	ks2m	figs-rquestion	מִ֣י שָׂ֣ם פֶּה֮ לָֽ⁠אָדָם֒	1	Who is it who made man’s mouth?	Yahweh uses this question to emphasize that he is the Creator who makes it possible for people to speak. Alternate translation: “Is it not I, Yahweh, who created the human mouth and the ability to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-EXO	4	11	e1y6	figs-rquestion	מִֽי־יָשׂ֣וּם אִלֵּ֔ם א֣וֹ חֵרֵ֔שׁ א֥וֹ פִקֵּ֖חַ א֣וֹ עִוֵּ֑ר	1	Who makes a man mute or deaf or seeing or blind?	Yahweh uses this question to emphasize that he is the one who decides if people can speak and hear, and if they can see. Alternate translation: “make people able to speak or hear or to see or to be blind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-EXO	4	11	uq7j	figs-rquestion	הֲ⁠לֹ֥א אָנֹכִ֖י יְהוָֽה	1	Is it not I, Yahweh?	Yahweh uses this question to emphasize that he alone makes these decisions. Alternate translation: “I, Yahweh, am the one who does this!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+EXO	4	11	ks2m	figs-rquestion	מִ֣י שָׂ֣ם פֶּה֮ לָֽ⁠אָדָם֒	1	Who is it who made man’s mouth?	Yahweh uses this question to emphasize that he is the Creator who makes it possible for people to speak. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Is it not I, Yahweh, who created the human mouth and the ability to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+EXO	4	11	e1y6	figs-rquestion	מִֽי־יָשׂ֣וּם אִלֵּ֔ם א֣וֹ חֵרֵ֔שׁ א֥וֹ פִקֵּ֖חַ א֣וֹ עִוֵּ֑ר	1	Who makes a man mute or deaf or seeing or blind?	Yahweh uses this question to emphasize that he is the one who decides if people can speak and hear, and if they can see. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “make people able to speak or hear or to see or to be blind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+EXO	4	11	uq7j	figs-rquestion	הֲ⁠לֹ֥א אָנֹכִ֖י יְהוָֽה	1	Is it not I, Yahweh?	Yahweh uses this question to emphasize that he alone makes these decisions. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I, Yahweh, am the one who does this!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 EXO	4	12	kkr1	figs-metonymy	וְ⁠אָנֹכִי֙ אֶֽהְיֶ֣ה עִם־פִּ֔י⁠ךָ	1	I will be with your mouth	Here, **mouth** refers to Moses’ ability to speak. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “I will give you the ability to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	4	12	kg7l	figs-quotemarks	תְּדַבֵּֽר	1		After this phrase, the direct quote from the previous verse ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	4	13	zy9m	figs-quotemarks	בִּ֣י אֲדֹנָ֑⁠י שְֽׁלַֽח־נָ֖א בְּ⁠יַד־תִּשְׁלָֽח	1		This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
@@ -338,7 +339,7 @@ EXO	4	13	y4a7	figs-synecdoche	בְּ⁠יַד	1		This phrase means “by a perso
 EXO	4	14	uy2v	figs-idiom	וַ⁠יִּֽחַר־אַ֨ף יְהוָ֜ה	1		This means that Yahweh is angry. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Yahweh became angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EXO	4	14	ifax	writing-pronouns	וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר֙	1		Alternate translation: “and Yahweh said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 EXO	4	14	zn40	figs-quotemarks	בְּ⁠מֹשֶׁ֗ה וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר֙	1		After this phrase a direct quote begins that continues until the end of [verse 17](../04/17.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-EXO	4	14	okko	figs-rquestion	הֲ⁠לֹ֨א אַהֲרֹ֤ן אָחִ֨י⁠ךָ֙ הַ⁠לֵּוִ֔י	1		Yahweh uses this rhetorical question to suggest an alternative to Moses. Alternative translation: “I know you have a brother, Aaron the Levite.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+EXO	4	14	okko	figs-rquestion	הֲ⁠לֹ֨א אַהֲרֹ֤ן אָחִ֨י⁠ךָ֙ הַ⁠לֵּוִ֔י	1		Yahweh uses this rhetorical question to suggest an alternative to Moses. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternative translation: “I know you have a brother, Aaron the Levite.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 EXO	4	14	e0js	translate-kinship	אָחִ֨י⁠ךָ֙	1		Aaron is older than Moses. If your language uses a different term for the sibling relationship based on gender and age order, choose the appropriate one. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
 EXO	4	14	y5ed	figs-idiom	דַבֵּ֥ר יְדַבֵּ֖ר	1		In Hebrew, the word **speak** is repeated. This means he speaks well. English cannot convey this by doubling, so the meaning of the repetition was translated in the ULT in this case. If your language can say something like “speaking speaks” to mean “speaks well,” consider it; otherwise, translate the meaning similarly to the ULT or UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EXO	4	14	c51y		הִנֵּה	1		Here, **behold** is used to draw attention to surprising information that follows. If your language has a term that functions in that way (“Listen!” or “Look!” or “Pay Attention!”), use it here.
@@ -378,16 +379,15 @@ EXO	4	21	ovma	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	וַ⁠אֲנִי֙ אֲחַזֵּ
 EXO	4	21	uvoh	figs-metaphor	וַ⁠אֲנִי֙ אֲחַזֵּ֣ק אֶת־לִבּ֔⁠וֹ	1		This means that God will make him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his heart would be made stronger. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. Alternate translation: “But as for me, I will cause Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	4	21	uudz	grammar-connect-logic-result	וְ⁠לֹ֥א יְשַׁלַּ֖ח אֶת־הָ⁠עָֽם	1		Make it clear in your translation that this is a result of God hardening Pharaoh’s heart. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 EXO	4	22	ftde		כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר יְהוָ֔ה	1		This is the first of hundreds of occurrences throughout the Old Testament of a standard phrase, **Thus says Yahweh**, used to introduce direct, authoritative instruction from Yahweh. It would be good for your team to have a standard way to translate this that makes it clear that the words that come next are directly from God. If your language has a standard way of introducing a new message from your rulers that alerts the hearers that these are the words of the rulers, that would be a good phrase to consider.
-EXO	4	22	zb2e	figs-quotesinquotes	כֹּ֚ה	1		Here, **Thus** begins a second-level quotation that continues until the end of [4:23](../04/23.md). It should be marked in some manner that distinguishes it from the outer level, the first level. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 EXO	4	22	teyy	figs-quotesinquotes	כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר יְהוָ֔ה	1		This begins a second-level quotation that continues until the end of [4:23](../04/23.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation. However, you may want to translate this as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the levels of quotations in this passage. Alternative translation: “that Yahweh says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
-EXO	4	22	kud7	figs-quotemarks	בְּנִ֥⁠י	1		This is the beginning of a third-level quotation that continues until the end of [4:23](../04/23.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening third-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. (If you chose to translate, “Thus says Yahweh,” as an indirect quote, this will be a second- level quotation.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-EXO	4	22	gr2d	figs-metaphor	בְּנִ֥⁠י בְכֹרִ֖⁠י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל׃	1		Yahweh expresses his affection for the Israelites by calling them his **son**. Some languages may need to change the metaphor here into a simile. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EXO	4	22	kud7	figs-quotemarks	בְּנִ֥⁠י בְכֹרִ֖⁠י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל׃	1		This is the beginning of a third-level quotation that continues until the end of [4:23](../04/23.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening third-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. (If you chose to translate, “Thus says Yahweh,” as an indirect quote, this will be a second- level quotation.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+EXO	4	22	gr2d	figs-metaphor	בְּנִ֥⁠י	1		Yahweh expresses his affection for the Israelites by calling them his **son**. Some languages may need to change the metaphor here into a simile. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	4	22	pt4n	grammar-collectivenouns	יִשְׂרָאֵֽל	1	Israel is my son	The word **Israel** here represents all the people of Israel as a group. It is important to keep the singular reference to Israel as son rather than change it to something like ‘the Israelites are my children,’ because God is making a particular contrast here between his son and Pharaoh’s son. Some languages may not be able to use “Israel” as a collective noun and may need to choose a translation like “the nation of Israel” or “the Israelite nation.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
-EXO	4	22	nbn7	figs-metonymy	יִשְׂרָאֵֽל	1		The Israelite nation is often referred to simply by the name of the patriarch. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. For alternative translation see: [[rc://en/tn/help/exo/04/22/pt4n]] (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+EXO	4	22	nbn7	figs-metonymy	יִשְׂרָאֵֽל	1		The Israelite nation is often referred to simply by the name of the patriarch. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “The Israelites are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	4	23	syar	figs-quotemarks	שַׁלַּ֤ח אֶת־בְּנִ⁠י֙ וְ⁠יַֽעַבְדֵ֔⁠נִי	1		This is a fourth-level quotation. It should be marked in some manner that distinguishes it from the outer levels. (If you chose to translate “Thus says Yahweh” as an indirect quote, this will be a third-level quotation.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	4	23	yyuo	figs-quotations	וָ⁠אֹמַ֣ר אֵלֶ֗י⁠ךָ שַׁלַּ֤ח אֶת־בְּנִ⁠י֙ וְ⁠יַֽעַבְדֵ֔⁠נִי וַ⁠תְּמָאֵ֖ן	1		The fourth-level quotation here may be a good one to translate as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the levels of quotations in this passage. Alternative translation: “and I told you to let my son go that he may serve me. But you have refused” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 EXO	4	23	k7mh	figs-metaphor	בְּנִ⁠י֙	1	you have refused to let him go	Yahweh continues to metaphorically speak of Israel as **my son.** See how you translated it in the previous verse. Alternative translation: “the Israelite nation, which is like a son to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EXO	4	23	u825	figs-pronouns	וְ⁠יַֽעַבְדֵ֔⁠נִי…לְ⁠שַׁלְּח֑⁠וֹ	1		The pronouns **he** and **him** agree with “son.” What you use may depend on how you translated son at [[rc://en/tn/help/exo/04/23/k7mh]]. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
+EXO	4	23	u825	figs-pronouns	וְ⁠יַֽעַבְדֵ֔⁠נִי…לְ⁠שַׁלְּח֑⁠וֹ	1		The pronouns **he** and **him** agree with “son.” What you use may depend on how you translated son in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
 EXO	4	23	ot2b		הִנֵּה֙	1		This is used to draw attention to surprising information that follows. Alternative translation: “Know this”
 EXO	4	23	re11		בִּנְ⁠ךָ֖	1	I will certainly kill your son, your firstborn	Here, **your son** refers to the actual son of Pharaoh.
 EXO	4	23	ubcw	figs-quotemarks	בִּנְ⁠ךָ֖ בְּכֹרֶֽ⁠ךָ	1		After this phrase, the three levels of direct quotations end, bringing a complete close to all quotations that started in verses [21](../04/21.md) and [22](../04/22.md). If you are using direct quotations, at the end of this verse you should have three closing markers: third level, second level and first level. In English, it looks like **” ’ ”** (without spaces). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
@@ -396,15 +396,15 @@ EXO	4	24	p820	writing-pronouns	וַ⁠יִּפְגְּשֵׁ֣⁠הוּ…הֲמ
 EXO	4	24	qeo5	writing-pronouns	וַ⁠יְבַקֵּ֖שׁ	1		Here, **he** refers to Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 EXO	4	25	m1la	translate-names	צִפֹּרָ֜ה	1	Zipporah	**Zipporah** is the name of Moses’ wife. See how you translated it in [2:21](../02/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EXO	4	25	sftg	writing-participants	צִפֹּרָ֜ה	1		**Zipporah** is introduced here as a new character. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
-EXO	4	25	a36h	translate-unknown	צֹ֗ר	1	flint knife	This was a knife with a sharpened stone blade. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-EXO	4	25	nkxn	translate-unknown	עָרְלַ֣ת	1		The **foreskin** is the retractable fold of skin which covers and protects the end of the penis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+EXO	4	25	a36h	translate-unknown	צֹ֗ר	1	flint knife	This was a flake or a sharp piece of a hard gray rock that was used as a knife.. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+EXO	4	25	nkxn	translate-unknown	עָרְלַ֣ת	1		The**foreskin** is the retractable fold of skin which covers and protects the end of the penis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	4	25	l6sr	figs-euphemism	לְ⁠רַגְלָ֑י⁠ו	1	to his feet	It is possible that the word **feet** may have been a more respectful way to refer to the genital area of the body. However, that possibility is not high enough that you should translate it either literally as genitals or with another euphemism meaning genitals in your language. If you have a word that means primarily feet or legs, but could in some cases also euphemistically mean genitals, you may consider it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 EXO	4	25	iuzw	figs-quotemarks	כִּ֧י חֲתַן־דָּמִ֛ים אַתָּ֖ה לִֽ⁠י	1		This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	4	25	b2t3	figs-metaphor	כִּ֧י חֲתַן־דָּמִ֛ים אַתָּ֖ה לִֽ⁠י	1	you are a bridegroom to me by blood	The meaning of this metaphor is unclear. It was probably a known saying in that culture. Alternate translation: “You are related to me by this blood” or “You are my husband because of blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	4	26	ceqk	grammar-connect-logic-result	וַ⁠יִּ֖רֶף	1		God **relented** as a result of Zipporah’s action. Consider a conjunction or other form that expresses result, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 EXO	4	26	o4zt	writing-pronouns	וַ⁠יִּ֖רֶף	1		Alternate translation: “Yahweh relented” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 EXO	4	26	k136	writing-pronouns	מִמֶּ֑⁠נּוּ	1		As in [4:24](../04/24.md), this could mean either Moses or the son, but most commentators think it is still Moses. The UST uses “anyone” to preserve ambiguity. Alternative translation: “from Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-EXO	4	26	r8hj	figs-quotations	חֲתַ֥ן דָּמִ֖ים	1		This is a unique quotation because Zipporah probably does not speak again; rather, the quotation refers back to her statement in [4:25](../04/25.md). Your language may handle this sort of quotation in a special way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+EXO	4	26	r8hj	figs-quotations	חֲתַ֥ן דָּמִ֖ים	1		This is a unique quotation because Zipporah probably does not speak again; rather, the quotation refers back to her statement in [4:25](../04/25.md). Use a form from your language for quoting a portion of what someone previously said. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 EXO	4	26	abmg	figs-quotemarks	חֲתַ֥ן דָּמִ֖ים לַ⁠מּוּלֹֽת	1		It is not clear if the quotation includes **because of the circumcision** or if that is a comment explaining the quotation. Translations are divided in where they end the quotation, but most exclude **because of the circumcision**, and it is best to follow that unless a locally respected translation includes it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	4	27	xk6b	writing-newevent	וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר	1	Yahweh said to Aaron	You may want to add a word that marks the beginning of a new part of the story, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 EXO	4	27	qxpc	writing-participants	אַהֲרֹ֔ן	1		**Aaron** is introduced as a new participant. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
@@ -419,18 +419,18 @@ EXO	4	30	x1v3		הָ⁠עָֽם	1		Context suggests that **people** refers to the
 EXO	4	31	glp2		הָ⁠עָ֑ם	1		Context suggests that **people** refers to the leaders gathered in [4:29](../04/29.md).
 EXO	4	31	q1er		פָקַ֨ד…בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל	1	had observed the Israelites	Alternate translation: “saw the Israelites” or “was concerned about the Israelites”
 EXO	4	31	g83a	translate-symaction	וַֽ⁠יִּקְּד֖וּ וַ⁠יִּֽשְׁתַּחֲוּֽוּ	1	they bowed their heads	Alternative translations: “they bowed their heads in awe” or “they bowed down low in reverence.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
-EXO	5	intro	kea2			0		# Exodus 05 General Notes<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### A slave’s work<br><br>The Egyptians were known for making their slaves do a lot of work. The Israelite slaves were forced to make a specific number of bricks every day. In this chapter, they were required not only to make these bricks, but also to gather straw, one of the raw materials needed in order to make those bricks.<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### “Let my people go”<br><br>This is a very important statement. Moses does not seek permission to leave, asking Pharaoh to “let go” of the Hebrew people. Instead, he demands that Pharaoh free the Hebrew people.<br><br>### Titles<br><br>The leaders are given different titles in this chapter. The ULT uses “taskmasters” and “foremen.” Many cultures will not have these types of titles. Generic expressions like “Egyptian leaders” and “Hebrew leaders” may be necessary.
+EXO	5	intro	kea2			0		# Exodus 05 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n- v. 1-5: Moses gives Pharaoh Yahweh’s message\n- v. 6-21: Pharaoh makes the Israelites work harder\n- v. 22-23: Moses asks Yahweh why things went badly\n
 EXO	5	1	q0zv	writing-newevent	וְ⁠אַחַ֗ר בָּ֚אוּ מֹשֶׁ֣ה וְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֔ן וַ⁠יֹּאמְר֖וּ אֶל־פַּרְעֹ֑ה	1		The time phrase, **and afterward**, marks a transition in the narrative. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternative translation: “After that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 EXO	5	1	q9kn	grammar-connect-time-sequential	וְ⁠אַחַ֗ר בָּ֚אוּ מֹשֶׁ֣ה וְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֔ן וַ⁠יֹּאמְר֖וּ אֶל־פַּרְעֹ֑ה	1	After these things happened	It is unclear how long Moses and Aaron waited before they went to see Pharaoh. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 EXO	5	1	cudx	figs-go	בָּ֚אוּ	1		In this instance, depending on how they have to set scenes, some languages may need to use “came in.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 EXO	5	1	tsnv	writing-participants	פַּרְעֹ֑ה	1		Pharaoh is reintroduced as a participant in the narrative for the first time since chapter 2. Use the natural form in your language for reintroducing a character. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
-EXO	5	1	jarm	figs-quotemarks	כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙ אֱלֹהֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל שַׁלַּח֙ אֶת־עַמִּ֔⁠י וְ⁠יָחֹ֥גּוּ לִ֖⁠י בַּ⁠מִּדְבָּֽר	1		This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+EXO	5	1	jarm	figs-quotemarks	כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙ אֱלֹהֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל שַׁלַּח֙ אֶת־עַמִּ֔⁠י וְ⁠יָחֹ֥גּוּ לִ֖⁠י בַּ⁠מִּדְבָּֽר	1		This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. There is a second-level quotation fully contained within this portion which is addressed elsewhere. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	5	1	ckml	figs-quotemarks	שַׁלַּח֙ אֶת־עַמִּ֔⁠י וְ⁠יָחֹ֥גּוּ לִ֖⁠י בַּ⁠מִּדְבָּֽר	1		This is a second-level direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	5	1	lu3i		כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙	1		This quotation formula is used to introduce commands from Yahweh. See [4:intro](../04/intro.md) for more information.
 EXO	5	1	u2vt		וְ⁠יָחֹ֥גּוּ	1	festival for me	This is a celebration to worship Yahweh. Alternative translation: “so they can worship me with eating and drinking”
 EXO	5	2	v4c1	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר	1	Why should I…let Israel go?	The result here is exactly as God has said; therefore, a contrastive transition word is reasonable but not required, given the immediate human context. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 EXO	5	2	fq6i	figs-quotemarks	מִ֤י יְהוָה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶשְׁמַ֣ע בְּ⁠קֹל֔⁠וֹ לְ⁠שַׁלַּ֖ח אֶת־יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל לֹ֤א יָדַ֨עְתִּי֙ אֶת־יְהוָ֔ה וְ⁠גַ֥ם אֶת־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל לֹ֥א אֲשַׁלֵּֽחַ	1		This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-EXO	5	2	lqwt		מִ֤י יְהוָה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶשְׁמַ֣ע בְּ⁠קֹל֔⁠וֹ לְ⁠שַׁלַּ֖ח אֶת־יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל	1		This is not a rhetorical question, though Pharaoh may have spoken with contempt. Pharaoh would have considered himself a god. The Egyptians had several gods, and most people groups were assumed to have their own gods. Therefore, Pharaoh had truly not heard of Yahweh (who has just told his name to Moses).
+EXO	5	2	lqwt		מִ֤י יְהוָה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶשְׁמַ֣ע בְּ⁠קֹל֔⁠וֹ לְ⁠שַׁלַּ֖ח אֶת־יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל	1		This is not a rhetorical question, though Pharaoh may have spoken with contempt. Pharaoh would have considered himself a god. The Egyptians had several gods, and most people groups were assumed to have their own gods. Therefore, Pharaoh had truly not heard of Yahweh (who has just revealed his name to Moses).
 EXO	5	2	wpff	grammar-collectivenouns	יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל…יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל	1		Here the nation is spoken of as an individual. Alternative translation: “the nation of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 EXO	5	2	c653	figs-metonymy	בְּ⁠קֹל֔⁠וֹ	1	listen to his voice	Here, **his voice** represent the words God spoke. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to what he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	5	2	ma6b		וְ⁠גַ֥ם	1		This functions to strengthen Pharaoh’s statement about his decision. Alternative translation: “and most definitely”
@@ -445,26 +445,26 @@ EXO	5	4	fiw9	figs-youdual	לְכ֖וּ לְ⁠סִבְלֹתֵי⁠כֶֽם	1		T
 EXO	5	5	nqbe	figs-aside	וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר פַּרְעֹ֔ה	1		It is unusual for the same speaker to be reintroduced like this. Some translations omit the repetition, but there is another option. This statement may be more connected to the next couple of verses, so it might be appropriate to make a minor break before this verse. Pharaoh may have been commenting to himself, or he may have only thought this statement silently; either way, it led to his next actions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]])
 EXO	5	5	todi		הֵן	1		**Behold** is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say.
 EXO	5	5	c53k	figs-youdual	וְ⁠הִשְׁבַּתֶּ֥ם	1		Here, **you** means Moses and Aaron. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual form if you have one, or if not, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
-EXO	5	6	ar9m		אֶת־הַ⁠נֹּגְשִׂ֣ים בָּ⁠עָ֔ם וְ⁠אֶת־שֹׁטְרָ֖י⁠ו	1		Pharaoh may have sent a messenger or messengers to the taskmasters and officers or spoken to one or a few representatives of them at his court rather than speaking to them directly. Alternative translation: “Pharaoh gave an order to the taskmasters among the people and officers. He said,”
+EXO	5	6	ar9m		וַ⁠יְצַ֥ו פַּרְעֹ֖ה…אֶת־הַ⁠נֹּגְשִׂ֣ים בָּ⁠עָ֔ם וְ⁠אֶת־שֹׁטְרָ֖י⁠ו לֵ⁠אמֹֽר	1		Pharaoh may have sent a messenger or messengers to the taskmasters and officers or spoken to one or a few representatives of them at his court rather than speaking to them directly. Alternative translation: “And … Pharaoh gave an order to the taskmasters among the people and officers. He said,”
 EXO	5	6	zd4m		הַ⁠נֹּגְשִׂ֣ים	1	taskmasters	**Taskmasters** were Egyptians whose job it was to force the Israelites to do hard work. These are probably the same as the “overseers” of labor gangs from [Exodus 1:11](../01/11.md), but here the term is harsher. Alternative translation: “oppressors”
 EXO	5	6	gsdx		שֹׁטְרָ֖י⁠ו	1		**Officers** were probably Israelite slaves who were in charge of the other Israelites but who answered to the Egyptian taskmasters.
 EXO	5	6	dxih		לֵ⁠אמֹֽר	1		Here, **saying** is a way of introducing a direct quotation in Hebrew; most translations can omit it without harm.
 EXO	5	7	k6io	figs-youdual	לֹ֣א תֹאסִפ֞וּ⁠ן	1		This command was given to multiple people; if your language distinguishes between singular and plural forms when giving commands, make sure this is a plural form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
 EXO	5	7	kfhw	figs-quotemarks	לֹ֣א תֹאסִפ֞וּ⁠ן	1		Verses 7-9 are a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate the start here with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of the quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-EXO	5	7	p9nx	figs-idiom	כִּ⁠תְמ֣וֹל שִׁלְשֹׁ֑ם	1	you must no longer give	This is a Hebrew idiom meaning “in the past.” If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternative translation: “as before” or “as previously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+EXO	5	7	p9nx	figs-idiom	כִּ⁠תְמ֣וֹל שִׁלְשֹׁ֑ם	1	you must no longer give	This is a Hebrew idiom meaning “in the past.” If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternative translation: “as you used to do” or “as was done previously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EXO	5	8	izkf	figs-youdual	תָּשִׂ֣ימוּ	1		If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
-EXO	5	8	ro25	translate-unknown	הַ⁠לְּבֵנִ֜ים	1		**Bricks** are hardened clay blocks for building. See how you translated in [1:14][../01/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+EXO	5	8	ro25	translate-unknown	הַ⁠לְּבֵנִ֜ים	1		**Bricks** are blocks made of clay or mud with straw in them. They are hardened in the sun or in another manner before they are used for building. See how you translated in [1:14][../01/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	5	8	dlzx	figs-idiom	תְּמ֤וֹל שִׁלְשֹׁם֙	1		This is a Hebrew idiom meaning “in the past.” See how you translated this in [5:7](../05/07md) Alternative translation: “before” or “previously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EXO	5	8	vd10	figs-quotemarks	נֵלְכָ֖ה נִזְבְּחָ֥ה לֵ⁠אלֹהֵֽי⁠נוּ	1		This is a second-level direct quotation. It is a quote of Moses and Aaron. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	5	9	xca1	figs-idiom	וְ⁠אַל־יִשְׁע֖וּ בְּ⁠דִבְרֵי־שָֽׁקֶר	1		Here words are spoken of as if they could be looked upon. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternative translation: “and not listen to words that are lies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EXO	5	10	ozzn	writing-newevent	וַ⁠יֵּ֨צְא֜וּ	1		This begins a new scene, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 EXO	5	10	x4bi		נֹגְשֵׂ֤י	1	taskmasters	**Taskmasters** were Egyptians whose job was to force the Israelites to do hard work. See how you translated this in [5:6](../05/6.md). See [[rc://en/tn/help/exo/05/06/zd4m]]
-EXO	5	10	zvxx		כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר פַּרְעֹ֔ה	1		This is the same quote form as is used when Yahweh gives a direct command. See [4:intro](../04/intro.md) for more information.
+EXO	5	10	zvxx		כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר פַּרְעֹ֔ה	1		This is the same quotation introduction as is used when Yahweh gives a direct command. See [4:intro](../04/intro.md) for more information.
 EXO	5	10	c12s	figs-quotations	וַ⁠יֹּאמְר֥וּ אֶל־הָ⁠עָ֖ם לֵ⁠אמֹ֑ר כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר פַּרְעֹ֔ה	1		It might be helpful in some languages to translate **thus says Pharaoh** as an indirect quote so that his conveyed command is not a quote within a quote. Alternate translation: “and told the people that Pharaoh says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 EXO	5	10	mkom	figs-quotesinquotes	אֵינֶ֛⁠נִּי	1		This is the beginning of a second-level quotation that continues until the end of verse 11. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the start of a quotation within a quotation. However, you could also translate this as an indirect quote. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 EXO	5	10	ad73	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	אֵינֶ֛⁠נִּי נֹתֵ֥ן לָ⁠כֶ֖ם תֶּֽבֶן	1		The structure of this phrase and the one that opens [the next verse](../05/11.md) create a strong contrast between what **I** (Pharaoh) and **you** (you all, the Israelites) will do. Translate this in a way that emphasizes, if possible, the contrast between “I” and “you.” Alternative translation: “It is not I who will give you straw.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 EXO	5	10	si2e	figs-metonymy	אֵינֶ֛⁠נִּי נֹתֵ֥ן לָ⁠כֶ֖ם תֶּֽבֶן	1		Pharaoh uses **I** to refer to his ownership and commands. Pharaoh does not physically give the Israelites straw. Rather, he had commanded his servants to take straw that belonged to Pharaoh and give it to the Israelites. Now he told his servants to stop providing straw. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “My servants will no longer give you my straw” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-EXO	5	10	gb4d	figs-youdual	לָ⁠כֶ֖ם	1	I will no longer give you	**You** is plural and refers to the Israelite people. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
+EXO	5	10	gb4d	figs-youdual	לָ⁠כֶ֖ם	1	I will no longer give you	**You**is plural and refers to the Israelite people. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
 EXO	5	11	ewg6	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	אַתֶּ֗ם לְכ֨וּ קְח֤וּ לָ⁠כֶם֙ תֶּ֔בֶן מֵ⁠אֲשֶׁ֖ר תִּמְצָ֑אוּ	1		The structure of this phrase serves as the opposing side of the contrast Pharaoh sets up in the last phrase. By explicitly using a pronoun with a command, he is emphasizing who will go get straw. If possible, translate this in a way that emphasizes the contrast between “I” and “you.” See [[rc://en/tn/help/exo/05/10/7zfp]] for more info. Alternative translation: “Rather, it is you yourselves who must go get straw from wherever you might find it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 EXO	5	11	xe4i	figs-youdual	אַתֶּ֗ם	1	you can find…your workload	Here, **you** is plural and refers to the Israelite people. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
 EXO	5	11	w918	figs-rpronouns	אַתֶּ֗ם…לָ⁠כֶם֙	1	You yourselves must go	The repetition of **you** emphasizes that the Egyptians will no longer help the slaves. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
@@ -478,9 +478,9 @@ EXO	5	13	d86r	figs-quotemarks	כַּלּ֤וּ מַעֲשֵׂי⁠כֶם֙ דּ
 EXO	5	13	a5ja		דְּבַר־י֣וֹם בְּ⁠יוֹמ֔⁠וֹ	1		**Day by day** means “daily.” Alternative translation: “the daily task”
 EXO	5	14	h4uo		נֹגְשֵׂ֥י	1		**Taskmasters** are Egyptians whose job it was to force the Israelites to do hard work. See how you translated this in [Exodus 5:6](../05/06.md).
 EXO	5	14	unbc	figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יֻּכּ֗וּ שֹֽׁטְרֵי֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל	1		The text does not specify who beat the officers. It was probably either the taskmasters or someone the taskmasters ordered to beat the officers. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And the taskmasters beat the officers of the sons of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EXO	5	14	eq22	figs-rquestion	מַדּ֡וּעַ לֹא֩ כִלִּיתֶ֨ם חָקְ⁠כֶ֤ם לִ⁠לְבֹּן֙ כִּ⁠תְמ֣וֹל שִׁלְשֹׁ֔ם גַּם־תְּמ֖וֹל גַּם־הַ⁠יּֽוֹם	1	Why have you not produced all the bricks required of you…in the past?	The taskmasters used this question to show they were angry with the lack of bricks. Alternate translation: “You are not producing enough bricks, either yesterday or today, as you did in the past!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+EXO	5	14	eq22	figs-rquestion	מַדּ֡וּעַ לֹא֩ כִלִּיתֶ֨ם חָקְ⁠כֶ֤ם לִ⁠לְבֹּן֙ כִּ⁠תְמ֣וֹל שִׁלְשֹׁ֔ם גַּם־תְּמ֖וֹל גַּם־הַ⁠יּֽוֹם	1	Why have you not produced all the bricks required of you…in the past?	The taskmasters used this question to show they were angry with the lack of bricks. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are not producing enough bricks, either yesterday or today, as you did in the past!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 EXO	5	14	nk4i	figs-quotemarks	מַדּ֡וּעַ לֹא֩ כִלִּיתֶ֨ם חָקְ⁠כֶ֤ם לִ⁠לְבֹּן֙ כִּ⁠תְמ֣וֹל שִׁלְשֹׁ֔ם גַּם־תְּמ֖וֹל גַּם־הַ⁠יּֽוֹם	1		This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-EXO	5	14	oh6o	figs-youdual	כִלִּיתֶ֨ם חָקְ⁠כֶ֤ם	1		Here, **you** and **your** are plural. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. However, also see [[rc://en/tn/help/exo/05/14/emq7]]. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
+EXO	5	14	oh6o	figs-youdual	כִלִּיתֶ֨ם חָקְ⁠כֶ֤ם	1		Here, **you** and **your** are plural. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
 EXO	5	14	emq7	figs-synecdoche	כִלִּיתֶ֨ם חָקְ⁠כֶ֤ם	1	cried out	Here, **you** and **your** do not simply refer to the officers; they refer to the groups of Israelite workers the officers are in charge of. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 EXO	5	14	liz8	figs-idiom	כִּ⁠תְמ֣וֹל שִׁלְשֹׁ֔ם	1		This is a Hebrew idiom meaning “in the past.” Here it specifically refers to the time before the Egyptians stopped giving the Israelites straw. See how you translated this in [5:7](../05/07md) Alternative translation: “before” or “previously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EXO	5	14	zklg		גַּם־תְּמ֖וֹל גַּם־הַ⁠יּֽוֹם	1		This time expression refers to more recent days, ones since the Egyptians stopped providing the straw to the Israelites.
@@ -513,11 +513,11 @@ EXO	5	21	vfit	figs-youdual	עֲלֵי⁠כֶ֖ם וְ⁠יִשְׁפֹּ֑ט	1
 EXO	5	21	j3zp	figs-metaphor	הִבְאַשְׁתֶּ֣ם אֶת־רֵיחֵ֗⁠נוּ בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֤י פַרְעֹה֙ וּ⁠בְ⁠עֵינֵ֣י עֲבָדָ֔י⁠ו	1	you have made us offensive	The Egyptians responded to the Israelites the same way they would respond to a foul odor. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “you have caused Pharaoh and his servants to hate us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	5	21	d592	figs-metonymy	חֶ֥רֶב בְּ⁠יָדָ֖⁠ם	1	have put a sword in their hand to kill us	Here, **a sword into their hand** is a metonym for “a reason in their mind.” The Israelites are afraid that the Egyptians will feel that they are doing the right thing if they kill the Israelites, because Moses and Aaron are making demands to the king and because the Egyptians view the Israelites as lazy and dangerous. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “them a reason to think they would be right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	5	22	pm0l	figs-quotemarks	וַ⁠יֹּאמַ֑ר	1		After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues to the end of the chapter. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-EXO	5	22	g4d5	figs-rquestion	לָ֥⁠מָּה זֶּ֖ה שְׁלַחְתָּֽ⁠נִי	1	Lord, why have you caused trouble for this people?	This question shows how disappointed Moses was that the Egyptians were treating the Israelites even more harshly now. He is expressing that he thinks God has caused the opposite of what he promised to happen. Alternate translation: “You sent me to rescue them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+EXO	5	22	g4d5	figs-rquestion	לָ֥⁠מָּה זֶּ֖ה שְׁלַחְתָּֽ⁠נִי	1	Lord, why have you caused trouble for this people?	This question shows how disappointed Moses was that the Egyptians were treating the Israelites even more harshly now. He is expressing that he thinks God has caused the opposite of what he promised to happen. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I thought you sent me to rescue them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 EXO	5	23	v2k2	figs-metonymy	בִּ⁠שְׁמֶ֔⁠ךָ	1	to speak to him in your name	Here, **in your name** indicates that Moses delivers Yahweh’s message. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “for you” or “your message for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	5	23	fzir	figs-idiom	וְ⁠הַצֵּ֥ל לֹא־הִצַּ֖לְתָּ	1		In Hebrew, **rescued** is repeated for emphasis. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EXO	5	23	ce6s	figs-quotemarks	עַמֶּֽ⁠ךָ	1		After this phrase, the direct quote of Moses that began in the [previous verse](../05/22.md) ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-EXO	6	intro	we5k			0		# Exodus 06 General Notes<br><br>## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Repetition of events:<br><br>Most of the content of this chapter is very similar to the events and dialogue in chapters 3-4. For consistency, translators should consult the decisions they made there while keeping in mind that this narrative is not exactly the same. Also, verses 10-12 and verses 28-30 are very similar to each other. These events are probably a recommissioning of Moses. After his first encounter with Pharaoh went very poorly and the Israelites seem to reject God, reminds Moses of God’s promises and power.<br><br>### Referring to God<br><br>A name for God (**Yahweh**) and a title for God (**El Shaddai**) are mentioned in this chapter ([6:2](../06/02.md)\\-[6:3](../06/03.md)). The precise meaning of El Shaddai is not known, but most scholars think it means something like “almighty.” Translators who have worked on Genesis may find confusing the statement that Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob did not know Yahweh as the name of God.<br><br>### Other possible translation difficulties:<br><br>With little explanation, a large portion of the chapter is devoted to the genealogy of Moses and Aaron. Some of the people in the genealogy lived much longer than is normal for humans today. If translators are not familiar with the lengths of people’s lives in the early days of the world (as recorded in Genesis, especially chapter 5), this may cause confusion.<br><br>## Study Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Promised Land<br><br>According to the covenant Yahweh made with Abraham, Egypt is not the home of the Hebrew people. Their home is the Promised Land in Canaan. The people are to return home to their land. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])<br><br>### “Let my people go”<br><br>This is a very important statement. Moses is not asking Pharaoh to “let go” of the Hebrew people. Instead, he is demanding that Pharaoh free the Hebrew people.<br><br>### God and his people<br><br>In verse 7, note mention of a very important biblical theme of God being “your God” and the special relationship that his people have with him.
+EXO	6	intro	we5k			0		# Exodus 06 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n- v. 1-13, 28-30: Yahweh repeats his commissioning of Moses after the bad events recorded in chapter 5\n- v. 14-27: Genealogy of Moses and Aaron\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Repetition of events:\n\nMost of the content of this chapter is very similar to the events and dialogue in chapters 3-4. For consistency, translators should consult the decisions they made there while keeping in mind that this narrative is not exactly the same. Also, verses 10-12 and verses 28-30 are very similar to each other. These events are probably a recommissioning of Moses. After his first encounter with Pharaoh went very poorly and the Israelites seem to reject God, Yahweh reminds Moses of his promises and power.\n\n### Referring to God\n\nA name for God (**Yahweh**) and a title for God (**El Shaddai**) are mentioned in this chapter ([6:2](../06/02.md)\\-[6:3](../06/03.md)). The precise meaning of El Shaddai is not known, but most scholars think it means something like “almighty.” Translators who have worked on Genesis may find confusing the statement that Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob did not know Yahweh as the name of God.\n\n### Other possible translation difficulties:\n\nWith little explanation, a large portion of the chapter is devoted to the genealogy of Moses and Aaron. Some of the people in the genealogy lived much longer than is normal for humans today. If translators are not familiar with the lengths of people’s lives in the early days of the world (as recorded in Genesis, especially chapter 5), this may cause confusion.\n\n## Study Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Promised Land\n\nAccording to the covenant Yahweh made with Abraham, Egypt is not the home of the Hebrew people. Their home is the Promised Land in Canaan. The people are to return home to their land. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])\n\n### God and his people\n\nIn verse 7, note the mention of a very important biblical theme of God being “your God” and the special relationship that his people have with him.
 EXO	6	1	ip5i	figs-quotemarks	עַתָּ֣ה תִרְאֶ֔ה אֲשֶׁ֥ר אֶֽעֱשֶׂ֖ה לְ⁠פַרְעֹ֑ה כִּ֣י בְ⁠יָ֤ד חֲזָקָה֙ יְשַׁלְּחֵ֔⁠ם וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֣ד חֲזָקָ֔ה יְגָרְשֵׁ֖⁠ם מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ	1		This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	6	1	lu95	grammar-connect-time-sequential	עַתָּ֣ה	1		This refers to future events starting very soon. Alternative translation: “Starting soon” or “Very soon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 EXO	6	1	ece6	figs-metonymy	בְ⁠יָ֤ד חֲזָקָה֙…וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֣ד חֲזָקָ֔ה	1	my strong hand	Here, **hand** is a metonym for power. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “by a strong power … and by a strong power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -530,7 +530,7 @@ EXO	6	3	l81y	translate-transliterate	בְּ⁠אֵ֣ל שַׁדָּ֑י	1	I appe
 EXO	6	3	m27p	figs-activepassive	וּ⁠שְׁמִ֣⁠י יְהוָ֔ה לֹ֥א נוֹדַ֖עְתִּי לָ⁠הֶֽם	1	I was not known to them	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but they did not know me by my name Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	6	3	e36z		וּ⁠שְׁמִ֣⁠י יְהוָ֔ה לֹ֥א נוֹדַ֖עְתִּי לָ⁠הֶֽם	1		This statement is very difficult to understand as God’s name, Yahweh, is used throughout Genesis, including by Abraham and others. There are many theories about what it means; the view followed by the UST is that now God is revealing to the Israelites a fuller meaning of his divine name than what Abraham and others knew. Alternate translation: “but my name Yahweh was not understood by them”
 EXO	6	4	zxvc	figs-quotations	לָ⁠תֵ֥ת לָ⁠הֶ֖ם אֶת־אֶ֣רֶץ כְּנָ֑עַן	1		This is the content of the covenant promise from God to his people. Some languages may need to make this part a direct quotation. To do so, begin a new sentence. Alternate translation: “I said, ‘I will give you the land of Canaan’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-EXO	6	4	gkkc	figs-parallelism	אֶ֥רֶץ מְגֻרֵי⁠הֶ֖ם אֲשֶׁר־גָּ֥רוּ בָֽ⁠הּ	1		These two phrases mean similar things. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “the land they lived in as temporary residents”; otherwise, “the land that was not their home but where they lived as foreigners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+EXO	6	4	gkkc	figs-parallelism	אֶ֥רֶץ מְגֻרֵי⁠הֶ֖ם אֲשֶׁר־גָּ֥רוּ בָֽ⁠הּ	1		These two phrases mean similar things. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “the land they lived in as temporary residents” or “the land that was not their home but where they lived as foreigners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 EXO	6	5	l3yc		נַאֲקַת֙	1	groaning	Here, **groaning** means making sad sounds because of pain and suffering.
 EXO	6	5	aiey		וָ⁠אֶזְכֹּ֖ר אֶת־בְּרִיתִֽ⁠י	1		**I have remembered my covenant** means God is going to take action. Alternative translation: “I will keep my promise”
 EXO	6	6	rgh0	grammar-connect-logic-result	לָ⁠כֵ֞ן	1		God is now telling Moses to deliver a message to the Israelites of what God is going to do because of everything that he said in verses 2-5. The reason-result relationship is strongly marked here, so translations should make sure to use a connector that marks verse 6-8 as a result of verses 2-5. Alternate translation: “Because of this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -541,7 +541,7 @@ EXO	6	6	oqnw	figs-synecdoche	מִ⁠תַּ֨חַת֙ סִבְלֹ֣ת מִצְר
 EXO	6	6	xyn4	figs-metaphor	בִּ⁠זְר֣וֹעַ נְטוּיָ֔ה	1		Here, **arm** is a figurative way of referring to Yahweh’s power, influence, and capacity for action. **Outstretched** means that he is using that power. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “by my great strength” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	6	6	efx1		וּ⁠בִ⁠שְׁפָטִ֖ים	1		Here, the term **judgments** refers to the plagues that God is about to send to harm Egypt and the Egyptians. Each plague is a response to Pharaoh’s stubbornness. Alternate translation: “and by [greatly] harming the Egyptians”
 EXO	6	7	o3lb	figs-youdual	אֶתְ⁠כֶ֥ם…לָ⁠כֶ֖ם…וִֽ⁠ידַעְתֶּ֗ם…אֱלֹ֣הֵי⁠כֶ֔ם…אֶתְ⁠כֶ֔ם	1		Here every occurrence of **you** refers to the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
-EXO	6	7	xsdh	figs-synecdoche	מִ⁠תַּ֖חַת סִבְל֥וֹת מִצְרָֽיִם	1		This refers to all the hard work the Egyptians forced upon the Israelites. See what you did in the previous verse at [[rc://en/tn/help/exo/06/07/oqnw]]. Alternate translation: “from the hard work the Egyptians force you to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+EXO	6	7	xsdh	figs-synecdoche	מִ⁠תַּ֖חַת סִבְל֥וֹת מִצְרָֽיִם	1		This refers to all the hard work the Egyptians forced upon the Israelites. See what you did in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “from the hard work the Egyptians force you to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 EXO	6	8	h9ho	figs-youdual	אֶתְ⁠כֶם֙…לָ⁠כֶ֛ם	1		Here every occurrence of **you** refers to the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
 EXO	6	8	g9ru	translate-symaction	נָשָׂ֨אתִי֙ אֶת־יָדִ֔⁠י	1	I swore	This is an action that signifies making an oath. Raising the hand may not have the same meaning in your culture, so you may need to use a different symbolic oath-taking action in your translation or simply translate the meaning. Alternate translation: “I promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 EXO	6	8	i3vj		מוֹרָשָׁ֖ה	1		This means the Israelites will own the land. Alternate translation: “as your own land”
@@ -550,16 +550,16 @@ EXO	6	9	aalj	grammar-connect-logic-result	וְ⁠לֹ֤א שָֽׁמְעוּ֙ 
 EXO	6	9	eph2		מִ⁠קֹּ֣צֶר ר֔וּחַ	1		Here, the people’s **spirit** is spoken of as something that could be measured. By calling it “short,” the author is saying they did not have very much motivation or hope. Alternate translation: “because they had no hope”
 EXO	6	10	tpw4		לֵּ⁠אמֹֽר	1		This is used to mark the beginning of a direct quotation. It can be omitted if it is unnatural.
 EXO	6	11	pi7a	figs-quotemarks	בֹּ֣א דַבֵּ֔ר אֶל־פַּרְעֹ֖ה מֶ֣לֶךְ מִצְרָ֑יִם וִֽ⁠ישַׁלַּ֥ח אֶת־בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ	1		This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-EXO	6	11	fxf2	figs-quotations	וִֽ⁠ישַׁלַּ֥ח אֶת־בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ	1		This is an indirect quote; in some languages you will have to make it a direct quote. Be careful to change the third-person pronouns to second-person pronouns if you do this. Alternate translation: “saying, ‘You must let the sons of Israel go from your land’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+EXO	6	11	fxf2	figs-quotations	וִֽ⁠ישַׁלַּ֥ח אֶת־בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ	1		This statement tells Moses what to discuss with Pharaoh. Some languages may need to covey this information as a direct quotation. Be careful to change the third-person pronouns to second-person pronouns if you do this. Alternate translation: “and say, ‘You must let the sons of Israel go from your land’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 EXO	6	12	rsag	figs-quotemarks	הֵ֤ן בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ לֹֽא־שָׁמְע֣וּ אֵלַ֔⁠י וְ⁠אֵיךְ֙ יִשְׁמָעֵ֣⁠נִי פַרְעֹ֔ה וַ⁠אֲנִ֖י עֲרַ֥ל שְׂפָתָֽיִם	1		This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	6	12	h7o0	figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י יְהוָ֖ה	1		Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. There may also be a hint of impudence in Moses’ attitude that is conveyed by the words **before the face of Yahweh**. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in the presence of Yahweh” or “boldly to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	6	12	iiui		הֵ֤ן	1		**Behold** is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation, or you can use an alternate translation like “as you know.”
-EXO	6	12	k7hl	figs-rquestion	הֵ֤ן בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ לֹֽא־שָׁמְע֣וּ אֵלַ֔⁠י וְ⁠אֵיךְ֙ יִשְׁמָעֵ֣⁠נִי פַרְעֹ֔ה	1	If the Israelites have not listened to me, why will Pharaoh listen to me, since I am not good at speaking?	Moses asked this question in hopes that God would change his mind about using Moses. This rhetorical question can be translated as a statement. Alternate translation: “Since the Israelites did not listen to me, neither will Pharaoh!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+EXO	6	12	k7hl	figs-rquestion	הֵ֤ן בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ לֹֽא־שָׁמְע֣וּ אֵלַ֔⁠י וְ⁠אֵיךְ֙ יִשְׁמָעֵ֣⁠נִי פַרְעֹ֔ה	1	If the Israelites have not listened to me, why will Pharaoh listen to me, since I am not good at speaking?	Moses asked this question in hopes that God would change his mind about using Moses. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Since the Israelites did not listen to me, neither will Pharaoh!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 EXO	6	12	lj51	grammar-connect-logic-result	הֵ֤ן בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ לֹֽא־שָׁמְע֣וּ אֵלַ֔⁠י וְ⁠אֵיךְ֙ יִשְׁמָעֵ֣⁠נִי פַרְעֹ֔ה	1		Moses is presenting a reasoned argument: since this, then probably that. Use a natural way of expressing such arguments in your language. Alternate translation: “Since the sons of Israel have not listened to me, why would you think Pharaoh would listen to me?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 EXO	6	12	k3br	figs-metaphor	וַ⁠אֲנִ֖י עֲרַ֥ל שְׂפָתָֽיִם	1		This is a metaphor that means that Moses was not a good speaker. It is somewhat crude; your translation of this phrase could convey that Moses spoke impolitely. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “And I do not speak well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	6	13	janr		וַ⁠יְצַוֵּ⁠ם֙ אֶל־בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל וְ⁠אֶל־פַּרְעֹ֖ה	1		This phrase is somewhat difficult to translate. Here, **command** could also be translated as “charge” or “commission.” Another difficulty is knowing to whom the command is directed: is it to Moses and Aaron or are they to give the command to Pharaoh and the Israelites; thus **to** could be translated as “for” or “regarding.” Alternate translations: “and he charged them regarding the sons of Israel and regarding Pharaoh” or “and he gave them a command for the sons of Israel and for Pharaoh” or “and he gave them a commission to the sons of Israel and to Pharaoh”
 EXO	6	14	hh3z	writing-background		0		Verses 14-27 are background information. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-EXO	6	14	h195	figs-metonymy	רָאשֵׁ֣י	1	the heads of their fathers’ houses	Here, **heads** refers to the original ancestors of the clan. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the ancestors of ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+EXO	6	14	h195	figs-metonymy	רָאשֵׁ֣י	1	the heads of their fathers’ houses	Here, **heads** refers to the original leaders of the clan. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the ancestors of ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	6	14	wv89	translate-names	רְאוּבֵ֜ן…יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל…חֲנ֤וֹךְ וּ⁠פַלּוּא֙ חֶצְר֣וֹן וְ⁠כַרְמִ֔י…רְאוּבֵֽן	1	Hanok, Pallu, Hezron, and Karmi	These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EXO	6	15	c1ni	translate-names	שִׁמְע֗וֹן יְמוּאֵ֨ל וְ⁠יָמִ֤ין וְ⁠אֹ֨הַד֙ וְ⁠יָכִ֣ין וְ⁠צֹ֔חַר וְ⁠שָׁא֖וּל…שִׁמְעֽוֹן	1	Jemuel, Jamin, Ohad, Jakin, Zohar, and Shaul	These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EXO	6	16	k64h	translate-names	לֵוִי֙…גֵּרְשׁ֕וֹן וּ⁠קְהָ֖ת וּ⁠מְרָרִ֑י…לֵוִ֔י	1	Gershon…Merari	These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -587,17 +587,17 @@ EXO	6	28	xssl	writing-newevent	וַ⁠יְהִ֗י בְּ⁠י֨וֹם	1		This m
 EXO	6	29	i50m	figs-quotemarks	לֵּ⁠אמֹ֖ר	1		Here, **saying** is used to mark the beginning of a direct quotation. It can be omitted if unnatural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	6	29	vogm	figs-quotemarks	אֲנִ֣י יְהוָ֑ה דַּבֵּ֗ר אֶל־פַּרְעֹה֙ מֶ֣לֶךְ מִצְרַ֔יִם אֵ֛ת כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֥ר אֲנִ֖י דֹּבֵ֥ר אֵלֶֽי⁠ךָ	1		This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	6	30	zyqs	figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֑ה	1		Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. There may also be a hint of impudence in Moses’ attitude that is conveyed by saying he spoke before **the face of Yahweh**. See how you translated this in [6:12](../06/12.md). If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in the presence of Yahweh” or “boldly to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-EXO	6	30	nf3w	figs-rquestion	הֵ֤ן אֲנִי֙ עֲרַ֣ל שְׂפָתַ֔יִם וְ⁠אֵ֕יךְ יִשְׁמַ֥ע אֵלַ֖⁠י פַּרְעֹֽה	1	I am not good…why will Pharaoh listen to me?	Moses asks this question hoping to change God’s mind about sending him. This rhetorical question can be translated as a statement. Alternate translation: “Behold, I am not a good speaker. Pharaoh will certainly not listen to me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+EXO	6	30	nf3w	figs-rquestion	הֵ֤ן אֲנִי֙ עֲרַ֣ל שְׂפָתַ֔יִם וְ⁠אֵ֕יךְ יִשְׁמַ֥ע אֵלַ֖⁠י פַּרְעֹֽה	1	I am not good…why will Pharaoh listen to me?	Moses asks this question hoping to change God’s mind about sending him. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Behold, I am not a good speaker. Pharaoh will certainly not listen to me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 EXO	6	30	qvxf	figs-quotemarks	הֵ֤ן אֲנִי֙ עֲרַ֣ל שְׂפָתַ֔יִם וְ⁠אֵ֕יךְ יִשְׁמַ֥ע אֵלַ֖⁠י פַּרְעֹֽה	1		This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	6	30	y4g2		הֵ֤ן	1		**Behold** is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation, or you can use an alternate translation like “as you know.”
 EXO	6	30	vzhq	figs-metaphor	אֲנִי֙ עֲרַ֣ל שְׂפָתַ֔יִם	1		This is a metaphor that means that Moses thought he was not a good speaker. It is somewhat crude, and your translation of this phrase could convey that Moses spoke impolitely. See how you translated this in [6:12](../06/12.md). Alternate translation: “I always fail to speak well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EXO	7	intro	r9we			0		# Exodus 07 General Notes<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Miracles<br><br>When Yahweh had Moses perform miracles, Pharaoh’s men were able to copy these miracles. It is unknown how they were able to do this, but since it was not from Yahweh, they were probably done under some evil power. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/miracle]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])<br><br>### Pharaoh’s hard heart<br><br>Pharaoh’s heart is often described as hard, strong, or heavy in this chapter. This means that his heart was not open or willing to understand Yahweh’s instructions.<br><br>### “Let my people go”<br><br>This is a very important statement. Moses is not asking Pharaoh to “let go” of the Hebrew people. Instead, he is demanding that Pharaoh free the Hebrew people.<br><br>## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter Include:<br><br>- Moses as God to Pharaoh<br>- A number of difficult terms: prophet, signs, wonders, miracles, sorcerers, magicians, magic, judgments, canals, reservoirs<br>- The use of “heart” to refer to the seat of will and emotion<br>- Up to third-level quotations<br><br>
+EXO	7	intro	r9we			0		# Exodus 07 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n\n- v. 1-9: The end of Yahweh’s re-sending of Moses and Aaron to Pharaoh\n- v. 10-13: Pharaoh’s first refusal, the sign of the snakes\n- v. 14-25: First plague: the Nile turns to blood\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Miracles\n\nWhen Yahweh had Moses perform miracles, Pharaoh’s men were able to copy these miracles. It is unknown how they were able to do this, but since it was not from Yahweh, they were probably done under some evil power. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/miracle]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])\n\n### Pharaoh’s hard heart\n\nPharaoh’s heart is often described as hard, strong, or heavy in this chapter. This means that he was not willing to obey Yahweh’s instructions.\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter Include:\n\n- Moses as God to Pharaoh\n- A number of difficult terms: prophet, signs, wonders, miracles, sorcerers, magicians, magic, judgments, canals, reservoirs\n- The use of “heart” to refer to the seat of will and emotion\n- Up to third-level quotations\n\n
 EXO	7	1	r18p	figs-quotemarks	מֹשֶׁ֔ה	1		After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues to the end of [verse 5](../07/05.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	7	1	gy1t		רְאֵ֛ה	1		This is used to draw attention to surprising information that follows. Alternative translation: “Listen carefully”
 EXO	7	1	dn1s	figs-metaphor	נְתַתִּ֥י⁠ךָ אֱלֹהִ֖ים לְ⁠פַרְעֹ֑ה	1	I have made you like a god	This means Moses would represent the same authority to Pharaoh as God did to Moses. See how you translated the very similar phrase in [Exodus 4:16](../04/16.md). Alternate translation: “I will cause Pharaoh to consider you as a god” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	7	1	z163	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֥ן אָחִ֖י⁠ךָ יִהְיֶ֥ה נְבִיאֶֽ⁠ךָ	1		This phrase compares Aaron to a prophet, because Aaron will actually be the one who proclaims to Pharaoh what Moses tells him. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 4:16](../04/16.md). Alternate translation: “and Aaron your brother will act like your prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	7	2	l44v	translate-kinship	אָחִ֨י⁠ךָ֙	1		Aaron is older than Moses. If your language uses a different term for the sibling relationship based on gender and age order, choose the appropriate one. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
-EXO	7	2	hdwo	figs-quotations	וְ⁠שִׁלַּ֥ח אֶת־בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ	1		Some languages may need to make this a direct quote. If so, be sure to mark it as a second-level quotation, subordinate to Yahweh’s main speech. Alternative translation: “saying, ‘You must let the sons of Israel go from your land’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+EXO	7	2	hdwo	figs-quotations	וְ⁠שִׁלַּ֥ח אֶת־בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ	1		Some languages may need to make this a direct quote. If so, be sure to mark it as a second-level quotation, subordinate to Yahweh’s main speech. See what you did in [6:25](../06/25.md). Alternative translation: “saying, ‘You must let the sons of Israel go from your land’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 EXO	7	2	p9p7		מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ	1		Alternate translation: “from Egypt”
 EXO	7	3	adsq	figs-metaphor	אַקְשֶׁ֖ה אֶת־לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֑ה	1		This means God will make him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his **heart** were **hard**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [Exodus 4:21](../04/21.md), but note the slightly different metaphor there: the heart being strong vs. **hard** here. Alternate translation: “will cause Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	7	3	vtt1	figs-doublet	אֶת־אֹתֹתַ֛⁠י וְ⁠אֶת־מוֹפְתַ֖⁠י	1	many signs…many wonders	The words **signs** and **wonders** mean basically the same thing. God uses them to emphasize the greatness of what he will do in Egypt. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine them.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -618,11 +618,9 @@ EXO	7	8	p2kf		לֵ⁠אמֹֽר	1		Here, **saying** marks the beginning of a dir
 EXO	7	9	b0jl	figs-quotemarks	כִּי֩ יְדַבֵּ֨ר אֲלֵ⁠כֶ֤ם פַּרְעֹה֙ לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר תְּנ֥וּ לָ⁠כֶ֖ם מוֹפֵ֑ת וְ⁠אָמַרְתָּ֣ אֶֽל־אַהֲרֹ֗ן קַ֧ח אֶֽת־מַטְּ⁠ךָ֛ וְ⁠הַשְׁלֵ֥ךְ לִ⁠פְנֵֽי־פַרְעֹ֖ה יְהִ֥י לְ⁠תַנִּֽין	1		This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	7	9	jt9z	figs-quotations	כִּי֩ יְדַבֵּ֨ר אֲלֵ⁠כֶ֤ם פַּרְעֹה֙ לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר תְּנ֥וּ לָ⁠כֶ֖ם מוֹפֵ֑ת וְ⁠אָמַרְתָּ֣ אֶֽל־אַהֲרֹ֗ן קַ֧ח אֶֽת־מַטְּ⁠ךָ֛ וְ⁠הַשְׁלֵ֥ךְ לִ⁠פְנֵֽי־פַרְעֹ֖ה יְהִ֥י לְ⁠תַנִּֽין	1	When Pharaoh says to you, ‘Do a miracle,’ then you will say to Aaron, ‘Take your staff and throw it down before Pharaoh, so that it may become a snake.’	The two quotations in this verse could be stated as indirect quotes. Alternate translation: “When Pharaoh tells you to do a miracle, then you will tell Aaron to take his staff and throw it down before Pharaoh so that it may become a snake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 EXO	7	9	ye9j	figs-quotemarks	תְּנ֥וּ לָ⁠כֶ֖ם מוֹפֵ֑ת	1		This is a second-level direct quotation. If you did not decide to make it an indirect quotation, it may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-EXO	7	9	r0tp	figs-quotemarks	קַ֧ח אֶֽת־מַטְּ⁠ךָ֛ וְ⁠הַשְׁלֵ֥ךְ לִ⁠פְנֵֽי־פַרְעֹ֖ה יְהִ֥י לְ⁠תַנִּֽין	1		This is a second-level direct quotation. The second level may end after **Pharaoh.** If you did not decide to make it an indirect quotation, it may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+EXO	7	9	r0tp	figs-quotemarks	קַ֧ח אֶֽת־מַטְּ⁠ךָ֛ וְ⁠הַשְׁלֵ֥ךְ לִ⁠פְנֵֽי־פַרְעֹ֖ה יְהִ֥י לְ⁠תַנִּֽין	1		This is a second-level direct quotation. The second level may either end after **Pharaoh** or at the end of the verse. If you did not decide to make it an indirect quotation, it may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	7	9	p3xh		לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר	1		Here, **saying** marks the beginning of a direct quote and is often omitted in translation when such a construction is unnatural in the target language. See UST.
 EXO	7	9	ms5o	figs-youdual	אֲלֵ⁠כֶ֤ם…לָ⁠כֶ֖ם	1		These pronouns are plural, referring to Moses and Aaron. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual form (if you have one) or plural form (if not) here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
-EXO	7	9	kj8g	figs-quotesinquotes	תְּנ֥וּ לָ⁠כֶ֖ם מוֹפֵ֑ת	1		This is a second-level quotation. It should be marked in some manner that distinguishes it from the outer level. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
-EXO	7	9	s5a9	figs-quotesinquotes	קַ֧ח אֶֽת־מַטְּ⁠ךָ֛ וְ⁠הַשְׁלֵ֥ךְ לִ⁠פְנֵֽי־פַרְעֹ֖ה יְהִ֥י לְ⁠תַנִּֽין	1		This is a second-level quotation. It should be marked in some manner that distinguishes it from the outer level. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 EXO	7	9	ogk9	figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵֽי־פַרְעֹ֖ה	1		Although **before the face of** still has the standard figurative meaning of “in the presence of,” it is a much more literal use here. Moses and Aaron are to actually do the miracles in front of Pharaoh so that Pharaoh can see them. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternative translation: “so Pharaoh can see it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	7	10	ehm9	figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י פַרְעֹ֛ה וְ⁠לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י עֲבָדָ֖י⁠ו	1		This time, while **before the face of** still has the standard figurative meaning of “in the presence of,” it is a much more literal use here. Aaron actually does this right in front of Pharaoh and his servants so they could watch what happens. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternative translation: “where Pharaoh and his servants could see it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	7	10	kv93		עֲבָדָ֖י⁠ו	1		Here, **his servants** does not refer common servants but probably refers to important advisors that would be in the king’s court.
@@ -647,7 +645,7 @@ EXO	7	17	mywj	figs-quotesinquotes	בְּ⁠זֹ֣את	1		This begins a third-lev
 EXO	7	17	jjm3		הִנֵּ֨ה	1		**Behold** is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. Alternate translation: “Look at this”
 EXO	7	18	bsjn	grammar-connect-logic-result	וּ⁠בָאַ֣שׁ הַ⁠יְאֹ֑ר	1		His warning,**the river will stink**, will happen because the fish die. Alternate translation: “and because of that the river will stink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 EXO	7	18	nx0q	grammar-connect-logic-result	וְ⁠נִלְא֣וּ מִצְרַ֔יִם לִ⁠שְׁתּ֥וֹת מַ֖יִם מִן־הַ⁠יְאֹֽר	1		In some languages you will need to put the reason before the result. Alternative translation: “In order to find water to drink from the river, the Egyptians will exhaust themselves.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-EXO	7	18	rgl0	figs-rpronouns	וְ⁠נִלְא֣וּ מִצְרַ֔יִם	1		Here, **themselves** refers back to the subject (**the Egyptians**) to indicated that the Egyptians are the object of the verb as well. Different languages have different methods of marking this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
+EXO	7	18	rgl0	figs-rpronouns	וְ⁠נִלְא֣וּ מִצְרַ֔יִם	1		Here, **themselves** refers back to the subject (**the Egyptians**) to indicated that the Egyptians are the object of the verb as well. Use a natural form in your language to show that the Egyptians are both subject and object. Alternate translation: “And the Egyptians will exhaust the Egyptians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 EXO	7	18	grwh	figs-quotemarks	מִן־הַ⁠יְאֹֽר	1		After this phrase, the direct quote of Yahweh’s commands ends. Depending on your decisions about the embedded quotation levels, you may have up to three levels of quotations that need to be closed here. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with closing quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation and quotations within quotations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	7	19	jima	figs-quotemarks	אֱמֹ֣ר אֶֽל־אַהֲרֹ֡ן קַ֣ח מַטְּ⁠ךָ֣ וּ⁠נְטֵֽה־יָדְ⁠ךָ֩ עַל־מֵימֵ֨י מִצְרַ֜יִם עַֽל־נַהֲרֹתָ֣⁠ם׀ עַל־יְאֹרֵי⁠הֶ֣ם וְ⁠עַל־אַגְמֵי⁠הֶ֗ם וְ⁠עַ֛ל כָּל־מִקְוֵ֥ה מֵימֵי⁠הֶ֖ם וְ⁠יִֽהְיוּ־דָ֑ם וְ⁠הָ֤יָה דָם֙ בְּ⁠כָל־אֶ֣רֶץ מִצְרַ֔יִם וּ⁠בָ⁠עֵצִ֖ים וּ⁠בָ⁠אֲבָנִֽים	1		This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	7	19	gwc2	figs-quotemarks	קַ֣ח מַטְּ⁠ךָ֣ וּ⁠נְטֵֽה־יָדְ⁠ךָ֩ עַל־מֵימֵ֨י מִצְרַ֜יִם עַֽל־נַהֲרֹתָ֣⁠ם ׀ עַל־יְאֹרֵי⁠הֶ֣ם וְ⁠עַל־אַגְמֵי⁠הֶ֗ם וְ⁠עַ֛ל כָּל־מִקְוֵ֥ה מֵימֵי⁠הֶ֖ם וְ⁠יִֽהְיוּ־דָ֑ם	1		This is a second-level direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
@@ -664,7 +662,7 @@ EXO	7	24	m6zn	figs-hyperbole	כָל־מִצְרַ֛יִם	1	All the Egyptians	Th
 EXO	7	25	bn5h	writing-newevent	וַ⁠יִּמָּלֵ֖א	1		A new scene begins here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 EXO	7	25	gjyb	figs-idiom	וַ⁠יִּמָּלֵ֖א שִׁבְעַ֣ת יָמִ֑ים	1		This means seven days later. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EXO	7	25	dg56	translate-numbers	שִׁבְעַ֣ת	1		Alternate translation: “7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-EXO	8	intro	ww1y			0		# Exodus 08 General Notes<br><br>## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>- the exact insects in plagues 3-4 are not certain; translation teams will need to decide what insects they can use for each<br>- Pharaoh makes his own heart heavy, that is, he determines to be proud and resist Yahweh twice in this chapter<br>- the Israelites’ sacrifices are spoken of as an abomination to the Egyptians, but it is not specified how or why that is<br><br><br>### Lifting up the hand and staff:<br><br>In the next few chapters, God will instruct Moses or Aaron or both to raise his hand or staff or both hand and staff. The narrative will then record who will raise his hand or staff or both. The instruction and the action do not always match exactly. God may say raise your hand, and the narrative may say that Moses raised his staff. These are not conflicting reports. Translators should understand that the hand and the staff are always understood together. They are one unit, and they can both be mentioned, or they can be mentioned separately. In each case, Moses or Aaron raises his hand with the staff in it. This fact is merely expressed differently.<br><br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Pharaoh’s hard heart<br><br>Pharaoh’s heart is often described as hard in this chapter. This means that his heart was not open or willing to understand Yahweh’s instructions. When his heart was hardened, it became less and less receptive to Yahweh.<br><br>### Let my people go<br><br>This is a very important statement. Moses is not asking Pharaoh to “let go” of the Hebrew people. Instead, he is demanding that Pharaoh free the Hebrew people.
+EXO	8	intro	ww1y			0		# Exodus 08 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n\n- v. 1-15: Second plague: frogs\n- v. 16-19: Third plague (first that magicians cannot imitate): gnats\n- v. 20-32: Fourth plague: flies\n\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n- the exact insects in plagues 3-4 are not certain; translation teams will need to decide what insects they can use for each\n- Pharaoh makes his own heart heavy, that is, he determines to be proud and resist Yahweh twice in this chapter\n- the Israelites’ sacrifices are spoken of as an abomination to the Egyptians, but it is not specified how or why that is\n\n\n### Lifting up the hand and staff:\n\nIn the next few chapters, God will instruct Moses or Aaron or both to raise his hand or staff or both hand and staff. The narrative will then record who will raise his hand or staff or both. The instruction and the action do not always match exactly. God may say raise your hand, and the narrative may say that Moses raised his staff. These are not conflicting reports. Translators should understand that the hand and the staff are always understood together. They are one unit, and they can both be mentioned, or they can be mentioned separately. In each case, Moses or Aaron raises his hand with the staff in it. This fact is merely expressed differently.\n
 EXO	8	1	tf7b	figs-quotations	בֹּ֖א	1		This begins a direct quote that continues until the end of [verse 4](../08/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 EXO	8	1	v6ll		כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר יְהוָ֔ה	1		This quotation formula is used to introduce commands from Yahweh. See [4:intro](../04/intro.md) for more information.
 EXO	8	1	lndc	figs-quotesinquotes	כֹּ֚ה	1		Here, **Thus** begins a second-level quote that continues until the end of [verse 4](../08/04.md). It should be marked in some manner that distinguishes it from the outer level. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
@@ -759,7 +757,7 @@ EXO	8	25	gj2w	figs-youdual	לֵֽ⁠אלֹהֵי⁠כֶ֖ם	1		Here, **your** is
 EXO	8	26	tvnj	figs-quotemarks	וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר מֹשֶׁ֗ה	1		After this phrase a direct quote begins that continues until the end of [8:27](../08/27.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	8	26	e9wk		תּוֹעֲבַ֣ת מִצְרַ֔יִם…תּוֹעֲבַ֥ת מִצְרַ֛יִם	1		We do not know what about their sacrificing was an **abomination** to the Egyptians. The same term is used in Genesis 43:32 and 46:34 to describe the Egyptians’ feelings about eating with Hebrews and about the Hebrew profession of shepherding, respectively. Translators should attempt to convey the strong negative feelings that would be provoked in the Egyptians without speculating as to the cause.
 EXO	8	26	idkt	figs-exclusive	נִזְבַּ֖ח…אֱלֹהֵ֑י⁠נוּ…נִזְבַּ֞ח…יִסְקְלֻֽ⁠נוּ	1		Here, **we**, **our,** and **us** should all be translated as exclusive (if your language makes that distinction). Pharaoh and the Egyptians are not included. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-EXO	8	26	i7dy	figs-rquestion	וְ⁠לֹ֥א יִסְקְלֻֽ⁠נוּ	1	will they not stone us?	Moses asks this question to show Pharaoh that the Egyptians would not allow the Israelites to worship Yahweh by making a sacrifice repugnant to them. Alternate translation: “they will certainly stone us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+EXO	8	26	i7dy	figs-rquestion	וְ⁠לֹ֥א יִסְקְלֻֽ⁠נוּ	1	will they not stone us?	Moses asks this question to show Pharaoh that the Egyptians would not allow the Israelites to worship Yahweh by making a sacrifice repugnant to them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “they will certainly stone us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 EXO	8	26	gy7d	figs-metonymy	לְ⁠עֵינֵי⁠הֶ֖ם	1	right before their eyes	The express **before their eyes** is a figurative way of saying “where they can see.” If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in their sight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	8	27	ju3u	figs-exclusive	נֵלֵ֖ךְ…וְ⁠זָבַ֨חְנוּ֙…אֱלֹהֵ֔י⁠נוּ…אֵלֵֽי⁠נוּ	1		Here, **we**, **our,** and **us** should all be translated as exclusive (if your language makes that distinction). Pharaoh and his people are not included. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 EXO	8	27	clc3	figs-quotemarks	אֵלֵֽי⁠נוּ	1		After the phrase **to us**, the direct quote of Moses’ argument to Pharaoh ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
@@ -779,7 +777,7 @@ EXO	8	31	rj50	translate-unknown	הֶ⁠עָרֹ֔ב	1		These are probably the co
 EXO	8	31	iyhn	figs-merism	מִ⁠פַּרְעֹ֖ה מֵ⁠עֲבָדָ֣י⁠ו וּ⁠מֵ⁠עַמּ֑⁠וֹ	1		This list means “from everyone and everywhere” (in Egypt). This makes clear that there was a complete end of the plague. You should translate the list in such a way that it does not convey limitation to these specifics but is understood to imply universality. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
 EXO	8	31	mb4r	figs-hyperbole	לֹ֥א נִשְׁאַ֖ר אֶחָֽד	1		This extreme statement emphasizes how thoroughly Yahweh removed the insects from the land. Alternate translation: “There was not a single one of these insects left in the whole land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 EXO	8	32	sb5l	figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יַּכְבֵּ֤ד פַּרְעֹה֙ אֶת־לִבּ֔⁠וֹ	1	Pharaoh hardened his heart	Pharaoh’s stubborn attitude is spoken of as if he made his own **heart heavy**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [8:15](../08/15.md). Alternate translation: “Pharaoh determined to be defiant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EXO	9	intro	hqw8			0		# Exodus 09 General Notes<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Pharaoh’s hard heart<br><br>Pharaoh’s heart is often described as hard in this chapter. This means that his heart was not open or willing to understand Yahweh’s instructions. When his heart was hardened, it became less and less receptive to Yahweh.<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Let my people go<br><br>This is a very important statement. Moses is not asking Pharaoh to “let go” of the Hebrew people. Instead, he is demanding that Pharaoh free the Hebrew people.
+EXO	9	intro	hqw8			0		# Exodus 09 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n- v. 1-7: Fifth plague (first that does not affect Israelites): disease kills livestock\n- v. 8-12: Sixth plague: boils\n- v. 13-35: Seventh plague: hail\n    -v. 27-35: Pharaoh seems to repent, but it does not last\n\n## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n- animals are affected in both the fifth and seventh plagues, in the fifth, the word is specifically related to domestic animals (livestock) while the word used in the seventh is more general
 EXO	9	1	se3f	writing-newevent	וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר יְהוָה֙	1	General Information:	A new scene begins here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. This is the beginning of the fifth plague sequence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 EXO	9	1	p1oj	figs-quotemarks	אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֔ה	1		After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues to the end of [9:4](../09/04.md) and contains two additional levels of quotes. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	9	1	maqa	figs-quotemarks	אֵלָ֗י⁠ו	1		After this phrase, a second-level direct quote begins which continues to the end of [9:4](../09/04.md) and contains one more level of quotes. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
@@ -824,18 +822,16 @@ EXO	9	8	gu1v		הַ⁠שָּׁמַ֖יְמָ⁠ה	1		Alternate translation: “to
 EXO	9	8	p795	figs-metonymy	לְ⁠עֵינֵ֥י פַרְעֹֽה	1		The phrase **before the eyes of Pharaoh** means in his sight. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in the sight of Pharaoh” or “so Pharaoh sees it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	9	9	d2v3	translate-unknown	לִ⁠שְׁחִ֥ין פֹּרֵ֛חַ אֲבַעְבֻּעֹ֖ת	1	fine	To have **boils** means to have a condition where the skin is red, hot, and painful,  the skin breaks open, and puss and blood come out. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	9	9	jlh0	figs-gendernotations	הָ⁠אָדָ֜ם	1		Here, **man** includes women and children. Alternate translation: “people” or “mankind” or “humans” See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-EXO	9	9	eyc7		הַ⁠בְּהֵמָ֗ה	1	to break out on	Alternate translation: “wild and domestic animals” or “wild animals and livestock”
 EXO	9	10	wdcn	grammar-collectivenouns	פִּ֣יחַ	1		Here, **ash** is singular. For some languages you may need to make it plural as in the UST. See how you translated this in the [previous verse](../09/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 EXO	9	10	dp3l		פִּ֣יחַ הַ⁠כִּבְשָׁ֗ן	1		Alternate translation: “ash from a furnace” or “ash produced by a furnace” See how you translated this in the [previous verse](../09/09.md).
 EXO	9	10	ufpn	figs-metonymy	וַ⁠יַּֽעַמְדוּ֙ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י פַרְעֹ֔ה	1		Here, **before the face of Pharaoh** means in Pharaoh’s presence. Alternate translation: “and stood in Pharaoh’s presence” or "and stood in the presence of Pharaoh" See how you translated a similar statement in the [previous verse](../09/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	9	10	xmbw		הַ⁠שָּׁמָ֑יְמָ⁠ה	1		Alternate translation: “toward the sky” See how you translated this in the [previous verse](../09/09.md).
-EXO	9	10	jhzb	translate-unknown	שְׁחִין֙ אֲבַעְבֻּעֹ֔ת פֹּרֵ֕חַ	1		This is a condition where the skin is red and hot, the skin breaks, and blood and puss come out. See how you translated this in the [previous verse](../09/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+EXO	9	10	jhzb	translate-unknown	שְׁחִין֙ אֲבַעְבֻּעֹ֔ת פֹּרֵ֕חַ	1		To have **boils** means to have a condition where the skin is red, hot, and painful,  the skin breaks open, and puss and blood come out. See how you translated this in the [previous verse](../09/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	9	10	rdo3	figs-gendernotations	בָּ⁠אָדָ֖ם	1		Here, **man** includes women and children. See how you translated this in the [previous verse](../09/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-EXO	9	10	iftm		וּ⁠בַ⁠בְּהֵמָֽה	1		Alternate translation: “and on wild and domestic animals” or “and on wild animals and livestock” See how you translated this in the [previous verse](../09/09.md).
 EXO	9	11	jrc3		הַֽ⁠חַרְטֻמִּ֗ים…בַּֽ⁠חֲרְטֻמִּ֖ם	1		See how you translated **magicians** in [7:11](../07/11.md).
 EXO	9	11	dxsx	figs-metonymy	לַ⁠עֲמֹ֛ד לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י מֹשֶׁ֖ה	1		Here, **before the face of** means in Moses’ presence. Alternate translation: “to stand in Moses’ presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	9	11	k9uu	figs-metonymy	מִ⁠פְּנֵ֣י הַ⁠שְּׁחִ֑ין	1		Here, **the face of** means the presence of or perhaps pain from the boils. Alternate translation: “because of the boils” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-EXO	9	11	lpmq	translate-unknown	הַ⁠שְּׁחִ֑ין…הַ⁠שְּׁחִ֔ין	1		This is a condition where the skin is red and hot, the skin breaks, and blood and puss comes out. See how you translated this in [9:9](../09/09.md). However, this time only **boils** is used, without the description (“bursting blisters”) that is in the previous two verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+EXO	9	11	lpmq	translate-unknown	הַ⁠שְּׁחִ֑ין…הַ⁠שְּׁחִ֔ין	1		To have **boils** means to have a condition where the skin is red, hot, and painful,  the skin breaks open, and puss and blood come out. See how you translated this in [9:9](../09/09.md). However, this time only **boils** is used, without the description (“bursting blisters”) that is in the previous two verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	9	12	p5m5	figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יְחַזֵּ֤ק יְהוָה֙ אֶת־לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֔ה	1	Yahweh hardened Pharaoh’s heart	This phrase means that it was God who made him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his **heart** were **strong**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [4:21](../04/21.md). Alternate translation: “But Yahweh caused Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	9	13	ifs8	writing-newevent	וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר יְהוָה֙ אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֔ה	1		A new scene begins here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. This is the beginning of the seventh plague sequence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 EXO	9	13	zsvl	figs-quotemarks	וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר יְהוָה֙ אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֔ה	1		After this phrase a direct quote begins that continues until the end of [9:19](../09/19.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
@@ -843,7 +839,7 @@ EXO	9	13	zmrt	figs-metonymy	וְ⁠הִתְיַצֵּ֖ב לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י פ
 EXO	9	13	dxww	figs-quotations	וְ⁠אָמַרְתָּ֣ אֵלָ֗י⁠ו כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙ אֱלֹהֵ֣י הָֽ⁠עִבְרִ֔ים	1		After **and say to him**, a second-level quote begins which continues until the end of [9:19](../09/19.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation. However, it may be useful to translate this short quote frame as an indirect quotation, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 EXO	9	13	hsl6		כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙	1		This quotation formula is used to introduce commands from Yahweh. See [4:intro](../04/intro.md) for more information.
 EXO	9	13	zi15	figs-quotemarks	שַׁלַּ֥ח	1		**Let** is the first word of a third-level direct quote which continues until the end of [9:19](../09/19.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening third-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a third-level quotation. If you chose to make the second-level quote an indirect quote, then this one would only be a second-level quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-EXO	9	14	z68b	grammar-connect-logic-result	כִּ֣י	1		Here, **For** means something like “I am warning you that unless you do this.” Alternate translation: “Otherwise,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+EXO	9	14	z68b	grammar-connect-logic-result	כִּ֣י	1		Here it is implied that Pharaoh will again not let God’s people go. **For** is expressing the result, that is, God‘s response to Pharaoh's disobedience to the command immediately preceding. You may need to insert this as in the UST or choose a contrastive conjunction. Alternate translation: “Otherwise,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 EXO	9	14	n6wq	figs-synecdoche	אֲנִ֨י שֹׁלֵ֜חַ אֶת־כָּל־מַגֵּפֹתַ⁠י֙ אֶֽל־לִבְּ⁠ךָ֔	1	on you yourself	Here, **to your heart** is a synecdoche that means that even Pharaoh will be hurt by the plagues. Alternate translation: “I am about to send all my plagues against you personally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 EXO	9	15	f056	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	כִּ֤י עַתָּה֙ שָׁלַ֣חְתִּי אֶת־יָדִ֔⁠י וָ⁠אַ֥ךְ אוֹתְ⁠ךָ֛ וְ⁠אֶֽת־עַמְּ⁠ךָ֖ בַּ⁠דָּ֑בֶר וַ⁠תִּכָּחֵ֖ד מִן־הָ⁠אָֽרֶץ	1		This verse presents two things that God could have done but did not do to the Egyptians. This is to set up the reason he gives in the [next verse](../09/16.md). Be sure that it is clear in your translation that these are hypothetical past events. See the note regarding Yahweh’s stated goals in the next verse. Some languages may need to reverse the order of these verses to put Yahweh’s goals before his non-action. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
 EXO	9	15	a3l8	figs-metonymy	שָׁלַ֣חְתִּי אֶת־יָדִ֔⁠י וָ⁠אַ֥ךְ אוֹתְ⁠ךָ֛	1	reached out with my hand and attacked you	Here, **my hand** refers to God’s power. Alternate translation: “I could have used my power to attack you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -851,13 +847,13 @@ EXO	9	15	hgfx	figs-metaphor	וָ⁠אַ֥ךְ אוֹתְ⁠ךָ֛ וְ⁠אֶֽ
 EXO	9	16	kwks	grammar-connect-logic-goal	וְ⁠אוּלָ֗ם בַּ⁠עֲב֥וּר זֹאת֙ הֶעֱמַדְתִּ֔י⁠ךָ בַּ⁠עֲב֖וּר הַרְאֹתְ⁠ךָ֣ אֶת־כֹּחִ֑⁠י וּ⁠לְמַ֛עַן סַפֵּ֥ר שְׁמִ֖⁠י בְּ⁠כָל־הָ⁠אָֽרֶץ׃	1		The statements from **to show** to the end of the verse are Yahweh’s stated goals, and thus, his reasons for not yet destroying Egypt and Pharaoh. You will need to translate, **However, for this reason I appointed you: in order** in a way that connects with the [previous verse](../09/15.md) in an action-goal manner. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 EXO	9	16	nec7	figs-metonymy	וּ⁠לְמַ֛עַן סַפֵּ֥ר שְׁמִ֖⁠י בְּ⁠כָל־הָ⁠אָֽרֶץ	1	so that my name may be proclaimed throughout all the earth	Here, **my name** represents Yahweh’s reputation. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “and so that people everywhere will know who I am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	9	17	h3ed	figs-metaphor	עוֹדְ⁠ךָ֖ מִסְתּוֹלֵ֣ל בְּ⁠עַמִּ֑⁠י	1	lifting yourself up against my people	Pharaoh’s opposition to letting the Israelites go to worship Yahweh is spoken of as if he were raising himself up as a barrier to them. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “You are still blocking my people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EXO	9	17	sdav	figs-rpronouns	מִסְתּוֹלֵ֣ל	1		Here, Pharaoh fills two different roles in the sentence. Different languages have different methods of marking this. Translate this in a way that conveys that Pharaoh is making Pharaoh (himself) proud (metaphorically expressed as Pharaoh making Pharaoh (himself) the obstacle in the Israelites’ way to freedom, as discussed in the previous note.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
+EXO	9	17	sdav	figs-rpronouns	מִסְתּוֹלֵ֣ל	1		Here, Pharaoh fills two different roles in the sentence. Translate this in a way that conveys that (1) Pharaoh is making Pharaoh (himself) proud and (2) this is metaphorically expressed as Pharaoh making Pharaoh (himself) the obstacle in the Israelites’ way to freedom (as discussed in the previous note.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 EXO	9	17	r1wv		מִסְתּוֹלֵ֣ל	1		Here, **you** is Pharaoh.
 EXO	9	17	zfhb		בְּ⁠עַמִּ֑⁠י	1		Here, **my people** are the Israelites.
 EXO	9	18	fnd2		הִנְ⁠נִ֤י	1	Listen!	Alternate translation: “Pay attention to the important thing I am about to tell you”
 EXO	9	18	pmy0		כָּ⁠עֵ֣ת…אֲשֶׁ֨ר לֹא־הָיָ֤ה כָמֹ֨⁠הוּ֙	1		Alternate translation: “at this time. There has never been anything like this”
 EXO	9	19	fduj	figs-metonymy	שְׁלַ֤ח הָעֵז֙ אֶֽת־מִקְנְ⁠ךָ֔ וְ⁠אֵ֛ת כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֥ר לְ⁠ךָ֖ בַּ⁠שָּׂדֶ֑ה	1		The form of address here is singular; Moses is speaking directly to Pharaoh. However, the next two verses make it clear that Pharaoh’s servants heard and understood this warning to be for them as well. In this sense Pharaoh represents the Egyptians. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-EXO	9	19	eo52		וְ⁠יָרַ֧ד עֲלֵ⁠הֶ֛ם הַ⁠בָּרָ֖ד	1		Alternate translation: “the hail will come down on”
+EXO	9	19	eo52		וְ⁠יָרַ֧ד עֲלֵ⁠הֶ֛ם הַ⁠בָּרָ֖ד	1		Alternate translation: “and the balls of ice will drop on”
 EXO	9	19	x4ja	figs-gendernotations	כָּל־הָ⁠אָדָ֨ם	1		Here, **man** means humans and includes men, women, and children. Alternate translation: “everyone” or “anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 EXO	9	19	itlv		וְ⁠הַ⁠בְּהֵמָ֜ה	1		Here, **and beast** includes domestic and wild animals.
 EXO	9	19	f80e	figs-explicit	וָ⁠מֵֽתוּ	1		The people and animals **will die** because they will be fatally injured by the hail. You may need to make this explicit. Alternate translation: “and the hail will kill them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -892,8 +888,8 @@ EXO	9	34	ke5k	figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יַּכְבֵּ֥ד לִבּ֖⁠וֹ	1	hard
 EXO	9	34	nz0e		וַ⁠יֹּ֣סֶף לַ⁠חֲטֹ֑א	1		This statement is from the author’s perspective. Therefore, unlike in [9:27](../09/27.md), **sin** should be translated with the word your language uses for “sin.”
 EXO	9	34	ooed		וַ⁠יַּכְבֵּ֥ד לִבּ֖⁠וֹ ה֥וּא וַ⁠עֲבָדָֽי⁠ו	1		Alternate translation: “and he caused his heart to be heavy. His servants did also” or “and he caused his heart to be heavy. His servants did the same”
 EXO	9	35	yxt8	figs-metaphor	וַֽ⁠יֶּחֱזַק֙ לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֔ה	1	The heart of Pharaoh was hardened	Pharaoh’s stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his **heart** were **strong**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [Exodus 7:13](../07/13.md). This is a neutral statement (it does not say that anyone caused him to be stubborn as many others in this part of the narrative do). Alternate translation: “Pharaoh was still defiant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EXO	9	35	x0kn	figs-metaphor	כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֛ר דִּבֶּ֥ר יְהוָ֖ה בְּ⁠יַד־מֹשֶֽׁה	1		This is similar to [9:12](../09/12.md). In this case, what Yahweh said is figuratively spoken of as if it were something that could be held in someone’s hand. This means that Moses delivered a message from Yahweh that Pharaoh would be stubborn. It is not clear if this message was given to the Israelites or if this refers to Moses’ statement to Pharaoh in [9:30](../09/30.md). If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “just as Yahweh had told Moses to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 
-EXO	10	intro	s5g1			0		# Exodus 10 General Notes\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Pharaoh’s hard heart\n\nPharaoh’s heart is often described as hard in this chapter. This means that his heart was not open or willing to understand Yahweh’s instructions. When his heart was hardened, it became less and less receptive to Yahweh.\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Let my people go\n\nThis is a very important statement. Moses does not ask Pharaoh to “let go” of the Hebrew people. Instead, he demands that Pharaoh free the Hebrew people.
+EXO	9	35	x0kn	figs-metaphor	כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֛ר דִּבֶּ֥ר יְהוָ֖ה בְּ⁠יַד־מֹשֶֽׁה	1		This is similar to [9:12](../09/12.md). In this case, what Yahweh said is figuratively spoken of as if it were something that could be held in someone’s hand. This means that Moses delivered a message from Yahweh that Pharaoh would be stubborn. It is not clear if this message was given to the Israelites or if this refers to Moses’ statement to Pharaoh in [9:30](../09/30.md). If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “just as Yahweh had told Moses to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EXO	10	intro	s5g1			0		# Exodus 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThe text does not specify, but some time seems to have passed between chapters nine and ten (see 9:31-32 and 10:5).\n- v. 1-20: Eighth plague: locusts\n    - v. 16-20: Pharaoh seems to repent, but it does not last\n- v. 21-29: Ninth plague: darkness
 EXO	10	1	w4pw	figs-metaphor	כִּֽי־אֲנִ֞י הִכְבַּ֤דְתִּי אֶת־לִבּ⁠וֹ֙ וְ⁠אֶת־לֵ֣ב עֲבָדָ֔י⁠ו	1	for I have hardened his heart and the hearts of his servants	This means God made Pharaoh and his servants stubborn. Their stubborn attitude is spoken of as if their **hearts** were **heavy.** If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [4:21](../04/21.md), but note that the metaphor is slightly different here. Alternate translation: “for I have caused Pharaoh and his servants to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	10	2	zg4c		הִתְעַלַּ֨לְתִּי֙ בְּ⁠מִצְרַ֔יִם	1	various signs	Alternate translation: “I mocked Egypt”
 EXO	10	3	pm8p	figs-quotemarks	וַ⁠יֹּאמְר֣וּ אֵלָ֗י⁠ו	1		After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues until near the end of [10:6](../10/06.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
@@ -904,12 +900,12 @@ EXO	10	4	ge67		הִנְ⁠נִ֨י	1	listen	Here, **behold me** adds emphasis to
 EXO	10	4	uwtp	grammar-collectivenouns	אַרְבֶּ֖ה	1		Here, **locust** is a singular noun referring to the group as one. Alternate translation: “locusts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 EXO	10	5	zu5r	figs-parallelism	וְ⁠כִסָּה֙ אֶת־עֵ֣ין הָ⁠אָ֔רֶץ וְ⁠לֹ֥א יוּכַ֖ל לִ⁠רְאֹ֣ת אֶת־הָ⁠אָ֑רֶץ	1	hail	These parallel statements have a similar meaning. They are used to emphasize the great number of locusts that are coming. In some languages this will not have the same rhetorical effect, and you will need to use another device to emphasize the statement. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 EXO	10	5	rdav		וְ⁠כִסָּה֙ אֶת־עֵ֣ין הָ⁠אָ֔רֶץ	1		Alternate translation: “And it will cover the land from sight”
-EXO	10	5	oj3i	grammar-collectivenouns	וְ⁠כִסָּה֙…וְ⁠אָכַ֣ל…וְ⁠אָכַל֙	1		Here the pronoun **it** agrees in number with the collective singular “locust” in the previous verse. Insects are often referred to without gender in English, but you will need to use whatever number, gender, or noun class is required in your language to agree with the word for “locust” that you used in the [previous verse](../10/04.md). See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
+EXO	10	5	oj3i	grammar-collectivenouns	וְ⁠כִסָּה֙…וְ⁠אָכַ֣ל…וְ⁠אָכַל֙	1		Here the pronoun **it** agrees in number with the collective singular “locust” in the previous verse. Insects are often referred to without gender in English, but you will need to use whatever number, gender, or noun class is required in your language to agree with the word for “locust” that you used in the [previous verse](../10/04.md). See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 EXO	10	6	ir5l	figs-hyperbole	עַל־הָ֣⁠אֲדָמָ֔ה	1	nothing ever seen	This could either mean **on the earth** (planet) or “on the land” (Egypt). Either way, it is meant to emphasize an extremely long time, meaning never. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 EXO	10	6	ma0o	figs-explicit	וַ⁠יִּ֥פֶן	1		[Verse 3](../10/03.md) says that Aaron came in to see the king with Moses. It is implied that he left with him as well. You may make this explicit if it would help your readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-EXO	10	7	xn8j	figs-rquestion	עַד־מָתַי֙ יִהְיֶ֨ה זֶ֥ה לָ֨⁠נוּ֙ לְ⁠מוֹקֵ֔שׁ	1	How long will this man be a menace to us?	Pharaoh’s servants ask this question to show Pharaoh that he is stubbornly causing the destruction of Egypt. This rhetorical question can be translated as a statement. Alternate translation: “We cannot allow this man to continue to bring trouble to us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+EXO	10	7	xn8j	figs-rquestion	עַד־מָתַי֙ יִהְיֶ֨ה זֶ֥ה לָ֨⁠נוּ֙ לְ⁠מוֹקֵ֔שׁ	1	How long will this man be a menace to us?	Pharaoh’s servants ask this question to show Pharaoh that he is stubbornly causing the destruction of Egypt. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We must not let this man continue to cause trouble for us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 EXO	10	7	jqbh	figs-gendernotations	הָ֣⁠אֲנָשִׁ֔ים	1		Here, **men** may be literal or it may refer to the Israelites, including the women and children. In [verse 10](../10/10.md) the king rejects the idea of letting the women and children go, and in [verse 11](../10/11.md) he specifically says that the men can go. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-EXO	10	7	xdm5	figs-rquestion	הֲ⁠טֶ֣רֶם תֵּדַ֔ע כִּ֥י אָבְדָ֖ה מִצְרָֽיִם	1	Do you not yet realize that Egypt is destroyed?	Pharaoh’s servants ask this question to bring Pharaoh to recognize what he refuses to see. This rhetorical question can be translated as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should realize that Egypt is destroyed!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+EXO	10	7	xdm5	figs-rquestion	הֲ⁠טֶ֣רֶם תֵּדַ֔ע כִּ֥י אָבְדָ֖ה מִצְרָֽיִם	1	Do you not yet realize that Egypt is destroyed?	Pharaoh’s servants ask this question to bring Pharaoh to recognize what he refuses to see. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should realize that Egypt is destroyed!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 EXO	10	7	c6pr	figs-activepassive	כִּ֥י אָבְדָ֖ה מִצְרָֽיִם	1	that Egypt is destroyed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that these plagues have destroyed Egypt” or “that their God has destroyed Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	10	8	bu1x	figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יּוּשַׁ֞ב אֶת־מֹשֶׁ֤ה וְ⁠אֶֽת־אַהֲרֹן֙ אֶל־פַּרְעֹ֔ה	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And a servant brought Moses and Aaron back to Pharaoh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	10	8	fzsv		מִ֥י וָ⁠מִ֖י	1		Alternate translation: “Who all”
@@ -920,7 +916,7 @@ EXO	10	11	pkm4		הַ⁠גְּבָרִים֙	1	Then Moses and Aaron were driven o
 EXO	10	11	vdjk	figs-metonymy	מֵ⁠אֵ֖ת פְּנֵ֥י פַרְעֹֽה	1		Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of Pharaoh. Alternate translation: “from his presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	10	12	kchn	writing-newevent	וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר יְהוָ֜ה	1		There is a minor scene change here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 EXO	10	12	gjfx		יָדְ⁠ךָ֜	1		See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding the hand and staff.
-EXO	10	12	qikq	grammar-collectivenouns	בָּֽ⁠אַרְבֶּ֔ה	1		**Locust** is a singular noun referring to the group as one. See how you translated this in [10:4](../10/04.md). Alternate translation: “locusts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
+EXO	10	12	qikq	grammar-collectivenouns	בָּֽ⁠אַרְבֶּ֔ה	1		**Locust** is a collective singular noun referring to the group as one. See how you translated this in [10:4](../10/04.md). Alternate translation: “locusts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 EXO	10	12	gzwa	grammar-collectivenouns	וְ⁠יַ֖עַל…וְ⁠יֹאכַל֙	1		Here, the pronoun **it** agrees in number with the collective singular “locust.” See how you translated this in [10:5](../10/05.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 EXO	10	13	xqsz		מַטֵּ⁠הוּ֮	1		See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding the hand and staff.
 EXO	10	13	vee8		ר֥וּחַ קָדִים֙	1		The wind blew from east to west.
@@ -937,7 +933,7 @@ EXO	10	17	doeg	figs-metonymy	הַ⁠מָּ֥וֶת הַ⁠זֶּֽה	1		The word
 EXO	10	17	nn2b	figs-explicit	הַ⁠מָּ֥וֶת הַ⁠זֶּֽה	1	take this death away from me	The word **death** here refers to the destruction by the locusts of all plants in Egypt, which would eventually lead to the deaths of people because there would be no crops. The full meaning of this statement can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “this destruction that will lead to our deaths” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EXO	10	18	p9hz		וַ⁠יֵּצֵ֖א	1		Moses and Aaron were summoned to the king in [10:16](../10/16.md), so some translations will need to say that they both left.
 EXO	10	19	xhsv		רֽוּחַ־יָם֙ חָזָ֣ק מְאֹ֔ד	1		Alternate translation: “a very strong west wind” or “a very strong wind from the west”
-EXO	10	19	mdp5		וַ⁠יִּשָּׂא֙ אֶת־הָ֣⁠אַרְבֶּ֔ה	1	picked up the locusts	Alternate translation: “and it moved the locusts upward”
+EXO	10	19	mdp5		וַ⁠יִּשָּׂא֙ אֶת־הָ֣⁠אַרְבֶּ֔ה	1	picked up the locusts	Alternate translation: “and it moved the locust upward”
 EXO	10	19	zhcu	grammar-collectivenouns	הָ֣⁠אַרְבֶּ֔ה…אַרְבֶּ֣ה	1		See how you translated this in [10:4](../10/04.md). Alternate translation: “the locusts … of the locusts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 EXO	10	19	q8aj	grammar-collectivenouns	וַ⁠יִּתְקָעֵ֖⁠הוּ	1		Here, the first **it** refers to the wind; the second **it** agrees in number with the collective singular “locust.” See how you translated this in [10:5](../10/05.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 EXO	10	20	dw1d	figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יְחַזֵּ֥ק יְהוָ֖ה אֶת־לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֑ה	1	Yahweh hardened Pharaoh’s heart	This means God made him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his **heart** were **strong**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [4:21](../04/21.md). Alternate translation: “But Yahweh caused Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -963,11 +959,12 @@ EXO	10	26	uiom		שָֽׁמָּ⁠ה	1		The destination is unspecified. Previous
 EXO	10	27	n588	figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יְחַזֵּ֥ק יְהוָ֖ה אֶת־לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֑ה	1	Yahweh hardened Pharaoh’s heart	This means God made him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his **heart** were **strong**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [4:21](../04/21.md). Alternate translation: “But Yahweh caused Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	10	27	mv8t		וְ⁠לֹ֥א אָבָ֖ה לְ⁠שַׁלְּחָֽ⁠ם	1	he would not let them go	Alternate translation: “and Pharaoh would not consent to let them go”
 EXO	10	28	di6g	figs-rpronouns	הִשָּׁ֣מֶר לְ⁠ךָ֗	1		Here, the listener, Moses, fills two different roles in the sentence. He is the person told to look (subject) and he himself is what he is told to look at (object). Different languages have different methods of marking this. Alternate translation: “You watch yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
+EXO	10	28	eza9	figs-idiom	הִשָּׁ֣מֶר לְ⁠ךָ֗	1		This is an idiom. Pharaoh is not telling Moses literally to keep looking at himself. Alternate translation: "Be careful" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EXO	10	28	lcz2	figs-explicit	תָּמֽוּת	1	Be careful about one thing	Pharaoh means he will have Moses killed. You may choose to make this explicit, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-EXO	10	28	te45	figs-synecdoche	פָּנַ֔⁠י…פָנַ֖⁠י	1	you see my face	Here, **face** refers to the whole person. See the UST (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+EXO	10	28	te45	figs-synecdoche	פָּנַ֔⁠י…פָנַ֖⁠י	1	you see my face	Here, **face** refers to the whole person. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 EXO	10	29	h1jf	figs-idiom	כֵּ֣ן דִּבַּ֑רְתָּ	1	You yourself have spoken	With these words, Moses emphasizes that Pharaoh has spoken the truth. Alternate translation: “What you have said is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EXO	10	29	rg18	figs-synecdoche	פָּנֶֽי⁠ךָ	1		Here, **face** refers to the whole person. Alternate translation: “you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-EXO	11	intro	pu3u			0		# Exodus 11 General Notes\n\n\nChapter 11 is a transition point in the book. The previous nine plagues (in their three sequences of three) have come to an end and the last plague, the death of the firstborn, is about to occur, along with the Passover and the Exodus itself. It is difficult to know if the events in chapter 11 all are recorded in the order in which they happened. For translation, you should follow the order of the text if it will not confuse your readers.\n\nIt may be helpful to think that after the end of chapter 10, Yahweh spoke to Moses immediately, before he actually left Pharaoh’s presence (v. [1](../11/01.md)-[2](../11/02.md)). [Verse 3](../11/03.md) is a comment suggesting that the Egyptians will be willing to do as the Israelites are told to ask them to do in [v. 2](../11/02.md). In verses [4](../11/04.md)-[7](../11/07.md) Moses gives Pharaoh and his officials a message from Yahweh that Yahweh is giving to Moses right at that moment. At the end of [v. 8](../11/08.md) Moses leaves Pharaoh’s presence (completing the interaction from the [end of ch. 10](../10/28.md)). [Verse 9](../11/09.md) may either be Yahweh telling Moses what is going to happen, or it could be part of the summary that occurs in [v. 10](../11/10.md). Verse 10 summarizes what has happened in chs. 5-10 (especially the plagues in chs. 7-10) in preparation for the great last plague.\n\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Pharaoh’s hard heart\n\nPharaoh’s heart is often described as hard in this chapter. This means that his heart was not open or willing to understand Yahweh’s instructions. When his heart was hardened, it became less and less receptive to Yahweh.\n\n### Let my people go\n\nIn the previous chapters, Moses did not ask Pharaoh’s permission for the Hebrew people to leave. Instead, he demanded that Pharaoh free the Hebrew people. In this chapter, the same wording is used to refer to Pharaoh “allowing” the Hebrew people to leave Egypt.
+EXO	11	intro	pu3u			0		# Exodus 11 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\r\n\n\nChapter 11 is a transition point in the book. The previous nine plagues (in their three sequences of three) have come to an end and the last plague, the death of the firstborn, is about to occur, along with the Passover and the Exodus itself. It is difficult to know if the events in chapter 11 all are recorded in the order in which they happened. For translation, you should follow the order of the text if it will not confuse your readers.\n\nIt may be helpful to think that after the end of chapter 10, Yahweh spoke to Moses immediately, before he actually left Pharaoh’s presence (v. [1](../11/01.md)-[2](../11/02.md)). [Verse 3](../11/03.md) is a comment suggesting that the Egyptians will be willing to do as the Israelites are told to ask them to do in [v. 2](../11/02.md). In verses [4](../11/04.md)-[7](../11/07.md) Moses gives Pharaoh and his officials a message from Yahweh that Yahweh is giving to Moses right at that moment. At the end of [v. 8](../11/08.md) Moses leaves Pharaoh’s presence (completing the interaction from the [end of ch. 10](../10/28.md)). [Verse 9](../11/09.md) may either be Yahweh telling Moses what is going to happen, or it could be part of the summary that occurs in [v. 10](../11/10.md). Verse 10 summarizes what has happened in chs. 5-10 (especially the plagues in chs. 7-10) in preparation for the great last plague.\n
 EXO	11	1	hrom	figs-quotemarks	אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֗ה	1		After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues until the end of [11:2](../11/02.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	11	1	eqeb	grammar-connect-time-sequential	כְּ⁠שַׁ֨לְּח֔⁠וֹ…יְגָרֵ֥שׁ	1		These verbs (**lets go** and **drive away**) are meant to immediately follow one another. When you translate, make sure they are almost simultaneous in time; the letting go happens and then immediately the driving away happens. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 EXO	11	1	iocd		כָּלָ֕ה גָּרֵ֛שׁ יְגָרֵ֥שׁ	1		The wording here is very forceful. Use strong words, forms, or phrasing when you are translating.
@@ -1001,7 +998,7 @@ EXO	11	8	milu	figs-idiom	בָּ⁠חֳרִי־אָֽף	1		This is an idiom meani
 EXO	11	9	xk4l	figs-quotemarks	לֹא־יִשְׁמַ֥ע אֲלֵי⁠כֶ֖ם פַּרְעֹ֑ה לְמַ֛עַן רְב֥וֹת מוֹפְתַ֖⁠י בְּ⁠אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם	1		This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	11	10	h5g7	writing-endofstory	וּ⁠מֹשֶׁ֣ה וְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֗ן עָשׂ֛וּ אֶת־כָּל־הַ⁠מֹּפְתִ֥ים הָ⁠אֵ֖לֶּה לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י פַרְעֹ֑ה וַ⁠יְחַזֵּ֤ק יְהוָה֙ אֶת־לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֔ה וְ⁠לֹֽא־שִׁלַּ֥ח אֶת־בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ	1		This verse is summarizing and wrapping up the story of the plagues. If your language has a way of summarizing information at the end of a story, try to translate this verse (and possibly verse 9 - see the introductory notes to this chapter) in this way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
 EXO	11	10	um4u	figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יְחַזֵּ֤ק יְהוָה֙ אֶת־לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֔ה	1	Yahweh hardened Pharaoh’s heart	This means God made him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his **heart** were **strong**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [4:21](../04/21.md). Alternate translation: “But Yahweh caused Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EXO	12	intro	fd2f			0		# Exodus 12 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThe events of this chapter are known as the Passover. They are remembered in the celebration of Passover. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])\n1. Instruction v. 1-28\n   * v. 1-20: Yahweh gives instructions\n        * v. 1-11: how to eat this Passover\n        * v. 12-13: description of the plague\n        * v. 14-20: directions for future celebration of Passover\n    * v. 21-28: Moses repeats Yahweh’s instructions to Israelites\n2. Narrative v. 29-42: Passover and Exodus\n3. Instruction v. 43-49: which foreigners may eat Passover\n4. Summary Narrative v. 50-51\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Unleavened bread\n\nThe concept of unleavened bread is introduced in this chapter. Its significance stems from its connection to the events in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/unleavenedbread]])\n\n### Ethnic segregation\n\nThe Hebrew people were to be separate from the rest of the world. Because of this, they separated themselves from other people groups. At this time, these foreigners were looked upon as unholy. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\n\n\n## Potential Translation Issues:\n\n### Passover\n\n\n### Pronoun usage\n\nIn the long quotation (verses 3-20) that Yahweh tells Moses and Aaron to convey to the Israelites, he speaks of them in the third person (“they must”) in [verses 3](../12/03.md)–4 and [verses 7](../12/07.md)–8 and to them in the second person (“you must”) for all the rest of the instruction. Some languages may need to keep the pronoun person consistent throughout the quotation.\n\n\n### You plural\n\nIn this chapter, almost every occurrence of “you” or “your” is plural. Each one refers to all the Israelites. Those that are not will be marked. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form throughout unless otherwise noted. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
+EXO	12	intro	fd2f			0		# Exodus 12 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThe events of this chapter are known as the Passover. They are remembered in the celebration of Passover. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])\n1. Instruction v. 1-28\n   * v. 1-20: Yahweh gives instructions\n        * v. 1-11: how to eat this Passover\n        * v. 12-13: description of the plague\n        * v. 14-20: directions for future celebration of Passover\n    * v. 21-28: Moses repeats Yahweh’s instructions to Israelites\n2. Narrative v. 29-42: Passover and Exodus\n3. Instruction v. 43-49: which foreigners may eat Passover\n4. Summary Narrative v. 50-51\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Unleavened bread\n\nThe concept of unleavened bread is introduced in this chapter. Its significance stems from its connection to the events in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/unleavenedbread]])\n\n### Ethnic segregation\n\nThe Hebrew people were to be separate from the rest of the world. Because of this, they separated themselves from other people groups. At this time, these foreigners were looked upon as unholy. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\n\n\n## Potential Translation Issues:\n\n### Passover\n\n\n### Pronoun usage\n\nIn the long quotation (verses 3-20) that Yahweh tells Moses and Aaron to convey to the Israelites, he speaks of them in the third person (“they must”) in [verses 3](../12/03.md)–4 and [verses 7](../12/07.md)–8 and to them in the second person (“you must”) for all the rest of the instruction. Some languages may need to keep the pronoun person consistent throughout the quotation.\n\n\n### You plural\n\nIn this chapter, almost every occurrence of “you” or “your” is plural. Each one refers to all the Israelites. Those that are not will be marked. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form throughout unless otherwise noted. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])<br>
 EXO	12	2	z785	figs-quotemarks	הַ⁠חֹ֧דֶשׁ הַ⁠זֶּ֛ה לָ⁠כֶ֖ם רֹ֣אשׁ חֳדָשִׁ֑ים	1	For you, this month will be the start of months, the first month of the year to you	The start of this verse is the beginning of a direct quote which continues until the end of [verse 20](../12/20.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])<br>
 EXO	12	2	gtgb	figs-parallelism	הַ⁠חֹ֧דֶשׁ הַ⁠זֶּ֛ה לָ⁠כֶ֖ם רֹ֣אשׁ חֳדָשִׁ֑ים רִאשׁ֥וֹן הוּא֙ לָ⁠כֶ֔ם לְ⁠חָדְשֵׁ֖י הַ⁠שָּׁנָֽה	1		These two phrases mean basically the same thing and emphasize that the month in which the events of this chapter take place will be the beginning of their calendar year. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 EXO	12	2	uy4w	translate-hebrewmonths	רִאשׁ֥וֹן הוּא֙ לָ⁠כֶ֔ם לְ⁠חָדְשֵׁ֖י הַ⁠שָּׁנָֽה	1	the first month of the year	The first month of the Hebrew calendar includes the last part of March and the first part of April on Western calendars. It marks when Yahweh rescued the Israelites from the Egyptians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
@@ -1011,11 +1008,11 @@ EXO	12	3	jjw0		וְ⁠יִקְח֣וּ לָ⁠הֶ֗ם אִ֛ישׁ שֶׂ֥ה 
 EXO	12	3	d1f5		שֶׂ֥ה לַ⁠בָּֽיִת	1		Alternate translation: “one lamb per house”
 EXO	12	3	qzct		שֶׂ֥ה…שֶׂ֥ה	1		The word **lamb** literally means “of the flock,” and it could also be translated as a sheep or a goat. Here, the ULT uses **lamb** (a young sheep), because [verse 5](../12/05.md) specifies that it must be one year old. “Kid” (a young goat) would be equally valid as verse 5 also says that it could be either a sheep or a goat. You may translate it as either sheep or goat, whichever would be most familiar.
 EXO	12	4	xzn3	figs-explicit	וְ⁠אִם־יִמְעַ֣ט הַ⁠בַּיִת֮ מִ⁠הְיֹ֣ת מִ⁠שֶּׂה֒	1	If the household is too small for a lamb	This means that there are not enough people in the family to eat an entire lamb. Alternate translation: “If there are not enough people in the household to eat an entire lamb” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-EXO	12	4	o258		וּ⁠שְׁכֵנ֛⁠וֹ הַ⁠קָּרֹ֥ב אֶל־בֵּית֖⁠וֹ בְּ⁠מִכְסַ֣ת נְפָשֹׁ֑ת	1		This phrase could either mean simply a neighbor that lives nearby or it could refer to a family of similar size or of the right size to split a lamb with.
+EXO	12	4	o258		וּ⁠שְׁכֵנ֛⁠וֹ הַ⁠קָּרֹ֥ב אֶל־בֵּית֖⁠וֹ בְּ⁠מִכְסַ֣ת נְפָשֹׁ֑ת	1		The phrase **by the number of people** helps to clarify which sort of  **neighbor near to his house** the Israelite should choose. They should count their own household and another household and try to have a group that is the right number to eat an entire lamb. Alternate translation: “and his neighbor who lives near him and whose family is the right size to share a lamb with”
 EXO	12	4	fu2g	figs-gendernotations	אִ֚ישׁ	1	the man and his next door neighbor	This refers to each person, whether man, woman, or child. Alternate translation: “each family member” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 EXO	12	6	lz76		בֵּ֥ין הָ⁠עַרְבָּֽיִם	1	twilight	This refers to the time of evening after the sun has set but while there is still some light.
-EXO	12	7	cjt7		עַל־שְׁתֵּ֥י הַ⁠מְּזוּזֹ֖ת וְ⁠עַל־הַ⁠מַּשְׁק֑וֹף עַ֚ל הַ⁠בָּ֣תִּ֔ים	1	on the two side doorposts and on the tops of the doorframes of the houses	Alternate translation: “on the sides and top of the way into the house”
-EXO	12	8	uxn6		מְרֹרִ֖ים	1	bitter herbs	These are small plants that have a strong and usually bad taste.
+EXO	12	7	cjt7		עַל־שְׁתֵּ֥י הַ⁠מְּזוּזֹ֖ת וְ⁠עַל־הַ⁠מַּשְׁק֑וֹף עַ֚ל הַ⁠בָּ֣תִּ֔ים	1	on the two side doorposts and on the tops of the doorframes of the houses	Alternate translation: “on the sides and top of the way into the house” or “on the top and sides of the frame around the door into the house”
+EXO	12	8	uxn6		מְרֹרִ֖ים	1	bitter herbs	These are edible but strong-tasting leaves, seeds, and other parts of plants.
 EXO	12	9	ny3a		אַל־תֹּאכְל֤וּ מִמֶּ֨⁠נּוּ֙ נָ֔א	1	Do not eat it raw	Alternate translation: “Do not eat the lamb or goat uncooked”
 EXO	12	11	ks7d		חֲגֻרִ֔ים	1	belt	Here, **belts** are strips of leather or fabric for tying around the waist.
 EXO	12	11	nzw2		וַ⁠אֲכַלְתֶּ֤ם אֹת⁠וֹ֙ בְּ⁠חִפָּז֔וֹן	1	eat it hurriedly	Alternate translation: “And you must eat it quickly”
@@ -1039,9 +1036,9 @@ EXO	12	18	v7g9	translate-ordinal	בָּ⁠רִאשֹׁ֡ן בְּ⁠אַרְבּ
 EXO	12	18	l57q	translate-ordinal	בָּ⁠רִאשֹׁ֡ן בְּ⁠אַרְבָּעָה֩ עָשָׂ֨ר י֤וֹם לַ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ֙…עַ֠ד י֣וֹם הָ⁠אֶחָ֧ד וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֛ים לַ⁠חֹ֖דֶשׁ	1		(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 EXO	12	18	m475	translate-hebrewmonths	בָּ⁠רִאשֹׁ֡ן בְּ⁠אַרְבָּעָה֩ עָשָׂ֨ר י֤וֹם לַ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ֙	1	the fourteenth day in the first month	This is the first month of the Hebrew calendar. The fourteenth day is near the beginning of April on Western calendars. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
 EXO	12	18	uss3	translate-hebrewmonths	י֣וֹם הָ⁠אֶחָ֧ד וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֛ים לַ⁠חֹ֖דֶשׁ	1	the twenty-first day of the month	This is near the middle of April on Western calendars. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
-EXO	12	19	aej1	figs-activepassive	שְׂאֹ֕ר לֹ֥א יִמָּצֵ֖א בְּ⁠בָתֵּי⁠כֶ֑ם	1	no yeast must be found in your houses	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Note that the UST   more accurately conveys the meaning here, as the alternate translation in this note could be understood to mean that you must simply hide the yeast very well. Alternate translation: “Yahweh must not find any yeast in your houses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EXO	12	19	vy72	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠נִכְרְתָ֞ה הַ⁠נֶּ֤פֶשׁ הַ⁠הִוא֙ מֵ⁠עֲדַ֣ת יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל	1	must be cut off from the community of Israel	See how you translated the metaphor **cut off** in [Exodus 12:15](../12/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EXO	12	19	cwvs	figs-activepassive	וְ⁠נִכְרְתָ֞ה הַ⁠נֶּ֤פֶשׁ הַ⁠הִוא֙ מֵ⁠עֲדַ֣ת יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל	1		See how you translated **cut off** in [Exodus 12:15](../12/15.md).
+EXO	12	19	aej1	figs-activepassive	שְׂאֹ֕ר לֹ֥א יִמָּצֵ֖א בְּ⁠בָתֵּי⁠כֶ֑ם	1	no yeast must be found in your houses	This means there should not be any yeast in their houses. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Note that the UST more accurately conveys the meaning here, as the alternate translation in this note could be understood to mean that you must simply hide the yeast very well. Alternate translation: “Yahweh must not find any yeast in your houses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+EXO	12	19	vy72	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠נִכְרְתָ֞ה הַ⁠נֶּ֤פֶשׁ הַ⁠הִוא֙ מֵ⁠עֲדַ֣ת יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל	1	must be cut off from the community of Israel	See how you translated **cut off** in [Exodus 12:15](../12/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EXO	12	19	cwvs	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠נִכְרְתָ֞ה הַ⁠נֶּ֤פֶשׁ הַ⁠הִוא֙ מֵ⁠עֲדַ֣ת יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל	1		See how you translated **cut off** in [Exodus 12:15](../12/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	12	20	dj1c	figs-quotemarks	מַצּֽוֹת	1		After this phrase, the direct quote of Yahweh’s commands to Moses and Aaron for the Israelites ends (two levels). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with closing second-level and first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of quotations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	12	21	y9qt	writing-newevent		0	summoned	A new scene begins at this verse, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 EXO	12	21	exy0	figs-quotemarks	וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר אֲלֵ⁠הֶ֑ם	1		After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues until the end of [12:27](../12/27.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])<br>
@@ -1074,7 +1071,7 @@ EXO	12	39	pva6	figs-activepassive	כִּֽי־גֹרְשׁ֣וּ מִ⁠מִּצ
 EXO	12	40	qsi5	translate-numbers	שְׁלֹשִׁ֣ים…וְ⁠אַרְבַּ֥ע מֵא֖וֹת	1	430 years	Alternate translation: “four hundred thirty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 EXO	12	41	d8yh	translate-numbers	שְׁלֹשִׁ֣ים…וְ⁠אַרְבַּ֥ע מֵא֖וֹת	1	430 years	Alternate translation: “four hundred thirty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 EXO	12	41	xlf4	translate-unknown	צִבְא֥וֹת	1	Yahweh’s armed groups	The term **hosts** refers to a large group of people, often organized into groups for war. See how you translated this in [Exodus 6:26](../06/26.md). Alternate translation: “your groups” or “your divisions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-EXO	12	42	w6mj		לַֽ⁠יהוָ֔ה שִׁמֻּרִ֛ים לְ⁠כָל־בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל לְ⁠דֹרֹתָֽ⁠ם	1	all the Israelites throughout their people’s generations	You could combine **for all the sons of Israel to observe for Yahweh throughout their generations** into one noun phrase as subject. Alternate translation: “for all the sons of Israel throughout their generations to observe for Yahweh”
+EXO	12	42	w6mj		לַֽ⁠יהוָ֔ה שִׁמֻּרִ֛ים לְ⁠כָל־בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל לְ⁠דֹרֹתָֽ⁠ם	1	all the Israelites throughout their people’s generations	Alternate translation: “for all the sons of Israel throughout their generations to observe for Yahweh”
 EXO	12	43	zwac	figs-quotemarks	וְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֔ן	1		After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues until the end of [12:49](../12/49.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	12	44	n9wn		וְ⁠כָל־עֶ֥בֶד אִ֖ישׁ	1	every Israelite’s slave	Alternate translation: “But any slave of an Israelite”
 EXO	12	44	qabi	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	וּ⁠מַלְתָּ֣ה אֹת֔⁠וֹ אָ֖ז	1		This is a hypothetical situation. You will need to use whatever form your language uses to mark something as potentially true. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
@@ -1089,7 +1086,7 @@ EXO	12	48	hi4z	figs-metonymy	כְּ⁠אֶזְרַ֣ח הָ⁠אָ֑רֶץ	1	the
 EXO	12	48	f9ti	figs-doublenegatives	וְ⁠כָל־עָרֵ֖ל לֹֽא־יֹ֥אכַל בּֽ⁠וֹ	1	no uncircumcised person may eat	This can be stated in positive terms. Alternate translation: “And only a circumcised person may eat it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 EXO	12	51	e3z3		וַ⁠יְהִ֕י בְּ⁠עֶ֖צֶם הַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה	1	It came about	This phrase is used here to mark an important event in the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
 EXO	12	51	tyj3	translate-unknown	צִבְאֹתָֽ⁠ם	1	by their armed groups	The term **hosts** refers to a large group of people often organized into groups for war. See how you translated this in [Exodus 6:26](../06/26.md). Alternate translation: “your groups” or “your divisions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-EXO	13	intro	g9qi			0		# Exodus 13 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>1. Instruction v. 1-2: First mention of setting apart the firstborn v. 3-10: Reiteration of the Passover instructions from [12:14-20](../12/14.md) and [24-27](../12/24.md), with a focus on telling to Yahweh’s deeds to the future generations of Israelites v. 11-13: More details on setting apart the firstborn v. 14-16: Reiteration of purpose: telling to future generations<br>2. Narrative v. 17-22: Some details of the exodus<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>* There are several concepts that will be important to understand and translate with care (some have already been encountered in Exodus). They are: set apart, sign, symbol, redemption, and sacrifice.<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>* There are a number of names of people groups and places in this chapter. However, many have been translated in earlier passages.<br>* Transporting the bones of Joseph may be an unknown concept in some places.<br>* It may take some time to decide on a good translation for the pillars of fire and cloud that lead the Israelites.
+EXO	13	intro	g9qi			0		# Exodus 13 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n1. Instruction \n    - v. 1-2: First mention of setting apart the firstborn  \n    - v. 3-10: Reiteration of the Passover instructions from [12:14-20](../12/14.md) and [24-27](../12/24.md), with a focus on telling to Yahweh’s deeds to the future generations of Israelites  \n    - v. 11-13: More details on setting apart the firstborn  \n    - v. 14-16: Reiteration of purpose: telling to future generations\n2. Narrative  \n    - v. 17-22: Some details of the exodus\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n* There are several concepts that will be important to understand and translate with care (some have already been encountered in Exodus). They are: set apart, sign, symbol, redemption, and sacrifice.\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n* There are a number of names of people groups and places in this chapter. However, many have been translated in earlier passages.\n* Transporting the bones of Joseph may be an unknown concept in some places.\n* It may take some time to decide on a good translation for the pillars of fire and cloud that lead the Israelites.
 EXO	13	2	de3u	figs-quotemarks	קַדֶּשׁ־לִ֨⁠י כָל־בְּכ֜וֹר פֶּ֤טֶר כָּל־רֶ֨חֶם֙ בִּ⁠בְנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל בָּ⁠אָדָ֖ם וּ⁠בַ⁠בְּהֵמָ֑ה לִ֖⁠י הֽוּא	1	Set apart to me…every firstborn male	This entire verse is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	13	3	e0n1	figs-quotemarks	אֶל־הָ⁠עָ֗ם	1		After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues until the end of [verse 16](../13/16.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	13	3	en1s	figs-metaphor	מִ⁠בֵּ֣ית עֲבָדִ֔ים	1	the house of slavery	Moses speaks of Egypt as if it were a house where people keep slaves. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the place where you were slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1141,7 +1138,7 @@ EXO	13	21	nr02		לְ⁠הָאִ֣יר לָ⁠הֶ֑ם	1		Alternate translation:
 EXO	13	21	i7yl	grammar-connect-logic-result	אֵ֖שׁ לְ⁠הָאִ֣יר לָ⁠הֶ֑ם לָ⁠לֶ֖כֶת יוֹמָ֥ם וָ⁠לָֽיְלָה	1		They could travel either by day or night because God provided light at night. You could reorder the cause and effect if that is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “fire. They could go by day or by night because he was light to them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])\n\n\n
 EXO	13	22	iiuj		עַמּ֤וּד הֶֽ⁠עָנָן֙ יוֹמָ֔ם וְ⁠עַמּ֥וּד הָ⁠אֵ֖שׁ לָ֑יְלָה	1		See how you translated this in [13:21](../13/21.md).
 EXO	13	22	qxks	figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֖י הָ⁠עָֽם	1		Here, **from the face of the people** means “from in front of the people” where they could see it. Alternate translation: “from where they could see it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-EXO	14	intro	jq4u			0		# Exodus 14 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter contains an important event in the history of Israel known as the “parting of the sea of reeds (Red Sea).”\nThroughout this chapter and chapter 15, the word “sea” is used. The context shows that this is the sea of reeds (Red Sea). Since the text does not explicitly say that though, the ULT will only say “sea.” In your translation, it may help people to be more specific than the text, if just using “sea” is confusing.\n\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Pharaoh’s hard heart\n\nPharaoh’s heart is often described as hard in this chapter. This means that his heart was not open or willing to understand Yahweh’s instructions. When his heart was hardened, it became less and less receptive to Yahweh.\n\n### Pharaoh’s chariots\n\nThese chariots were a fighting force. Pharaoh took an army to kill the Hebrew people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Rhetorical Questions\n\nThe Israelites asked a few rhetorical questions of Moses. These questions were not really directed at Moses, but at Yahweh. This showed their lack of faith in Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
+EXO	14	intro	jq4u			0		# Exodus 14 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis whole chapter is the record of an important event in the history of Israel known as the “parting of the sea of reeds (Red Sea).”\nThroughout this chapter and chapter 15, the word “sea” is used. Exodus 13:18 and 15:22 show that this is the sea of reeds (Red Sea). Since the text does not explicitly say that though, the ULT will only say “sea.” In your translation, it may help people to be more specific than the text if just using “sea” is confusing.\n\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Pharaoh’s chariots\n\nThese chariots were a fighting force. Pharaoh took an army to kill the Hebrew people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Rhetorical Questions\n\nThe Israelites asked a few rhetorical questions of Moses. These questions were not really directed at Moses, but at Yahweh. This showed their lack of faith in Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])\n
 EXO	14	2	b5qq	figs-quotemarks	דַּבֵּר֮	1		This verse begins a direct quote which continues into [verse 4](../13/04.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	14	2	mb4e	translate-names	פִּ֣י הַחִירֹ֔ת…מִגְדֹּ֖ל…בַּ֣עַל צְפֹ֔ן	1	Pi Hahiroth…Migdol…Baal Zephon	These are locations on Egypt’s eastern border. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EXO	14	2	ue2o	figs-quotations	בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵל֒ וְ⁠יָשֻׁ֗בוּ וְ⁠יַחֲנוּ֙ לִ⁠פְנֵי֙ פִּ֣י הַחִירֹ֔ת בֵּ֥ין מִגְדֹּ֖ל וּ⁠בֵ֣ין הַ⁠יָּ֑ם לִ⁠פְנֵי֙ בַּ֣עַל צְפֹ֔ן	1		The portion after **that** could be translated as a direct quotation. That would make a second-level direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “the sons of Israel, ‘Turn and camp before the face of Pi Hahiroth, between Migdol and the sea, before the face of Baal Zephon.’ ”<br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
@@ -1158,7 +1155,7 @@ EXO	14	5	it5s		בָרַ֖ח	1	had fled	Alternate translation: “had run away”
 EXO	14	5	k67b	figs-metonymy	וַ֠⁠יֵּהָפֵךְ לְבַ֨ב פַּרְעֹ֤ה וַ⁠עֲבָדָי⁠ו֙ אֶל־הָ⁠עָ֔ם	1	the minds of Pharaoh and his servants turned against the people	Here, **heart** refers to their attitudes toward the Israelites. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “and Pharaoh and his servants changed their attitude about the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	14	5	go8u	figs-activepassive	וַ֠⁠יֵּהָפֵךְ לְבַ֨ב פַּרְעֹ֤ה וַ⁠עֲבָדָי⁠ו֙ אֶל־הָ⁠עָ֔ם	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and Pharaoh and his servants turned their hearts to the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	14	5	wljw		אֶל־הָ⁠עָ֔ם	1		Alternate translation: “against the Israelites”
-EXO	14	5	v236	figs-rquestion	מַה־זֹּ֣את עָשִׂ֔ינוּ כִּֽי־שִׁלַּ֥חְנוּ אֶת־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מֵ⁠עָבְדֵֽ⁠נוּ	1	What have we done? We have released Israel from serving us.	They asked this question to show they thought they had done a foolish thing. This rhetorical question can be translated as a statement. Alternate translation: “We should not have let the Israelites go free from working for us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+EXO	14	5	v236	figs-rquestion	מַה־זֹּ֣את עָשִׂ֔ינוּ כִּֽי־שִׁלַּ֥חְנוּ אֶת־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מֵ⁠עָבְדֵֽ⁠נוּ	1	What have we done? We have released Israel from serving us.	They asked this question to show they thought they had done a foolish thing. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We should not have let the Israelites go free from working for us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 EXO	14	5	kw4x	figs-quotemarks	מַה־זֹּ֣את עָשִׂ֔ינוּ כִּֽי־שִׁלַּ֥חְנוּ אֶת־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מֵ⁠עָבְדֵֽ⁠נוּ	1		This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	14	5	dnj3	grammar-collectivenouns	יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל	1		This is a collective singular noun. If your language would not refer to a group of people in this way, you may need to translate it as plural. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 EXO	14	7	ry11	translate-numbers	שֵׁשׁ־מֵא֥וֹת	1	He took six hundred chosen chariots	Alternate translation: “six hundred” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
@@ -1170,21 +1167,21 @@ EXO	14	9	q0jo	writing-pronouns	אוֹתָ⁠ם֙	1		Alternate translation: “th
 EXO	14	9	sb7x	translate-names	פִּי֙ הַֽחִירֹ֔ת…בַּ֥עַל צְפֹֽן	1	Pi Hahiroth…Baal Zephon	These are places on Egypt’s eastern border. See how you translated them in [Exodus 14:2](../14/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EXO	14	10	s1xa	figs-synecdoche	וּ⁠פַרְעֹ֖ה הִקְרִ֑יב	1	When Pharaoh came close	Here, **Pharaoh** represents the entire Egyptian army. Alternate translation: “Then Pharaoh and his army approached” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 EXO	14	10	vyp9		וַ⁠יִּשְׂאוּ֩ בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֨ל אֶת־עֵינֵי⁠הֶ֜ם	1		Alternate translation: “and the sons of Israel looked up” or “and the sons of Israel looked back”
-EXO	14	10	qcy1		וְ⁠הִנֵּ֥ה	1	they were terrified	Here, **behold** is used to draw attention to surprising information that follows. Use a word, phrase, or structure in your language that indicates that the next information is very surprising.
-EXO	14	11	vzw5	figs-rquestion	הַֽ⁠מִ⁠בְּלִ֤י אֵין־קְבָרִים֙ בְּ⁠מִצְרַ֔יִם לְקַחְתָּ֖⁠נוּ לָ⁠מ֣וּת בַּ⁠מִּדְבָּ֑ר	1	Is it because there were no graves in Egypt, that you have taken us away to die in the wilderness?	The Israelites ask this question to express their frustration and fear of dying. This rhetorical question can be translated as a statement. Alternate translation: “There were plenty of graveyards in Egypt for us to be buried in. You did not have to take us into the wilderness to die!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-EXO	14	11	x4n2	figs-rquestion	מַה־זֹּאת֙ עָשִׂ֣יתָ לָּ֔⁠נוּ לְ⁠הוֹצִיאָ֖⁠נוּ מִ⁠מִּצְרָֽיִם	1	Why have you treated us like this, bringing us out of Egypt?	The Israelites ask this question to rebuke Moses for bringing them to the desert to die. This rhetorical question can be translated as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should not have treated us like this by bringing us out of Egypt!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-EXO	14	12	itb2	figs-rquestion	הֲ⁠לֹא־זֶ֣ה הַ⁠דָּבָ֗ר אֲשֶׁר֩ דִּבַּ֨רְנוּ אֵלֶ֤י⁠ךָ בְ⁠מִצְרַ֨יִם֙	1	Is this not what we told you in Egypt?	The Israelites ask this question to emphasize that this is what they had told Moses. This rhetorical question can be translated as a statement. Alternate translation: “This is exactly what we told you while we were in Egypt,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+EXO	14	10	qcy1		וְ⁠הִנֵּ֥ה	1	they were terrified	Here, **behold** is used to draw attention to alarming information that follows. Use a word, phrase, or structure in your language that indicates that the next information is very alarming.
+EXO	14	11	vzw5	figs-rquestion	הַֽ⁠מִ⁠בְּלִ֤י אֵין־קְבָרִים֙ בְּ⁠מִצְרַ֔יִם לְקַחְתָּ֖⁠נוּ לָ⁠מ֣וּת בַּ⁠מִּדְבָּ֑ר	1	Is it because there were no graves in Egypt, that you have taken us away to die in the wilderness?	The Israelites ask this question to express their frustration and fear of dying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “There were plenty of graveyards in Egypt for us to be buried in. You did not have to take us into the wilderness to die!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+EXO	14	11	x4n2	figs-rquestion	מַה־זֹּאת֙ עָשִׂ֣יתָ לָּ֔⁠נוּ לְ⁠הוֹצִיאָ֖⁠נוּ מִ⁠מִּצְרָֽיִם	1	Why have you treated us like this, bringing us out of Egypt?	The Israelites ask this question to rebuke Moses for bringing them to the desert to die. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not have endangered us like this by bringing us out of Egypt!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+EXO	14	12	itb2	figs-rquestion	הֲ⁠לֹא־זֶ֣ה הַ⁠דָּבָ֗ר אֲשֶׁר֩ דִּבַּ֨רְנוּ אֵלֶ֤י⁠ךָ בְ⁠מִצְרַ֨יִם֙	1	Is this not what we told you in Egypt?	The Israelites ask this question to emphasize that this is what they had told Moses. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This is exactly what we told you while we were in Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 EXO	14	12	ix25	figs-quotations	בְ⁠מִצְרַ֨יִם֙ לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר חֲדַ֥ל מִמֶּ֖⁠נּוּ וְ⁠נַֽעַבְדָ֣ה אֶת־מִצְרָ֑יִם	1	We said to you, ‘Leave us alone, so we can work for the Egyptians.’	The portion following **saying** can be stated as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “in Egypt? We told you to leave us alone so we could serve the Egyptians.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-EXO	14	13	phy1	figs-abstractnouns	וּ⁠רְאוּ֙ אֶת־יְשׁוּעַ֣ת יְהוָ֔ה אֲשֶׁר־יַעֲשֶׂ֥ה לָ⁠כֶ֖ם הַ⁠יּ֑וֹם	1		If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **salvation** with a verb. Alternate translation: “and see that Yahweh will save you; he will do that for you today” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+EXO	14	13	phy1	figs-abstractnouns	וּ⁠רְאוּ֙ אֶת־יְשׁוּעַ֣ת יְהוָ֔ה אֲשֶׁר־יַעֲשֶׂ֥ה לָ⁠כֶ֖ם הַ⁠יּ֑וֹם	1		If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **salvation** with a verb. Alternate translation: “and see what Yahweh will do for you today, he will save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 EXO	14	13	l615	figs-quotemarks	אֶל־הָ⁠עָם֮	1		After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues until the end of [verse 14](../14/14.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	14	13	rrd4		לֹ֥א תֹסִ֛יפוּ לִ⁠רְאֹתָ֥⁠ם ע֖וֹד עַד־עוֹלָֽם	1	provide for you	This statement is very extended for emphasis on its certainty. Alternate translation: “you will not see them again forever”
 EXO	14	14	vcdc	figs-rpronouns	יְהוָ֖ה יִלָּחֵ֣ם	1		The form **Yahweh himself** is reflexive, emphasizing what Yahweh will do in contrast to what the Israelites will do. Alternate translation: “As for Yahweh, he will fight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 EXO	14	14	hx1f		תַּחֲרִישֽׁוּ⁠ן	1		Here, **silent** could mean “still.” The Israelites’ lack of action is in contrast to Yahweh’s fighting. It is not a total lack of motion or sound. Alternate translation: “you will not fight”
 EXO	14	15	zsgk	figs-quotemarks	אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֔ה	1	Why are you, Moses, continuing to call out to me?	After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues until the end of [verse 18](../14/18.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-EXO	14	15	a727	figs-rquestion	מַה־תִּצְעַ֖ק אֵלָ֑⁠י	1	Why are you, Moses, continuing to call out to me?	Moses apparently had been praying to God for help, so God uses this question to compel Moses to act. This rhetorical question can be translated as a statement. Alternate translation: “Do not call out to me any longer, Moses.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+EXO	14	15	a727	figs-rquestion	מַה־תִּצְעַ֖ק אֵלָ֑⁠י	1	Why are you, Moses, continuing to call out to me?	Moses apparently had been praying to God for help, so God uses this question to compel Moses to act. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Do not call out to me any longer, Moses.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 EXO	14	16	stla		הָרֵ֣ם אֶֽת־מַטְּ⁠ךָ֗ וּ⁠נְטֵ֧ה אֶת־יָדְ⁠ךָ֛	1	divide it in two	See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding **hand** and **staff**.
 EXO	14	16	t3e4		וּ⁠בְקָעֵ֑⁠הוּ	1	divide it in two	Alternate translation: “and divide the sea into two parts”
-EXO	14	17	z5ub		וַ⁠אֲנִ֗י הִנְ⁠נִ֤י	1	Be aware	Here, **behold me** is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. In this case Yahweh is drawing attention to his next actions. Alternate translation: “Look at what I will do”
+EXO	14	17	z5ub		וַ⁠אֲנִ֗י הִנְ⁠נִ֤י	1	Be aware	Here, **behold me** is an expression meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. In this case, Yahweh is drawing attention to his next actions. Alternate translation: “Look at what I will do”
 EXO	14	17	qd3l	figs-metaphor	מְחַזֵּק֙ אֶת־לֵ֣ב מִצְרַ֔יִם	1	I will harden the Egyptians’ hearts	This means that God will make them stubborn. Their stubborn attitude is spoken of as if their **hearts** were "strong." If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [4:21](../04/21.md). Alternate translation: “I will cause the Egyptians to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	14	17	asz9		וְ⁠יָבֹ֖אוּ אַחֲרֵי⁠הֶ֑ם	1	so they will go after them	Alternate translation: “so that the Egyptians will go into the sea after the Israelites”
 EXO	14	17	hjyh	figs-ellipsis	וְ⁠אִכָּבְדָ֤ה בְּ⁠פַרְעֹה֙ וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־חֵיל֔⁠וֹ בְּ⁠רִכְבּ֖⁠וֹ וּ⁠בְ⁠פָרָשָֽׁי⁠ו	1	so they will go after them	Yahweh is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be clearer in your language, you could supply these words from the context. See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 4](../14/04.md) Alternate translation: “And I will be glorified because of what I do to Pharaoh, all his army, his chariots, and his horsemen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -1195,7 +1192,7 @@ EXO	14	19	hsih	figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵי֙ מַחֲנֵ֣ה…מִ⁠פּ
 EXO	14	19	m1do		עַמּ֤וּד הֶֽ⁠עָנָן֙	1	so they will go after them	See how you translated this in [13:21](../13/21.md).
 EXO	14	19	ysv9	grammar-collectivenouns	יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל	1	so they will go after them	This is a collective singular noun. If your language would not refer to a group of people in this way, you may need to translate it as plural. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 EXO	14	20	jyz2	grammar-collectivenouns	יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל	1	so one side did not come near the other	This is a collective singular noun. If your language would not refer to a group of people in this way, you may need to translate it as plural. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
-EXO	14	20	c4u5		וַ⁠יְהִ֤י הֶֽ⁠עָנָן֙ וְ⁠הַ⁠חֹ֔שֶׁךְ וַ⁠יָּ֖אֶר אֶת־הַ⁠לָּ֑יְלָה	1	so one side did not come near the other	Alternate translation: “And the cloud became dark and light all night”
+EXO	14	20	c4u5		וַ⁠יְהִ֤י הֶֽ⁠עָנָן֙ וְ⁠הַ⁠חֹ֔שֶׁךְ וַ⁠יָּ֖אֶר אֶת־הַ⁠לָּ֑יְלָה	1	so one side did not come near the other	Alternate translation: “And the cloud became dark on one side and light on the other side all night”
 EXO	14	21	qbzp		וַ⁠יֵּ֨ט מֹשֶׁ֣ה אֶת־יָד⁠וֹ֮ עַל־הַ⁠יָּם֒	1	east wind	See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding the hand and staff.
 EXO	14	21	dfx5		בְּ⁠ר֨וּחַ קָדִ֤ים	1	east wind	An **east wind** originates in the east and blows towards the west.
 EXO	14	21	f9zh	figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יִּבָּקְע֖וּ הַ⁠מָּֽיִם	1	the waters were divided	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And Yahweh divided the waters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1217,14 +1214,14 @@ EXO	14	30	e2lf	figs-metonymy	מִ⁠יַּ֣ד מִצְרָ֑יִם	1	out of the
 EXO	14	30	p5zw		עַל־שְׂפַ֥ת הַ⁠יָּֽם	1	on the seashore	Alternate translation: “on the land along the edge of the sea”
 EXO	14	31	o1oc	grammar-collectivenouns	יִשְׂרָאֵ֜ל	1	on the seashore	This is a collective singular noun. If your language would not refer to a group of people in this way, you may need to translate it as plural. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 EXO	14	31	np6s	figs-metonymy	אֶת־הַ⁠יָּ֣ד הַ⁠גְּדֹלָ֗ה	1	on the seashore	Here, **hand** refers to power. Alternate translation: “the great power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-EXO	15	intro	ni4b			0		# Exodus 15 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nVerses 1b-18 and 21b of chapter 15 are poetry. They are a song of praise to Yahweh because he defeated and destroyed the Egyptian army ([Exodus 14:26-28](../14/26.md).). Translating poetry should be done by someone who is a skilled poet in the target language. Because the forms of poetry are so different in different languages, a translation that is good poetry in the target language may seem very different from the original poem. The structure may look quite different. The poet will be well served by looking at the entire poem from multiple perspectives. He will need to know the meaning of the poem, the themes and discourse structure of the poem, and the feelings that the poem is supposed to create in the reader at each point (UST, tNotes). He will need to understand how that was accomplished by the original form and structure (ULT). Then he will need to compose the translated poem using forms and structures that have the same or similar meaning, themes, discourse elements, and feelings in his own language.\n\n### Structure\n\nThis song follows a basic AB structure which is given to us in verse 1b-c and 21b-c:\n\n* A - praise to Yahweh - he is magnificent (expressed in various words)\n* B - because he defeats our enemies\n\nThe song can be divided into three major sections, each of which is patterned as: AB(a)b. Each section starts with an AB portion which is characterized by fewer verbs (or participles, how to express) (especially the A portion). The section then elaborates on each. Note that there are other possible analyses of the structure of the poem.\n\nHere is an outline of the structure according to this model:\n\n* Section 1 (see alternate breakdown below):\n    * 1b: A “Let me sing to Yahweh, for he has triumphantly triumphed;”\n    * 1c: B “the horse and the one riding it he threw into the sea.”\n    * 2-3: a\n    * 4-5: b\n* Section 2:\n    * 6a: A\n    * 6b: B\n    * 7a: a “And in the abundance of your majesty”\n    * 7a-10: b “you overthrow those who rise up against you … ”\n* Section 3:\n    * 11: A\n    * 12: B\n    * 13a: a (possibly) “In your covenant loyalty”\n    * 13a-17: b\n* 18: finale\n\nAlternate breakdown of section 1: it is possible to view 1b-c as the introduction and divide verse 2 such that:\n\n* 2a: A “Yah is my strength and my song”\n* 2b: B “and he has become my salvation”\n* 2c-3: a\n* 4-5: b\n\n### Themes:\n\nThere are several images and themes that are throughout the song as well as some that are throughout an individual section.\n\n* “High” versus “low”: Yahweh is high, while his enemies are low.\n    * The following words are all related to the idea of being high or rising up: **triumph** ([v1](../15/01.md)), **exalt** ([v2](../15/02.md)), **majestic** ([v6](../15/06.md), [v11](../15/11.md)), **majesty** ([v7](../15/07.md)), and **the mountain of** \\[Yahweh’s\\] **possession** ([v17](../15/17.md)). In the last case, Yahweh’s people are brought to a high place with him.\n    * In contrast, his enemies are low. Note in [verse 7](../15/07.md), Yahweh overthrows those who **rise up against** \\[him\\]. Ideas of being low are as follows: **sank** ([v4](../15/04.md), [v10](../15/19.md)), **deeps** ([v5](../15/05.md)), **descended into the depths** ([v5](../15/05.md)), **melted away** ([v15](../15/15.md)), and **fall on them** ([v16](../15/16.md)).\n* The strength of Yahweh in [verses 2](../15/02.md), [6](../15/06.md), and [13](../15/13.md).\n* The effectiveness of Yahweh’s hand versus the enemy’s hand. Yahweh’s hand (and arm) is effective in [verses 6](../15/06.md), [12](../15/12.md), [16](../15/16.md), and [17](../15/17.md) but the enemy’s hand is ineffective despite his boasting in [verse 9](../15/09.md).\n* There is parallel imagery near the end of each section. The enemy is compared three times by simile to a heavy, inert object. In [verses 5](../15/05.md) and [16](../15/16.md) that is a **stone**, in [verse 10](../15/10.md) that is **lead**.\n* More parallel imagery occurs at the end of sections one ([v5](../15/05.md)) and two ([v10](../15/10.md)): that of the enemy sinking in the water and being covered by it.\n* In sections two and three the water ([v8](../15/08.md)) and the other peoples ([v16](../15/16.md)) are made still by Yahweh.\n* Section two begins and ends with **majestic** ([v6](../15/06.md), [v10](../15/10.md)) and that word is picked up in the beginning of section three ([v11](../15/11.md)).\n* In section two ([v9](../15/09.md)), the enemies seek to **dispossess** (or disinherit) the Israelites; in section three ([v16](../15/16.md)), the Israelites come to live in the land of Yahweh’s **possession** (or inheritance).\n* In [verse 11](../15/11.md), three themes for the third section are introduced. These are each expanded on in that section.\n    * **Holiness** occurs again in [verses 13](../15/13.md) and [16](../15/16.md)\n    * **Fear** is vividly described in [verses 14-16](../15/14.md) (shake, terror, panic, trembling, melted away, dread)\n    * Yahweh **does miracles** to protect and build a home for his people\n* [Verses 14](../15/14.md)-16a are a chiasm, a complex parallel structure where concepts are repeated in reverse order:\n    * A: 14a: peoples (nations) *become* afraid\n    * B: 14b: *inhabitants* of Philistia are afraid\n    * C: 15a: *rulers* of Edom are afraid\n    * C’: 15b: *rulers* of Moab are afraid\n    * B’: 15c: *inhabitants* of Canaan are afraid\n    * A’: 16a: people *become* afraid\n* In section three, there is another parallel structure:\n    * [v13](../15/13.md): you led this people => [v16](../15/16.md): your people pass by\n    * v13: this people you redeemed => v16: this people you acquired (or purchased or ransomed)\n    * v13: you led them to the home => [v17](../15/17.md): you will bring them … \\[to\\] the place … you made\n    * v13: of your holiness => v17: the holy place\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The Israelite’s discontent\n\nIn [verse 24](../15/24.md) the word **murmur** is introduced for the first time. This is a very strong term for “grumble” or “complain” that is used to describe the Israelites’ attitude throughout their time in the wilderness. It occurs several times in Exodus and Numbers.\n\n### Yahweh’s laws\n\nIn verses [24-26](../15/24.md), there is an introductory revelation of the requirement that Israel keep the covenant by obeying the law of Moses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])
+EXO	15	intro	ni4b			0		# Exodus 15 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nVerses 1b-18 and 21b of chapter 15 are poetry. They are a song of praise to Yahweh because he defeated and destroyed the Egyptian army ([Exodus 14:26-28](../14/26.md).). Translating poetry should be done by someone who is a skilled poet in the target language. Because the forms of poetry are so different in different languages, a translation that is good poetry in the target language may seem very different from the original poem. The structure may look quite different. The poet will be well served by looking at the entire poem from multiple perspectives. He will need to know the meaning of the poem, the themes and discourse structure of the poem, and the feelings that the poem is supposed to create in the reader at each point (UST, tNotes). He will need to understand how that was accomplished by the original form and structure (ULT). Then he will need to compose the translated poem using forms and structures that have the same or similar meaning, themes, discourse elements, and feelings in his own language.\n\n### Structure\n\nThis song follows a basic AB structure which is given to us in verse 1b-c and 21b-c:\n\n*   A - praise to Yahweh - he is magnificent (expressed in various words)\n*   B - because he defeats our enemies\n\nThe song can be divided into three major sections, each of which is patterned as: AB(a)b. Each section starts with an AB portion which is characterized by fewer verbal forms (especially the A portion). The section then elaborates on each. Note that there are other possible analyses of the structure of the poem.\n\nHere is an outline of the structure according to this model:\n\n*   Section 1 (see alternate breakdown below):\n*   1b: A “Let me sing to Yahweh, for he has triumphantly triumphed;”\n*   1c: B “the horse and the one riding it he threw into the sea.”\n*   2-3: a\n*   4-5: b\n*   Section 2:\n*   6a: A\n*   6b: B\n*   7a: a “And in the abundance of your majesty”\n*   7a-10: b “you overthrow those who rise up against you … ”\n*   Section 3:\n*   11: A\n*   12: B\n*   13a: a (possibly) “In your covenant loyalty”\n*   13a-17: b\n*   18: finale\n\nAlternate breakdown of section 1: it is possible to view 1b-c as the introduction and divide verse 2 such that:\n\n*   2a: A “Yah is my strength and my song”\n*   2b: B “and he has become my salvation”\n*   2c-3: a\n*   4-5: b\n\n### Themes:\n\nThere are several images and themes that are throughout the song as well as some that are throughout an individual section.\n\n*   “High” versus “low”: Yahweh is high, while his enemies are low.\n*   The following words are all related to the idea of being high or rising up: **triumph** ([v1](../15/01.md)), **exalt** ([v2](../15/02.md)), **majestic** ([v6](../15/06.md), [v11](../15/11.md)), **majesty** ([v7](../15/07.md)), and **the mountain of** \\[Yahweh’s\\] **possession** ([v17](../15/17.md)). In the last case, Yahweh’s people are brought to a high place with him.\n*   In contrast, his enemies are low. Note in [verse 7](../15/07.md), Yahweh overthrows those who **rise up against** \\[him\\]. Ideas of being low are as follows: **sank** ([v4](../15/04.md), [v10](../15/19.md)), **deeps** ([v5](../15/05.md)), **descended into the depths** ([v5](../15/05.md)), **melted away** ([v15](../15/15.md)), and **fall on them** ([v16](../15/16.md)).\n*   The strength of Yahweh in [verses 2](../15/02.md), [6](../15/06.md), and [13](../15/13.md).\n*   The effectiveness of Yahweh’s hand versus the enemy’s hand. Yahweh’s hand (and arm) is effective in [verses 6](../15/06.md), [12](../15/12.md), [16](../15/16.md), and [17](../15/17.md) but the enemy’s hand is ineffective despite his boasting in [verse 9](../15/09.md).\n*   There is parallel imagery near the end of each section. The enemy is compared three times by simile to a heavy, inert object. In [verses 5](../15/05.md) and [16](../15/16.md) that is a **stone**, in [verse 10](../15/10.md) that is **lead**.\n*   More parallel imagery occurs at the end of sections one ([v5](../15/05.md)) and two ([v10](../15/10.md)): that of the enemy sinking in the water and being covered by it.\n*   In sections two and three the water ([v8](../15/08.md)) and the other peoples ([v16](../15/16.md)) are made still by Yahweh.\n*   Section two begins and ends with **majestic** ([v6](../15/06.md), [v10](../15/10.md)) and that word is picked up in the beginning of section three ([v11](../15/11.md)).\n*   In section two ([v9](../15/09.md)), the enemies seek to **dispossess** (or disinherit) the Israelites; in section three ([v16](../15/16.md)), the Israelites come to live in the land of Yahweh’s **possession** (or inheritance).\n*   In [verse 11](../15/11.md), three themes for the third section are introduced. These are each expanded on in that section.\n*   **Holiness** occurs again in [verses 13](../15/13.md) and [16](../15/16.md)\n*   **Fear** is vividly described in [verses 14-16](../15/14.md) (shake, terror, panic, trembling, melted away, dread)\n*   Yahweh **does miracles** to protect and build a home for his people\n*   [Verses 14](../15/14.md)\\-16a are a chiasm, a complex parallel structure where concepts are repeated in reverse order:\n*   A: 14a: peoples (nations) *become* afraid\n*   B: 14b: *inhabitants* of Philistia are afraid\n*   C: 15a: *rulers* of Edom are afraid\n*   C’: 15b: *rulers* of Moab are afraid\n*   B’: 15c: *inhabitants* of Canaan are afraid\n*   A’: 16a: people *become* afraid\n*   In section three, there is another parallel structure:\n*   [v13](../15/13.md): you led this people => [v16](../15/16.md): your people pass by\n*   v13: this people you redeemed => v16: this people you acquired (or purchased or ransomed)\n*   v13: you led them to the home => [v17](../15/17.md): you will bring them … \\[to\\] the place … you made\n*   v13: of your holiness => v17: the holy place\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The Israelite’s discontent\n\nIn [verse 24](../15/24.md) the word **murmur** is introduced for the first time. This is a very strong term for “grumble” or “complain” that is used to describe the Israelites’ attitude throughout their time in the wilderness. It occurs several times in Exodus and Numbers.\n\n### Yahweh’s laws\n\nIn verses [24-26](../15/24.md), there is an introductory revelation of the requirement that Israel keep the covenant by obeying the law of Moses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])\n
 EXO	15	1	kw29	figs-explicit	גָאֹ֣ה גָּאָ֔ה	1	he has triumphed gloriously	It can be stated explicitly over whom Yahweh triumphed. Alternate translation: “he has achieved a glorious victory over the army of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EXO	15	1	bpyj		גָאֹ֣ה גָּאָ֔ה	1	he has triumphed gloriously	Alternate translation: “he is highly exalted” or “he is extremely high” or “he is exaltedly exalted”
 EXO	15	1	f6ue	figs-metaphor	ס֥וּס וְ⁠רֹכְב֖⁠וֹ רָמָ֥ה בַ⁠יָּֽם	1	the horse and its rider he has thrown into the sea	Moses sang about God causing the sea to cover and drown the horse and rider as if God had thrown them **into the sea**. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “he has made the horse and rider drown in the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	15	1	cr5u	figs-genericnoun	ס֥וּס וְ⁠רֹכְב֖⁠וֹ	1	the horse and its rider	This refers to many or all of the Egyptian horses and riders that were chasing the Israelites. Alternate translation: “the horses and their riders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 EXO	15	1	ex3p		וְ⁠רֹכְב֖⁠וֹ	1	rider	Here, **rider** could either refer to a person who sits on a horse or who travels in a chariot that a horse is pulling.
 EXO	15	2	pb23	figs-metaphor	עָזִּ֤⁠י…יָ֔הּ	1	Yahweh is my strength	Moses is expressing the help that he gets from Yahweh by equating Yahweh with **strength**. Use a form or metaphor from your language that would express Yahweh’s strengthening help. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Yah is the one who gives me strength” or “Yah is the strong one who protects me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EXO	15	2	vk6l	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠זִמְרָת֙ יָ֔הּ	1	song	Moses calls Yahweh his **song** because Yahweh is the one he sings about or because Yahweh causes him to sing. Use a form or metaphor from your language that would express Yahweh being a song of joy. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Yah is … the one I sing about” or “Yah makes … me sing joyfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EXO	15	2	vk6l	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠זִמְרָת֙ יָ֔הּ	1	song	Moses calls Yahweh his **song** because Yahweh is the one he sings about or because Yahweh causes him to sing. Use a form or metaphor from your language that would express Yahweh being a song of joy. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Yah is … the one I sing about” or “Yah … makes me sing joyfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	15	2	kbv7	figs-metaphor	וַֽ⁠יְהִי־לִ֖⁠י לִֽ⁠ישׁוּעָ֑ה	1	he has become my salvation	Moses calls Yahweh his salvation because Yahweh saved him. Use a form or metaphor from your language that would express Yahweh’s saving power. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and he has saved me” or “and he is the one who saves me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	15	2	rgtu	figs-parallelism	זֶ֤ה אֵלִ⁠י֙ וְ⁠אַנְוֵ֔⁠הוּ אֱלֹהֵ֥י אָבִ֖⁠י וַ⁠אֲרֹמְמֶֽ⁠נְהוּ	1	he has become my salvation	These lines are expressing very similar ideas for emphasis. If that is a normal way to make an emphatic (poetic) statement or if it would be understood in your language, you can translate in a similar way. If, however, repetition like this would create a different meaning, find a structure in your language that would fit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 EXO	15	3	p1d5	figs-metaphor	יְהוָ֖ה אִ֣ישׁ מִלְחָמָ֑ה	1	Yahweh is a warrior	Moses calls Yahweh a **man of war** because he powerfully fought against the Egyptians and won. Alternate translation: “Yahweh is like a warrior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1247,22 +1244,22 @@ EXO	15	8	qg9g	figs-activepassive	וּ⁠בְ⁠ר֤וּחַ אַפֶּ֨י⁠ך
 EXO	15	8	tguh	figs-parallelism	נֶ֣עֶרְמוּ מַ֔יִם נִצְּב֥וּ כְמוֹ־נֵ֖ד נֹזְלִ֑ים קָֽפְא֥וּ תְהֹמֹ֖ת בְּ⁠לֶב־יָֽם	1	By the blast of your nostrils	These lines are synonymous parallels where each line means basically the same thing, but each gives the reader a different poetic image. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 EXO	15	8	uevt	figs-metaphor	בְּ⁠לֶב־יָֽם	1	By the blast of your nostrils	The center or deepest part of the sea is spoken of as if the sea had a **heart**. Alternate translation: “in the center of the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	15	9	d8nk	figs-activepassive	תִּמְלָאֵ֣⁠מוֹ נַפְשִׁ֔⁠י	1	my desire will be satisfied on them	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I will satisfy my desire on them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EXO	15	9	lu0e		תּוֹרִישֵׁ֖⁠מוֹ יָדִֽ⁠י	1	my hand will destroy them	The meaning of this phrase is unclear. The word translated **dispossess** could also mean ”possess” or ”inherit.” What seems clear is that the Egyptians plan to use their power to prevent the Israelites from possessing good things. Whether this is a reference back to **plunder** earlier in the verse or to recapturing them as slaves or to taking over the Israelites’ place in the land of Goshen or to keeping them from reaching the promised land (of Yahweh’s possession, see [verse 17](../15/17.md) regarding where Yahweh will bring his people) or something else is not so clear. **Dispossess** was chosen rather than another term because the verb is in a causative form here. Alternate translation: “my hand will possess them” or “my hand will inherit them”
-EXO	15	9	sm77	figs-metonymy	תּוֹרִישֵׁ֖⁠מוֹ יָדִֽ⁠י	1	my hand will destroy them	Here **hand** is used figuratively of the Egyptians’ power (that is, their military strength). If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “my power will dispossess them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+EXO	15	9	lu0e		תּוֹרִישֵׁ֖⁠מוֹ יָדִֽ⁠י	1	my hand will destroy them	The meaning of this phrase is unclear. The word translated **dispossess** could also mean “possess” or “inherit.” What seems clear is that the Egyptians plan to use their power to prevent the Israelites from possessing good things. Whether this is a reference back to **plunder** earlier in the verse or to recapturing them as slaves or to taking over the Israelites’ place in the land of Goshen or to keeping them from reaching the promised land (of Yahweh’s possession, see [verse 17](../15/17.md) regarding where Yahweh will bring his people) or something else is not so clear. It could also refer to taking away their life and breath. **Dispossess** was chosen rather than another term because the verb is in a causative form here. Alternate translation: “my hand will possess them” or “my hand will inherit them” or “my hand will kill them”
+EXO	15	9	sm77	figs-metonymy	תּוֹרִישֵׁ֖⁠מוֹ יָדִֽ⁠י	1	my hand will destroy them	Here **hand** is used figuratively of the Egyptians’ power (that is, their military strength). If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “I will dispossess them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	15	10	yrj5	figs-metaphor	נָשַׁ֥פְתָּ בְ⁠רוּחֲ⁠ךָ֖	1	But you blew with your wind	Moses spoke about God making the **wind** blow as if God **blew** the wind through his nose or mouth. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “But you made the wind blow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	15	10	f7d3	figs-simile	צָֽלֲלוּ֙ כַּֽ⁠עוֹפֶ֔רֶת בְּ⁠מַ֖יִם אַדִּירִֽים	1	sank like lead in the mighty waters	**Lead** is a heavy metal that is commonly used to make things sink in water. It is used here to show how quickly God’s enemies were destroyed. Alternate translation: “sank as fast as a heavy piece of metal in the deep turbulent waters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
-EXO	15	11	wq2s	figs-rquestion	מִֽי־כָמֹ֤⁠כָה בָּֽ⁠אֵלִם֙ יְהוָ֔ה	1	Who is like you, Yahweh, among the gods?	Moses uses this question to show how great God is. Alternate translation: “O Yahweh, no one is like you among the gods!” or “Yahweh, none of the gods is like you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-EXO	15	11	pp57	figs-rquestion	מִ֥י כָּמֹ֖⁠כָה נֶאְדָּ֣ר בַּ⁠קֹּ֑דֶשׁ נוֹרָ֥א תְהִלֹּ֖ת עֹ֥שֵׂה פֶֽלֶא	1	Who is like you,…doing miracles?	Moses uses this question to show how great God is. Alternate translation: “No one is like you. No one is majestic in holiness as you are, no one is honored in praises as you are, and no one does miracles as you do!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+EXO	15	11	wq2s	figs-rquestion	מִֽי־כָמֹ֤⁠כָה בָּֽ⁠אֵלִם֙ יְהוָ֔ה	1	Who is like you, Yahweh, among the gods?	Moses uses this question to show how great God is. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “O Yahweh, no one is like you among the gods!” or “Yahweh, none of the gods is like you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+EXO	15	11	pp57	figs-rquestion	מִ֥י כָּמֹ֖⁠כָה נֶאְדָּ֣ר בַּ⁠קֹּ֑דֶשׁ נוֹרָ֥א תְהִלֹּ֖ת עֹ֥שֵׂה פֶֽלֶא	1	Who is like you,…doing miracles?	Moses uses this question to show how great God is. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way.  Alternate translation: “No one is like you. No one is majestic in holiness as you are, no one is honored in praises as you are, and no one does miracles as you do!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 EXO	15	12	cid8	figs-metonymy	יְמִ֣ינְ⁠ךָ֔	1	with your right hand	The phrase **right hand** represents the strong power of God. Alternate translation: “with your strong power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	15	12	bkg2	figs-metaphor	נָטִ֨יתָ֙ יְמִ֣ינְ⁠ךָ֔	1	You reached out with your right hand	Moses speaks about God causing something to happen as if God **reached out** with his** hand**. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “With your strong power you made it happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	15	12	g7bv	figs-personification	תִּבְלָעֵ֖⁠מוֹ אָֽרֶץ	1	the earth swallowed them	Moses personifies the earth as if it could swallow or devour with its mouth. Alternate translation: “the earth devours them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 EXO	15	13	cvea	figs-parallelism	נָחִ֥יתָ בְ⁠חַסְדְּ⁠ךָ֖ עַם־ז֣וּ גָּאָ֑לְתָּ נֵהַ֥לְתָּ בְ⁠עָזְּ⁠ךָ֖	1	the earth swallowed them	These lines are structural parallels where the lines are saying similar things, but the parallelism is more in the construction of the lines. **In your** is repeated and the concepts of **led** and **guided** are very similar to one another. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 EXO	15	14	qlpy	figs-parallelism		0	tremble	Verses 14-16a form a complex parallel structure where things are repeated in reverse. (See the [introduction to chapter 15](../15/intro.md) and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-EXO	15	14	zi1m		יִרְגָּז֑וּ⁠ן	1	tremble	This means to shake with fear.
+EXO	15	14	zi1m	figs-explicit	יִרְגָּז֑וּ⁠ן	1	tremble	This means to shake with fear. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EXO	15	14	uqf7	figs-personification	חִ֣יל אָחַ֔ז יֹשְׁבֵ֖י פְּלָֽשֶׁת	1	terror will seize the inhabitants of Philistia	Moses speaks of **anguish** as if it were a person that could forcefully grab hold of someone and make them extremely afraid. Alternate translation: “the inhabitants of Philistia will be afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 EXO	15	15	qyix	figs-personification	אֵילֵ֣י מוֹאָ֔ב יֹֽאחֲזֵ֖⁠מוֹ רָ֑עַד	1	terror will seize the inhabitants of Philistia	Moses speaks of **trembling** as if it were a person that could forcefully grab hold of someone and make them extremely afraid. Alternate translation: “the leaders of Moab will be afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 EXO	15	15	ya48	figs-metaphor	נָמֹ֕גוּ	1	will melt away	Moses uses the phrase, **melted away,** to speak of people becoming weak because of their fear. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “became weak from fear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EXO	15	16	nk67	figs-doublet	תִּפֹּ֨ל עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֤ם אֵימָ֨תָ⁠ה֙ וָ⁠פַ֔חַד	1	Terror and dread will fall on them	**Terror and dread** form a doublet meaning “very afraid.” If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “They will become very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+EXO	15	16	nk67	figs-doublet	תִּפֹּ֨ל עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֤ם אֵימָ֨תָ⁠ה֙ וָ⁠פַ֔חַד	1	Terror and dread will fall on them	**Terror and dread** form a doublet meaning “extremely fearful.” If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “They will become extremely fearful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 EXO	15	16	kbt5	figs-metaphor	תִּפֹּ֨ל עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֤ם אֵימָ֨תָ⁠ה֙ וָ⁠פַ֔חַד	1	Terror and dread will fall on them	**Terror and dread** are pictured as physical objects that could **fall on** people. The image might be of them crushing people or being a heavy weight that people struggle under (however, the image is not specified). It means that the people will feel the emotions of terror and dread very strongly. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “They will be overwhelmed with feelings of terror and dread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	15	16	t2yp	figs-metonymy	בִּ⁠גְדֹ֥ל זְרוֹעֲ⁠ךָ֖	1	Because of your arm’s power	Yahweh’s **arm** represents his great strength. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Because of your great strength” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	15	16	umm7	figs-simile	יִדְּמ֣וּ כָּ⁠אָ֑בֶן	1	they will become as still as a stone	This could mean: (1) “they will be silent like stone” or (2) “they will be motionless as stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
@@ -1280,20 +1277,20 @@ EXO	15	21	hvu1	figs-metaphor	ס֥וּס וְ⁠רֹכְב֖⁠וֹ רָמָ֥ה
 EXO	15	22	iw9n	grammar-collectivenouns	יִשְׂרָאֵל֙	1	Moses led Israel	The word **Israel** represents the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “Moses led the Israelite people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 EXO	15	22	c7pe	translate-names	מִדְבַּר־שׁ֑וּר	1	wilderness of Shur	We do not know the exact location of this place. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EXO	15	23	a9pv	translate-names	מָרָ֔תָ⁠ה	1	Marah	We do not know the exact location of **Marah**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-EXO	15	24	n64m		וַ⁠יִּלֹּ֧נוּ הָ⁠עָ֛ם עַל־מֹשֶׁ֥ה	1	complained to Moses and said	**Murmur** is a very strong term for “grumble” or “complain” that is used to describe the Israelites’ attitude throughout their time in the wilderness. It occurs several times in Exodus and Numbers. Alternate translation: “And the people were unhappy and told Moses” or “And the people angrily told Moses”
+EXO	15	24	n64m		וַ⁠יִּלֹּ֧נוּ הָ⁠עָ֛ם עַל־מֹשֶׁ֥ה	1	complained to Moses and said	Murmur is a very strong term for “grumble” or “complain” that is used to describe the Israelites’ attitude throughout their time in the wilderness. It occurs several times in Exodus and Numbers. Alternate translation: “And the people complained against Moses” or “And the people grumbled at Moses”
 EXO	15	26	l2hx	figs-123person	לְ⁠ק֣וֹל׀ יְהוָ֣ה אֱלֹהֶ֗י⁠ךָ	1	the voice of Yahweh your God	Yahweh is speaking about his own voice. Alternate translation: “to my voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 EXO	15	26	oh8c	figs-metonymy	לְ⁠ק֣וֹל׀ יְהוָ֣ה אֱלֹהֶ֗י⁠ךָ	1	the voice of Yahweh your God	Yahweh’s voice represents what he says. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to what I say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	15	26	sq5x	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠הַ⁠יָּשָׁ֤ר בְּ⁠עֵינָי⁠ו֙ תַּעֲשֶׂ֔ה	1	do what is right in his eyes	The **eyes** represent seeing, and seeing represents thoughts or judgment. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and do what Yahweh considers to be right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	15	26	bgcf	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠הַֽאֲזַנְתָּ֙ לְ⁠מִצְוֺתָ֔י⁠ו	1	do what is right in his eyes	The **ear** represents listening, and listening represents obeying. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and you carefully obey his commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EXO	15	26	m4cn	figs-metaphor	כָּֽל־הַ⁠מַּֽחֲלָ֞ה אֲשֶׁר־שַׂ֤מְתִּי בְ⁠מִצְרַ֨יִם֙ לֹא־אָשִׂ֣ים עָלֶ֔י⁠ךָ	1	I will put on you none of the diseases	God speaks of causing people to have **diseases** as putting diseases on them. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “I will not cause any of you to have the diseases that I cause the Egyptians to have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EXO	15	26	m4cn	figs-metaphor	כָּֽל־הַ⁠מַּֽחֲלָ֞ה אֲשֶׁר־שַׂ֤מְתִּי בְ⁠מִצְרַ֨יִם֙ לֹא־אָשִׂ֣ים עָלֶ֔י⁠ךָ	1	I will put on you none of the diseases	God speaks of causing people to have diseases as putting diseases on them. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “I will not cause any of you to have the diseases that I cause the Egyptians to have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	15	27	did8	translate-names	אֵילִ֔מָ⁠ה	1	Elim	**Elim** is an oasis in the desert, a place with water and shade trees. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EXO	15	27	p64y	translate-numbers	וְ⁠שִׁבְעִ֣ים	1	seventy	Alternate translation: “and seventy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-EXO	16	intro	nkd7			0		# Exodus 16 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Complaints<br><br>After complaining about the water, the Israelites complained that they had less food than in Egypt. This is intended to show their ungratefulness and their sinful view of Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])<br><br>### Prohibition against storing food<br><br>The people were not allowed to store the food, called manna, that Yahweh provided to them. This is because they were to trust in Yahweh to provide for their needs every day. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/trust]])<br><br>### Sabbath<br><br>This is the first recorded celebration of the Sabbath rest. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])<br><br>## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Bread as food<br><br>Yahweh speaks of the food that he will send as if it were bread. The manna he gave them was perhaps not literally bread. The Israelites would eat this food every day, just as they had eaten bread every day before this. Alternate translations: “food” or “food like bread” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/bread]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>### Chronology<br><br>[Verses 34](../../exo/16/34.md)-36 are written from a much later perspective. Translators will need to find a way to show that this portion gives background information from a much later point (at least 40 years).<br><br>### Ark of the covenant<br><br>Related to the chronology issue, although the covenant has not yet been made, it is referenced in [Exodus 16:34](../../exo/16/34.md). This is probably an editorial comment made after these events. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])<br><br>### Wilderness of Sin<br><br>Sin is the name of a part of the Sinai Wilderness. It is the description of a place, and it has nothing to do with sinning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+EXO	16	intro	nkd7			0		# Exodus 16 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure and Formatting\nThis entire chapter is the story of the Israelites complaining about food and Yahweh providing food. Verses 22-30 introduce  the Sabbath.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Complaints\n\nAfter complaining about the water, the Israelites complained that they had less food than in Egypt. This is intended to show their ungratefulness and their sinful view of Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n### Prohibition against storing food\n\nThe people were not allowed to store the food, called manna, that Yahweh provided to them. This is because they were to trust in Yahweh to provide for their needs every day. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/trust]])\n\n### Sabbath\n\nThis is the first recorded celebration of the Sabbath rest. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])\n\n## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Bread as food\n\nYahweh speaks of the food that he will send as if it were bread. The manna he gave them was perhaps not literally bread. The Israelites would eat this food every day, just as they had eaten bread every day before this. Alternate translations: “food” or “food like bread” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/bread]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### Chronology\n\n[Verses 34](../../exo/16/34.md)-36 are written from a much later perspective. Translators will need to find a way to show that this portion gives background information from a much later point (at least 40 years).\n\n### Box of the Covenant\n\nRelated to the chronology issue, although the covenant has not yet been made, it is referenced in [Exodus 16:34](../../exo/16/34.md). This is probably an editorial comment made after these events. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])\n\n### Wilderness of Sin\n\nSin is the name of a part of the Sinai Wilderness. It is the description of a place, and it has nothing to do with sinning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EXO	16	1	gw67	translate-names	סִ֔ין	1	wilderness of Sin	The word **Sin** here is the Hebrew name of the wilderness. It is not the English word “sin.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EXO	16	1	h44x	translate-hebrewmonths	בַּ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֥ר יוֹם֙ לַ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֔י	1	on the fifteenth day of the second month	This time coincides with the end of April and the beginning of May on Western calendars. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
 EXO	16	1	u2aq	translate-ordinal	בַּ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֥ר יוֹם֙ לַ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֔י	1	on the fifteenth day of the second month	Alternate translation: “on day 15 of the second month” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 EXO	16	2	h938	figs-hyperbole	וַיִּלּ֜וֹנוּ כָּל־עֲדַ֧ת בְּנֵי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֛ל	1	The whole community of Israelites complained	Here, **all** is a generalization. Alternate translation: “And many of the community of the sons of Israel murmured” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-EXO	16	2	nx6f		וַיִּלּ֜וֹנוּ	1	complained	Alternate translation: “And … were angry and spoke”
+EXO	16	2	nx6f		וַיִּלּ֜וֹנוּ	1	complained	Alternate translation: “And … spoke angrily”
 EXO	16	3	nwy6	figs-hypo	מִֽי־יִתֵּ֨ן מוּתֵ֤⁠נוּ	1	If only we had died	This is a way of saying that they wished that they had died. It is a hypothetical past statement. Translate it in a way that makes it clear that this did not actually happen. Alternate translation: “We wish that we had died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 EXO	16	3	g1n1	figs-metonymy	בְ⁠יַד־יְהוָה֙	1	by Yahweh’s hand	The phrase **the hand of Yahweh** represents Yahweh’s action. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “by Yahweh’s action” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	16	4	kls5	figs-metaphor	מַמְטִ֥יר לָ⁠כֶ֛ם לֶ֖חֶם מִן־הַ⁠שָּׁמָ֑יִם	1	I will rain down bread from heaven for you	God speaks of food coming **down from heaven** as if it were rain. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “make bread come down from heaven like rain” or “make bread fall to you from the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1301,16 +1298,16 @@ EXO	16	4	yew5		בְּ⁠תוֹרָתִ֖⁠י	1	my law	Alternate translation: 
 EXO	16	5	p1f6		וְ⁠הָיָה֙ בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שִּׁשִּׁ֔י וְ⁠הֵכִ֖ינוּ	1	It will come about on the sixth day, that they	Alternate translation: “It will happen on the sixth day that they will prepare” or “On the sixth day they will prepare”
 EXO	16	5	cl74	translate-ordinal	בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שִּׁשִּׁ֔י	1	on the sixth day	Alternate translation: “on day 6” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 EXO	16	5	t5il		מִשְׁנֶ֔ה	1	twice	two times
-EXO	16	7	zb21	figs-rquestion	וְ⁠נַ֣חְנוּ מָ֔ה כִּ֥י תלונו עָלֵֽי⁠נוּ	1	Who are we for you to complain against us?	Moses and Aaron used this question to show the people that it was foolish to complain against them. Alternate translation: “We are not powerful enough for you to complain against us.” or “It is foolish to complain against us, because we cannot do what you want.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-EXO	16	8	pn4e	figs-rquestion	וְ⁠נַ֣חְנוּ מָ֔ה	1	Who are Aaron and I?	Moses used this question to show the people that he and Aaron did not have the power to give them what they wanted. Alternate translation: “Aaron and I cannot give you what you want.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+EXO	16	7	zb21	figs-rquestion	וְ⁠נַ֣חְנוּ מָ֔ה כִּ֥י תלונו עָלֵֽי⁠נוּ	1	Who are we for you to complain against us?	Moses and Aaron used this question to show the people that it was foolish to complain against them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We are not powerful enough for you to complain against us.” or “It is foolish to complain against us, because we cannot do what you want.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+EXO	16	8	pn4e	figs-rquestion	וְ⁠נַ֣חְנוּ מָ֔ה	1	Who are Aaron and I?	Moses used this question to show the people that he and Aaron did not have the power to give them what they wanted. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Aaron and I cannot give you what you want.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 EXO	16	8	vdr8	figs-explicit	וְ⁠נַ֣חְנוּ מָ֔ה לֹא־עָלֵ֥י⁠נוּ תְלֻנֹּתֵי⁠כֶ֖ם כִּ֥י עַל־יְהוָֽה	1	Your complaints are not against us; they are against Yahweh	The people were complaining against Moses and Aaron, who were Yahweh’s servants. So by complaining against them, the people were really complaining against Yahweh. Alternate translation: “Your complaints are not really against us; they are against Yahweh, because we are his servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EXO	16	9	pqgo	figs-quotesinquotes	וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר מֹשֶׁה֙ אֶֽל־אַהֲרֹ֔ן אֱמֹ֗ר אֶֽל־כָּל־עֲדַת֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל קִרְב֖וּ	1	Your complaints are not against us; they are against Yahweh	There are two layers of quotes here. You may want to translate one or the other as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the layers of quotations in this passage. Alternative translation: “And Moses told Aaron to tell all of the congregation of the sons of Israel, “Approach” or “And Moses told Aaron, “Tell all of the congregation of the sons of Israel to approach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 EXO	16	10	q4ax		וַ⁠יְהִ֗י	1	It came about	This phrase is used here to mark an important event in the story. The important event here is the people seeing Yahweh’s glory. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
-EXO	16	10	b6rp		וְ⁠הִנֵּה֙	1	behold	The word **behold** here shows that the people saw something interesting.
+EXO	16	10	b6rp		וְ⁠הִנֵּה֙	1	behold	The word **behold** here shows that the people saw something extraordinary.
 EXO	16	13	aas8		וַ⁠יְהִ֣י	1	It came about…that	This phrase is used here to mark an important part of the events. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
 EXO	16	13	eu1x	translate-unknown	הַ⁠שְּׂלָ֔ו	1	quails	The word **quail** means a type of small, plump game bird. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	16	14	k5lb	translate-unknown	כַּ⁠כְּפֹ֖ר	1	like frost	Frost is frozen dew that forms on the ground. It is very fine. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-EXO	16	14	jern	figs-simile	כַּ⁠כְּפֹ֖ר	1	like frost	The original readers knew what frost is like, so this phrase would help them understand what the flakes were like. Alternate translation: “that looked like frost” or “that was fine like frost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+EXO	16	14	jern	figs-simile	כַּ⁠כְּפֹ֖ר	1	like frost	The original readers knew what frost is like, so this phrase would help them understand what the flakes were like. Alternate translation: “flakes that looked like frost” or “flakes that were fine like frost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 EXO	16	16	gotf		אִ֖ישׁ לְ⁠פִ֣י אָכְל֑⁠וֹ	1	omer	Alternate translation: “according to how much each will eat”
 EXO	16	16	fqp9	translate-bvolume	עֹ֣מֶר	1	omer	2 liters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
 EXO	16	16	mnwy		עֹ֣מֶר לַ⁠גֻּלְגֹּ֗לֶת מִסְפַּר֙ נַפְשֹׁ֣תֵי⁠כֶ֔ם אִ֛ישׁ לַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר בְּ⁠אָהֳל֖⁠וֹ תִּקָּֽחוּ	1	omer	Alternate translation: “take an omer per person according to how many people are in the gatherer’s tent”
@@ -1325,7 +1322,7 @@ EXO	16	24	y4d9		וְ⁠לֹ֣א הִבְאִ֔ישׁ	1	did not become foul	Alter
 EXO	16	25	pr1p		כִּֽי־שַׁבָּ֥ת הַ⁠יּ֖וֹם לַ⁠יהוָ֑ה	1	today is a day reserved as a Sabbath to honor Yahweh	Alternate translation: “today is a Sabbath, a day to honor Yahweh by not working”
 EXO	16	26	jv77	translate-ordinal	וּ⁠בַ⁠יּ֧וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֛י	1	but the seventh day	Alternate translation: “but on day seven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 EXO	16	27	qf14		וְ⁠לֹ֖א מָצָֽאוּ	1	they found none	Alternate translation: “but they did not find any manna”
-EXO	16	28	e1vx	figs-rquestion	עַד־אָ֨נָה֙ מֵֽאַנְתֶּ֔ם לִ⁠שְׁמֹ֥ר מִצְוֺתַ֖⁠י וְ⁠תוֹרֹתָֽ⁠י	1	How long will you refuse to keep my commandments and my laws?	God used this question to scold the people because they did not obey his laws. Alternate translation: “You people still do not keep my commandments and laws!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+EXO	16	28	e1vx	figs-rquestion	עַד־אָ֨נָה֙ מֵֽאַנְתֶּ֔ם לִ⁠שְׁמֹ֥ר מִצְוֺתַ֖⁠י וְ⁠תוֹרֹתָֽ⁠י	1	How long will you refuse to keep my commandments and my laws?	God used this question to scold the people because they did not obey his laws. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You people still do not keep my commandments and laws!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 EXO	16	28	q41d	figs-youcrowd	מֵֽאַנְתֶּ֔ם	1	General Information:	Yahweh speaks to Moses, but the word **you** refers to the people of Israel in general. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
 EXO	16	28	vnq7		לִ⁠שְׁמֹ֥ר מִצְוֺתַ֖⁠י וְ⁠תוֹרֹתָֽ⁠י	1	to keep my commandments and my laws	Alternate translation: “to obey my commandments and my laws”
 EXO	16	29	p22l	figs-metaphor	כִּֽי־יְהוָה֮ נָתַ֣ן לָ⁠כֶ֣ם הַ⁠שַּׁבָּת֒	1	Yahweh has given you the Sabbath	Yahweh speaks about teaching people to rest on the Sabbath as if the **Sabbath** were a gift. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “I, Yahweh, have taught you to rest on the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1337,9 +1334,9 @@ EXO	16	31	vrl4		כְּ⁠צַפִּיחִ֥ת	1	wafers	**Wafers** are very thin
 EXO	16	33	ggba	figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֔ה	1	wafers	Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “in the presence of Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])<br>
 EXO	16	34	x9vr	writing-background		0	wafers	Verses 34-36 provide a later commentary on the chapter. If your language has a way of marking background information you may want to use it starting from verse 34 or verse 35. You may want to leave verse 34 more connected to verse 33 even though it references the **Covenant**, which has not been given yet. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 EXO	16	34	jzcz	figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הָ⁠עֵדֻ֖ת	1	wafers	Here, **face** figuratively represents being near the **Covenant.** Alternate translation: “near the Covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-EXO	16	36	g8ns	translate-bvolume	וְ⁠הָ⁠עֹ֕מֶר עֲשִׂרִ֥ית הָ⁠אֵיפָ֖ה הֽוּא	1	Now an omer is a tenth of an ephah	An **omer** and an **ephah** are both containers for measuring volume. The original readers would have known how much an ephah was. This sentence would help them know how much an omer was. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
+EXO	16	36	g8ns	translate-bvolume	וְ⁠הָ⁠עֹ֕מֶר עֲשִׂרִ֥ית הָ⁠אֵיפָ֖ה הֽוּא	1	Now an omer is a tenth of an ephah	An **omer** and an **ephah** are both units of dry measurement. An ephah is approximately equal to a bushel, and an omer is one-tenth of an ephah. The original readers would have known how much an ephah was. This sentence would help them know how much an omer was. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
 EXO	16	36	a9uh	translate-fraction	וְ⁠הָ⁠עֹ֕מֶר עֲשִׂרִ֥ית הָ⁠אֵיפָ֖ה הֽוּא	1	Now an omer is a tenth of an ephah	For languages that do not use fractions, this can be reworded. Alternate translation: “Now ten omers equal one ephah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
-EXO	17	intro	f12q			0		# Exodus 17 General Notes\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nMoses uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. The purpose of these questions is to convince people of their sin. Likewise, the people’s rhetorical question shows their ignorance. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Wilderness of Sin\n\nSin is the name of a part of the Sinai Wilderness. It is not the description of a place, and it has nothing to do with the act of sinning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n\n### Naming\n\nAs in the last couple of chapters, places and things are named for what happens in that location. In this chapter is Massah (which means “test”), Meribah (“arguing”), and an alter named “Yahweh is my Banner,” because Yahweh will be at war with the Amalekites forever.
+EXO	17	intro	f12q			0		7# Exodus 17 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n\n- v. 1-7: the Israelites complain and Yahweh gives them water\n- v. 8-16: Israel defeats Amalek in battle\n\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nMoses uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. The purpose of these questions is to convince people of their sin. Likewise, the people’s rhetorical question shows their ignorance. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Wilderness of Sin\n\nSin is the name of a part of the Sinai Wilderness. It is not the description of a place, and it has nothing to do with the act of sinning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n\n### Naming\n\nAs in the last couple of chapters, places and things are named for what happens in that location. In this chapter is Massah (which means “test”), Meribah (“arguing”), and an alter named “Yahweh is my Banner,” because Yahweh will be at war with the Amalekites forever.\n
 EXO	17	1	jzz5	writing-newevent	וַ֠⁠יִּסְעוּ כָּל־עֲדַ֨ת בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֧ל	1	wilderness of Sin	A new scene begins here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 EXO	17	1	h1li	translate-names	סִ֛ין	1	wilderness of Sin	The word **Sin** here is the Hebrew name of the wilderness. It is not the English word “sin.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 16:1](../16/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EXO	17	1	e7jv	figs-metonymy	עַל־פִּ֣י יְהוָ֑ה	1	wilderness of Sin	Here, **mouth** refers figuratively to Yahweh’s commands (that is, what he says to do). If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “at the command of Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -1361,14 +1358,14 @@ EXO	17	10	itcx	writing-participants	וְ⁠ח֔וּר	1	Hur	**Hur** is a new par
 EXO	17	11	x5ex	figs-synecdoche	וְ⁠גָבַ֣ר יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל…וְ⁠גָבַ֥ר עֲמָלֵֽק	1	Israel was winning…Amalek would begin to win	The words **Israel** and **Amalek** represent the fighters from those groups. Alternate translation: “the Israelite fighters were winning … the Amalekite fighters would begin to win” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 EXO	17	12	hxt8	figs-idiom	וִ⁠ידֵ֤י מֹשֶׁה֙ כְּבֵדִ֔ים	1	hands became heavy	The author writes of Moses’ arms becoming tired as if his **hands became heavy**. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And Moses’ arms became tired” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EXO	17	12	js2p		מִ⁠זֶּ֤ה אֶחָד֙ וּ⁠מִ⁠זֶּ֣ה אֶחָ֔ד	1	hands became heavy	Alternate translation: “one on one side, and one on the other”
-EXO	17	13	plp3	figs-metonymy	לְ⁠פִי־חָֽרֶב	1	with the sword	The **sword** represents battle. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in the battle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+EXO	17	13	plp3	figs-metonymy	לְ⁠פִי־חָֽרֶב	1	with the sword	The **sword** represents battle. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in combat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	17	14	c5rl	figs-metaphor	מָחֹ֤ה אֶמְחֶה֙ אֶת־זֵ֣כֶר עֲמָלֵ֔ק	1	I will completely blot out the memory of Amalek	God speaks of destroying Amalek as if he were removing people’s memory of Amalek. When a group of people is completely destroyed, there is nothing to remind people about them. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “I will completely destroy Amalek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	17	14	jm77	figs-metonymy	עֲמָלֵ֔ק	1	Amalek	The Amalekites are referred to by naming their ancestor. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: Amalekites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	17	14	n42j	figs-hyperbole	מִ⁠תַּ֖חַת הַ⁠שָּׁמָֽיִם	1	Amalek	This phrase makes an intentionally broad image and represents all people everywhere. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from all people everywhere” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 EXO	17	15	fneg		נִסִּֽ⁠י	1	Amalek	A **banner** is something lifted up high, perhaps like a flag, that people can see from a distance and follow. Alternate translation: “is my military standard” or “is my guidon”
 EXO	17	16	lr14		כִּֽי־יָד֙ עַל־כֵּ֣ס יָ֔הּ	1	Amalek	The Hebrew here is very difficult, and there are a variety of opinions regarding the meaning. Questions include: (1) Whose hand is referred to? Amalek’s, Yahweh’s, or Moses’? (2) What is the hand on (or against)? Yahweh’s throne or banner? (3) What is the meaning of the Hebrew preposition meaning on, against, or above? What does that signify? Rebellion, or taking an oath, or holding onto a symbol of power? If there is another translation in your region, it may be best to simply follow the interpretation it gives. Alternate translation: “Because a hand was on the throne of Yah” or “Because a hand was on the banner of Yah”
 EXO	17	16	sw1q		מִלְחָמָ֥ה לַ⁠יהוָ֖ה בַּֽ⁠עֲמָלֵ֑ק	1	Amalek	This phrase has no verbs in Hebrew. You may need to translate the noun **war** as a verb. Alternate translation: “Yahweh will make war with Amalek” or “Yahweh will war against Amalek”
-EXO	18	intro	t8g2			0		# Exodus 18 General Notes\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Leadership lessons\n\nJethro taught Moses an important leadership lesson in this chapter. Many scholars look at this chapter for important leadership lessons. Moses delegated some of his responsibilities to other godly men so that he would not become worn out by all the demands made of him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])\n\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties\n\n### Order of events\n\nThe timing of the events in [verse 2](../18/02.md) is not clear and, whatever their timing, may be difficult to translate. The question: Is Jethro’s **taking** Zipporah related to the past event of Moses sending her back to him at some otherwise unmentioned point in time, or is Jethro’s **taking** related to his coming to meet Moses in [verse 5](../18/05.md).\n\n### Verse 11\n\n[Verse 11](../18/11.md) is difficult in the original and requires interpretation.\n\n### God and Yahweh\n\nIn this chapter, God, who is named Yahweh in much of the rest of the book, is mostly referred to as God instead by his name as is usual. Translations should not suggest that they are not different beings.\n\n### Kinship: Father-in-law\n\nJethro is the father of Moses’ wife. Some languages may make a distinction between that and a woman’s father-in-law. If that is the case, note it in verses: 1-2, 5-8, 12, 14-15, 17, 24, and 27. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])\n\n\n### Participant reference\n\nJethro is often referred to simply as the father-in-law of Moses in this chapter. He is also named explicitly (referred to by name) an unusually high number of times (it would be more usual to have more pronouns referring to him). Frequent use of his name is likely to emphasize his familial ties and authority (or honored status). Some languages may need to alter the way he is referred to for naturalness or to convey the same sense of familial ties and authority (or honored status).
+EXO	18	intro	t8g2			0		# Exodus 18 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n\n- v. 1-12: Jethro visits Moses and hears all that Yahweh has done\n- v. 13-27: Jethro observes Moses and advises him to set up a subsidiarity leadership structure; Moses does so\n\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Leadership lessons\n\nJethro taught Moses an important leadership lesson in this chapter. Many scholars look at this chapter for important leadership lessons. Moses delegated some of his responsibilities to other godly men so that he would not become worn out by all the demands made of him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])\n\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties\n\n### Order of events\n\nThe timing of the events in [verse 2](../18/02.md) is not clear and, whatever their timing, may be difficult to translate. The question: Is Jethro’s **taking** Zipporah related to the past event of Moses sending her back to him at some otherwise unmentioned point in time, or is Jethro’s **taking** related to his coming to meet Moses in [verse 5](../18/05.md).\n\n### Verse 11\n\n[Verse 11](../18/11.md) is difficult in the original and requires interpretation.\n\n### God and Yahweh\n\nIn this chapter, God, who is named Yahweh in much of the rest of the book, is mostly referred to as God instead of by his name as is usual. Translations should not suggest that they are not different beings.\n\n### Kinship: Father-in-law\n\nJethro is the father of Moses’ wife. Some languages may make a distinction between that and a woman’s father-in-law. If that is the case, note it in verses: 1-2, 5-8, 12, 14-15, 17, 24, and 27. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])\n\n\n### Participant reference\n\nJethro is often referred to simply as the father-in-law of Moses in this chapter. He is also named explicitly (referred to by name) an unusually high number of times (it would be more usual to have more pronouns referring to him). Frequent use of his name is likely to emphasize his familial ties and authority (or honored status). Some languages may need to alter the way he is referred to for naturalness or to convey the same sense of familial ties and authority (or honored status).\n
 EXO	18	1	nl86	translate-kinship	חֹתֵ֣ן מֹשֶׁ֔ה	1	Moses’ father-in-law	The label, **father-in-law of Moses** refers to the father of the wife of Moses. If your language uses a different term for a man’s father-in-law than for a woman’s father-in-law, choose the appropriate one here. Note the use of this term also in verses: 2, 5-8, 12, 14-15, 17, 24, and 27. Alternate translation: “the father of the wife of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
 EXO	18	2	zw6h		וַ⁠יִּקַּ֗ח יִתְרוֹ֙ חֹתֵ֣ן מֹשֶׁ֔ה אֶת־צִפֹּרָ֖ה אֵ֣שֶׁת מֹשֶׁ֑ה	1	took Zipporah, Moses’ wife	This could mean: (1) Jethro took Zipporah to Moses, or (2) Jethro had earlier welcomed back Zipporah.
 EXO	18	2	chy6	figs-explicit	אַחַ֖ר שִׁלּוּחֶֽי⁠הָ	1	after he had sent her home	This is something Moses had done earlier. The full meaning of this can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “after Moses had sent her home to her father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1383,12 +1380,12 @@ EXO	18	8	a1ra	figs-metaphor	כָּל־הַ⁠תְּלָאָה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר 
 EXO	18	9	wp1p	figs-metonymy	מִ⁠יַּ֥ד מִצְרָֽיִם	1	the hand of the Egyptians	The hand represents the power of someone to do something. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from the power of the Egyptians” or “from what the Egyptians were doing to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	18	10	nrv7	figs-metonymy	מִ⁠יַּ֥ד מִצְרַ֖יִם וּ⁠מִ⁠יַּ֣ד פַּרְעֹ֑ה…מִ⁠תַּ֖חַת יַד־מִצְרָֽיִם	1	the hand of the Egyptians…the hand of Pharaoh	The hand represents the power of someone to do something. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from the power of the Egyptians and from the power of Pharaoh … from the power of the Egyptians” or “from what the Egyptians and Pharaoh were doing to you … from what the Egyptians were doing to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	18	11	kmk7		כִּ֣י בַ⁠דָּבָ֔ר	1	the hand of the Egyptians…the hand of Pharaoh	Here, **because of the matter** probably refers back to Yahweh’s rescue of Israel. Alternate translation: “because of what he did”
-EXO	18	11	ljj6	figs-explicit	אֲשֶׁ֥ר זָד֖וּ עֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם	1	the hand of the Egyptians…the hand of Pharaoh	The most natural referent for **they** is **the gods**, who, perhaps through their agents (Pharaoh and the Egyptians), fought against Yahweh and oppressed the Israelites. This would connect back to [Exodus 12:12](../12/12.md) where Yahweh declares that he is bringing judgment on the gods of Egypt. You may need to make some part of this explicit. Alternate translation: “in which they proudly fought Yahweh by oppressing Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+EXO	18	11	ljj6	figs-explicit	אֲשֶׁ֥ר זָד֖וּ עֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם	1	the hand of the Egyptians…the hand of Pharaoh	The most natural referent for **they** is **the gods**, who, perhaps through their agents (Pharaoh and the Egyptians), fought against Yahweh and oppressed the Israelites (**them**). This would connect back to [Exodus 12:12](../12/12.md) where Yahweh declares that he is bringing judgment on the gods of Egypt. You may need to make some part of this explicit. Alternate translation: “in which they proudly fought Yahweh by oppressing Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EXO	18	12	voi9	figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הָ⁠אֱלֹהִֽים	1	the hand of the Egyptians…the hand of Pharaoh	Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of God. In this case it likely means that this was a worship event. Alternate translation: “in the presence of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	18	13	ni2b	writing-newevent	וַ⁠יְהִי֙ מִֽ⁠מָּחֳרָ֔ת	1	the hand of the Egyptians…the hand of Pharaoh	A new scene begins here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 EXO	18	13	ano2	translate-symaction	וַ⁠יֵּ֥שֶׁב מֹשֶׁ֖ה לִ⁠שְׁפֹּ֣ט	1	the hand of the Egyptians…the hand of Pharaoh	Sitting was symbolic of having a position of authority. Alternate translation: “Moses sat down as a judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 EXO	18	13	wzea		מִן־הַ⁠בֹּ֖קֶר עַד־הָ⁠עָֽרֶב	1	the hand of the Egyptians…the hand of Pharaoh	Alternate translation: “all day”
-EXO	18	14	bax5	figs-rquestion	מָֽה־הַ⁠דָּבָ֤ר הַ⁠זֶּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֨ר אַתָּ֤ה עֹשֶׂה֙ לָ⁠עָ֔ם	1	What is this that you are doing with the people?	Jethro uses this question to show Moses that what he was doing was not good. This rhetorical question can be translated as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should not be doing all of this for the people!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+EXO	18	14	bax5	figs-rquestion	מָֽה־הַ⁠דָּבָ֤ר הַ⁠זֶּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֨ר אַתָּ֤ה עֹשֶׂה֙ לָ⁠עָ֔ם	1	What is this that you are doing with the people?	Jethro uses this question to show Moses that what he was doing was not good. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not be doing all of this for the people!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 EXO	18	14	b5wj	figs-rquestion	מַדּ֗וּעַ אַתָּ֤ה יוֹשֵׁב֙ לְ⁠בַדֶּ֔⁠ךָ וְ⁠כָל־הָ⁠עָ֛ם נִצָּ֥ב עָלֶ֖י⁠ךָ מִן־בֹּ֥קֶר עַד־עָֽרֶב	1	Why is it that you sit alone…from morning until evening?	Jethro used this question to show Moses that he was doing too much. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Why are you doing all this for the people? Why are you doing this by yourself, and why are all the people standing around you from morning until evening, asking you to make decisions for them?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 EXO	18	14	cfd1	figs-metonymy	אַתָּ֤ה יוֹשֵׁב֙ לְ⁠בַדֶּ֔⁠ךָ	1	you sit alone	The word **sit** here is a metonym for “judge.” Judges would sit while they listened to people’s complaints. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “do you judge alone” or “are you the only one who judges the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	18	14	tiqs	figs-explicit	נִצָּ֥ב עָלֶ֖י⁠ךָ	1	you sit alone	The people came to be near Moses so that they could get a chance for him to hear their petitions. You could state that explicitly if it would be more clear. Alternate translation: “petition you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1399,11 +1396,10 @@ EXO	18	19	v8i9	figs-metaphor	וִ⁠יהִ֥י אֱלֹהִ֖ים עִמָּ֑
 EXO	18	19	w4r8	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠הֵבֵאתָ֥ אַתָּ֛ה אֶת־הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֖ים אֶל־הָ⁠אֱלֹהִֽים	1	you bring their disputes to him	Jethro speaks of Moses telling God about their disputes as if they were something that Moses was bringing to God. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and you tell God about their disputes” or and “you tell God what they are arguing about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	18	20	w3vf	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠הוֹדַעְתָּ֣ לָ⁠הֶ֗ם אֶת־הַ⁠דֶּ֨רֶךְ֙ יֵ֣לְכוּ בָ֔⁠הּ	1	You must show them the way to walk	Jethro speaks of living or behaving like walking. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “You must show them how to live” or “You must show them how to behave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	18	21	p5ap		וְ⁠אַתָּ֣ה תֶחֱזֶ֣ה	1	Furthermore, you must choose	Alternate translation: “As for you, search out” or “You must also search out”
-EXO	18	21	n936	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠שַׂמְתָּ֣ עֲלֵ⁠הֶ֗ם	1	You must put them over people	Jethro speaks of giving them authority over people as putting them over people. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “You must give them authority over people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EXO	18	21	n936	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠שַׂמְתָּ֣ עֲלֵ⁠הֶ֗ם	1	You must put them over people	Jethro speaks of giving them authority over people as putting them over people. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “You should select leaders for the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	18	21	xprc	writing-pronouns	וְ⁠שַׂמְתָּ֣ עֲלֵ⁠הֶ֗ם	1	You must put them over people	Here, **them** refers to the Israelites. Moses is advised to place good men in charge of groups of Israelites. Alternate translation: “And you must appoint these men over the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 EXO	18	21	d2hv	translate-numbers	שָׂרֵ֤י אֲלָפִים֙ שָׂרֵ֣י מֵא֔וֹת שָׂרֵ֥י חֲמִשִּׁ֖ים וְ⁠שָׂרֵ֥י עֲשָׂרֹֽת	1	leaders in charge of thousands, hundreds, fifties, and of tens	This could mean: (1) these numbers represent the exact amount of people in each group. Alternate translation: “leaders in charge of groups of 1,000 people, groups of 100 people, groups of 50 people, and groups of 10 people” or (2) these numbers are not exact, but represent groups of people of various sizes. Alternate translation: “leaders in charge of very small groups, small groups, large groups, and very large groups” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-EXO	18	22	y5n2	figs-metaphor	כָּל־הַ⁠דָּבָ֤ר הַ⁠גָּדֹל֙ יָבִ֣יאוּ אֵלֶ֔י⁠ךָ	1	the difficult cases they will bring to you	Jethro speaks of telling Moses about the difficult cases as bringing him the difficult cases. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the difficult cases they will tell you about” or “when there are difficult cases, they will tell you about them so you can judge them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EXO	18	22	vnvh		וְ⁠הָקֵל֙ מֵֽ⁠עָלֶ֔י⁠ךָ	1	the difficult cases they will bring to you	Jethro is ending his proposal with the good result that should come from it, less work for Moses. Alternate translation: “and make your work less” or “and lessen your work”
+EXO	18	22	y5n2	figs-metaphor	כָּל־הַ⁠דָּבָ֤ר הַ⁠גָּדֹל֙ יָבִ֣יאוּ אֵלֶ֔י⁠ךָ	1	the difficult cases they will bring to you	By **every great situation they will bring to you**, Jethro is recommending that the new leaders should pass the most difficult cases to Moses for him to judge them. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the difficult cases they will tell you about” or “when there are difficult cases, they will tell you about them so you can judge them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	18	22	u42p	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠הָקֵל֙ מֵֽ⁠עָלֶ֔י⁠ךָ וְ⁠נָשְׂא֖וּ אִתָּֽ⁠ךְ	1	they will carry the burden with you	Jethro speaks of the hard work that they would do as if it were something that they would carry beside Moses and make lighter for Moses by helping him. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and lessen your work by having them do the hard work with you” or “and make your work easier by having them help you do the hard work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	18	23	wyq4		וְ⁠יָֽכָלְתָּ֖ עֲמֹ֑ד	1	endure	Alternate translation: “then you will not wear yourself out”
 EXO	18	23	bt5p		כָּל־הָ⁠עָ֣ם הַ⁠זֶּ֔ה עַל־מְקֹמ֖⁠וֹ יָבֹ֥א בְ⁠שָׁלֽוֹם	1	endure	Here, getting **to their place** could mean each person’s home tent or it could mean the whole group gets to the promised land. If you cannot leave it ambiguous, it would be best to indicate something like “harmony in the camp.” Alternate translation: “all these people will live in harmony”
@@ -1413,7 +1409,7 @@ EXO	18	25	iqn8	translate-numbers	שָׂרֵ֤י אֲלָפִים֙ שָׂרֵ֣
 EXO	18	26	abx4		וְ⁠שָׁפְט֥וּ אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֖ם בְּ⁠כָל־עֵ֑ת	1	judged the people in normal circumstances	Alternate translation: “They judged the people most of the time” or “They judged the people in all regular circumstances”
 EXO	18	26	z7j4	figs-metaphor	אֶת־הַ⁠דָּבָ֤ר הַ⁠קָּשֶׁה֙ יְבִיא֣וּ⁠ן אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֔ה	1	The difficult cases they brought to Moses	The author writes of telling Moses about the difficult cases as bringing him the difficult cases. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “They told Moses about the difficult cases” or “When there were difficult cases, they told Moses about them so that he would judge them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	18	26	ve8h		הַ⁠דָּבָ֥ר הַ⁠קָּטֹ֖ן	1	the small cases	Alternate translation: “easy case”
-EXO	19	intro	ck7e			0		 # Exodus 19 General Notes\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “A kingdom of priests”\n\nThe function of the priests was to intercede for the people. The Levites were the only priests in Israel; this is a metaphor indicating that the nation was to intercede for the world as a whole. They were also to be holy, or set apart, from the rest of the world. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\n\n### Revealing the law\n\nThe events of this chapter are concerned with preparing the people to receive the law of Moses. The people go through all of this to prepare themselves for the law, which shows the great importance of this event for Israel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n\n### Boundaries between Yahweh and the people\n\nMoses is told to make the people holy in preparation for meeting Yahweh, then boundaries are set up to keep the people separate from Yahweh, and then the priests are told to make themselves holy. The theme of a holy separation is beginning to be developed that will become much of the law code.
+EXO	19	intro	ck7e			0		# Exodus 19 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure and Formatting\nThis chapter consist of a series of Moses going up Mount Sinai, talking to Yahweh, coming down, and talking to the people. He is being the intermediary, carrying messages between Yahweh and the people.\n- v. 1-2: Arrival at Sinai\n- v. 3-8: First cycle of Moses going up and down for instruction and response\n- v. 9-15: Second cycle, people get ready to hear God\n- v. 16-19: God speaks to the people from the mountain\n- v. 20-25: Third cycle\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “A kingdom of priests”\n\nThe function of the priests was to intercede for the people. The Levites were the only priests in Israel; this is a metaphor indicating that the nation was to intercede for the world as a whole. They were also to be holy, or set apart, from the rest of the world. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\n\n### Revealing the law\n\nThe events of this chapter are concerned with preparing the people to receive the law of Moses. The people go through all of this to prepare themselves for the law, which shows the great importance of this event for Israel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n\n### Boundaries between Yahweh and the people\n\nMoses is told to make the people holy in preparation for meeting Yahweh, then boundaries are set up to keep the people separate from Yahweh, and then the priests are told to make themselves holy. The theme of a holy separation is beginning to be developed that will become much of the law code.\n
 EXO	19	1	r5tj	translate-ordinal	בַּ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ֙ הַ⁠שְּׁלִישִׁ֔י…בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֔ה	1	In the third month…on the same day	This means they arrived at the wilderness on the first day of the month just as they left Egypt on the first day of the month. The first day of the third month on the Hebrew calendar is near the middle of May on Western calendars. Alternate translation: “In the third month … on the first day of the month” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 EXO	19	2	nk51	translate-names	מֵ⁠רְפִידִ֗ים	1	Rephidim	**Rephidim** is an area on the edge of the wilderness of Sinai where the people of Israel had been camping. See how you translated this name in [Exodus 17:1](../17/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EXO	19	3	kgev	figs-parallelism	תֹאמַר֙ לְ⁠בֵ֣ית יַעֲקֹ֔ב וְ⁠תַגֵּ֖יד לִ⁠בְנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל	1	the house of Jacob, the people of Israel	These two phrases have exactly the same meaning. This may be for poetic effect, as Yahweh’s statement here through [verse 6](../19/06.md) is somewhat artfully crafted. You may need to use a strategy other than parallelism to achieve a similar poetic effect in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
@@ -1424,7 +1420,7 @@ EXO	19	5	c767	figs-metonymy	בְּ⁠קֹלִ֔⁠י	1	my voice	God’s voice re
 EXO	19	5	fh8e		וּ⁠שְׁמַרְתֶּ֖ם אֶת־בְּרִיתִ֑⁠י	1	keep my covenant	Alternate translation: “and do what my covenant requires you to do”
 EXO	19	5	ifv6		סְגֻלָּה֙	1	special possession	Alternate translation: “treasure”
 EXO	19	6	gm9s	figs-metaphor	לִ֛⁠י מַמְלֶ֥כֶת כֹּהֲנִ֖ים	1	a kingdom of priests	God speaks of his people as if they were **priests**. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “my kingdom of people who are like priests” or “my kingdom of people who do what priests do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EXO	19	7	c5tq	figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יָּ֣שֶׂם לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶ֗ם אֵ֚ת כָּל־הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֣ים	1	set before them all these words	The author writes of Moses telling people things as if he were setting the words before them. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “And he told them all these words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EXO	19	7	c5tq	figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יָּ֣שֶׂם לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶ֗ם אֵ֚ת כָּל־הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֔לֶּה	1	set before them all these words	Moses setting the words before them means that he was telling people things. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “And he told them all these words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	19	7	xjbb	figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶ֗ם	1	set before them all these words	Here, **face** means the person. Alternate translation: “before them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	19	7	zqk1		כָּל־הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֔לֶּה אֲשֶׁ֥ר צִוָּ֖⁠הוּ יְהוָֽה	1	all these words that Yahweh had commanded him	Alternate translation: “all that Yahweh had commanded him”
 EXO	19	8	ljf5	figs-explicit	וַ⁠יָּ֧שֶׁב מֹשֶׁ֛ה אֶת־דִּבְרֵ֥י הָ⁠עָ֖ם	1	Moses came to report	Where Moses went can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “Moses went back up the mountain to report the words of the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1438,9 +1434,9 @@ EXO	19	12	xct0		הִשָּׁמְר֥וּ לָ⁠כֶ֛ם עֲל֥וֹת בָּ
 EXO	19	12	kis1	figs-activepassive	כָּל־הַ⁠נֹּגֵ֥עַ בָּ⁠הָ֖ר מ֥וֹת	1	Whoever touches the mountain will surely be put to death	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You must surely put to death any person who touches the mountain” or “You must surely kill anyone who touches the mountain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	19	13	l9ak	figs-metonymy	לֹא־תִגַּ֨ע בּ֜⁠וֹ יָ֗ד	1	such a person	Here, **hand** is a metonym for any part of a person. Alternate translation: “No person shall touch that one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	19	13	k35k	figs-activepassive	סָק֤וֹל יִסָּקֵל֙ אוֹ־יָרֹ֣ה יִיָּרֶ֔ה	1	he must certainly be stoned or shot	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must certainly stone or shoot him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EXO	19	13	vw19		יָרֹ֣ה יִיָּרֶ֔ה	1	shot	This refers to being killed by someone who shoots arrows from a bow or stones from a slingshot.
+EXO	19	13	vw19		יָרֹ֣ה יִיָּרֶ֔ה	1	shot	This refers to being killed by someone who shoots arrows from a bow.
 EXO	19	13	ezpm	figs-go	יַעֲל֥וּ	1	shot	If you translate this with come or go, consider which would be the correct perspective for your language and the text context. Yahweh is speaking, so “come up” is valid; however, the people will be the ones moving, so “go up” is valid as well. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
-EXO	19	15	bw2p	figs-euphemism	אַֽל־תִּגְּשׁ֖וּ אֶל־אִשָּֽׁה	1	do not go near your wives	This is a polite way of talking about sexual relations. Alternate translation: “do not sleep with your wives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
+EXO	19	15	bw2p	figs-euphemism	אַֽל־תִּגְּשׁ֖וּ אֶל־אִשָּֽׁה	1	do not go near your wives	This is a polite way of talking about sexual relations. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “do not sleep with your wives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 EXO	19	15	z0aq		אִשָּֽׁה	1	do not go near your wives	This word means both “woman” and “wife.” Context dictates the correct translation. Since wife would make it a narrower command, **woman** was chosen here.
 EXO	19	18	m1b5		יָרַ֥ד…יְהוָ֖ה	1	Yahweh descended	Alternate translation: “Yahweh came down”
 EXO	19	18	a8p7	figs-simile	כְּ⁠עֶ֣שֶׁן הַ⁠כִּבְשָׁ֔ן	1	like the smoke of a furnace	This shows that it was a very large amount of smoke. Alternate translation: “like the smoke from a very large fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
@@ -1448,25 +1444,23 @@ EXO	19	19	m8ae		הוֹלֵ֖ךְ וְ⁠חָזֵ֣ק מְאֹ֑ד	1	grew louder
 EXO	19	19	f5e6	figs-metonymy	בְ⁠קֽוֹל	1	in a voice	The word **voice** here refers to a sound that God made. This could mean: (1) “by speaking loudly like thunder” or (2) “by speaking” or (3) “by causing thunder to sound” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	19	20	zx5p	figs-go	וַ⁠יֵּ֧רֶד…וַ⁠יַּ֥עַל	1	in a voice	You may need to consider your language’s rules for perspective regarding going or coming up or down in this verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 EXO	19	21	d2qm	figs-metaphor	פֶּן־יֶהֶרְס֤וּ	1	not to break through	God spoke about walking past the boundary as if they might break down a barrier and walk through it. See how you translated “set bounds” in [Exodus 19:12](../19/12.md). If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “not to go beyond the boundary” or “not to go through the barrier” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EXO	19	21	oht2	figs-euphemism	וְ⁠נָפַ֥ל	1	not to break through	Here, **fall** is a euphemism for dying. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
+EXO	19	21	oht2	figs-euphemism	וְ⁠נָפַ֥ל	1	not to break through	Here, **fall** refers to dying. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 EXO	19	22	pq8j	figs-metaphor	יִפְרֹ֥ץ בָּ⁠הֶ֖ם יְהוָֽה	1	not to break through	Yahweh’s anger and judgment are pictured as something that will **burst** through a boundary. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Yahweh kills them in anger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	19	23	gagp	figs-quotesinquotes	בָּ֨⁠נוּ֙ לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר הַגְבֵּ֥ל אֶת־הָ⁠הָ֖ר וְ⁠קִדַּשְׁתּֽ⁠וֹ	1	not to break through	This quoted command could be translated as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “us to set boundaries on the mountain to keep it separate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 EXO	19	24	w8lx		לֶךְ־רֵ֔ד	1	get down	Alternate translation: “Go down”
 EXO	19	24	bk6p	figs-metaphor	אַל־יֶֽהֶרְס֛וּ	1	break through the barrier	God spoke about walking past the boundary as if they might **break** down a barrier and walk through it. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 19:21](../19/21.md). If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “must not go beyond the boundary” or “must not go through the barrier” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EXO	19	24	p1yq	figs-metaphor	יִפְרָץ־בָּֽ⁠ם	1	break through the barrier	Yahweh’s anger and judgment are pictured as something that will **burst** through a boundary. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 19:22](../19/22.md). If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “he kill them in anger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EXO	20	intro	x7vt			0		# Exodus 20 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThe instructions recorded in this chapter are commonly known as the “ten commandments.”\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Covenant\n\nYahweh’s covenant faithfulness is now based on the covenant he made with Abraham as well as the covenant he is making with Moses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenantfaith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])\n\n\n### Form of you\n\nThe singular form of you is used in the commandments; however, the commandments applied to the whole Israelite community. There is both a singular and a corporate aspect to them. You may need to choose between singular and plural if your language makes that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
+EXO	19	24	p1yq	figs-metaphor	יִפְרָץ־בָּֽ⁠ם	1	break through the barrier	Yahweh’s anger and judgment are pictured as something that will **burst** forth from him. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 19:22](../19/22.md). If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “he kill them in anger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EXO	20	intro	x7vt			0		# Exodus 20 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n\n- v. 1-17: Yahweh gives the Ten Commandments\n- v. 18-21: the people react\n- v. 22-26: Yahweh gives a little more explanation about idols and altars\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Covenant\n\nYahweh’s covenant faithfulness is now based on the covenant he made with Abraham as well as the covenant he is making with Moses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenantfaith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])\n\n\n### Form of you\n\nThe singular form of you is used in the commandments; however, the commandments applied to the whole Israelite community. There is both a singular and a corporate aspect to them. You may need to choose between singular and plural if your language makes that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])\n
 EXO	20	2	qg71	figs-metaphor	מִ⁠בֵּ֥ית עֲבָדִֽים	1	house of slavery	Yahweh speaks of **Egypt** as if it were a **house** where people keep slaves. See how you translated this in [Exodus 13:3](../13/03.md). If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “from the place where you were slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	20	3	r9h3		לֹֽ֣א יִהְיֶֽה־לְ⁠ךָ֛ אֱלֹהִ֥ים אֲחֵרִ֖ים עַל־פָּנָֽ⁠יַ	1	You must have no other gods before me	Alternate translation: “You must not worship any other gods besides me”
 EXO	20	4	s7n3	figs-merism	וְ⁠כָל־תְּמוּנָ֔ה אֲשֶׁ֤ר בַּ⁠שָּׁמַ֨יִם֙ מִ⁠מַּ֔עַל וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר בָּ⁠אָ֖רֶץ מִ⁠תָּ֑חַת וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר בַּ⁠מַּ֖יִם מִ⁠תַּ֥חַת לָ⁠אָֽרֶץ	1	nor the likeness	This list means all created things wherever they are. Alternate translation: “nor anything that looks like anything created, whether that is in heaven above, or that is in the earth beneath, or that is in the water under the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
 EXO	20	4	rkn1	figs-abstractnouns	וְ⁠כָל־תְּמוּנָ֔ה	1	nor the likeness	Alternate translation: “nor anything looking like something” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 EXO	20	5	ka3i	writing-pronouns	לָ⁠הֶ֖ם	1	You must not bow down to them or worship them	The word **them** refers to carved figures or idols. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-EXO	20	5	s2ia	translate-ordinal	עַל־שִׁלֵּשִׁ֥ים וְ⁠עַל־רִבֵּעִ֖ים	1	to the third and the fourth generation	Alternate translation: “to generations 3 and 4” This refers to the grandchildren and great-grandchildren. Alternate translation: “and even on the grandchildren and great-grandchildren (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-EXO	20	5	hx93	figs-ellipsis	בָּנִ֛ים עַל־שִׁלֵּשִׁ֥ים וְ⁠עַל־רִבֵּעִ֖ים	1	to the third and the fourth generation	Alternate translation: “Generation” is implied by **sons**. Alternate translation: “the sons down to the third and fourth generations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-EXO	20	6	u9nc	figs-abstractnouns	חֶ֖סֶד	1	I show covenant faithfulness to thousands of those who love me	The abstract noun **faithfulness** can be restated as “faithfully” or “faithful.” Alternate translation: “I am faithful to the covenant with thousands of those who love me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-EXO	20	6	oyh7	figs-ellipsis	לַ⁠אֲלָפִ֑ים	1	to the third and the fourth generation	Alternate translation: “Generation” is implied by the previous verse. However, this may not be the case; therefore, two notes following deal with either possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-EXO	20	6	k52w		לַ⁠אֲלָפִ֑ים	1	to the third and the fourth generation	Alternate translation: “to the thousandth generation” or “for a thousand generations”
-EXO	20	6	xp5k	figs-hyperbole	לַ⁠אֲלָפִ֑ים	1	to the third and the fourth generation	Option 1: This large number is used to mean “forever” or “to all descendants forever.” Alternate translation: “for every generation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-EXO	20	6	yw38	figs-metonymy	לַ⁠אֲלָפִ֑ים לְ⁠אֹהֲבַ֖⁠י	1	to thousands of those who love me	Option 2: The word **thousands** is a metonym for a number too many to count. Alternate translation: “forever to innumerable people who love me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+EXO	20	5	hx93	figs-ellipsis	בָּנִ֛ים עַל־שִׁלֵּשִׁ֥ים וְ⁠עַל־רִבֵּעִ֖ים	1	to the third and the fourth generation	Alternate translation: “Generation” is implied by **sons**, therefore **third and fourth** refers to the grandchildren and great-grandchildren. Alternate translation: “the sons down to the third and fourth generations” or “and even on the grandchildren and great-grandchildren” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+EXO	20	5	s2ia	translate-ordinal	עַל־שִׁלֵּשִׁ֥ים וְ⁠עַל־רִבֵּעִ֖ים	1	to the third and the fourth generation	Alternate translation: “to generations 3 and 4”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+EXO	20	6	u9nc	figs-abstractnouns	וְ⁠עֹ֥שֶׂה חֶ֖סֶד לַ⁠אֲלָפִ֑ים לְ⁠אֹהֲבַ֖⁠י	1	I show covenant faithfulness to thousands of those who love me	The abstract noun **faithfulness** can be restated as “faithfully” or “faithful.” Alternate translation: “I am faithful to the covenant with thousands of those who love me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+EXO	20	6	oyh7	figs-ellipsis	לַ⁠אֲלָפִ֑ים	1	to the third and the fourth generation	Alternate translation: “Generation” is implied by the previous verse. Alternate translation: “to the thousandth generation” or “for a thousand generations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+EXO	20	6	yw38	figs-metonymy	לַ⁠אֲלָפִ֑ים לְ⁠אֹהֲבַ֖⁠י	1	to thousands of those who love me	Here, **thousands** may mean: (1) “forever,” that is, “to all descendants forever” (2) a number too many to count. Alternate translation: “for every generation” or “forever to innumerable people who love me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	20	7	o96b		תִשָּׂ֛א…יִשָּׂ֥א	1	take the name of Yahweh your God	To **lift up**, take, or use the name of Yahweh (with emptiness, i.e. improperly) covers many sorts of speaking or invoking his name or making a claim to him or attempting to manipulate him or misrepresenting him. A broad word should be used in translation of this term.
 EXO	20	7	t3k2		לֹ֥א תִשָּׂ֛א אֶת־שֵֽׁם־יְהוָ֥ה אֱלֹהֶ֖י⁠ךָ	1	take the name of Yahweh your God	Alternate translation: “You must not use the name of Yahweh your God”
 EXO	20	7	gcz2		לַ⁠שָּׁ֑וְא…לַ⁠שָּֽׁוְא	1	in vain	Alternate translation: “carelessly” or “without proper respect”
@@ -1482,7 +1476,7 @@ EXO	20	18	nm52		הָ⁠הָ֖ר עָשֵׁ֑ן	1	the mountain smoking	Alternate
 EXO	20	18	lmt5		וַ⁠יָּנֻ֔עוּ	1	they trembled	Alternate translation: “and they shook with fear”
 EXO	20	18	h53m		וַ⁠יַּֽעַמְד֖וּ מֵֽ⁠רָחֹֽק	1	stood far off	Alternate translation: “and stood far away”
 EXO	20	20	slb8		וּ⁠בַ⁠עֲב֗וּר תִּהְיֶ֧ה יִרְאָת֛⁠וֹ עַל־פְּנֵי⁠כֶ֖ם לְ⁠בִלְתִּ֥י תֶחֱטָֽאוּ	1	so that the honor of him may be in you, and so that you do not sin	Alternate translation: “so that you will honor him and not sin”
-EXO	20	20	hocw	figs-metaphor	תִּהְיֶ֧ה יִרְאָת֛⁠וֹ עַל־פְּנֵי⁠כֶ֖ם	1	so that the honor of him may be in you, and so that you do not sin	Here, **fear** is spoken of as something that could be on their faces. It may mean they would have such a fear that their attitude could be seen on their faces. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “reverence for him will show on your faces” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EXO	20	20	hocw	figs-metaphor	תִּהְיֶ֧ה יִרְאָת֛⁠וֹ עַל־פְּנֵי⁠כֶ֖ם	1	so that the honor of him may be in you, and so that you do not sin	Here, **fear** is spoken of as something that could be **above their faces**. This means that they would be continually thinking about honoring God. It is similar to the image in [Exodus 13:16](../13/16.md). If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “you will live always reverencing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	20	21	lts1		וּ⁠מֹשֶׁה֙ נִגַּ֣שׁ	1	Moses approached	Alternate translation: “and Moses moved closer,”
 EXO	20	22	ayom	figs-quotemarks	אַתֶּ֣ם רְאִיתֶ֔ם	1	Moses approached	A second-level direct quotation begins here that continues until the [end of the chapter](../20/26.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	20	23	qm44		אֱלֹ֤הֵי כֶ֨סֶף֙ וֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֣י זָהָ֔ב	1	gods of silver or gods of gold	Alternate translation: “gods made out of silver or gold” or “idols made out of silver or gold”
@@ -1492,7 +1486,7 @@ EXO	20	24	zmc4	figs-activepassive	אַזְכִּ֣יר אֶת־שְׁמִ֔⁠י
 EXO	20	26	qm1b	figs-explicit	וְ⁠לֹֽא־תַעֲלֶ֥ה בְ⁠מַעֲלֹ֖ת עַֽל־מִזְבְּחִ֑⁠י	1	You must not go up to my altar on steps	If you need to connect this statement more explicitly to the previous statements regarding building the alter, you could add a phrase about building steps. Alternate translation: “Do not build steps up to the altar and go up to it on those steps” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EXO	20	26	e28y	figs-activepassive	אֲשֶׁ֛ר לֹֽא־תִגָּלֶ֥ה עֶרְוָתְ⁠ךָ֖ עָלָֽי⁠ו	1	You must not go up to my altar on steps	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that you do not expose your nakedness over it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	20	26	h2qd		עֶרְוָתְ⁠ךָ֖	1	your nakedness	Alternate translation: “your private parts”
-EXO	21	intro	dnd3			0		# Exodus 21 General Notes\n\nThis chapter begins to give the Israelite civil case law, that is, the explanation of how to apply the principles condensed in the ten commandments.\n\n## Structure:\n\n- 1: Introduction\n- 2-6: Laws regarding male slaves\n- 7-11: Laws regarding female slaves\n- 12-17: Capital crimes\n- 18-36: Liability laws\n    * 18-27: Regarding human violence\n    * 28-36: Regarding damage done by or to animals\n\n## Translation Issues in this Chapter\n\n### Hypothetical situations\n\nThroughout the case law, a hypothetical situation is introduced with “when” or “if.” It is followed by a description of the situation; then there is the penalty or action to be taken in those situations. A hypothetical person may be introduced with “anyone” or “whoever.” Most verses for the next several chapters will have these hypothetical situations. See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]] Translators familiar with Hebrew may want to notice that, generally, major divisions are introduced by כִּי (ki) and minor divisions within a topic are introduced by אִם (’im).\n\n\n### Passive construction\n\nMany portions of these situations are written in the passive voice. Some languages may have to change all or some of these to active voice. See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]].\n\n\n### Daughters sold as servants\n\nThe section from [verses 7-11](../21/07.md) may be somewhat confusing because a daughter that is sold as a servant is seamlessly connected to her becoming someone’s wife.\n\n### Ransom payment\n\nIn [verse 30](../21/30.md) a man whose bull killed someone may evade the death penalty by paying a ransom price, but the conditions for that happening are not clear.
+EXO	21	intro	dnd3			0		# Exodus 21 General Notes\n\nThis chapter begins to give the Israelite civil case law, that is, the explanation of how to apply the principles condensed in the ten commandments.\n\n## Structure:\n\n- 1: Introduction\n- 2-6: Laws regarding male slaves\n- 7-11: Laws regarding female slaves\n- 12-17: Capital crimes\n- 18-36: Liability laws\n    * 18-27: Regarding human violence\n    * 28-36: Regarding damage done by or to animals\n\n## Translation Issues in this Chapter\n\n### Hypothetical situations\n\nThroughout the case law, a hypothetical situation is introduced with “when” or “if.” It is followed by a description of the situation; then there is the penalty or action to be taken in those situations. A hypothetical person may be introduced with “anyone” or “whoever.” Most verses for the next several chapters will have these hypothetical situations. See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]] Translators familiar with Hebrew may want to notice that, generally, major divisions are introduced by כִּי (ki) and minor divisions within a topic are introduced by אִם (’im).\n\n\n### Passive construction\n\nMany portions of these situations are written in the passive voice. Some languages may have to change all or some of these to active voice. See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]].\n\n\n### Daughters sold as servants\n\nThe section from [verses 7-11](../21/07.md) may be somewhat confusing because a daughter that is sold as a servant is seamlessly connected to her becoming someone’s wife. It seems the two things could be closely related.\n\n### Ransom payment\n\nIn [verse 30](../21/30.md) a man whose bull killed someone may evade the death penalty by paying a ransom price, but the conditions for that happening are not clear.\n
 EXO	21	1	xxf4			0	you must set before them	Yahweh continues speaking to Moses. There is no quote break between chapters.
 EXO	21	1	hhf7		תָּשִׂ֖ים	1	you must set before them	Alternate translation: “you must give” or “you must tell”
 EXO	21	1	ddql	figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶֽם	1	you must set before them	Here, **faces** figuratively represents the presence of the nation. Alternate translation: “before them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -1504,12 +1498,12 @@ EXO	21	3	e467		אִם־בַּ֤עַל אִשָּׁה֙ ה֔וּא	1	if he is mar
 EXO	21	5	yj8x		אָמֹ֤ר יֹאמַר֙	1	plainly says	Alternate translation: “makes a statement, saying”
 EXO	21	5	jqh4		לֹ֥א אֵצֵ֖א חָפְשִֽׁי	1	I will not go out free	Alternate translation: “I do not want my master to set me free”
 EXO	21	6	vnjk	figs-metonymy	הָ֣⁠אֱלֹהִ֔ים	1	bore his ear through	The word for **God** at its most literal means “great ones.” Here it may have this basic meaning and refer to human judges or other leaders in Israel. It may also be a metonym and refer to the judges because they represent God to the people and have his authority. Texts other than the standard Hebrew text support this reading. See [Exodus 22:8-9](../22/08.md) for another example of this. Alternate translation: “the judges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-EXO	21	6	z8x1		וְ⁠רָצַ֨ע…אֶת־אָזְנ⁠וֹ֙	1	bore his ear through	Alternate translation: “will put a hole in his ear”
+EXO	21	6	z8x1		וְ⁠רָצַ֨ע…אֶת־אָזְנ⁠וֹ֙	1	bore his ear through	Alternate translation: “and … will put a hole in his ear”
 EXO	21	6	xpd3		בַּ⁠מַּרְצֵ֔עַ	1	awl	An **awl** is a pointed tool used to make a hole
 EXO	21	6	k6ev		לְ⁠עֹלָֽם	1	for life	Alternate translation: “until the end of his life” or “until he dies”
 EXO	21	8	lpqh			0	has designated	This verse is the first of three possible situations between a master and his female slave.
-EXO	21	8	p8se		יְעָדָ֖⁠הּ	1	has designated	Alternate translation: “has chosen”
-EXO	21	8	t2zf	figs-activepassive	וְ⁠הֶפְדָּ֑⁠הּ	1	he must let her be bought back	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he must allow her father to buy her back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+EXO	21	8	p8se		יְעָדָ֖⁠הּ	1	has designated	Alternate translation: “has chosen her”
+EXO	21	8	t2zf	figs-activepassive	וְ⁠הֶפְדָּ֑⁠הּ	1	he must let her be bought back	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “then he must allow her father to buy her back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	21	8	h7f7		בְּ⁠בִגְד⁠וֹ־בָֽ⁠הּ	1	he has treated her deceitfully	Alternate translation: “since he has deceived her”
 EXO	21	9	h9ni			0	he has treated her deceitfully	This verse is the second of three possible situations between a master and his female slave.
 EXO	21	9	w99z		לִ⁠בְנ֖⁠וֹ יִֽיעָדֶ֑⁠נָּה	1	designates her as a wife for his son	Alternate translation: “he decides that she is the one who will be his son’s wife”
@@ -1525,7 +1519,7 @@ EXO	21	14	st5h		בְ⁠עָרְמָ֑ה	1	according to a cunning plan	Alternate
 EXO	21	14	abx6		תִּקָּחֶ֖⁠נּוּ	1	must take him	The word “him” refers to the one who killed his neighbor.
 EXO	21	14	mvpx		לָ⁠מֽוּת	1	must take him	Alternate translation: “to execute him”
 EXO	21	15	y3hd	figs-activepassive	וּ⁠מַכֵּ֥ה אָבִ֛י⁠ו וְ⁠אִמּ֖⁠וֹ מ֥וֹת יוּמָֽת	1	Whoever hits his father or mother must surely be put to death	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “If anyone hits his father or mother, you must surely put him to death” or “You must surely kill anyone who hits his father or mother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EXO	21	15	qh2j		מ֥וֹת	1	must surely	Alternate translation: “must certainly”
+EXO	21	15	qh2j		מ֥וֹת	1	must surely	Alternate translation: “certainly”
 EXO	21	16	iu81	figs-activepassive	מ֥וֹת יוּמָֽת	1	that kidnapper must be put to death	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must kill that kidnapper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	21	17	h8qf	figs-activepassive	וּ⁠מְקַלֵּ֥ל אָבִ֛י⁠ו וְ⁠אִמּ֖⁠וֹ מ֥וֹת יוּמָֽת	1	Whoever curses his father or his mother must surely be put to death	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You must surely kill anyone who curses his father or his mother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	21	17	kvbc		וּ⁠מְקַלֵּ֥ל	1	Whoever curses his father or his mother must surely be put to death	The word translated **acts contemptuously** means the opposite of “honor” (as in the commandment to honor one’s parents). Alternate translation: “Whoever acts dishonorably toward”
@@ -1541,14 +1535,14 @@ EXO	21	22	w4p3		אָס֑וֹן	1	she miscarries	Alternate translation: “hurt
 EXO	21	22	cn4h	figs-activepassive	עָנ֣וֹשׁ יֵעָנֵ֗שׁ	1	the guilty man must surely be fined	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must certainly fine the guilty man” or “the guilty man must pay a fine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	21	22	v5ye		בִּ⁠פְלִלִֽים	1	as the judges determine	Alternate translation: “what the judges decide”
 EXO	21	23	ya82	figs-explicit	וְ⁠נָתַתָּ֥ה נֶ֖פֶשׁ תַּ֥חַת נָֽפֶשׁ	1	as the judges determine	This means that if someone is hurt, the person who caused the hurt must be hurt in the same way. Alternate translation: “you must take the killer’s life for the murdered person’s life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-EXO	21	24	c5bq	figs-explicit	עַ֚יִן תַּ֣חַת עַ֔יִן	1	an eye for an eye	This means that if someone is hurt, the person who caused the hurt must be hurt in the same way. Alternate translation: “the striker’s eye for the injured person’s eye” (and etc throughout this and the next verse) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+EXO	21	24	c5bq	figs-explicit	עַ֚יִן תַּ֣חַת עַ֔יִן	1	an eye for an eye	This means that if someone is hurt, the person who caused the hurt must be hurt in the same way. Alternate translation: “the striker’s eye for the injured person’s eye” (and repeated in like manner for each example throughout this and the next verse) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EXO	21	26	i8cg		אִ֜ישׁ	1	If a man	Here, **man** refers to the owner of a slave.
 EXO	21	26	bmc1		תַּ֥חַת	1	in compensation	Alternate translation: “as payment for”
 EXO	21	28	sp6w		יִגַּ֨ח שׁ֥וֹר	1	an ox gores	Alternate translation: “an ox injures with its horns”
 EXO	21	28	qk3u	figs-activepassive	סָק֨וֹל יִסָּקֵ֜ל הַ⁠שּׁ֗וֹר	1	the ox must surely be stoned	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must surely stone the ox to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	21	28	q2gv	figs-activepassive	וְ⁠לֹ֤א יֵאָכֵל֙ אֶת־בְּשָׂר֔⁠וֹ	1	its flesh must not be eaten	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and you must not eat its flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EXO	21	29	zgll	figs-activepassive	וְ⁠הוּעַ֤ד בִּ⁠בְעָלָי⁠ו֙	1	its owner also must be put to death	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and someone warned its owner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EXO	21	29	x2y0	figs-explicit	וְ⁠הוּעַ֤ד בִּ⁠בְעָלָי⁠ו֙	1	its owner also must be put to death	The content of the warning could be made explicit. Alternate translation: “and its owner was warned that it gores” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+EXO	21	29	zgll	figs-activepassive	וְ⁠הוּעַ֤ד בִּ⁠בְעָלָי⁠ו֙ וְ⁠לֹ֣א יִשְׁמְרֶ֔⁠נּוּ	1	its owner also must be put to death	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state **its owner was warned** in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and someone warned its owner but he did not keep it in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+EXO	21	29	x2y0	figs-explicit	וְ⁠הוּעַ֤ד בִּ⁠בְעָלָי⁠ו֙ וְ⁠לֹ֣א יִשְׁמְרֶ֔⁠נּוּ	1	its owner also must be put to death	The content of the warning could be made explicit. Alternate translation: “and its owner was warned that it gores but he did not keep it in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EXO	21	29	nzn1	figs-activepassive	וְ⁠גַם־בְּעָלָ֖י⁠ו יוּמָֽת	1	its owner also must be put to death	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and you must also kill its owner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	21	30	t5rs	figs-explicit	אִם־כֹּ֖פֶר יוּשַׁ֣ת עָלָ֑י⁠ו וְ⁠נָתַן֙ פִּדְיֹ֣ן נַפְשׁ֔⁠וֹ כְּ⁠כֹ֥ל אֲשֶׁר־יוּשַׁ֖ת עָלָֽי⁠ו	1	If a payment is required for his life	The text does not specify who will impose a ransom on the ox’s owner. Since other texts indicate that justice is retributive and performed by the dead person’s family, that is one option. Another option is that the judges will impose it. One of these can be stated clearly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EXO	21	30	py37	figs-activepassive	אִם־כֹּ֖פֶר יוּשַׁ֣ת עָלָ֑י⁠ו…יוּשַׁ֖ת עָלָֽי⁠ו	1	If a payment is required for his life	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. However, you must make a decision regarding who is imposing the ransom or use an unspecified pronoun, if that is possible in your language (This second option would not make sense in English). Alternate translation: “If the judges impose a ransom on him … they impose on him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1566,7 +1560,7 @@ EXO	21	36	fkx2	figs-activepassive	א֣וֹ נוֹדַ֗ע	1	if it was known	If y
 EXO	21	36	v64b		נַגָּ֥ח הוּא֙ מִ⁠תְּמ֣וֹל שִׁלְשֹׁ֔ם	1	a habit of goring in time past	Alternate translation: “the ox had gored other animals before”
 EXO	21	36	ix8h	figs-explicit	וְ⁠לֹ֥א יִשְׁמְרֶ֖⁠נּוּ בְּעָלָ֑י⁠ו	1	its owner has not kept it in	This means that the owner did not keep his ox safely where it could not wander to hurt other animals. This can be clearly stated in the translation. Alternate translation: “and its owner did not keep it inside a fence” or “and its owner did not tie it securely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EXO	21	36	dcv2	figs-explicit	שַׁלֵּ֨ם יְשַׁלֵּ֥ם שׁוֹר֙ תַּ֣חַת הַ⁠שּׁ֔וֹר	1	he must surely pay ox for ox	The owner of the ox that killed must give an ox to the man who lost his ox. This can be stated clearly in the translation. Alternate translation: “the owner of the ox that killed must surely give a living ox to the owner of the ox that died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-EXO	22	intro	f9vb			0		# Exodus 22 General Notes\n\n## Structure\n\nThis chapter continues the list of case laws for Israel. Any attempt to outline structure would have almost as many sections as there are verses.\n\n## Translation Issues in this Chapter\n\n### Hypothetical situations\n\nThroughout the case law a hypothetical situation is introduced with “when” or “if.” Then there is a description of the situation, and then there is the penalty or action to be taken in those situations. A hypothetical person may be introduced with “anyone” or “whoever.” Most verses for the next several chapters will contain these hypothetical situations. See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]] Translators familiar with Hebrew may want to notice that, generally, major divisions are introduced by כִּי (ki) and minor divisions within a topic are introduced by אִם (’im).\n\n### Passive construction\n\nMany portions of these situations are written in the passive voice. Some languages may have to change all or some of these to active voice. See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]].
+EXO	22	intro	f9vb			0		# Exodus 22 General Notes\n\n## Structure\n\nThis chapter continues the list of case laws for Israel. We will not attempt to provide an outline since almost every verse is about a different case.\n\n## Translation Issues in this Chapter\n\n### Hypothetical situations\n\nThroughout the case law a hypothetical situation is introduced with “when” or “if.” Then there is a description of the situation, and then there is the penalty or action to be taken in those situations. A hypothetical person may be introduced with “anyone” or “whoever.” Most verses for the next several chapters will contain these hypothetical situations. See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]] Translators familiar with Hebrew may want to notice that, generally, major divisions are introduced by כִּי (ki) and minor divisions within a topic are introduced by אִם (’im).\n\n### Passive construction\n\nMany portions of these situations are written in the passive voice. Some languages may have to change all or some of these to active voice. See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]].<br>
 EXO	22	1	syx5			0	General Information:	Yahweh continues telling Moses his laws for the people of Israel.
 EXO	22	1	onm0	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	כִּ֤י יִגְנֹֽב־אִישׁ֙ שׁ֣וֹר אוֹ־שֶׂ֔ה וּ⁠טְבָח֖⁠וֹ א֣וֹ מְכָר֑⁠וֹ	1	General Information:	This is the first of many hypothetical situations in this chapter, introduced by “when” or **if,** which you will encounter over the next several chapters. See the [introduction](../22/intro.md). You will need to translate these consistently in a manner that expresses that these situations have not actually happened. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 EXO	22	1	bc03	translate-numbers	חֲמִשָּׁ֣ה…וְ⁠אַרְבַּע	1	General Information:	Alternate translation: “5 … and 4” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
@@ -1584,14 +1578,14 @@ EXO	22	5	jrb3		יְשַׁלֵּֽם	1	he must make restitution	Alternate transla
 EXO	22	6	x6aj	figs-activepassive	כִּֽי־תֵצֵ֨א אֵ֜שׁ וּ⁠מָצְאָ֤ה קֹצִים֙ וְ⁠נֶאֱכַ֣ל	1	If a fire breaks out and spreads in thorns	Here, **breaks out** and **consumes** can be stated in active form or in another way that is natural in your language if your language does not use the passive form in this way. Alternate translation: “If someone starts a fire, and it spreads in thorns, and it consumes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	22	6	i4ma		וּ⁠מָצְאָ֤ה קֹצִים֙	1	spreads in thorns	Alternate translation: “and moves along the ground through dry plants”
 EXO	22	6	u1pa	translate-unknown	גָּדִ֔ישׁ	1	stacked grain	This is grain that has been cut and tied in bundles. Alternate translation: “bundled grain” or “harvested grain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-EXO	22	6	r2cf	translate-unknown	הַ⁠קָּמָ֖ה	1	standing grain	This is grain that has not been cut, but it is ready to be harvested. Alternate translation: “the grain still in the field” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+EXO	22	6	r2cf	translate-unknown	הַ⁠קָּמָ֖ה	1	standing grain	This is grain that has not been cut, but it is ready to be harvested. Alternate translation: “the grain still growing in the field” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	22	7	jw3v		לִ⁠שְׁמֹ֔ר	1	for safe keeping	Alternate translation: “to watch over it” or “to keep it safe”
 EXO	22	7	na9h	figs-activepassive	וְ⁠גֻנַּ֖ב	1	if it is stolen	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “if someone steals it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	22	7	x2sh	figs-activepassive	אִם־יִמָּצֵ֥א הַ⁠גַּנָּ֖ב	1	if the thief is found	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “if you find the thief” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	22	8	lwg5	figs-activepassive	אִם־לֹ֤א יִמָּצֵא֙ הַ⁠גַּנָּ֔ב וְ⁠נִקְרַ֥ב בַּֽעַל־הַ⁠בַּ֖יִת אֶל־הָֽ⁠אֱלֹהִ֑ים	1	come before the judges to see whether	You may need to translate these in an active voice if your language does not use passive in this way. Alternate translation: “If no one finds the thief, bring the owner of the house to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	22	8	c812	figs-metonymy	הָֽ⁠אֱלֹהִ֑ים	1	come before the judges to see whether	The word for **God** at its most literal means “great ones.” Here and in the [next verse](../22/09.md) it may have this basic meaning and refer to human judges or other leaders in Israel. It may also be a metonym and refer to the judges because they represent God to the people and have his authority. See [Exodus 21:6](../21/06.md) for another example of this. Alternate translation: “the judges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	22	8	f774	figs-idiom	שָׁלַ֛ח יָד֖⁠וֹ בִּ⁠מְלֶ֥אכֶת רֵעֵֽ⁠הוּ	1	has put his own hand on his neighbor’s property	This is an idiom for stealing. If you have a way of saying this in your language, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “he has stolen his neighbor’s property” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-EXO	22	9	p7ab		דְּבַר…דְּבַר	1		Alternate translation: “dispute”
+EXO	22	9	p7ab		דְּבַר…דְּבַר	1		Alternate translation: “dispute of … the dispute of”
 EXO	22	9	fgz1		כִּי־ה֣וּא זֶ֔ה	1	the claim of both parties must come before the judges	Alternate translation: “This is mine” or “This is my missing property”
 EXO	22	9	m31k	figs-metonymy	הָֽ⁠אֱלֹהִ֔ים…אֱלֹהִ֔ים	1	the claim of both parties must come before the judges	The word used here for **God**, at its most literal, means “great ones.” Here and in the [previous verse](../22/08.md) it may have this basic meaning and refer to human judges or other leaders in Israel. It may also be a metonym and refer to the judges because they represent God to the people and have his authority. See [Exodus 21:6](../21/06.md) for another example of this. Alternate translation: “the judges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	22	10	h7ms	figs-activepassive	נִשְׁבַּ֥ר אוֹ־נִשְׁבָּ֖ה	1	the claim of both parties must come before the judges	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language, as modeled in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1604,35 +1598,35 @@ EXO	22	14	wu3u	figs-activepassive	וְ⁠נִשְׁבַּ֣ר אוֹ־מֵ֑ת	1
 EXO	22	15	g3zw	figs-activepassive	אִם־שָׂכִ֣יר	1	if the animal was hired	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “if someone rented the animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	22	15	r792	figs-explicit	בָּ֖א בִּ⁠שְׂכָרֽ⁠וֹ	1	it will be paid for by its hiring fee	The one who borrowed the animal will not have to pay the owner anything more than the hiring or rental fee. This fee will pay for the loss of the animal. This can be stated clearly in the translation. Alternate translation: “the money that someone paid to rent the animal will cover the loss of the animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EXO	22	15	f9w9		בִּ⁠שְׂכָרֽ⁠וֹ	1	hiring fee	Alternate translation: “for its rental fee” or “for the money paid to rent the animal”
-EXO	22	16	a8s8		וְ⁠כִֽי־יְפַתֶּ֣ה אִ֗ישׁ בְּתוּלָ֛ה אֲשֶׁ֥ר לֹא־אֹרָ֖שָׂה	1	a man seduces a virgin who is not engaged	Alternate translation: “If a man persuades a virgin who is not engaged that she wants to sleep with him”
+EXO	22	16	a8s8		וְ⁠כִֽי־יְפַתֶּ֣ה אִ֗ישׁ בְּתוּלָ֛ה אֲשֶׁ֥ר לֹא־אֹרָ֖שָׂה	1	a man seduces a virgin who is not engaged	Alternate translation: “If a man persuades a virgin who is not engaged that she wants to lie with him”
 EXO	22	16	th2m		לֹא־אֹרָ֖שָׂה	1	not engaged	Alternate translation: “not promised to be married”
-EXO	22	16	g24h	figs-euphemism	וְ⁠שָׁכַ֣ב	1	if he lies with her	Lying with someone is a euphemism for having sex. Alternate translation: “if he has sex with her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
+EXO	22	16	g24h	figs-euphemism	וְ⁠שָׁכַ֣ב	1	if he lies with her	Lying with someone refers to having sex. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “if he has sex with her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 EXO	22	16	x33y		מָהֹ֛ר יִמְהָרֶ֥⁠נָּה	1	bride wealth	The **bride price** was money paid to the family to compensate for the loss of their daughter.
 EXO	22	17	y2xz	writing-pronouns	ל֑⁠וֹ…יִשְׁקֹ֔ל	1	him, he	These pronouns refer back to the man who seduced the virgin. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-EXO	22	19	y3qy	figs-euphemism	כָּל־שֹׁכֵ֥ב עִם־בְּהֵמָ֖ה	1	Whoever lies with an animal	This is a euphemism. Alternate translation: “Whoever has sexual relations with an animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
+EXO	22	19	y3qy	figs-euphemism	כָּל־שֹׁכֵ֥ב עִם־בְּהֵמָ֖ה	1	Whoever lies with an animal	This refers to sexual relations. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “Whoever has sexual relations with an animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 EXO	22	19	b807	figs-activepassive	כָּל־שֹׁכֵ֥ב עִם־בְּהֵמָ֖ה מ֥וֹת יוּמָֽת	1	Whoever lies with an animal	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state **be put to death** in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You must surely execute whoever lies with an animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EXO	22	20	n4nh	figs-activepassive	יָֽחֳרָ֑ם…לְ⁠בַדּֽ⁠וֹ	1	Yahweh must be completely destroyed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “alone, you must completely destroy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+EXO	22	20	n4nh	figs-activepassive	יָֽחֳרָ֑ם	1	Yahweh must be completely destroyed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation (placed at the beginning of the sentence): “You must completely destroy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	22	21	kr35		לֹא־תוֹנֶ֖ה	1	wrong a foreigner	Alternate translation: “You must not mistreat” or “You must not cheat”
 EXO	22	21	eoa5	figs-explicit	כִּֽי־גֵרִ֥ים הֱיִיתֶ֖ם בְּ⁠אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם	1	wrong a foreigner	The Israelites are called to remember their previous condition, that they lived as foreign guests in Egypt. They came first to avoid the famine in Jacob and Joseph’s time and were dependent on Egyptian hospitality. Later they were wronged and oppressed, and they are not to do that to those who sojourn with them. You may need to make this explicit. Alternate translation: “for you were wronged and oppressed as sojourners in the land of Egypt” or “for you also depended on hospitality while you lived as sojourners in Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EXO	22	22	djh3	figs-doublenegatives	כָּל־אַלְמָנָ֥ה וְ⁠יָת֖וֹם לֹ֥א תְעַנּֽוּ⁠ן׃	1	You must not mistreat any widow or fatherless child	This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “You must treat all widows and fatherless children fairly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 EXO	22	22	v3i8		אַלְמָנָ֥ה	1	widow	Alternate translation: “woman whose husband has died”
 EXO	22	22	l2ih		וְ⁠יָת֖וֹם	1	fatherless child	Alternate translation: “or child with no parents”
 EXO	22	24	zszz	figs-idiom	וְ⁠חָרָ֣ה אַפִּ֔⁠י	1	fatherless child	This is an idiom meaning that Yahweh will be angry. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “and I will became very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-EXO	22	24	sx9h	figs-metonymy	בֶּ⁠חָ֑רֶב	1	I will kill you with the sword	To be killed **with the sword** is a metonym that means a person will die violently, perhaps while fighting in a war. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “you will die a violent death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+EXO	22	24	sx9h	figs-metonymy	בֶּ⁠חָ֑רֶב	1	I will kill you with the sword	To be killed **with the sword** is a metonym that means a person will die violently, perhaps while fighting in a war. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “violently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	22	25	v5je		כְּ⁠נֹשֶׁ֑ה	1	a moneylender	Alternate translation: “like one who lends money”
 EXO	22	25	g3ry		לֹֽא־תְשִׂימ֥וּ⁠ן עָלָ֖י⁠ו נֶֽשֶׁךְ	1	charge him interest	Alternate translation: “you must not charge him extra money for borrowing” or “you must not charge him extra money for the loan”
 EXO	22	27	wi2m		כְסוּתוֹ֙ לְ⁠בַדָּ֔⁠הּ	1	only covering	Alternate translation: “is his only coat” or “is his only garment to keep him warm”
-EXO	22	27	x7zb	figs-rquestion	בַּ⁠מֶּ֣ה יִשְׁכָּ֔ב	1	What else can he sleep in?	This question adds emphasis. You can translate it as a strong statement. Alternate translation: “He will have nothing to wear while he sleeps!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+EXO	22	27	x7zb	figs-rquestion	בַּ⁠מֶּ֣ה יִשְׁכָּ֔ב	1	What else can he sleep in?	This question adds emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “He will have nothing to wear while he sleeps!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 EXO	22	28	eel2		אֱלֹהִ֖ים לֹ֣א תְקַלֵּ֑ל	1	You must not blaspheme me, God	Alternate translation: “Do not insult God” or “Do not speak evil about God”
 EXO	22	28	tdj6		וְ⁠נָשִׂ֥יא בְ⁠עַמְּ⁠ךָ֖ לֹ֥א תָאֹֽר	1	nor curse a ruler	Alternate translation: “and do not ask God to do bad things to your ruler”
 EXO	22	29	p8nk	figs-doublenegatives	לֹ֣א תְאַחֵ֑ר	1	You must not hold back offerings	This can be stated in a positive form. Alternate translation: “You must bring all of your offerings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-EXO	22	30	j345	translate-numbers	שִׁבְעַ֤ת	1	For seven days	This can be written as a numeral. Alternate translation: “7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
+EXO	22	30	j345	translate-numbers	שִׁבְעַ֤ת	1	For seven days	Alternate translation: “7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 EXO	22	30	m4wq	translate-ordinal	בַּ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁמִינִ֖י	1	the eighth day	This can be written as a numeral. Alternate translation: “on day number 8” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-EXO	23	intro	hk5t			0		# Exodus 23 General Notes\n\n## Structure\n\nThis chapter continues the list of case laws for Israel. It also touches on the patterns of life regarding the Sabbaths ([verses 10-12](../23/10.md)) and Festivals ([verses 14-19](../23/14.md)). At [verse 20](../23/20.md) Yahweh begins telling them about their future as they go to and live in the promised land.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Celebrations of feasts and festivals\n\nThe people of Israel were required to celebrate certain feasts and festivals. These were part of the law of Moses, and some are described in this chapter. Their purpose was to worship Yahweh and to remember the great things Yahweh has done for them.
+EXO	23	intro	hk5t			0		# Exodus 23 General Notes\n\n## Structure\n\nThis chapter continues the list of case laws for Israel. It also touches on the patterns of life regarding the Sabbaths ([verses 10-12](../23/10.md)) and Festivals ([verses 14-19](../23/14.md)). At [verse 20](../23/20.md) Yahweh begins telling them about their future as they go to and live in the promised land.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Celebrations of feasts and festivals\n\nThe people of Israel were required to celebrate certain feasts and festivals. These were part of the law of Moses, and some are described in this chapter. Their purpose was to worship Yahweh and to remember the great things Yahweh has done for them.<br>
 EXO	23	1	we1y			0	General Information:	Yahweh continues telling Moses his laws for the people of Israel.
 EXO	23	1	eeoc	figs-abstractnouns	לֹ֥א תִשָּׂ֖א שֵׁ֣מַע שָׁ֑וְא	1	dishonest witness	This could be translated differently to avoid the abstract nouns **report** and **emptiness.** Alternate translation: “You must not report emptily” or “You must not report falsely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-EXO	23	1	fu5k	figs-idiom	אַל־תָּ֤שֶׁת יָֽדְ⁠ךָ֙ עִם־רָשָׁ֔ע	1	dishonest witness	Here, to **put your hand with the wicked** means to support the lies that he is telling in order to harm someone else. The image is of putting out your hand to help him, to make him stronger than he would be on his own. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “You must not assist the wicked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EXO	23	1	l4xr		שֵׁ֣מַע שָׁ֑וְא	1	General Information:	Alternate translation: “a false testimony”
+EXO	23	1	fu5k	figs-idiom	אַל־תָּ֤שֶׁת יָֽדְ⁠ךָ֙ עִם־רָשָׁ֔ע	1	dishonest witness	Here, to **put your hand with the wicked** means to support the lies that he is telling in order to harm someone else. The image is of putting out your hand to help him, to make him stronger than he would be on his own. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “You must not assist the wicked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EXO	23	1	y1a3	figs-metonymy	עֵ֥ד חָמָֽס	1	dishonest witness	Here, **violence** can also mean “wrong.” Either way, it means to harm another person by committing injustice (violence to justice) by lying. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “a false witness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	23	2	nqz9		וְ⁠לֹא־תַעֲנֶ֣ה	1	nor may you bear witness	Alternate translation: “and you also must not speak”
 EXO	23	2	z6ej	figs-metaphor	לֹֽא־תִהְיֶ֥ה אַחֲרֵֽי־רַבִּ֖ים לְ⁠רָעֹ֑ת	1	siding with the crowd	This is a metaphor that describes one’s agreeing with a group of people as if he actually walked behind that group. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “You must not do the evil that the crowd wants” or “You must not agree with the majority for evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1641,7 +1635,7 @@ EXO	23	2	tnv2		לִ⁠נְטֹ֛ת…לְ⁠הַטֹּֽת	1	pervert justice	Her
 EXO	23	6	z2al		לֹ֥א תַטֶּ֛ה מִשְׁפַּ֥ט אֶבְיֹנְ⁠ךָ֖ בְּ⁠רִיבֽ⁠וֹ	1	Do not thrust aside justice for your poor in his lawsuit	Alternate translation: “Do not decide to treat a poor man unjustly in legal matters”
 EXO	23	6	vh76		בְּ⁠רִיבֽ⁠וֹ	1	lawsuit	Here, **in his lawsuit** refers to any matter that a court decides.
 EXO	23	7	ljdw	figs-metaphor	מִ⁠דְּבַר־שֶׁ֖קֶר תִּרְחָ֑ק	1	I will not acquit the wicked	Here distance is used figuratively to tell the Israelites to have no part in deception. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Do not speak deceptively” or “Do not join a false matter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EXO	23	7	c6xl	figs-doublet	וְ⁠נָקִ֤י וְ⁠צַדִּיק֙	1	I will not acquit the wicked	These two terms mean very similar things, both of which contrast with **the wicked** later in the verse. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “person who has not done anything wrong or the person who always does what is right” or “person who does right and not wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+EXO	23	7	c6xl	figs-doublet	וְ⁠נָקִ֤י וְ⁠צַדִּיק֙	1	I will not acquit the wicked	These two terms mean very similar things, both of which contrast with **the wicked** later in the verse. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “and … the person who has not done anything wrong or the person who always does what is right” or “and … the person who does right and not wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 EXO	23	7	mf4w		לֹא־אַצְדִּ֖יק רָשָֽׁע	1	I will not acquit the wicked	Alternate translation: “I will not find the wicked not guilty” or “I will not say that a wicked person is innocent”
 EXO	23	8	gh3v	figs-personification	כִּ֤י הַ⁠שֹּׁ֨חַד֙ יְעַוֵּ֣ר פִּקְחִ֔ים וִֽ⁠יסַלֵּ֖ף דִּבְרֵ֥י צַדִּיקִֽים	1	bribe blinds…perverts	Here, a “bribe” is described as if it could take action itself that negatively affects justice. Alternate translation: “for if you do, an evil person can give money to blind the clear-sighted and to pervert the words of the righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 EXO	23	8	ai37	figs-metaphor	כִּ֤י הַ⁠שֹּׁ֨חַד֙ יְעַוֵּ֣ר פִּקְחִ֔ים וִֽ⁠יסַלֵּ֖ף דִּבְרֵ֥י צַדִּיקִֽים	1	bribe blinds…perverts	To **blind the clear-sighted** is a metaphor that means causing those who know what is right to act like they do not. And **perverts the words of the righteous** could mean causes those who would speak the truth (in court) to lie or causes the judge to give an evil judgment or causes those listening to **the words of the righteous** to choose to act as if they had heard something different. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “for a bribe causes those who understand the right thing to do not to do it and causes good men to speak lies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1657,7 +1651,7 @@ EXO	23	12	u07q	translate-ordinal	הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֖י	1	any foreigner m
 EXO	23	12	gpu1	figs-activepassive	וְ⁠יִנָּפֵ֥שׁ בֶּן־אֲמָתְ⁠ךָ֖ וְ⁠הַ⁠גֵּֽר	1	any foreigner may rest and be refreshed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and the son of your female slave and the sojourner may refresh themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	23	13	ldn8		תִּשָּׁמֵ֑רוּ	1	Pay attention to	Alternate translation: “Do” or “Obey”
 EXO	23	13	va2j	figs-parallelism	וְ⁠שֵׁ֨ם אֱלֹהִ֤ים אֲחֵרִים֙ לֹ֣א תַזְכִּ֔ירוּ לֹ֥א יִשָּׁמַ֖ע עַל־פִּֽי⁠ךָ	1	mention the names of other gods	These two instructions mean almost the same thing. It may be more clear to combine them in some languages. Alternate translation: “Be sure never to speak the names of other gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-EXO	23	13	x5tf	figs-metonymy	וְ⁠שֵׁ֨ם אֱלֹהִ֤ים אֲחֵרִים֙ לֹ֣א תַזְכִּ֔ירוּ לֹ֥א יִשָּׁמַ֖ע עַל־פִּֽי⁠ךָ	1	mention the names of other gods	This probably means praying to other gods. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Do not pray to other gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+EXO	23	13	x5tf	figs-metonymy	וְ⁠שֵׁ֨ם אֱלֹהִ֤ים אֲחֵרִים֙ לֹ֣א תַזְכִּ֔ירוּ לֹ֥א יִשָּׁמַ֖ע עַל־פִּֽי⁠ךָ	1	mention the names of other gods	These parallel phrases probably mean praying to other gods. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Do not pray to other gods, never let me hear you do that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	23	13	apnw	figs-metonymy	לֹ֥א יִשָּׁמַ֖ע עַל־פִּֽי⁠ךָ	1	mention the names of other gods	To be **on your mouth** means to speak. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “nor speak them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	23	13	s86p	figs-activepassive	לֹ֥א יִשָּׁמַ֖ע עַל־פִּֽי⁠ךָ	1	mention the names of other gods	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Also see previous note. Alternate translation: “nor speak them so someone could hear them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	23	14	ezgh	translate-numbers	שָׁלֹ֣שׁ	1	mention the names of other gods	Alternate translation: “3” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
@@ -1667,11 +1661,11 @@ EXO	23	15	tx1v	figs-doublenegatives	וְ⁠לֹא־יֵרָא֥וּ פָנַ֖
 EXO	23	16	ybsb		וְ⁠חַ֤ג הַ⁠קָּצִיר֙	1	Festival of Ingathering	Elsewhere this is called the “Festival of Weeks.” See [Exodus 34:22](../34/22.md) and Deuteronomy 16:9 and following.
 EXO	23	16	pnx4		וְ⁠חַ֤ג הָֽ⁠אָסִף֙	1	Festival of Ingathering	This festival celebrated the final harvesting of all the crops for the year. This festival was also known as the Festival of Shelters or the Festival of Booths. The idea came from the practice of the farmers living in temporary booths, or huts, out in the fields to guard the crop as it ripened. See Deuteronomy 16:13. Alternate translation: “And the Festival of the Ingathering”
 EXO	23	16	wgxm	figs-metaphor	בְּ⁠צֵ֣את הַ⁠שָּׁנָ֔ה	1	Festival of Ingathering	The phrase **in the exiting of the year** means at the end of the year.  The year is pictured as something that is leaving. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “as the year goes out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EXO	23	17	t5xj	figs-metonymy	יֵרָאֶה֙	1	All your males must appear before the Lord Yahweh	Here, to **appear to the face of the Lord Yahweh** means to gather to worship. **To the face** is a metonym for Yahweh’s presence, referring to worship. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “must come to worship the Lord Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+EXO	23	17	t5xj	figs-metonymy	יֵרָאֶה֙…אֶל־פְּנֵ֖י הָ⁠אָדֹ֥ן׀ יְהוָֽה׃	1	All your males must appear before the Lord Yahweh	Here, to **appear to the face of the Lord Yahweh** means to gather to worship. **To the face** is a metonym for Yahweh’s presence, referring to worship. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “must come to worship the Lord Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	23	20	bssx	figs-metonymy	לְ⁠פָנֶ֔י⁠ךָ	1		This means “in front of you.” Alternate translation: “in front of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	23	21	mpfy	figs-metonymy	הִשָּׁ֧מֶר מִ⁠פָּנָ֛י⁠ו	1	Be attentive to him	This means to respect him; **from his face** refers to his person. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Show respect to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	23	21	pm7x	figs-activepassive	הִשָּׁ֧מֶר מִ⁠פָּנָ֛י⁠ו	1	Be attentive to him	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Pay attention to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EXO	23	21	p5y3	grammar-connect-logic-result	אַל־תַּמֵּ֣ר בּ֑⁠וֹ כִּ֣י לֹ֤א יִשָּׂא֙ לְ⁠פִשְׁעֲ⁠כֶ֔ם כִּ֥י שְׁמִ֖⁠י בְּ⁠קִרְבּֽ⁠וֹ׃	1	Do not provoke him, for he will not pardon	There are two reasons given for the instruction **do not cause bitterness in him**. They are chained together such that you could say: “Because my name is within him, he will not forgive your transgressions; therefore, do not cause bitterness in him.” The relation of the **name** and **forgiveness** is not explicit. Alternate translation: “If you provoke him, he will not pardon your sins, for my name is within him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+EXO	23	21	p5y3	grammar-connect-logic-result	אַל־תַּמֵּ֣ר בּ֑⁠וֹ כִּ֣י לֹ֤א יִשָּׂא֙ לְ⁠פִשְׁעֲ⁠כֶ֔ם כִּ֥י שְׁמִ֖⁠י בְּ⁠קִרְבּֽ⁠וֹ׃	1	Do not provoke him, for he will not pardon	There are two reasons given for the instruction **do not cause bitterness in him**. They are connected in such a way that you could say: “Because my name is within him, he will not forgive your transgressions; therefore, do not cause bitterness in him.” The relation of the **name** and **forgiveness** is not explicit. Alternate translation: “If you provoke him, he will not pardon your sins, for my name is within him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 EXO	23	21	p4jv	figs-metonymy	שְׁמִ֖⁠י בְּ⁠קִרְבּֽ⁠וֹ	1	My name is on him	Here, **name** refers to God’s authority. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “he has my authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	23	21	gt76	figs-metonymy	וּ⁠שְׁמַ֥ע בְּ⁠קֹל֖⁠וֹ	1	If you indeed obey his voice	Here, **voice** represents what the angel says. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “and obey what he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	23	22	z1gn	figs-metonymy	אִם־שָׁמֹ֤עַ תִּשְׁמַע֙ בְּ⁠קֹל֔⁠וֹ	1	If you indeed obey his voice	Here, **voice** represents what the angel says. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “if you carefully obey what he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -1693,7 +1687,7 @@ EXO	23	29	i9aq	figs-explicit	פֶּן־תִּהְיֶ֤ה הָ⁠אָ֨רֶץ֙
 EXO	23	30	mne7	figs-metonymy	מִ⁠פָּנֶ֑י⁠ךָ	1	miscarry	This means “ahead of you.” Alternate translation: “from before you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	23	31	my2e	figs-metonymy	מִ⁠פָּנֶֽי⁠ךָ	1	miscarry	This means “ahead of you.” Alternate translation: “from before you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	23	33	d1fp	figs-metaphor	כִּֽי־יִהְיֶ֥ה לְ⁠ךָ֖ לְ⁠מוֹקֵֽשׁ	1	this will surely become a trap for you	This means worshiping other gods will lead the people of Israel to certain destruction, as if they were an animal caught in a hunter’s trap. It could also be saying that leaving the other people around will make it so that the Israelites see the other people’s worship and are lured (like in a trap) into worshiping the other gods, which is a sin against Yahweh. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Worshiping them will surely destroy you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EXO	24	intro	b83l			0		# Exodus 24 General Notes\n\n## Structure\n\n1. Yahweh summons Moses v. 1-2\n2. Moses reads the covenant and the people accept it; this is ritually marked by sacrifice and sprinkling of blood v. 3-8\n3. Moses and Israelite elders go up the mountain, see God and eat v. 9-11\n4. Yahweh summons Moses further up the mountain without the other elders, and he goes v. 12-15\n5. Description of Yahweh’s glory, and Moses is at the top of the mountain v. 16-18\n\n## Potential Translation Issues\n\n- there are a number of similes used to describe people’s encounter with God\n- “covenant” appears in a variety of ways\n- the mountain, the mountain of God, and Mount Sinai are all the same location\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Moses’ covenant\n\nThe people of Israel promise to obey the covenant Yahweh made with Moses. Their continued blessings were contingent upon their obedience to this covenant. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])\n\n### God’s holiness\n\nBecause Yahweh is perfectly holy, he can only be approached in a certain way. Because of this, only Moses was allowed near Yahweh. This is also why Yahweh is described as a “devouring fire.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])
+EXO	24	intro	b83l			0		# Exodus 24 General Notes\n\n## Structure\n\n- v. 1-2: Yahweh summons Moses\n- v. 3-8: Moses reads the covenant and the people accept it; this is ritually marked by sacrifice and sprinkling of blood\n- v. 9-11: Moses and Israelite elders go up the mountain, see God and eat\n- v. 12-15: Yahweh summons Moses further up the mountain without the other elders, and he goes\n- v. 16-18: Description of Yahweh’s glory, and Moses is at the top of the mountain\n\n## Potential Translation Issues\n\n- there are a number of similes used to describe people’s encounter with God\n- “covenant” appears in a variety of ways\n- the mountain, the mountain of God, and Mount Sinai are all the same location\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Moses’ covenant\n\nThe people of Israel promise to obey the covenant Yahweh made with Moses. Their continued blessings were contingent upon their obedience to this covenant. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])\n\n### God’s holiness\n\nBecause Yahweh is perfectly holy, he can only be approached in a certain way. Because of this, only Moses was allowed near Yahweh. This is also why Yahweh is described as a “devouring fire.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\n
 EXO	24	1	hji6	writing-newevent		0	Nadab…Abihu	A new scene begins here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 EXO	24	1	c97i	translate-names	נָדָ֣ב וַ⁠אֲבִיה֔וּא	1	Nadab…Abihu	**Nadab and Abihu** are men’s names. See how you translated these names in [Exodus 6:23](../06/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EXO	24	1	zukb	figs-123person	אֶל־יְהוָ֗ה	1	Nadab…Abihu	Yahweh refers to himself in the third person. You may change it to first person if it would be unclear in your language. Alternate translation: “to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
@@ -1719,8 +1713,8 @@ EXO	24	10	zd6u	figs-simile	וּ⁠כְ⁠עֶ֥צֶם הַ⁠שָּׁמַ֖יִ
 EXO	24	11	jds6	figs-metonymy	וְ⁠אֶל־אֲצִילֵי֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל לֹ֥א שָׁלַ֖ח יָד֑⁠וֹ	1	God did not lay a hand on the Israelite leaders	Here, **his hand** refers to his judgement. This means that God did not harm the leaders. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “God did not harm the Israelite leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	24	11	b398	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	וְ⁠אֶל־אֲצִילֵי֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל לֹ֥א שָׁלַ֖ח יָד֑⁠וֹ	1	God did not lay a hand on the Israelite leaders	What would be expected is that they would die if they saw God. The Israelite elders ability to see God and live is unexpected. Be sure your translation conveys that. Alternate translation: “However, he did not send out his hand to the leaders of the sons of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
 EXO	24	12	dx4f	figs-explicit	לְ⁠הוֹרֹתָֽ⁠ם	1	tablets of stone and the law and commandments	This means so that Moses and the other Israelite leaders could teach the laws and commandments to the Israelite people. You may need to make this clear. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-EXO	24	13	gv5e		וִ⁠יהוֹשֻׁ֖עַ מְשָׁרְת֑⁠וֹ	1	with his assistant Joshua	The word translated **servant** here is usually associated with a higher position, like a government minister. Avoid using a word that implies a lower class serving role. Alternate translation: “with Joshua who assisted him” or “with Joshua who helped him”
 EXO	24	13	flw7	writing-participants	וִ⁠יהוֹשֻׁ֖עַ	1	with his assistant Joshua	**Joshua** is introduced here again. Use the natural form in your language for reintroducing a character. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
+EXO	24	13	gv5e		וִ⁠יהוֹשֻׁ֖עַ מְשָׁרְת֑⁠וֹ	1	with his assistant Joshua	The word translated **servant** here is usually associated with a higher position, like a government minister. Avoid using a word that implies a lower class serving role. Alternate translation: “and Joshua his assistant”
 EXO	24	14	mhvj	grammar-connect-time-sequential	וְ⁠אֶל־הַ⁠זְּקֵנִ֤ים אָמַר֙	1	wait for us	The structure of the Hebrew indicates but does not require that this speech by Moses happened before [verse 13](../24/13.md) (hence **had said**). The ULT takes this view, however, for languages where it is hard to express events out of order, the UST reflects the other grammatical possibility and says in [24:13](../24/13.md) that Moses started up the mountain and in [24:15](../24/15.md) that he went the rest of the way up the mountain. Following this, you can view this verse as if Moses paused and gave these final instructions as he was leaving the elders behind, thus keeping a sequential structure. Either approach is permissible by the text, but the approach of the ULT is preferred, if possible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 EXO	24	14	qiy4		לָ֣⁠נוּ	1	wait for us	Alternate translation: “Joshua and me”
 EXO	24	14	uc7r	translate-names	וְ⁠חוּר֙	1	Hur	**Hur** is a man’s name. See how you translated this name in [Exodus 17:10](../17/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -1732,7 +1726,7 @@ EXO	24	16	uwdd	translate-ordinal	בַּ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ
 EXO	24	17	e4n6	figs-simile	כְּ⁠אֵ֥שׁ אֹכֶ֖לֶת	1	like a devouring fire	This means the glory of Yahweh was very large and seemed to burn brightly, like a fire. Alternate translation: “like a big fire burning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 EXO	24	17	k5lj	figs-metaphor	לְ⁠עֵינֵ֖י בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל	1	in the eyes of the Israelites	Their **eyes** represent seeing, and seeing represents their thoughts or judgment about what they saw. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. See how you translated a similar expression in [15:26](../15/26.md). Alternate translation: “to the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	24	18	h1wy	translate-numbers	אַרְבָּעִ֣ים י֔וֹם וְ⁠אַרְבָּעִ֖ים לָֽיְלָה	1	forty days and forty nights	Alternate translation: “forty days and forty nights” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-EXO	25	intro	t23a			0		# Exodus 25 General Notes\n\n## Structure:\n\n*   v. 1-7: Instructions for gifts the Israelites may give to help build the place where they will worship God\n*   v. 8-9: Introductory building instructions\n*   v. 10-22: Instructions for building the Box of the Testimony\n*   v. 23-30: Instructions for building the table\n*   v. 31-39: Instructions for building the lampstand\n*   v. 40: Summary instruction\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n*   The tent of meeting and Box of the Testimony are introduced in this chapter.\n*   Translators will need to take special care in translating the concept of atonement.\n\n## Potential Translation Issues in this Chapter:\n\n*   There are many unfamiliar items in this chapter. Fortunately they are mostly all physical items. Translators will have to try to understand what each item is and translate it into the closest equivalent in their culture. It may be helpful for translators to try to find images depicting some of the items the Israelites were to make.\n*   There are some biblical weights and measurements that translators may not have encountered before.\n*   From [verse 11](../25/11.md) until the end of chapter 30, almost every instruction regarding the construction of the tent of meeting and all the associated items are given with a singular form of “you,” as if Moses himself would make them. However, it is clear and made explicit in [chapter 31](../31/01.md) that certain skilled craftsmen will receive these instructions from Moses and make these items. In some languages you may need to change from second to third person throughout, following the pattern in [25:10](../25/10.md). There are a few exceptions which will have their own note. See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]].
+EXO	25	intro	t23a			0		# Exodus 25 General Notes\n\n## Structure:\n\n*   v. 1-7: Instructions for gifts the Israelites may give to help build the place where they will worship God\n*   v. 8-9: Introductory building instructions\n*   v. 10-22: Instructions for building the Box of the Testimony\n*   v. 23-30: Instructions for building the table\n*   v. 31-39: Instructions for building the lampstand\n*   v. 40: Summary instruction\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n*   The tent of meeting and Box of the Testimony are introduced in this chapter.\n*   Translators will need to take special care in translating the concept of atonement.\n\n## Potential Translation Issues in this Chapter:\n\n*   There are many unfamiliar items in this chapter. Fortunately they are mostly all physical items. Translators will have to try to understand what each item is and translate it into the closest equivalent in their culture. It may be helpful for translators to try to find images depicting some of the items the Israelites were to make.\n*   There are some biblical weights and measurements that translators may not have encountered before.\n*   From [verse 11](../25/11.md) until the end of chapter 30, almost every instruction regarding the construction of the tent of meeting and all the associated items are given with a singular form of “you,” as if Moses himself would make them. However, it is clear and made explicit in [chapter 31](../31/01.md) that certain skilled craftsmen will receive these instructions from Moses and make these items. In some languages you may need to change from second to third person throughout, following the pattern in [25:10](../25/10.md). There are a few exceptions which will have their own note. See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]].<br>
 EXO	25	2	ygtd	figs-quotemarks	דַּבֵּר֙	1	who is motivated by a willing heart	The beginning of this verse marks the start of a very long direct quote which continues until the end of [Exo 30:10](../30/10.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	25	2	tktu	figs-quotations	דַּבֵּר֙ אֶל־בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל וְ⁠יִקְחוּ־לִ֖⁠י תְּרוּמָ֑ה	1	who is motivated by a willing heart	In some languages you may have to make **and they shall take a contribution for me** a direct quote. Note that this will make it a second-level quotation and you will need to mark it with second-level quotation marking if your language uses them. Alternate translation: “Say to the sons of Israel, ‘You shall take a contribution for me.’ ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 EXO	25	2	r5yr	figs-idiom	אֲשֶׁ֣ר יִדְּבֶ֣⁠נּוּ לִבּ֔⁠וֹ	1	who is motivated by a willing heart	This is an idiom that indicates a person’s desire to give an offering. Many languages will have a similar idiom, though the body part may vary. Alternate translation: “who wants to give one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -1742,11 +1736,11 @@ EXO	25	4	c958	translate-unknown	וְ⁠תוֹלַ֥עַת שָׁנִ֖י	1	scarl
 EXO	25	5	ayup	translate-unknown	מְאָדָּמִ֛ים	1	scarlet	When animal skins are tanned (processed into usable leather), they become reddish in color. It is not clear whetherfff these hides are dyed red or simply reddened in the tanning process. Alternate translation: “tanned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	25	5	va28	translate-unknown	תְּחָשִׁ֖ים	1	scarlet	The meaning of this word is not known. It may refer to some water mammal that has skin that can be made into a high-quality leather. [Sea cows on Wikipedia](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sirenia) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	25	5	d4fa	translate-unknown	שִׁטִּֽים	1	scarlet	A small tree with spreading foliage and durable wood. [See on Wikipedia](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Shittah_tree) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-EXO	25	6	i6gp	translate-unknown	בְּשָׂמִים֙	1	spices	Here, **spices** are parts of dried plants that people chop or grind into a powder and put in oil or food to give it a pleasing smell or flavor. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+EXO	25	6	i6gp	translate-unknown	בְּשָׂמִים֙	1	spices	Here, **spices** are things made from parts of plants that people dry and then grind into a powder to put in oil or food, giving it a particular smell or flavor. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	25	7	mg4f	translate-unknown	אַבְנֵי־שֹׁ֕הַם	1	onyx	An **onyx** is a valuable stone that has layers of white and black, red or brown. If this stone is unknown to your people, consider translating it by using a word for a familiar stone with a similar pattern, if possible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	25	7	c3hk		וְ⁠אַבְנֵ֖י	1	precious stones	Alternate translation: “and valuable gems for” or “ and treasured gems for”
 EXO	25	9	m1np	figs-you	אוֹתְ⁠ךָ֔	1	show you in the plans	Here, **you** is singular and refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-EXO	25	9	w4sc		כֵּלָ֑י⁠ו	1	tabernacle	Here, **utensils** is a general term that you could translate by a broad term that could encompass all of the things used in the tabernacle, as described in this and the several following chapters. Alternate translation: “its implements”
+EXO	25	9	w4sc		כֵּלָ֑י⁠ו	1	tabernacle	Here, **utensils** is a general term that you could translate by a broad term that could encompass all of the things used in the Dwelling, as described in this and the several following chapters. Alternate translation: “its implements”
 EXO	25	9	c9qe	figs-youdual	תַּעֲשֽׂוּ	1	You must make it	Here, **you** is plural and refers to Moses and the people of Israel. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
 EXO	25	9	tc2k	figs-123person	תַּעֲשֽׂוּ	1	You must make it	Since Moses does not construct these items himself, you may consider shifting the instructions to the third person if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “they shall make it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 EXO	25	10	o8dl	translate-unknown	שִׁטִּ֑ים	1	two and a half cubits…one cubit and a half	These trees, **acacias**, are small trees with spreading foliage and durable wood. See how you translated this in [25:5](../25/05.md). [See on Wikipedia](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Shittah_tree) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -1754,7 +1748,7 @@ EXO	25	10	cs23	translate-bdistance	אַמָּתַ֨יִם וָ⁠חֵ֜צִי…
 EXO	25	10	saf8	translate-fraction	וָ⁠חֵ֜צִי…וָ⁠חֵ֨צִי֙…וָ⁠חֵ֖צִי	1	two and a half cubits…one cubit and a half	The word **half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
 EXO	25	12	wbq8	translate-unknown	וְ⁠יָצַ֣קְתָּ לּ֗⁠וֹ אַרְבַּע֙ טַבְּעֹ֣ת זָהָ֔ב	1	cast four rings of gold	Casting rings was a process in which gold was melted, poured into a mold that was in the shape of a ring, and then allowed to cool and harden. If this sort of metal-working process is unknown to your people, you may simply describe it, or use a word meaning “make,” as the UST does. The UST approach is preferred, as the creation process is not in focus here, and it would be cumbersome to include the description in the text. You could use a word meaning “make,” and include the description in a footnote if you are including those and your team feels it is important to understand. Alternate translation: “You shall make four rings of gold by melting the gold and pouring it into molds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	25	13	i5mc	translate-unknown	שִׁטִּ֑ים	1	cast four rings of gold	A small tree with spreading foliage and durable wood. See how you translated this in [25:5](../25/05.md). [See on Wikipedia](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Shittah_tree) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-EXO	25	15	k67p	figs-parallelism	בְּ⁠טַבְּעֹת֙ הָ⁠אָרֹ֔ן יִהְי֖וּ הַ⁠בַּדִּ֑ים לֹ֥א יָסֻ֖רוּ מִמֶּֽ⁠נּוּ	1	General Information:	These two phrases mean similar things. Yahweh is saying basically the same thing twice to emphasize how important this command is. If it is confusing for your readers to repeat both phrases, you can combine them and show the emphasis in a different way. Alternate translation: “The poles belong in the rings of the box; never is anyone to remove them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+EXO	25	15	k67p	figs-parallelism	בְּ⁠טַבְּעֹת֙ הָ⁠אָרֹ֔ן יִהְי֖וּ הַ⁠בַּדִּ֑ים לֹ֥א יָסֻ֖רוּ מִמֶּֽ⁠נּוּ	1	General Information:	These two phrases mean similar things. Yahweh is saying the same thing in two different ways to emphasize how important this command is. If it is confusing for your readers to repeat both phrases, you can combine them and show the emphasis in a different way. Alternate translation: “The poles belong in the rings of the box; no one is ever to remove them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 EXO	25	15	aea1	figs-activepassive	בְּ⁠טַבְּעֹת֙ הָ⁠אָרֹ֔ן יִהְי֖וּ הַ⁠בַּדִּ֑ים לֹ֥א יָסֻ֖רוּ מִמֶּֽ⁠נּוּ	1	General Information:	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language, as seen in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	25	17	ast8	translate-bdistance	אַמָּתַ֤יִם וָ⁠חֵ֨צִי֙…וְ⁠אַמָּ֥ה וָ⁠חֵ֖צִי	1	two and a half cubits…a cubit and a half	You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to the metric system is: 115 centimeters … 69 centimeters … 69 centimeters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
 EXO	25	17	c8o7	translate-fraction	וָ⁠חֵ֨צִי֙…וָ⁠חֵ֖צִי	1	two and a half cubits…a cubit and a half	The word **half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
@@ -1767,8 +1761,8 @@ EXO	25	25	awi7	translate-bdistance	טֹ֖פַח	1	one handbreadth wide	You can c
 EXO	25	25	bit8		לּ֥⁠וֹ	1	frame for it	Alternate translation: “for the table”
 EXO	25	27	jdh4	figs-idiom	לְ⁠בָתִּ֣ים	1	The rings must be attached	Here, **to house the poles** means that the rings will hold the poles. Since the rings are where the poles belong for use when carrying the table, the rings are figuratively in their **house.** If your language has a similar idiom meaning “place of belonging,” you may use it, or you may translate the idea. Alternate translation: “to be a place for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EXO	25	28	l4fk	figs-activepassive	וְ⁠נִשָּׂא־בָ֖⁠ם אֶת־הַ⁠שֻּׁלְחָֽן	1	so that the table may be carried with them	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And you shall carry the table with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EXO	25	29	nrmp	translate-unknown	קְּעָרֹתָ֜י⁠ו וְ⁠כַפֹּתָ֗י⁠ו וּ⁠קְשׂוֹתָי⁠ו֙ וּ⁠מְנַקִּיֹּתָ֔י⁠ו	1	to be used to pour out drink offerings	We do not know precisely what these dishes were. It is likely that the **plates** were mostly flat dishes for holding the bread that would be on the table. The **pans** may have been shallow bowls or deep plates for holding incense, or they may have been something more like a ladle or spoon. The **pitchers** probably held wine to be poured into the **bowls** for the drink offerings. You will need to translate using the closest word in your culture for each such item. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-EXO	25	29	v78d	figs-activepassive	אֲשֶׁ֥ר יֻסַּ֖ךְ בָּ⁠הֵ֑ן	1	to be used to pour out drink offerings	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the priests will pour out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+EXO	25	29	nrmp	translate-unknown	קְּעָרֹתָ֜י⁠ו וְ⁠כַפֹּתָ֗י⁠ו וּ⁠קְשׂוֹתָי⁠ו֙ וּ⁠מְנַקִּיֹּתָ֔י⁠ו	1	to be used to pour out drink offerings	We do not know precisely what these dishes were. It is likely that the **plates** were mostly flat dishes for holding the bread that would be on the table. The **pans** may have been shallow bowls or deep plates for holding incense, or they may have been something more like a ladle or spoon. The **pitchers** probably held wine to be poured into the **bowls** for the drink offerings. You will need to translate using the closest word for each such item in your culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+EXO	25	29	v78d	figs-activepassive	אֲשֶׁ֥ר יֻסַּ֖ךְ בָּ⁠הֵ֑ן	1	to be used to pour out drink offerings	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “from which the priests will pour out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	25	30	uth7	figs-metonymy	לֶ֥חֶם פָּנִ֖ים	1	bread of the presence	Here, **faces** figuratively represents the presence of Yahweh. This bread represented the presence of God. Alternate translation: “the bread of the Presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	25	30	kh7c	figs-metonymy	לְ⁠פָנַ֥⁠י	1	bread of the presence	Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “in front of me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	25	31	kc3q		מִקְשָׁ֞ה	1	hammered gold	Alternate translation: “of beaten gold” See how you translated this in [Exodus 25:18](../25/18.md).
@@ -1778,12 +1772,11 @@ EXO	25	35	lk10		וְ⁠כַפְתֹּ֡ר תַּחַת֩ שְׁנֵ֨י הַ⁠
 EXO	25	36	r7yz		מִקְשָׁ֥ה	1	made as one piece with it	Alternate translation: “of beaten gold” See how you translated this in [Exodus 25:18](../25/18.md).
 EXO	25	37	dfn6	figs-metonymy	וְ⁠הֵאִ֖יר עַל־עֵ֥בֶר פָּנֶֽי⁠הָ	1	for them to give light from it	Here, **face** figuratively represents the location of the lampstand. Alternate translation: “so they shine light near it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	25	39	ff5p	translate-bweight	כִּכָּ֛ר	1	one talent	You can convert this weight to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A talent weighs about 33 kilograms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
-EXO	25	40	y081	figs-explicit	וּ⁠רְאֵ֖ה וַ⁠עֲשֵׂ֑ה	1	you are being shown on the mountain	All the items described in this chapter are implied as what Moses is told to **see and make**. You could make that explicit in your translation if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “See and make everything I have described” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-EXO	25	40	gyte	figs-metonymy	וּ⁠רְאֵ֖ה וַ⁠עֲשֵׂ֑ה	1	you are being shown on the mountain	Here, **see** relates to observing or overseeing. Essentially, Yahweh is telling Moses to be careful as he observes the pattern on the mountain and as he sees the craftsmen of Israel working on these items, so that they are made correctly. Alternate translation: “Watch carefully so you can make these things well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+EXO	25	40	y081	figs-explicit	וּ⁠רְאֵ֖ה וַ⁠עֲשֵׂ֑ה	1	you are being shown on the mountain	All the items described in this chapter are included in what Moses is told to **see and make**. You could make that explicit in your translation if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “See and make everything I have described” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+EXO	25	40	gyte	figs-metonymy	וּ⁠רְאֵ֖ה וַ⁠עֲשֵׂ֑ה	1	you are being shown on the mountain	Here, **see** relates to observing or overseeing. Essentially, Yahweh is telling Moses to be careful as he observes the pattern on the mountain and as he sees the craftsmen of Israel working on these items, so that they are made correctly. Alternate translation: “Observe carefully and work exactly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	25	40	l7je	figs-activepassive	אַתָּ֥ה מָרְאֶ֖ה	1	you are being shown on the mountain	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I am showing you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EXO	26	intro	emw7			0		# Exodus 26 General Notes\n\n\n- The sacred tent has four layers (from inside to out): linen, goats’ hair, tanned rams’ skins, and fine leather.\n- There are multiple different curtains described using three different Hebrew words: one sort of curtains to make the walls of the tent ([verses 1-13](../26/01.md)), another to separate the Holy Place and Most Holy Place ([verses 31-34](../26/31.md)), and another for the entrance of the sacred tent ([verses 36-37](../26/36.md)). If there are words in your language that would make a distinction between these sorts of hanging cloths, it would be appropriate to make a distinction in your translation.\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter is a continuation of the material in the previous chapter.\n- v. 1-30: Instructions for constructing the exterior of the sacred tent\n    * v. 1-6: Inner covering\n    * v. 7-14: Outer covering layers\n    * v. 15-30: Wooden framework\n- v. 31-35: Instructions for arranging the interior of the sacred tent\n- v. 36-37: Instructions for hanging the entrance curtain\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n\n### The tent of meeting\n\nThis chapter gives specific instructions regarding the building of a tent where Moses would meet Yahweh and the box would be stored. This would eventually become the tabernacle. Note: “tabernacle” is simply an English word transcribed from the Latin for “tent,” which translates the Hebrew for “dwelling place and which has taken on religious significance via the King James Version of the Bible. The terms “tabernacle” and “tent” should be considered interchangeable. It was to be considered a very holy place. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])
-EXO	26	1	ks8r	figs-you	תַּעֲשֶׂ֖ה	1	You must make	Yahweh is speaking to Moses, so the word **you** is singular. Yahweh probably expected Moses to tell someone else to do the actual work, but Moses would be the one responsible for seeing that the work was done correctly. “Tell a craftsman to make” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-EXO	26	1	iww4	translate-unknown	יְרִיעֹ֑ת	1	curtains	The **curtains** were large, heavy sections of woven cloth that were used to form the covering and dividing walls of the tabernacle. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+EXO	26	intro	emw7			0		# Exodus 26 General Notes\n\n- The sacred tent has four layers (from inside to out): linen, goats’ hair, tanned rams’ skins, and fine leather.\n- There are multiple different curtains described using three different Hebrew words: one sort of curtains to make the walls of the tent ([verses 1-13](../26/01.md)), another to separate the Holy Place and Most Holy Place (also known as Holy of Holies) ([verses 31-34](../26/31.md)), and another for the entrance of the sacred tent ([verses 36-37](../26/36.md)). If there are words in your language that would make a distinction between these sorts of hanging cloths, it would be appropriate to make a distinction in your translation.\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter is a continuation of the material in the previous chapter.\n- v. 1-30: Instructions for constructing the exterior of the sacred tent\n    * v. 1-6: Inner covering\n    * v. 7-14: Outer covering layers\n    * v. 15-30: Wooden framework\n- v. 31-35: Instructions for arranging the interior of the sacred tent\n- v. 36-37: Instructions for hanging the entrance curtain\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The tent of meeting\n\nThis chapter gives specific instructions regarding the building of a tent where Moses would meet Yahweh and the box would be stored. This would eventually become the Dwelling.  (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\n
+EXO	26	1	ks8r	figs-you	תַּעֲשֶׂ֖ה	1	You must make	Yahweh is speaking to Moses, so the word **you** is singular. Yahweh probably expected Moses to tell someone else to do the actual work, but Moses would be the one responsible for seeing that the work was done correctly. Alternate translation: “, tell a craftsman to make” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 EXO	26	1	vre7		וּ⁠תְכֵ֤לֶת וְ⁠אַרְגָּמָן֙ וְ⁠תֹלַ֣עַת שָׁנִ֔י	1	curtains	This could mean: (1) “material that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 25:4](../25/04.md).
 EXO	26	1	xvs7	translate-unknown	וְ⁠תֹלַ֣עַת שָׁנִ֔י	1	scarlet wool	A bright red color for dying cloth was extracted from these worms. Alternate translation: “and bright red” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	26	1	ni5d	translate-unknown	שֵׁ֣שׁ מָשְׁזָ֗ר	1	scarlet wool	This was cloth made from fine linen threads that someone twisted together to make a stronger thread. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -1810,7 +1803,7 @@ EXO	26	12	hftk	translate-fraction	חֲצִ֤י	1	clasps	The word **half** means
 EXO	26	13	k4ci	translate-bdistance	וְ⁠הָ⁠אַמָּ֨ה…וְ⁠הָ⁠אַמָּ֤ה	1	cubit	You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46 centimeters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
 EXO	26	14	kii8	translate-unknown	תְּחָשִׁ֖ים	1	a covering of ram skins dyed red, and another covering of fine leather	The meaning of this word, **sea cows**, is not known. It may refer to a water mammal that has skin that can be made into a high-quality leather. [Sea cows on Wikipedia](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sirenia) See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 25:5](../25/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	26	14	yz3v	translate-unknown	מְאָדָּמִ֑ים	1	dyed red	When animal skins are tanned (processed into usable leather), they become reddish. It is not clear if these hides are dyed red or simply reddened in the tanning process. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 25:5](../25/05.md). Alternate translation: “tanned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-EXO	26	15	y85l	translate-unknown	הַ⁠קְּרָשִׁ֖ים	1	frames	This refers to frames or panels that they made by joining together smaller pieces of wood. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+EXO	26	15	y85l	translate-unknown	הַ⁠קְּרָשִׁ֖ים	1	frames	Here, **frames** refers to open wooden structures made to hold the curtains. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	26	15	tw2h	translate-unknown	שִׁטִּ֖ים	1	frames	The **acacias** are relatively small trees with spreading foliage and durable wood. See how you translated this in [25:5](../25/05.md). [See on Wikipedia](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Shittah_tree) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	26	16	k4b7	translate-numbers	עֶ֥שֶׂר…וְ⁠אַמָּה֙ וַ⁠חֲצִ֣י הָֽ⁠אַמָּ֔ה	1	ten cubits…one and a half cubits	Alternate translation: “10 … 1.5 cubits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 EXO	26	16	z2rv	translate-bdistance	עֶ֥שֶׂר אַמּ֖וֹת…וְ⁠אַמָּה֙ וַ⁠חֲצִ֣י הָֽ⁠אַמָּ֔ה	1	ten cubits…one and a half cubits	You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people, if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 4.6 meters … 69 centimeters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
@@ -1828,53 +1821,53 @@ EXO	26	29	nq3m		לַ⁠בְּרִיחִ֑ם	1	crossbars	The **crossbars** are ho
 EXO	26	30	csf9	figs-activepassive	הָרְאֵ֖יתָ בָּ⁠הָֽר	1	you were shown on the mountain	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	26	31	yqi6			0	General Information:	See how you translated very similar text in [Exodus 26:1](../26/01.md).
 EXO	26	33	p2yq	translate-unknown	הַ⁠קְּרָסִים֒	1	clasps	The **clasps** fit into the loops to hold the curtains together. See how you translated these in [Exodus 26:6](../26/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-EXO	26	33	x28l	figs-possession	קֹ֥דֶשׁ הַ⁠קֳּדָשִֽׁים	1	clasps	Here, **Holy of Holies** means extremely holy, as in, the holiest of the holy places. If doubling the words like this would not create this strengthening and marking as exclusive meaning in your language, you may need to find another way to express that this item would become uniquely holy. Alternate translation: “the most holy place” or “the extraordinarily holy place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-EXO	26	34	u3tu	figs-possession	בְּ⁠קֹ֖דֶשׁ הַ⁠קֳּדָשִֽׁים	1	clasps	Here, **Holy of Holies** means extremely holy, as in, the holiest of the holy places. If doubling the words like this would not create this strengthening and marking as exclusive meaning in your language, you may need to find another way to express that this item would become uniquely holy. See how you translated it in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “in the most holy place” or “in the extraordinarily holy place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+EXO	26	33	x28l	figs-possession	קֹ֥דֶשׁ הַ⁠קֳּדָשִֽׁים	1	clasps	Here, **Holy of Holies** means extremely or uniquely holy. If this form would not express that this place would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. Alternate translation: “the most holy place” or “the extraordinarily holy place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+EXO	26	34	u3tu	figs-possession	בְּ⁠קֹ֖דֶשׁ הַ⁠קֳּדָשִֽׁים	1	clasps	Here, **Holy of Holies** means extremely holy, as in, the holiest of the holy places. If this form would not express that this place would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. See how you translated it in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “in the most holy place” or “in the extraordinarily holy place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 EXO	26	35	lv9e		הַ⁠שֻּׁלְחָן֙…הַ⁠מְּנֹרָה֙	1	The table must be on the north side	This is the **table** Yahweh told Moses how to make in [25:23-30](../25/23.md) and the **lampstand** he told him how to make in [25:31-39](../25/31.md).
 EXO	26	36	tiz7			0	The table must be on the north side	See how you translated very similar text in [Exodus 26:1](../26/01.md).
 EXO	26	36	rr16		תְּכֵ֧לֶת וְ⁠אַרְגָּמָ֛ן וְ⁠תוֹלַ֥עַת שָׁנִ֖י	1	blue, purple, and scarlet material	This could mean: (1) “yarn that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple, and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. See how you translated this in [Exodus 25:4](../25/04.md).
 EXO	26	36	f6td	translate-unknown	וְ⁠שֵׁ֣שׁ מָשְׁזָ֑ר	1	fine twined linen	This was cloth made from fine linen threads that someone twisted together to make a stronger thread. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	26	36	r2fy	translate-unknown	רֹקֵֽם	1	an embroiderer	Alternate translation: “a person who sews decorative designs into cloth” or “a person who embroiders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	26	37	av60			0	an embroiderer	See how you translated very similar instructions in [verse 32](../26/32.md).
-EXO	27	intro	x4f7			0		# Exodus 27 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter is a continuation of the material in the previous chapter.\n- v. 1-8: Instructions for constructing the altar\n- v. 9-19: Instructions for constructing the outer curtain walls forming the courtyard around the sacred tent\n- v. 20-21: Instructions for the lampstand\n\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The tent of meeting\n\nThis chapter gives specific instructions regarding the building (around the tent of meeting) of the courtyard area containing the altar where priests made sacrifices to Yahweh.\n\n## Potential Translation Issues\n\n- The verb **make** at the beginning of [verse 9](../27/09.md) is the only verb from verses 9-18. Some languages may be able to translate a clause chain this long without additional verbs. Others (including English), will need to supply at least a minimum number of verbs (ULT) or quite a few verbs (UST) for naturalness.\n- There continue to be a number of possibly unknown terms, still all tangible objects.
-EXO	27	1	s8qy	translate-bdistance	חָמֵשׁ֩ אַמּ֨וֹת…וְ⁠חָמֵ֧שׁ אַמּ֣וֹת…וְ⁠שָׁלֹ֥שׁ אַמּ֖וֹת	1	cubits	You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people, if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 2.3 meters … 2.3 meters … 138 centimeters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
-EXO	27	4	hsq3		רֶ֣שֶׁת	1	grate	a frame of crossed metal bars for holding wood when burning
-EXO	27	4	vlau			0	grate	You may want to refer back to several other passages regarding making rings for carrying poles when translating this verse. See [Exo 25:12](../25/12.md), [Exo 25:26](../25/26.md), & [Exo 25:27](../25/27.md).
-EXO	27	5	c5em	figs-explicit	וְ⁠נָתַתָּ֣ה אֹתָ֗⁠הּ תַּ֛חַת כַּרְכֹּ֥ב הַ⁠מִּזְבֵּ֖חַ מִ⁠לְּ⁠מָ֑טָּה וְ⁠הָיְתָ֣ה הָ⁠רֶ֔שֶׁת עַ֖ד חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מִּזְבֵּֽחַ	1	You must put the grate under the ledge of the altar	The grate was placed inside the altar. This can be stated clearly in the translation. Alternate translation: “And you shall put the grate under the rim of the altar, on the inside of the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+EXO	27	intro	x4f7			0		# Exodus 27 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter is a continuation of the material in the previous chapter.\n- v. 1-8: Instructions for constructing the altar\n- v. 9-19: Instructions for constructing the outer curtain walls forming the courtyard around the sacred tent\n- v. 20-21: Instructions for the lampstand\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The tent of meeting\n\nThis chapter gives specific instructions regarding building the courtyard area around the Dwelling containing the altar where priests made sacrifices to Yahweh.\n\n## Potential Translation Issues\n\n- The verb **make** at the beginning of [verse 9](../27/09.md) is the only verb from verses 9-18. Some languages may be able to translate a clause chain this long without additional verbs. Others (including English), will need to supply at least a minimum number of verbs (ULT) or quite a few verbs (UST) for naturalness.\n- There continue to be a number of possibly unknown terms, still all tangible objects.\n
+EXO	27	1	s8qy	translate-bdistance	חָמֵשׁ֩ אַמּ֨וֹת…וְ⁠חָמֵ֧שׁ אַמּ֣וֹת…וְ⁠שָׁלֹ֥שׁ אַמּ֖וֹת	1	cubits	You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people, if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 2.3 meters … 2.3 meters … 138 centimeters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
+EXO	27	4	hsq3		מִכְבָּ֔ר	1	grate	The **grate** is a frame of crossed metal bars for holding wood when burning.
+EXO	27	4	vlau		וְ⁠עָשִׂ֣יתָ עַל־הָ⁠רֶ֗שֶׁת אַרְבַּע֙ טַבְּעֹ֣ת נְחֹ֔שֶׁת עַ֖ל אַרְבַּ֥ע קְצוֹתָֽי⁠ו	1	grate	You may want to refer back to several other passages regarding making rings for carrying poles when translating this verse. See [Exo 25:12](../25/12.md), [Exo 25:26](../25/26.md), and [Exo 25:27](../25/27.md).
+EXO	27	5	c5em	figs-explicit	וְ⁠נָתַתָּ֣ה אֹתָ֗⁠הּ תַּ֛חַת כַּרְכֹּ֥ב הַ⁠מִּזְבֵּ֖חַ מִ⁠לְּ⁠מָ֑טָּה וְ⁠הָיְתָ֣ה הָ⁠רֶ֔שֶׁת עַ֖ד חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מִּזְבֵּֽחַ	1	You must put the grate under the ledge of the altar	The grate was placed inside the altar. This can be stated clearly as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EXO	27	7	b3yx	figs-activepassive	וְ⁠הוּבָ֥א אֶת־בַּדָּ֖י⁠ו	1	The poles must be put into the rings, and the poles must be on the two sides of the altar, to carry it	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And you shall put its poles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	27	8	ecmh	figs-123person	הֶרְאָ֥ה	1	The poles must be put into the rings, and the poles must be on the two sides of the altar, to carry it	Here, **he** refers to Yahweh in the third person. If it would be unnatural in your language for someone to refer to himself in this way, you may need to change it. Alternate translation: “I showed” or “Yahweh showed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-EXO	27	8	frcs	figs-123person	יַעֲשֽׂוּ	1	The poles must be put into the rings, and the poles must be on the two sides of the altar, to carry it	Here, **they** refers to whoever will make all these items. It is an indication that even though Yahweh has been speaking to Moses in the singular throughout, these instructions are meant to be conveyed to craftsmen in Israel. See [25:intro](../25/intro.md) for more. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+EXO	27	8	frcs	figs-123person	יַעֲשֽׂוּ	1	The poles must be put into the rings, and the poles must be on the two sides of the altar, to carry it	Here, **they** refers to whoever will make all these items. It is an indication that even though Yahweh has been speaking to Moses in the singular throughout, these instructions are meant to be conveyed to Israelite craftsmen. See [25:intro](../25/intro.md) for more. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 EXO	27	9	v748	translate-unknown	שֵׁ֣שׁ מָשְׁזָ֗ר	1	fine twined linen	This was cloth made from fine linen threads that someone twisted together to make a stronger thread. See how you translated this in [Exodus 25:4](../25/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-EXO	27	9	ce9a	translate-bdistance	מֵאָ֤ה בָֽ⁠אַמָּה֙	1	one hundred cubits	You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. The **cubits** are each approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46 meters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
+EXO	27	9	ce9a	translate-bdistance	מֵאָ֤ה בָֽ⁠אַמָּה֙	1	one hundred cubits	You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46 meters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
 EXO	27	10	qq8f		וְ⁠עַמֻּדָ֣י⁠ו עֶשְׂרִ֔ים וְ⁠אַדְנֵי⁠הֶ֥ם עֶשְׂרִ֖ים נְחֹ֑שֶׁת	1	one hundred cubits	Here, **bronze** may refer to both the **pillars** and the **bases**, or just to the **bases.** The pillars inside the tent were of wood overlaid with gold; these may be wood overlaid with bronze.
 EXO	27	11	gjg5			0	there must be hangings one hundred cubits long	See how you translated many similar words in [Exodus 27:9-10](../27/09.md).
 EXO	27	11	ynao	figs-ellipsis	מֵ֣אָה	1	there must be hangings one hundred cubits long	Here, “cubits” is omitted because it is understood as a repetition of the instructions in verse 9. Alternate translation: “100 cubits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 EXO	27	11	xev2	translate-bdistance	מֵ֣אָה	1	there must be hangings one hundred cubits long	You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46 meters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
-EXO	27	12	p4u4	translate-bdistance	חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים אַמָּ֑ה	1	there must be a curtain	You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. The **cubits** are each approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 23 meters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
-EXO	27	13	w2sg	translate-bdistance	חֲמִשִּׁ֥ים אַמָּֽה	1	The courtyard must also be fifty cubits long	You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. The **cubits** are each approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 23 meters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
-EXO	27	14	u8nm	translate-bdistance	וַ⁠חֲמֵ֨שׁ עֶשְׂרֵ֥ה	1	fifteen cubits	You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. Each of the **cubits** is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 6.9 meters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
+EXO	27	12	p4u4	translate-bdistance	חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים אַמָּ֑ה	1	there must be a curtain	You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 23 meters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
+EXO	27	13	w2sg	translate-bdistance	חֲמִשִּׁ֥ים אַמָּֽה	1	The courtyard must also be fifty cubits long	You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 23 meters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
+EXO	27	14	u8nm	translate-bdistance	וַ⁠חֲמֵ֨שׁ עֶשְׂרֵ֥ה	1	fifteen cubits	You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 6.9 meters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
 EXO	27	14	z8n2		עַמֻּדֵי⁠הֶ֣ם	1	posts	The **pillars** were strong pieces of wood set upright and used as supports. See how you translated these in [Exodus 27:10](../27/10.md).
 EXO	27	14	gz7s		וְ⁠אַדְנֵי⁠הֶ֖ם	1	bases	The **bases** were metal blocks that had a slot in them to keep the board in place. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:19](../26/19.md).
 EXO	27	15	s2cc	translate-bdistance	חְמֵ֥שׁ עֶשְׂרֵ֖ה	1	fifteen cubits	You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 6.9 meters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
 EXO	27	15	hlzp		עַמֻּדֵי⁠הֶ֣ם	1	posts	These **posts** were strong pieces of wood set upright and used as supports. See how you translated these in [Exodus 27:10](../27/10.md).
 EXO	27	15	o49h		וְ⁠אַדְנֵי⁠הֶ֖ם	1	bases	The **bases** were metal blocks that had a slot in them to keep the board in place. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:19](../26/19.md).
 EXO	27	16	kn9u			0	blue, purple, and scarlet material and fine twined linen	See how you translated a nearly identical passage in [26:36](../26/36.md).
-EXO	27	16	g5wi	translate-bdistance	עֶשְׂרִ֣ים אַמָּ֗ה	1	an embroiderer	You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. Each of the **cubits** is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 9.2m (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
+EXO	27	16	g5wi	translate-bdistance	עֶשְׂרִ֣ים אַמָּ֗ה	1	an embroiderer	You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 9.2m (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
 EXO	27	17	wtng	figs-activepassive	מְחֻשָּׁקִ֣ים	1	an embroiderer	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Among other options not so relevant here, Wiktionary suggests that a **fillet** could be a “thin strip of any material, in various technical uses,” “thin featureless molding used as separation between broader decorative moldings,” or a rounded corner. Alternate translation: “you shall fillet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EXO	27	18	wt7n	translate-bdistance	מֵאָ֨ה בָֽ⁠אַמָּ֜ה…חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים בַּ⁠חֲמִשִּׁ֗ים…חָמֵ֥שׁ אַמּ֖וֹת	1	one hundred cubits	You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people, if that is the style of translation that you are using. Each of the **cubits** is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46 meters … 23 meters … 2.3 meters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
+EXO	27	18	wt7n	translate-bdistance	מֵאָ֨ה בָֽ⁠אַמָּ֜ה…חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים בַּ⁠חֲמִשִּׁ֗ים…חָמֵ֥שׁ אַמּ֖וֹת	1	one hundred cubits	You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people, if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46 meters … 23 meters … 2.3 meters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
 EXO	27	18	mu6b	figs-ellipsis	חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים בַּ⁠חֲמִשִּׁ֗ים	1	one hundred cubits	Here, “cubits” is omitted because it is understood as a repetition of the instructions in verse 9. Alternate translation: “50 cubits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 EXO	27	19	bs7c	translate-unknown	יְתֵדֹתָ֛י⁠ו…יִתְדֹ֥ת	1	tent pegs	The **tent pegs** are strong, sharp pieces of metal driven into the ground and used to secure the corners of a tent to the ground or to secure ropes in order to create tension to stabilize something standing upright. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	27	21	p7ru	figs-synecdoche	הָ⁠עֵדֻ֗ת	1	ark of testimony	The **testimony** refers to the chest that contains the sacred slabs of stone on which Yahweh had written his commandments. If it would be more clear to your readers you may include a reference to the chest. Alternate translation: “is the Box of the Testimony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-EXO	27	21	nlwz		אֹת֨⁠וֹ יַעֲרֹךְ֩ אֹת֨⁠וֹ	1	ark of testimony	Here, **it** refers to the lamp mentioned in the previous verse and **arrange** means to set it up for burning, and light it. Alternate translation: “shall set up the lampstand and light it”
+EXO	27	21	nlwz		יַעֲרֹךְ֩ אֹת֨⁠וֹ	1	ark of testimony	Here, **it** refers to the lamp mentioned in the previous verse and **arrange** means to set it up for burning, and light it. Alternate translation: “shall set up the lampstand and light it”
 EXO	27	21	j41s	figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֑ה	1	ark of testimony	Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “in front of me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	27	21	vr7m		חֻקַּ֤ת עוֹלָם֙ לְ⁠דֹ֣רֹתָ֔⁠ם מֵ⁠אֵ֖ת בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל	1	This requirement will be a lasting statute	See how you translated a similar statement in [12:14](../12/14.md)
-EXO	28	intro	r3yx			0		# Exodus 28 General Notes\n\n## Structure\n\n- v. 1: Introduction - Aaron and sons will become priests\n- v. 2-5: General introduction of sacred clothing\n- v. 6-14: Instructions for the ephod\n    * v. 9-14: Instructions regarding stones on ephod\n- v. 15-28: Instructions for the breastpiece\n    * v. 17-21: Instructions regarding stones on breastpiece\n    * v. 22-28: Instructions for mounting the breastpiece on the ephod\n- v. 29-30: Aaron should wear things over his heart\n- v 31-35: Instructions for making the robe with bells and pomegranates\n- v. 36-38: Instructions regarding the turban\n- v. 39-41: Closing general instructions regarding clothing\n- v. 42-43: Instructions on making and wearing undergarments\n- v. 43b: Closing statement\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Holy garments\n\nBecause Yahweh is holy, only the priests could approach him, and when they did they had to be wearing specially made clothing. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\n\n\n## Potential Translation Issues\n\n- Verses 17-20 list 12 kinds of stone. Scholars are not sure which kinds of stones the Hebrew words refer to. Some translations list different stones. The UST gives the probable color of the gemstones. Translators may use names of familiar gem stones.\n
+EXO	28	intro	r3yx			0		# Exodus 28 General Notes\n\n## Structure\n\n- v. 1: Introduction - Aaron and sons will become priests\n- v. 2-5: General introduction of sacred clothing\n- v. 6-14: Instructions for the ephod\n    * v. 9-14: Instructions regarding stones on ephod\n- v. 15-28: Instructions for the breastpiece\n    * v. 17-21: Instructions regarding stones on breastpiece\n    * v. 22-28: Instructions for mounting the breastpiece on the ephod\n- v. 29-30: Aaron should wear things over his heart\n- v 31-35: Instructions for making the robe with bells and pomegranates\n- v. 36-38: Instructions regarding the turban\n- v. 39-41: Closing general instructions regarding clothing\n- v. 42-43: Instructions on making and wearing undergarments\n- v. 43b: Closing statement\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Holy garments\n\nBecause Yahweh is holy, only the priests could approach him, and when they did they had to be wearing specially made clothing. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\n\n\n## Potential Translation Issues\n\n- Verses 17-20 list 12 kinds of stone. Scholars are not sure which kinds of stones the Hebrew words refer to. Some translations list different stones. The UST gives the probable color of the gemstones. Translators may use names of familiar gem stones.\n<br>
 EXO	28	1	e1xb	figs-you	וְ⁠אַתָּ֡ה	1	Call to yourself	Here, **you** refers to Moses; in this case it is about something he must do. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 EXO	28	1	w9ls	translate-kinship	אַהֲרֹ֨ן אָחִ֜י⁠ךָ	1	Call to yourself	Aaron is older than Moses. If your language uses a different term for the sibling relationship based on gender and age order, choose the appropriate one. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
 EXO	28	1	ofgr	translate-names	נָדָ֧ב וַ⁠אֲבִיה֛וּא אֶלְעָזָ֥ר וְ⁠אִיתָמָ֖ר	1	Call to yourself	These are men’s names. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EXO	28	3	n17y	figs-you	וְ⁠אַתָּ֗ה	1	Call to yourself	Here, **you** refers to Moses. In this case it is about something he must do. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 EXO	28	3	c9pv	figs-parallelism	אֶל־כָּל־חַכְמֵי־לֵ֔ב אֲשֶׁ֥ר מִלֵּאתִ֖י⁠ו ר֣וּחַ חָכְמָ֑ה	1	Call to yourself	There is a little bit of parallelism here. Yahweh is clarifying who causes someone to be **wise of heart**. You could translate this in a more causal way if that would make more sense. Alternate translation: “to anyone whom I have filled with the spirit of wisdom, making them wise of heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-EXO	28	3	wt7m	figs-metonymy	אֶל־כָּל־חַכְמֵי־לֵ֔ב אֲשֶׁ֥ר מִלֵּאתִ֖י⁠ו ר֣וּחַ חָכְמָ֑ה	1	Call to yourself	Here, **heart** and **spirit** are both referring to innate possession by a person that is, traits of a person. **Wisdom** refers to skill or talent with crafting in this case. Together **wise of heart** and **filled with the spirit of wisdom** both essentially mean “a talented craftsman.” If it would be more clear to your readers, you may consider making some of this more explicit. Alternate translation: “to every talented craftsman, those whom I have made skilled in their work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+EXO	28	3	wt7m	figs-metonymy	אֶל־כָּל־חַכְמֵי־לֵ֔ב אֲשֶׁ֥ר מִלֵּאתִ֖י⁠ו ר֣וּחַ חָכְמָ֑ה	1	Call to yourself	Here, **heart** and **spirit** are both referring to things innately possessed by a person that is, traits of a person. **Wisdom** refers to skill or talent with crafting in this case. Together **wise of heart** and **filled with the spirit of wisdom** both essentially mean “a talented craftsman.” If it would be more clear to your readers, you may consider making some of this more explicit. Alternate translation: “to every talented craftsman, those whom I have made skilled in their work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	28	4	tr5e		וּ⁠כְתֹ֥נֶת תַּשְׁבֵּ֖ץ	1	a coat of woven work	We do not know what word translated **of woven work** means, as it only occurs here and in [verse 39](../28/39.md) as a verb. Alternate translation: “and a checkered tunic” or "an embroidered garment"
 EXO	28	4	dz5h	translate-unknown	מִצְנֶ֣פֶת	1	turban	This is a head covering made from cloth wrapped around the head several times. You may translate it using a word commonly used for a similar item in your culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	28	4	k184	translate-unknown	וְ⁠אַבְנֵ֑ט	1	sash	The **sash** is a piece of cloth that people wear around their waist or across their chest. You may translate it with a word commonly used for a similar item in your culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -1890,7 +1883,7 @@ EXO	28	9	s2yd	translate-numbers	שְׁתֵּ֖י	1	onyx stones	Alternate transla
 EXO	28	10	h5mr	translate-numbers	שִׁשָּׁה֙…הַ⁠שִּׁשָּׁ֧ה	1	onyx stones	Alternate translation: “6 of … the 6” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 EXO	28	10	zlte		כְּ⁠תוֹלְדֹתָֽ⁠ם	1	onyx stones	Alternate translation: “according to their birth order”
 EXO	28	11	dv8k		פִּתּוּחֵ֣י חֹתָ֗ם	1	With the work of an engraver in stone, like the engraving on a signet	Alternate translation: “in the same way a person engraves on a seal”
-EXO	28	11	x1xc	translate-unknown	חָרַשׁ֮ אֶבֶן֒	1	engraver	A **craftsman of stone** is a person who cuts designs into a hard material such as wood, stone, or metal. Alternate translation: “a detailed stone cutter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+EXO	28	11	x1xc	translate-unknown	חָרַשׁ֮ אֶבֶן֒	1	engraver	A **craftsman of stone** is a person who cuts designs into stones. Alternate translation: “a detailed stone cutter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	28	11	cm3f	translate-unknown	חֹתָ֗ם	1	signet	This is an engraved stone often set into a ring and used to stamp a design into a wax seal to authenticate an official document. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	28	11	gh2r	translate-unknown	מִשְׁבְּצ֥וֹת	1	settings	These are pieces of metal that hold the stones onto the ephod. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	28	12	ypfd		זִכָּרֹ֖ן…לְ⁠זִכָּרֹֽן	1	settings	The text does not specify if Yahweh or Aaron or someone else is the one being reminded by the stones. It also does not specify exactly what the reminder is of. Try to maintain this ambiguity if possible in your translation.
@@ -1911,8 +1904,8 @@ EXO	28	20	ekaf	translate-ordinal	וְ⁠הַ⁠טּוּר֙ הָ⁠רְבִיע
 EXO	28	20	ul2e	translate-unknown	תַּרְשִׁ֥ישׁ וְ⁠שֹׁ֖הַם וְ⁠יָשְׁפֵ֑ה	1	beryl…jasper	These are precious stones. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	28	20	rgf6	translate-unknown	וְ⁠שֹׁ֖הַם	1	onyx	An **onyx** is a valuable stone that has layers of white and black, red or brown. See how you translated these in [Exodus 25:7](../25/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	28	20	pw5h	figs-activepassive	מְשֻׁבָּצִ֥ים זָהָ֛ב יִהְי֖וּ	1	They must be mounted in gold settings	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You shall set them in gold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EXO	28	21	z8mw	translate-unknown	פִּתּוּחֵ֤י חוֹתָם֙	1	signet ring	A signet is an engraved stone used to stamp a design into a wax seal. Here the stone is mounted on a ring. See how you translated “signet” in [Exodus 28:11](../28/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-EXO	28	22	m7yl	translate-unknown	שַֽׁרְשֹׁ֥ת גַּבְלֻ֖ת מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה עֲבֹ֑ת זָהָ֖ב טָהֽוֹר	1	chains like cords, braided work of pure gold	Alternate translation: “chains that are made of pure gold and are braided like cords.” See how you translated similar phrases in [Exodus 28:14](../28/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+EXO	28	21	z8mw	translate-unknown	פִּתּוּחֵ֤י חוֹתָם֙	1	signet ring	This is an engraved stone often set into a ring and used to stamp a design into a wax seal to authenticate an official document. Here the stone is mounted on a ring. See how you translated “signet” in [Exodus 28:11](../28/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+EXO	28	22	m7yl	translate-unknown	שַֽׁרְשֹׁ֥ת גַּבְלֻ֖ת מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה עֲבֹ֑ת זָהָ֖ב טָהֽוֹר	1	chains like cords, braided work of pure gold	See how you translated similar phrases in [Exodus 28:14](../28/14.md). Alternate translation (place at **twisted chains**): “chains that are made of pure gold and are braided like cords” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	28	25	d8y3	figs-metonymy	אֶל־מ֥וּל פָּנָֽי⁠ו	1	braided chains	Here, **face** simply refers to the object (the ephod). Alternate translation: “on its front side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	28	25	a4lc	figs-explicit	עַל־שְׁתֵּ֣י הַֽ⁠מִּשְׁבְּצ֑וֹת	1	to the two settings	These are two settings that enclose the stones. This can be clearly stated in the translation. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EXO	28	27	f2nn	figs-metonymy	פָּנָ֔י⁠ו	1	braided chains	Here, **face** simply refers to the object (the ephod). Alternate translation: “on its front side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -1924,7 +1917,7 @@ EXO	28	29	cc97		עַל־לִבּ֖⁠וֹ	1	over his heart	Alternate translation
 EXO	28	30	dgn9	translate-unknown	הָ⁠אוּרִים֙ וְ⁠אֶת־הַ⁠תֻּמִּ֔ים	1	the Urim and the Thummim	It not clear what **the Urim and the Thummim** are. They were objects, possibly stones, that the priest used to somehow determine the will of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	28	30	f537	translate-unknown	וְ⁠נָשָׂ֣א אַ֠הֲרֹן אֶת־מִשְׁפַּ֨ט בְּנֵי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֧ל עַל־לִבּ֛⁠וֹ לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י יְהוָ֖ה תָּמִֽיד	1	the Urim and the Thummim…the means for making decisions	The second phrase appears to refer to the Urim and Thummim and explain their purpose. Alternate translation: “And Aaron shall bear the decisions for the sons of Israel over his heart before Yahweh continually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	28	30	fep5	figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֑ה…לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י יְהוָ֖ה	1	the Urim and the Thummim…the means for making decisions	Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “before Yahweh … before Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-EXO	28	32	x42n		מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה אֹרֵ֗ג	1	This must be the work of a weaver	This can be stated as a command. Alternate translation: "made by a weaver"
+EXO	28	32	x42n		מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה אֹרֵ֗ג	1	This must be the work of a weaver	Alternate translation: "made by a weaver"
 EXO	28	32	rw96	translate-unknown	אֹרֵ֗ג	1	a weaver	Alternate translation: “a person who weaves” or “a person who creates cloth using thread, yarns and wool” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	28	32	t60l	translate-unknown	תַחְרָ֛א	1	a weaver	We do not know what this term means, but the implication seems to be that the collar should be made strong. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	28	32	ubhg	figs-activepassive	לֹ֥א יִקָּרֵֽעַ	1	a weaver	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language, as modeled in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1945,12 +1938,12 @@ EXO	28	39	t5vj	translate-unknown	מִצְנֶ֣פֶת	1	turban	This was a head c
 EXO	28	39	yi1l	translate-unknown	וְ⁠אַבְנֵ֥ט	1	sash	A **sash** is a decorative piece of cloth that a person wears around his waist or across his chest. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:4](../28/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	28	39	i62z	translate-unknown	רֹקֵֽם	1	the work of an embroiderer	An embroiderer is a person who sews decorative designs onto cloth. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:36](../26/36.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	28	40	pfs2	translate-unknown	אַבְנֵטִ֑ים	1	sashes	The **sashes** are decorative pieces of cloth that people wear around the waist or across the chest. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:4](../28/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-EXO	28	40	v2tj	translate-unknown	וּ⁠מִגְבָּעוֹת֙	1	headbands	A headband is a decorative, narrow strip of cloth that is worn around the head above the eyes. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+EXO	28	40	v2tj	translate-unknown	וּ⁠מִגְבָּעוֹת֙	1	headbands	A headband is a decorative, narrow strip of cloth that is worn around the head above the eyes. This seems to be similar to, but perhaps smaller than the turban worn by the high priest. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	28	41	xa75	translate-kinship	אַהֲרֹ֣ן אָחִ֔י⁠ךָ	1	You must clothe Aaron your brother	Aaron is older than Moses. If your language uses a different term for the sibling relationship based on gender and age order, choose the appropriate one. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
 EXO	28	41	agey	figs-idiom	וּ⁠מִלֵּאתָ֧ אֶת־יָדָ֛⁠ם	1	You must clothe Aaron your brother	This seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “and you shall ordain them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EXO	28	42	vz62	translate-unknown	מִכְנְסֵי	1	undergarments	These are articles of clothing worn under the outer clothes, next to the skin. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-EXO	28	42	m1bi	figs-euphemism	בְּשַׂ֣ר עֶרְוָ֑ה	1	undergarments	This is an euphemism for the male genitalia. You may translate it using an appropriate euphemism in your culture. Alternate translation: “their private parts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
-EXO	29	intro	xmd9			0		# Exodus 29 General Notes\n\nLarge translation teams working on multiple books at the same time should note that this chapter is very similar to Leviticus 8.\n\n## Structure\n\nAs you translate, you may perceive a different structure in this chapter than what is below. Feel free to organize in a way that is clear in your language. This chapter is really one united whole; the outline below is one possible way of subdividing it.\nThe Consecration of the Priests\n- v. 1-3 Preparing items\n- v. 4-9 Preparing Aaron and his sons\n- v. 10-14 Sacrificing the bull to purify the altar\n- v. 15-34 Sacrificing the rams\n    * v. 15-18 The first ram wholly burned\n    * v. 19-28 The second ram used for consecrating and divided for eating\n    * v. 29-30 Priestly succession\n    * v. 31-34 More instructions regarding eating the second ram\n- v. 35-37 Instructions to do all this for seven days\n- v. 38-41 Instructions for perpetual offerings\n- v. 42-46 Yahweh’s affirmation\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Consecrating priests\n\nThis chapter records the process of consecrating priests. The priests were to be set apart from the rest of Israel because Yahweh is holy. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/consecrate]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n\n### Forms of you\n\nFor this chapter, it seems that the singular "you: that Yahweh has been using to give Moses general instructions for the last several chapters now actually refers to Moses himself. If you have been translating the instructions using a plural form of you or by shifting the instructions to the third person, you should switch back to a singular form referring directly to Moses for this chapter.\n\n### “I will live among the Israelites”\n\nAs God, Yahweh is everywhere and cannot be limited to a single space. This phrase indicates that he permanently remains within Israel in a special way while they have the ark.
+EXO	28	42	m1bi	figs-euphemism	בְּשַׂ֣ר עֶרְוָ֑ה	1	undergarments	This refers to the male genitalia. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “their private parts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
+EXO	29	intro	xmd9			0		# Exodus 29 General Notes\n\nLarge translation teams working on multiple books at the same time should note that this chapter is very similar to Leviticus 8.\n\n## Structure\n\nAs you translate, you may perceive a different structure in this chapter than what is below. Feel free to organize in a way that is clear in your language. This chapter is really one united whole; the outline below is one possible way of subdividing it.\nThe Consecration of the Priests\n- v. 1-3 Preparing items\n- v. 4-9 Preparing Aaron and his sons\n- v. 10-14 Sacrificing the bull to purify the altar\n- v. 15-34 Sacrificing the rams\n    * v. 15-18 The first ram wholly burned\n    * v. 19-28 The second ram used for consecrating and divided for eating\n    * v. 29-30 Priestly succession\n    * v. 31-34 More instructions regarding eating the second ram\n- v. 35-37 Instructions to do all this for seven days\n- v. 38-41 Instructions for perpetual offerings\n- v. 42-46 Yahweh’s affirmation\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Consecrating priests\n\nThis chapter records the process of consecrating priests. The priests were to be set apart from the rest of Israel because Yahweh is holy. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/consecrate]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n\n### Forms of you\n\nFor this chapter, it seems that the singular "you: that Yahweh has been using to give Moses general instructions for the last several chapters now actually refers to Moses himself. If you have been translating the instructions using a plural form of you or by shifting the instructions to the third person, you should switch back to a singular form referring directly to Moses for this chapter.\n\n### “I will live among the Israelites”\n\nAs God, Yahweh is everywhere and cannot be limited to a single space. This phrase indicates that he permanently remains within Israel in a special way while they have the ark.\n
 EXO	29	1	d6gk	writing-newevent	וְ⁠זֶ֨ה	1	Now	A new scene begins here. There is a change in topic from instructions for making garments for priests to consecrating priests. This may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 EXO	29	1	z78h	writing-pronouns	תַּעֲשֶׂ֥ה	1	you must do	Here, **you** refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 EXO	29	1	ld5s	writing-pronouns	לָ⁠הֶ֛ם	1	to set them apart	Alternate translation: “to Aaron and his sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -1961,20 +1954,19 @@ EXO	29	2	wkyb		וּ⁠רְקִיקֵ֥י מַצּ֖וֹת מְשֻׁחִ֣ים 
 EXO	29	2	r449	translate-unknown	וְ⁠חַלֹּ֤ת…וּ⁠רְקִיקֵ֥י	1	bread…cakes…wafers	These are different kinds of food made from flour. While all the breads were somewhat flat because they were unleavened, the **cakes** were a bread enriched with oil, and the **wafers** were especially thin. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	29	3	gm58	writing-pronouns	אוֹתָ⁠ם֙	1	You must put them	Alternate translation: “the bread, cakes, and wafers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 EXO	29	3	cd6m		וְ⁠הִקְרַבְתָּ֥ אֹתָ֖⁠ם בַּ⁠סָּ֑ל וְ⁠אֶ֨ת־הַ⁠פָּ֔ר וְ⁠אֵ֖ת שְׁנֵ֥י הָ⁠אֵילִֽם	1	present them with the bull and the two rams	Here, **in the basket** is almost parenthetical. You may need to restructure the sentence or use punctuation to make it clear that **the bull and the two rams** are connected to **bring**, and not to **in the basket.** Alternate translation: “and you shall bring them near (in the basket) along with the bull and the two rams”
-EXO	29	4	a6rz		אֹ֣הֶל מוֹעֵ֑ד	1	tent of meeting	The **tent of meeting** is another name for the tabernacle. See how you translated this in [Exodus 27:21](../27/21.md).
+EXO	29	4	a6rz		אֹ֣הֶל מוֹעֵ֑ד	1	tent of meeting	The **tent of meeting** is another name for the Dwelling. See how you translated this in [Exodus 27:21](../27/21.md).
 EXO	29	5	pr4i	translate-unknown	בְּ⁠חֵ֖שֶׁב	1	finely-woven waistband	This was a cloth belt made from narrow linen threads that someone twisted together to make a stronger thread. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:8](../28/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	29	6	ap2x	translate-unknown	הַ⁠מִּצְנֶ֖פֶת…הַ⁠מִּצְנָֽפֶת	1	turban	This was a head covering made from cloth wrapped around the head several times. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:4](../28/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	29	6	y59s	translate-unknown	נֵ֥זֶר הַ⁠קֹּ֖דֶשׁ	1	holy crown	This **crown** is described in [Exodus 28:36](../28/36.md) as being engraved with the words “Holy to Yahweh” and made of pure gold. There it is referred to by a different Hebrew word, which is translated as “rosette.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	29	7	rwuj	translate-unknown	שֶׁ֣מֶן הַ⁠מִּשְׁחָ֔ה	1	holy crown	See how you translated **oil of anointing" in [25:6](../25/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	29	8	v46k	writing-pronouns	בָּנָ֖י⁠ו	1	bring his sons	Alternate translation: “Aaron’s sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-EXO	29	8	jtc7	translate-unknown	כֻּתֳּנֹֽת	1	coats	The **tunics** were coats with a design woven into them. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:4](../28/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	29	9	j3a8	translate-unknown	אַבְנֵ֜ט	1	sashes	A **sash** is a decorative piece of cloth that people wear around their waist or across their chest. See how you translated this word in [Exodus 28:4](../28/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	29	9	bh2d	translate-unknown	מִגְבָּעֹ֔ת	1	headbands	A headband is a narrow, decorative strip of cloth that is worn around the head above the eyes. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:40](../28/40.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	29	9	r1x4	translate-unknown	כְּהֻנָּ֖ה	1	The work of the priesthood	Here, **the priesthood** means the official office of priest. Alternate translation: “the duty of being priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-EXO	29	9	ze9l	figs-explicit	וְ⁠הָיְתָ֥ה לָ⁠הֶ֛ם	1	will belong to them	The duty of being priests will also belong to the descendants of Aaron’s sons. You can state this clearly in the translation. Alternate translation: “And … will belong to them and their descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+EXO	29	9	ze9l	figs-explicit	וְ⁠הָיְתָ֥ה לָ⁠הֶ֛ם כְּהֻנָּ֖ה	1	will belong to them	The duty of being priests will also belong to the descendants of Aaron’s sons. You can state this clearly in the translation. Alternate translation: “And the priesthood will belong to them and their descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EXO	29	9	p7m9		לְ⁠חֻקַּ֣ת עוֹלָ֑ם	1	permanent law	Alternate translation: “a law that will not end.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:43](../28/43.md).
 EXO	29	9	zbzk	figs-idiom	וּ⁠מִלֵּאתָ֥ יַֽד־אַהֲרֹ֖ן וְ⁠יַד־בָּנָֽי⁠ו	1	permanent law	The phrase, **fill the hand**, seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:41](../28/41.md). Alternate translation: “And you shall ordain Aaron and his sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-EXO	29	9	jhwb		וּ⁠מִלֵּאתָ֥ יַֽד־אַהֲרֹ֖ן וְ⁠יַד־בָּנָֽי⁠ו	1	tent of meeting	Interpretations of this phrase, **fill the hand**, vary. Some take it to mean that the actions previous to this statement describe the consecrating of Aaron and his sons as priests, and at this point they are ordained. Others suggest that this phrase may introduce the following material as the consecration process. However, because there are several statements regarding this consecration (literally filling the hand) throughout the chapter (see verses 29, 33, and 35), it may also merely be a summary and reminder statement of the purpose of the entire process as the instructions transition from dressing the priests to the sacrificial portion of the ritual. It would probably be best to translate this in the way a mid-text summary reminder phrase would be spoken in your language, avoiding any indication that it refers only to the previous or following text.
+EXO	29	9	jhwb		וּ⁠מִלֵּאתָ֥ יַֽד־אַהֲרֹ֖ן וְ⁠יַד־בָּנָֽי⁠ו	1	tent of meeting	The phrase, **fill the hand** may be (1) a summary and reminder statement of the whole ordination process, (2) referring to the previous description, meaning that the priests have been ordained, or (3) referring to the following description, meaning that the priests are about to be ordained. It would probably be best to translate this in the way a mid-text summary reminder phrase would be spoken in your language, avoiding any indication that it refers only to the previous or following text.
 EXO	29	10	wjko			0	tent of meeting	The purpose of the sacrifice explained here through verse 14 is to purify or cleanse the altar. This is made more clear in [verses 36-37](../29/36.md).
 EXO	29	10	sgur	figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֖י אֹ֣הֶל מוֹעֵ֑ד	1	tent of meeting	Here, **face** refers to the front of the tent. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	29	10	rf0w	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	וְ⁠סָמַ֨ךְ אַהֲרֹ֧ן וּ⁠בָנָ֛י⁠ו אֶת־יְדֵי⁠הֶ֖ם עַל־רֹ֥אשׁ הַ⁠פָּֽר	1	tent of meeting	The slaughter of the bull in the next verse occurs while the priests continue to have their hands on the bull’s head. Take care to arrange the phrases and to use words or forms that indicate that the two events happened at the same time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
@@ -1982,7 +1974,7 @@ EXO	29	12	c2ud	translate-unknown	קַרְנֹ֥ת	1	the horns	These were project
 EXO	29	12	xdl5		כָּל־הַ⁠דָּ֣ם	1	the rest of the blood	Alternate translation: “the remaining blood”
 EXO	29	13	x2c5		וְ⁠הִקְטַרְתָּ֖	1	covers the inner parts	Alternate translation: “and burn them to make smoke”
 EXO	29	13	nsg6	translate-unknown	הַ⁠כָּבֵ֔ד…הַ⁠כְּלָיֹ֔ת	1	liver…kidneys	The **liver** and **kidneys** are organs in the body. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-EXO	29	14	eza8		וְ⁠אֶת־בְּשַׂ֤ר הַ⁠פָּר֙ וְ⁠אֶת־עֹר֣⁠וֹ וְ⁠אֶת	1	But as for the bull’s flesh, as well as its skin and dung	Alternate translation: “But as for the remaining parts of the bull, including the flesh and”
+EXO	29	14	eza8		וְ⁠אֶת־בְּשַׂ֤ר הַ⁠פָּר֙ וְ⁠אֶת־עֹר֣⁠וֹ וְ⁠אֶת־פִּרְשׁ֔⁠וֹ תִּשְׂרֹ֣ף	1	But as for the bull’s flesh, as well as its skin and dung	Alternate translation: “But as for the remaining parts of the bull, including the flesh and dung, you shall burn it”
 EXO	29	14	o262		מִ⁠ח֖וּץ לַֽ⁠מַּחֲנֶ֑ה	1	But as for the bull’s flesh, as well as its skin and dung	Alternate translation: “outside the borders of where the Israelites are camped”
 EXO	29	15	pd0t	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	וְ⁠סָ֨מְכ֜וּ אַהֲרֹ֧ן וּ⁠בָנָ֛י⁠ו אֶת־יְדֵי⁠הֶ֖ם עַל־רֹ֥אשׁ הָ⁠אָֽיִל	1	But as for the bull’s flesh, as well as its skin and dung	The slaughter of the ram in the next verse occurs while they continue to have their hands on the ram’s head. Take care to arrange the phrases and to use words or forms that indicate that the two events happened at the same time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
 EXO	29	17	w2nb	translate-unknown	קִרְבּ⁠וֹ֙	1	the inner parts	Alternate translation: “the organs” See how you translated this in [Exodus 29:13](../29/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -2004,10 +1996,10 @@ EXO	29	26	bf71		מֵ⁠אֵ֤יל הַ⁠מִּלֻּאִים֙	1	ram of dedicat
 EXO	29	26	c21f	translate-symaction	וְ⁠הֵנַפְתָּ֥ אֹת֛⁠וֹ תְּנוּפָ֖ה	1	Aaron’s ram of dedication	The act of raising the meat symbolized dedicating it to Yahweh. The priests would be acting out handing the offering to him. You may need to make this clear in your language. See how you translated this in [verse 24](../29/24.md). Alternate translation: “and show that you are giving it to me by holding it up to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 EXO	29	27	dzkx	translate-symaction	הַ⁠תְּנוּפָ֗ה וְ⁠אֵת֙ שׁ֣וֹק הַ⁠תְּרוּמָ֔ה אֲשֶׁ֥ר הוּנַ֖ף וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֣ר הוּרָ֑ם	1	Aaron’s ram of dedication	The act of raising the meat symbolized dedicating it to Yahweh. The priests would be acting out handing the offering to him. You may need to make this clear in your language. See how you translated this in [verse 24](../29/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 EXO	29	28	uc2d		וְ⁠הָיָה֩ לְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֨ן וּ⁠לְ⁠בָנָ֜י⁠ו לְ⁠חָק־עוֹלָ֗ם מֵ⁠אֵת֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל כִּ֥י תְרוּמָ֖ה ה֑וּא	1	This will be a perpetual share for Aaron and his sons	Alternate translation: “This offering is what Aaron and his sons will always receive from the people”
-EXO	29	28	q3ms		מֵ⁠אֵת֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל כִּ֥י תְרוּמָ֖ה ה֑וּא וּ⁠תְרוּמָ֞ה יִהְיֶ֨ה מֵ⁠אֵ֤ת בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ מִ⁠זִּבְחֵ֣י שַׁלְמֵי⁠הֶ֔ם תְּרוּמָתָ֖⁠ם לַ⁠יהוָֽה	1	This will be a perpetual share for Aaron and his sons	The amount of repetition in this verse may make it difficult to translate smoothly. You may consider combining some of them if that would work better in your language. Alternate translation: “for the Israelites must offer this portion from what they bring to Yahweh as peace offerings to them”
-EXO	29	29	a59z	figs-idiom	וּ⁠לְ⁠מַלֵּא־בָ֖⁠ם אֶת־יָדָֽ⁠ם	1	The holy garments of Aaron must also be reserved for his sons after him	This seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:41](../28/41.md). Alternate translation: “to ordain them in them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+EXO	29	28	q3ms		מֵ⁠אֵת֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל כִּ֥י תְרוּמָ֖ה ה֑וּא וּ⁠תְרוּמָ֞ה יִהְיֶ֨ה מֵ⁠אֵ֤ת בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ מִ⁠זִּבְחֵ֣י שַׁלְמֵי⁠הֶ֔ם תְּרוּמָתָ֖⁠ם לַ⁠יהוָֽה	1	This will be a perpetual share for Aaron and his sons	The amount of repetition in this verse may make it difficult to translate smoothly. You may consider combining some phrases if that would work better in your language. Alternate translation: “for the Israelites must offer this portion from what they bring to Yahweh as peace offerings to him”
+EXO	29	29	a59z	figs-idiom	וּ⁠לְ⁠מַלֵּא־בָ֖⁠ם אֶת־יָדָֽ⁠ם	1	The holy garments of Aaron must also be reserved for his sons after him	**Fill their hand** seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:41](../28/41.md). Alternate translation: “to ordain them in the clothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EXO	29	31	l3xk		אֵ֥יל הַ⁠מִּלֻּאִ֖ים	1	the ram for the installation of the priests	The **ram of consecration** refers to the second ram, the one described in [verses 19](../29/19.md) and following.
-EXO	29	31	u9kl	figs-explicit	בְּ⁠מָקֹ֥ם קָדֹֽשׁ	1	in a holy place	This is not the same as the holy place outside of the most holy place. This probably refers to a place within the courtyard. However, exactly where it is is not otherwise specified. Alternate translation: “at the entrance to the tent of meeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+EXO	29	31	u9kl	figs-explicit	בְּ⁠מָקֹ֥ם קָדֹֽשׁ	1	in a holy place	This is not the same as the holy place outside of the most holy place. This probably refers to a place within the courtyard. However, its exact location is not otherwise specified. Alternate translation: “at the entrance to the tent of meeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EXO	29	33	mcdc	figs-idiom	לְ⁠מַלֵּ֥א אֶת־יָדָ֖⁠ם	1	in a holy place	This seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:41](../28/41.md). Alternate translation: “to ordain them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EXO	29	34	rhp7	figs-activepassive	לֹ֥א יֵאָכֵ֖ל	1	It must not be eaten	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “No one may eat it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	29	35	yo59		כָּ֔כָה	1	General Information:	Here, **thus** means “like this” and, as the next verses make clear, refers to the sacrificial ceremony outlined in this chapter which they must repeat seven times.
@@ -2015,7 +2007,7 @@ EXO	29	35	wrfs	translate-numbers	שִׁבְעַ֥ת	1	General Information:	Alter
 EXO	29	35	c2si	figs-idiom	תְּמַלֵּ֥א יָדָֽ⁠ם	1	General Information:	This seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:41](../28/41.md). Alternate translation: “you shall ordain them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EXO	29	36	r5tx			0	General Information:	This verse and the next explain the purpose of the sacrifice detailed in [verses 10-14](../29/10.md).
 EXO	29	36	s81n	grammar-connect-logic-goal	וּ⁠פַ֨ר חַטָּ֜את תַּעֲשֶׂ֤ה לַ⁠יּוֹם֙ עַל־הַ⁠כִּפֻּרִ֔ים וְ⁠חִטֵּאתָ֙ עַל־הַ⁠מִּזְבֵּ֔חַ בְּ⁠כַפֶּרְ⁠ךָ֖ עָלָ֑י⁠ו	1	General Information:	The phrase **and you shall purify the altar by making atonement for it** describes the purpose of offering the bull. You may want to use a stronger connector. In languages that need to put purpose first, you may need to re-order the clauses. Alternate translation: “And you shall offer a bull of purification for atonement daily, thus you shall purify the altar, by making atonement for it.” or “You shall purify the altar by making atonement for it: you shall offer a bull of purification daily for its atonement.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-EXO	29	37	pq5d	figs-possession	קֹ֣דֶשׁ קָֽדָשִׁ֔ים	1	Then the altar will be completely set apart to me	Here, **holy of holies** means extremely holy, as in, the holiest of the holy things. If doubling the words like this would not create this strengthening and marking as exclusive meaning in your language, you may need to find another way to express that this item would become uniquely holy. Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extraordinarily holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+EXO	29	37	pq5d	figs-possession	קֹ֣דֶשׁ קָֽדָשִׁ֔ים	1	Then the altar will be completely set apart to me	Here, **holiest holy** means extremely or uniquely holy. If this form would not express that this item would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extraordinarily holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 EXO	29	37	qk5h		יִקְדָּֽשׁ	1	will be set apart to Yahweh	Alternate translation: “will also become set apart”
 EXO	29	38	e4r9	figs-idiom	בְּנֵֽי־שָׁנָ֛ה	1	General Information:	The phrase **sons of a year** is an idiom meaning one year old. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EXO	29	39	qxst	figs-idiom	בֵּ֥ין הָ⁠עַרְבָּֽיִם	1	General Information:	The exact meaning of this phrase is debated. Since the priests ate many of the sacrifices, it may have been offered around the time of the evening meal. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -2026,7 +2018,7 @@ EXO	29	41	ibch	figs-idiom	בֵּ֣ין הָ⁠עַרְבָּ֑יִם	1	a tenth
 EXO	29	42	j8cg		לְ⁠דֹרֹ֣תֵי⁠כֶ֔ם	1	throughout your generations	Alternate translation: “through all the generations of your descendants.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 12:14](../12/14.md).
 EXO	29	42	h5r7	figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֑ה	1	tent of meeting	This means in the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “before Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	29	43	ic8i	figs-activepassive	וְ⁠נִקְדַּ֖שׁ בִּ⁠כְבֹדִֽ⁠י	1	the tent will be set apart for me by my glory	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “My awesome presence will dedicate the tent to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EXO	30	intro	z3yc			0		# Exodus 30 General Notes\n\nThis chapter is mostly a return to instructions for building worship equipment for the sacred tent.\nThe forms of "you" are mostly singular. However, they again refer to the workmen that Moses will instruct, so you should return to whatever form you have been following in chapters 25-28.\n\n\n## Structure:\n\n- v. 1-10: Incense altar\n    * v. 1-6: Instructions for making the incense altar\n    * v. 7-10: Use of the incense altar\n- v. 11-16: Ransom money for taking a census\n- v. 17-21: Instructions for a washbasin\n- v. 22-30: Anointing oil\n    * v. 22-25: Instructions for making the oil\n    * v. 26-33: Instructions for using the oil\nv- 34-38: Making and using sacred incense\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Atonement\n\nThrough the offering of blood and money, things and people were kept in God’s favor. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/atonement]])\n\n\n### Holiness\n\nSome items in this chapter became so holy that they could make other things holy. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\n\n\n### Unknown terms\n\nThere are a number of ingredient terms that are unknown even to scholars.
+EXO	30	intro	z3yc			0		# Exodus 30 General Notes\n\nThis chapter is mostly a return to instructions for building worship equipment for the sacred tent.\nThe forms of "you" are mostly singular. However, they again refer to the workmen that Moses will instruct, so you should return to whatever form you have been following in chapters 25-28.\n\n\n## Structure:\n\n- v. 1-10: Incense altar\n    * v. 1-6: Instructions for making the incense altar\n    * v. 7-10: Use of the incense altar\n- v. 11-16: Ransom money for taking a census\n- v. 17-21: Instructions for a washbasin\n- v. 22-30: Anointing oil\n    * v. 22-25: Instructions for making the oil\n    * v. 26-33: Instructions for using the oil\nv- 34-38: Making and using sacred incense\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Atonement\n\nThrough the offering of blood and money, things and people were kept in God’s favor. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/atonement]])\n\n\n### Holiness\n\nSome items in this chapter became so holy that they could make other things holy. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\n\n\n### Unknown terms\n\nThere are a number of ingredient terms that are unknown even to scholars.<br>
 EXO	30	1	v8vb	figs-you	וְ⁠עָשִׂ֥יתָ	1	You must make	Here, **you** refers to Moses and the people of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 EXO	30	2	w56e	translate-unknown	קַרְנֹתָֽי⁠ו	1	Its horns must be made	See how you translated **horns** in [Exodus 27:2](../27/02.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	30	2	a39m	translate-bdistance	אַמָּ֨ה…וְ⁠אַמָּ֤ה…וְ⁠אַמָּתַ֖יִם	1	Its horns must be made	You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46cm … 46cm … 94cm (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
@@ -2044,7 +2036,7 @@ EXO	30	9	ckf9		לֹא־תַעֲל֥וּ עָלָ֛י⁠ו קְטֹ֥רֶת זָ
 EXO	30	10	dgny	grammar-connect-logic-goal	קֹֽדֶשׁ־קָֽדָשִׁ֥ים ה֖וּא לַ⁠יהוָֽה	1	horns	This last clause defines the purpose of the ritual described in this verse. See [Exo 29:37](../29/37.md). Alternate translation: “This is to make it holy of holies to Yahweh.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 EXO	30	10	k6xk		קַרְנֹתָ֔י⁠ו	1	horns	These were projections that looked like ox horns and were attached to the four corners of the altar. See how you translated this in [Exodus 27:2](../27/02.md).
 EXO	30	10	san2		לְ⁠דֹרֹ֣תֵי⁠כֶ֔ם	1	throughout your generations	Alternate translation: “through all the generations of your descendants.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 12:14](../12/14.md).
-EXO	30	10	jxn0	figs-possession	קֹֽדֶשׁ־קָֽדָשִׁ֥ים	1	throughout your generations	Here, **holy of holies** means extremely holy, as in, the holiest of the holy things. If doubling the words like this would not create this strengthening and marking as exclusive meaning in your language, you may need to find another way to express that this item would become uniquely holy. See how you translated this in [Exodus 29:37](../29/37.md). Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extraordinarily holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+EXO	30	10	jxn0	figs-possession	קֹֽדֶשׁ־קָֽדָשִׁ֥ים	1	throughout your generations	Here, **holiest holy** means extremely or uniquely holy. If this form would not express that this item would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. See how you translated this in [Exodus 29:37](../29/37.md). Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extraordinarily holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 EXO	30	10	uxb4	figs-quotemarks	לַ⁠יהוָֽה	1	throughout your generations	After **Yahweh**, the direct quote that began in [Exo 25:2](../25/02.md) ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	30	12	dprx	figs-idiom	תִשָּׂ֞א אֶת־רֹ֥אשׁ	1	When you take	In this context, **lift up the head** means to take a census. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “take a census” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EXO	30	12	s73c	figs-you	תִשָּׂ֞א	1	When you take	This could mean: (1) **you** refers to Moses and the leaders of Israel in future generations when they take a census or (2) **you** refers to just Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
@@ -2058,15 +2050,15 @@ EXO	30	14	uqt6	figs-idiom	כֹּ֗ל הָ⁠עֹבֵר֙ עַל־הַ⁠פְּק
 EXO	30	14	vhim	figs-idiom	מִ⁠בֶּ֛ן עֶשְׂרִ֥ים שָׁנָ֖ה	1	from twenty years old and up	This is an idiom that refers to age. See the UST and how you translated the same idiom in [Exo 7:7](../07/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EXO	30	14	k4h9	figs-metaphor	מִ⁠בֶּ֛ן עֶשְׂרִ֥ים שָׁנָ֖ה וָ⁠מָ֑עְלָ⁠ה	1	from twenty years old and up	Larger numbers are spoken of as being up or above smaller numbers. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “from twenty years old and more” or “who is twenty years old or older” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	30	15	e8xa	translate-bmoney	מִֽ⁠מַּחֲצִ֖ית הַ⁠שָּׁ֑קֶל	1	the half shekel	See how you translated this in [Exodus 3:13](../03/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
-EXO	30	15	ew8p	figs-123person	נַפְשֹׁתֵי⁠כֶֽם	1	the half shekel	The plural form of you is used here. In many cases, since Yahweh is speaking to Moses about the people that will be counted, it may make more sense to change to the third person. However, Moses would be counted as well and would have to pay the ransom, so a form of you that could include Moses and all the other Israelite men would also be an appropriate translation. Alternate translation: “for their lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+EXO	30	15	ew8p	figs-123person	נַפְשֹׁתֵי⁠כֶֽם	1	the half shekel	The plural form of you is used here. In many cases, since Yahweh is speaking to Moses about the people that will be counted, it may make more sense to change to the third person. However, Moses would be counted as well and would have to pay the ransom, so a form of you that could include Moses and all the other Israelite men would also be an appropriate translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 EXO	30	16	z6tn		וְ⁠הָיָה֩ לִ⁠בְנֵ֨י יִשְׂרָאֵ֤ל לְ⁠זִכָּרוֹן֙ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֔ה לְ⁠כַפֵּ֖ר עַל־נַפְשֹׁתֵי⁠כֶֽם	1	It must be a reminder to the Israelites before me, to make atonement for your lives	This sentence is very unclear. It is not clear who is being reminded of what. This could mean: (1) that it will remind Yahweh that the Israelites have given money for their lives, and therefore he should welcome them. (2) that it will remind the Israelites that they have given Yahweh money for their lives. Therefore, Yahweh will welcome them.
 EXO	30	16	mwix	figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֔ה	1	It must be a reminder to the Israelites before me, to make atonement for your lives	Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “before Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	30	18	v88y	translate-unknown	כִּיּ֥וֹר נְחֹ֛שֶׁת	1	bronze basin	Alternate translation: “bronze bowl” or “bronze tub” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	30	18	bh82		וְ⁠כַנּ֥⁠וֹ	1	a bronze stand	The **base** is what the basin would be put upon.
 EXO	30	18	iq8n		לְ⁠רָחְצָ֑ה	1	a basin for washing	This phrase, **for washing**, explains the purpose for which the priests were to use the bronze basin.
 EXO	30	19	ivb1		מִמֶּ֑⁠נּוּ	1	water in it	Alternate translation: “in the water in the basin”
-EXO	30	20	dyku	grammar-connect-logic-goal	וְ⁠לֹ֣א יָמֻ֑תוּ	1	water in it	The priests must wash in order that God would not put them to death. If the goal of some action needs to be placed elsewhere in the structure of your language, move it to the usual location. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-EXO	30	20	it0h	grammar-connect-logic-goal	וְ⁠לֹ֣א יָמֻ֑תוּ	1	water in it	The priests must wash in order to remain alive. If the goal of some action needs to be placed elsewhere in the structure of your language move it to the usual location. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+EXO	30	20	dyku	figs-explicit	וְ⁠לֹ֣א יָמֻ֑תוּ	1	water in it	The priests might die if they do not wash because God would kill them for being defiled in his presence. If your readers would not understand this you may want to include it in a footnote or in the text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+EXO	30	20	it0h	grammar-connect-logic-goal	וְ⁠לֹ֣א יָמֻ֑תוּ	1	water in it	Not dying is the goal of the priests’ washing. If the goal of some action needs to be placed elsewhere in the structure of your language move it to the usual location. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 EXO	30	21	hp35		וְ⁠הָיְתָ֨ה לָ⁠הֶ֧ם חָק־עוֹלָ֛ם ל֥⁠וֹ וּ⁠לְ⁠זַרְע֖⁠וֹ לְ⁠דֹרֹתָֽ⁠ם	1	for Aaron and his descendants throughout their people’s generations	See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 12:17](../12/17.md).
 EXO	30	23	m9g7	translate-unknown	בְּשָׂמִ֣ים	1	spices	These are parts of dried plants (other than the leaves) which people grind into a powder and put in oil or food to give it a nice smell or flavor. See how you translated this in [Exodus 25:6](../25/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	30	23	zq43	figs-explicit	חֲמֵ֣שׁ מֵא֔וֹת…חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים וּ⁠מָאתָ֑יִם…חֲמִשִּׁ֥ים וּ⁠מָאתָֽיִם	1	five hundred shekels…250 shekels	[The next verse](../30/24.md) mentions that these are shekel weight measurements. You may want to include some indication of that here. Alternate translation: “500 shekels … 250 shekels … 250 shekels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2079,27 +2071,27 @@ EXO	30	25	k3s5		מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה רֹקֵ֑חַ	1	the work of a perfumer	This
 EXO	30	25	yv9l	translate-unknown	רֹקֵ֑חַ	1	a perfumer	This is a person who is skilled in mixing spices and oils. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	30	26	u241	figs-you	וּ⁠מָשַׁחְתָּ֥	1	You must anoint	Here, **you** may refer to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 EXO	30	29	np7g		אֹתָ֔⁠ם	1	set them apart	Here, **them** refers to the items listed in [Exodus 30:26-28](../30/26.md).
-EXO	30	29	m062	figs-possession	קֹ֣דֶשׁ קָֽדָשִׁ֑ים	1	set them apart	Here, **holy of holies** means extremely holy, as in, the holiest of the holy things. If doubling the words like this would not create this strengthening and marking as exclusive meaning in your language, you may need to find another way to express that this item would become uniquely holy. See how you translated this in [Exodus 29:37](../29/37.md). Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extraordinarily holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+EXO	30	29	m062	figs-possession	קֹ֣דֶשׁ קָֽדָשִׁ֑ים	1	set them apart	Here, **holiest holy** means extremely or uniquely holy. If this form would not express that this item would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. See how you translated this in [Exodus 29:37](../29/37.md). Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extraordinarily holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 EXO	30	31	k4s7		לְ⁠דֹרֹתֵי⁠כֶֽם	1	throughout your people’s generations	Alternate translation: “all the generations of your descendants.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 12:14](../12/14.md).
 EXO	30	32	rlk4	figs-activepassive	עַל־בְּשַׂ֤ר אָדָם֙ לֹ֣א יִיסָ֔ךְ	1	It must not be applied to people’s skin	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You shall not pour it on the body of a man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	30	32	v3br		וּ⁠בְ⁠מַ֨תְכֻּנְתּ֔⁠וֹ	1	with the same formula	Alternate translation: “and … with the same ingredients” or “and … with the same items” or “and … according to this recipe”
 EXO	30	32	it0x	grammar-connect-logic-result	קֹ֣דֶשׁ ה֔וּא קֹ֖דֶשׁ יִהְיֶ֥ה לָ⁠כֶֽם	1	with the same formula	The second half of this statement (**it shall be holy to you**) explains to the people the result of this oil being holy, which is, they must respect it as a holy thing. It may make more sense in some languages to move this whole statement to the beginning of the verse, because the rule about pouring on someone’s body is an application of the result. Alternate translation (placed at the beginning of the verse): “Because it is sacred, you must treat it like it is sacred, therefore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-EXO	30	33	pa53	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠נִכְרַ֖ת מֵ⁠עַמָּֽי⁠ו	1	that person must be cut off from his people	See how you translated the metaphor **cut off** in [Exodus 12:15](../12/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EXO	30	33	yhgi	figs-activepassive	וְ⁠נִכְרַ֖ת מֵ⁠עַמָּֽי⁠ו	1	that person must be cut off from his people	See how you translated **cut off** in [12:15](../12/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+EXO	30	33	pa53	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠נִכְרַ֖ת מֵ⁠עַמָּֽי⁠ו	1	that person must be cut off from his people	See how you translated **cut off** in [Exodus 12:15](../12/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EXO	30	33	yhgi	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠נִכְרַ֖ת מֵ⁠עַמָּֽי⁠ו	1	that person must be cut off from his people	See how you translated **cut off** in [12:15](../12/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	30	34	uo57	translate-unknown	נָטָ֤ף׀ וּ⁠שְׁחֵ֨לֶת֙ וְ⁠חֶלְבְּנָ֔ה…וּ⁠לְבֹנָ֣ה זַכָּ֑ה	1	General Information:	Here is a brief description of these materials, though we really do not know exactly what they are:  **stacte** is a resin from certain gum plants, **onycha** is from certain shellfish or mollusks, and **galbanum** is another kind of gum resin. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	30	35	y8yj		וְ⁠עָשִׂ֤יתָ אֹתָ⁠הּ֙ קְטֹ֔רֶת רֹ֖קַח מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה רוֹקֵ֑חַ	1	blended by a perfumer	This could mean: (1) Moses was to have a perfumer do the work or (2) Moses was to do the work himself the way a perfumer would do it. See how you translated these words in [Exodus 30:25](../30/25.md).
-EXO	30	36	nz2a	figs-you	וְ⁠שָֽׁחַקְתָּ֣…וְ⁠נָתַתָּ֨ה	1	You will grind it	Alternate translation: “You will crush” Here, **you** refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+EXO	30	36	nz2a	figs-you	וְ⁠שָֽׁחַקְתָּ֣…וְ⁠נָתַתָּ֨ה	1	You will grind it	Here, **you** refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 EXO	30	36	oj2r	figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֤י	1	You will grind it	Alternate translation: “in front of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	30	36	mxww	figs-metonymy	הָ⁠עֵדֻת֙	1	You will grind it	Here, **testimony** probably refers to the sacred chest that contained the tablets of the law. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-EXO	30	36	i71b	figs-possession	קֹ֥דֶשׁ קָֽדָשִׁ֖ים	1	You will grind it	Here, **holy of holies** means extremely holy, as in, the holiest of the holy things. If doubling the words like this would not create this strengthening and marking as exclusive meaning in your language, you may need to find another way to express that this item would become uniquely holy. See how you translated this in [Exodus 29:37](../29/37.md). Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extraordinarily holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+EXO	30	36	i71b	figs-possession	קֹ֥דֶשׁ קָֽדָשִׁ֖ים	1	You will grind it	Here, **holiest holy** means extremely or uniquely holy. If this form would not express that this item would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. See how you translated this in [Exodus 29:37](../29/37.md). Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extraordinarily holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 EXO	30	36	t8y9	figs-you	לָ⁠כֶֽם	1	You will regard	Here, **you** is plural and refers to Moses and all the people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 EXO	30	37	dq6c	figs-you	תַעֲשׂ֖וּ	1	you must not make any	The word **you** here refers to the people of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 EXO	30	37	yv1y		בְּ⁠מַ֨תְכֻּנְתָּ֔⁠הּ	1	with the same formula	Alternate translation: “with the same ingredients” or “with the same items.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 30:32](../30/32.md).
 EXO	30	37	wh25		קֹ֛דֶשׁ תִּהְיֶ֥ה לְ⁠ךָ֖ לַ⁠יהוָֽה	1	It must be most holy to you	Alternate translation: “You must consider it to be most holy”
 EXO	30	38	xn6v		לְ⁠הָרִ֣יחַ בָּ֑⁠הּ	1	perfume	This could mean: (1) to enjoy the scent for oneself (2) to wear as a perfume.
-EXO	30	38	sa1m	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠נִכְרַ֖ת מֵ⁠עַמָּֽי⁠ו	1	must be cut off from his people	See how you translated the metaphor **cut off** in [Exodus 12:15](../12/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EXO	30	38	o6v0	figs-activepassive	וְ⁠נִכְרַ֖ת מֵ⁠עַמָּֽי⁠ו	1	must be cut off from his people	See how you translated **cut off** in [12:15](../12/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EXO	31	intro	wfk7			0		# Exodus 31 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter is the end of Exodus’ recording of the law of Moses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Sabbath\n\nAs described in this chapter, the Sabbath is more than just a day of worship or celebration. Its significance extends beyond a way to help people rest. It is a major part of the identity of the Hebrew people. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])
+EXO	30	38	sa1m	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠נִכְרַ֖ת מֵ⁠עַמָּֽי⁠ו	1	must be cut off from his people	See how you translated **cut off** in [Exodus 12:15](../12/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EXO	30	38	o6v0	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠נִכְרַ֖ת מֵ⁠עַמָּֽי⁠ו	1	must be cut off from his people	See how you translated **cut off** in [12:15](../12/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EXO	31	intro	wfk7			0		# Exodus 31 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n- v. 1-11: Selection of the skilled craftsmen\n- v. 12-17: Sabbath instruction\n- v. 18: the end of Exodus’ recording of the law of Moses (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Sabbath\n\nAs described in this chapter, the Sabbath is more than just a day of worship or celebration. Its significance extends beyond a way to help people rest. It is a major part of the identity of the Hebrew people. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])\n
 EXO	31	2	m8ju	figs-idiom	קָרָ֣אתִֽי בְ⁠שֵׁ֑ם	1	I have called by name	Yahweh speaks of choosing specific people as calling them by name. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I have chosen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EXO	31	2	hf5r	translate-names	בְּצַלְאֵ֛ל…אוּרִ֥י…ח֖וּר	1	Bezalel…Uri…Hur	These are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EXO	31	3	f7sk	figs-metaphor	וָ⁠אֲמַלֵּ֥א אֹת֖⁠וֹ ר֣וּחַ אֱלֹהִ֑ים	1	I have filled Bezalel with my Spirit	Yahweh speaks of giving Bezalel his spirit as if Bezalel were a container and God’s spirit were a liquid. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “I have given my spirit to Bezalel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -2111,21 +2103,21 @@ EXO	31	6	jh61	translate-names	אָהֳלִיאָ֞ב…אֲחִֽיסָמָךְ
 EXO	31	6	wcq7	figs-idiom	וּ⁠בְ⁠לֵ֥ב כָּל־חֲכַם־לֵ֖ב נָתַ֣תִּי חָכְמָ֑ה	1	I have put skill into the hearts of all who are wise	God speaks of making people able to make things as if he were putting the ability into their hearts. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I have given skill to all who are wise” or “I have made all who are wise able to make things well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EXO	31	11	iusb	writing-pronouns	יַעֲשֽׂוּ	1	I have put skill into the hearts of all who are wise	**They** refers to Bezalel and Oholiab as well as the unnamed other “skilled of heart” (talented craftsmen) referred to in [verse 2](../31/02.md) and [verse 6](../30/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 EXO	31	13	bveg	figs-quotemarks	לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר	1	You must certainly keep Yahweh’s Sabbath days	A second-level direct quotation starts after **saying**. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. There are multiple possible endings for this quotation, which will be addressed in later verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-EXO	31	13	i1lw	figs-metaphor	אַ֥ךְ אֶת־שַׁבְּתֹתַ֖⁠י תִּשְׁמֹ֑רוּ	1	You must certainly keep Yahweh’s Sabbath days	God speaks of obeying his instructions about the Sabbath as keeping the Sabbath as if it was a precious thing you guard. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “You must certainly obey Yahweh’s instructions about the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EXO	31	13	i1lw	figs-metaphor	אַ֥ךְ אֶת־שַׁבְּתֹתַ֖⁠י תִּשְׁמֹ֑רוּ	1	You must certainly keep Yahweh’s Sabbath days	Yahweh uses the phrase **keep my Sabbaths** as a metaphor for obeying his instructions about the Sabbath, as if it was a precious thing they should guard. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “You must certainly obey Yahweh’s instructions about the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	31	13	gw13		לְ⁠דֹרֹ֣תֵי⁠כֶ֔ם	1	throughout your people’s generations	Alternate translation: “through all the generations of your descendants.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 12:14](../12/14.md).
 EXO	31	14	dsya	figs-quotemarks	לָ⁠כֶ֑ם	1	throughout your people’s generations	One possible ending place for the second-level quotation that began in the previous verse is after **to you**. The rest of Yahweh’s instructions to Moses in this section do not use the second person to address Israel directly, so you may close the second-level quotation here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EXO	31	14	plq5	figs-activepassive	מ֣וֹת יוּמָ֔ת	1	must surely be put to death	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must surely kill” or “you must surely execute” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EXO	31	14	fz1g	figs-activepassive	וְ⁠נִכְרְתָ֛ה	1	must surely be cut off from his people	See how you translated **cut off** in [12:15](../12/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+EXO	31	14	fz1g	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠נִכְרְתָ֛ה	1	must surely be cut off from his people	See how you translated **cut off** in [12:15](../12/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	31	15	v4dv	translate-numbers	שֵׁ֣שֶׁת	1	but the seventh day	Alternate translation: “6” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 EXO	31	15	fvga	translate-ordinal	הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֗י	1	but the seventh day	Alternate translation: “the 7th” or “day number 7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 EXO	31	15	lrat		שַׁבַּ֧ת שַׁבָּת֛וֹן	1	but the seventh day	Alternate translation: “a Sabbath of complete rest”
 EXO	31	15	fxuo	figs-activepassive	מ֥וֹת יוּמָֽת	1	must surely be put to death	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must surely kill” or “you must surely execute” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EXO	31	16	t9hw	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠שָׁמְר֥וּ בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל אֶת־הַ⁠שַּׁבָּ֑ת	1	must keep the Sabbath	God speaks of obeying his instructions about the Sabbath as keeping the Sabbath as if it was a precious thing you guard. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And the sons of Israel must obey Yahweh’s instructions about the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EXO	31	16	n7q2		לְ⁠דֹרֹתָ֖⁠ם	1	They must observe it throughout their people’s generations	Alternate translation: “They and all the generations of their descendants must observe it.” See how you translated “throughout their people’s generations” in [Exodus 12:42](../12/42.md).
+EXO	31	16	t9hw	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠שָׁמְר֥וּ בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל אֶת־הַ⁠שַּׁבָּ֑ת	1	must keep the Sabbath	Yahweh uses the phrase **keep my Sabbaths** as a metaphor for obeying his instructions about the Sabbath, as if it was a precious thing they should guard. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And the sons of Israel must obey Yahweh’s instructions about the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EXO	31	16	n7q2		לְ⁠דֹרֹתָ֖⁠ם	1	They must observe it throughout their people’s generations	See how you translated “throughout their people’s generations” in [Exodus 12:42](../12/42.md). Alternate translation: “; they and all the generations of their descendants must observe it.”
 EXO	31	16	yef8		בְּרִ֥ית עוֹלָֽם	1	lasting covenant	Alternate translation: “A covenant that will always exist” or “A lasting covenant”
 EXO	31	17	oc30	figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יִּנָּפַֽשׁ	1	lasting covenant	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and he refreshed himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	31	18	xc6h	figs-activepassive	כְּתֻבִ֖ים בְּ⁠אֶצְבַּ֥ע אֱלֹהִֽים	1	written on by his own hand	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which Yahweh wrote on with his own hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EXO	32	intro	vv2w			0		# Exodus 32 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThe events in verses 1-6 of this chapter occured while Moses spoke with God and therefore happened sometime during the events recorded between Exodus 24:15 and Exodus 31. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])\n\n\n- v. 1-6: The people ask Aaron to make them a god and he makes the golden calf\n- v. 7-29 - Yahweh and Moses’ reaction\n    * v. 11-14 - Moses intercedes for the people\n- v. 30-34 - Moses intercedes for the people\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 32:18.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Idolatry\n\nThe making of the golden calf was considered a form of idolatry. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+EXO	32	intro	vv2w			0		# Exodus 32 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThe events in verses 1-6 of this chapter occured while Moses spoke with God and therefore happened sometime during the events recorded between Exodus 24:15 and Exodus 31. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])\n\n\n- v. 1-6: The people ask Aaron to make them a god and he makes the golden calf\n- v. 7-29 - Yahweh and Moses’ reaction\n    * v. 11-14 - Moses intercedes for the people\n- v. 30-34 - Moses intercedes for the people\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 32:18.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Idolatry\n\nThe making of the golden calf was considered a form of idolatry. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])<br>
 EXO	32	1	oan6	writing-newevent		0	the people saw	This chapter begins with a major scene shift, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 EXO	32	1	cfk8	figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יַּ֣רְא הָ⁠עָ֔ם	1	the people saw	Here, the word **saw** is used to indicate understanding or realization of a situation. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “And the people realized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	32	1	lnau	figs-rpronouns	וַ⁠יִּקָּהֵ֨ל הָ⁠עָ֜ם	1	the people saw	This means the people were not summoned by Aaron to come to him, but instead they decided to **gather themselves.** (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
@@ -2135,7 +2127,7 @@ EXO	32	1	wulk		כִּי־זֶ֣ה׀ מֹשֶׁ֣ה	1	go before us	People showed
 EXO	32	2	p86s	writing-pronouns	וְ⁠הָבִ֖יאוּ	1	bring them to me	The word **them** here refers to the golden rings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 EXO	32	3	ckg2	figs-hyperbole	כָּל־הָ⁠עָ֔ם	1	All the people	This refers to all the people who rejected Moses as their leader and Yahweh as their God. Later parts of the text reveal that there were people still faithful to Moses and Yahweh and  that the Israelites had a great deal more gold. Alternate translation: “many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 EXO	32	4	uf9e	translate-unknown	וַ⁠יָּ֤צַר אֹת⁠וֹ֙ בַּ⁠חֶ֔רֶט וַֽ⁠יַּעֲשֵׂ֖⁠הוּ עֵ֣גֶל מַסֵּכָ֑ה	1	fashioned it with an engraving tool and he made a cast idol in the shape of a calf	Most likely this means that Aaron melted the gold and poured it into a mold that had the shape of a calf. When the gold cooled and became hard, he removed the mold, and the hardened gold had the shape of a calf. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-EXO	32	4	cc7s	writing-pronouns	וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמְר֔וּ	1	fashioned it with an engraving tool and he made a cast idol in the shape of a calf	It is not clear who **they** is who spoke. Alternate translation: “And someone said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+EXO	32	4	cc7s	writing-pronouns	וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמְר֔וּ	1	fashioned it with an engraving tool and he made a cast idol in the shape of a calf	The identity of the speakers, referred to as **they**, remains unknown. Alternate translation: “And someone said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 EXO	32	4	ence	figs-123person	אֱלֹהֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙…הֶעֱל֖וּ⁠ךָ	1	fashioned it with an engraving tool and he made a cast idol in the shape of a calf	Because the speaker of this sentence is unknown and mentioned in the plural, it is possible that it is the people speaking. In that case, it would be possible for a translation to use the first person rather than second person here. Alternate translation: “our gods … brought us up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 EXO	32	4	n17v		אֵ֤לֶּה אֱלֹהֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙	1	fashioned it with an engraving tool and he made a cast idol in the shape of a calf	In the text, there only appears to be one “god” (the golden calf idol) presented to Israel. If it would be clearer to your audience, you may consider translating **these … gods** as singular. Alternate translation: “this is your god”
 EXO	32	5	ztx4	figs-explicit	וַ⁠יַּ֣רְא אַהֲרֹ֔ן	1	When Aaron saw this	You may need to make explicit what he saw. “Aaron saw what the people did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2154,11 +2146,11 @@ EXO	32	9	my87	grammar-collectivenouns	הַ⁠זֶּ֔ה…הֽוּא	1	a stiff-n
 EXO	32	10	fmk3	grammar-connect-logic-result	וְ⁠עַתָּה֙	1	Now then	**So now** is used here to mark that Yahweh’s next statements are a result of what he has said in the previous verses. Alternate translation: “Therefore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 EXO	32	10	sd9w	figs-idiom	וְ⁠יִֽחַר־אַפִּ֥⁠י בָ⁠הֶ֖ם	1	My anger will burn hot against them	This is an idiom meaning that Yahweh is angry. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “And let me be angry with them”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EXO	32	10	vc2u	writing-pronouns	אוֹתְ⁠ךָ֖	1	from you	The word **you** refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-EXO	32	11	h62e	figs-rquestion	לָ⁠מָ֤ה יְהוָה֙ יֶחֱרֶ֤ה אַפְּ⁠ךָ֙ בְּ⁠עַמֶּ֔⁠ךָ אֲשֶׁ֤ר הוֹצֵ֨אתָ֙ מֵ⁠אֶ֣רֶץ מִצְרַ֔יִם בְּ⁠כֹ֥חַ גָּד֖וֹל וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֥ד חֲזָקָֽה	1	why does your anger burn against your people…a mighty hand?	Moses used this question to try to persuade Yahweh not to be so angry with his people. This rhetorical question can be translated as a statement. Alternate translation: “Yahweh, do not let your nose burn against your people whom you have brought out from the land of Egypt with great power and with a strong hand.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+EXO	32	11	h62e	figs-rquestion	לָ⁠מָ֤ה יְהוָה֙ יֶחֱרֶ֤ה אַפְּ⁠ךָ֙ בְּ⁠עַמֶּ֔⁠ךָ אֲשֶׁ֤ר הוֹצֵ֨אתָ֙ מֵ⁠אֶ֣רֶץ מִצְרַ֔יִם בְּ⁠כֹ֥חַ גָּד֖וֹל וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֥ד חֲזָקָֽה	1	why does your anger burn against your people…a mighty hand?	Moses used this question to try to persuade Yahweh not to be so angry with his people. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Yahweh, do not let your nose burn against your people whom you have brought out from the land of Egypt with great power and with a strong hand.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 EXO	32	11	nuwf	figs-idiom	יֶחֱרֶ֤ה אַפְּ⁠ךָ֙ בְּ⁠עַמֶּ֔⁠ךָ	1	My anger will burn hot against them	This is an idiom meaning that Yahweh is angry with his people. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “are you angry with your people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EXO	32	11	t2cv	figs-doublet	בְּ⁠כֹ֥חַ גָּד֖וֹל וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֥ד חֲזָקָֽה	1	great power…mighty hand	These two phrases share similar meanings and are combined for emphasis. If doubling in this way would not convey emphasis in your language, you will need to find a way to translate it that does give emphasis. Alternate translation: “using your very strong power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 EXO	32	11	ph43	figs-metonymy	וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֥ד חֲזָקָֽה	1	a mighty hand	Here, **hand** represents God’s actions or works. See how you translated this in [Exodus 6:1](../06/01.md). Alternate translation: “and with powerful works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-EXO	32	12	r8ij	figs-rquestion	לָ⁠מָּה֩ יֹאמְר֨וּ מִצְרַ֜יִם לֵ⁠אמֹ֗ר בְּ⁠רָעָ֤ה הֽוֹצִיאָ⁠ם֙ לַ⁠הֲרֹ֤ג אֹתָ⁠ם֙ בֶּֽ⁠הָרִ֔ים וּ֨⁠לְ⁠כַלֹּתָ֔⁠ם מֵ⁠עַ֖ל פְּנֵ֣י הָֽ⁠אֲדָמָ֑ה	1	Why should the Egyptians say, ‘He led them out…to destroy them from the face of the earth?’	Moses used this question to try to persuade God not to destroy his people. This rhetorical question can be translated with a statement. Alternate translation: If you destroy your people, the Egyptians might say, ‘He brought them out with evil intent, to kill them in the mountains and to destroy them from on the face of the ground.’ (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+EXO	32	12	r8ij	figs-rquestion	לָ⁠מָּה֩ יֹאמְר֨וּ מִצְרַ֜יִם לֵ⁠אמֹ֗ר בְּ⁠רָעָ֤ה הֽוֹצִיאָ⁠ם֙ לַ⁠הֲרֹ֤ג אֹתָ⁠ם֙ בֶּֽ⁠הָרִ֔ים וּ֨⁠לְ⁠כַלֹּתָ֔⁠ם מֵ⁠עַ֖ל פְּנֵ֣י הָֽ⁠אֲדָמָ֑ה	1	Why should the Egyptians say, ‘He led them out…to destroy them from the face of the earth?’	Moses used this question to try to persuade God not to destroy his people. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: If you destroy your people, the Egyptians might say, ‘He brought them out with evil intent, to kill them in the mountains and to destroy them from on the face of the ground.’ (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 EXO	32	12	yvez	figs-quotesinquotes	יֹאמְר֨וּ מִצְרַ֜יִם לֵ⁠אמֹ֗ר בְּ⁠רָעָ֤ה הֽוֹצִיאָ⁠ם֙ לַ⁠הֲרֹ֤ג אֹתָ⁠ם֙ בֶּֽ⁠הָרִ֔ים וּ֨⁠לְ⁠כַלֹּתָ֔⁠ם מֵ⁠עַ֖ל פְּנֵ֣י הָֽ⁠אֲדָמָ֑ה	1	Why should the Egyptians say, ‘He led them out…to destroy them from the face of the earth?’	After **saying,** this is a second-level quote. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation.\nHowever, you may want to translate this as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the layers of quotations in this passage. Alternative translation: “the Egyptians say that you brought them out with evil intent, to kill them in the mountains and to destroy them from on the face of the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 EXO	32	12	kzh7	figs-metonymy	מֵ⁠עַ֖ל פְּנֵ֣י הָֽ⁠אֲדָמָ֑ה	1	face of the earth	Here, **face** means “surface.” Alternate translation: “from the surface of the land” or “from the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	32	12	fns1		שׁ֚וּב מֵ⁠חֲר֣וֹן אַפֶּ֔⁠ךָ	1	Turn from your burning anger	Alternate translation: “Stop your burning anger” or “Stop being so angry”
@@ -2173,7 +2165,7 @@ EXO	32	17	cua3	writing-participants	יְהוֹשֻׁ֛עַ	1	he said to Moses	Jo
 EXO	32	18	r0gm	writing-poetry	אֵ֥ין קוֹל֙ עֲנ֣וֹת גְּבוּרָ֔ה וְ⁠אֵ֥ין ק֖וֹל עֲנ֣וֹת חֲלוּשָׁ֑ה ק֣וֹל עַנּ֔וֹת אָנֹכִ֖י שֹׁמֵֽעַ	1	he said to Moses	These lines are widely considered to be poetic. It is not clear why a poetic form is used here. In some languages it may not be appropriate to convey this response in poetic form, in which case another form may be used. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry]])
 EXO	32	18	m4k0	figs-parallelism	אֵ֥ין קוֹל֙ עֲנ֣וֹת גְּבוּרָ֔ה וְ⁠אֵ֥ין ק֖וֹל עֲנ֣וֹת חֲלוּשָׁ֑ה ק֣וֹל עַנּ֔וֹת אָנֹכִ֖י שֹׁמֵֽעַ	1	he said to Moses	The poetic form here is parallelism in the repetition of **sound of singing**. If it would be unclear to say that Moses heard **the sound of singing** in the third line after saying he didn’t hear the sound of singing twice before, something more like the more contrastive UST may be followed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 EXO	32	18	fdg8	figs-explicit	ק֣וֹל עַנּ֔וֹת אָנֹכִ֖י שֹׁמֵֽעַ	1	he said to Moses	If it is unclear to say that Moses hears **the sound of singing** after twice saying he didn’t hear that, you may want to make the type of singing explicit. Consider referring to your translation of the last word of [verse 6](../32/06.md) (to play in the ULT). Alternate translation: “the sound of playful singing I hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-EXO	32	19	hr2j	figs-idiom	וַ⁠יִּֽחַר־אַ֣ף	1	the tablets	This is an idiom for being angry. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “And Moses was very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+EXO	32	19	hr2j	figs-idiom	וַ⁠יִּֽחַר־אַ֣ף מֹשֶׁ֗ה	1	the tablets	This is an idiom for being angry. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “and Moses was very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EXO	32	19	d8zo		תַּ֥חַת	1	the tablets	Alternate translation: “at the bottom of”
 EXO	32	21	du5l	figs-quotesinquotes	וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר מֹשֶׁה֙ אֶֽל־אַהֲרֹ֔ן מֶֽה־עָשָׂ֥ה לְ⁠ךָ֖ הָ⁠עָ֣ם הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה כִּֽי־הֵבֵ֥אתָ עָלָ֖י⁠ו חֲטָאָ֥ה גְדֹלָֽה׃	1	Then Moses said to Aaron, “What did this people…a great sin on them?”	Moses’ question is a second-level quote. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation.\nHowever, you may want to translate this as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the layers of quotations in this passage. Alternate translation: “Then Moses asked Aaron what the people did to him, that he had brought such a great sin on them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 EXO	32	21	np73	figs-metaphor	כִּֽי־הֵבֵ֥אתָ עָלָ֖י⁠ו חֲטָאָ֥ה גְדֹלָֽה	1	you have brought such a great sin on them	Moses spoke of causing people to **sin** as if sin were an object and Aaron put it **on them**. Alternate translation: “that you have caused them to sin greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -2193,8 +2185,8 @@ EXO	32	27	xsl3		עִבְר֨וּ וָ⁠שׁ֜וּבוּ מִ⁠שַּׁ֤עַר
 EXO	32	28	at4i	translate-numbers	כִּ⁠שְׁלֹ֥שֶׁת אַלְפֵ֖י	1	three thousand of the people	Alternate translation: “about three thousand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 EXO	32	29	to5d	figs-idiom	מִלְא֨וּ יֶדְ⁠כֶ֤ם	1	You have been placed into Yahweh’s service	This seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:41](../28/41.md). However, this usage is different from that text, as here it is not specified what authority they are given or what they are consecrated for other than **for Yahweh**. Alternate translation: “Consecrate yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EXO	32	29	rkp6		מִלְא֨וּ יֶדְ⁠כֶ֤ם הַ⁠יּוֹם֙ לַֽ⁠יהוָ֔ה	1	You have been placed into Yahweh’s service	Here it is unclear if **fill** should be rightly understood as in the past or as a new command. You may want to follow the decision of another translation your people are familiar with. Alternate translation: “You have filled your hand for Yahweh today”
-EXO	32	29	c6fg	figs-explicit	כִּ֛י אִ֥ישׁ בִּ⁠בְנ֖⁠וֹ וּ⁠בְ⁠אָחִ֑י⁠ו	1	for each of you has taken action against his son and his brother	The fact that they did this in obedience to God can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “For you have obeyed Yahweh and killed your sons and your brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-EXO	32	29	l54l		וְ⁠לָ⁠תֵ֧ת עֲלֵי⁠כֶ֛ם הַ⁠יּ֖וֹם בְּרָכָֽה	1	for each of you has taken action against his son and his brother	This phrase is difficult to interpret. Several options depend on exactly how the conjunction, preposition, and verb combination are interpreted. The first difficulty is related to the difficulty with the previous verb: have they already been blessed or are they going to be blessed? (Alternate translation: “and to have given a blessing over you today”) The second difficulty is: should the clause connections be understood to say that the blessing is because of their actions, or more strongly, that a desire for blessing motivated them to take action? (Alternate translation: “and therefore to give a blessing over you today” or “so that a blessing may be given over you today”) The third difficulty is: while ultimately all blessing is from Yahweh, which is the subject here, Yahweh or the Levites? (Alternate translation: “and to give a blessing over yourselves today” or “and so Yahweh gives a blessing over you today”) As with the previous clause, you may want to follow the decision of another translation your people are familiar with. Alternate translation: “by that you brought blessing on yourselves”
+EXO	32	29	c6fg	figs-explicit	כִּ֛י אִ֥ישׁ בִּ⁠בְנ֖⁠וֹ וּ⁠בְ⁠אָחִ֑י⁠ו	1	for each of you has taken action against his son and his brother	The fact that they did this in obedience to God can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “For you have obeyed Yahweh because each man was against his son and against his brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+EXO	32	29	l54l		וְ⁠לָ⁠תֵ֧ת עֲלֵי⁠כֶ֛ם הַ⁠יּ֖וֹם בְּרָכָֽה	1	for each of you has taken action against his son and his brother	This phrase is difficult to interpret. Several options depend on exactly how the conjunction, preposition, and verb combination are interpreted. The first difficulty is related to the difficulty with the previous verb: have they already been blessed or are they going to be blessed? (Alternate translation: “to have put a blessing on yourselves today”) The second difficulty is: should the clause connections be understood to say that the blessing is because of their actions, or more strongly, that a desire for blessing motivated them to take action? (Alternate translation: “and therefore a blessing is put on you today” or “so that a blessing may be put over you today”) The third difficulty is: while ultimately all blessing is from Yahweh, which is the subject here, Yahweh or the Levites? (Alternate translation: “and so Yahweh is putting a blessing on you today”) As with the previous clause, you may want to follow the decision of another translation your people are familiar with. Alternate translation: “, by that you brought blessing on yourselves”
 EXO	32	30	kvj4	figs-doublet	חֲטָאתֶ֖ם חֲטָאָ֣ה גְדֹלָ֑ה	1	You have committed a very great sin	Here, **sin** used as a verb and then repeated as a noun for emphasis. Along with **great**, it suggests that the people sinned very, very badly. If the repetition of words in this way would not create emphasis, use another form in your language that would. Alternate translation: “You have sinned extremally badly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 EXO	32	30	r5fn	figs-abstractnouns	חֲטָאתֶ֖ם חֲטָאָ֣ה גְדֹלָ֑ה	1	You have committed a very great sin	If your language does not use an abstract noun for **sin**, you could express the idea behind it in another way. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 EXO	32	31	ccpg	figs-doublet	חָטָ֞א הָ⁠עָ֤ם הַ⁠זֶּה֙ חֲטָאָ֣ה	1	You have committed a very great sin	Here, **sin** is used as a verb and then repeated as a noun for emphasis. Along with **great**, it suggests that the people sinned very, very badly. If the repetition of words in this way would not create emphasis, use another form in your language that would. Alternate translation: “this people has sinned extremely badly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -2202,13 +2194,13 @@ EXO	32	31	y049	figs-abstractnouns	חֲטָאָ֣ה	1	You have committed a very g
 EXO	32	31	yeta		אֱלֹהֵ֥י	1	You have committed a very great sin	Alternate translation: “a god”
 EXO	32	32	brpu	figs-ellipsis	וְ⁠עַתָּ֖ה אִם־תִּשָּׂ֣א חַטָּאתָ֑⁠ם	1	blot me out of the book	Moses leaves out his conclusion, perhaps as a way of making this conditional phrase into a request, or perhaps to avoid suggesting to God what would be good for him to do. However, if leaving out a conclusion would be misunderstood in your language you may need to rephrase it or add the implied conclusion. Alternate translation: “But now, if you forgive their sin, good!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 EXO	32	32	c72y	figs-metonymy	מְחֵ֣⁠נִי	1	blot me out of the book	Here, **me** refers to the name of Moses. Alternate translation: “erase my name from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-EXO	32	32	ahb3	figs-explicit	כָּתָֽבְתָּ	1	the book that you have written	What God had written in the book can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “the book in which you have written the names of your people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+EXO	32	32	ahb3	figs-explicit	אֲשֶׁ֥ר כָּתָֽבְתָּ	1	the book that you have written	What God had written in the book can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “in which you have written the names of your people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EXO	32	33	igb4	figs-metonymy	אֶמְחֶ֖⁠נּוּ מִ⁠סִּפְרִֽ⁠י	1	that person I will blot out of my book	Here, **him** represents that person’s name. Alternate translation: “I will erase that person’s name from my book” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	32	33	qwk9		מִ⁠סִּפְרִֽ⁠י	1	my book	This refers to the book of Yahweh that Moses spoke of in [Exodus 32:32](../32/32.md).
 EXO	32	34	xn8p	grammar-connect-logic-result	וּ⁠בְ⁠י֣וֹם פָּקְדִ֔⁠י וּ⁠פָקַדְתִּ֥י עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֖ם חַטָּאתָֽ⁠ם	1	But on the day that I punish them, I will punish them	Yahweh makes it clear that he will punish the people because they sinned by making and worshiping the idol. If it would be more clear in your language to place the reason first, you may consider reordering the clauses. Alternate translation: “However, because they sinned, one day I will come to punish them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-EXO	32	35	wv1v	figs-explicit	עָשׂ֣וּ אֶת־הָ⁠עֵ֔גֶל אֲשֶׁ֥ר עָשָׂ֖ה אַהֲרֹֽן	1	they had made the calf, the one that Aaron made	The first instance of **had made** here could mean (1) “had done,” which would imply worship of the calf (2) the people are being spoken of as having made the calf themselves (along with Aaron) because they demanded it and gave their gold for it. Alternate translation: “they had worshiped the calf that Aaron made” or “they were guilty along with Aaron of making the calf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-EXO	32	35	h3kl	grammar-connect-logic-result	וַ⁠יִּגֹּ֥ף יְהוָ֖ה אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֑ם עַ֚ל אֲשֶׁ֣ר עָשׂ֣וּ אֶת־הָ⁠עֵ֔גֶל אֲשֶׁ֥ר עָשָׂ֖ה אַהֲרֹֽן	1	they had made the calf, the one that Aaron made	If your language requires placing the reason before the result, you may reorder these clauses. Alternate translation: “And on account that they had made the calf (that Aaron made), Yahweh plagued the people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-EXO	33	intro	g5k3			0		# Exodus 33 General Notes\n\nThis chapter is largely about Moses continuing to negotiate for a closer relationship between Yahweh and himself and Yahweh and the people. There are a number of important theological issues addressed, especially Yahweh’s holiness and character. Several key terms appear.\n\n## Potential Translation Issues\n\nYahweh’s statement to Moses in verse 5 seems to have happened before the people’s reaction in verse 4, so in some languages you may need to reverse them.\n\nVerses 7-11 seem to be background, general information about a somewhat unspecified time period. Be sure this is clear in how you structure these verses. See the beginning of verse 7 in the UST. While the term in verses 7-11 is often used interchangeably with the tabernacle that will be built in chapters 35-39, it is a temporary and different tent. One distinguishing feature is that it is well outside the camp, while the tabernacle will be in the center of the tent.\n\nThe word **tent** in verses 7-11 refers either to this temporary “tent of meeting” that Moses set up or to the tents that the Israelites lived in. Pay attention throughout these verses to which tent is referred to.\n
+EXO	32	35	wv1v	figs-explicit	עָשׂ֣וּ אֶת־הָ⁠עֵ֔גֶל אֲשֶׁ֥ר עָשָׂ֖ה אַהֲרֹֽן	1	they had made the calf, the one that Aaron made	The people are being spoken of as having made the calf themselves (along with Aaron) because they demanded it and gave their gold for it. Alternate translation: “they were guilty along with Aaron of making the calf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+EXO	32	35	h3kl	grammar-connect-logic-result	וַ⁠יִּגֹּ֥ף יְהוָ֖ה אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֑ם עַ֚ל אֲשֶׁ֣ר עָשׂ֣וּ אֶת־הָ⁠עֵ֔גֶל אֲשֶׁ֥ר עָשָׂ֖ה אַהֲרֹֽן	1	they had made the calf, the one that Aaron made	If your language requires placing the reason before the result, you may reorder these clauses. Alternate translation: “And because they had made the calf (that Aaron made), Yahweh plagued the people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+EXO	33	intro	g5k3			0		# Exodus 33 General Notes\n\nThis chapter is largely about Moses continuing to negotiate for a closer relationship between Yahweh and himself and Yahweh and the people. There are a number of important theological issues addressed, especially Yahweh’s holiness and character. Several key terms appear.\n\n\n## Structure:\n- v. 1-6: Moses negotiating with Yahweh to go with Israel\n- v. 7-11: the temporary tent of meeting\n- v. 12-23: Moses negotiating with Yahweh to see his glory\n\n## Potential Translation Issues\n\nYahweh’s statement to Moses in verse 5 seems to have happened before the people’s reaction in verse 4, so in some languages you may need to reverse them.\n\nVerses 7-11 seem to be background, general information about a somewhat unspecified time period. Be sure this is clear in how you structure these verses. See the beginning of verse 7 in the UST. While the term in verses 7-11 is often used interchangeably with the Dwelling that will be built in chapters 35-39, it is a temporary and different tent. One distinguishing feature is that it is well outside the camp, while the Dwelling will be in the center of the camp.\n\nThe word **tent** in verses 7-11 refers either to this temporary “tent of meeting” that Moses set up or to the tents that the Israelites lived in. Pay attention throughout these verses to which tent is referred to.\n\n
 EXO	33	1	p8xp	figs-quotesinquotes	לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר לְ⁠זַרְעֲ⁠ךָ֖ אֶתְּנֶֽ⁠נָּה	1	General Information:	The words which follow **saying** are a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. However, you may want to translate this as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the layers of quotations in this passage. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 EXO	33	2	tlen		וְ⁠שָׁלַחְתִּ֥י לְ⁠פָנֶ֖י⁠ךָ מַלְאָ֑ךְ וְ⁠גֵֽרַשְׁתִּ֗י אֶת־הַֽ⁠כְּנַעֲנִי֙ הָֽ⁠אֱמֹרִ֔י וְ⁠הַֽ⁠חִתִּי֙ וְ⁠הַ⁠פְּרִזִּ֔י הַ⁠חִוִּ֖י וְ⁠הַ⁠יְבוּסִֽי	1	General Information:	See how you translated these in [Exodus 23:20](../23/20.md) and [23:23](../23/23.md).
 EXO	33	3	yyt4	figs-metonymy	חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָ֑שׁ	1	that land, which is flowing with milk and honey	Here, **milk** is a metonym for domestic animals and the food products obtained from them; **honey** is a metonym for the food obtained from growing plants. See how you translated this in [Exodus 3:8](../03/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -2217,10 +2209,9 @@ EXO	33	3	ah5t	figs-metaphor	קְשֵׁה־עֹ֨רֶף֙	1	a stubborn people	Yah
 EXO	33	4	jemj	figs-gendernotations	וְ⁠לֹא־שָׁ֛תוּ אִ֥ישׁ עֶדְי֖⁠וֹ עָלָֽי⁠ו	1	jewelry	Here, **his** and **him** refer to both men and women. Alternate translation: “and the men and women did not put on their ornaments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 EXO	33	4	cf7g	translate-unknown	עֶדְי֖⁠וֹ	1	jewelry	This may have referred to beautiful clothing as well as chains and rings made from gold or silver that had could have had jewels in them. Alternate translation: “his adornments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	33	4	qwuu	translate-versebridge		0	jewelry	Yahweh’s statement to Moses in verse 5 seems to have happened before the people’s reaction in verse 4, so in some languages you may need to reverse them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
-EXO	33	5	rn40	grammar-connect-words-phrases	וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר יְהוָ֜ה	1	jewelry	The word **had** places Yahweh’s statement back in time. It can be understood from context as Yahweh’s statement to Moses in verse 5 seems to have happened before the people’s reaction in verse 4. If you are reversing the order of the verses for your language, you should omit it in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+EXO	33	5	rn40	grammar-connect-words-phrases	וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר יְהוָ֜ה	1	jewelry	The word **had** places Yahweh’s statement back in time. It can be understood from context as Yahweh’s statement to Moses in verse 5 seems to have happened before the people’s reaction in verse 4. If you are reversing the order of the verses for your language, you should adjust the verbal sequencing in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 EXO	33	5	ndhx	figs-quotations	אֱמֹ֤ר אֶל־בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙	1	jewelry	You may want to make the introductory portion of this quotation,**Say to the sons of Israel**, indirect to keep from having a quote inside a quote. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 EXO	33	5	rzr5	figs-metaphor	קְשֵׁה־עֹ֔רֶף	1	a stubborn people	Yahweh speaks of the people being rebellious as if they had **hard necks**. See how you translated this in [Exodus 32:9](../32/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EXO	33	5	cdm1	grammar-connect-logic-result	אַתֶּ֣ם עַם־קְשֵׁה־עֹ֔רֶף רֶ֧גַע אֶחָ֛ד אֶֽעֱלֶ֥ה בְ⁠קִרְבְּ⁠ךָ֖ וְ⁠כִלִּיתִ֑י⁠ךָ	1	a stubborn people	Because the Israelites are so obstinate (reason), Yahweh’s reaction to being near them would be destruction (result). You may need to restructure this in your language if the order of reason and result is particular. Alternate translation: “If I went up among you for one moment, then I would destroy you, because you are a people hard of neck.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 EXO	33	5	hakp	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	רֶ֧גַע אֶחָ֛ד אֶֽעֱלֶ֥ה בְ⁠קִרְבְּ⁠ךָ֖ וְ⁠כִלִּיתִ֑י⁠ךָ וְ⁠עַתָּ֗ה	1	a stubborn people	Because the surrounding narrative clearly shows that this is not what Yahweh did or will do, this is a hypothetical situation. Some languages may need to reorder the clauses. Alternate translation: “Since I would destroy if I went up among you for one moment, then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 EXO	33	5	l6ax	grammar-connect-logic-goal	וְ⁠עַתָּ֗ה הוֹרֵ֤ד עֶדְיְ⁠ךָ֙ מֵֽ⁠עָלֶ֔י⁠ךָ וְ⁠אֵדְעָ֖ה מָ֥ה אֶֽעֱשֶׂה־לָּֽ⁠ךְ	1	a stubborn people	The goal of the Israelites removing their ornaments is so that Yahweh can consider his reaction. Some languages may need to reorder this structure. Alternate translation: “So that I will know what I will do to you, take your ornaments down from on you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 EXO	33	5	gb16	figs-explicit	וְ⁠עַתָּ֗ה הוֹרֵ֤ד עֶדְיְ⁠ךָ֙ מֵֽ⁠עָלֶ֔י⁠ךָ	1	a stubborn people	This was a way for the Israelites to show that they were sorry for sinning. If this would not be understood, you may need to make it explicit in the text or a footnote. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2243,19 +2234,19 @@ EXO	33	12	hlsl	figs-quotations	הַ֚עַל אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֣ם הַ⁠זּ
 EXO	33	12	unz8		רְ֠אֵה	1	See	This is an interjection to get someone’s attention. Alternate translation: “Look!” or “Listen!” or “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you”
 EXO	33	12	w7fs	figs-idiom	יְדַעְתִּ֣י⁠ךָֽ בְ⁠שֵׁ֔ם	1	I know you by name	To **know** someone **by name** is to know them well. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I know you well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EXO	33	12	uhjs	figs-activepassive	וְ⁠גַם־מָצָ֥אתָ חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינָֽ⁠י	1	you have also found favor in my eyes	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and my eyes find you favorable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EXO	33	12	a7jr	figs-idiom	מָצָ֥אתָ חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינָֽ⁠י	1	you have also found favor in my eyes	Here, **found favor** is an idiom that means be approved of or that God is pleased with Moses. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “You please my eyes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-EXO	33	12	k101	figs-metonymy	וְ⁠גַם־מָצָ֥אתָ חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינָֽ⁠י	1	you have also found favor in my eyes	Here, **eyes** are a metonym for sight. Alternate translation: “and you have also found favor in my sight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-EXO	33	12	y281	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠גַם־מָצָ֥אתָ חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינָֽ⁠י	1	you have also found favor in my eyes	Here, sight (by metonymy from **eyes**) is a metaphor representing God’s evaluation. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and you have also found favor in my evaluation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EXO	33	12	es6z	figs-abstractnouns	וְ⁠גַם־מָצָ֥אתָ חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינָֽ⁠י	1	you have also found favor in my eyes	Here, **favor** is an abstract noun that you could express in another way if necessary in your language. Alternate translation: “and you have also been found favorable in my eyes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-EXO	33	13	e6vv		מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֜ן בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֗י⁠ךָ…אֶמְצָא־חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֑י⁠ךָ	1	Now if I have found favor in your eyes	Here, **found favor** is an idiom that means that God is pleased with Moses. You may also need to make the phrase active in form and change the abstract noun **favor** into another form. Finally, **eyes** are a metonym for sight, and sight is a metaphor representing his evaluation. See how you dealt with the multiple issues in the phrase **you have found favor in my eyes** in [Exodus 33:12](../33/12.md).
+EXO	33	12	a7jr	figs-idiom	וְ⁠גַם־מָצָ֥אתָ חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינָֽ⁠י	1	you have also found favor in my eyes	Here, **found favor in my eyes** is an idiom that means "I am pleased with you" so it means that God is pleased with Moses. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “and you please me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+EXO	33	12	y281	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠גַם־מָצָ֥אתָ חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינָֽ⁠י	1	you have also found favor in my eyes	Here, **in my eyes** is a metaphor representing God’s evaluation. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and you have also found favor in my evaluation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EXO	33	12	es6z	figs-abstractnouns	וְ⁠גַם־מָצָ֥אתָ חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינָֽ⁠י	1	you have also found favor in my eyes	Here, **favor** is an abstract noun that you could express in another way if necessary in your language. Alternate translation: “and you have also been found approved in my eyes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+EXO	33	13	e6vv		מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֜ן בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֗י⁠ךָ…אֶמְצָא־חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֑י⁠ךָ	1	Now if I have found favor in your eyes	Here, **found favor in your eyes** is an idiom that means that God is pleased with Moses. You may also need to make the phrase active in form and change the abstract noun **favor** into another form. Finally, **in your eyes** is a metaphor representing his evaluation. See how you dealt with the multiple issues in the phrase **you have found favor in my eyes** in [Exodus 33:12](../33/12.md).
 EXO	33	13	zi7j	figs-metaphor	הוֹדִעֵ֤⁠נִי נָא֙ אֶת־דְּרָכֶ֔⁠ךָ	1	show me your ways	Here, **ways** is a metaphor either: (1) for Yahweh’s plans or (2) for the holy life he requires. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: (1) “please cause me to know what you are going to do in the future” (2) “please cause me to know how people can do what pleases you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	33	13	gtv4		אֶמְצָא־חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֑י⁠ךָ	1	show me your ways	This instance of the phrase **find favor in your eyes** means in the future. Consider how to translate it in your language to convey an on-going situation. Alternate translation: “I can always find favor in your eyes”
+EXO	33	13	o1ew		וּ⁠רְאֵ֕ה כִּ֥י עַמְּ⁠ךָ֖ הַ⁠גּ֥וֹי הַ⁠זֶּֽה׃	1	show me your ways	Moses is requesting that Yahweh would again **see**, perceive, consider, or recognize the Israelites as his special people. In this way, Moses would know that Yahweh had truly forgiven them.
 EXO	33	14	gh8q	figs-metonymy	פָּנַ֥⁠י יֵלֵ֖כוּ	1	My own presence will go	Yahweh’s **face** represents his presence, which represents himself. Alternate translation: “I will go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	33	14	esdd	figs-explicit	פָּנַ֥⁠י יֵלֵ֖כוּ וַ⁠הֲנִחֹ֥תִי לָֽ⁠ךְ	1	My own presence will go	The preposition connected to **you** here has a very flexible meaning and seems to be connected to both **will go** and **will cause rest**. If this would be unclear, consider repeating it in both clauses. Alternate translation: “My face will go with you and I will cause rest for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EXO	33	14	hl15	figs-you	לָֽ⁠ךְ	1	go with you…give you	The word **you** here refers to Moses. It is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 EXO	33	15	a2hc	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	אִם־אֵ֤ין פָּנֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ הֹלְכִ֔ים	1	go with you…give you	**If your face is not going** is a hypothetical situation in which Moses makes a request that they not go anywhere without Yahweh. In some languages you may need to place the request first. Alternate translation: “Do not take us up from here if your face is not going” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 EXO	33	15	m5cq	figs-metonymy	אִם־אֵ֤ין פָּנֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ הֹלְכִ֔ים	1	go with you…give you	Yahweh’s **face** represents his presence, which represents himself. Alternate translation: “If you are not going” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-EXO	33	16	cgl8	figs-rquestion	וּ⁠בַ⁠מֶּ֣ה׀ יִוָּדַ֣ע אֵפ֗וֹא כִּֽי־מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֤ן בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ אֲנִ֣י וְ⁠עַמֶּ֔⁠ךָ הֲ⁠ל֖וֹא בְּ⁠לֶכְתְּ⁠ךָ֣ עִמָּ֑⁠נוּ וְ⁠נִפְלֵ֨ינוּ֙ אֲנִ֣י וְ⁠עַמְּ⁠ךָ֔ מִ⁠כָּ֨ל־הָ⁠עָ֔ם אֲשֶׁ֖ר עַל־פְּנֵ֥י הָ⁠אֲדָמָֽה	1	how will it be known…people?	This verse contains two or three rhetorical questions, and the length of the second is debated. The first rhetorical question, **And in what then will it be known that I have found favor in your eyes, I and your people?** is used for emphasis and means, “There is only one way people will know that I and your people please you.” The second, **Is it not in your going with us?** is used to answer the first question and means “That way is your going with us.” It is possible that the rest of the verse is (1) a statement further clarifying how Yahweh’s favor is demonstrated (ULT, UST), (2) an extension of the second rhetorical question (“Is it not in your going with us so that I and your people shall be distinct from all of the people that are on the face of the earth?”), or (3) a separate rhetorical question making the same point (“And shall I and your people be distinct from all of the people that are on the face of the earth?”)\nMoses used these questions in order to emphasize that if Yahweh does not go with them, no one will know that Yahweh is pleased with Moses and the people. Use whatever forms would be natural in your language to present an argument like this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+EXO	33	16	cgl8	figs-rquestion	וּ⁠בַ⁠מֶּ֣ה׀ יִוָּדַ֣ע אֵפ֗וֹא כִּֽי־מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֤ן בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ אֲנִ֣י וְ⁠עַמֶּ֔⁠ךָ הֲ⁠ל֖וֹא בְּ⁠לֶכְתְּ⁠ךָ֣ עִמָּ֑⁠נוּ וְ⁠נִפְלֵ֨ינוּ֙ אֲנִ֣י וְ⁠עַמְּ⁠ךָ֔ מִ⁠כָּ֨ל־הָ⁠עָ֔ם אֲשֶׁ֖ר עַל־פְּנֵ֥י הָ⁠אֲדָמָֽה	1	how will it be known…people?	This verse contains two or three rhetorical questions, and the length of the second is debated. The first rhetorical question, **And in what then will it be known that I have found favor in your eyes, I and your people?** is used for emphasis and means, “There is only one way people will know that I and your people please you.” The second, **Is it not in your going with us?** is used to answer the first question and means “That way is your going with us.” It is possible that the rest of the verse is (1) a statement further clarifying how Yahweh’s favor is demonstrated (ULT, UST), (2) an extension of the second rhetorical question (“Is it not in your going with us so that I and your people shall be distinct from all of the people that are on the face of the earth?”), or (3) a separate rhetorical question making the same point (“And shall I and your people be distinct from all of the people that are on the face of the earth?”)\nMoses used these questions in order to emphasize that if Yahweh does not go with them, no one will know that Yahweh is pleased with Moses and the people. Use whatever forms would be natural in your language to present an argument like this. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 EXO	33	16	d36k	figs-infostructure	וּ⁠בַ⁠מֶּ֣ה	1	For otherwise	This refers back to Moses’ hypothetical situation in the previous verse, that is, Yahweh not going with them. Use whatever connecting forms are necessary to make that clear. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 EXO	33	16	tu8e	figs-activepassive	וּ⁠בַ⁠מֶּ֣ה׀ יִוָּדַ֣ע אֵפ֗וֹא	1	how will it be known	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And in what then will people know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	33	16	u82a	figs-idiom	מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֤ן בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙	1	Will it not only be if	Here, **found favor** is an idiom that means that God is pleased with Moses. You may also need to make the phrase active in form and change the abstract noun **favor** into another form. Finally, **eyes** are a metonym for sight, and sight is a metaphor representing his evaluation. See how you dealt with the multiple issues in the phrase **you have found favor in my eyes** in [Exodus 33:12](../33/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -2275,11 +2266,11 @@ EXO	33	21	loep	writing-quotations	וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר יְהוָ֔ה	1	I wil
 EXO	33	21	s4iy		הִנֵּ֥ה	1	See	Alternate translation: “Look” or “Listen” or “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you.”
 EXO	33	22	qhe6	figs-metaphor	בַּ⁠עֲבֹ֣ר כְּבֹדִ֔⁠י	1	See	Yahweh speaks of his **glory** as if it were an object that he could move over Moses. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “while I pass over gloriously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	33	22	o5as	figs-abstractnouns	כְּבֹדִ֔⁠י	1	See	In languages without abstract nouns, you may need to change **glory** to another form. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-EXO	33	22	ivf5	figs-personification	וְ⁠שַׂכֹּתִ֥י כַפִּ֛⁠י עָלֶ֖י⁠ךָ	1	See	Here Yahweh speaks as if he, like a person, had hands which could cover things. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use a simile to keep the image, as this figure is important to keep and extends into the next verse. Alternate translation: “I will cover you as with a hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+EXO	33	22	ivf5	figs-personification	וְ⁠שַׂכֹּתִ֥י כַפִּ֛⁠י עָלֶ֖י⁠ךָ	1	See	Here Yahweh speaks as if he, like a person, had hands that could cover things. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use a simile to retain the image, as this figure is important to retain and extends into the next verse. Alternate translation: “I will cover you as with a hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 EXO	33	23	fmu8	figs-personification	וַ⁠הֲסִרֹתִי֙ אֶת־כַּפִּ֔⁠י וְ⁠רָאִ֖יתָ אֶת־אֲחֹרָ֑⁠י וּ⁠פָנַ֖⁠י לֹ֥א יֵרָאֽוּ	1	you will see my back	The strong personification image of Yahweh continues throughout this verse and should be retained, if possible. You may have to use similes if this would be misunderstood in your culture. Alternate translation: “Then it will be as if I stop covering you with a hand, and you will see a small part of my glory, like a person’s back, but not my full glory, like a person’s face.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 EXO	33	23	jq7t	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	וּ⁠פָנַ֖⁠י	1	you will see my back	Here, **but my face** is moved to the front of the clause to emphasize contrast with **my back**. If your language has a certain way of contrasting elements, be sure to make a strong contrast between Yahweh’s face and back. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 EXO	33	23	gw1n	figs-activepassive	וּ⁠פָנַ֖⁠י לֹ֥א יֵרָאֽוּ	1	but my face will not be seen	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but you will not see my face” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EXO	34	intro	smp6			0		# Exodus 34 General Notes\n\n## Outline\n\n*   v. 1-4 Yahweh orders Moses to return to the mountain\n*   v. 5-9 Yahweh reveals himself to Moses and Moses reacts\n*   v. 10-28 Covenant renewal\n*   v. 29-34 Moses reports to Israel\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n*   In verse 1, Yahweh says he will write on stone tablets, yet later (v. 27-28) he commands Moses to write and the text says Moses writes.\n*   Yahweh reveals something significant about himself or his character to Moses. There are a number of difficult terms and concepts.\n*   The biblical metaphor of true worship as sexual fidelity appears in v. 14-16.\n*   Several verses are repeated either exactly or closely from earlier chapters.\n*   In v. 12-26 Yahweh appears to give a different 10 commandments from those in Exodus 20 (but also largely repeated from other earlier parts of Exodus), raising the question of what was actually written on the stone tablets in v. 28.\n*   The concept of Moses’s shining face may be difficult in some cultures.\n\n### “He will bring the punishment for the fathers’ sin on their children”\n\nThis phrase does not mean that a child is necessarily punished for the sins of their parents. Many scholars believe that this passage indicates that a parent’s sins will have consequences that will affect their children and grandchildren. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
+EXO	34	intro	smp6			0		# Exodus 34 General Notes\n\n## Outline\n\n*   v. 1-4 Yahweh orders Moses to return to the mountain\n*   v. 5-9 Yahweh reveals himself to Moses and Moses reacts\n*   v. 10-28 Covenant renewal\n*   v. 29-34 Moses reports to Israel\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n*   In verse 1, Yahweh says he will write on stone tablets, yet later (v. 27-28) he commands Moses to write and the text says Moses writes.\n*   Yahweh reveals something significant about himself or his character to Moses. There are a number of difficult terms and concepts.\n*   The biblical metaphor of true worship as sexual fidelity appears in v. 14-16.\n*   Several verses are repeated either exactly or closely from earlier chapters.\n*   In v. 12-26 Yahweh appears to give a different 10 commandments from those in Exodus 20 (but also largely repeated from other earlier parts of Exodus), raising the question of what was actually written on the stone tablets in v. 28.\n*   The concept of Moses’s shining face may be difficult in some cultures.\n\n### “He will bring the punishment for the fathers’ sin on their children”\n\nThis phrase does not mean that a child is necessarily punished for the sins of their parents. Many scholars believe that this passage indicates that a parent’s sins will have consequences that will affect their children and grandchildren. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])<br>
 EXO	34	1	ppyw	writing-quotations	וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר יְהוָה֙ אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֔ה	1	tablets of stone	Yahweh continues to speak to Moses, but there is a change of topic here, so you may want to retain the speech introduction. However, if it would be misunderstood, you could simply continue the quotation from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Yahweh continued” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 EXO	34	1	zf77	figs-infostructure	אֲשֶׁ֥ר שִׁבַּֽרְתָּ	1	tablets of stone	This clause reminds the reader of what tablets are being mentioned by reminding you of what had happened to the previous tablets. If it would be more helpful in your language to attach it to the first mention of the tablets in this verse, you could rearrange it like the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 EXO	34	1	s1kv		לֻחֹ֥ת אֲבָנִ֖ים	1	tablets of stone	Alternate translation: “flat slabs of stone” See how you translated this in [Exodus 31:18](../31/18.md)
@@ -2301,7 +2292,7 @@ EXO	34	7	e2qc	figs-abstractnouns	עָוֺ֛ן וָ⁠פֶ֖שַׁע וְ⁠חַ
 EXO	34	7	x397	figs-123person	וְ⁠נַקֵּה֙ לֹ֣א יְנַקֶּ֔ה	1	he will by no means clear the guilty	Yahweh is speaking about himself. Alternate translation: “But I will certainly not acquit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 EXO	34	7	ts1b	figs-ellipsis	וְ⁠נַקֵּה֙ לֹ֣א יְנַקֶּ֔ה	1	will by no means clear the guilty	Whom Yahweh will not acquit is not stated. Many translations will require that information. Alternate translations: “But he will certainly not clear the guilty” or “But he will certainly not say that the guilty are innocent” or “But he will certainly not free guilty people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 EXO	34	7	lyrg	figs-metonymy	עֲוֺ֣ן	1	will by no means clear the guilty	Here, **iniquity** refers to the consequences or the punishment for iniquity. Alternate translation: “the punishment for the iniquity of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-EXO	34	7	px85	figs-metaphor	פֹּקֵ֣ד׀ עֲוֺ֣ן אָב֗וֹת עַל־בָּנִים֙ וְ⁠עַל־בְּנֵ֣י בָנִ֔ים	1	He will bring the punishment for the fathers’ sin on their children	The **iniquity of the fathers** is spoken of as if it were something capable of **visiting** people. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “punishing the sons and the sons of the sons for the iniquity of the fathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EXO	34	7	px85	figs-metaphor	פֹּקֵ֣ד׀ עֲוֺ֣ן אָב֗וֹת עַל־בָּנִים֙ וְ⁠עַל־בְּנֵ֣י בָנִ֔ים	1	He will bring the punishment for the fathers’ sin on their children	The **iniquity of the fathers** is spoken of as if it were something capable of **visiting** people. This means that Yahweh makes the consequences of people’s sins affect their descendants. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “punishing the sons and the sons of the sons for the iniquity of the fathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	34	7	c3tb	figs-metonymy	עַל־בָּנִים֙ וְ⁠עַל־בְּנֵ֣י בָנִ֔ים	1	their children	The references to **sons** and **sons of the sons** represents descendants. Alternate translation: “on their descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	34	7	d462	figs-explicit	עַל־שִׁלֵּשִׁ֖ים וְ⁠עַל־רִבֵּעִֽים	1	their children	Here, “generation” is implied. Many translations will need to make this explicit as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EXO	34	7	pacu	figs-metonymy	עַל־שִׁלֵּשִׁ֖ים וְ⁠עַל־רִבֵּעִֽים	1	their children	Here, **third** and **fourth** means “several.” If this would not be understood and your language has a way of referring to an unspecified (but approximately 3-4) number, you may have to use it here. Alternate translation: “on a few generations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -2380,7 +2371,7 @@ EXO	34	30	yn9s	grammar-connect-logic-result	וַ⁠יִּֽירְא֖וּ	1	had
 EXO	34	32	kt23		וַ⁠יְצַוֵּ֕⁠ם אֵת֩ כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֨ר דִּבֶּ֧ר יְהוָ֛ה אִתּ֖⁠וֹ	1	all the commands that Yahweh had given him	This means that Moses commanded the Israelites to obey everything Yahweh had commanded Moses to command the Israelites to do.
 EXO	34	34	fzm1	grammar-connect-time-background		0	he would remove	This and the next verse give a general statement about Moses’s practice for an unstated amount of time (it was probably from this point until his death as he continued to talk to Yahweh). You should mark this with a form in your language that is used for on-going action like **would** and the UST’s “Whenever.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
 EXO	34	34	m1sv	figs-activepassive	יְצֻוֶּֽה	1	what he was commanded	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Yahweh had commanded him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EXO	35	intro	lew9			0		# Exodus 35 General Notes\n\n## Translation Issues in this Chapter\n\n\n- In the last chapter some repetition of Yahweh’s instructions began, mostly around the covenant commands. Starting in this chapter and even more so in chapter 36, the commands regarding the construction of the tabernacle complex are repeated, often word for word, from chapters 25-31. In many verses the only difference will be a change of verb form from instruction to completion. As much as possible, these parallels will be pointed out for the translators with links to the previous verses. Translators should refer back to the previously translated verses for consistency and because notes in this section may not cover everything that was covered in the initial instruction section.\n- Many items, materials, and processes for building the tabernacle may be unknown, but should have already been addressed in chapters 25-31.\n\n\n## Structure\n\n- v. 1-3: reiteration of Sabbath command\n- v. 4-9: list of materials for donation (see [Exodus 25:1-7](../25/01.md))\n- v. 10-19: things they need to make for the tabernacle complex\n- v. 20-29: the people bring all the things listed\n- v. 30-36:1: appointing of lead craftsmen to build these things
+EXO	35	intro	lew9			0		# Exodus 35 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure\r\n\r\n- v. 1-3: reiteration of Sabbath command\r\n- v. 4-9: list of materials for donation (see [Exodus 25:1-7](../25/01.md))\r\n- v. 10-19: things they need to make for the Dwelling complex\r\n- v. 20-29: the people bring all the things listed\r\n- v. 30-36:1: appointing of lead craftsmen to build these things\n\n## Translation Issues in this Chapter\n\n- In the last chapter some repetition of Yahweh’s instructions began, mostly around the covenant commands. Starting in this chapter and even more so in chapter 36, the commands regarding the construction of the Dwelling complex are repeated, often word for word, from chapters 25-31. In many verses the only difference will be a change of verb form from instruction to completion. As much as possible, these parallels will be pointed out for the translators with links to the previous verses. Translators should refer back to the previously translated verses for consistency and because notes in this section may not cover everything that was covered in the initial instruction section.\n- Many items, materials, and processes for building the Dwelling may be unknown, but should have already been addressed in chapters 25-31.\n\n
 EXO	35	2	hfaq			0		This verse is very similar to [Exodus 31:15](../31/15.md).<br>
 EXO	35	2	g6oe	translate-numbers	שֵׁ֣שֶׁת	1	the seventh day	Alternate translation: “6” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 EXO	35	2	c559	translate-ordinal	הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֗י	1	the seventh day	Alternate translation: “day number seven” or “Saturday” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
@@ -2401,11 +2392,11 @@ EXO	35	7	l5bq	translate-unknown	מְאָדָּמִ֛ים	1	ram skins dyed red an
 EXO	35	7	wmsl	translate-unknown	תְּחָשִׁ֖ים	1	ram skins dyed red and fine leather hides	The meaning of this word is not known; it may refer to some water mammal that has skin that can be made into a high-quality leather. [Sea cows on Wikipedia](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sirenia) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	35	7	tzrk	translate-unknown	שִׂטִּֽים	1	ram skins dyed red and fine leather hides	A small tree with spreading foliage and durable wood. [See on Wikipedia](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Shittah_tree) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	35	8	ikm4			0	General Information:	Except for several uses of the word **and**, this verse is identical to [Exodus 25:6](../25/06.md).
-EXO	35	8	y11w	translate-unknown	וּ⁠בְשָׂמִים֙	1	General Information:	Here, **spices** are dried plants that people grind into a powder and put in oil or food to give it a nice smell or flavor. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+EXO	35	8	y11w	translate-unknown	וּ⁠בְשָׂמִים֙	1	General Information:	Here, **spices** are made from parts of plants that people dry and then grind into a powder to put in oil or food, giving it a particular smell or flavor. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	35	9	f1dd			0	General Information:	Except for an initial **and**, this verse is identical to [Exodus 25:7](../25/07.md).
 EXO	35	9	hcs9	translate-unknown	וְ⁠אַ֨בְנֵי־שֹׁ֔הַם	1	General Information:	An **onyx stone** is a valuable stone that has layers of white and black, red or brown. If this stone is unknown to your people, consider translating it by using a word for a familiar stone with a similar pattern, if possible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	35	9	kk7z		וְ⁠אַבְנֵ֖י	1	General Information:	Alternate translation: “and valuable gems for” or “and treasured gems for”
-EXO	35	10	dc4b	figs-metonymy	וְ⁠כָל־חֲכַם־לֵ֖ב	1	Every skilled man	Here, **heart** is referring to innate possession by a person, that is, traits of a person. The phrase essentially means “a talented craftsman.” If this is unclear to your readers you may consider making it more explicit. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:3](../28/03.md). Alternate translation: “And every man with a skill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+EXO	35	10	dc4b	figs-metonymy	וְ⁠כָל־חֲכַם־לֵ֖ב	1	Every skilled man	Here, **heart** and **spirit** are both referring to things innately possessed by a person, that is, traits of a person. The phrase essentially means “a talented craftsman.” If this is unclear to your readers you may consider making it more explicit. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:3](../28/03.md). Alternate translation: “And every man with a skill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	35	10	lkp4	figs-ellipsis	צִוָּ֖ה	1	Every skilled man	Here, some the words that a sentence would need to be complete in some languages are left out. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context, as modeled in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 EXO	35	10	ugjb			0	Every skilled man	After this verse, a list begins. You may need to mark the end of this verse with punctuation or another way that your language marks the start of a list.
 EXO	35	11	s0ip		מִכְסֵ֑⁠הוּ	1	clasps	See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:14](../26/14.md).
@@ -2441,8 +2432,8 @@ EXO	35	23	t3ti	figs-hyperbole	וְ⁠כָל־אִ֞ישׁ	1	Everyone who had…b
 EXO	35	24	qpep	figs-activepassive	וְ⁠כֹ֡ל אֲשֶׁר֩ נִמְצָ֨א אִתּ֜⁠וֹ	1	Everyone who had…brought them	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Also, the meaning of this phrase is simple possession. Alternate translation: “and everyone who owned” or “and everyone having” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	35	24	zk6i		כָּל־מֵרִ֗ים	1	Everyone who had…brought them	Here, **all** is limited by **presenters**, meaning only everyone who brought contributions. Avoid implying that every single Israelite did this (though very many did). Alternate translation: “All who decided to offer”
 EXO	35	24	loob	figs-hyperbole	וְ⁠כֹ֡ל	1	Everyone who had…brought them	The phrase **all** is used here without the restriction, “who were willing,” from previous verses. The exaggeration is used to emphasize what a large portion of the Israelites gave willingly. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses a large number or a majority. Alternate translation: “and very many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-EXO	35	24	bab9	figs-metonymy	לְ⁠כָל־מְלֶ֥אכֶת הָ⁠עֲבֹדָ֖ה	1	Everyone who had…brought them	Here, **service** refers to worshiping Yahweh, and the phrase **work of the service** refers to building the tabernacle as a place for worshiping Yahweh. Alternate translation: “for any of the building of a place for worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-EXO	35	25	ae9d	figs-metonymy	חַכְמַת־לֵ֖ב	1	blue, purple, or scarlet wool	Here, **heart** is referring to innate possession by a person, that is, traits of a person. The phrase essentially means “a talented craftswoman.” If this is unclear to your readers you may consider making it more explicit. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 28:3](../28/03.md). Alternate translation: “who possessed the skill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+EXO	35	24	bab9	figs-metonymy	לְ⁠כָל־מְלֶ֥אכֶת הָ⁠עֲבֹדָ֖ה	1	Everyone who had…brought them	Here, **service** refers to worshiping Yahweh, and the phrase **work of the service** refers to building the Dwelling as a place for worshiping Yahweh. Alternate translation: “for any of the building of a place for worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+EXO	35	25	ae9d	figs-metonymy	חַכְמַת־לֵ֖ב	1	blue, purple, or scarlet wool	Here, **heart** is referring to something innately possessed by a person, that is, a trait of a person. The phrase essentially means “a talented craftswoman.” If this is unclear to your readers you may consider making it more explicit. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 28:3](../28/03.md). Alternate translation: “who possessed the skill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	35	25	ebm5		אֶֽת־הַ⁠תְּכֵ֨לֶת֙ וְ⁠אֶת־הָֽ⁠אַרְגָּמָ֔ן אֶת־תּוֹלַ֥עַת הַ⁠שָּׁנִ֖י	1	blue, purple, or scarlet wool	This could mean: (1) “material that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 25:4](../25/04.md).
 EXO	35	26	k1gy	figs-synecdoche	אֲשֶׁ֨ר נָשָׂ֥א לִבָּ֛⁠ן אֹתָ֖⁠נָה	1	whose hearts stirred them up	Here, **heart** refers to a persons’ will, their desire to do something. It is spoken of as causing a person to use her skills for Yahweh. This is the same as the first phrase in [verse 21](../35/21.md). Alternate translation: “whose wills impelled them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 EXO	35	27	f13n			0	The leaders brought…breastpiece	Beginning with **onyx**, this verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:7](../25/07.md).
@@ -2453,26 +2444,26 @@ EXO	35	29	w582	figs-metonymy	אֲשֶׁ֨ר צִוָּ֧ה יְהוָ֛ה לַ
 EXO	35	30	z1e2			0	Bezalel son of Uri son of Hur, from the tribe of Judah	What Moses says in this verse is a quote from [Exodus 31:2](../31/02.md)
 EXO	35	30	kx4o	translate-names	בְּצַלְאֵ֛ל…אוּרִ֥י…ח֖וּר	1	Bezalel son of Uri son of Hur, from the tribe of Judah	These are men’s names. See [31:2](../31/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EXO	35	31	zd74			0	filled Bezalel…craftsmanship	This verse is a quote from [Exodus 31:3](../31/03.md)
-EXO	35	31	gse9	figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יְמַלֵּ֥א אֹת֖⁠וֹ ר֣וּחַ אֱלֹהִ֑ים	1	He has filled Bezalel with his Spirit	Yahweh speaks of giving Bezalel his spirit as if Bezalel were a container and God’s spirit were a liquid. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “I have given my spirit to Bezalel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EXO	35	31	gse9	figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יְמַלֵּ֥א אֹת֖⁠וֹ ר֣וּחַ אֱלֹהִ֑ים	1	He has filled Bezalel with his Spirit	Yahweh speaks of giving Bezalel his spirit as if Bezalel were a container and God’s spirit were a liquid. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “And he has given his spirit to Bezalel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	35	31	jsd7	figs-abstractnouns	בְּ⁠חָכְמָ֛ה	1	He has filled Bezalel with his Spirit	If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **skill** in another way. Alternate translation: “so he can work skillfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 EXO	35	31	hnju	figs-abstractnouns	וּ⁠בְ⁠דַ֖עַת	1	He has filled Bezalel with his Spirit	If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **understanding** in another way. Alternate translation: “and so he can understand his work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 EXO	35	31	qx5o	figs-abstractnouns	וּ⁠בְ⁠דַ֖עַת	1	He has filled Bezalel with his Spirit	If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **knowledge** in another way. Alternate translation: “and so he knows his work well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-EXO	35	31	cf63	figs-abstractnouns	מְלָאכָֽה	1	He has filled Bezalel with his Spirit	If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **craftsmanship** in another way. Alternate translation: “and for making all kinds of crafts” or “and so that he can make all kinds of things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+EXO	35	31	cf63	figs-abstractnouns	וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־מְלָאכָֽה	1	He has filled Bezalel with his Spirit	If your language does not use an abstract noun for **craftsmanship**, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun in another way. Alternate translation: “and for making all kinds of crafts” or “and so that he can make all kinds of things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 EXO	35	32	r7e3			0	to make artistic designs…bronze	This verse is identical to [Exodus 31:4](../31/04.md), except for the first **and**.
 EXO	35	33	fj6f			0	also to cut and set stones…craftsmanship	This verse is identical to [Exodus 31:5](../31/05.md) except for the final **of invention**.
-EXO	35	34	xd67	figs-idiom	וּ⁠לְ⁠הוֹרֹ֖ת נָתַ֣ן בְּ⁠לִבּ֑⁠וֹ	1	He has put it in his heart to teach	Here, **put in his heart** is an idiom referring to ability and desire. These are spoken of as if they are something that could be placed in a heart. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “and he gave the ability and desire to teach to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+EXO	35	34	xd67	figs-idiom	וּ⁠לְ⁠הוֹרֹ֖ת נָתַ֣ן בְּ⁠לִבּ֑⁠וֹ	1	He has put it in his heart to teach	Here, **put in his heart** is an idiom referring to ability and desire. These are spoken of as if they are something that could be placed in a heart. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “And he gave to them the ability and desire to teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EXO	35	34	ab2z	translate-names	וְ⁠אָֽהֳלִיאָ֥ב…אֲחִיסָמָ֖ךְ	1	Oholiab son of Ahisamak, from the tribe of Dan	These are names of men. See how you translated these names in [Exodus 31:6](../31/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EXO	35	35	ehu7			0	filled them with skill	This verse summarizes and pulls together many previously mentioned things. See [28:3](../28/03.md) (**skill of heart**), [25:4](../25/04.md) (for materials), [26:36](../26/36.md) (**embroiderer**), [28:32](../28/32.md) (**weaver**), [26:31](../26/31.md) (**skillful workman**), [31:3](../31/03.md) (**craftsman**), [28:6](../28/06.md) (**designer of designs**).
 EXO	35	35	rcv9	figs-metaphor	מִלֵּ֨א אֹתָ֜⁠ם חָכְמַת־לֵ֗ב	1	filled them with skill	Here, **skill** to create beautiful objects is spoken of as if it were something that could fill up a person. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “He has made them very skillful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	35	35	jvtd	figs-synecdoche	חָכְמַת־לֵ֗ב	1	filled them with skill	Here, **of heart** refers to possessing something, in this case ability or skill. Some languages will use a different body part for this image. Alternate translation: “with ability” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-EXO	36	intro	nz4n			0		# Exodus 36 General Notes\n\n## Translation issues\n\n*   The first verse of this chapter goes with the last chapter.\n*   Most of this chapter exactly quotes chapter 26 with a shift from instruction to past narrative form on the verbs and a few other minor changes; some are Hebrew word order that will be invisible here. Be sure to consult your previous work for consistency.\n*   Throughout verses 8-38 the word **he** is used. This is a generic noun referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could also change it to “they” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])\n\n## Structure\n\n*   v. 1: finish Moses’ instruction\n*   v. 2-7: craftsmen collect materials from Moses, inform him the people should stop bringing things because they have too much already -v. 8-38: construction of the tabernacle, verse-by-verse quotations marked below\n    *   v. 8-18: quote [Exodus 26:1-11](../26/01.md)\n    *   v. 19-34: quote [Exodus 26:14-29](../26/14.md)\n    *   v. 35-36: quote [26:31-32](../26/31.md)\n    *   v. 37-38: quote [26:36-37](../26/36.md)
+EXO	36	intro	nz4n			0		# Exodus 36 General Notes\n\n## Structure\n\n\n\r\n\r\n*   v. 1: finish Moses’ instruction\r\n*   v. 2-7: craftsmen collect materials from Moses, inform him the people should stop bringing things because they have too much already -v. 8-38: construction of the Dwelling, verse-by-verse quotations marked below\r\n    *   v. 8-18: quote [Exodus 26:1-11](../26/01.md)\r\n    *   v. 19-34: quote [Exodus 26:14-29](../26/14.md)\r\n    *   v. 35-36: quote [26:31-32](../26/31.md)\r\n    *   v. 37-38: quote [26:36-37](../26/36.md)\n\n\n## Translation issues\n\n*   The first verse of this chapter goes with the last chapter.\n*   Most of this chapter exactly quotes chapter 26 with a shift from instruction to past narrative form on the verbs and a few other minor changes; some are Hebrew word order that will be invisible here. Be sure to consult your previous work for consistency.\n*   Throughout verses 8-38 the word **he**is used. This is a generic noun referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could also change it to “they” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])\n
 EXO	36	1	ubk2			0	General Information:	This verse is the end of a quotation from Moses that begin in [35:30](../35/30.md). It should be connected as visually as possible to the previous verses, as the chapter break here is poorly placed.
 EXO	36	1	ds99	translate-names	בְצַלְאֵ֨ל וְ⁠אָהֳלִיאָ֜ב	1	Bezalel	**Bezalel and Oholiab** are the names of men. See how you translated this in [Exodus 31:2](../31/02.md) and [31:6](../31/06.md) as well as in the end of [chapter 35](../35/30.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EXO	36	1	y1h1	figs-gendernotations	אִ֣ישׁ	1	Bezalel	We know from [35:25](../35/25.md) that women were included in the skilled workers, so **man** means every person. Alternate translation: “person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 EXO	36	1	tr3p	figs-synecdoche	חֲכַם־לֵ֗ב	1	to whom Yahweh has given skill and ability	Here, **of heart** refers to innately possessing something, in this case ability or skill. Some languages will use a different body part for this image. Alternate translation: “with innate ability” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 EXO	36	1	ah6j	figs-abstractnouns	חָכְמָ֤ה	1	to whom Yahweh has given skill and ability	If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **skill** in another way. See [35:31](../35/31.md). Alternate translation: “the ability to work skillfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 EXO	36	1	d6os	figs-abstractnouns	וּ⁠תְבוּנָה֙	1	to whom Yahweh has given skill and ability	If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **understanding** in another way. See [35:31](../35/31.md). Alternate translation: “and so he can understand his work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-EXO	36	1	mdi4	figs-metonymy	מְלֶ֖אכֶת עֲבֹדַ֣ת הַ⁠קֹּ֑דֶשׁ	1	according to all that Yahweh has commanded	Here, **service** refers to worshiping Yahweh, and the phrase **work of the service** refers to building the tabernacle (**holy place**) where the Israelites would worship Yahweh. See [35:24](../35/24.md). Alternate translation: “the building of the holy place for worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+EXO	36	1	mdi4	figs-metonymy	מְלֶ֖אכֶת עֲבֹדַ֣ת הַ⁠קֹּ֑דֶשׁ	1	according to all that Yahweh has commanded	Here, **service** refers to worshiping Yahweh, and the phrase **work of the service** refers to building the Dwelling (**holy place**) where the Israelites would worship Yahweh. See [35:24](../35/24.md). Alternate translation: “the building of the holy place for worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	36	2	tda7		אֶל־בְּצַלְאֵ֘ל וְ⁠אֶל־אָֽהֳלִיאָב֒ וְ⁠אֶל֙ כָּל־אִ֣ישׁ חֲכַם־לֵ֔ב אֲשֶׁ֨ר נָתַ֧ן יְהוָ֛ה חָכְמָ֖ה בְּ⁠לִבּ֑⁠וֹ	1	in whose mind Yahweh had given skill	See how you translated this in the [previous verse](../36/01.md).
 EXO	36	2	vvtz	figs-abstractnouns	חָכְמָ֖ה	1	in whose mind Yahweh had given skill	See how you translated this abstract noun in the [previous verse](../36/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 EXO	36	2	yuq8	figs-metaphor	כֹּ֚ל אֲשֶׁ֣ר נְשָׂא֣⁠וֹ לִבּ֔⁠וֹ	1	whose heart stirred within him	See how you translated this in [35:21](../35/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -2523,7 +2514,7 @@ EXO	36	35	pfc5			0	General Information:	This verse is almost identical to [Exodu
 EXO	36	36	hg2q			0	General Information:	Aside from some verbal differences, this verse is very similar to [Exodus 26:32](../26/32.md).
 EXO	36	37	r5ya			0	General Information:	This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:36](../26/36.md).
 EXO	36	38	pr67			0	General Information:	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 26:37](../26/37.md).
-EXO	37	intro	mt99			0		# Exodus 37 General Notes\n\n- This chapter continues the record of the construction of the tabernacle and the  items for it in almost exact repetition of Yahweh’s instructions.\nBe sure to consult your previous work for consistency.\n- Throughout the chapter the word **he** is used. This is a generic noun referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could also change it to “they” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])\n\n## Structure\n\n- v. 1-9 Making the ark, see [Exodus 25:10-20](../25/10.md)\n- v. 10-16 Making the table, see [Exodus 25:23-29](../25/23.md)\n- v. 17-24 Making the lampstand, see [Exodus 25:31-39](../25/31.md)\n- v. 25-28 Making the altar for incense, see [Exodus 30:1-5](../30/01.md)\n- v. 29 Making the oil and incense, see [Exodus 30:22-38](../30/22.md)
+EXO	37	intro	mt99			0		# Exodus 37 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure\r\n\r\n- v. 1-9 Making the ark, see [Exodus 25:10-20](../25/10.md)\r\n- v. 10-16 Making the table, see [Exodus 25:23-29](../25/23.md)\r\n- v. 17-24 Making the lampstand, see [Exodus 25:31-39](../25/31.md)\r\n- v. 25-28 Making the altar for incense, see [Exodus 30:1-5](../30/01.md)\r\n- v. 29 Making the oil and incense, see [Exodus 30:22-38](../30/22.md)\n\n\n## Potential translation issues\n\n- This chapter continues the record of the construction of the Dwelling and the items for it in almost exact repetition of Yahweh’s instructions.\nBe sure to consult your previous work for consistency.\n- Throughout the chapter the word **he** is used. This is a generic noun referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could also change it to “they” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])\n
 EXO	37	1	byr3			0	General Information:	This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:10](../25/10.md).
 EXO	37	2	kb3s			0	General Information:	This verse is very similar to [Exodus 25:11](../25/11.md).
 EXO	37	3	pb6v			0	General Information:	This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:12](../25/12.md).
@@ -2553,7 +2544,7 @@ EXO	37	26	ep66			0	General Information:	This verse is almost identical to [Exodu
 EXO	37	27	zez2			0	General Information:	This verse is very similar to [Exodus 30:4](../30/04.md).
 EXO	37	28	hw37			0	General Information:	This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 30:5](../30/05.md).
 EXO	37	29	c992			0	General Information:	For the **oil**, see [Exodus 30:25](../30/25.md), and for the **incense** see [25:6](../25/06.md) and [30:35](../30/35.md).
-EXO	38	intro	hp86			0		# Exodus 38 General Notes\n\n- This chapter continues the record of the construction of the tabernacle and the items for it in almost exact repetition of Yahweh’s instructions.\nBe sure to consult your previous work for consistency. Verses 1-20 of this chapter follow [Exodus 27:1-19](../27/01.md) almost verse for verse.\n- Throughout the chapter the word **he** is used. This is a generic noun referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could also change it to “they” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])\n
+EXO	38	intro	hp86			0		# Exodus 38 General Notes\n\n- This chapter continues the record of the construction of the Dwelling and the items for it in almost exact repetition of Yahweh’s instructions.\nBe sure to consult your previous work for consistency. Verses 1-20 of this chapter follow [Exodus 27:1-19](../27/01.md) almost verse for verse.\n- Throughout the chapter the word **he** is used. This is a generic noun referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could also change it to “they” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])\n<br>
 EXO	38	1	r81c			0	General Information	This verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:1](../27/01.md).
 EXO	38	2	g71x			0	General Information	This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 27:2](../27/02.md).
 EXO	38	3	v73t			0	General Information	This verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:3](../27/03.md).
@@ -2573,8 +2564,8 @@ EXO	38	14	n1xj			0	General Information	This verse is almost identical to [Exodus
 EXO	38	15	dlq7			0	General Information	This verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:15](../27/15.md).
 EXO	38	17	s5g5			0	General Information	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 27:17](../27/17.md).
 EXO	38	18	hmi5			0	General Information	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 27:16 and 18](../27/16.md).
-EXO	38	18	yf6z	translate-bdistance	וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֤ים…חָמֵ֣שׁ	1	cubits	You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 9.2m … 2.3m (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
-EXO	38	18	trz5		אֹ֔רֶךְ וְ⁠קוֹמָ֤ה	1	The curtain was made of	This probably refers to the general dimensions (20 cubits long by 5 cubits wide) but clarifies that the **width** would become the **height** of the curtain when the craftsmen or Levites set up the tabernacle. Alternate translation: “and the width, which corresponded to the height”
+EXO	38	18	yf6z	translate-bdistance	וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֤ים…חָמֵ֣שׁ	1	cubits	You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 9.2m … 2.3m (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
+EXO	38	18	trz5		וְ⁠קוֹמָ֤ה בְ⁠רֹ֨חַב֙ חָמֵ֣שׁ אַמּ֔וֹת	1	The curtain was made of	This probably refers to the general dimensions (20 cubits long by 5 cubits wide) but clarifies that the **width** would become the **height** of the curtain when the craftsmen or Levites set up the Dwelling. Alternate translation: “and the width, which corresponded to the height when hung, was five cubits”
 EXO	38	19	fjw4			0	General Information	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 27:17](../27/17.md).
 EXO	38	20	ye5c			0	General Information	This verse is very similar to the second half of [Exodus 27:19](../27/19.md).
 EXO	38	21	k2ex	figs-activepassive	אֲשֶׁ֥ר פֻּקַּ֖ד	1	as it was taken	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which the Levites recorded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -2599,7 +2590,7 @@ EXO	38	28	rcda			0	Bezalel	See how you translated some of these in [Exodus 27:17
 EXO	38	29	p3mr	translate-bweight	שִׁבְעִ֣ים כִּכָּ֑ר וְ⁠אַלְפַּ֥יִם וְ⁠אַרְבַּע־מֵא֖וֹת שָֽׁקֶל	1	seventy talents and 2,400 shekels	A talent is about 34 kilograms and a shekel is about 11 grams. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
 EXO	38	30	rck7		מִכְבַּ֥ר	1	grate	A **grate** is a frame of crossed bars for holding wood when burning. See how you translated this in [Exodus 27:4](../27/04.md).
 EXO	38	31	bvr9		יִתְדֹ֧ת…יִתְדֹ֥ת	1	tent pegs	These are sharp bronze stakes that were used to secure the corners of a tent to the ground. See how you translated this in [Exodus 27:19](../27/19.md).
-EXO	39	intro	mll6			0		# Exodus 39 General Notes\n\n- This chapter continues the record of the construction in almost exact repetition of Yahweh’s instructions. The special, holy clothing mentioned in previous chapters is produced to the correct specifications in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\nBe sure to consult your previous work to maintain consistency. Verses 1-31 of this chapter follow [Exodus 28:1-37](../28/01.md) with some differences. Verses 33-41 follow [35:10-19](../35/10.md).\n- Throughout the chapter the people making the items are referred to interchangeably as **he** or **they**. Both are generic nouns referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could change all instances to “they” or “he” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])\n
+EXO	39	intro	mll6			0		# Exodus 39 General Notes\n\n- This chapter continues the record of the construction in almost exact repetition of Yahweh’s instructions. The special, holy clothing mentioned in previous chapters is produced to the correct specifications in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\nBe sure to consult your previous work to maintain consistency. Verses 1-31 of this chapter follow [Exodus 28:1-37](../28/01.md) with some differences. Verses 33-41 follow [35:10-19](../35/10.md).\n- Throughout the chapter the people making the items are referred to interchangeably as **he** or **they**. Both are generic nouns referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could change all instances to “they” or “he” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])\n<br>
 EXO	39	1	h8kg			0	as Yahweh had commanded Moses	See how you translated similar instructions in [Exodus 28:4-5](../28/04.md).
 EXO	39	1	e1xh	figs-abstractnouns	בִּגְדֵ֤י הַ⁠קֹּ֨דֶשׁ֙	1	as Yahweh had commanded Moses	If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **holiness** in another way. Alternate translation: “the holy clothes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 EXO	39	2	b9mg			0	General Information:	This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:6](../28/06.md).
@@ -2631,10 +2622,10 @@ EXO	39	28	um4e			0	turban	Verses 27-29 reflect [Exodus 28:39](../28/39.md), [40]
 EXO	39	29	hn5g			0	sash	Verses 27-29 reflect [Exodus 28:39](../28/39.md), [40](../28/40.md), and [42](../28/42.md) but in a different order.
 EXO	39	30	kq33			0	General Information:	This verse is almost identical [Exodus 28:36](../28/36.md). See [29:6](../29/06.md) for the **crown of holiness**.
 EXO	39	31	fml2			0	General Information:	This verse is very similar to [Exodus 28:37](../28/37.md).
-EXO	39	32	jh64	writing-endofstory		0	General Information:	This verse marks the end of the narrative of the construction of the tabernacle. More precisely, it seems to mark the beginning of an ending section. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
-EXO	39	32	z1z7	figs-doublet	מִשְׁכַּ֖ן אֹ֣הֶל מוֹעֵ֑ד	1	So the work on the tabernacle, the tent of meeting, was finished. The people of Israel did everything	The **tabernacle** and **tent of meeting** are the same thing. The two interchangeable terms are brought together here in a poetic doubling to bring this part of the narrative to a close. If your readers would find this confusing you may need to simplify to one or expand in explanation like in the UST. Alternate translation: “holy meeting tent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-EXO	39	32	et19	figs-parallelism	וַֽ⁠יַּעֲשׂוּ֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל כְּ֠⁠כֹל אֲשֶׁ֨ר צִוָּ֧ה יְהוָ֛ה אֶת־מֹשֶׁ֖ה כֵּ֥ן עָשֽׂוּ	1	So the work on the tabernacle, the tent of meeting, was finished. The people of Israel did everything	Here, **thus they did** parallels the whole rest of the sentence. Like the doubling of the terms for **tabernacle** this brings the narrative of building to an emphatic conclusion. If this sort of parallelism would convey a meaning other than this emphatic conclusion in your language you may need to use another natural way to close the narrative with emphasis on the Israelites complete obedience. Alternate translation: “And the sons of Israel faithfully did exactly according to all that Yahweh had commanded Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-EXO	39	33	ri54	writing-newevent		0	So the work on the tabernacle, the tent of meeting, was finished. The people of Israel did everything	This verse starts a short narrative of the Israelites bringing and presenting the items for the tabernacle to Moses for inspection. It is a summary of the construction and extended conclusion to the last few chapters. Your team may need to decide how to group verse 32, as it both closes the construction narrative and introduces this next section, which ends with a very similar summary statement in [verses 42-43](../39/42.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
+EXO	39	32	jh64	writing-endofstory		0	General Information:	This verse marks the end of the narrative of the construction of the Dwelling. More precisely, it seems to mark the beginning of an ending section. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
+EXO	39	32	z1z7	figs-doublet	מִשְׁכַּ֖ן אֹ֣הֶל מוֹעֵ֑ד	1	So the work on the Dwelling, the tent of meeting, was finished. The people of Israel did everything	The **tabernacle** and **tent of meeting** are the same thing. The two interchangeable terms are brought together here in a poetic doubling to bring this part of the narrative to a close. If your readers would find this confusing you may need to simplify to one or expand in explanation like in the UST. Alternate translation: “holy meeting tent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+EXO	39	32	et19	figs-parallelism	וַֽ⁠יַּעֲשׂוּ֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל כְּ֠⁠כֹל אֲשֶׁ֨ר צִוָּ֧ה יְהוָ֛ה אֶת־מֹשֶׁ֖ה כֵּ֥ן עָשֽׂוּ	1	So the work on the Dwelling, the tent of meeting, was finished. The people of Israel did everything	Here, **thus they did** parallels the whole rest of the sentence. Like the doubling of the terms for **tabernacle** this brings the narrative of building to an emphatic conclusion. If this sort of parallelism would convey a meaning other than this emphatic conclusion in your language you may need to use another natural way to close the narrative with emphasis on the Israelites complete obedience. Alternate translation: “And the sons of Israel faithfully did exactly according to all that Yahweh had commanded Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+EXO	39	33	ri54	writing-newevent		0	So the work on the Dwelling, the tent of meeting, was finished. The people of Israel did everything	This verse starts a short narrative of the Israelites bringing and presenting the items for the Dwelling to Moses for inspection. It is a summary of the construction and extended conclusion to the last few chapters. Your team may need to decide how to group verse 32, as it both closes the construction narrative and introduces this next section, which ends with a very similar summary statement in [verses 42-43](../39/42.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 EXO	39	33	y9ym			0	clasps	This verse, especially the list of items, is very similar to [35:11](../35/11.md).
 EXO	39	34	z6r6		וְ⁠אֶת־מִכְסֵ֞ה עוֹרֹ֤ת הָֽ⁠אֵילִם֙ הַ⁠מְאָדָּמִ֔ים וְ⁠אֶת־מִכְסֵ֖ה עֹרֹ֣ת הַ⁠תְּחָשִׁ֑ים	1	the covering of ram skins dyed red, the covering of fine leather	See how you translated similar phrases to this in [Exodus 26:14](../26/14.md).
 EXO	39	34	l0fi		פָּרֹ֥כֶת הַ⁠מָּסָֽךְ	1	the covering of ram skins dyed red, the covering of fine leather	See how you translated similar phrases to this in [35:12](../35/12.md).
@@ -2644,34 +2635,34 @@ EXO	39	37	nzph			0	bread of the presence	This verse is very similar to [35:14](.
 EXO	39	38	elv1			0	bread of the presence	This verse is very similar to [35:15](../35/15.md).
 EXO	39	39	e755			0	grate	This verse is almost identical with [35:16](../35/16.md).
 EXO	39	40	i8lm			0	Connecting Statement:	This verse is almost identical with [35:17](../35/17.md) and parts of [35:18](../35/18.md).
-EXO	39	40	ajt4	figs-doublet	הַ⁠מִּשְׁכָּ֖ן לְ⁠אֹ֥הֶל מוֹעֵֽד	1	the tabernacle, the tent of meeting	These refer to the same place. See how you translated the doubling in [verse 32](../39/32.md). Alternate translation: “the tabernacle, that is the tent of meeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-EXO	39	41	z3ip			0	the tabernacle, the tent of meeting	This verse is identical to [35:19](../35/19.md).
+EXO	39	40	ajt4	figs-doublet	הַ⁠מִּשְׁכָּ֖ן לְ⁠אֹ֥הֶל מוֹעֵֽד	1	the Dwelling, the tent of meeting	These refer to the same place. See how you translated the doubling in [verse 32](../39/32.md). Alternate translation: “the Dwelling, that is the tent of meeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+EXO	39	41	z3ip			0	the Dwelling, the tent of meeting	This verse is identical to [35:19](../35/19.md).
 EXO	39	42	ct6k			0	Thus the people	This verse is almost identical to the second half of [verse 32](../39/32.md).
 EXO	39	43	t26m		וְ⁠הִנֵּה֙	1	behold	Here, the word **behold** draws attention to the information that follows. Use a word or marking in your language that draws attention to the next information.
 EXO	39	43	z79s	writing-endofstory		0	As Yahweh had commanded, in that way they did it	This (and really verse 42) is the end of the conclusion of the construction of materials portion of the story. The ending began in [verse 32](../39/32.md). If your language has specific features that should be part of the end of a section like this, consider using them here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
-EXO	40	intro	fa6e			0		# Exodus 40 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n- In this chapter, **just as Yahweh commanded Moses** is repeated seven times, as in the previous chapter, to show that Moses was obedient to every detail of Yahweh’s command.\n- This chapter is repetitive both internally and with other parts of the book. Verses 17-33 parallel verses 2-8 in an expanded way.\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n\n- The **tabernacle** and **tent of meeting** are the same thing, but both appear next to each other many times in this chapter. The two interchangeable terms are brought together throughout this chapter in a poetic doubling to bring book to a close. If your readers would find this confusing, you may need to simplify to one or expand in explanation like in the UST.\n- This chapter says that Moses did all these things. Just like with Bezalel in earlier chapters, it would have been impossible for him to do all this personally. The people helped him set up the tabernacle. In many translations this will more more clear if you make this explicit.\n- “Yahweh’s glory filled the tabernacle”: This phrase indicates that Yahweh began to dwell within the tabernacle, among Israel, in a special way. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]])
+EXO	40	intro	fa6e			0		# Exodus 40 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n- In this chapter, **just as Yahweh commanded Moses** is repeated seven times, as in the previous chapter, to show that Moses was obedient to every detail of Yahweh’s command.\n- This chapter is repetitive both internally and with other parts of the book. Verses 17-33 parallel verses 2-8 in an expanded way.\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n- The **Dwelling** and **tent of meeting** are the same thing, but both appear next to each other many times in this chapter. The two interchangeable terms are brought together throughout this chapter in a poetic doubling to bring book to a close. If your readers would find this confusing, you may need to simplify to one or expand in explanation like in the UST.\n- This chapter says that Moses did all these things. Just like with Bezalel in earlier chapters, it would have been impossible for him to do all this personally. The people helped him set up the Dwelling. In many translations this will more more clear if you make this explicit.\n- “the glory of Yahweh filled the Dwelling”: This phrase indicates that Yahweh began to dwell within the Dwelling, among Israel, in a special way. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]])\n
 EXO	40	1	ea7j	writing-newevent		0		There is a transition to a new event at the beginning of this chapter. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 EXO	40	2	bgv1	translate-ordinal	בְּ⁠יוֹם־הַ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֖וֹן בְּ⁠אֶחָ֣ד לַ⁠חֹ֑דֶשׁ	1		Alternate translation: “On day one of the month, in month one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-EXO	40	2	gzk3	figs-doublet	מִשְׁכַּ֖ן אֹ֥הֶל מוֹעֵֽד	1	the first day of the first month of the new year	These refer to the same place. See how you translated the doubling in [39:32](../39/32.md). Alternate translation: “the tabernacle, that is the tent of meeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+EXO	40	2	gzk3	figs-doublet	מִשְׁכַּ֖ן אֹ֥הֶל מוֹעֵֽד	1	the first day of the first month of the new year	These refer to the same place. See how you translated the doubling in [39:32](../39/32.md). Alternate translation: “the Dwelling, that is the tent of meeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 EXO	40	2	clkf	figs-ellipsis	לַ⁠חֹ֑דֶשׁ	1	the first day of the first month of the new year	Here, the new or next year is omitted because it can be inferred from context. However, if that would be misunderstood by your readers (perhaps they would think it just meant ”next month” or something), you could add a phrase to make it clear that it is the first month of the year. This refers to exactly one year after God rescued his people from Egypt. See [Exodus 12:2](../12/02.md). Alternate translation: “month of the year” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 EXO	40	3	l7fp		וְ⁠סַכֹּתָ֥ עַל	1	place the ark of the testimony in it	Alternate translation: “and you shall conceal”
 EXO	40	5	b3ct	figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֖י	1	place the ark of the testimony in it	Alternate translation: “in front of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	40	6	o5sz	figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֕י	1	place the ark of the testimony in it	Alternate translation: “in front of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-EXO	40	6	nqha	figs-doublet	מִשְׁכַּ֥ן אֹֽהֶל־מוֹעֵֽד	1	place the ark of the testimony in it	These refer to the same place. See how you translated the doubling in [39:32](../39/32.md). Alternate translation: “the tabernacle, that is the tent of meeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-EXO	40	10	yiq8	figs-possession	קֹ֥דֶשׁ קָֽדָשִֽׁים	1	General Information:	Here, **holy of holies** means extremely holy, as in, the holiest of the holy things. If doubling the words like this would not create this strengthening and marking as exclusive meaning in your language, you may need to find another way to express that this item would become uniquely holy. See how you translated this in [Exodus 29:37](../29/37.md). Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extraordinarily holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+EXO	40	6	nqha	figs-doublet	מִשְׁכַּ֥ן אֹֽהֶל־מוֹעֵֽד	1	place the ark of the testimony in it	These refer to the same place. See how you translated the doubling in [39:32](../39/32.md). Alternate translation: “the Dwelling, that is the tent of meeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+EXO	40	10	yiq8	figs-possession	קֹ֥דֶשׁ קָֽדָשִֽׁים	1	General Information:	Here, **holiest holy** means extremely or uniquely holy. If this form would not express that this item would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. See how you translated this in [Exodus 29:37](../29/37.md). Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extraordinarily holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 EXO	40	12	gqld			0	General Information:	Verses 12-15 are similar to [Exodus 29:4-9](../29/04.md).
 EXO	40	16	xl61	writing-newevent		0	General Information:	This statement starts a new section in which Moses does all the things **just as Yahweh had commanded**; this poetic obedience statement was seen so often in the previous chapter. You may wish to mark this transition and poetic statement in a particular way in your language that is similar to how you did in the last chapter. See [39:32](../39/32.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
-EXO	40	17	r6pc	figs-activepassive	הוּקַ֖ם הַ⁠מִּשְׁכָּֽן	1	So the tabernacle was set up	The use of the passive here indicates that the important thing is the completion of the task of setting up the tent on the specific date Yahweh had commanded. If your language would show that focus in a different way, use a natural form to do that. Alternate translation: “that they set up the tabernacle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+EXO	40	17	r6pc	figs-activepassive	הוּקַ֖ם הַ⁠מִּשְׁכָּֽן	1	So the Dwelling was set up	The use of the passive here indicates that the important thing is the completion of the task of setting up the tent on the specific date Yahweh had commanded. If your language would show that focus in a different way, use a natural form to do that. Alternate translation: “that they set up the Dwelling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	40	17	gzu5		בַּ⁠חֹ֧דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֛וֹן בַּ⁠שָּׁנָ֥ה הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֖ית בְּ⁠אֶחָ֣ד לַ⁠חֹ֑דֶשׁ	1	the first day of the first month	This refers to exactly one year after God rescued his people from Egypt. See [Exodus 12:2](../12/02.md).
 EXO	40	17	wnh8	translate-ordinal	בַּ⁠חֹ֧דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֛וֹן בַּ⁠שָּׁנָ֥ה הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֖ית בְּ⁠אֶחָ֣ד	1	in the second year	Alternate translation: “in month one, year two, on day one of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-EXO	40	18	kk4n	figs-explicit	וַ⁠יָּ֨קֶם מֹשֶׁ֜ה אֶת־הַ⁠מִּשְׁכָּ֗ן וַ⁠יִּתֵּן֙ אֶת־אֲדָנָ֔י⁠ו	1	Moses set up	Moses was the leader. It would have been impossible for him to do all this personally; the people helped him set up the tabernacle. In many translations this will more more clear if you make this explicit. This applies from here to all the tabernacle assembly listing through [verse 33](../40/33.md). Alternate translation: “And Moses directed the people to raise up the tabernacle, and they placed its bases”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-EXO	40	20	chx4	writing-pronouns	וַ⁠יִּקַּ֞ח…וַ⁠יָּ֥שֶׂם	1	Moses set up	In this verse and the next, there may be an exception to **he** meaning someone who was helping Moses, because these items were especially sacred. If you have been using a form that indicates that people are helping Moses construct the tabernacle, you may consider switching to “Moses” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-EXO	40	21	yhbs	writing-pronouns	וַ⁠יָּבֵ֣א…וַ⁠יָּ֗שֶׂם	1	Moses set up	In this verse and the previous verse, there may be an exception to **he** meaning someone who was helping Moses, because these items were especially sacred. If you have been using a form that indicates that people are helping Moses construct the tabernacle, you may consider switching to “Moses” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+EXO	40	18	kk4n	figs-metonymy	וַ⁠יָּ֨קֶם מֹשֶׁ֜ה אֶת־הַ⁠מִּשְׁכָּ֗ן וַ⁠יִּתֵּן֙ אֶת־אֲדָנָ֔י⁠ו	1	Moses set up	Moses was the leader. It would have been impossible for him to do all this personally; the people helped him set up the Dwelling. All references to Moses from here to all the Dwelling assembly listing through [verse 33](../40/33.md) can be understood this way. Alternate translation: “And Moses directed the people to raise up the Dwelling, and they placed its bases”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+EXO	40	20	chx4	writing-pronouns	וַ⁠יִּקַּ֞ח…וַ⁠יָּ֥שֶׂם	1	Moses set up	In this verse and the next, there may be an exception to **he** meaning someone who was helping Moses, because these items were especially sacred. If you have been using a form that indicates that people are helping Moses construct the Dwelling, you may consider switching to “Moses” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+EXO	40	21	yhbs	writing-pronouns	וַ⁠יָּבֵ֣א…וַ⁠יָּ֗שֶׂם	1	Moses set up	In this verse and the previous verse, there may be an exception to **he** meaning someone who was helping Moses, because these items were especially sacred. If you have been using a form that indicates that people are helping Moses construct the Dwelling, you may consider switching to “Moses” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 EXO	40	23	b3pp	figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י	1	Moses set up	Alternate translation: “in the presence of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	40	25	t2o2	figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י	1	Moses set up	Alternate translation: “in the presence of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	40	26	i5gg	figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֖י	1	in front of the curtain	Alternate translation: “in front of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	40	27	iwuo			0	in front of the curtain	See [30:7](../30/07.md).
-EXO	40	35	ysd8		וְ⁠לֹא־יָכֹ֣ל מֹשֶׁ֗ה לָ⁠בוֹא֙ אֶל־אֹ֣הֶל מוֹעֵ֔ד כִּֽי־שָׁכַ֥ן עָלָ֖י⁠ו הֶ⁠עָנָ֑ן וּ⁠כְב֣וֹד יְהוָ֔ה מָלֵ֖א אֶת־הַ⁠מִּשְׁכָּֽן	1	Yahweh’s glory filled	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because the cloud had settled on it and the glory of Yahweh had filled the tabernacle, Moses was not able to go into the tent of meeting.”
+EXO	40	35	ysd8		וְ⁠לֹא־יָכֹ֣ל מֹשֶׁ֗ה לָ⁠בוֹא֙ אֶל־אֹ֣הֶל מוֹעֵ֔ד כִּֽי־שָׁכַ֥ן עָלָ֖י⁠ו הֶ⁠עָנָ֑ן וּ⁠כְב֣וֹד יְהוָ֔ה מָלֵ֖א אֶת־הַ⁠מִּשְׁכָּֽן	1	Yahweh’s glory filled	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because the cloud had settled on it and the glory of Yahweh had filled the Dwelling, Moses was not able to go into the tent of meeting.”
 EXO	40	36	ak35	figs-activepassive	וּ⁠בְ⁠הֵעָל֤וֹת הֶֽ⁠עָנָן֙	1	was taken up from over	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Whenever Yahweh’s cloud moved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	40	37	s8y2	figs-activepassive	וְ⁠אִם־לֹ֥א יֵעָלֶ֖ה הֶ⁠עָנָ֑ן וְ⁠לֹ֣א יִסְע֔וּ עַד־י֖וֹם הֵעָלֹתֽ⁠וֹ	1	that it was lifted up	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but if Yahweh did not take up the cloud, then they would not set out until the day he took it up.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	40	38	i8hu	figs-metonymy	לְ⁠עֵינֵ֥י כָל־בֵּֽית־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל	1	that it was lifted up	Here, **before the eyes of** refers to being able to see. All the Israelites could see the cloud and fire. Alternate translation: “and all the house of Israel could see it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
diff --git a/en_tn_04-NUM.tsv b/en_tn_04-NUM.tsv
index 6e57c8044f..835ad3a264 100644
--- a/en_tn_04-NUM.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_04-NUM.tsv
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
 Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNote
-NUM	front	intro	p55k			0		# Introduction to Numbers<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of Numbers<br><br>1. Preparing to leave Sinai (1:1–10:10)<br>    * Counting and assembling the tribes (1:1–4:49)<br>    * Regulations (5:1–6:27)<br>    * Dedicating the altar (7:1-89)<br>    * Setting up the lampstand (8:1-4)<br>    * Setting apart the Levites (8:5–29)<br>    * Second Passover; the cloud to lead them; trumpets (9:1–10:10)<br>1. Sinai to Moab, through the wilderness (10:11–17:13)<br>    * Complaining and murmuring (10:11–11:15)<br>    * The quails (11:16–35)<br>    * Miriam’s leprosy (12:1–16)<br>    * The spies selected and sent (13:1–14:45)<br>    * Commands (15:1-41)<br>    * Korah’s rebellion (16:1–17:13)<br>1. The Priests and purifying (18:1-19:22)<br>    * Priests and Levites (18:1–32)<br>    * The law about purifying (19:1–22)<br>1. Conflicts (20:1–21:35)<br>    * Miriam’s death (20:1–13)<br>    * Edom’s refusal and Aaron’s death (20:14–29)<br>    * Journey to Moab (21:1–35)<br>1. The Plains of Moab (22:1–36:13)<br>    * Balaam (22:1–24:25)<br>    * Baal Peor (25:1–18)<br>    * The second counting (26:1-65)<br>    * Inheritance rights for daughters (27:1–11)<br>    * Joshua succeeds Moses (27:12–23)<br>    * Offerings and women’s vows (28:1–30:16)<br>    * Midianite war (31:1–54)<br>    * Across the Jordan (32:1–42)<br>    * The people set up camp (33:1–56)<br>    * Land west of the Jordan; cities for Levites and cities of refuge (34:1–35:34)<br>    * Female heirs marry (36:1-13)<br><br>### What is the Book of Numbers about?<br><br>The Book of Numbers tells about the people of Israel as they traveled from Mount Sinai in the wilderness to the Jordan River. While traveling, the Israelites became discouraged. So they rebelled against the leaders whom God had given them. At the Jordan River, the people of Israel refused to enter the Promised Land. Because the Israelites were afraid and did not trust God, he delayed their entry into the Promised Land for forty years (13:1–14:45). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>The title of this book, “Numbers,” refers to when the number of the Israelites was counted. The people of the project language may already be familiar with the name “Numbers” from other Bible versions. If not, the translator could consider a clearer name for the book, such as “The Counting of the People of Israel.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/census]])<br><br>### Who wrote the Book of Numbers?<br><br>The writers of both the Old and New Testament present Moses as being very involved with writing the Book of Numbers. However, at a later time, scribes and priests probably put the book into its present form. They may have included text from other sources. One such source was “the scroll of the Wars of Yahweh” (21:14).<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### How does Numbers present the idea of the whole community being responsible when only a few people sinned?<br><br>The people understood and assumed that God would punish the whole community of Israel if some of the people rebelled against him. God did often punish the entire nation when some of them sinned. All of the people in the ancient Near East would have understood and expected this. However, Moses and Aaron prayed for God to punish only those who were guilty.<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### Why does Moses speak using third person pronouns about himself?<br><br>When an author wrote about something he was involved in, it was common for him to use the pronoun “he” instead of “I,” or “they” instead of “we.” The translator may decide to use the project’s normal pronouns instead.
+NUM	front	intro	p55k			0		# Introduction to Numbers\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of Numbers\n\n1. Preparing to leave Sinai (1:1–10:10)\n    * Counting and assembling the tribes (1:1–4:49)\n    * Regulations (5:1–6:27)\n    * Dedicating the altar (7:1-89)\n    * Setting up the lampstand (8:1-4)\n    * Setting apart the Levites (8:5–29)\n    * Second Passover; the cloud to lead them; trumpets (9:1–10:10)\n1. Sinai to Moab, through the wilderness (10:11–17:13)\n    * Complaining and murmuring (10:11–11:15)\n    * The quails (11:16–35)\n    * Miriam’s leprosy (12:1–16)\n    * The spies selected and sent (13:1–14:45)\n    * Commands (15:1-41)\n    * Korah’s rebellion (16:1–17:13)\n1. The Priests and purifying (18:1-19:22)\n    * Priests and Levites (18:1–32)\n    * The law about purifying (19:1–22)\n1. Conflicts (20:1–21:35)\n    * Miriam’s death (20:1–13)\n    * Edom’s refusal and Aaron’s death (20:14–29)\n    * Journey to Moab (21:1–35)\n1. The Plains of Moab (22:1–36:13)\n    * Balaam (22:1–24:25)\n    * Baal Peor (25:1–18)\n    * The second counting (26:1-65)\n    * Inheritance rights for daughters (27:1–11)\n    * Joshua succeeds Moses (27:12–23)\n    * Offerings and women’s vows (28:1–30:16)\n    * Midianite war (31:1–54)\n    * Across the Jordan (32:1–42)\n    * The people set up camp (33:1–56)\n    * Land west of the Jordan; cities for Levites and cities of refuge (34:1–35:34)\n    * Female heirs marry (36:1-13)\n\n### What is the Book of Numbers about?\n\nThe Book of Numbers tells about the people of Israel as they traveled from Mount Sinai in the wilderness to the Jordan River. While traveling, the Israelites became discouraged. So they rebelled against the leaders whom God had given them. At the Jordan River, the people of Israel refused to enter the Promised Land. Because the Israelites were afraid and did not trust God, he delayed their entry into the Promised Land for forty years (13:1–14:45). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nThe title of this book, “Numbers,” refers to when the number of the Israelites was counted. The people of the project language may already be familiar with the name “Numbers” from other Bible versions. If not, the translator could consider a clearer name for the book, such as “The Counting of the People of Israel.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/census]])\n\n### Who wrote the Book of Numbers?\n\nThe writers of both the Old and New Testament present Moses as being very involved with writing the Book of Numbers. However, at a later time, scribes and priests probably put the book into its present form. They may have included text from other sources. One such source was “the scroll of the Wars of Yahweh” (21:14).\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### How does Numbers present the idea of the whole community being responsible when only a few people sinned?\n\nThe people understood and assumed that God would punish the whole community of Israel if some of the people rebelled against him. God did often punish the entire nation when some of them sinned. All of the people in the ancient Near East would have understood and expected this. However, Moses and Aaron prayed for God to punish only those who were guilty.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### Why does Moses speak using third person pronouns about himself?\n\nWhen an author wrote about something he was involved in, it was common for him to use the pronoun “he” instead of “I,” or “they” instead of “we.” The translator may decide to use the project’s normal pronouns instead.
 NUM	1	intro	av14			0		# Numbers 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>The ULT sets the lines in 1:5-15 farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text because they are long lists.<br><br>### Census<br><br>They counted how many men of military age were in each tribe of Israel. These men would also become the heads of families. It is possible the numbers in this chapter are rounded to the nearest 100.
 NUM	1	1	fr2s			0	Yahweh	This is the name of God that he revealed to his people in the Old Testament. See the translationWord page about Yahweh concerning how to translate this.
-NUM	1	1	u2p1	translate-hebrewmonths	בְּ⁠אֶחָד֩ לַ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֜י	1	on 1 of the second month	This is the **second month** of the Hebrew calendar. The first day is near the middle of April on Western calendars. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+NUM	1	1	u2p1	translate-hebrewmonths	בְּ⁠אֶחָד֩ לַ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֜י	1	on 1 of the second month	This is the **second month** of the Hebrew calendar. The first day is near the middle of April on Western calendars. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
 NUM	1	1	owqr	translate-ordinal	הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֜י…הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֗ית	1		Both occurrences of the word **second** are the ordinal forms of “two.”  (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 NUM	1	1	ava2	translate-ordinal		0	the second year	Alternate translation: “year 2” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 NUM	1	2	m9tq	figs-explicit		0	Count them by name	This means to count the men by recording their names. Alternate translation: “Count them, recording each man’s name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ NUM	2	5	su53			0	Nethanel son of Zuar	See how you translated this man’s name i
 NUM	2	6	pvl6			0	division	This is a military term for a large group of soldiers. Each tribe was its own “division.”
 NUM	2	6	s8hf	translate-numbers		0	54,400 men	Alternate translation: “fifty-four thousand four hundred men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 NUM	2	7	a457			0	Eliab son of Helon	See how you translated this man’s name in [Numbers 1:9](../01/09.md).
-NUM	2	8	fgs1	translate-numbers	שִׁבְעָ֧ה וַ⁠חֲמִשִּׁ֛ים אֶ֖לֶף וְ⁠אַרְבַּ֥ע מֵאֽוֹת	1	are 57,400	You can state this in words. Alternate translation: “fifty-seven thousand four hundred.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
+NUM	2	8	fgs1	translate-numbers	שִׁבְעָ֧ה וַ⁠חֲמִשִּׁ֛ים אֶ֖לֶף וְ⁠אַרְבַּ֥ע מֵאֽוֹת	1	are 57,400	You can state this in words. Alternate translation: “fifty-seven thousand four hundred” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 NUM	2	8	kceb	figs-ellipsis	שִׁבְעָ֧ה וַ⁠חֲמִשִּׁ֛ים אֶ֖לֶף וְ⁠אַרְבַּ֥ע מֵאֽוֹת	1	are 57,400	This refers to the number of men. Alternate translation: “are 57,400 men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 NUM	2	9	p866	translate-numbers	מְאַ֨ת אֶ֜לֶף וּ⁠שְׁמֹנִ֥ים אֶ֛לֶף וְ⁠שֵֽׁשֶׁת־ אֲלָפִ֥ים וְ⁠אַרְבַּע־ מֵא֖וֹת	1	are 186,400	You can state this in words. Alternate translation: “are one hundred and eighty-six thousand four hundred” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 NUM	2	9	e32j			0	the camp of Judah	This refers to the three tribes that camp east of the tent of meeting: the tribes of Judah, Issachar, and Zebulun.
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ NUM	2	15	cd9v	translate-numbers	חֲמִשָּׁ֤ה וְ⁠אַרְבָּעִי
 NUM	2	15	j539	figs-ellipsis	חֲמִשָּׁ֤ה וְ⁠אַרְבָּעִים֙ אֶ֔לֶף וְ⁠שֵׁ֥שׁ מֵא֖וֹת וַ⁠חֲמִשִּֽׁים	1	are 45,650	This refers to the number of men. Alternate translation: “are 45,650 men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 NUM	2	16	sz9m	translate-numbers	מְאַ֨ת אֶ֜לֶף וְ⁠אֶחָ֨ד וַ⁠חֲמִשִּׁ֥ים אֶ֛לֶף וְ⁠אַרְבַּע־ מֵא֥וֹת וַ⁠חֲמִשִּׁ֖ים	1	are 151,450	You can state this in words. Alternate translation: “are one hundred and fifty-one thousand four hundred and fifty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 NUM	2	16	etwk	figs-explicit	מְאַ֨ת אֶ֜לֶף וְ⁠אֶחָ֨ד וַ⁠חֲמִשִּׁ֥ים אֶ֛לֶף וְ⁠אַרְבַּע־ מֵא֥וֹת וַ⁠חֲמִשִּׁ֖ים	1	are 151,450	This refers to the men. Alternate translation: “ are 151,450 men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-NUM	2	16	ti9z	translate-ordinal	וּ⁠שְׁנִיִּ֖ם יִסָּֽעוּ	1	And they will set out second	This means that when the Israelite camp moves, the camp of Reuben will start walking out after the camp of Judah goes out. Alternate translation: “When traveling, the camp of Reuben will start walking second” or “When the Israelites leave, those tribes will leave next” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+NUM	2	16	ti9z	figs-explicit	וּ⁠שְׁנִיִּ֖ם יִסָּֽעוּ	1	And they will set out second	This means that when the Israelite camp moves, the camp of Reuben will start walking out after the camp of Judah goes out. Alternate translation: “When traveling, the camp of Reuben will start walking second” or “When the Israelites leave, those tribes will leave next” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NUM	2	16	yg28	translate-ordinal	וּ⁠שְׁנִיִּ֖ם יִסָּֽעוּ	1	And they will set out second	The word **second** is the ordinal form of “two.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 NUM	2	17	a2em			0	the tent of meeting must go out … in the middle of all the camps	This means that the tent of meeting must be carried by the Levites in the middle of the tribes as they travel.
 NUM	2	17	b2zi			0	They must go out	Alternate translation: “They” refers to the twelve tribes.
@@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ NUM	3	4	y1lm	figs-idiom		0	fell dead before Yahweh	The phrase “fell dead” me
 NUM	3	4	a4v4	figs-metonymy		0	before Yahweh	This refers to Yahweh’s presence, meaning that Yahweh saw everything that happened. Alternate translation: “in Yahweh’s presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 NUM	3	4	w613	figs-metonymy		0	they offered to him unacceptable fire	Here the word “fire” is used to refer to “burning incense.” Alternate translation: “they burned an incense offering in a way that Yahweh did not approve of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 NUM	3	6	e8en	figs-metonymy		0	Bring the tribe of Levi	Here the word “tribe” refers to the men in the tribe. Alternate translation: “Bring the men of the tribe of Levi” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-NUM	3	7	t5uv			0	on behalf of	Alternate translation: “for.” This means to do something for someone else, as a representative for them.
+NUM	3	7	t5uv			0	on behalf of	This means to do something for someone else, as a representative for them. Alternate translation: “for”
 NUM	3	8	zdb4	figs-metonymy		0	help the tribes of Israel	Here the “tribes of Israel” refer to the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “help the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 NUM	3	8	cj2z	figs-idiom		0	they must help the tribes of Israel to carry out the tabernacle service	The phrase “carry out” means to “serve.” Alternate translation: “they must help the tribes of Israel by serving in the tabernacle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 NUM	3	8	pkf3			0	tabernacle service	Alternate translation: “work of the tabernacle”
@@ -312,12 +312,12 @@ NUM	5	15	cpv6	translate-fraction		0	a tenth	This is one part out of ten equal pa
 NUM	5	15	h7qc	translate-bvolume		0	a tenth of an ephah	This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “a tenth of an ephah (which is about 2 liters)” or “2 liters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
 NUM	5	15	rqv9			0	a grain offering of jealousy	Alternate translation: “a grain offering for jealousy”
 NUM	5	15	hlz4			0	a reminder of the iniquity	A “reminder” is something that shows evidence that something had occurred that required justice. In this case, he made the offering to determine whether his wife had committed adultery or not.
-NUM	5	16	b35g	figs-explicit		0	near and place her before Yahweh	Alternate translation: “in the presence of Yahweh.” The priest would bring her near the altar. Alternate translation: “near the altar and place her in the presence of Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+NUM	5	16	b35g	figs-explicit		0	near and place her before Yahweh	The priest would bring her near the altar. Alternate translation: “near the altar and place her in the presence of Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NUM	5	18	nx25			0	before Yahweh	Alternate translation: “in the presence of Yahweh”
 NUM	5	18	pji2			0	grain offering of suspicion	See how you translated this phrase in [Numbers 5:15](../05/15.md).
 NUM	5	19	hjz9	figs-euphemism		0	no other man has lain with you	This is a euphemism. Alternate translation: “no other man has had sexual relations with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 NUM	5	19	xw4y	figs-idiom		0	if you have not gone astray	The words “gone astray” is an idiom that means “to be unfaithful.” Alternate translation: “if you have not been unfaithful to your husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-NUM	5	19	t3qy			0	and committed impurity	Alternate translation: “by committing impurity.” This phrase refers to committing adultery.
+NUM	5	19	t3qy			0	and committed impurity	This phrase refers to committing adultery. Alternate translation: “by committing impurity”
 NUM	5	19	e97n	figs-idiom		0	you will be free from this bitter water	The phrase to “be free” from something means to not be harmed by it. Alternate translation: “this bitter water will not harm you, though it is able to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 NUM	5	19	tdr3	figs-personification		0	this bitter water that can bring a curse	Here the bitter water is described as being able to bring a curse. This means that when the woman drinks the water it cause her to be unable to bear children, if she is guilty. Alternate translation: “this bitter water can be a curse to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 NUM	5	20	ulh8	figs-idiom		0	have gone astray	The words “gone astray” is an idiom that means “to be unfaithful.” Alternate translation: “have been unfaithful to your husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -329,7 +329,7 @@ NUM	5	21	b27i	figs-euphemism		0	your thigh to waste away	Here the word “thigh
 NUM	5	23	rp5w			0	he must wash away the written curses	This means that he is to wash the ink off of the scroll.
 NUM	5	23	k7qn	figs-activepassive		0	the written curses	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the curses he has written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	5	24	wm1q			0	General Information:	Verse 24 explains in a general way what the priest must do and what is expected to happen when the woman drinks the water. Verse 25 and 26 explains in detail how the priest is to do this work. The priest gives the water to the woman and she drinks it only once.
-NUM	5	25	kuh3			0	grain offering of jealousy	Alternate translation: “a grain offering for jealousy.” See how you translated this in [Numbers 5:15](../05/15.md).
+NUM	5	25	kuh3			0	grain offering of jealousy	See how you translated this in [Numbers 5:15](../05/15.md). Alternate translation: “a grain offering for jealousy”
 NUM	5	26	tvx7			0	a representative offering	The handful of the grain offering represents the whole grain offering. This means the whole offering belongs to Yahweh.
 NUM	5	27	eld4	figs-activepassive		0	if she is defiled because she has committed	This can be written in active form. Alternate translation: “if she has defined herself by committing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	5	27	dzq6	figs-explicit		0	committed a sin	Here the “sin” refers specifically to committing adultery. The meaning of this statement can be made clear. Alternate translation: “committed adultery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -393,7 +393,7 @@ NUM	6	17	d7zf	figs-ellipsis		0	The priest must present also … drink offering	Y
 NUM	6	18	x9jb	figs-idiom	נִזְר֑⁠וֹ…נִזְר֔⁠וֹ	1	his separation … his separation	Here, **his separation** is an idiom that means “his dedication.” Alternate translation: “indicating his dedication … indicating his dedication” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 NUM	6	18	rrkq	figs-abstractnouns	נִזְר֑⁠וֹ…נִזְר֔⁠וֹ	1	his separation … his separation	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind both instances of the word **separation**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “indicating how he has separated himself … indicating how he has separated himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 NUM	6	19	h5f8	figs-activepassive		0	the boiled shoulder of the ram	This means that he had boiled the ram’s shoulder. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the shoulder of the ram that he boiled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-NUM	6	19	ia1k	figs-idiom		0	indicating separation	Here “separation” means “dedication.” Also, this abstract noun can be expressed with the verb “separated.” Alternate translation: “indicating dedication” or “indicating that he has dedicated himself to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+NUM	6	19	ia1k	figs-abstractnouns	אֶת־ נִזְרֽ⁠וֹ	1	his separation	Here, the abstract noun **separation** can be expressed with the verb “dedicated.” Alternate translation: “indicating his dedication” or “indicating that he has dedicated himself to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 NUM	6	20	izv4	figs-explicit		0	The priest must wave them	After handing the items to the Nazirite, the priest takes them back to offer them to Yahweh. The full meaning of this statement can be made clear. Alternate translation: “Then the priest must take them back and wave them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NUM	6	20	vm26			0	together with	Alternate translation: “as well as”
 NUM	6	20	nr52	figs-activepassive		0	that was waved	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the priest waved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -447,7 +447,7 @@ NUM	7	18	k818	translate-ordinal		0	the second day	Alternate translation: “day
 NUM	7	18	s55k			0	Nethanel son of Zuar	See how you translated this man’s name in [Numbers 1:8](../01/08.md).
 NUM	7	19	fv6a	translate-bweight	שְׁלֹשִׁ֣ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֮ מִשְׁקָלָ⁠הּ֒	1	its weight was 130	See how you translated **its weight was 130** in [7:13](../07/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
 NUM	7	19	xung	translate-bweight	שִׁבְעִ֥ים שֶׁ֖קֶל	1	70 shekels	See how you translated **70 shekels** in [7:13](../07/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
-NUM	7	19	hdb1	translate-bweight		0	one silver bowl weighing seventy shekels	Alternate translation: “one silver bowl weighing 70 shekels.” If necessary, these weights can be written in modern measurements. See how you translated these same weights in [Numbers 7:13](../07/13.md). Alternate translation: “one silver bowl weighing nearly eight tenths of a kilogram” or “one silver bowl weighting 770 grams” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
+NUM	7	19	hdb1	translate-bweight	מִזְרָ֤ק אֶחָד֙ כֶּ֔סֶף שִׁבְעִ֥ים שֶׁ֖קֶל	1	one silver bowl of 70 shekels	If necessary, these weights can be written in modern measurements. See how you translated these same weights in [Numbers 7:13](../07/13.md). Alternate translation: “one silver bowl weighing nearly eight tenths of a kilogram” or “one silver bowl weighting 770 grams” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
 NUM	7	19	m81x	translate-bweight		0	by the standard weight of the sanctuary shekel	There were shekels of different weights. This is the one that people had to use in the sanctuary of the sacred tent. See how you translated this phrase in [Numbers 7:13](../07/13.md). Alternate translation: “measured by the standard weights used in the sanctuary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
 NUM	7	19	tdm6	figs-activepassive		0	fine flour mixed with oil	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “fine flour that he had mixed with oil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	7	20	e7yz	translate-bweight		0	one gold dish weighing ten shekels	If necessary, this can be written in modern measurements. See how you translated these same weights in [Numbers 7:14](../07/14.md). Alternate translation: “one gold dish weighing one tenth of a kilogram” or “one gold dish weighting 110 grams” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
@@ -482,7 +482,7 @@ NUM	7	37	kj44	translate-bweight		0	by the standard weight of the sanctuary sheke
 NUM	7	37	ekt1	figs-activepassive		0	fine flour mixed with oil	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “fine flour that he had mixed with oil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	7	38	d1vh	translate-bweight		0	one gold dish weighing ten shekels	If necessary, this can be written in modern measurements. See how you translated these same weights in [Numbers 7:14](../07/14.md). Alternate translation: “one gold dish weighing one tenth of a kilogram” or “one gold dish weighting 110 grams” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
 NUM	7	41	rc2k			0	that were a year old	Alternate translation: “that were each one year old”
-NUM	7	41	p15a	translate-names		0	This was the sacrifice of Shelumiel son of Zurishaddai	Alternate translation: “This was what Shelumiel son of Zurishaddai gave as a sacrifice.” “Shelumiel” and “Zurishaddai” are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+NUM	7	41	p15a	translate-names		0	This was the sacrifice of Shelumiel son of Zurishaddai	“Shelumiel” and “Zurishaddai” are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NUM	7	41	xhm1			0	Shelumiel son of Zurishaddai	See how you translated this man’s name in [Numbers 1:6](../01/06.md).
 NUM	7	42	uxi5	translate-ordinal		0	the sixth day	Alternate translation: “day 6” or “day number 6” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 NUM	7	42	h5ih			0	Eliasaph son of Deuel	See how you translated this man’s name in [Numbers 1:14](../01/14.md).
@@ -516,7 +516,7 @@ NUM	7	59	z3ed			0	This was the sacrifice of Gamaliel son of Pedahzur	Alternate t
 NUM	7	59	ixg3			0	Gamaliel son of Pedahzur	See how you translated this man’s name in [Numbers 1:10](../01/10.md).
 NUM	7	60	d8hi	translate-ordinal		0	the ninth day	Alternate translation: “day 9” or “day number 9” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 NUM	7	60	h4gl			0	Abidan son of Gideoni	See how you translated this man’s name in [Numbers 1:11](../01/11.md).
-NUM	7	61	wl2g	translate-bweight	֣ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֮ מִשְׁקָלָ⁠	1	its weight was 130	See how you translated **its weight was 130** in [7:13](../07/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
+NUM	7	61	wl2g	translate-bweight	שְׁלֹשִׁ֣ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֮ מִשְׁקָלָ⁠הּ֒	1	its weight was 130	See how you translated **its weight was 130** in [7:13](../07/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
 NUM	7	61	gv7x	translate-bweight	ְעִ֥ים שֶׁ֖קֶל	1	70 shekels	See how you translated **70 shekels** in [7:13](../07/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
 NUM	7	61	r94v	translate-bweight		0	by the standard weight of the sanctuary shekel	There were shekels of different weights. This is the one that people had to use in the sanctuary of the sacred tent. See how you translated this phrase in [Numbers 7:13](../07/13.md). Alternate translation: “measured by the standard weights used in the sanctuary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
 NUM	7	61	aq7k	figs-activepassive		0	fine flour mingled with oil	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “fine flour that he had mixed with oil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -542,7 +542,7 @@ NUM	7	73	bxh3	translate-bweight		0	by the standard weight of the sanctuary sheke
 NUM	7	73	vra2	figs-activepassive		0	fine flour mingled with oil	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “fine flour that he had mixed with oil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	7	74	s3qc	translate-bweight		0	one gold dish weighing ten shekels	If necessary, this can be written in modern measurements. See how you translated these same weights in [Numbers 7:14](../07/14.md). Alternate translation: “one gold dish weighing one tenth of a kilogram” or “one gold dish weighting 110 grams” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
 NUM	7	77	h23u			0	that were a year old	Alternate translation: “that were each one year old”
-NUM	7	77	ql5z	translate-names		0	This was the sacrifice of Pagiel son of Okran	Alternate translation: “This was what Pagiel son of Okran gave as a sacrifice.” “Pagiel” and “Okran” were names of men. See how you translated their names in [Numbers 1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+NUM	7	77	ql5z	translate-names		0	This was the sacrifice of Pagiel son of Okran	“Pagiel” and “Okran” were names of men. See how you translated their names in [Numbers 1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NUM	7	78	ki2v	translate-ordinal		0	the twelfth day	Alternate translation: “day 12” or “day number 12” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 NUM	7	78	ge9i			0	Ahira son of Enan	See how you translated this man’s name in [Numbers 1:15](../01/15.md).
 NUM	7	79	hn31	translate-bweight	 וּ⁠מֵאָה֮ מִשְׁקָלָ⁠הּ֒	1	its weight was 130	See how you translated **its weight was 130** in [7:13](../07/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
@@ -564,8 +564,6 @@ NUM	7	85	y3m8			0	the silver vessels	This refers to all of the offerings that we
 NUM	7	86	c3sw			0	All the gold dishes weighed	Alternate translation: “All the gold dishes together weighed”
 NUM	7	86	ww9i	translate-bweight	עֶשְׂרִ֥ים וּ⁠מֵאָֽה	1	was 120	If necessary, this can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “was one tenth of a kilogram” or “weighed 110 grams” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
 NUM	7	86	pb2y	translate-numbers		0	120 shekels	Alternate translation: “one hundred and twenty shekels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-NUM	7	87	vdl4	translate-numbers		0	twelve	Alternate translation: “12.” This number may be written with a numeral instead of with a word. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-NUM	7	88	xp2v	translate-numbers		0	twenty-four … sixty	Alternate translation: “24…60.” These numbers may be written with numerals instead of with words. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 NUM	7	88	jy6x			0	a year old	Alternate translation: “that were one year old”
 NUM	7	88	uul3	figs-activepassive		0	after it was anointed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “after Moses had anointed it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	7	89	y6f1	figs-synecdoche		0	he heard his voice speaking to him	Here “his voice” refers to Yahweh. Alternate translation: “he heard Yahweh speaking to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@@ -602,7 +600,7 @@ NUM	8	20	r3gb	figs-parallelism		0	Moses, Aaron, and the whole community of the p
 NUM	8	22	xtr2	figs-abstractnouns		0	to do their service	The word “service,” an abstract noun, can be expressed as a verb. Alternate translation: “to serve” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 NUM	8	22	f444			0	before Aaron and before Aaron’s sons	Alternate translation: “in the presence of Aaron and his sons”
 NUM	8	22	x68h			0	This was	Alternate translation: “What they did was”
-NUM	8	22	lzx3			0	They treated all the Levites in this way	Alternate translation: “They did to the Levites what Yahweh commanded.” The word “They” refers to the people of Israel.
+NUM	8	22	lzx3			0	They treated all the Levites in this way	The word “They” refers to the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “They did to the Levites what Yahweh commanded”
 NUM	8	24	ygl7			0	All of this is for the Levites	Alternate translation: “All of these commandments are for the Levites”
 NUM	8	24	q65x	translate-numbers		0	twenty-five years old	Alternate translation: “25 years old” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 NUM	8	24	l8m6			0	must join the company to serve in the tent of meeting	The word “company” refers to the rest of the people working in the tent of meeting. See how you translated this phrase in [Numbers 4:3](../04/03.md).
@@ -640,7 +638,7 @@ NUM	9	13	h37g	figs-activepassive	וְ⁠נִכְרְתָ֛ה הַ⁠נֶּ֥פֶ
 NUM	9	13	n841			0	fixed	set or predetermined
 NUM	9	13	j8p3	figs-metaphor		0	That man must carry his sin	Here the concept of the man having to bear the consequences of his sin is spoken of as if his sin were a heavy object that he had to carry. Alternate translation: “That man must bear the punishment for his sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	9	14	ln14	figs-you		0	lives among you	Here “you” is plural and refers to the people of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-NUM	9	14	t2rf	figs-parallelism		0	he must keep it according to the statute of the Passover and according to its rule	Alternate translation: “that stranger must keep it and do all that Yahweh has commanded concerning the Passover.” The words “statute” and “rule” mean basically the same thing and are used together to emphasize that the stranger must obey all of the rules about the Passover. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+NUM	9	14	t2rf	figs-parallelism		0	he must keep it according to the statute of the Passover and according to its rule	The words “statute” and “rule” mean basically the same thing and are used together to emphasize that the stranger must obey all of the rules about the Passover. Alternate translation: “that stranger must keep it and do all that Yahweh has commanded concerning the Passover” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 NUM	9	14	bz6x			0	in the land	Alternate translation: “in the land of Israel”
 NUM	9	15	yg8g	figs-activepassive		0	the tabernacle was set up	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Levites set up the tabernacle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	9	15	b1a2			0	the tent of the covenant decrees	This is another name for the tabernacle. See how you translated the phrase “the tabernacle of the covenant decrees” in [Numbers 1:50](../01/50.md).
@@ -661,16 +659,16 @@ NUM	9	23	h49s	figs-activepassive		0	Yahweh’s command given through Moses	If yo
 NUM	10	intro	vix6			0		# Numbers 10 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Trumpets<br>In the ancient Near East, trumpets were used for many purposes. They were used to call people together. They were also used to lead people into battle.<br><br>### Israel starts to move<br><br>Each tribe had its place in line as did the tabernacle. Their movements through the desert were very deliberate and ordered. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]])
 NUM	10	2	a5wu	figs-metonymy		0	Make two silver trumpets	This means that Yahweh commanded Moses to have someone make the trumpet. He did not make them himself. Alternate translation: “Tell someone to make two silver trumpets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 NUM	10	2	a3nl	figs-metonymy		0	You must use the trumpets	Moses will not blow the trumpets himself, but he will command the priests to blow them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-NUM	10	3	k8w4			0	in front of you	Alternate translation: “while you are present.” This means that Moses was to be there with the priest when he blew the trumpets.
+NUM	10	3	k8w4			0	in front of you	This means that Moses was to be there with the priest when he blew the trumpets. Alternate translation: “while you are present”
 NUM	10	4	c73m	figs-parallelism		0	the leaders, the heads of the clans of Israel	These two phrases refer to the same group of people. Here the second phrase is used to describe the first phrase. Alternate translation: “the leaders, who are the heads of the clans of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 NUM	10	5	vt88	figs-you	וּ⁠תְקַעְתֶּ֖ם תְּרוּעָ֑ה	1	And you shall blow a blast	Here the word **you** is plural. Yahweh is speaking to Moses, but he his referring to the priests. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 NUM	10	5	a48l	figs-metonymy	וּ⁠תְקַעְתֶּ֖ם תְּרוּעָ֑ה	1	And you shall blow a blast	The priests will blow the trumpets, Moses will not. Alternate translation: “And they shall blow a blast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 NUM	10	6	m9ab	figs-you	וּ⁠תְקַעְתֶּ֤ם תְּרוּעָה֙ שֵׁנִ֔ית	1	And you shall blow a second blast	Here the word **you** is plural. Yahweh is speaking to Moses, but he his referring to the priests. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-NUM	10	6	huyc	figs-you	וּ⁠תְקַעְתֶּ֤ם תְּרוּעָה֙ שֵׁנִ֔ית	1	And you shall blow a second blast	The priests will blow the trumpets, Moses will not. Alternate translation: “And they shall blow a second blast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+NUM	10	6	huyc	figs-metonymy	וּ⁠תְקַעְתֶּ֤ם תְּרוּעָה֙ שֵׁנִ֔ית	1	And you shall blow a second blast	The priests will blow the trumpets, Moses will not. Alternate translation: “And they shall blow a second blast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 NUM	10	6	hik8	translate-ordinal		0	the second time	Alternate translation: “time number 2” or “again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 NUM	10	6	bv3w			0	They must blow a loud signal for their journeys	Alternate translation: “They” refers to the priests and the word “their” refers to the people of Israel.
 NUM	10	7	cga9			0	When the community gathers together	Alternate translation: “To gather the community together”
-NUM	10	8	ias7	figs-you		0	be a regulation for you	Alternate translation: “be a rule for you.” Here “you” is plural and refers to the people of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+NUM	10	8	ias7	figs-you		0	be a regulation for you	Here “you” is plural and refers to the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “be a rule for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 NUM	10	9	em5l	figs-synecdoche		0	When you go to war … oppresses you	Yahweh is speaking to Moses and uses the word “you,” but he is actually referring the people of Israel going to war. Alternate translation: “When the people of Israel to war … oppresses Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 NUM	10	9	mze9	figs-metonymy		0	then you must sound an alarm with the trumpets	Here Yahweh again speaks to Moses using the word “you” but actually wants Moses to have the priests blow the trumpets. Alternate translation: “then you must command the priests to sound an alarm with the trumpets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 NUM	10	9	unu5	figs-idiom		0	call you to mind	This phrase “call to mind” means to remember. Alternate translation: “remember you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -679,9 +677,9 @@ NUM	10	10	elw2	figs-metonymy		0	you must blow the trumpets	Here Yahweh again spe
 NUM	10	10	cu9l	translate-hebrewmonths		0	at the beginnings of the months	There are 12 months on the Hebrew calendar. The beginning phase of the moon with its sliver of light marked the beginning of each month in the lunar calendar. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
 NUM	10	10	d7nd	figs-you		0	your burnt offerings … your fellowship offerings … you to me	In these phrases the words “your” and “you” are plural and refer to the people of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 NUM	10	10	fs2w			0	over the sacrifices	Alternate translation: “in honor of the sacrifices”
-NUM	10	10	ii25	figs-abstractnouns		0	will act as a reminder of you to me	Alternate translation: “will act as a memorial for you of me.” The word “reminder” can be expressed with the verb “remind.” Alternate translation: “will always remind you of me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+NUM	10	10	ii25	figs-abstractnouns		0	will act as a reminder of you to me	The word “reminder” can be expressed with the verb “remind.” Alternate translation: “will always remind you of me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 NUM	10	10	da3q			0	These will act	The word “these” refers to the trumpets and the sacrifices.
-NUM	10	11	g9q8	translate-ordinal		0	In the second year	Alternate translation: “In year 2.” This refers to the second year after Yahweh brought the Israelites out of Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+NUM	10	11	g9q8	translate-ordinal		0	In the second year	This refers to the second year after Yahweh brought the Israelites out of Egypt. Alternate translation: “In year 2” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 NUM	10	11	etr3	translate-ordinal	בַּ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֖י בְּ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֣ים בַּ⁠חֹ֑דֶשׁ	1	in the second month, on 20 in the month	The word **second** is the ordinal form of "two." Alternate translation: “on day 20 of month 2” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 NUM	10	11	obou	translate-hebrewmonths	בַּ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֖י בְּ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֣ים בַּ⁠חֹ֑דֶשׁ	1	in the second month, on 20 in the month	This is the **second month** of the Hebrew calendar. Alternate translation: “on day 20 of month 2” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
 NUM	10	11	be2g	figs-activepassive		0	the cloud was lifted	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the cloud rose up” or “Yahweh lifted the cloud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -783,7 +781,8 @@ NUM	12	10	e5f3	figs-simile		0	was as white as snow	Leprosy turned Miriam’s ski
 NUM	12	11	e1yt	figs-metonymy		0	do not hold this sin against us	To hold people’s sin against them is to say that they are guilty for their sin. Here it represents punishing them for their sin. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 NUM	12	12	ml35	figs-simile	אַל־ נָ֥א תְהִ֖י כַּ⁠מֵּ֑ת	1	Please do not let her be like the dead one	Aaron compares the deadly leprosy of Miriam to a stillborn baby who has begun to decompose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 NUM	12	13	tf8r			0	Please heal her, God, please	Here “please” is repeated for emphasis.
-NUM	12	14	f2gq	figs-hypo		0	If her father had spit in her face	This describes something that could have happened but did not. Spitting in someone’s face was a terrible insult. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
+NUM	12	14	f2gq	figs-hypo	וְ⁠אָבִ֨י⁠הָ֙ יָרֹ֤ק יָרַק֙ בְּ⁠פָנֶ֔י⁠הָ	1	If her father had spit in her face	This describes something that could have happened but did not. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
+NUM	12	14	iv3z	translate-symaction	וְ⁠אָבִ֨י⁠הָ֙ יָרֹ֤ק יָרַק֙ בְּ⁠פָנֶ֔י⁠הָ	1	If her father had spit in her face	Spitting in someone’s face was a terrible insult. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 NUM	12	15	dk19	figs-metaphor		0	Miriam was shut outside the camp	Being sent out of the camp and not being allowed to go back in is spoken of as if there were a door that was closed behind her. Alternate translation: “Miriam was sent outside the camp” or “Miriam was kept outside the camp” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	12	15	ww7l	figs-activepassive		0	Miriam was shut outside the camp	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Moses shut Miriam outside the camp” or “Moses sent Miriam outside the camp” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	12	16	w7ur			0	Hazeroth	This is the name of a place in the desert. See how you translated it in [Numbers 11:35](../11/35.md).
@@ -831,7 +830,7 @@ NUM	14	3	r8f9	figs-rquestion		0	Why did Yahweh bring us to this land to die by t
 NUM	14	3	c2ap	figs-metonymy		0	to die by the sword	Here “the sword” represents either being killed by the sword or being killed in battle. Alternate translation: “to die when people attack us with swords” or “to die in battle” or (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 NUM	14	3	y89n	figs-rquestion		0	Is it not better for us to return to Egypt?	The people use this question to encourage people to agree with them that it would be better to return to Egypt. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “It would be better for us to return to Egypt than to try to conquer Canaan.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 NUM	14	4	t6qp			0	They said to each another	This refers to the people of Israel.
-NUM	14	5	f4j7	translate-symaction		0	lay facedown	Alternate translation: “lay down with their faces touching the ground.” Moses and Aaron did this to show that they were humbling themselves before God. They feared that God might punish the people for rebelling against him. Alternate translation: “lay facedown in humility to God” or “lay facedown to pray to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
+NUM	14	5	f4j7	translate-symaction		0	lay facedown	Moses and Aaron did this to show that they were humbling themselves before God. They feared that God might punish the people for rebelling against him. Alternate translation: “lay facedown in humility to God” or “lay facedown to pray to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 NUM	14	6	p2vs	translate-names		0	Nun … Jephunneh	These are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NUM	14	6	d9ig	figs-activepassive		0	who were some of those sent	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “who were some of those whom Moses sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	14	6	s58b	translate-symaction		0	tore their clothes	Tearing one’s clothes was a gesture indicating the person is very troubled and is mourning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
@@ -840,12 +839,12 @@ NUM	14	9	yk5g	figs-metaphor	כִּ֥י לַחְמֵ֖⁠נוּ הֵ֑ם	1	for th
 NUM	14	9	en4q	figs-activepassive		0	Their protection will be removed from them	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Yahweh will remove their protection from them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	14	9	z1a2	figs-abstractnouns		0	Their protection	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **protection**, you could express the same idea with “protect.” Alternate translation: “Anyone that might protect them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 NUM	14	11	g9t8	figs-rquestion		0	How long must this people despise me? How long must they fail to trust me, despite all the signs … them?	Yahweh uses these questions to show that he was angry and had lost patience with the people. They can be translated as statements. Alternate translation: “This people has despised me for too long. They have failed to trust me for too long, despite all the signs … them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-NUM	14	12	fg73			0	disinherit them	Alternate translation: “reject them from being my people.” This may imply that he would destroy them, and some versions translate it that way.
+NUM	14	12	fg73			0	disinherit them	This may imply that he would destroy them, and some versions translate it that way. Alternate translation: “reject them from being my people”
 NUM	14	12	i52q	figs-you		0	make from your own clan	Here “your” is singular and refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-NUM	14	14	ugy1	figs-metaphor		0	you are seen face to face	This could mean: (1) Moses speaks of God showing himself to his people as if God had allowed them to actually see his face. Alternate translation: “they have seen you” or (2) Moses speaks of the intimate relationship between him and God as if Moses could see God’s face when God spoke to him. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you speak directly to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+NUM	14	14	ugy1	figs-metaphor		0	you are seen face to face	This could mean: (1) Moses speaks of God showing himself to his people as if God had allowed them to actually see his face. Alternate translation: “they have seen you” or (2) Moses speaks of the intimate relationship between him and God as if Moses could see God’s face when God spoke to him. Alternate translation: “you speak directly to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	14	15	py5f	figs-metaphor		0	as one man	Killing them all at the same time is spoken of as killing them as one person. Alternate translation: “all at one time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	14	18	rp6d	figs-abstractnouns		0	abundant in covenant faithfulness	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **faithfulness**, you could express the same idea with “faithful” or “faithfully.” Alternate translation: “always faithful to his covenant” or “always faithfully loves his people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-NUM	14	18	gp2r	figs-metaphor		0	He will by no means clear the guilty	Alternate translation: “he will certainly not clear guilty people.” Clearing away people’s sin is a metaphor for refusing to punish them. God would not clear away the sin of guilty people. Alternate translation: “He will always punish the guilty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+NUM	14	18	gp2r	figs-metaphor		0	He will by no means clear the guilty	Clearing away people’s sin is a metaphor for refusing to punish them. God would not clear away the sin of guilty people. Alternate translation: “He will always punish the guilty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	14	18	z9da	figs-metaphor		0	when he brings the punishment of the ancestors’ sin on their descendants	Punishing people is spoken of as if punishment were an object that could be brought and put on people. Alternate translation: “when he punishes the guilty people’s descendants for the guilty people’s sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	14	21	ft8l	figs-activepassive		0	all the earth will be filled with my glory	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “my glory will fill all the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	14	22	nu5r			0	they have still tempted me	Alternate translation: “they have continued to test me”
@@ -876,32 +875,32 @@ NUM	14	44	dy4m			0	they presumed to go up into the hill country	Alternate transl
 NUM	14	44	c73c			0	into the hill country	Much of the land of Israel is elevated. When the Israelites crossed the Jordan River valley to attack the Canaanites, there were hills that they had to climb in order to go farther into the land of Canaan.
 NUM	15	intro	s9dr			0		# Numbers 15 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br>### Purifying the people<br>As the people travel through the wilderness, Yahweh is purifying them. He is doing this so that they are able to enter into the Promised Land. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/purify]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Prostitution<br><br>The imagery of prostitution is commonly used in Scripture to indicate that Yahweh alone is to be worshiped. The people are compared to the prostitute because a husband is to only have a sexual relationship with his wife. Both the prostitute and the worship of other gods are violations of this exclusive relationship. Many cultures will struggle with this imagery because of a desire to use euphemisms. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 NUM	15	1	kit4			0	General Information:	Numbers 15:1-32 tells what God told Moses to tell the people of Israel.
-NUM	15	3	w63b	figs-metaphor		0	to produce a pleasing aroma for Yahweh from the herd or the flock	Alternate translation: “to produce from the herd or flock a smell that pleases Yahweh.” The Lord’s pleasure with the aroma represents his pleasure with the person who burns the offering. Alternate translation: “to please Yahweh by burning a sacrifice from the herd or the flock” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+NUM	15	3	w63b	figs-metaphor		0	to produce a pleasing aroma for Yahweh from the herd or the flock	The Lord’s pleasure with the aroma represents his pleasure with the person who burns the offering. Alternate translation: “to please Yahweh by burning a sacrifice from the herd or the flock” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	15	4	x238			0	a burnt offering	This refers to the offerings spoken of in [Numbers 15:3](../15/03.md).
 NUM	15	4	yb2v	translate-bvolume		0	a tenth of an ephah	An ephah is a unit of volume equal to about 22 liters. Alternate translation: “about 2 liters” or “two liters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
 NUM	15	4	tf7w	translate-bvolume		0	one-fourth of a hin	A hin is a unit of volume equal to about 3.7 liters. Alternate translation: “about 1 liter” or “one liter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
 NUM	15	6	c6bq	translate-bvolume		0	two-tenths of an ephah	An ephah is a unit of volume equal to about 22 liters. Alternate translation: “4 liters” or “four and a half liters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
 NUM	15	6	n7vu	translate-bvolume		0	a third of a hin	A hin is a unit of volume equal to about 3.7 liters. Alternate translation: “one liter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
-NUM	15	7	pp6e	figs-metaphor		0	It will produce a sweet aroma for Yahweh	Alternate translation: “It will produce a smell that pleases Yahweh.” The Lord’s pleasure with the aroma represents his pleasure with the person who burns the offering. Alternate translation: “You will please Yahweh by offering it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+NUM	15	7	pp6e	figs-metaphor		0	It will produce a sweet aroma for Yahweh	The Lord’s pleasure with the aroma represents his pleasure with the person who burns the offering. Alternate translation: “You will please Yahweh by offering it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	15	9	tu6y	translate-bvolume		0	three-tenths of an ephah	You may convert this to a modern measure. Alternate translation: “six and one half liters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
 NUM	15	9	r51w	translate-bvolume		0	half a hin	You may convert this to a modern measure Alternate translation: “two liters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
 NUM	15	10	l51m	figs-activepassive		0	made by fire	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that you burn on the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-NUM	15	10	h4r6	figs-metaphor		0	to produce a sweet aroma for Yahweh	Alternate translation: “to produce a smell that pleases Yahweh.” The Lord being pleased with the sincere worshiper who offers the sacrifice is spoken of as if God were pleased with the aroma of the sacrifice. Alternate translation: “to please Yahweh by offering it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+NUM	15	10	h4r6	figs-metaphor		0	to produce a sweet aroma for Yahweh	The Lord being pleased with the sincere worshiper who offers the sacrifice is spoken of as if God were pleased with the aroma of the sacrifice. Alternate translation: “to please Yahweh by offering it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	15	11	f88g	figs-activepassive		0	It must be done	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You must do it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	15	12	a9x6	figs-activepassive		0	must be done as described	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must do as I have described” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	15	13	p4pt	figs-activepassive		0	made by fire	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that they burn on the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-NUM	15	13	ziu6	figs-metaphor		0	to produce an aroma that is pleasing to Yahweh	Alternate translation: “to produce a smell that pleases Yahweh.” Yahweh being pleased with the sincere worshiper who offers the sacrifice is spoken of as if Yahweh were pleased with the aroma of the sacrifice. Alternate translation: “to please Yahweh by offering it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+NUM	15	13	ziu6	figs-metaphor		0	to produce an aroma that is pleasing to Yahweh	Yahweh being pleased with the sincere worshiper who offers the sacrifice is spoken of as if Yahweh were pleased with the aroma of the sacrifice. Alternate translation: “to please Yahweh by offering it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	15	14	l1di	figs-activepassive		0	he must make an offering made by fire	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he must burn an offering on the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-NUM	15	14	b1ia	figs-metaphor		0	to produce a sweet aroma for Yahweh	Alternate translation: “to produce a smell that pleases Yahweh.” The Lord being pleased with the sincere worshiper who offers the sacrifice is spoken of as if God were pleased with the aroma of the sacrifice. Alternate translation: “to please Yahweh by offering it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+NUM	15	14	b1ia	figs-metaphor		0	to produce a sweet aroma for Yahweh	The Lord being pleased with the sincere worshiper who offers the sacrifice is spoken of as if God were pleased with the aroma of the sacrifice. Alternate translation: “to please Yahweh by offering it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	15	15	wi5k			0	As you are, so also must be the traveler	This could mean: (1) “You and the traveler staying with you are alike before Yahweh” or (2) “The same law applies to both you and the traveler”
-NUM	15	15	l678	figs-explicit		0	He must act as you act before Yahweh	Alternate translation: “He must act as you act in Yahweh’s presence.” Because it says that they must act as the Israelites in Yahweh’s presence, it is implied that they must obey all of Yahweh’s commands. Alternate translation: “he must act as you act and obey all of Yahweh’s commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+NUM	15	15	l678	figs-explicit		0	He must act as you act before Yahweh	Because it says that they must act as the Israelites in Yahweh’s presence, it is implied that they must obey all of Yahweh’s commands. Alternate translation: “he must act as you act and obey all of Yahweh’s commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NUM	15	19	w5ic	figs-activepassive		0	the food produced in the land	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the food that the land produces” or “the food that you produce in the land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	15	20	yt5q	figs-metonymy		0	the first of your dough	This could mean: (1) the first grain that they would gather during the harvest or (2) the dough that they would make from the first of their grain. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 NUM	15	20	i3c9			0	a loaf	Calling it a loaf implies that they would cooked the dough first.
 NUM	15	20	huf4	figs-idiom		0	to raise it up as a raised offering	This idiom “raise it up” refers to offering it as a gift. Alternate translation: “to offer it as a gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 NUM	15	20	hum8			0	a raised offering from the threshing floor	The offering is spoken of as being from the threshing floor because this is where they would separate the grain from the other parts of the plant.
 NUM	15	22	pp7r			0	General Information:	The word “you” here refers to Israelite people.
-NUM	15	24	mua7	figs-metaphor		0	to produce a sweet aroma for Yahweh	Alternate translation: “to produce a smell that pleases Yahweh.” The Lord being pleased with the sincere worshipers who offer the sacrifice is spoken of as if God were pleased with the aroma of the sacrifice. Alternate translation: “to please Yahweh by burning it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+NUM	15	24	mua7	figs-metaphor		0	to produce a sweet aroma for Yahweh	The Lord being pleased with the sincere worshipers who offer the sacrifice is spoken of as if God were pleased with the aroma of the sacrifice. Alternate translation: “to please Yahweh by burning it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	15	24	l26t	figs-activepassive		0	must be made a grain offering and drink offering	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must make a grain offering and drink offering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	15	24	w7mx	figs-activepassive		0	as commanded by the decree	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as the decree commands” or “as I commanded when I made the decree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	15	25	xii5	figs-activepassive		0	They will be forgiven	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I will forgive them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -963,7 +962,7 @@ NUM	16	28	wbf7			0	By this you will know	Here “this” refers to what Moses wi
 NUM	16	30	ntr5	figs-simile		0	the earth opens its mouth and swallows them	Moses speaks as if the earth were alive and the opening in the ground into which these people would fall were a large mouth that would eat them. Alternate translation: “and they fall into it and are buried underneath the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 NUM	16	32	f596	figs-metaphor		0	The earth opened its mouth and swallowed them	Moses speaks of the earth as if it were alive, and the hole that the people fell into as if it were the earth’s mouth. Alternate translation: “The earth opened up like a large mouth, and they fell into it and were buried in it” or “There was a giant hole in the ground, and they fell into it and were buried in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	16	33	ruw6			0	went down alive into Sheol	A similar phrase occurs in [Numbers 16:30](../16/30.md). See how you translated it there.
-NUM	16	34	ti29			0	They exclaimed	Alternate translation: “They” refers to “All Israel.”
+NUM	16	34	ti29			0	They exclaimed	“They” refers to “All Israel.”
 NUM	16	34	ap66	figs-metaphor		0	The earth may swallow us up also	The people speak of the earth as if it were alive. Alternate translation: “The earth might open up and we too will fall into it” or “If the earth opens up again, we too will fall into it and be buried” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	16	35	hv92	figs-metaphor		0	fire flashed out from Yahweh and devoured the 250 men	Being destroyed by fire is spoken of as if they were eaten by the fire. Alternate translation: “fire flashed out from Yahweh and destroyed the 250 men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	16	35	m6g1	translate-numbers		0	250 men	Alternate translation: “two hundred and fifty men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
@@ -974,7 +973,7 @@ NUM	16	38	li47			0	they are set apart … They will be a sign	Here “they” an
 NUM	16	39	as46	figs-activepassive		0	that had been used by the men who were burned up	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the men whom the fire had burned up had used” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	16	42	wnr1			0	Then it happened	This phrase is used here to mark an important event in the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
 NUM	16	42	bu59			0	had assembled against Moses and Aaron	Alternate translation: “had assembled to complain against Moses and Aaron”
-NUM	16	42	fm5n			0	behold, the cloud	Alternate translation: “suddenly, the cloud.” Here “behold” shows that the people were surprised by what they saw.
+NUM	16	42	fm5n			0	behold, the cloud	Here “behold” shows that the people were surprised by what they saw. Alternate translation: “suddenly, the cloud”
 NUM	16	45	f8q6	figs-metaphor		0	so that I may consume them	God speaks of destroying them as if he would eat them. Alternate translation: “so that I may destroy them” or “and I will destroy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	16	45	y1ae	translate-symaction		0	lay down with their faces to the ground	This indicates that Moses and Aaron are humbling themselves before God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 NUM	16	46	pv5i	figs-metonymy		0	anger is coming from Yahweh	Anger coming from God represents God showing his anger. Alternate translation: “Yahweh is showing us his anger” or “Yahweh is very angry and is acting according to his anger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -1033,7 +1032,7 @@ NUM	18	18	maz6	figs-activepassive		0	the raised breast and the right thigh	If yo
 NUM	18	19	a4zb			0	I have given to you	God speaks as if he had already done this because it is a decision that he had already made. Alternate translation: “I give to you”
 NUM	18	19	he1c			0	as a continual share	A share is a portion of something that someone receives. Alternate translation: “as the portion that you will continually receive”
 NUM	18	19	a21e	figs-parallelism		0	an everlasting covenant of salt … a binding covenant forever	The two phrases refer to the same thing. Together they emphasize that the covenant will endure forever. Alternate translation: “an agreement forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-NUM	18	19	y9je	translate-symaction		0	an everlasting covenant of salt	Alternate translation: “a covenant made with salt.” Salt represented permanence and was used in offerings and covenant meals. Alternate translation: “a permanent covenant” or “an everlasting covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
+NUM	18	19	y9je	translate-symaction		0	an everlasting covenant of salt	Salt represented permanence and was used in offerings and covenant meals. Alternate translation: “a permanent covenant” or “an everlasting covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 NUM	18	20	hmh1	figs-metaphor		0	You will have no inheritance in the people’s land	God speaks of the land that the other people will possess as if they will inherit it. Alternate translation: “You will not possess any of the people’s land” or “You will not receive any of the land that the Israelites will possess” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	18	20	l9jb	figs-metaphor		0	I am your share and inheritance	God speaks of the great honor that Aaron and his descendants will have by serving him as priests as if God were something that they will inherit. Alternate translation: “Instead, I am what you will have” or “Instead, I will allow you to serve me and I will provide for you through that service” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	18	21	b9ib			0	look, I have given	The word “look” here adds emphasis to what follows. Alternate translation: “indeed, I have given”
@@ -1077,7 +1076,7 @@ NUM	19	17	j1j4	figs-metaphor		0	General Information:	The ideas of “clean” an
 NUM	19	20	d5l6	figs-metaphor		0	General Information:	The ideas of “clean” and “purify” represent being acceptable to God and making something acceptable to God. The ideas of “unclean,” “defile,” and “impurity,” represent not being acceptable to God, making something unacceptable to God, and the state of being unacceptable to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]))
 NUM	19	20	mz5q	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠נִכְרְתָ֛ה הַ⁠נֶּ֥פֶשׁ הַ⁠הִ֖וא	1	that person shall be cut off	Here the phrase **be cut off** means to be disowned and sent away. See how you translated this in [Numbers 9:13](../09/13.md). Alternate translation: “that person must be sent away” or “you must send that person away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	19	20	u7dz	figs-activepassive		0	The water for impurity has not been sprinkled on him	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “No one has sprinkled the water for impurity on him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-NUM	19	21	bs1a			0	the water for impurity	Alternate translation: “the water that is sprinkled on impure things to make them pure” or “the water for making things pure.” See how you translated this in [Numbers 19:13](../19/13.md)
+NUM	19	21	bs1a			0	the water for impurity	See how you translated this in [Numbers 19:13](../19/13.md). Alternate translation: “the water that is sprinkled on impure things to make them pure” or “the water for making things pure”
 NUM	20	intro	uzx8			0		# Numbers 20 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Moses’ sin<br><br>God told Moses to command water to come out of a rock for the people who were complaining that they had no water. Moses became angry with the people and hit the rock twice. God told him that he and Aaron would not be allowed to go into Canaan because he disobeyed by hitting the rock instead of just speaking to it. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br>### “It would have been better if we had died when our fellow Israelites died in front of Yahweh”<br>It is possible that this statement should be taken as hyperbole, but it does not have to be taken this way. The translator should probably avoid treating this as hyperbole. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br>### Wilderness of Sin<br>Sin is the name of a place in this chapter. It is not a place that is known for its sin. The name is not related to the meaning of the word “sin.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
 NUM	20	1	wu8m	translate-transliterate		0	the wilderness of Zin	The word “Zin” here is the Hebrew name of the wilderness. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
 NUM	20	1	ht9k	translate-hebrewmonths		0	the first month	This is the first month of the Hebrew calendar. It marks when God rescued the Israelites from the Egyptians. The first month is during the last part of March and the first part of April on the Western calendar. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
@@ -1147,13 +1146,13 @@ NUM	21	20	exou	figs-personification	וְ⁠נִשְׁקָ֖פָה עַל־ פּ
 NUM	21	21	mqq6	figs-metonymy		0	Then Israel	Here “Israel” refers to the people of Israel, and especially to their leaders. Alternate translation: “Then the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 NUM	21	22	en73			0	We will not turn into any field or vineyard	Alternate translation: “We will not go into any of your fields or vineyards”
 NUM	21	22	rgg6			0	the king’s highway	This is the main road that connects Damascus in the north to the Gulf of Aqabah in the south. See how you translated this in [Numbers 20:17](../20/17.md).
-NUM	21	23	k1p3			0	to pass through their border	Alternate translation: “to cross over their border.” Here “their” refers to the Amorites.
+NUM	21	23	k1p3			0	to pass through their border	Here “their” refers to the Amorites. Alternate translation: “to cross over their border”
 NUM	21	23	hx3p	translate-names		0	Jahaz	This is the name of a place. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NUM	21	23	g1x8	figs-synecdoche		0	he fought against Israel	Here “he” refers to King Sihon who represents himself and his army. Alternate translation: “they fought against the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 NUM	21	24	e3nm	figs-metonymy		0	Israel attacked	Here “Israel” refers to the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “The Israelites attacked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-NUM	21	24	c7k2	figs-metonymy		0	with the edge of the sword	Alternate translation: “with the sharp part of the sword.” The “edge of the sword” is associated with death and complete destruction. Alternate translation: “and completely defeated them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-NUM	21	24	ph3k			0	took their land	Alternate translation: “conquered the land of the Amorites.” Here the word “their” refers to the Amorites.
-NUM	21	24	n2gs			0	was fortified	Alternate translation: “was strongly defended.” The Israelites did not attack the Ammonites.
+NUM	21	24	c7k2	figs-metonymy		0	with the edge of the sword	The “edge of the sword” is associated with death and complete destruction. Alternate translation: “and completely defeated them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+NUM	21	24	ph3k			0	took their land	Here the word “their” refers to the Amorites. Alternate translation: “conquered the land of the Amorites”
+NUM	21	24	n2gs			0	was fortified	The Israelites did not attack the Ammonites. Alternate translation: “was strongly defended”
 NUM	21	25	c7tz			0	Heshbon and all of its villages	Here “its” is possessive to show that a relationship existed between the city of Heshbon and these nearby villages. Alternate translation: “Heshbon and the nearby villages that it controlled”
 NUM	21	26	v9rj			0	Sihon had taken all his land	Here “his” refers to the king of Moab.
 NUM	21	27	bf5s	figs-parallelism		0	Heshbon … city of Sihon	These are two names that refer to the same city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
@@ -1189,7 +1188,7 @@ NUM	22	5	gr45			0	He sent messengers	Alternate translation: “Balak sent messen
 NUM	22	5	wr6v	translate-names		0	Beor	This is the name of Balaam’s father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NUM	22	5	z33v	translate-names		0	Pethor	This is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NUM	22	5	s4sb			0	of his nation and his people	Alternate translation: “of Balaam’s nation and people”
-NUM	22	5	fr82			0	He called him	Alternate translation: “Balak called Balaam.” Balak did not speak to Balaam directly, but did so through the messengers he sent.
+NUM	22	5	fr82			0	He called him	Balak did not speak to Balaam directly, but did so through the messengers he sent. Alternate translation: “Balak called Balaam”
 NUM	22	5	vlg5	figs-hyperbole		0	They cover the face of the earth	This is an exaggeration to emphasize how many of them there were. Alternate translation: “They are extremely numerous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 NUM	22	5	h1t4	figs-idiom		0	the face of the earth	This refers to the surface of the earth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 NUM	22	6	fdd6			0	drive them	Alternate translation: “chase them”
@@ -1213,7 +1212,7 @@ NUM	22	18	q97p			0	Balak	This is the name of a man. See how you translated this
 NUM	22	18	x1c1	figs-hypo		0	Even if Balak would give me his palace full of silver and gold	Balaam is describing something that would never happen. He is emphasizing that there is nothing that could make him disobey Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 NUM	22	18	j6cl			0	I cannot go beyond the word of Yahweh … and do less or more than what he tells me	This means Balaam cannot disobey Yahweh in any way.
 NUM	22	21	z7il			0	saddled his donkey	A saddle is a seat put on the back of an animal in order to ride it.
-NUM	22	22	sb7d	figs-idiom		0	God’s anger was kindled	The increase in God’s anger is spoken of as if it was a fire starting to burn. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God became very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+NUM	22	22	sb7d	figs-idiom	וַ⁠יִּֽחַר־ אַ֣ף אֱלֹהִים֮	1	And the nose of God burned	This is an idiom that speaks of the increase in God’s anger as if his **nose** was starting to burn. Alternate translation: “And God became very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 NUM	22	22	n3m5			0	as someone hostile to Balaam	Alternate translation: “as an enemy to Balaam” or “in order to stop Balaam”
 NUM	22	23	gu3v	figs-explicit		0	with his drawn sword	A sword is drawn from its sheath in order to be ready to use. Alternate translation: “with his sword ready to attack” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NUM	22	23	ben2			0	The donkey turned off the road and went into a field	The donkey did this to avoid the angel of Yahweh.
@@ -1221,7 +1220,7 @@ NUM	22	23	r3sy			0	to turn her back	Sometimes animals are referred to as “her
 NUM	22	25	wf2x			0	She went against the wall	This was an attempt to escape from the angel of Yahweh in the road.
 NUM	22	25	uhb9			0	She went	Sometimes animals are referred to as “her” or “she.” Alternate translation: “It went”
 NUM	22	25	w91q			0	pinned Balaam’s foot against it	Alternate translation: “pushed Balaam’s foot against it” or “hurt Balaam’s foot against it”
-NUM	22	27	jh49	figs-idiom		0	Balaam’s anger was kindled	The increase in Balaam’s anger is spoken of as if it was a fire starting to burn. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Numbers 22:22](../22/22.md). Alternate translation: “Balaam became very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+NUM	22	27	jh49	figs-idiom	וַ⁠יִּֽחַר־ אַ֣ף בִּלְעָ֔ם	1	And the nose of Balaam burned	This is an idiom that speaks of the increase in Balaam’s anger as if his **nose** was starting to burn. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Numbers 22:22](../22/22.md). Alternate translation: “And Balaam became very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 NUM	22	28	imi3	figs-metonymy		0	Then Yahweh opened the donkey’s mouth so she could talk	Opening the mouth is associated with the ability to speak. Alternate translation: “Then Yahweh gave the donkey the ability to speak like a human would speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 NUM	22	28	b84t			0	She said to Balaam	Alternate translation: “The donkey said to Balaam”
 NUM	22	30	hb6v	figs-rquestion		0	Am not I your donkey on which you have ridden all your life long to this present day?	This rhetorical question was used to convict Balaam that his judgment of the donkey was unfair. This can be translated as a statement. Alternate translation: “I am your donkey on which you have ridden all your life, right up to the present moment.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -1233,7 +1232,7 @@ NUM	22	32	mb9v	figs-rquestion		0	Why have you struck your donkey these three tim
 NUM	22	32	bfy4			0	as someone hostile to you	Alternate translation: “as an enemy to you” or “to oppose you”
 NUM	22	33	nqy4	figs-hypo		0	If she had not turned … killed you and spared her life	This hypothetical statement indicated what could have happened, but it did not because the donkey’s actions saved Balaam. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 NUM	22	34	hxf8			0	So now, if it is displeasing to you	Alternate translation: “So if you do not want me to continue going”
-NUM	22	35	dyl3			0	with the leaders of Balak	Alternate translation: “with the leaders whom Balak had sent.” See how you translated “Balak” in [Numbers 22:2](../22/02.md).
+NUM	22	35	dyl3			0	with the leaders of Balak	See how you translated “Balak” in [Numbers 22:2](../22/02.md). Alternate translation: “with the leaders whom Balak had sent”
 NUM	22	36	c4ji			0	Arnon	This is the name of a river. See how you translated it in [Numbers 21:13](../21/13.md).
 NUM	22	37	kjv9	figs-rquestion		0	Did I not send men to you to summon you?	This rhetorical question is used to rebuke Balaam for delaying to come. This can be translated as a statement. Alternate translation: “Surely I sent men to summon you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 NUM	22	37	f7wv	figs-rquestion		0	Why did you not come to me?	This rhetorical question is used to rebuke Balaam for delaying to come. This can be translated as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should have come to me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -1256,7 +1255,8 @@ NUM	23	9	hq42	figs-parallelism		0	from the top of the rocks I see him … from t
 NUM	23	9	a551	figs-metonymy		0	I see him … I look at him	Here “him” is a metonym that refers to the people of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 NUM	23	9	mm7u			0	there is a people	Alternate translation: “there is a group of people”
 NUM	23	9	ni8f	figs-litotes		0	do not consider themselves as just an ordinary nation	This negative statement is used to stress that the opposite is true. Alternate translation: “they consider themselves to be a special nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
-NUM	23	10	hr4v	figs-rquestion		0	Who can count the dust of Jacob or number even only one-fourth of Israel?	Here “dust of Jacob” is a metaphor that speaks of the number of Israelites as if they were as numerous as the specks of dust. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “There are too many Israelites to count. No one could count even a fourth of them because there are so many.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+NUM	23	10	hr4v	figs-metaphor	מִ֤י מָנָה֙ עֲפַ֣ר יַעֲקֹ֔ב וּ⁠מִסְפָּ֖ר אֶת־ רֹ֣בַע יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל	1	Who can count the dust of Jacob\nor number the fourth part of Israel?	Here **dust of Jacob** is a metaphor that speaks of the number of Israelites as if they were as numerous as the specks of dust. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+NUM	23	10	x7sy	figs-rquestion	מִ֤י מָנָה֙ עֲפַ֣ר יַעֲקֹ֔ב וּ⁠מִסְפָּ֖ר אֶת־ רֹ֣בַע יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל	1	Who can count the dust of Jacob\nor number the fourth part of Israel?	If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “There are too many Israelites to count. No one could count even a fourth of them because there are so many.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 NUM	23	10	uxp9	figs-explicit		0	the death of a righteous person	It is understood that this will be a peaceful death. This can be stated. Alternate translation: “the peaceful death of a righteous person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NUM	23	10	am5i	figs-metonymy		0	a righteous person … like his	These are metonymies that refer to the people of Israel as a single person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 NUM	23	11	x2xr			0	Balak	This is the king of Moab. See how you translated this in [Numbers 22:2](../22/02.md).
@@ -1271,12 +1271,14 @@ NUM	23	16	fc1n	figs-metaphor		0	put a message in his mouth	The message is spoken
 NUM	23	16	yn5x			0	He said	Alternate translation: “Then Yahweh said”
 NUM	23	18	kka5	figs-parallelism		0	Balak, and hear … Listen to me, you son of Zippor	These two phrases mean the same thing and are repeated to emphasize how important it was for Balak to pay attention. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 NUM	23	18	d6y8			0	Balak … son of Zippor	See how you translated these names in [Numbers 22:2](../22/02.md).
-NUM	23	19	q4wm	figs-parallelism		0	Has he promised anything without doing it? Has he said he would do something without carrying it out?	Both of these questions mean the same thing and emphasize that God does what he says he will. These rhetorical questions can be translated as statements. Alternate translation: “He has never promised a thing without fulfilling what he promised. He has always done exactly what he said he would do.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+NUM	23	19	q4wm	figs-parallelism	הַ⁠ה֤וּא אָמַר֙ וְ⁠לֹ֣א יַעֲשֶׂ֔ה וְ⁠דִבֶּ֖ר וְ⁠לֹ֥א יְקִימֶֽ⁠נָּה	1	Has he said and not done,\nOr spoken and not made it arise?	Both of these clauses mean the same thing and emphasize that God does what he says he will. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+NUM	23	19	cqsi	figs-rquestion	הַ⁠ה֤וּא אָמַר֙ וְ⁠לֹ֣א יַעֲשֶׂ֔ה וְ⁠דִבֶּ֖ר וְ⁠לֹ֥א יְקִימֶֽ⁠נָּה	1	Has he said and not done,\nOr spoken and not made it arise?	These rhetorical questions can be translated as statements. Alternate translation: “He has never promised a thing without fulfilling what he promised. He has always done exactly what he said he would do.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 NUM	23	20	tga7	figs-activepassive		0	I have been commanded to bless	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has commanded me to bless the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	23	21	w1xp	figs-parallelism		0	hardship in Jacob … trouble in Israel	These two phrases mean the same thing. This could mean: (1) God has given Israel only good things or (2) there is no sin in Israel that would cause him to judge them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 NUM	23	21	i4xz			0	shouts for their king are among them	Alternate translation: “they shout with joy because Yahweh is their king”
 NUM	23	22	bnk6	figs-simile		0	with strength like that of a wild ox	This simile says that Yahweh’s great strength is equal to an ox. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
-NUM	23	23	q3q1	figs-parallelism		0	There is no sorcery that works against Jacob … no fortune-telling harms Israel	These two lines mean the same thing, that no curse that anyone puts on the nation of Israel will be effective. Here “Jacob” is a metonym that refers to Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+NUM	23	23	q3q1	figs-parallelism	כִּ֤י לֹא־ נַ֨חַשׁ֙ בְּ⁠יַעֲקֹ֔ב וְ⁠לֹא־ קֶ֖סֶם בְּ⁠יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל	1	For there is no omen against Jacob,\nand no divination against Israel	These two lines mean the same thing, that no curse that anyone puts on the nation of **Israel** will be effective. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+NUM	23	23	rriu	figs-metonymy	כִּ֤י לֹא־ נַ֨חַשׁ֙ בְּ⁠יַעֲקֹ֔ב וְ⁠לֹא־ קֶ֖סֶם בְּ⁠יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל	1	For there is no omen against Jacob,\nand no divination against Israel	Here **Jacob** is a metonym that refers to **Israel**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 NUM	23	23	xhg8	figs-activepassive		0	it must be said	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. “people must say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	23	23	yvh5			0	Look what God has done!	It is implied that what God did for them was good. Alternate translation: “Look at the good things God has done for them!”
 NUM	23	24	jm1j	figs-metaphor		0	the people rise like a lioness … he has killed	This verse is a long metaphor that speaks of Israel defeating her enemies as if Israel was a lion devouring its prey. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1296,12 +1298,14 @@ NUM	24	4	ej3r	figs-idiom		0	with his eyes open	Here “eyes open” is an idiom
 NUM	24	5	ba5v	figs-parallelism		0	How beautiful are your tents, Jacob, the place where you live, Israel!	Both of these statements mean the same thing. They emphasize the Israelite camp was beautiful to Balaam. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 NUM	24	6	qar4	figs-simile		0	Like valleys they spread out	Balaam speaks of the Israelies as if they were numerous enough to cover entire valleys. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 NUM	24	6	j8eg	figs-simile		0	like gardens by the riverside	Balaam speaks of the Israelies as if they were well-watered gardens that produce an abundant harvest. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
-NUM	24	6	l53y	translate-unknown		0	aloes planted by Yahweh	Aloes are plants with a pleasant smell that grow well even in dry conditions. Balaam speaks of the Israelies as if they would thrive and be pleasant like aloe plants. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “aloes which Yahweh has planted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+NUM	24	6	l53y	translate-unknown	כַּ⁠אֲהָלִים֙ נָטַ֣ע יְהוָ֔ה	1	like aloes Yahweh has planted	Aloes are plants with a pleasant smell that grow well even in dry conditions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+NUM	24	6	v5qb	figs-simile	כַּ⁠אֲהָלִים֙ נָטַ֣ע יְהוָ֔ה	1	like aloes Yahweh has planted	Balaam speaks of the Israelites as if they would thrive and be pleasant like aloe plants. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 NUM	24	6	aw4k	figs-simile		0	like cedars beside the waters	Cedar trees were the largest trees in Israel. Balaam speaks of the Israelies as if they grew as large as well-watered cedar trees. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 NUM	24	7	fl12	figs-metonymy		0	Water flows … well-watered	Abundant water is associated with God’s blessing on the crops of the land. Alternate translation: “God will bless Israel with plenty of water for their crops” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 NUM	24	7	a4i7	figs-metonymy		0	their seed is well-watered	Well-watered seed refers to God’s blessing on his people so that they will have abundant crops. Alternate translation: “they will have plenty of water for their seed to grow healthy crops” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 NUM	24	7	zlh1	figs-parallelism		0	Their king is to be higher … their kingdom will be honored	These two phrases have similar meaning, emphasizing how much God will bless them compared to other nations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-NUM	24	7	ftd7	translate-names		0	Their king is to be higher than Agag	Here “higher” refers to greater honor and power. This means the future king of Israel will have more honor and will be more powerful than Agag. Agag was king of the Amalekites. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+NUM	24	7	h0mq	figs-metonymy	 וְ⁠יָרֹ֤ם מֵֽ⁠אֲגַג֙ מַלְכּ֔⁠וֹ	1	And his king will be higher than Agag	Here **higher** refers to having greater honor and power. This means the future king of Israel will have more honor and will be more powerful than **Agag**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+NUM	24	7	ftd7	translate-names	 וְ⁠יָרֹ֤ם מֵֽ⁠אֲגַג֙ מַלְכּ֔⁠וֹ	1	And his king will be higher than Agag	**Agag** was king of the Amalekites. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NUM	24	7	b156	figs-activepassive		0	their kingdom will be honored	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “other people will give honor to their kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	24	8	x28i			0	God brings him	Alternate translation: “God brings the Israelites”
 NUM	24	8	n9ze	figs-simile		0	with strength like a wild ox	This simile emphasizes that the Israelites have great strength. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
@@ -1310,7 +1314,7 @@ NUM	24	9	rx4y			0	General Information:	Balaam finishes the prophecy under the co
 NUM	24	9	kq6q	figs-simile		0	He crouches down like a lion, like a lioness	In this simile, Balaam compares the Israelites to both male and female lions. This means they are dangerous and always ready to attack. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 NUM	24	9	l12k	figs-rquestion		0	Who dares disturb him?	Balaam uses a question to warn all the people to not provoke the Israelites. This can be translated as a statement. Alternate translation: “No one dares to disturb him!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 NUM	24	9	iv8q	figs-activepassive		0	May everyone who blesses him be blessed; may everyone who curses him be cursed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “May God bless those who bless the Israelites; may he curse those who curse the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-NUM	24	10	m1vp	figs-idiom		0	Balak’s anger was kindled	The increase in Balak’s anger is spoken of as if it was a fire starting to burn. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Balak became very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+NUM	24	10	m1vp	figs-idiom	וַ⁠יִּֽחַר־ אַ֤ף בָּלָק֙	1	And the nose of Balak burned	This is an idiom that speaks of the increase in Balak’s anger as if his nose was starting to burn. Alternate translation: “And Balak became very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 NUM	24	10	rgi1	translate-symaction		0	struck his hands together in anger	This was a sign of great frustration and anger. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 NUM	24	13	gi9a	figs-hypo		0	Even if Balak gave me his palace full of silver and gold	Balaam is describing something that would never happen. This statement emphasizes that there is nothing that would make Balaam disobey God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 NUM	24	13	a4su	figs-rquestion		0	Did I not say this to them?	Balaam uses a question to remind Balak about what he said earlier. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. “Alternate translation: I said this to them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -1328,7 +1332,8 @@ NUM	24	17	evy3			0	shatter Moab’s leaders	This could mean: (1) he will break t
 NUM	24	17	r3pg			0	all the descendants of Seth	This also refers to the Moabites, who were descendants of Seth.
 NUM	24	18	l7jt			0	General Information:	Balaam finishes the first of his four prophecies.
 NUM	24	18	nu8t	figs-activepassive		0	Edom will become a possession of Israel	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The Israelites will occupy Edom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-NUM	24	18	w7ft	figs-activepassive		0	Seir will also become their possession	Here “Seir” refers to the people who lived near Mount Seir. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Israel will also conquer the people of Seir” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+NUM	24	18	w7ft	figs-metonymy	וְ⁠הָיָ֧ה יְרֵשָׁ֛ה שֵׂעִ֖יר	1	and Seir will become a possession	Here **Seir** refers to the people who lived near Mount Seir.Alternate translation: “and the people of Seir will become a possession” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+NUM	24	18	ysaa	figs-activepassive	וְ⁠הָיָ֧ה יְרֵשָׁ֛ה שֵׂעִ֖יר	1	and Seir will become a possession	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Israel will also conquer the people of Seir” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	24	19	u3rj	figs-metonymy		0	Out of Jacob a king will come	Jacob was the ancestor of the Israelites. “Jacob” is a metonym that refers to the whole people group. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 NUM	24	19	d85v	figs-explicit		0	of their city	This refers to the city of Ar where Balak met Balaam. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NUM	24	20	j37m	figs-123person		0	his final end	A singular pronoun is used because the Amalekites are spoken of as a single person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
@@ -1344,7 +1349,7 @@ NUM	25	intro	vs5m			0		# Numbers 25 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and format
 NUM	25	1	bx2y	translate-names		0	Shittim	This is the name of a place in Moab. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NUM	25	2	zud9	translate-symaction		0	bowed down	This was an act of worship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 NUM	25	3	bum9			0	Peor	Peor was the name of a mountain. See how you translated this in [Numbers 23:28](../23/28.md).
-NUM	25	3	idj8	figs-idiom		0	Yahweh’s anger was kindled	The increase in Yahweh’s anger is spoken of as if it was a fire starting to burn. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Numbers 21:20](../21/20.md). Alternate translation: “Yahweh became very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+NUM	25	3	idj8	figs-idiom	וַ⁠יִּֽחַר־ אַ֥ף יְהוָ֖ה	1	And the nose of Yahweh burned	This is an idiom that speaks of the increase in Yahweh’s anger as if his nose was starting to burn. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Numbers 21:20](../21/20.md). Alternate translation: “And Yahweh became very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 NUM	25	4	ea9b	figs-explicit		0	all the leaders of the people	It is implied that this refers to the leaders who were guilty of idolatry. The full meaning of this statement can be made clear. Alternate translation: “all the leaders of the people who are guilty of idolatry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NUM	25	4	yg38			0	to expose them in the daylight	This means that the leaders of Israel will kill these people and leave their dead bodies out where all the people can see them.
 NUM	25	5	by2q			0	to Israel’s leaders	Alternate translation: “to Israel’s leaders who were not guilty of idolatry”
@@ -1357,7 +1362,6 @@ NUM	25	11	z3sf			0	Connecting Statement:	Yahweh begins to speak to Moses.
 NUM	25	11	j3xu	figs-metaphor		0	turned my rage away from the people of Israel	God’s rage is spoken of as if it were something that could be physically pushed aside in order to stop it. Alternate translation: “caused me to no longer be angry with the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	25	11	lt3f	figs-metaphor		0	I have not consumed the people of Israel in my fierceness	God is spoken of as if he were a fierce animal that could have eaten up the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “I have not destroyed the people of Israel in my terrible anger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	25	13	eu4w			0	Connecting Statement:	This is the end of Yahweh’s speech that begins in verse 11.
-NUM	25	13	lgg4	figs-quotesinquotes		0	For him … of Israel.”’”	This is the end of Yahweh’s speech from [Numbers 25:11](./10.md). This has quotations within quotations. The direct quotations can be stated as indirect quotation. “Therefore say to them that Yahweh says that he is giving to Phinehas his covenant of peace. For him and his descendants after him, it will be a covenant of an everlasting priesthood because he was zealous for Yahweh, his God. He has atoned for the people of Israel.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 NUM	25	14	u1w2	writing-background		0	Now	This switches from the main story line to background information about Zimri and Kozbi. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 NUM	25	14	xw6i	figs-activepassive		0	who was killed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom Phinehas killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	25	14	r6ve	translate-names		0	Zimri … Salu	These are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -1374,7 +1378,7 @@ NUM	26	2	vni2	translate-numbers		0	twenty years old and up	Alternate translation
 NUM	26	3	z8gq			0	spoke to them	Alternate translation: “spoke to the Israelite leaders”
 NUM	26	3	i73q			0	plains	A plain is a large flat area of land.
 NUM	26	4	sjq1	translate-numbers		0	twenty years old and up	Alternate translation: “20 years old and older” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-NUM	26	5	l25r	translate-names		0	General Information:	The leaders of Israel are counting the men, 20 years old and older, according to their tribes and families. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
+NUM	26	5	l25r	translate-names		0	General Information:	The leaders of Israel are counting the men, 20 years old and older, according to their tribes and families. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NUM	26	5	jv53			0	was the firstborn of Israel	Here “Israel” refers to the man also known as Jacob.
 NUM	26	5	blb4			0	From his son	The word “his” refers to Rueben.
 NUM	26	7	ukj3	translate-numbers		0	43,730 men	Alternate translation: “forty-three thousand seven hundred and thirty men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
@@ -1386,31 +1390,31 @@ NUM	26	10	l16k	figs-personification		0	fire devoured 250 men	Here the fire is sp
 NUM	26	10	y2z4	translate-numbers		0	250 men	Alternate translation: “two hundred and fifty men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 NUM	26	11	nb3j			0	Korah’s line	Alternate translation: “all of Korah’s family”
 NUM	26	11	y8qj			0	die out	Alternate translation: “end”
-NUM	26	12	utp6	translate-names		0	General Information:	The leaders of Israel are counting the men, 20 years old and older, according to their tribes and families. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
+NUM	26	12	utp6	translate-names		0	General Information:	The leaders of Israel are counting the men, 20 years old and older, according to their tribes and families. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NUM	26	14	y9j2	translate-numbers		0	22,200 men	Alternate translation: “twenty-two thousand two hundred men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-NUM	26	15	rb4h	translate-names		0	General Information:	The leaders of Israel are counting the men, 20 years old and older, according to their tribes and families. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
+NUM	26	15	rb4h	translate-names		0	General Information:	The leaders of Israel are counting the men, 20 years old and older, according to their tribes and families. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NUM	26	18	nkh7	translate-numbers		0	40,500 men	Alternate translation: “forty thousand five hundred men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-NUM	26	19	hbe7	translate-names		0	General Information:	The leaders of Israel are counting the men, 20 years old and older, according to their tribes and families. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
+NUM	26	19	hbe7	translate-names		0	General Information:	The leaders of Israel are counting the men, 20 years old and older, according to their tribes and families. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NUM	26	22	ar7q	translate-numbers		0	76,500 men	Alternate translation: “seventy-six thousand five hundred men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-NUM	26	23	f73t	translate-names		0	General Information:	The leaders of Israel are counting the men, 20 years old and older, according to their tribes and families. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
+NUM	26	23	f73t	translate-names		0	General Information:	The leaders of Israel are counting the men, 20 years old and older, according to their tribes and families. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NUM	26	25	da8l	translate-numbers		0	64,300 men	Alternate translation: “sixty-four thousand three hundred men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-NUM	26	26	w3fz	translate-names		0	General Information:	The leaders of Israel are counting the men, 20 years old and older, according to their tribes and families. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
+NUM	26	26	w3fz	translate-names		0	General Information:	The leaders of Israel are counting the men, 20 years old and older, according to their tribes and families. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NUM	26	27	j5hx	translate-numbers		0	60,500 men	Alternate translation: “sixty thousand five hundred men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 NUM	26	28	fqy4	translate-names		0	General Information:	The leaders of Israel are counting the men, 20 years old and older, according to their tribes and families. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NUM	26	30	b45q	translate-names		0	General Information:	The leaders of Israel are counting the men, 20 years old and older, according to their tribes and families. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-NUM	26	33	slu8	translate-names		0	General Information:	The leaders of Israel are counting the men, 20 years old and older, according to their tribes and families. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
+NUM	26	33	slu8	translate-names		0	General Information:	The leaders of Israel are counting the men, 20 years old and older, according to their tribes and families. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NUM	26	34	af6u	translate-numbers		0	52,700 men	Alternate translation: “fifty-two thousand seven hundred men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-NUM	26	35	jhj1	translate-names		0	General Information:	The leaders of Israel are counting the men, 20 years old and older, according to their tribes and families. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
+NUM	26	35	jhj1	translate-names		0	General Information:	The leaders of Israel are counting the men, 20 years old and older, according to their tribes and families. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NUM	26	37	y5mi	translate-numbers		0	32,500 men	Alternate translation: “thirty-two thousand five hundred men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 NUM	26	37	np8k	figs-explicit		0	These were Joseph’s descendants, counted	The word “these” refers to all of the men descended from Joseph’s sons, Ephraim and Manasseh. The full meaning of this statement can be made clear. Alternate translation: “These were Joseph’s descendants, descended from his sons Manasseh and Ephraim, counted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NUM	26	37	fxl7	figs-activepassive		0	counted in each of their clans	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they counted them in each of their clans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-NUM	26	38	fb9i	translate-names		0	General Information:	The leaders of Israel are counting the men, 20 years old and older, according to their tribes and families. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
+NUM	26	38	fb9i	translate-names		0	General Information:	The leaders of Israel are counting the men, 20 years old and older, according to their tribes and families. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NUM	26	41	t1c5	translate-numbers		0	45,600 men	Alternate translation: “forty-five thousand six hundred men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-NUM	26	42	x61c	translate-names		0	General Information:	The leaders of Israel are counting the men, 20 years old and older, according to their tribes and families. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
+NUM	26	42	x61c	translate-names		0	General Information:	The leaders of Israel are counting the men, 20 years old and older, according to their tribes and families. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NUM	26	43	s5va	translate-numbers		0	64,400 men	Alternate translation: “sixty-four thousand four hundred men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-NUM	26	44	lci1	translate-names		0	General Information:	The leaders of Israel are counting the men, 20 years old and older, according to their tribes and families. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
+NUM	26	44	lci1	translate-names		0	General Information:	The leaders of Israel are counting the men, 20 years old and older, according to their tribes and families. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NUM	26	47	lw59	translate-numbers		0	53,400 men	Alternate translation: “fifty-three thousand four hundred men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-NUM	26	48	v1j8	translate-names		0	General Information:	The leaders of Israel are counting the men, 20 years old and older, according to their tribes and families. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
+NUM	26	48	v1j8	translate-names		0	General Information:	The leaders of Israel are counting the men, 20 years old and older, according to their tribes and families. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NUM	26	50	pgj7	translate-numbers		0	45,400 men	Alternate translation: “forty-five thousand four hundred men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 NUM	26	51	l55t			0	the complete count	Alternate translation: “the total number”
 NUM	26	51	tr8m	translate-numbers		0	601,730	Alternate translation: “six-hundred and one thousand, seven hundred and thirty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
@@ -1432,10 +1436,11 @@ NUM	26	59	zb3x			0	She bore to Amram their children	Alternate translation: “Sh
 NUM	26	60	wwe5			0	Nadab … Abihu … Ithamar	See how you translated these men’s names in [Numbers 3:2](../03/02.md).
 NUM	26	61	qsd1	figs-metonymy		0	they offered before Yahweh unacceptable fire	Here the word “fire” is used to refer to “burning incense.” See how you translated a similar phrase in [Numbers 3:4](../03/04.md). Alternate translation: “they burned an incense offering to Yahweh in a way that he did not approve of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 NUM	26	62	ane3	figs-activepassive		0	who were counted	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom the leaders counted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-NUM	26	62	ac2r	translate-numbers		0	twenty-three thousand	Alternate translation: “23,000” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
+NUM	26	62	ac2r	translate-numbers	שְׁלֹשָׁ֤ה וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִים֙ אֶ֔לֶף	1	23,000	Alternate translation: “twenty-three thousand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 NUM	26	62	kw5d			0	one month old and up	Alternate translation: “one month old and older”
 NUM	26	62	atk6	figs-activepassive		0	they were not counted	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but the leaders did not count them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-NUM	26	62	e3dt	figs-activepassive		0	because no inheritance was given to them	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Here “inheritance” refers to land inherited. The full meaning of this statement can be made clear. Alternate translation: “because Yahweh said they would not receive any land as an inheritance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+NUM	26	62	e3dt	figs-explicit	כִּ֠י לֹא־ נִתַּ֤ן לָ⁠הֶם֙ נַחֲלָ֔ה בְּ⁠ת֖וֹךְ בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל	1	because an inheritance in the midst of the sons of Israel was not given to them	Here, **inheritance** refers to land they inherited. The full meaning of this statement can be made clear. Alternate translation: “because land in the midst of the sons of Israel was not given to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+NUM	26	62	snpx	figs-activepassive	כִּ֠י לֹא־ נִתַּ֤ן לָ⁠הֶם֙ נַחֲלָ֔ה בְּ⁠ת֖וֹךְ בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל	1	because an inheritance in the midst of the sons of Israel was not given to them	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “because Yahweh said they would not receive any land as an inheritance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	26	63	l1g7	figs-activepassive		0	who were counted by Moses and Eleazar the priest	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom Moses and Eleazar the priest counted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	26	64	fpg9			0	there was no man	Alternate translation: “there were no men”
 NUM	26	64	bwj6	figs-activepassive		0	who had been counted by Moses and Aaron the priest	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom Moses and Aaron the priest had counted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1444,7 +1449,7 @@ NUM	26	65	zm6j	figs-doublenegatives		0	There was not a man left among them, exce
 NUM	26	65	sl65			0	son of Jephunneh	Jephunneh was Caleb’s father. See how you translated this in [Numbers 13:6](../13/06.md).
 NUM	26	65	j2tl			0	son of Nun	Nun was Joshua’s father. See how you translated this in [Numbers 11:28](../11/28.md).
 NUM	27	intro	g57e			0		# Numbers 27 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Daughters<br>The daughters of Korah received no land because their father was punished by Yahweh. Yahweh still graciously gave them their father’s portion of land. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]])<br><br>### The new leader is Joshua<br><br>God told Moses to appoint Joshua as the new leader. Joshua became Yahweh’s anointed leader. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/appoint]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/anoint]])
-NUM	27	1	r2z7			0	Then to Moses came the daughters of Zelophehad … son of Joseph	Alternate translation: “Then the daughters of Zelophehad son of Hepher son of Gilead son of Machir son of Manasseh, of the clans of Manasseh son of Joseph came to Moses.” This tells us the genealogy of Zelophehad.
+NUM	27	1	r2z7			0	Then to Moses came the daughters of Zelophehad … son of Joseph	This tells us the genealogy of Zelophehad. Alternate translation: “Then the daughters of Zelophehad son of Hepher son of Gilead son of Machir son of Manasseh, of the clans of Manasseh son of Joseph came to Moses”
 NUM	27	1	xh5x			0	Zelophehad son of Hepher … Mahlah, Noah, Hoglah, Milkah, and Tirzah	See how you translated these men’s names in [Numbers 26:33](../26/33.md).
 NUM	27	1	f1ul			0	Gilead … Machir	See how you translated these men’s names in [Numbers 26:29](../26/29.md).
 NUM	27	2	ma3g			0	They stood	Alternate translation: “The daughters of Zelophehad stood”
@@ -1487,129 +1492,169 @@ NUM	28	2	d2nc	figs-activepassive		0	the food of my offerings made by fire to pro
 NUM	28	2	ii63			0	a sweet aroma for me	Alternate translation: “a smell I enjoy”
 NUM	28	3	ng8v	figs-activepassive		0	the offering made by fire	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. “the burnt offering” or “the offering you have burned by fire on the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	28	5	xae3	figs-activepassive		0	mixed with	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. “which you have mixed with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-NUM	28	5	n3fd	translate-fraction		0	a tenth of an ephah	Alternate translation: “A tenth” means one part out of ten equal parts. This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “2 liters” or “a tenth of an ephah (which is about 2 liters)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
-NUM	28	5	y354	translate-fraction		0	one-fourth of a hin	Alternate translation: “One-fourth” means one part out of four equal parts. This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “a liter” or “one-fourth of a hin (which is almost 1 liter)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
-NUM	28	5	gu2x			0	beaten oil	Alternate translation: “pressed oil” or “pure olive oil.” This refers to oil that has been pressed out of olives.
+NUM	28	5	n3fd	translate-fraction	וַ⁠עֲשִׂירִ֧ית הָ⁠אֵיפָ֛ה	1	and the tenth of an ephah of	A **tenth** means one part out of ten equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
+NUM	28	5	x6xh	translate-bvolume	וַ⁠עֲשִׂירִ֧ית הָ⁠אֵיפָ֛ה	1	and the tenth of an ephah of	You can express this in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “2 liters of” or “a tenth of an ephah (which is about 2 liters) of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
+NUM	28	5	y354	translate-fraction	רְבִיעִ֥ת הַ⁠הִֽין	1	the fourth of a hin of	One **fourth** means one part out of four equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
+NUM	28	5	r9di	translate-bvolume	רְבִיעִ֥ת הַ⁠הִֽין	1	the fourth of a hin of	You can express this in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “a liter of” or “one-fourth of a hin (which is almost 1 liter) of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
+NUM	28	5	gu2x			0	beaten oil	This refers to oil that has been pressed out of olives. Alternate translation: “pressed oil” or “pure olive oil”
 NUM	28	6	r7yz	figs-activepassive		0	that was commanded at Mount Sinai	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that Yahweh commanded at Mount Sinai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	28	6	i5mv	figs-activepassive		0	made by fire	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that you burned on the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-NUM	28	7	j24a	translate-fraction		0	one-fourth of a hin	Alternate translation: “One-fourth” means one part out of four equal parts. This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “a liter” or “one-fourth of a hin (which is almost 1 liter)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
+NUM	28	7	j24a	translate-fraction	רְבִיעִ֣ת הַ⁠הִ֔ין	1	shall be the fourth of a hin	The **fourth** means one part out of four equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
+NUM	28	7	mkas	translate-bvolume	רְבִיעִ֣ת הַ⁠הִ֔ין	1	shall be the fourth of a hin	This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “shall be a liter” or “shall be one-fourth of a hin (which is almost 1 liter)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
 NUM	28	7	uf3m	figs-explicit		0	You must pour out in the holy place a drink offering of strong drink to Yahweh	This sentence describes the drink offering that is to accompany the lamb. The full meaning of this statement can be made clear. Alternate translation: “It must be a drink offering of strong drink and you must pour it out in the holy place to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NUM	28	8	sd8n	figs-activepassive		0	like the one offered	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “like the one you offered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-NUM	28	9	nv9k	translate-fraction		0	two-tenths of an ephah	Alternate translation: “Two-tenths” means two parts out of ten equal parts. This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “four and a half liters” or “two tenths of an ephah (which is about 4.5 liters)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
+NUM	28	9	nv9k	translate-fraction	וּ⁠שְׁנֵ֣י עֶשְׂרֹנִ֗ים סֹ֧לֶת	1	and two-tenths fine flour	The **two-tenths** means two parts out of ten equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
+NUM	28	9	vgpx	figs-ellipsis	וּ⁠שְׁנֵ֣י עֶשְׂרֹנִ֗ים סֹ֧לֶת	1	and two-tenths fine flour	The words “of an ephah” are understood and you may state them clearly. Alternate translation: “and two-tenths of an ephah of fine flour” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 NUM	28	9	l25u	figs-activepassive		0	mixed with oil	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which you have mixed with oil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	28	9	rgb3	figs-explicit		0	the drink offering with it	Many offerings had a drink offering that was required to be offered with them. The full meaning of the can be made clear. Alternate translation: “the drink offering that accompanies it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-NUM	28	12	rs1i	translate-fraction		0	three-tenths of an ephah	Alternate translation: “Three-tenths” means three parts out of ten equal parts. This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “six liters” or “three-tenths of an ephah (which is about six liters)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
+NUM	28	12	rs1i	translate-fraction	וּ⁠שְׁלֹשָׁ֣ה עֶשְׂרֹנִ֗ים סֹ֤לֶת	1	and three-tenths fine flour	The **three-tenths** means three parts out of ten equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
+NUM	28	12	sid3	figs-ellipsis	וּ⁠שְׁלֹשָׁ֣ה עֶשְׂרֹנִ֗ים סֹ֤לֶת	1	and three-tenths fine flour	The words “of an ephah” are understood and you may state them clearly. Alternate translation: “and three-tenths of an ephah of fine flour” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 NUM	28	12	sa2r	figs-activepassive		0	mixed with oil	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which you have mixed with oil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-NUM	28	12	vr13	figs-ellipsis		0	two-tenths of fine flour	The words “of an ephah” are understood and may stated clearly. “Two-tenths” means two parts out of ten equal parts. This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “four and a half liters of fine flour” or “two-tenths of an ephah (which is about 4.5 liters) of fine flour” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
-NUM	28	13	kh7w	translate-fraction		0	a tenth of an ephah	Alternate translation: “A tenth” means one part out of ten equal parts. This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “2 liters” or “a tenth of an ephah (which is about 2 liters)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
+NUM	28	12	vr13	translate-fraction	וּ⁠שְׁנֵ֣י עֶשְׂרֹנִ֗ים סֹ֤לֶת	1	and two-tenths fine flour	The **two-tenths** means two parts out of ten equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
+NUM	28	12	pu5x	figs-ellipsis	וּ⁠שְׁנֵ֣י עֶשְׂרֹנִ֗ים סֹ֤לֶת	1	and two-tenths fine flour	The words “of an ephah” are understood and you may state them clearly. Alternate translation: “and two-tenths of an ephah of fine flour” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+NUM	28	12	fcmo	translate-bvolume	וּ⁠שְׁנֵ֣י עֶשְׂרֹנִ֗ים סֹ֤לֶת	1	and two-tenths fine flour	This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “and four and a half liters of fine flour” or “and two-tenths of an ephah (which is about 4.5 liters) of fine flour” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
+NUM	28	13	kh7w	translate-fraction	וְ⁠עִשָּׂרֹ֣ן עִשָּׂר֗וֹן סֹ֤לֶת	1	a tenth of an ephah	A **tenth** means one part out of ten equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
+NUM	28	13	lme4	figs-ellipsis	וְ⁠עִשָּׂרֹ֣ן עִשָּׂר֗וֹן סֹ֤לֶת	1	and a tenth, a tenth fine flour	The words “of an ephah” are understood and you may state them clearly. Alternate translation: “and a tenth of an ephah of fine flour” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+NUM	28	13	wjym	translate-bvolume	וְ⁠עִשָּׂרֹ֣ן עִשָּׂר֗וֹן סֹ֤לֶת	1	and a tenth, a tenth fine flour	You can express this in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “2 liters of fine flour” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
 NUM	28	13	sbx3	figs-activepassive		0	made by fire	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that you burned on the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-NUM	28	14	fi54	translate-fraction		0	half a hin	Alternate translation: “Half” means one part out of two equal parts. This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “two liters” or “half a hin (which is two liters)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
-NUM	28	14	uy8x	translate-fraction		0	a third of a hin	Alternate translation: “One third of a hin.” “A third” means one part out of three equal parts. This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “1.2 liters” or “One and one-fifth liters” or “half a hin (which is 1.2 liters)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
-NUM	28	14	t84u	translate-fraction		0	one-fourth of a hin	Alternate translation: “One-fourth” means one part out of four equal parts. This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “a liter” or “one-fourth of a hin (which is almost 1 liter)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
+NUM	28	14	fi54	translate-fraction	חֲצִ֣י הַ⁠הִין֩	1	half of a hin of	A **half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
+NUM	28	14	if3y	translate-bvolume	חֲצִ֣י הַ⁠הִין֩	1	half of a hin of	You can express this in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “two liters of” or “half a hin (which is two liters) of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
+NUM	28	14	uy8x	translate-fraction	וּ⁠שְׁלִישִׁ֧ת הַ⁠הִ֣ין	1	and a third of a hin	A **third** means one part out of three equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
+NUM	28	14	wif2	translate-bvolume	וּ⁠שְׁלִישִׁ֧ת הַ⁠הִ֣ין	1	and a third of a hin	You can express in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “1.2 liters of” or “one and one-fifth liters of” or “half a hin (which is 1.2 liters) of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
+NUM	28	14	t84u	translate-fraction	וּ⁠רְבִיעִ֥ת הַ⁠הִ֛ין	1	and a fourth of a hin	A **fourth** means one part out of four equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
+NUM	28	14	gekh	translate-bvolume	וּ⁠רְבִיעִ֥ת הַ⁠הִ֛ין	1	and a fourth of a hin	You can express this in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “a liter” or “one-fourth of a hin (which is almost 1 liter)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
 NUM	28	15	pi9d	figs-activepassive		0	One male goat as a sin offering to Yahweh must be offered	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You must offer one male goat to Yahweh as a sin offering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-NUM	28	16	vq3q	translate-hebrewmonths		0	the first month, on the fourteenth day of the month	Alternate translation: “During the first month, on day 14 of the month.” This refers to the first month of the Hebrew calendar. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+NUM	28	16	vq3q	translate-hebrewmonths	וּ⁠בַ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֗וֹן בְּ⁠אַרְבָּעָ֥ה עָשָׂ֛ר י֖וֹם לַ⁠חֹ֑דֶשׁ	1	And in the first month, on day 14 of the month	This refers to the first **month** of the Hebrew calendar. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
 NUM	28	16	k2hc			0	comes Yahweh’s Passover	Alternate translation: “you must celebrate Yahweh’s Passover”
-NUM	28	17	agz5	translate-hebrewmonths		0	On the fifteenth day of this month	Alternate translation: “On day 15 day of this month.” This refers to the first month of the Hebrew calendar. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+NUM	28	17	agz5	translate-hebrewmonths	וּ⁠בַ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֥ר י֛וֹם לַ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ הַ⁠זֶּ֖ה	1	And on day 15 of this month	This refers to the first **month** of the Hebrew calendar. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
 NUM	28	17	l12w	figs-activepassive		0	a feast is to be held	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. “you must have a feast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	28	17	gw3f	figs-activepassive		0	bread without yeast must be eaten	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. “you must eat bread without yeast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-NUM	28	18	jgc4	translate-ordinal		0	On the first day	This refers to the first day of the feast. This can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “On day 1 of the feast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-NUM	28	18	wcl9			0	there must be a holy assembly to honor Yahweh	Alternate translation: “you must gather together to worship and honor Yahweh.” The phrase “a holy assembly” means the people gather together to worship Yahweh. Worshiping Yahweh is a holy event.
+NUM	28	18	jgc4	figs-explicit	בַּ⁠יּ֥וֹם הָ⁠רִאשׁ֖וֹן	1	On the first day	This refers to the **first day** of the feast. You can state this clearly. Alternate translation: “On day 1 of the feast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+NUM	28	18	wcl9			0	there must be a holy assembly to honor Yahweh	The phrase “a holy assembly” means the people gather together to worship Yahweh. Worshiping Yahweh is a holy event. Alternate translation: “you must gather together to worship and honor Yahweh”
 NUM	28	19	v698	figs-activepassive		0	you must offer a sacrifice made by fire, a burnt offering	The idea of “burnt” can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “you must burn an offering on the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-NUM	28	20	ztc9	translate-fraction		0	three-tenths of an ephah	Alternate translation: “Three-tenths” means three parts out of ten equal parts. This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “six liters” or “three-tenths of an ephah (which is about six liters)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
+NUM	28	20	ztc9	translate-fraction	שְׁלֹשָׁ֨ה עֶשְׂרֹנִ֜ים	1	three-tenths	The **three-tenths” means three parts out of ten equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
+NUM	28	20	fvxg	figs-ellipsis	שְׁלֹשָׁ֨ה עֶשְׂרֹנִ֜ים	1	three-tenths	The words “of an ephah” are understood and you may state them clearly. Alternate translation: “three-tenths of an ephah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+NUM	28	20	gieg	translate-bvolume	שְׁלֹשָׁ֨ה עֶשְׂרֹנִ֜ים	1	three-tenths	You can express this in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “six liters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
 NUM	28	20	nb8c	figs-activepassive		0	mixed with oil	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which you have mixed with oil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-NUM	28	20	lcc6	figs-ellipsis		0	two-tenths	The words “of an ephah of fine flour” are understood from the previous phrase. They can be repeated. “Two-tenths” means two parts out of ten equal parts. This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “four and a half liters of fine flour” or “two-tenths of an ephah of fine flour (which is about 4.5 liters)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
-NUM	28	21	u36t	translate-fraction		0	a tenth of an ephah	Alternate translation: “A tenth” means one part out of ten equal parts. This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “2 liters” or “a tenth of an ephah (which is about 2 liters)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
+NUM	28	20	lcc6	translate-fraction	וּ⁠שְׁנֵ֧י עֶשְׂרֹנִ֛ים	1	and two-tenths	The **two-tenths** means two parts out of ten equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
+NUM	28	20	iyr6	figs-ellipsis	וּ⁠שְׁנֵ֧י עֶשְׂרֹנִ֛ים	1	and two-tenths	The words “of an ephah of fine flour” are understood from the previous phrase. You can repeat them here. Alternate translation: “two-tenths of an ephah of fine flour” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+NUM	28	20	mz27	translate-bvolume	וּ⁠שְׁנֵ֧י עֶשְׂרֹנִ֛ים	1	and two-tenths	You can express this in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “four and a half liters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
+NUM	28	21	u36t	translate-fraction	עִשָּׂר֤וֹן עִשָּׂרוֹן֙	1	A tenth, a tenth	A **tenth** means one part out of ten equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
+NUM	28	21	pxrj	translate-bvolume	עִשָּׂר֤וֹן עִשָּׂרוֹן֙	1	A tenth, a tenth	This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “2 liters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
+NUM	28	21	q5zp	figs-ellipsis	עִשָּׂר֤וֹן עִשָּׂרוֹן֙	1	A tenth, a tenth	The words “of an ephah of fine flour mixed with oil” are understood and you may state them clearly. Alternate translation: “One-tenth of an ephah of fine flour mixed with oil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 NUM	28	22	ma18	figs-abstractnouns		0	to make atonement	The phrase “make atonement” can be expressed with the verb “atone.” Alternate translation: “to atone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 NUM	28	23	u3dt	figs-activepassive		0	required each morning	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which Yahweh requires each morning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	28	24	whx2	figs-activepassive		0	As described here	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “As I, Yahweh, have described here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	28	24	dh1t	figs-activepassive		0	the food of the offering made by fire	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must burn the food offering on the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	28	24	zv8n			0	a sweet aroma for Yahweh	Alternate translation: “as a sweet aroma for Yahweh”
 NUM	28	24	g7rd	figs-activepassive		0	It must be offered	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You must offer it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-NUM	28	25	niw8			0	have a holy assembly to honor Yahweh	Alternate translation: “gather together to worship and honor Yahweh.” The phrase “a holy assembly” means the people gather together to worship Yahweh. Worshiping Yahweh is a holy event.
-NUM	28	26	m6k3			0	the day of the firstfruits	Alternate translation: “the day of the firstfruits, that is the day.” This refers to the day during the Festival of Weeks when they offer the grain offering to Yahweh.
-NUM	28	26	bm4a			0	have a holy assembly to honor Yahweh	Alternate translation: “gather together to worship and honor Yahweh.” The phrase “a holy assembly” means the people gather together to worship Yahweh. Worshiping Yahweh is a holy event.
-NUM	28	28	hu83	figs-activepassive		0	mixed with oil	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which you have mixed with oil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-NUM	28	28	p6rr	translate-fraction		0	three-tenths of an ephah	Alternate translation: “Three tenths” means three parts out of ten equal parts. This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “six liters” or “three-tenths of an ephah (which is about six liters)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
-NUM	28	28	w5qw	translate-fraction		0	three-tenths of an ephah	Alternate translation: “Three tenths” means three parts out of ten equal parts. This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “six liters” or “three-tenths of an ephah (which is about six liters)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
-NUM	28	28	qfh5	figs-ellipsis		0	two-tenths	The words “of an ephah of fine flour” are understood from the previous phrase and can be repeated. “Two-tenths” means two parts out of ten equal parts. This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “four and a half liters of fine flour” or “two-tenths of an ephah of fine flour (which is about 4.5 liters)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
-NUM	28	29	tdh2	translate-fraction		0	a tenth of an ephah	Alternate translation: “A tenth” means one part out of ten equal parts. This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “2 liters” or “a tenth of an ephah (which is about 2 liters)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
+NUM	28	25	niw8			0	have a holy assembly to honor Yahweh	The phrase “a holy assembly” means the people gather together to worship Yahweh. Worshiping Yahweh is a holy event. Alternate translation: “gather together to worship and honor Yahweh”
+NUM	28	26	m6k3			0	the day of the firstfruits	This refers to the day during the Festival of Weeks when they offer the grain offering to Yahweh. Alternate translation: “the day of the firstfruits, that is the day”
+NUM	28	26	bm4a			0	have a holy assembly to honor Yahweh	The phrase “a holy assembly” means the people gather together to worship Yahweh. Worshiping Yahweh is a holy event. Alternate translation: “gather together to worship and honor Yahweh”
+NUM	28	28	hu83	figs-activepassive	בְּלוּלָ֣ה בַ⁠שָּׁ֑מֶן	1	mixed with the oil	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which you have mixed with oil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+NUM	28	28	p6rr	translate-fraction	שְׁלֹשָׁ֤ה עֶשְׂרֹנִים֙	1	three-tenths	The **three-tenths** means three parts out of ten equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
+NUM	28	28	w5qw	translate-bvolume	שְׁלֹשָׁ֤ה עֶשְׂרֹנִים֙	1	three-tenths	This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “six liters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
+NUM	28	28	qfh5	translate-fraction	שְׁנֵי֙ עֶשְׂרֹנִ֔ים	1	two-tenths	The **two-tenths** means two parts out of ten equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
+NUM	28	28	amlx	translate-bvolume	שְׁנֵי֙ עֶשְׂרֹנִ֔ים	1	two-tenths	This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “four and a half liters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
+NUM	28	28	t0od	figs-ellipsis	שְׁנֵי֙ עֶשְׂרֹנִ֔ים	1	two-tenths	The words “of an ephah of fine flour mixed with oil” are understood from the previous phrase and can be repeated. Alternate translation: “two-tenths of an ephah of fine flour (which is about 4.5 liters) mixed with oil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+NUM	28	29	tdh2	translate-fraction	עִשָּׂרוֹן֙ עִשָּׂר֔וֹן	1	a tenth, a tenth	A **tenth** means one part out of ten equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
+NUM	28	29	bm0k	translate-bvolume	עִשָּׂרוֹן֙ עִשָּׂר֔וֹן	1	a tenth, a tenth	This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “2 liters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
 NUM	28	29	t9h7	figs-activepassive		0	fine flour mixed with oil	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “fine flour which you mix with oil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	28	30	yj1e	figs-abstractnouns		0	to make atonement	The word “atonement” can be expressed with the verb “atone.” Alternate translation: “to atone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 NUM	28	31	k54h	figs-possession		0	their drink offerings	This refers to the drink offerings that are required to accompany each of the animals when they are sacrificed. Alternate translation: “the drink offerings that are offered with them” or “the drink offerings that accompany them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 NUM	29	intro	gs9v			0		# Numbers 29 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br>This chapter continues the material from the previous chapter about offerings on specific days.
 NUM	29	1	n5nd			0	General Information:	Yahweh continues telling Moses what the people must do.
-NUM	29	1	wr36	translate-hebrewmonths		0	In the seventh month, on the first day of the month	This refers to the seventh month of the Hebrew calendar. Alternate translation: “On day 1 of month 7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-NUM	29	1	c4iy			0	have a holy assembly to honor Yahweh	Alternate translation: “gather together to worship and honor Yahweh.” The phrase “a holy assembly” means the people gather together to worship Yahweh. Worshiping Yahweh is a holy event.
+NUM	29	1	wr36	translate-hebrewmonths	וּ⁠בַ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֜י בְּ⁠אֶחָ֣ד לַ⁠חֹ֗דֶשׁ	1	And in the seventh month, on the first of the month	This refers to the seventh month of the Hebrew calendar. Alternate translation: “And on day 1 of month 7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
+NUM	29	1	c4iy			0	have a holy assembly to honor Yahweh	The phrase “a holy assembly” means the people gather together to worship Yahweh. Worshiping Yahweh is a holy event. Alternate translation: “gather together to worship and honor Yahweh”
 NUM	29	1	d1mb	figs-synecdoche		0	It will be a day when you blow trumpets	The word “you” refers to the people of Israel who here represent the priests. The priests blew the trumpet to begin a worship service or to gather the community together. Alternate translation: “It will be a day when the priests blow trumpets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 NUM	29	3	k2nl	figs-possession		0	their grain offering	This refers to the grain offerings that are required to accompany each of the animals when they are sacrificed. Alternate translation: “the grain offerings that are offered with them” or “the grain offerings that accompany them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 NUM	29	3	mh5z	figs-activepassive		0	mixed with oil	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which you have mixed with oil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-NUM	29	3	yys9	translate-fraction		0	three-tenths of an ephah	The phrase “of fine flour mixed with oil” is understood from the previous phrase and can be repeated. “Three-tenths” means three parts out of ten equal parts. This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “six liters of fine flour mixed with oil” or “three-tenths of an ephah (which is about six liters)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
-NUM	29	3	c9pg	figs-ellipsis		0	two-tenths	The phrase “of an ephah of fine flour mixed with oil” is understood from earlier in the sentence. “Two tenths” means two parts out of ten equal parts. This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “four and a half liters of fine flour mixed with oil” or “two-tenths of an ephah (which is about 4.5 liters)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
-NUM	29	4	chq7	translate-fraction		0	one-tenth	The phrase “of an ephah of fine flour mixed with oil” is understood from earlier in the sentence. “One-tenth” means one part out of ten equal parts. This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “2 liters of fine flour mixed with oil” or “a tenth of an ephah (which is about 2 liters)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
+NUM	29	3	yys9	translate-fraction	שְׁלֹשָׁ֤ה עֶשְׂרֹנִים֙	1	three-tenths	The **three-tenths** means three parts out of ten equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
+NUM	29	3	cruv	translate-bvolume	שְׁלֹשָׁ֤ה עֶשְׂרֹנִים֙	1	three-tenths	This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “six liters” (See:  [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
+NUM	29	3	wfp3	figs-ellipsis	שְׁלֹשָׁ֤ה עֶשְׂרֹנִים֙	1	three-tenths	The phrase “of fine flour mixed with oil” is understood from the previous phrase and can be repeated. Alternate translation: “three-tenths of an ephah (which is about six liters) of fine flour mixed with oil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+NUM	29	3	c9pg	translate-fraction	שְׁנֵ֥י עֶשְׂרֹנִ֖ים	1	two-tenths	The **two-tenths** means two parts out of ten equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
+NUM	29	3	l8ml	translate-bvolume	שְׁנֵ֥י עֶשְׂרֹנִ֖ים	1	two-tenths	This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “four and a half liters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
+NUM	29	3	yylr	figs-ellipsis	שְׁנֵ֥י עֶשְׂרֹנִ֖ים	1	two-tenths	The phrase “of an ephah of fine flour mixed with oil” is understood from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “two-tenths of an ephah (which is about 4.5 liters) of fine flour mixed with oil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+NUM	29	4	chq7	translate-fraction	וְ⁠עִשָּׂר֣וֹן אֶחָ֔ד	1	and one-tenth	The **one-tenth** means one part out of ten equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
+NUM	29	4	uehg	translate-bvolume	וְ⁠עִשָּׂר֣וֹן אֶחָ֔ד	1	and one-tenth	This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “2 liters” (See:  [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
+NUM	29	4	fdnd	figs-ellipsis	וְ⁠עִשָּׂר֣וֹן אֶחָ֔ד	1	and one-tenth	The phrase “of an ephah of fine flour mixed with oil” is understood from earlier in the sentence.  Alternate translation: “a tenth of an ephah (which is about 2 liters) of fine flour mixed with oil” (See:  [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 NUM	29	5	b36k	figs-abstractnouns		0	to make atonement	The word “atonement” can be expressed with the verb “atone.” Alternate translation: “to atone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-NUM	29	6	p8f6	translate-hebrewmonths		0	in the seventh month … the first of each month	Alternate translation: “in month 7…day 1 of each month.” The word “month” refers to a month of the Hebrew calendar. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-NUM	29	6	frt3			0	of each month: the special burnt offering … with it	Alternate translation: “of each month--the special burnt offering … with it.” This is the offering that is made on the first day of each month.
+NUM	29	6	frt3			0	of each month: the special burnt offering … with it	This is the offering that is made on the first day of each month. Alternate translation: “of each month—the special burnt offering … with it”
 NUM	29	6	h1cf	figs-possession		0	the regular burnt offering, its grain offering, and its drink offerings	This refers to the offerings the priests were to give every day. The grain offering and drink offering were to be offered with the regular burnt offering. Alternate translation: “the regular burnt offering, with the grain offering and drink offerings that accompany it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 NUM	29	6	nh25	figs-activepassive		0	you will obey what has been decreed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you will obey Yahweh’s decree” or “you will obey what Yahweh had decreed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	29	6	kle9	figs-activepassive		0	an offering made by fire to Yahweh	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “an offering you burnt on the altar to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-NUM	29	7	v8xp	translate-hebrewmonths		0	the tenth day of the seventh month	Alternate translation: “day 10 of month 7” The word “month” refers to those in the Hebrew calendar. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-NUM	29	7	dka4			0	have a holy assembly to honor Yahweh	Alternate translation: “gather together to worship and honor Yahweh.” The phrase “a holy assembly” means the people gather together to worship Yahweh. Worshiping Yahweh is a holy event.
+NUM	29	7	v8xp	translate-ordinal	וּ⁠בֶ⁠עָשׂוֹר֩ לַ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֜י הַ⁠זֶּ֗ה	1	And on the tenth of this seventh month	Alternate translation: “And on day 10 of month 7” (See:[[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+NUM	29	7	v4f3	translate-hebrewmonths	וּ⁠בֶ⁠עָשׂוֹר֩ לַ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֜י הַ⁠זֶּ֗ה	1	And on the tenth of this seventh month	The word **month** refers to those in the Hebrew calendar. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
+NUM	29	7	dka4			0	have a holy assembly to honor Yahweh	The phrase “a holy assembly” means the people gather together to worship Yahweh. Worshiping Yahweh is a holy event. Alternate translation: “gather together to worship and honor Yahweh”
 NUM	29	9	k4tv	figs-activepassive		0	fine flour mixed with oil	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “fine flour which you have mixed with oil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-NUM	29	9	ufz8	translate-fraction		0	three-tenths of an ephah	Alternate translation: “Three-tenths” means three parts out of ten equal parts. This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “six liters” or “three-tenths of an ephah (which is about six liters)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
-NUM	29	9	bde9	figs-ellipsis		0	two-tenths	The words “of an ephah” are understood from earlier in the verse. They can be repeated here. “Two-tenths” means two parts out of ten equal parts. This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “four and a half liters” or “two-tenths of an ephah (which is about 4.5 liters)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
-NUM	29	10	n1nx	translate-fraction		0	a tenth of an ephah	Alternate translation: “A tenth” means one part out of ten equal parts. This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “2 liters” or “a tenth of an ephah (which is about 2 liters)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
+NUM	29	9	ufz8	translate-fraction	שְׁלֹשָׁ֤ה עֶשְׂרֹנִים֙	1	three-tenths	The **three-tenths** means three parts out of ten equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
+NUM	29	9	qwhd	translate-bvolume	שְׁלֹשָׁ֤ה עֶשְׂרֹנִים֙	1	three-tenths	This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “six liters” (See:  [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
+NUM	29	9	argg	figs-ellipsis	שְׁלֹשָׁ֤ה עֶשְׂרֹנִים֙	1	three-tenths	The words “of an ephah” are understood from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “three-tenths of an ephah (which is about six liters) ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+NUM	29	9	bde9	translate-fraction	שְׁנֵי֙ עֶשְׂרֹנִ֔ים	1	two-tenths	The **two-tenths** means two parts out of ten equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
+NUM	29	9	muuk	translate-bvolume	שְׁנֵי֙ עֶשְׂרֹנִ֔ים	1	two-tenths	This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “four and a half liters” (See:  [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
+NUM	29	9	k18z	figs-ellipsis	שְׁנֵי֙ עֶשְׂרֹנִ֔ים	1	two-tenths	The words “of an ephah” are understood from earlier in the verse. They can be repeated here. Alternate translation: “two-tenths of an ephah (which is about 4.5 liters)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+NUM	29	10	n1nx	translate-fraction	עִשָּׂרוֹן֙ עִשָּׂר֔וֹן	1	a tenth, a tenth	The **tenth** means one part out of ten equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
+NUM	29	10	isyt	translate-bvolume	עִשָּׂרוֹן֙ עִשָּׂר֔וֹן	1	a tenth, a tenth	This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “2 liters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
+NUM	29	10	y5ik	figs-ellipsis	עִשָּׂרוֹן֙ עִשָּׂר֔וֹן	1	a tenth, a tenth	The words “of an ephah” are understood and you may state them clearly.  Alternate translation: “a tenth of an ephah (which is about 2 liters)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 NUM	29	11	ray5	figs-abstractnouns		0	of atonement	The word “atonement” can be expressed with the verb “atone.” Alternate translation: “that atones for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 NUM	29	11	cc81	figs-possession		0	its grain offering, and their drink offerings	The grain offering was to be offered with the burnt offering. The drink offerings were to be offered with both the sin offering and the burnt offering. Alternate translation: “along with the grain offering and the drink offerings that accompany them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-NUM	29	12	kw4n	translate-hebrewmonths		0	the fifteenth day of the seventh month	Alternate translation: “day 15 of month 7.” The word “month” refer to those in the Hebrew calendar. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-NUM	29	12	e72q			0	have a holy assembly to honor Yahweh	Alternate translation: “gather together to worship and honor Yahweh.” The phrase “a holy assembly” means the people gather together to worship Yahweh. Worshiping Yahweh is a holy event.
+NUM	29	12	kw4n	translate-ordinal	וּ⁠בַ⁠חֲמִשָּׁה֩ עָשָׂ֨ר י֜וֹם לַ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֗י	1	And on day 15 of the seventh month	Alternate translation: “day 15 of month 7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+NUM	29	12	zkng	translate-hebrewmonths	וּ⁠בַ⁠חֲמִשָּׁה֩ עָשָׂ֨ר י֜וֹם לַ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֗י	1	And on day 15 of the seventh month	The word **month** refer to those in the Hebrew calendar. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
+NUM	29	12	e72q			0	have a holy assembly to honor Yahweh	The phrase “a holy assembly” means the people gather together to worship Yahweh. Worshiping Yahweh is a holy event. Alternate translation: “gather together to worship and honor Yahweh”
 NUM	29	12	e2ym	figs-idiom		0	you must keep the festival for him	This is an idiom. Here the word “keep” means to observe or celebrate. The word “him” refers to Yahweh. Alternate translation: “you must observe the festival for Yahweh” or “you must celebrate the festival for Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 NUM	29	13	lh4l	figs-activepassive		0	a sacrifice made by fire	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. “you must burn it on the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	29	13	u88p	translate-numbers		0	thirteen young bulls, two rams, and fourteen male lambs	Alternate translation: “13 young bulls, 2 rams, and 14 male lambs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 NUM	29	14	ja5h	figs-activepassive		0	fine flour mixed with oil	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “fine flour which you have mixed with oil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-NUM	29	14	idt9	translate-fraction		0	three-tenths of an ephah	The phrase “of fine flour mixed with oil” is understood from earlier in the sentence and can be repeated. “Three-tenths” means three parts out of ten equal parts. This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “six liters of fine flour mixed with oil” or “three-tenths of an ephah (which is about six liters)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
+NUM	29	14	idt9	translate-fraction	שְׁלֹשָׁ֨ה עֶשְׂרֹנִ֜ים	1	three-tenths	The **three-tenths** means three parts out of ten equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
+NUM	29	14	h524	translate-bvolume	שְׁלֹשָׁ֨ה עֶשְׂרֹנִ֜ים	1	three-tenths	This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “six liters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
+NUM	29	14	lvme	figs-ellipsis	שְׁלֹשָׁ֨ה עֶשְׂרֹנִ֜ים	1	three-tenths	The phrase “an ephah of fine flour mixed with oil” is understood from earlier in the sentence and can be repeated. Alternate translation: “three-tenths of an ephah (which is about six liters) of fine flour mixed with oil” (See:  [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 NUM	29	14	hgf4	translate-numbers		0	thirteen bulls	Alternate translation: “13 bulls” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-NUM	29	14	qmq4	figs-ellipsis		0	two-tenths	The phrase “of an ephah of fine flour” is understood from earlier in the sentence. “Two-tenths” means two parts out of ten equal parts. This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “four and a half liters of fine flour” or “two-tenths of an ephah (which is about 4.5 liters)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
+NUM	29	14	qmq4	translate-fraction	שְׁנֵ֤י עֶשְׂרֹנִים֙	1	two-tenths	The **two-tenths** means two parts out of ten equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
+NUM	29	14	r1ry	translate-bvolume	שְׁנֵ֤י עֶשְׂרֹנִים֙	1	two-tenths	This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “four and a half liters” (See:  [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
+NUM	29	14	xcn4	figs-ellipsis	שְׁנֵ֤י עֶשְׂרֹנִים֙	1	two-tenths	The phrase “of an ephah of fine flour” is understood from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “two-tenths of an ephah (which is about 4.5 liters) of fine flour mixed with oil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 NUM	29	15	jj7t	translate-numbers		0	fourteen lambs	Alternate translation: “14 lambs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-NUM	29	15	qqa5	translate-fraction		0	a tenth of an ephah	The phrase “of fine flour” is understood from earlier in the sentence. “A tenth” means one part out of ten equal parts. This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “2 liters of fine flour” or “a tenth of an ephah (which is about 2 liters)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
+NUM	29	15	qqa5	translate-fraction	וְ⁠עִשָּׂרׄוֹן֙ עִשָּׂר֔וֹן	1	and a tenth, a tenth	The **tenth** means one part out of ten equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
+NUM	29	15	z8vc	translate-bvolume	וְ⁠עִשָּׂרׄוֹן֙ עִשָּׂר֔וֹן	1	and a tenth, a tenth	This can be written in modern measurements. Alternate translation: “two liters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
+NUM	29	15	i5np	figs-ellipsis	וְ⁠עִשָּׂרׄוֹן֙ עִשָּׂר֔וֹן	1	and a tenth, a tenth	The phrase “of fine flour” is understood from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “a tenth of an ephah (which is about 2 liters) of fine flour mixed with oil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 NUM	29	16	vxx2			0	its grain offering, and the drink offering with it	The grain offering and drink offering accompany the regular burnt offering.
-NUM	29	17	r62t	translate-ordinal		0	On the second day of the assembly	Alternate translation: “On day 2 of the festival.” Here the word “assembly” refers to the Festival of Weeks. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+NUM	29	17	r62t	translate-ordinal		0	On the second day of the assembly	Here the word “assembly” refers to the Festival of Weeks. Alternate translation: “On day 2 of the festival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 NUM	29	17	dus6	translate-numbers		0	twelve young bulls, two rams, and fourteen male lambs	Alternate translation: “12 young bulls, 2 rams, and 14 male lambs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 NUM	29	18	sk9u	figs-activepassive		0	as were commanded	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as Yahweh commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	29	19	f57m	figs-possession		0	its grain offering, and their drink offerings	The grain offering was to be offered with the burnt offering. Drink offerings were to be offered with both the sin offering and the burnt offering. Alternate translation: “along with the grain offering and the drink offerings that accompany them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-NUM	29	20	mi8p	translate-ordinal		0	the third day of the assembly	Alternate translation: “day 3 of the festival.” Here the word “assembly” refers to the Festival of Weeks. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+NUM	29	20	mi8p	translate-ordinal		0	the third day of the assembly	Here the word “assembly” refers to the Festival of Weeks. Alternate translation: “day 3 of the festival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 NUM	29	20	r4i9	translate-numbers		0	eleven bulls, two rams, and fourteen male lambs	Alternate translation: “11 bulls, 2 rams, and 14 male lambs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 NUM	29	21	q47t	figs-activepassive		0	as were commanded	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as Yahweh commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	29	22	fe9m	figs-possession		0	its grain offering, and their drink offerings	The grain offering was to be offered with the burnt offering. The drink offerings were to be offered with both the sin offering and the burnt offering. Alternate translation: “along with the grain offering and the drink offerings that accompany them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-NUM	29	23	kxu3	translate-ordinal		0	the fourth day of the assembly	Alternate translation: “day 4 of the festival.” Here the word “assembly” refers to the Festival of Weeks. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+NUM	29	23	kxu3	translate-ordinal		0	the fourth day of the assembly	Here the word “assembly” refers to the Festival of Weeks. Alternate translation: “day 4 of the festival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 NUM	29	23	v266	translate-numbers		0	fourteen male lambs	Alternate translation: “14 male lambs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 NUM	29	24	g8rl	figs-activepassive		0	as were commanded	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as Yahweh commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	29	25	y2d2	figs-possession		0	its grain offering, and their drink offerings	The grain offering was to be offered with the burnt offering. The drink offerings were to be offered with both the sin offering and the burnt offering. Alternate translation: “along with the grain offering and the drink offerings that accompany them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-NUM	29	26	jr4e	translate-ordinal		0	the fifth day of the assembly	Alternate translation: “day 5 of the festival.” Here the word “assembly” refers to the Festival of Weeks. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+NUM	29	26	jr4e	translate-ordinal		0	the fifth day of the assembly	Here the word “assembly” refers to the Festival of Weeks. Alternate translation: “day 5 of the festival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 NUM	29	26	wa33	translate-numbers		0	fourteen male lambs	Alternate translation: “14 male lambs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 NUM	29	27	y83f	figs-activepassive		0	as were commanded	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as Yahweh commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	29	28	dde7	figs-possession		0	its grain offering, and their drink offerings	The grain offering was to be offered with the burnt offering. The drink offerings were to be offered with both the sin offering and the burnt offering. Alternate translation: “along with the grain offering and the drink offerings that accompany them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-NUM	29	29	l7vr	translate-ordinal		0	the sixth day of the assembly	Alternate translation: “day 6 of the festival.” Here the word “assembly” refers to the Festival of Weeks. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+NUM	29	29	l7vr	translate-ordinal		0	the sixth day of the assembly	Here the word “assembly” refers to the Festival of Weeks. Alternate translation: “day 6 of the festival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 NUM	29	29	dix2	translate-numbers		0	fourteen male lambs	Alternate translation: “14 male lambs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 NUM	29	30	x5lx	figs-activepassive		0	as were commanded	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as Yahweh commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	29	31	mq57	figs-possession		0	its grain offering, and their drink offerings	The grain offering was to be offered with the burnt offering. The drink offerings were to be offered with both the sin offering and the burnt offering. Alternate translation: “along with the grain offering and the drink offerings that accompany them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-NUM	29	32	mwy5	translate-ordinal		0	the seventh day of the assembly	Alternate translation: “day 7 of the festival.” Here the word “assembly” refers to the Festival of Weeks. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+NUM	29	32	mwy5	translate-ordinal		0	the seventh day of the assembly	Here the word “assembly” refers to the Festival of Weeks. Alternate translation: “day 7 of the festival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 NUM	29	32	x55k	translate-numbers		0	fourteen male lambs	Alternate translation: “14 male lambs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 NUM	29	33	rxm4	figs-activepassive		0	as were commanded	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as Yahweh commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	29	34	vk22	figs-possession		0	its grain offering, and their drink offerings	The grain offering was to be offered with the burnt offering. The drink offerings were to be offered with both the sin offering and the burnt offering. Alternate translation: “along with the grain offering and the drink offerings that accompany them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 NUM	29	35	a9cf			0	General Information:	Yahweh tells Moses what the people must do after the seven-day festival in the seventh month.
 NUM	29	35	hs6t	translate-ordinal		0	eighth day	This “eighth” is the ordinal number for eight. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-NUM	29	35	x6n9			0	have another solemn assembly	Alternate translation: “gather together again to worship Yahweh.” This is another assembly similar to the one on the first day of the festival.
+NUM	29	35	x6n9			0	have another solemn assembly	This is another assembly similar to the one on the first day of the festival. Alternate translation: “gather together again to worship Yahweh”
 NUM	29	36	h37k	figs-activepassive		0	an offering made by fire	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must burn it on the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	29	37	hc7w	figs-possession		0	their grain offering and their drink offerings	These offerings were to be offered with the bull, the ram, and the lambs. Alternate translation: “the grain offerings and the drink offerings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 NUM	29	37	m6nc	figs-activepassive		0	as were commanded	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as Yahweh commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	29	38	nyr3	figs-possession		0	its grain offering, and their drink offerings	The grain offering was to be offered with the burnt offering. The drink offerings were to be offered with both the sin offering and the burnt offering. Alternate translation: “along with the grain offering and the drink offerings that accompany them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 NUM	29	39	zpq3			0	These are what you must offer	Alternate translation: “These offerings are what you must offer”
-NUM	29	39	y3wf			0	fixed festivals	Alternate translation: “planned festivals.” These are festivals that occurred at regularly scheduled times. The word “fixed” means “set” or “predetermined.”
+NUM	29	39	y3wf			0	fixed festivals	These are festivals that occurred at regularly scheduled times. The word “fixed” means “set” or “predetermined.” Alternate translation: “planned festivals”
 NUM	30	intro	e9dr			0		# Numbers 30 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Vows<br><br>Because a vow is a type of promise, men must do what they have vowed to do. A father or a husband has one day in which to cancel a woman’s vow. Otherwise, she must do what she vowed she would do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/vow]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promise]])
 NUM	30	2	n92a			0	a man makes a vow	The words “a man” refer to any man, not one particular man. It refers only to men and does not include women. Alternate translation: “any man”
 NUM	30	2	yep5	figs-metaphor		0	to bind himself with a binding promise	Here Moses speaks of a person promising to do something as if his promise were a physical object that he ties to himself. Alternate translation: “committing to fulfill a promise” or “promising to do something” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	30	2	d5ft	figs-parallelism		0	he must not break his word. He must keep his promise to do everything that comes out of his mouth	These two sentences have similar meanings and are combined to emphasize that he must fulfill his promises. Here “word” is a metonym that refers to what he said. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-NUM	30	2	nf8m	figs-metaphor		0	he must not break his word	The phrase “his word” refers to a man’s oaths and vows. Here Moses speaks of not fulfilling these as if they were physical objects that the man could break. Alternate translation: “he must fulfill his promises” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+NUM	30	2	nf8m	figs-metaphor	לֹ֥א יַחֵ֖ל דְּבָר֑⁠וֹ	1	he shall not profane his word	The phrase **his word** refers to a man’s oaths and vows. Alternate translation: “he must fulfill his promises” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	30	2	krx2	figs-metonymy		0	everything that comes out of his mouth	Here the word “mouth” is a metonym for the things that the man says. Alternate translation: “to do everything that he says he will do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 NUM	30	3	rh7v	figs-metaphor		0	binds herself with a promise	Here Moses speaks of a woman promising to do something as if her promise were a physical object that she ties to herself. Alternate translation: “commits herself to fulfilling a promise” or “promises to do something” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	30	4	u957	figs-doublet		0	the vow and the promise	These two phrases have very similar meanings. They emphasize what she has promised to do. Alternate translation: “the vow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -1622,27 +1667,25 @@ NUM	30	5	r6kd	figs-explicit		0	Yahweh will release her	This refers to Yahweh for
 NUM	30	6	qq7y			0	rash	something done without thinking
 NUM	30	6	r4gc	figs-metaphor		0	by which she has bound herself	Here Moses speaks of how a woman has committed herself to fulfilling a promise as if her promise were a physical object that she had bound to her body. Alternate translation: “which she has committed herself to fulfill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	30	7	s8e5	figs-ellipsis		0	says nothing to her	You may need to specify that he says nothing to her about her vow. Alternate translation: “says nothing to her about her vow” or “does not tell her to have Yahweh release her from the vow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-NUM	30	7	nh9k	figs-metaphor		0	by which she bound herself	Here Moses speaks of how a woman has committed herself to fulfilling a promise as if her promise were a physical object that she had bound to her body. Alternate translation: “that she has committed herself to fulfill” See how this is translated in [Numbers 30:4](./04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-NUM	30	7	vj3j	figs-idiom		0	will stand	This is an idiom. It means that her vows will remain in effect and that she will be required to fulfill them. Alternate translation: “she will be obligated to fulfill” See how this is translated in [Numbers 30:4](./04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-NUM	30	8	n9fw	figs-parallelism		0	the vow that she has made … the rash talk of her lips	Alternate translation: “the vow that she has made … that is, the rash talk of her lips.” These two phrases refer to the same thing. The second phrase describes the vow that the woman made. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+NUM	30	7	nh9k	figs-metaphor		0	by which she bound herself	Here Moses speaks of how a woman has committed herself to fulfilling a promise as if her promise were a physical object that she had bound to her body. Alternate translation: “that she has committed herself to fulfill” See how this is translated in [Numbers 30:4](../30/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+NUM	30	7	vj3j	figs-idiom		0	will stand	This is an idiom. It means that her vows will remain in effect and that she will be required to fulfill them. Alternate translation: “she will be obligated to fulfill” See how this is translated in [Numbers 30:4](../30/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+NUM	30	8	n9fw	figs-parallelism		0	the vow that she has made … the rash talk of her lips	These two phrases refer to the same thing. The second phrase describes the vow that the woman made. Alternate translation: “the vow that she has made … that is, the rash talk of her lips” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 NUM	30	8	j925	figs-synecdoche		0	the rash talk of her lips	The phrase “the rash talk” refers to the rash promise that she made. Here “her lips” means the woman herself. She is referred to as “her lips” because lips are related to what she says. Alternate translation: “the rash things she has said” or “her rash promise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-NUM	30	8	pen9	figs-metaphor		0	with which she has bound herself	Here Moses speaks of how a woman has committed herself to fulfilling a promise as if her promise were a physical object that she had bound to her body. Alternate translation: “that she has committed herself to fulfill” See how this is translated in [Numbers 30:4](./04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-NUM	30	8	dgy8	figs-metaphor		0	Yahweh will release her	Here Moses speaks about Yahweh forgiving the woman for not fulfilling her vow as if he were releasing her from something that bound her. The full meaning of this statement can be made clear. Alternate translation: “Yahweh will forgive her” or “Yahweh will forgive her for not fulfilling her vow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+NUM	30	8	pen9	figs-metaphor		0	with which she has bound herself	Here Moses speaks of how a woman has committed herself to fulfilling a promise as if her promise were a physical object that she had bound to her body. Alternate translation: “that she has committed herself to fulfill” See how this is translated in [Numbers 30:4](../30/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	30	9	vr6d	figs-activepassive		0	a divorced woman	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a woman whom a man has divorced” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-NUM	30	9	aab4	figs-idiom		0	will stand against her	This is an idiom. It means that her vows will remain in effect and she will be required to fulfill them. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Numbers 30:4](./04.md). Alternate translation: “she will be obligated to fulfill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+NUM	30	9	aab4	figs-idiom		0	will stand against her	This is an idiom. It means that her vows will remain in effect and she will be required to fulfill them. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Numbers 30:4](../30/04.md). Alternate translation: “she will be obligated to fulfill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 NUM	30	10	svt7	figs-explicit		0	If a woman made a vow in her husband’s house	This refers to a married woman. You can make the meaning of this statement clear. Alternate translation: “If a married woman makes a vow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NUM	30	11	m4jf	figs-idiom		0	then all her vows will stand	This is an idiom. The phrase “will stand” means that her vows will remain in effect and she will be required to fulfill them. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Numbers 30:4](../30/04.md). Alternate translation: “then she must fulfill all her vows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 NUM	30	12	p61z	figs-metonymy		0	then whatever came out of her lips	Here what the woman said is referred to as something that came out of her lips. Alternate translation: “then whatever she said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-NUM	30	12	r31m	figs-idiom		0	will not stand	This is an idiom. It means that her vows will not remain in effect and she will be not required to fulfill them. See how you translated this phrase in [Numbers 30:4](./04.md). Alternate translation: “she will not be obligated to fulfill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-NUM	30	12	g6ze	figs-metaphor		0	Yahweh will release her	Here Moses speaks about Yahweh forgiving the woman for not fulfilling her vow as if he were releasing her from something that bound her. The full meaning of this statement can be made clear. Alternate translation: “Yahweh will forgive her” or “Yahweh will forgive her for not fulfilling her vow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+NUM	30	12	r31m	figs-idiom		0	will not stand	This is an idiom. It means that her vows will not remain in effect and she will be not required to fulfill them. See how you translated this phrase in [Numbers 30:4](../30/04.md). Alternate translation: “she will not be obligated to fulfill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 NUM	30	13	rng1			0	binding oath to afflict her	an oath by which the woman says that unless she fulfills the oath, God or other poeple have the right to afflict her
 NUM	30	14	sq3z	figs-metaphor		0	binding promises	Moses describes a woman’s promises as if they were something that she is physically bound by. Alternate translation: “obligations” or “promises” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-NUM	30	14	ntv6	figs-idiom		0	will stand	This is an idiom. It means that her vows will remain in effect and that she will be required to fulfill them. Alternate translation: “she will be obligated to fulfill” See how this is translated in [Numbers 30:4](./04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+NUM	30	14	ntv6	figs-idiom		0	will stand	This is an idiom. It means that her vows will remain in effect and that she will be required to fulfill them. Alternate translation: “she will be obligated to fulfill” See how this is translated in [Numbers 30:4](../30/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 NUM	30	14	w9nv	figs-ellipsis		0	because he has said nothing to her	You can make clear the understood information. Alternate translation: “because he has said nothing to her about them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 NUM	30	15	z7x5	figs-explicit		0	then he will be responsible for her guilt	This means that he will be guilty of her sin instead of her if she does not fulfill her vow. The full meaning of this statement can be made clear. Alternate translation: “if she does not fulfill her vow, she will not be guilty of her sin, and he will be guilty instead of her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NUM	31	intro	p1di			0		# Numbers 31 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Midianites<br><br>Israel killed the Midianites, including Balaam, for tempting them to worship Baal. This battle was at Yahweh’s command. Yahweh would bring justice. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]])
 NUM	31	2	u6qq			0	Take vengeance on the Midianites for what they did to the Israelites	Yahweh was punishing the Midianites for convincing the Israelites to worship idols.
-NUM	31	2	l7s2	figs-parallelism		0	you will die and be gathered to your people	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. This is a polite way to emphasize that it is time for Moses to die and for his spirit to go to the place where his ancestors are. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
+NUM	31	2	gcqb	figs-euphemism	תֵּאָסֵ֥ף אֶל־ עַמֶּֽי⁠ךָ	1	you shall be gathered to your people	This is a polite way to emphasize that it is time for Moses to die and for his spirit to go to the place where his ancestors are. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 NUM	31	3	z1v2			0	Arm some of your men for war	Alternate translation: “Give weapons to some of your men”
 NUM	31	3	jkm1			0	go against Midian and carry out Yahweh’s vengeance on it	Alternate translation: “go fight a war against the Midianites and punish them for what they did to us”
 NUM	31	4	zf2p	translate-numbers		0	a thousand	Alternate translation: “1,000” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
@@ -1662,7 +1705,7 @@ NUM	31	15	q7z6	figs-rquestion		0	Have you let all the women live?	The law was ex
 NUM	31	16	zwr2	figs-idiom		0	Look	This word is used here to draw the audience’s attention to what is said next. Alternate translation: “Listen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 NUM	31	17	x8nq	figs-euphemism		0	has known a man by lying with him	Alternate translation: “has had sexual relations with a man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 NUM	31	18	f9zv			0	General Information:	Moses speaks to the commanders of the Israelite army about becoming clean before God.
-NUM	31	18	m1ae	figs-euphemism		0	who have not known a man by lying with him	Alternate translation: “who have not had sexual relations with any man.” This refers to girls who were virgins. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
+NUM	31	18	m1ae	figs-euphemism		0	who have not known a man by lying with him	This refers to girls who were virgins. Alternate translation: “who have not had sexual relations with any man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 NUM	31	19	esz2			0	All of you	Moses is referring to anyone who fought in battle, not just the commanders.
 NUM	31	19	u6bv			0	you must purify yourselves	They must become spiritually clean again before entering the camp.
 NUM	31	20	bml5	figs-activepassive		0	everything made of animal hide and goats’ hair, and everything made of wood	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “everything that someone has made of animal hide, goats’ hair, or wood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1685,7 +1728,7 @@ NUM	31	32	jc9u	translate-numbers		0	675,000 sheep	Alternate translation: “six
 NUM	31	33	en2l	translate-numbers		0	seventy-two thousand oxen	Alternate translation: “72,000 oxen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 NUM	31	34	m1fr	translate-numbers		0	sixty-one thousand donkeys	Alternate translation: “61,000 donkeys” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 NUM	31	35	mz61	translate-numbers		0	thirty-two thousand women	Alternate translation: “32,000 women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-NUM	31	35	h8xs	figs-euphemism		0	women who had not known a man by lying with him	Alternate translation: “women who had no had sexual relations with a man.” This refers to women who are virgins. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
+NUM	31	35	h8xs	figs-euphemism		0	women who had not known a man by lying with him	This refers to women who are virgins. Alternate translation: “women who had no had sexual relations with a man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 NUM	31	36	k5us	translate-numbers		0	General Information:	Moses is listing the plunder that goes to the soldiers and the tax that goes to Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 NUM	31	36	hx4b	figs-activepassive		0	The half that was kept for the soldiers	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The soldiers’ part of the sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	31	36	xz5a	translate-numbers		0	337,000 sheep	Alternate translation: “three hundred and thirty-seven thousand sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
@@ -1701,9 +1744,10 @@ NUM	31	41	t161	figs-activepassive		0	to be an offering presented to Yahweh	If yo
 NUM	31	42	uzx5	translate-numbers		0	General Information:	Moses is listing the plunder that goes to the people and the tax that goes to Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 NUM	31	43	tq4z	translate-numbers		0	337,500 sheep	Alternate translation: “three hundred and thirty-seven thousand five hundred sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 NUM	31	44	iiy9	translate-numbers		0	thirty-six thousand oxen	36,000 oxen (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-NUM	31	46	ad6b	translate-numbers		0	sixteen thousand women	Alternate translation: “16,000 women.” It has been stated earlier that all the males and the married women captives were put to death (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+NUM	31	46	htl1	translate-numbers	וְ⁠נֶ֣פֶשׁ אָדָ֔ם שִׁשָּׁ֥ה עָשָׂ֖ר אָֽלֶף	1	and 16,000 human lives	You can state this number in words. Alternate translation: “and sixteen thousand human lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
+NUM	31	46	ad6b	figs-explicit	וְ⁠נֶ֣פֶשׁ אָדָ֔ם שִׁשָּׁ֥ה עָשָׂ֖ר אָֽלֶף	1	and 16,000 human lives	It has been stated earlier that all the males and the married women captives were put to death. Alternate translation: “and 16,000 women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NUM	31	47	kg6l	translate-numbers		0	General Information:	Moses is listing the plunder that goes to the people and the tax that goes to Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-NUM	31	47	kg6m	translate-numbers		0	General Information:	The tax on the people’s portion was higher than the tax on the soldiers’ portion.
+NUM	31	47	kg6m			0	General Information:	The tax on the people’s portion was higher than the tax on the soldiers’ portion.
 NUM	31	48	vf7u	translate-numbers		0	the commanders over thousands and the captains over hundreds	This could mean: (1) these numbers represent the exact amount of soldiers that these commanders and captains led. Alternate translation: “the commanders over 1,000 soldiers and the captains over 100 soldiers” or (2) the words translated as “thousands” and “hundreds” do not represent exact numbers, but are the names of larger and smaller military divisions. Alternate translation: “the commanders over large military divisions and the captains over smaller military divisions” See how you translated a similar phrase in [Numbers 31:14](../31/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 NUM	31	49	f2pw			0	Your servants have counted	The commanders refer to themselves as “your servants.” This is a polite way to speak to someone with greater authority.
 NUM	31	49	v7td	figs-litotes		0	not one man is missing	This can be stated in a positive statement. “we know for certain that every man is here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
@@ -1722,7 +1766,9 @@ NUM	32	3	dwl6	translate-names		0	Ataroth, Dibon, Jazer, Nimrah, Heshbon, Elealeh
 NUM	32	4	fd7v			0	General Information:	The people from Reuben and Gad continue speaking to Moses, Eleazar, and the other leaders.
 NUM	32	4	t4lw	figs-metaphor		0	the lands that Yahweh attacked before the community of Israel	Yahweh enabling the Israelites to conquer the people who lived in the land is spoken of as if Yahweh went before the Israelites and attacked the people. Alternate translation: “the lands where Yahweh enabled us to defeat the people living there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	32	4	a77c			0	We, your servants	The people of the tribes of Reuben and Gad refer to themselves in this way to show respect to a person of higher authority.
-NUM	32	5	pl1g	figs-idiom		0	If we have found favor in your eyes	Here “found favor” is an idiom that means be approved of or that the leaders are pleased with them. Here “eyes” are a metonym for sight, and sight is a metaphor representing his evaluation. Alternate translation: “If we have found favor with you” or “If you are pleased with us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+NUM	32	5	kbeb	figs-metonymy	אִם־ מָצָ֤אנוּ חֵן֙ בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֔י⁠ךָ	1	If we have found favor in your eyes	Here, **eyes** are a metonym for sight. Alternate translation: “If we have found favor in your sight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+NUM	32	5	pl1g	figs-idiom	אִם־ מָצָ֤אנוּ חֵן֙ בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֔י⁠ךָ	1	If we have found favor in your eyes	Here, **found favor** is an idiom that means be approved of or that the leaders are pleased with them. Alternate translation: “If you are pleased with us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+NUM	32	5	ig4m	figs-metaphor	אִם־ מָצָ֤אנוּ חֵן֙ בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֔י⁠ךָ	1	If we have found favor in your eyes	Here, for Moses to see with his **eyes** is a metaphor representing his evaluation. Alternate translation: “If we have found favor with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	32	5	q5ik	figs-activepassive		0	let this land be given to us	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “give this land to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	32	5	gd1t	figs-explicit		0	Do not make us cross over the Jordan	They wanted the land on the east side of the Jordan River instead of crossing over to the west side and claiming land there. Alternate translation: “Do not make us cross over the Jordan to take possession of land on that side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NUM	32	6	sua3	figs-rquestion		0	Should your brothers go to war while you settle down here?	Moses asks this question to rebuke the people from the tribes of Gad and Reuben. Alternate translation: “It is wrong for you to settle down in this land while your brothers go to war.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -1731,13 +1777,13 @@ NUM	32	7	yrl5	figs-synecdoche		0	discourage the hearts of the people of Israel f
 NUM	32	9	ge3e	translate-names		0	Valley of Eshkol	This is the name of a place. See how you translated this in [Numbers 13:23](../13/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NUM	32	9	jta2	figs-explicit		0	They saw the land	This refers to seeing what was in the land. Alternate translation: “They saw the strong people and cities in the land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NUM	32	9	z21f	figs-synecdoche		0	discouraged the hearts of the people of Israel	Here the word “hearts” represents the people themselves and refers to the seat of their emotions. See how you translated this in [Numbers 32:7](../32/07.md). Alternate translation: “discouraged the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-NUM	32	10	hpu7	figs-metaphor		0	Yahweh’s anger was kindled	Yahweh becoming angry is spoken of as if his anger was a fire that begins to burn. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Yahweh became very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-NUM	32	11	wb16			0	none of the men	Alternate translation: “none of the people.” This phrase refers to both men and women.
+NUM	32	10	hpu7	figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יִּֽחַר־ אַ֥ף יְהוָ֖ה	1	And the nose of Yahweh burned	Yahweh becoming angry is spoken of as if his **nose** begins to burn. Alternate translation: “Yahweh became very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+NUM	32	11	wb16			0	none of the men	This phrase refers to both men and women. Alternate translation: “none of the people”
 NUM	32	11	m7bw	translate-numbers		0	twenty years old and up	Alternate translation: “20 years old or older” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 NUM	32	11	a6wn	figs-metaphor		0	completely followed me	Being devoted to Yahweh and obeying him are spoken of as if they were following Yahweh. Alternate translation: “completely obeyed me” or “been completely devoted to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	32	12	m62i	translate-names		0	Jephunneh … Nun	These are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NUM	32	12	dt3y	translate-names		0	Kenizzite	This is the name of a people group. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-NUM	32	13	n7kk	figs-metaphor		0	Yahweh’s anger was kindled against Israel	Yahweh becoming angry is spoken of as if his anger was a fire that begins to burn. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Yahweh became very angry with Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+NUM	32	13	n7kk	figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יִּֽחַר־ אַ֤ף יְהוָה֙ בְּ⁠יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל	1	And the nose of Yahweh burned against Israel	Yahweh becoming angry is spoken of as if his **nose** begins to burn. Alternate translation: “Yahweh became very angry with Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	32	13	qr9t	translate-numbers		0	forty years	Alternate translation: “40 years” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 NUM	32	13	mca3	figs-activepassive		0	all the generation … sight was destroyed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he destroyed all the generation … sight” or “all the generation … sight had died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	32	13	z1be	figs-idiom		0	who had done evil in his sight	Being in someone’s sight means to be in front of that person where he can see. Alternate translation: “who had done evil before Yahweh” or “who had done evil in Yahweh’s presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -1750,8 +1796,9 @@ NUM	32	18	lu48			0	General Information:	The leaders of Gad and Reuben continue s
 NUM	32	18	k2zl	figs-metaphor		0	has obtained his inheritance	The land that the people were to receive as a permanent possession is spoken of as if it were an inheritance that they were to obtain. Alternate translation: “has taken possession of his portion of the land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	32	20	s681			0	if you arm yourselves	Alternate translation: “if you take your weapons”
 NUM	32	20	sb1z	figs-idiom		0	before Yahweh	This means Yahweh will go with them to battle and enable them to defeat their enemy and take their land. Alternate translation: “in the presence of Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-NUM	32	21	w22a	figs-metaphor		0	until he has driven out his enemies from before him	Alternate translation: “until Yahweh has driven out his enemies from his presence.” The pronouns here all refer to Yahweh. Yahweh enabling the Israelites to defeat their enemies is spoken of as if Yahweh were fighting their battles. Alternate translation: “until Yahweh has enabled your soldiers to defeat the enemy and force them away from his presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-NUM	32	22	he19	figs-metonymy		0	the land is subdued before him	Here the word “land” refers to the people who live there. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in his presence the Israelites have subdued the people who live in the land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+NUM	32	21	w22a	figs-metaphor		0	until he has driven out his enemies from before him	The pronouns here all refer to Yahweh. Yahweh enabling the Israelites to defeat their enemies is spoken of as if Yahweh were fighting their battles. Alternate translation: “until Yahweh has enabled your soldiers to defeat the enemy and force them away from his presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+NUM	32	22	he19	figs-metonymy	וְ⁠נִכְבְּשָׁ֨ה הָ⁠אָ֜רֶץ לִ⁠פְנֵ֤י יְהוָה֙	1	and the land is subdued before the face of Yahweh	Here, **land** refers to the people who live there. Alternate translation: “and the people of the land are subdued before the face of Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+NUM	32	22	chic	figs-activepassive	וְ⁠נִכְבְּשָׁ֨ה הָ⁠אָ֜רֶץ לִ⁠פְנֵ֤י יְהוָה֙	1	and the land is subdued before the face of Yahweh	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and the Israelites have subdued the people who live in the land before Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	32	22	i7x4	figs-explicit		0	you may return	It is implied that they will return to the east side of the Jordan. Alternate translation: “you may return to this land on the east side of the Jordan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NUM	32	22	rj5v			0	You will be guiltless toward Yahweh and toward Israel	This could mean: (1) “You will have fulfilled your obligation to Yahweh and to Israel” or (2) “There will be nothing for which Yahweh or the people of Israel can blame you.”
 NUM	32	23	g2nz	figs-personification		0	Be sure that your sin will find you out	Moses speaks of sin as if it were a person who will condemn the guilty person. This means that the people cannot escape the punishment that their sin deserves. Alternate translation: “Know for sure that Yahweh will punish you for your sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
@@ -1764,7 +1811,7 @@ NUM	32	30	c7xh			0	then they will acquire their possessions among you in the lan
 NUM	32	32	v4jp	figs-explicit		0	We will cross over armed	You can make it clear that they will cross the Jordan. Alternate translation: “We will cross over the Jordan ready to fight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NUM	32	32	zxx7	figs-metaphor		0	our possessed inheritance	The land that the people were to receive as a permanent possession is spoken of as if it were an inheritance that they were to obtain. Alternate translation: “the portion of land that we will possess” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	32	32	p5vi	figs-idiom		0	will remain with us	This idiom refers to ownership. Alternate translation: “will be ours” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-NUM	32	33	d9qr	figs-ellipsis		0	the kingdom of Sihon … and of Og	These are names of kings who ruled two separate kingdoms. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of Sihon … and the kingdom of Og” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+NUM	32	33	d9qr	translate-names	סִיחֹן֙…ע֖וֹג	1	Sihon … Og	**Sihon** and **Og** are names of kings who ruled two separate kingdoms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NUM	32	34	x51u	translate-names		0	Dibon, Ataroth, Aroer	These are names of cities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NUM	32	35	h5rs	translate-names		0	Atroth Shophan, Jazer, Jogbehah	These are names of cities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NUM	32	36	q92b	translate-names		0	Beth Nimrah, and Beth Haran	These are names of cities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -1777,11 +1824,12 @@ NUM	32	41	mn6c	translate-names		0	Havvoth Jair	This is the name of a city. (See:
 NUM	32	42	rm3m	translate-names		0	Nobah	This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NUM	32	42	r3cx	translate-names		0	Kenath	This is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NUM	33	intro	s7u7			0		# Numbers 33 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>This chapter is a summary of Israel’s exodus from Egypt to the Promised Land, including their wandering through the desert. The phrase “they set out” means “they left.”
-NUM	33	1	va6t			0	by their armed groups	Alternate translation: “by their military divisions.” This means that each tribe had their own men, who were armed, to protect them. See how you translated “armed groups” in [Numbers 1:3](../01/03.md).
+NUM	33	1	va6t			0	by their armed groups	This means that each tribe had their own men, who were armed, to protect them. See how you translated “armed groups” in [Numbers 1:3](../01/03.md). Alternate translation: “by their military divisions”
 NUM	33	2	gx4i	figs-activepassive		0	as commanded by Yahweh	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as Yahweh commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	33	2	y7p2			0	departure after departure	Alternate translation: “from one place to another place”
 NUM	33	3	ak5s	translate-names		0	General Information:	Moses lists the places the Israelites went after they left Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-NUM	33	3	na6v	translate-hebrewmonths		0	during the first month, leaving on the fifteenth day of the first month	Here “first” is the ordinal number one and “fifteenth” is the ordinal number fifteen. This is the first month of the Hebrew calendar. The fifteenth day is near the beginning of April on Western calendars. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+NUM	33	3	na6v	translate-ordinal	בַּ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הָֽ⁠רִאשׁ֔וֹן בַּ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֥ה עָשָׂ֛ר י֖וֹם לַ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֑וֹן	1	on the first month, on day 15 of the first month	Here, **first** is the ordinal number one. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+NUM	33	3	gdmd	translate-hebrewmonths	בַּ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הָֽ⁠רִאשׁ֔וֹן בַּ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֥ה עָשָׂ֛ר י֖וֹם לַ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֑וֹן	1	on the first month, on day 15 of the first month	This is the first month of the Hebrew calendar. The fifteenth day is near the beginning of April on Western calendars. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
 NUM	33	3	gaw7			0	the people of Israel left openly, in the sight of all the Egyptians	Alternate translation: “the Israelites left in plain view of the Egyptians”
 NUM	33	4	gt7n	figs-explicit		0	their firstborn	This refers to the firstborn sons. Alternate translation: “their firstborn sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NUM	33	4	nq9p	figs-metaphor		0	he also inflicted punishment on their gods	Yahweh proving that he is more powerful than all of the false gods that the Egyptians worshiped is spoken of as if Yahweh punished those false gods. Alternate translation: “he also proved that he is greater than their gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1800,7 +1848,8 @@ NUM	33	27	ii4p	translate-names		0	General Information:	Moses lists the places th
 NUM	33	31	gpz3	translate-names		0	General Information:	Moses lists the places the Israelites went after they left Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NUM	33	35	uzs2	translate-names		0	General Information:	Moses lists the places the Israelites went after they left Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NUM	33	38	sp6v	translate-ordinal		0	in the fortieth year after	Here “fortieth” is the ordinal number for forty. Alternate translation: “40 years after” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-NUM	33	38	lpa5	translate-hebrewmonths		0	in the fifth month, on the first day of the month	This “fifth” is the ordinal number for five. This “first” is the ordinal number for one. This is the fifth month of the Hebrew calendar. The first day is near the middle of July on Western calendars. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+NUM	33	38	lpa5	translate-ordinal	בַּ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ הַ⁠חֲמִישִׁ֖י בְּ⁠אֶחָ֥ד לַ⁠חֹֽדֶשׁ	1	in the fifth month, on 1 of the month	Here, **fifth** is the ordinal number for five. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+NUM	33	38	o1ro	translate-hebrewmonths	בַּ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ הַ⁠חֲמִישִׁ֖י בְּ⁠אֶחָ֥ד לַ⁠חֹֽדֶשׁ	1	in the fifth month, on 1 of the month	This is the **fifth month** of the Hebrew calendar. The first day is near the middle of July on Western calendars. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
 NUM	33	39	sx7z	translate-numbers		0	123 years old	Alternate translation: “one hundred and twenty-three years old” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 NUM	33	40	b5x6			0	The Canaanite, the king of Arad	Alternate translation: “The Canaanite king of Arad”
 NUM	33	40	fa11	translate-names		0	Arad	This was the name of a Canaanite city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -1826,17 +1875,18 @@ NUM	35	intro	rg3i			0		# Numbers 35 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and format
 NUM	35	1	z6sc			0	plains	a large area of flat land
 NUM	35	2	ww25			0	give some of their own shares of land to the Levites	Yahweh did not give the Levites their own land, so they had to live in cities that belonged to other tribes.
 NUM	35	2	hlb8			0	pastureland	an area of land where animals feed on grass
-NUM	35	4	fb2e	translate-numbers		0	one thousand cubits	Alternate translation: “1,000 cubits.” If it is necessary to use modern distance units, here is a way of doing it. Alternate translation: “457 meters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
-NUM	35	5	cr3z	translate-bdistance		0	two thousand cubits	Alternate translation: “2,000 cubits.” A cubit is 46 centimeters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
+NUM	35	4	fb2e	translate-numbers	אֶ֥לֶף אַמָּ֖ה	1	1,000 cubits	You can state this number in words. Alternate translation: “one thousand cubits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
+NUM	35	4	fzlt	translate-bdistance	אֶ֥לֶף אַמָּ֖ה	1	1,000 cubits	If it is necessary to use modern distance units, here is a way of doing it. Alternate translation: “457 meters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
+NUM	35	5	cr3z	translate-numbers	אַלְפַּ֪יִם בָּֽ⁠אַמָּ֟ה…אַלְפַּ֨יִם בָּ⁠אַמָּ֜ה…אַלְפַּ֣יִם בָּֽ⁠אַמָּ֗ה	1	2,000 by the cubit … 2,000 by the cubit … 2,000 by the cubit	You can state these numbers in words. Alternate translation: “two thousand cubits … two thousand cubits … two thousand cubits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
+NUM	35	5	zzrs	translate-bdistance	אַלְפַּ֪יִם בָּֽ⁠אַמָּ֟ה…אַלְפַּ֨יִם בָּ⁠אַמָּ֜ה…אַלְפַּ֣יִם בָּֽ⁠אַמָּ֗ה	1	2,000 by the cubit … 2,000 by the cubit … 2,000 by the cubit	You can state this in modern measurements. A cubit is 46 centimeters. Alternate translation: “920 meters … 920 meters … 920 meters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
 NUM	35	6	g8wz			0	a person who has killed someone	This refers to people who have killed someone, but it had not yet been determined whether they killed the person intentionally or accidentally.
 NUM	35	6	q5lc	translate-numbers		0	forty-two	Alternate translation: “42” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 NUM	35	7	jnp2	translate-numbers		0	forty-eight	Alternate translation: “48” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 NUM	35	11	fy84			0	unintentionally	accidentally or without wanting to or trying to
 NUM	35	12	vp5m			0	the avenger	This refers to a close relative that seeks vengeance by killing the accused man.
 NUM	35	12	le4k	figs-activepassive		0	so that the accused man will not be killed without first standing trial before the community	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that no one will kill the accused man before the community is able to judge him in court” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-NUM	35	16	z14e	figs-activepassive		0	He must certainly be put to death	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You must certainly execute him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+NUM	35	16	z14e	figs-activepassive	מ֥וֹת יוּמַ֖ת הָ⁠רֹצֵֽחַ	1	The one who murders shall certainly be put to death	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You must certainly execute the one who murders another person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	35	19	wx13	figs-metonymy		0	The avenger of blood	Here the word “blood” is a metonym for the murder. Alternate translation: “The one who avenges the murder” or “The relative seeking vengeance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-NUM	35	21	b1cz	figs-activepassive		0	the accused who struck him must surely be put to death	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the relative must certainly execute the accused man” or “the accused man must die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 NUM	35	22	umg8			0	without premeditated hate	Alternate translation: “without planning it out of hate ahead of time”
 NUM	35	22	p8t8	figs-metaphor		0	without lying in wait	Someone intentionally seeking a way to harm another person is spoken of as if someone were hiding in order to ambush that other person. Alternate translation: “without intentionally having tried to harm the victim” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	35	24	gs31	figs-metonymy		0	the avenger of blood	Here the word “blood” is a metonym for the murder. See how you translated this phrase in [Numbers 35:19](../35/19.md). Alternate translation: “the one who avenges the murder” or “the relative seeking vengeance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -1847,7 +1897,7 @@ NUM	35	29	b5jp			0	through all your people’s generations	Alternate translation
 NUM	35	30	l81w	figs-activepassive		0	the murderer must be killed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone must execute the murderer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	35	30	e5vq	figs-activepassive		0	as testified to by the words of witnesses	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “according to the testimony of witnesses” or “as witnesses testify to the murder” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	35	30	y1ik	figs-activepassive		0	But one witness’ word alone may not cause any person to be put to death	The testimony of one witness is not enough to execute a person for murder. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “But the word of only one witness is not enough for you to execute a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-NUM	35	31	th5f	figs-activepassive		0	He must certainly be put to death	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You must execute him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+NUM	35	31	th5f	figs-activepassive	מ֖וֹת יוּמָֽת	1	he shall certainly be put to death	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must execute him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	35	32	pv6j	figs-explicit		0	You must not … allow him to reside on his own property	This implied that the man would have left the city of refuge and returned home. Alternate translation: “You must not … allow him to leave the city of refuge and return home to live on his own property” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NUM	35	32	a9qa			0	in this way	Alternate translation: “by accepting a ransom”
 NUM	35	33	gzd5	figs-metaphor		0	Do not pollute in this way the land where you live, because blood from murder pollutes the land	Making the land unacceptable to Yahweh is spoken of as if it were physically polluting the land. Alternate translation: “Do not make the land where you live unacceptable to me in this way, because blood from murder makes the land unacceptable to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
diff --git a/en_tn_17-EST.tsv b/en_tn_17-EST.tsv
index abdb555f63..57ca019d61 100644
--- a/en_tn_17-EST.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_17-EST.tsv
@@ -772,7 +772,7 @@ EST	8	7	ace6		בֵית־הָמָ֜ן נָתַ֣תִּי לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֗
 EST	8	7	h44h	figs-metonymy	בֵית־הָמָ֜ן	1	the house of Haman	Here, **house** is a metonym meaning the entire household of Haman. Alternate translation: “the household of Haman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EST	8	7	ace7	figs-events	וְ⁠אֹת⁠וֹ֙ תָּל֣וּ עַל־הָ⁠עֵ֔ץ	1	they have hanged him on the tree	You can put this information first because it happened before the king gave Haman’s property to Esther. Alternate translation: “I had my servants impale Haman on a wooden pole” or “I had my servants hang Haman on a gallows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
 EST	8	7	ace8	translate-unknown	הָ⁠עֵ֔ץ	1	the tree	See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-EST	8	7	j2r9	figs-idiom	שָׁלַ֥ח יָד֖⁠וֹ	1	he stretched out his hand	Here the expression \*\*to stretch out a hand\*\* means to cause someone physical harm with the intention of killing them. Alternate translation: “because he plotted to destroy all the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+EST	8	7	j2r9	figs-idiom	שָׁלַ֥ח יָד֖⁠וֹ	1	he stretched out his hand	Here the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to cause someone physical harm with the intention of killing them. Alternate translation: “because he plotted to destroy all the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EST	8	8	acf0		וְ֠⁠אַתֶּם	1	So you	Alternate translation: “so this is what you should do”
 EST	8	8	acf1		כִּתְב֨וּ עַל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֜ים כַּ⁠טּ֤וֹב בְּ⁠עֵֽינֵי⁠כֶם֙	1	write for the Jews as is good in your eyes	Alternate translation: “I am giving you permission to write other letters to save your people”
 EST	8	8	j3r1	figs-metaphor	כַּ⁠טּ֤וֹב בְּ⁠עֵֽינֵי⁠כֶם֙	1	as is good in your eyes	Here, **eyes** figuratively represent the action of seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. This phrase means that Esther and Mordecai have permission to write what they think is best. Alternate translation: “as you think is best” or “what you think is best” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv
index ff42973ab3..4b53af1aa6 100644
--- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv
@@ -1,123 +1,74 @@
 Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNote
 MAT	front	intro	sa9c			0		# Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of the Book of Matthew<br><br>1. The birth of Jesus Christ and the beginning of his ministry (1:1-4:25)<br>1. Jesus’ Sermon on the Mount (5:1-7:28)<br>1. Jesus illustrates the kingdom of God through acts of healing (8:1-9:34)<br>1. Jesus’ teaching about mission and the kingdom (9:35-10:42)<br>1. Jesus’ teaching about the gospel of the kingdom of God. The beginning of opposition to Jesus. (11:1-12:50)<br>1. Jesus’ parables about the kingdom of God (13:1-52)<br>1. Further opposition to Jesus and misunderstanding of the kingdom of God (13:53-17:57)<br>1. Jesus’ teaching about life in the kingdom of God (18:1-35)<br>1. Jesus ministers in Judea (19:1-22:46)<br>1. Jesus’ teaching about the final judgment and salvation (23:1-25:46)<br>1. The crucifixion of Jesus, his death and resurrection (26:1-28:19)<br><br>### What is the book of Matthew about?<br><br>The Gospel of Matthew is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life of Jesus Christ. The authors of the gospels wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. Matthew showed that Jesus was the Messiah, and God would save Israel through him. Matthew often explained that Jesus fulfilled the Old Testament prophecies about the Messiah. This may indicate that he expected most of his first readers to be Jewish. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]])<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of Matthew,” or “The Gospel according to Matthew.” Or they may choose a title that may be clearer, such as, “The Good News about Jesus that Matthew wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>### Who wrote the Book of Matthew?<br><br>The book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the author was the Apostle Matthew.<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### What is the “kingdom of heaven?”<br><br>Matthew spoke of the kingdom of heaven in the same way that other gospel writers spoke of the kingdom of God. The kingdom of heaven represents God ruling over all people and all creation everywhere. Those whom God accepts into his kingdom will be blessed. They will live with God forever.<br><br>### What were Jesus’ teaching methods?<br><br>The people regarded Jesus as a rabbi. A rabbi is a teacher of God’s law. Jesus taught in similar ways as other religious teachers in Israel. He had students who followed him wherever he went. These students were called disciples. He often told parables. Parables are stories that teach moral lessons. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/parable]])<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### What are the Synoptic Gospels?<br><br>The Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they have many similar passages. The word “synoptic” means to “see together.”<br><br>The texts are considered “parallel” when they are the same or almost the same among two or three gospels. When translating parallel passages, translators should use the same wording and make them as similar as possible.<br><br>### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?<br><br>In the gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” It is a reference to Daniel 7:13-14. In this passage there is a person described as a “son of man.” That means the person was someone who looked like a human being. God gave authority to the son of man to rule over the nations forever. And all the people will worship him forever.<br><br>Jews of Jesus’ time did not use “Son of Man” as a title for anyone. Therefore, Jesus used it for himself to help them understand who he truly was. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]])<br><br>Translating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.<br><br>### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Matthew?<br><br>The following verses are found in older versions of the Bible but are not included in most modern versions:<br>* “Bless those who curse you, do good to those who hate you” (5:44)<br>* “For yours is the kingdom and the power and the glory forever. Amen” (6:13)<br>* “But this kind of demon does not go out except with prayer and fasting” (17:21)<br>* “For the Son of Man came to save that which was lost” (18:11)<br>* “Many are called, but few are chosen” (20:16)<br>* “Woe to you, scribes and Pharisees, hypocrites! for you devour widows’ houses, while you make a show of long prayers. You will therefore receive greater condemnation.” (23:14)<br><br>Translators are advised not to include these passages. However, if in the translators’ region, there are older versions of the Bible that include one or more of these passages, the translators can include them. If they are included, they should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to Matthew’s Gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 MAT	1	intro	y7kk			0		# Matthew 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set a quotation from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this for the quoted material in 1:23.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Genealogy<br><br>A genealogy is a list that records a person’s ancestors or descendants. Jews used genealogies to choose the right man to become king. They did this because only a son of a king could become king. Most important people had records of their genealogies.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Use of the passive voice<br><br>Matthew uses the passive voice very purposefully in this chapter to indicate that Mary did not have a sexual relationship with anyone. She became pregnant with Jesus because the Holy Spirit performed a miracle. Many languages do not have a passive voice, so translators in those languages must find other ways to present the same truths. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MAT	1	1	ava1			0	General Information:	The author begins with Jesus’ genealogy in order to show that he is a descendant of King David and of Abraham. The genealogy continues through [1:17](../01/17.md).
-MAT	1	1	y31w		βίβλος γενέσεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	The book of the genealogy of Jesus Christ	You could translate this as a complete sentence. Alternate translation: “This is the list of the ancestors of Jesus Christ”
-MAT	1	1	vpg1		Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, υἱοῦ Δαυεὶδ, υἱοῦ Ἀβραάμ	1	of Jesus Christ, son of David, son of Abraham	There were many generations between Jesus, David, and Abraham. Here the word **son** means “descendant.” Alternate translation: “Jesus Christ, a descendant of David, who was a descendant of Abraham”
-MAT	1	1	tka3		υἱοῦ Δαυεὶδ	1	son of David	Sometimes the phrase **son of David** is used as a title, but here it seems to be used only to identify Jesus’ ancestry.
-MAT	1	2	ejp6		Ἀβραὰμ ἐγέννησεν τὸν Ἰσαάκ	1	Abraham became the father of Isaac	There are different ways you could translate this. Whichever way you translate it here, it would be best to translate it the same way throughout the list of Jesus’ ancestors. Alternate translation: “Abraham had a son Isaac” or “Abraham had a son named Isaac”
-MAT	1	3	g8y6	translate-names	Φαρὲς…Ζάρα…Ἑσρώμ…Ἀράμ	1	of Perez … Zerah … of Hezron … of Ram	These are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-MAT	1	5	q5bd		Βόες…ἐγέννησεν τὸν Ἰωβὴδ ἐκ τῆς Ῥούθ	2	Boaz became the father of Obed by Ruth	Alternate translation: “Boaz was the father of Obed, and Obed’s mother was Ruth” or “Boaz and Ruth were the parents of Obed”
-MAT	1	6	bp35		τῆς τοῦ Οὐρίου	1	the wife of Uriah	Solomon was born after Uriah died. Alternate translation: “the widow of Uriah”
-MAT	1	10	bh7r		τὸν Ἀμώς	1	Amon	Sometimes **Amon** is translated as “Amos.”
-MAT	1	11	rj7p		ἐπὶ τῆς μετοικεσίας Βαβυλῶνος	1	at the deportation to Babylon	If your language needs to specify who went to **Babylon**, you could state “the Israelites” or “the Israelites who lived in Judah.” Alternate translation: “when they were forced to move to Babylon” or “when the Babylonians conquered them and made them go live in Babylon”
-MAT	1	11	v2im		Βαβυλῶνος	1	to Babylon	Here, **Babylonian** refers to the country of Babylon, not just the city of Babylon.
-MAT	1	12	y7cx		μετὰ…τὴν μετοικεσίαν Βαβυλῶνος	1	after the deportation to Babylon	Use the same wording you used in [1:11](../01/11.md).
-MAT	1	12	tx6g		Σαλαθιὴλ…ἐγέννησεν τὸν Ζοροβαβέλ	1	Shealtiel became the father of Zerubbabel	**Shealtiel** was Zerubbabel’s grandfather.
-MAT	1	15	lqk9			0	Connecting Statement:	The author concludes Jesus’ genealogy, which began in [Matthew 1:1](../01/01.md).
+MAT	1	1	ava1			0	General Information:	The author begins with Jesus’ genealogy in order to show that he is a descendant of of both King David and of Abraham. The genealogy continues through [1:17](../01/17.md).
+MAT	1	1	vpg1	figs-metaphor	Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, υἱοῦ Δαυεὶδ, υἱοῦ Ἀβραάμ	1	of Jesus Christ, son of David, son of Abraham	Here, **son** means “descendant.” If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Descendant of King David, who was a descendent of Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MAT	1	3	g8y6	translate-names		0	of Perez … Zerah … of Hezron … of Ram	Unless stated otherwise, all of the names in this genealogy are men’s names. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+MAT	1	5	q5bd	translate-names	Ῥαχάβ…Ῥούθ	1	Boaz became the father of Obed by Ruth	**Rahab** and **Ruth** were the names of women. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+MAT	1	11	rj7p		ἐπὶ τῆς μετοικεσίας Βαβυλῶνος	1	at the deportation to Babylon	Alternate translation: See the UST
+MAT	1	11	v2im		Βαβυλῶνος	1	to Babylon	Here, **Babylonian** refers to the country of Babylonia, not just the city of Babylon.
+MAT	1	12	y7cx		μετὰ…τὴν μετοικεσίαν Βαβυλῶνος	1	after the deportation to Babylon	Use the same wording you used in [1:11](../01/11.md) for **Babylonian**.
 MAT	1	16	b3bm	figs-activepassive	Μαρίας, ἐξ ἧς ἐγεννήθη Ἰησοῦς	1	of Mary, by whom Jesus was born	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Mary, who gave birth to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MAT	1	16	wdbo	translate-names	Μαρίας	1		**Mary** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 MAT	1	16	z2rg	figs-activepassive	ὁ λεγόμενος Χριστός	1	who is called Christ	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “whom people call Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MAT	1	17	z5xw		τῆς μετοικεσίας Βαβυλῶνος	1	the deportation to Babylon	Use the same wording you used in [1:11](../01/11.md).
-MAT	1	18	gnl6			0	General Information:	This begins a new part of the story in which the author describes the events leading up to the birth of Jesus.
-MAT	1	18	cqt1	figs-explicit	μνηστευθείσης τῆς μητρὸς αὐτοῦ Μαρίας τῷ Ἰωσήφ	1	His mother, Mary, having been engaged to marry Joseph	Parents normally arranged the marriages of their children. Alternate translation: “The parents of Mary, the mother of Jesus, had promised her in marriage to Joseph” or “His mother, Mary, was going to marry Joseph” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MAT	1	18	e4ur	figs-explicit	μνηστευθείσης τῆς μητρὸς αὐτοῦ Μαρίας	1	His mother, Mary, having been engaged	Translate in a way that makes it clear that Jesus was not already born when **Mary** was engaged to Joseph. Alternate translation: “Mary, who would be the mother of Jesus, was engaged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MAT	1	18	xvk1	figs-euphemism	πρὶν…συνελθεῖν αὐτοὺς	1	before they came together	This may refer to Mary and Joseph sleeping together. Alternate translation: “before they had slept together” or “before they got married” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
-MAT	1	18	in4a	figs-activepassive	εὑρέθη ἐν γαστρὶ ἔχουσα	1	was found having in the womb	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they realized that she was going to have a baby” or “it happened that she was pregnant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MAT	1	18	a71d		ἐκ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	by the Holy Spirit	The power of the **Holy Spirit** had enabled Mary to have a baby before she had slept with a man.
-MAT	1	19	j8eb	figs-explicit	Ἰωσὴφ…ὁ ἀνὴρ αὐτῆς	1	Joseph, her husband	**Joseph** had not married Mary yet, but when a man and woman promised to marry each other, Jews considered them **husband** and wife though they did not live together. Alternate translation: “Joseph, who was supposed to marry Mary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MAT	1	19	pu3p		ἀπολῦσαι αὐτήν	1	to divorce her	Alternate translation: “to cancel their plans to get married”
-MAT	1	20	iip4		αὐτοῦ ἐνθυμηθέντος	1	when he had thought	Alternate translation: “after Joseph thought”
-MAT	1	20	fb7e		κατ’ ὄναρ ἐφάνη αὐτῷ	1	appeared to him in a dream	Alternate translation: “came to Joseph while he was dreaming”
-MAT	1	20	lc8r		υἱὸς Δαυείδ	1	son of David	Here, **son** means “descendant.”
+MAT	1	18	gnl6	writing-newevent	τοῦ δὲ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ ἡ γένεσις οὕτως ἦν	1	General Information:	This begins a new part of the story in which the author describes the events leading up to the birth of Jesus. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
+MAT	1	18	cqt1	figs-activepassive	μνηστευθείσης τῆς μητρὸς αὐτοῦ Μαρίας τῷ Ἰωσήφ	1	His mother, Mary, having been engaged to marry Joseph	Mary was given by her parents to Joseph to marry him. This was common in their culture. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Mary’s parents promised to Jospeh that Mary, Jesus’ mother, would marry him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MAT	1	18	xvk1	figs-euphemism	πρὶν…συνελθεῖν αὐτοὺς	1	before they came together	This may refer to Mary and Joseph sleeping together. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “before they had slept together” or “before they got married” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
+MAT	1	18	in4a	figs-activepassive	εὑρέθη ἐν γαστρὶ ἔχουσα	1	was found having in the womb	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they realized that she was going to have a baby” or “it happened that she was pregnant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MAT	1	18	q6y8	figs-idiom	εὑρέθη ἐν γαστρὶ ἔχουσα	1		This is an idiom meaning people discovered that she was pregnant. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: (1) “Joseph found out that she was pregnant” or (2), more generally “Some people discovered that she was pregnant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+MAT	1	18	a71d	figs-explicit	ἐκ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	by the Holy Spirit	The power of the **Holy Spirit** had enabled Mary to have a baby before she had slept with a man. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “through the Holy Spirit allowing her to be pregnant without sleeping with a man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MAT	1	19	pu3p	grammar-connect-time-background	ἀπολῦσαι αὐτήν	1	to divorce her	Mark is providing this background information to help readers understand who Joseph was and what his motives were. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Joseph her husband was a righteous man who did not want to embarrass her publicly.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
+MAT	1	20	iip4	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	ταῦτα δὲ αὐτοῦ ἐνθυμηθέντος ἰδοὺ, ἄγγελος Κυρίου κατ’ ὄναρ ἐφάνη αὐτῷ	1	when he had thought	The angel appeared to Joseph at the same time he was considering divorcing Mary. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “During the time when Jospeh was considering divorcing Mary, an angel of the Lord appeared to him in a dream” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
+MAT	1	20	lc8r	figs-metaphor	υἱὸς Δαυείδ	1	son of David	Here, **son** means “descendant.” If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Descendant of King David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MAT	1	20	va5e	figs-activepassive	τὸ…ἐν αὐτῇ γεννηθὲν ἐκ Πνεύματός ἐστιν Ἁγίου	1	the one who has been conceived in her is from the Holy Spirit	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit caused Mary to become pregnant with this child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MAT	1	21	j38f		τέξεται…υἱὸν	1	she will bear a son	Because God sent the angel, the angel knew the baby was a boy.
-MAT	1	21	glq8		καλέσεις τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1	you will call his name	This is a command. Alternate translation: “you must name him” or “you must give him the name”
-MAT	1	21	bf5z		αὐτὸς γὰρ σώσει	1	for he will save	Translator may add a footnote that says “The name ‘Jesus’ means ‘the Lord saves.’”
-MAT	1	21	em9q		τὸν λαὸν αὐτοῦ	1	his people	Here, **his people** refers to the Jews.
-MAT	1	22	p47i	writing-background		0	General Information:	The author quotes the prophet Isaiah to show that Jesus’ birth was according to scripture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-MAT	1	22	p9la		τοῦτο…ὅλον γέγονεν	1	all this happened	The angel is no longer speaking. Matthew is now explaining the importance of what the angel said.
-MAT	1	22	c1vw	figs-activepassive	τὸ ῥηθὲν ὑπὸ Κυρίου διὰ τοῦ προφήτου	1	what was spoken by the Lord through the prophet	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “what the Lord told the prophet to write long ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MAT	1	22	p39k	figs-explicit	τοῦ προφήτου	1	the prophet	There were many prophets. Matthew was speaking specifically of Isaiah. Alternate translation: “the prophet Isaiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MAT	1	23	q19h		ἰδοὺ, ἡ παρθένος ἐν γαστρὶ ἕξει καὶ τέξεται υἱόν, καὶ καλέσουσιν τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ Ἐμμανουήλ	1	Behold, the virgin will have in her womb and bear a son, and they will call his name Immanuel	Here Matthew quotes the prophet Isaiah.
-MAT	1	23	dw7z		ἰδοὺ, ἡ παρθένος	1	Behold, the virgin	Alternate translation: “Pay attention, because what I am about to say is both true and important: the virgin”
+MAT	1	21	j38f	grammar-connect-time-background	αὐτὸς γὰρ σώσει τὸν λαὸν αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν αὐτῶν	1	she will bear a son	**for he will save his people from their sins** is explaining the meaning of the name**Jesus**. In Hebrew, Jesus comes from the word meaning “to save”. Use a natural way in your language for introducing this background information. Alternate translation: “For, just like his name means, he will save his people from their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
+MAT	1	21	em9q		τὸν λαὸν αὐτοῦ	1	his people	Here, **his** refers to the those people who love the Lord. Alternate translation: “the people whom the Lord loves”
+MAT	1	22	c1vw	figs-activepassive	τὸ ῥηθὲν ὑπὸ Κυρίου διὰ τοῦ προφήτου	1	what was spoken by the Lord through the prophet	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what the Lord told the prophet to write long ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MAT	1	22	p39k	figs-explicit	τοῦ προφήτου	1	the prophet	There were many prophets. Matthew was speaking specifically of Isaiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the prophet Isaiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MAT	1	22	e8ld	writing-quotations	λέγοντος	1		In Paul’s culture, **saying** is a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book written by Isaiah the prophet. If your readers would not understand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “He wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 MAT	1	23	sln1	translate-names	Ἐμμανουήλ	1	Immanuel	**Immanuel** is a male name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-MAT	1	23	lm6t		ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, μεθ’ ἡμῶν ὁ Θεός	1	which is translated, “God with us.”	This is not in the book of Isaiah. Matthew is explaining the meaning of the name “Immanuel.” You could translate it as a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “This name means ‘God with us.’”
-MAT	1	24	iue3			0	Connecting Statement:	The author concludes his description of the events leading up to the birth of Jesus.
-MAT	1	24	iz4r		ὡς προσέταξεν…ὁ ἄγγελος Κυρίου	1	as the angel of the Lord commanded	The **angel** had told Joseph to take Mary as his wife and to name the child Jesus.
-MAT	1	24	nr5e		παρέλαβεν τὴν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ	1	he took her as his wife	Alternate translation: “he married Mary”
-MAT	1	25	i7p5	figs-euphemism	οὐκ ἐγίνωσκεν αὐτὴν	1	he did not know her	This is a euphemism. Alternate translation: “he did not have sexual relations with her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
-MAT	1	25	dlm9		υἱόν	1	a son	Make sure it is clear that Joseph is not portrayed as the actual father. Alternate translation: “a male baby” or “her son”
-MAT	1	25	jtz8		καὶ ἐκάλεσεν τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ, Ἰησοῦν	1	And he called his name Jesus	Alternate translation: “And Joseph named the child Jesus”
+MAT	1	23	wlft	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1		The term **behold** focuses the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. Though it literally means “look” or “see,” in this case seeing figuratively means giving notice and attention. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Pay attention to what I am saying to you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MAT	1	23	lm6t	grammar-connect-time-background	ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, μεθ’ ἡμῶν ὁ Θεός	1	which is translated, “God with us.”	Matthew is providing this background information to help readers understand what the name **Immanuel** means. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “This name means, ‘God with us’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
+MAT	1	24	iue3	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐποίησεν ὡς προσέταξεν αὐτῷ ὁ ἄγγελος Κυρίου, καὶ παρέλαβεν τὴν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ	1	Connecting Statement:	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Jospeh took Mary as his wife, just as the angel of the Lord commanded Him to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])\n
+MAT	1	25	i7p5	figs-euphemism	οὐκ ἐγίνωσκεν αὐτὴν	1	he did not know her	Mark uses a polite expression to say that they had not engaged in sexual activity. Alternate translation: “He did not have sexual with her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 MAT	2	intro	dz1c			0		# Matthew 2 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in verses 6 and 18, which are words from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### “His star”<br><br>These words probably refer to a star that the learned men believed to be the sign of a new king of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sign]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### “Learned men”<br><br>English translations use many different words to translate this phrase. These words include “magi” and “wise men.” These men could have been scientists or astrologers. If you can, you should translate this with the general word “learned men.”
-MAT	2	1	j9yn			0	General Information:	A new part of the story begins here and continues through the end of the chapter. Matthew tells about Herod’s attempt to kill the new King of the Jews.
-MAT	2	1	k518		Βηθλέεμ τῆς Ἰουδαίας	1	Bethlehem of Judea	Alternate translation: “the town of Bethlehem in the province of Judea”
-MAT	2	1	id55		ἐν…ἡμέραις Ἡρῴδου τοῦ βασιλέως	2	in the days of Herod the king	Alternate translation: “when Herod was king there”
-MAT	2	1	kf5g		Ἡρῴδου	1	of Herod	There was more than one **Herod**. This refers to **Herod** the Great.
-MAT	2	1	p6gc		μάγοι ἀπὸ ἀνατολῶν	1	learned men from the east	Alternate translation: “men from the east who studied the stars”
-MAT	2	1	ft22		ἀπὸ ἀνατολῶν	1	from the east	Alternate translation: “from a country far east of Judea”
-MAT	2	2	v5t4		ποῦ ἐστιν ὁ τεχθεὶς Βασιλεὺς τῶν Ἰουδαίων?	1	Where is the one who has been born King of the Jews?	The men knew from studying the stars that the one who would become king had been **born**. They were trying to learn where he was. Alternate translation: “A baby who will become the king of the Jews has been born. Where is he?”
-MAT	2	2	zj7c		αὐτοῦ τὸν ἀστέρα	1	his star	They were not saying that the baby was the rightful owner of the **star**. Alternate translation: “the star that tells about him” or “the star that is associated with his birth”
-MAT	2	2	a7y9		ἐν τῇ ἀνατολῇ	1	in the east	Alternate translation: “as it came up in the east” or “while we were in our country”
+MAT	2	1	j9yn	grammar-connect-time-sequential	τοῦ δὲ Ἰησοῦ γεννηθέντος ἐν Βηθλέεμ τῆς Ἰουδαίας ἐν ἡμέραις Ἡρῴδου τοῦ βασιλέως, ἰδοὺ, μάγοι ἀπὸ ἀνατολῶν παρεγένοντο εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα	1	General Information:	**learned men from the east arrived in Jerusalem** comes after **Jesus had been born in Bethlehem of Judea**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “Now after Jesus had been born in the city of Bethlehem, which is in Judea, men who studied the stars came to Jerusalem from an eastern country” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
+MAT	2	1	kf5g	translate-names	Ἡρῴδου	1	of Herod	There was more than one man named **Herod**. This refers to **Herod** the Great. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+MAT	2	1	p6gc	translate-unknown	μάγοι ἀπὸ ἀνατολῶν	1	learned men from the east	These men were men who studied the stars in the sky to try to learn what the gods were communicating to them. If your readers would not be familiar with this, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “men who studied the stars” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+MAT	2	2	w3nc	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἴδομεν γὰρ αὐτοῦ τὸν ἀστέρα ἐν τῇ ἀνατολῇ καὶ ἤλθομεν προσκυνῆσαι αὐτῷ	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase is the result of the first phrase. Alternate translation: “We have come to worship him, for we saw his star in the sky in the east” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+MAT	2	2	zj7c	figs-explicit	αὐτοῦ τὸν ἀστέρα	1	his star	They were not saying that the baby was the owner of the **star**, but rather that this star was directing them to where the child was. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the star that tells about him” or “the star that is associated with his birth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MAT	2	2	v248		προσκυνῆσαι	1	to worship	This could mean: (1) they intended to **worship** the baby as divine. (2) they wanted to honor him as a human king. If your language has a word that includes both meanings, you should consider using it here.
-MAT	2	3	p5rw		ἐταράχθη	1	became troubled	Herod was worried that this baby would replace him as king. Alternate translation: “he was worried”
-MAT	2	3	qu3d	figs-metonymy	πᾶσα Ἱεροσόλυμα	1	all Jerusalem	Here, **Jerusalem** refers to the people.Alternate translation: “all the people in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-MAT	2	3	mc1r	figs-hyperbole	πᾶσα Ἱεροσόλυμα	1	all Jerusalem	Here, **all** means “many.” Matthew is exaggerating to emphasize how many people were worried. Alternate translation: “many of the people in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-MAT	2	4	ne4v			0	General Information:	In verse 6, the chief priests and scribes of the people quote the prophet Micah to show that the Christ would be born in Bethlehem.
-MAT	2	5	w68n		ἐν Βηθλέεμ τῆς Ἰουδαίας	1	In Bethlehem of Judea	Alternate translation: “In the town of Bethlehem in the province of Judea”
+MAT	2	3	qu3d	figs-metonymy	πᾶσα Ἱεροσόλυμα	1	all Jerusalem	Here, **Jerusalem** refers to the people who live in Jerusalem. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “all the people in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+MAT	2	3	b0gt	figs-ellipsis	καὶ πᾶσα Ἱεροσόλυμα μετ’ αὐτοῦ	1		Matthew left out some words in this phrase that might be needed in certain languages to make a full sentence. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “And many in Jerusalem were troubled along with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+MAT	2	3	mc1r	figs-hyperbole	πᾶσα Ἱεροσόλυμα	1	all Jerusalem	Here, **all** means “many.” Matthew is exaggerating to emphasize how many people were worried. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternate translation: “many of the people in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+MAT	2	4	ne4v	figs-quotations	ἐπυνθάνετο παρ’ αὐτῶν ποῦ ὁ Χριστὸς γεννᾶται	1	General Information:	If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “He was asking them where the Messiah was supposed to have been born” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+MAT	2	5	w68n	figs-ellipsis	ἐν Βηθλέεμ τῆς Ἰουδαίας	1	In Bethlehem of Judea	Matthew is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “He is supposed to have been born in Bethlehem, which is in the region of Judea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MAT	2	5	z2i4	figs-activepassive	οὕτως…γέγραπται διὰ τοῦ προφήτου	1	thus it has been written through the prophet	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “this is what the prophet wrote long ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MAT	2	6	kmw7	figs-apostrophe	σύ Βηθλέεμ	1	you, Bethlehem	Micah was speaking to the people of **Bethlehem** as if they were with him but they were not. Alternate translation: “you, people of Bethlehem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]])
-MAT	2	6	c2cl	figs-litotes	οὐδαμῶς ἐλαχίστη εἶ ἐν τοῖς ἡγεμόσιν Ἰούδα	1	are by no means the least among the leaders of Judah	If your readers would misunderstand the phrase **are by no means the least**, you can translate it with a positive phrase. Alternate translation: “your town is among the most important towns in Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
-MAT	2	6	tg5d	figs-metaphor	ὅστις ποιμανεῖ τὸν λαόν μου τὸν Ἰσραήλ	1	who will shepherd my people Israel	Micah speaks of this ruler as one who will **shepherd** **Israel**. This means he will lead and care for the people. Alternate translation: “who will lead my people Israel as a shepherd leads his sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-MAT	2	7	b487		Ἡρῴδης λάθρᾳ καλέσας τοὺς μάγους	1	Herod, having secretly called the learned men	This means that **Herod** talked to **the learned men** without other people knowing.
-MAT	2	7	tax3	figs-quotations	ἠκρίβωσεν παρ’ αὐτῶν τὸν χρόνον τοῦ φαινομένου ἀστέρος	1	inquired from them the time of the appearing of the star	You can translate this indirect quotation as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “men, and he asked them, ‘When exactly did this star appear?’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-MAT	2	7	vng3	figs-explicit	τὸν χρόνον τοῦ φαινομένου ἀστέρος	1	the time of the appearing of the star	It is implied that the learned men told him when **the star** appeared. Alternate translation: “what time the star had appeared. The learned men told Herod when the star first appeared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MAT	2	8	v7y2		τοῦ παιδίου	1	the young child	The **young child** refers to Jesus.
-MAT	2	8	t4u1		ἀπαγγείλατέ μοι	1	report to me	Alternate translation: “let me know” or “tell me” or “report back to me”
-MAT	2	8	jtw7		προσκυνήσω αὐτῷ	1	might worship him	See how you translated this in [Matthew 2:2](../02/02.md).
-MAT	2	9	h1zx		οἱ δὲ ἀκούσαντες	1	And they, having heard	Alternate translation: “And the learned men, after they heard”
-MAT	2	9	wl4r		εἶδον ἐν τῇ ἀνατολῇ	1	they saw in the east	Alternate translation: “they had seen come up in the east” or “they had seen in their country”
-MAT	2	9	hy1i		προῆγεν αὐτούς	1	was going before them	Alternate translation: “guided them” or “led them”
-MAT	2	9	jp2j		ἐστάθη ἐπάνω	1	it stood over	Alternate translation: “it stopped over”
-MAT	2	9	w3v1		οὗ ἦν τὸ παιδίον	1	where the young child was	Alternate translation: “the place where the young child was staying”
-MAT	2	11	pv3r			0	Connecting Statement:	Here the scene shifts to the house where Mary, Joseph, and the young Jesus were living.
-MAT	2	11	tu5s		ἐλθόντες	1	having gone	Alternate translation: “after he learned men went”
-MAT	2	11	d41d	translate-symaction	πεσόντες προσεκύνησαν αὐτῷ	1	having fallen down, they worshiped him	They did this to honor Jesus. Alternate translation: “they knelt down and put their faces close to the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
-MAT	2	11	r452	figs-metonymy	τοὺς θησαυροὺς αὐτῶν	1	their treasures	Here, **their treasures** refers to the boxes or bags they used to carry their treasures. Alternate translation: “the containers that held their treasures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-MAT	2	12	zyq6		χρηματισθέντες	1	having been warned	God knew that Herod wanted to harm the child. Alternate translation: “when God warned the learned men”
-MAT	2	12	dr1p	figs-quotations	κατ’ ὄναρ μὴ ἀνακάμψαι πρὸς Ἡρῴδην	1	through a dream not to return to Herod	You can translate this indirect quotation as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “through a dream, saying, ‘Do not go back to King Herod’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-MAT	2	13	brp5			0	General Information:	In verse 15, Matthew quotes the prophet Hosea to show that the Christ would spend time in Egypt.
-MAT	2	13	iw8p		ἀναχωρησάντων…αὐτῶν	1	after they had departed	Alternate translation: “when the learned men had departed”
-MAT	2	13	zwj5		φαίνεται κατ’ ὄναρ τῷ Ἰωσὴφ	1	appears to Joseph in a dream	Alternate translation: “came to Joseph while he was dreaming”
-MAT	2	13	u4a4	figs-you	ἐγερθεὶς, παράλαβε…φεῦγε…ἴσθι…σοι	1	Get up, take … flee … remain … you	God is speaking to Joseph, so these should all be singular forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+MAT	2	5	o460	writing-quotations	οὕτως γὰρ γέγραπται διὰ τοῦ προφήτου	1		In Matthew’s culture, **for thus it has been written through the prophet** is a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book written by Micah the prophet. If your readers would not understand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Matthew is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “according to Micah the prophet, who wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+MAT	2	6	kmw7	figs-apostrophe	καὶ σύ Βηθλέεμ, γῆ Ἰούδα, οὐδαμῶς ἐλαχίστη εἶ ἐν τοῖς ἡγεμόσιν Ἰούδα; ἐκ σοῦ γὰρ ἐξελεύσεται ἡγούμενος, ὅστις ποιμανεῖ τὸν λαόν μου τὸν Ἰσραήλ	1	you, Bethlehem	Micah was speaking to **Bethlehem** as if it was a person. If this is confusing in your language, consider referring to Bethlehem in the third person. Alternate translation: “Bethlehem, in the land of Judah, is by no means the least among the leaders of Judah. For from this region a ruler will come who will shepherd my people Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]])
+MAT	2	6	c2cl	figs-litotes	οὐδαμῶς ἐλαχίστη εἶ ἐν τοῖς ἡγεμόσιν Ἰούδα	1	are by no means the least among the leaders of Judah	If **are by no means the least among the leaders of Judah** is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “your town is among the most important towns in Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
+MAT	2	6	rihn	figs-metonymy	ἐκ σοῦ γὰρ ἐξελεύσεται ἡγούμενος	1		When Matthew says **for from you will come out a ruler**, he is talking about from the people who live in Bethlehem. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from your people a leader will come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+MAT	2	6	tg5d	figs-metaphor	ὅστις ποιμανεῖ τὸν λαόν μου τὸν Ἰσραήλ	1	who will shepherd my people Israel	Micah speaks of this ruler as one who will **shepherd…Israel**. This means he will lead and care for the people just like a shepherd cares for their animals. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “who will lead my people Israel and take care of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MAT	2	8	jtw7	figs-infostructure	προσκυνήσω αὐτῷ	1	might worship him	Herod first says **Having gone, search carefully for the young child, and after you have found him, report to me so that I also, having come, might worship him.** and then he **sent them to Bethlehem**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “Herod said to the men who study the stars, “After you leave, search carefully for the young child, and after you have found him, report to me so that I also, having come, might worship him.” Then he sent them to Bethlehem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+MAT	2	11	q8vp	figs-explicit	πεσόντες προσεκύνησαν αὐτῷ	1		In their culture, **falling down, they worshipped him** was something that was done to a king. This shows that they saw Jesus as the true king of the Jews. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “They bowed down and honored the child as they would a king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MAT	2	11	r452	figs-metonymy	τοὺς θησαυροὺς αὐτῶν	1	their treasures	Here, **their treasures** refers to the boxes or bags they used to carry their treasures. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the containers that held their treasures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+MAT	2	11	kidl	figs-explicit	προσήνεγκαν αὐτῷ δῶρα	1		In some cultures, gifts are brought when you are meeting someone important to show that you honor them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “They offered him gifts to honor him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MAT	2	13	v88f	figs-explicit	ἕως ἂν εἴπω σοι	1	until I tell you	If your readers would misunderstand this phrase, you can make the full meaning of this statement explicit. Alternate translation: “until I tell you it is safe to come back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MAT	2	13	g3t7		εἴπω σοι	1	I tell you	Here, **I** refers to God. The angel is speaking for God.
-MAT	2	15	ft3a	figs-explicit	ἦν	1	he was	It is implied that Joseph, Mary, and Jesus remained in Egypt. Alternate translation: “they remained” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MAT	2	15	d11g		ἕως τῆς τελευτῆς Ἡρῴδου	1	until the death of Herod	**Herod** does not die until [2:19](../02/19.md). This statement describes the length of their stay in Egypt, and it does not say that Herod died at this time.
-MAT	2	15	d5wl		ἐξ Αἰγύπτου ἐκάλεσα τὸν Υἱόν μου	1	Out of Egypt I called my son	Alternate translation: “I have called my son out of Egypt”
-MAT	2	15	dr9b		τὸν Υἱόν μου	1	my son	In Hosea this refers to the people of Israel. Matthew quoted it to say that this was true of God’s Son, Jesus. Translate it using a word for son that could refer to the only **son** or the first son.
-MAT	2	16	s2la	figs-events		0	General Information:	These events happen before Herod’s death, which Matthew mentioned in [2:15](../02/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
-MAT	2	16	yq7p			0	Connecting Statement:	Here the scene shifts back to Herod and tells what he did when he learned that the learned men had deceived him.
+MAT	2	15	ft3a	writing-pronouns	ἦν ἐκεῖ	1	he was	It is implied that Joseph, Mary, and Jesus remained in Egypt. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jospeh, Mary and Jesus were there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+MAT	2	15	we5w	figs-activepassive	ἵνα πληρωθῇ τὸ ῥηθὲν ὑπὸ Κυρίου διὰ τοῦ προφήτου	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in order that God might prove true that which he spoke through the prophet Hosea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MAT	2	15	s792	writing-quotations	λέγοντος	1		See how you translated **saying** in [1:23](../01/23.md)(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 MAT	2	16	g513	figs-activepassive	ἐνεπαίχθη ὑπὸ τῶν μάγων	1	he had been mocked by the learned men	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the learned men had embarrassed him by tricking him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MAT	2	16	d8d5	figs-explicit	ἀποστείλας, ἀνεῖλεν πάντας τοὺς παῖδας	1	having sent forth, he killed all the male children	Herod did not kill the **children** himself. Alternate translation: “he gave orders for his soldiers to kill all the boys” or “he sent soldiers there to kill all the boy babies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MAT	2	16	dr3r		κατὰ τὸν χρόνον	1	according to the time	Alternate translation: “based on the time”
-MAT	2	17	q1y9			0	General Information:	Matthew quotes the prophet Jeremiah to show that the death of all of the male children in the region of Bethlehem was according to scripture.
-MAT	2	17	l8g5	figs-activepassive	τότε ἐπληρώθη	1	Then was fulfilled	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “This fulfilled” or “Herod’s actions fulfilled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MAT	2	17	v6a1	figs-activepassive	τὸ ῥηθὲν διὰ Ἰερεμίου τοῦ προφήτου	1	what had been spoken through Jeremiah the prophet	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “what the Lord spoke long ago through the prophet Jeremiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MAT	2	18	p9gk		φωνὴ…ἠκούσθη…οὐκ εἰσίν	1	A voice was heard … they are no more	Matthew is quoting the prophet Jeremiah.
-MAT	2	18	k91t	figs-activepassive	φωνὴ…ἠκούσθη	1	A voice was heard	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “People heard a voice” or “There was a loud sound” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MAT	2	18	zm17		Ῥαχὴλ κλαίουσα τὰ τέκνα αὐτῆς	1	Rachel weeping for her children	**Rachel** lived many years before this time. This prophecy shows Rachel, who has died, weeping for her descendants.
-MAT	2	18	rgg1	figs-activepassive	οὐκ ἤθελεν παρακληθῆναι	1	not willing to be comforted	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “no one could comfort her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MAT	2	18	p9ri	figs-euphemism	ὅτι οὐκ εἰσίν	1	because they are no more	Here, **are no more** is a mild way of saying they are dead. Alternate translation: “because they were dead” or “because the children were gone and would never return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
-MAT	2	19	kt2i			0	Connecting Statement:	Here the scene shifts to Egypt, where Joseph, Mary, and the young Jesus are living.
-MAT	2	19	r4yu		ἰδοὺ	1	behold	The word **behold** marks the beginning of another event in the larger story. It may involve different people than the previous events. Your language may have a way of doing this.
-MAT	2	20	hz2m	figs-euphemism	οἱ ζητοῦντες τὴν ψυχὴν τοῦ παιδίου	1	those who seek the life of the child	Here, **seeking the life of the child** is a way of saying they wanted to kill the child. Alternate translation: “those who were looking for the child in order to kill him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
-MAT	2	20	y6r6		οἱ ζητοῦντες	1	those who seek	This phrase refers to King Herod and his advisors.
-MAT	2	22	kg7u			0	Connecting Statement:	This is the end of the part of the story that began in [2:1](../02/01.md) about Herod’s attempt to kill the new King of the Jews.
-MAT	2	22	uq8p		ἀκούσας δὲ	1	But having heard	Alternate translation: “But when Joseph heard”
+MAT	2	16	d8d5	figs-explicit	ἀποστείλας, ἀνεῖλεν πάντας τοὺς παῖδας	1	having sent forth, he killed all the male children	Herod sent other people to kill the **children**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he gave orders for his soldiers to kill all the boys” or “he sent soldiers there to kill all the boy babies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MAT	2	17	l8g5	figs-activepassive	ἐπληρώθη τὸ ῥηθὲν	1	Then was fulfilled	See how your translated this in [2:15](../02/15.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MAT	2	18	k91t	figs-activepassive	φωνὴ…ἠκούσθη	1	A voice was heard	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “People heard a voice” or “People heard a sound” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MAT	2	18	x062	figs-doublet	κλαυθμὸς καὶ ὀδυρμὸς πολύς	1		These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that the sound of weeping was very loud. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “much weeping” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+MAT	2	18	zm17	figs-metonymy	Ῥαχὴλ κλαίουσα τὰ τέκνα αὐτῆς καὶ οὐκ ἤθελεν παρακληθῆναι	1	Rachel weeping for her children	**Rachel** lived many years before this time. This prophecy depicts Rachel, who is represented by her descendants weeping over their children. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the descendants of Rachel are weeping over their children, and no one can comfort them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+MAT	2	18	rgg1	figs-activepassive	οὐκ ἤθελεν παρακληθῆναι	1	not willing to be comforted	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “no one could comfort her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MAT	2	18	p9ri	figs-euphemism	ὅτι οὐκ εἰσίν	1	because they are no more	Here, **they are no more** is a polite way of saying they are dead. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “because they were dead” or “because the children were gone and would never return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
+MAT	2	20	hz2m	figs-euphemism	οἱ ζητοῦντες τὴν ψυχὴν τοῦ παιδίου	1	those who seek the life of the child	Here, **seeking the life of the child** is a way of saying they wanted to kill the child. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “those who were looking for the child in order to kill him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 MAT	2	22	h4cq	translate-names	Ἀρχέλαος	1	Archelaus	**Archelaus** is the name of Herod’s son. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-MAT	2	22	zk37		ἐφοβήθη	1	he was afraid	Alternate translation: “Joseph was afraid”
-MAT	2	23	dx5i	figs-activepassive	τὸ ῥηθὲν διὰ τῶν προφητῶν	1	what had been spoken through the prophets	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “what the Lord spoke long ago through the prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MAT	2	23	hc8g	translate-names	Ναζωραῖος κληθήσεται	1	he will be called a Nazarene	Here, **he** refers to Jesus. The prophets before the time of Jesus would have referred to him as the Messiah or the Christ. Alternate translation: “people would say that the Christ is a Nazarene” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+MAT	2	23	dx5i	figs-activepassive	πληρωθῇ τὸ ῥηθὲν διὰ τῶν προφητῶν	1	what had been spoken through the prophets	See how you translated this in [2:15](../02/15.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MAT	3	intro	a6h3			0		# Matthew 3 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in verse 3.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### “Bear fruit worthy of repentance”<br><br>Fruit is a common picture word in the scriptures. Writers use it to describe the results of either good or bad behavior. In this chapter, good fruit is the result of living as God commands. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### “The kingdom of heaven is near”<br><br>No one knows for sure whether the “kingdom of heaven” was present or still coming when John spoke these words. English translations often use the phrase “at hand,” but these words can be difficult to translate. Other versions use the phrases “is coming near” and “has come near.”
 MAT	3	1	xp3z			0	General Information:	This is the beginning of a new part of the story where Matthew tells of the ministry of John the Baptist. In verse 3, Matthew quotes the prophet Isaiah to show that John the Baptist was God’s appointed messenger to prepare for Jesus’ ministry.
 MAT	3	1	d74m		ἐν…ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις	1	in those days	The events of this chapter occurred many years after Joseph and his family left Egypt and went to Nazareth. This is probably near the time that Jesus begins his ministry. Alternate translation: “some time later” or “some years later”
@@ -1455,7 +1406,7 @@ MAT	14	11	lqb6		τῷ κορασίῳ	1	to the girl	Translate **girl** with the
 MAT	14	12	fl47		οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ	1	his disciples	Alternate translation: “the disciples of John”
 MAT	14	12	ni1q		τὸ πτῶμα	1	the corpse	Alternate translation: “the dead body”
 MAT	14	12	mq89	figs-explicit	ἐλθόντες, ἀπήγγειλαν τῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	having come, they reported it to Jesus	The full meaning of this statement can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “the disciples of John went and told Jesus what had happened to John the Baptist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MAT	14	13	id97	writing-background		0	General Information:	Verses 13-14 give background information about the miracle that Jesus is about to perform by feeding five thousand people in verses [15-21](..\14\15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
+MAT	14	13	id97	writing-background		0	General Information:	Verses 13-14 give background information about the miracle that Jesus is about to perform by feeding five thousand people in verses [15-21](..\\14\\15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 MAT	14	13	ds5w		δὲ	1	Now	The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Matthew starts to tell a new part of the story.
 MAT	14	13	dvq4		ἀκούσας	1	having heard this	Alternate translation: “having heard what happened to John” or “having heard the news about John”
 MAT	14	13	ia39	figs-explicit	ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἀνεχώρησεν	1	Jesus withdrew	It is implied that Jesus’ disciples went with him. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples left” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1695,11 +1646,11 @@ MAT	17	23	fjac	figs-activepassive	ἐγερθήσεται	1	he will be raised up
 MAT	17	24	jli6			0	Connecting Statement:	Here the scene shifts again to a later time when Jesus teaches Peter about paying the temple tax.
 MAT	17	24	t8qt		ἐλθόντων…αὐτῶν	1	when they had come	Alternate translation: “when Jesus and his disciples had come”
 MAT	17	24	b953	figs-explicit	τὰ δίδραχμα	1	the two-drachma tax	This was a **tax** that Jewish men paid to support the temple in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the temple tax” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MAT	17	24	cths	translate-bmoney	τὰ δίδραχμα	1	the two-drachma tax	The **drachma** was equivalent to the “denarius,” which was worth about one day's wage. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
+MAT	17	24	cths	translate-bmoney	τὰ δίδραχμα	1	the two-drachma tax	The **drachma** was equivalent to the “denarius,” which was worth about one day’s wage. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
 MAT	17	25	y26n		τὴν οἰκίαν	1	the house	Alternate translation: “the place where Jesus was staying”
 MAT	17	25	yp5h	figs-rquestion	τί σοι δοκεῖ, Σίμων? οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς, ἀπὸ τίνων λαμβάνουσιν τέλη ἢ κῆνσον? ἀπὸ τῶν υἱῶν αὐτῶν ἢ ἀπὸ τῶν ἀλλοτρίων?	1	What do you think, Simon? From whom do the kings of the earth receive taxes or tolls? From their sons or from strangers?	Jesus asks these questions to teach Simon, not to gain information for himself. If your readers would misunderstand these questions, you can express them as a statement. Alternate translation: “Listen, Simon. We know that when kings collect taxes, they collect it from people who are not members of their own family.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MAT	17	26	w75w	figs-quotations	εἰπόντος δέ, ἀπὸ τῶν ἀλλοτρίων, ἔφη αὐτῷ ὁ Ἰησοῦς	1	But when he said, “From strangers,” Jesus said to him	If you translated Jesus’ questions as statements in [17:25](../17/25.md), you may need to give an alternate response here. You could also state it as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “But when Peter said, ‘Yes, that is true. Kings collect taxes from people who are not their family,’ Jesus said” or “But after Peter agreed with Jesus, Jesus said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-MAT	17	26	u6xx		οἱ υἱοί	1	the sons	Here, **the sons** refers to people who are not part of the ruler's family.
+MAT	17	26	u6xx		οἱ υἱοί	1	the sons	Here, **the sons** refers to people who are not part of the ruler’s family.
 MAT	17	27	mwa6		ἵνα δὲ μὴ σκανδαλίσωμεν αὐτούς, πορευθεὶς	1	But in order that we might not cause them to sin, having gone	Alternate translation: “But we do not want to make the tax collectors angry. So, go”
 MAT	17	27	uhk5	figs-explicit	βάλε ἄγκιστρον	1	throw in a hook	Fishermen tied **a fishhook** to the end of a line, then threw it in the water to catch fish. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MAT	17	27	ebj4		τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ	1	its mouth	Alternate translation: “the fish’s mouth”
@@ -1769,7 +1720,7 @@ MAT	18	23	rqp1	figs-parables	ὡμοιώθη ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐ
 MAT	18	23	bp72		συνᾶραι λόγον μετὰ τῶν δούλων αὐτοῦ	1	to settle accounts with his slaves	Alternate translation: “his slaves to pay him what they owed”
 MAT	18	24	d6ne	figs-activepassive	προσηνέχθη εἷς αὐτῷ	1	one was brought to him	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “someone brought one of the king’s servants to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MAT	18	24	w3nr	translate-numbers	μυρίων ταλάντων	1	of 10,000 talents	Alternate translation: “of ten thousand talents” or “more money than the servant could ever repay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-MAT	18	24	bihe	translate-bmoney	μυρίων ταλάντων	1	of 10,000 talents	A “talent” was equal to one day's wage. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
+MAT	18	24	bihe	translate-bmoney	μυρίων ταλάντων	1	of 10,000 talents	A “talent” was equal to one day’s wage. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
 MAT	18	25	nmz8	figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευσεν αὐτὸν ὁ κύριος πραθῆναι, καὶ τὴν γυναῖκα, καὶ τὰ τέκνα, καὶ πάντα ὅσα εἶχεν, καὶ ἀποδοθῆναι	1	the master commanded him to be sold, together with his wife and children and everything that he had, and repayment to be made	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the king commanded his servants to sell the man along with his wife and children and everything that he had, and to pay the debt with the money from the sale” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MAT	18	26	thl3	translate-symaction	πεσὼν οὖν ὁ δοῦλος προσεκύνει	1	So the slave, having fallen down, was bowing down before	This shows that the **slave** approached the king in the most humble way possible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 MAT	18	26	cx5z		προσεκύνει αὐτῷ	1	was bowing down before him	Alternate translation: “was bowing down before the king”
@@ -2741,4 +2692,4 @@ MAT	28	19	yz6q	figs-metonymy	πάντα τὰ ἔθνη	1	of all the nations	Her
 MAT	28	19	l5b5	figs-metonymy	εἰς τὸ ὄνομα	1	into the name	Here, **name** refers to authority. Alternate translation: “by the authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MAT	28	19	kwa3	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Πατρὸς…τοῦ Υἱοῦ	1	the Father … the Son	**Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 MAT	28	20	mz6f		ἰδοὺ	1	See	Alternate translation: “look” or “listen” or “pay attention to what I am about to tell you”
-MAT	28	20	si8z		ἕως τῆς συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος	1	even to the end of the age	Alternate translation: “until the end of this age” or “until the end of the world”
+MAT	28	20	si8z		ἕως τῆς συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος	1	even to the end of the age	Alternate translation: “until the end of this age” or “until the end of the world”
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv b/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv
index f93139a5ee..45794c4e43 100644
--- a/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNote
 MRK	front	intro	r2f2			0		# Introduction to the Gospel of Mark<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of the Book of Mark<br><br>1. Introduction (1:1-13)<br>1. The ministry of Jesus in Galilee<br>    * Early ministry (1:14-3:6)<br>    * Jesus becomes more popular among the people (3:7-5:43)<br>    * Moving away from Galilee and then returning (6:1-8:26)<br>1. Progress toward Jerusalem, repeated times when Jesus predicts his own death; the disciples misunderstand, and Jesus teaches them how difficult it will be to follow him (8:27-10:52)<br>1. Last days of ministry and preparation for final conflict in Jerusalem (11:1-13:37)<br>1. The death of Christ and the empty tomb (14:1-16:8)<br><br>### What is the Book of Mark about?<br><br>The Gospel of Mark is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life of Jesus Christ. The authors of the gospels wrote about who Jesus was and what he did during his life. Mark wrote much about how Jesus suffered and died on the cross. He did this to encourage his readers who were being persecuted. Mark also explained Jewish customs and some Aramaic words. This may indicate that Mark expected most of his first readers to be Gentiles.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of Mark,” or “The Gospel according to Mark.” They may also choose a title that may be clearer, such as, “The Good News about Jesus that Mark wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>### Who wrote the Book of Mark?<br><br>The book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the author was Mark. Mark was also known as John Mark. He was a close friend of Peter. Mark may not have witnessed what Jesus said and did. Many experts think that Peter the Apostle was the source of what Mark wrote about Jesus.<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### What were Jesus’ teaching methods?<br><br>The people regarded Jesus as a rabbi. A rabbi is a teacher of God’s law. Jesus taught in similar ways as other religious teachers in Israel. He had students who followed him wherever he went. These students were called disciples. He often told parables. Parables are stories that teach moral lessons. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/parable]])<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### What are the Synoptic Gospels?<br><br>The Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they have many similar passages. The word “synoptic” means to “see together.”<br><br>The texts are considered “parallel” when they are the same or almost the same among two or three of the gospels. When translating parallel passages, translators should use the same wording and make them as similar as possible.<br><br>### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?<br><br>In the Gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” This phrase could mean a few things:<br><br>*The phrase son of man can simply be describing that someone’s father is also a human being. Therefore, the person being described is literally a son of a man, or a human being.<br><br>*The phrase sometimes is a reference to Daniel 7:13-14. In this passage there is a person described as a “son of man.” This description tells us that the person ascending to the throne of God looked like a human being. This description is than the first different because God gives this son of man authority forever. Therefore, the title son of man became a title for the Messiah.<br><br>Translating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.<br><br>### Why does Mark frequently use terms indicating short periods of time?<br><br>The Gospel of Mark uses the word “immediately” forty-two times. Mark does this to make the events more exciting and vivid. It moves the reader quickly from one event to the next.<br><br>### Sabbath/Sabbaths<br><br>Oftentimes in the culture of the Bible, religious festivals would be written in the plural form of the word instead of a singular form. This occurs in Mark as well. In the ULT, the word should be kept plural, “sabbaths”. This is simply for the sake of being as close to the original text as possible. In the UST it is changed to singular to make more sense of the use of the word in its context, “sabbath”.<br><br>### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Mark?<br><br>The following verses are found in older versions of the Bible but are not included in most modern versions. Translators are advised not to include these verses. However, if in the translators’ region, there are older versions of the Bible that include one or more of these verses, the translators can include them. If they are included, they should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to Mark’s Gospel.<br>* “If any man has ears to hear, let him hear.” (7:16)<br>* “where their worm never dies and the fire is never quenched” (9:44)<br>* “where their worm never dies and the fire is never quenched” (9:46)<br>* “And the scripture was fulfilled that says, ‘He was counted with the lawless ones’” (15:28)<br><br>The following passage in not found in the earliest manuscripts. Most Bibles include this passage, but modern Bibles put it in brackets ([]) or indicate in some way that this passage may not have been original to Mark’s Gospel. Translators are advised to do something similar as the modern versions of the Bible.<br>* “Early on the first day of the week, after he arose, he appeared first to Mary Magdalene, from whom he had cast out seven demons. She went and told those who were with him, while they were mourning and weeping. They heard that he was alive and that he had been seen by her, but they did not believe. After these things he appeared in a different form to two of them, as they were walking out into the country. They went and told the rest of the disciples, but they did not believe them. Jesus later appeared to the eleven as they were reclining at the table, and he rebuked them for their unbelief and hardness of heart, because they did not believe those who saw him after he rose from the dead. He said to them, ‘Go into all the world, and preach the gospel to the entire creation. He who believes and is baptized will be saved, and he who does not believe will be condemned. These signs will go with those who believe: In my name they will cast out demons. They will speak in new languages. They will pick up snakes with their hands, and if they drink anything deadly, it will not hurt them. They will lay hands on the sick, and they will get well.’ After the Lord had spoken to them, he was taken up into heaven and sat down at the right hand of God. The disciples left and preached everywhere, while the Lord worked with them and confirmed the word by the signs that went with them.” (16:9-20)<br><br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-MRK	1	intro	c6ep			0		# Mark 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 1:2-3, which are words from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### “You can make me clean”\n\nLeprosy was a disease of the skin that made a person unclean and unable to properly worship God. Jesus is capable of making people physically “clean” or healthy as well as spiritually “clean” or right with God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])\n\n### “The kingdom of God is near”\n\nScholars debate whether the “kingdom of God” was present at this time or is something that is still coming. English translations frequently use the phrase “at hand,” but this can create difficulty for translators. Other versions use the phase “is coming” and “has come near.”\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### The Historic Present \n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 12, 21, 30, 37, 40 and 44. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “John testified about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])\n\n
+MRK	1	intro	c6ep			0		# Mark 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 1:2-3, which are words from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### “You can make me clean”<br><br>Leprosy was a disease of the skin that made a person unclean and unable to properly worship God. Jesus is capable of making people physically “clean” or healthy as well as spiritually “clean” or right with God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])<br><br>### “The kingdom of God is near”<br><br>Scholars debate whether the “kingdom of God” was present at this time or is something that is still coming. English translations frequently use the phrase “at hand,” but this can create difficulty for translators. Other versions use the phase “is coming” and “has come near.”<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### The Historic Present <br><br>To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 12, 21, 30, 37, 40 and 44. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “John testified about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 MRK	1	1	kpq1	writing-newevent	ἀρχὴ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ	1		This verse introduces the reader to the history of Jesus the Messiah as told by Mark. This functions as an introduction to the entire book of Mark. Use the natural form in your language for beginning the telling of something that actually happened. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent)
 MRK	1	1	i3bc	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Son of God	**Son of God** is an important title that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. If this would be misunderstood, you could use the alternate translation: “who is God’s Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 MRK	1	2	fc4t	figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται ἐν τῷ Ἠσαΐᾳ τῷ προφήτῃ	1		If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an active form. Alternate translation: “Just as Isaiah the prophet wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ MRK	1	4	di1o	translate-names	Ἰωάννης	1		**John** is the name of a man. (
 MRK	1	4	s05n	figs-explicit	καὶ κηρύσσων βάπτισμα μετανοίας εἰς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν	1		The **baptism of repentance** proclaimed by John likely has its origin in baptisms which gentiles did who were converting to Judaism. This baptism was done one time, and showed that these people were converting from their former way of life to the new way of life. If this would be misunderstood, you can state it explicitly. Alternate Translation: “and preaching that he must baptize them to show that they have turned from their former evil ways, accepted God’s forgiveness for their sins, and were now following God” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit)
 MRK	1	4	dtqv	figs-explicit	καὶ κηρύσσων βάπτισμα μετανοίας εἰς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **repentance**, **forgiveness**, and **sins**, you could express those ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “and preaching that he must baptize them to show that they have repented of their former evil way of living and that God has forgiven them for sinning against him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	1	5	u9yg	figs-synecdoche	πᾶσα ἡ Ἰουδαία χώρα	1	the whole region of Judea and all the people of Jerusalem	The word **region of Judea** is used here to refer to the people living within Judea. Alternate translation: “the people from Judea and Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-MRK	1	5	cf75	figs-hyperbole	πᾶσα ἡ Ἰουδαία χώρα καὶ οἱ Ἱεροσολυμεῖται πάντες	1	the whole region of Judea and all the people of Jerusalem	Here, **the whole region** and **all the people** are generalizations that refers to a great number of people, not to every single person. Alternate translation: “many people from Judea and Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+MRK	1	5	cf75	figs-hyperbole	πᾶσα ἡ Ἰουδαία χώρα καὶ οἱ Ἱεροσολυμεῖται πάντες	1	the whole region of Judea and all the people of Jerusalem	Here, **the whole region** and **all the inhabitants** are generalizations that refer to a great number of people, not to every single person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or use plain language. Alternate translation: “many people from Judea and Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 MRK	1	5	h8h7	figs-activepassive	καὶ ἐβαπτίζοντο ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ ἐν τῷ Ἰορδάνῃ ποταμῷ, ἐξομολογούμενοι τὰς ἁμαρτίας αὐτῶν	1	were baptized by him in the Jordan River, confessing their sins	If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “and he was baptizing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	1	6	n3rk	writing-background	καὶ ἦν ὁ Ἰωάννης ἐνδεδυμένος τρίχας καμήλου, καὶ ζώνην δερματίνην περὶ τὴν ὀσφὺν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἔσθων ἀκρίδας καὶ μέλι ἄγριον.	1		This verse helps provide background to John. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 MRK	1	6	j141	figs-explicit	ἦν ὁ Ἰωάννης ἐνδεδυμένος τρίχας καμήλου	1		The camels’ hair that John wore had been made into clothing. This would have been a rough, coarse material. If that would not be understood by your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “John wore rough clothing woven from camel’s hair” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -101,42 +101,48 @@ MRK	1	44	xhu8	figs-explicit	σεαυτὸν δεῖξον τῷ ἱερεῖ	1	s
 MRK	1	44	w6b2	figs-synecdoche	σεαυτὸν δεῖξον	1	show yourself	Here, the word **yourself** represents the skin of the leper. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “show your skin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 MRK	1	45	i91a	figs-metaphor	ἤρξατο κηρύσσειν πολλὰ καὶ διαφημίζειν τὸν λόγον	1	began to proclaim often and to spread the word widely	Here, **spread the word widely** is a metaphor for telling people in many places about what had happened. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “began to tell people in many places about what Jesus had done” (See: and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	1	45	z363	figs-hyperbole	πάντοθεν	1	from all sides	The word **all sides** is a hyperbole used to emphasize how very many places the people came from. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternate translation: “from all over the region” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-MRK	2	intro	zhb5			0		# Mark 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Jesus heals the paralytic (2:1-12)\n1. Jesus tells Levi to follow him (2:13,14)\n1. The feast at Levi’s house (2:15-17)\n1. Questions about fasting (2:18-22)\n1. Picking grain on the Sabbath (2:22-28)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### “Sinners”\n\nWhen the people of Jesus’ time spoke of “sinners,” they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses and instead committed sins like stealing or sexual sins. When Jesus said that he came to call “sinners,” he meant that only people who believe that they are sinners can be his followers. This is true even if they are not what most people think of as “sinners.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n### Fasting and Feasting\n\nPeople would fast, or not eat food for a long time, when they were sad or were showing God that they were sorry for their sins. When they were happy, like during weddings, they would have feasts, or meals where they would eat much food. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fast]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Rhetorical Questions\n\nThe Jewish leaders used rhetorical questions to show that they were angry because of what Jesus said and did and that they did not believe that he was God’s Son ([Mark 2:7](../mrk/02/07.md)). Jesus used them to show the Jewish leaders that they were arrogant ([Mark 2:25-26](./25.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n### The Historic Present \n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 3, 7, 14, 15, 18, 25, . If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “John testified about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])\n\n
+MRK	2	intro	zhb5			0		# Mark 2 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>1. Jesus heals the paralytic (2:1-12)<br>1. Jesus tells Levi to follow him (2:13,14)<br>1. The feast at Levi’s house (2:15-17)<br>1. Questions about fasting (2:18-22)<br>1. Picking grain on the Sabbath (2:22-28)<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### “Sinners”<br><br>When the people of Jesus’ time spoke of “sinners,” they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses and instead committed sins like stealing or sexual sins. When Jesus said that he came to call “sinners,” he meant that only people who believe that they are sinners can be his followers. This is true even if they are not what most people think of as “sinners.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])<br><br>### Fasting and Feasting<br><br>People would fast, or not eat food for a long time, when they were sad or were showing God that they were sorry for their sins. When they were happy, like during weddings, they would have feasts, or meals where they would eat much food. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fast]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Rhetorical Questions<br><br>The Jewish leaders used rhetorical questions to show that they were angry because of what Jesus said and did and that they did not believe that he was God’s Son ([Mark 2:7](../mrk/02/07.md)). Jesus used them to show the Jewish leaders that they were arrogant ([Mark 2:25-26](./25.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>### The Historic Present <br><br>To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 3, 7, 14, 15, 18, 25, . If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “John testified about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 MRK	2	1	ir5j	figs-activepassive	ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν	1	it was heard that he is at home	If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “The people there heard that he was staying at his home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	2	1	j6pa	grammar-connect-time-background	καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺμ	1		The author tells us that Jesus **entered again** to remind us that he has already been in Capernaum in [1:21](../01/21.md). You could make this more explicit in your language. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Jesus came a second time to the town called Capernaum” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
 MRK	2	1	afvi	figs-explicit	ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν	1		There is some debate over whose **house** this is. It could possibly be (1) Peter’s house. Peter’s house functioned as the place where Jesus always returned to when we was in the town of Capernaum. Alternate translation: “He was in Peter’s house” or (2) you could leave it generic, and not specify whose house it was. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	2	3	s21g	translate-unknown	παραλυτικὸν	1		A paralytic is someone who is not able to completely use their body. Sometimes they just can’t use their legs, but sometimes they can’t use anything. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 MRK	2	4	v6ma	translate-unknown	ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν, καὶ ἐξορύξαντες, χαλῶσι	1	they removed the roof where he was, and having made an opening, they lowered	Houses where Jesus lived had flat roofs made of clay and covered with tiles. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they removed the tiles from the part of the roof above where Jesus was. And when they had dug through the clay roof, they lowered” or “they made a hole in the roof above where Jesus was, and then they lowered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 MRK	2	4	ouxr	translate-unknown	κράβαττον	1		A mat was a portable bed that could also be used to transport a person. Think of something in your culture that you might carry an injured person on to get them medical attention. Alternate translation: “a stretcher” or “a cot” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown)
-MRK	2	5	trg9	figs-explicit	ἰδὼν…τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν	1	having seen their faith	**having seen the men’s faith** could mean: (1) only the men who carried the paralyzed man had **faith**. (2) the paralyzed man and the men who brought him to Jesus all had **faith**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	2	5	trg9	figs-explicit	ἰδὼν…τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν	1	having seen their faith	The implication is that Jesus recognized that the friends of this paralyzed man strongly believed that he could heal him. Their actions proved that. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “When Jesus recognized that the man’s friends were convinced that he could heal him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	2	5	hzg6	translate-kinship	τέκνον	1	Child	The word **Child** here shows Jesus cared for the man as a father cares for a son. This man was not actually Jesus’ son. If your language has a term like this, you can clarify. Alternate translation: “Beloved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
 MRK	2	6	le6v	figs-metonymy	διαλογιζόμενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν	1	reasoning in their hearts	Here, **hearts** is a metonym for the people’s thoughts. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “were thinking to themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-MRK	2	7	yr5a	figs-rquestion	τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ?	1	Why does this man speak this way?	The scribes used this question to show their anger that Jesus said “Your sins are forgiven.” If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This man should not speak this way!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	2	7	yr5a	figs-rquestion	τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ?	1	Why does this man speak this way?	These religious leaders do not expect someone to tell them who Jesus is. Instead, they are using the question form to emphasize how inappropriate they think it is for Jesus to tell someone that he forgives their sins. As the next sentence explains, they think this means Jesus was claiming to be God, and so in their view, he would be speaking blasphemies. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate their words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “This man is speaking blasphemies!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	2	7	sj6j	figs-rquestion	τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁμαρτίας, εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ Θεός?	1	Who is able to forgive sins except God alone?	The scribes used this question to say that since only **God is able to forgive sins**, then Jesus should not say “Your sins are forgiven.” If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Only God can forgive sins, not a man!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	2	8	niy6	figs-metonymy	τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ	1	in his spirit	The word **spirit** is a metonym for his inner thoughts and desires. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in his inner being” or “within himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	2	8	h3zp	figs-explicit	ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ	1		This phrase implies that Jesus had supernatural knowledge. It indicates that Jesus knew what the scribes were saying even though he did not hear what they said. If it would be helpful to your readers, your could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Even though no one told Jesus, he knew” or “Even though Jesus had not heard them, he was fully aware”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	2	8	wga7	figs-rquestion	τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν?	1	Why are you thinking these things in your hearts?	Jesus uses this question to tell the scribes that what they are thinking is wrong. It also shows that He knows what they are thinking without them saying it out loud. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “What you are thinking is wrong.” or “Do not think that I am blaspheming.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	2	8	s3m6	figs-metonymy	ταῦτα…ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν	1	these things in your hearts	The word **hearts** is a metonym for their inner thoughts and desires. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “this inside yourselves” or “these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-MRK	2	9	wv5d	figs-rquestion	τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον, εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ, ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁμαρτίαι, ἢ εἰπεῖν, ἔγειρε καὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει?	1	Which is easier to say to the paralyzed man, ‘Your sins have been forgiven’ or to say ‘Get up and take up your bed, and walk’?	Jesus uses this question to make the scribes think about what might prove whether or not he could really forgive sins. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I just said to the paralyzed man, ‘Your sins are forgiven.’ You may think that it is harder to say ‘Get up, take up your bed, and walk,’ because the proof of whether or not I can heal him will be shown by whether or not he gets up and walks.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	2	9	wv5d	figs-rquestion	τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον, εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ, ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁμαρτίαι, ἢ εἰπεῖν, ἔγειρε καὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει?	1	Which is easier to say to the paralyzed man, ‘Your sins have been forgiven’ or to say ‘Get up and take up your bed, and walk’?	Jesus is using the form of a question in order to teach. He wants to make the scribes and Pharisees reflect on the situation and realize something. There are many implications. For example, these religious leaders may take the question in the sense, “Which is easier to get away with saying?” The answer would be, “Your sins are forgiven,” because people don’t expect visual proof of that, whereas if someone says, “Get up and walk,” and nothing happens, that proves the speaker doesn’t have the power to heal. Jesus likely intends the question in a different sense: “Which is the easier way to deal with a situation like this?” It appears that the man’s sickness has something to do with his sins, because Jesus forgives them. In such a situation, it would not be sufficient to say, “Get up and walk,” since that would address the effect but not the cause. To say, “Your sins are forgiven,” would deal with both the cause and the effect, so that would be the easier way to deal with the situation. There are many other implications that could also be drawn out as well—too many to include in the text of a translation. Since the question form is intrinsic to Jesus’ teaching method, you may wish simply to retain it in your translation. However, to show that he is teaching, not asking for information, you could introduce his question with a phrase that indicates its purpose. Alternate translation: “Think about this. Which is easier, to say, ‘Your sins are forgiven you,’ or to say, ‘Get up and walk’?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	2	9	q905	figs-quotesinquotes	τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον, εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ, ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁμαρτίαι, ἢ εἰπεῖν, ἔγειρε καὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει	1		If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Is it easier to tell someone that his sins are forgiven, or to tell him to get up, take his mat, and walk?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 MRK	2	10	g4jn		εἰδῆτε	1	But in order that you may know	The word **you** refers to the scribes and the crowd. If this would be misunderstood, you can state this explicitly.
+MRK	2	11	f369	figs-imperative	ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου, καὶ ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου	1		**get up, take up your mat, and go** were not commands that the man was able to obey. Instead, this was a command that directly caused the man to be healed. Alternate translation: “I heal you, so you can get up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 MRK	2	10	jw9z	figs-123person	ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	that the Son of Man has authority	Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man.” If this is confusing in your language, you can use the second person and convey the respect in another way. Alternate translation: “that I am the Son of Man and I have authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+MRK	2	10	s0w6	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		**Son of Man** is an important title referring to Jesus. [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 MRK	2	12	ki94		ἔμπροσθεν πάντων	1	in front of everyone	Alternate translation: “in the presence of everyone in the house”
+MRK	2	12	e0xs	figs-explicit	ἠγέρθη, καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον, ἐξῆλθεν ἔμπροσθεν πάντων	1		The implication is that the man was able to get up because Jesus had healed him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “And all at once the man was healed, so he got up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	2	13	ma6f	grammar-connect-time-background	καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν, καὶ πᾶς ὁ ὄχλος ἤρχετο πρὸς αὐτόν, καὶ ἐδίδασκεν αὐτούς	1	Connecting Statement:	This phrase acts as background information to tell the reader where the next event is taking place. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
 MRK	2	13	zecn	figs-go	πᾶς ὁ ὄχλος ἤρχετο πρὸς αὐτόν	1		Your language may say “went” rather than came in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “A large crowd went to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 MRK	2	14	sc4g	translate-names	Λευεὶν τὸν τοῦ Ἁλφαίου	1	Levi son of Alphaeus	**Alphaeus** was the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+MRK	2	14	ekv0	figs-idiom	ἀκολούθει μοι	1		In this context, to follow someone means to become that person’s disciple. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Become my disciple” or “Come, follow me as your teacher” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	2	15	bwv2		ἦσαν γὰρ πολλοὶ, καὶ ἠκολούθουν αὐτῷ	1	for there were many and they were following him	Alternate translation: “There were many tax collectors and sinful people who followed Jesus”
 MRK	2	15	zqcu	(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])	καὶ πολλοὶ τελῶναι καὶ ἁμαρτωλοὶ συνανέκειντο τῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		These two groups are used to express that Jesus and his students were eating with many people who the religious leaders looked down upon. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 MRK	2	16	rwu1	figs-rquestion	οἱ γραμματεῖς τῶν Φαρισαίων	1		This phrase tells the reader that these scribes were members of the group known as the Pharisees. Alternate translation: “The scribes, who were members of the Pharisees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-MRK	2	16	b1bi	figs-rquestion	ὅτι μετὰ τῶν τελωνῶν καὶ ἁμαρτωλῶν ἐσθίει?	1	Why is he eating with the tax collectors and sinners?	The scribes and Pharisees asked this question to show they disapproved of Jesus’ hospitality to tax collectors and sinners. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “He should not eat with sinners and tax collectors!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-MRK	2	17	ak1u	writing-proverbs	οὐ χρείαν ἔχουσιν οἱ ἰσχύοντες ἰατροῦ, ἀλλ’ οἱ κακῶς ἔχοντες	1	The ones being healthy do not have need of a physician, but the ones having sickness	Jesus used this proverb about sick people and doctors to teach them that only people who know that they are sinful realize that they need Jesus. You can translate the proverb itself in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]])
+MRK	2	16	b1bi	figs-rquestion	ὅτι μετὰ τῶν τελωνῶν καὶ ἁμαρτωλῶν ἐσθίει?	1	Why is he eating with the tax collectors and sinners?	The Pharisees and scribes are using the question form to express their disapproval. They believed that religious people should separate themselves from people whom they considered to be sinners. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate their words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not eat and drink with sinful tax collectors!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	2	17	ak1u	writing-proverbs	οὐ χρείαν ἔχουσιν οἱ ἰσχύοντες ἰατροῦ, ἀλλ’ οἱ κακῶς ἔχοντες	1	The ones being healthy do not have need of a physician, but the ones having sickness	Jesus begins his response by quoting or creating a proverb, a short saying about something that is generally true in life. This proverb draws a figurative comparison. Just as sick people need to see a doctor to be healed, so sinners need to see Jesus in order to be forgiven and restored. But since Jesus explains the comparison in the next verse, you do not need to explain it here. Rather, you can translate the proverb itself in a way that will be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “People who are well do not need to see a doctor; people who are sick do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]])
 MRK	2	17	c62j	figs-irony	οὐ χρείαν ἔχουσιν οἱ ἰσχύοντες ἰατροῦ, ἀλλ’ οἱ κακῶς ἔχοντες. οὐκ ἦλθον καλέσαι δικαίους, ἀλλὰ ἁμαρτωλούς	1		**Those who are sick** are equated with those who are wanting to be saved by Jesus. The **healthy** are equated with those who do not think they need Jesus. Jesus does not actually think those who do not want him are healthy, but the opposite. He says this because those people think they are healthy in their own eyes and do not need Jesus. If this would be confusing in your language, you be more explicit. Alternate translation: “Those who suppose themselves to be healthy do not need a doctor. It is those who know that they are sick who need a doctor”. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
 MRK	2	17	lh4l	figs-ellipsis	οὐ χρείαν ἔχουσιν οἱ ἰσχύοντες ἰατροῦ, ἀλλ’ οἱ κακῶς ἔχοντες	1		The words **have a need of a physician** are assumed in the second phrase. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: Those who are healthy do not need a doctor, but those whoa re sick need a doctor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	2	17	ca4e	figs-ellipsis	οὐκ ἦλθον καλέσαι…ἀλλὰ ἁμαρτωλούς	1	but sinners	The words **I came...to call** are understood from the phrase before this. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but I came to call sinners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	2	18	z394		ἔρχονται	1	they are coming	**They came** refers to an unknown group of people. It is best to leave this unknown, as it is not clear who is being talked about here. Alternate translation: “A group of unknown men came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 MRK	2	18	j1h2	figs-explicit	καὶ ἦσαν οἱ μαθηταὶ Ἰωάννου καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι νηστεύοντες	1		This fast is likely referring to the fast which the religious leaders performed twice per week. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “Now, the students of John and the Pharisees were performing their bi-weekly fast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	2	18	y7bm	figs-explicit	καὶ ἦσαν οἱ μαθηταὶ Ἰωάννου καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι νηστεύοντες.	1		This phrase provides background information. The author is telling us this to help us to understand why Jesus was being asked this question. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Now, it happened at the time when the students of John the Baptizer and the Pharisees were fasting.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-MRK	2	19	eke3	figs-rquestion	μὴ δύνανται οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ νυμφῶνος ἐν ᾧ ὁ νυμφίος μετ’ αὐτῶν ἐστιν νηστεύειν?	1	The sons of the wedding chamber are not able to fast while the bridegroom is still with them, are they?	Jesus uses this question to remind the people of something they already know and to encourage them to apply it to him and his disciples. Alternate translation: “Wedding attendants do not fast while the bridegroom is with them. Rather they celebrate and feast.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	2	19	eke3	figs-rquestion	μὴ δύνανται οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ νυμφῶνος ἐν ᾧ ὁ νυμφίος μετ’ αὐτῶν ἐστιν νηστεύειν?	1	The sons of the wedding chamber are not able to fast while the bridegroom is still with them, are they?	Jesus is using the question form to teach. He wants the scribes and Pharisees to reflect on the actions of his disciples in light of a situation they are already familiar with. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate his words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “No one tells the groom’s party at a wedding to fast while the groom is still with them!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	2	19	tiiz	figs-extrainfo	μὴ δύνανται οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ νυμφῶνος ἐν ᾧ ὁ νυμφίος μετ’ αὐτῶν ἐστιν νηστεύειν?	1		It is best to keep this verse the way it is. Do not clarify that it is about Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
+MRK	2	19	wetb	figs-idiom	οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ	1		The expression sons of is a Hebrew idiom that means a person shares the qualities of something. In this case, Jesus is describing people who share the quality of being an integral part of a wedding. These are the male friends who attend the groom during the ceremony and the festivities. Alternate translation: “the groom’s party” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	2	20	vg2u	figs-activepassive	ἀπαρθῇ…ὁ νυμφίος	1	the bridegroom may be taken away	If it would be more natural in your language, you could say **the bridegroom may be taken away** with an active form. Alternate translation: “the bridegroom will leave his friends” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	2	20	y79o	figs-activepassive	τότε	1		**then** here shows the reader that the bridegroom must first leave, and then the friends will begin fasting. Make sure this is clear in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 MRK	2	21	v6xc	figs-explicit	οὐδεὶς ἐπίβλημα ῥάκους ἀγνάφου ἐπιράπτει ἐπὶ ἱμάτιον παλαιόν	1	No one sews a patch of unshrunk cloth on an old garment	When a piece of clothing gets a hole in it, another piece of cloth, a patch, is sewn onto the clothing to cover the hole. If this patch has not yet been washed, it will shrink and tear the piece of clothing, making the hole worse than it was to begin with. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -146,8 +152,9 @@ MRK	2	22	dgcz	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ οἶνον νέον εἰς ἀσκοὺ
 MRK	2	23	jya1	figs-explicit	τίλλοντες τοὺς στάχυας	1	picking the heads of grain	Plucking grain in others’ fields and eating it was not considered stealing. It was actually a commandment of the Law to leave the grain on the edges of your field standing so that those who were hungry could eat it. The question was whether it was lawful to do this on the Sabbath. If this would be misunderstood In your culture, you can clarify. Alternate translation: plucking heads of grain, as the Law permitted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	2	23	k3pa	figs-explicit	τοὺς στάχυας	1	the heads of grain	The **heads** are the topmost part of the wheat plant, which is a kind of tall grass. The heads hold the mature grain or seeds of the plant. The disciples were **picking the heads of grain** to eat the kernels, or seeds, in them. This can be worded to show the full meaning. Alternate translation: “picking heads of grain and eating the seeds”. If this would be misunderstood in your language, think of a type of food that you have to remove from a shell or casing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	2	24	h41a	figs-rquestion	ἴδε, τί ποιοῦσιν τοῖς Σάββασιν ὃ οὐκ ἔξεστιν?	1	Look, why are they doing what is not lawful on the Sabbaths?	The Pharisees ask Jesus a question to condemn him. You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “Look! They are breaking the Jewish law concerning the Sabbaths.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	2	24	ec3u	figs-explicit	τί ποιοῦσιν τοῖς Σάββασιν ὃ οὐκ ἔξεστιν	1		The Pharisees considered even the small action of plucking and rubbing heads of grain to be harvesting, and therefore work. You could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “You are harvesting grain, and that is work that the law does not permit you to do on the Sabbath!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	2	24	bf8w	figs-exclamations	ἴδε	1	Look	“Look at this” or “Listen.” This is a word used to get the attention of someone to show them something. If there is a word in your language that is used to draw a person’s attention to something, you could use that here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
-MRK	2	25	g8sf	figs-rquestion	οὐδέποτε ἀνέγνωτε τί ἐποίησεν Δαυεὶδ	1	Have you never read what David did	You can state this (1) as a command. Alternate translation: “Remember what you read about what David did” or (2) as a statement. Alternate translation: “you have read that David did the same thing when he and those with him were hungry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	2	25	g8sf	figs-rquestion	οὐδέποτε ἀνέγνωτε τί ἐποίησεν Δαυεὶδ	1	Have you never read what David did	Jesus does not expect the Pharisees to tell him whether they have read this passage in the Scriptures. Instead, he is using the question form to emphasize that the Pharisees should have learned a principle from that passage that indicates that they are wrong to criticize the disciples. You can state this (1) as a command. Alternate translation: “Remember what you read about what David did” or (2) as a statement. Alternate translation: “you have read that David did the same thing when he and those with him were hungry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	2	25	r14d	figs-explicit	οὐδέποτε ἀνέγνωτε τί ἐποίησεν Δαυεὶδ	1	Have you never read what David did	Jesus refers to reading about David in the Old Testament. You can translate this showing the implicit information. Alternate translation: “Have you not read in the scriptures what David did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	2	25	cjzx	figs-doublet	ὅτε χρείαν ἔσχεν καὶ ἐπείνασεν	1		**had need** and **hungry** are two words that being used to express the same idea. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can combine the two words in your translation. Alternate translation: “When he was in need of food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 MRK	2	26	y57j	figs-explicit	τοὺς ἄρτους τῆς Προθέσεως	1	the bread of the presence	This refers to the 12 loaves of **bread** that were placed on a golden table in the tabernacle or temple building as a sacrifice to God during Old Testament times. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -156,14 +163,17 @@ MRK	2	27	i374	figs-activepassive	τὸ Σάββατον διὰ τὸν ἄνθ
 MRK	2	27	u83s	figs-gendernotations	τὸν ἄνθρωπον	1	man	**man** is a word which refers to both men and women. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 MRK	2	27	v3mb	figs-genericnoun	τὸν ἄνθρωπον	1		**man** is a generic noun. It does not refer to any specific person, but to mankind as a whole. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 MRK	2	27	s2yd	figs-ellipsis	οὐχ ὁ ἄνθρωπος διὰ τὸ Σάββατον	1	not man for the Sabbath	The words **was made** are understood from the previous phrase. They can be repeated here. Alternate translation: “man was not made for the Sabbath” or “God did not make man for the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-MRK	2	28	wgwu			1		Son of Man is a common title given to Jesus. See the introduction to the book for a detailed explanation of the title.
-MRK	2	28	pwb5			1		There are two major interpretations of this passage. (1) Many think that Jesus is here appealing to his heavenly authority to speak about the Sabbath day to the religious leaders. Alternate translation: “Therefore, I, the Son of Man, am Lord of the Sabbath.” (2) **son of man** is a popular title used in the Old Testament to refer to a human being. Jesus could be saying (functioning as the conclusion to the previous verse) that mankind has authority over the Sabbath, and that the Sabbath does not have authority over mankind. Alternate translation: “Therefore, mankind has authority over the Sabbath”.
-MRK	3	intro	x969			0		# Mark 3 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Sabbath\n\nIt was against the law of Moses to do work on the Sabbath. The Pharisees believed healing a sick person on the Sabbath was “work,” so they said that Jesus did wrong when he healed a person on the Sabbath. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n### “Blasphemy against the Spirit”\n\nNo one knows for sure what actions people perform or what words they say when they commit this sin. However, they probably insult the Holy Spirit and his work. Part of the Holy Spirit’s work is to make people understand that they are sinners and that they need to have God forgive them. Therefore, anyone who does not try to stop sinning is probably committing blasphemy against the Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### The twelve disciples\n\nThe following are the lists of the twelve disciples:\n\nIn Matthew:\n\nSimon (Peter), Andrew, James son of Zebedee, John son of Zebedee, Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot and Judas Iscariot.\n\nIn Mark:\n\nSimon (Peter), Andrew, James the son of Zebedee and John the son of Zebedee (to whom he gave the name Boanerges, that is, sons of thunder), Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot.\n\nIn Luke:\n\nSimon (Peter), Andrew, James, John, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon (who was called the Zealot), Judas the son of James, and Judas Iscariot.\n\nThaddaeus is probably the same person as Jude, the son of James.\n\n### Brothers and Sisters\n\nMost people call those who have the same parents “brother” and “sister” and think of them as the most important people in their lives. Many people also call those with the same grandparents “brother” and “sister.” In this chapter Jesus says that the most important people to him are those who obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/brother]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### The Historic Present \n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 3, 13, 20, 31, 32, 33, and 34. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “John testified about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])\n\n
+MRK	2	28	wgwu		ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		Son of Man is a common title given to Jesus. See the introduction to the book for a detailed explanation of the title.
+MRK	2	28	pwb5		ὥστε Κύριός ἐστιν ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου καὶ τοῦ Σαββάτου	1		There are two major interpretations of this passage. (1) Many think that Jesus is here appealing to his heavenly authority to speak about the Sabbath day to the religious leaders. Alternate translation: “Therefore, I, the Son of Man, am Lord of the Sabbath.” (2) **son of man** is a popular title used in the Old Testament to refer to a human being. Jesus could be saying (functioning as the conclusion to the previous verse) that mankind has authority over the Sabbath, and that the Sabbath does not have authority over mankind. Alternate translation: “Therefore, mankind has authority over the Sabbath”.
+MRK	3	intro	x969			0		# Mark 3 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Sabbath<br><br>It was against the law of Moses to do work on the Sabbath. The Pharisees believed healing a sick person on the Sabbath was “work,” so they said that Jesus did wrong when he healed a person on the Sabbath. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])<br><br>### “Blasphemy against the Spirit”<br><br>No one knows for sure what actions people perform or what words they say when they commit this sin. However, they probably insult the Holy Spirit and his work. Part of the Holy Spirit’s work is to make people understand that they are sinners and that they need to have God forgive them. Therefore, anyone who does not try to stop sinning is probably committing blasphemy against the Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### The twelve disciples<br><br>The following are the lists of the twelve disciples:<br><br>In Matthew:<br><br>Simon (Peter), Andrew, James son of Zebedee, John son of Zebedee, Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot and Judas Iscariot.<br><br>In Mark:<br><br>Simon (Peter), Andrew, James the son of Zebedee and John the son of Zebedee (to whom he gave the name Boanerges, that is, sons of thunder), Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot.<br><br>In Luke:<br><br>Simon (Peter), Andrew, James, John, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon (who was called the Zealot), Judas the son of James, and Judas Iscariot.<br><br>Thaddaeus is probably the same person as Jude, the son of James.<br><br>### Brothers and Sisters<br><br>Most people call those who have the same parents “brother” and “sister” and think of them as the most important people in their lives. Many people also call those with the same grandparents “brother” and “sister.” In this chapter Jesus says that the most important people to him are those who obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/brother]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### The Historic Present <br><br>To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 3, 13, 20, 31, 32, 33, and 34. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “John testified about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 MRK	3	2	vr25	figs-explicit	ἵνα κατηγορήσωσιν αὐτοῦ	1	so that they might accuse him	If Jesus were to heal the man that day, the Pharisees would **accuse him** of breaking the law by the working on the Sabbath. Alternate translation: “so that they could accuse him of wrongdoing” or “so that they could accuse him of breaking the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	3	1	bm6z	writing-newevent	καὶ εἰσῆλθεν πάλιν εἰς συναγωγήν, καὶ ἦν ἐκεῖ ἄνθρωπος, ἐξηραμμένην ἔχων τὴν χεῖρα	1		Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
+MRK	3	1	rn8y	writing-participants	καὶ ἦν ἐκεῖ ἄνθρωπος	1		This expression introduces a new character into the story. If your language has an expression of its own that serves this purpose, you can use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
+MRK	3	1	ye6d	translate-unknown	ἐξηραμμένην ἔχων τὴν χεῖρα	1		This means that the man’s hand was damaged in such a way that he could not stretch it out. It was probably bent almost into a fist, making it look smaller. Alternate translation: “his hand was shriveled” or “his hand was atrophied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 MRK	3	2	q35x	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα κατηγορήσωσιν αὐτοῦ	1		This phrase tells the reader why the Pharisees were watching Jesus. Alternate translation: “They were doing this so that they could accuse him of working on the jewish rest day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 MRK	3	3	nm6w		ἔγειρε εἰς τὸ μέσον	1	in our midst	**midst** here is referring to the group people who were gathered inside of the synagogue. If this would be confusing in your language, you can be explicit. Alternate translation: “Stand up in front of all of those meeting here”
 MRK	3	4	mh3z	figs-rquestion	ἔξεστιν τοῖς Σάββασιν ἀγαθοποιῆσαι ἢ κακοποιῆσαι, ψυχὴν σῶσαι ἢ ἀποκτεῖναι?	1	Is it lawful on the Sabbaths to do good, or to do harm; to save a life, or to kill?	Jesus said this to challenge them. He wanted them to acknowledge that it is **lawful** to obey God and do good on the Sabbath. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you may state these questions as sentences. Alternate translation: “It is allowed for people to do good on the sabbath, but not to do evil. Likewise it is allowed to save someone on the sabbath, but not to kill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-MRK	3	4	i71v	figs-parallelism	ἀγαθοποιῆσαι ἢ κακοποιῆσαι, ψυχὴν σῶσαι ἢ ἀποκτεῖναι	1	to do good, or to do harm … to save a life, or to kill	**Do the laws that God gave Moses permit people to do good on the day of rest, or to do evil** and **Do the laws permit us to save a person’s life on the day of rest, or permit us to refuse to help a person and let them die** are similar in meaning, except that the second is more extreme. The two phrases are trying to make the same point. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+MRK	3	4	i71v	figs-parallelism	ἀγαθοποιῆσαι ἢ κακοποιῆσαι, ψυχὴν σῶσαι ἢ ἀποκτεῖναι	1	to do good, or to do harm … to save a life, or to kill	**Is it lawful on the Sabbaths to do good, or to do harm; to save a life, or to kill** are similar in meaning, except that the second is more extreme. The two phrases are trying to make the same point. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 MRK	3	4	vz6c	figs-ellipsis	ψυχὴν σῶσαι ἢ ἀποκτεῖναι	1	to save a life, or to kill	The phrase **is it lawful** is assumed here. If this would be misunderstood, you may clarify and add it again for the second phrase. Alternate translation: “is it lawful to save a life, or is it lawful to kill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	3	4	nut4	figs-metonymy	ψυχὴν	1	a life	This refers to physical life and is a metonym for a person. Alternate translation: “someone from dying” or “someone’s life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	3	5	n4ep	figs-metaphor	τῇ πωρώσει τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν	1		**hardness of heart** is a common metaphor which describes stubbornness towards God’s will. The Pharisees were stubborn about their unwillingness to do anything on the Sabbath — whether good or evil. They therefore leave this man to suffer with his crippled hand. Alternate Translation: “by their stubbornness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -212,7 +222,7 @@ MRK	3	33	qe8c	figs-rquestion	τίς ἐστιν ἡ μήτηρ μου, καὶ 
 MRK	3	33	iu9r	translate-kinship	ἡ μήτηρ μου, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί μου	1		Jesus is using the words **mother** and **brother** here not referring to biological relatives, but to those whom he loves and whom obey God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
 MRK	3	35	dr45	figs-genericnoun	ὃς	1	whoever may do … this is	**whoever** does not refer to any specific person, but to any person who does these things. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 MRK	3	35	yr9i	figs-metaphor	οὗτος ἀδελφός μου καὶ ἀδελφὴ καὶ μήτηρ ἐστίν	1	this is my brother, and sister, and mother	This is a metaphor that means Jesus’ disciples belong to Jesus’ spiritual family. This is more important than belonging to his physical family. Alternate translation: “that person is like a brother, sister, or mother to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-MRK	4	intro	f5ua			0		# Mark 4 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nMark 4:3-10 forms one parable. The parable is explained in 4:14-23.\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 4:12, which are words from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Parables\n\nThe parables were short stories that Jesus told so that people would easily understand the lesson he was trying to teach them. He also told the stories so that those who did not want to believe in him would not understand the truth.\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### The Historic Present \n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 13, 35, 36, 37 and 38. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “John testified about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])\n\n
+MRK	4	intro	f5ua			0		# Mark 4 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Mark 4:3-10 forms one parable. The parable is explained in 4:14-23.<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 4:12, which are words from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Parables<br><br>The parables were short stories that Jesus told so that people would easily understand the lesson he was trying to teach them. He also told the stories so that those who did not want to believe in him would not understand the truth.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### The Historic Present <br><br>To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 13, 35, 36, 37 and 38. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “John testified about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 MRK	4	1	i95e	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε αὐτὸν εἰς τὸ πλοῖον ἐμβάντα, καθῆσθαι ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ	1	the sea	Jesus **stepped into the boat** because the crowd was so big that it would have been very difficult for them all to hear him. If this would not be clear in your language, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Because the crowd was so large, Jesus went out onto a boat so the crowd could hear his teaching.” See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 MRK	4	2	h2a9		καὶ ἐδίδασκεν αὐτοὺς ἐν παραβολαῖς πολλά, καὶ ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ	1		Mark provides this background information about Jesus’ actions to help readers understand what happens while Jesus is on the boat. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 MRK	4	3	vqh3	figs-parables	ἀκούετε! ἰδοὺ, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρων σπεῖραι	1	Listen! Behold, the sower	Jesus teaches the crowd about what happens when different people hear Jesus’ teaching. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
@@ -277,12 +287,12 @@ MRK	4	33	y7i2		καὶ τοιαύταις παραβολαῖς πολλαῖς,
 MRK	4	34	oo4t	figs-litotes	χωρὶς δὲ παραβολῆς οὐκ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς	1		Luke uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: See the UST (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 MRK	4	34	gp99	figs-hyperbole	ἐπέλυεν πάντα	1	he was explaining everything	Here, **everything** does not actually mean everything, but rather, all of his parables which he had spoken. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could state this clearly. Alternate translation: “he explained all his parables” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 MRK	4	38	b4xb	figs-rquestion	οὐ μέλει σοι ὅτι ἀπολλύμεθα?	1	do you not care that we are perishing?	The disciples asked this question to convey their fear. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you need to pay attention to what is happening; we are all about to die!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-MRK	4	38	phc3	\n	Διδάσκαλε	1		**Teacher** is a respectful title. You could translate it with an equivalent term that your language and culture would use.
+MRK	4	38	phc3		Διδάσκαλε	1		**Teacher** is a respectful title. You could translate it with an equivalent term that your language and culture would use.
 MRK	4	38	qtb3	figs-exclusive	ἀπολλύμεθα	1	we are perishing	The word **we** includes the disciples and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 MRK	4	39	yym6	figs-doublet	σιώπα, πεφίμωσο	1	Be silent! Be still!	These two phrases are similar and used to emphasize what Jesus wanted the wind and the sea to do. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “Be calm!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 MRK	4	40	w5n4	figs-rquestion	τί δειλοί ἐστε? οὔπω ἔχετε πίστιν	1	Why are you afraid? Do you not yet have faith?	Jesus asks these questions to make his disciples consider why they are **afraid** when he is with them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not be afraid. You need to have more faith.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	4	41	u8e1	figs-rquestion	τίς ἄρα οὗτός ἐστιν, ὅτι καὶ ὁ ἄνεμος καὶ ἡ θάλασσα ὑπακούει αὐτῷ?	1	Who then is this, for even the wind and the sea obey him?	The disciples ask this question in amazement at what Jesus did. This question can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “This man is not like ordinary men; even the wind and the sea obey him!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-MRK	5	intro	lh25			0		# Mark 5 General Notes\n\n## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “Talitha, koum”\n\nThe words **Talitha, koum** ([Mark 5:41](../mrk/05/41.md)) are from the Aramaic language. Mark writes them the way they sound and then translates them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### The Historic Present \n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 7, 9, 19, 22, 23, 31, 35, 36, 38, 39, 40 and 41. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “John testified about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])\n\n
+MRK	5	intro	lh25			0		# Mark 5 General Notes<br><br>## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### “Talitha, koum”<br><br>The words **Talitha, koum** ([Mark 5:41](../mrk/05/41.md)) are from the Aramaic language. Mark writes them the way they sound and then translates them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### The Historic Present <br><br>To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 7, 9, 19, 22, 23, 31, 35, 36, 38, 39, 40 and 41. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “John testified about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 MRK	5	1	fix1	writing-newevent	καὶ ἦλθον εἰς τὸ πέραν τῆς θαλάσσης, εἰς τὴν χώραν τῶν Γερασηνῶν	1	Connecting Statement:	This verse acts as an introduction to the next story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “After this, they came to the other side of the Sea of Galilee, to the region where the Geresenes lived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 MRK	5	1	gt8a	figs-go	ἦλθον	1	They came	Your language may say “went” rather than came in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 MRK	5	1	vsc7	translate-names	τῶν Γερασηνῶν	1	the Gerasenes	This name refers to the people who live in Gerasa. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -331,7 +341,7 @@ MRK	5	41	hx3c	translate-transliterate	ταλιθὰ, κοῦμ!	1	Talitha, koum!
 MRK	5	42	pt5t	translate-numbers	ἦν…ἐτῶν δώδεκα	1	she was 12 years of age	“she was twelve years old” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 MRK	5	42	m49c	translate-numbers	καὶ εὐθὺς ἀνέστη τὸ κοράσιον καὶ περιεπάτει, ἦν γὰρ ἐτῶν δώδεκα	1		Mark includes this information to help the readers understand how it was that she immediately **rose up** and began **walking**. She was able to get up and walk because she was old enough to do so. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “And immediately the little girl rose up and was walking. She was able to do this because she was 12 years old” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	5	43	n29k	figs-quotations	καὶ εἶπεν δοθῆναι αὐτῇ φαγεῖν	1	and he told them to give her something to eat	You can state this as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “and he told them, ‘Give her something to eat’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-MRK	6	intro	kl7n			0		# Mark 6 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### “Anointed with oil”\n\nIn the ancient Near East, people would try to heal sick people by putting olive oil on them.\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### The Historic Present \n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 7, 30, 31, 37, 38, 45, 48, 49 and 55. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “John testified about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])\n\n
+MRK	6	intro	kl7n			0		# Mark 6 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### “Anointed with oil”<br><br>In the ancient Near East, people would try to heal sick people by putting olive oil on them.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### The Historic Present <br><br>To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 7, 30, 31, 37, 38, 45, 48, 49 and 55. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “John testified about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 MRK	6	1	mi7z	writing-newevent	καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἐκεῖθεν, καὶ ἔρχεται εἰς τὴν πατρίδα αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀκολουθοῦσιν αὐτῷ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ	1	Connecting Statement:	This introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later, Jesus and his disciples went out from there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 MRK	6	1	lpci	figs-go	ἐξῆλθεν…ἔρχεται εἰς	1		Your language may say “went” rather than came in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “he came out … went into” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 MRK	6	2	y4xj	figs-activepassive	τίς ἡ σοφία ἡ δοθεῖσα τούτῳ	1	what is this wisdom that has been given to him?	If your language does not use the passive form in this way you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what is this wisdom that God gave to him?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -355,14 +365,14 @@ MRK	6	15	n8sq	figs-explicit	ἄλλοι δὲ ἔλεγον, ὅτι Ἠλεία
 MRK	6	16	ym2w	figs-metonymy	ὃν ἐγὼ ἀπεκεφάλισα	1	whom I beheaded	Here Herod uses the word **I** to refer to himself. The word **I** is a metonym for Herod’s soldiers. Alternate translation: “whom I commanded my soldiers to behead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	6	16	n6nq	figs-activepassive	ἠγέρθη	1	has been raised	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “is alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	6	17	vpr7	figs-explicit	αὐτὸς…ὁ Ἡρῴδης, ἀποστείλας ἐκράτησεν τὸν Ἰωάννην, καὶ ἔδησεν αὐτὸν ἐν φυλακῇ	1	Herod himself, having sent, seized John and he bound him in prison	You can state this clearly that **Herod** sent his soldiers to put **John** in **prison**. Alternate translation: “Herod sent his soldiers to arrest John and had them bind him in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	6	17	ojtd	figs-explicit	γὰρ	1		Mark is providing this background information to help readers understand why Herod was saying that John rose from the dead. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “He was saying this because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])\n
+MRK	6	17	ojtd	figs-explicit	γὰρ	1		Mark is providing this background information to help readers understand why Herod was saying that John rose from the dead. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “He was saying this because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
 MRK	6	17	sf6r	translate-names	τὴν γυναῖκα Φιλίππου, τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	the wife of his brother Philip	Herod’s **brother Philip** is the name of a man. This is not the same Philip who was an evangelist in the book of Acts or the Philip who was one of Jesus’ twelve disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 MRK	6	18	e2ex	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἔλεγεν γὰρ ὁ Ἰωάννης τῷ Ἡρῴδῃ, ὅτι οὐκ ἔξεστίν σοι ἔχειν τὴν γυναῖκα τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ σου	1		Herod put John into prison because he was saying **It is not lawful for you to have the wife of your brother**. Make sure this is clear in your language. Alternate translation: “Herod told his soldiers to arrest John because he was saying, ‘God’s law does not allow you to marry the wife of your brother.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 MRK	6	19	x35v	figs-metonymy	Ἡρῳδιὰς…ἤθελεν αὐτὸν ἀποκτεῖναι	1	was wanting to kill him, but she was not able	**Herodias** is a metonym, as she wants someone else to execute John for her. Alternate translation: “she wanted someone to kill him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	6	20	k13z	figs-doublet	εἰδὼς αὐτὸν ἄνδρα δίκαιον καὶ ἅγιον	1		**righteous and holy** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that John was a holy man before God. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Because he knew that he was a righteous man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 MRK	6	21	m54q	figs-metonymy	Ἡρῴδης τοῖς γενεσίοις αὐτοῦ δεῖπνον ἐποίησεν, τοῖς μεγιστᾶσιν αὐτοῦ	1	Herod prepared his birthday dinner for his officials	Here, **Herod** is a metonym for his servants whom he would have commanded to prepare a meal. Alternate translation: “Herod had his servants prepare a dinner for his officials” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	6	22	a1d7	translate-textvariants	εἰσελθούσης τῆς θυγατρὸς αὐτοῦ Ἡρῳδιάδος	1	the daughter of Herodias herself	There are a few possible understandings of this passage. (1) This could be saying that Herod’s daughter’s name was Herodias. Alternate translation: “And Herodias his daughter came in” or (2) This could be speaking about the daughter of Herodias emphatically. Alternate translation: “Herodias’ daughter herself came in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-MRK	6	25	caz0	\n	εὐθὺς…μετὰ σπουδῆς…ἐξαυτῆς	1		**immediately**, **with haste**, and **at once** are all words which give a sense of urgency. Make sure that this comes across in your language.
+MRK	6	25	caz0		εὐθὺς…μετὰ σπουδῆς…ἐξαυτῆς	1		**immediately**, **with haste**, and **at once** are all words which give a sense of urgency. Make sure that this comes across in your language.
 MRK	6	25	ap2w	figs-euphemism	δῷς μοι	1	a platter	Herodias is telling her daughter that she wants King Herod to cut off John the Baptizer’s head. **give** is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “Cut off John’s head and bring it to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 MRK	6	26	c1gn	figs-explicit	διὰ τοὺς ὅρκους καὶ τοὺς συνανακειμένους	1	because of his oath and those reclining at table with him	You can state clearly the content of the **oath**, and the relationship between the oath and the dinner guests. Alternate translation: “because his dinner guests had heard him make the oath that he would give her anything she asked for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	6	27	k51v	figs-euphemism	ἐνέγκαι τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ	1	on a platter	See how you handled the note in verse 25. [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
@@ -371,10 +381,10 @@ MRK	6	34	j1td	figs-simile	ἦσαν ὡς πρόβατα μὴ ἔχοντα π
 MRK	6	35	sei9	figs-idiom	καὶ ἤδη ὥρας πολλῆς γενομένης	1	And the hour already having become late	This means it was late in the day. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “And when it was getting late” or “And late in the afternoon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	6	35	hz4h		ἔρημός ἐστιν ὁ τόπος	1	This place is desolate	This refers to a place where there are no people. See how you translated this in [Mark 6:31](../06/31.md).
 MRK	6	37	cts5	figs-rquestion	ἀπελθόντες, ἀγοράσωμεν δηναρίων διακοσίων ἄρτους, καὶ δώσομεν αὐτοῖς φαγεῖν?	1	Having gone away, might we buy 200 denarii of loaves of bread and give it to them to eat?	The disciples ask this question to say that there is no way they could afford to buy enough food for this crowd. Alternate translation: “We could not buy enough bread to feed this crowd, even if we had two hundred denarii!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-MRK	6	37	wowk	figs-rquestion	ἀπελθόντες, ἀγοράσωμεν δηναρίων διακοσίων ἄρτους, καὶ δώσομεν αὐτοῖς φαγεῖν	1		The disciples are using a hypothetical situation to express how expensive it would be to buy enough food for all of the people. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Suppose we go out to the market, how could we afford to spend 200 denarii on food to feed all of these people?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])\n\n
+MRK	6	37	wowk	figs-rquestion	ἀπελθόντες, ἀγοράσωμεν δηναρίων διακοσίων ἄρτους, καὶ δώσομεν αὐτοῖς φαγεῖν	1		The disciples are using a hypothetical situation to express how expensive it would be to buy enough food for all of the people. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Suppose we go out to the market, how could we afford to spend 200 denarii on food to feed all of these people?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 MRK	6	37	hs21	translate-bmoney	δηναρίων διακοσίων	1	200 denarii	The singular form of the word **denarii** is “denarius.” A denarius was a Roman silver coin worth one day’s wages. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
 MRK	6	37	c65w	translate-numbers	δηναρίων διακοσίων	1	200 denarii	“two hundred denarii” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-MRK	6	39	xgb6	translate-unknown	τῷ χλωρῷ χόρτῳ	1	the green grass	Describe the **grass** with the color word used in your language for healthy grass, which may or may not be the color **green**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])\n
+MRK	6	39	xgb6	translate-unknown	τῷ χλωρῷ χόρτῳ	1	the green grass	Describe the **grass** with the color word used in your language for healthy grass, which may or may not be the color **green**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 MRK	6	40	e4cb	figs-explicit	πρασιαὶ, κατὰ ἑκατὸν καὶ κατὰ πεντήκοντα	1	by group according to hundreds and according to fifties	This refers to the number of people in each of the groups. Alternate translation: “about fifty people in some groups and about a hundred people in other groups” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	6	41	l8q3	figs-explicit	ἀναβλέψας εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν	1	having looked up to heaven	This means that he **looked up** toward the sky, which is associated with the place where God lives. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus looked up to the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	6	43	xk9h	translate-numbers	δώδεκα κοφίνων	1	12 baskets	“twelve baskets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
@@ -385,33 +395,33 @@ MRK	6	45	y3ve	translate-names	Βηθσαϊδάν	1	Bethsaida	This is a town on t
 MRK	6	48	g7ka	(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])	τετάρτην φυλακὴν	1	the fourth watch	This is the time between 3 AM and sunrise. If your reader would not be familiar with this, you can state this explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 MRK	6	50	et5c	figs-parallelism	θαρσεῖτε…μὴ φοβεῖσθε	1	Take courage! … Do not fear!	**Take courage** and **Do not be afraid** are similar in meaning, emphasizing to his disciples that they did not need to be afraid. They can be combined into one if necessary. Alternate translation: “Do not be afraid of me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 MRK	6	52	m53m	figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τοῖς ἄρτοις	1	about the loaves	Here the phrase **the loaves** refers to when Jesus multiplied the loaves of bread. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “what it meant when Jesus multiplied the loaves of bread” or “what it meant when Jesus caused the few loaves to become many” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-MRK	6	52	t1qb	figs-metaphor	ἦν αὐτῶν ἡ καρδία πεπωρωμένη	1	their heart had been hardened	Their stubborn attitude is spoken of as if their hearts had been hardened.\nIf the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. Alternate translation: “they were stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n
+MRK	6	52	t1qb	figs-metaphor	ἦν αὐτῶν ἡ καρδία πεπωρωμένη	1	their heart had been hardened	Their stubborn attitude is spoken of as if their hearts had been hardened. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. Alternate translation: “they were stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	6	53	p316	translate-names	Γεννησαρὲτ	1	Gennesaret	This is the name of the region to the northwest of the Sea of Galilee. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 MRK	6	55	d9k9		περιέδραμον…ἤκουον	1	they ran throughout … they were hearing	The word **they** refers to the people who recognized Jesus, not to the disciples.
 MRK	6	56	gi6y		ἐτίθεσαν	1	they were putting	Here, **they** refers to the people. It does not refer to Jesus’ disciples.
 MRK	6	56	y6hs	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας	1	the sick	This phrase refers to people. Alternate translation: “the sick people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 MRK	6	56	bqzf	figs-litany	εἰς κώμας, ἢ εἰς πόλεις, ἢ εἰς ἀγροὺς	1		Mark lists **villages**, **cities**, and **countryside** to emphasize that everywhere Jesus went, they were bringing sick people to him. Use a form in your language that someone would use to list different places. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]])
-MRK	7	intro	vq1j			0		# Mark 7 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 7:6-7, which are words from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Hand washing\n\nThe Pharisees washed many things that were not dirty because they were trying to make God think that they were good. They washed their hands before they ate, even when their hands were not dirty. and even though the law of Moses did not say that they had to do it. Jesus told them that they were wrong and that people make God happy by thinking and doing the right things. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “Ephphatha”\n\nThis is an Aramaic word. Mark wrote it the way it sounds using Greek letters and then explained what it means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### The Historic Present \n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 18, 32, 34. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “John testified about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])\n\n
-MRK	7	1	b9ul	writing-newevent	καὶ συνάγονται πρὸς αὐτὸν οἱ Φαρισαῖοι καί τινες τῶν γραμματέων, ἐλθόντες ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων\n	1d	are gathering around him	This verse introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later, some Pharisees and some men who teach the Jewish laws who had come from Jerusalem gathered around Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
+MRK	7	intro	vq1j			0		# Mark 7 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 7:6-7, which are words from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Hand washing<br><br>The Pharisees washed many things that were not dirty because they were trying to make God think that they were good. They washed their hands before they ate, even when their hands were not dirty. and even though the law of Moses did not say that they had to do it. Jesus told them that they were wrong and that people make God happy by thinking and doing the right things. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### “Ephphatha”<br><br>This is an Aramaic word. Mark wrote it the way it sounds using Greek letters and then explained what it means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### The Historic Present <br><br>To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 18, 32, 34. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “John testified about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
+MRK	7	1	b9ul	writing-newevent	καὶ συνάγονται πρὸς αὐτὸν οἱ Φαρισαῖοι καί τινες τῶν γραμματέων, ἐλθόντες ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων	1d	are gathering around him	This verse introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later, some Pharisees and some men who teach the Jewish laws who had come from Jerusalem gathered around Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 MRK	7	2	wd6i	figs-extrainfo		0	General Information:	The following verses explain the significance of this verse. Since it is explained in the following verses, you do not need to explain its meaning here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
-MRK	7	3	mj6u	writing-background	γὰρ	1	of the elders	This verse, as well as the next verse, are added to explain to the reader why the Jewish leaders did not approve of what Jesus’ disciples were doing. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “They were appalled because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])\n
+MRK	7	3	mj6u	writing-background	γὰρ	1	of the elders	This verse, as well as the next verse, are added to explain to the reader why the Jewish leaders did not approve of what Jesus’ disciples were doing. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “They were appalled because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 MRK	7	3	x0b6	figs-explicit	κρατοῦντες τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων	1		**The traditions of the elders** were teachings that were handed down from generation to generation. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “observing strictly the teachings which past generations had taught them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	7	4	wsb8	writing-background	χαλκίων	1	copper vessels	See the note in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 MRK	7	4	d3qc	figs-explicit	ποτηρίων καὶ ξεστῶν καὶ χαλκίων	1		**cups…pots…copper vessels** would have been used for consuming food and drinks. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Cups, pots, and copper vessels for eating and drinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	7	5	hts4	figs-metaphor	διὰ τί οὐ περιπατοῦσιν οἱ μαθηταί σου κατὰ τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων	1	Why do your disciples not walk according to the tradition of the elders, but they eat their bread with unwashed hands?	**walk** is a common way of speaking which means “obey.” If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent way of speaking from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Why do your disciples not obey what the elders have taught us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-MRK	7	5	ugom	grammar-connect-logic-contrast\n	ἀλλὰ	1	Why do your disciples not walk according to the tradition of the elders, but they eat their bread with unwashed hands?	**but** is used to contrast what the Pharisees thought Jesus’ disciples should be doing, with what they were actually doing. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+MRK	7	5	ugom	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	Why do your disciples not walk according to the tradition of the elders, but they eat their bread with unwashed hands?	**but** is used to contrast what the Pharisees thought Jesus’ disciples should be doing, with what they were actually doing. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 MRK	7	5	j7ht	figs-synecdoche	ἄρτον	1	bread	**bread** is a synecdoche, representing food in general. Alternate translation: “food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-MRK	7	6	oavh	figs-quotesinquotes	ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, ὅτι καλῶς ἐπροφήτευσεν Ἠσαΐας περὶ ὑμῶν τῶν ὑποκριτῶν, ὡς γέγραπται, ὅτι οὗτος ὁ λαὸς τοῖς χείλεσίν με τιμᾷ, ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ\n	1		If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Jesus said to them, ‘Isaiah prophesied well about you hypocrites when God wrote through him that people honor him with their lips, but their desires are for other things’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+MRK	7	6	oavh	figs-quotesinquotes	ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, ὅτι καλῶς ἐπροφήτευσεν Ἠσαΐας περὶ ὑμῶν τῶν ὑποκριτῶν, ὡς γέγραπται, ὅτι οὗτος ὁ λαὸς τοῖς χείλεσίν με τιμᾷ, ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ	1		If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Jesus said to them, ‘Isaiah prophesied well about you hypocrites when God wrote through him that people honor him with their lips, but their desires are for other things’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 MRK	7	6	ep7u	figs-metonymy	τοῖς χείλεσίν	1	with their lips	Here, **lips** is used to signify speaking. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “by what they say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	7	6	zgt9	figs-metonymy	ἡ…καρδία αὐτῶν	1	but their heart is far from me	The word **heart** is a metonym for their inner thoughts and desires. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “their desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	7	6	xtab	figs-idiom	ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ	1	but their heart is far from me	This is a way of saying the people are not truly devoted to God. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “but they do not really love me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-MRK	7	8	hnw4	figs-metaphor	κρατεῖτε	1	you hold fast to	To **hold fast** means to obey something without ceasing. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent way of speaking from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “You obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n
+MRK	7	8	hnw4	figs-metaphor	κρατεῖτε	1	you hold fast to	To **hold fast** means to obey something without ceasing. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent way of speaking from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “You obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	7	9	e3qv	figs-irony	καλῶς ἀθετεῖτε τὴν ἐντολὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἵνα τὴν παράδοσιν ὑμῶν τηρήσητε	1	How well you reject the commandment of God so that you may keep your tradition!	Jesus says **You do well at rejecting the commandment of God so that you may keep your tradition** to rebuke his listeners for forsaking God’s **commandment**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, consider expressing the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You think you have done well in how you have rejected the commandment of God so you may keep your own traditions, but what you have done is not good at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
 MRK	7	10	d4sd	figs-quotesinquotes	Μωϋσῆς γὰρ εἶπεν, τίμα τὸν πατέρα σου καὶ τὴν μητέρα σου; καί, ὁ κακολογῶν πατέρα ἢ μητέρα θανάτῳ τελευτάτω	1	The one speaking evil of his father	If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “For Moses said to honor your father and mother. He also said that the one who speaks evil against his father or mother deserves to die.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 MRK	7	11	cd57	translate-transliterate	κορβᾶν	1	is Corban	**Corban** is a Hebrew word that refers to things that people promise to give to God. Translators normally transliterate it using the target language alphabet. Some translators translate its meaning, and then leave out Mark’s explanation of the meaning that follows. In your translation you can spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
-MRK	7	11	ev2r	\n	ὅ ἐστιν δῶρον	1	that is, a gift	The author says **that is a gift** to provide background information to his audience who may not have understood this word. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “this word means a gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])\n
+MRK	7	11	ev2r		ὅ ἐστιν δῶρον	1	that is, a gift	The author says **that is a gift** to provide background information to his audience who may not have understood this word. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “this word means a gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
 MRK	7	14	u3nk	figs-doublet	ἀκούσατέ μου πάντες καὶ σύνετε	1	Listen to me, all of you, and understand	The words **Listen** and **understand** are related. Jesus uses them together to emphasize that his hearers should pay close attention to what he is saying. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “All of you, take head to what I am about to say to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-MRK	7	15	gk5i	figs-idiom	οὐδέν…ἔξωθεν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου	1	nothing from outside the man	Jesus is speaking about what a person eats. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “nothing which a person could eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])\n
+MRK	7	15	gk5i	figs-idiom	οὐδέν…ἔξωθεν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου	1	nothing from outside the man	Jesus is speaking about what a person eats. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “nothing which a person could eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	7	15	ms5c	figs-metonymy	τὰ ἐκ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκπορευόμενά	1	the things that come out from the man	Jesus is speaking about the thoughts and desires of a person. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the things which a person thinks and does” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	7	17	l7d7	writing-endofstory	καὶ ὅτε	1	And	**and when** is a comment about what happened after the story as a result of the events within the story itself. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
 MRK	7	18	z8w1	figs-rquestion	οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς ἀσύνετοί ἐστε?	1	Are you also thus without understanding?	Jesus uses this question to express his disappointment that they do not understand. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “After all I have said and done, I am amazed that you still do not understand.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -421,7 +431,7 @@ MRK	7	19	hm98	figs-explicit	καθαρίζων πάντα τὰ βρώματα	1
 MRK	7	20	r12p	figs-metonymy	τὸ ἐκ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκπορευόμενον	1	he was saying	**What is coming out from the man** means the thoughts and intentions of a person. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “It is the thoughts and desires of a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	7	21	chkk	figs-metonymy	ἐκ τῆς καρδίας τῶν ἀνθρώπων οἱ διαλογισμοὶ οἱ κακοὶ ἐκπορεύονται	1		Here, **heart** is a metonym for a person’s inner being or mind. Alternate translation: “out of the inner being of a person, come evil thoughts” or “out of the mind of a person, come evil thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	7	21	eey1	figs-litany	πορνεῖαι, κλοπαί, φόνοι	1		Mark lists out a number of sins here and in the next verse. Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that someone has done wrong. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]])
-MRK	7	24	k9bl	writing-background	καὶ εἰσελθὼν εἰς οἰκίαν, οὐδένα ἤθελεν γνῶναι, καὶ οὐκ ἠδυνάσθη λαθεῖν	1	Connecting Statement:	**and having entered into a house, he was wanting no one to know it, but he was not able to hide** provides background information to what Jesus was thinking as he travelled to this area. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Having entered someones house, he was hoping to not be found, but he was unable to hide from the people of that place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])\n
+MRK	7	24	k9bl	writing-background	καὶ εἰσελθὼν εἰς οἰκίαν, οὐδένα ἤθελεν γνῶναι, καὶ οὐκ ἠδυνάσθη λαθεῖν	1	Connecting Statement:	**and having entered into a house, he was wanting no one to know it, but he was not able to hide** provides background information to what Jesus was thinking as he travelled to this area. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Having entered someones house, he was hoping to not be found, but he was unable to hide from the people of that place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 MRK	7	26	aik7	writing-background	ἡ δὲ γυνὴ ἦν Ἑλληνίς, Συροφοινίκισσα τῷ γένει	1	But the woman was a Greek, a Syrophoenician by descent	This sentence gives us background information about the woman. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 MRK	7	26	e39y	translate-names	Συροφοινίκισσα	1	a Syrophoenician	This is the name of the woman’s nationality. She was born in the Phoenician region in Syria. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 MRK	7	27	gsj7	figs-metaphor	ἄφες πρῶτον χορτασθῆναι τὰ τέκνα; οὐ γάρ ἐστιν καλόν λαβεῖν τὸν ἄρτον τῶν τέκνων, καὶ τοῖς κυναρίοις βαλεῖν	1	Permit the children first be fed, for it is not good to take the bread of the children and to throw it to the dogs	Here Jesus speaks about the Jews as if they are **children** and the Gentiles as if they are **dogs**. This is not in a derogatory remark, but he is talking in terms of whether they are Israelites or not. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Let the children of Israel first eat. For it is not right to take the children’s bread and throw it to the Gentiles, who are like household pets compared to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -438,7 +448,7 @@ MRK	7	35	yj4j	figs-activepassive	ἐλύθη ὁ δεσμὸς τῆς γλώσ
 MRK	7	35	gssm	figs-idiom	ἐλύθη ὁ δεσμὸς τῆς γλώσσης αὐτοῦ	1		**the band of his tongue was released** means he was able to speak. Alternate translation: “his tongue was free and he was able to speak” or “he was able to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	7	36	eb2y	figs-ellipsis	ὅσον…αὐτοῖς διεστέλλετο, αὐτοὶ	1	as much as he ordered them	The refers to him ordering them not to tell anyone about what he had done. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the more he ordered them not to tell anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	7	37	dh17	figs-metonymy	τοὺς κωφοὺς…ἀλάλους	1	the deaf … the mute	These refer to people. Alternate translation: “deaf people … mute people” or “people who cannot hear … people who cannot speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-MRK	8	intro	ry56			0		# Mark 8 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Bread\n\nWhen Jesus worked a miracle and provided bread for a large crowd of people, they probably thought about when God miraculously provided food for the people of Israel when they were in the wilderness.\n\nYeast is the ingredient that causes bread to become larger before it is baked. In this chapter, Jesus uses yeast as a metaphor for things that change the way people think, speak, and act. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### “Adulterous generation”\n\nWhen Jesus called the people an “adulterous generation,” he was telling them that they were not faithful to God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/peopleofgod]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### The Historic Present \n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 2, 6, 12, 17, 19, 20, 22, 29 and 33. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “John testified about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])\n\n### Rhetorical Questions\n\nJesus used many rhetorical questions as a way of both teaching the disciples ([Mark 8:17-21](./17.md)) and scolding the people ([Mark 8:12](../mrk/08/12.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Paradox\n\nA paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “Whoever wants to save his life will lose it, and whoever loses his life for my sake will find it” ([Mark 8:35-37](./35.md)).\n\n\n\n
+MRK	8	intro	ry56			0		# Mark 8 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Bread<br><br>When Jesus worked a miracle and provided bread for a large crowd of people, they probably thought about when God miraculously provided food for the people of Israel when they were in the wilderness.<br><br>Yeast is the ingredient that causes bread to become larger before it is baked. In this chapter, Jesus uses yeast as a metaphor for things that change the way people think, speak, and act. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>### “Adulterous generation”<br><br>When Jesus called the people an “adulterous generation,” he was telling them that they were not faithful to God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/peopleofgod]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### The Historic Present <br><br>To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 2, 6, 12, 17, 19, 20, 22, 29 and 33. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “John testified about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])<br><br>### Rhetorical Questions<br><br>Jesus used many rhetorical questions as a way of both teaching the disciples ([Mark 8:17-21](./17.md)) and scolding the people ([Mark 8:12](../mrk/08/12.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Paradox<br><br>A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “Whoever wants to save his life will lose it, and whoever loses his life for my sake will find it” ([Mark 8:35-37](./35.md)).
 MRK	8	1	rmd8	writing-newevent	ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις	1	In those days	This introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 MRK	8	1	sgv6	figs-extrainfo	μὴ ἐχόντων τι φάγωσιν	1	Connecting Statement:	Jesus explains following this why the crowd did not have anything to eat. Since the expression is explained in the next verse, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 MRK	8	3	u3mu	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	καὶ ἐὰν ἀπολύσω αὐτοὺς νήστεις εἰς οἶκον αὐτῶν, ἐκλυθήσονται ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ	1	they will faint	Mark is using a hypothetical situation to bring to the disciples attention the dangers of making the people return home without eating. Alternate translation: “If I should send them to their houses hungry, some of them might collapse on the way home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
@@ -446,7 +456,7 @@ MRK	8	4	jdk2	figs-rquestion	πόθεν τούτους δυνήσεταί τις
 MRK	8	6	x2jr	figs-quotations	παραγγέλλει τῷ ὄχλῳ ἀναπεσεῖν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς	1	he commands the crowd to recline on the ground	If it would be more natural in your language, you could express **to recline on the ground** as a direct quotation. “Jesus commanded the crowd, ‘Sit down on the ground’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 MRK	8	7	bio6	figs-quotations	εἶπεν καὶ ταῦτα παρατιθέναι	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could express **to recline on the ground** as a direct quotation. “Jesus said to the disciples, ‘Serve these fish also’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 MRK	8	8	v5zi	figs-explicit	περισσεύματα κλασμάτων ἑπτὰ σπυρίδας	1	an abundance of broken pieces—seven baskets	This refers to the **broken pieces** of bread that were left over after the people ate. Alternate translation: “the remaining broken pieces of bread, which filled seven large baskets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	8	9	m81z	writing-background	ἦσαν δὲ ὡς τετρακισχίλιοι\n	1	and he sent them away	Mark includes **Now there were about 4,000** to help his reader to know how many people are there. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “There were approximately 4000 people that Jesus fed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
+MRK	8	9	m81z	writing-background	ἦσαν δὲ ὡς τετρακισχίλιοι	1	and he sent them away	Mark includes **Now there were about 4,000** to help his reader to know how many people are there. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “There were approximately 4000 people that Jesus fed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 MRK	8	10	qnt3	writing-endofstory	καὶ εὐθὺς ἐμβὰς εἰς τὸ πλοῖον μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ	1		**And immediately, having gotten into the boat with his disciples** is a comment concluding the story of Jesus feeding the 4,000 people. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
 MRK	8	10	y8u3	figs-explicit	ἦλθεν εἰς τὰ μέρη Δαλμανουθά	1	he went into the region of Dalmanutha	They got to Dalmanutha in a boat. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he sailed around the Sea of Galilee to the region of Dalmanutha” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	8	10	x33a	translate-names	Δαλμανουθά	1	of Dalmanutha	**Dalmanutha** is the name of a place on the northwestern shore of the Sea of Galilee. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -485,24 +495,24 @@ MRK	8	28	nn1f	figs-ellipsis	ἄλλοι…ἄλλοι	1	other … others	The two
 MRK	8	30	rgy8	figs-quotations	ἐπετίμησεν αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδενὶ λέγωσιν περὶ αὐτοῦ	1	he warned them that they might tell no one about him	If it would be more natural in your language, you could express **they might tell no one about him** as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “Jesus warned them, ‘Do not tell anyone that I am the Christ’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 MRK	8	31	d4dc	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	the Son of Man	This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 MRK	8	31	m32p	figs-activepassive	ἀποδοκιμασθῆναι ὑπὸ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων καὶ τῶν ἀρχιερέων καὶ τῶν γραμματέων, καὶ ἀποκτανθῆναι, καὶ μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας ἀναστῆναι	1	to be rejected by the elders and the chief priests and the scribes, and to be killed, and to rise up after three days	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the elders and the chief priests and the scribes would reject him, and that men would kill him, and that after three days he would rise up from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MRK	8	31	gjg2	grammar-connect-time-sequential	καὶ ἀποδοκιμασθῆναι ὑπὸ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων καὶ τῶν ἀρχιερέων καὶ τῶν γραμματέων, καὶ ἀποκτανθῆναι, καὶ μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας ἀναστῆναι\n	1		The events of this verse progress in chronological order. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “first, the elders and the chief priests and the scribes will reject me. Then, people will kill me. But after that, on the third day, I will rise from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
+MRK	8	31	gjg2	grammar-connect-time-sequential	καὶ ἀποδοκιμασθῆναι ὑπὸ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων καὶ τῶν ἀρχιερέων καὶ τῶν γραμματέων, καὶ ἀποκτανθῆναι, καὶ μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας ἀναστῆναι	1		The events of this verse progress in chronological order. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “first, the elders and the chief priests and the scribes will reject me. Then, people will kill me. But after that, on the third day, I will rise from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 MRK	8	31	h9t2	figs-123person	δεῖ τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου πολλὰ παθεῖν	1		When Jesus says **Son of Man**, he is speaking about himself in the third person. If this would be confusing in your language, you can use first person. Alternate translation: “It is necessary that I, the Son of Man, should suffer many things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 MRK	8	33	nu32	figs-metaphor	ὕπαγε ὀπίσω μου, Σατανᾶ	1	Get behind me, Satan! For you are not setting your mind	Jesus means that Peter is acting like **Satan** because Peter is trying to prevent Jesus from accomplishing what God sent him to do. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Get behind me, because you are acting like Satan!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-MRK	8	33	r9gy	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ\n	1	Get behind me	Jesus is saying that Peter is acting in a way that he ought not act. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “instead of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-MRK	8	33	clxo	figs-idiom\n	οὐ φρονεῖς τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		To **set your mind** on something means to think about it. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “you are not thinking about what God desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-MRK	8	33	t6jv	figs-ellipsis\n	οὐ φρονεῖς τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἀλλὰ τὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1		Jesus leaves some words out in the second phrase that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “You are not thinking about what God desires, but you are thinking about what man desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+MRK	8	33	r9gy	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	Get behind me	Jesus is saying that Peter is acting in a way that he ought not act. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “instead of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+MRK	8	33	clxo	figs-idiom	οὐ φρονεῖς τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		To **set your mind** on something means to think about it. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “you are not thinking about what God desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+MRK	8	33	t6jv	figs-ellipsis	οὐ φρονεῖς τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἀλλὰ τὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1		Jesus leaves some words out in the second phrase that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “You are not thinking about what God desires, but you are thinking about what man desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	8	34	m732	figs-metaphor	ὀπίσω μου ἀκολουθεῖν	1	to follow after me	To **follow** Jesus here represents being one of his disciples. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “be my disciple” or “be one of my disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	8	34	c6ll	figs-metonymy	ἀράτω τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀκολουθείτω μοι	1	take up his cross, and follow me	The cross here represents suffering and death because you follow Jesus. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “something he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	8	34	oxv6	figs-hypo	εἴ τις θέλει ὀπίσω μου ἀκολουθεῖν ἀπαρνησάσθω ἑαυτὸν, καὶ ἀράτω τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀκολουθείτω μοι	1	take up his cross, and follow me	Jesus is using a hypothetical situation to show the seriousness of being his follower. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: See the UST (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 MRK	8	35	d5rj	figs-genericnoun	ὃς γὰρ ἐὰν θέλῃ	1	For whoever wants	Jesus is speaking of people in general, not of one particular person. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “For if a person desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
-MRK	8	35	a6g3	figs-explicit	ὃς γὰρ ἐὰν θέλῃ τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ σῶσαι, ἀπολέσει αὐτήν, ὃς δ’ ἂν ἀπολέσει τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ καὶ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου, σώσει αὐτήν	1	soul	The first time the word life occurs in each phrase, it means life before a person dies, that is, earthly life. The second occurrence of life in each phrase means life after death, that is, everlasting life. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “For whoever desires to save his earthly life will not have everlasting life with God after he dies. Whoever loses his earthly life for my sake, and for the sake of the good news, will have everlasting life with God after he dies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n
+MRK	8	35	a6g3	figs-explicit	ὃς γὰρ ἐὰν θέλῃ τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ σῶσαι, ἀπολέσει αὐτήν, ὃς δ’ ἂν ἀπολέσει τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ καὶ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου, σώσει αὐτήν	1	soul	The first time the word life occurs in each phrase, it means life before a person dies, that is, earthly life. The second occurrence of life in each phrase means life after death, that is, everlasting life. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “For whoever desires to save his earthly life will not have everlasting life with God after he dies. Whoever loses his earthly life for my sake, and for the sake of the good news, will have everlasting life with God after he dies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	8	35	nn0a	figs-euphemism	ἀπολέσει αὐτήν	1		**lose it** is a polite way to say that God will judge the person who tries to save their own soul. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “God will judge them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 MRK	8	36	ua46	figs-rquestion	τί γὰρ ὠφελεῖ ἄνθρωπον, κερδήσῃ τὸν κόσμον ὅλον καὶ ζημιωθῆναι τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ?	1	For what does it profit a man to gain the whole world and to forfeit his soul?	Jesus asks this question to emphasize that If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Even if a person gains the whole world, it will not benefit him if he forfeits his soul.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	8	36	mxuj	figs-rquestion	ἄνθρωπον	1		Mark is using the phrase **a man** here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 MRK	8	36	jde6	figs-hyperbole	κερδήσῃ τὸν κόσμον ὅλον	1	to gain the whole world	The phrase **the whole world** is an exaggeration, meaning that the person might gain great riches. Alternate translation: “to gain everything he desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 MRK	8	37	wua4	figs-rquestion	τί γὰρ δοῖ ἄνθρωπος ἀντάλλαγμα τῆς ψυχῆς αὐτοῦ?	1	For what might a man give as an exchange for his soul?	Jesus asks this question to emphasize the value of the soul of each person. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “There is nothing a person can give in exchange for his life.” or “No one can give anything in exchange for his life.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	8	38	c53y	figs-metaphor	ἐν τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ, τῇ μοιχαλίδι καὶ ἁμαρτωλῷ	1	in this adulterous and sinful generation	Jesus speaks of this **generation** as **adulterous**, meaning that they are unfaithful in their relationship with God. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “in this generation of people who have committed adultery against God and are very sinful” or “in this generation of people who are unfaithful to God and are very sinful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-MRK	8	38	ov1d	figs-synecdoche	τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ	1		See how you translated **this generation** in [8:12](../08/12.md)\n(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])\n
+MRK	8	38	ov1d	figs-synecdoche	τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ	1		See how you translated **this generation** in [8:12](../08/12.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 MRK	8	38	s5tm	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	the Son of Man	This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 MRK	8	38	hvx0	figs-123person	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		See how you translated **Son of Man** in [8:31](../08/31.md)(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 MRK	9	intro	n92j			0		# Mark 9 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### “transfigured”<br><br>Scripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. Mark says in this chapter that Jesus’ clothing shone with this glorious light so that his followers could see that Jesus truly was God’s Son. At the same time, God told them that Jesus was his Son. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fear]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Hyperbole<br><br>Jesus said things that he did not expect his followers to understand literally. When he said, “If your hand causes you to stumble, cut it off” ([Mark 9:43](../mrk/09/43.md)), he was exaggerating so that his hearers would pay close attention to what he was saying and realize how important it is to avoid sin.<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Elijah and Moses<br><br>Elijah and Moses suddenly appear to Jesus, James, John, and Peter, and then they disappear. All four of them saw Elijah and Moses, and because Elijah and Moses spoke with Jesus, the reader should understand that Elijah and Moses appeared physically.<br><br>### “Son of Man”<br><br>Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([Mark 9:31](../mrk/09/31.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])<br><br>### Paradox<br><br>A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “If anyone wants to be first, he must be last of all and servant of all” ([Mark 9:35](../mrk/09/35.md)).
@@ -512,7 +522,7 @@ MRK	9	1	kg4x	figs-idiom	οἵτινες οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται θανά
 MRK	9	1	qloy	figs-abstractnouns	οἵτινες οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται θανάτου	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **death** by using the verb form. Alternate translation: “who may certainly not die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	9	1	ymou	figs-abstractnouns	ἕως ἂν ἴδωσιν τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐληλυθυῖαν ἐν δυνάμει	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **power**, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **power** by using an adverb such as “powerfully.” Alternate translation: “before they would see the kingdom of God come powerfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	9	1	yjf6	figs-explicit	τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐληλυθυῖαν ἐν δυνάμει	1	the kingdom of God come with power	The phrase **the kingdom of God come with power** represents God showing himself as king. If it would help your readers understand the meaning you can state this plainly. The phrase **the kingdom of God come with power** probably refers to God powerfully confirming that Jesus is the Messianic king through the transfiguration of Jesus which immediately follows this verse in [9:2-10](../09/02.md). Alternate translation: “God powerfully showing himself as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	9	2	uf5f	figs-rpronouns	κατ’ ἰδίαν μόνους	1	by themselves, alone	The author uses the reflexive pronoun **themselves** here to emphasize that they were alone and that only Jesus, Peter, James, and John went up the mountain. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
+MRK	9	2	uf5f	figs-rpronouns	κατ’ ἰδίαν μόνους	1	by themselves, alone	Mark uses the reflexive pronoun **themselves** here to emphasize that they were alone and that only Jesus, Peter, James, and John went up the mountain. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 MRK	9	2	krt6	translate-unknown	μετεμορφώθη ἔμπροσθεν αὐτῶν	1	he was transfigured before them	The word **transfigured** means to be changed in appearance or form. If your readers would not be familiar with the meaning of this word, you could state the meaning of this word in plain language. Alternate translation: “Jesus’ appearance was changed in front of them” or “when they looked at him, his appearance was different from what it had been” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 MRK	9	2	b3bb	figs-activepassive	μετεμορφώθη ἔμπροσθεν αὐτῶν	1	he was transfigured	If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the meaning of the phrase **he was transfigured before them** with an active form and say who did the action. Alternate translation: “God changed Jesus’ appearance before them” or “God transfigured Jesus before them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	9	3	gp48	translate-unknown	οἷα γναφεὺς ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς οὐ δύναται οὕτως λευκᾶναι	1	as no bleacher on earth is able thus to make them white	The word **launderer** refers to a person who worked with cloth and would clean and bleach it. If your readers would not be familiar with the meaning of this word, you could state the meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “whiter than any person who bleached cloth could make them” or “such as no person on earth who bleached cloth could make them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -539,7 +549,7 @@ MRK	9	9	pdmm	writing-pronouns	διεστείλατο αὐτοῖς	1		Here, the
 MRK	9	9	w1nf	writing-pronouns	διεστείλατο αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδενὶ ἃ εἶδον διηγήσωνται	1		Here, the pronoun **them** and the second and third occurrence of the pronoun **they** all refer to Peter and James and John. Alternate translation: “Jesus ordered Peter and James and John not to tell anyone about what they had just seen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 MRK	9	9	wter		διεστείλατο αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδενὶ ἃ εἶδον διηγήσωνται	1		Alternate translation: “Jesus ordered them not tell anyone about what they had just seen”
 MRK	9	9	w98g	figs-metonymy	ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῇ	1	would rise from the dead	Jesus speaks figuratively in this way of coming back to life, since it involves rising out of the grave. Alternate translation: “would come back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-MRK	9	10	edv3	figs-explicit	καὶ τὸν λόγον ἐκράτησαν πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς	1		**And they kept the matter to themselves** means that Peter, James, and John did not share with other people that Jesus had been transfigured until after he rose from the dead. Alternate translation: “And they did not tell others about Jesus’ transfiguration” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	9	10	edv3		καὶ τὸν λόγον ἐκράτησαν πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς	1		Here, Mark is using the term **word** in a specific sense. Alternate translation: “And they kept the matter to themselves”
 MRK	9	10	wfu9		ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῆναι	1	to rise from the dead	See how you translated the phrase “rise from the dead” in the previous verse.
 MRK	9	11	s9zn	writing-pronouns	ἐπηρώτων αὐτὸν λέγοντες	1	they were questioning him	Here, the pronoun **they** refers to Peter, James, and John. Alternate translation: “Peter, James, and John were questioning Jesus, saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 MRK	9	11	je29	writing-pronouns	ἐπηρώτων αὐτὸν	1		Here, the pronoun **him** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “they were questioning Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -553,6 +563,7 @@ MRK	9	14	n8fd		ἐλθόντες πρὸς τοὺς μαθητὰς	1	having co
 MRK	9	14	qsp3	writing-pronouns	αὐτοὺς…αὐτούς	1		Here, both occurrences of the pronoun **them** refers to the other disciples of Jesus who had not went up on the mountain with Jesus and Peter, James, and John. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 MRK	9	15	qhc3	writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν…προστρέχοντες…αὐτόν	1		All three of the occurrences of the pronoun **him** in this verse, refer to Jesus. If it would help your readers you can clarify this in your translation in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 MRK	9	16	w679	writing-pronouns	καὶ ἐπηρώτησεν αὐτούς	1		Here, the first occurrence of the pronoun **them** could refer to: (1) the disciples of Jesus who had not went up on the mountain. Alternate translation: “And Jesus asked his disciples” (2) the people in the crowd. Alternate translation: “And Jesus asked the people in the crown” (3) the scribes. Alternate translation: “And Jesus asked the scribes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+MRK	9	17	a2j6		Διδάσκαλε	1		See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../4/38.md).
 MRK	9	18	h98h		ξηραίνεται	1	he becomes rigid	Alternate translation: “his body becomes rigid”
 MRK	9	18	zre6	figs-explicit	οὐκ ἴσχυσαν	1	they could not	The phrase **the were not strong enough** refers to the disciples not being about to drive the spirit out of the boy. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they could not drive it out of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	9	19	tb67	figs-extrainfo	ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς αὐτοῖς λέγει	1	answering them, he says	Here, the pronoun **them** is plural so Jesus is addressing more than one person. However, it is not clear exactly who **them** refers to. It could refer to the disciples, the crowd, the boy and his father, some some combination of them, or to all of them at once. Here,**them** probably refers to everyone who was present. Use the form in your language that would be used for addressing a group of people. Alternate translation: “But answering all of them, Jesus said” or “Addressing them all, Jesus said” or “Addressing everyone present, Jesus said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
@@ -597,8 +608,13 @@ MRK	9	31	s1n2	figs-activepassive	ἀποκτανθεὶς, μετὰ τρεῖς
 MRK	9	33	xv94	figs-go	ἦλθον εἰς Καφαρναούμ	1	Connecting Statement:	Your language may say “they went” rather than **they came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went to Capernaum” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 MRK	9	33	l2kj	figs-go	ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ γενόμενος	1		Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “having went into the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 MRK	9	34	gdg3	figs-explicit	τίς μείζων	1	about who was the greatest	Here, **greatest** refers to who was the **greatest** among the disciples. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “who was the greatest among them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	9	35	jzl5	figs-metaphor	εἴ τις θέλει πρῶτος εἶναι, ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος	1	If anyone wants to be first, he will be last of all	Here the words **first** and **last** are opposites of one another. Jesus speaks of being the “most important” as being **first** and of being the “least important” as being **last**. Alternate translation: “If anyone wants God to consider him to be the most important person of all, he must consider himself to be the least important of all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	9	35	z754	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς δώδεκα	1		See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../3/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+MRK	9	35	fkf6	figs-declarative	ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος καὶ πάντων διάκονος	1		Jesus is using a future statement to give an instruction. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. Alternate translation: “he must act as if he is the least important and serve everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
+MRK	9	35	jzl5	figs-metaphor	εἴ τις θέλει πρῶτος εἶναι, ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος	1	If anyone wants to be first, he will be last of all	Being **first** figuratively represents people who are esteemed by others because of their social position, wealth, and privileges. Being **last** figuratively represents people who are not esteemed by others because they lack social position, wealth, and privileges. Jesus speaks of being the “most important” as being **first** and of being the “least important” as being **last**. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **first** and **last** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	9	35	ioiu	figs-nominaladj	εἴ τις θέλει πρῶτος εἶναι, ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος	1		Jesus is using the adjective **first** as a noun in order to describe a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “If anyone wants to be most important in God’s sight, he should act as if he is the least important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 MRK	9	35	um58	translate-ordinal	πρῶτος	1		If your language does not use ordinal numbers such as **first**, you can express the meaning behind the word **first** in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: see the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+MRK	9	35	jqo3	figs-ellipsis	ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος καὶ πάντων διάκονος	1		Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he will be last of all people and a servant of all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+MRK	9	35	z9x2	figs-declarative	ἔσται…ἔσχατος	1		Jesus is using the future statement **he will be last** to give an instruction. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. Alternate translation: “he must be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
 MRK	9	35	t526		πάντων…πάντων	1	of all … of all	Alternate translation: “of all people … of all people”
 MRK	9	36	qqcu	writing-pronouns	ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν	1		The pronoun **them** refers to the 12 disciples. If it would help your readers you could state that explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “in the midst of his disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 MRK	9	37	h242		ἓν τῶν τοιούτων παιδίων	1	one of these little children	Alternate translation: “a child such as this one”
@@ -606,6 +622,7 @@ MRK	9	37	ul12	figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου	1	in my name	H
 MRK	9	37	uik3	figs-explicit	οὐκ ἐμὲ δέχεται, ἀλλὰ τὸν ἀποστείλαντά με	1		**does not receive me but the one who sent me** means that the people who receive Jesus are not just receiving him but are also receiving God who sent him. If it would help your readers you can state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “receives not just me, but also receives God who has sent me” or “receives not only me, but receives God who sent me to represent him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	9	37	y24n	figs-explicit	τὸν ἀποστείλαντά με	1	the one who has sent me	Jesus assumes that his disciples will know that **the one** refers to God. If it would help your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God, who has sent me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	9	38	dxq5	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί σου	1	in your name	Here, **name** is a figurative way of referring to a person by reference to something associated with him. This expression means the person was acting with the power and authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “on your behalf” or “as your representative” or “by your authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+MRK	9	38	a3d3		Διδάσκαλε	1		See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../4/38.md).
 MRK	9	38	k2i2	figs-metaphor	οὐκ ἠκολούθει ἡμῖν	1	he was not following us	Here, **following** does not seem to mean to be one of Jesus’ disciples, since this man was acting in Jesus’ **name**. Here, **following us** means that this man did not travel in the group of Jesus and his disciples. Alternate translation: “he does not travel with you in our group” or “he is not part of our group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	9	39	oynl	figs-litotes	μὴ κωλύετε αὐτόν	1		Jesus is figuratively expressing a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. You can state this positively. Alternate translation: “Allow him to continue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 MRK	9	39	yw2q	figs-metonymy	ὀνόματί	1		See how you translated **name** in the previous verse [9:39](../09/39.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -673,309 +690,401 @@ MRK	10	15	a1e7	figs-simile	ὡς παιδίον	1	as a little child	The point of
 MRK	10	15	q3ck	figs-explicit	οὐ μὴ εἰσέλθῃ εἰς αὐτήν	1	may certainly not enter into it	Here, the word **it** refers to the kingdom of God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “will certainly not enter the kingdom of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	10	16	jq4f		ἐναγκαλισάμενος αὐτὰ	1	having taken them into his arms	Alternate translation: “embracing the children in his arms”
 MRK	10	17	fpp6	figs-metaphor	ἵνα ζωὴν αἰώνιον κληρονομήσω	1	in order that I might inherit everlasting life	Here, the word **inherit** means “be given” or “receive” and is being used metaphorically to mean “receive eternal life” or “be given eternal.” If your readers would not understand what it means to “inherit eternal life” in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “in order to receive eternal life” or “in order to obtain eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	10	17	d0iy		Διδάσκαλε	1		See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../4/38.md).
 MRK	10	17	h45i	figs-abstractnouns	ζωὴν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **life**, you could express the idea behind **life** by using a verbal form like “live.” Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	10	18	lw1f	figs-rquestion	τί με λέγεις ἀγαθόν?	1	Why are you calling me good?	Jesus’ question “Why are you calling me good” is a rhetorical question which Jesus is asks in order to make a point. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate Jesus’ words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You do not understand what you are saying when you call me good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	10	18	uwt6		τί με λέγεις ἀγαθόν? οὐδεὶς ἀγαθὸς, εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ Θεός	1		By saying, **Why are you calling me good? No one {is} good except God alone**, Jesus is asking the man a rhetorical question in order to make a point. The Bible clearly teaches that Jesus is God and Jesus affirms elsewhere that he believes that he is God. Make sure that your translation does not portray Jesus as denying his own moral perfection or divinity here.
-MRK	10	18	gyod		τί με λέγεις ἀγαθόν? οὐδεὶς ἀγαθὸς, εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ Θεός	1		By saying, **Why are you calling me good? No one {is} good except God alone**, Jesus is correcting the man’s misunderstanding regarding eternal life and what it takes to please God. In the previous verse, the man called Jesus “Good Teacher” thinking that Jesus was a good man but not knowing that Jesus was God. In this verse, Jesus redirects the man’s focus away from people and towards God. As evidenced by the man’s question to Jesus in the previous verse, the man thinks that in order to merit God’s approval and “inherit eternal life” a person simply needs to know the right things to do and do them. Jesus’ words in this verse are meant to correct the man’s thinking and show the man that only God is fully good and that to please God a person must focus on God and put their trust in God’s charachter.
+MRK	10	18	gyod		τί με λέγεις ἀγαθόν? οὐδεὶς ἀγαθὸς, εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ Θεός	1		By saying, **Why are you calling me good? No one is good except God alone**, Jesus is correcting the man’s misunderstanding regarding eternal life and what it takes to please God. In the previous verse, the man called Jesus “Good Teacher” thinking that Jesus was a good man but not knowing that Jesus was God. In this verse, Jesus redirects the man’s focus away from people and towards God. As evidenced by the man’s question to Jesus in the previous verse, the man thinks that in order to merit God’s approval and “inherit eternal life” a person simply needs to know the right things to do and do them. Jesus’ words in this verse are meant to correct the man’s thinking and show the man that only God is fully good and that to please God a person must focus on God and put their trust in God’s character.
+MRK	10	19	qs3e	figs-quotesinquotes	τὰς ἐντολὰς οἶδας: μὴ φονεύσῃς, μὴ μοιχεύσῃς, μὴ κλέψῃς, μὴ ψευδομαρτυρήσῃς, μὴ ἀποστερήσῃς, τίμα τὸν πατέρα σου καὶ τὴν μητέρα	1		In the previous verse Jesus begins directly addressing the man who came to him. This verse continues Jesus’ direct speech to the man. However, in this verse, beginning with the phrase **Do not kill**, Jesus begins quoting several Old Testament passages. If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate Jesus’ direct quotation of the Old Testament as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “You know that the scriptures tell us that we should not kill, commit adultery, steal, testify falsely, or defraud others, and that each person must honor their father and mother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 MRK	10	19	hj3v		μὴ ψευδομαρτυρήσῃς	1	do not testify falsely	Alternate translation: “do not testify falsely against anyone” or “do not lie about someone in court”
-MRK	10	21	syq1	figs-metaphor	ἕν σε ὑστερεῖ	1	One thing you are lacking	“There is one thing you are missing.” Here, **lacking** is a metaphor for needing to do something. Alternate translation: “One thing you need to do” or “There is one thing you have not yet done” or (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-MRK	10	21	rd85	figs-metonymy	δὸς τοῖς πτωχοῖς	1	give it to the poor	Here the word **it** refers to the things he sells and is a metonym for the money he receives when he sells them. Alternate translation: “give the money to the poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-MRK	10	21	ux1l	figs-nominaladj	τοῖς πτωχοῖς	1	to the poor	This refers to **poor** people. Alternate translation: “to poor people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-MRK	10	21	iij4		θησαυρὸν	1	treasure	wealth, valuable things
-MRK	10	22	v58f		ἔχων κτήματα πολλά	1	one having many possessions	“someone who owned many things”
-MRK	10	23	k5nk		πῶς δυσκόλως	1	How difficult it is	“It is very difficult”
-MRK	10	24	z9z1		ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς πάλιν ἀποκριθεὶς λέγει αὐτοῖς	1	but again answering, Jesus says to them	“but Jesus said to his disciples again”
-MRK	10	24	fh1q	figs-metaphor	τέκνα, πῶς	1	Children, how	“My children, how.” Jesus is teaching them as a father would teach his **children**. Alternate translation: “My friends, how” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-MRK	10	24	jf83		πῶς δύσκολόν ἐστιν	1	how hard it is	“it is very hard”
-MRK	10	25	f15k	figs-hyperbole	εὐκοπώτερόν ἐστιν κάμηλον διὰ τρυμαλιᾶς ῥαφίδος διελθεῖν, ἢ πλούσιον εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ εἰσελθεῖν	1	It is easier for a camel to pass through the eye of a needle than for a rich person to enter into the kingdom of God	Jesus uses an exaggeration to emphasize how very difficult it is for **rich** people to get into **the kingdom of God**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-MRK	10	25	hl4s	figs-hypo	εὐκοπώτερόν ἐστιν κάμηλον	1	It is easier for a camel	This speaks of an impossible situation. If you cannot state this in this way in your language, it can be written as a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “It would be easier for a camel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
-MRK	10	25	t4y8		τρυμαλιᾶς ῥαφίδος	1	the eye of a needle	“the hole of a needle.” This refers to the small hole in the end of a sewing **needle** that thread passes through.
-MRK	10	26	ly6b		οἱ δὲ περισσῶς ἐξεπλήσσοντο	1	But they were greatly astonished	“But the disciples were very astonished”
-MRK	10	26	q8b7	figs-rquestion	καὶ τίς δύναται σωθῆναι?	1	And who is able to be saved?	This can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “If that is so, then no one will be saved!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-MRK	10	27	a7bi	figs-ellipsis	παρὰ ἀνθρώποις ἀδύνατον, ἀλλ’ οὐ παρὰ Θεῷ	1	With men it is impossible, but not with God	The understood information may be supplied. Alternate translation: “It is impossible for people to save themselves, but God can save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-MRK	10	28	hcv3		ἰδοὺ	1	Behold	**Behold** is used here to draw attention to the words that come next.
-MRK	10	28	cj3f		ἀφήκαμεν πάντα	1	have left everything	“have left everything behind”
-MRK	10	29	zhx5	figs-litotes	οὐδείς ἐστιν ὃς ἀφῆκεν	1	there is no one who has left	The phrase **there is no one who has left** is a litotes. Jesus uses it to emphasize that every single person who leaves things for Jesus’ sake will receive the rewards that he lists in the next verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
-MRK	10	29	m1w3		ἢ ἀγροὺς	1	or lands	“or plots of ground” or “or the land that he owns”
-MRK	10	29	hr9y		ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ	1	for my sake	“for my cause” or “for me”
-MRK	10	29	pf2g		τοῦ εὐαγγελίου	1	for the gospel	“to proclaim the gospel”
-MRK	10	30	sjhg	figs-doublenegatives	ἐὰν μὴ λάβῃ	1	who may not receive	Jesus finishes a sentence that begins with the words **there is no one who has left** (verse 29). You can state the whole sentence positively. “everyone who has left house, or brothers, or sisters, or mother, or father, or children, or lands, for my sake, and for the gospel, will receive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-MRK	10	30	heb4		ἐν τῷ καιρῷ τούτῳ	1	in this time	“in this life” or “in this present age”
-MRK	10	30	jev2		ἀδελφοὺς, καὶ ἀδελφὰς, καὶ μητέρας, καὶ τέκνα	1	brothers, and sisters, and mothers, and children	Like the list in verse 29, this describes the family in general. The word “fathers” is missing in verse 30, but it does not significantly change the meaning.
-MRK	10	30	ae92	figs-abstractnouns	μετὰ διωγμῶν, καὶ ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τῷ ἐρχομένῳ, ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1	with persecutions, and in the age that is coming, everlasting life	This can be reworded so that the ideas in the abstract noun **persecutions** are expressed with the verb “persecute.” Because the sentence is so long and complicated, “will receive” can be repeated. Alternate translation: “and even though people persecute them, in the world to come, they will receive everlasting life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-MRK	10	30	v8nr		ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τῷ ἐρχομένῳ	1	in the age that is coming	“in the future world” or “in the future”
-MRK	10	31	ym7t	figs-metaphor	ἔσονται πρῶτοι ἔσχατοι, καὶ ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι	1	who are first will be last, and the last first	Here the words **first** and **last** are opposites of one another. Jesus speaks of being the “important” as being “first” and of being the “unimportant” as being “last.” Alternate translation: “are important will be unimportant, and those who are unimportant will be important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-MRK	10	31	xcj1	figs-nominaladj	ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι	1	the last first	The phrase **the last** refers to people who are “last.” Also, the understood verb in this clause may be supplied. Alternate translation: “those who are last, first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-MRK	10	31	mo59	figs-ellipsis	ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι	1	the last first	The understood verb in this clause may be supplied. Alternate translation: “those who are last will be first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-MRK	10	32	zc62		ἦσαν δὲ ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ ἀναβαίνοντες εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα, καὶ ἦν προάγων αὐτοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς	1	And they were on the road, going up to Jerusalem, and Jesus was going ahead of them	“And Jesus and his disciples were walking on the road, on the way up to Jerusalem, and Jesus was in front of his disciples”
-MRK	10	32	hq7y		οἱ…ἀκολουθοῦντες	1	those who are following behind	“those who were following behind them.” Some people were walking behind Jesus and his disciples.
-MRK	10	33	pv4w		ἰδοὺ	1	Behold	“Look” or “Listen” or “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you”
-MRK	10	33	s1hp	figs-explicit	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδοθήσεται	1	the Son of Man will be delivered	Jesus is speaking about himself. You can state this clearly. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man, will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	10	33	ha2g	figs-activepassive	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδοθήσεται	1	the Son of Man will be delivered	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “someone will deliver the Son of Man” or “they will hand the Son of Man over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MRK	10	33	zhf1		κατακρινοῦσιν	1	they will condemn	The word **they** refers to the chief priests and the scribes.
-MRK	10	33	ils2		παραδώσουσιν αὐτὸν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1	deliver him to the Gentiles	“put him under the control of the Gentiles”
-MRK	10	34	ccd3		ἐμπαίξουσιν	1	they will mock	“people will mock”
-MRK	10	34	xv2g	figs-explicit	ἀναστήσεται	1	he will rise	This refers to rising from the dead. Alternate translation: “he will rise from being dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	10	35	li9k	figs-exclusive	θέλομεν…αἰτήσωμέν…ἡμῖν	1	we desire … for us … we may ask	The words **we** and **us** refer only to James and John. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-MRK	10	37	bb98	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῇ δόξῃ σου	1	in your glory	“when you are glorified.” The phrase **in your glory** refers to when Jesus is glorified and rules over his kingdom. Alternate translation: “when you rule in your kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+MRK	10	20	bd3s		Διδάσκαλε	1		See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../4/38.md).
+MRK	10	21	syq1	figs-metaphor	ἕν σε ὑστερεῖ	1	One thing you are lacking	Here, **lack** is a metaphor for needing to do something. If your readers would not understand what it means to **lack** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “One thing you need to do” or “There is one thing you have not yet done” or (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	10	21	rd85	figs-explicit	δὸς τοῖς πτωχοῖς	1	give it to the poor	Here, the word **it** refers to the money the man would receive from selling his possessions. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	10	21	ux1l	figs-nominaladj	τοῖς πτωχοῖς	1	to the poor	Jesus is using the adjective **poor** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+MRK	10	21	iij4	figs-metaphor	ἕξεις θησαυρὸν ἐν οὐρανῷ	1	treasure	Jesus speaks figuratively of rewards in heaven as if these rewards are **treasure**. If your readers would not understand what it means to **have treasure in heaven** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “you will be rewarded in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	10	22	afu7	figs-synecdoche	τῷ λόγῳ	1		Although the term **word** is singular, Mark is using this term to refer to all of the instructions that Jesus gave the man in the prior verse. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+MRK	10	22	v58f		ἔχων κτήματα πολλά	1	one having many possessions	Alternate translation: “someone who owned many things”
+MRK	10	24	z9z1		ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς πάλιν ἀποκριθεὶς λέγει αὐτοῖς	1	but again answering, Jesus says to them	Alternate translation: “but Jesus said to his disciples again”
+MRK	10	24	fh1q	figs-metaphor	τέκνα	1	Children, how	Here, Jesus is using the term **Children** figuratively to describe the disciples. They are under his spiritual care and Jesus teaches them as a father would instruct his children, and so Jesus regards them in that sense as if they were his own children. If your readers would not understand the use of the term **Children** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or you could translate this in a non-figurative way as UST does. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor)
+MRK	10	25	f15k	figs-hyperbole	εὐκοπώτερόν ἐστιν κάμηλον διὰ τρυμαλιᾶς ῥαφίδος διελθεῖν, ἢ πλούσιον εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ εἰσελθεῖν	1	It is easier for a camel to pass through the eye of a needle than for a rich person to enter into the kingdom of God	This entire verse is an exaggeration which Jesus uses to emphasize how difficult it is for **rich** people **to enter into the kingdom of God**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses the difficulty of something happening. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+MRK	10	25	t4y8	translate-unknown	εὐκοπώτερόν ἐστιν κάμηλον διὰ τρυμαλιᾶς ῥαφίδος διελθεῖν, ἢ πλούσιον εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ εἰσελθεῖν	1	the eye of a needle	**the eye of a needle** refers to the small hole at the end of a sewing **needle** that thread passes through. If your readers are not familiar with camels and/or needles, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture, or you could state this in plain language without using hyperbole and express the emphasis another way. Alternate translation: “It is extremely difficult for a rich person to enter into the kingdom of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 
+MRK	10	27	vfyb	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώποις	1		Here, although the term **men** is masculine, it is used with a generic sense to refer to people in general, both male and female. If it would help your readers you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+MRK	10	28	hcv3	figs-exclamations	ἰδοὺ	1	Behold	**Behold** is an exclamation word which is used to draw attention to the words that come next. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: See the UST.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
+MRK	10	29	zhx5	figs-litotes	οὐδείς ἐστιν ὃς ἀφῆκεν	1	there is no one who has left	The phrase **there is no one who has left** is a litotes. Jesus uses the negative word **no** to negate **one** in order to emphasize that every single person who leaves things for Jesus’ sake will receive the rewards that he lists in the next verse. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “everyone who has left” or “every person who has left” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
+MRK	10	29	m1w3		ἢ ἀγροὺς	1	or lands	Alternate translation: “or the land that he owns”
+MRK	10	30	sjhg	figs-doublenegatives	ἐὰν μὴ λάβῃ	1	who may not receive	The phrase **not receive** in this verse, when combined with the phrase “no one” in the previous verse, creates a double negative. If this is confusing in your language you can state the entire sentence positively. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+MRK	10	30	heb4		ἐν τῷ καιρῷ τούτῳ	1	in this time	Alternate translation: “in this present age”
+MRK	10	31	y2lu	figs-nominaladj	πολλοὶ…ἔσονται πρῶτοι ἔσχατοι, καὶ ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι	1		Jesus is using the adjectives **first** and **last** as nouns in order to indicate groups of people. See how you translated the words **first** and **last** in [Mark 9:35](../mrk/09/35.md). Alternate translation: “many people who are now important will not be, and the people who are not now important, will be” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj)
+MRK	10	31	ym7t	figs-metaphor	ἔσονται πρῶτοι ἔσχατοι, καὶ ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι	1	who are first will be last, and the last first	Here, Jesus is using the words **first** and **last** metaphorically. See how you translated these words in [Mark 9:35](../mrk/09/35.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	10	32	hq7y	figs-explicit	οἱ…ἀκολουθοῦντες	1	those who are following behind	Some people were walking behind Jesus and his twelve disciples. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “those people who were following behind them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	10	32	k1nn	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς δώδεκα	1		See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../3/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+MRK	10	33	pv4w	figs-exclamations	ἰδοὺ	1	Behold	**Behold** is an exclamation word which Jesus is using to draw attention to the words that he says next next. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
+MRK	10	33	qkq9	figs-exclusive	ἀναβαίνομεν	1		When Jesus says **we**, he is speaking of himself and the 12 disciples so **we** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+MRK	10	33	s1hp	figs-123person	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδοθήσεται τοῖς ἀρχιερεῦσιν καὶ γραμματεῦσιν, καὶ κατακρινοῦσιν αὐτὸν θανάτῳ, καὶ παραδώσουσιν αὐτὸν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1	the Son of Man will be delivered	Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man, will be delivered to the chief priests and the scribes, and they will condemn me to death and deliver me to the Gentiles” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person)
+MRK	10	33	ha2g	figs-activepassive	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδοθήσεται	1	the Son of Man will be delivered	If your language does not use the passive form in this way you can express the meaning behind the phrase **will be delivered** by using an active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they will hand the Son of Man over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MRK	10	33	ohsf	figs-abstractnouns	καὶ κατακρινοῦσιν αὐτὸν θανάτῳ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **death** by using a verbal form of this word. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+MRK	10	33	ils2		παραδώσουσιν αὐτὸν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1	deliver him to the Gentiles	Alternate translation: “put him under the control of the Gentiles”
+MRK	10	34	ccd3	figs-123person	ἐμπαίξουσιν	1	they will mock	In this verse Jesus continues referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person)
+MRK	10	34	t0lt	writing-pronouns	ἐμπαίξουσιν	1		The pronoun **they** refers to “the Gentiles” mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles will mock him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+MRK	10	34	xv2g	figs-explicit	ἀναστήσεται	1	he will rise	The phrase **he will rise** refers to rising from the dead. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he will rise from being dead” or “he will rise from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	10	35	li9k	figs-exclusive	θέλομεν…αἰτήσωμέν…ἡμῖν	1	we desire … for us … we may ask	Here, the pronouns **we** and **us** refer only to James and John and so they would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+MRK	10	35	ch2r		Διδάσκαλε	1		See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../4/38.md).
+MRK	10	36	he8f	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1		The pronoun **them** refers to James and John. Alternate translation: “to James and John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+MRK	10	37	xwf8	writing-pronouns	οἱ δὲ εἶπαν αὐτῷ	1		The pronoun **they** refers to James and John. Alternate translation: “And James and John said to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+MRK	10	37	n1fv	figs-exclusive	δὸς ἡμῖν…καθίσωμεν	1		Here, the pronouns **us** and **we** refer only to James and John and so they would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+MRK	10	37	bb98	figs-explicit	ἐν τῇ δόξῃ σου	1	in your glory	The phrase **in your glory** refers to when Jesus is glorified and gloriously rules over his kingdom. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “with you when you rule in your kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	10	37	kyg6	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ δόξῃ σου	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **glory** in another way such as using a verbal form of the word. Alternate translation: “next to you when you are glorified” or “sit by you when you are glorified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	10	38	v1bf		οὐκ οἴδατε	1	You do not know	“You do not understand”
-MRK	10	38	yvu8	figs-metaphor	πιεῖν τὸ ποτήριον ὃ ἐγὼ πίνω	1	to drink the cup which I am drinking	Here, **cup** refers to what Jesus must suffer. Suffering is often referred to as drinking from a cup. Alternate translation: “drink the cup of suffering that I will drink” or “drink from the cup of suffering that I will drink from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-MRK	10	38	pd7l	figs-metaphor	τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι βαπτισθῆναι	1	to be baptized with the baptism with which I am being baptized	Here, **baptism** and **being baptized** represent suffering. Just as water covers a person during baptism, suffering will overwhelm Jesus. Alternate translation: “to endure the baptism of suffering which I will suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-MRK	10	39	r3pm	figs-ellipsis	δυνάμεθα	1	We are able	They respond this way, meaning that they **are able** to drink the same cup and endure the same baptism. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-MRK	10	39	hc1g		πίεσθε	1	you will drink	“you will drink as well”
-MRK	10	40	ig8f		τὸ δὲ καθίσαι ἐκ δεξιῶν μου ἢ ἐξ εὐωνύμων, οὐκ ἔστιν ἐμὸν δοῦναι	1	But to sit at my right hand or at my left hand is not mine to give	“But I am not the one who allows people to sit at my right hand or my left hand”
-MRK	10	40	pdc1		ἀλλ’ οἷς ἡτοίμασται	1	but it is for those for whom it has been prepared	“but those places are for those for whom they have been prepared.” The word **it** refers to the places to his right hand and to his left hand.
-MRK	10	40	eu9v	figs-activepassive	ἡτοίμασται	1	it has been prepared	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has prepared it” or “God has prepared them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MRK	10	41	ad19		ἀκούσαντες,	1	When heard about this	The word **this** refers to James and John asking to sit at Jesus’ right and left hands.
-MRK	10	42	sbk8		προσκαλεσάμενος αὐτοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς	1	having summoned them, Jesus	“after Jesus called his disciples, he”
-MRK	10	42	sfs9	figs-activepassive	οἱ δοκοῦντες ἄρχειν τῶν ἐθνῶν	1	that those who are considered rulers of the Gentiles	You can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) the people in general consider these people the rulers of the Gentiles. Alternate translation: “that those whom people consider to be the rulers of the Gentiles.” (2) the Gentiles consider these people their rulers. Alternate translation: “that those whom the Gentiles think of as their rulers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MRK	10	42	hme7		κατακυριεύουσιν	1	lord it over	have control or power over
-MRK	10	42	zfr3		κατεξουσιάζουσιν	1	exercise authority over	“flaunt their authority over.” This means that they show or use their authority in an overbearing way.
-MRK	10	43	zfz6	figs-explicit	οὐχ οὕτως δέ ἐστιν ἐν ὑμῖν	1	But it is not this way among you	This refers back to the previous verse about the Gentile rulers. You can state this clearly. Alternate translation: “But do not be like them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	10	43	fc3m		μέγας γενέσθαι	1	to become great	“to be highly respected”
-MRK	10	44	e7sn	figs-metaphor	εἶναι πρῶτος	1	to be first	This is a metaphor for being the most important. Alternate translation: “to be the most important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-MRK	10	45	a3fr	figs-activepassive	καὶ γὰρ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου οὐκ ἦλθεν διακονηθῆναι	1	For even the Son of Man did not come to be served	You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “For even the Son of Man did not come to have people serve him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MRK	10	45	rik1		διακονηθῆναι, ἀλλὰ διακονῆσαι	1	to be served, but to serve	“to be served by people, but to serve people”
-MRK	10	45	d9jd		ἀντὶ πολλῶν	1	in exchange for many	“in the place of many people”
-MRK	10	46	n4i3			0	Connecting Statement:	As Jesus and his disciples continue walking toward Jerusalem, Jesus heals blind Bartimaeus, who then walks with them.
-MRK	10	46	bq3j	translate-names	ὁ υἱὸς Τιμαίου, Βαρτιμαῖος, τυφλὸς προσαίτης	1	Bartimaeus, a blind beggar, son of Timaeus	“a blind beggar named Bartimaeus, the son of Timaeus.” **Bartimaeus** is the name of a man. **Timaeus** is his father’s name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-MRK	10	47	ynr7	figs-ellipsis	ἀκούσας ὅτι Ἰησοῦς…ἐστιν	1	having heard that it was Jesus	Bartimaeus **heard** people saying **that it was Jesus**. Alternate translation: “when he heard people saying that it was Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-MRK	10	47	vwz9	figs-explicit	Υἱὲ Δαυεὶδ	1	Son of David	Jesus is called the Son of David because he is a descendant of King David. Alternate translation: “You who are the Messiah descended from King David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	10	48	ca5u		ἐπετίμων…πολλοὶ	1	many were rebuking	“many people rebuked”
-MRK	10	48	m32u		πολλῷ μᾶλλον	1	much more	“even more”
-MRK	10	49	t5ch	figs-quotations	εἶπεν, φωνήσατε αὐτόν	1	said, “Call him.”	You can translate this as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “commanded others to call him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-MRK	10	49	ac7h		φωνοῦσι	1	they call	The word **they** refers to the crowd.
-MRK	10	49	jvr1		θάρσει	1	Take courage!	“Have courage” or “Do not be afraid”
-MRK	10	49	gnb9		φωνεῖ σε	1	He is calling you	“Jesus is calling for you”
-MRK	10	50	z6ec		ἀναπηδήσας	1	having sprung up	“having jumped up”
-MRK	10	51	i5an		ἀποκριθεὶς αὐτῷ	1	answering him	“answering the blind man”
-MRK	10	51	dap1		ἀναβλέψω	1	I might receive my sight	“I would be able to see”
+MRK	10	38	yvu8	figs-idiom	πιεῖν τὸ ποτήριον ὃ ἐγὼ πίνω	1	to drink the cup which I am drinking	Drinking a **cup** is an idiom which refers to suffering some experience which is difficult to undergo. In the Bible suffering is often referred to as drinking from a cup. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “drink the cup of suffering that I will drink” or “drink from the cup of suffering that I will drink from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+MRK	10	38	pax6	figs-metaphor	τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι βαπτισθῆναι	1		The phrase **to be baptized with the baptism** is a metaphor which refers to being overwhelmed by difficult circumstances. Just as water covers a person during baptism, suffering and trials overwhelm a person. Here, this metaphor for suffering refers specifically to Jesus’ future suffering in Jerusalem and death by crucifixion. If your readers would not understand this metaphor for suffering, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or use plain language. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	10	38	hlue	figs-activepassive	ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι	1		The phrase **I am being baptized** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MRK	10	39	r3pm	writing-pronouns	οἱ…αὐτοῖς	1	We are able	Here, the pronouns **they** and **them** refer to James and John. Alternate translation: “James and John … to James and John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+MRK	10	39	hc1g	figs-idiom	τὸ ποτήριον ὃ ἐγὼ πίνω, πίεσθε	1	you will drink	**The cup that I drink** is an idiom. See how you translated this idiom in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+MRK	10	39	c15v	figs-metaphor	τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι, βαπτισθήσεσθε	1		In this verse Jesus continues to use **baptism** metaphorically. See how you translated Jesus’ metaphorical use of baptism in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	10	39	humc	figs-activepassive	ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι, βαπτισθήσεσθε	1		The phrase **I am being baptized** and the phrase **you will be baptized** are both passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state these two phrases in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MRK	10	40	pdc1	figs-explicit	ἀλλ’ οἷς ἡτοίμασται	1	but it is for those for whom it has been prepared	The word **it** refers to the places at Jesus’ right and left hand. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “but those places are for those for whom they have been prepared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	10	40	eu9v	figs-activepassive	ἡτοίμασται	1	it has been prepared	The phrase **it has been prepared** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus says in [Matthew 20:23](../mat/07/14.md) that God the Father is the one who will prepare these places. Alternate translation: “God has prepared it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MRK	10	41	ad19	figs-explicit]	ἀκούσαντες,	1	When heard about this	The word **this** refers to James and John asking to sit at Jesus’ right and left hand. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]
+MRK	10	41	i48d	figs-explicit	οἱ δέκα	1		**the ten** refers to the other ten disciples of Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	10	42	sbk8		προσκαλεσάμενος αὐτοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς	1	having summoned them, Jesus	Alternate translation: “after Jesus called his disciples to him, he”
+MRK	10	42	zfr3	figs-abstractnouns	κατεξουσιάζουσιν	1	exercise authority over	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you could express the idea behind this abstract noun in another way. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+MRK	10	43	zfz6	figs-explicit	οὐχ οὕτως…ἐστιν ἐν ὑμῖν	1	But it is not this way among you	The phrase **it is not this way among you** means “this is not the reality you live by as my followers” or “it should not be this way among you” and refers back to the way that Jesus said the Gentile rulers governed in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers you can indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “But you live by a different set of principles than the Gentile rulers do” or “But you are to act differently than the Gentile rulers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	10	43	fc3m		μέγας γενέσθαι	1	to become great	Alternate translation: “to be highly respected” or “to be greatly respected”
+MRK	10	43	gfun	figs-declarative	ἔσται ὑμῶν διάκονος	1		Jesus is using the future statement **will be your servant** to give an instruction. See how you translated the phrase “will be” in [Mark 9:35](../mrk/09/35.md) where it occurs with the same meaning and in a similar context. Alternate translation: “must be your servant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
+MRK	10	44	e7sn	figs-metaphor	εἶναι πρῶτος	1	to be first	Here, **to be first** is a metaphor for being the most important. See how you translated **first** in [Mark 9:35](../mrk/09/35.md). Alternate translation: “to be the most important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	10	44	qzo8	figs-declarative	ἔσται πάντων δοῦλος	1		Jesus is using the future statement **will be a slave of all** to give an instruction. See how you translated the phrase “will be” in the previous verse, where it occurs with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “must be a slave of all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
+MRK	10	44	u5yb	figs-hyperbole	δοῦλος	1		Jesus speaks figuratively of being **a slave** to emphasize the great lengths Jesus’ followers should go to in order to serve others. If Jesus’ exaggeration would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows service or you could clarify that Jesus is teaching that his followers must act similar to slaves in their service to others. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+MRK	10	45	ctta	figs-123person	καὶ γὰρ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person)
+MRK	10	45	pmk3	translate/figs-go	οὐκ ἦλθεν	1		Your language may say “leave” and “go” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “did not leave heaven and go to earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+MRK	10	45	a3fr	figs-activepassive	διακονηθῆναι	1	For even the Son of Man did not come to be served	The phrase **to be served** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to have people serve him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MRK	10	45	rik1		διακονηθῆναι, ἀλλὰ διακονῆσαι	1	to be served, but to serve	Alternate translation: “to be served by people, but to serve people”
+MRK	10	45	d9jd		ἀντὶ πολλῶν	1	in exchange for many	Alternate translation: “in place of many people” or “in exchange for many people”
+MRK	10	46	n4i3	figs-go	ἔρχονται εἰς Ἰερειχώ	1	Connecting Statement:	Your language may say “went” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went into Jericho” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+MRK	10	46	bq3j	figs-go	ἐκπορευομένου αὐτοῦ	1	Bartimaeus, a blind beggar, son of Timaeus	Your language may say “coming out” rather than **going out** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “as he is coming out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+MRK	10	47	ow3g	translate-names	Ἰησοῦς ὁ Ναζαρηνός	1		The people call **Jesus the Nazarene** because he was from the town of Nazareth in Galilee. Alternate translation: “Jesus from the town of Nazareth” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names)
+MRK	10	47	opm0	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1		Here, Mark uses **And** to introduce a reason result statement. **And** introduces the reason **having heard that it was Jesus** which resulted in Bartimaeus beginning **to cry out and to say, “Son of David, Jesus, have mercy on me!”** When the blind man learned that Jesus was walking by, he knew that Jesus would hear him if he called out, so as a result, he shouted to him. Alternate translation: “So” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result)
+MRK	10	47	ynr7	figs-metaphor	Υἱὲ Δαυεὶδ	1	having heard that it was Jesus	The blind man is using the word **Son** figuratively to mean “descendant.” Alternate translation: “Descendant of David” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor)
+MRK	10	47	vwz9	figs-explicit	Υἱὲ Δαυεὶδ	1	Son of David	**David** was Israel’s most important king, and God had promised him that one of his descendants would be the Messiah. So the title Son of David implicitly meant “Messiah.” Alternate translation: “Messiah” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit)
+MRK	10	47	ylls	figs-abstractnouns	ἐλέησόν με	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **mercy**, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **mercy** by using an adjective form such as “merciful” or by expressing it some other way. Alternate translation: “be merciful to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+MRK	10	47	s2dr	figs-imperative	ἐλέησόν με	1		This is an imperative, but it should be translated as a polite request rather than as a command. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please be merciful to me” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative)
+MRK	10	47	tvkh	figs-explicit	ἐλέησόν με	1		The blind man assumes that Jesus will know that he is asking specifically to be healed. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “please have mercy on me and heal me” or “please be merciful to me by healing me” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit)
+MRK	10	48	ca5u		ἐπετίμων αὐτῷ πολλοὶ ἵνα σιωπήσῃ	1	many were rebuking	Alternate translation: “many people kept telling him not to shout”
+MRK	10	48	m32u		πολλῷ μᾶλλον ἔκραζεν	1	much more	The phrase **was crying out much more** could mean: (1) that the blind man shouted even louder to Jesus. Alternate translation: See the UST. (2) that the blind man called out even more persistently. Alternate translation: “called out even more persistently”
+MRK	10	48	l86a	figs-explicit	Υἱὲ Δαυείδ, ἐλέησόν με	1		See how you decided to translate this phrase in [10:47](../010/47.md). Alternate translation: “Messiah, please have mercy on me and heal me” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit)
+MRK	10	49	ac7h	writing-pronouns	φωνοῦσι	1	they call	Here, the pronoun **they** refers to the crowd. If this might confuse your readers, you could state explicitly who **they** refers to. Alternate translation: “some people in the crowd called” or “some people in the front of the crowd called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+MRK	10	49	n6xl	figs-abstractnouns	θάρσει	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **courage**, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **courage** by using an adjective form such as “courageous” or by expressing it some other way. Alternate translation: “Be courageous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	10	52	s5d2	figs-explicit	ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε	1	Your faith has healed you	This phrase is written this way to place emphasis on the man’s **faith**. Jesus heals the man because he believes that Jesus can heal him. This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “I am healing you because you believed in me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	10	52	ub7w		ἠκολούθει αὐτῷ	1	he was following him	“he followed Jesus”
+MRK	10	52	bjuw	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the idea behind this word by using a verb such as “trusted” or by expressing it some other way. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+MRK	10	52	ub7w	figs-abstractnouns	ἀνέβλεψεν	1	he was following him	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sight**, you could express the idea behind this word by using a verb such as “see” or by expressing it some other way. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	11	intro	xg3t			0		# Mark 11 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 11:9-10, 17, which are words from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### The donkey and the colt<br><br>Jesus rode into Jerusalem on an animal. In this way he was like a king who came into a city after he had won an important battle. Also, the kings of Israel in the Old Testament rode on a donkeys. Other kings rode on horses. So Jesus was showing that he was the king of Israel and that he was not like other kings.<br><br>Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about this event. Matthew and Mark wrote that the disciples brought Jesus a donkey. John wrote that Jesus found a donkey. Luke wrote that they brought him a colt. Only Matthew wrote that there were both a donkey had a colt. No one knows for sure whether Jesus rode the donkey or the colt. It is best to translate each of these accounts as it appears in the ULT without trying to make them all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 21:1-7](../mat/21/01.md) and [Mark 11:1-7](../mrk/11/01.md) and [Luke 19:29-36](../luk/19/29.md) and [John 12:14-15](../jhn/12/14.md))
-MRK	11	1	ch4j		καὶ ὅτε ἐγγίζουσιν εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα, εἰς Βηθφαγὴ καὶ Βηθανίαν πρὸς τὸ Ὄρος τῶν Ἐλαιῶν	1	And when they come to Jerusalem, to Bethphage and Bethany, to the Mount of Olives	“And when Jesus and his disciples came near to Jerusalem, they came to Bethphage and Bethany near the Mount of Olives” They had come to **Bethphage and Bethany** in the vicinity of **Jerusalem**.
-MRK	11	1	g1fy	translate-names	Βηθφαγὴ	1	Bethphage	This is the name of a village. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-MRK	11	2	bi22		τὴν κατέναντι ὑμῶν	1	opposite us	“ahead of us”
-MRK	11	2	r41g		πῶλον	1	a colt	This refers to a young donkey that is large enough to carry a man.
-MRK	11	2	yw78	figs-activepassive	ἐφ’ ὃν οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων οὔπω ἐκάθισεν	1	on which no man has yet sat	This can be written in active form. Alternate translation: “that no one has ever ridden” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MRK	11	3	xw55	figs-explicit	τί ποιεῖτε τοῦτο?	1	Why are you doing this?	It can be written clearly what the word **this** refers to. Alternate translation: “Why are you untying and taking the colt?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	11	3	k7fd		αὐτοῦ χρείαν ἔχει	1	has need of it	“needs it”
-MRK	11	3	yj5y	figs-explicit	εὐθὺς αὐτὸν ἀποστέλλει πάλιν ὧδε	1	immediately he sends it back here	Jesus will send it back promptly when he is finished using it. Alternate translation: “will immediately send it back when he no longer needs it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	11	4	y381		ἀπῆλθον	1	they went away	“the two disciples went away”
-MRK	11	4	i2ml		πῶλον	1	a colt	This refers to a young donkey that is large enough to carry a man. See how you translated this in [Mark 11:2](../11/02.md).
-MRK	11	6	j39z		οἱ…εἶπον	1	they spoke	“they responded”
-MRK	11	6	ij7y		καθὼς εἶπεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς	1	just as Jesus told them	“just as Jesus had told them to respond.” This refers to how **Jesus** had **told them** to respond to people’s questions about taking the colt.
-MRK	11	6	m8pm	figs-idiom	ἀφῆκαν αὐτούς	1	they gave them permission	This means that they allowed them to continue doing what they were doing. Alternate translation: “they let them take the donkey with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-MRK	11	7	ice6		ἐπιβάλλουσιν αὐτῷ τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτῶν, καὶ ἐκάθισεν ἐπ’ αὐτόν	1	throw their cloaks on it, and he sat on it	“laid their cloaks on its back so Jesus could ride it.” It is easier to ride a colt or a horse when there is a blanket or something similar on its back. In this case, the disciples threw **their cloaks** on it.
-MRK	11	7	k9g7		τὰ ἱμάτια	1	cloaks	“coats” or “robes”
-MRK	11	8	t8hy	figs-explicit	πολλοὶ τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτῶν ἔστρωσαν εἰς τὴν ὁδόν	1	many spread their cloaks on the road	It was a tradition to lay garments on **the road** in front of important people to honor them. This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “many people spread their garments on the road to honor him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	11	1	ch4j	translate/figs-go	ἐγγίζουσιν	1	And when they come to Jerusalem, to Bethphage and Bethany, to the Mount of Olives	Your language may say “went” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went near” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+MRK	11	1	g1fy	translate-names	Βηθφαγὴ	1	Bethphage	**Bethphage** is the name of a village. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+MRK	11	2	bi22	figs-go	ὑπάγετε εἰς τὴν κώμην	1	opposite us	Your language may say “Come” rather than **Go** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “Come into the village” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+MRK	11	2	si41	figs-youdual	ὑμῶν…εὑρήσετε	1		Since the word **you** applies to the two disciples in both of these instances, it would be dual, if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual)
+MRK	11	2	r41g	translate-unknown	πῶλον	1	a colt	The term **colt** refers to a young donkey. If your readers would not be familiar with what a donkey is, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a young donkey” or “a young riding animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 
+MRK	11	2	yw78	figs-gendernotations	οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων οὔπω ἐκάθισεν	1	on which no man has yet sat	Although the term **man** is masculine, Mark is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. He means that “no one” had yet sat on the donkey. Alternate translation: “no person has yet sat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+MRK	11	2	zloo	figs-metonymy	οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων οὔπω ἐκάθισεν	1		Jesus is using the term **sat** to refer to riding on an animal by association with the way people sit on an animal they are riding. Alternate translation: “no person has ever ridden” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy)
+MRK	11	3	aw3v	figs-quotesinquotes	καὶ ἐάν τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ, τί ποιεῖτε τοῦτο? εἴπατε, ὅτι ὁ Κύριος αὐτοῦ χρείαν ἔχει, καὶ εὐθὺς αὐτὸν ἀποστέλλει πάλιν ὧδε	1		This verse contains two direct quotations within a direct quotation. If this would be confusing in your language, you could translate the two direct quotations in this verse as indirect quotations. Alternate translation: “And if anyone asks you why you are untying the donkey tell them that the Lord needs it and will send it back here as soon as he is done using it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+MRK	11	3	q446	figs-youdual	ποιεῖτε	1		The owners of the colt are speaking to the two disciples, so **you** would be dual, if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual)
+MRK	11	3	xw55	figs-explicit	τί ποιεῖτε τοῦτο?	1	Why are you doing this?	If it would be helpful to your readers you can say explicitly what the word **this** refers to. Alternate translation: “Why are you untying and taking the colt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	11	3	k7fd	figs-abstractnouns	αὐτοῦ χρείαν ἔχει	1	has need of it	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **need**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “needs it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+MRK	11	3	yj5y		εὐθὺς αὐτὸν ἀποστέλλει πάλιν ὧδε	1	immediately he sends it back here	Alternate translation: “will immediately send it back when he no longer needs it”
+MRK	11	4	y381	writing-pronouns	ἀπῆλθον	1	they went away	Here, **they** refers to the two disciples mentioned in [11:1](../11/01.md). If it would help your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+MRK	11	4	f6hc		πῶλον	1		See how you translated **colt** in [Mark 11:2](../11/02.md). Alternate translation: “a young donkey” or “a young riding animal”
+MRK	11	7	k9g7	translate-unknown	τὰ ἱμάτια	1	cloaks	The word **cloaks** refers to outer garments. You could translate this with the name of an outer garment that your readers would recognize, or with a general expression. Alternate translation: “coats” or “outer garments” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown)
+MRK	11	7	sbqy	figs-explicit	ἐπιβάλλουσιν αὐτῷ τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτῶν	1		The disciples did this to show that the person riding the colt was special and important. In this culture, animals that important people rode were draped with rich fabrics. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “draped the colt with their cloaks as a sign of honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	11	8	t8hy	figs-explicit	πολλοὶ τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτῶν ἔστρωσαν εἰς τὴν ὁδόν, ἄλλοι δὲ στιβάδας κόψαντες ἐκ τῶν ἀγρῶν	1	many spread their cloaks on the road	Spreading **cloaks on the road** and **branches** was a way of showing honor to someone. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “many people spread their cloaks on the road, and others spread branches they had cut from the fields. They did this in order to honor Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	11	8	jk2o	translate-symaction	πολλοὶ τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτῶν ἔστρωσαν εἰς τὴν ὁδόν, ἄλλοι δὲ στιβάδας κόψαντες ἐκ τῶν ἀγρῶν	1		The words **many**, **others**, and **they** all refer to other people besides the disciples. Alternate translation: “many people spread their cloaks on the road, and other people spread branches they had cut” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction)
+MRK	11	8	fwl0		ἱμάτια	1		See how you translated the word **cloaks** in [11:7](../11/07.md). Alternate translation: “coats” or “outer garments”
 MRK	11	8	nx3n	figs-explicit	ἄλλοι δὲ στιβάδας κόψαντες ἐκ τῶν ἀγρῶν	1	and others, branches having been cut from the fields	It was a tradition to lay palm **branches** on the road in front of an important people to honor them. Alternate translation: “and others spread branches on the road that they had cut from the fields, also to honor him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	11	9	ye41		οἱ ἀκολουθοῦντες	1	those following	“those who followed Jesus”
-MRK	11	9	d8se	translate-transliterate	ὡσαννά	1	Hosanna	This word means “save us,” but people also shouted it joyfully when they wanted to praise God. You can translate it according to how it was used, or you can write **Hosanna** using your language’s way of spelling that word. Alternate translation: “Praise God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
-MRK	11	9	x1bz	figs-explicit	εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχόμενος	1	Blessed is the one who comes	This is referring to Jesus. You can state this clearly. Alternate translation: “Blessed are you, the one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	11	9	e2p6	figs-metonymy	ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου	1	in the name of the Lord	This is a metonym for the Lord’s authority. Alternate translation: “with the authority of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-MRK	11	9	el81		εὐλογημένος	1	Blessed is	“May God bless”
-MRK	11	10	a6b4	figs-explicit	εὐλογημένη ἡ ἐρχομένη βασιλεία τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, Δαυείδ	1	Blessed is the coming kingdom of our father David	“Blessed is our father David’s coming kingdom.” This refers to Jesus **coming** and ruling as king. Alternate translation: “Blessed be the coming of your kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	11	10	kkfo	figs-activepassive	εὐλογημένη ἡ ἐρχομένη βασιλεία τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, Δαυείδ	1	Blessed is the coming kingdom of our father David	The word **blessed** can be translated as an active verb. Alternate translation: “May God bless you as you rule your coming kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MRK	11	10	diq8	figs-metonymy	τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, Δαυείδ	1	of our father David	Here David’s descendant who will rule is referred to as **David** himself. Alternate translation: “of the greatest descendant of our father David” or “that David’s greatest descendant will rule” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-MRK	11	10	b1si		ὡσαννὰ ἐν τοῖς ὑψίστοις	1	Hosanna in the highest	This could mean: (1) they should praise God who is in heaven. (2) those who are in heaven should shout ‘Hosanna’.
-MRK	11	10	vqm2	figs-metaphor	τοῖς ὑψίστοις	1	the highest	Here heaven is spoken of as **the highest**. Alternate translation: “the highest heaven” or “heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-MRK	11	11	mz8r		ὀψίας ἤδη οὔσης τῆς ὥρας	1	the hour already being late	“because it was already late in the day”
-MRK	11	11	t5nv		ἐξῆλθεν εἰς Βηθανίαν μετὰ τῶν δώδεκα	1	he went out to Bethany with the Twelve	“he and his twelve disciples left Jerusalem and went to Bethany”
-MRK	11	12	zr8n		ἐξελθόντων αὐτῶν ἀπὸ Βηθανίας	1	when they had returned from Bethany	“while they were going back to Jerusalem from Bethany”
-MRK	11	13	y447			0	Connecting Statement:	This happens while Jesus and his disciples are walking to Jerusalem.
-MRK	11	13	yg5n		εἰ ἄρα τι εὑρήσει ἐν αὐτῇ	1	if perhaps he could find anything on it	“looking to see if there was any fruit on it”
-MRK	11	13	j6cq	figs-litotes	οὐδὲν εὗρεν εἰ μὴ φύλλα	1	he found nothing except leaves	Mark is using a negative expressions to emphasize that there were only leaves on the tree. Alternate translation: “he found only leaves on the tree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
-MRK	11	13	vy09	figs-explicit	οὐδὲν εὗρεν εἰ μὴ φύλλα	1	he found nothing except leaves	This means that he did not find any figs. Alternate translation: “he did not find any figs at all on the tree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	11	13	g76z		ὁ…καιρὸς	1	the season	“the time of year”
-MRK	11	14	u3bk	figs-apostrophe	εἶπεν αὐτῇ, μηκέτι εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα, ἐκ σοῦ μηδεὶς καρπὸν φάγοι	1	he said to it, “No one will ever eat fruit from you again.”	Jesus speaks to the fig tree and curses it. He speaks to it so that his disciples hear him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]])
-MRK	11	14	b362		εἶπεν αὐτῇ	1	he said to it	“he spoke to the tree”
-MRK	11	14	ij5h		ἤκουον οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ	1	his disciples heard it	The word **it** refers to Jesus speaking to the fig tree.
-MRK	11	15	hj7z		ἔρχονται	1	coming	“Jesus and his disciples came”
-MRK	11	15	md5l	figs-explicit	ἤρξατο ἐκβάλλειν τοὺς πωλοῦντας καὶ τοὺς ἀγοράζοντας ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ	1	he began to cast out those selling and those buying in the temple	Jesus is forcing these people out of **the temple**. This can be written clearly. Alternate translation: “he began to drive the sellers and buyers out of the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	11	15	s4m2		τοὺς πωλοῦντας καὶ τοὺς ἀγοράζοντας	1	those selling and those buying	“the people who were buying and selling”
-MRK	11	17	ve56			0	General Information:	God had said earlier in his word, through the prophet Isaiah, that his temple would be a house of prayer for all the nations.
-MRK	11	17	xrz2	figs-rquestion	οὐ γέγραπται, ὅτι ὁ οἶκός μου, οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν?	1	Is it not written, ‘My house will be called a house of prayer for all the nations’?	Jesus is rebuking the Jewish leaders for their misuse of the temple. This can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “It is written in the scriptures that God said, ‘I want my house to be called a house where people from all nations may pray.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-MRK	11	17	dpt1	figs-metaphor	ὑμεῖς δὲ ἐποιήσατε αὐτὸν σπήλαιον λῃστῶν	1	But you have made it a den of robbers	Jesus compares the people to **robbers** and the temple to a robbers’ **den**. Alternate translation: “But you are like robbers who have made my house into a robbers’ den” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-MRK	11	17	qc6k		σπήλαιον λῃστῶν	1	a den of robbers	“a cave where robbers hide”
-MRK	11	18	k6dv		ἐζήτουν πῶς	1	they were seeking a way	“they were looking for a way”
-MRK	11	19	h4hg		ὅταν ὀψὲ ἐγένετο	1	when evening came	“in the evening”
-MRK	11	19	y7la		ἐξεπορεύοντο ἔξω τῆς πόλεως	1	they were departing from the city	“Jesus and his disciples left the city”
-MRK	11	20	m27r			0	Connecting Statement:	Jesus uses the example of the fig tree to remind the disciples to have faith in God.
-MRK	11	20	b56h		παραπορευόμενοι	1	passing by	“walking along the road”
-MRK	11	20	s8ki	figs-explicit	τὴν συκῆν ἐξηραμμένην ἐκ ῥιζῶν	1	the fig tree had been withered from its roots	Translate this statement to clarify that the **tree** died. Alternate translation: “the fig tree had withered away down to its roots and died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	11	20	a83v		ἐξηραμμένην	1	had been withered	“had dried up”
-MRK	11	21	jt3h	figs-explicit	ἀναμνησθεὶς ὁ Πέτρος	1	having remembered, Peter	It may be helpful to state what **Peter** **remembered**. Alternate translation: “Peter, remembering what Jesus had said to the fig tree,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	11	22	ry5v		ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ Ἰησοῦς λέγει αὐτοῖς	1	answering, Jesus says to them	“Jesus replied to his disciples”
-MRK	11	23	sy61		ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly I say to you	“I tell you the truth.” This phrase adds emphasis to what Jesus says next.
-MRK	11	23	c3cj		ὃς ἂν εἴπῃ	1	whoever might say	“if anyone says”
-MRK	11	23	y76p	figs-metonymy	μὴ διακριθῇ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ, ἀλλὰ πιστεύῃ	1	may not doubt in his heart, but may believe	Here, **heart** is a metonym for a person’s mind or inner being. Alternate translation: “if he truly believes in his heart” or “if he does not doubt but believes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-MRK	11	23	fzp5		ἔσται αὐτῷ	1	it will be for him	“God will make it happen”
-MRK	11	24	pn9x	grammar-connect-words-phrases	διὰ τοῦτο λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Because of this, I say to you	“So I tell you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-MRK	11	24	tu5z	figs-explicit	ἔσται ὑμῖν	1	it will be yours	It is understood that this will happen because God will provide what you ask for. You can state this clearly. Alternate translation: “God will give it to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	11	25	m7xi		ὅταν στήκετε προσευχόμενοι	1	when you stand praying	It is common in Hebrew culture to **stand** when **praying** to God. Alternate translation: “when you pray”
-MRK	11	25	f6ex		εἴ τι ἔχετε κατά τινος	1	if you have something against anyone	“whatever grudge you have against anyone.” Here the word **something** refers to any grudge you hold **against** someone for sinning against you or any anger you have against someone.
-MRK	11	27	n3ei			0	Connecting Statement:	The next day when Jesus returns to temple, he gives the chief priests, scribes, and elders an answer to their question about his casting the money changers out of the temple area, by asking them another question, which they were not willing to answer.
-MRK	11	27	s2ac		ἔρχονται…εἰς	1	they come to	“Jesus and his disciples came to”
-MRK	11	27	alh5		ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ περιπατοῦντος αὐτοῦ	1	as he is walking around in the temple	This means that Jesus was walking around inside of the temple courtyard; he was not walking into the temple.
-MRK	11	28	r3ik		ἔλεγον αὐτῷ	1	they were saying to him	The word **they** refers to the chief priests, the scribes, and the elders.
+MRK	11	9	d8se	translate-transliterate	ὡσαννά	1	Hosanna	The word **Hosanna** is a Hebrew word. Mark spelled it out using Greek letters so his readers would know how it sounded. **Hosanna** had an original meaning of “save now” but by the time of this event it had become a way of praising God. In your translation you can spell **Hosanna** the way it sounds in your language or you can translate it according to how it was used, as the UST does. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
+MRK	11	9	ye41	figs-activepassive	εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου	1	those following	The word **Blessed** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, “God” is the one doing the blessing. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MRK	11	9	suib		εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου	1		The phrase **Blessed is the one** could be: (1) a request for God to bless Jesus. Alternate translation: “May God bless the one who comes in his name” (2) stating that God had already blessed Jesus. Alternate translation: “God has blessed the one who comes in his name”
+MRK	11	9	x1bz	figs-explicit	εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχόμενος	1	Blessed is the one who comes	Here, the phrase **the one** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers you can state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Blessed are you, the one who comes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	11	9	e2p6	figs-metonymy	ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου	1	in the name of the Lord	Here, the phrase **in the name of** is used figuratively for authority. The phrase **in the name of the Lord** means the “with the authority of the Lord.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or express this with plain language. Alternate translation: “with the authority of the Lord” or “with the Lord’s authority” (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+MRK	11	10	kkfo	figs-activepassive	εὐλογημένη	1	Blessed is the coming kingdom of our father David	The word **Blessed** is passive in form. See how you translated this word in [11:9](../11/09.md). Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MRK	11	10	a6b4		εὐλογημένη ἡ ἐρχομένη βασιλεία τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, Δαυείδ	1	Blessed is the coming kingdom of our father David	The phrase **Blessed is the coming kingdom of our father David** could be: (1) an exclamation proclaiming that the future messianic kingdom promised to a descendant of David is blessed by God. Alternate translation: See the UST. (2) a prayer expressing the desire that God would bless the coming messianic kingdom. Alternate translation: “May God bless the coming kingdom of our father David”
+MRK	11	10	yuap	figs-metaphor	τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, Δαυείδ	1		Here, the term **father** figuratively means “ancestor.” If your readers would not understand the figurative use of **father** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “of our ancestor David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	11	10	b1si		ὡσαννὰ ἐν τοῖς ὑψίστοις	1	Hosanna in the highest	See how you translated the word **Hosanna** in [11:9](../11/09.md). The phrase ** Hosanna in the highest** could be (1) an exclamation of praise to God. Alternate translation: See the UST. (2) a prayer to God for salvation from Israel’s enemies. Alternate translation: “Please save us now God in the highest”
+MRK	11	10	vqm2	figs-explicit	ἐν τοῖς ὑψίστοις	1	the highest	The phrase ** in the highest** is a figurative way or referring to heaven where God dwells. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state this explicitly. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	11	11	h2du	figs-synecdoche	ἱερόν	1		Since only priests could enter the temple building, here the word **temple** means the temple courtyard. Mark is using the word for the entire building to refer to one part of it. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+MRK	11	11	t5nv	figs-go	ἐξῆλθεν εἰς Βηθανίαν	1	he went out to Bethany with the Twelve	Your language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “he came to Bethany” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+MRK	11	11	rvd7	figs-nominaladj	τῶν δώδεκα	1		See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../3/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+MRK	11	12	zr8n	figs-go	ἐξελθόντων αὐτῶν ἀπὸ Βηθανίας	1	when they had returned from Bethany	Your language may say “went” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “when they had went out from Bethany” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+MRK	11	13	y447	figs-go	ἦλθεν	1	Connecting Statement:	Your language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “he came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]
+MRK	11	13	yg5n	figs-go	ἐλθὼν ἐπ’ αὐτὴν	1	if perhaps he could find anything on it	Your language may say “went” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “having went to it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+MRK	11	13	j6cq	figs-litotes	οὐδὲν εὗρεν εἰ μὴ φύλλα	1	he found nothing except leaves	Mark is using a negative expressions to emphasize that there were only leaves on the tree. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he found only leaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
+MRK	11	13	g76z		ὁ…καιρὸς οὐκ ἦν σύκων	1	the season	Alternate translation: “it was not the time of year for figs”
+MRK	11	14	u3bk	figs-apostrophe	εἶπεν αὐτῇ, μηκέτι εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα, ἐκ σοῦ μηδεὶς καρπὸν φάγοι	1	he said to it, “No one will ever eat fruit from you again.”	Jesus is figuratively addressing something that he knows cannot hear him, the fig tree, in order to teach his listeners something. If this is confusing in your language, consider expressing this feeling by talking about the fig tree. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]])
+MRK	11	14	b362	figs-explicit	εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα	1	he said to it	The phrase **to eternity** is a Jewish expression which means “forever.” In this context it specifically means “ever again.” Mark assumed his readers would be familiar with this expression. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the meaning of the expression **to eternity** explicitly. Alternate translation: “ever again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	11	14	ij5h	figs-doublenegatives	μηκέτι…ἐκ σοῦ μηδεὶς καρπὸν φάγοι	1	his disciples heard it	The phrase **no one will any longer** is a double negative. Jesus uses a double negative here for emphasis. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it using only one negative statement and show the emphasis some other way. Alternate translation: “Surely, no one will eat from you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+MRK	11	15	hj7z	figs-go	ἔρχονται εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα	1	coming	Your language may say “going” rather than **coming** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “going to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+MRK	11	15	c2wl	figs-synecdoche	ἱερὸν	1		See how you translated the word **temple** in [11:11](../11/11.md) where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+MRK	11	15	hoym		ἐκβάλλειν	1		Alternate translation: “to throw out” or “to force out” or “to drive out”
+MRK	11	15	s4m2		τοὺς πωλοῦντας καὶ τοὺς ἀγοράζοντας	1	those selling and those buying	Alternate translation: “the people who were buying and selling”
+MRK	11	15	ve56	figs-synecdoche	ἱερῷ	1	General Information:	See how you translated the word **temple** in [11:11](../11/11.md) where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+MRK	11	16	ohxg	figs-synecdoche	ἱεροῦ	1		See how you translated the word **temple** in [11:11](../11/11.md) where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+MRK	11	17	xrz2	figs-rquestion	οὐ γέγραπται, ὅτι ὁ οἶκός μου, οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν?	1	Is it not written, ‘My house will be called a house of prayer for all the nations’?	**Has it not been written** is a rhetorical question which Jesus is using to emphasize God’s purpose for the temple as recorded in the Old Testament scriptures. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate Jesus’ words as a statement and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Listen to me! You should have payed closer attention to the scripture which says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	11	17	dxwe	figs-quotesinquotes	οὐ γέγραπται, ὅτι ὁ οἶκός μου, οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν? ὑμεῖς δὲ ἐποιήσατε αὐτὸν σπήλαιον λῃστῶν	1		If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “God says in the Scriptures that ‘his temple will be a place of prayer for all nations,’ but you have made it ‘a den of robbers’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+MRK	11	17	t9x9	figs-activepassive	οὐ γέγραπται	1		If your readers would misunderstand the phrase **been written**, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who has done the action. Alternate translation: “Has God not said in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MRK	11	17	qeix	figs-metaphor	οἶκός μου	1		God, speaking through the prophet Isaiah, refers figuratively to his temple as his **house**, because his presence is there. Alternate translation: “My temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	11	17	t1ho	figs-metaphor	οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1		God, speaking through the prophet Isaiah, refers figuratively to a place where people would pray as a **house**. Alternate translation: “will be called a place where people from all nations can pray to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	11	17	npdf	figs-activepassive	οἶκός μου, οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται	1		The phrase **will be called** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it is people who are calling God’s temple a house of prayer. Alternate translation: “People will call my house a house of prayer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MRK	11	17	qvxz	figs-abstractnouns	προσευχῆς…πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **prayer**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “pray.” Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+MRK	11	17	dpt1	figs-metaphor	σπήλαιον λῃστῶν	1	But you have made it a den of robbers	God, speaking through the prophet Jeremiah, refers figuratively to a place where thieves would gather to hide and plot their crimes as if it were a wild animal’s den or lair. Alternate translation: “a place where thieves gather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	11	18	k6dv		ἐζήτουν πῶς	1	they were seeking a way	Alternate translation: “they were looking for a way”
+MRK	11	19	h4hg		ὅταν ὀψὲ ἐγένετο	1	when evening came	Alternate translation: “in the evening”
+MRK	11	20	s8ki	figs-explicit	τὴν συκῆν ἐξηραμμένην ἐκ ῥιζῶν	1	the fig tree had been withered from its roots	The phrase **the fig tree had been withered from the roots** means that the **fig tree** had shriveled and dried up and was dead. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the fig tree had withered down to its roots and died” or “the fig tree was dried and shriveled down to its roots and had completely died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	11	20	a83v	figs-activepassive	ἐξηραμμένην	1	had been withered	The phrase **had been withered** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “was withered” or “had dried up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 
+MRK	11	21	jt3h	figs-activepassive	ἀναμνησθεὶς	1	having remembered, Peter	The phrase **having been reminded** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 
+MRK	11	21	na1k	figs-activepassive	ἐξήρανται	1		The phrase **has been withered away** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “was withered away” or “has dried up” or “has died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MRK	11	22	ry5v	figs-yousingular	ἔχετε πίστιν	1	answering, Jesus says to them	In the original language that Mark wrote this Gospel in, the phrase **have faith** is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “Every one of you have faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+MRK	11	22	x8k7	figs-abstractnouns	ἔχετε πίστιν Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “trust.” Alternate translation: “Trust in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+MRK	11	23	sy61		ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly I say to you	Jesus uses the phrase **Truly I say to you** to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. Alternate translation: “What I am about to tell you is very true”
+MRK	11	23	mred	figs-hyperbole	ὅτι ὃς ἂν εἴπῃ τῷ ὄρει τούτῳ, ἄρθητι καὶ βλήθητι εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν	1		Jesus is using hyperbole to teach. He is using an extreme example to emphasize to his disciples the point that God can do anything in response to believing prayer. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternate translation: “for example, that whoever might ask God and say, ‘God please take up this mountain and cast it into the sea,’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+MRK	11	23	a01g	figs-metaphor	ὅτι ὃς ἂν εἴπῃ τῷ ὄρει τούτῳ, ἄρθητι καὶ βλήθητι εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν	1		Here, Jesus uses **mountain** figuratively to represent anything that would seem difficult or impossible to do. If your readers would not understand Jesus’ figurative use of **mountain** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “that anyone of you who encounters a difficult task and asks God to do it” or “that anyone of you who encounters a difficult task and asks God to accomplish it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	11	23	dwsf	figs-imperative	ἄρθητι καὶ βλήθητι εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν	1		This would not be a command that the mountain would be capable of obeying. Instead, it would be a command that directly caused the mountain to be taken up and cast into the sea by the power of God. Alternate translation: “May God lift you up and cast you into the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
+MRK	11	23	c3cj	figs-extrainfo	ὄρει τούτῳ	1	whoever might say	Here, the phrase **this mountain** refers to the Mount of Olives which was mentioned in [11:1](../11/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
+MRK	11	23	k3z4	figs-activepassive	ἄρθητι καὶ βλήθητι εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν	1		The phrases **Be taken up** and **be cast* are both passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express these ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Mark implies that “God” is the one doing it. Alternate translation: “May God lift you up and cast you into the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MRK	11	23	y76p	figs-metonymy	μὴ διακριθῇ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ, ἀλλὰ πιστεύῃ	1	may not doubt in his heart, but may believe	In the expression **doubt in his heart** the word **heart** figuratively represents a person’s mind or inner being. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. Alternate translation: “if he does not doubt but believes” or “if he truly believes in his mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+MRK	11	23	doeg	figs-doublenegatives	μὴ διακριθῇ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ, ἀλλὰ πιστεύῃ	1		The phrase **not doubt** is a double negative. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “if he truly believes in his mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+MRK	11	23	fzp5		ἔσται αὐτῷ	1	it will be for him	Alternate translation: “God will make it happen”
+MRK	11	24	pn9x		διὰ τοῦτο λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Because of this, I say to you	Alternate translation: “For this reason, I say to you”
+MRK	11	24	c61c	figs-yousingular	ὑμῖν…προσεύχεσθε…ἐλάβετε…ὑμῖν	1		In this verse, all four occurrences of the word **you** are plural and apply to Jesus’ disciples. Your language may require you to mark these as plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+MRK	11	24	abke	figs-yousingular	πιστεύετε	1		In the original language that Mark wrote this Gospel in, the word **believe** is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “every one of you must believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+MRK	11	24	tu5z	figs-explicit	ἔσται ὑμῖν	1	it will be yours	In the phrase **it will be to you** the implication is that God will provide what is asked for. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	11	25	m2aw	figs-yousingular	στήκετε…ἔχετε…ὑμῶν…ὑμῖν…ὑμῶν	1		In this verse every occurrence of the word **you** and **your** is plural and applies to Jesus’ disciples. Your language may require you to mark these as plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+MRK	11	25	m7xi	figs-explicitinfo	ὅταν στήκετε προσευχόμενοι	1	when you stand praying	It is common in Hebrew culture to **stand** when **praying** to God. Jesus assumes that his readers would be familiar with this practice. If this would be misunderstood in your culture you can abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “when you are praying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
+MRK	11	25	ttxg	figs-yousingular	ἀφίετε	1		In this verse, the first occurrence of the word **forgive** is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “each of you must forgive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+MRK	11	25	swa3	figs-yousingular	ἀφίετε	1		In the original language that the author of Mark wrote this Gospel in, the word **forgive** is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “every one of you must believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+MRK	11	25	f6ex	figs-explicit	εἴ τι ἔχετε κατά τινος	1	if you have something against anyone	Here, **have something against anyone** refers to any anger, unforgiveness, or grudge a person holds **against** against another person for offending or sinning against them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	11	25	jjs9	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Jesus says **forgive, if you have something against anyone** with the goal that **your Father who {is} in the heavens may also forgive you your trespasses.** Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+MRK	11	25	omze	figs-abstractnouns	τὰ παραπτώματα ὑμῶν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **trespasses**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “sinned” or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for the times you have sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+MRK	11	27	alh5	figs-synecdoche	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ περιπατοῦντος αὐτοῦ	1	as he is walking around in the temple	The phrase, **he is walking around in the temple** means that Jesus was walking around in the temple courtyard; he was not walking in the temple since only priests were allowed in inside the temple building. See how you translated the word **temple** in [11:15](../11/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 MRK	11	28	se9b	figs-parallelism	ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιεῖς? ἢ, τίς σοι ἔδωκεν τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην, ἵνα ταῦτα ποιῇς?	1	By what authority do you do these things, and who gave you this authority, so that you might do them?	This could mean: (1) both of these questions have the same meaning and are asked together to strongly question Jesus’ authority and so can be combined. Alternate translation: “Who gave you authority to do these things?” (2) these are two separate questions, the first asking about the nature of the authority and the second about who gave it to him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-MRK	11	28	p5u3	figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1	these things	The words **these things** refer to Jesus turning over the sellers’ tables in the temple and speaking against what the chief priests and scribes taught. Alternate translation: “things like those you did here yesterday” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	11	30	jj91		τὸ βάπτισμα τὸ Ἰωάννου	1	The baptism of John	“The baptism that John performed”
-MRK	11	30	fr1b		ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἦν ἢ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων	1	was it from heaven or from men	“was it authorized by heaven or by men”
-MRK	11	30	sh7b	figs-metonymy	ἐξ οὐρανοῦ	1	from heaven	Here, **heaven** refers to God. Alternate translation: “from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-MRK	11	30	i5is		ἐξ ἀνθρώπων	1	from men	“from people”
-MRK	11	31	s9vv	figs-ellipsis	ἐὰν εἴπωμεν, ἐξ οὐρανοῦ	1	If we would say, ‘From heaven,’	This refers to the source of the baptism of John. Alternate translation: “If we say, ‘It was from heaven,’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-MRK	11	31	nu1m	figs-metonymy	ἐξ οὐρανοῦ	1	From heaven	Here, **heaven** refers to God. See how you translated this in [Mark 11:30](../11/30.md). Alternate translation: “From God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-MRK	11	31	t9er		οὐκ ἐπιστεύσατε αὐτῷ	1	did you not believe him	The word **him** refers to John the Baptist.
-MRK	11	32	aus1	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων	1	But we might say, ‘From men,’	This refers to the source of the baptism of John. Alternate translation: “But if we say, ‘It was from men,’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-MRK	11	32	v2gs		ἐξ ἀνθρώπων	1	From men	“From people”
-MRK	11	32	b5qb	figs-explicit	ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων?	1	But we might say, ‘From men,’…	The religious leaders imply that they will suffer from the people if they give this answer. Alternate translation: “But we do not want to say that it was from men or the crowd may attack us.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	11	32	z93u	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων?	1	But we might say, ‘From men,’…	The religious leaders do not finish their statement, since they all understood what would happen if they said John’s baptism was not from God. Alternate translation: “But if we say, ‘From men,’ that would not be good.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-MRK	11	32	z998	figs-explicit	ἐφοβοῦντο τὸν ὄχλον	1	They were afraid of the crowd	The author, Mark, explains why the religious leaders did not want to say that John’s baptism was from men. You can state this clearly. “They said this to each other because they were afraid of the people” or “They did not want to say that John’s baptism was from men because they were afraid of the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	11	33	us4a	figs-ellipsis	οὐκ οἴδαμεν	1	We do not know	This refers to the baptism of John. This understood information may be supplied. Alternate translation: “We do not know where the baptism of John came from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-MRK	12	intro	ne55			0		# Mark 12 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 12:10-11, 36, which are words from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Hypothetical Situations<br><br>Hypothetical situations are situations that have not actually happened. People describe these situations so they learn what their hearers think is good and bad or right and wrong. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
-MRK	12	1	w2hb	figs-parables		0	Connecting Statement:	Jesus speaks this parable against the chief priests, the scribes, and the elders. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
-MRK	12	1	qa93		καὶ ἤρξατο αὐτοῖς ἐν παραβολαῖς λαλεῖν	1	Then Jesus began to speak to them in parables	The word **them** here refers to the chief priests, the scribes, and the elders to whom Jesus had been talking in the previous chapter.
-MRK	12	1	qap8		περιέθηκεν φραγμὸν	1	put a hedge around it	He put a barrier around the vineyard. It could have been a row of shrubs, a fence, or a stone wall.
-MRK	12	1	ns9e	figs-explicit	ὤρυξεν ὑπολήνιον	1	dug a pit for a winepress	This means that he carved a pit on the rock, which would be the bottom part of the winepress used for collecting the squeezed grape juice. Alternate translation: “carved a pit into rock for the winepress” or “he made a vat to collect the juice from the winepress” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	12	1	l2i2		ἐξέδετο αὐτὸν γεωργοῖς	1	leased the vineyard to vine growers	The owner still owned the vineyard, but he allowed the vine growers to take care of it. When the grapes became ripe, they were to give some of them to the owner and keep the rest.
-MRK	12	2	s83v	figs-explicit	τῷ καιρῷ	1	at the season	This refers to the time of harvest. This can be made clear. Alternate translation: “when the time came to harvest the grapes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	12	3	vz7k		καὶ λαβόντες αὐτὸν	1	But having seized him	“But after the vine growers grabbed the slave”
-MRK	12	3	c321	figs-explicit	κενόν	1	with nothing	This means that they did not give him any of the fruit. Alternate translation: “without any grapes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	12	4	f3f4		ἀπέστειλεν πρὸς αὐτοὺς	1	he sent to them	“the owner of the vineyard sent to the vine growers”
-MRK	12	4	w1ge	figs-explicit	κἀκεῖνον ἐκεφαλίωσαν	1	and that one, they wounded in the head	This can be written more clearly. Alternate translation: “and they beat that one on the head, and they hurt him terribly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	12	5	l1yw	figs-ellipsis	ἄλλον…κἀκεῖνον ἀπέκτειναν; καὶ πολλοὺς ἄλλους	1	another, and that one they killed, and many others	These phrases refer to other slaves. Alternate translation: “yet another slave, and they killed him, and many other slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-MRK	12	6	z5hz	figs-explicit	υἱὸν ἀγαπητόν	1	a beloved son	It is implied that this is the owner’s **son**. Alternate translation: “his beloved son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	12	7	m63e	figs-explicit	ὁ κληρονόμος	1	the heir	This is the owner’s **heir**, who would inherit the vineyard after his father died. Alternate translation: “the owner’s heir” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	12	7	s5dc	figs-synecdoche	ἡ κληρονομία	1	the inheritance	The tenants are referring to the vineyard as **the inheritance**. Alternate translation: “this vineyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-MRK	12	8	gx6l		λαβόντες	1	having seized him	“after the vine growers seized the son”
-MRK	12	9	r4md	figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ποιήσει ὁ κύριος τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος?	1	Therefore, what will the lord of the vineyard do?	Jesus asks a question and then gives the answer to teach the people. The question may be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “So I will tell you what the owner of the vineyard will do.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-MRK	12	9	rde6	grammar-connect-words-phrases	οὖν	1	Therefore	Jesus has finished telling the parable and is now asking the people what they think will happen next. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-MRK	12	9	g4ce		ἀπολέσει	1	destroy	kill
-MRK	12	9	mc5y	figs-explicit	δώσει τὸν ἀμπελῶνα ἄλλοις	1	will give the vineyard to others	The word **others** refers to other vine growers who will care for the vineyard. Alternate translation: “he will give the vineyard to other vine growers to care for it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	12	10	v6ta			0	General Information:	This scripture was written long before in God’s word.
-MRK	12	10	xj9j	figs-rquestion	οὐδὲ τὴν Γραφὴν ταύτην ἀνέγνωτε:	1	And have you not read this scripture?	Jesus reminds the people of a **scripture** passage. He uses a rhetorical question here to rebuke them. This can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “And surely you have read this scripture.” or “And you should remember this scripture.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-MRK	12	10	jpa3		ἐγενήθη εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας	1	has become the head of the corner	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the Lord made into the cornerstone”
-MRK	12	11	r8z8		παρὰ Κυρίου ἐγένετο αὕτη	1	This came from the Lord	“The Lord has done this”
-MRK	12	11	k5w6	figs-metaphor	ἔστιν θαυμαστὴ ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν	1	it is marvelous in our eyes	Here, **in our eyes** stands for seeing, which is a metaphor for the people’s opinion. Alternate translation: “we have seen it and think that it is marvelous” or “we think that it is wonderful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-MRK	12	12	b1vz		ἐζήτουν αὐτὸν κρατῆσαι	1	they were seeking to seize him	Here, **they** refers to the chief priests, scribes, and elders. This group may be referred to as “the Jewish leaders.”
-MRK	12	12	sl74		ἐζήτουν	1	they were seeking	“they wanted”
-MRK	12	12	lx62	figs-explicit	καὶ ἐφοβήθησαν τὸν ὄχλον	1	but they feared the crowd	They were afraid of what **the crowd** would do to them if they arrested Jesus. This can be made clear. Alternate translation: “but they feared what the crowd would do if they arrested him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	12	12	v9wb		πρὸς αὐτοὺς	1	against them	“to accuse them”
-MRK	12	13	s1hb			0	Connecting Statement:	In an effort to trap Jesus, some of the Pharisees and Herodians, and then the Sadducees, come to Jesus with questions.
-MRK	12	13	z2sf		καὶ ἀποστέλλουσιν	1	And they send	“Then the Jewish leaders sent”
-MRK	12	13	pj3c		τῶν Ἡρῳδιανῶν	1	the Herodians	This was the name of an informal political party that supported Herod Antipas.
-MRK	12	13	kuy5	figs-metaphor	ἵνα αὐτὸν ἀγρεύσωσιν	1	in order to trap him	Here the author describes tricking Jesus as “trapping him.” Alternate translation: “to trick him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-MRK	12	14	dh3d		λέγουσιν	1	they say	Here, **they** refers to those sent from among the Pharisees and the Herodians.
-MRK	12	14	cp3x	figs-litotes	οὐ μέλει σοι περὶ οὐδενός	1	it is not a concern to you about anyone	The negation can modify the verb. Alternate translation: “you do not care about people’s opinions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
-MRK	12	14	xptc	figs-idiom	οὐ μέλει σοι περὶ οὐδενός	1	it is not a concern to you about anyone	This is an idiom that means that Jesus does not show favoritism. Alternate translation: “you are not concerned with earning people’s favor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-MRK	12	15	g48w	figs-explicit	ὁ…εἰδὼς αὐτῶν τὴν ὑπόκρισιν	1	he, knowing their hypocrisy	They were acting hypocritically. This can be explained more clearly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, knowing that they did not really want to know what God wanted them to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	12	15	c7nj	figs-rquestion	τί με πειράζετε?	1	Why do you test me?	Jesus rebukes the Jewish leaders because they were trying to trick him. This can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “I know you are trying to make me say something wrong so you can accuse me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-MRK	12	15	wl34	translate-bmoney	δηνάριον	1	a denarius	This coin was worth a day’s wages. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
-MRK	12	16	ev6s		οἱ δὲ ἤνεγκαν	1	And they brought one	“So the Pharisees and the Herodians brought a denarius”
-MRK	12	16	wd1n		ἡ εἰκὼν αὕτη καὶ ἡ ἐπιγραφή	1	is this likeness and inscription	“is this picture and name”
-MRK	12	16	gi96	figs-ellipsis	οἱ…εἶπαν αὐτῷ, Καίσαρος	2	they said to him, “Caesar’s.”	Here, **Caesar’s** refers to his likeness and inscription. Alternate translation: “they said, ‘They are Caesar’s likeness and inscription” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-MRK	12	17	fl4l	figs-metonymy	τὰ Καίσαρος ἀπόδοτε Καίσαρι	1	The things of Caesar, give back to Caesar	Jesus is teaching that his people must respect the government by paying taxes. This figure of speech can be clarified by changing **Caesar** to Roman government. Alternate translation: “Give to the Roman government the things that belong to the Roman government” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-MRK	12	17	la16	figs-ellipsis	καὶ τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ τῷ Θεῷ	1	and the things of God, to God	The understood verb may be supplied. Alternate translation: “and give to God the things of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-MRK	12	17	pw4r	figs-explicit	ἐξεθαύμαζον ἐπ’ αὐτῷ	1	they were marveling at him	They were amazed at what Jesus had said. This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “they marveled at him and at what he had said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	12	18	rdl7	figs-explicit	οἵτινες λέγουσιν ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι	1	who say there is no resurrection	This phrase explains who the Sadducees were. This can be written more clearly. Alternate translation: “who say there is no resurrection from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	12	19	e8x2	figs-quotations	Μωϋσῆς ἔγραψεν ἡμῖν, ὅτι ἐάν τινος ἀδελφὸς ἀποθάνῃ	1	Moses wrote to us, ‘If someone’s brother may die	The Sadducees are quoting what **Moses** had written in the law. Moses’ quote can be expressed as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “Moses wrote for us that if a man’s brother dies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-MRK	12	19	m8fh		ἔγραψεν ἡμῖν	1	wrote to us	“wrote to us Jews.” The Sadducees were a group of Jews. Here they use the word **us** to refer to themselves and all Jews.
-MRK	12	19	g49e		λάβῃ ὁ ἀδελφὸς αὐτοῦ τὴν γυναῖκα	1	his brother should take the wife	“the man should marry his brother’s wife”
-MRK	12	19	m2um	figs-explicit	ἐξαναστήσῃ σπέρμα τῷ ἀδελφῷ αὐτοῦ	1	should raise up offspring to his brother	“have a son for his brother.” The man’s first son would be considered to be the dead brother’s son, and the son’s descendants would be considered to be the dead brother’s descendants. You can state this clearly. Alternate translation: “should have a son who will be considered to be the dead brother’s son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	12	20	wz27	figs-hypo	ἑπτὰ ἀδελφοὶ ἦσαν	1	There were seven brothers	The Sadducees talk about a situation that did not really happen because they want Jesus to tell them what he thinks is right and wrong. Alternate translation: “Suppose there were seven brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
-MRK	12	20	pj71		ὁ πρῶτος	1	the first	the first brother
-MRK	12	20	af1t		ὁ πρῶτος ἔλαβεν γυναῖκα	1	the first took a wife	“the first married a woman.” Here marrying a woman is spoken of as “taking” her.
-MRK	12	21	d61g	figs-ellipsis	ὁ δεύτερος…ὁ τρίτος	1	the second … the third	These numbers refer to each of the brothers and can be expressed as such. Alternate translation: “the second brother … the third brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-MRK	12	21	na6s		ὁ δεύτερος ἔλαβεν αὐτήν	1	the second took her	“the second married her.” Here marrying a woman is spoken of as “taking” her.
-MRK	12	21	l1ds	figs-explicit	ὁ τρίτος ὡσαύτως	1	the third likewise	It may be helpful to explain what **likewise** means. Alternate translation: “the third brother married her as his other bothers did, and he also died leaving no children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	12	22	wjq8	figs-ellipsis	οἱ ἑπτὰ	1	the seven	This refers to all the brothers. Alternate translation: “the seven brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-MRK	12	22	l3dg	figs-explicit	οἱ ἑπτὰ οὐκ ἀφῆκαν σπέρμα	1	the seven did not leave offspring	Each of the brothers married the woman and then died before he had any children with her. You can state this clearly. Alternate translation: “eventually all seven brothers married that woman one by one, but none of them had any children with her, and one by one they died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	12	23	w4wu	figs-rquestion	ἐν τῇ ἀναστάσει, ὅταν ἀναστῶσιν, τίνος αὐτῶν ἔσται γυνή	1	In the resurrection, when they may rise again, of which of them will she be a wife?	The Sadducees are testing Jesus by asking this question. If your readers can only understand this as a request for information, this can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “Now tell us whose wife she will be in the resurrection, when they all rise again.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-MRK	12	24	zp2p	figs-rquestion	οὐ διὰ τοῦτο πλανᾶσθε, μὴ εἰδότες τὰς Γραφὰς, μηδὲ τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ?	1	Are you not being led astray because of this, not knowing the scriptures nor the power of God?	Jesus rebukes the Sadducees because they are mistaken about God’s law. This may be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “You are mistaken because you do not know the scriptures nor the power of God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-MRK	12	24	li2y		μὴ εἰδότες τὰς Γραφὰς	1	not knowing the scriptures	This means that they do not understand what is written in the Old Testament **scriptures**.
-MRK	12	24	i8il		τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the power of God	“how powerful God is”
-MRK	12	25	nvh6		ὅταν γὰρ…ἀναστῶσιν	1	For when they may rise	Here the word **they** refers to the brothers and the woman from the example.
-MRK	12	25	y8vz	figs-metaphor	ἀναστῶσιν	1	they may rise	Waking and getting up from sleep is a metaphor for becoming alive after having been dead. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-MRK	12	25	vh7r		ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	from the dead	From among all those who have died. This expression describes all **dead** people together in the underworld. To rise from among them speaks of becoming alive again.
-MRK	12	25	p5ak		οὔτε γαμοῦσιν οὔτε γαμίζονται	1	they neither marry nor are given in marriage	“they do not marry, and they are not given in marriage”
-MRK	12	25	h7ii	figs-activepassive	γαμίζονται	1	are given in marriage	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “and no one gives them in marriage” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MRK	12	25	pi8l		τοῖς οὐρανοῖς	1	the heavens	This refers to the place where God lives.
-MRK	12	26	z36n	figs-activepassive	ὅτι ἐγείρονται	1	that are raised	This can be expressed with an active verb. Alternate translation: “who rise” or “who rise to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MRK	12	26	jc5a		τῇ βίβλῳ Μωϋσέως	1	the book of Moses	“the book that Moses wrote”
-MRK	12	26	w2lj	figs-explicit	τοῦ βάτου	1	the bush	This refers to the part of the Book of Moses that tells about when God spoke to Moses out of a **bush** that was burning but that did not burn up. Alternate translation: “the passage about the burning bush” or “the words about the fiery bush” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	12	26	si2b		τοῦ βάτου	1	the bush	This refers to a shrub, a woody plant that is smaller than a tree.
-MRK	12	26	y35v		πῶς εἶπεν αὐτῷ ὁ Θεὸς	1	how God spoke to him	“about when God spoke to Moses”
-MRK	12	26	re82		ἐγὼ ὁ Θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς Ἰσαὰκ, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς Ἰακώβ	1	I am the God of Abraham and the God of Isaac and the God of Jacob	This means that **Abraham**, **Isaac**, and **Jacob** worship **God**. These men have died physically, but they are still alive spiritually and still worship God.
-MRK	12	27	dgc9	figs-nominaladj	Θεὸς νεκρῶν, ἀλλὰ ζώντων	1	the God of the dead, but of the living	Here, **the dead** refers to people who are dead, and **the living** refers to people who are alive. Alternate translation: “not the God of dead people, but of living people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-MRK	12	27	v7ui	figs-ellipsis	Θεὸς νεκρῶν, ἀλλὰ ζώντων	1	the God of the dead, but of the living	You can state **the God** clearly in the second phrase. Alternate translation: “not the God of dead people, but the God of living people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-MRK	12	27	l22e		ζώντων	1	of the living	This includes people who are alive physically and spiritually.
-MRK	12	27	wmz2	figs-explicit	πολὺ πλανᾶσθε	1	You are quite being led astray	It may be helpful to state what they are lead astray about. Alternate translation: “When you say that dead people do not rise again, you are quite mistaken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	12	27	sp7x		πολὺ πλανᾶσθε	1	You are quite being led astray	“You are completely mistaken” or “You are very wrong”
-MRK	12	28	q1u5		ἐπηρώτησεν αὐτόν	1	he asked him	“the scribe asked Jesus”
-MRK	12	29	n74y	figs-nominaladj	πρώτη ἐστίν	1	The first is	Here, **The first** refers to the most important commandment. Alternate translation: “The most important commandment is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-MRK	12	29	mq92		ἄκουε, Ἰσραήλ, Κύριος ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν Κύριος εἷς ἐστιν	1	Hear, O Israel, the Lord our God, the Lord is one	“Listen, O Israel! The Lord our God is one Lord”
-MRK	12	30	xjng	figs-doublet	ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ψυχῆς σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς διανοίας σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ἰσχύος σου	1	from your whole heart … from your whole soul … from your whole mind … from your whole strength	These four phrases are used together to mean “completely” or “earnestly.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-MRK	12	30	q49v	figs-metonymy	ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ψυχῆς σου	1	from your whole heart, and from your whole soul	Here, **heart** and “soul” are metonyms for a person’s inner being. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-MRK	12	31	tp6p	figs-simile	ἀγαπήσεις τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς σεαυτόν	1	You will love your neighbor as yourself	Jesus uses this simile to compare how people are to love each other with the same love as they love themselves. Alternate translation: “You must love your neighbor as much as you love yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
-MRK	12	31	pyc1		τούτων	1	than these	Here the word **these** refers to the two commandments that Jesus had just told the people.
-MRK	12	32	qqm4		καλῶς, Διδάσκαλε	1	Good, Teacher	“Good answer, Teacher” or “Well said, Teacher”
-MRK	12	32	awe3	figs-idiom	εἷς ἐστιν	1	he is one	This means that there is only **one** God. Alternate translation: “there is only one God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-MRK	12	32	as2j	figs-ellipsis	οὐκ ἔστιν ἄλλος	1	that there is no other	The word “God” is understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “that there is no other God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-MRK	12	33	xnq9	figs-doublet	ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας…ἐξ ὅλης τῆς συνέσεως…ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ἰσχύος	1	from your whole heart … from your whole understanding … from your whole strength	These three phrases are used together to mean “completely” or “earnestly.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-MRK	12	33	k42a	figs-metonymy	ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας	1	from your whole heart	Here, **heart** is a metonym for person’s thoughts, feelings, or inner being. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-MRK	12	33	tw15	figs-simile	τὸ ἀγαπᾶν τὸν πλησίον ὡς ἑαυτὸν	1	to love your neighbor as yourself	This simile compares how people are **to love** each other with the same love that they love themselves. Alternate translation: “to love your neighbor as much as you love yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
-MRK	12	33	ll9t	figs-idiom	περισσότερόν ἐστιν	1	is even more than	This idiom means that something is more important than something else. In this case, these two commandments are more pleasing to God that burnt offering and sacrifices. This may be written clearly. Alternate translation: “is even more important than” or “is even more pleasing to God than” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-MRK	12	34	b144	figs-litotes	οὐ μακρὰν εἶ ἀπὸ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	You are not far from the kingdom of God	You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “You are very close to the kingdom of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
-MRK	12	34	is4c	figs-metaphor	οὐ μακρὰν εἶ ἀπὸ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	You are not far from the kingdom of God	Here Jesus speaks of the man being ready to submit to God as king as being physically close to **the kingdom of God**, as if it where a physical place. Alternate translation: “You are close to submitting to God as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-MRK	12	34	rgh8	figs-litotes	οὐδεὶς οὐκέτι ἐτόλμα	1	no one any longer was daring	You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “everyone was afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
-MRK	12	35	ptc8	figs-explicit	ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἔλεγεν διδάσκων ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ	1	answering, Jesus, teaching in the temple, said	Some time has passed and Jesus is now in the temple. This is not part of the previous conversation. Alternate translation: “And later, while Jesus was teaching in the temple area, he said to the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	12	35	q6e4	figs-rquestion	πῶς λέγουσιν οἱ γραμματεῖς ὅτι ὁ Χριστὸς, υἱὸς Δαυείδ ἐστιν?	1	How do the scribes say that the Christ is the son of David?	Jesus uses this question to get the people to think deeply about the Psalm he is about to quote. This can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “Consider why the scribes say the Christ is the son of David.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-MRK	12	35	i6a4		υἱὸς Δαυείδ	1	the son of David	“a descendant of David”
-MRK	12	36	e1zq	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς Δαυεὶδ	1	David himself	This word **himself** refers to **David** and is used to place emphasis on him and what he said. Alternate translation: “It was David who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
-MRK	12	36	ejy2	figs-idiom	ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι τῷ ἁγίῳ	1	in the Holy Spirit	This means that he was inspired by **the Holy Spirit**. That is, the Holy Spirit directed David in what he said. Alternate translation: “inspired by the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-MRK	12	36	dv7b	figs-explicit	εἶπεν…εἶπεν ὁ Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου	1	said, ‘The Lord said to my Lord	Here David calls God **The Lord** and calls the Christ **my Lord**. This can be written more clearly. Alternate translation: “said about the Christ, ‘The Lord God said to my Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	12	36	v53p	translate-symaction	κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου	1	Sit at my right hand	Jesus is quoting a psalm. Here God is speaking to the Christ. To sit at the **right hand** of God is a symbolic action of receiving great honor and authority from God. Alternate translation: “Sit in the place of honor beside me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
-MRK	12	36	mml8	figs-metaphor	ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν σου	1	until I may place your enemies under your feet	In this quote, God speaks of defeating enemies as placing them under his feet. Alternate translation: “until I completely defeat your enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-MRK	12	37	ka5u		λέγει αὐτὸν, Κύριον	1	calls him ‘Lord,’	Here the word **him** refers to the Christ.
-MRK	12	37	rh2t	figs-rquestion	καὶ πόθεν υἱός αὐτοῦ ἐστιν?	1	and how is he his son?	This can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “so consider how the Christ can be a descendant of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-MRK	12	38	z649	figs-abstractnouns	ἀσπασμοὺς ἐν ταῖς ἀγοραῖς	1	greetings in the marketplaces	The noun **greetings** can be expressed with the verb “greet.” Alternate translation: “for people to greet them in the marketplaces” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-MRK	12	38	k31m	figs-explicit	ἀσπασμοὺς ἐν ταῖς ἀγοραῖς	1	greetings in the marketplaces	These greetings showed that the people respected the scribes. Alternate translation: “to be greeted respectfully in the marketplaces” or “for people to greet them respectfully in the marketplaces” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	12	40	jtw4	figs-metaphor	οἱ κατεσθίοντες τὰς οἰκίας τῶν χηρῶν	1	They devour the houses of the widows	Here Jesus describes the scribes’ cheating of **widows** and stealing of their **houses** as “devouring” their houses. Alternate translation: “They also cheat widows in order to steal their houses from them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-MRK	12	40	j27b	figs-synecdoche	τὰς οἰκίας τῶν χηρῶν	1	the houses of the widows	The words **widows** and **houses** are synecdoches for helpless people and all of a person’s important possessions, respectively. Alternate translation: “everything from helpless people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-MRK	12	40	qm52	figs-activepassive	οὗτοι λήμψονται περισσότερον κρίμα	1	These will receive greater condemnation	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will certainly punish them with greater condemnation” or “God will certainly punish them severely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MRK	12	40	h36x	figs-explicit	λήμψονται περισσότερον κρίμα	1	will receive greater condemnation	The word **greater** implies a comparison. Here the comparison is to other men who are punished. Alternate translation: “will receive greater condemnation than other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	12	41	r69x			0	Connecting Statement:	Still in the temple area, Jesus comments on the value of the widow’s offering.
-MRK	12	41	p2kp		τοῦ γαζοφυλακίου	1	the temple offering box	This **box**, which everyone could use, was the place into which people gave offerings to the **temple**.
-MRK	12	42	g6ry	translate-bmoney	λεπτὰ δύο	1	two mites	“two small copper coins.” These were the least valuable coins available. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
-MRK	12	42	n29e		ἐστιν κοδράντης	1	are a quadrans	“are worth very little.” A **quadrans** is worth very little. Translate **quadrans** with the name of the smallest coin in your language if you have one that is worth very little.
+MRK	11	28	ooxp	figs-abstractnouns	ἐξουσίᾳ…ἐξουσίαν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “authorized” or express the meaning some other way. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+MRK	11	29	erqp	figs-abstractnouns	ἐξουσίᾳ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “authorized” or express the meaning some other way. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+MRK	11	29	aak2		ἕνα λόγον	1		Here, Jesus is using the term **word** in a specific sense. Alternate translation: “a question”
+MRK	11	30	vpgv		τὸ βάπτισμα τὸ Ἰωάννου, ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἦν ἢ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων	1		Jesus knows that John’s authority came from God, so he is not asking the Jewish leaders for information. However, this is not a rhetorical question that could be translated as a statement, for example, “Surely you must admit that God, not people, gave John the authority to baptize.” This is an actual question that Jesus wants the Jewish leaders to try to answer, because he knows that either way they answer, they will have a problem. So his words should be translated as a question. Alternate translation: “Was it God who told John to baptize people, or did people tell him to do it?”
+MRK	11	30	jj91		τὸ βάπτισμα τὸ Ἰωάννου	1	The baptism of John	Alternate translation: “The baptism that John performed”
+MRK	11	30	sh7b	figs-euphemism	ἐξ οὐρανοῦ	1	from heaven	In order to honor the commandment not to misuse God’s name, Jewish people often avoided saying the word “God” and used the word **heaven** instead. That seems to be what Jesus is doing here. Alternate translation: “from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
+MRK	11	30	i5is	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων	1	from men	Here, Jesus is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “people” or “humanity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+MRK	11	30	fr1b		ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἦν ἢ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων	1	was it from heaven or from men	Alternate translation: “was it authorized by God or by men”
+MRK	11	30	mc8n	figs-yousingular	ἀποκρίθητέ μοι	1		In the original language that Mark wrote this book in the word **Answer** is a command written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+MRK	11	31	s9vv	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἐὰν εἴπωμεν, ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐρεῖ, διὰ τί οὖν οὐκ ἐπιστεύσατε αὐτῷ	1	If we would say, ‘From heaven,’	The Jewish leaders are describing a hypothetical situation. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Suppose we say, ‘From heaven.’ Then he will ask, ‘Then why did you not believe him’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
+MRK	11	31	e7j4	figs-quotesinquotes	ἐὰν εἴπωμεν, ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐρεῖ, διὰ τί οὖν οὐκ ἐπιστεύσατε αὐτῷ	1		If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “If we say that John’s authority came from God, Jesus will ask us why we did not believe him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+MRK	11	31	nu1m	figs-euphemism	ἐξ οὐρανοῦ	1	From heaven	See how you translated the expression **From heaven** in [11:30](../11/30.md). Alternate translation: “From God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
+MRK	11	32	tczm	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων	1		Here, the Jewish leaders are describing another hypothetical situation. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “But suppose we say, ‘From men.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
+MRK	11	32	aus1	figs-explicit	ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων	1	But we might say, ‘From men,’	The phrase **From men** refers to the source of the baptism of John. If it would help your readers you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “But if we say, ‘John’s baptism was from men,’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	11	32	v2gs	figs-gendernotations	ἐξ ἀνθρώπων	1	From men	See how you translated the phrase **From men** in [11:30](../11/30.md). Alternate translation: “From people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+MRK	11	32	b5qb	figs-quotesinquotes	ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων	1	But we might say, ‘From men,’…	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But if we say that John’s authority came from people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+MRK	11	32	z93u	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων?	1	But we might say, ‘From men,’…	The religious leaders do not finish their statement, since they all understand what will happen if they say John’s baptism is not from God. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “But if we say, ‘From men,’ that would not be good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+MRK	11	32	z998	grammar-connect-time-background	ἐφοβοῦντο τὸν ὄχλον, ἅπαντες γὰρ εἶχον τὸν Ἰωάννην, ὄντως ὅτι προφήτης ἦν	1	They were afraid of the crowd	The author of Mark is providing this background information to help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “They said this to each other because they were afraid of the crowd, for all the people in the crowd believed that John really was a prophet” or “They did not want to say that John’s baptism was from men because they were afraid of the crowd, since all the people in the crowd believed that John truly was a prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
+MRK	11	32	dqlt	grammar-collectivenouns	ἐφοβοῦντο τὸν ὄχλον	1		The word **crowd** is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “They were afraid of the group of people gathered there” or “They were afraid of the many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
+MRK	11	32	x4bo	grammar-collectivenouns	ἅπαντες γὰρ εἶχον	1		Here, the word **all** refers to the people in the crowd. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “for everyone in the crowd held” or “for all those who were in the crowd believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	11	33	rmbd	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1		Here, Mark uses the word **And** to introduce the results of what the previous sentences described. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+MRK	11	33	us4a	figs-ellipsis	οὐκ οἴδαμεν	1	We do not know	The reply **We do not know** leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “We do not know where the baptism of John came from” or “We do not know where John’s authority to baptize came from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+MRK	11	33	av5y	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὐδὲ ἐγὼ λέγω ὑμῖν	1		With the words **Neither do I say to you**, Jesus is indicating that this is the result of what the Jewish leaders told him. Alternate translation: “Then I will not tell you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+MRK	11	33	arpm	figs-abstractnouns	ἐξουσίᾳ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “authorized” or express the meaning some other way. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+MRK	12	intro	ne55			0		# Mark 12 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 12:10-11, 36, which are words from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Hypothetical Situations<br><br>Hypothetical situations are situations that have not actually happened. People describe these situations so they learn what their hearers think is good and bad or right and wrong. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])<br><br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. In this chapter, Jesus quotes a psalm that records David calling his son “lord,” that is, “master.” However, to the Jews, ancestors were greater than their descendants, so a father would not call his son “master.” In this passage, Mark 12:35-37, Jesus is trying to lead his hearers to the true understanding that the Messiah will be divine, and that he himself is the Messiah. So David is speaking to his son, that is, his descendant, as the Messiah, and it is appropriate for him to address him as his “Lord.”
+MRK	12	1	w2hb	figs-parables	καὶ ἤρξατο αὐτοῖς ἐν παραβολαῖς λαλεῖν	1	Connecting Statement:	To help the people understand what the Jewish leaders were doing by rejecting him and John the Baptist, Jesus tells a brief story that provides an illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus told the people stories to help them understand better” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
+MRK	12	1	qa93	writing-participants	ἀμπελῶνα ἄνθρωπος ἐφύτευσεν	1	Then Jesus began to speak to them in parables	Jesus uses the phrase **A man planted a vineyard** to introduce the main character into the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing the main character into a story. Alternate translation: “There once was a man who planted a vineyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
+MRK	12	1	l2i2	translate-unknown	ἐξέδετο αὐτὸν γεωργοῖς	1	leased the vineyard to vine growers	As the rest of the story shows, the man rented the vineyard not for regular cash payments, but under an arrangement that entitled him to a share of the crop in exchange for the use of the land. If an arrangement like that would not be familiar to your readers, you could translate this in a way that explains it. Alternate translation: “allowed some grape farmers to use it in exchange for a share of the crop” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+MRK	12	1	fd71		γεωργοῖς	1		While **farmers** is a general term for anyone who farms the ground, in this context it refers to people who tend grape vines and grow grapes. Alternate translation: “vine growers” or “grape farmers”
+MRK	12	2	s83v	figs-explicit	τῷ καιρῷ	1	at the season	This refers to the time of harvest. This can be made clear. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	12	2	su2e		γεωργοὺς…γεωργῶν	1		See how you translated **farmers** in [12:1](../12/01.md).
+MRK	12	2	oxoo	figs-metaphor	καρπῶν	1		The word **fruit** could be: (1) intended literally. Alternate translation: “some of the grapes they had grown” (2) figurative. Alternate translation: “some of what they had produced from the grapes they had grown” or “some of the money they had earned by selling their produce” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	12	3	c321	figs-metaphor	ἀπέστειλαν κενόν	1	with nothing	Jesus speaks figuratively of this servant as if he were a container with nothing in it. Here, the word **empty** means that they did not give him any of the fruit. Alternate translation: “sent him away without giving him anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	12	4	jhi3		καὶ ἠτίμασαν	1		Alternate translation: “and humiliated”
+MRK	12	6	z5hz	figs-quotesinquotes	λέγων, ὅτι ἐντραπήσονται τὸν υἱόν μου	1	a beloved son	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “thinking that they would respect his son” or “thinking to himself that the farmers would respect his son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+MRK	12	7	m63e	figs-explicit	ἐκεῖνοι δὲ οἱ γεωργοὶ πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς εἶπαν, ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ κληρονόμος; δεῦτε, ἀποκτείνωμεν αὐτόν, καὶ ἡμῶν ἔσται ἡ κληρονομία	1	the heir	It may be helpful to state explicitly that this happened after the owner sent his son and he arrived as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	12	7	kefz		γεωργοὶ	1		See how you translated **farmers** in [12:1](../12/01.md).
+MRK	12	7	s5dc	figs-metonymy	ἡ κληρονομία	1	the inheritance	By inheritance, the farmers mean the vineyard, which the son would inherit. Alternate translation: “this vineyard, which he is going to inherit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+MRK	12	8	gx6l	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	having seized him	Jesus uses the word **And** to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. The farmers carried out the plan they had decided on. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+MRK	12	9	r4md	figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ποιήσει ὁ κύριος τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος?	1	Therefore, what will the lord of the vineyard do?	Jesus does not want the people to tell him what the owner of the vineyard will do. Rather, he is using the question form to get his listeners to pay attention to what he says the owner will do. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “So now, listen to what the lord of the vineyard will do to them” or “So I will tell you what the owner of the vineyard will do.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	12	9	tlji		γεωργούς	1		See how you translated **farmers** in [12:1](../12/01.md).
+MRK	12	9	g4ce	translate-unknown	δώσει τὸν ἀμπελῶνα ἄλλοις	1	destroy	See how you translated the similar expression in [12:1](../12/01.md). Alternate translation: “allow different grape farmers to use it in exchange for a share of the crop” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+MRK	12	9	mc5y	figs-explicit	δώσει τὸν ἀμπελῶνα ἄλλοις	1	will give the vineyard to others	The word **others** refers to other vine growers who will care for the vineyard. If it would help your readers you can say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he will give the vineyard to other farmers to care for it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	12	10	v6ta	figs-quotesinquotes	οὐδὲ τὴν Γραφὴν ταύτην ἀνέγνωτε: λίθον ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες, οὗτος ἐγενήθη εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας	1	General Information:	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And surely you have read the Scripture that says that the stone which the builders rejected became the cornerstone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+MRK	12	10	xj9j	figs-rquestion	οὐδὲ τὴν Γραφὴν ταύτην ἀνέγνωτε:	1	And have you not read this scripture?	Jesus does not want the Jewish leaders to tell him whether or not they have read the scripture he quotes to them. He knows that they have read the scripture. He is using the question form for emphasis and to rebuke them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “And surely you have read this scripture” or “And you should remember this scripture” or “And you should pay attention to this scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	12	10	mzr2	figs-metaphor	λίθον ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες, οὗτος ἐγενήθη εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας	1		This is a quotation from Psalm 118, and it is a metaphor. It refers to the Messiah as if he were a stone that builders chose not to use. This means that people will reject him. When the psalm says that this stone became the cornerstone, this means figuratively that God will nevertheless make the Messiah the ruler of these people. However, since this is a quotation from Scripture, translate the words directly rather than providing a non-figurative explanation of them, even if your language does not customarily use such figures of speech. If you want to explain the meaning of the metaphor, we recommend that you do that in a footnote rather than in the Bible text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	12	10	kv7t	figs-explicit	λίθον ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες	1		The psalm refers implicitly to the way people in this culture used stones to build the walls of houses and other buildings. Alternate translation: “The stone that the builders thought was not good enough to use for building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	12	10	l5ma	figs-idiom	κεφαλὴν γωνίας	1		The phrase the **head of the corner** is an idiom that refers to a large stone with straight edges that builders would place down first and use as a reference to make sure that the walls of a stone building were straight and that the building was oriented in the right direction. Your language may have its own term for such a stone. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the cornerstone” or “the reference stone for the whole building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+MRK	12	11	r8z8	figs-quotesinquotes	παρὰ Κυρίου ἐγένετο αὕτη, καὶ ἔστιν θαυμαστὴ ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν	1	This came from the Lord	This entire verse is a continuation of Jesus’ quotation from Psalm 118. If you chose not to translate [12:10](../12/10.md) as a quotation within a quotation then you should do the same with this verse. Alternate translation: “and which says that it was the Lord who did it and those who saw it marveled as they looked at it” or “and that it was the Lord who did it and those who saw it marveled when they saw what the Lord had done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+MRK	12	11	k5w6	figs-metonymy	ἔστιν θαυμαστὴ ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν	1	it is marvelous in our eyes	**in our eyes** is a figurative way of referring to the act of seeing. Here, the act of seeing could be referring to “thinking” about or “considering” what is seen. Alternate translation: “we have seen it and think that it is marvelous” or “we think that it is wonderful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+MRK	12	12	b1vz	writing-pronouns	ἐζήτουν	1	they were seeking to seize him	Here, the pronoun **they** refers to the chief priests, scribes, and elders mentioned in [11:27](../11/27.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could refer to this group as “the Jewish leaders.” Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+MRK	12	12	lx62	grammar-connect-time-background	καὶ ἐφοβήθησαν τὸν ὄχλον	1	but they feared the crowd	Mark is providing this background information to help readers understand what happens next. The religious leaders fear of the crowd is why they **left** Jesus and **went away**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “but because they were afraid of the crowd they did not” or “but they did not because they feared the crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
+MRK	12	12	v9wb	figs-infostructure	καὶ ἐζήτουν αὐτὸν κρατῆσαι, καὶ ἐφοβήθησαν τὸν ὄχλον; ἔγνωσαν γὰρ ὅτι πρὸς αὐτοὺς τὴν παραβολὴν εἶπεν. καὶ ἀφέντες αὐτὸν, ἀπῆλθον	1	against them	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases to show the logical sequence of events. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+MRK	12	12	v5wv	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	καὶ ἐφοβήθησαν τὸν ὄχλον	1		Here, Mark uses the word **but** to introduce a contrast between what the Jewish leaders wanted to do and this reason why they were not able to do. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “however they were afraid of what the people might do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+MRK	12	13	z2sf	writing-pronouns	καὶ ἀποστέλλουσιν	1	And they send	Here, the pronoun **they** refers to the chief priests, scribes, and elders mentioned in [11:27](../11/27.md). If it would help your readers, you could refer to this group as “the Jewish leaders.” Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+MRK	12	13	pj3c	figs-explicit	τῶν Ἡρῳδιανῶν	1	the Herodians	**the Herodians** supported the Roman Empire and Herod Antipas. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	12	13	kuy5	figs-metaphor	ἵνα αὐτὸν ἀγρεύσωσιν	1	in order to trap him	Here, Mark describes tricking Jesus as “trapping him.” If your readers would not understand what it means to be trapped in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “to trick him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	12	13	s1hb	figs-metonymy	λόγῳ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, Mark uses the term **word** figuratively to mean something Jesus might say by using words. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in something he might say” or “with something he might say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+MRK	12	14	dh3d	figs-synecdoche	λέγουσιν	1	they say	Mark could mean that one person spoke to Jesus on behalf of the whole group. So instead of **they**, you could say “one of them,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+MRK	12	14	xhl6		Διδάσκαλε	1		See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../4/38.md).
+MRK	12	14	awv5	figs-exclusive	οἴδαμεν	1		The spies are speaking only of themselves, so **we** would be exclusive, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+MRK	12	14	cp3x		οὐ μέλει σοι περὶ οὐδενός	1	it is not a concern to you about anyone	Alternate translation: “you do not try to earn people’s favor but rather fearlessly teach the truth without worrying about people’s opinion” 
+MRK	12	14	xptc	figs-idiom	οὐ γὰρ βλέπεις εἰς πρόσωπον ἀνθρώπων	1	it is not a concern to you about anyone	The phrase **not look at the face of men** is a Hebrew expression that means to not give attention to people’s outward appearances. Outward appearance in this context refers to social position and whether or not a person was wealthy or influential or had a high religious position. This phrase taken as a whole here means that Jesus was impartial in his judgement and teaching and did not show favoritism. Alternate translation: “for you pay no attention to external things when you speak” or “for you do not regard people’s position or status when you teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+MRK	12	14	qvpo	figs-metonymy	πρόσωπον ἀνθρώπων	1		The Jewish leaders are using the term **face** figuratively to mean “external status and position.” Alternate translation: “the status and position of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+MRK	12	14	brm3	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων	1		Although the term **men** is masculine, Mark is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+MRK	12	14	yfnc	figs-metaphor	ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		The Jewish leaders speak figuratively of how God wants people to live as if it were a **way** or path that people should follow. Alternate translation: “how God wants people to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	12	14	ap2q	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπ’ ἀληθείας	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “truthfully”, or in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+MRK	12	14	k0tw	figs-explicit	ἔξεστιν	1		The Jewish leaders are asking about God’s law, not the law of the Roman government. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Does God’s law permit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	12	14	gtsk	figs-metonymy	Καίσαρι	1		The Jewish leaders are referring figuratively to the Roman government by Caesar’s name, since he was its ruler. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+MRK	12	15	g48w	figs-abstractnouns	ὁ δὲ εἰδὼς αὐτῶν τὴν ὑπόκρισιν, εἶπεν	1	he, knowing their hypocrisy	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hypocrisy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “But Jesus knew that they were not being sincere, so he said” or “But Jesus realized that they were trying to trick him, and so he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+MRK	12	15	c7nj	figs-rquestion	τί με πειράζετε	1	Why do you test me?	Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here as a rebuke and for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for these purposes in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I know that you are trying to make me say something wrong so you can accuse me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	12	15	wl34	translate-bmoney	δηνάριον	1	a denarius	A denarius was a silver coin equivalent to a day’s wage. Alternate translation: “a Roman coin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
+MRK	12	16	ev6s		οἱ δὲ ἤνεγκαν	1	And they brought one	Alternate translation: “So the Pharisees and the Herodians brought a denarius”
+MRK	12	16	gi96	figs-explicit	Καίσαρος	1	they said to him, “Caesar’s.”	Here, **Caesar’s** refers to Caesar’s likeness and inscription. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “They are Caesar’s likeness and inscription” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	12	17	fl4l	figs-metonymy	τὰ Καίσαρος ἀπόδοτε Καίσαρι	1	The things of Caesar, give back to Caesar	See how you translated **Caesar** in [12:14](../12/14.md). Alternate translation: “Give to the Roman government the things that belong to the Roman government” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+MRK	12	17	la16	figs-ellipsis	καὶ τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ τῷ Θεῷ	1	and the things of God, to God	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and give to God the things that belong to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+MRK	12	18	edcn	writing-background	οἵτινες λέγουσιν ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι	1		Mark provides this background information about the Sadducees to help readers understand what happens in this episode. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “who are a sect who deny the resurrection of the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
+MRK	12	18	y8yo	writing-participants	καὶ ἔρχονται Σαδδουκαῖοι πρὸς αὐτόν, οἵτινες λέγουσιν ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι	1		Mark uses the statement **Sadducees … come to him** to introduce these new characters into the story. It may be helpful to introduce them more fully in your translation. Alternate translation: “Some members of the group of Jews called the Sadducees, who say there is not resurrection, then came to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
+MRK	12	18	ss09	figs-distinguish	Σαδδουκαῖοι…οἵτινες λέγουσιν ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι	1		This phrase is identifying the Sadducees as a group of Jews that said no one would rise from the dead. It is not identifying the Sadducees who came to question Jesus as members of that group who held that belief, as if other members did not. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could begin a new sentence here to clarify this. Alternate translation: “Sadducees believe that no one will rise from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
+MRK	12	18	rdl7	figs-explicit	οἵτινες λέγουσιν ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι	1	who say there is no resurrection	The word **resurrection** refers to becoming alive again after being dead. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	12	18	ax25	figs-synecdoche	λέγοντες	1		Mark could mean that one Sadducee spoke on behalf of the whole group, and you could indicate that as UST does. If you decide to do that, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “One of them said to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+MRK	12	19	w3ev		Διδάσκαλε	1		See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../4/38.md).
+MRK	12	19	e8x2	figs-metonymy	Μωϋσῆς ἔγραψεν ἡμῖν, ὅτι ἐάν τινος ἀδελφὸς ἀποθάνῃ	1	Moses wrote to us, ‘If someone’s brother may die	These Sadducees are figuratively describing Moses giving this instruction in the law by association with the way that he wrote it down. Alternate translation: “Moses instructed us in the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+MRK	12	19	m8fh	figs-exclusive	ἔγραψεν ἡμῖν	1	wrote to us	Here, the word **us** would be inclusive, if your language marks that distinction. The Sadducees mean “us Jews,” and they are speaking to Jesus, who is also a Jew. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+MRK	12	19	kgws	figs-hypo	ἐάν τινος ἀδελφὸς ἀποθάνῃ, καὶ καταλίπῃ γυναῖκα καὶ μὴ ἀφῇ τέκνον	1		Alternate translation: “if a man’s brother dies who is married but who does not have children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
+MRK	12	19	g49e		ἵνα λάβῃ ὁ ἀδελφὸς αὐτοῦ τὴν γυναῖκα	1	his brother should take the wife	Alternate translation: “that man should marry his dead brother’s widow” or “that the man should marry his brother’s wife”
+MRK	12	19	m2um	figs-metaphor	καὶ ἐξαναστήσῃ σπέρμα τῷ ἀδελφῷ αὐτοῦ	1	should raise up offspring to his brother	The Sadducees assume that Jesus will know that this law specified that if the widow had children by her dead husband’s brother, those children would be considered the children of her dead husband. Alternate translation: “and have children who will be considered his brother’s descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	12	19	r0tg	figs-metaphor	σπέρμα	1		The term **seed** figuratively means “offspring.” It is a word picture. Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. Alternate translation: “offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	12	20	wz27	figs-hypo	ἑπτὰ ἀδελφοὶ ἦσαν; καὶ ὁ πρῶτος ἔλαβεν γυναῖκα, καὶ ἀποθνῄσκων, οὐκ ἀφῆκεν σπέρμα	1	There were seven brothers	While the Sadducees describe this as if it happened, they are actually asking about a hypothetical possibility in order to test Jesus. Alternate translation: “Suppose there were seven brothers, and the oldest brother got married, but he died before he had any children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
+MRK	12	20	pj71	figs-nominaladj	ὁ πρῶτος	1	the first	Jesus is using the adjective **first** as a noun in order to indicate a particular person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can specify the person. Alternate translation: “the first brother” or “the oldest brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+MRK	12	20	pj2g	translate-ordinal	ὁ πρῶτος	1		If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “brother number one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+MRK	12	20	af1t	figs-metaphor	σπέρμα	1	the first took a wife	See how you translated this figurative sense of the word seed in [12:19](../12/19.md).. Alternate translation: “descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	12	21	uef6	figs-hypo	καὶ	1		The Sadducees are continuing to describe a hypothetical situation. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “And suppose that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
+MRK	12	21	d61g	figs-nominaladj	ὁ δεύτερος	1	the second … the third	Jesus is using the adjective **second** as a noun in order to indicate a particular person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can specify the person. Alternate translation: “the second brother” or “the next oldest brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+MRK	12	21	na6s	translate-ordinal	ὁ δεύτερος	1	the second took her	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “brother number two” or “the next oldest brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+MRK	12	21	cgzm	figs-metaphor	σπέρμα	1		See how you translated this figurative sense of the word seed in [12:19](../12/19.md).. Alternate translation: “descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	12	21	tbzw	figs-explicit	καὶ ὁ τρίτος ὡσαύτως	1		The Sadducees are speaking in a compact way in order to keep the story short. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could supply the information they leave out from the context. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “In the same way, the third brother married this widow, but also died before they had any children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	12	21	l1ds	figs-nominaladj	ὁ τρίτος	1	the third likewise	Jesus is using the adjective **third** as a noun in order to indicate a particular person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can specify the person. Alternate translation: “the third brother” or “the next oldest brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+MRK	12	21	hx1q	translate-ordinal	ὁ τρίτος	1		If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “brother number three” or “the next oldest brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+MRK	12	22	wjq8	figs-ellipsis	οἱ ἑπτὰ	1	the seven	The Sadducees are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the seven brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+MRK	12	22	l3dg	figs-metaphor	σπέρμα	1	the seven did not leave offspring	See how you translated this figurative sense of the word seed in [12:19](../12/19.md).. Alternate translation: “descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	12	23	w4wu		ἐν τῇ ἀναστάσει	1	In the resurrection, when they may rise again, of which of them will she be a wife?	The Sadducees did not actually believe that there would be a resurrection. Your language may have a way of showing this. Alternate translation: “in the supposed resurrection” or “when people supposedly rise from the dead”
+MRK	12	23	c4p5	figs-ellipsis	οἱ…ἑπτὰ	1		The Sadducees are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the seven brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+MRK	12	24	zp2p	figs-rquestion	οὐ διὰ τοῦτο πλανᾶσθε, μὴ εἰδότες τὰς Γραφὰς, μηδὲ τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ?	1	Are you not being led astray because of this, not knowing the scriptures nor the power of God?	Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the fact that the Sadducees do not correctly understand the scriptures or God’s power. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are greatly misunderstanding this matter because you do not know the scriptures nor the power of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	12	24	sie3	figs-activepassive	οὐ διὰ τοῦτο πλανᾶσθε, μὴ εἰδότες τὰς Γραφὰς, μηδὲ τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You are greatly mistaken because you do not know the scriptures or God’s power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MRK	12	24	i8il		τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the power of God	Alternate translation: “how powerful God is”
+MRK	12	25	nvh6	writing-pronouns	ὅταν γὰρ ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῶσιν, οὔτε γαμοῦσιν οὔτε γαμίζονται	1	For when they may rise	Both uses of the pronoun **they** refer to men and women in general. If it would help your readers, you could clarify this in your translation. Alternate translation: “For when men and women rise from the dead, they neither marry nor are given in marriage” or “For when men and women rise from the dead, they neither marry nor are given in marriage” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+MRK	12	25	ox82	figs-nominaladj	νεκρῶν	1		Jesus is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the people who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+MRK	12	25	y8vz	figs-activepassive	οὔτε γαμοῦσιν οὔτε γαμίζονται	1	they may rise	If your language does not use passive verbal forms, but your culture does use different expressions for men and women when they marry, you can use two different active verbal forms here, and you can say who does the action in the second case. Alternate translation: “men marry wives and parents give their daughters in marriage to husbands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MRK	12	25	ensg	figs-idiom	οὔτε γαμοῦσιν οὔτε γαμίζονται	1		In this culture, the idiom was to say that men married their wives and that women were given in marriage to their husbands by their parents. If your culture does not use different expressions like that, you can use a single term here. Alternate translation: “they do not get married” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+MRK	12	25	asw4	figs-explicit	ἀλλ’ εἰσὶν ὡς ἄγγελοι ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς	1		Jesus assumes that his listeners will know that angels do not marry. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because they will be like the angels, who do not marry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	12	25	pi8l	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’	1	the heavens	What follows the word **but** here is in contrast to what is currently the case on earth. Jesus is using this contrast to show the Sadducees that they mistakenly thought that men and women being raised from the dead automatically meant that their existence would follow the same pattern or order of things as their former lives did. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “but rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+MRK	12	26	mffe	figs-nominaladj	τῶν νεκρῶν	1		Jesus is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. See how you translated the phrase **the dead** in [12:25](../12/25.md). Alternate translation: “people who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+MRK	12	26	z36n	figs-activepassive	τῶν νεκρῶν, ὅτι ἐγείρονται	1	that are raised	If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say this with an active form, and you can say who does the action. Alternate translation: “the matter of God bringing back to life people who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MRK	12	26	eod4	figs-rquestion	οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε ἐν τῇ βίβλῳ Μωϋσέως	1		Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here for emphasis in order to rebuke the Sadducees for not correctly understanding the scriptures. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you have surely read in the book of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	12	26	jc5a	figs-possession	τῇ βίβλῳ Μωϋσέως	1	the book of Moses	Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe the book that Moses wrote, the Pentateuch. Jesus is not using the possessive form to indicate a book that Moses owned this book. If this is not clear in your language, you could clarify this in your translation. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+MRK	12	26	w2lj	figs-explicit	ἐπὶ τοῦ βάτου	1	the bush	Jesus assumes that his listeners will know that he means the bush in the desert that was burning without being consumed, at which Moses encountered God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the burning bush” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	12	26	si2b	figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τοῦ βάτου	1	the bush	Jesus is not referring to the actual encounter that Moses had with God at the burning bush, since during that encounter Moses did not say the words that Jesus attributes to him here. Rather, God said those words about himself, and Moses recorded them in the Scriptures. So Jesus is referring by association to the passage in which Moses describes his encounter with God at the burning bush. Alternate translation: “in the passage where he wrote about the burning bush” or “in the scripture about the burning bush” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+MRK	12	26	y35v	figs-verbs	λέγων	1	how God spoke to him	In many languages, it is conventional to use the present tense to describe what a writer does within a composition. However, if that would not be natural in your language, you could use the past tense here. Alternate translation: “he called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]])
+MRK	12	26	re82	figs-explicit	ὁ Θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς Ἰσαὰκ, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς Ἰακώβ	1	I am the God of Abraham and the God of Isaac and the God of Jacob	The implication is that God would not have identified himself as the God of these men if they were not alive. This must mean that God brought them back to life after they died. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	12	27	dgc9	figs-nominaladj	νεκρῶν	1	the God of the dead, but of the living	Jesus is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “people who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+MRK	12	27	xxzs	figs-nominaladj	ζώντων	1		Jesus is using the adjective **living** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “people who are alive” or “people whom he has brought back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+MRK	12	27	v7ui	figs-activepassive	πολὺ πλανᾶσθε	1	the God of the dead, but of the living	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You are greatly mistaken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MRK	12	28	zqy4	writing-participants	καὶ…εἷς τῶν γραμματέων	1		Mark uses the statement **And one of the scribes** to introduce this new character into the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. The expression “one of the scribes” identifies him as a teacher who had carefully studied the Law of Moses. Since he is a new participant, if it would be helpful to your readers, you could call him something like “A man who taught the Jewish laws” as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
+MRK	12	28	b3yh	figs-metonymy	ἰδὼν	1		Here, Mark is using the word **seen** figuratively to mean “understood” or “knew.” He is figuratively describing something a person would perceive with their mind by association with eyes. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “He understood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+MRK	12	28	q1u5	figs-metaphor	ποία ἐστὶν ἐντολὴ πρώτη πάντων	1	he asked him	Here, the scribe is using the word **first** figuratively to represent to mean “most important.” If your readers would not understand the figurative use of **first** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or state the meaning using plain language, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	12	28	kftz	translate-ordinal	ποία ἐστὶν ἐντολὴ πρώτη πάντων	1		If your language does not use ordinal numbers such as **first**, you can express the meaning behind the word **first** in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: see the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+MRK	12	29	ztyh	figs-metaphor	πρώτη	1		Here, Jesus continues the figurative use of the word **first**. See how you translated the phrase **The first** in [12:28](../12/28.md) where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	12	29	euim	figs-ellipsis	πρώτη	1		Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “The first commandment is this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+MRK	12	29	n74y	figs-nominaladj	πρώτη	1	The first is	If your language does not use ordinal numbers such as **first**, you can express the meaning behind the word **first** in a way that would be natural in your language. See how you translated the phrase **The first** in [12:28](../12/28.md) where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+MRK	12	29	mq92	figs-personification	Ἰσραήλ	1	Hear, O Israel, the Lord our God, the Lord is one	Jesus is citing a scripture from Deuteronomy in which God is referring figuratively to all of the people of Israel as if they were a single person, their ancestor, **Israel**. Alternate translation: “O Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+MRK	12	29	mmtb		Κύριος εἷς ἐστιν	1		**the Lord our God, the Lord is one** could be: (1) an affirmation of the exclusiveness of the Lord as Israel’s god for the purpose of reminding Israel that the Lord was to be the only god they should worship. Alternate translation: “the Lord alone is our God” (2) an affirmation of the uniqueness of the Lord. Alternate translation: “the Lord our God, the Lord is special”
+MRK	12	30	thj7	figs-declarative	ἀγαπήσεις	1		Here, Jesus is quoting a scripture in which a future statement is used to give an instruction. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
+MRK	12	30	xjng	figs-merism	ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ψυχῆς σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς διανοίας σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ἰσχύος σου	1	from your whole heart … from your whole soul … from your whole mind … from your whole strength	Jesus is citing a scripture from Deuteronomy in which God is referring figuratively to the entirety of a person by listing different parts. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “with the entirety of your being” or “completely with your entire person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
+MRK	12	30	q49v	figs-metaphor	ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου	1	from your whole heart, and from your whole soul	Here, the term **heart** figuratively represents a person’s mind and specifically the mind as the center and source of persons thinking and will. Alternate translation: “with all your mind” or “with your whole mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	12	30	m8hi		ἐξ…ἐξ…ἐξ…ἐξ	1		Alternate translation: “with”
+MRK	12	30	x3n5	figs-abstractnoun	ψυχῆς	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **soul**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+MRK	12	30	ln0t	figs-abstractnoun	διανοίας	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **mind**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+MRK	12	30	mii2	figs-abstractnoun	ἰσχύος	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **strength**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+MRK	12	31	eu8b	figs-ellipsis	δευτέρα αὕτη	1		Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “The second commandment is this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+MRK	12	31	fz8g	figs-metaphor	δευτέρα	1		Here, Jesus is using the word **second** figuratively to mean “most important.” If your readers would not understand the figurative use of **first** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or state the meaning using plain language. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	12	31	oegh	translate-ordinal	δευτέρα	1		If your language does not use ordinal numbers such as **second**, you can express the meaning behind the word **first** in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: see the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+MRK	12	31	np4y	figs-ellipsis	ἀγαπήσεις τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς σεαυτόν	1		Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “You will love your neighbor as you love yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+MRK	12	31	tp6p	figs-declarative	ἀγαπήσεις	1	You will love your neighbor as yourself	Here, Jesus is quoting a scripture in which a future statement is used to give an instruction. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
+MRK	12	31	pyc1	figs-explicit	τούτων	1	than these	Here, the word **these** refers to the two commandments that Jesus has just quoted. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	12	32	uhgy		Διδάσκαλε	1		See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../4/38.md).
+MRK	12	32	qqm4	figs-abstractnouns	ἀληθείας	1	Good, Teacher	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+MRK	12	32	awe3		εἷς ἐστιν	1	he is one	See how you translated the phrase **is one** in [12:29](../12/29.md).
+MRK	12	32	as2j	figs-ellipsis	οὐκ ἔστιν ἄλλος	1	that there is no other	The scribe is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context.. Alternate translation: “that there is no other god” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+MRK	12	33	v8yn	figs-metaphor	καρδίας	1		See how you translated the phrase **whole heart** in [12:30](../12/30.md). Alternate translation: “with all your mind” or “with your whole mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	12	33	xnq9	figs-abstractnouns	συνέσεως	1	from your whole heart … from your whole understanding … from your whole strength	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **understanding**, you could express the same idea in another way as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+MRK	12	33	k42a	figs-abstractnouns	ὅλης τῆς ἰσχύος	1	from your whole heart	See how you translated the phrase **whole strength** in [12:30](../12/30.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+MRK	12	33	ekfy	figs-ellipsis	τὸ ἀγαπᾶν τὸν πλησίον ὡς ἑαυτὸν	1		The scribe is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “to love your neighbor as you love yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+MRK	12	33	ll9t		περισσότερόν ἐστιν	1	is even more than	Alternate translation: “is even more important than” or “is greater than”
+MRK	12	34	hkf7	figs-metonymy	ἰδὼν αὐτὸν	1		See how you translated the use of the word **seen** in [12:28](../12/28.md) where it is used with the same figurative meaning. Alternate translation: “having understood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+MRK	12	34	b144		οὐ μακρὰν εἶ ἀπὸ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	You are not far from the kingdom of God	If it would help your readers you can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “You are very close to the kingdom of God”
+MRK	12	34	is4c	figs-metaphor	οὐ μακρὰν εἶ ἀπὸ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	You are not far from the kingdom of God	Here, Jesus speaks of the man being ready to submit to God as being physically close to **the kingdom of God**, as if it where a physical place. Alternate translation: “You are close to submitting to God as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	12	34	lfti	figs-abstractnouns	Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **kingdom**, you could express the same idea in another way, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+MRK	12	34	rgh8	figs-doublenegatives	οὐδεὶς οὐκέτι ἐτόλμα	1	no one any longer was daring	If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “everyone was afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+MRK	12	35	ptc8	figs-synecdoche	ἱερῷ	1	answering, Jesus, teaching in the temple, said	See how you translated the word **temple** in [11:11](../11/11.md) where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+MRK	12	35	q6e4	figs-rquestion	πῶς λέγουσιν οἱ γραμματεῖς ὅτι ὁ Χριστὸς, υἱὸς Δαυείδ ἐστιν?	1	How do the scribes say that the Christ is the son of David?	This does not seem to be a rhetorical question that Jesus is using as a teaching tool. Rather, it seems to be a question that Jesus wanted his listeners to try to answer. They had asked him some difficult questions, and they had admitted that he answered them well. Now, in return, he is asking them a difficult question. None of them will be able to answer it, and this will demonstrate his wisdom even further. His question actually will teach something to those who are able to recognize its implications. But it would be appropriate to leave it in question form and not translate it as a statement. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	12	35	i6a4	figs-metaphor	υἱὸς Δαυείδ	1	the son of David	Here, Jesus is using the term **son** figuratively to mean “descendant.” Alternate translation: “a descendant of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	12	36	e1zq	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς Δαυεὶδ	1	David himself	Jesus uses the word **himself** here to emphasize to that it was David, the very person whom the scribes call the father of the Christ, who spoke the words in the quotation that follows. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “None other than David” or “David, the very person whom you call the father of the Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
+MRK	12	36	jlbd	figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπεν ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι τῷ ἁγίῳ, εἶπεν ὁ Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου, κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου, ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν σου	1		If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation, and then another quotation within that one. Alternate translation: “said, by inspiration of the Holy Spirit, that the Lord told his Lord to sit at his right side until he made his enemies a footstool for his feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+MRK	12	36	ejy2		ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι τῷ ἁγίῳ	1	in the Holy Spirit	Alternate translation: “inspired by the Holy Spirit” or “by the inspiration of the Holy Spirit”
+MRK	12	36	dv7b	figs-euphemism	εἶπεν ὁ Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου	1	said, ‘The Lord said to my Lord	Here, the term **Lord** does not refer to the same person in both instances. The first instance is representing the name Yahweh, which David actually uses in this psalm. In order to honor the commandment not to misuse God’s name, Jewish people often avoided saying that name and said Lord instead. The second instance is the regular term for “lord” or “master.” The ULT and UST capitalize the word because it refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “The Lord God said to my Lord” or “God said to my Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
+MRK	12	36	v53p	translate-symaction	κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου	1	Sit at my right hand	The seat at the right side of a ruler was a position of great honor and authority. By telling the Messiah to sit there, God was symbolically conferring honor and authority on him. Alternate translation: “Sit in the place of honor beside me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
+MRK	12	36	k2j1	figs-nominaladj	κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου	1		In this quotation, Yahweh is using the adjective **right** as a noun in order to indicate his right side. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could state that specifically. Alternate translation: “Sit at my right side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+MRK	12	36	rfy9	translate-symaction	ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν σου	1		To place an enemy under one’s feet is symbolic for conquering an enemy and making them submit and so here it means that Yahweh would make His enemies stop resisting the Messiah and submit to him. Alternate translation: “until I conquer your enemies for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
+MRK	12	37	j7wn	figs-quotesinquotes	αὐτὸς Δαυεὶδ λέγει αὐτὸν, Κύριον	1		If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “David himself calls the Messiah his Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+MRK	12	37	ka5u	figs-explicit	λέγει αὐτὸν	1	calls him ‘Lord,’	Here, the word **him** refers to the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	12	37	ssq3	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς Δαυεὶδ	1		See how you translated the word **himself** in [12:36](../12/36.md) where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “None other than David” or “David, the very person” or “David, whom we all respect” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
+MRK	12	37	qpdy	figs-explicit	αὐτὸς Δαυεὶδ λέγει αὐτὸν, Κύριον	1		In this culture, an ancestor was more respected than a descendant. But to call someone **Lord** was to address that person as the more respected one. As the General Notes to this chapter describe, this is a paradox, that is, is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. Jesus is calling attention to this paradox to get his listeners to think more deeply about who the Messiah is. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly what makes this a paradox. Alternate translation: “David therefore addresses the Messiah respectfully as his Lord. But if the Messiah is his descendant, David should be the more respected person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	12	37	rh2t	figs-rquestion	καὶ πόθεν υἱός αὐτοῦ ἐστιν?	1	and how is he his son?	Like the question in [12:35](../12/35.md), this seems to be a question that Jesus wanted his listeners to try to answer, even though he is also using it to teach. It is a difficult question, like the ones they asked him, which he answered well. They will not be able to answer his question, and this should give them a further appreciation for his wisdom, in addition to what they might learn from reflecting on the question later. So it would be appropriate to leave it in question form and not translate it as a statement. Alternate translation: “So why do people say that the Messiah is David’s descendant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	12	37	qucc	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1		Jesus is using the word **and** to show that a conclusion should be drawn as a result of what he has just said, and that this conclusion would be different from what his listeners had previously believed. Alternate translation: “so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+MRK	12	37	tjp6	figs-metaphor	υἱός	1		Jesus is using the term **son** figuratively to mean “descendant” as he did in [12:35](../12/35.md). See how you translated the term **son** there. Alternate translation: “descendant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	12	38	bh8w	grammar-connect-time-sequential	καὶ	1		Mark uses the word **And** to indicate that after asking his own difficult question to the people who had been trying to trap him, Jesus turned to speak to his disciples. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
+MRK	12	38	rwxq	figs-yousingular	βλέπετε	1		In the original language that Mark wrote this Gospel in, the phrase **Watch out** is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “All of you watch out for” or “Every one of you watch out for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+MRK	12	38	yhfv	figs-metonymy	βλέπετε ἀπὸ τῶν γραμματέων	1		Jesus says **Watch out** to warn about the influence of these people. He is not saying that the scribes themselves are physically dangerous, but that it would be dangerous spiritually to follow their example. Alternate translation: “Be careful not to follow the example of the scribes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+MRK	12	38	nxy9	translate-symaction	τῶν θελόντων ἐν στολαῖς περιπατεῖν	1		In this culture, **long robes** were a symbol of wealth and status. To walk around in public in a **long robe** was to assert wealth and status. Alternate translation: “who like to walk around looking important in their long robes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
+MRK	12	38	mu5a	figs-explicit	ἀσπασμοὺς	1		The implication is that these would be respectful **greetings**, in which the scribes would be addressed by important titles. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “desire respectful greetings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	12	39	mwmf	figs-metaphor	πρωτοκαθεδρίας…πρωτοκλισίας	1		Both uses of the word **first** here figuratively mean “best.” Alternate translation: “the best seats … the best places” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	12	40	jtw4	figs-metonymy	οἱ κατεσθίοντες τὰς οἰκίας τῶν χηρῶν	1	They devour the houses of the widows	Jesus speaks figuratively of the **houses** of widows to mean their wealth and possessions, which they would have in their houses. Alternate translation: “They defraud widows of everything they own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+MRK	12	40	j27b	figs-metaphor	οἱ κατεσθίοντες τὰς οἰκίας τῶν χηρῶν	1	the houses of the widows	Jesus says figuratively that the scribes are **devouring** or eating up the possessions of widows to mean that they continually ask the widows for money until the widows have none left. Alternate translation: “They defraud widows of everything they own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	12	40	r3ht		καὶ προφάσει μακρὰ προσευχόμενοι	1		Here, **pretext** refers to something that someone would do in order to appear a certain way. Alternate translation: “in order to seem godly, they offer long prayers”
+MRK	12	40	qm52	figs-metonymy	οὗτοι λήμψονται περισσότερον κρίμα	1	These will receive greater condemnation	Jesus is using the word **condemnation** figuratively to mean the punishment that a person would receive after being condemned (found guilty) for doing something wrong. Alternate translation: “These scribes will receive greater punishment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+MRK	12	40	h36x	figs-explicit	οὗτοι λήμψονται περισσότερον κρίμα	1	will receive greater condemnation	The implication seems to be that these proud and greedy scribes will receive **greater** punishment than they would have if they had not pretended to be so godly. It is also implicit that God will be the one who punishes them. Alternate translation: “God will punish these scribes more severely because they do all these wrong things while pretending to be godly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	12	41	r69x	writing-background	καὶ	1	Connecting Statement:	Mark uses the word **And** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
+MRK	12	41	nohd	writing-newevent	καθίσας κατέναντι τοῦ γαζοφυλακίου, ἐθεώρει πῶς ὁ ὄχλος βάλλει χαλκὸν εἰς τὸ γαζοφυλάκιον; καὶ πολλοὶ πλούσιοι ἔβαλλον πολλά	1		This background information that Mark provides introduces a new event in the story. Alternate translation: “after Jesus sat down he was watching the crown put money into the offering box and noticed that there were many rich people who were placing gifts of money in the offering boxes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
+MRK	12	41	p2kp	figs-metonymy	τοῦ γαζοφυλακίου…τὸ γαζοφυλάκιον	1	the temple offering box	Mark is figuratively describing the boxes in the temple courtyard where people put money that they were giving to God by association with the name of the place where this money would be kept until it was needed, the treasury. Alternate translation: “the offering boxes … the offering boxes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+MRK	12	41	w4xc	grammar-collectivenouns	ὁ ὄχλος	1		The word **crowd** is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression such as “many people” as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
+MRK	12	41	jgkw	figs-nominaladj	πλούσιοι	1		Mark is using the adjective **rich** as a noun in order to indicate a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression such as “rich people” as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+MRK	12	41	rl1l	figs-ellipsis	πολλά	1		Mark is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “much money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+MRK	12	42	g6ry	translate-bmoney	λεπτὰ δύο, ὅ ἐστιν κοδράντης	1	two mites	The word lepta is the plural of “lepton.” A lepton was a small bronze or copper coin used by the Jews which was equivalent to a few minutes’ wages. It was the least valuable coin that people used in this culture. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead you might use the name of the least valuable coin in your culture, or a general expression. Alternate translation: “two pennies” or “two small coins of little value” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
+MRK	12	42	n29e	translate-bmoney	ὅ ἐστιν κοδράντης	1	are a quadrans	A **quadrans** was the smallest Roman coin. Mark is seeking to help his readers, who are Roman, understand the value of **two leptas** in their currency. You could clarify in your translation that a **quadrans** is a Roman coin, as the UST does, or you can leave this information untranslated. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
 MRK	12	43	ipl1	translate-versebridge		0	General Information:	In verse 43 Jesus says that the widow put more money in the offering than the rich people put in, and in verse 44 he tells his reason for saying that. The information can be reordered so that Jesus tells his reason first and then says that the widow put in more, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
-MRK	12	43	n7su		προσκαλεσάμενος	1	having called	“when Jesus had called”
-MRK	12	43	q124		ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly I say to you	This indicates that the statement that follows is especially true and important. See how you translated this in [Mark 3:28](../03/28.md).
-MRK	12	43	n8z5		πάντων…τῶν βαλλόντων εἰς	1	all of those putting into	“all the other people who put money into”
-MRK	12	44	ui9a		τοῦ περισσεύοντος	1	abundance	much wealth, many valuable things
-MRK	12	44	l4tp		τῆς ὑστερήσεως αὐτῆς	1	her poverty	“her lack” or “the little she had”
-MRK	12	44	p3as		τὸν βίον αὐτῆς	1	of her livelihood	“she had to survive on”
+MRK	12	43	q124		ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly I say to you	Jesus says this to emphasize the importance of what he is about to say. See how you translated this in [Mark 3:28](../03/28.md). Alternate translation: “I can assure you”
+MRK	12	43	ih0m	figs-metaphor	ἡ χήρα αὕτη ἡ πτωχὴ	1		Even though it is not literally true that the widow has put more money into the offering box than all the rich people, this is still not figurative language. As Jesus explains in the next verse, he means that she has put in proportionately more than all the others, relative to her means, and that is literally true. But Jesus makes the seemingly untrue statement first, to get his disciples to reflect on how it can be true. So it would be appropriate to translate Jesus’ words directly and not interpret them as if they were figurative. For example, it would be a figurative interpretation to say, “God considers what this poor widow has given to be more valuable than the gifts of all the others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	12	43	n8z5	figs-explicit	πάντων…τῶν βαλλόντων	1	all of those putting into	In context, **all** means specifically all of the rich people who were putting large monetary gifts in the collection boxes. Alternate translation: “all of those rich people putting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	12	43	n7su		γαζοφυλάκιον	1	having called	See how you translated this term in [12:41](../12/41.md).
+MRK	12	44	c7jj	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces the reason for what Jesus said in [12:43](../12/43.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+MRK	12	44	ihuq		ἐκ τοῦ περισσεύοντος αὐτοῖς ἔβαλον	1		Alternate translation: “had a lot of money but only gave a small portion of it”
+MRK	12	44	ui9a		αὕτη δὲ, ἐκ τῆς ὑστερήσεως αὐτῆς, πάντα ὅσα εἶχεν ἔβαλεν, ὅλον τὸν βίον αὐτῆς	1	abundance	Alternate translation: “but she only had a very little money but gave everything she had to live on”
+MRK	12	44	l4tp		τῆς ὑστερήσεως αὐτῆς	1	her poverty	Alternate translation: “her lack” or “the little she had”
+MRK	12	44	p3as		τὸν βίον αὐτῆς	1	of her livelihood	Alternate translation: “she had to survive on”
 MRK	13	intro	ti7d			0		# Mark 13 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 13:24-25, which are words from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### The return of Christ<br><br>Jesus said much about what would happen before he returned ([Mark 13:6-37](./06.md)). He told his followers that bad things would happen to the world and bad things would happen to them before he returned, but they needed to be ready for him to return at any time.
-MRK	13	1	rrv1			0	General Information:	As they leave the temple area, Jesus tells his disciples what will happen in the future to the wonderful temple that Herod the Great has built.
-MRK	13	1	ql81	figs-explicit	ποταποὶ λίθοι καὶ ποταπαὶ οἰκοδομαί	1	What wonderful stones and wonderful buildings	The **stones** refer to the stones that the **buildings** were built with. Alternate translation: “What wonderful buildings and the wonderful stones that they are made of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	13	2	rez6	figs-rquestion	βλέπεις ταύτας τὰς μεγάλας οἰκοδομάς? οὐ μὴ ἀφεθῇ ὧδε λίθος ἐπὶ λίθον	1	Do you see these great buildings? Stone upon stone may certainly not be left here	This question is used to draw attention to the buildings. This can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “Look at these great buildings! Not one stone will be left stacked on top of another” or “You see these great buildings now, but not a single stone will be left” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-MRK	13	2	zu46	figs-explicit	οὐ μὴ ἀφεθῇ ὧδε λίθος ἐπὶ λίθον, ὃς οὐ μὴ καταλυθῇ	1	Stone upon stone may certainly not be left here, which may certainly not be torn down	It is implied that enemy soldiers will tear down the stones. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	13	2	xdhj	figs-activepassive	οὐ μὴ ἀφεθῇ ὧδε λίθος ἐπὶ λίθον, ὃς οὐ μὴ καταλυθῇ	1	Stone upon stone may certainly not be left here, which may certainly not be torn down	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Not one stone will remain on top of another, for enemy soldiers will come and destroy these buildings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MRK	13	3	e913			0	Connecting Statement:	In answer to the disciples’ questions about the temple’s destruction and what was going to happen, Jesus tells them what was going to take place in the future.
-MRK	13	3	izt8	figs-explicit	καὶ καθημένου αὐτοῦ εἰς τὸ Ὄρος τῶν Ἐλαιῶν κατέναντι τοῦ ἱεροῦ…Πέτρος	1	And as he was sitting on the Mount of Olives opposite the temple, Peter	It can be expressed clearly that Jesus and his disciples had walked to **the Mount of Olives**. Alternate translation: “And after arriving at the Mount of Olives, which is opposite the temple, Jesus sat down. Then Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	13	3	u7ju		κατ’ ἰδίαν	1	by himself	when they were alone
-MRK	13	4	uf37	figs-explicit	πότε ταῦτα ἔσται, καὶ τί τὸ σημεῖον ὅταν μέλλῃ ταῦτα συντελεῖσθαι πάντα	1	when will these things be? And what is the sign when all these things are about to be fulfilled	This refers to what Jesus had just said will happen to the stones of the temple. This can be made clear. Alternate translation: “when will these things happen to the buildings of the temple, and what will be the sign that these things are about to happen to the temple buildings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	13	4	lw1n		ὅταν…ταῦτα…πάντα	1	when all these things	“that all these things”
-MRK	13	5	fe42		λέγειν αὐτοῖς	1	to say to them	“to say to his disciples”
-MRK	13	5	u79c	figs-metaphor	ὑμᾶς πλανήσῃ	1	may lead you astray	Here, **lead you astray** is a metaphor for persuading someone to believe what is not true. Alternate translation: “deceives you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-MRK	13	6	wv12	figs-metaphor	πολλοὺς πλανήσουσιν	1	they will lead many astray	Here, **will lead many astray** is a metaphor for persuading someone to believe what is not true. Alternate translation: “they will deceive many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-MRK	13	6	z63u	figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου	1	in my name	This could mean: (1) they would be claiming his authority. (2) they would be claiming that God had sent them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-MRK	13	6	l7f9		ἐγώ εἰμι	1	I am	“I am the Christ”
-MRK	13	7	fl5h		ἀκούσητε πολέμους καὶ ἀκοὰς πολέμων	1	you may hear of wars and rumors of wars	“you may hear of wars and reports about wars.” This could mean: (1) they would hear the sounds of wars close by and news of wars far away. (2) they would hear of wars that have started and reports about wars that are about to start.
-MRK	13	7	d1k9		ἀλλ’ οὔπω τὸ τέλος	1	but the end is not yet	“but it is not yet the end” or “but the end will not happen until later” or “but the end will be later”
-MRK	13	7	mi4d	figs-explicit	τὸ τέλος	1	the end	This probably refers to **the end** of the world. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	13	1	rrv1		Διδάσκαλε	1	General Information:	See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../4/38.md).
+MRK	13	1	ql81	figs-explicit	ποταποὶ λίθοι καὶ ποταπαὶ οἰκοδομαί	1	What wonderful stones and wonderful buildings	Here, **stones** refers to the very large stones which the temple walls were built with. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “How wonderful these huge blocks of stones are and how wonderful these buildings are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	13	2	rez6	figs-rquestion	βλέπεις ταύτας τὰς μεγάλας οἰκοδομάς	1	Do you see these great buildings? Stone upon stone may certainly not be left here	Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to draw attention to the buildings and emphasize what he is about to say. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Look at these great buildings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	13	2	xdhj	figs-activepassive	οὐ μὴ ἀφεθῇ ὧδε λίθος ἐπὶ λίθον, ὃς οὐ μὴ καταλυθῇ	1	Stone upon stone may certainly not be left here, which may certainly not be torn down	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this with an active form, and you can state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “Your enemies will not leave one stone upon another here, but will tear them down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MRK	13	3	izt8	writing-pronouns	καὶ καθημένου αὐτοῦ εἰς τὸ Ὄρος τῶν Ἐλαιῶν κατέναντι τοῦ ἱεροῦ, ἐπηρώτα αὐτὸν κατ’ ἰδίαν Πέτρος, καὶ Ἰάκωβος, καὶ Ἰωάννης, καὶ Ἀνδρέας	1	And as he was sitting on the Mount of Olives opposite the temple, Peter	Here, the pronouns **he** and **him** refer to Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “And as Jesus was sitting on the Mount of Olives opposite the temple, Peter, and James, and John, and Andrew were asking him by privately” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+MRK	13	3	u7ju		κατ’ ἰδίαν	1	by himself	Alternate translation: “when they were alone” or “privately”
+MRK	13	4	uf37	figs-explicit	πότε ταῦτα ἔσται, καὶ τί τὸ σημεῖον ὅταν μέλλῃ ταῦτα συντελεῖσθαι πάντα	1	when will these things be? And what is the sign when all these things are about to be fulfilled	Both occurrences of the phrase **these things** refer to what Jesus said in [13:2](../13/02.md). If it would help your readers you could say explicitly what the phrase **these things** refers to as the UST models. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	13	4	lw1n	figs-activepassive	ὅταν μέλλῃ ταῦτα συντελεῖσθαι πάντα	1	when all these things	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “God will fulfill all these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MRK	13	5	fe42	writing-pronouns	λέγειν αὐτοῖς	1	to say to them	The pronoun **them** refers to Peter, James, John, and Andrew who are mentioned in [13:3](../13/03.md). If it would help your readers you can clarify this in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to say to these four disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+MRK	13	6	z63u	figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου	1	in my name	Here, Jesus uses the word **name** figuratively to mean identity and the authority that comes with the identity. The people he is talking about will likely not say that their name is Jesus, but they will claim to be the Messiah. Alternate translation: “claiming to be me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+MRK	13	5	rm66	figs-yousingular	βλέπετε, μή τις ὑμᾶς πλανήσῃ	1		In the original language that Mark wrote this Gospel in, the phrase **Be careful** is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “All of you be careful that no one deceives you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+MRK	13	6	cee7	figs-quotesinquotes	πολλοὶ ἐλεύσονται ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου λέγοντες, ὅτι ἐγώ εἰμι	1		If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Many will come in my name claiming to be me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) 
+MRK	13	6	pbz4	figs-explicit	πολλοὶ…πολλοὺς	1		Here, both uses of the word **many** refer to many people. If it would help your readers you can say that explicitly as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	13	6	wv12	figs-explicit	ἐγώ εἰμι	1	they will lead many astray	The implication is that **he** means the Messiah. Alternate translation: “I am the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	13	7	fl5h		ἀκοὰς πολέμων	1	you may hear of wars and rumors of wars	The phrase “rumors of wars” could mean: (1) reports of wars that might happen at a future time. Alternate translation: See the UST. (2) reports of wars that are already taking place in distant places. Alternate translation: “reports of wars far away”
+MRK	13	7	d1k9	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλ’ οὔπω τὸ τέλος	1	but the end is not yet	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but the end will not happen immediately” or “but the end will not happen until later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+MRK	13	7	mi4d	figs-explicit	τὸ τέλος	1	the end	Here, **the end** implicitly means the end of the world. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly as the UST models. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	13	8	xln4	figs-idiom	ἐγερθήσεται…ἐπ’	1	will rise against	This idiom means to fight against one another. Alternate translation: “will fight against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	13	8	e2ln	figs-ellipsis	βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν	1	kingdom against kingdom	The words “will rise” are understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “kingdom will rise against kingdom” or “the people of one kingdom will fight against the people of another kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	13	8	dz8g	figs-metaphor	ἀρχὴ ὠδίνων ταῦτα	1	These are the beginnings of birth pains	Jesus speaks of these disasters as **the beginnings of birth pains** because more severe things will happen after them. Alternate translation: “These events will be like the first pains a woman suffers when she is about to bear a child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1073,6 +1182,7 @@ MRK	14	9	vr3w		ἀμὴν…λέγω ὑμῖν	1	truly I say to you	This indica
 MRK	14	9	ysc5	figs-activepassive	ὅπου ἐὰν κηρυχθῇ τὸ εὐαγγέλιον	1	wherever the gospel may be preached	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “wherever my followers preach the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	14	9	ljh1	figs-activepassive	καὶ ὃ ἐποίησεν αὕτη, λαληθήσεται	1	what she has done will also be spoken of	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “people will speak about what this woman has done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	14	10	pdm5			0	Connecting Statement:	After the woman anoints Jesus with perfume, Judas promises to deliver Jesus to the chief priests.
+MRK	14	10	tq5a	figs-nominaladj	τῶν δώδεκα	0		See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../3/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 MRK	14	10	z71f	figs-explicit	ἵνα αὐτὸν παραδοῖ αὐτοῖς	1	so that he might betray him to them	Judas did not deliver Jesus to them yet, rather he went to make arrangements with them. Alternate translation: “in order to arrange with them that he would deliver Jesus over to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	14	10	dq6r		αὐτὸν παραδοῖ	1	he might betray him	“he would bring Jesus to them so they could capture him”
 MRK	14	11	kzk1	figs-explicit	οἱ δὲ ἀκούσαντες	1	But when they heard it	It may be helpful to state clearly what the chief priests heard. Alternate translation: “But when the chief priests heard what he was willing to do for them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1081,17 +1191,20 @@ MRK	14	12	wpe7	figs-explicit	ὅτε τὸ Πάσχα ἔθυον	1	when they we
 MRK	14	12	bel5	figs-metonymy	φάγῃς τὸ Πάσχα	1	you may eat the Passover	Here the **Passover** refers to the Passover meal. Alternate translation: “eat the Passover meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	14	13	a7xg		κεράμιον ὕδατος βαστάζων	1	bearing a pitcher of water	“carrying a large jar full of water”
 MRK	14	14	i344	figs-quotations	ὁ διδάσκαλος λέγει, ποῦ ἐστιν τὸ κατάλυμά μου, ὅπου τὸ Πάσχα μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν μου φάγω?	1	The Teacher says, “Where is my guest room where I may eat the Passover with my disciples?”	This can be written as an indirect quote. Translate this so that it is a polite request. Alternate translation: “Our Teacher would like to know where the guest room is where he may eat the Passover with his disciples.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+MRK	14	14	chb0		διδάσκαλος	1		See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../4/38.md).
 MRK	14	14	q3pn		τὸ κατάλυμά	1	guest room	a room for visitors
 MRK	14	15	x3zk	figs-explicit	ἐκεῖ ἑτοιμάσατε ἡμῖν	1	make the preparations for us there	They were to prepare the meal for Jesus and his disciples to eat. Alternate translation: “prepare the meal for us there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	14	16	sb35		ἐξῆλθον οἱ μαθηταὶ	1	the disciples left	“the two disciples left”
 MRK	14	16	m339		καθὼς εἶπεν	1	just as he said	“just as Jesus had said”
 MRK	14	17	n7z4			0	Connecting Statement:	That evening as Jesus and the disciples eat the Passover meal, Jesus tells them that one of them will betray him.
 MRK	14	17	i1q1	figs-explicit	ἔρχεται μετὰ τῶν δώδεκα	1	he came with the Twelve	It may be helpful to state where they came to. Alternate translation: “he came with the Twelve to the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	14	17	bheu	figs-nominaladj	τῶν δώδεκα	1		See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../3/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 MRK	14	18	cwl8		ἀνακειμένων αὐτῶν	1	as they were reclining at table	In Jesus’ culture, when people gathered to eat, they lay down on their sides, propping themselves up on pillows beside a low table.
 MRK	14	18	dg95		ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly I say to you	This indicates that the statement that follows is especially true and important. See how you translated this in [Mark 3:28](../03/28.md).
 MRK	14	19	v3a1		εἷς κατὰ εἷς	1	one by one	This means that “one at a time” each disciple asked him.
 MRK	14	19	f13p	figs-rquestion	μήτι ἐγώ?	1	Surely not I?	This could be: (1) a question for which the disciples expected the answer to be no. (2) a rhetorical question that did not require a response. Alternate translation: “Surely I am not the one who will betray you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	14	20	b25j		εἷς τῶν δώδεκα	1	It is one of the Twelve	“He is one of the twelve of you”
+MRK	14	20	n1tv	figs-nominaladj	τῶν δώδεκα	1		See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../3/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 MRK	14	20	htn4		ἐμβαπτόμενος μετ’ ἐμοῦ εἰς τὸ τρύβλιον	1	who is dipping with me into the bowl	In Jesus’ culture, people would often eat bread, **dipping** it in a shared bowl of sauce or of oil mixed with herbs.
 MRK	14	21	q5l3		ὅτι ὁ μὲν Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ὑπάγει, καθὼς γέγραπται περὶ αὐτοῦ	1	For the Son of Man is going away just as it has been written about him	Here Jesus refers to the scriptures prophesying about his death. If you have a polite way to talk about death in your language, use it here. Alternate translation: “For the Son of Man will die in the way that the scriptures say”
 MRK	14	21	ct78	figs-explicit	δι’ οὗ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται	1	through whom the Son of Man is being betrayed	You can state this more directly. Alternate translation: “who is betraying the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1146,7 +1259,7 @@ MRK	14	41	ae53		ἦλθεν ἡ ὥρα	1	The hour has come	The time of Jesus’
 MRK	14	41	msb2		ἰδοὺ	1	Behold	“Listen”
 MRK	14	41	eg9m	figs-activepassive	παραδίδοται ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	the Son of Man is being betrayed	Jesus warns his disciples that his betrayer is approaching them. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “someone is betraying me, the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	14	43	r9cp	writing-background		0	General Information:	Verse 44 gives background information about how Judas had arranged with the Jewish leaders to betray Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-MRK	14	43	nz4t			0	Connecting Statement:	Judas betrays Jesus with a kiss, and the disciples all flee.
+MRK	14	43	nz4t	figs-nominaladj	τῶν δώδεκα	0	Connecting Statement:	See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../3/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 MRK	14	44	bzj2		δὲ ὁ παραδιδοὺς αὐτὸν	1	And his betrayer	This refers to Judas.
 MRK	14	44	lsh3	figs-explicit	αὐτός ἐστιν	1	he it is	This refers to the man that Judas was going to identify. Alternate translation: “he is the one you want” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	14	45	tpd4		κατεφίλησεν αὐτόν	1	he kissed him	“Judas kissed him”
@@ -1295,4 +1408,4 @@ MRK	16	1	cw1b			0	Connecting Statement:	On the first day of the week, women come
 MRK	16	1	p61n		καὶ διαγενομένου τοῦ Σαββάτου	1	And the Sabbath having passed	That is, after **the Sabbath**, the seventh day of the week, had ended and the first day of the week had begun.
 MRK	16	4	kld9	figs-activepassive	ἀποκεκύλισται ὁ λίθος	1	the stone had been rolled away	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “someone had rolled away the stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	16	6	x9m8	figs-activepassive	ἠγέρθη	1	He has been raised!	The angel is emphatically stating that Jesus has risen from the dead. You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “He arose!” or “God raised him from the dead!” or “He raised himself from the dead!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MRK	9	10	to7w	figs-metonymy		1		Mark is figuratively describing something Jesus would say by association with his mouth, which he would use to say something. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “something he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+MRK	9	10	to7w	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1		Mark is figuratively describing something Jesus would say by association with his mouth, which he would use to say something. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “what he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
diff --git a/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv b/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv
index 296cc9e2f1..25770d250a 100644
--- a/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv
@@ -3595,9 +3595,11 @@ LUK	20	41	mda6	figs-rquestion	πῶς λέγουσιν τὸν Χριστὸν 
 LUK	20	41	sq2g	writing-pronouns	λέγουσιν	1	they say	Here Jesus is using the pronoun **they** in an indefinite sense. He does not have specific individuals in mind. Alternate translation: “do people say that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	20	41	b7rb	figs-metaphor	Δαυεὶδ Υἱόν	1	the son of David	Here Jesus is using the term **son** figuratively to mean “descendant.” Alternate translation: “a descendant of King David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	20	41	m412	translate-names	Δαυεὶδ	1	David	**David** is the name of a man, Israel’s most important king. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+LUK	20	42	y972	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς γὰρ Δαυεὶδ	1	For David himself	Jesus uses the word **himself** here to emphasize to that it was **David**, the very person whom the scribes call the father of the Christ, who spoke the words in the quotation that follows. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “None other than David” or “David, the very person whom you call the father of the Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
+LUK	20	42	z0vc	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For	Jesus uses the word **For** to introduce the reason why he has asked this question. Alternate translation: "I ask this question because" See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 LUK	20	42	m413		λέγει	1	says	In many languages, it is conventional to use the present tense to describe what a writer does within a composition. However, if that would not be natural in your language, you could use the past tense here. Alternate translation: “said”
 LUK	20	42	h2al	figs-quotesinquotes	λέγει ἐν βίβλῳ Ψαλμῶν, εἶπεν ὁ Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου, κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου	1	says in the book of Psalms, ‘The Lord said to my Lord, “Sit at my right	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation, and then another quotation within that one. Alternate translation: “says in the book of Psalms that the Lord told his Lord to sit at his right side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
-LUK	20	42	e1i2	figs-euphemism	εἶπεν ὁ Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου	1	The Lord said to my Lord	Here, the term **Lord** does not refer to the same person in both instances. The first instance is representing the name Yahweh, which David actually uses in this psalm. In order to honor the commandment not to misuse God’s name, Jewish people often avoided saying that name and and said **Lord** instead. The second instance is the regular term for “lord” or “master.” ULT and UST capitalize the word because it refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “The Lord God said to my Lord” or “God said to my Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
+LUK	20	42	e1i2	figs-euphemism	εἶπεν ὁ Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου	1	The Lord said to my Lord	Here, the term **Lord** does not refer to the same person in both instances. The first instance is representing the name Yahweh, which David actually uses in this psalm. In order to honor the commandment not to misuse God’s name, Jewish people often avoided saying that name and said **Lord** instead. The second instance is the regular term for “lord” or “master.” ULT and UST capitalize the word because it refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “The Lord God said to my Lord” or “God said to my Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 LUK	20	42	m415	figs-nominaladj	κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου	1	Sit at my right	In this quotation, Yahweh is using the adjective **right** as a noun in order to indicate his right side. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could state that specifically. Alternate translation: “Sit at my right side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 LUK	20	42	pse3	translate-symaction	κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου	1	Sit at my right	The seat at the right side of a ruler was a position of great honor and authority. By telling the Messiah to sit there, God was symbolically conferring honor and authority on him. Alternate translation: “Sit in the place of honor beside me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 LUK	20	43	m416	figs-quotesinquotes	ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν σου	1	until I make your enemies a footstool for your feet	This is the continuation of a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. If you decided in [20:42](../20/42.md) to have only one level of quotation, you can make the same adjustment here. Alternate translation: “until he made his enemies a footstool for his feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
@@ -3606,7 +3608,7 @@ LUK	20	43	m418	figs-metaphor	ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν σου	1	a
 LUK	20	44	m419	figs-quotesinquotes	Δαυεὶδ οὖν, Κύριον, αὐτὸν καλεῖ	1	David therefore calls him ‘Lord’	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “David therefore calls the Messiah his Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 LUK	20	44	zk2h	figs-explicit	Δαυεὶδ οὖν, Κύριον, αὐτὸν καλεῖ	1	David therefore calls him ‘Lord’	In this culture, an ancestor was more respected than a descendant. But to call someone **Lord** was to address that person as the more respected one. As the General Notes to this chapter describe, this is a paradox, that is, is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. Jesus is calling attention to this paradox to get his listeners to think more deeply about who the Messiah is. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly what makes this a paradox. Alternate translation: “David therefore addresses the Messiah respectfully as his Lord. But if the Messiah is his descendant, David should be the more respected person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	20	44	k1tp	figs-rquestion	καὶ πῶς υἱός αὐτοῦ ἐστιν	1	And how is he his son	Like the question in [20:41](../20/41.md), this seems to be a question that Jesus wanted his listeners to try to answer, even though he is also using it to teach. It is a difficult question, like the ones they asked him, which he answered well. They will not be able to answer his question, and this should give them a further appreciation for his wisdom, in addition to what they might learn from reflecting on the question later. So it would be appropriate to leave it in question form and not translate it as a statement. Alternate translation: “So why do people say that the Messiah is David’s descendant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-LUK	20	44	m427	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	And	Jesus is using this word to show that a conclusion should be drawn as a result of what he has just said, and that this conclusion would be different from what his listeners had previoiusly believed. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+LUK	20	44	m427	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	And	Jesus is using this word to show that a conclusion should be drawn as a result of what he has just said, and that this conclusion would be different from what his listeners had previously believed. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 LUK	20	44	m426	figs-metaphor	υἱός	1	son	Here Jesus is using the term **son** figuratively to mean “descendant.” Alternate translation: “descendant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	20	45	k3pf	grammar-connect-time-sequential	δὲ	1	And	Luke uses this word to indicate that after asking his own difficult question to the people who had been trying to trap him, Jesus turned to speak to his disciples. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 LUK	20	45	m420	figs-hyperbole	παντὸς τοῦ λαοῦ	1	all the people	Luke is generalizing to refer to everyone who was present as Jesus was teaching. Alternate translation: “all the people who were there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
diff --git a/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv b/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv
index a0440df32a..642a48fab9 100644
--- a/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv
@@ -1,34 +1,34 @@
 Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNote
-JHN	front	intro	t6za			0		# Introduction to the Gospel of John<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of the Gospel of John<br><br>1. Introduction about who Jesus is (1:1–18)<br>2. John the Baptizer baptizes Jesus, and Jesus chooses 12 disciples (1:19–51)<br>3. Jesus preaches, teaches, and heals people (2–11)<br>4. The seven days before Jesus’ death (12–19)<br><br>    * Mary anoints the feet of Jesus (12:1–11)<br>    * Jesus rides a donkey into Jerusalem (12:12–19)<br>    * Some Greek men want to see Jesus (12:20–36)<br>    * The Jewish leaders reject Jesus (12:37–50)<br>    * Jesus teaches his disciples (13–16)<br>    * Jesus prays for himself and his disciples (17)<br>    * Jesus is arrested and undergoes trial (18:1–19:15)<br>    * Jesus is crucified and buried (19:16–42)<br><br>1. Jesus rises from the dead (20:1–29)<br>2. John says why he wrote his Gospel (20:30–31)<br>3. Jesus meets with the disciples (21)<br><br>More detailed outlines are in the General Notes for each chapter.<br><br>### What is the Gospel of John about?<br><br>The Gospel of John is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life and teachings of Jesus Christ. These books are called “Gospels,” which means “good news.” Their authors wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. John said that he wrote his Gospel “so that people might believe that Jesus is the Christ, the Son of the living God” ([20:31](../20/31.md)). John’s Gospel repeatedly emphasizes that Jesus is God in human form.<br><br>John’s Gospel is very different from the other three Gospels. John does not include some of the teachings and events that the other writers included in their Gospels. Also, John wrote about some teachings and events that are not in the other Gospels.<br><br>John wrote much about the miraculous signs Jesus did to prove that what Jesus said about himself was true. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sign]])<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of John” or “The Gospel According to John.” Or they may choose a title that may be clearer, such as, “The Good News About Jesus That John Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>### Who wrote the Gospel of John?<br><br>This book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the apostle John was the author. Further evidence that the apostle John wrote this Gospel is the fact that his name does not occur once within the book. Instead, this Gospel contains the phrases “the disciple whom Jesus loved” or “the other disciple” in places where the other Gospels indicate that John was present ([13:23–25](../13/23.md); [19:26–27](../19/26.md); [20:2–8](../20/02.md); [21:7](../21/07.md), [20–24](../21/20.md)). The apostle John most likely referred to himself in this manner because he wanted to humbly say that he had a very close relationship with Jesus. He was part of Jesus’ inner circle of disciples who became the “pillars” of the early church ([Galatians 2:9](../../gal/02/09.md)).<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### Why does John write so much about the final week of Jesus’ life?<br><br>John wrote much about Jesus’ final week. He wanted his readers to think deeply about Jesus’ final week and his death on the cross. He wanted people to understand that Jesus willingly died on the cross so that God could forgive them for sinning against him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?<br><br>In the Gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” This is a reference to [Daniel 7:13–14](../../dan/07/13.md). In that passage, there is a person who is described as like a “son of man.” That means that the person was someone who looked like a human being. God gave authority to this “son of man” to rule over the nations forever. All people will worship him forever.<br><br>Jews of Jesus’ time did not use “Son of Man” as a title for anyone. But Jesus used it for himself to help them understand who he truly was. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]])<br><br>Translating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.<br><br>### What does the word “sign” mean in the Gospel of John?<br><br>While other New Testament writers use terms like “mighty works” or “wonders” to refer to the miracles that Jesus did, John prefers to use the term “sign.” The miracles John calls “signs” were significant displays of divine power. John called them signs to emphasize that an important purpose of Jesus’ miracles was to prove that Jesus was God and that what Jesus said about himself was true. John said that in his Gospel he only wrote about some of the signs that Jesus did. John said, “these have been written so that you would believe that Jesus is the Christ, the Son of God, and so that believing, you would have life in his name” ([20:30–31](../20/30.md)).<br><br>### What do the words “remain,” “reside,” and “abide” mean in the Gospel of John?<br><br>John often used the words “remain,” “reside,” and “abide” as metaphors. John spoke of a believer becoming more faithful to Jesus and knowing Jesus better as if Jesus’ word “remained” in the believer. John also spoke of someone being spiritually joined to someone else as if the person “remained” in the other person. Christians are said to “remain” in Christ and in God. The Father is said to “remain” in the Son, and the Son is said to “remain” in the Father. The Son is said to “remain” in believers. The Holy Spirit is also said to “remain” in the believers.<br><br>Many translators will find it impossible to represent these ideas in their languages in exactly the same way. For example, Jesus intended to express the idea of the Christian being spiritually together with him when he said, “He who eats my flesh and drinks my blood remains in me, and I in him” ([6:56](../06/56.md)). The UST uses the idea of “will be united with me, and I will be united with them,” but translators may have to find other ways of expressing the idea.<br><br>In the passage, “my words remain in you” ([15:7](../15/07.md)), the UST expresses this idea as “obey what I have taught you.” Translators may find it possible to use this translation as a model.<br><br>### What is double meaning in the Gospel of John?<br><br>John occasionally used words or phrases that could have two meanings (double entendre) in the language in which he originally wrote this Gospel. For example, the phrase translated “born again” in the ULT could also mean “born from above” ([3:3](../03/03.md), [7](../03/07.md)). In such cases, you may want to choose one meaning and put the other meaning in a footnote.<br><br>### What are the major issues in the text of the Gospel of John?<br><br>The following verses are found in older versions of the Bible but are not included in most modern versions. Translators are advised not to translate these verses. However, if there are older versions of the Bible in the translators’ region that include these verses, then the translators can include them. If they are translated, they should be put inside square brackets (\\[\\]) to indicate that they were probably not originally in John’s Gospel.<br><br>* “waiting for the moving of the water. For an angel of the Lord went down into the pool and stirred up the water at certain times, and whoever then first stepped in after the water was stirred was healed from whatever disease he suffered from.” (5:3-4)<br>* “going through the midst of them, and so passed by” ([8:59](../08/59.md))<br><br>The following passage is included in most older and modern versions of the Bible. But it is not in the earliest copies of the Bible. Translators are advised to translate this passage. It should be put inside of square brackets (\\[\\]) to indicate that it may not have been original to John’s Gospel.<br><br>* The story of the adulterous woman ([7:53](../07/53.md)–[8:11](../08/11.md)) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+JHN	front	intro	t6za			0		# Introduction to the Gospel of John<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of the Gospel of John<br><br>1. Introduction about who Jesus is (1:1–18)<br>1. John the Baptizer baptizes Jesus, and Jesus chooses 12 disciples (1:19–51)<br>1. Jesus preaches, teaches, and heals people (2–11)<br>1. The seven days before Jesus’ death (12–19)<br><br>    * Mary anoints the feet of Jesus (12:1–11)<br>    * Jesus rides a donkey into Jerusalem (12:12–19)<br>    * Some Greek men want to see Jesus (12:20–36)<br>    * The Jewish leaders reject Jesus (12:37–50)<br>    * Jesus teaches his disciples (13–16)<br>    * Jesus prays for himself and his disciples (17)<br>    * Jesus is arrested and undergoes trial (18:1–19:15)<br>    * Jesus is crucified and buried (19:16–42)<br><br>1. Jesus rises from the dead (20:1–29)<br>1. John says why he wrote his Gospel (20:30–31)<br>1. Jesus meets with the disciples (21)<br><br>More detailed outlines are in the General Notes for each chapter.<br><br>### What is the Gospel of John about?<br><br>The Gospel of John is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life and teachings of Jesus Christ. These books are called “Gospels,” which means “good news.” Their authors wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. John said that he wrote his Gospel “so that people might believe that Jesus is the Christ, the Son of the living God” ([20:31](../20/31.md)). John’s Gospel repeatedly emphasizes that Jesus is God in human form.<br><br>John’s Gospel is very different from the other three Gospels. John does not include some of the teachings and events that the other writers included in their Gospels. Also, John wrote about some teachings and events that are not in the other Gospels.<br><br>John wrote much about the miraculous signs Jesus did to prove that what Jesus said about himself was true. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sign]])<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of John” or “The Gospel According to John.” Or they may choose a title that may be clearer, such as, “The Good News About Jesus That John Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>### Who wrote the Gospel of John?<br><br>This book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the apostle John was the author. Further evidence that the apostle John wrote this Gospel is the fact that his name does not occur once within the book. Instead, this Gospel contains the phrases “the disciple whom Jesus loved” or “the other disciple” in places where the other Gospels indicate that John was present ([13:23–25](../13/23.md); [19:26–27](../19/26.md); [20:2–8](../20/02.md); [21:7](../21/07.md), [20–24](../21/20.md)). The apostle John most likely referred to himself in this manner because he wanted to humbly say that he had a very close relationship with Jesus. He was part of Jesus’ inner circle of disciples who became the “pillars” of the early church ([Galatians 2:9](../../gal/02/09.md)).<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### Why does John write so much about the final week of Jesus’ life?<br><br>John wrote much about Jesus’ final week. He wanted his readers to think deeply about Jesus’ final week and his death on the cross. He wanted people to understand that Jesus willingly died on the cross so that God could forgive them for sinning against him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?<br><br>In the Gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” This is a reference to [Daniel 7:13–14](../../dan/07/13.md). In that passage, there is a person who is described as like a “son of man.” That means that the person was someone who looked like a human being. God gave authority to this “son of man” to rule over the nations forever. All people will worship him forever.<br><br>Jews of Jesus’ time did not use “Son of Man” as a title for anyone. But Jesus used it for himself to help them understand who he truly was. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]])<br><br>Translating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.<br><br>### What does the word “sign” mean in the Gospel of John?<br><br>While other New Testament writers use terms like “mighty works” or “wonders” to refer to the miracles that Jesus did, John prefers to use the term “sign.” The miracles John calls “signs” were significant displays of divine power. John called them signs to emphasize that an important purpose of Jesus’ miracles was to prove that Jesus was God and that what Jesus said about himself was true. John said that in his Gospel he only wrote about some of the signs that Jesus did. John said, “these have been written so that you would believe that Jesus is the Christ, the Son of God, and so that believing, you would have life in his name” ([20:30–31](../20/30.md)).<br><br>### What do the words “remain,” “reside,” and “abide” mean in the Gospel of John?<br><br>John often used the words “remain,” “reside,” and “abide” as metaphors. John spoke of a believer becoming more faithful to Jesus and knowing Jesus better as if Jesus’ word “remained” in the believer. John also spoke of someone being spiritually joined to someone else as if the person “remained” in the other person. Christians are said to “remain” in Christ and in God. The Father is said to “remain” in the Son, and the Son is said to “remain” in the Father. The Son is said to “remain” in believers. The Holy Spirit is also said to “remain” in the believers.<br><br>Many translators will find it impossible to represent these ideas in their languages in exactly the same way. For example, Jesus intended to express the idea of the Christian being spiritually together with him when he said, “He who eats my flesh and drinks my blood remains in me, and I in him” ([6:56](../06/56.md)). The UST uses the idea of “will be united with me, and I will be united with them,” but translators may have to find other ways of expressing the idea.<br><br>In the passage, “my words remain in you” ([15:7](../15/07.md)), the UST expresses this idea as “obey what I have taught you.” Translators may find it possible to use this translation as a model.<br><br>### What is double meaning in the Gospel of John?<br><br>John occasionally used words or phrases that could have two meanings (double entendre) in the language in which he originally wrote this Gospel. For example, the phrase translated “born again” in the ULT could also mean “born from above” ([3:3](../03/03.md), [7](../03/07.md)). In such cases, you may want to choose one meaning and put the other meaning in a footnote.<br><br>### What are the major issues in the text of the Gospel of John?<br><br>The following verses are found in older versions of the Bible but are not included in most modern versions. Translators are advised not to translate these verses. However, if there are older versions of the Bible in the translators’ region that include these verses, then the translators can include them. If they are translated, they should be put inside square brackets (\\[\\]) to indicate that they were probably not originally in John’s Gospel.<br><br>* “waiting for the moving of the water. For an angel of the Lord went down into the pool and stirred up the water at certain times, and whoever then first stepped in after the water was stirred was healed from whatever disease he suffered from.” (5:3-4)<br>* “going through the midst of them, and so passed by” ([8:59](../08/59.md))<br><br>The following passage is included in most older and modern versions of the Bible. But it is not in the earliest copies of the Bible. Translators are advised to translate this passage. It should be put inside of square brackets (\\[\\]) to indicate that it may not have been original to John’s Gospel.<br><br>* The story of the adulterous woman ([7:53](../07/53.md)–[8:11](../08/11.md)) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 JHN	1	intro	k29b			0		# John 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>1. Jesus is God (1:1–5)<br>2. John the Baptist was Jesus’ witness (1:6–8)<br>3. Summary of Jesus’ ministry on earth (1:9–13)<br>4. Jesus is God in the flesh (1:14–18)<br>5. John the Baptist prepares the way for Jesus (1:19–34)<br>6. Jesus meets Andrew, Peter, Philip, and Nathaniel (1:35–51)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [1:23](../01/23.md), which are words from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### “The Word”<br><br>John uses the phrase “the Word” to refer to Jesus ([1:1](../01/01.md), [14](../01/14.md)). John is saying that God’s most important message to all people is actually Jesus, a person with a physical body. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wordofgod]])<br><br>### Light and Darkness<br><br>In [1:4–9](../01/04.md), John uses an extended metaphor in which light represents what is true and good and darkness represents what is false and evil. John applies that light metaphor to Jesus in order to show that Jesus is God’s truth and goodness displayed in a human body. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])<br><br>### “Children of God”<br><br>People are sometimes described as “children of God” because God created them. However, John uses this expression in a different sense in this chapter. He uses it to describe people who have entered into a father-child relationship with God by putting their faith and trust in Jesus. God indeed created all people, but people can only become children of God in this sense by believing in Jesus. “Children” in this usage does not refer to those who are young, but only to the relationship that people have to their father at any age. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Metaphors<br><br>John uses the metaphors of light and darkness and of “the Word” to tell the reader that he will be writing more about good and evil and about what God wants to tell people through Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### “In the beginning”<br><br>Some languages and cultures speak of the world as if it has always existed, as if it had no beginning. But “very long ago” is different from “in the beginning,” and you need to be sure that your translation communicates correctly.<br><br>### “Son of Man”<br><br>Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([1:51](../01/51.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	1	1	er9g	figs-explicit	ἐν ἀρχῇ ἦν	1	In the beginning	This phrase refers to the very earliest time before God created the heavens and the earth. It does not refer to time in the distant past. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Before the beginning of the universe there was” or “Before the universe began there was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	1	1	z59q	figs-explicit	ὁ λόγος, καὶ ὁ λόγος…καὶ Θεὸς ἦν ὁ λόγος	1	the Word	Here, **the Word** refers to Jesus. It does not refer to a spoken word. ULT indicates this by capitalizing **Word** to indicate that this is a title for Jesus. Use whatever convention your language uses to indicate that this is a name. If “word” is feminine in your language, it could be translated as “the one who is called the Word.” Alternate translation: “Jesus, who is the Word, and Jesus … and Jesus was God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	1	2	u6xx	writing-pronouns	οὗτος	1		**He** here refers to Jesus, whom John has called “the Word” in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “the Word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	1	2	u6xx	writing-pronouns	οὗτος	1		**He** here refers to Jesus, whom John has called “the Word” in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “the Word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	1	2	k8cf		ἐν ἀρχῇ	1		Here this phrase refers to the very earliest time before God created the heavens and the earth. See how you translated this phrase in verse [1](../01/01.md). Alternate translation: “before the beginning of the universe” or “before the universe began”
 JHN	1	3	gm5g	figs-activepassive	πάντα δι’ αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο	1	All things were made through him	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “God made all things through him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	1	3	t1lj	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ	1		Here, **him** refers to Jesus, the one who is called “the Word.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “the Word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	1	3	t1lj	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ	1		Here, **him** refers to Jesus, the one who is called “the Word.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “the Word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	1	3	aqs1	figs-doublenegatives	χωρὶς αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο οὐδὲ ἕν ὃ γέγονεν	1	without him there was not one thing made that has been made	If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “with him came into being everything that came into being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-JHN	1	3	v4yk	figs-activepassive	χωρὶς αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο οὐδὲ ἕν ὃ γέγονεν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “God did not make one thing without him” or “God made with him everything that God has made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+JHN	1	3	v4yk	figs-activepassive	χωρὶς αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο οὐδὲ ἕν ὃ γέγονεν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “God did not make one thing without him” or “with him, God made everyting that God has made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	1	4	pz5c	figs-explicit	ζωὴ	1		Here it is best to use a general term for **life**. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/life]]) If you must use a more specific word, consider that **life** here could refer to: (1) eternal life, which is the meaning John uses for this term throughout this Gospel. Alternate translation: “the means of receiving eternal life” (2) physical life, which would mean that this verse continues the discussion about the creation of the universe in the previous verses. Alternate translation: “the life of all living things” (3) both physical life and eternal life. Alternate translation: “the life of all living things and the source of eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	1	4	ffbw	figs-explicit	καὶ ἡ ζωὴ	1		Here, **the life** refers to the same life stated in the previous phrase. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “and that life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	1	4	dpeb	figs-metaphor	τὸ φῶς τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1		Here John uses **light** figuratively to refer to God’s truth and goodness. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the true and good things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	1	4	dpeb	figs-metaphor	τὸ φῶς τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1		Here John uses **light** figuratively to refer to God’s truth and goodness. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the true and good things God has for men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	1	4	saci	figs-possession	τὸ φῶς τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1		John uses **of** to indicate to whom the **light** is given. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the light given to men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JHN	1	4	jzwk	figs-gendernotations	τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1		Although the term **men** is masculine, John is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 JHN	1	5	dgin	figs-metaphor	τὸ φῶς…φαίνει	1		John uses **the light shines** figuratively to refer to God’s truth and goodness being revealed as if it were a light shining. This truth and goodness was revealed to the world by Jesus. He is the embodiment of God’s truth and goodness. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “God reveals his truth and goodness” or “God’s truth and goodness is like a light that shines” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	1	5	y5ry	figs-metaphor	ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ…καὶ ἡ σκοτία	1	The light shines in the darkness, and the darkness did not overcome it	Here John uses **darkness** figuratively to refer to what is false and evil. It is the spiritual **darkness** of the people in the world who do not love Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “in the false and evil world, and that evil world” or “in the evil world that is like a dark place, and that dark place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	1	5	w9ni		αὐτὸ οὐ κατέλαβεν	1		Here the word translated **overcome** could also be translated as “understand.” It could mean: (1) the evil forces in the world did not conquer God’s truth and goodness. Alternate translation: “did not conquer it” (2) the people in the world who don’t know God do not understand his truth and goodness. Alternate translation: “did not comprehend it” (3) the evil forces of this world neither conquered nor understood God’s truth and goodness. Alternate translation: “did not conquer or comprehend it”
-JHN	1	5	yv8l	writing-pronouns	αὐτὸ οὐ κατέλαβεν	1		Here, **it** refers to the light mentioned earlier in the verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “did not overcome the light” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	1	5	yv8l	writing-pronouns	αὐτὸ οὐ κατέλαβεν	1		Here, **it** refers to the light mentioned earlier in the verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “did not overcome the light” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	1	6	qa1s	figs-activepassive	ἀπεσταλμένος παρὰ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “whom God has sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	1	6	gih6	figs-explicit	Ἰωάννης	1		Here, **John** refers to Jesus’ cousin, often referred to as “John the Baptist.” (See: rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/johnthebaptist) It does not refer to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Immerser” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	1	7	mtlb	writing-pronouns	οὗτος	1		**He** here refers to John the Baptist, who was introduced in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Immerser” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	1	7	mtlb	writing-pronouns	οὗτος	1		**He** here refers to John the Baptist, who was introduced in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Immerser” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	1	7	mht8	figs-metaphor	περὶ τοῦ φωτός	1	testify about the light	Here John uses **light** figuratively to refer to the revelation of God’s truth and goodness in Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “about Jesus, who revealed the true and good things of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	1	7	cdl5		δι’ αὐτοῦ	1		Here, **through him** indicates the means by which everyone might believe in the light. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of him”
-JHN	1	8	pn9t	writing-pronouns	ἐκεῖνος	1		**That one** here refers to John the Baptist. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Immerser” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	1	7	cdl5		δι’ αὐτοῦ	1		Here, **through him** indicates the means by which everyone might believe in the light. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of him”
+JHN	1	8	pn9t	writing-pronouns	ἐκεῖνος	1		**That one** here refers to John the Baptist. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Immerser” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	1	8	kbwh	figs-metaphor	τὸ φῶς…τοῦ φωτός	1		See how you translated **light** in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who revealed the true and good things of God … Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	1	9	xe1z	figs-metaphor	τὸ φῶς τὸ ἀληθινὸν, ὃ	1	The true light	Here John uses **light** figuratively to refer to Jesus as the one who both reveals the truth about God and is himself that truth. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who truly embodied God’s truth, who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	1	9	rbsj	figs-metaphor	ὃ φωτίζει πάντα ἄνθρωπον	1		Here, John uses **light** figuratively to refer to God’s truth and goodness. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “which reveals the true and good things of God to all men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	1	9	u00s	figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπον	1		Although the term **men** is masculine, John is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-JHN	1	10	c2ne	writing-pronouns	ἦν…δι’ αὐτοῦ…αὐτὸν	1		**He** and **him** in this verse refer to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus was … through Jesus … Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	1	10	c2ne	writing-pronouns	ἦν…δι’ αὐτοῦ…αὐτὸν	1		**He** and **him** in this verse refer to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus was … through Jesus … Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	1	10	io8w	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ	1		Here, **world** refers to the earth on which people live. It does not refer only to the people in the world or to the entire universe. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “on the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	1	10	krcb	figs-metonymy	ὁ κόσμος	1		Here, **world** refers to the universe God created. It does not refer only to the people in the world or only to the earth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the whole universe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	1	10	b93e	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	καὶ ὁ κόσμος αὐτὸν οὐκ ἔγνω	1	He was in the world, and the world was made through him, and the world did not know him	Here, **and** introduces a contrast between what was expected, that the world would recognize its Creator, and what happened, that the world did to do that. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “but the world did not know him” or “yet the world did not know him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
@@ -40,10 +40,10 @@ JHN	1	11	va1w		αὐτὸν οὐ παρέλαβον	1	receive him	Here, **recei
 JHN	1	12	pvtl	figs-infostructure	ὅσοι δὲ ἔλαβον αὐτόν, ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς ἐξουσίαν τέκνα Θεοῦ γενέσθαι, τοῖς πιστεύουσιν εἰς τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1		If it would be natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. You will also need to adjust some words to fit the new order. Alternate translation: “But as many as received him and believed in his name, he gave to them the authority to become children of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 JHN	1	12	ijje		ἔλαβον αὐτόν	1		Here, **receive** means to accept a person into one’s presence with friendliness. See how you translated this word in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “accepted him” or “welcomed him”
 JHN	1	12	x4f9		ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς ἐξουσίαν	1	he gave the right	Here, the word translated **authority** means either the right or ability to do something. Alternate translation: “he gave to them the right” or “he made it possible for them”
-JHN	1	12	uc6e	figs-metaphor	τέκνα Θεοῦ	1	children of God	Here John uses **children** figuratively to refer to people who love and obey God. The relationship between God and those who love him is like the relationship between a father and his children. Because this is an important concept in the Bible, you should not say the meaning plainly here, but you may use a simile. Alternate translation: “like children who have God as their father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	1	12	uc6e	figs-metaphor	τέκνα Θεοῦ	1	children of God	Here John uses **children** figuratively to refer to people who love and obey God. The relationship between God and those who love him is like the relationship between a father and his children. Because this is an important concept in the Bible, you should not state the meaning plainly here, but you may use a simile. Alternate translation: “like children who have God as their father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	1	12	jp3y	figs-metonymy	πιστεύουσιν εἰς τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1	believed in his name	Here John uses **name** figuratively to refer to Jesus’ identity and everything about him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who believed in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-JHN	1	13	no4j	figs-explicit	οἳ	1		**These** here refers to the children of God mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be misunderstood for your readers, you could say this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	1	13	ygxb	figs-metaphor	ἐγεννήθησαν	1		John uses **born** figuratively to describe God changing a person from being spiritually dead to being spiritually alive when they believe in Jesus. John recorded Jesus referring to this change as being “born again” in [3:3](../03/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/bornagain]]) If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an expression that indicates spiritual rebirth rather than physical birth. Alternate translation: “born spiritually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	1	13	no4j	figs-explicit	οἳ	1		**These** here refers to the children of God mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be misunderstood for your readers, you could state this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	1	13	ygxb	figs-metaphor	οἳ οὐκ ἐξ αἱμάτων…ἐγεννήθησαν	1		John uses **born** figuratively to describe God changing a person from being spiritually dead to being spiritually alive when they believe in Jesus. John recorded Jesus referring to this change as being “born again” in [3:3](../03/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/bornagain]]) If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an expression that indicates spiritual rebirth rather than physical birth. Alternate translation: “These were born spiritually, not from blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	1	13	k24g	figs-metaphor	οὐκ ἐξ αἱμάτων…ἐγεννήθησαν	1		Here, **bloods** refers to the bloodlines or genetic contributions of both parents of a child. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “were not born from human bloodlines” or “were not born from human decent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	1	13	it6r		ἐξ	1		Here, **from** could refer to any of the following: (1) the means by which God’s children are born. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “by” (2) the source from which God’s children are born. Alternate translation: “of” (3) the cause of the birth of God’s children. Alternate translation: “as a result of”
 JHN	1	13	jtjr	figs-ellipsis	οὐδὲ ἐκ θελήματος σαρκὸς	1		John is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages in order to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “nor were they born from the will of the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -66,38 +66,38 @@ JHN	1	14	tg4m	figs-metaphor	πλήρης χάριτος καὶ ἀληθεία
 JHN	1	14	c3b4	figs-abstractnouns	πλήρης χάριτος καὶ ἀληθείας	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **grace** and **truth**, you could express the same ideas in other ways. Alternate translation: “full of God’s gracious and faithful character” or “full of kind acts and true teachings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	1	15	xduu	figs-pastforfuture	Ἰωάννης μαρτυρεῖ περὶ αὐτοῦ	1		To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “John testified about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	1	15	qxgz	writing-quotations	καὶ κέκραγεν λέγων	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and has cried out, and he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-JHN	1	15	yfuv	figs-quotesinquotes	οὗτος ἦν ὃν εἶπον, ὁ ὀπίσω μου ἐρχόμενος, ἔμπροσθέν μου γέγονεν, ὅτι πρῶτός μου ἦν.	1		If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “This was the one of whom I said that he is coming after me who has become greater than me, for he was before me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
-JHN	1	15	k7rm		ὁ ὀπίσω μου ἐρχόμενος	1	He who comes after me	Here, John is speaking about Jesus. The phrase **is coming after me** means that John’s ministry has already started, and Jesus’ ministry will start later. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “He who starts his ministry after I have done so”
+JHN	1	15	yfuv	figs-quotesinquotes	οὗτος ἦν ὃν εἶπον, ὁ ὀπίσω μου ἐρχόμενος, ἔμπροσθέν μου γέγονεν, ὅτι πρῶτός μου ἦν.	1		If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “This was the one I said would come after me, and who would be greater than me for he was before me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+JHN	1	15	k7rm		ὁ ὀπίσω μου ἐρχόμενος	1	He who comes after me	Here, John is speaking about Jesus. The phrase **is coming after me** means that John’s ministry has already started, and Jesus’ ministry will start later. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “He who starts his ministry after I have done so”
 JHN	1	15	q75h		ἔμπροσθέν μου γέγονεν	1	is greater than I am	Here, **greater** refers to being more important or having having a superior position. Alternate translation: “is more important than I am” or “is superior to me”
 JHN	1	15	lrd7		ὅτι πρῶτός μου ἦν	1	for he was before me	Here, **before me** means that Jesus existed earlier in time than John. This does not mean that Jesus is more important because he is older than John in human years. Jesus is greater and more important than John because he is God the Son, who has always existed. Alternate translation: “for he existed before I was born”
 JHN	1	16	punh	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1		**For** here introduces the reason why John said that Jesus is “full of grace and truth” in verse [14](../01/14.md). Alternate translation: “We can say that Jesus is full of grace and truth because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-JHN	1	16	iriv	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ	1		Here, **his** refers to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	1	16	iriv	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ	1		Here, **his** refers to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	1	16	p3zg	figs-abstractnouns	τοῦ πληρώματος αὐτοῦ	1	fullness	Here, **fullness** refers to the grace and truth which John said Jesus was full of in verse [14](../01/14.md). If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **fullness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what he is full of” or “his full amount of grace and truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	1	16	vmyz	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς πάντες	1		Here, **we** refers to John and all believers. Your language may require you to mark this form. Alternate translation: “all of we believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 JHN	1	16	yrg8		ἐλάβομεν καὶ χάριν	1		Here, **even** indicates that “grace after grace” explains what “his fullness” means. Alternate translation: “have received, that is, grace” or “have received, namely, grace”
 JHN	1	16	b9r1	figs-abstractnouns	χάριν ἀντὶ χάριτος	1	grace after grace	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “kind act after kind act” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	1	16	avst		χάριν ἀντὶ χάριτος	1		Here, **after** could mean: (1) the second “grace” replaces the first “grace,” which is the most common use for this word. This meaning could indicate that the first “grace” refers to “the law” and the second “grace” refers to “Grace and truth” in the next verse. Alternate translation: “grace in place of grace” or “grace instead of grace” (2) the second “grace” is in addition to the first “grace.” Alternate translation: “grace in addition to” or “grace upon grace”
-JHN	1	17	iata	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ὁ νόμος διὰ Μωϋσέως ἐδόθη, ἡ χάρις καὶ ἡ ἀλήθεια διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐγένετο	1		John placed the two sentences in this verse next to each other without any connecting word in order to show a contrast between the law of Moses and the grace and truth of Jesus. This does not mean that the law of Moses did not have grace and truth. Rather, John is indicating that the grace and truth revealed by Jesus is more complete than that revealed in the law of Moses. Although God revealed himself and his will through the law of Moses, he did so much more clearly though Jesus, who is God in human form. Alternate translation: “the law was given through Moses. But grace and truth came about through Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+JHN	1	17	iata	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ὁ νόμος διὰ Μωϋσέως ἐδόθη, ἡ χάρις καὶ ἡ ἀλήθεια διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐγένετο	1		John placed the two sentences in this verse next to each other without any connecting word in order to show a contrast between the law of Moses and the grace and truth of Jesus. This does not mean that the law of Moses did not have grace and truth. Rather, John is indicating that the grace and truth revealed by Jesus is more complete than that revealed in the law of Moses. Although God revealed himself and his will through the law of Moses, he did so much more clearly though Jesus, who is God in human form. Alternate translation: “the law was given through Moses. In contrast, grace and truth came about through Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 JHN	1	17	xsbj	figs-activepassive	ὁ νόμος διὰ Μωϋσέως ἐδόθη	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “God gave the law through Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	1	17	kup2	grammar-collectivenouns	ὁ νόμος…ἐδόθη	1		The word **law** is a singular noun that refers to the many laws and instructions that God gave to the Israelites. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the group of laws was given” or “God’s laws were given” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 JHN	1	17	wios	translate-names	Μωϋσέως	1		**Moses** is the name of a man, a prophet of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	1	17	vm1h	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ χάρις καὶ ἡ ἀλήθεια	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **grace** and **truth**, you could express the same ideas in other ways. Alternate translation: “God’s gracious and faithful character” or “Kind acts and true teachings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	1	18	vf9q		μονογενὴς Θεὸς	1		Here and throughout John’s Gospel, the phrase **the One and Only** is a title for Jesus that could refer to: (1) Jesus being unique as the only member of his kind. Alternate translation: “the Unique God” (2) Jesus being the only child of his Father. Alternate translation: “the Only Begotten God”
-JHN	1	18	r1la		μονογενὴς Θεὸς	1		Here, **God** indicates that Jesus, who is called **the One and Only**, is God. If it would be misunderstood to you readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the One and Only, who is God”
+JHN	1	18	r1la		μονογενὴς Θεὸς	1		Here, **God** indicates that Jesus, who is called **the One and Only**, is God. If it would be misunderstood to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the One and Only, who is God”
 JHN	1	18	rflq	figs-idiom	ὁ ὢν εἰς τὸν κόλπον τοῦ Πατρὸς	1		Here, **in the bosom of** is an idiom that refers to having a close and intimate relationship with someone. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “who has a close relationship with the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	1	18	h5cq	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Πατρὸς	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-JHN	1	18	kmqm	writing-pronouns	ἐκεῖνος	1		Here, **that one** refers to Jesus in an emphatic way. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-JHN	1	18	zc8g	writing-pronouns	ἐξηγήσατο	1		Here, **him** refers to God the Father. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	1	18	kmqm	writing-pronouns	ἐκεῖνος	1		Here, **that one** refers to Jesus in an emphatic way. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	1	18	zc8g	writing-pronouns	ἐξηγήσατο	1		Here, **him** is not in the original text, but is necessary for English. It refers to God the Father. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “has made the Father known” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	1	18	pmw5		ἐξηγήσατο	1		Here, the word translated **has made him known** refers to making people know something by explaining or revealing it clearly. Alternate translation: “has explained him” or “has fully revealed him”
 JHN	1	19	t5pf	figs-explicit	τοῦ Ἰωάννου	1		Here, John refers to Jesus’ cousin, often referred to as “John the Baptist.” (See: rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/johnthebaptist) It does not refer to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of John the Baptist” or “of John the Immerser” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	1	19	e1dz	figs-synecdoche	ἀπέστειλαν οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι ἐξ Ἱεροσολύμων	1	the Jews sent … to him from Jerusalem	Here, **the Jews** refers to the “Jewish leaders.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders sent … from Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-JHN	1	20	b7zz		ὡμολόγησεν καὶ οὐκ ἠρνήσατο, καὶ ὡμολόγησεν	1	He confessed—he did not deny, but confessed	The phrase “he confessed” says in positive terms the same thing that **he did not deny** says in negative terms. This emphasizes that John was telling the truth and was strongly stating that he was not the Christ. Your language may have a different way of doing this. Alternate translation: “he strongly confessed” or “he solemnly testified”
-JHN	1	21	f926	writing-pronouns	ἠρώτησαν	1		Here, **they** refers to “the Jews,” mentioned in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say it explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jews asked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	1	20	b7zz		ὡμολόγησεν καὶ οὐκ ἠρνήσατο, καὶ ὡμολόγησεν	1	He confessed—he did not deny, but confessed	The phrase “he confessed” expresses in positive terms the same thing that **he did not deny** expresses in negative terms. This emphasizes that John was telling the truth and was strongly stating that he was not the Christ. Your language may have a different way of doing this. Alternate translation: “he strongly confessed” or “he solemnly testified”
+JHN	1	21	f926	writing-pronouns	ἠρώτησαν	1		Here, **they** refers to “the Jews,” mentioned in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jews asked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	1	21	iv9d		τί οὖν?	1	What are you then?	Alternate translation: “If you are not the Messiah, then who are you?”
 JHN	1	21	vk6r	translate-names	Ἠλείας	1		**Elijah** is the name of a man. **Elijah** was a prophet whom the Jews expected to return to earth shortly become the arrival of the Messiah. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	1	21	h2dv	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	1	21	nhx9	figs-explicit	ὁ προφήτης	1		Here, **the prophet** refers to a prophet the Jews were waiting for, based on God’s promise to send a prophet like Moses, which is recorded in Deuteronomy 18:15. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the prophet whom God promised to send to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	1	22	t8ib	writing-pronouns	εἶπαν…αὐτῷ	1		Here, the pronouns **they** and **him** refer to the priests and Levites and John the Baptist, respectively. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the priests and Levites … John the Baptist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	1	22	t8ib	writing-pronouns	εἶπαν…αὐτῷ	1		Here, the pronouns **they** and **him** refer to the priests and Levites and John the Baptist, respectively. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the priests and Levites … John the Baptist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	1	22	wbd9	figs-ellipsis	τίς εἶ? ἵνα ἀπόκρισιν δῶμεν τοῖς πέμψασιν ἡμᾶς; τί	1		John is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. This may require you to change the punctuation of the sentences. Alternate translation: “Who are you? Tell us so that we might given an answer to those who sent us. What” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	1	22	x8wz	figs-exclusive	δῶμεν…ἡμᾶς	1	we may give … us	Here, **we** and **us** refer to the priests and Levites, not to John. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 JHN	1	22	fmc8		ἵνα ἀπόκρισιν δῶμεν	1		Alternate translation: “so that we might tell your answer”
@@ -105,13 +105,13 @@ JHN	1	22	sa3t	figs-explicit	τοῖς πέμψασιν ἡμᾶς	1	they said to
 JHN	1	23	x314	figs-quotemarks	φωνὴ βοῶντος ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, εὐθύνατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου	1		In these phrases, John quotes from the Old Testament book of Isaiah ([Isaiah 40:3](../../isa/40/03.md)). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 JHN	1	23	baa5	figs-metonymy	ἐγὼ φωνὴ βοῶντος ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ	1	I am a voice, crying in the wilderness	Here, **voice** refers to the person who is crying out in the wilderness. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am the one calling out in the wilderness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	1	23	p7kc	figs-quotesinquotes	ἐγὼ φωνὴ βοῶντος ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, εὐθύνατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου	1		This clause is a quotation within a quotation. John is quoting from the book of Isaiah, and Isaiah is quoting the words of the person calling out in the wilderness. It would be best to indicate that by punctuating this material as a second-level quotation, since Luke is quoting from Scripture. However, if your language does not put one direct quotation within another, you could translate this material as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “I am a voice crying out in the wilderness to make the way of the Lord straight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
-JHN	1	23	iry1	figs-metaphor	εὐθύνατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου	1	Make the way of the Lord straight	Here John the Baptist quotes Isaiah, using this clause figuratively to refer to telling people to get ready to listen to the Lord’s message when it comes. They are to do this by repenting of their sins. If this might confuse you readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Repent of your sins so that you will be ready to listen to the Lord’s message when it comes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	1	23	iry1	figs-metaphor	εὐθύνατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου	1	Make the way of the Lord straight	Here John the Baptist quotes Isaiah, using this clause figuratively to refer to telling people to get ready to listen to the Lord’s message when it comes. They are to do this by repenting of their sins. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Repent of your sins so that you will be ready to listen to the Lord’s message when it comes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	1	23	v1gi	translate-names	Ἠσαΐας ὁ προφήτης	1		**Isaiah** is the name of a man. He wrote the book of **Isaiah**, in the Bible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	1	24	bk96	writing-background		0		This verse is background information about the people who questioned John. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	1	24	uq5b	figs-explicit	ἀπεσταλμένοι	1		Here, **the ones** refers to the priests and Levites, as introduced in verse [19](../01/19.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the priests and Levites who had been sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	1	24	guqm	figs-activepassive	ἀπεσταλμένοι ἦσαν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones whom the Jewish leaders sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	1	24	f4xj	figs-explicit	ἦσαν ἐκ τῶν Φαρισαίων	1		This phrase could refer to: (1) the priests and Levites who had been sent. Alternate translation: “belonged to the Pharisees” (2) the leaders in Jerusalem who sent the priests and Levites. Alternate translation: “were sent from the Pharisees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	1	25	s00c	writing-pronouns	ἠρώτησαν	1		Here, **they** refers to the priests and Levites who had been sent from Jerusalem, as introduced in verse [19](../01/19.md). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the priests and Levites from Jerusalem asked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	1	25	s00c	writing-pronouns	ἠρώτησαν	1		Here, **they** refers to the priests and Levites who had been sent from Jerusalem, as introduced in verse [19](../01/19.md). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the priests and Levites from Jerusalem asked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	1	25	v5sn	translate-names	Ἠλείας	1		**Elijah** is the name of a man. See how you translated this name in [1:21](../01/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	1	25	u7is	figs-explicit	ὁ προφήτης	1		Here, **the Prophet** refers to a prophet the Jews were waiting for, based on God’s promise to send a prophet like Moses, which is recorded in Deuteronomy 18:15. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the prophet whom God promised to send to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	1	26	la26	figs-explicit	Ἰωάννης	1		Here, John refers to Jesus’ cousin, often referred to as “John the Baptist.” (See: rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/johnthebaptist) It does not refer to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Immerser” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ JHN	1	26	aupp	writing-quotations	ἀπεκρίθη αὐτοῖς ὁ Ἰωάν
 JHN	1	27	x2ki	figs-explicit	ὁ ὀπίσω μου ἐρχόμενος	1	who comes after me	Here, John is speaking about Jesus. The phrase **coming after me** means that John’s ministry has already started and Jesus’ ministry will start later. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the one who starts his ministry after I have done so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	1	27	y7v5	figs-metaphor	μου…οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγὼ ἄξιος, ἵνα λύσω αὐτοῦ τὸν ἱμάντα τοῦ ὑποδήματος	1	me, the strap of whose sandal I am not worthy to untie	Untying sandals was the work of a slave or servant. John the Baptist uses this expression figurative to refer to the most unpleasant work of a servant. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “me. I am not even worthy to untie the strap of his sandal” or “me, whom I am not worthy to serve in even the most unpleasant way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	1	28	r4ty	writing-background		0	General Information:	This verse provides background information about the setting of the story that is recorded in [1:19–27](../01/19.md). Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-JHN	1	28	u0iq	figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1		Here, **these things** refers to the events that were described in [1:19–27](../01/19.md). If it would be misunderstood to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This conversation between John and the priests and Levites from Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	1	28	u0iq	figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1		Here, **these things** refers to the events that were described in [1:19–27](../01/19.md). If it would be misunderstood to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This conversation between John and the priests and Levites from Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	1	28	civp	translate-names	Βηθανίᾳ	1		**Bethany** is the name of a village. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	1	28	tfxy	translate-names	τοῦ Ἰορδάνου	1		**Jordan** is the name of a river. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	1	28	f5he	translate-names	πέραν τοῦ Ἰορδάνου	1		Here, **beyond the Jordan** refers to the region of Judea that is on the east side of the Jordan River, which is the side opposite from Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “on the side of the Jordan River opposite from Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -132,17 +132,17 @@ JHN	1	29	j397	figs-metaphor	Ἀμνὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Lamb of God	John th
 JHN	1	29	cgxj	figs-metaphor	ὁ αἴρων	1		Here John the Baptist speaks figuratively of forgiving sin as if sin were an object that Jesus is **taking away**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “who is forgiving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	1	29	rg4n	figs-metonymy	τοῦ κόσμου	1	world	John the Baptist uses **world** figuratively to refer to all the people in the world. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of those who live in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	1	30	x393		ὀπίσω μου ἔρχεται ἀνὴρ, ὃς ἔμπροσθέν μου γέγονεν, ὅτι πρῶτός μου ἦν.	1	The one who comes after me is more than me, for he was before me	See how you translated this in verse [15](../01/15.md).
-JHN	1	31	himw	writing-pronouns	κἀγὼ οὐκ ᾔδειν αὐτόν	1		Here, **him** refers to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “And I did not know Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	1	31	himw	writing-pronouns	κἀγὼ οὐκ ᾔδειν αὐτόν	1		Here, **him** refers to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “And I did not know Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	1	31	hb8e	figs-explicit	κἀγὼ οὐκ ᾔδειν αὐτόν	1		Here John means that he did not know previously that Jesus was the Messiah. It does not mean that he didn’t know who Jesus was, because Jesus was his cousin. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “And I did not know that he was the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	1	31	dr02	figs-doublet	ἵνα φανερωθῇ τῷ Ἰσραὴλ διὰ τοῦτο	1		Here John uses the redundant words **so that** and **because of this** to emphasize the reason why he was baptizing people. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could combine these phrases and indicate the emphasis. Alternate translation: “for the exact purpose that he might be revealed to Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	1	31	s9dj	figs-metonymy	τῷ Ἰσραὴλ	1		Here John uses the name of the nation, **Israel**, to represent the people who belong to that nation. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-JHN	1	31	jr9r	figs-explicit	διὰ τοῦτο	1		Here, **this** refers to the revealing of the Messiah to Israel that is mentioned in the previous clause. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because he might be revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	1	31	jr9r	figs-explicit	διὰ τοῦτο	1		Here, **this** refers to the revealing of the Messiah to Israel that is mentioned in the previous clause. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because he might be revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	1	32	mcc7	writing-quotations	ἐμαρτύρησεν Ἰωάννης λέγων	1	descending	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “John testified, and he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	1	32	xyr3	figs-simile	ὡς περιστερὰν	1	like a dove	This phrase is a simile. As [Luke 3:22](../../luk/03/22.md) indicates, the Holy Spirit came down with an appearance that resembled a **dove**. Alternate translation: “resembling a dove” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
-JHN	1	32	uji2	writing-pronouns	ἐπ’ αὐτόν	1	heaven	Here, **him** refers to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “upon Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-JHN	1	33	y1bb	figs-explicit	κἀγὼ οὐκ ᾔδειν αὐτόν	1		Here John means that he did not know previously that Jesus was the Messiah. It does not mean that he didn’t recognize who Jesus was when he saw him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “And I did not recognize that he was the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	1	32	uji2	writing-pronouns	ἐπ’ αὐτόν	1	heaven	Here, **him** refers to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “upon Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	1	33	y1bb	figs-explicit	κἀγὼ οὐκ ᾔδειν αὐτόν	1		Here John means that he did not know previously that Jesus was the Messiah. It does not mean that he didn’t recognize who Jesus was when he saw him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “And I did not recognize that he was the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	1	33	ccys	figs-explicit	ὁ πέμψας με βαπτίζειν ἐν ὕδατι, ἐκεῖνός	1		Here, the phrases **the one who sent me** and **that one** both refer to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “God, who sent me to baptize in water,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	1	33	x8lb	figs-metaphor	οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ βαπτίζων ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ	1		Here John the Baptist is using literal baptism, which puts a person under water, figuratively to refer to spiritual baptism, which puts people under the influence of the Holy Spirit, who purifies them. If this might confuse you readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he is the one who will put you under the influence of the Holy Spirit, who will purify you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	1	33	x8lb	figs-metaphor	οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ βαπτίζων ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ	1		Here John the Baptist is using literal baptism, which puts a person under water, figuratively to refer to spiritual baptism, which puts people under the influence of the Holy Spirit, who purifies them. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he is the one who will put you under the influence of the Holy Spirit, who will purify you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	1	34	ea3y	translate-textvariants	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the Son of God	Although most copies of this text say **Son of God**, some say “chosen one of God” or “chosen Son of God.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the phrase it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to follow the example of the ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 JHN	1	34	naf2	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Son of God	**Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	1	35	i3lg	grammar-connect-time-sequential	τῇ ἐπαύριον πάλιν	1	Again, the next day	**The next day** here indicates that the events the story will now relate came after the event it has just described in [1:29–34](../01/29.md). John saw Jesus two days after his conversation with the priests and Levites that is described in verses [19–28](../01/19.md). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “Two days after John spoke with the priests and Levites from Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
@@ -150,8 +150,8 @@ JHN	1	36	kuol	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense
 JHN	1	36	ntaw	figs-explicit	ἴδε, ὁ Ἀμνὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		The phrase **Lamb of God** refers to Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Behold, Jesus, the Lamb of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	1	36	t2yx	figs-metaphor	ἴδε	1		John records John the Baptist using the term **Behold** to call his audience’s attention to what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	1	36	ap5m	figs-metaphor	Ἀμνὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Lamb of God	See how you translated this same phrase in [John 1:29](../01/29.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	1	37	v5be	writing-pronouns	ἤκουσαν οἱ δύο μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ	1		Here, **his** and **him** refer to John the Baptist. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “John’s two disciples heard him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-JHN	1	38	a8bg	writing-pronouns	θεασάμενος αὐτοὺς	1		Here, **them** refers to the two disciples of John the Baptist who were mentioned in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “having seen John’s two disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	1	37	v5be	writing-pronouns	ἤκουσαν οἱ δύο μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ	1		Here, **his** and **him** refer to John the Baptist. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “John’s two disciples heard him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	1	38	a8bg	writing-pronouns	θεασάμενος αὐτοὺς	1		Here, **them** refers to the two disciples of John the Baptist who were mentioned in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “having seen John’s two disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	1	38	hlee	figs-ellipsis	θεασάμενος αὐτοὺς ἀκολουθοῦντας	1		Here John is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “having seen them following him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	1	38	qxej	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	1	38	kkey		ποῦ μένεις	1		Alternate translation: “where are you spending the night”
@@ -164,16 +164,16 @@ JHN	1	40	x8g8			0	General Information:	Verses [40–42] give background informat
 JHN	1	40	f6b9	figs-explicit	Ἰωάννου	1		Here, John refers to Jesus’ cousin, often referred to as “John the Baptist.” (See: rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/johnthebaptist) It does not refer to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Immerser” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	1	40	q0bp	translate-names	Ἀνδρέας…Σίμωνος Πέτρου	1		**Andrew** and **Simon Peter** are names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	1	40	jmyp		Σίμωνος Πέτρου	1		**Simon** was also called **Peter** by Jesus, as recorded in verse [42](../01/42.md). Alternate translation: “Simon, who is also called Peter”
-JHN	1	41	xpi4	writing-pronouns	οὗτος	1		**This one** here refers to Andrew, who was mentioned in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Andrew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	1	41	xpi4	writing-pronouns	οὗτος	1		**This one** here refers to Andrew, who was mentioned in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Andrew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	1	41	vfsj	figs-pastforfuture	εὑρίσκει…λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	1	41	roca	translate-names	Σίμωνα	1		**Simon** is the name of a man, Andrew’s brother. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	1	41	rxox	figs-activepassive	ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, Χριστός	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which means Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	1	41	ek1a	figs-explicit	ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, Χριστός	1		John assumes that his readers will know that he is saying what the title “Messiah” means when translated from the Aramaic language into Greek. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “which is ‘Christ’ in Greek” or “which is the Aramaic word for ‘Christ’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	1	42	xwc7	writing-pronouns	ἤγαγεν αὐτὸν	1		**He** here refers to Andrew and **him** refers to Simon. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Andrew brought Simon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	1	41	ek1a	figs-explicit	ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, Χριστός	1		John assumes that his readers will know that he is saying what the title “Messiah” means when translated from the Aramaic language into Greek. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “which is ‘Christ’ in Greek” or “which is the Aramaic word for ‘Christ’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	1	42	xwc7	writing-pronouns	ἤγαγεν αὐτὸν	1		**He** here refers to Andrew and **him** refers to Simon. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Andrew brought Simon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	1	42	f5wo	writing-quotations	ἐμβλέψας αὐτῷ, ὁ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “Jesus looked at him, and he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	1	42	k2dx	translate-names	υἱὸς Ἰωάννου	1	son of John	**John** is the name of a man. This is neither John the Baptist nor John the apostle. **John** was a common name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	1	42	rstd	figs-activepassive	σὺ κληθήσῃ Κηφᾶς	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “People will call you Cephas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	1	42	pv4e	figs-explicit	Κηφᾶς	1		**Cephas** is a word in the Aramaic language that means “rock.” Here, Jesus uses the word as a name for Simon. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Cephas, which means ‘rock’ in Aramaic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	1	42	pv4e	figs-explicit	Κηφᾶς	1		**Cephas** is a word in the Aramaic language that means “rock.” Here, Jesus uses the word as a name for Simon. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Cephas, which means ‘rock’ in Aramaic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	1	42	t3n5	figs-activepassive	ὃ ἑρμηνεύεται, Πέτρος	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which means ‘Peter’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	1	42	esly	figs-explicit	ὃ ἑρμηνεύεται, Πέτρος	1		John assumes that his readers will know that he is saying what the name Cephas means when translated from the Aramaic language into Greek. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “which is ‘Peter’ in Greek” or “which is the Aramaic word for Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	1	43	cmi8	grammar-connect-time-sequential	τῇ ἐπαύριον	1		**The next day** here indicates that the events the story will now relate came after the event it has just described in the previous. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “The day after Andrew brought Simon to Jesus,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
@@ -186,14 +186,14 @@ JHN	1	45	m8j1	translate-names	Φίλιππος…Ναθαναὴλ…Μωϋσῆ
 JHN	1	45	faz3	figs-pastforfuture	εὑρίσκει Φίλιππος τὸν Ναθαναὴλ, καὶ λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	1	45	ci52	figs-ellipsis	οἱ προφῆται	1		Here, John is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “the prophets wrote about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	1	45	r31z	translate-names	Ναζαρέτ	1		**Nazareth** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-JHN	1	46	s2kg	writing-pronouns	εἶπεν αὐτῷ Ναθαναήλ	1	Nathaniel said to him	Here, **him** refers to Philip. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Nathaniel said to Philip” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	1	46	s2kg	writing-pronouns	εἶπεν αὐτῷ Ναθαναήλ	1	Nathaniel said to him	Here, **him** refers to Philip. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Nathaniel said to Philip” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	1	46	i4wp	figs-rquestion	ἐκ Ναζαρὲτ δύναταί τι ἀγαθὸν εἶναι?	1	Can any good thing come out of Nazareth?	Nathaniel is using the question form for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No good thing can come out of Nazareth!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	1	46	shpn	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	1	47	e1ke	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	1	47	ka53	figs-metaphor	ἴδε	1		John records Jesus using the term **Behold** to call his audience’s attention to what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	1	47	ys8d	figs-litotes	ἐν ᾧ δόλος οὐκ ἔστιν	1	in whom is no deceit	**Jesus** is using a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that means the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “a completely truthful man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 JHN	1	48	am5y	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-JHN	1	48	d1on	figs-explicit	πρὸ τοῦ σε Φίλιππον φωνῆσαι, ὄντα ὑπὸ τὴν συκῆν, εἶδόν σε	1		Nathaniel’s reaction to this statement in the next verse indicates that this is a display of supernatural knowledge. It appears that Jesus knew something about Nathaniel that no one else could have known. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Before Philip called you, being completely alone under the fig tree, I saw you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	1	48	d1on	figs-explicit	πρὸ τοῦ σε Φίλιππον φωνῆσαι, ὄντα ὑπὸ τὴν συκῆν, εἶδόν σε	1		Nathaniel’s reaction to this statement in the next verse indicates that this is a display of supernatural knowledge. It appears that Jesus knew something about Nathaniel that no one else could have known. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Before Philip called you, being completely alone under the fig tree, I saw you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	1	48	a0ym	figs-explicit	ὄντα ὑπὸ τὴν συκῆν	1		The subject of this clause is Philip, not Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “while you were under the fig tree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	1	49	l666	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Son of God	**Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	1	50	d53b	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι εἶπόν σοι, ὅτι εἶδόν σε ὑποκάτω τῆς συκῆς, πιστεύεις?	1		If your readers would misunderstand this, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the result for the reason that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Do you believe because I said to you that I saw you underneath the fig tree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -202,8 +202,8 @@ JHN	1	50	fhzr	figs-ellipsis	πιστεύεις	1		Jesus is leaving out some of t
 JHN	1	50	oubk	figs-explicit	μείζω τούτων	1		Jesus uses the plural pronoun **these** to refer to a general category of something, in this case the miraculous display of supernatural knowledge that took place in [verse 48](../01/48.md). Alternate translation: “greater things than this type of thing” or “greater things that this kind of miracle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	1	51	byxy	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	1	51	ga44	figs-doublet	ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly, truly	Jesus repeats **Truly** in order to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases, forming a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “What I am about to tell you is very true.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-JHN	1	51	yuye	figs-you	λέγω ὑμῖν	1		Jesus is using the plural form of **you** to indicate that he is speaking to all those who are with him at that moment. He is not only speaking to Nathaniel. If it would be misunderstood to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I say to all of you here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-JHN	1	51	s28k	figs-explicit	ὄψεσθε τὸν οὐρανὸν ἀνεῳγότα, καὶ τοὺς ἀγγέλους τοῦ Θεοῦ ἀναβαίνοντας καὶ καταβαίνοντας	1		Here, Jesus refers to an event described in the book of Genesis. While fleeing from his brother, Jacob had a dream in which he saw angels descending from and ascending to heaven. If it would be helpful to your readers who may not be familiar with the story, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “just as Jacob saw in his vision, you will see heaven opened, and the angels of God ascending and descending” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	1	51	yuye	figs-you	λέγω ὑμῖν	1		Jesus is using the plural form of **you** to indicate that he is speaking to all those who are with him at that moment. He is not only speaking to Nathaniel. If it would be misunderstood to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I say to all of you here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+JHN	1	51	s28k	figs-explicit	ὄψεσθε τὸν οὐρανὸν ἀνεῳγότα, καὶ τοὺς ἀγγέλους τοῦ Θεοῦ ἀναβαίνοντας καὶ καταβαίνοντας	1		Here, Jesus refers to an event described in the book of Genesis. While fleeing from his brother, Jacob had a dream in which he saw angels descending from and ascending to heaven. If it would be helpful to your readers who may not be familiar with the story, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “just as Jacob saw in his vision, you will see heaven opened, and the angels of God ascending and descending” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	1	51	ahj4	figs-123person	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	1	51	z4a7	figs-explicit	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		The title **Son of Man** is equivalent to “Messiah.” Jesus uses it to claim that role subtly and implicitly. You may want to translate this title directly into your language. On the other hand, if you think it would be helpful to your readers, you could state what it means. See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	2	intro	jav2			0		# John 2 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>1. Jesus’ first sign: he turns water into wine (2:1–12)<br>2. Jesus causes controversy in the Temple (2:13–22)<br>3. Jesus’ ministry in Jerusalem at Passover (2:23–25)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Wine<br><br>The Jews drank wine at many meals and especially when they were celebrating special events. They did not believe that it was a sin to drink wine.<br><br>### Driving out the money changers<br><br>Jesus drove the money changers out of the temple to show that he had authority over the temple and over all of Israel. As the Son of God, it was his Father’s temple that was being used inappropriately for making money. Therefore, he had the authority to drive out those who were misusing the temple.<br><br>### “He knew what was in man”<br><br>Jesus knew what other people were thinking only because he is the Son of Man and the Son of God. Because he is the Son of God, he has supernatural insight into what other people were thinking and could correctly judge their intentions.<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### “His disciples remembered”<br><br>John used this phrase to stop telling the main historical narrative and to tell about something that happened much later. The Jewish authorities spoke to Jesus right after he scolded the sellers in the temple in ([2:16](../02/16.md)). Jesus’ disciples remembered what the prophet had written long ago and that Jesus was talking about the temple of his body after Jesus became alive again ([2:17](../02/17.md) and [2:22](../02/22.md)).
@@ -221,10 +221,10 @@ JHN	2	4	v5x5	figs-metonymy	οὔπω ἥκει ἡ ὥρα μου	1	My time has
 JHN	2	5	d5wy	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	2	6	y7p3	translate-bvolume	μετρητὰς δύο ἢ τρεῖς	1	two to three metretes	A **metretes** was equivalent to about 40 liters. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the quantity in modern measurements. Alternatively, to help your readers recognize that the biblical writings come from long ago when people used different measurements, you could express the amount using the ancient measurement, the metrete, and explain the equivalent in modern measurements in a footnote. Alternate translation: “80 to 120 liters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
 JHN	2	7	hv80	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-JHN	2	7	byc0	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1		Here, **them** refers to the servants at the wedding. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	2	7	byc0	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1		Here, **them** refers to the servants at the wedding. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	2	7	vt75		ἕως ἄνω	1	to the brim	The **brim** is the top edge of the water pot. Alternate translation: “to the very top”
 JHN	2	8	xbw3	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-JHN	2	8	y52q	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς…οἱ δὲ ἤνεγκαν	1		Here, **them** and **they** refer to the servants at the wedding. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the servants … And the servants carried” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	2	8	y52q	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς…οἱ δὲ ἤνεγκαν	1		Here, **them** and **they** refer to the servants at the wedding. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the servants … And the servants carried” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	2	8	h9gr		τῷ ἀρχιτρικλίνῳ	1	the head waiter	The term **head waiter** refers to the person in charge of the servants who served the food and drink at meals and feasts.
 JHN	2	9	t0zb		ὁ ἀρχιτρίκλινος…ὁ ἀρχιτρίκλινος	1		See how you translated this term in the previous verse.
 JHN	2	9	yg44	writing-background		0		John provides this background information about who knew where the wine came from in order to emphasize the veracity of this miracle. The head waiter did not know that the wine was originally water from the water pots. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
@@ -237,29 +237,29 @@ JHN	2	11	ear7	figs-explicit	ἀρχὴν τῶν σημείων	1		John wrote mu
 JHN	2	11	r5kb	translate-names	Κανὰ	1	Cana	See how you translated this name in [verse 1](../02/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	2	11	z3tk	figs-abstractnouns	ἐφανέρωσεν τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ	1	revealed his glory	Here, **glory** refers to the mighty power of Jesus that enabled him to do miracles. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “revealed his glorious power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	2	12	gw2f	writing-newevent	μετὰ τοῦτο	1		**After this** introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time afterward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
-JHN	2	12	mmkj	figs-explicit	μετὰ τοῦτο	1		Here, **this** refers to the what took place in Cana that was described in [2:1–11](../02/01.md). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “After Jesus’ first sign in Cana” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	2	12	mmkj	figs-explicit	μετὰ τοῦτο	1		Here, **this** refers to the what took place in Cana that was described in [2:1–11](../02/01.md). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “After Jesus’ first sign in Cana” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	2	12	h9tu		κατέβη	1	went down	This indicates that they went from a higher place to a lower place. Capernaum is at a lower elevation than Cana.
 JHN	2	12	x3f7	translate-names	Καφαρναοὺμ	1	his brothers	**Capernaum** is the name of a town in the region of Galilee. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	2	13	xr29		ἀνέβη εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα	1	went up to Jerusalem	This indicates that Jesus went from a lower place to a higher place. Jerusalem is built on a hill.
-JHN	2	14	sa75	figs-explicit	τοὺς πωλοῦντας βόας καὶ πρόβατα καὶ περιστερὰς	1	sellers of oxen and sheep and pigeons	These animals were used for sacrifices in the temple. People were buying animals in the temple courtyard in order to sacrifice them to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “those selling oxen and sheep and pigeons for people to sacrifice to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	2	14	qu9k	figs-explicit	κερματιστὰς	1	money changers	Jewish authorities required people who wanted to buy animals for sacrifices in the temple to exchange their money for special money from the **money changers**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “people who exchanged money for special money approved for temple use” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	2	14	i8lv	figs-explicit	καθημένους	1	were sitting there	The next verse makes it clear that these people are in the temple courtyard. That area was intended for worship and not for commerce. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “sitting in the temple courtyard that was intended for worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	2	15	x6et	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	So	Here John is telling his readers what Jesus did as a result of the commerce he saw going on in the temple. If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Consequently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-JHN	2	15	nn6y	writing-pronouns	πάντας	1		Here, **them all** refers to the people selling the animals and the money changers. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “all the sellers and money changers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	2	14	sa75	figs-explicit	τοὺς πωλοῦντας βόας καὶ πρόβατα καὶ περιστερὰς	1	sellers of oxen and sheep and pigeons	These animals were used for sacrifices in the temple. People were buying animals in the temple courtyard in order to sacrifice them to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “those selling oxen and sheep and pigeons for people to sacrifice to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	2	14	qu9k	figs-explicit	κερματιστὰς	1	money changers	Jewish authorities required people who wanted to buy animals for sacrifices in the temple to exchange their money for special money from the **money changers**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “people who exchanged money for special money approved for temple use” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	2	14	i8lv	figs-explicit	καθημένους	1	were sitting there	The next verse makes it clear that these people are in the temple courtyard. That area was intended for worship and not for commerce. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “sitting in the temple courtyard that was intended for worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	2	15	x6et	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	So	Here John is telling his readers what Jesus did as a result of the commerce he saw going on in the temple. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Consequently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+JHN	2	15	nn6y	writing-pronouns	πάντας	1		Here, **them all** refers to the people selling the animals and the money changers. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “all the sellers and money changers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	2	16	h6qy	figs-explicit	τὸν οἶκον τοῦ πατρός μου οἶκον ἐμπορίου	1	the house of my Father	Jesus uses **the house of my Father** to refer to the temple. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the house of my Father, which is the temple, a house of commerce” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	2	16	grg3	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ πατρός μου	1	my Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	2	17	c2pu	figs-activepassive	γεγραμμένον ἐστίν	1	it was written	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone had written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	2	17	q91v	writing-quotations	γεγραμμένον ἐστίν	1		Here John uses **it is written** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Psalm 69:9](../../psa/69/09.md)). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that John is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it had been written in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	2	17	jp55	figs-quotemarks	ὁ ζῆλος τοῦ οἴκου σου καταφάγεταί με	1		This sentence is a quotation from [Psalm 69:9](../../psa/69/09.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-JHN	2	17	pvct	figs-yousingular	τοῦ οἴκου σου	1		Here, **your** refers to God and is singular. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for God’s house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+JHN	2	17	pvct	figs-yousingular	τοῦ οἴκου σου	1		Here, **your** refers to God and is singular. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for God’s house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 JHN	2	17	ua3v	figs-explicit	τοῦ οἴκου σου	1	your house	Here, **house** refers to the temple, which is often called God’s **house** in the Bible. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “for your house, the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	2	17	gg1w	figs-metaphor	καταφάγεταί	1	consume	Here, the author uses **consume** figuratively to refer to Jesus’ intense love for the temple, as if it were a fire that burned within him. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “will be intense within” or “will be like a fire that consumes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	2	18	r5rw	figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1	these things	Here, **these things** refers to Jesus’ actions against the animal sellers and money changers in the temple. (See the discussion of this event in the General Notes to this chapter.) If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these disruptive activities in the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	2	18	r5rw	figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1	these things	Here, **these things** refers to Jesus’ actions against the animal sellers and money changers in the temple. (See the discussion of this event in the General Notes to this chapter.) If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these disruptive activities in the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	2	19	mp6i	figs-imperative	λύσατε τὸν ναὸν τοῦτον, καὶ ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις ἐγερῶ αὐτόν	1	Destroy this temple, and in three days I will raise it up	This is an imperative, but it should be translated as introducing a hypothetical situation rather than as a command. Jesus is stating a hypothetical situation in which the event in the second clause would happen if the event in the first clause took place. In this case, Jesus would certainly **raise** the **temple** up if the Jewish authorities were to **destroy** it. Alternate translation: “If you destroy this temple, then in three days I will raise it up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 JHN	2	19	of4u	figs-extrainfo	λύσατε τὸν ναὸν τοῦτον, καὶ ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις ἐγερῶ αὐτόν	1		Here, John records Jesus using the words **Destroy** and **raise** figuratively to describe his killing and resurrection, as if tearing down and rebuilding a building. However, the Jewish leaders did not understand this and Jesus does not explain the metaphor to them. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 JHN	2	20	qb4x	figs-rquestion	σὺ ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις ἐγερεῖς αὐτόν?	1		The Jewish leaders are using the question form for emphasis. They think that Jesus wants to tear down the temple and rebuild it in three days. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you cannot possibly rebuild it in three days!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	2	21	g6jx	writing-endofstory		0	General Information:	[Verses 21–22](../02/21.md) are a comment John made about the story that was described in [2:13–20](../02/13.md). These verses tell about something that happened later. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
-JHN	2	21	b440	writing-pronouns	ἐκεῖνος δὲ ἔλεγεν	1		Here, **that one** refers to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “But Jesus was speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	2	21	b440	writing-pronouns	ἐκεῖνος δὲ ἔλεγεν	1		Here, **that one** refers to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “But Jesus was speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	2	22	oznm	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1		**Therefore** indicates that in this verse John is giving the result of Jesus making the statement in [2:19](../02/19.md). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Because Jesus said this about his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 JHN	2	22	jejg	figs-activepassive	ἠγέρθη ἐκ νεκρῶν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “God raised him from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	2	22	nxug		ἐμνήσθησαν οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ	1		Here, John is speaking about something that happened long after the event described in the previous verses. See the discussion of this in the General Notes to this chapter.
@@ -277,9 +277,9 @@ JHN	2	25	lxro	figs-explicit	τί ἦν ἐν τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ	1		This refe
 JHN	3	intro	i7a7			0		# John 3 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>1. Jesus teaches Nicodemus about being born again (3:1–21)<br>2. John the Baptist testifies about Jesus (3:22–36)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Light and Darkness<br><br>The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong, and to begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])<br><br>### The kingdom of God<br><br>The kingdom of God is a concept that is very rich in meaning. It includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God, but it also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when Jesus returns and rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. The unifying concept behind all of these ideas is God ruling and people embracing God’s rule over their lives. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/kingdomofgod]])<br><br>### Born again<br><br>A major idea in this chapter is the spiritual new birth that Jesus says is necessary in order for someone to enter the kingdom of God [3:3–8](../03/03.md). Jesus also uses the following expressions to refer to being born again: “born from water and the Spirit” ([3:4](../03/04.md)) and “born from the Spirit” ([3:6,8](../03/06.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/bornagain]])<br><br>## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### “Son of Man”<br><br>Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” twice in this chapter ([3:13–14](../03/13.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	3	1	yl6f	writing-newevent	δὲ	1		**Now** here introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related in the previous chapter. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 JHN	3	1	s9p9	writing-participants	ἦν…ἄνθρωπος ἐκ τῶν Φαρισαίων, Νικόδημος ὄνομα αὐτῷ,	1	Now	Here, **there was a man** is used to introduce Nicodemus as a new character in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. The phrase **from the Pharisees** identifies him as member of a strict Jewish religious sect. Alternate translation: “there was a man named Nicodemus, who was a member of a strict Jewish religious group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
-JHN	3	1	fz6f	figs-explicit	ἄρχων τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1		This phrase means that Nicodemus was a member of the Jewish religious leadership, specifically the Jewish council called the Sanhedrin which made decisions about Jewish law. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/council]]) If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a member of the Jewish ruling council” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	3	2	sxo1	writing-pronouns	οὗτος	1		**This one** here refers to Nicodemus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Nicodemus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-JHN	3	2	n84a	writing-pronouns	πρὸς αὐτὸν	1		Here, **him** refers to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	3	1	fz6f	figs-explicit	ἄρχων τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1		This phrase means that Nicodemus was a member of the Jewish religious leadership, specifically the Jewish council called the Sanhedrin which made decisions about Jewish law. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/council]]) If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a member of the Jewish ruling council” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	3	2	sxo1	writing-pronouns	οὗτος	1		**This one** here refers to Nicodemus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Nicodemus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	3	2	n84a	writing-pronouns	πρὸς αὐτὸν	1		Here, **him** refers to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	3	2	skq8	figs-exclusive	οἴδαμεν	1	we know	Here, **we** is exclusive. Nicodemus is only referring to himself and the other members of the Jewish council. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 JHN	3	2	hxcr	figs-metaphor	ἐὰν μὴ ᾖ ὁ Θεὸς μετ’ αὐτοῦ	1		Here, Nicodemus uses **with him** figuratively to refer to God’s help. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “without God’s help” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	3	3	nz18	figs-doublet	ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω σοι	1	Truly, truly	Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -288,8 +288,8 @@ JHN	3	3	t8pt		γεννηθῇ ἄνωθεν	1	born again	Here, the word translat
 JHN	3	3	i0ew	figs-metaphor	ἰδεῖν τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here Jesus uses **see** figuratively to refer to experiencing an event or state. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to experience the kingdom of God” or “to participate in the kingdom of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	3	3	ikj9	figs-metaphor	τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	kingdom of God	Here this phrase refers to both the place where God currently rules in heaven and to the earth when God rules over it in the future. See the discussion of this concept in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “the place where God rules” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	3	4	z64b	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	a second time	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-JHN	3	4	wa1p	figs-rquestion	πῶς δύναται ἄνθρωπος γεννηθῆναι, γέρων ὤν?	1	How can a man be born when he is old?	Nicodemus uses this question to emphasize that this cannot happen. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “A man certainly cannot be born again when he is old!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-JHN	3	4	yk9d	figs-rquestion	μὴ δύναται εἰς τὴν κοιλίαν τῆς μητρὸς αὐτοῦ δεύτερον εἰσελθεῖν καὶ γεννηθῆναι?	1	He cannot enter a second time into his mother’s womb and be born, can he?	Nicodemus uses this question to emphasize his belief that a second birth is impossible. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “He surely cannot enter a second time into his mother’s womb!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+JHN	3	4	wa1p	figs-rquestion	πῶς δύναται ἄνθρωπος γεννηθῆναι, γέρων ὤν?	1	How can a man be born when he is old?	Nicodemus uses this question to emphasize that this cannot happen. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “A man certainly cannot be born again when he is old!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+JHN	3	4	yk9d	figs-rquestion	μὴ δύναται εἰς τὴν κοιλίαν τῆς μητρὸς αὐτοῦ δεύτερον εἰσελθεῖν καὶ γεννηθῆναι?	1	He cannot enter a second time into his mother’s womb and be born, can he?	Nicodemus uses this question to emphasize his belief that a second birth is impossible. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “He surely cannot enter a second time into his mother’s womb!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	3	5	il52	figs-doublet	ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω σοι	1	Truly, truly	Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this is in [3:3](../03/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	3	5	n6d7	figs-metaphor	γεννηθῇ ἐξ ὕδατος καὶ Πνεύματος	1	born of water and the Spirit	The phrase **born from water and Spirit** could refer to: (1) spiritual birth that includes cleansing from sin and spiritual transformation by the Holy Spirit. In this case, Jesus’ words would be understood as a reference to Ezekiel 36:25–27, which Nicodemus would have been familiar with. Alternate translation: “would be born again by cleansing and the Spirit.” (2) physical birth and spiritual birth. Alternate translation: “would be born physically and spiritually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	3	5	e1dj	figs-metaphor	εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here Jesus uses **enter into** figuratively to refer to experiencing something. The meaning is similar to the meaning of “see” in [3:3](../03/03.md). Alternate translation: “to experience the kingdom of God” or “to participate in the kingdom of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -299,16 +299,16 @@ JHN	3	6	rru5	figs-metonymy	τῆς σαρκὸς, σάρξ ἐστιν	1		Here J
 JHN	3	6	v3g8	figs-explicit	τὸ γεγεννημένον ἐκ τοῦ Πνεύματος	1		Here, **the Spirit** refers to the Holy Spirit, who enables people to be born again. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “what has been born again by means of the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	3	6	lfg1	figs-explicit	πνεῦμά	1		Here, **spirit** refers to the new spiritual nature that God gives a person when they are born again. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/bornagain]]) If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “a new spiritual nature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	3	7	t2sl	figs-extrainfo	γεννηθῆναι ἄνωθεν	1		See how you translated this in [3:3](../03/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
-JHN	3	8	p87y	figs-metaphor	τὸ πνεῦμα ὅπου θέλει, πνεῖ	1	The wind blows wherever it wishes	The word translated **wind** can also mean spirit. Jesus here speaks figuratively of the Holy Spirit, as if he were **wind**. Just like people in Jesus’ time could not understand how the **wind** blew but could observe the effects of the wind, people cannot understand how the Holy Spirit works but can witness the effects of his work. If this might confuse your readers, you could say this with a simile. Alternate translation: “The Holy Spirit is like the wind that blows wherever it wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	3	8	p87y	figs-metaphor	τὸ πνεῦμα ὅπου θέλει, πνεῖ	1	The wind blows wherever it wishes	The word translated **wind** can also mean spirit. Jesus here speaks figuratively of the Holy Spirit, as if he were **wind**. Just like people in Jesus’ time could not understand how the **wind** blew but could observe the effects of the wind, people cannot understand how the Holy Spirit works but can witness the effects of his work. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this with a simile. Alternate translation: “The Holy Spirit is like the wind that blows wherever it wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	3	8	mxjc		οὕτως ἐστὶν	1		This phrase connects this sentence with the previous sentence. In the same way that people cannot understand the wind but recognize its effects, people who are not born from the Spirit cannot understand those who are born from the Spirit but can recognize the effects of the new birth. Alternate translation: “So it is with” or “So it happens with”
 JHN	3	8	k9ay		ὁ γεγεννημένος ἐκ τοῦ Πνεύματος	1		See how you translated this phrase in [3:6](../03/06.md).
 JHN	3	8	wh4z	figs-explicit	τοῦ Πνεύματος	1		Here, **the Spirit** refers to the Holy Spirit, who enables people to be born again. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	3	9	g4ji	figs-rquestion	πῶς δύναται ταῦτα γενέσθαι?	1	How can these things be?	This question could be: (1) a genuine question that shows that Nicodemus is confused. Alternate translation: “How are these things possible” (2) a rhetorical question Nicodemus uses to add emphasis to the statement. Alternate translation: “These things cannot be!” or “These things are impossible!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-JHN	3	9	phe2	figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1		Here, **these things** refers to all that Jesus had spoken in [3:3–8](../03/03.md). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these things you have just told me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	3	9	phe2	figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1		Here, **these things** refers to all that Jesus had spoken in [3:3–8](../03/03.md). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these things you have just told me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	3	10	gw2h	figs-rquestion	σὺ εἶ ὁ διδάσκαλος τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ, καὶ ταῦτα οὐ γινώσκεις	1	Are you a teacher of Israel, and yet you do not understand these things?	Jesus is using the question form for emphasis. He is not asking Nicodemus a question in order to get information. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are a teacher of Israel, so I am surprised you do not understand these things!” or “You are a teacher of Israel, so you should understand these things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-JHN	3	10	gbu5	figs-you	σὺ εἶ ὁ διδάσκαλος…οὐ γινώσκεις	1	Are you a teacher … yet you do not understand	The word **you** is singular and refers to Nicodemus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Are you, Nicodemus, the teacher … you do not understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+JHN	3	10	gbu5	figs-you	σὺ εἶ ὁ διδάσκαλος…οὐ γινώσκεις	1	Are you a teacher … yet you do not understand	The word **you** is singular and refers to Nicodemus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Are you, Nicodemus, the teacher … you do not understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 JHN	3	10	ljiy	figs-explicit	ὁ διδάσκαλος τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ	1		Here, **the teacher** indicates that Nicodemus was recognized as a master teacher and religious authority in the land of Israel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the renowned religious teacher in Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	3	10	vx3u	figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1		Here, **these things** refers to all that Jesus had spoken in [3:3–8](../03/03.md). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. See how you translated this phrase is the previous verse. Alternate translation: “these things you have just told me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	3	10	vx3u	figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1		Here, **these things** refers to all that Jesus had spoken in [3:3–8](../03/03.md). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. See how you translated this phrase is the previous verse. Alternate translation: “these things you have just told me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	3	11	jt1f	figs-doublet	ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω σοι	1	Truly, truly	Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this is in [3:3](../03/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	3	11	upi7	figs-exclusive	ὃ οἴδαμεν λαλοῦμεν…τὴν μαρτυρίαν ἡμῶν	1	we speak	When Jesus says **we** and **our** in this verse, he was not including Nicodemus. Jesus used these pronouns as a contrast to Nicodemus saying **we** in [3:2](../03/02.md). While Nicodemus used **we** to refer to himself and the other Jewish religious leaders, Jesus could have been referring to: (1) himself and his disciples. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “my disciples and I speak what we know … our testimony” (2) himself and the other members of the Godhead. Alternate translation: “the Father, Spirit, and I speak what we know … our testimony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 JHN	3	11	j1k1	figs-you	οὐ λαμβάνετε	1	you do not accept	The word **you** is plural and could refer to: (1) the Jewish people in general. Alternate translation: “you Jews” (2) Nicodemus and his fellow Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “you Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
@@ -336,13 +336,13 @@ JHN	3	17	b7vf	figs-parallelism	οὐ γὰρ ἀπέστειλεν ὁ Θεὸς
 JHN	3	17	haut	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Υἱὸν	1		**Son** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	3	17	mjjg	figs-123person	τὸν Υἱὸν…δι’ αὐτοῦ	1		Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “me … through me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	3	17	amqn	figs-explicit	τὸν κόσμον	1		Here, **world** refers to the universe God created. It does not refer only to the people in the world or only to the earth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the universe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	3	17	f5o9	writing-pronouns	ἵνα κρίνῃ	1		Here, **he** refers to God; it does not refer to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that God might condemn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	3	17	f5o9	writing-pronouns	ἵνα κρίνῃ	1		Here, **he** refers to God; it does not refer to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that God might condemn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	3	17	zv1i		ἵνα κρίνῃ τὸν κόσμον	1		The word translated **condemn** means to judge someone to be guilty and deserving of punishment. Alternate translation: “so that he might judge the world as guilty”
 JHN	3	17	ynyh	figs-metonymy	τὸν κόσμον…ὁ κόσμος	2		Here, **world** refers to the people who live in it. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people in the world … the people in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	3	17	kuow	figs-activepassive	ἵνα σωθῇ ὁ κόσμος	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “so that God might save the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	3	17	exd0		δι’ αὐτοῦ	1		This phrase indicates the means by which God would save the world. Alternate translation: “by means of him”
 JHN	3	18	zl5p		οὐ κρίνεται…ἤδη κέκριται	1		The word translated **condemn** means to judge someone to be guilty and deserving of punishment. See how you translated it in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “is not judged as guilty … has already been judged as guilty”
-JHN	3	18	x14j	writing-pronouns	εἰς αὐτὸν	1		Here, **him** refers to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	3	18	x14j	writing-pronouns	εἰς αὐτὸν	1		Here, **him** refers to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	3	18	tmz7	figs-activepassive	ὁ πιστεύων εἰς αὐτὸν οὐ κρίνεται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “God does not condemn the one who believes in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	3	18	t21p	figs-activepassive	ὁ δὲ μὴ πιστεύων, ἤδη κέκριται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “but God has already condemned the one who does not believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	3	18	ps4n	figs-metonymy	μὴ πεπίστευκεν εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ μονογενοῦς Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here, **name** represents Jesus’ identity and everything about him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he has not believed in the One and Only Son of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -354,26 +354,26 @@ JHN	3	19	gh4i	figs-123person	τὸ φῶς ἐλήλυθεν εἰς τὸν κ
 JHN	3	19	fvvg	figs-gendernotations	οἱ ἄνθρωποι	1		Although the term **men** is masculine, Jesus uses the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 JHN	3	19	h4nk	figs-metaphor	ἠγάπησαν οἱ ἄνθρωποι…τὸ σκότος	1	men loved the darkness	Here Jesus uses **darkness** figuratively to refer to what is false and evil. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly. See the discussion of light and darkness in the General Notes for Chapter 1. Alternate translation: “men loved evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	3	20	velv	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates another reason why men love the darkness, as stated in the previous verse. People who do evil things hate the light. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-JHN	3	20	bus8		πᾶς…ὁ φαῦλα πράσσων	1		This phrase refers to someone who habitually does evil things. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “everyone who habitually does evil”
+JHN	3	20	bus8		πᾶς…ὁ φαῦλα πράσσων	1		This phrase refers to someone who habitually does evil things. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “everyone who habitually does evil”
 JHN	3	20	cg3i	figs-metaphor	τὸ φῶς, καὶ…πρὸς τὸ φῶς	1		See how you translated **the light** in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who revealed the true and good things of God, and … to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	3	20	s49o	figs-123person	τὸ φῶς, καὶ…πρὸς τὸ φῶς	1		Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If your language does not allow people to speak of themselves in the third person, you may need to specify who **the light** is. Alternate translation: “me, the light, and … to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	3	20	u25p	figs-activepassive	ἵνα μὴ ἐλεγχθῇ τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ	1	so that his deeds will not be exposed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that the light might not expose his deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	3	21	q77t		ὁ…ποιῶν τὴν ἀλήθειαν	1		This phrase refers to someone who habitually does true things. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “everyone who habitually does the truth”
+JHN	3	21	q77t		ὁ…ποιῶν τὴν ἀλήθειαν	1		This phrase refers to someone who habitually does true things. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “everyone who habitually does the truth”
 JHN	3	21	kpb9	figs-abstractnouns	ὁ…ποιῶν τὴν ἀλήθειαν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the one who does true things” or “the one who does what is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	3	21	ud15	figs-metaphor	ἔρχεται πρὸς τὸ φῶς	1		See how you translated **the light** in the previous two verses. Alternate translation: “comes to Jesus, who revealed the true and good things of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	3	21	k8wr	figs-123person	ἔρχεται πρὸς τὸ φῶς	1		Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If your language does not allow people to speak of themselves in the third person, you may need to specify who **the light** is. See how you translated this expression in the previous two verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	3	21	l7ax	figs-activepassive	φανερωθῇ αὐτοῦ τὰ ἔργα	1	plainly seen that his deeds	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the light might reveal his deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	3	21	de2j		ὅτι ἐν Θεῷ ἐστιν εἰργασμένα	1		This clause indicates what the light will reveal about the deeds of those who come to the light. The phrase **in God** indicates that the works these people have done were done with God’s help and not by their own strength or effort. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “that they have been done with God’s help”
+JHN	3	21	de2j		ὅτι ἐν Θεῷ ἐστιν εἰργασμένα	1		This clause indicates what the light will reveal about the deeds of those who come to the light. The phrase **in God** indicates that the works these people have done were done with God’s help and not by their own strength or effort. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “that they have been done with God’s help”
 JHN	3	22	uy4j	writing-newevent	μετὰ ταῦτα	1	After this	This phrase introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 JHN	3	23	m4yg	figs-explicit	ὁ Ἰωάννης	1		Here, **John** refers to Jesus’ cousin, often referred to as “John the Baptist.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/johnthebaptist]]) It does not refer to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Immerser” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	3	23	x1ge	translate-names	Αἰνὼν	1	Aenon	**Aenon** is the name of a town near the Jordan River close to Samaria. **Aenon** is the Aramaic word for springs of water, which explains John’s comment in the next clause about there being much water there. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	3	23	e5v2	translate-names	τοῦ Σαλείμ	1	Salim	**Salim** is the name of a town near the Jordan River close to Samaria. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	3	23	ukz2	figs-activepassive	ἐβαπτίζοντο	1	were being baptized	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John implies that John the Baptist did it. Alternate translation: “John was baptizing them” or “he was baptizing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	3	24	v13x	figs-activepassive	οὔπω…ἦν βεβλημένος	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, [Mark 6:17](../../mrk/06/17.md) implies that Herod did it. Alternate translation: “Herod had not yet thrown”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+JHN	3	24	v13x	figs-activepassive	οὔπω…ἦν βεβλημένος…ὁ Ἰωάννης	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, [Mark 6:17](../../mrk/06/17.md) implies that Herod did it. Alternate translation: “Herod had not yet thrown John”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	3	25	fuq2	figs-abstractnouns	ἐγένετο οὖν ζήτησις ἐκ τῶν μαθητῶν Ἰωάννου	1	a dispute	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **dispute**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Then the disciples of John began arguing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	3	25	ft8r	figs-activepassive	ἐγένετο οὖν ζήτησις ἐκ τῶν μαθητῶν Ἰωάννου μετὰ Ἰουδαίου	1	Then there arose a dispute between some of John’s disciples and a Jew	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Then John’s disciples and a Jew began to dispute” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	3	25	qzq7	figs-explicit	Ἰωάννου	1		Here, **John** refers to Jesus’ cousin, often referred to as “John the Baptist.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/johnthebaptist]]) It does not refer to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of John the Baptist” or “of John the Immerser” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	3	26	uuvj	writing-pronouns	ἦλθον	1		Here, **they** refers to John the Baptist’s disciples, who were disputing in the previous verse. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say it explicitly. Alternate translation: “John’s disciples went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	3	26	uuvj	writing-pronouns	ἦλθον	1		Here, **they** refers to John the Baptist’s disciples, who were disputing in the previous verse. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “John’s disciples went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	3	26	cxy7	figs-explicit	ὃς ἦν μετὰ σοῦ πέραν τοῦ Ἰορδάνου, ᾧ σὺ μεμαρτύρηκας	1		This phrase refers to Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who was with you beyond the Jordan, about whom you had testified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	3	26	jr28	figs-metaphor	ἴδε, οὗτος βαπτίζει	1	you have testified, look, he is baptizing,	John the Baptist’s disciples used the term **behold** to call John’s attention to what Jesus was doing. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. Alternate translation: “see how he is baptizing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	3	26	j8di	figs-hyperbole	πάντες ἔρχονται πρὸς αὐτόν	1		Here John the Baptist’s disciples use the word **all** as a generalization for emphasis. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “it seems like everyone is going to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
@@ -383,13 +383,13 @@ JHN	3	27	hap4	figs-metonymy	ᾖ δεδομένον αὐτῷ ἐκ τοῦ ο
 JHN	3	28	l9yt	figs-you	αὐτοὶ ὑμεῖς	1	You yourselves	Here, **You** is plural and refers to all the people to whom John the Baptist is talking. Alternate translation: “You all” or “All of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 JHN	3	28	p92u	figs-quotesinquotes	ὅτι εἶπον, οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγὼ ὁ Χριστός, ἀλλ’, ὅτι ἀπεσταλμένος εἰμὶ ἔμπροσθεν ἐκείνου	1		If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “that I said that I am not the Christ but that I have been sent before that one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 JHN	3	28	nf9l	figs-activepassive	ἀπεσταλμένος εἰμὶ ἔμπροσθεν ἐκείνου	1	I have been sent before him	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God sent me before that one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	3	28	vguf	writing-pronouns	ἐκείνου	1		Here, **that** refers to Jesus, whom John has called “the Christ” in the previous clause. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “the Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	3	28	vguf	writing-pronouns	ἐκείνου	1		Here, **that** refers to Jesus, whom John has called “the Christ” in the previous clause. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “the Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	3	29	p569	figs-metaphor	ὁ ἔχων τὴν νύμφην, νυμφίος ἐστίν…τοῦ νυμφίου…τὴν φωνὴν τοῦ νυμφίου	1	The bride belongs to the bridegroom	John the Baptist uses **bride** and **bridegroom** figuratively to refer to people who believe in Jesus and Jesus himself, respectively. Since these are important terms for Christians and for Jesus, you should translate the words directly and not provide a non-figurative explanation in the text of your translation. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate these words with similes. Alternate translation: “The one who is like one who has a bride is like a bridegroom … of the one who is like a bridegroom … of the voice of one who is like a bridegroom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	3	29	nd5o	figs-123person	ὁ δὲ φίλος τοῦ νυμφίου	1		John the Baptist is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN	3	29	nd5o	figs-123person	ὁ δὲ φίλος τοῦ νυμφίου	1		John the Baptist is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “But I am the friend of the bridegroom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	3	29	nfvx	figs-doublet	χαρᾷ χαίρει	1		These words mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how much joy John had because Jesus had come. Alternate translation: “rejoices greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	3	29	wkb8	figs-activepassive	αὕτη…ἡ χαρὰ ἡ ἐμὴ πεπλήρωται	1	This, then, is my joy made complete	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I rejoice greatly” or “I rejoice with complete joy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	3	29	hnw2	figs-123person	αὕτη…ἡ χαρὰ ἡ ἐμὴ	1	my joy	Here, **my** refers to John the Baptist, the one who is speaking. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this joy that I, John, have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-JHN	3	30	kn9s	writing-pronouns	ἐκεῖνον δεῖ αὐξάνειν	1	He must increase	Here, **that one** refers to Jesus, whom John the Baptist called “the bridegroom” in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “It is necessary for Jesus to increase” or “It is necessary for the bridegroom to increase” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	3	29	hnw2	figs-123person	αὕτη…ἡ χαρὰ ἡ ἐμὴ	1	my joy	Here, **my** refers to John the Baptist, the one who is speaking. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this joy that I, John, have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN	3	30	kn9s	writing-pronouns	ἐκεῖνον δεῖ αὐξάνειν	1	He must increase	Here, **that one** refers to Jesus, whom John the Baptist called “the bridegroom” in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “It is necessary for Jesus to increase” or “It is necessary for the bridegroom to increase” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	3	30	u5e0	figs-metaphor	αὐξάνειν…ἐλαττοῦσθαι	1		John the Baptist uses **increase** figuratively to refer to growing in importance and influence, while **decrease** refers to diminishing in importance and influence. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to be more influential … to be less influential” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	3	31	wu2j	figs-doublet	ὁ ἄνωθεν ἐρχόμενος, ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστίν…ὁ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ἐρχόμενος, ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστίν	1		These two phrases mean basically the same thing. John repeats himself to emphasize that Jesus is greater than every person and every thing. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could combine these phrases and include words that show emphasis. Alternate translation: “The one who comes from heaven is certainly above all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	3	31	qd7t	figs-explicit	ὁ ἄνωθεν ἐρχόμενος, ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστίν…ὁ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ἐρχόμενος, ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστίν	1	He who comes from above is above all	Both of these phrases refer to Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, the one who comes from above, is above all things … Jesus, the one who comes from heaven, is above all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -399,22 +399,22 @@ JHN	3	31	mhk9	figs-123person	ὁ ὢν ἐκ τῆς γῆς, ἐκ τῆς γ
 JHN	3	31	p05h	figs-metaphor	ἐκ τῆς γῆς ἐστιν	1		This phrase refers figuratively to having an earthly origin, which is the case for John the Baptist and every human being other than Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “originates from the earth” or “has an earthly origin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	3	31	ar7r	figs-metaphor	καὶ ἐκ τῆς γῆς λαλεῖ	1		This phrase refers figuratively to speaking based on an earthly perspective, which is the perspective of John the Baptist and every human being other than Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and speaks from an earthly perspective” or “and speaks as someone from the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	3	31	yj2t	figs-metaphor	ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστίν	2		John the Baptist uses **above** figuratively to refer to having superior status. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is superior to all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	3	32	c5yt	writing-pronouns	ὃ ἑώρακεν καὶ ἤκουσεν, τοῦτο μαρτυρεῖ…μαρτυρίαν αὐτοῦ	1	He testifies about what he has seen and heard	**He** and **his** in this verse refer to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus testifies about that which he has seen and heard … Jesus’ testimony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	3	32	c5yt	writing-pronouns	ὃ ἑώρακεν καὶ ἤκουσεν, τοῦτο μαρτυρεῖ…μαρτυρίαν αὐτοῦ	1	He testifies about what he has seen and heard	**He** and **his** in this verse refer to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus testifies about that which he has seen and heard … Jesus’ testimony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	3	32	umek	figs-explicit	ὃ ἑώρακεν καὶ ἤκουσεν	1		This phrase refers to what Jesus saw and heard while he was in heaven. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “which he has seen and heard in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	3	32	kqi1	figs-hyperbole	τὴν μαρτυρίαν αὐτοῦ, οὐδεὶς λαμβάνει	1	no one accepts his testimony	Here, John the Baptist exaggerates to emphasize that only a few people believed Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “very few people receive his testimony” or “it seems like no one receives his testimony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-JHN	3	33	k36d	figs-genericnoun	ὁ λαβὼν αὐτοῦ τὴν μαρτυρίαν	1	He who has received his testimony	This phrase does not refer to a specific person, but to any person who does this thing. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Anyone who has received his testimony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
-JHN	3	33	ygba	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ τὴν μαρτυρίαν	1		Here, **his** refers to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus’ testimony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	3	33	k36d	figs-genericnoun	ὁ λαβὼν αὐτοῦ τὴν μαρτυρίαν	1	He who has received his testimony	This phrase does not refer to a specific person, but to any person who does this thing. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Anyone who has received his testimony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+JHN	3	33	ygba	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ τὴν μαρτυρίαν	1		Here, **his** refers to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus’ testimony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	3	33	g5x4	translate-unknown	ἐσφράγισεν	1	has confirmed	This expression refers to placing a **seal** on a document in order to certify that what is written in the document is true. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/seal]]) Here this meaning is extended to refer to certifying that God is true. If your readers would not be familiar with this practice of sealing documents, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “has certified” or “has attested” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 JHN	3	34	rr83	figs-explicit	ὃν…ἀπέστειλεν ὁ Θεὸς	1	For the one whom God has sent	This phrase refers to Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, whom God has sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	3	34	p9wt	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	2		**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why the previous sentence is true. We know that Jesus speaks the words of God because God has given him the Holy Spirit. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “We know this because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-JHN	3	34	bnx8	writing-pronouns	οὐ…δίδωσιν	1	For he does not give the Spirit by measure	Here, **he** refers to God. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God does not give” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	3	34	bnx8	writing-pronouns	οὐ…δίδωσιν	1	For he does not give the Spirit by measure	Here, **he** refers to God. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God does not give” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	3	34	hmky	figs-ellipsis	οὐ…ἐκ μέτρου δίδωσιν τὸ Πνεῦμα	1		John is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context, especially this discussion of God giving to his Son in the next verse. Alternate translation: “he does not give the Spirit to him by measure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	3	34	cdia	figs-litotes	οὐ…ἐκ μέτρου δίδωσιν τὸ Πνεῦμα	1		This clause is a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that means the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he certainly gives the Spirit without measure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 JHN	3	35	hmk4	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατὴρ…Υἱόν	1	Father … Son	**Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	3	35	ha4e	figs-idiom	πάντα δέδωκεν ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ	1	given … into his hand	Here, giving **into his hand** means putting under his power or control. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “has given him control over everything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-JHN	3	36	u1ks	figs-genericnoun	ὁ πιστεύων	1	He who believes	This phrase does not refer to a specific person, but to any person who does this thing. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Anyone who believes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+JHN	3	36	u1ks	figs-genericnoun	ὁ πιστεύων	1	He who believes	This phrase does not refer to a specific person, but to any person who does this thing. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Anyone who believes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 JHN	3	36	ob32	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	εἰς τὸν Υἱὸν…τῷ Υἱῷ	1		**Son** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-JHN	3	36	hpte	figs-genericnoun	ὁ…ἀπειθῶν	2		This phrase does not refer to a specific person, but to any person who does this thing. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “anyone who disobeys” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+JHN	3	36	hpte	figs-genericnoun	ὁ…ἀπειθῶν	2		This phrase does not refer to a specific person, but to any person who does this thing. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “anyone who disobeys” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 JHN	3	36	joql		ὁ…ἀπειθῶν	2		The word translated **disobeys** can also be translated “does not believe.” Alternate translation: “the one who does not believe”
 JHN	3	36	ni86	figs-metaphor	οὐκ ὄψεται ζωήν	1		John the Baptist uses **see** metaphorically to refer to experiencing or participating in something. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will not experience life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	3	36	pzf5	figs-explicit	οὐκ ὄψεται ζωήν	1		Here, **life** refers to eternal life, as indicated by the previous clause. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “will not see eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -444,7 +444,7 @@ JHN	4	9	dpoh	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense i
 JHN	4	9	xdw7	figs-rquestion	πῶς σὺ Ἰουδαῖος ὢν, παρ’ ἐμοῦ πεῖν αἰτεῖς γυναικὸς Σαμαρείτιδος οὔσης?	1	How is it that you, being a Jew, are asking … for something to drink?	The woman is using the question form for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate her words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I cannot believe that you, being a Jew, are asking a Samaritan woman for a drink!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	4	9	px8w		οὐ…συνχρῶνται	1	have no dealings with	Alternate translation: “do not associate with” or “have nothing to do with”
 JHN	4	10	redz	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ ᾔδεις τὴν δωρεὰν τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ τίς ἐστιν ὁ λέγων σοι…σὺ ἂν ᾔτησας αὐτὸν	1		Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he knows that the condition is not true. He knows that the woman does not know the gift of God or who he is. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “You surely do not know the gift of God and who it is who is saying to you … Otherwise, you would have asked him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
-JHN	4	10	i9eg		τὴν δωρεὰν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here, **the gift of God** refers to the “living water” that Jesus mentions at the end of the verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God’s gift of living water”
+JHN	4	10	i9eg		τὴν δωρεὰν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here, **the gift of God** refers to the “living water” that Jesus mentions at the end of the verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God’s gift of living water”
 JHN	4	10	ed4r	figs-possession	τὴν δωρεὰν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Jesus uses **of** to describe a **gift** that comes from **God**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the gift from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JHN	4	10	oywu	figs-123person	τίς ἐστιν ὁ λέγων σοι…ᾔτησας αὐτὸν, καὶ ἔδωκεν	1		Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “who I am who is saying to you … would have asked me, and I would have given” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	4	10	ua0b	figs-quotesinquotes	ὁ λέγων σοι, δός μοι πεῖν,	1		If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “who is asking you to give him a drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
@@ -466,15 +466,15 @@ JHN	4	18	zpl1	figs-explicit	τοῦτο ἀληθὲς εἴρηκας	1	What yo
 JHN	4	19	tzs3	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	4	19	kfs1		κύριε	1	Sir	The Samaritan woman calls Jesus **Sir** in order to show respect or politeness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lord]])
 JHN	4	19	za2w	figs-metaphor	θεωρῶ ὅτι προφήτης εἶ σύ	1	I see that you are a prophet	The woman uses **see** figuratively to refer to understanding something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I understand that you are a prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	4	20	hp3m	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ ὄρει τούτῳ	1	Our fathers	Here, **this mountain** refers to Mount Gerizim, the mountain where the Samaritans built their own temple. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “here on Mount Gerizim” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	4	20	keg4	figs-you	ὑμεῖς λέγετε	1		Here the word **you** is plural and refers to the Jewish people. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you Jewish people say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-JHN	4	20	m27n	figs-explicit	ὁ τόπος	1		Here, **the place** refers to the Jewish temple, the place where God commanded his people to worship at that time. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	4	20	hp3m	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ ὄρει τούτῳ	1	Our fathers	Here, **this mountain** refers to Mount Gerizim, the mountain where the Samaritans built their own temple. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “here on Mount Gerizim” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	4	20	keg4	figs-you	ὑμεῖς λέγετε	1		Here the word **you** is plural and refers to the Jewish people. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you Jewish people say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+JHN	4	20	m27n	figs-explicit	ὁ τόπος	1		Here, **the place** refers to the Jewish temple, the place where God commanded his people to worship at that time. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	4	21	klz9	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	Believe me	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	4	21	tisq		γύναι	1		Here, **woman** refers to the Samaritan woman. If it is impolite to call someone “woman” in your language, you can use another word that is polite, or leave it out.
 JHN	4	21	eccs	figs-metonymy	ἔρχεται ὥρα	1		Here, **hour** refers to a point in time when something happens. It does not refer to a 60-minute length of time. See the discussion of this in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “a point in time is coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	4	21	ff27	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατρί	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	4	21	nu5m	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ ὄρει τούτῳ	1	you will worship the Father	Here, **this mountain** refers to Mount Gerizim. See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “here on Mount Gerizim” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	4	22	guu4	figs-you	ὑμεῖς…οὐκ οἴδατε	1	You worship what you do not know. We worship what we know	**You** is plural here in this verse and refers to the Samaritan people. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you Samaritan people … you all do not know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+JHN	4	22	guu4	figs-you	ὑμεῖς…οὐκ οἴδατε	1	You worship what you do not know. We worship what we know	**You** is plural here in this verse and refers to the Samaritan people. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you Samaritan people … you all do not know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 JHN	4	22	c54u	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς…οἴδαμεν	1		**We** here is exclusive. Jesus is only referring to himself and the Jewish people. Your language may require you to mark this form. Alternate translation: “We Jewish people … we all know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 JHN	4	22	i2df	figs-explicit	ὅτι ἡ σωτηρία ἐκ τῶν Ἰουδαίων ἐστίν	1	for salvation is from the Jews	The phrase **from the Jews** indicates that the Jewish people were the people group from which **salvation** came. This is true because the Savior Jesus was from the Jewish people. This phrase does not mean that the Jewish people themselves will save others from their sins. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “for salvation comes from among the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	4	22	yj1y	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ σωτηρία	1	salvation is from the Jews	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the way to be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -485,27 +485,27 @@ JHN	4	23	utt7	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν πνεύματι καὶ ἀληθείᾳ
 JHN	4	24	pfdv		ἐν πνεύματι καὶ ἀληθείᾳ	1		See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse.
 JHN	4	25	ip1u	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	4	25	lp44	figs-explicit	ὁ λεγόμενος Χριστός	1	I know that the Messiah … Christ	**Christ** is the Greek translation of **Messiah**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the one called Christ in the Greek language” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	4	25	ek2f	writing-pronouns	ὅταν ἔλθῃ ἐκεῖνος	1		Here, **he** and **that one** refer to the Messiah. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “When the Messiah may come, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-JHN	4	25	u8nb	figs-explicit	ἐκεῖνος, ἀναγγελεῖ ἡμῖν ἅπαντα	1	he will explain everything to us	The words **declare everything** imply all that the people need to know. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “he will tell us all that we need to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	4	25	ek2f	writing-pronouns	ὅταν ἔλθῃ ἐκεῖνος	1		Here, **he** and **that one** refer to the Messiah. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “When the Messiah may come, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	4	25	u8nb	figs-explicit	ἐκεῖνος, ἀναγγελεῖ ἡμῖν ἅπαντα	1	he will explain everything to us	The words **declare everything** imply all that the people need to know. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “he will tell us all that we need to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	4	25	izgt	figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν	1		When the woman said “us,” she was including the people to whom she was speaking, so this would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 JHN	4	26	lvgs	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	4	26	rbgo	figs-123person	ὁ λαλῶν σοι	1		Jesus is referring to himself in third person. If this would confuse your readers, you can use the first person form, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	4	27	vk5j		ἐπὶ τούτῳ	1	At that moment his disciples returned	Alternate translation: “at the time he said this” or “just as Jesus was saying this”
-JHN	4	27	p39j	figs-explicit	καὶ ἐθαύμαζον ὅτι μετὰ γυναικὸς ἐλάλει	1	Now they were wondering why he was speaking with a woman	In the culture of that time, it was very unusual for a Jew to speak with a **woman** he did not know, especially if they were alone or if that woman was a Samaritan. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and they were amazed that he was speaking alone with an unknown woman, because people didn’t usually do that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	4	27	p39j	figs-explicit	καὶ ἐθαύμαζον ὅτι μετὰ γυναικὸς ἐλάλει	1	Now they were wondering why he was speaking with a woman	In the culture of that time, it was very unusual for a Jew to speak with a **woman** he did not know, especially if they were alone or if that woman was a Samaritan. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and they were amazed that he was speaking alone with an unknown woman, because people didn’t usually do that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	4	27	cbc9		τί ζητεῖς?	1	no one said, “What … want?” or “Why … her?”	This question could be spoken to: (1) Jesus. Alternate translation: “What do you want from this woman?” (2) the woman. Alternate translation: “What do you want from him?”
 JHN	4	28	f13n	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	4	28	iu9d	figs-gendernotations	τοῖς ἀνθρώποις	1		Here, **the men** could refer to: (1) the men who lived in the nearby town and would have been working out in the fields at that time. Alternate translation: “to the men of the town” (2) the people who lived in the nearby town. Alternate translation: “to the people of the town” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 JHN	4	29	hb5h	figs-hyperbole	δεῦτε, ἴδετε ἄνθρωπον ὃς εἶπέ μοι πάντα ὅσα ἐποίησα	1	Come, see a man who told me everything that I have ever done	The Samaritan woman exaggerates to show that she is impressed by how much Jesus knows about her. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “Come see a man who knows very much about me even though I never met him before” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 JHN	4	29	dl18		μήτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ Χριστός	1	This could not be the Christ, could it?	This question is not a rhetorical question. The woman is not sure that Jesus is the **Christ**, so she asks a question that expects “no” for an answer. However, the fact that she asked the question instead of making a statement indicates that she is uncertain. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in a way that shows her uncertainty. Alternate translation: “Is it even possible that this is the Christ?”
-JHN	4	30	d4fu	writing-pronouns	ἐξῆλθον	1	the disciples were urging him	**They** here refers to the men or people from the town to whom the woman had spoken. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Your translation will depend on how you translated “the men” in verse [28](../04/28.md). Alternate translation: “The men of the town went out” or “The nearby townspeople went out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	4	30	d4fu	writing-pronouns	ἐξῆλθον	1	the disciples were urging him	**They** here refers to the men or people from the town to whom the woman had spoken. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Your translation will depend on how you translated “the men” in verse [28](../04/28.md). Alternate translation: “The men of the town went out” or “The nearby townspeople went out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	4	31	t6hy		ἐν τῷ μεταξὺ	1	In the meantime	Alternate translation: “While the woman was going into town” or “During the time that the woman was in the town”
-JHN	4	31	mgs7	writing-quotations	ἠρώτων αὐτὸν οἱ μαθηταὶ λέγοντες	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “ the disciples were urging him, and they said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+JHN	4	31	mgs7	writing-quotations	ἠρώτων αὐτὸν οἱ μαθηταὶ λέγοντες	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “the disciples were urging him, and they said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	4	31	z7wy	figs-imperative	Ῥαββεί, φάγε	1		Here, **eat** is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Rabbi, please eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 JHN	4	32	j8h2	figs-extrainfo	ἐγὼ βρῶσιν ἔχω φαγεῖν	1	I have food to eat that you do not know about	Here Jesus uses the word **food** figuratively to refer to doing God’s will, as he states in [verse 34](../04/34.md). However, his disciples do not understand this and Jesus does not explain the metaphor to them in this verse. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 JHN	4	33	w451		μή τις ἤνεγκεν αὐτῷ φαγεῖν?	1	No one has brought him anything to eat, have they?	The disciples think Jesus is literally talking about something **to eat**. They begin asking each other this question, expecting a “no” response. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in a way that shows their uncertainty. Alternate translation: “Is it even possible that someone brought him food to eat?”
 JHN	4	34	bnke	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-JHN	4	34	tvp1	figs-metaphor	ἐμὸν βρῶμά ἐστιν ἵνα ποιήσω τὸ θέλημα τοῦ πέμψαντός με, καὶ τελειώσω αὐτοῦ τὸ ἔργον	1	My food is to do the will of him who sent me and to complete his work	Here Jesus uses **food** figuratively to refer to obeying God’s **will**. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could say this with a simile. Alternate translation: “Like food satisfies a hungry person, doing the will of the one who sent me and completing his work satisfies me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	4	34	l64q	figs-explicit	τοῦ πέμψαντός με	1		Here, **the one who sent me** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of God, the one who sent me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	4	34	tvp1	figs-metaphor	ἐμὸν βρῶμά ἐστιν ἵνα ποιήσω τὸ θέλημα τοῦ πέμψαντός με, καὶ τελειώσω αὐτοῦ τὸ ἔργον	1	My food is to do the will of him who sent me and to complete his work	Here Jesus uses **food** figuratively to refer to obeying God’s **will**. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could express this with a simile. Alternate translation: “Like food satisfies a hungry person, doing the will of the one who sent me and completing his work satisfies me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	4	34	l64q	figs-explicit	τοῦ πέμψαντός με	1		Here, **the one who sent me** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of God, the one who sent me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	4	35	u5d6	figs-rquestion	οὐχ ὑμεῖς λέγετε	1	Do you not say	Jesus is using the question form for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You surely say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	4	35	y5d7	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1		Jesus using the term **Behold** to call the disciples’ attention to what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	4	35	coiv	figs-idiom	ἐπάρατε τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς ὑμῶν	1		This phrase, **lift up your eyes**, is a common idiom in the Bible that is used to describe the act of looking at something or direct one’s own attention toward something. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “look” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -516,20 +516,20 @@ JHN	4	36	qtf8	figs-exmetaphor	μισθὸν, λαμβάνει	1		Jesus continues
 JHN	4	36	qc31	figs-exmetaphor	καὶ συνάγει καρπὸν εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1	and gathers fruit for everlasting life	Jesus continues to speak figuratively to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. Jesus uses the phrase**fruit for eternal life** figuratively to refer to people who believe his message and are forgiven for their sins, so that they can have eternal life with God in heaven. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this as a simile. Alternate translation: “and the people who believe the message and receive eternal life are like the fruit that the one who is harvesting gathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
 JHN	4	36	nuku	figs-exmetaphor	ὁ σπείρων	1		Jesus continues to speak figuratively to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. The act of **sowing** seed is used figuratively to refer to the act of preparing people to receive Jesus’ message. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “the one who is preparing people to receive the message is like one who is sowing seed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
 JHN	4	37	w4xn	figs-explicit	ἐν…τούτῳ	1		Here, **this** could refer to: (1) the statements in the rest of this verse and the next verse. Alternate translation: “regarding what I am about to say,” (2) the statement in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “regarding what I have just said,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	4	37	rqe7	figs-exmetaphor	ἄλλος ἐστὶν ὁ σπείρων	1	One sows, and another harvests	Jesus continues to speak figuratively to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. This is part of an extended metaphor in verses [35–38](../04/35.md). Here, **sowing** is used figuratively to refer to preparing people to receive the message of Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with a simile. Alternate translation: “One preparing people to receive the message is like one sowing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
-JHN	4	37	eqwf	figs-exmetaphor	ὁ θερίζων	1		Jesus continues to speak figuratively to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. This is part of an extended metaphor in verses [35–38](../04/35.md). Here, **harvesting** refers to proclaiming the message of Jesus to those already prepared to receive it. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with a simile. Alternate translation: “the one proclaiming the message to those who are receiving it is like one harvesting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
-JHN	4	38	cpob	figs-you	ὑμᾶς…ὑμεῖς…ὑμεῖς	1		In this verse **you** is plural and refers to the disciples to whom Jesus is speaking. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you who are my disciples … you … you disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-JHN	4	38	tu2y	figs-exmetaphor	ἐγὼ ἀπέστειλα ὑμᾶς θερίζειν	1		Jesus continues to speak figuratively to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. This is part of an extended metaphor in verses [35–38](../04/35.md). Here, **harvest** refers to proclaiming the message of Jesus to those already prepared to receive it. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with a simile. Alternate translation: “I sent you to successfully proclaim my message like those who harvest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
+JHN	4	37	rqe7	figs-exmetaphor	ἄλλος ἐστὶν ὁ σπείρων	1	One sows, and another harvests	Jesus continues to speak figuratively to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. This is part of an extended metaphor in verses [35–38](../04/35.md). Here, **sowing** is used figuratively to refer to preparing people to receive the message of Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this with a simile. Alternate translation: “One preparing people to receive the message is like one sowing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
+JHN	4	37	eqwf	figs-exmetaphor	ὁ θερίζων	1		Jesus continues to speak figuratively to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. This is part of an extended metaphor in verses [35–38](../04/35.md). Here, **harvesting** refers to proclaiming the message of Jesus to those already prepared to receive it. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this with a simile. Alternate translation: “the one proclaiming the message to those who are receiving it is like one harvesting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
+JHN	4	38	cpob	figs-you	ὑμᾶς…ὑμεῖς…ὑμεῖς	1		In this verse **you** is plural and refers to the disciples to whom Jesus is speaking. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you who are my disciples … you … you disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+JHN	4	38	tu2y	figs-exmetaphor	ἐγὼ ἀπέστειλα ὑμᾶς θερίζειν	1		Jesus continues to speak figuratively to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. This is part of an extended metaphor in verses [35–38](../04/35.md). Here, **harvest** refers to proclaiming the message of Jesus to those already prepared to receive it. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this with a simile. Alternate translation: “I sent you to successfully proclaim my message like those who harvest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
 JHN	4	38	lq36	figs-explicit	ὃ οὐχ ὑμεῖς κεκοπιάκατε	1		This phrase refers to those who received Jesus’ message when his disciples proclaimed it to them. Although the disciples did not prepare those people to receive the message, they enjoyed the benefits of seeing those people trust in Jesus for salvation. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “those people whom you previously did not prepare to receive the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	4	38	fbcv	figs-explicit	ἄλλοι κεκοπιάκασιν	1		**Others** here refers to those people who prepared people to receive Jesus’ message before Jesus’ disciples successfully proclaimed that message to them. This would include Jesus, John the Baptist, and possibly the Old Testament prophets as well. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Others such as myself and the prophets have labored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	4	38	slw4		ὑμεῖς εἰς τὸν κόπον αὐτῶν εἰσεληλύθατε	1	you have entered into their labor	Here, **entered into** means to have joined others or participated with others in doing something. Alternate translation: “you are joining in doing their work”
+JHN	4	38	fbcv	figs-explicit	ἄλλοι κεκοπιάκασιν	1		**Others** here refers to those people who prepared people to receive Jesus’ message before Jesus’ disciples successfully proclaimed that message to them. This would include Jesus, John the Baptist, and possibly the Old Testament prophets as well. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Others such as myself and the prophets have labored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	4	38	slw4		ὑμεῖς εἰς τὸν κόπον αὐτῶν εἰσεληλύθατε	1	you have entered into their labor	Here, **entered into** means to have joined others or participated with others in doing something. Alternate translation: “you have joined in doing their work”
 JHN	4	39	nbcd	figs-explicit	ἐκ…τῆς πόλεως ἐκείνης	1		Here, **that city** refers to the the Samaritan city of Sychar. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “from Sychar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	4	39	qda3	figs-hyperbole	εἶπέν μοι πάντα ἃ ἐποίησα	1	He told me everything that I have done	Here, **everything** is an exaggeration. The woman was impressed by how much Jesus knew about her. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “He told me many things that I have done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-JHN	4	40	w3ck	writing-pronouns	πρὸς αὐτὸν…αὐτὸν…ἔμεινεν	1		In this verse **him** and **he** refer to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to Jesus … Jesus … Jesus stayed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	4	40	w3ck	writing-pronouns	πρὸς αὐτὸν…αὐτὸν…ἔμεινεν	1		In this verse **him** and **he** refer to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to Jesus … Jesus … Jesus stayed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	4	41	qrj5	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ	1	his word	Here, **word** refers to the message that Jesus proclaimed. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-JHN	4	42	u7ev	writing-pronouns	ἔλεγον	1		Here, **they** refers to the Samaritans from Sychar. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the local Samaritans said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	4	42	u7ev	writing-pronouns	ἔλεγον	1		Here, **they** refers to the Samaritans from Sychar. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the local Samaritans said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	4	42	ciyt	figs-exclusive	πιστεύομεν…ἀκηκόαμεν…οἴδαμεν	1		**We** throughout this verse refers to the Samaritan townspeople who came to Jesus apart from the Samaritan woman, so the pronoun would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-JHN	4	42	fpdj	writing-pronouns	οὗτός	1		Here, **this one** refers to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this man, Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	4	42	fpdj	writing-pronouns	οὗτός	1		Here, **this one** refers to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this man, Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	4	42	k4cz	figs-metonymy	κόσμου	1	world	Here, **world** refers to everyone throughout the world who believes in Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all the believers in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	4	43	n1mk	writing-newevent	μετὰ δὲ τὰς δύο ἡμέρας	1		This phrase introduces a new event that happened after the events the story has just related. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “After he had spent two days in Samaria” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 JHN	4	43	gj2f	figs-explicit	ἐκεῖθεν	1	from there	Here, **there** could refer to: (1) the Samaritan city of Sychar. Alternate translation: “from Sychar” (2) the region of Samaria in general. Alternate translation: “from Samaria” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -546,12 +546,12 @@ JHN	4	46	ffm3	grammar-connect-time-sequential	οὖν	1	Now	**Then** indicates t
 JHN	4	46	w3dy	translate-names	τὴν Κανὰ	1		See how you translated this name in [2:1](../02/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	4	46	vp1m	translate-names	Καφαρναούμ	1		See how you translated **Capernaum** in [2:12](../02/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	4	46	bp3w	writing-participants	καὶ ἦν τις βασιλικὸς	1	royal official	This phrase introduces a new character in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. The expression **royal official** identifies this man as someone who was in the service of the king. Since he is a new participant, if it would be helpful to your readers, you could call him something like “a man who was a government official who served the king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
-JHN	4	47	brcf	writing-pronouns	οὗτος	1		**He** here refers to the royal official. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The official” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	4	47	brcf	writing-pronouns	οὗτος	1		**He** here refers to the royal official. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The official” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	4	47	p2nv	translate-names	τῆς Ἰουδαίας	1		See how you translated **Judea** in [verse 3](../04/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	4	47	scql	translate-names	τὴν Γαλιλαίαν	1		See how you translated **Galilee** in [1:43](../01/43.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-JHN	4	47	eqga	writing-pronouns	ἤμελλεν	1		Here, **he** refers to the royal official’s son. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the official’s son was about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	4	47	eqga	writing-pronouns	ἤμελλεν	1		Here, **he** refers to the royal official’s son. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the official’s son was about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	4	48	u73r	figs-doublenegatives	ἐὰν μὴ σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα ἴδητε, οὐ μὴ πιστεύσητε	1	Unless you see signs and wonders, you will not believe	If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “Only if you see signs and wonders will you believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-JHN	4	48	hlts	figs-you	ἴδητε…πιστεύσητε	1		The word **you** is plural in this verse. This means that Jesus was not only speaking to the royal official, but also to the other people who were there. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you all would see … you all would … believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+JHN	4	48	hlts	figs-you	ἴδητε…πιστεύσητε	1		The word **you** is plural in this verse. This means that Jesus was not only speaking to the royal official, but also to the other people who were there. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you all would see … you all would … believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 JHN	4	48	n3ot	figs-hendiadys	σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα	1		This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **wonders** describes the character of Jesus’ miraculous **signs**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “wonderful miraculous signs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 JHN	4	49	ui6f	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	4	49	y3vi		κύριε	1		The royal official calls Jesus **Sir** in order to show respect or politeness. See how you translated this word in [4:11](../04/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lord]])
@@ -559,10 +559,10 @@ JHN	4	49	ycdt	figs-imperative	κατάβηθι	1		This is an imperative, but it
 JHN	4	50	n5mo	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	4	50	cbtv	figs-explicit	ὁ ἄνθρωπος	1		Here, **the man** refers to the royal official who was introduced in verse [46](../04/46.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “The royal official” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	4	50	uwa3	figs-metonymy	ἐπίστευσεν…τῷ λόγῳ	1	believed the word	Here, **word** refers to all that Jesus said to the man. It does not refer to one specific word that Jesus said. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “believed the words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-JHN	4	51	a5gw	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ	1	While	In this verse **he**, **his**, and **him** refer to the royal official who was introduced in verse [46](../04/46.md). If it would be misunderstood to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the royal official” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	4	51	a5gw	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ	1	While	In this verse **he**, **his**, and **him** refer to the royal official who was introduced in verse [46](../04/46.md). If it would be misunderstood to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the royal official” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	4	51	h5h4	figs-quotations	λέγοντες, ὅτι ὁ παῖς αὐτοῦ ζῇ	1		If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this as a direct quotation. You will also need to adjust the sentence to indicate to whom they are speaking. Alternate translation: “saying, ‘Your son lives’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 JHN	4	52	x2ta	figs-quotations	ἐπύθετο οὖν τὴν ὥραν παρ’ αὐτῶν ἐν ᾗ κομψότερον ἔσχεν	1		If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “So he asked from them, ‘In what hour did he begin to improve?’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-JHN	4	52	y2e9	writing-pronouns	ἔσχεν	1		Here, **he** refers to the royal official’s son who was ill. If it would be misunderstood to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “his son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	4	52	y2e9	writing-pronouns	ἔσχεν	1		Here, **he** refers to the royal official’s son who was ill. If it would be misunderstood to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “his son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	4	52	qdye		ὥραν ἑβδόμην	1		In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. Here, the seventh hour indicates a time in the middle of the day. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “at about one o’clock in the afternoon”
 JHN	4	53	tlgi	figs-explicit	ὁ πατὴρ	1		Here, **the father** refers to the royal official who was introduced in verse [46](../04/46.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the royal official” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	4	53	qek2	figs-quotations	εἶπεν αὐτῷ ὁ Ἰησοῦς, ὁ υἱός σου ζῇ	1		If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Jesus had said to him that his son lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
@@ -583,16 +583,16 @@ JHN	5	6	w97q	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	he said to him	Here John uses the p
 JHN	5	7	aeu3		κύριε	1	Sir, I do not have	The man calls Jesus **Sir** in order to show respect or politeness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lord]])
 JHN	5	7	ny5f	figs-activepassive	ὅταν ταραχθῇ τὸ ὕδωρ	1	when the water is stirred up	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, verse [4](../05/04.md) indicates who the man believed was doing the action. Alternate translation: “when an angel moves the water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	5	7	kul6		εἰς τὴν κολυμβήθραν	1	into the pool	See how you translated **pool** in verse [2](../05/02.md).
-JHN	5	7	u93g		ἄλλος πρὸ ἐμοῦ καταβαίνει	1	another steps down before me	The man believed that only the first person to enter the water after the water stirred would be healed. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “another goes down before me and is healed”
+JHN	5	7	u93g		ἄλλος πρὸ ἐμοῦ καταβαίνει	1	another steps down before me	The man believed that only the first person to enter the water after the water stirred would be healed. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “another goes down before me and is healed”
 JHN	5	8	eqe4	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	Get up	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-JHN	5	9	i4tk	writing-background	δὲ…ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ	1	Now that day	John uses the word **Now** to show that the words that follow provide background information for a new event in the story that takes place in [verses 10–13](../05/10.md). Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: The day on which Jesus healed the man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
+JHN	5	9	i4tk	writing-background	δὲ…ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ	1	Now that day	John uses the word **Now** to show that the words that follow provide background information for a new event in the story that takes place in [verses 10–13](../05/10.md). Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “The day on which Jesus healed the man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	5	10	ja3x	figs-synecdoche	ἔλεγον οὖν οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	So the Jews said to him who was healed	Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	5	10	qydu	figs-activepassive	τῷ τεθεραπευμένῳ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John indicates who did the action in the previous verses. Alternate translation: “to the one whom Jesus had healed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	5	10	xd9b		Σάββατόν ἐστιν	1	It is the Sabbath	Your language might use an indefinite article rather than the definite article here, since the synagogue ruler is not speaking of a specific Sabbath. Alternate translation: “It is a Sabbath day”
 JHN	5	10	o8eq	figs-explicit	οὐκ ἔξεστίν σοι ἆραι τὸν κράβαττον σου	1		Here, the Jewish leaders (who were probably Pharisees) said this because they thought that the man was doing work by carrying his mat, and so he was disobeying God’s command to rest and not work on the Sabbath. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/works]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]]) If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “it is not permitted for you, according to our law, to carry your mat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	5	11	en3v		ὁ ποιήσας με ὑγιῆ	1	He who made me healthy	Alternate translation: “The one who made me well” or “The one who healed me of my illness”
 JHN	5	11	kpkd	figs-quotesinquotes	ἐκεῖνός μοι εἶπεν, ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου	1		If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “that one said to me to pick up my mat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
-JHN	5	12	r7nx	writing-pronouns	ἠρώτησαν αὐτόν	1	They asked him	**They** here refers to the Jewish leaders and **him** refers to the man whom Jesus had healed. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The Jewish leaders asked the man who was healed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	5	12	r7nx	writing-pronouns	ἠρώτησαν αὐτόν	1	They asked him	**They** here refers to the Jewish leaders and **him** refers to the man whom Jesus had healed. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The Jewish leaders asked the man who was healed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	5	12	kryx	figs-quotesinquotes	ὁ εἰπών σοι, ἆρον	1		If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “who said to you to pick it up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 JHN	5	13	qtsj	figs-activepassive	ὁ…ἰαθεὶς	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John indicates who did the action in the previous verses. Alternate translation: “the one whom Jesus had healed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	5	13	tijo	figs-ellipsis	τίς ἐστιν	1		John is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “who it was who had healed him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -600,22 +600,22 @@ JHN	5	13	sgx1	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὄχλου ὄντος ἐν τῷ 
 JHN	5	13	qzpi	grammar-collectivenouns	ὄχλου	1		The word **crowd** is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a group of people” or “many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 JHN	5	14	rl0k	writing-newevent	μετὰ ταῦτα	1		**After these things** introduces a new event that happened some time after the events which the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 JHN	5	14	h1ri	figs-pastforfuture	εὑρίσκει	1	Jesus found him	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-JHN	5	14	qo3z	writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν…αὐτῷ	1		Here, **him** refers to the man whom Jesus had healed. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the healed man … that man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	5	14	qo3z	writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν…αὐτῷ	1		Here, **him** refers to the man whom Jesus had healed. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the healed man … that man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	5	14	h39z	figs-metaphor	ἴδε	1	See	Jesus uses the term **Behold** to call the man’s attention to what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	5	15	auad	figs-synecdoche	τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις	1		Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [5:10](../05/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-JHN	5	16	efg2	writing-background	καὶ διὰ τοῦτο, ἐδίωκον οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι τὸν Ἰησοῦν, ὅτι ταῦτα ἐποίει ἐν Σαββάτῳ.	1	Now	The writer uses the word **And** to show that the words this verse gives background information. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Now the Jews began to persecute Jesus because he was doing these things on the Sabbath.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-JHN	5	16	ef9i	figs-explicit	διὰ τοῦτο	1		Here, **this** refers to what the man whom Jesus had healed told the Jewish leaders. The Jewish leaders began to persecute Jesus because he had healed the man on the Sabbath, which was something they believed was against the law of Moses. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because Jesus had healed him on the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	5	16	efg2	writing-background	καὶ διὰ τοῦτο, ἐδίωκον οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι τὸν Ἰησοῦν, ὅτι ταῦτα ἐποίει ἐν Σαββάτῳ.	1	Now	The writer uses the phrase **And because of this** to show that previous verse gave background information for what John will now present. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Now the Jews began to persecute Jesus because he was doing these things on the Sabbath.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
+JHN	5	16	ef9i	figs-explicit	διὰ τοῦτο	1		Here, **this** refers to what the man whom Jesus had healed told the Jewish leaders. The Jewish leaders began to persecute Jesus because he had healed the man on the Sabbath, which was something they believed was against the law of Moses. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because Jesus had healed him on the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	5	16	kup5	figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	the Jews	Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	5	16	acn0	figs-explicit	ὅτι ταῦτα ἐποίει	1		This phrase indicates a second reason why the Jewish leaders began persecuting Jesus. Here, **these things** refers to Jesus healing people on the Sabbath. The plural **things** indicates that he healed on the Sabbath multiple times, not just on the occasion recorded in verses [5–9](../05/05.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “because he was doing these healings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	5	16	f69o		ἐν Σαββάτῳ	1		Your language might use an indefinite article rather than the definite article here, since the synagogue ruler is not speaking of a specific Sabbath. Alternate translation: “on a Sabbath day”
 JHN	5	17	lq1v	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατήρ μου	1	My Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	5	18	zrmw	figs-explicit	διὰ τοῦτο οὖν	1		Here, **this** refers to what Jesus had said in the previous verse. One of the reasons why the Jewish leaders wanted to kill Jesus was that Jesus called God his Father. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Because Jesus said this, therefore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	5	18	t5ze	figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1		Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [5:10](../05/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-JHN	5	18	jwmx	figs-idiom	ὅτι οὐ μόνον ἔλυε τὸ Σάββατον	1		The phrase **breaking the Sabbath** is an idiom that means to disobey the regulations for the Sabbath that God gave in the law of Moses. The Pharisees themselves added many regulations which they considered to be equal to those God had given. It was the additional Jewish regulations that Jesus was disobeying, thereby making the Jewish leaders very angry with him. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because he not only was disobeying their Sabbath regulations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+JHN	5	18	jwmx	figs-idiom	ὅτι οὐ μόνον ἔλυε τὸ Σάββατον	1		The phrase **breaking the Sabbath** is an idiom that means to disobey the regulations for the Sabbath that God gave in the law of Moses. The Pharisees themselves added many regulations which they considered to be equal to those God had given. It was the additional Jewish regulations that Jesus was disobeying, thereby making the Jewish leaders very angry with him. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because he not only was disobeying their Sabbath regulations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	5	18	kpkw	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατέρα	1		**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	5	18	n8bh	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἴσον ἑαυτὸν ποιῶν τῷ Θεῷ	1	making himself equal to God	This clause, **making himself equal to God**, is the result of what Jesus had said in the previous clause. The result of Jesus calling God Father is that he was claiming to be equal with God. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the result being that he was making himself equal to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 JHN	5	19	f2qp	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1		**Therefore** indicates that what Jesus is about to say is a response to the accusations of the Jewish leaders that were mentioned in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Because the Jewish leaders had made these accusations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-JHN	5	19	xu0e	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1		Here, **them** refers to the Jewish leaders who wanted to kill Jesus and made accusations against him in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the Jewish authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	5	19	xu0e	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1		Here, **them** refers to the Jewish leaders who wanted to kill Jesus and made accusations against him in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the Jewish authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	5	19	rr9q	figs-doublet	ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly, truly	Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	5	19	c9in	figs-you	λέγω ὑμῖν	1		Since Jesus is speaking to a group of Jewish leaders, **you** is plural here and through [5:47](../05/47.md). If your language does not have a different form for plural **you**, you can use another way to express it. Alternate translation: “I say to you Jews” or “I say to you all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 JHN	5	19	iuc7	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὸς…Πατέρα	1	Son … Father	**Son** and **Father** are important titles that describe the relationship between Jesus and God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
@@ -625,9 +625,9 @@ JHN	5	19	ymuo	figs-metaphor	τι βλέπῃ τὸν Πατέρα ποιοῦν
 JHN	5	20	t3b4	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ…Πατὴρ…τὸν Υἱὸν	1	For the Father loves the Son	**Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between Jesus and God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	5	20	lk5n	figs-123person	τὸν Υἱὸν	1		As in the previous verse, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	5	20	x8ac	figs-metaphor	δείκνυσιν αὐτῷ…δείξει αὐτῷ	1	loves	Jesus uses **shows** and **show** figuratively to refer to revealing or making something known. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he reveals to him … he will reveal to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	5	20	rtb6	writing-pronouns	δείξει αὐτῷ	1		Here, **he** refers to God the Father and **him** refers to Jesus the Son. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Father will reveal to the Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	5	20	rtb6	writing-pronouns	δείξει αὐτῷ	1		Here, **he** refers to God the Father and **him** refers to Jesus the Son. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Father will reveal to the Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	5	20	zlr7	figs-explicit	μείζονα τούτων…ἔργα	1	you will be amazed	Here, **works** refers specifically to miracles. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “greater miracles than these” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	5	20	y4yy	figs-explicit	μείζονα τούτων…ἔργα	1		Here, **these** refers to the miracles that Jesus had already performed by the time he spoke these words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “greater works than these miracles I have already performed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	5	20	y4yy	figs-explicit	μείζονα τούτων…ἔργα	1		Here, **these** refers to the miracles that Jesus had already performed by the time he spoke these words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “greater works than these miracles I have already performed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	5	21	s6te	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατὴρ…Υἱὸς	1	Father … Son	**Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	5	21	xzu4	figs-explicit	ζῳοποιεῖ…οὓς θέλει ζῳοποιεῖ	1	life	The phrase **makes them alive** could refer to: (1) eternal life. Alternate translation: “makes them have eternal life … makes whom he desires have eternal life” (2) physical life, in which case it would repeat the idea of “raises the dead” in the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “makes them live again … makes alive again whom he desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	5	21	c96p	figs-123person	ὁ Υἱὸς	1		As in the previous two verses, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “I, the Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
@@ -636,7 +636,7 @@ JHN	5	22	sc4t	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν κρίσιν	1		Here, **judgment** refe
 JHN	5	22	dtxw	figs-123person	τῷ Υἱῷ	1		As in the previous three verses, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	5	23	iqn7	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Υἱὸν…τὸν Πατέρα. ὁ μὴ τιμῶν τὸν Υἱὸν, οὐ τιμᾷ τὸν Πατέρα	1		**Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	5	23	p2kj	figs-123person	τὸν Υἱὸν…ὁ μὴ τιμῶν τὸν Υἱὸν	1		As in the previous four verses, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-JHN	5	23	j7vc	figs-explicit	τὸν Πατέρα, τὸν πέμψαντα αὐτόν	1		Here, this phrase refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of God, the Father who sent me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	5	23	j7vc	figs-explicit	τὸν Πατέρα, τὸν πέμψαντα αὐτόν	1		Here, this phrase refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God, the Father who sent him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	5	24	w6wu	figs-doublet	ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly, truly	Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	5	24	rsqh	figs-you	λέγω ὑμῖν	1		Since Jesus is speaking to a group of Jewish leaders, **you** is plural here and through [5:47](../05/47.md). If your language does not have a different form for plural **you**, you can use another way to express it. Alternate translation: “I say to you Jews” or “I say to you all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 JHN	5	24	v45a	figs-metaphor	ὁ τὸν λόγον μου ἀκούων	1		Here, **hearing** means listening to something with the intent to heed it and respond appropriately. It does not mean simply to hear what someone says. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one heeding my word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -655,32 +655,32 @@ JHN	5	25	k1ii	figs-explicit	ζήσουσιν	1		This could refer to: (1) having
 JHN	5	26	x136	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατὴρ…τῷ Υἱῷ	1	Father … Son	**Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	5	26	f5vq	figs-explicit	ἔχει ζωὴν ἐν ἑαυτῷ…ζωὴν, ἔχειν ἐν ἑαυτῷ	1	life	Here, the phrases **has life** and **have life** refer to being the source of life or having the ability to create life. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “is the source of life … the right to be the source of life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	5	26	yv7o	figs-123person	τῷ Υἱῷ…ζωὴν, ἔχειν ἐν ἑαυτῷ	1		As in the previous verses in this paragraph, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-JHN	5	27	pr1c	writing-pronouns	ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ…ἐστίν	1	the Father has given the Son authority to carry out judgment	The first occurrence of **he** refers to God the Father, but **him** and the second occurrence of **he** refer to the Son of Man. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Father gave the Son … the Son is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	5	27	pr1c	writing-pronouns	ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ…ἐστίν	1	the Father has given the Son authority to carry out judgment	The first occurrence of **he** refers to God the Father, but **him** and the second occurrence of **he** refer to the Son of Man. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Father gave the Son … the Son is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	5	27	xlln	figs-123person	ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ…Υἱὸς Ἀνθρώπου ἐστίν	1		As in the previous verses in this paragraph, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	5	27	h9em	figs-abstractnouns	ἐξουσίαν ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ κρίσιν ποιεῖν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **authority** and **judgment**, you could express the same ideas in other ways. Alternate translation: “he authorized him to act as judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	5	27	g58f	figs-explicit	Υἱὸς Ἀνθρώπου	1	Son of Man	See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	5	28	sr8j	figs-explicit	μὴ θαυμάζετε τοῦτο	1	Do not be amazed at this	Here, **this** refers to the the Son of Man’s authority to give eternal life and to carry out judgment, as stated in the previous two verses. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Do not be amazed that the Father has given the Son this authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	5	28	sr8j	figs-explicit	μὴ θαυμάζετε τοῦτο	1	Do not be amazed at this	Here, **this** refers to the the Son of Man’s authority to give eternal life and to carry out judgment, as stated in the previous two verses. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Do not be amazed that the Father has given the Son this authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	5	28	yax7	figs-metonymy	ἔρχεται ὥρα	1		See the discussion of **an hour is coming** in the General Notes to Chapter 4 and see how you translated it in verse [25](../05/25.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	5	28	h9l7	figs-123person	ἀκούσουσιν τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ	1	hear his voice	As in the previous verses in this paragraph, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	5	29	qnik	figs-possession	ἀνάστασιν ζωῆς	1		In this phrase, Jesus uses **of** to describe a **resurrection** that results in eternal **life**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. For further discussion of this phrase, see the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “a resurrection that results in life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JHN	5	29	vwuo	figs-possession	ἀνάστασιν κρίσεως	1		In this phrase, Jesus uses **of** to describe a **resurrection** that results in eternal **judgment**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. For further discussion of this phrase, see the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “a resurrection that results in judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-JHN	5	30	bzmq	figs-explicit	ἀπ’ ἐμαυτοῦ	1		Here, **from** is used to indicate the source of Jesus’ teaching and ability to do miracles. His teaching and miracles could only have authority if they came from God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “on my own authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	5	30	bzmq	figs-explicit	ἀπ’ ἐμαυτοῦ	1		Here, **from** is used to indicate the source of Jesus’ teaching and ability to do miracles. His teaching and miracles could only have authority if they came from God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “on my own authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	5	30	f3za	figs-ellipsis	καθὼς ἀκούω, κρίνω	1		Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Just as I hear from the Father, I judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	5	30	n8o9	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ κρίσις ἡ ἐμὴ δικαία ἐστίν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **judgment** and **righteous**, you could express the same ideas in other ways. Alternate translation: “I judge rightly” or “I judge justly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	5	30	ayn1	figs-explicit	τοῦ πέμψαντός με	1		Here, **the one who sent me** refers to God. See how you translated it in [4:34](../04/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	5	31	f9vc	figs-explicit	ἐὰν ἐγὼ μαρτυρῶ περὶ ἐμαυτοῦ, ἡ μαρτυρία μου οὐκ ἔστιν ἀληθής.	1		Here Jesus is referring to a rule in the law of Moses. According to Deuteronomy 19:15, a statement had to be confirmed by at least two witnesses in order to be considered true in legal decisions. If your audience is not familiar with the law of Moses in the Old Testament, then you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “You know that the law of Moses states that if I testify about myself, my testimony is not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	5	31	f9vc	figs-explicit	ἐὰν ἐγὼ μαρτυρῶ περὶ ἐμαυτοῦ, ἡ μαρτυρία μου οὐκ ἔστιν ἀληθής.	1		Here Jesus is referring to a rule in the law of Moses. According to Deuteronomy 19:15, a statement had to be confirmed by at least two witnesses in order to be considered true in legal decisions. If your audience is not familiar with the law of Moses in the Old Testament, then you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “You know that the law of Moses states that if I testify about myself, my testimony is not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	5	31	qu3o	figs-explicit	ἐὰν ἐγὼ μαρτυρῶ περὶ ἐμαυτοῦ	1		Jesus assumed that his listeners understood that he was referring to testifying about himself without any other witnesses. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “If I testify about myself without any other witnesses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	5	32	nr3l	figs-explicit	ἄλλος ἐστὶν ὁ μαρτυρῶν περὶ ἐμοῦ	1	another	Here, **another** refers to God the Father. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “There is another who is testifying about me, the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	5	33	uxh5	figs-you	ὑμεῖς ἀπεστάλκατε πρὸς Ἰωάννην	1	the testimony that he gives about me is true	Here and through [5:47](../05/47.md), **You** is plural and refers to the Jewish leaders to whom Jesus is speaking. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “You Jewish authorities sent to John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+JHN	5	33	uxh5	figs-you	ὑμεῖς ἀπεστάλκατε πρὸς Ἰωάννην	1	the testimony that he gives about me is true	Here and through [5:47](../05/47.md), **You** is plural and refers to the Jewish leaders to whom Jesus is speaking. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “You Jewish authorities sent to John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 JHN	5	33	athw	figs-ellipsis	ὑμεῖς ἀπεστάλκατε πρὸς Ἰωάννην	1		Jesus is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “You have sent messengers to John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	5	33	qrdg	figs-explicit	πρὸς Ἰωάννην	1		Here, **John** refers to Jesus’ cousin, often referred to as “John the Baptist.” (See: rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/johnthebaptist) It does not refer to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “to John the Baptist” or “to John the Immerser” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	5	34	rvc5	figs-genericnoun	παρὰ ἀνθρώπου	1	the testimony that I receive is not from man	Here, **man** does not refer to any specific man, but to any human being. Alternate translation: “from mankind” or “from anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 JHN	5	34	dseu	figs-explicit	ταῦτα λέγω	1		Here, **these things** could refer to: (1) what Jesus said about John the Baptist in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “I say this about John” (2) all that Jesus has said in verses [17–33](../05/17.md). Alternate translation: “I say these things about myself and John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	5	34	a4je	figs-activepassive	ἵνα ὑμεῖς σωθῆτε	1	that you might be saved	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “so that God might save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	5	35	qczd	writing-pronouns	ἐκεῖνος	1		**That one** here refers to Jesus’ cousin, often referred to as “John the Baptist.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/johnthebaptist]]) If it would be misunderstood to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Immerser” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-JHN	5	35	w4w3	figs-metaphor	ἐκεῖνος ἦν ὁ λύχνος ὁ καιόμενος καὶ φαίνων	1	John was a lamp that was burning and shining, and you were willing to rejoice in his light for a while	Jesus uses the word **lamp** figuratively to refer to John the Baptist. In the way that lamps in those days burned oil and shined light, so John’s teaching helped people understand God’s truth and prepared them to receive Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could say this plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “That one taught you the truth about God” or “That one was like a lamp that was burning and shining” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	5	35	o2j5	figs-metaphor	ἐν τῷ φωτὶ αὐτοῦ	1		Jesus uses the word **light** figuratively to refer to John the Baptist’s teaching. In the way that light enables people to see in the dark, so John’s teaching helped people understand God’s truth and prepared them to receive Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could say this plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “in his teaching” or “in his teaching that was like a light” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	5	35	i0l5	figs-metonymy	πρὸς ὥραν	1		Here, **hour** refers to a short amount of time. It does not mean a 60-minute period of time or a specific point in time. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for a moment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+JHN	5	35	qczd	writing-pronouns	ἐκεῖνος	1		**That one** here refers to Jesus’ cousin, often referred to as “John the Baptist.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/johnthebaptist]]) If it would be misunderstood to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Immerser” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	5	35	w4w3	figs-metaphor	ἐκεῖνος ἦν ὁ λύχνος ὁ καιόμενος καὶ φαίνων	1	John was a lamp that was burning and shining, and you were willing to rejoice in his light for a while	Jesus uses the word **lamp** figuratively to refer to John the Baptist. In the way that lamps in those days burned oil and shined light, so John’s teaching helped people understand God’s truth and prepared them to receive Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “That one taught you the truth about God” or “That one was like a lamp that was burning and shining” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	5	35	o2j5	figs-metaphor	ἐν τῷ φωτὶ αὐτοῦ	1		Jesus uses the word **light** figuratively to refer to John the Baptist’s teaching. In the way that light enables people to see in the dark, so John’s teaching helped people understand God’s truth and prepared them to receive Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “in his teaching” or “in his teaching that was like a light” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	5	35	i0l5	figs-metonymy	πρὸς ὥραν	1		Here, **hour** refers to a short amount of time. It does not mean a 60-minute period of time or a specific point in time. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for a moment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	5	36	ll75		γὰρ	1		Here, **for** indicates that what follows is an explanation of the “testimony” Jesus has mentioned in the previous clause. Alternate translation: “that testimony is”
 JHN	5	36	rt6j		τὰ…ἔργα	1	the works that the Father has given me to accomplish … that the Father has sent me	Here, **works** could refer to: (1) the miracles that Jesus did. Alternate translation: “the miracles” (2) Jesus’ miracles and teaching. Alternate translation: “the miracles and teaching”
 JHN	5	36	dvr9	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατὴρ…ὅτι ὁ Πατήρ	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
@@ -691,10 +691,10 @@ JHN	5	38	rc2n	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ	1	his word	Here, **w
 JHN	5	38	dfn1	figs-metaphor	τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ οὐκ ἔχετε ἐν ὑμῖν μένοντα	1	You do not have his word remaining in you	Here Jesus is speaking of God’s **word** as if it were an object that could remain inside people. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you do not live according to his word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	5	38	uj90	figs-123person	ὃν ἀπέστειλεν ἐκεῖνος, τούτῳ	1		This phrase refers to Jesus. He is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “me, the one whom he has sent … me whom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	5	39	xi22	figs-explicit	ἐν αὐταῖς ζωὴν αἰώνιον ἔχειν	1	in them you have eternal life	Some Jews in Jesus’ time believed that a person could earn their way to heaven by studying the Scriptures and doing good deeds. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “you will get eternal life if you study them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	5	39	bmc3	writing-pronouns	ἐν αὐταῖς…ἐκεῖναί εἰσιν αἱ	1		In this verse, **them**, **these**, and **the ones** all refer to the Scriptures. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say some of these words explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the Scriptures … these Scriptures are the ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	5	39	bmc3	writing-pronouns	ἐν αὐταῖς…ἐκεῖναί εἰσιν αἱ	1		In this verse, **them**, **these**, and **the ones** all refer to the Scriptures. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state some of these words explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the Scriptures … these Scriptures are the ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	5	39	fzbf	figs-personification	ἐκεῖναί εἰσιν αἱ μαρτυροῦσαι περὶ ἐμοῦ	1		Here Jesus is speaking of the Scriptures figuratively as though they were a person who is **testifying** about who he is. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “these indicate who I am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-JHN	5	40	dzm2	figs-explicit	οὐ θέλετε ἐλθεῖν πρός με	1	you are not willing to come to me	Here, **come** does not mean to merely come near Jesus, but it means to follow him and be his disciple. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you are not willing to come and by my disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	5	40	xuxj	figs-explicit	ζωὴν ἔχητε	1		Here, **life** refers to eternal life. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you might have eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	5	40	dzm2	figs-explicit	οὐ θέλετε ἐλθεῖν πρός με	1	you are not willing to come to me	Here, **come** does not mean to merely come near Jesus, but it means to follow him and be his disciple. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you are not willing to come and by my disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	5	40	xuxj	figs-explicit	ζωὴν ἔχητε	1		Here, **life** refers to eternal life. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you might have eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	5	41	c1rx	figs-gendernotations	παρὰ ἀνθρώπων	1	receive	Although the term **men** is masculine, Jesus uses the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 JHN	5	42	b1j4	figs-possession	τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	you do not have the love of God in yourselves	This could mean: (1) they did not **love** **God**. Alternate translation: “love for God” (2) they had not received God’s love. Alternate translation: “love from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JHN	5	43	zw65	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Πατρός μου	1	in my Father’s name	Here, John records Jesus using the word **name** figuratively to refer to God’s power and authority. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with the authority of my Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -712,7 +712,7 @@ JHN	5	47	x7h9	figs-metonymy	τοῖς ἐμοῖς ῥήμασιν	1	my words	He
 JHN	6	intro	xe4t			0		# John 6 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>1. Jesus’ fourth sign: Jesus feeds a large crowd (6:1–14)<br>2. Jesus’ fifth sign: Jesus walks on the Sea of Galilee (6:15–21)<br>3. Jesus says he is the bread of life (6:22–71)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### King<br><br>The king of any nation was the richest and most powerful person in that nation. The people wanted Jesus to be their king because he gave them food. They thought he would make the Jews into the richest and most powerful nation in the world. They did not understand that Jesus came to die so God could forgive his people’s sins and that the world would persecute his people.<br><br>## Important Metaphors in this Chapter<br><br>### Bread<br><br>Bread was the most common and important food in Jesus’ day, so the word “bread” was their general word for “food.” It is often difficult to translate the word “bread” into the languages of people who do not eat bread, because the general word for food in some languages refers to food that did not exist in Jesus’ culture. Jesus used the word “bread” to refer to himself. He wanted the people to understand that they need him so they can have eternal life, just as people need food to sustain physical life. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])<br><br>### Eating the flesh and drinking the blood<br><br>When Jesus said, “unless you would eat the flesh of the Son of Man and would drink his blood, you do not have life in yourselves,” he was speaking figuratively of believing in his sacrificial death on the cross for the forgiveness of sins. He also knew that before he died he would tell his followers to commemorate this sacrifice by eating bread and drinking wine. In the event this chapter describes, he expected that his hearers would understand that he was using a metaphor but would not understand to what the metaphor referred. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blood]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Parenthetical ideas<br><br>Several times in this passage, John explains something or gives the reader some background information needed to better understand the story. These explanations are intended to give the reader some additional knowledge without interrupting the flow of the narrative. This information is placed inside parentheses.<br><br>### “Son of Man”<br><br>Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” several times in this chapter. Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	6	1	qhj7	writing-background		0	General Information:	Jesus had traveled from Jerusalem to Galilee. A crowd has followed him up a mountainside. Verses [1–4](../06/01.md) tell the setting of this part of the story. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	6	1	el4l	writing-newevent	μετὰ ταῦτα	1	After these things	This phrase, **After these things**, introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
-JHN	6	1	z345	figs-explicit	θαλάσσης τῆς Γαλιλαίας τῆς Τιβεριάδος	1		The **Sea of Galilee** was called by several names, one of which was Sea **of Tiberias**. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/seaofgalilee]]) If having two different names for the same place would be confusing in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the Sea of Galilee (also known as the Sea of Tiberias)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	6	1	z345	figs-explicit	τῆς θαλάσσης τῆς Γαλιλαίας τῆς Τιβεριάδος	1		The **Sea of Galilee** was called by several names, one of which was Sea **of Tiberias**. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/seaofgalilee]]) If having two different names for the same place would be confusing in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the Sea of Galilee (also known as the Sea of Tiberias)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	2	ebel	grammar-collectivenouns	ὄχλος πολύς	1		See how you translated **crowd** in [5:13](../05/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 JHN	6	2	g6zm		σημεῖα	1	signs	See how you translated **signs** in [2:11](../02/11.md). See also the discussion of **signs** in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracles”
 JHN	6	4	ri55	writing-background	ἦν δὲ ἐγγὺς τὸ Πάσχα, ἡ ἑορτὴ τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	Now the Passover, the Jewish festival, was near	In this verse John briefly stops telling about the events in the story in order to give background information about when the events happened. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “This event took place near the time of the Passover, the festival of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
@@ -723,7 +723,7 @@ JHN	6	5	pzhc	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense i
 JHN	6	5	v0mp	translate-names	Φίλιππον	1		See how you translated the man’s name,**Philip**, in [1:43](../01/43.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	6	6	cj58	writing-background	τοῦτο δὲ ἔλεγεν πειράζων αὐτόν; αὐτὸς γὰρ ᾔδει τί ἔμελλεν ποιεῖν	1	But Jesus said this to test Philip, for he himself knew what he was going to do	In this verse John briefly stops telling about the events in the story in order to explain why Jesus asked Philip where to buy bread. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Now he said this at that time to test him, for he himself knew what he was going to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	6	6	sr0p	grammar-connect-logic-goal	πειράζων αὐτόν	1		Here John is stating the purpose for which Jesus asked Philip the question in the previous verse. In your translation, follow the conventions of your language for purpose clauses. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “so that he could test Philip” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-JHN	6	6	rrco	writing-pronouns	αὐτόν	1		Here, **him** refers to Philip. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Philip” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	6	6	rrco	writing-pronouns	αὐτόν	1		Here, **him** refers to Philip. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Philip” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	6	6	uk6t	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς…ᾔδει	1	for he himself knew	Here, John uses the reflexive pronoun **himself** to make clear that the word **he** refers to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus himself knew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 JHN	6	7	z3gj	translate-bmoney	διακοσίων δηναρίων ἄρτοι	1	Two hundred denarii worth of bread	The word **denarii** is the plural form of “denarius.” It was a denomination of money in the Roman Empire that was equivalent to one days’ wages. Alternate translation: “The amount of bread that cost 200 days’ wages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
 JHN	6	8	gzei	translate-names	Ἀνδρέας	1		See how you translated the name **Andrew** in [1:40](../01/40.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -736,28 +736,28 @@ JHN	6	10	n9ft	figs-gendernotations	τοὺς ἀνθρώπους	1		Although the
 JHN	6	10	v4h0	figs-infostructure	ἦν δὲ χόρτος πολὺς ἐν τῷ τόπῳ. ἀνέπεσαν οὖν οἱ ἄνδρες, τὸν ἀριθμὸν ὡς πεντακισχίλιοι.	1		If it would be natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “So the men sat down, about 5,000 in number. (Now there was a lot of grass in the place.)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 JHN	6	10	pf33	writing-background	ἦν δὲ χόρτος πολὺς ἐν τῷ τόπῳ	1	Now there was a lot of grass in the place	John briefly stops telling about the events in the story in order to give background information about the place where this event happened. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “The place where the people were all coming together had a lot of grass” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	6	10	iz32		ἀνέπεσαν οὖν οἱ ἄνδρες, τὸν ἀριθμὸν ὡς πεντακισχίλιοι	1	So the men sat down, about five thousand in number	Here, **men** refers specifically to adult males. Although the term for “men” used earlier in this verse refers to a group that included men, women, and children, here John is counting only the **men**.
-JHN	6	11	l6pm	translate-unknown	τοὺς ἄρτους	1		This means **loaves** of bread, which are lumps of flour dough that a person has shaped and baked. These **loaves** are those five barley **loaves** mentioned in verse [9](../06/09.md). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the five loaves of barley bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-JHN	6	11	mnw3	figs-ellipsis	εὐχαριστήσας	1		John leaves out some words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “having given thanks to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	6	11	l6pm	translate-unknown	τοὺς ἄρτους	1		This means **loaves** of bread, which are lumps of flour dough that a person has shaped and baked. These **loaves** are those five barley **loaves** mentioned in verse [9](../06/09.md). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the five loaves of barley bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+JHN	6	11	mnw3	figs-ellipsis	εὐχαριστήσας	1		John leaves out some words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “having given thanks to God for the food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	6	11	wi9d	figs-synecdoche	διέδωκεν	1	he gave it	Here, **he** refers to “Jesus and his disciples.” Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples gave them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-JHN	6	11	ib37	figs-explicit	τῶν ὀψαρίων	1		These **fish** are the two **fish** mentioned in verse [9](../06/09.md). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “the two fish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	6	11	ib37	figs-explicit	τῶν ὀψαρίων	1		These **fish** are the two **fish** mentioned in verse [9](../06/09.md). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “those two small fish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	12	leym	figs-activepassive	ἐνεπλήσθησαν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they had finished eating” or “they had filled themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	6	12	z5o3	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	6	12	qp1n	figs-quotations	λέγει τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ, συναγάγετε	1		If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “he says to his disciples to gather up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 JHN	6	13	h64z	translate-unknown	κοφίνους	1		Here, **baskets** refers to large baskets that were used for carrying food and goods while traveling. If your language has a word for this kind of basket, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “large traveling baskets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 JHN	6	14	d7lp	figs-gendernotations	οἱ…ἄνθρωποι	1		Although the term **men** is masculine, John uses the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-JHN	6	14	gmat		ἰδόντες ὃ ἐποίησεν σημεῖον	1		This clause could refer to: (1) the time that they said what follows in the verse. Alternate translation: “at the time they saw the sign he did” (2) the reason that they said what follows in the verse. Alternate translation: “because they saw the sign he did”
+JHN	6	14	gmat		ἰδόντες ὃ ἐποίησεν σημεῖον	1		This clause could refer to: (1) the time that they said the words which follow in the verse. Alternate translation: “at the time they saw the sign he did” (2) the reason that they said what follows in the verse. Alternate translation: “because they saw the sign he did”
 JHN	6	14	nlw1	figs-explicit	ὃ…σημεῖον	1	this sign	Here, **sign** refers to the Jesus miraculously feeding the large crowd that was described in verses [5–13](../06/05.md). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the sign of miraculously feeding the large crowd that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	6	14	g8zb	figs-explicit	ὁ προφήτης ὁ ἐρχόμενος εἰς τὸν κόσμον	1	the prophet	Here, **the Prophet** refers to a prophet the Jews were waiting for, based on God’s promise to send a prophet like Moses, which is recorded in Deuteronomy 18:15. If your readers will not be familiar with this Old Testament reference, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Prophet whom God said he would send into the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	6	14	g8zb	figs-explicit	ὁ προφήτης ὁ ἐρχόμενος εἰς τὸν κόσμον	1	the prophet	Here, **the Prophet** refers to a prophet the Jews were waiting for, based on God’s promise to send a prophet like Moses, which is recorded in Deuteronomy 18:15. If your readers will not be familiar with this Old Testament reference, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Prophet whom God said he would send into the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	15	rfbr		γνοὺς ὅτι μέλλουσιν ἔρχεσθαι	1		This clause could refer to: (1) the time that Jesus decided to withdraw. Alternate translation: “at the time he realized that they were about to come” (2) the reason that Jesus decided to withdraw. Alternate translation: “because he realized that they were about to come”
 JHN	6	15	hg4f	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς μόνος	1		Here John uses the reflexive pronoun **himself** to emphasize that Jesus was completely alone. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “completely alone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 JHN	6	16	qb23			0	Connecting Statement:	This is the next event in the story. Jesus’ disciples go out onto the Sea of Galilee in a boat.
 JHN	6	16	tmzf	figs-explicit	τὴν θάλασσαν	1		Here and throughout this chapter, **sea** refers to the Sea of Galilee. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly, as modeled by UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	17	zu3v	translate-names	εἰς Καφαρναούμ	1		See how you translated **Capernaum** in [2:12](../02/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	6	17	fkj2	writing-background	καὶ σκοτία ἤδη ἐγεγόνει, καὶ οὔπω ἐληλύθει πρὸς αὐτοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς	1	It was dark by this time, and Jesus had not yet come to them	In these clauses John provides background information about the situation in order to help readers understand what happens in this story. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-JHN	6	18	q5f7	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἀνέμου μεγάλου πνέοντος	1		This clause indicates the reason for what happens in the next clause. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Because a strong wind was blowing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+JHN	6	18	q5f7	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἥ τε θάλασσα ἀνέμου μεγάλου πνέοντος διηγείρετο	1		The first clause about the wind indicates the reason the **sea was being aroused** in the second clause. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Because a strong wind was blowing, the sea was being aroused” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 JHN	6	18	pms3	figs-metaphor	διηγείρετο	1		John uses **aroused** figuratively to refer to the wind causing the sea to become turbulent. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “was being stirred up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	6	18	z381	figs-activepassive	ἥ…θάλασσα…διηγείρετο	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the wind was causing the sea to be aroused” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	6	19	xx7d	translate-unknown	ἐληλακότες	1	they had rowed	The boats used on the Sea of Galilee usually had positions for two, four, or six people who sat together and **rowed** with oars on each side of the boat. If your readers would not be familiar with rowed boats, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “having propelled the boat through the water by using oars” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+JHN	6	19	xx7d	translate-unknown	ἐληλακότες	1	they had rowed	The boats used on the Sea of Galilee usually had positions for two, four, or six people who sat together and **rowed** with oars on each side of the boat. If your readers would not be familiar with rowed boats, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “having propelled the boat through the water by using oars” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 JHN	6	19	sgf4	translate-bdistance	ὡς σταδίους εἴκοσι πέντε ἢ τριάκοντα	1	about twenty-five or thirty stadia	The word **stadia** is the plural of “stadium,” which is a Roman measurement of distance equivalent to about 185 meters or a little over 600 feet. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. Alternate translation: “about four and a half or five and a half kilometers” or “about three or three and a half miles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
 JHN	6	19	diko	figs-pastforfuture	θεωροῦσιν	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	6	20	tjg9	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
@@ -767,12 +767,12 @@ JHN	6	22	ho60	figs-explicit	πέραν τῆς θαλάσσης	1		Here, **the o
 JHN	6	22	mhjh	figs-explicit	πλοιάριον ἄλλο οὐκ ἦν ἐκεῖ, εἰ μὴ ἕν	1		Here, **one** refers to the boat that the disciples had taken to cross the Sea of Galilee. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “there was no other boat there except the one that the disciples had taken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	23	w7qu	writing-background	ἄλλα ἦλθεν πλοῖα ἐκ Τιβεριάδος, ἐγγὺς τοῦ τόπου ὅπου ἔφαγον τὸν ἄρτον	1		In this verse John provides background information about the story. The day after Jesus miraculously fed the crowd, some **boats** with people from **Tiberias** came to see Jesus. However, Jesus and his disciples had left that place the night before. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Other boats came with people from Tiberias close to the place where the crowd had eaten the bread loaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	6	23	hwtc	figs-explicit	τοῦ Κυρίου	1		Here, **the Lord** refers to Jesus. It does not refer to God the Father. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	6	23	sqke	figs-ellipsis	εὐχαριστήσαντος τοῦ Κυρίου	1		John leaves out some words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “after the Lord had given thanks to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	6	23	sqke	figs-ellipsis	εὐχαριστήσαντος τοῦ Κυρίου	1		John leaves out some words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “after the Lord had given thanks to God for the food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	6	24	vad6	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1		**Therefore** indicates that this verse is the result of what happened in verse [22](../06/22.md). This verse resumes the narrative that was interrupted by the background information in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Because Jesus and his disciples had gone to the other side of the Sea of Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 JHN	6	24	f7t2	grammar-collectivenouns	ὁ ὄχλος	1		See how you translated **crowd** in [5:13](../05/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 JHN	6	24	cql6	figs-pastforfuture	ἔστιν	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	6	24	fecq	figs-explicit	εἰς τὰ πλοιάρια	1		These **boats** are the **boats** mentioned in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “into the boats that had come from Tiberias” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	6	24	o7vs	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ζητοῦντες τὸν Ἰησοῦν	1		Here John is stating the purpose for which the crowd went to Capernaum. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “so that they could seek Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+JHN	6	24	o7vs	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ζητοῦντες τὸν Ἰησοῦν	1		Here John is stating the purpose for which the crowd went to Capernaum. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “so that they could seek Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 JHN	6	25	tnms	figs-explicit	πέραν τῆς θαλάσσης	1		Here, **on the other side** refers to the side of the Sea of Galilee that is opposite the side where Jesus had miraculously fed the crowd. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the opposite side of the sea from where Jesus had fed the crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	26	f8j4	figs-doublet	ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly, truly	Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this is in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	6	26	l9ws		σημεῖα	1		See how you translated this term in [2:11](../02/11.md). See also the discussion of **signs** in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracles”
@@ -786,7 +786,7 @@ JHN	6	27	bric	figs-explicit	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		See how
 JHN	6	27	gf9q	figs-idiom	τοῦτον…ἐσφράγισεν	1		To “**set** a **seal**” on something means to place a mark on it in order to show to whom it belongs or to certify its authenticity. Here, the phrase is used as an idiom and could mean: (1) that the Father approves of the Son in every way. Alternate translation: “has affirmed his approval of him” (2) that the Son belongs to the Father. Alternate translation: “has affirmed that the Son belongs to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	6	29	he3q	figs-explicit	τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ ἔργον τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἵνα πιστεύητε εἰς ὃν ἀπέστειλεν ἐκεῖνος	1		Here, Jesus says which **work** one must do in order to receive “the food that endures to eternal life” that was mentioned in verse [27](../06/27.md). This **work** is not any kind of labor or deed that can be done, but it is faith in Jesus, which is a gift from God ([Ephesians 2:8–9](../eph/02/08.md)). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is the work of God that is required to receive the food that endures to eternal life: that you believe in the one whom that one has sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	29	aevl	figs-123person	ὃν ἀπέστειλεν ἐκεῖνος	1		This phrase refers to Jesus. He is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-JHN	6	29	z1u9	writing-pronouns	ἀπέστειλεν ἐκεῖνος	1		Here, **that one** refers to God the Father. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God has sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	6	29	z1u9	writing-pronouns	ἀπέστειλεν ἐκεῖνος	1		Here, **that one** refers to God the Father. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God has sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	6	31	t3jt	figs-explicit	οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν τὸ μάννα ἔφαγον ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ	1		In this verse, John assumes that his readers will know that the crowd is referring to a story recorded in the Old Testament book of Exodus. In that story, the Israelites complained against Moses and Aaron because they were hungry. God responded by providing a flake-like food that fell from the sky and could be baked into bread. The people called this flake-like food “manna.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/manna]]) You could indicate this explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers, particularly if they would not know the story. Alternate translation: “Our fathers ate the manna when they were wandering in the wilderness after leaving Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	31	gye7	figs-metaphor	οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν	1	Our fathers	The crowd used **fathers** figuratively to refer to their ancestors. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Our ancestors” or “Our forefathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	6	31	jz9p	figs-activepassive	ἐστιν γεγραμμένον	1	heaven	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the prophets wrote in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -808,8 +808,8 @@ JHN	6	33	rrf5	figs-explicit	ζωὴν	1	gives life to the world	Here, **life** r
 JHN	6	33	k897	figs-metonymy	τῷ κόσμῳ	1	the world	Here, **the world** refers to the people who live in it. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people living in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	6	34	j26s		κύριε	1		The crowd calls Jesus **Sir** in order to show respect or politeness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lord]])
 JHN	6	34	z9zv	figs-synecdoche	τὸν ἄρτον	1		Here, **bread** could refer to: (1) food in general, as the word was used by the crowd in [verse 31](../06/31.md). This would mean that the crowd did not understand that Jesus was calling himself the bread from heaven. Alternate translation: “food” (2) some gift from God of which the crowd was uncertain. This would mean that the crowd recognized that Jesus was talking about something more spiritual than mere food but did not understand that he was talking about himself. Alternate translation: “heavenly food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-JHN	6	35	cr2m	figs-exmetaphor	ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ ἄρτος τῆς ζωῆς	1	I am the bread of life	John records Jesus continuing the **bread** metaphor to refer figuratively to himself. In Jesus’ culture, **bread** was the primary food people ate to stay alive. Just as **bread** is necessary for sustaining physical life, Jesus is necessary for giving spiritual life. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “Just as food keeps you physically alive, I can give you spiritual life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
-JHN	6	35	yq25	figs-possession	ὁ ἄρτος τῆς ζωῆς	1		Jesus uses **of** to describe what produces **life**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the bread that produces life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+JHN	6	35	cr2m	figs-exmetaphor	ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ ἄρτος τῆς ζωῆς	1	I am the bread of life	John records Jesus continuing the **bread** metaphor to refer figuratively to himself. In Jesus’ culture, **bread** was the primary food people ate to stay alive. Just as **bread** is necessary for sustaining physical life, Jesus is necessary for giving spiritual life. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “Just as food keeps you physically alive, I can give you spiritual life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
+JHN	6	35	yq25	figs-possession	ὁ ἄρτος τῆς ζωῆς	1		Jesus uses **of life** to the source of the **life** about which he is speaking. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the bread that produces life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JHN	6	35	hvpi	figs-explicit	τῆς ζωῆς	1		Here, **life** refers to eternal life. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	35	lgpu	figs-exmetaphor	ὁ ἐρχόμενος πρὸς ἐμὲ, οὐ μὴ πεινάσῃ; καὶ ὁ πιστεύων εἰς ἐμὲ, οὐ μὴ διψήσει πώποτε	1		Jesus speaks about the person who trusts in him by continuing the metaphor of food that he began in verse [32](../06/32.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “The one coming to me will be like a person who never gets hungry, and the one believing in me will be like a person who never gets thirsty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
 JHN	6	35	fpgo	figs-doublet	ὁ ἐρχόμενος πρὸς ἐμὲ, οὐ μὴ πεινάσῃ; καὶ ὁ πιστεύων εἰς ἐμὲ, οὐ μὴ διψήσει πώποτε	1		These two clauses mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that anyone who trusts in Jesus will never lack spiritual satisfaction. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “The one who trusts me will certainly never lack spiritual satisfaction again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -822,9 +822,9 @@ JHN	6	38	z84i	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1	Connecting Statement:	**For
 JHN	6	38	cpi9	figs-explicit	τοῦ πέμψαντός με	1	him who sent me	Here, **the one who sent me** refers to God. See how you translated it in [4:34](../04/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	39	uqjy	figs-explicit	τοῦ πέμψαντός με	1		Here, **the one who sent me** refers to God. See how you translated it in [4:34](../04/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	39	x5c1	figs-litotes	πᾶν ὃ…μὴ ἀπολέσω ἐξ αὐτοῦ	1	I would lose not one of all those	Jesus is using a figure of speech here to expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that means the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I should keep all of them whom he has given” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
-JHN	6	39	p8s0	writing-pronouns	μὴ ἀπολέσω ἐξ αὐτοῦ, ἀλλὰ ἀναστήσω αὐτὸ	1		Here, **it** refers to the whole group of believers as a whole. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly or use a plural pronoun. Alternate translation: “I would not lose from the group of believers … but will raise that group up” or “I would not lose from them … but will raise them up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-JHN	6	39	j7q6	figs-idiom	ἀναστήσω αὐτὸ	1	will raise them up	Here, to **raise** up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “will cause them to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-JHN	6	39	npma	figs-explicit	τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ	1		Here, **the last day** refers to “the day of the Lord,” which is the time when God judges everyone, Jesus returns to earth, and the bodies of those who are dead are raised from their graves. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]]) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the day when I return and judge everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	6	39	p8s0	writing-pronouns	μὴ ἀπολέσω ἐξ αὐτοῦ, ἀλλὰ ἀναστήσω αὐτὸ	1		Here, **it** refers to the whole group of believers as a whole. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly or use a plural pronoun. Alternate translation: “I would not lose from the group of believers … but will raise that group up” or “I would not lose from them … but will raise them up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	6	39	j7q6	figs-idiom	ἀναστήσω αὐτὸ	1	will raise them up	Here, to **raise** up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “will cause them to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+JHN	6	39	npma	figs-explicit	τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ	1		Here, **the last day** refers to “the day of the Lord,” which is the time when God judges everyone, Jesus returns to earth, and the bodies of those who are dead are raised from their graves. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]]) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the day when I return and judge everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	40	wnou	grammar-connect-logic-result	τοῦτο γάρ ἐστιν τὸ θέλημα τοῦ Πατρός μου, ἵνα πᾶς	1		**For** introduces the reason for the Father’s will that Jesus stated in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “What I have just said is my Father’s will, because his will is also that everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 JHN	6	40	b84t	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Πατρός μου	1		**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	6	40	cb1a	figs-metaphor	πᾶς ὁ θεωρῶν τὸν Υἱὸν	1		Jesus uses **sees** figuratively to refer to understanding something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everyone who understands who the Son is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -836,7 +836,7 @@ JHN	6	41	wwa5	figs-metaphor	ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ ἄρτος	1	I am the bread	H
 JHN	6	42	bm3w	figs-rquestion	οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν Ἰησοῦς ὁ υἱὸς Ἰωσήφ, οὗ ἡμεῖς οἴδαμεν τὸν πατέρα καὶ τὴν μητέρα?	1	Is not this Jesus … whose father and mother we know?	Here the Jewish leaders are using the form of a question to emphasize that they believe that Jesus is just a normal person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation, and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This is just Jesus, the son of Joseph, whose father and mother we know!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	6	42	i81r	figs-rquestion	πῶς νῦν λέγει, ὅτι ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καταβέβηκα?	1	How then does he now say, ‘I have come down from heaven’?	Here the Jewish leaders are using the form of a question to emphasize that they do not believe that Jesus came from heaven. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “He is lying when he says that he came from heaven!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	6	42	z0zh	figs-quotesinquotes	πῶς νῦν λέγει, ὅτι ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καταβέβηκα?	1		If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “How then does he now say that he has come down from heaven?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
-JHN	6	44	zis9	figs-explicit	ἐλθεῖν πρός με	1		Here, **come** does not mean to merely come near Jesus. It means to believe in him and be his disciple. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to come to be my disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	6	44	zis9	figs-explicit	ἐλθεῖν πρός με	1		Here, **come** does not mean to merely come near Jesus. It means to believe in him and be his disciple. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to come to be my disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	44	jb73	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατὴρ	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	6	44	k7ld	figs-explicit	ὁ πέμψας με	1		Here, this phrase refers to God. See how you translated it in [5:23](../05/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	44	rr2m		ἑλκύσῃ αὐτόν	1	draws	Alternate translation: “would pull him” or “would drag him”
@@ -848,7 +848,7 @@ JHN	6	45	jg6g	writing-quotations	ἔστιν γεγραμμένον ἐν το
 JHN	6	45	wnjr	figs-quotesinquotes	ἐν τοῖς προφήταις, καὶ ἔσονται πάντες διδακτοὶ Θεοῦ	1		If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “in the prophets that all will be taught by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 JHN	6	45	fken	figs-activepassive	ἔσονται πάντες διδακτοὶ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will teach all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	6	45	orme	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Πατρὸς	1		**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-JHN	6	45	xmzr	figs-explicit	ἔρχεται πρὸς ἐμέ	1		Here, **comes** does not mean to merely come near Jesus. It means to believe in him and be his disciple. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “comes to be my disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	6	45	xmzr	figs-explicit	ἔρχεται πρὸς ἐμέ	1		Here, **comes** does not mean to merely come near Jesus. It means to believe in him and be his disciple. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “comes to be my disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	46	i9mp	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Πατέρα…ἑώρακεν τὸν Πατέρα	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	6	46	lcz8	figs-123person	ὁ ὢν παρὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ; οὗτος ἑώρακεν τὸν Πατέρα	1		John records Jesus referring to himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “me, the who is from God—I have seen the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	6	47	de5y	figs-doublet	ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly, truly	Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this is in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -856,21 +856,21 @@ JHN	6	47	t8lk	figs-ellipsis	ὁ πιστεύων	1	he who believes	John records
 JHN	6	48	iih2	figs-metaphor	ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ ἄρτος τῆς ζωῆς	1	I am the bread of life	See how you translated this in [John 6:35](../06/35.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	6	49	uh76	figs-metaphor	οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν	1	Your fathers	Jesus uses **fathers** figuratively to refer to ancestors. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Your forefathers” or “Your ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	6	49	mr3u	figs-explicit	ἔφαγον ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ τὸ μάννα	1	died	See how you translated this expression in verse [31](../06/31.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	6	50	sa53	figs-exmetaphor	οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ ἄρτος ὁ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καταβαίνων, ἵνα τις ἐξ αὐτοῦ φάγῃ, καὶ μὴ ἀποθάνῃ	1	This is the bread	Jesus continues using the **bread** metaphor to say that one must believe in him in order to have eternal life just as one must **eat** **bread** to sustain physical life. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this as a simile. Alternate translation: “I am this bread that comes down from heaven, just as one must eat bread to live, so must one believe in me in order to not die spiritually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
+JHN	6	50	sa53	figs-exmetaphor	οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ ἄρτος ὁ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καταβαίνων, ἵνα τις ἐξ αὐτοῦ φάγῃ, καὶ μὴ ἀποθάνῃ	1	This is the bread	Jesus continues using the **bread** metaphor to express that one must believe in him in order to have eternal life just as one must **eat** **bread** to sustain physical life. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this as a simile. Alternate translation: “I am this bread that comes down from heaven, just as one must eat bread to live, so must one believe in me in order to not die spiritually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
 JHN	6	50	y1x9	figs-123person	οὗτός ἐστιν…αὐτοῦ	1		John records Jesus referring to himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “I am … me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	6	50	gse5	figs-metaphor	ὁ ἄρτος	1		See how you translated this in verse [48](../06/48.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	6	50	lfwm	figs-metaphor	ἐξ αὐτοῦ φάγῃ	1		Here Jesus uses **eat** figuratively to refer to believing in him for salvation. What Jesus said plainly in verse [47](../06/47.md) he says figuratively here. If this would confuse your readers, you could say this with a simile. Alternate translation: “might believe in me as one eats bread to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	6	50	lfwm	figs-metaphor	ἐξ αὐτοῦ φάγῃ	1		Here Jesus uses **eat** figuratively to refer to believing in him for salvation. What Jesus said plainly in verse [47](../06/47.md) he says figuratively here. If this would confuse your readers, you could express this with a simile. Alternate translation: “might believe in me as one eats bread to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	6	50	v212	figs-metaphor	μὴ ἀποθάνῃ	1	not die	Here Jesus uses **die** figuratively to refer to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “might not die spiritually” or “might not experience spiritual death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	6	51	e9g3	figs-exmetaphor	ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ ἄρτος ὁ ζῶν ὁ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καταβάς; ἐάν τις φάγῃ ἐκ τούτου τοῦ ἄρτου, ζήσεται εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα	1		As in the previous verse, Jesus continues using the **bread** metaphor to say that one must believe in him in order to have eternal life just as one **eats** **bread** to sustain physical life. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this as a simile. Alternate translation: “I am the living bread that comes down from heaven. Just as one lives if they eat bread, so does one who believes in me live forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
+JHN	6	51	e9g3	figs-exmetaphor	ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ ἄρτος ὁ ζῶν ὁ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καταβάς; ἐάν τις φάγῃ ἐκ τούτου τοῦ ἄρτου, ζήσεται εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα	1		As in the previous verse, Jesus continues using the **bread** metaphor to say that one must believe in him in order to have eternal life just as one **eats** **bread** to sustain physical life. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this as a simile. Alternate translation: “I am the living bread that comes down from heaven. Just as one lives if they eat bread, so does one who believes in me live forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
 JHN	6	51	ztqs	figs-explicit	ἐγώ εἰμι	1		Jesus uses this phrase emphatically to make a strong statement about who he is. Use the most natural way to express emphasis in your language. Alternate translation: “I myself am” or “I am indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	6	51	px99	figs-explicit	ὁ ἄρτος ὁ ζῶν	1	living bread	Here, **living** refers to being the source of life or having the ability to produce life, which is synonymous with “life” in the phrase “the bread of life,” which Jesus used in verse [35](../06/35.md). See how you translated “the bread of life” in verse [35](../06/35.md). Alternate translation: “the bread that causes life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	6	51	px99	figs-explicit	ὁ ἄρτος ὁ ζῶν	1	living bread	Here, **living** refers to being the source of life or having the ability to produce life, which is synonymous with “of life” in the phrase “the bread of life,” which Jesus used in [verse 35](../06/35.md). See how you translated “the bread of life” in [verse 35](../06/35.md). Alternate translation: “the bread that gives life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	51	gs06	figs-metaphor	φάγῃ ἐκ τούτου τοῦ ἄρτου	1		Here and in the previous verse, Jesus uses **eats** figuratively to refer to believing in Jesus for salvation. Jesus gives eternal life to those who believe in him. See how you translated “eat” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Just as food keeps you physically alive, I can give you spiritual life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	6	51	k4bo	figs-metonymy	σάρξ μού	1		Here, John records Jesus using **flesh** figuratively to refer to his whole physical body. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	6	51	ee9d	figs-extrainfo	ὁ ἄρτος	2		Here Jesus is using the **bread** metaphor slightly differently from how he has used it previously. Here it refers specifically to his physical body, which he would sacrifice on the cross to pay for the sins of those who believe in him. Since Jesus says this explicitly at the end of the verse, you do not need to explain its meaning further. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 JHN	6	51	c5z3	figs-explicit	ὑπὲρ τῆς τοῦ κόσμου ζωῆς	1		Here, **life** refers to eternal life. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the eternal life of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	51	nb41	figs-metonymy	ὑπὲρ τῆς τοῦ κόσμου ζωῆς	1	for the life of the world	Here, **the world** is used figuratively to refer to the people in the world. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for the life of the people in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-JHN	6	52	q5nw	writing-quotations	ἐμάχοντο…πρὸς ἀλλήλους οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι λέγοντες	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “then the Jews began to argue among themselves, and they said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	6	52	v6g7	figs-synecdoche	οὖν…οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1		Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+JHN	6	52	q5nw	writing-quotations	ἐμάχοντο…πρὸς ἀλλήλους οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι λέγοντες	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “then the Jews began to argue among themselves, and they said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	6	52	fj5p	figs-rquestion	πῶς δύναται οὗτος ἡμῖν δοῦναι τὴν σάρκα φαγεῖν?	1	How can this man give us his flesh to eat?	Here the Jewish leaders are using the form of a question to emphasize that they are reacting negatively to what Jesus has said about **his flesh**. If this might be misunderstood in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “There is no way that this one is able to give us his flesh to eat!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	6	52	llc0	figs-metonymy	τὴν σάρκα	1		Here, John records the Jews using **flesh** figuratively to refer to Jesus’ whole physical body. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	6	53	q8jl	figs-doublet	ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly, truly	Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this is in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -903,18 +903,18 @@ JHN	6	58	lb07	figs-explicit	ἔφαγον οἱ πατέρες καὶ ἀπέθ
 JHN	6	58	j2hx	figs-123person	ὁ τρώγων τοῦτον τὸν ἄρτον	1	He who eats this bread	Jesus spoke about himself as **this bread**. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	6	58	jv4c	figs-extrainfo	ὁ τρώγων τοῦτον τὸν ἄρτον	1	He who eats this bread	Jesus is using **eating this bread** figuratively to refer to trusting him. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 JHN	6	59	ph39	writing-background		0		In this verse John gives background information about when this event happened. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-JHN	6	59	ukxi	figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1		Here, **these things** refers to what Jesus said to the crowd and Jewish leaders in verses [26–58](../06/26.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these teachings about being the bread of life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	6	59	ukxi	figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1		Here, **these things** refers to what Jesus said to the crowd and Jewish leaders in verses [26–58](../06/26.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these teachings about being the bread of life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	60	t1me	figs-ellipsis	ἀκούσαντες	1		Here, John leaves out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “having heard this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	6	60	wf67	figs-metonymy	ἐστιν ὁ λόγος οὗτος	1		Here, **word** stands for what Jesus had just spoken to the crowd in verses [26–58](../06/26.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “What he has just said is” or “These words are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	6	60	lmcv	figs-explicit	σκληρός	1		Here, **hard** refers to something that causes a negative reaction because it is harsh or unpleasant. It does not refer to something that is difficult to understand, but something that is difficult to accept. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “hard to accept” or “offensive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	60	cp3k	figs-rquestion	τίς δύναται αὐτοῦ ἀκούειν?	1		Here the disciples use the question form for emphasis. If this would be confusing in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “no one is able to listen to it!” or “it is too hard to listen to!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-JHN	6	61	rn8i	figs-explicit	εἰδὼς δὲ ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἐν ἑαυτῷ	1	Does this offend you?	This phrase implies that Jesus had supernatural knowledge. It indicates that Jesus knew what his disciples were saying even though he did not hear what they said. If it would be helpful to your readers, your could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Even though no one told Jesus, he knew” or “Even though Jesus had not heard them, he was fully aware”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	6	61	g3z7	figs-explicit	περὶ τούτου…τοῦτο	1		In this verse, **this** refers to what Jesus had just spoken to the crowd in verses [26–58](../06/26.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “about these teachings … what I teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	6	61	rn8i	figs-explicit	εἰδὼς δὲ ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἐν ἑαυτῷ	1	Does this offend you?	This phrase implies that Jesus had supernatural knowledge. It indicates that Jesus knew what his disciples were saying even though he did not hear what they said. If it would be helpful to your readers, your could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Even though no one told Jesus, he knew” or “Even though Jesus had not heard them, he was fully aware”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	6	61	g3z7	figs-explicit	περὶ τούτου…τοῦτο	1		In this verse, **this** refers to what Jesus had just spoken to the crowd in verses [26–58](../06/26.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “about these teachings … what I teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	61	j2gj	figs-you	ὑμᾶς	1		Here and throughout [verses 61–71](../06/61.md) **you** is plural and refers to Jesus’ disciples. If your language distinguishes between singular and plural second person pronouns, you should use the plural form of **you**. Alternate translation: “you disciples of mine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 JHN	6	62	r33r	figs-ellipsis	ἐὰν…θεωρῆτε τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου, ἀναβαίνοντα ὅπου ἦν τὸ πρότερον?	1		Here, John records Jesus using only one part of a conditional sentence. He leaves out the second part of the conditional sentence for emphasis. Many languages need to have both parts of a conditional sentence in order to make the sentence complete. If this is true for your language, you could supply the second clause from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “if you would see the Son of Man going up to where he was before, would it offend you?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	6	62	v4tr	figs-123person	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου, ἀναβαίνοντα ὅπου ἦν τὸ πρότερον	1		Jesus is speaking of himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	6	62	ibnq	figs-explicit	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	6	62	uxe0	figs-explicit	ὅπου ἦν τὸ πρότερον	1		This phrase refers to heaven, where Jesus was **before** he came down to earth. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to heaven, where I used to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	6	62	uxe0	figs-explicit	ὅπου ἦν τὸ πρότερον	1		This phrase refers to heaven, where Jesus was **before** he came down to earth. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to heaven, where I used to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	63	nx51	figs-explicit	τὸ Πνεῦμά ἐστιν τὸ ζῳοποιοῦν	1		Here, **making alive** refers to giving eternal life, not physical life. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “The Spirit is the one giving eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	63	ygqi	figs-explicit	ἡ σὰρξ	1		Here, **the flesh** could refer to: (1) human nature, as in the UST. (2) Jesus’ body. Alternate translation: “my flesh” (3) both human nature and Jesus’ body. “your nature and my flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	63	y558	figs-explicit	οὐκ ὠφελεῖ οὐδέν	1	profits	Here, **profit** means to be beneficial or useful. It does not mean to earn money. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “has no benefit” or “is no help at all”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -923,13 +923,13 @@ JHN	6	63	plw8		πνεῦμά ἐστιν	1		This could mean: (1) from the Spirit
 JHN	6	63	gb29		καὶ ζωή ἐστιν	1		This could mean: (1) give life. Alternate translation: “and they give life” (2) about life. Alternate translation: “and they are about life”
 JHN	6	63	dz25	figs-explicit	ζωή	1		Here, **life** refers to eternal life. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	64	ey1e	writing-background	ᾔδει γὰρ ἐξ ἀρχῆς ὁ Ἰησοῦς, τίνες εἰσὶν οἱ μὴ πιστεύοντες, καὶ τίς ἐστιν ὁ παραδώσων αὐτόν	1	For Jesus knew from the beginning who were the ones … who it was who would betray him	In this sentence John gives background information to explain why Jesus said the earlier part of this verse. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Jesus said this because he knew from the start who did not believe and who would later betray him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-JHN	6	64	rlhr	figs-explicit	οἳ οὐ πιστεύουσιν…οἱ μὴ πιστεύοντες	1		The implied object of **believe** and **believing** is Jesus or Jesus’ teaching. If your language requires an object for these words, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who do not believe in me … the ones not believing in me” or “who do not believe what I say … the ones not believing what I say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	6	65	e9ex	figs-explicit	διὰ τοῦτο	1		Here, **this** refers to the information Jesus said in the previous verse. If it would be misunderstood for your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Because of the disbelief I have just told you about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	6	64	rlhr	figs-explicit	οἳ οὐ πιστεύουσιν…οἱ μὴ πιστεύοντες	1		The implied object of **believe** and **believing** is Jesus or Jesus’ teaching. If your language requires an object for these words, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who do not believe in me … the ones not believing in me” or “who do not believe what I say … the ones not believing what I say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	6	65	e9ex	figs-explicit	διὰ τοῦτο	1		Here, **this** refers to the information Jesus said in the previous verse. If it would be misunderstood for your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Because of the disbelief I have just told you about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	65	c3cl	figs-explicit	οὐδεὶς δύναται ἐλθεῖν πρός με	1	no one can come to me unless it is granted to him by the Father	See how you translated the identical phrase in verse [44](../06/44.md). Alternate translation: “no one is able to come to be my disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	6	65	ckfz	writing-pronouns	ᾖ δεδομένον αὐτῷ	1		Here, the pronoun **it** refers to the ability to come to Jesus and be his disciple. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the ability to come to me would be have been granted to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	6	65	ckfz	writing-pronouns	ᾖ δεδομένον αὐτῷ	1		Here, the pronoun **it** refers to the ability to come to Jesus and be his disciple. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the ability to come to me would be have been granted to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	6	65	uvxb	figs-activepassive	ᾖ δεδομένον αὐτῷ ἐκ τοῦ Πατρός	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Father would give it to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	6	65	g4za	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατρός	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-JHN	6	66	o1pd	figs-idiom	ἀπῆλθον εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω	1		Here, **stayed behind** is an idiom that refers to going back to living the way one had lived previously. Here, these people left Jesus to go back to living the way they had lived before they met him. If this might confuse your readers, you could say its meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “returned to their former manner of living” or “went back to their previous way of life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+JHN	6	66	o1pd	figs-idiom	ἀπῆλθον εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω	1		Here, **stayed behind** is an idiom that refers to going back to living the way one had lived previously. Here, these people left Jesus to go back to living the way they had lived before they met him. If this might confuse your readers, you could state its meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “returned to their former manner of living” or “went back to their previous way of life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	6	66	h8j9	figs-metaphor	οὐκέτι μετ’ αὐτοῦ περιεπάτουν	1	no longer walked with him	Although Jesus did walk from one place to another, here **walking** is used figuratively to refer to how a person lives and behaves. These people were **no longer** living according to Jesus’ teaching and thus were no longer his disciples. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “no longer obeyed his teachings” or “no longer were his disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	6	67	bg2f	figs-nominaladj	τοῖς δώδεκα	1	the twelve	John is using the adjective **Twelve** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the 12 apostles” or “the 12 men whom he had appointed to be apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 JHN	6	67	hoye	translate-names	τοῖς δώδεκα	1		If your language does not ordinarily use adjectives as nouns, you may be able to do that in this case, since this is a title by which the apostles were known. Even though it is a number, if you translate it as a title, as the ULT does, follow the conventions for titles in your language. For example, capitalize main words and write out numbers rather than use digits. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -937,7 +937,7 @@ JHN	6	67	ezer	figs-explicit	μὴ καὶ ὑμεῖς θέλετε ὑπάγε
 JHN	6	68	n5ty	translate-names	Σίμων Πέτρος	1		See how you translated the name **Simon Peter** in [1:40](../01/40.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	6	68	g9l4	figs-rquestion	Κύριε, πρὸς τίνα ἀπελευσόμεθα?	1	Lord, to whom shall we go?	**Simon Peter** is using the form of a question to emphasize that he desires to follow only Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Lord, we could never follow anyone but you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	6	68	tiwh	figs-possession	ῥήματα ζωῆς αἰωνίου ἔχεις	1		**Peter** uses **of** to describe a **word** that gives **eternal life**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “You have words that give eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-JHN	6	68	v12o	figs-metonymy	ῥήματα	1		John records Peter using the term **words** figuratively to describe the things that Jesus taught by using words. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+JHN	6	68	v12o	figs-metonymy	ῥήματα	1		John records Peter using the term **words** figuratively to describe the things that Jesus taught by using words. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	6	69	o3w6	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1		When Peter says **we**, he is speaking of himself and the rest of the twelve disciples, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 JHN	6	69	qu0n	figs-possession	ὁ Ἅγιος τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		**Peter** uses **of** to describe **the Holy One** who comes from **God**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Holy One from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JHN	6	70	m9ys	figs-rquestion	οὐκ ἐγὼ ὑμᾶς τοὺς δώδεκα ἐξελεξάμην, καὶ ἐξ ὑμῶν εἷς διάβολός ἐστιν?	1	Did not I choose you, the twelve, and one of you is a devil?	Jesus gives this remark in the form of a question in order to emphasize that one of the twelve disciples will betray him. Alternate translation: “I chose you, the Twelve, myself, and one of you is a devil!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -976,19 +976,19 @@ JHN	7	11	er5u	figs-explicit	ποῦ ἐστιν ἐκεῖνος	1		Here, John r
 JHN	7	12	qc8f	figs-explicit	γογγυσμὸς	1		Although the word translated **murmuring** usually refers to grumbling or complaining, here it refers to speaking quietly, without a negative meaning. Some people in **the crowd** were discussing who Jesus was and didn’t want the religious leaders to hear them. If your word for **murmuring** only has a negative connotation in your language, use a different neutral expression. Alternate translation: “quiet discussion” or “whispering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	7	12	glq8	grammar-collectivenouns	τοῖς ὄχλοις…τὸν ὄχλον	1		Here, **crowds** refers to several different groups of people, while **crowd** refers to a group of people in general. See how you translated **crowd** in [5:13](../05/13.md). Alternate translation: “the groups of people … the group of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 JHN	7	12	c27a	figs-metaphor	πλανᾷ τὸν ὄχλον	1	he leads the crowds astray	Here the people use **leads** **astray** figuratively to refer to persuading someone to believe something that is not true. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he misleads the crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	7	13	yyiv	figs-possession	διὰ τὸν φόβον τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1		John is using **of** to describe the **fear** that the people had for the Jewish leaders. If this use of the possessive form would be confusing in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “because of their fear for the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+JHN	7	13	yyiv	figs-possession	διὰ τὸν φόβον τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1		John is using **of** to describe the **fear** that the people had for the Jewish leaders. If this use of the possessive form would be confusing in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “because of their fear that the Jews would harm them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JHN	7	13	n8bb	figs-synecdoche	τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	the Jews	Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	7	14	yut8		τῆς ἑορτῆς	1		Here, **the festival** refers to the Jewish Festival of Shelters mentioned in verse [1](../07/01.md). See how you translated the word **festival** there. Alternate translation: “the Shelters festival”
 JHN	7	14	jqnk	figs-synecdoche	εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν	1		Since only priests could enter **the temple** building, this refers to **the temple** courtyard. John is using the word for the entire building to refer to one part of it. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-JHN	7	15	z0db	writing-quotations	ἐθαύμαζον…οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι λέγοντες	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “the Jews marveled, and they said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	7	15	u12l	figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1		Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	7	15	obtt	figs-explicit	ἐθαύμαζον	1		The word translated **marveled** refers to being amazed or in wonder of something in either a negative or positive way. Since the Jewish leaders despised Jesus, their amazement was unfavorable toward him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “showed their surprise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	7	15	e7ve	figs-rquestion	πῶς οὗτος γράμματα οἶδεν, μὴ μεμαθηκώς?	1		The Jewish leaders are using the form of a question to emphasize that they were surprised and annoyed by how much knowledge Jesus had about Scripture. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate their words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “He certainly cannot know so much about the scriptures, not being educated!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	7	15	k8wh	figs-explicit	οὗτος	1		Here, John records the Jewish leaders saying **this one** as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus and to avoid saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “this so-and-so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	7	15	oqzy	figs-explicit	μὴ μεμαθηκώς	1		Here, the Jewish leaders use **educated** to refer to receiving a Jewish religious education, which would include studying the Hebrew scriptures and Jewish religious traditions. This does not mean that they thought Jesus didn’t know how to read or write. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “not being trained in our scriptures and doctrines” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	7	15	z0db	writing-quotations	ἐθαύμαζον…οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι λέγοντες	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “the Jews marveled, and they said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	7	16	h7mr	figs-explicit	τοῦ πέμψαντός με	1	of him who sent me	Here, **the one who sent me** refers to God. See how you translated it in [4:34](../04/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	7	17	vlcd	figs-explicit	ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐστιν…ἀπ’ ἐμαυτοῦ	1		Here, **from** is used to indicate the source of Jesus’ teaching. A teaching could only have authority if God was its source. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “it is with God’s authority … only with my own authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	7	18	u5h6	figs-explicit	ἀφ’ ἑαυτοῦ	1		Here, **from** is used to indicate the source of what the person is speaking. A teaching could only have authority if God was its source. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by his own authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	7	17	vlcd	figs-explicit	ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐστιν…ἀπ’ ἐμαυτοῦ	1		Here, **from** is used to indicate the source of Jesus’ teaching. A teaching could only have authority if God was its source. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “it is with God’s authority … only with my own authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	7	18	u5h6	figs-explicit	ἀφ’ ἑαυτοῦ	1		Here, **from** is used to indicate the source of what the person is speaking. A teaching could only have authority if God was its source. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by his own authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	7	18	z5bx	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν δόξαν τὴν ἰδίαν ζητεῖ; ὁ δὲ ζητῶν τὴν δόξαν τοῦ πέμψαντος αὐτὸν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “seeks to make himself glorious, but the one seeking to make the one who sent him glorious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	7	18	xf9j	figs-abstractnouns	ἀδικία ἐν αὐτῷ οὐκ ἔστιν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **unrighteousness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he is not wicked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	7	19	c7xq	figs-rquestion	οὐ Μωϋσῆς δέδωκεν ὑμῖν τὸν νόμον, καὶ οὐδεὶς ἐξ ὑμῶν ποιεῖ τὸν νόμον?	1	Did not Moses give you the law?	Jesus is using the form of a question to add emphasis. If your language does not use this type of question, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “It was Moses who gave you the law, but none of you obeys the law!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ JHN	7	21	l1zf	figs-explicit	πάντες θαυμάζετε	1	you all marvel	The
 JHN	7	22	o9n9	figs-explicit	διὰ τοῦτο	1		Here, **this** refers to someone doing something on the Sabbath to help someone else. More specifically, Jesus is referring to the time he offended the Jews by healing a paralyzed man on the Sabbath. This event was indirectly mentioned in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “On account of activities like healing taking place on the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	7	22	d8sw	writing-background	οὐχ ὅτι ἐκ τοῦ Μωϋσέως ἐστὶν, ἀλλ’ ἐκ τῶν πατέρων	1	not that it is from Moses, but from the ancestors	Here Jesus provides additional information about where the Jewish practice of circumcision came from. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	7	22	w22v	figs-explicit	τῶν πατέρων	1		Here, **fathers** refers specifically to the first ancestors of the Jewish people, who are often called “the Patriarchs.” Those people are Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob. It does not refer to the ancestors of the Jewish people in general. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Patriarchs” or “the men who founded the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	7	22	cs9z	figs-explicit	ἐν Σαββάτῳ περιτέμνετε ἄνθρωπον	1	on the Sabbath you circumcise a man	Jesus implies that the act of **circumcision** was a kind of work. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you circumcise a male baby on the Sabbath. That is working too” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	7	22	cs9z	figs-explicit	ἐν Σαββάτῳ περιτέμνετε ἄνθρωπον	1	on the Sabbath you circumcise a man	Jesus implies that the act of **circumcision** was a kind of work. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you circumcise a male baby on the Sabbath. That is working too” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	7	22	dl6z	figs-genericnoun	ἄνθρωπον	1		Jesus is speaking of any Jewish **man** in general, not of one particular **man**. If this use of **man** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a more natural expression. Alternate translation: “men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 JHN	7	23	t21u	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ περιτομὴν λαμβάνει ἄνθρωπος ἐν Σαββάτῳ	1	If a man receives circumcision on the Sabbath	John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since a man receives circumcision on the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 JHN	7	23	k04n	figs-genericnoun	λαμβάνει ἄνθρωπος	1		See how you translated **man** in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “men receive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
@@ -1011,20 +1011,20 @@ JHN	7	23	owuc	grammar-collectivenouns	ὁ νόμος	1		See how you translated *
 JHN	7	23	ltsk	figs-activepassive	μὴ λυθῇ ὁ νόμος Μωϋσέως	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you might not break the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	7	23	fbk2	figs-idiom	μὴ λυθῇ ὁ νόμος Μωϋσέως	1		Here, Jesus uses **broken** figuratively to refer to disobeying the regulations that God gave in **the law of Moses**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the regulations of the law of Moses might not be disobeyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	7	23	w9wn	figs-rquestion	ἐμοὶ χολᾶτε ὅτι ὅλον ἄνθρωπον ὑγιῆ ἐποίησα ἐν Σαββάτῳ?	1	why are you angry with me because I made a man completely healthy on the Sabbath?	Jesus is using the question form for emphasis. If your language does not use this type of question, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you should not be angry with me because I made a man completely well on the Sabbath!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-JHN	7	24	x4fl	figs-explicit	μὴ κρίνετε κατ’ ὄψιν, ἀλλὰ τὴν δικαίαν κρίσιν κρίνετε	1	Do not judge according to appearance, but judge righteously	Jesus implies that the people should not decide what is right based only on what they can see. A person does something for a reason and that reason cannot be seen. If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Do not judge people according to appearance! Instead, decide what is right according to what God says is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	7	24	x4fl	figs-explicit	μὴ κρίνετε κατ’ ὄψιν, ἀλλὰ τὴν δικαίαν κρίσιν κρίνετε	1	Do not judge according to appearance, but judge righteously	Jesus implies that the people should not decide what is right based only on what they can see. A person does something for a reason and that reason cannot be seen. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Do not judge people according to appearance! Instead, decide what is right according to what God says is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	7	24	mrll	figs-abstractnouns	κατ’ ὄψιν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **appearance**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “according to what you see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	7	24	b7zy	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν δικαίαν κρίσιν κρίνετε	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgment**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “judge righteously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	7	25	ts7d	figs-rquestion	οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὃν ζητοῦσιν ἀποκτεῖναι?	1	Is not this the one they seek to kill?	Here, **the Jerusalemites** are using the question form for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This is the one they are seeking to kill!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	7	26	n5pi	figs-explicit	οὐδὲν αὐτῷ λέγουσιν	1	they say nothing to him	The Jerusalemites use this phrase in order to imply that the Jewish leaders are not opposing Jesus. Alternate translation: “they say nothing to oppose him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	7	26	s2un	figs-explicit	μήποτε ἀληθῶς ἔγνωσαν οἱ ἄρχοντες, ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ Χριστός?	1	It cannot be that the rulers indeed know that this is the Christ, can it?	Here, the Jerusalemites ask this question in a way that expects a negative response, but also expresses uncertainty about that response. If your language has a question form that assumes a negative response with uncertainty, you should use it here. Alternate translation: “Could it be possible that the rulers really know this is the Christ?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	7	26	f1jp	figs-explicit	οἱ ἄρχοντες	1		This phrase refers to the Jewish religious leadership, specifically the Jewish council called the Sanhedrin, which made decisions about Jewish law. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/council]]) If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The members of the Jewish ruling council” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	7	26	f1jp	figs-explicit	οἱ ἄρχοντες	1		This phrase refers to the Jewish religious leadership, specifically the Jewish council called the Sanhedrin, which made decisions about Jewish law. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/council]]) If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The members of the Jewish ruling council” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	7	27	rqq8	figs-explicit	τοῦτον	1		Here, John records the Jerusalemites saying **this one** as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus without saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “this so-and-so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	7	28	ht31	writing-quotations	διδάσκων…καὶ λέγων	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “while he was teaching he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+JHN	7	28	ht31	writing-quotations	ἔκραξεν οὖν ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ διδάσκων Ἰησοῦς, καὶ λέγων	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “Then Jesus cried out in the temple. While he was teaching, he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	7	28	zxh7		ἔκραξεν	1	cried out	Alternate translation: “spoke in a loud voice”
 JHN	7	28	ah7u	figs-synecdoche	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ	1	in the temple	Jesus and the people were actually in the courtyard of the **temple**. See how you translated **temple** in [verse 14](../07/14.md). Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	7	28	w35k	figs-explicit	ἀπ’ ἐμαυτοῦ	1	of myself	See how you translated **from myself** in verse [17](../07/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	7	28	a2h9	figs-explicit	ὁ πέμψας με	1	he who sent me is true	Here, **the one who sent me** refers to God. See how you translated it in verse [16](../07/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	7	28	rc3g	figs-explicit	ἔστιν ἀληθινὸς ὁ πέμψας με	1		Here, **true** could mean: (1) real. In this case, Jesus would be saying that he the God who is real sent him. Alternate translation: “the one who sent me is the real God” (2) truthful. In this case, Jesus would be saying that God is truly the one who sent him. Alternate translation: “the one who sent me is the true sender” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	7	28	rc3g	figs-explicit	ἔστιν ἀληθινὸς ὁ πέμψας με	1		Here, **true** could mean: (1) real, in contrast to a false god. In this case, Jesus would be saying that the Father is the only real God. Alternate translation: “the one who sent me is the real God” (2) truthful, in contrast to a liar. In this case, Jesus would be saying that Father who sent him always tells the truth. Alternate translation: “the one who sent me can be trusted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	7	30	kci1	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1		**Therefore** indicates that this verse states the result of what had happened in the previous verses. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “As a result of Jesus saying these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 JHN	7	30	e0ce	writing-pronouns	ἐζήτουν	1		Here, **they** could refer to: (1) the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “the Jewish authorities were seeking” (2) the Jerusalemites. Alternate translation: “the people dwelling in Jerusalem were seeking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	7	30	pamg	figs-idiom	οὐδεὶς ἐπέβαλεν ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὴν χεῖρα	1		To lay **a hand on** someone is an idiom which means to grab someone or hold onto someone. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “no one grabbed him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -1042,17 +1042,17 @@ JHN	7	35	zn29	figs-synecdoche	εἶπον οὖν οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι πρ
 JHN	7	35	ojvy	figs-explicit	οὗτος	1		Here, John records the Jewish leaders saying **this one** as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus and to avoid saying his name. See how you translated this phrase in verse [15](../07/15.md). Alternate translation: “this so-and-so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	7	35	tc23	figs-rquestion	μὴ εἰς τὴν διασπορὰν τῶν Ἑλλήνων μέλλει πορεύεσθαι, καὶ διδάσκειν τοὺς Ἕλληνας?	1		The Jewish leaders are using the form of a question to add emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this type of question, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely he is not about to go to the dispersion of the Greeks and to teach the Greeks!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	7	35	ef1y	figs-explicit	τὴν διασπορὰν	1		Here, **dispersion** refers to the Jewish people who were spread across the Greek-speaking world that was outside of the land of Israel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jews who are dispersed” or “the Jews who are scattered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	7	35	g64h	figs-possession	τὴν διασπορὰν τῶν Ἑλλήνων	1		John records the **Jews** using **of** to describe the Jewish people who were dispersed among **the Greeks**. If this use of the possessive form would be confusing in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the dispersion among the Greeks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+JHN	7	35	g64h	figs-possession	τὴν διασπορὰν τῶν Ἑλλήνων	1		The Jews used the phrase **of the Greeks** to describe the location where the Jews were dispersed. If this use of the possessive form would be confusing in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the Jews who are dispersed among the Greeks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JHN	7	36	ib6p	figs-metonymy	τίς ἐστιν ὁ λόγος οὗτος ὃν εἶπε	1	What is this word that he said	Here, **word** is used figuratively to refer to the meaning of the message that Jesus had shared. The Jewish leaders had failed to understand that message. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “What was he talking about when he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	7	36	h18z	figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπε, ζητήσετέ με, καὶ οὐχ εὑρήσετέ; καὶ ὅπου εἰμὶ ἐγὼ, ὑμεῖς οὐ δύνασθε ἐλθεῖν	1		If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 JHN	7	36	dyy1		ζητήσετέ με, καὶ οὐχ εὑρήσετέ; καὶ ὅπου εἰμὶ ἐγὼ, ὑμεῖς οὐ δύνασθε ἐλθεῖν	1		See how you translated this in verse [34](../07/34.md).
 JHN	7	37	elc6			0	General Information:	About three or four days has passed since the events described in verses [14–36](../07/14.md). It is now the last day of the Festival of Shelters, and Jesus speaks to the crowd.
 JHN	7	37	n3um	writing-quotations	ἔκραξεν λέγων	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “cried out, and he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	7	37	ipem		ἔκραξεν	1		See how you translated this in verse [28](../07/28.md).
-JHN	7	37	iy9e	figs-metaphor	ἐάν τις διψᾷ	1	If anyone is thirsty	Here Jesus uses **thirst** figuratively to refer to a person’s need for God, just as someone would **thirst** for water. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “If anyone may recognize your need for God like a thirsty person desires water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	7	37	iy9e	figs-metaphor	ἐάν τις διψᾷ	1	If anyone is thirsty	Here Jesus uses **thirst** figuratively to refer to a person’s need for God, just as someone would **thirst** for water. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “If anyone who recognizes their need for God is like a thirsty person who desires water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	7	37	ayn6	figs-metaphor	ἐρχέσθω πρός με καὶ πινέτω	1	let him come to me and drink	Here Jesus uses **come** and **drink** figuratively to refer together to believing in Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use similes. Alternate translation: “let him believe in me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	7	38	u9cx	figs-infostructure	ὁ πιστεύων εἰς ἐμὲ, καθὼς εἶπεν ἡ Γραφή	1	He who believes in me, just as the scripture says	If it would be natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. You will also need to adjust some words to fit the new order. Alternate translation: “As the scripture says about anyone who believes in me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-JHN	7	38	wtl7	figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπεν ἡ Γραφή, ποταμοὶ ἐκ τῆς κοιλίας αὐτοῦ ῥεύσουσιν ὕδατος ζῶντος	1		If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “the scriptures say that rivers of living water will flow from his stomach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+JHN	7	38	wtl7	figs-quotesinquotes	καθὼς εἶπεν ἡ Γραφή, ποταμοὶ ἐκ τῆς κοιλίας αὐτοῦ ῥεύσουσιν ὕδατος ζῶντος	1		If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “rivers of living water will flow from the stomach of the one believing in me, just as the scripture says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 JHN	7	38	q926	figs-personification	εἶπεν ἡ Γραφή	1		Here Jesus uses **scripture** as if it were a person who could speak. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the prophets spoke in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 JHN	7	38	uw2q	figs-metaphor	ποταμοὶ…ῥεύσουσιν ὕδατος ζῶντος	1	rivers of living water will flow	Here Jesus uses **rivers** figuratively to refer to a constant and abundant flow of **living water**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “an abundance of living water will flow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	7	38	yt75	figs-extrainfo	ὕδατος ζῶντος	1	living water	Jesus uses **living water** here figuratively to refer to the Holy Spirit who works in a person to save and transform them. However, since John explains this meaning in the next verse, you do not need to explain it further here. See how you translated **living water** in [4:10](../04/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
@@ -1060,7 +1060,7 @@ JHN	7	38	y1zb	figs-explicit	ὕδατος ζῶντος	1		Here, **living** is u
 JHN	7	38	ebk7	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ	1		The pronoun **his** could refer to: (1) the person who believes in Jesus. This meaning is used in most Bible translations and assumes that a new sentence begins at the beginning of this verse. Alternate translation, as in the ULT: “his” (2) Jesus. This meaning is used in some ancient church writings and assumes that the sentence at the end of the previous verse continues into through **the one believing in me** in this verse. Alternate translation: “my” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	7	38	cx1q	figs-metonymy	ἐκ τῆς κοιλίας αὐτοῦ	1	from his stomach	Here the **stomach** is used figuratively to refer to the non-physical part of a person. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from inside of him” or “from his heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	7	39	i8wx	writing-background		0	General Information:	In this verse John gives information to clarify what Jesus was talking about in the previous verse. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-JHN	7	39	qbr1	figs-explicit	οὔπω…ἦν Πνεῦμα	1	the Spirit had not yet been given	John implies here that **the Spirit** would later come to dwell in those who trusted in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Spirit had not yet come to dwell in the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	7	39	qbr1	figs-explicit	οὔπω…ἦν Πνεῦμα	1	the Spirit had not yet been given	John implies here that **the Spirit** would later come to dwell in those who trusted in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Spirit had not yet come to dwell in the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	7	39	n599	figs-explicit	οὐδέπω ἐδοξάσθη	1		Here the word **glorified** could refer to: (1) the time when Jesus would die on the cross and rise from the dead (see John [12:23](../12/23.md)). Alternate translation: “had not yet been crucified and resurrected” (2) the time when Jesus would ascend to his Father in heaven. [Acts 1–2](../act/01/01.md) records the Holy Spirit coming after Jesus went up to heaven. Alternate translation: “had not yet returned to God in glory” (3) both the crucifixion, resurrection, and ascension of Jesus. Alternate translation: “had not yet been glorified by his death, resurrection, and return to heaven” See the discussion of double meaning in Part 3 of the Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	7	40	xvts	grammar-connect-time-sequential	οὖν	1		**Then** here indicates that what follows is the continuation of the narrative from [verse 38](../07/38.md), which John had interrupted with background information in [verse 39](../07/39.md). If your readers would misunderstand this reference to earlier events, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “After Jesus had said this about the Holy Spirit,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 JHN	7	40	schi	grammar-collectivenouns	ἐκ τοῦ ὄχλου	1		See how you translated **crowd** in [5:13](../05/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
@@ -1071,7 +1071,7 @@ JHN	7	42	n8nb	figs-rquestion	οὐχ ἡ Γραφὴ εἶπεν, ὅτι ἐκ
 JHN	7	42	ep4z	figs-personification	οὐχ ἡ Γραφὴ εἶπεν	1	Have the scriptures not said	**Scripture** here is referred to as though it were a person who could speak. If this use of **said** might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Have the prophets not said in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 JHN	7	43	h7d3	figs-abstractnouns	σχίσμα…ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ ὄχλῳ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **division**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the crowd was divided” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	7	43	lf5r	grammar-collectivenouns	ἐν τῷ ὄχλῳ	1		See how you translated **crowd** in [5:13](../05/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
-JHN	7	44	yv80	writing-pronouns	τινὲς…ἐξ αὐτῶν	1		Here, **them** refers to the people in the crowd with whom Jesus had just spoken, particularly those who were opposed to him. If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “some of his opponents in the crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	7	44	yv80	writing-pronouns	τινὲς…ἐξ αὐτῶν	1		Here, **them** refers to the people in the crowd with whom Jesus had just spoken, particularly those who were opposed to him. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “some of his opponents in the crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	7	44	rc64	figs-idiom	οὐδεὶς ἐπέβαλεν ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας	1		See how you translated this phrase in [verse 30](../07/30.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	7	47	z95z	figs-explicit	μὴ καὶ ὑμεῖς πεπλάνησθε?	1	Have you also been deceived?	**The Pharisees** ask this question in a way that expects a negative response but also expresses uncertainty about that response. If your language has a question form that assumes a negative response with uncertainty, you should use it here. Alternate translation: “Could it be possible that you have also been deceived?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	7	47	i47o	figs-activepassive	μὴ καὶ ὑμεῖς πεπλάνησθε	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “He has not also deceived you, has he?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1087,33 +1087,33 @@ JHN	7	51	ia3j	figs-rquestion	μὴ ὁ νόμος ἡμῶν κρίνει τὸ
 JHN	7	51	y8df	figs-personification	μὴ ὁ νόμος ἡμῶν κρίνει τὸν ἄνθρωπον, ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ πρῶτον παρ’ αὐτοῦ, καὶ γνῷ	1	Does our law judge a man	Nicodemus speaks of the **law** figuratively as if it were a person. If this use of **law** is not natural in your language, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “It is not written in our law that we may judge a man unless we might first hear from him and might know … is it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 JHN	7	51	c2h5	figs-genericnoun	τὸν ἄνθρωπον	1		Here, **a man** does not refer to a specific man. It refers to any man in general. Alternate translation: “any man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 JHN	7	52	pt91	figs-rquestion	μὴ καὶ σὺ ἐκ τῆς Γαλιλαίας εἶ?	1	Are you also from Galilee?	The Jewish leaders know that Nicodemus is not **from Galilee**. They ask this question as a way of scoffing at him. If your language does not use questions in this way, use another way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “You must also be one of those people from Galilee!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-JHN	7	52	k6pg	figs-ellipsis	ἐραύνησον καὶ ἴδε	1	Search and see	Here, John records the Jewish leaders leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this sentence, you could supply the missing words from the context. Alternate translation: “Search carefully and read what is written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-JHN	7	52	jm59	figs-explicit	προφήτης ἐκ τῆς Γαλιλαίας οὐκ ἐγείρεται	1	no prophet comes from Galilee	The Jewish leaders believed that Jesus came **from Galilee** and that no **prophet** in the scriptures came **from Galilee**. Therefore, based on their reasoning, Jesus could not be a **prophet**. However, what they believed was incorrect. Jesus did not originally come from Galilee, but Bethlehem in Judea. Also, the prophet Jonah came **from Galilee** ([2 Kings 14:25](../2ki/14/25.md)) and [Isaiah 9:1–7](../isa/09/01.md) said that the Messiah would be a great light rising from Galilee. If your readers might not understand what the Jewish leaders are implying, you could say it explicitly. Alternate translation: “no prophet rises up from Galilee, so this man cannot be a true prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	7	52	k6pg	figs-ellipsis	ἐραύνησον καὶ ἴδε	1	Search and see	Here, John records the Jewish leaders leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this sentence, you could supply the missing words from the context. Alternate translation: “Look carefully and read what is written in the Scriptures to learn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	7	52	jm59	figs-explicit	προφήτης ἐκ τῆς Γαλιλαίας οὐκ ἐγείρεται	1	no prophet comes from Galilee	The Jewish leaders believed that Jesus came **from Galilee** and that no **prophet** in the scriptures came **from Galilee**. Therefore, based on their reasoning, Jesus could not be a **prophet**. However, what they believed was incorrect. Jesus did not originally come from Galilee, but Bethlehem in Judea. Also, the prophet Jonah came **from Galilee** ([2 Kings 14:25](../2ki/14/25.md)) and [Isaiah 9:1–7](../isa/09/01.md) said that the Messiah would be a great light rising from Galilee. If your readers might not understand what the Jewish leaders are implying, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “no prophet rises up from Galilee, so this man cannot be a true prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	7	52	i0im		ἐγείρεται	1		Here, **rises up** means to appear. Alternate translation: “appears”
 JHN	7	53	s5fi	translate-textvariants		0	General Information:	The best early texts do not have [7:53–8:11](../07/53.md). The ULT has set them apart in square brackets ([ ]) to show that John probably did not include them in his original text. See the discussion of this textual issue in the General Notes to this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-JHN	8	intro	e667			0		# John 8 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>1. Jesus forgives the adulterous woman [8:1–11](../08/01.md)<br>2. Jesus says he is the light of the world (8:12–20)<br>3. Jesus says he came from above (8:21–30)<br>4. Jesus says he frees people from sin (8:31–36)<br>5. Jesus describes the true children of Abraham and the children of Satan (8:37–47)<br>6. Jesus is greater than Abraham (8:48–59)<br><br>Translators may wish to include a note at [verse 1](../08/01.md) to explain to the reader why they have chosen to translate or to not translate [verses 8:1–11](../08/01.md). [Verses 7:53–8:11](../07/53.md) are not in the best and oldest ancient manuscripts. Those ancient texts which do have these verses also have many differences between them, which are additional evidence that these verses were not originally in the Gospel of John. If the translators have chosen to translate these verses, then they will want to either put them in a footnote outside of the main text or mark them in some way, such as square brackets ([ ]), to indicate that the passage may not have originally been in John’s Gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Light and darkness<br><br>Generally in John’s Gospel, light represents what is true and good and darkness represents what is false and evil. Similar to the discussion of light in [1:4–9](../01/04.md), in [8:12](../08/12.md) Jesus applies the light metaphor to himself in order to show that he is the embodiment of God’s truth and goodness. Jesus calls himself the Light of the World because he is the one who enables people to know God’s truth and goodness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/light]])<br><br>### I AM<br><br>John records Jesus saying these words as an independent phrase three times in this chapter ([8:24](../08/24.md), [28](../08/28.md), [58](../08/58.md)). They stand alone as a complete sentence, and they literally translate the Hebrew expression “I AM,” by which Yahweh identified himself to Moses in Exodus [3:14](../exo/03/14.md). For these reasons, many people believe that when Jesus said these words he was claiming to be Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/yahweh]]).<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### “Son of Man”<br><br>Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([8:28](../08/28.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN	8	intro	e667			0		# John 8 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>1. Jesus forgives the adulterous woman [8:1–11](../08/01.md)<br>2. Jesus says he is the light of the world (8:12–20)<br>3. Jesus says he came from above (8:21–30)<br>4. Jesus says he frees people from sin (8:31–36)<br>5. Jesus describes the true children of Abraham and the children of Satan (8:37–47)<br>6. Jesus is greater than Abraham (8:48–59)<br><br>Translators may wish to include a note at [verse 1](../08/01.md) to explain to the reader why they have chosen to translate or to not translate [verses 8:1–11](../08/01.md). [Verses 7:53–8:11](../07/53.md) are not in the best and oldest ancient manuscripts. Those ancient texts which do have these verses also have many differences between them, which are additional evidence that these verses were not originally in the Gospel of John. If the translators have chosen to translate these verses, then they will want to either put them in a footnote outside of the main text or mark them in some way, such as square brackets ([ ]), to indicate that the passage may not have originally been in John’s Gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Light and darkness<br><br>Generally in John’s Gospel, light represents what is true and good and darkness represents what is false and evil. Similar to the discussion of light in [1:4–9](../01/04.md), in [8:12](../08/12.md) Jesus applies the light metaphor to himself in order to show that he is the embodiment of God’s truth and goodness. Jesus calls himself the Light of the World because he is the one who enables people to know God’s truth and goodness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/light]])<br><br>### I AM<br><br>John records Jesus saying these words as an independent phrase three times in this chapter ([8:24](../08/24.md), [28](../08/28.md), [58](../08/58.md)). They stand alone as a complete sentence, and they literally translate the Hebrew expression “I AM,” by which Yahweh identified himself to Moses in [Exodus 3:14](../exo/03/14.md). For these reasons, many people believe that when Jesus said these words he was claiming to be Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/yahweh]]).<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### “Son of Man”<br><br>Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([8:28](../08/28.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	8	1	mkz2	translate-textvariants		0	General Information:	The best early texts do not have [7:53–8:11](../07/53.md). The ULT has set them apart in square brackets ([ ]) to show that John probably did not include them in his original text. See the discussion of this textual issue in the General Notes to this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-JHN	8	12	pvpr	writing-quotations	πάλιν…αὐτοῖς ἐλάλησεν…λέγων	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “spoke to the people again, and he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	8	12	m4ma	writing-newevent		0		In this verse Jesus begins speaking to a crowd near the treasury in the temple some time after the events of [John 7:1–52](../07/01.md). John does not mark the beginning of this new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
+JHN	8	12	pvpr	writing-quotations	πάλιν…αὐτοῖς ἐλάλησεν…λέγων	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “spoke to the people again, and he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	8	12	k5ib	figs-metaphor	ἐγώ εἰμι τὸ φῶς τοῦ κόσμου…ἀλλ’ ἕξει τὸ φῶς	1	I am the light of the world	Here Jesus uses **light** figuratively to refer to God’s truth and goodness that are revealed to the world by Jesus. He is the embodiment of God’s truth and goodness. See the discussion of **light** and **darkness** in the General Notes to this chapter. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “I am the one who reveals God’s truth and goodness, that is like a light, to the world … but will have that truth and goodness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	8	12	yc5p	figs-metonymy	τοῦ κόσμου	1	the world	Here, **world** refers figuratively to all the people in the world. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of the people of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	8	12	zf41	figs-idiom	ὁ ἀκολουθῶν ἐμοὶ	1	he who follows me	Here, **following** means to become Jesus’ disciple and obey his teachings. See how you translated a similar phrase in [1:43](../01/43.md). Alternate translation: “the one who becomes my disciple” or “the one who obeys me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	8	12	tse3	figs-metaphor	οὐ μὴ περιπατήσῃ ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ	1	will not walk in the darkness	Here Jesus uses the phrase **walk in the darkness** figuratively to refer to living a sinful life. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “may certainly not live as if he were living in the darkness of sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	8	12	vw7r	figs-possession	φῶς τῆς ζωῆς	1	light of life	Here, John records Jesus using the **of** to describe **light** that gives **life**. If this use of the possessive form is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “light that brings life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JHN	8	12	lvdg	figs-explicit	τῆς ζωῆς	1		Here, **life** refers to eternal **life**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	8	13	ih9h	figs-explicit	σὺ περὶ σεαυτοῦ μαρτυρεῖς	1	You bear witness about yourself	The Pharisees assumed that their listeners understood that they were referring to Jesus testifying about himself without there being any other witnesses to confirm his **testimony**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “You are testifying about yourself without any other witnesses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	8	13	mrj6	figs-explicit	ἡ μαρτυρία σου οὐκ ἔστιν ἀληθής	1	your witness is not true	The Pharisees are implying that the **testimony** of only one person **is not true** because of a rule in the law of Moses. According to Deuteronomy [19:15](../deu/19/15.md), a statement had to be confirmed by at least two witnesses in order to be considered true in legal decisions. If your audience is not familiar with the law of Moses in the Old Testament, then you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “your testimony about yourself cannot be true because the law of Moses requires at least two witnesses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	8	14	bh68	figs-you	ὑμεῖς δὲ οὐκ οἴδατε	1		In [verses 14–20](../08/14.md) Jesus uses the plural form of **you** to indicate that he is speaking to the Pharisees. He is not speaking directly to those who believe in him. If this would confuse your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “but you Pharisees do not know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+JHN	8	13	ih9h	figs-explicit	σὺ περὶ σεαυτοῦ μαρτυρεῖς	1	You bear witness about yourself	The Pharisees assumed that their listeners understood that they were referring to Jesus testifying about himself without there being any other witnesses to confirm his **testimony**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “You are testifying about yourself without any other witnesses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	8	13	mrj6	figs-explicit	ἡ μαρτυρία σου οὐκ ἔστιν ἀληθής	1	your witness is not true	The Pharisees are implying that the **testimony** of only one person **is not true** because of a rule in the law of Moses. According to [Deuteronomy 19:15](../deu/19/15.md), a statement had to be confirmed by at least two witnesses in order to be considered true in legal decisions. If your audience is not familiar with the law of Moses in the Old Testament, then you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “your testimony about yourself cannot be true because the law of Moses requires at least two witnesses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	8	14	bh68	figs-you	ὑμεῖς δὲ οὐκ οἴδατε	1		In [verses 14–20](../08/14.md) Jesus uses the plural form of **you** to indicate that he is speaking to the Pharisees. He is not speaking directly to those who believe in him. If this would confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “but you Pharisees do not know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 JHN	8	15	k92s	figs-metaphor	τὴν σάρκα	1	the flesh	Here Jesus uses **the flesh** figuratively to refer to human standards. Such standards are superficial and based on the limitations of sinful human nature. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “standards limited by human nature” or “superficial human standards” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	8	15	j79i	figs-ellipsis	ἐγὼ οὐ κρίνω οὐδένα	1	I judge no one	This could mean: (1) Jesus does not judge anyone in the same manner as the Pharisees, that is, **according to the flesh**. Alternate translation: “I do not judge anyone according to the flesh” (2) Jesus is not judging anyone at that time. Alternate translation: “I do not judge anyone at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-JHN	8	16	ys2e	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ κρίσις ἡ ἐμὴ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgment**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “I judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+JHN	8	16	ys2e	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ κρίσις ἡ ἐμὴ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgment**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “I judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	8	16	jb2f		ἡ κρίσις ἡ ἐμὴ ἀληθινή ἐστιν	1	my judgment is true	Here, Jesus is contrasting the nature of the Pharisees’ **judgment** with the nature of his own **judgment**. Alternate translation: “my judgment is right” or “my judgment is according to what is true”
-JHN	8	16	ev1r	figs-explicit	μόνος οὐκ εἰμί	1	I am not alone	Here, Jesus implies that he is **not alone** when he judges people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am not alone in how I judge” or “I do not judge alone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	8	16	ev1r	figs-explicit	μόνος οὐκ εἰμί	1	I am not alone	Here, Jesus implies that he is **not alone** when he judges people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am not alone in how I judge” or “I do not judge alone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	8	16	cbrc	figs-explicit	ὁ πέμψας με Πατήρ	1		Here, this phrase refers to God. See how you translated it in [5:23](../05/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	8	16	r7dx	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ…Πατήρ	1	the Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	8	17	r2r8	figs-activepassive	γέγραπται	1	it is written	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “Moses” did it. Alternate translation: “Moses wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	8	17	l6ln	figs-explicit	δύο ἀνθρώπων ἡ μαρτυρία ἀληθής ἐστιν	1	the testimony of two men is true	Here, Jesus is referring to a rule in the law of Moses. According to Deuteronomy [19:15](../deu/19/15.md), a statement had to be confirmed by at least two witnesses in order to be considered true in legal decisions. If it would be helpful to your readers, then you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “if the testimony of two men agrees, then it is valid” or “if two men say something that agrees, then it should be considered to be true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	8	18	gfd3	figs-explicit	μαρτυρεῖ περὶ ἐμοῦ ὁ πέμψας με Πατήρ	1	the Father who sent me bears witness about me	In addition to Jesus himself, God **the Father** also **testifies about** Jesus. Jesus thus implies that his testimony is true, because there are two witnesses. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “my Father, who sent me, also brings evidence about me. So you should believe that what we tell you is true” or “my Father, who sent me, also testifies about me. Therefore, my testimony is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	8	17	l6ln	figs-explicit	δύο ἀνθρώπων ἡ μαρτυρία ἀληθής ἐστιν	1	the testimony of two men is true	Here, Jesus is referring to a rule in the law of Moses. According to [Deuteronomy 19:15](../deu/19/15.md), a statement had to be confirmed by at least two witnesses in order to be considered true in legal decisions. If it would be helpful to your readers, then you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “if the testimony of two men agrees, then it is valid” or “if two men say something that agrees, then it should be considered to be true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	8	18	gfd3	figs-explicit	μαρτυρεῖ περὶ ἐμοῦ ὁ πέμψας με Πατήρ	1	the Father who sent me bears witness about me	In addition to Jesus himself, God **the Father** also **testifies about** Jesus. Jesus thus implies that his testimony is true, because there are two witnesses. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “my Father, who sent me, also brings evidence about me. So you should believe that what we tell you is true” or “my Father, who sent me, also testifies about me. Therefore, my testimony is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	8	18	ayl5	figs-explicit	ὁ πέμψας με Πατήρ	1		Here, this phrase refers to God. See how you translated it in verse [16](../08/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	8	18	ycc8	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ…Πατήρ	2	the Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	8	19	o66t	figs-explicit	οὔτε ἐμὲ οἴδατε, οὔτε τὸν Πατέρα μου. εἰ ἐμὲ ᾔδειτε, καὶ τὸν Πατέρα μου ἂν ᾔδειτε	1		In this verse, **know** refers to knowing who Jesus and God actually are, not just knowing information about them. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “You know neither who I am nor who my Father is; if you had known who I am, you would have known who my Father is also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1139,13 +1139,13 @@ JHN	8	23	qlv4	figs-explicit	τῶν ἄνω	1		Here, John records Jesus using **
 JHN	8	23	svn1	figs-explicit	ὑμεῖς ἐκ τούτου τοῦ κόσμου ἐστέ, ἐγὼ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου τούτου	1		The phrase **from this world** could refer to: (1) the origin of the subject. Alternate translation: “You come from this world; I do not come from this world” (2) the place where the subject belongs. Alternate translation: “You belong to this world; I do not belong to this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	8	23	w3vx	figs-metonymy	τούτου τοῦ κόσμου…τοῦ κόσμου τούτου	1		Here, **this world** refers to everything in the universe that has been corrupted by sin and is hostile to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this sinful world … this sinful world” or “this world that opposes God … this world that opposes God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	8	24	jgw4		ἀποθανεῖσθε ἐν ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις ὑμῶν…ἐγώ εἰμι, ἀποθανεῖσθε ἐν ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις ὑμῶν	1	you will die in your sins	This phrase **you will die in your sins** is different from the similar statement in verse [21](../08/21.md) because **sins** is plural in this verse but singular in that verse. Therefore, make sure that you translate **sins** differently than how you translated “sin” in verse [21](../08/21.md).
-JHN	8	24	he1k	figs-explicit	ὅτι ἐγώ εἰμι	1	that I AM	This could mean: (1) Jesus is identifying himself as Yahweh, who identified himself to Moses as “I AM” in Exodus [3:14](../exo/03/14.md). Alternate translation: “that I am the I AM” (2) Jesus expects the people to understand that he is referring to what he already has already said about himself in the previous verse: “that I am from above” See the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes for this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	8	25	t7tv	writing-pronouns	ἔλεγον	1	They said	Here, **they** refers to the Jewish leaders. If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish authorities said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	8	24	he1k	figs-explicit	ὅτι ἐγώ εἰμι	1	that I AM	This could mean: (1) Jesus is identifying himself as Yahweh, who identified himself to Moses as “I AM” in [Exodus 3:14](../exo/03/14.md). Alternate translation: “that I am the I AM” (2) Jesus expects the people to understand that he is referring to what he already has already said about himself in the previous verse: “that I am from above” See the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes for this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	8	25	t7tv	writing-pronouns	ἔλεγον	1	They said	Here, **they** refers to the Jewish leaders. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish authorities said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	8	25	c106	figs-rquestion	τὴν ἀρχὴν ὅ τι καὶ λαλῶ ὑμῖν	1		Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that he has already told the Jewish leaders who he is. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I am who I have been telling you I am since the beginning!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	8	26	f9pp	figs-infostructure	ἀλλ’ ὁ πέμψας με ἀληθής ἐστιν, κἀγὼ ἃ ἤκουσα παρ’ αὐτοῦ, ταῦτα λαλῶ εἰς τὸν κόσμον	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases and make a new sentence. Alternate translation: “But I will say to the world the things that I heard from him who sent me. He is true.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 JHN	8	26	n3gf	figs-extrainfo	ὁ πέμψας με…παρ’ αὐτοῦ	1		These phrases refer to God. However, since the Jewish leaders did not understand what Jesus meant when he used these phrases, you do not need to explain their meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 JHN	8	26	ivk5		ὁ πέμψας με ἀληθής ἐστιν	1		Here, **true** means to be truthful or to speak only the truth. If this use of **true** would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who sent me is truthful” or “the one who sent me tells the truth”
-JHN	8	26	xj8y	figs-explicit	κἀγὼ ἃ ἤκουσα παρ’ αὐτοῦ, ταῦτα	1		Jesus says that **the one who sent** him **is true** in order to imply that **these things** he **heard** and spoke are **true**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the true things that I heard from him, these true things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	8	26	xj8y	figs-explicit	κἀγὼ ἃ ἤκουσα παρ’ αὐτοῦ, ταῦτα	1		Jesus says that **the one who sent** him **is true** in order to imply that **these things** he **heard** and spoke are **true**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the true things that I heard from him, these true things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	8	26	lsc7	figs-metonymy	ταῦτα λαλῶ εἰς τὸν κόσμον	1	these things I say to the world	Here, John records Jesus using **the world** figuratively to refer to the people who live in **the world**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “these things I say to everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	8	27	i7gq	writing-background		0	General Information:	In this verse John gives information about the Jewish leaders to explain their reaction to Jesus’ teaching. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	8	27	hh1s	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Πατέρα	1	the Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
@@ -1185,22 +1185,22 @@ JHN	8	39	qp2r	figs-metaphor	ὁ πατὴρ	1	father	Here the people use **fathe
 JHN	8	39	wg9n	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	8	39	v7og	figs-metaphor	τέκνα τοῦ Ἀβραάμ	1		Here Jesus uses **children** figuratively to mean “descendants.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “descendants of Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	8	39	xcnx	figs-possession	τὰ ἔργα τοῦ Ἀβραὰμ	1		Jesus is using **of** to describe **works** that were done by **Abraham**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the works done by Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-JHN	8	40	s615	figs-explicit	τοῦτο Ἀβραὰμ οὐκ ἐποίησεν	1	Abraham did not do this	Here, **this** refers to what Jesus said earlier in the verse about what the Jews were trying to do to him. If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Abraham did not seek to kill someone who told him the truth from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	8	40	s615	figs-explicit	τοῦτο Ἀβραὰμ οὐκ ἐποίησεν	1	Abraham did not do this	Here, **this** refers to what Jesus said earlier in the verse about what the Jews were trying to do to him. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Abraham did not seek to kill someone who told him the truth from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	8	41	i87r	figs-extrainfo	ὑμεῖς ποιεῖτε τὰ ἔργα τοῦ πατρὸς ὑμῶν	1	You do the works of your father	Jesus uses the phrase **your father** to refer to the devil. However, since the Jews did not understand what Jesus meant when he used this phrase, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 JHN	8	41	y82e	figs-explicit	ἡμεῖς ἐκ πορνείας οὐ γεγεννήμεθα	1	We were not born in sexual immorality	Here, the Jews imply that Jesus does not know who his real father is and that his birth is the result of an immoral sexual relationship. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “We do not know about you, but we are not illegitimate children” or “We were all born from proper marriages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	8	42	nh4m	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ ὁ Θεὸς Πατὴρ ὑμῶν ἦν, ἠγαπᾶτε ἂν ἐμέ	1		Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he already knows that the condition is not true. Jesus knows that the Jews speaking to him here do not love him and are not true followers of God. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “God is surely not your father, because if he were, you would love me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
-JHN	8	42	mk2w	figs-explicit	ἀπ’ ἐμαυτοῦ ἐλήλυθα	1		Here, **from** is used to indicate Jesus’ origin. He could only have authority if he came from God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “have I come on my own authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	8	42	p7iv	writing-pronouns	ἐκεῖνός	1		Here, **that one** refers to God the Father. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	8	42	mk2w	figs-explicit	ἀπ’ ἐμαυτοῦ ἐλήλυθα	1		Here, **from** is used to indicate Jesus’ origin. He could only have authority if he came from God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “have I come on my own authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	8	42	p7iv	writing-pronouns	ἐκεῖνός	1		Here, **that one** refers to God the Father. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	8	43	ig11	figs-rquestion	διὰ τί τὴν λαλιὰν τὴν ἐμὴν οὐ γινώσκετε?	1	Why do you not understand my words?	Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I will tell you why you do not understand what I say!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	8	43	yham	figs-metaphor	οὐ δύνασθε ἀκούειν τὸν λόγον τὸν ἐμόν	1		Here, **hear** means to listen to something with the intent to heed it and respond appropriately. It does not mean simply to hear what someone says. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you are not able to heed my words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	8	43	cf8v	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τὸν ἐμόν	1	It is because you cannot hear my words	Here, Jesus uses **words** figuratively to refer to his teachings. See how you translated this phrase in [5:47](../05/47.md). Alternate translation: “my teachings.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	8	44	vgy1	figs-explicit	ὑμεῖς ἐκ τοῦ πατρὸς τοῦ διαβόλου ἐστὲ	1	You are of your father, the devil	The phrase **from your father** could refer to: (1) the person to whom the subject belongs, as in the UST. (2) the origin of the subject. Alternate translation: “You came from your father, the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	8	44	csgm	writing-pronouns	ἐκεῖνος	1		Here, **that one** refers to **the devil**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	8	44	csgm	writing-pronouns	ἐκεῖνος	1		Here, **that one** refers to **the devil**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	8	44	pmda	figs-explicit	ἀνθρωποκτόνος ἦν ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς	1		Here, **the beginning** refers to the time when the first humans, Adam and Eve, sinned. It does not refer to the very beginning of time. The devil tempted Eve to sin and Adam sinned as well. Because they sinned, all living things die as part of the punishment for sin. Therefore, Jesus calls **the devil** a **murderer** for starting the process that brought death to the world. You could indicate this explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers, particularly if they would not know the story. Alternate translation: “was a murderer from the time when he tempted the first people to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	8	44	i1e4	figs-idiom	ἐν τῇ ἀληθείᾳ οὐκ ἔστηκεν	1		The phrase **does not stand in the truth** is an idiom that means to not accept or approve of what is true. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “does not approve of the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	8	44	j6rz	figs-metaphor	οὐκ ἔστιν ἀλήθεια ἐν αὐτῷ	1		Here Jesus speaks figuratively of **truth** as if it were an object that could exist inside someone. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he never speaks the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	8	44	hqmo		ἐκ τῶν ἰδίων λαλεῖ	1		Alternate translation: “he speaks according to his character” or “he speaks what is most natural for him to speak”
-JHN	8	44	k1qu	figs-metaphor	ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ	1	the father of lies	Here Jesus uses **father** figuratively to refer to the one who originated the act of lying. Since **the devil** is the first being to tell a lie, he is called the **father** of lying. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who created it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	8	44	k1qu	figs-metaphor	ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ	1	the father of lies	Here Jesus uses **father** figuratively to refer to the one who originated the act of lying. Since **the devil** is the first being to tell a lie, he is called the **father** of lying. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the first one to lie” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	8	44	x11i	figs-explicit	ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ	1		Here, **it** refers to the act of lying. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the father of lying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	8	46	y3gz	figs-rquestion	τίς ἐξ ὑμῶν ἐλέγχει με περὶ ἁμαρτίας?	1	Which one of you convicts me of sin?	Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that he has never sinned. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “None of you can convict me concerning sin!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	8	46	kh6a	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ ἀλήθειαν λέγω	1	If I speak the truth	John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since I speak the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
@@ -1243,9 +1243,9 @@ JHN	8	57	yzf9	figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	The Jews said to him	Se
 JHN	8	57	r1ek	figs-rquestion	πεντήκοντα ἔτη οὔπω ἔχεις, καὶ Ἀβραὰμ ἑώρακας?	1	You are not yet fifty years old, and you have seen Abraham?	Here, **the Jews** opposing Jesus are using this question to express their shock that Jesus claims to have seen Abraham. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are less than fifty years old! You could not possibly have seen Abraham!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	8	58	rnw4	figs-doublet	ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly, truly	Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	8	58	k4tp	figs-explicit	ἐγὼ εἰμί	1	I AM	See how you translated **I am** verse [24](../08/24.md) and also see the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes for this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	8	59	bxs5	figs-explicit	ἦραν…λίθους, ἵνα βάλωσιν ἐπ’ αὐτόν	1	Then they picked up stones to throw at him	The Jews opposing **Jesus** are outraged at what **Jesus** said in the previous verse. Here, John implies that they **picked up stones** in order to kill him by stoning because he had made himself equal to God (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/stone]]). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “they picked up stones in order to kill him, because he claimed to be equal with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	8	59	bxs5	figs-explicit	ἦραν…λίθους, ἵνα βάλωσιν ἐπ’ αὐτόν	1	Then they picked up stones to throw at him	The Jews opposing **Jesus** are outraged at what **Jesus** said in the previous verse. Here, John implies that they **picked up stones** in order to kill him by stoning because he had made himself equal to God (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/stone]]). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “they picked up stones in order to kill him, because he claimed to be equal with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	8	59	qwe6	figs-synecdoche	τοῦ ἱεροῦ	1		**Jesus** and his Jewish opponents were in the courtyard of **the temple**. See how you translated **temple** in [verse 14](../08/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-JHN	9	intro	hq31			0		# John 9 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>1. Jesus’ sixth sign: he heals a blind man (9:1–12)<br>2. The Pharisees question the formerly blind man whom Jesus healed (9:13–34)<br>3. Jesus speaks with the formerly blind man and some Pharisees (9:35–41)<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### “Who sinned?”<br><br>Many of the Jews in Jesus’ time believed that if a person was blind or deaf or crippled, it was because he, his parents, or someone else in his family had sinned. The rabbis even taught that it was possible for a baby to sin while still in the womb. This was not the teaching of the law of Moses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])<br><br>### “A sinner”<br><br>The Pharisees call some people in this chapter “sinners.” The Jewish leaders thought these people were sinful, but in reality the leaders were also sinful. This can be taken as irony. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])<br><br>### “He does not keep the Sabbath”<br><br>The Pharisees thought that Jesus was working, and so breaking the Sabbath, by healing the blind man. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])<br><br>## Important metaphors in this chapter<br><br>### Light and darkness<br><br>The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])<br><br>### Seeing and being blind<br><br>Jesus uses the healing of the blind man as a metaphor for spiritual blindness. Just as a blind man cannot see the physical world, a man who is spiritually blind does not recognize God’s truth, which includes his sinfulness and need for salvation. The blind man in this story is first healed from his physical blindness ([9:6–7](../09/06.md)), then from his spiritual blindness ([9:38](../09/38.md)). By contrast, the Pharisees are not physically blind but are spiritually blind. Jesus calls the Pharisees blind because they have seen him do great miracles that only someone sent from God could do, but they still refuse to believe that God sent him or that they are sinners who need to repent ([9:39–40](../09/39.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### “Son of Man”<br><br>Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([9:35](../09/35.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN	9	intro	hq31			0		# John 9 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>1. Jesus’ sixth sign: he heals a blind man (9:1–12)<br>2. The Pharisees question the formerly blind man whom Jesus healed (9:13–34)<br>3. Jesus speaks with the formerly blind man and some Pharisees (9:35–41)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### “Who sinned?”<br><br>Many of the Jews in Jesus’ time believed that if a person was blind or deaf or crippled, it was because he, his parents, or someone else in his family had sinned. The rabbis even taught that it was possible for a baby to sin while still in the womb. This was not the teaching of the law of Moses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])<br><br>### “A sinner”<br><br>The Pharisees call some people in this chapter “sinners.” The Jewish leaders thought these people were sinful, but in reality the leaders were also sinful. This can be taken as irony. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])<br><br>### “He does not keep the Sabbath”<br><br>The Pharisees thought that Jesus was working, and so breaking the Sabbath, by healing the blind man. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])<br><br>## Important Metaphors in this Chapter<br><br>### Light and darkness<br><br>The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])<br><br>### Seeing and being blind<br><br>Jesus uses the healing of the blind man as a metaphor for spiritual blindness. Just as a blind man cannot see the physical world, a man who is spiritually blind does not recognize God’s truth, which includes his sinfulness and need for salvation. The blind man in this story is first healed from his physical blindness ([9:6–7](../09/06.md)), then from his spiritual blindness ([9:38](../09/38.md)). By contrast, the Pharisees are not physically blind but are spiritually blind. Jesus calls the Pharisees blind because they have seen him do great miracles that only someone sent from God could do, but they still refuse to believe that God sent him or that they are sinners who need to repent ([9:39–40](../09/39.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### “Son of Man”<br><br>Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([9:35](../09/35.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	9	1	un4h	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	1	Now	**And** here shows that John intended for the events in this chapter to be directly connected to what Jesus said in the previous chapter. In [chapter 8](../08/01.md), Jesus said that he is the Light of the World. In this chapter, Jesus demonstrates that he is the Light of the World by giving physical sight and spiritual light to a blind man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 JHN	9	2	hf1y	writing-quotations	ἠρώτησαν αὐτὸν…λέγοντες	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “asked him, and they said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	9	2	w44c	figs-explicit	τίς ἥμαρτεν, οὗτος ἢ οἱ γονεῖς αὐτοῦ, ἵνα τυφλὸς γεννηθῇ?	1	who sinned, this man or his parents … blind?	This question reflects the ancient Jewish belief that sin caused illnesses and other deformities. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “Teacher, we know that sin causes a person to be blind. Whose sin caused this man to be born blind? did this man himself sin, or was it his parents who sinned?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1259,20 +1259,20 @@ JHN	9	4	qs5q	figs-possession	τὰ ἔργα τοῦ πέμψαντός με	1
 JHN	9	4	mv5u	figs-explicit	τοῦ πέμψαντός με	1		Here, **the one who sent me** refers to God. See how you translated it in [4:34](../04/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	9	4	x8rx	figs-explicit	ἕως ἡμέρα ἐστίν; ἔρχεται νὺξ	1		Here, **day** and **night** could mean: (1) the time when Jesus was on the earth with his disciples and the time when he was no longer on earth, respectively. Alternate translation: “while I am still with you. The time when I will leave you is coming” (2) a person’s lifetime and the time that person dies, respectively. Alternate translation: “while we are still alive. The time when we will die is coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	9	4	g92d	figs-metaphor	ἕως ἡμέρα ἐστίν	1		Here Jesus uses **day** figuratively. He compares the time when he and his disciples can do God’s work to the daytime, which is the time when people normally work. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “while it is the time like the daylight hours when people usually work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	9	4	rloj	figs-metaphor	ἔρχεται νὺξ	1		Here Jesus uses **Night** figuratively. He compares the time when he and his disciples cannot do God’s work to the nighttime, which is the time when people normally cannot work because it is too dark to see. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “The time like the night hours when people cannot work is coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	9	4	rloj	figs-metaphor	ἔρχεται νὺξ	1		Here Jesus uses **Night** figuratively. He compares the time when he and his disciples cannot do God’s work to the nighttime, which is the time when people normally cannot work because it is too dark to see. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “The time like the night hours is coming when people cannot work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	9	5	f2xu	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ	1	in the world	Here Jesus uses **world** to refer to the earth on which people live. It does not refer only to the people in the world or to the entire universe. Alternate translation: “on the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-JHN	9	5	dd8k	figs-metaphor	φῶς εἰμι τοῦ κόσμου	1	light of the world	See how you translated this clause in [8:12](../08/12.md). Alternate translation: “I am the one who reveals God’s truth and goodness to the world that is like a light” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	9	6	y3s4	figs-explicit	ἐποίησεν πηλὸν ἐκ τοῦ πτύσματος	1	made mud with the saliva	Jesus used his fingers to mix the dirt and **saliva** into **mud**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “used his fingers to mix the dirt and saliva to make mud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	9	5	dd8k	figs-metaphor	φῶς εἰμι τοῦ κόσμου	1	light of the world	See how you translated this clause in [8:12](../08/12.md). Alternate translation: “I am the one who is like a light and who reveals God’s truth and goodness to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	9	6	y3s4	figs-explicit	ἐποίησεν πηλὸν ἐκ τοῦ πτύσματος	1	made mud with the saliva	Jesus used his fingers to mix the dirt and **saliva** into **mud**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “used his fingers to mix the dirt and saliva to make mud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	9	7	ily8	figs-explicit	νίψαι…ἐνίψατο	1	wash … washed	Here, Jesus wanted the blind man to **wash** the mud off of his eyes in the pool and that is what the man did. Jesus did not want him to bathe or **wash** his whole body. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “and wash your eyes … washed his eyes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	9	7	haum	figs-possession	τὴν κολυμβήθραν τοῦ Σιλωάμ	1		Jesus is using **of** to describe a **pool** that is called **Siloam**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the pool named Siloam” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JHN	9	7	ror0	figs-activepassive	ὃ ἑρμηνεύεται, ἀπεσταλμένος	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which means ‘Sent’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	9	7	ri9h	writing-background	ὃ ἑρμηνεύεται, ἀπεσταλμένος	1	which is translated “Sent”	In this clause John provides a brief break in the storyline in order to explain to his readers what **Siloam** means. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “which means ‘Sent’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-JHN	9	7	p54y	figs-explicit	ὃ ἑρμηνεύεται, ἀπεσταλμένος	1	which is translated “Sent”	John assumes that his readers will know that he is saying what the name **Siloam** means when translated from the Aramaic language into Greek. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “which is the Aramaic word for ‘Sent’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	9	7	q68b	figs-go	ἦλθεν	1	which is translated “Sent”	As the next verse suggests, the man **came back** to his home, not to Jesus. Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+JHN	9	7	p54y	figs-explicit	ὃ ἑρμηνεύεται, ἀπεσταλμένος	1	which is translated “Sent”	John assumes that his readers will know that he is saying what the name **Siloam** means when translated from the Aramaic language into Greek. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “which is the Aramaic word for ‘Sent’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	9	7	q68b	figs-go	ἦλθεν	1	which is translated “Sent”	As the next verse suggests, the man **came back** to his home, not to Jesus. Your language may state “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 JHN	9	7	rj0w	figs-explicit	βλέπων	1		Here, **seeing** means that the man became able to see before coming back. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “after becoming able to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	9	8	d1vq	figs-ellipsis	ὅτι προσαίτης ἦν	1		This clause is missing some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “those who had seen that he was a beggar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	9	8	r79x	figs-rquestion	οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ καθήμενος καὶ προσαιτῶν?	1	Is not this the man that used to sit and beg?	The people here are using a rhetorical question to express their surprise at seeing the blind man who has been healed. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This man is the one who used to sit and beg!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-JHN	9	10	m97n	figs-activepassive	πῶς ἠνεῴχθησάν σου οἱ ὀφθαλμοί?	1	Then how were your eyes opened?	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “How did you open your eyes?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+JHN	9	10	m97n	figs-activepassive	πῶς ἠνεῴχθησάν σου οἱ ὀφθαλμοί?	1	Then how were your eyes opened?	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “How did your eyes become opened?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	9	10	yy53	figs-metonymy	πῶς ἠνεῴχθησάν σου οἱ ὀφθαλμοί	1	Then how were your eyes opened?	Here, **eyes** **opened** figuratively describes the ability to see by referring to something associated with vision coming into action, specifically, the **eyes**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “How are you able to see?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	9	11	nii1	figs-activepassive	ὁ λεγόμενος Ἰησοῦς	1	smeared it on my eyes	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom we call Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	9	11	a42y	figs-explicit	πηλὸν ἐποίησεν	1		See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 6](../09/06.md). Alternate translation: “used his fingers to mix the dirt with saliva to make mud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1280,19 +1280,19 @@ JHN	9	11	b5zf	figs-explicit	νίψαι…καὶ νιψάμενος	1		See how y
 JHN	9	11	ajxb	figs-abstractnouns	ἀνέβλεψα	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sight**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “I could see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	9	13	cu14	figs-pastforfuture	ἄγουσιν	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	9	14	dl48	writing-background		0	General Information:	In this verse John briefly stops telling about the events in the story in order to give background information about when Jesus healed the man. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-JHN	9	14	ef0w	figs-explicit	τὸν πηλὸν ἐποίησεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς, καὶ ἀνέῳξεν αὐτοῦ τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς	1		The negative reaction of the Pharisees described in the following verses is based on their belief that Jesus’ actions were considered to be work according to their religious laws. Therefore, they believed that he was disobeying God’s command to rest and not work on the Sabbath. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/works]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]]). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus made the mud and opened his eyes. These were two deeds the Pharisees considered to be work.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	9	14	ef0w	figs-explicit	τὸν πηλὸν ἐποίησεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς, καὶ ἀνέῳξεν αὐτοῦ τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς	1		The negative reaction of the Pharisees described in the following verses is based on their belief that, according to their religious law, Jesus’ actions were considered to be work. Therefore, they believed that he was disobeying God’s command to rest and not work on the Sabbath. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/works]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]]). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus made the mud and opened his eyes. These were two deeds the Pharisees considered to be work.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	9	14	qxy9	figs-metonymy	ἀνέῳξεν αὐτοῦ τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς	1		Here, **opened** **eyes** figuratively describes the ability to see by referring to something associated with vision coming into action, specifically, the **eyes**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “caused him to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	9	15	d6xd	figs-explicit	πάλιν οὖν ἠρώτων αὐτὸν καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι	1	Then again the Pharisees asked him	Here, **again** means that this is the second time people questioned the blind man whom Jesus had healed. It does not mean that this is the second time **the Pharisees** questioned him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then, in addition to his neighbors questioning him, the Pharisees also began asking him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	9	15	exy2	figs-abstractnouns	ἀνέβλεψεν	1		See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 11](../09/11.md). Alternate translation: “he could see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	9	15	g2vb	figs-explicit	ἐνιψάμην	1		See how you translated **washed** in [verse 11](../09/11.md). Alternate translation: “I washed my eyes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	9	16	hdh9	figs-explicit	τὸ Σάββατον οὐ τηρεῖ	1	he does not keep the Sabbath	The phrase **does not keep the Sabbath** means to disobey the regulations for the Sabbath that God gave in the law of Moses. The Pharisees added many regulations which they considered to be equal with those that God had given. It was these additional regulations that Jesus was disobeying, thereby making the Pharisees very angry with him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “he does not obeying our Sabbath regulations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	9	16	h0tt	figs-explicit	οὐκ ἔστιν οὗτος παρὰ Θεοῦ ὁ ἄνθρωπος	1		Here, **from** is used to indicate Jesus’ origin. He could only have authority if he came **from God**. Since Jesus was not obeying the Pharisees’ rules, they refused to believe that God had given him authority. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This man does not have God’s authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	9	16	hdh9	figs-explicit	τὸ Σάββατον οὐ τηρεῖ	1	he does not keep the Sabbath	The phrase **he does not keep the Sabbath** means he disobeys the regulations for the Sabbath that God gave in the law of Moses. The Pharisees added many regulations which they considered to be equal with those that God had given. It was these additional regulations that Jesus was disobeying, thereby making the Pharisees very angry with him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “he does not obeying our Sabbath regulations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	9	16	h0tt	figs-explicit	οὐκ ἔστιν οὗτος παρὰ Θεοῦ ὁ ἄνθρωπος	1		Here, **from** is used to indicate Jesus’ origin. He could only have authority if he came **from God**. Since Jesus was not obeying the Pharisees’ rules, they refused to believe that God had given him authority. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This man does not have God’s authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	9	16	k4sy	figs-rquestion	πῶς δύναται ἄνθρωπος ἁμαρτωλὸς τοιαῦτα σημεῖα ποιεῖν?	1	How can a man who is a sinner do such signs?	Some people are using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that Jesus’ signs prove he is not a sinner. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “A sinner cannot possibly do such signs!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	9	16	qn73		σημεῖα	1	signs	See how you translated this term in [2:11](../02/11.md). See also the discussion of **signs** in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracles”
 JHN	9	16	jeyz	figs-abstractnouns	σχίσμα ἦν ἐν αὐτοῖς	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **division**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “they divided themselves against each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	9	17	lxnf	figs-pastforfuture	λέγουσιν	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-JHN	9	17	glud	figs-explicit	ὅτι ἠνέῳξέν σου τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς	1		Because the next verse indicates that the Pharisees did not believe that the man used to be blind, **since** here does not mean that they thought the man had really been healed. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “since you claim that he opened your eyes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	9	17	lcb3	figs-metonymy	ἠνέῳξέν σου τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς	1		Here, **opened** **eyes** figuratively describes the ability to see by referring to something associated with vision coming into action, specifically, the **eyes**. See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 14](../09/14.md). Alternate translation: “he caused you to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+JHN	9	17	glud	figs-explicit	ὅτι ἠνέῳξέν σου τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς	1		Because the next verse indicates that the Pharisees did not believe that the man used to be blind, here, **since** does not mean that they thought the man had really been healed. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “since you claim that he opened your eyes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	9	17	lcb3	figs-metonymy	ἠνέῳξέν σου τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς	1		Here, **he opened your eyes** figuratively describes the newly gained ability to see by referring to something associated with vision coming into action, specifically, the **eyes**. See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 14](../09/14.md). Alternate translation: “he caused you to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	9	18	y3wn	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1		**Therefore** here indicates that what follows is the result of what the man said about Jesus in the previous verse. Because the formerly blind man believed Jesus was a prophet, **the Jews** who opposed Jesus refused to believe that the man had really been blind. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Since the man said that Jesus was a prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 JHN	9	18	awp6	figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1		Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders, which in this chapter may have been a group of leaders among the Pharisees. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	9	19	umip	writing-quotations	ἠρώτησαν αὐτοὺς λέγοντες	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “they asked him, and they said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
@@ -1306,33 +1306,33 @@ JHN	9	23	go77	figs-explicit	ἡλικίαν ἔχει	1	he would be thrown out o
 JHN	9	24	h1tl		ἐφώνησαν…τὸν ἄνθρωπον	1	they called the man	Here, **they** refers to the Jewish leaders introduced in ([verse 18](../09/18.md))
 JHN	9	24	bkx6	figs-idiom	δὸς δόξαν τῷ Θεῷ	1	Give glory to God	This is an idiom that Jewish people used when commanding someone to take an oath. It first appears in [Joshua 7:19](../jos/07/19.md) when Joshua orders Achan to confess his sin. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Speak the truth before God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	9	24	ww3t	figs-explicit	οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρωπος	1	this man	Here, John records the Jewish leaders saying **this man** as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus and to avoid saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “this so-and-so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	9	25	sr93	writing-pronouns	ἐκεῖνος	1	that man	Here, **that one** refers to the man who had been blind. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the man who had been blind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-JHN	9	26	z2l2	figs-metonymy	πῶς ἤνοιξέν σου τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς	1		Here, **open** **eyes** figuratively describes the ability to see by referring to something associated with vision coming into action, specifically, the **eyes**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “How did he cause you to see?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+JHN	9	25	sr93	writing-pronouns	ἐκεῖνος	1	that man	Here, **that one** refers to the man who had been blind. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the man who had been blind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	9	26	z2l2	figs-metonymy	πῶς ἤνοιξέν σου τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς	1		Here, **open eyes** figuratively describes the ability to see by referring to something associated with vision coming into action, specifically, the **eyes**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “How did he cause you to see?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	9	27	cf2d	figs-rquestion	τί πάλιν θέλετε ἀκούειν?	1	Why do you want to hear it again?	The man is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize his amazement that the Jewish leaders have asked him to tell them again what happened. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I am surprised that you want to listen again to what happened to me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	9	27	rpav	figs-irony	μὴ καὶ ὑμεῖς θέλετε αὐτοῦ μαθηταὶ γενέσθαι?	1		Here the formerly blind man actually means to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of his words. He knows that the Jewish leaders do not want to follow Jesus, but asks this question to ridicule them. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “It sounds like you also want to become his disciples!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
-JHN	9	28	h7hy	figs-explicit	ἐκείνου	1		Here, John records the Jewish leaders saying **that one** as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus and to avoid saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “of that so-and-so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	9	28	h7hy	figs-explicit	ἐκείνου	1		Here John records the Jewish leaders saying **that one** as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus and to avoid saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “of that so-and-so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	9	28	z2tn	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς δὲ τοῦ Μωϋσέως ἐσμὲν μαθηταί	1	but we are disciples of Moses	Here, the pronoun **we** is exclusive. The Jewish leaders are speaking only of themselves. Your language may require you to mark this form. Alternate translation: “but we true Jews are disciples of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-JHN	9	29	b8id	figs-explicit	τοῦτον	1		Here, John records the Jewish leaders saying **this one** as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus and to avoid saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “this so-and-so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	9	29	vv43	figs-explicit	τοῦτον…πόθεν ἐστίν	1	where this one is from	Here, the Jewish leaders use **from** to indicate Jesus’ origin. He could only have authority if he came **from** God, but they say that they do not know where he came **from**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “where this one gets his authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	9	30	d9uh	figs-exclamations	ἐν τούτῳ γὰρ τὸ θαυμαστόν ἐστιν, ὅτι ὑμεῖς οὐκ οἴδατε	1		If the plain statement form for this seems unnatural, you could translate this as an exclamation and may need to make a new sentence. Alternate translation: “This is amazing! You do not know” or “How remarkable! You do not know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
+JHN	9	29	b8id	figs-explicit	τοῦτον	1		Here John records the Jewish leaders saying **this one** as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus and to avoid saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “this so-and-so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	9	29	vv43	figs-explicit	τοῦτον…πόθεν ἐστίν	1	where this one is from	Here, the Jewish leaders use **from** to indicate Jesus’ origin. He could only have authority if he came **from** God, but they say that they do not know where he came **from**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “where this one gets his authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	9	30	d9uh	figs-exclamations	ἐν τούτῳ γὰρ τὸ θαυμαστόν ἐστιν, ὅτι ὑμεῖς οὐκ οἴδατε	1		If the plain statement form for this seems unnatural, you could translate this as an exclamation and you may need to make a new sentence. Alternate translation: “This is amazing! You do not know” or “How remarkable! You do not know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
 JHN	9	30	i3gm	figs-explicit	πόθεν ἐστίν	1	that you do not know where he is from	See how you translated **from** in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “where he gets his authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	9	30	lent	figs-metonymy	ἤνοιξέν μου τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς	1		See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 14](../09/14.md). Alternate translation: “caused me to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+JHN	9	30	lent	figs-metonymy	ἤνοιξέν μου τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς	1		See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 14](../09/14.md). Alternate translation: “he caused me to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	9	31	e7ec	figs-metaphor	ἁμαρτωλῶν…οὐκ ἀκούει…τούτου ἀκούει	1	does not listen to sinners … listens to him	Here, **hear** and **hears** mean paying attention to or listening to something with the intent to heed it and respond appropriately. It does not mean simply to **hear** what someone says. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “does not heed sinners … he heeds this one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	9	32	b2xt	figs-activepassive	οὐκ ἠκούσθη	1	it has never been heard that anyone opened	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “no one has ever heard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	9	32	hstv	figs-metonymy	ἠνέῳξέν…ὀφθαλμοὺς τυφλοῦ γεγεννημένου	1		See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 14](../09/14.md). Alternate translation: “caused one having been born blind to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	9	32	bzxd	figs-activepassive	τυφλοῦ γεγεννημένου	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “of one who was blind when his mother bore him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	9	33	tt5e	figs-doublenegatives	εἰ μὴ ἦν οὗτος παρὰ Θεοῦ, οὐκ ἠδύνατο ποιεῖν οὐδέν	1	If this man were not from God, he could do nothing	Here, the formerly blind man uses a double negative sentence pattern to emphasize the positive fact that Jesus must be **from God**. If this double negative pattern would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “Only a man from God would be able to do anything like that!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+JHN	9	33	tt5e	figs-doublenegatives	εἰ μὴ ἦν οὗτος παρὰ Θεοῦ, οὐκ ἠδύνατο ποιεῖν οὐδέν	1	If this man were not from God, he could do nothing	Here, the formerly blind man uses a double negative sentence pattern to emphasize the positive fact that Jesus must be **from God**. If this double-negative pattern would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “Only a man from God would be able to do anything like that!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 JHN	9	33	pyin	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ μὴ ἦν οὗτος παρὰ Θεοῦ	1	If this man were not from God, he could do nothing	The formerly blind man is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He has concluded that Jesus must have come **from God** because he healed him. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If this one were not from God, but he is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
 JHN	9	33	sd3s	figs-explicit	μὴ ἦν…παρὰ Θεοῦ	1		See how you translated **from God** in [verse 16](../09/16.md). Alternate translation: “did not have God’s authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	9	33	ry9j	figs-explicit	οὐδέν	1		Here, **anything** does not mean “anything at all.” It means **anything** like the miraculous signs that Jesus was performing, particularly his healing this man who was born blind. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “anything like healing a man blind from birth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	9	34	da3z	figs-rquestion	ἐν ἁμαρτίαις σὺ ἐγεννήθης ὅλος, καὶ σὺ διδάσκεις ἡμᾶς?	1	You were completely born in sins, and you are teaching us?	The Jewish leaders are using a question to emphasize their belief that this man was not qualified to question their opinion. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You were completely born in sins and not qualified to teach us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+JHN	9	33	ry9j	figs-explicit	οὐδέν	1		Here, **anything** does not mean “anything at all.” It means **anything** like the miraculous signs that Jesus was performing, particularly his healing of this man who was born blind. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “anything like healing a man blind from birth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	9	34	da3z	figs-rquestion	ἐν ἁμαρτίαις σὺ ἐγεννήθης ὅλος, καὶ σὺ διδάσκεις ἡμᾶς?	1	You were completely born in sins, and you are teaching us?	The Jewish leaders are using a question to emphasize their belief that this man was not qualified to question their opinion. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You were completely born in sins, and you are not qualified to teach us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	9	34	wo1z	figs-activepassive	ἐν ἁμαρτίαις σὺ ἐγεννήθης ὅλος	1	You were completely born in sins	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Your mother bore you completely in sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	9	34	mcm3	figs-explicit	ἐν ἁμαρτίαις σὺ ἐγεννήθης ὅλος	1	You were completely born in sins	The Jewish leaders mention the formerly blind man being **born in sins** to imply that the **sins** of his parents had caused his blindness. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “You were born blind completely because of your parents’ sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	9	34	kl2x	figs-metaphor	ἐξέβαλον αὐτὸν ἔξω	1	they threw him out	Here John uses **threw him out** figuratively to refer to no longer being allowed to go into the synagogue and no longer belonging to the group of people who attend services at the synagogue. When people were thrown out of the synagogue, they were shunned by their local community. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he was forbidden to enter the synagogue” or “he was forbidden to belong to the synagogue community” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	9	34	kl2x	figs-metaphor	ἐξέβαλον αὐτὸν ἔξω	1	they threw him out	Here John uses **threw him out** figuratively to refer to him no longer being allowed to go into the synagogue and no longer belonging to the group of people who attend services at the synagogue. When people were thrown out of the synagogue, they were shunned by their local community. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he was forbidden to enter the synagogue” or “he was forbidden to belong to the synagogue community” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	9	35	z6r9			0	General Information:	Jesus finds the man whom he healed in ([verses 1–7](../09/01.md)) and begins to speak to him and the crowd.
 JHN	9	35	amfh	figs-metaphor	ἐξέβαλον αὐτὸν ἔξω	1		See how you translated a similar phrase in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “they had forbidden him from entering the synagogue” or “they had forbidden him from belonging to the synagogue community” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	9	35	mxkw	figs-explicit	εὑρὼν αὐτὸν	1		Here, **found** implies that **Jesus** had first searched for the man. It does not mean that Jesus unintentionally or accidentally met the man at another time. If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “having looked for him and found him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	9	35	tw58	figs-extrainfo	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	the Son of Man	Here Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man”. However, the formerly blind man did not realize that Jesus was speaking of himself and Jesus does not explain the metaphor to him until verse [37](../09/37.md). Therefore, you do not need to explain that Jesus is speaking about himself here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
+JHN	9	35	mxkw	figs-explicit	εὑρὼν αὐτὸν	1		Here, **found** implies that **Jesus** had first searched for the man. It does not mean that Jesus unintentionally or accidentally met the man at another time. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “having looked for him and found him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	9	35	tw58	figs-extrainfo	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	the Son of Man	Here Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man”. However, the formerly blind man did not realize that Jesus was speaking of himself, and Jesus does not explain the metaphor to him until verse [37](../09/37.md). Therefore, you do not need to explain that Jesus is speaking about himself here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 JHN	9	35	v3a0	figs-explicit	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	9	36	gurg		κύριε	1		The formerly blind man calls Jesus **Sir** in order to show respect or politeness. He does not yet know that Jesus is the Lord. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lord]])
 JHN	9	37	z3rk	figs-123person	καὶ ὁ λαλῶν μετὰ σοῦ ἐκεῖνός ἐστιν	1		Here, Jesus is referring to himself in third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person form. Alternate translation: “and I, the one who is speaking with you, am that one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
@@ -1344,8 +1344,8 @@ JHN	9	39	t9vo	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἵνα οἱ μὴ βλέποντε
 JHN	9	40	d8mm	figs-rquestion	μὴ καὶ ἡμεῖς τυφλοί ἐσμεν	1	Are we also blind?	Several **Pharisees** are using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that they do not think that they are spiritually blind. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We surely are not also blind!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	9	40	c8zs	figs-metaphor	μὴ καὶ ἡμεῖς τυφλοί ἐσμεν	1	Are we also blind?	Here the Pharisees use **blind** figuratively to refer to not knowing God’s truth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “We are not also ignorant of God’s truth, are we?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	9	41	rh3l	figs-metaphor	εἰ τυφλοὶ ἦτε, οὐκ ἂν εἴχετε ἁμαρτίαν	1	If you were blind, you would have no sin	See how you translated **blind** in [verses 39–40](../09/39.md). Alternate translation: “If you did not know God’s truth, you would have no sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	9	41	bj0s	figs-metaphor	οὐκ ἂν εἴχετε ἁμαρτίαν…ἡ ἁμαρτία ὑμῶν μένει	1	If you were blind, you would have no sin	In these two phrases, Jesus speaks figuratively of **sin** as if it were an object that a person could possess or that could remain with a person. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you would not be sinful … you are still sinful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	9	41	jmq7	figs-metaphor	λέγετε, ὅτι βλέπομεν, ἡ ἁμαρτία ὑμῶν μένει	1		See how you translated **see** in [verse 39](../09/39.md). Alternate translation: “you say, ‘We know God’s truth,’ your sin remains” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	9	41	bj0s	figs-metaphor	οὐκ ἂν εἴχετε ἁμαρτίαν…ἡ ἁμαρτία ὑμῶν μένει	1	If you were blind, you would have no sin	In these two phrases, Jesus speaks figuratively of **sin** as if it were an object that a person could possess or that could remain with a person. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you would not be sinful … You are still sinful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	9	41	jmq7	figs-metaphor	λέγετε, ὅτι βλέπομεν, ἡ ἁμαρτία ὑμῶν μένει	1		See how you translated **see** in [verse 39](../09/39.md). Alternate translation: “you say, ‘We know God’s truth.’ Your sin remains” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	9	41	ch0y	figs-quotesinquotes	λέγετε, ὅτι βλέπομεν	1		If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “you say that you see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 JHN	10	intro	e8mb			0		# John 10 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>1. Jesus tells the Parable of the Sheep Pen (10:1–6)<br>2. Jesus says he is the gate of the sheep pen (10:7–10)<br>3. Jesus says he is the Good Shepherd (10:11–18)<br>4. The Jewish leaders disagree about who Jesus is (10:19–21)<br>5. Jesus says he is God at the Festival of Dedication (10:22–42)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Blasphemy<br><br>Blasphemy is when a person claims that he is God or claims that God has told him to speak when God has not told him to speak. The law of Moses commanded the Israelites to kill blasphemers by throwing stones at them until they died. When Jesus said, “I and the Father are one,” the Jews thought he was blaspheming, so they picked up stones to kill him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Parables<br><br>Parables were short stories that Jesus told so that people who wanted to believe in him could easily understand the lesson he was trying to teach them. People who did not want to believe in him would not be able to understand the message ([10:1–6](../10/01.md)).<br><br>### Sheep<br><br>Jesus spoke metaphorically of people as sheep because sheep do not see well, do not think well, often walk away from those who care for them, and cannot defend themselves when other animals attack them. God’s people are similar to sheep in that they also are weak and do foolish things like rebelling against God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/sheep]])<br><br>### Sheep pen<br><br>A sheep pen was a space with a stone wall around it in which shepherds would keep their sheep for periods of time, such as over night. There were large sheep pens in which multiple flocks were kept, and also smaller sheep pens for a single flock. Once they were inside the sheep pen, the sheep could not run away, and animals and thieves could not easily get inside to kill or steal them. In [10:1–5](../10/01.md), Jesus uses the sheep pen as a metaphor for the people of Israel. Out of the “sheep pen” of the Jewish people, Jesus calls his first “sheep.”<br><br>### Laying down and taking up life<br><br>Jesus speaks of his life as if it were a physical object that he could: (1) lay down on the ground, which is a metaphor for dying, or (2) pick up again, which is a metaphor for becoming alive again.
 JHN	10	1	gzd8	figs-parables		0	General Information:	In [verses 1–5](../10/01.md), Jesus speaks a parable, which he then uses for teaching purposes in [verses 7–18](../10/07.md). Here, the “shepherd” is a metaphor for Jesus and “sheep” is a metaphor for people. “His own sheep” are the people who follow Jesus, and the **thief**, **robber**, and “strangers” are the Jewish leaders, including the Pharisees, who try to deceive the people. Since Jesus does not explain the meaning of this parable here, you should not explain the metaphors within the parable itself. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
@@ -1356,13 +1356,13 @@ JHN	10	1	zz7x	figs-explicit	κλέπτης…καὶ λῃστής	1	a thief and
 JHN	10	2	ib4y	figs-possession	ποιμήν…τῶν προβάτων	1		Jesus is using **of** to describe a **shepherd** who takes care of **the sheep**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the shepherd who cares for the sheep” or “the shepherd in charge of the sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JHN	10	3	uy2v	translate-unknown	ὁ θυρωρὸς	1	The gatekeeper opens for him	A **gatekeeper** is a person who guards the sheep pen and opens the gate for the shepherd. If your readers would not be familiar with this way of protecting livestock, you could use a general expression for a person who guards an entrance. Alternate translation: “The gate guard” or “The person guarding the gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 JHN	10	3	q48q	figs-ellipsis	ὁ θυρωρὸς ἀνοίγει	1	The gatekeeper opens	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “The gatekeeper opens the gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-JHN	10	3	ploz	writing-pronouns	τούτῳ…τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ…τὰ ἴδια πρόβατα φωνεῖ	1		In this verse, **this one**, **his**, and **he** refer to the shepherd mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for this shepherd … the shepherd’s voice … the shepherd calls his own sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	10	3	ploz	writing-pronouns	τούτῳ…τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ…τὰ ἴδια πρόβατα φωνεῖ	1		In this verse, **this one**, **his**, and **he** refer to the shepherd mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for this shepherd … the shepherd’s voice … the shepherd calls his own sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	10	3	db3c	figs-metaphor	τὰ πρόβατα τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ ἀκούει	1	The sheep hear his voice	Here, **hear** could mean: (1) all the sheep in the pen **hear** the shepherd’s **voice**, but not all of them respond to it, as in the ULT. This meaning implies that there are multiple flocks in the sheep pen. (2) the sheep that belong to the shepherd heed or obey his **voice**. This implies that **the sheep** are identical with **his own sheep**. Alternate translation: “the sheep heed his voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	10	3	zxsd	figs-explicit	τὰ ἴδια πρόβατα φωνεῖ κατ’ ὄνομα	1		Here, **his own sheep** are designated as a separate group among **the sheep** of the previous clause. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “he calls his own sheep by name out from among all the sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	10	4	n1ta	figs-explicit	ἔμπροσθεν αὐτῶν πορεύεται	1	he goes ahead of them	Shepherds in Jesus’ culture led their sheep by walking in front of them. If people who take care of livestock in your culture do not do this, you might need to say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “he leads them to pasture by walking in front of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	10	4	n1ta	figs-explicit	ἔμπροσθεν αὐτῶν πορεύεται	1	he goes ahead of them	Shepherds in Jesus’ culture led their sheep by walking in front of them. If people who take care of livestock in your culture do not do this, you might need to state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “he leads them to pasture by walking in front of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	10	5	z8dm	grammar-collectivenouns	τῶν ἀλλοτρίων τὴν φωνήν	1		Here, the word **voice** is singular in form, but it refers to all of the strangers’ voices as a group. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the voices of strangers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 JHN	10	6	u3nw	figs-parables	ταύτην τὴν παροιμίαν	1	this parable	This **parable** is an illustration from the work of shepherds that uses metaphors. See the discussion of parables in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “this analogy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
-JHN	10	6	i3ot	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1	this parable	In this verse, **them**, **those ones**, and **they** refer to the Pharisees, whom Jesus was speaking with in [9:40–41](../09/40.md). If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this explicitly, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	10	6	i3ot	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1	this parable	In this verse, **them**, **those ones**, and **they** refer to the Pharisees, whom Jesus was speaking with in [9:40–41](../09/40.md). If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	10	7	q3na			0	Connecting Statement:	In [verses 7–18](../10/07.md), Jesus uses ideas from the parable he told in [verses 1–5](../10/01.md) in order to teach about himself, those who believe in him, and those who deceive the people.
 JHN	10	7	q4hs	figs-doublet	ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly, truly	Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this is in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	10	7	nj4k	figs-metaphor	ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ θύρα τῶν προβάτων	1	I am the gate	Here Jesus uses the word **gate** differently than he did in [verse 1–2](../10/01.md). Here, Jesus uses **gate** figuratively to say that he provides access into heaven, where God dwells. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “I am like the gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1401,12 +1401,12 @@ JHN	10	14	fg93	figs-metaphor	ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός
 JHN	10	15	qr9g	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατὴρ…τὸν Πατέρα	1	The Father knows me, and I know the Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	10	15	pn9w	figs-euphemism	τὴν ψυχήν μου τίθημι	1	I lay down my life for the sheep	See how you translated the similar phrase in [verse 11](../10/11.md). Alternate translation: “I voluntarily die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 JHN	10	15	mwpf	figs-metaphor	τῶν προβάτων	1	I lay down my life for the sheep	See how you translated this phrase in the [verse 8](../10/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	10	16	y3g7	figs-metaphor	ἄλλα πρόβατα ἔχω	1	I have other sheep	Jesus uses **other sheep** figuratively to refer to his followers who are not Jews. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “I have disciples from a different group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	10	16	y3g7	figs-metaphor	ἄλλα πρόβατα ἔχω, ἃ οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ τῆς αὐλῆς ταύτης	1	I have other sheep	Jesus uses **other sheep** figuratively to refer to his followers who are not Jews. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “I have disciples who are not from the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	10	16	la1v	figs-metaphor	τῆς αὐλῆς ταύτης	1	I have other sheep	Jesus uses **sheep pen** figuratively to refer to the people of Israel. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	10	16	v95z	figs-ellipsis	κἀκεῖνα…ἀγαγεῖν	1	I have other sheep	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. This could mean: (1) Jesus will bring them to himself, as in the UST. (2) Jesus will bring them to God. Alternate translation: “to bring them also to God”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	10	16	kq11	figs-metaphor	τῆς φωνῆς μου ἀκούσουσιν	1	I have other sheep	Here, **hear** refers to listening to something with the intent to heed it and respond appropriately. See how you translated this word in [verse 8](../10/08.md). Alternate translation: “they will heed my voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	10	16	w86n	figs-metaphor	μία ποίμνη	1	one flock and one shepherd	Jesus uses **flock** figuratively to refer to all of his followers, including Jews and non-Jews, as if they are one group, like a **flock** of **sheep**. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “one group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	10	16	bobi	figs-metaphor	εἷς ποιμήν	1	one flock and one shepherd	Jesus uses **shepherd** figuratively to refer to himself. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for the chapter. See also how you translated **shepherd** in [verse 11](../10/11.md). Alternate translation: “one group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	10	16	bobi	figs-metaphor	εἷς ποιμήν	1	one flock and one shepherd	Jesus uses **shepherd** figuratively to refer to himself. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for the chapter. See also how you translated **shepherd** in [verse 11](../10/11.md). Alternate translation: “one united group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	10	17	kd16			0	Connecting Statement:	Jesus finishes speaking to the crowd.
 JHN	10	17	i59j	figs-infostructure	διὰ τοῦτό, με ὁ Πατὴρ ἀγαπᾷ, ὅτι ἐγὼ τίθημι τὴν ψυχήν μου, ἵνα πάλιν λάβω αὐτήν	1		Here, **this** refers to all the information in the second clause. If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “Because I lay down my life so that I might take it up again, the Father loves me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 JHN	10	17	kpr5	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατὴρ	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
@@ -1447,7 +1447,7 @@ JHN	10	29	k1ya	figs-metonymy	οὐδεὶς δύναται ἁρπάζειν ἐ
 JHN	10	30	xok8	figs-explicit	ἕν ἐσμεν	1	I and the Father are one	Here, the word translated **one** means to be one entity. Although this expression implies that Jesus is God, he is not identical to God **the Father**. Therefore, **one** cannot be translated as “one person.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “are one entity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	10	30	rs4j	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατὴρ	1	I and the Father are one	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	10	31	fl8i	figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	Then the Jews took up stones	Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-JHN	10	31	a42t	figs-explicit	ἵνα λιθάσωσιν αὐτόν	1		**The Jews** opposing Jesus are outraged at what Jesus said in the previous verse. Here, John implies that they wanted to kill him with stones because he had made himself equal to God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that they might stone him because he claimed to be equal with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	10	31	a42t	figs-explicit	ἵνα λιθάσωσιν αὐτόν	1		**The Jews** opposing Jesus are outraged at what Jesus said in the previous verse. Here, John implies that they wanted to kill him with stones because he had made himself equal to God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that they might stone him because he claimed to be equal with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	10	32	uvdo	figs-explicit	πολλὰ ἔργα καλὰ…αὐτῶν ἔργον	1		See how you translated **works** in [verse 25](../10/25.md). Alternate translation: “many good miracles … of those miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	10	32	kttb		ἐκ τοῦ Πατρός	1		This phrase could refer to: (1) the source of the **good works**. Alternate translation: “originating from the Father” (2) the one who enabled the **good works**. Alternate translation: “given to me by the Father”
 JHN	10	32	t5q8	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Πατρός	1	Jesus answered them, “I have shown you many good works from the Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
@@ -1455,12 +1455,12 @@ JHN	10	32	tx8h	figs-irony	διὰ ποῖον αὐτῶν ἔργον, ἐμὲ
 JHN	10	33	bq1l	figs-synecdoche	ἀπεκρίθησαν αὐτῷ οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	The Jews answered him	See how you translated this in [verse 31](../10/31.md). Alternate translation: “The Jewish authorities answered him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	10	33	khfg	figs-abstractnouns	περὶ βλασφημίας	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **blasphemy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because you are blaspheming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	10	33	w0v8	figs-explicit	βλασφημίας	1		Here, the **Jews** use the word **blasphemy** with its technical sense, which refers to a human being claiming to be God. This is what the Jewish leaders felt Jesus was doing in [verse 30](../10/30.md). Here, **blasphemy** does not have a general sense of “insult.” See the discussion of this term in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “committing the crime of blasphemy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	10	33	h4kp		ποιεῖς σεαυτὸν Θεόν	1	making yourself God	This phrase means to claim to be God. It does not mean to try to make oneself into God or become God. Alternate translation: “claiming to be God”
+JHN	10	33	h4kp		ποιεῖς σεαυτὸν Θεόν	1	making yourself God	This phrase means to claim to be God. It does not mean to try to make oneself into God or become God. Alternate translation: “saying that you are God”
 JHN	10	34	qi82	figs-rquestion	οὐκ ἔστιν γεγραμμένον ἐν τῷ νόμῳ ὑμῶν, ὅτι ἐγὼ εἶπα, θεοί ἐστε?	1	Is it not written … gods”’?	Here Jesus uses the form of a question to add emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “It is certainly written in your law, ‘I said, “You are gods”’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	10	34	tb1l	figs-activepassive	οὐκ ἔστιν γεγραμμένον	1	Is it not written … gods”’?	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Did not a prophet write” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	10	34	smk1	writing-quotations	οὐκ ἔστιν γεγραμμένον ἐν τῷ νόμῳ ὑμῶν	1	Is it not written … gods”’?	Here Jesus uses **written in your law** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Psalm 82:6](../../psa/82/06.md)). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Has it not been written in the Psalms, part of your law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+JHN	10	34	smk1	writing-quotations	οὐκ ἔστιν γεγραμμένον ἐν τῷ νόμῳ ὑμῶν	1	Is it not written … gods”’?	Here Jesus uses **written in your law** to introduce a quotation from ([Psalm 82:6](../../psa/82/06.md)). Psalms is considered to be part of the Old Testament “wisdom literature.” However, the Jews sometimes used **law** broadly to refer to the entire Old Testament. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state explicitly that Jesus was quoting from Psalms. Alternate translation: “Has it not been written in the Psalms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	10	34	rycn	figs-synecdoche	ἐν τῷ νόμῳ ὑμῶν	1		Jesus is using the name of the first part of the Hebrew Scriptures, the **law**, to represent the entire Hebrew Scriptures in general. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in your Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-JHN	10	34	b3gp	figs-123person	ἐγὼ εἶπα, θεοί ἐστε	1	You are gods	Jesus quotes [Psalm 82:6](../psa/82/06.md) where God calls some humans **gods**. Jesus does this in order to show that God also used the word “god” to refer to people other than himself. In the verse that Jesus quotes, the first person **I** refers to God. If this might be misunderstood by your readers, you could say it explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, said, ‘You are gods’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN	10	34	b3gp	figs-123person	ἐγὼ εἶπα, θεοί ἐστε	1	You are gods	Jesus quotes [Psalm 82:6](../psa/82/06.md) where God calls some humans **gods**. Jesus does this in order to show that God also used the word “god” to refer to people other than himself. In the verse that Jesus quotes, the first person **I** refers to God. If this might be misunderstood by your readers, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, said, ‘You are gods’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	10	34	h189	figs-quotesinquotes	ἐγὼ εἶπα, θεοί ἐστε	1	You are gods	If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “I said that you are gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 JHN	10	35	nfly			0		Verses 35 and 36 are one sentence. In this sentence, Jesus argues by moving from a weaker reason to a stronger reason (an argument from the lesser to the greater). Based on the scripture he quoted in verse 34, Jesus argues that, since God calls humans **gods** in that verse, it is even more appropriate to call him God because he is the Son of God. You may need to change the order of the clauses in order for this idea to be clearer in your language.
 JHN	10	35	ieot	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ ἐκείνους εἶπεν θεοὺς	1	the word of God came	**If** indicates a conditional sentence that extends until the end of the next verse. Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since he called them gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
@@ -1486,8 +1486,8 @@ JHN	10	40	t8mj	figs-explicit	Ἰωάννης	1		Here, **John** refers to Jesus
 JHN	10	40	wztl	figs-explicit	ἦν Ἰωάννης τὸ πρῶτον βαπτίζων	1		Here, **first** refers to the beginning of John’s ministry. It does not mean that **John** was the **first** person to baptize people in that location. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “John was baptizing during the first days of his ministry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	10	40	f5dx	figs-explicit	ἔμεινεν ἐκεῖ	1	he stayed there	Jesus remained on the east side of **Jordan** for a short period of time. If your language requires a length of time for **stay**, you can use a general expression. Alternate translation: “Jesus stayed there for several days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	10	41	yfin		σημεῖον	1		See how you translated this term in [2:11](../02/11.md). See also the discussion of signs in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracle”
-JHN	10	41	gd31	writing-pronouns	τούτου	1		Here, **this one** refers to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this man, Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-JHN	11	intro	tks5			0		# John 11 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>1. Jesus returns to Judea (11:1–16)<br>2. Jesus’ seventh sign: Jesus makes Lazarus become alive again (11:17–46)<br>3. The Jewish leaders plan to kill Jesus (11:47–57)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Ancient Jewish burial customs<br><br>According to the burial customs of that time, a dead person’s family would wrap the dead body with many strips of linen cloth and place it on a table inside a tomb. The tomb was either a cave or a room cut out of the side a large rock. According to Jewish tradition, the body was left to decompose in the tomb for one year. Then the family would place the bones in a stone box. If your readers would be unfamiliar with these burial customs, then you may need to provide explanations in your translation or in a note for [verses 38–44](../11/38.md).<br><br>### Passover<br><br>After Jesus made Lazarus become alive again, the Jewish leaders were determined to kill Jesus, so he started traveling secretly from place to place. The Pharisees knew that he would come to Jerusalem for the Passover festival because God had commanded all Jewish men to celebrate the Passover in Jerusalem. Thus they planned to catch him and kill him during Passover ([11:55–57](../11/55.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### “Walks in the daytime” and “walks at night”<br><br>In [verses 9–10](../11/09.md) of this chapter, Jesus uses the idea of a person working in the light of day and stumbling in the darkness of night as a metaphor for his ministry on the earth. The “daytime” refers to the length of time that Jesus would do God’s work on the earth. The “night” refers to the end of his earthly ministry. This ministry would end when he “stumbled,” which refers to his death. Jesus uses this metaphor to comfort his disciples when they worry about him going to Judea ([11:8](../11/08.md)). He reassures them that, just as the daylight has a set length of time, so does his earthly ministry, and nothing can shorten that time.<br><br>### “One man dies for the people”<br><br>In the law of Moses, God commanded the priests to kill animals so that God would forgive the people’s sins. In this chapter, the high priest Caiaphas says, “It is better for you that one man dies for the people than that the whole nation perishes” ([11:50](../11/50.md)). He said this because he loved his “place” and “nation” ([11:48](../11/48.md)) more than he loved the God who had made Lazarus become alive again. He wanted Jesus to die so that the Romans would not destroy the temple and Jerusalem. However, God wanted Jesus to die so that he could forgive all of his people’s sins.<br><br>### “The Jews”<br><br>This term is used in three different ways in this chapter. Unlike in other parts of John’s Gospel, it is used here primarily to refer to the Jewish people who were living in Judea, especially Judean friends and relatives of Lazarus. Some of these Judeans believed in Jesus and others opposed him ([11:36–37](../11/36.md)). The term is also used specifically at least once in this chapter to refer to the Jewish leaders who opposed Jesus and were trying to kill him ([11:8](../11/08.md) and possibly [11:54](../11/54.md)). Finally, the term is used in [11:55](../11/55.md) to refer to the Jewish people in general. The translator may wish to use the terms “Judeans,” “Jewish authorities,” and “Jewish people” to clarify these distinctions.<br><br>### Hypothetical situation<br><br>When Martha and Mary said, “If you had been here, my brother would not have died,” they were speaking of a situation that could have happened but did not happen ([11:21](../11/21.md), [32](../11/32.md)). Jesus had not come, and their brother did die.
+JHN	10	41	gd31	writing-pronouns	τούτου	1		Here, **this one** refers to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this man, Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	11	intro	tks5			0		# John 11 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Jesus returns to Judea (11:1–16)\n2. Jesus’ seventh sign: Jesus makes Lazarus become alive again (11:17–46)\n3. The Jewish leaders plan to kill Jesus (11:47–57)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Ancient Jewish burial customs\n\nAccording to the burial customs of that time, a dead person’s family would wrap the dead body with many strips of linen cloth and place it on a table inside a tomb. The tomb was either a cave or a room cut out of the side a large rock. According to Jewish tradition, the body was left to decompose in the tomb for one year. Then the family would place the bones in a stone box. If your readers would be unfamiliar with these burial customs, then you may need to provide explanations in your translation or in a note for [verses 38–44](../11/38.md).\n\n### Passover\n\nAfter Jesus made Lazarus become alive again, the Jewish leaders were determined to kill Jesus, so he started traveling secretly from place to place. The Pharisees knew that he would come to Jerusalem for the Passover festival because God had commanded all Jewish men to celebrate the Passover in Jerusalem. Thus they planned to catch him and kill him during Passover ([11:55–57](../11/55.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### “One man dies for the people”\n\nIn the law of Moses, God commanded the priests to kill animals so that God would forgive the people’s sins. In this chapter, the high priest Caiaphas says, “It is better for you that one man dies for the people than that the whole nation perishes” ([11:50](../11/50.md)). He said this because he loved his “place” and “nation” ([11:48](../11/48.md)) more than he loved the God who had made Lazarus become alive again. He wanted Jesus to die so that the Romans would not destroy the temple and Jerusalem. However, God wanted Jesus to die so that he could forgive all of his people’s sins.\n\n### “The Jews”\n\nThis term is used in three different ways in this chapter. Unlike in other parts of John’s Gospel, it is used here primarily to refer to the Jewish people who were living in Judea, especially Judean friends and relatives of Lazarus. Some of these Judeans believed in Jesus and others opposed him ([11:36–37](../11/36.md)). The term is also used specifically at least once in this chapter to refer to the Jewish leaders who opposed Jesus and were trying to kill him ([11:8](../11/08.md) and possibly [11:54](../11/54.md)). Finally, the term is used in [11:55](../11/55.md) to refer to the Jewish people in general. The translator may wish to use the terms “Judeans,” “Jewish authorities,” and “Jewish people” to clarify these distinctions.\n\n### Hypothetical situation\n\nWhen Martha and Mary said, “If you had been here, my brother would not have died,” they were speaking of a situation that could have happened but did not happen ([11:21](../11/21.md), [32](../11/32.md)). Jesus had not come, and their brother did die.
 JHN	11	1	fsf7	writing-background		0	General Information:	[Verses 1–2](../11/01.md) provide background information about **Lazarus** and his sisters. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	11	1	s5im	writing-participants	ἦν δέ τις ἀσθενῶν Λάζαρος ἀπὸ Βηθανίας	1		This verse introduces **Lazarus** as a new character in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “There was a man named Lazarus, who was from Bethany and was sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 JHN	11	1	b2r5	translate-names	Λάζαρος	1		**Lazarus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -1501,9 +1501,9 @@ JHN	11	3	i2ar	figs-ellipsis	ἀπέστειλαν…πρὸς αὐτὸν	1	sen
 JHN	11	3	g1im	figs-declarative	Κύριε, ἴδε, ὃν φιλεῖς ἀσθενεῖ	1		Here, the **sisters** are using a present statement to make a request indirectly. They tell Jesus that Lazarus is **sick**, because they want Jesus to come and heal him. If this use of a statement is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. Alternate translation: “Sir, behold, he whom you love is sick and needs your help” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
 JHN	11	3	czm1	figs-metaphor	ἴδε	1		Here, **behold** means to take notice of something or pay attention to something. It is used here to emphasize the urgency of the words that follow. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “take notice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	11	4	nk3g	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὐκ ἔστιν πρὸς θάνατον	1	This sickness is not to death	Here, **not to** indicates that what follows is not the result of the **sickness**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “This sickness will not result in death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-JHN	11	4	q343	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἀλλ’ ὑπὲρ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Jesus is stating the purpose for Lazarus’s **sickness**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “but for the purpose of glorifying God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+JHN	11	4	q343	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἀλλ’ ὑπὲρ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Jesus is stating the purpose for Lazarus’s **sickness**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “but for the purpose of glorifying God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 JHN	11	4	wln1	figs-abstractnouns	ὑπὲρ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in order to glorify God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-JHN	11	4	y9vx	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα δοξασθῇ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ αὐτῆς	1		Jesus is stating the second purpose for Lazarus’s **sickness**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a second purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “and for the purpose of glorifying the Son of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+JHN	11	4	y9vx	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα δοξασθῇ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ αὐτῆς	1		Jesus is stating the second purpose for Lazarus’s **sickness**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a second purpose clause. Alternate translation: “and for the purpose of glorifying the Son of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 JHN	11	4	asqb	figs-123person	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Son of God	Jesus is referring to himself in third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person form, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	11	4	ad99	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Son of God	**Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	11	5	j6r4	writing-background		0		In this verse John briefly stops telling about the events in the story in order to give background information about Jesus’ relationship with **Lazarus** and his sisters. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
@@ -1513,19 +1513,19 @@ JHN	11	7	zq1l	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense
 JHN	11	8	p4x9	figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	the Jews	Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md) and the discussion of this term in the General Notes for this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	11	8	y4jm	figs-rquestion	πάλιν ὑπάγεις ἐκεῖ?	1	Rabbi, right now the Jews are trying to stone you, and you are going back there again?	Here the disciples use the form of a question to emphasize that they do not want Jesus to go to Jerusalem. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you surely should not go back there again!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	11	9	uv34	figs-rquestion	οὐχὶ δώδεκα ὧραί εἰσιν τῆς ἡμέρας?	1	Are there not twelve hours of light in a day?	Jesus is using the form of a question for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “There are surely 12 hours in the day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-JHN	11	9	ln4r	figs-metaphor	ἐάν τις περιπατῇ ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, οὐ προσκόπτει, ὅτι τὸ φῶς τοῦ κόσμου τούτου βλέπει	1	If someone walks in the daytime, he will not stumble, because he sees by the light of this world	Here Jesus uses the idea of **someone** walking in the daylight figuratively to refer to himself doing what God wants him to do while he is still on the earth. In this metaphor, Jesus uses **the light of this world** figuratively to refer to himself, who has previously called himself “the Light of the World” in [8:12](../08/12.md) and [9:5](../09/05.md). He also uses **stumble** figuratively to refer to death. The statement in this verse has a similar meaning to Jesus’ statement in [9:4](../09/04.md). Jesus does not want his disciples to worry about him going to Judea because he will be safe as long God wants him to remain on the earth. If this metaphor would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. See the discussion of this passage in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “Just as someone who walks in the daytime does not stumble because they can see in the light, so you do not need to worry about me while I, the Light of the World, am still with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	11	10	vm6h	figs-exmetaphor	ἐὰν δέ τις περιπατῇ ἐν τῇ νυκτί, προσκόπτει, ὅτι τὸ φῶς οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν αὐτῷ	1	if he walks at night	In this verse Jesus continues the metaphor of a person walking outside. Jesus uses the idea of **someone** walking **at night** figuratively to refer to the time when his earthly ministry would be complete, and he would die and leave the earth. Jesus uses **night** figuratively to refer to the time when his ministry on earth would end. He uses **stumble** figuratively to refer to his death, and uses **light** figuratively to refer to his life. If this metaphor would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. See the discussion of this passage in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “But just as someone who walks at night stumbles because there is no light, so I will die when it is time for me, the Light of the World, to leave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
+JHN	11	9	ln4r	figs-metaphor	ἐάν τις περιπατῇ ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, οὐ προσκόπτει, ὅτι τὸ φῶς τοῦ κόσμου τούτου βλέπει	1	If someone walks in the daytime, he will not stumble, because he sees by the light of this world	Here Jesus speaks figuratively about **someone** walking **in the daytime** in order to comfort his disciples who were worried about going to Judea. In this metaphor Jesus uses **the light of this world** figuratively to refer to himself, who has previously called himself “the Light of the World” in [8:12](../09/12.md) and [9:5](../09/05.md).This whole metaphor could mean: (1) if Jesus and his disciples did God’s work during the limited time God had given him to work with them (**the daytime**), they would not fail (**stumble**) because Jesus was with them. This interpretation has a similar meaning to Jesus’ statement in [9:4](../09/04.md). Alternate translation: “If you do God’s work during the time I am here, you will succeed, because you are with me, the light of this world.” (2) someone who acts according to God’s will (**walks in the daytime**) does not fail (**stumble**) because Jesus guides that person. Alternate translation: “If someone acts according to God’s will, he will succeed, because I, the light of this world, will guide him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	11	10	vm6h	figs-exmetaphor	ἐὰν δέ τις περιπατῇ ἐν τῇ νυκτί, προσκόπτει, ὅτι τὸ φῶς οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν αὐτῷ	1	if he walks at night	In this verse Jesus expands the metaphor from the previous verse about a person walking outside. In this metaphor Jesus uses **the light** figuratively to refer to himself, who has previously called himself “the Light of the World” in [8:12](../09/12.md) and [9:5](../09/05.md). This whole metaphor could mean: (1) if his disciples tried to do God’s work after the limited time God had given him to be with them (the **night** which comes after “the daytime”), they would fail (**stumble**) because Jesus would not be with them. This interpretation has a similar meaning to Jesus’ statement in [9:4](../09/04.md). Alternate translation: “If you try to do this work after I have left, you will fail because I, the light, am not with you.” (2) someone who does not act according to God’s will (**walks at night**) is an unbeliever who fails completely (**stumble**) because that person does not know Jesus. Alternate translation: “If someone does not act according to God’s will, he will fail because he does not know me, the light” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
 JHN	11	11	fan2	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	11	11	bev5	figs-euphemism	Λάζαρος ὁ φίλος ἡμῶν κεκοίμηται	1	Our friend Lazarus has fallen asleep	Jesus uses **fallen asleep** to refer to being dead. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. Since Jesus explains the meaning in [verse 14](../11/14.md), you do not need to explain it here. However, If you have an idiom for this idea in your language, you may use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 JHN	11	11	ze1z	figs-idiom	ἀλλὰ πορεύομαι ἵνα ἐξυπνίσω αὐτόν	1	but I am going so that I may wake him out of sleep	Here, **wake him out of sleep** refers to Jesus’ plan to cause Lazarus to become alive again. If you have an idiom for this idea in your language, you may use it here. Since the disciples do not understand what Jesus is saying here, do not translate this in a non-figurative way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	11	12	hn2j	figs-euphemism	εἰ κεκοίμηται	1	if he has fallen asleep	See how you translated **fallen asleep** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 JHN	11	13	h3kl	writing-background		0		In this verse John briefly stops telling the events in the story in order to give background information about Jesus’ conversation with his disciples. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-JHN	11	13	tt6v	writing-pronouns	ἐκεῖνοι	1		Here, **those ones** refers to Jesus’ disciples. If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	11	13	tt6v	writing-pronouns	ἐκεῖνοι	1		Here, **those ones** refers to Jesus’ disciples. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	11	13	leg3	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	11	13	pf8u	figs-possession	τῆς κοιμήσεως τοῦ ὕπνου	1		John is using **of** to describe **sleep** that is **slumber**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “sleep that is actually sleep” or “natural sleep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JHN	11	14	azy3		τότε…εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Ἰησοῦς παρρησίᾳ	1	Then Jesus said to them plainly	Here, **plainly** means to say something clearly without using and metaphors or others figures of speech. Because the disciples did not understand the metaphor Jesus told them in [verse 11](../11/11.md), he told them the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Jesus then said to them in words that they could understand”
 JHN	11	15	c4wj		δι’ ὑμᾶς	1	for your sakes	Alternate translation: “for your benefit” or “for your good”
-JHN	11	15	ar2j	figs-ellipsis	ἵνα πιστεύσητε	1		Here, Jesus is leaving out some words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply this word from the context. You may also need to start a new sentence. Alternate translation: “ for I allowed this to happen so that you may believe in me” or “for I let Lazarus die so that you may believe that I am the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	11	15	ar2j	figs-ellipsis	ἵνα πιστεύσητε	1		Here, Jesus is leaving out some words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply this word from the context. You may also need to start a new sentence. Alternate translation: “for I allowed this to happen so that you may believe in me” or “for I let Lazarus die so that you may believe that I am the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	11	16	e043	translate-names	Θωμᾶς	1		**Thomas** is the name of a man, one of Jesus’ disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	11	16	dzc3	figs-activepassive	ὁ λεγόμενος Δίδυμος	1	who was called Didymus	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom some people called Didymus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	11	16	ymy6	translate-names	Δίδυμος	1	Didymus	**Didymus** is the name of a man. It is a Greek word that means “twin” and is Thomas’ other name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -1539,7 +1539,7 @@ JHN	11	20	k7dy	figs-quotations	ἤκουσεν ὅτι Ἰησοῦς ἔρχε
 JHN	11	21	ef5h	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ ἦς ὧδε, οὐκ ἂν ἀπέθανεν ὁ ἀδελφός μου	1	my brother would not have died	**Martha** is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but she knows that the condition is not true. **Jesus** had not been there and her **brother** had **died**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if you had been here, but you were not, my brother would not have died, but he did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
 JHN	11	21	g9xt	translate-kinship	ὁ ἀδελφός	1	my brother would not have died	See how you translated **brother** in [verse 2](../11/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
 JHN	11	23	c1rc	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-JHN	11	23	j8p2	figs-idiom	ἀναστήσεται ὁ ἀδελφός σου	1	Your brother will rise again	Here, **rise again** is an idiom that refers to a died person becoming alive **again**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Your brother will become alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+JHN	11	23	j8p2	figs-idiom	ἀναστήσεται ὁ ἀδελφός σου	1	Your brother will rise again	Here, **rise again** is an idiom that refers to a died person becoming **alive again**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Your brother will become alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	11	23	hf5m	translate-kinship	ὁ ἀδελφός	1	Your brother will rise again	See how you translated **brother** in [verse 2](../11/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
 JHN	11	24	f0qy	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	he will rise again	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	11	24	z7el	figs-idiom	ἀναστήσεται	1	he will rise again	See how you translated **rise again** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -1550,25 +1550,25 @@ JHN	11	25	o9qv	figs-explicit	ἡ ζωή	1		Here, **Jesus** calls himself **the l
 JHN	11	25	chs2	figs-explicit	κἂν ἀποθάνῃ	1	even if he dies	Here, **dies** refers to physical death. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “even if his body dies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	11	25	ef7a	figs-explicit	ζήσεται	1	will live	Here, **live** refers to having eternal life. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “will have eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	11	26	a6gs	figs-explicit	πᾶς ὁ ζῶν	1	whoever lives and believes in me will never die	Here, **living** refers to having eternal life, as “live” does in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “everyone who has eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	11	26	fue3	figs-explicit	οὐ μὴ ἀποθάνῃ εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα	1	will never die	Here, **die** refers to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. If your readers would misunderstand this use of **die**, you could say this explicitly. See how you translated a similar phrase in [6:50](../06/50.md). Alternate translation: “may certainly not not die spiritually into eternity” or “may certainly not experience spiritual death into eternity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	11	26	fue3	figs-explicit	οὐ μὴ ἀποθάνῃ εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα	1	will never die	Here, **die** refers to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. If your readers would misunderstand this use of **die**, you could state this explicitly. See how you translated a similar phrase in [6:50](../06/50.md). Alternate translation: “may certainly not not die spiritually into eternity” or “may certainly not experience spiritual death into eternity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	11	26	js8v	figs-litotes	οὐ μὴ ἀποθάνῃ εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα	1	will never die	Jesus is using a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “may certainly live into eternity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 JHN	11	27	mk4e	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	She said to him	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	11	27	y83q	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Son of God	**Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-JHN	11	27	au1i	figs-explicit	ὁ εἰς τὸν κόσμον ἐρχόμενος	1		This phrase refers to a prophet the Jews were waiting for, based on God’s promise to send **into the world** a prophet like Moses, which is recorded in [Deuteronomy 18:15](../deu/18/15.md). If your readers will not be familiar with this Old Testament reference, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “whom God said he would send into the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	11	27	au1i	figs-explicit	ὁ εἰς τὸν κόσμον ἐρχόμενος	1		This phrase refers to a prophet the Jews were waiting for, based on God’s promise to send **into the world** a prophet like Moses, which is recorded in [Deuteronomy 18:15](../deu/18/15.md). If your readers will not be familiar with this Old Testament reference, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “whom God said he would send into the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	11	28	yd61	translate-kinship	τὴν ἀδελφὴν	1	she went away and called her sister Mary	See how you translated **sister** in [verse 5](../11/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
 JHN	11	28	zs2t	figs-explicit	διδάσκαλος	1	Teacher	Here, **Teacher** refers to Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Teacher, Jesus,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	11	30	k5hy	writing-background	οὔπω δὲ ἐληλύθει ὁ Ἰησοῦς εἰς τὴν κώμην	1	Now Jesus had not yet come into the village	Here John provides a brief break in the story to give background information regarding the location of Jesus. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “At that time Jesus had not yet come into the village” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	11	31	zpe9		οἱ…Ἰουδαῖοι	1		See how you translated **the Jews** in [verse 19](../11/19.md).
 JHN	11	31	q0iv	figs-distinguish	οἱ ὄντες μετ’ αὐτῆς ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ καὶ παραμυθούμενοι αὐτήν	1		This phrase is making a distinction between **the Jews** who were **comforting** **Mary** in her **house** and those who were not doing so. It is not giving us further information about **the Jews**. If this might confuse your readers, you could make the relationship between these phrases more clear. Alternate translation: “the Jews, that is, those Jews who were with her in the house and comforting her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
-JHN	11	32	sn74	writing-quotations	ἔπεσεν αὐτοῦ πρὸς τοὺς πόδας, λέγουσα αὐτῷ	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “she fell down at his feet and said to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	11	32	zmp7	figs-explicit	ἔπεσεν αὐτοῦ πρὸς τοὺς πόδας	1	fell down at his feet	Here, **fell down** means that Mary voluntarily threw herself down on the ground in front of Jesus to show the respect that she had for him. The phrase does not mean that **Mary** involuntarily **fell down**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “she prostrated herself at his feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	11	32	sn74	writing-quotations	ἔπεσεν αὐτοῦ πρὸς τοὺς πόδας, λέγουσα αὐτῷ	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “she fell down at his feet and said to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	11	32	j2wr		Κύριε, εἰ ἦς ὧδε, οὐκ ἄν μου ἀπέθανεν ὁ ἀδελφός	1	my brother would not have died	See how you translated this sentence in [11:21](../11/21.md).
 JHN	11	33	ct82		τοὺς…Ἰουδαίους	1		See how you translated **the Jews** in [verse 19](../11/19.md).
 JHN	11	33	qef6	figs-doublet	ἐνεβριμήσατο τῷ πνεύματι καὶ ἐτάραξεν ἑαυτόν	1	he was deeply moved in his spirit and was troubled	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. John combines these phrases to express the intense emotional distress that Jesus was feeling. Alternate translation: “he was very upset” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	11	33	s5uz	figs-explicit	ἐνεβριμήσατο	1	he was deeply moved in his spirit and was troubled	The word translated **deeply disturbed** could mean: (1) Jesus was experiencing very intense negative emotions, in which case the meaning would be similar to **troubled**. Alternate translation: “he was deeply moved” (2) Jesus was angry or indignant, which is what the word means in other books in the Bible. Alternate translation: “he was outraged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	11	33	w7f8	figs-explicit	ἐνεβριμήσατο τῷ πνεύματι	1	he was deeply moved in his spirit and was troubled	Here, **spirit** refers to Jesus’ **spirit**. It does not refer to the Holy Spirit. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “he was deeply disturbed within himself” or “he was deeply disturbed inside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	11	34	xl9p	figs-euphemism	ποῦ τεθείκατε αὐτόν	1	Where have you laid him	Jesus is referring to putting Lazarus’ dead body in a tomb as laying him down. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant and accurately describes the Jewish burial practice of laying a dead body on a table inside the tomb. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “Where have you entombed him?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
-JHN	11	35	bj6b	figs-explicit	ἐδάκρυσεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς	1	Jesus wept	The word translated **wept** is different from the word used to describe the weeping of Mary and the Jews with her in [verses 31–33](../11/31.md). The word here just means to shed tears. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus cried” or “Jesus shed tears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	11	35	bj6b	figs-explicit	ἐδάκρυσεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς	1	Jesus wept	The word translated **wept** is different from the word used to describe the weeping of Mary and the Jews with her in [verses 31–33](../11/31.md). The word here just means to shed tears. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus cried” or “Jesus shed tears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	11	36	b6ee		οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	loved	See how you translated **the Jews** in [verse 19](../11/19.md).
 JHN	11	37	b3at	figs-rquestion	οὐκ ἐδύνατο οὗτος, ὁ ἀνοίξας τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ τυφλοῦ, ποιῆσαι ἵνα καὶ οὗτος μὴ ἀποθάνῃ?	1	Could not this man, who opened the eyes of a blind man, also have made this man not die?	Some of the Jews use the form of a question to express their surprise that Jesus did not heal Lazarus. This could mean: (1) they believed that Jesus loved Lazarus, but doubted his ability to heal him. “He opened the eyes of the blind man, but he was not able to keep this man from dying.” (2) they thought that Jesus did not really love Lazarus because he healed the blind man but not him. Alternate translation: “He could open the eyes of the blind man. So if he really loved this man, he surely would have healed him!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	11	37	a76u	figs-metonymy	ὁ ἀνοίξας τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ τυφλοῦ	1	opened the eyes	See how you translated a similar phrase in [9:14](../09/14.md). Alternate translation: “who caused the blind man to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -1590,7 +1590,7 @@ JHN	11	44	h203	translate-unknown	δεδεμένος τοὺς πόδας καὶ
 JHN	11	44	n5yj	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	11	45	rlf4			0	General Information:	[Verses 45–54] explain what happened after Jesus raised Lazarus from the dead.
 JHN	11	45	ksi3		τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1		See how you translated this phrase in [verse 19](../11/19.md).
-JHN	11	47	yl3k	figs-explicit	Συνέδριον	1		The **Sanhedrin** is the name of the highest ruling council of the Jews. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Sanhedrin, their ruling council” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	11	47	yl3k	figs-explicit	Συνέδριον	1		The **Sanhedrin** is the name of the highest ruling council of the Jews. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Sanhedrin, their ruling council” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	11	47	y70t	translate-names	Συνέδριον	1		**Sanhedrin** is the name of a governing body. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	11	47	z5e9	figs-explicit	τί ποιοῦμεν	1	What will we do?	It is implied here that the council members are talking about Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “What are we going to do about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	11	47	q01y	figs-explicit	οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρωπος	1		Here, the Jewish leaders say **this man** as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus and to avoid saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “this so-and-so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1598,10 +1598,10 @@ JHN	11	47	ha2e		σημεῖα	1		See how you translated **signs** in [2:11](../0
 JHN	11	48	kq4z	figs-explicit	πάντες πιστεύσουσιν εἰς αὐτὸν	1	all will believe in him	The Jewish leaders were afraid that the people would try to make Jesus their king and rebel against the Roman government. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “everyone will believe in him, make him king, and revolt against the Roman government” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	11	48	hr3p	figs-synecdoche	ἐλεύσονται οἱ Ῥωμαῖοι	1	the Romans will come	The Jewish leaders use **the Romans** figuratively to refer to the Roman army. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Roman soldiers will come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	11	48	ah4r	figs-explicit	καὶ ἀροῦσιν ἡμῶν καὶ τὸν τόπον	1	take away both our place and our nation	Here, **place** could mean: (1) the Jewish temple, as in the UST. (2) the city of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “and will take away both our city, Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	11	48	zy0k	figs-explicit	τὸ ἔθνος	1		Here, **nation** refers to all of the Jewish people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jewish nation” or “the people of our nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	11	48	zy0k	figs-explicit	τὸ ἔθνος	1		Here, **nation** refers to all of the Jewish people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jewish nation” or “the people of our nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	11	49	efq8	writing-participants	εἷς…τις ἐξ αὐτῶν, Καϊάφας	1	a certain man among them	This phrase introduces **Caiaphas** as a new character in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “there was a man among them named Caiaphas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 JHN	11	49	lj6b	figs-hyperbole	ὑμεῖς οὐκ οἴδατε οὐδέν	1	You know nothing	Here, **Caiaphas** uses an exaggeration in order to insult his hearers. If this would confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows contempt. Alternate translation: “You do not understand what is happening” or “You speak as though you know nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-JHN	11	50	fvry	figs-explicit	καὶ μὴ ὅλον τὸ ἔθνος ἀπόληται	1		Caiaphas implies that the Roman army would kill all of the people of the Jewish **nation** if Jesus is allowed to live and cause a rebellion. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the Romans would not kill all the people of our nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	11	50	fvry	figs-explicit	καὶ μὴ ὅλον τὸ ἔθνος ἀπόληται	1		Caiaphas implies that the Roman army would kill all of the people of the Jewish **nation** if Jesus is allowed to live and cause a rebellion. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the Romans would not kill all the people of our nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	11	50	zh9n	figs-synecdoche	καὶ μὴ ὅλον τὸ ἔθνος ἀπόληται	1	than that the whole nation perishes	Here, **nation** refers to all of the Jewish people. See how you translated this word in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “and all the people of our nation would not perish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	11	51	qww5	writing-background		0	General Information:	In [verses 51–52](../11/51.md) John interrupts the story to explain that Caiaphas was prophesying even though he did not realize it at the time. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	11	51	kw41	figs-explicit	ἀφ’ ἑαυτοῦ	1		Here, **from himself** could mean: (1) Caiaphas was speaking something he had thought of himself. Alternate translation: “on his own initiative” (2) Caiaphas was speaking from his own authority, which is how the phrase is used in [5:19](../05/19.md). Alternate translation: “on his own authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1609,16 +1609,16 @@ JHN	11	51	mw4e	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἀλλὰ ἀρχιερεὺς ὢ
 JHN	11	51	eh17	figs-synecdoche	ἀποθνῄσκειν ὑπὲρ τοῦ ἔθνους	1	die for the nation	See how you translated **nation** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	11	52	gee2	figs-synecdoche	τοῦ ἔθνους	1		See how you translated **nation** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	11	52	mle1	figs-metaphor	τὰ τέκνα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	children of God	Here John uses the word **children** figuratively to express the relationship between God and those who trust Jesus for salvation. That relationship is like the relationship between **children** and their father. See the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to chapter 1. Since this is an important metaphor in the Bible, you should keep it in your translation. However, you can use a simile if it might confuse your readers. Alternate translation: “those who are like God’s children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	11	52	tpe1	figs-activepassive	ἵνα καὶ τὰ τέκνα τοῦ Θεοῦ, τὰ διεσκορπισμένα συναγάγῃ εἰς ἕν	1		If your language does not use the passive voice, you could express the ideas of these two passive phrases in active forms or in another way that is natural in your language. You may need to change the sentence structure in order to do this. Alternate translation: “so that also Jesus would gather together into one the children of God who have scattered themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+JHN	11	52	tpe1	figs-activepassive	ἵνα καὶ τὰ τέκνα τοῦ Θεοῦ, τὰ διεσκορπισμένα συναγάγῃ εἰς ἕν	1		If your language does not use the passive voice, you could express the ideas of these two passive phrases in active forms or in another way that is natural in your language. You may need to change the sentence structure in order to do this. Alternate translation: “so that also Jesus would gather together into one the children of God whom God had scattered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	11	52	d85p	figs-ellipsis	συναγάγῃ εἰς ἕν	1	would be gathered together into one	Here, John is leaving out a word that some languages would need in order for the sentence to be complete. The word **people** is implied by the context. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “would be gathered into one people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	11	53	xyda	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	would be gathered together into one	John is telling his readers what the Jewish leaders did as a result of what Caiaphas said in [verses 49–50](../11/49.md). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Consequently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 JHN	11	53	psay		ἐβουλεύσαντο	1		The word translated **plotted** could mean: (1) the Jewish leaders made plans together for how to kill Jesus. Alternate translation: “they schemed” (2) the Jewish leaders were determined to kill Jesus. Alternate translation: “they resolved”
 JHN	11	54	bnd8	figs-synecdoche	παρρησίᾳ περιεπάτει ἐν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις	1	walk openly among the Jews	Here, **the Jews** does not refer to the Jewish people in general. It could refer to: (1) the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “among the Jewish authorities” (2) the people living in Judea. Alternate translation: “among the Judeans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	11	54	s9km	figs-metaphor	παρρησίᾳ περιεπάτει ἐν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις	1		Here John uses **walked openly** figuratively to mean “walked around where everyone could see him.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “walked around where all the Jews could see him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	11	54	cg66		τὴν χώραν	1	the country	Here, **country** could refer to: (1) an area of land. Alternate translation: “the area” or “the district” (2) the rural area outside cities where fewer people live. Alternate translation: “the countryside” or “the rural area”
-JHN	11	54	h5jk	figs-explicit	κἀκεῖ ἔμεινεν μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν	1	There he stayed with the disciples	Jesus and his disciples **stayed** in Ephraim for a short period of time. If your language requires a length of time for **stayed**, you can use a general expression. Alternate translation: “There he stayed with the disciples for a short period of time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	11	54	h5jk	figs-explicit	κἀκεῖ ἔμεινεν μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν	1	There he stayed with the disciples	Jesus and his disciples **stayed** in Ephraim for a short period of time. If your language requires a length of time for **stayed**, you can use a general expression. Alternate translation: “There he stayed with the disciples for a time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	11	55	qd5y		ἀνέβησαν…εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα	1	went up to Jerusalem	The phrase **went up** is used here because Jerusalem is at a higher elevation than the surrounding areas. See how you translated **went up** in [7:10](../07/10.md).
-JHN	11	55	zh3j	translate-names	τὸ Πάσχα…πρὸ τοῦ Πάσχα	1		Here, **Passover** is the name of a festival. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Passover festival … before the Passover festival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+JHN	11	55	zh3j	translate-names	τὸ Πάσχα…πρὸ τοῦ Πάσχα	1		Here, **Passover** is the name of a festival. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Passover festival … before the Passover festival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	11	55	rsgm		τῆς χώρας	1		Here, **country** could refer to: (1) an area of land. Alternate translation: “the area” or “the district” (2) the rural area outside cities where fewer people live. Alternate translation: “the countryside” or “the rural area”
 JHN	11	56	a5kt	figs-events		0	General Information:	The event in [verse 57](../11/57.md) occurs before the event in this verse. If this order might confuse your readers, you can combine these verses and put the text of [verse 57](../11/57.md) before the text of this verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
 JHN	11	56	kc75	writing-pronouns	ἐζήτουν…τὸν Ἰησοῦν	1	They were looking for Jesus	Here, **they** refers to the Jewish people who had traveled to Jerusalem before the Passover celebration, as described in the previous verse. If this use of **they** might be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people who came to Jerusalem before the Passover celebration were looking for Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -1627,7 +1627,7 @@ JHN	11	56	i7en	figs-idiom	τί δοκεῖ ὑμῖν	1	What do you think? That
 JHN	11	56	p2wz	figs-rquestion	ὅτι οὐ μὴ ἔλθῃ εἰς τὴν ἑορτήν?	1	What do you think? That he will not come to the festival?	The people are using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that they do not think Jesus will **come** to the **Passover** festival. The speakers here were wondering if Jesus would come to the festival since the Jewish leaders wanted to kill him. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “He will certainly not come to the festival!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	11	56	x6im	figs-ellipsis	ὅτι οὐ μὴ ἔλθῃ εἰς τὴν ἑορτήν?	1		The people are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “Does it seem to you that he will come to the festival?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	11	57	glb6	figs-events	δὲ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς	1	Now the chief priests	This event occurs before that of the previous verse. If this order might confuse your readers, you can combine these verses and put the text of this verse before the text of [verse 56](../11/56.md). Another option would be to clearly state that this verse refers to an earlier event. Alternate translation: “Earlier, the chief priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
-JHN	12	intro	qzv4			0		# John 12 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>1. Mary pours perfume on Jesus (12:1–11)<br>2. Jesus enters Jerusalem (12:12–19)<br>3. Some Greeks come to Jesus (12:20–26)<br>4. Jesus predicts his death (12:27–36)<br>5. John explains the Jews’ rejection of Jesus (12:37–43)<br>6. Jesus says that he is God (12:44–50)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry sections in [12:38](../12/38.md) and [40](../12/40.md), which are quotations from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Mary poured perfume on Jesus’ feet<br><br>The Jews would put oil on a person’s head to make that person feel welcome and comfortable. They would also put oil on a person’s body after the person had died but before they buried the body. However, they would never think to put oil on a person’s feet, because they thought that feet were dirty.<br><br>### The donkey and the colt<br><br>Jesus rode into Jerusalem on an animal, which was a common practice for kings. The kings of Israel in the Old Testament rode on donkeys. So by riding on a donkey Jesus was showing that he was the king of Israel.<br><br>### Glory<br><br>Scripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. In [12:16](../12/16.md) John says that the glory of Jesus is his resurrection and possibly his return to heaven as well.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Light and darkness<br><br>In [12:35–36, 46](../12/35.md), Jesus uses an extended metaphor in which light represents what is true and good, and darkness represents what is false and evil. He applies that light metaphor to himself in order to show that he is the embodiment of God’s truth and goodness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Paradox<br><br>A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. A paradox occurs in [12:25](../12/25.md): “He who loves his life will lose it; but he who hates his life in this world will keep it for eternal life.” But in [12:26](../12/26.md) Jesus explains what it means to keep one’s life for eternal life.<br><br>### “Son of Man”<br><br>Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” several times in this chapter. Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN	12	intro	qzv4			0		# John 12 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>1. Mary pours perfume on Jesus (12:1–11)<br>2. Jesus enters Jerusalem (12:12–19)<br>3. Some Greeks come to Jesus (12:20–26)<br>4. Jesus predicts his death (12:27–36)<br>5. John explains the Jews’ rejection of Jesus (12:37–43)<br>6. Jesus says that he is God (12:44–50)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry sections in [12:38](../12/38.md) and [40](../12/40.md), which are quotations from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Mary poured perfume on Jesus’ feet<br><br>The Jews would put oil on a person’s head to make that person feel welcome and comfortable. They would also put oil on a person’s body after the person had died but before they buried the body. However, they would never think to put oil on a person’s feet, because they thought that feet were dirty.<br><br>### The donkey and the colt<br><br>Jesus rode into Jerusalem on an animal, which was a common practice for kings. The kings of Israel in the Old Testament rode on donkeys. So by riding on a donkey Jesus was showing that he was the king of Israel.<br><br>### Glory<br><br>Scripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. In [12:16](../12/16.md) John says that the glory of Jesus is his resurrection and possibly his return to heaven as well.<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Light and darkness<br><br>In [12:35–36, 46](../12/35.md), Jesus uses an extended metaphor in which light represents what is true and good, and darkness represents what is false and evil. He applies that light metaphor to himself in order to show that he is the embodiment of God’s truth and goodness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Paradox<br><br>A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. A paradox occurs in [12:25](../12/25.md): “He who loves his life will lose it; but he who hates his life in this world will keep it for eternal life.” But in [12:26](../12/26.md) Jesus explains what it means to keep one’s life for eternal life.<br><br>### “Son of Man”<br><br>Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” several times in this chapter. Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	12	1	s1v2	writing-newevent	οὖν…πρὸ ἓξ ἡμερῶν τοῦ Πάσχα	1	Six days before the Passover	John uses this phrase to mark the beginning of a new event. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later, six days before the Passover” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 JHN	12	1	bepc	translate-names	Βηθανίαν	1		See how you translated this village name, **Bethany**, in [1:28](../01/28.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	12	1	ii2v	translate-names	Λάζαρος	1		See how you translated this man’s name, **Lazarus**, in [11:1](../11/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -1651,20 +1651,20 @@ JHN	12	6	mgm8	figs-nominaladj	τῶν πτωχῶν	1		See how you translated **
 JHN	12	6	qoun	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλ’ ὅτι κλέπτης ἦν	1		John is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “but he said this because he was a thief” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	12	6	ol4t	figs-activepassive	τὰ βαλλόμενα	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what people gave him to put in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	12	7	z6s7	figs-ellipsis	ἄφες αὐτήν, ἵνα εἰς τὴν ἡμέραν τοῦ ἐνταφιασμοῦ μου, τηρήσῃ αὐτό	1		This could mean: (1) Jesus is stating the purpose for which Mary did not sell the perfume. In this case he would be leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. This translation would require supplying those words from Judas’ objection in [verse 5](../12/05.md) and making a new sentence. Alternate translation: “Leave her alone. She did not sell this perfumed oil so that she might keep it for the day of my burial” (2) Jesus is giving the purpose for his command in the previous clause. In this case he would be implying that there was some leftover perfumed oil which Mary could later put on his dead body. Alternate translation: “Leave her alone so that she might keep it for the day of my burial” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-JHN	12	7	dcn3	figs-explicit	ἄφες αὐτήν, ἵνα εἰς τὴν ἡμέραν τοῦ ἐνταφιασμοῦ μου, τηρήσῃ αὐτό	1	Allow her to keep what she has for the day of my burial	If Jesus is stating the reason why Mary had the perfume, then Jesus is implying that Mary’s actions can be understood as anticipating his death and **burial**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. You may need to add a new sentence. Alternate translation: “Leave her alone. She did not sell this perfumed oil so that she might keep it to prepare my body for burial, as she had just done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	12	8	wo1a	figs-explicit	τοὺς πτωχοὺς γὰρ πάντοτε ἔχετε μεθ’ ἑαυτῶν, ἐμὲ δὲ οὐ πάντοτε ἔχετε	1	You will always have the poor with you	Jesus’ statement in this verse implies that Mary acted properly by pouring the expensive perfume on him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “She acted appropriately, because you always have the poor with you, but you do not always have me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	12	8	r82p	figs-explicit	τοὺς πτωχοὺς…πάντοτε ἔχετε μεθ’ ἑαυτῶν	1	You will always have the poor with you	Jesus implies that there will always be opportunities to help **the poor**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you always have the poor with you that you can help” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	12	7	dcn3	figs-explicit	ἄφες αὐτήν, ἵνα εἰς τὴν ἡμέραν τοῦ ἐνταφιασμοῦ μου, τηρήσῃ αὐτό	1	Allow her to keep what she has for the day of my burial	If Jesus is stating the reason why Mary had the perfume, then Jesus is implying that Mary’s actions can be understood as anticipating his death and **burial**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. You may need to add a new sentence. Alternate translation: “Leave her alone. She did not sell this perfumed oil so that she might keep it to prepare my body for burial, as she had just done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	12	8	wo1a	figs-explicit	τοὺς πτωχοὺς γὰρ πάντοτε ἔχετε μεθ’ ἑαυτῶν, ἐμὲ δὲ οὐ πάντοτε ἔχετε	1	You will always have the poor with you	Jesus’ statement in this verse implies that Mary acted properly by pouring the expensive perfume on him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “She acted appropriately, because you always have the poor with you, but you do not always have me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	12	8	r82p	figs-explicit	τοὺς πτωχοὺς…πάντοτε ἔχετε μεθ’ ἑαυτῶν	1	You will always have the poor with you	Jesus implies that there will always be opportunities to help **the poor**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you always have the poor with you that you can help” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	8	b6lf	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς πτωχοὺς	1	You will always have the poor with you	See how you translated **the poor** in the [verse 6](../12/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 JHN	12	8	qctd	figs-you	ἔχετε μεθ’ ἑαυτῶν…οὐ…ἔχετε	1		In this verse every occurrence of **you** is plural and refers to the disciples and those who were with Jesus at the dinner. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-JHN	12	8	kn28	figs-explicit	ἐμὲ δὲ οὐ πάντοτε ἔχετε	1	But you will not always have me	Jesus implies that he will not always be with them, because he will die. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “but I will not always be here with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	12	8	kn28	figs-explicit	ἐμὲ δὲ οὐ πάντοτε ἔχετε	1	But you will not always have me	Jesus implies that he will not always be with them, because he will die. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “but I will not always be here with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	9	qm36	writing-background	οὖν	1	Now	**Then** is used here to mark a break in the main storyline. This break continues until the end of [verse 11](../12/11.md). In this verse John gives background information about a new group of people that has come to Bethany. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	12	9	i6mn	grammar-collectivenouns	ὁ ὄχλος πολὺς	1		See how you translated **crowd** in [5:13](../05/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 JHN	12	9	ycv6	figs-synecdoche	τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1		Here, **the Jews** refers to people from Judea. See the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “the Judeans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	12	9	ilgp	figs-pastforfuture	ἐστιν	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	12	9	yokk	figs-idiom	ἤγειρεν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1		See how you translated this phrase in [verse 1](../12/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	12	10	nt9p		ἐβουλεύσαντο	1		See how you translated **plotted** in [11:53](../11/53.md).
-JHN	12	10	b9ri	figs-explicit	καὶ τὸν Λάζαρον ἀποκτείνωσιν	1		Here, **also** implies that **the chief priests** want to kill **Lazarus** in addition to Jesus, whom they have already plotted to kill in [11:53](../11/53.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “they might put Lazarus to death in addition to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	12	11	kjk7	figs-explicit	δι’ αὐτὸν	1	because of him	This phrase implies that the fact that Lazarus was alive after he had been dead caused many **Jews** to believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because Lazarus was alive after having died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	12	10	b9ri	figs-explicit	καὶ τὸν Λάζαρον ἀποκτείνωσιν	1		Here, **also** implies that **the chief priests** want to kill **Lazarus** in addition to Jesus, whom they have already plotted to kill in [11:53](../11/53.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “they might put Lazarus to death in addition to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	12	11	kjk7	figs-explicit	δι’ αὐτὸν	1	because of him	This phrase implies that the fact that Lazarus was alive after he had been dead caused many **Jews** to believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because Lazarus was alive after having died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	11	n6gl		τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	because of him	See how you translated this phrase in [verse 9](../12/09.md).
 JHN	12	11	ex1y	figs-explicit	ὑπῆγον	1	because of him	Here, John uses **went away** figuratively to refer to the fact that **many of the Jews** stopped believing the teachings of the Jewish religious authorities and starting trusting Jesus instead. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “stopped listening to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	12	f1im			0	General Information:	Jesus enters Jerusalem and the people honor him as a king of Israel.
@@ -1677,41 +1677,41 @@ JHN	12	13	hf0a	figs-quotemarks	ὡσαννά! εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρ
 JHN	12	13	lzn9	figs-explicit	ὡσαννά	1	Hosanna	**Hosanna** is the Greek pronunciation of an expression in the Hebrew language that means “Please save!” It is a quotation from part of [Psalm 118:25](../psa/118/25.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Save us now!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	13	w7ty	figs-metonymy	ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου	1	comes in the name of the Lord	Here, **name** refers figuratively to a person’s power and authority. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with the Lord’s authority” or “as God’s representative” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	12	14	dbc5	writing-background		0		In [verses 14–16](../12/14.md) John interrupts the story to give background information about how Jesus fulfilled an Old Testament prophecy about the Messiah riding on a **donkey**. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-JHN	12	14	b9ry	figs-explicit	εὑρὼν…ὁ Ἰησοῦς ὀνάριον, ἐκάθισεν ἐπ’ αὐτό	1		John implies that Jesus will ride the **donkey** into Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, having found a young donkey, sat on it, riding it into the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	12	14	b9ry	figs-explicit	εὑρὼν…ὁ Ἰησοῦς ὀνάριον, ἐκάθισεν ἐπ’ αὐτό	1		John implies that Jesus will ride the **donkey** into Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, having found a young donkey, sat on it, riding it into the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	14	lqyy	writing-quotations	καθώς ἐστιν γεγραμμένον	1	as it was written	This phrase introduces a combination of parts of various quotations from the Old Testament which occur in the next verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that John is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “just as the prophets wrote in the Old Testament” or “as it had been written in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-JHN	12	21	rfff	writing-quotations	ἠρώτων αὐτὸν λέγοντες	1	as it was written	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “asked him by saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-JHN	12	23	dkmf	writing-quotations	ἀποκρίνεται αὐτοῖς λέγων	1	as it was written	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “answered them by saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	12	14	h6xz	figs-activepassive	καθώς ἐστιν γεγραμμένον	1	as it was written	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as prophets wrote in the Scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	12	15	ts1f	figs-quotemarks		1		This verse is a combination of parts of various quotations from the Old Testament. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+JHN	12	15	ts1f	figs-quotemarks		0		This verse is a combination of parts of various quotations from the Old Testament. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 JHN	12	15	vra1	figs-metonymy	θυγάτηρ Σιών	1	daughter of Zion	Here, **daughter of Zion** is used figuratively to refer to the people who lived in Jerusalem. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you people of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	12	15	c36a		πῶλον ὄνου	1		A **colt** is a young male **donkey**.
-JHN	12	16	rq52	figs-explicit	ταῦτα…ταῦτα…ταῦτα	1	His disciples did not understand these things	In this verse, **these things** refers to the words of the Old Testament prophecies that were quoted in the previous verse, which were fulfilled in the events described in [verses 13–14](../12/13.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “His disciples did not understand the meaning of these words from the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	12	16	rq52	figs-explicit	ταῦτα…ταῦτα…ταῦτα	1	His disciples did not understand these things	In this verse, **these things** refers to the words of the Old Testament prophecies that were quoted in the previous verse, which were fulfilled in the events described in [verses 13–14](../12/13.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “His disciples did not understand the meaning of these words from the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	16	xdm7	figs-activepassive	ὅτε ἐδοξάσθη Ἰησοῦς	1	when Jesus was glorified	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “when God glorified Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	12	16	u9hf	figs-explicit	ἐδοξάσθη	1	when Jesus was glorified	Here, **glorified** could refer to: (1) when Jesus became alive again after he was killed. Alternate translation: “when Jesus came back to life” (2) when Jesus returned to heaven. Alternate translation: “when Jesus went back to heaven” (3) both Jesus’ resurrection and return to heaven. Alternate translation: “when Jesus came back to life and went back to heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	16	w0hx	figs-activepassive	ταῦτα ἦν ἐπ’ αὐτῷ γεγραμμένα	1	when Jesus was glorified	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the prophets have written these things about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	12	17	nr1j	grammar-collectivenouns	ὁ ὄχλος	1		See how you translated **crowd** in [5:13](../05/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
-JHN	12	17	wyrv	figs-explicit	ἐμαρτύρει…ὁ ὄχλος ὁ ὢν μετ’ αὐτοῦ	1		Here, **the crowd** refers to the group of Jews who had seen Jesus raise Lazarus from the dead at Bethany in Chapter 11. This is a different **crowd** than the crowd mentioned in the next verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “one crowd testified that they had been with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	12	17	wyrv	figs-explicit	ἐμαρτύρει…ὁ ὄχλος ὁ ὢν μετ’ αὐτοῦ	1		Here, **the crowd** refers to the group of Jews who had seen Jesus raise Lazarus from the dead at Bethany in Chapter 11. This is a different **crowd** than the crowd mentioned in the next verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “one crowd testified that they had been with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	17	cq7a		ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1		See how you translated this phrase in [verse 1](../12/01.md).
-JHN	12	18	h0l2	figs-explicit	ὁ ὄχλος	1	they heard that he had done this sign	Here, **the crowd** refers to a group of people who were coming out of Jerusalem to see Jesus as he came. This is a different **crowd** than the crowd mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a second crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	12	18	h0l2	figs-explicit	ὁ ὄχλος	1	they heard that he had done this sign	Here, **the crowd** refers to a group of people who were coming out of Jerusalem to see Jesus as he came. This is a different **crowd** than the crowd mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a second crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	18	czmv	figs-explicit	τοῦτο…τὸ σημεῖον	2	this sign	This phrase refers to Jesus raising Lazarus from the dead, an event that was mentioned in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “this sign, bringing a dead man back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	18	v2nx		τὸ σημεῖον	1	this sign	See how you translated **sign** in [2:11](../02/11.md). See also the discussion of signs in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracle”
 JHN	12	19	c43j	figs-explicit	θεωρεῖτε ὅτι οὐκ ὠφελεῖτε οὐδέν	1	Look, you can do nothing	The Pharisees imply here that it might be impossible to stop Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “It seems like we can do nothing to stop him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	19	i5uq	figs-hyperbole	ἴδε, ὁ κόσμος ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ ἀπῆλθεν	1	see, the world has gone after him	The Pharisees use **the world** as an exaggeration to express their shock that so many people have come out to follow Jesus. If this would confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows shock. Alternate translation: “Behold, it seems like everyone has gone after him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-JHN	12	19	ev6e	figs-metonymy	ὁ κόσμος	1	the world	Here, **world** refers to the people who lived in it. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people living in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+JHN	12	19	ev6e	figs-metonymy	ὁ κόσμος	1	the world	Here, **world** refers to the people who lived in it. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “every person in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	12	19	oraj	figs-explicit	ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ ἀπῆλθεν	1		Here, **gone after** means to follow Jesus and become his disciple. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “has become his disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	20	k8v2	writing-participants	δὲ Ἕλληνές τινες	1	Now certain Greeks	This phrase marks the introduction of **some Greeks** as new characters in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 JHN	12	20	ehkd	figs-explicit	Ἕλληνές	1	Now certain Greeks	Here, the term **Greeks** refers to non-Jewish people who lived in the Roman Empire. It does not refer only to people from the country of Greece or to people who speak the Greek language. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/greek]]) If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Gentiles” or “non-Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	12	20	ks5z	figs-explicit	τῶν ἀναβαινόντων	1		The phrase **going up** is used specifically for the act of going to Jerusalem, which is a city at a higher elevation than the area around it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “those going up to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	12	20	ks5z	figs-explicit	τῶν ἀναβαινόντων	1		The phrase **going up** is used specifically for the act of going to Jerusalem, which is a city at a higher elevation than the area around it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “those going up to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	20	i6nd	figs-ellipsis	ἵνα προσκυνήσωσιν ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ	1	to worship at the festival	John is leaving out a word that some languages would need in order a clause to be complete. If you language requires an object for the verb **worship**, you can supply it from the context. Alternate translation: “to worship God at the festival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	12	20	rbrb		τῇ ἑορτῇ	1	to worship at the festival	This refers to the Jewish Passover festival. See how you translated this word in [verse 12](../12/12.md).
 JHN	12	21	ha8d	translate-names	Φιλίππῳ	1	Bethsaida	See how you translated **Philip** in [1:43](../01/43.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	12	21	lr8c	translate-names	Βηθσαϊδὰ	1	Bethsaida	See how you translated **Bethsaida** in [1:44](../01/44.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	12	21	l774	translate-names	τῆς Γαλιλαίας	1		See how you translated **Galilee** in [1:43](../01/43.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+JHN	12	21	rfff	writing-quotations	ἠρώτων αὐτὸν λέγοντες	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “asked him by saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	12	21	c8qt		κύριε	1		Speaking to **Philip**, the Greeks called him **Sir** in order to show respect or politeness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lord]])
 JHN	12	21	xgoj	figs-declarative	θέλομεν τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἰδεῖν	1		The Greeks are using a statement to make a request. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for a request. Alternate translation: “may we see Jesus?” or “could you take us to see Jesus?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
-JHN	12	22	e9vn	figs-explicit	λέγει τῷ Ἀνδρέᾳ	1		**Philip** tells **Andrew** about the Greeks’ request to see **Jesus**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “relates to Andrew what the Greeks had said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	12	22	e9vn	figs-explicit	λέγει τῷ Ἀνδρέᾳ	1		**Philip** tells **Andrew** about the Greeks’ request to see **Jesus**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “relates to Andrew what the Greeks had said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	22	vzih	figs-pastforfuture	ἔρχεται…καὶ λέγει…ἔρχεται…καὶ λέγουσιν	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-JHN	12	22	b9re	figs-explicit	λέγουσιν τῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		**Philip** and **Andrew** tell **Jesus** about the Greeks’ request to see him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “speak to Jesus about what the Greeks had said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	12	22	b9re	figs-explicit	λέγουσιν τῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		**Philip** and **Andrew** tell **Jesus** about the Greeks’ request to see him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “speak to Jesus about what the Greeks had said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	12	23	dkmf	writing-quotations	ἀποκρίνεται αὐτοῖς λέγων	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “answered them by saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	12	23	jl9u	figs-metonymy	ἐλήλυθεν ἡ ὥρα	1	The hour has come for the Son of Man to be glorified	See the discussion of this in the General Notes to Chapter 4 and see how you translated it in [4:21](../04/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	12	23	zj5j	figs-explicit	ἵνα δοξασθῇ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		Here, Jesus refers to his upcoming death, resurrection, and return to heaven as the time when he would be **glorified**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that the Son of Man might be glorified through his death, resurrection, and ascension” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	23	pfmt	figs-123person	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		Jesus is speaking of himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
@@ -1721,9 +1721,9 @@ JHN	12	24	m255	figs-doublet	ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly,
 JHN	12	24	gq2y	figs-metaphor	ἐὰν μὴ ὁ κόκκος τοῦ σίτου πεσὼν εἰς τὴν γῆν ἀποθάνῃ, αὐτὸς μόνος μένει; ἐὰν δὲ ἀποθάνῃ, πολὺν καρπὸν φέρει	1	unless a grain of wheat falls into the earth and dies … it will bear much fruit	Here Jesus uses **a grain of wheat** figuratively to refer to himself. He speaks of the death of that **grain** to refer to his death, burial, and resurrection. He also uses **fruit** to refer to those people who will trust in him for salvation after his resurrection. Just as a seed is planted and grows into a plant that will bear **much fruit**, so will many people trust in Jesus after he is killed, buried, and raised back to life. If this would confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am like a grain of wheat. Unless that grain of wheat, having fallen into the earth, dies, it remains by itself; but if it would die, it bears much fruit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	12	25	sk6e	figs-idiom	ὁ φιλῶν τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ, ἀπολλύει αὐτήν	1	He who loves his life will lose it	Here, **the one loving his life** refers to someone who thinks that his own physical life is more important than anything else. If this clause would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Whoever values his own life more than anything else will still die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	12	25	mp7b	figs-idiom	ὁ μισῶν τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ τούτῳ, εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον φυλάξει αὐτήν	1	he who hates his life in this world will keep it for eternal life	Here, **the one hating his life** refers to someone who values his own physical life less than he values being a disciple of Jesus. The word “hating” here does not refer to having negative feelings about one’s life or despising oneself. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whoever values being my disciple more than he values his own life will keep it for eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-JHN	12	25	r4h6	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1	he who hates his life in this world will keep it for eternal life	The phrase **eternal life** states the result of what precedes it. The **one hating his life** will **keep** that life, which will result in **eternal life**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “resulting in eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-JHN	12	26	ytxu	figs-idiom	ἐμοὶ ἀκολουθείτω	1	where I am, there will my servant also be	In this context, to **follow** someone means to become that person’s disciple. See how you translated a similar phrase in [1:43](../01/43.md). Alternate translation: “let him follow me as his teacher” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-JHN	12	26	i8ky	figs-explicit	ὅπου εἰμὶ ἐγὼ, ἐκεῖ καὶ ὁ διάκονος ὁ ἐμὸς ἔσται	1	where I am, there will my servant also be	Here, Jesus implies that those who **serve** him will be with him in heaven. If it would be helpful to you readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “when I am in heaven, my servant will also be there with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	12	25	r4h6	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1	he who hates his life in this world will keep it for eternal life	The phrase **eternal life** states the result of what precedes it. The **one hating his life** will **keep** that life, which will result in **eternal life**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “and also gain eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+JHN	12	26	ytxu	figs-idiom	ἐμοὶ ἀκολουθείτω	1	where I am, there will my servant also be	In this context, to **follow** someone means to become that person’s disciple. See how you translated a similar phrase in [1:43](../01/43.md). Alternate translation: “let him follow me as my disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+JHN	12	26	i8ky	figs-explicit	ὅπου εἰμὶ ἐγὼ, ἐκεῖ καὶ ὁ διάκονος ὁ ἐμὸς ἔσται	1	where I am, there will my servant also be	Here, Jesus implies that those who **serve** him will be with him in heaven. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “when I am in heaven, my servant will also be there with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	26	wx3m	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατήρ	1	the Father will honor him	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	12	27	ytv9	figs-rquestion	τί εἴπω, Πάτερ, σῶσόν με ἐκ τῆς ὥρας ταύτης?	1	what should I say? ‘Father, save me from this hour’?	Here Jesus uses a rhetorical question to emphasize what he will not do. Although Jesus desires to avoid crucifixion, he chooses to be obedient to God and let himself be killed. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I will not say, ‘Father, save me from this hour!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	12	27	bx1j	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πάτερ	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
@@ -1733,7 +1733,7 @@ JHN	12	28	t69i	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πάτερ	1		**Father** is an impo
 JHN	12	28	v2fk	figs-metonymy	δόξασόν σου τὸ ὄνομα…καὶ ἐδόξασα…δοξάσω	1	glorify your name	In this verse, **name** and **it** refer to God himself. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “glorify yourself … I have both glorified myself … I will glorify myself”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	12	28	r6qk	figs-metaphor	ἦλθεν…φωνὴ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	a voice came from heaven	Here John refers to the sound of God’s **voice** as if it were an object that **came from heaven**. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God spoke from heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	12	29	dnsk	grammar-collectivenouns	ὁ…ὄχλος	1		See how you translated **crowd** in [5:13](../05/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
-JHN	12	30	kd86	figs-metonymy	οὐ…ἡ φωνὴ αὕτη γέγονεν	1		Here, Jesus refers to the sound of God’s **voice** as if it were an object that came down from heaven. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God did not speak this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+JHN	12	30	kd86	figs-metonymy	οὐ…ἡ φωνὴ αὕτη γέγονεν	1		Here, Jesus refers to the sound of God’s **voice** as if it were an object that came down from heaven (see [verse 28](../12/28.md)). If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God did not speak this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	12	31	hlcg	figs-abstractnouns	νῦν κρίσις ἐστὶν τοῦ κόσμου τούτου	1	Now is the judgment of this world	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgment**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Now God will judge this world”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	12	31	fc6r	figs-metonymy	τοῦ κόσμου τούτου	1	Now is the judgment of this world	Here, **this world** is used figuratively to refer to all the people in the **world**. See how you translated **world** in [1:29](../01/29.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	12	31	pv51	figs-explicit	νῦν ὁ ἄρχων τοῦ κόσμου τούτου ἐκβληθήσεται ἔξω	1	Now will the ruler of this world be thrown out	Here, **ruler of this world** refers to Satan. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Now Satan will be thrown out”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1758,7 +1758,7 @@ JHN	12	36	j1rs	figs-metaphor	τὸ φῶς…εἰς τὸ φῶς	1	While you h
 JHN	12	36	xu4p	figs-idiom	υἱοὶ φωτὸς	1	While you have the light, believe in the light so that you may be sons of light	Here, **sons of light** is an idiom that refers to people who live according to God’s truth and goodness, which Jesus has revealed to them. Here, **sons** does not refer specifically to male children and **light** does not refer to Jesus. If this expression would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “people who share in God’s truth and goodness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	12	37	s1wh	writing-background		0	General Information:	In [verses 37–43](../12/37.md) John interrupts the main storyline in order to explain how the Jewish people had fulfilled prophecies that had been spoken by the prophet Isaiah. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information for these verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	12	37	g1z3		σημεῖα	1		See how you translated **signs** in [2:11](../02/11.md). See also the discussion of **signs** in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracles”
-JHN	12	38	k15e	figs-activepassive	λόγος Ἠσαΐου τοῦ προφήτου πληρωθῇ	1	so that the word of Isaiah the prophet would be fulfilled	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in order to fulfill the word of Isaiah the prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+JHN	12	38	k15e	figs-activepassive	ἵνα ὁ λόγος Ἠσαΐου τοῦ προφήτου πληρωθῇ	1	so that the word of Isaiah the prophet would be fulfilled	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in order to fulfill the word of Isaiah the prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	12	38	n4m7	figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος Ἠσαΐου τοῦ προφήτου	1	so that the word of Isaiah the prophet would be fulfilled	Here, **word** refers to the specific prophecy written down by Isaiah that is quoted in the second half of this verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this prophecy of Isaiah the prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	12	38	hps9	translate-names	Ἠσαΐου	1		See how you translated **Isaiah** in [1:23](../01/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	12	38	y9ya	writing-quotations	ὃν εἶπεν	1	so that the word of Isaiah the prophet would be fulfilled	This phrase introduces a quotation that occurs in the rest of this verse. The quotation is from the Old Testament book written by Isaiah the prophet ([Isaiah 53:1](../../isa/53/01.md)). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that John is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “which Isaiah said in the Old Testament” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
@@ -1768,14 +1768,14 @@ JHN	12	38	tcb7	figs-activepassive	ὁ βραχίων Κυρίου τίνι ἀπ
 JHN	12	38	dh6s	figs-metaphor	ὁ βραχίων Κυρίου	1	the arm of the Lord	Here, John quotes **Isaiah** using **arm** figuratively to refer to the Lord’s power. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Lord’s power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	12	39	f28y		τοῦτο	1		Here, **this reason** refers to the **reason** for the Jews’ unbelief. That reason is given in the quotation from **Isaiah** provided in the next verse. It does not refer back to the quotation from **Isaiah** in the previous verse.
 JHN	12	39	cskd	writing-quotations	ὅτι πάλιν εἶπεν Ἠσαΐας	1		This phrase introduces a quotation from the Old Testament book written by **Isaiah** the prophet ([Isaiah 6:10](../../isa/06/10.md)) which occurs in the next verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that John is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “for Isaiah had again said in the Old Testament” or “for according to Isaiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-JHN	12	40	q8k8	figs-quotemarks	τετύφλωκεν αὐτῶν τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς καὶ ἐπώρωσεν αὐτῶν τὴν καρδίαν, ἵνα μὴ ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς καὶ νοήσωσιν τῇ καρδίᾳ, καὶ στραφῶσιν καὶ ἰάσομαι αὐτούς	1		This verse is a quotation from [Isaiah 6:10](../../isa/06/10.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-JHN	12	40	opz8	figs-metaphor	τετύφλωκεν αὐτῶν τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς	1		Here John quotes Isaiah using **blinded their eyes** figuratively to refer to causing people to not be able to understanding what they see. Although the Jews saw Jesus’ many miracles, most of them did not understand that those miracles proved that Jesus was sent by God. If this use of **blinded** and **eyes** would confuse your readers, you could say the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “He has caused them to not be able to understand” or “He has made them like those who are blind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	12	40	q8k8	figs-quotemarks	τετύφλωκεν αὐτῶν τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς καὶ ἐπώρωσεν αὐτῶν τὴν καρδίαν, ἵνα μὴ ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς καὶ νοήσωσιν τῇ καρδίᾳ, καὶ στραφῶσιν καὶ ἰάσομαι αὐτούς	1		This verse is a quotation from [Isaiah 6:10](../../isa/06/10.md). It is a prophecy that God told Isaiah to speak against the Jewish people because they kept rejecting God. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+JHN	12	40	opz8	figs-metaphor	τετύφλωκεν αὐτῶν τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς	1		Here John quotes Isaiah using **blinded their eyes** figuratively to refer to causing people to not be able to understanding what they see. Although the Jews saw Jesus’ many miracles, most of them did not understand that those miracles proved that Jesus was sent by God. If this use of **blinded** and **eyes** would confuse your readers, you could state the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “He has caused them to not be able to understand” or “He has made them like those who are blind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	12	40	wac6	figs-metaphor	ἐπώρωσεν αὐτῶν τὴν καρδίαν	1		John quotes Isaiah using the phrase **hardened their heart** figuratively to refer to causing the Jewish people to become stubborn. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he has made them stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	12	40	zs9l	grammar-collectivenouns	αὐτῶν τὴν καρδίαν…τῇ καρδίᾳ	1		Both occurrences of the singular noun **heart** in this verse refer to all of the hearts of the people as a group. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “their hearts … with their hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 JHN	12	40	v6ic	figs-metaphor	μὴ ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς	1		John quotes Isaiah using the phrase **see with their eyes** figuratively here to refer to people understanding something that they **see**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they might not see and perceive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	12	40	btbb	figs-metaphor	νοήσωσιν τῇ καρδίᾳ	1		John quotes Isaiah using the phrase **understand with their heart** figuratively to refer to the Jewish people truly understanding something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “might fully understand” or “might understand deep within themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	12	40	h99a	figs-metaphor	καὶ στραφῶσιν	1	and turn	John quotes Isaiah using **turn** figuratively to mean “repent,” which means to stop sinning and start obeying the Lord. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and they would repent” or “and they would stop sinning and obey God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	12	40	be3d	figs-metaphor	καὶ ἰάσομαι αὐτούς	1	and turn	John quotes Isaiah using **heal** figuratively to refer to forgiving people of their sins. It does not refer to physical healing. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and I would forgive them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	12	40	h99a	figs-metaphor	καὶ στραφῶσιν	1	and turn	John quotes Isaiah using **turn** figuratively to mean “repent,” which means to stop sinning and start obeying the Lord. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and they would repent” or “and they would stop sinning and obey God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	12	40	be3d	figs-metaphor	καὶ ἰάσομαι αὐτούς	1	and turn	John quotes Isaiah using **heal** figuratively to refer to forgiving people of their sins. It does not refer to physical healing. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and I would forgive them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	12	41	q2x6	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how glorious he is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	12	42	srml	figs-explicit	τῶν ἀρχόντων	1		Here, **rulers** refers to the Jewish religious leadership, specifically the Jewish council called the Sanhedrin, which made decisions about Jewish law. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/council]]) See how you translated this in [3:1](../03/01.md). Alternate translation: “members of the Jewish ruling council” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	42	hdh1	figs-activepassive	ἵνα μὴ ἀποσυνάγωγοι γένωνται	1	so that they would not be banned from the synagogue	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that the Pharisees would not ban them from the synagogue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1785,7 +1785,7 @@ JHN	12	43	cqqw	figs-possession	τὴν δόξαν τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1	Th
 JHN	12	43	pib1	figs-gendernotations	τὴν δόξαν τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1	They loved the praise that comes from people more than the praise that comes from God	Although the term **men** is masculine, John is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both **men** and women. Alternate translation: “the glory of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 JHN	12	43	oyf8	figs-possession	τὴν δόξαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	They loved the praise that comes from people more than the praise that comes from God	John is using **of** to describe **glory** that is given by **God**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the glory that is given by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JHN	12	44	t7cq	writing-newevent	δὲ	1		**Now** here introduces a new event that happened at some time after the events in [verses 20–36](../12/20.md). The story does not say how long after the previous events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “At another time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
-JHN	12	44	d27w	figs-explicit	Ἰησοῦς…ἔκραξεν καὶ εἶπεν	1	Jesus cried out and said	John uses **cried out** to imply that Jesus was speaking loudly to a crowd of people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus cried out and said to a crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	12	44	d27w	figs-explicit	Ἰησοῦς…ἔκραξεν καὶ εἶπεν	1	Jesus cried out and said	John uses **cried out** to imply that Jesus was speaking loudly to a crowd of people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus cried out and said to a crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	44	kcnd	figs-explicit	τὸν πέμψαντά με	1		Here, **the one who sent me** refers to God. See how you translated it in [4:34](../04/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	45	s6xx	figs-explicit	τὸν πέμψαντά με	1		Here, **the one who sent me** refers to God. See how you translated it in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	46	wib3	figs-metaphor	ἐγὼ φῶς εἰς τὸν κόσμον ἐλήλυθα	1	I have come as a light	Here Jesus uses **light** figuratively to refer to himself. See how you translated light in [8:12](../08/12). Alternate translation: “I have come as the one who reveals God’s truth and goodness to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1802,14 +1802,14 @@ JHN	12	48	b1ds	figs-explicit	ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ	1	on the la
 JHN	12	49	ovmm	figs-explicit	ἐξ ἐμαυτοῦ	1		Here, **from** is used to indicate the source of what Jesus spoke. See how you translated this phrase in [7:17](../07/17.md). Alternate translation: “by my own authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	49	ybm5	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ…Πατὴρ	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	12	49	l77y	figs-doublet	τί εἴπω, καὶ τί λαλήσω	1		Here, **what I should speak** could refer to: (1) the manner in which Jesus **should speak**. Alternate translation: “what I should say and the manner in which I should say it” (2) the same meaning as **what I should say**, in which case the two phrases would be a doublet used for emphasis and could be combined into one clause. Alternate translation: “exactly what I should say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-JHN	12	50	tar2	figs-explicit	οἶδα, ὅτι ἡ ἐντολὴ αὐτοῦ	1	I know that his command is eternal life	Here, **his command** refers to the teachings that God commanded Jesus to speak, as mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I know that what he commanded me to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	12	50	tar2	figs-explicit	οἶδα, ὅτι ἡ ἐντολὴ αὐτοῦ	1	I know that his command is eternal life	Here, **his command** refers to the teachings that God commanded Jesus to speak, as mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I know that what he commanded me to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	50	q9cr	figs-explicit	ἡ ἐντολὴ αὐτοῦ ζωὴ αἰώνιός ἐστιν	1	I know that his command is eternal life	This phrase means that what God commanded Jesus to say gives **eternal life** to those who believe it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “his command gives eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	13	intro	zk68			0		# John 13 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>1. The Passover meal begins: Jesus washes his disciples’ feet (13:1–20)<br>2. Jesus predicts that Judas will betray him (13:21–30)<br>3. Jesus commands his disciples to love each other (13:31–35)<br>4. Jesus predicts that Peter will deny him (13:36–38)<br><br>The events of this chapter are commonly referred to as the “Last Supper.” In many ways this Passover meal parallels the sacrifice of Jesus as the lamb of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lordssupper]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### The washing of feet<br><br>People in the Ancient Near East thought that feet were very dirty. Only servants would wash people’s feet. The disciples did not want Jesus to wash their feet, because they considered him to be their master and themselves to be his servants, and it was a servant’s job to wash the feet of master and guests. However, Jesus wanted to show them that his disciples need to humbly serve and love each other. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])<br><br>### I AM<br><br>John records Jesus saying these words as an independent phrase one time in this chapter ([13:19](../13/19.md)). They stand alone as a complete sentence, and they literally translate the Hebrew expression “I AM,” by which Yahweh identified himself to Moses in [Exodus 3:14](../../exo/03/14.md). For these reasons many people believe that when Jesus said these words he was claiming to be Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/yahweh]]).<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### “The disciple whom Jesus loved”<br><br>The Apostle John first referred to himself as the disciple “whom Jesus loved” in this chapter ([13:23](../13/23.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. If this is the case, then you will need to add a first person pronoun to these references and the other references to John in ([13:23–25](../13/23.md). If your language can retain the third person references, then you may still want to make these references to John explicit by adding “John” next to them. See the discussion of this in Part 1 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/johntheapostle]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])<br><br>### “Son of Man”<br><br>Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([13:31](../13/31.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN	13	intro	zk68			0		# John 13 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>1. The Passover meal begins: Jesus washes his disciples’ feet (13:1–20)<br>2. Jesus predicts that Judas will betray him (13:21–30)<br>3. Jesus commands his disciples to love each other (13:31–35)<br>4. Jesus predicts that Peter will deny him (13:36–38)<br><br>The events of this chapter are commonly referred to as the “Last Supper.” In many ways this Passover meal parallels the sacrifice of Jesus as the lamb of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lordssupper]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### The washing of feet<br><br>People in the Ancient Near East thought that feet were very dirty. Only servants would wash people’s feet. The disciples did not want Jesus to wash their feet, because they considered him to be their master and themselves to be his servants, and it was a servant’s job to wash the feet of master and guests. However, Jesus wanted to show them that his disciples need to humbly serve and love each other. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])<br><br>### I AM<br><br>John records Jesus saying these words as an independent phrase one time in this chapter ([13:19](../13/19.md)). They stand alone as a complete sentence, and they literally translate the Hebrew expression “I AM,” by which Yahweh identified himself to Moses in [Exodus 3:14](../../exo/03/14.md). For these reasons many people believe that when Jesus said these words he was claiming to be Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/yahweh]]).<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### “The disciple whom Jesus loved”<br><br>The Apostle John first referred to himself as the disciple “whom Jesus loved” in this chapter ([13:23](../13/23.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. If this is the case, then you will need to add a first person pronoun to these references and the other references to John in ([13:23–25](../13/23.md)). If your language can retain the third person references, then you may still want to make these references to John explicit by adding “John” next to them. See the discussion of this in Part 1 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/johntheapostle]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])<br><br>### “Son of Man”<br><br>Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([13:31](../13/31.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	13	1	wk2k	writing-background		0	General Information:	It is not yet **Passover**, and **Jesus** is with his disciples for the evening meal. [Verses 1–4](../13/01.md) explain the setting of the story and give background information about Jesus and Judas. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	13	1	z4q9	figs-metonymy	ἦλθεν αὐτοῦ ἡ ὥρα	1		Here, the word **hour** is used figuratively to refer to the time God had planned for Jesus to be arrested and killed. See how you translated this word in [7:30](../07/30.md). Alternate translation: “the right time to arrest him had come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	13	1	w7w3	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατέρα	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-JHN	13	1	a1w4	figs-explicit	τοὺς ἰδίους τοὺς ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ	1		This phrase refers to Jesus’ disciples. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “his own disciples who were with him in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	13	1	g86x	figs-idiom	εἰς τέλος ἠγάπησεν αὐτούς	1		Here, **to the end** could mean: (1) utterly or completely. Alternate translation: “he loved them to the uttermost.” (2) **to the end** of Jesus’ life. If you use this meaning, make sure that you do not translate this phrase in a way that could imply that Jesus did not continue to love them after his death. Alternate translation: “he loved them to the end of his life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+JHN	13	1	a1w4	figs-explicit	τοὺς ἰδίους τοὺς ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ	1		This phrase refers to Jesus’ disciples. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “his own disciples who were with him in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	13	1	g86x	figs-idiom	εἰς τέλος ἠγάπησεν αὐτούς	1		Here, **to the end** could mean: (1) **to the end** of Jesus’ life. If you use this meaning, make sure that you do not translate this phrase in a way that could imply that Jesus did not continue to love them after his death. Alternate translation: “he loved them to the time of his death” (2) utterly or completely. Alternate translation: “he loved them to the uttermost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	13	2	xn6r	figs-idiom	τοῦ διαβόλου ἤδη βεβληκότος εἰς τὴν καρδίαν, ἵνα παραδοῖ αὐτὸν Ἰούδας, Σίμωνος Ἰσκαριώτης	1	the devil had already put it into the heart of Judas Iscariot son of Simon, to betray Jesus	Here, **put into the heart** is an idiom that means to cause someone to think about something. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the devil had already caused Judas Iscariot, the son of Simon, to think about betraying Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	13	2	iq56	translate-names	Ἰούδας, Σίμωνος Ἰσκαριώτης	1		See how you translated this phrase in [6:71](../06/71.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	13	3	qtr3	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰδὼς	1	Father	Here, the word **knowing** could mean: (1) the rest of this verse is the reason why Jesus did the result that John describes in the next verse. Alternate translation: “because he knew” (2) this verse provides a contrast between who Jesus is and what he would do in the next verse. Alternate translation: “although he knew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -1818,7 +1818,7 @@ JHN	13	3	x8hc	figs-metonymy	εἰς τὰς χεῖρας	1	had given everything
 JHN	13	4	t7cu	figs-pastforfuture	ἐγείρεται…τίθησιν	1	He got up from dinner and took off his outer clothing	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	13	4	nm8h	figs-explicit	ἐγείρεται ἐκ τοῦ δείπνου	1	He got up from dinner and took off his outer clothing	During Jesus’ time, people would often eat meals while lying on their sides on low couches next to the table. Here, **gets up** means that Jesus went from lying on his side on a couch next to the table where he was eating **supper** to standing up. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “he gets up from the table where he was eating supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	13	4	a9yt		τίθησιν τὰ ἱμάτια	1	He got up from dinner and took off his outer clothing	Here, **outer clothing** refers to clothing that is worn over undergarments. It does not refer to a coat that would be worn over a person’s regular clothing. Use the term in your language for the regular clothing that people wear on top of their underwear.
-JHN	13	4	gfe4	figs-explicit	λαβὼν λέντιον	1		Here, **towel** refers to piece of cloth that is long enough to wrap around Jesus’ waist and still has enough leftover cloth to wipe the disciples’ feet. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “having taken a long towel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	13	4	gfe4	figs-explicit	λαβὼν λέντιον	1		Here, **towel** refers to piece of cloth that is long enough to wrap around Jesus’ waist and still has enough leftover cloth to wipe the disciples’ feet. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “having taken a long towel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	13	5	qfqd	figs-pastforfuture	βάλλει	1	began to wash the feet of the disciples	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	13	5	adm9	figs-activepassive	ᾧ ἦν διεζωσμένος	1	began to wash the feet of the disciples	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that he had tied around himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	13	6	hevx	figs-pastforfuture	ἔρχεται…λέγει	1	Lord, are you going to wash my feet?	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
@@ -1830,9 +1830,9 @@ JHN	13	8	m90p	figs-explicit	ἐὰν μὴ νίψω σε, οὐκ ἔχεις μ
 JHN	13	9	bjgq	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	13	9	irnh	figs-ellipsis	μὴ τοὺς πόδας μου μόνον,	1		Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “wash not only my feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	13	10	dp8l	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-JHN	13	10	is57	figs-metaphor	ὁ λελουμένος οὐκ ἔχει χρείαν, εἰ μὴ τοὺς πόδας νίψασθαι	1	He who is bathed has no need, except to wash his feet	In this verse, Jesus uses **washed** figuratively to refer to God forgiving a person for their sins. He also uses **feet** figuratively to refer to daily sins, because people in Jesus’ culture had to wash their **feet** frequently due to wearing sandals while walking on dusty, dirty roads. If this might confuse your readers, you could say their meanings clearly or use similes. Alternate translation: “The one who has received God’s forgiveness for their sins, only needs to be forgiven for his daily sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	13	10	is57	figs-metaphor	ὁ λελουμένος οὐκ ἔχει χρείαν, εἰ μὴ τοὺς πόδας νίψασθαι	1	He who is bathed has no need, except to wash his feet	In this verse, Jesus uses **washed** figuratively to refer to God forgiving a person for their sins. He also uses **feet** figuratively to refer to daily sins, because people in Jesus’ culture had to wash their **feet** frequently due to wearing sandals while walking on dusty, dirty roads. If this might confuse your readers, you could state their meanings clearly or use similes. Alternate translation: “The one who has received God’s forgiveness for their sins, only needs to be forgiven for his daily sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	13	10	bbon	figs-activepassive	ὁ λελουμένος	1	He who is bathed has no need, except to wash his feet	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The one who someone had washed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	13	10	o25q	figs-metaphor	ἀλλ’ ἔστιν καθαρὸς ὅλος; καὶ ὑμεῖς καθαροί ἐστε	1	He who is bathed has no need, except to wash his feet	In this verse, Jesus uses **clean** figuratively to refer to someone who has been forgiven for their sins. If this might be confusing in your language, you could say its meaning clearly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “but he has been completely forgiven for his sins, and you have been forgiven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	13	10	o25q	figs-metaphor	ἀλλ’ ἔστιν καθαρὸς ὅλος; καὶ ὑμεῖς καθαροί ἐστε	1	He who is bathed has no need, except to wash his feet	In this verse, Jesus uses **clean** figuratively to refer to someone who has been forgiven for their sins. If this might be confusing in your language, you could state its meaning clearly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “but he has been completely forgiven for his sins, and you have been forgiven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	13	10	tv57	figs-yousingular	ὑμεῖς	1		Here Jesus uses the word **you** to refer to all of his disciples, not only Peter. Use a plural form of **you** if your language distinguishes between singular and plural **you**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 JHN	13	11	tzj7	writing-background		0		Here John interrupts the story to give the reason why Jesus made his comment in the end of the previous verse. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	13	11	ccz4	figs-metaphor	οὐχὶ πάντες καθαροί ἐστε	1	Not all of you are clean	See how you translated **clean** in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Not all of you have received God’s forgiveness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1848,17 +1848,17 @@ JHN	13	16	la0x	figs-metaphor	οὐδὲ ἀπόστολος μείζων τοῦ
 JHN	13	17	nwhg	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ ταῦτα οἴδατε	1		Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If you know these things, which you do,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 JHN	13	17	nxou	figs-activepassive	μακάριοί ἐστε	1	you are blessed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that God did it. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	13	18	ji7u	figs-explicit	οὐ περὶ πάντων ὑμῶν λέγω	1		Here Jesus is referring back to what he just said in the previous verse. He means that not all of those to whom he is speaking will be blessed for serving each other, because one of them, Judas Iscariot, will betray him. If this clause would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am not speaking this about all of you” or “I am not saying that God will bless all of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	13	18	ztpw	figs-explicit	ἐγὼ οἶδα τίνας ἐξελεξάμην	1		Here Jesus states that he knew the character of every person he chose to be his disciple. Therefore, he knew Judas would betray him when he chose him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I know exactly the kind of men I have chosen to be my disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	13	18	ztpw	figs-explicit	ἐγὼ οἶδα τίνας ἐξελεξάμην	1		Here Jesus states that he knew the character of every person he chose to be his disciple. Therefore, he knew Judas would betray him when he chose him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I know exactly the kind of men I have chosen to be my disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	13	18	lpug	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλ’ ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ	1		Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but I chose one who will betray me so that the scripture might be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	13	18	u5fl	figs-activepassive	ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ	1	this so that the scripture will be fulfilled	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this is in order to fulfill the scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	13	18	dk5l	writing-quotations	ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ	1		Here Jesus uses **that the scripture might be fulfilled** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Psalm 41:9](../../psa/41/09.md)). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “so that what is written in the Psalms might be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	13	18	tx1f	figs-quotemarks	ὁ τρώγων μετ’ ἐμοῦ τὸν ἄρτον, ἐπῆρεν ἐπ’ ἐμὲ τὴν πτέρναν αὐτοῦ	1		This sentence is a quotation from [Psalm 41:9](../../psa/41/09.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 JHN	13	18	v5pv	figs-idiom	ὁ τρώγων μετ’ ἐμοῦ τὸν ἄρτον, ἐπῆρεν ἐπ’ ἐμὲ τὴν πτέρναν αὐτοῦ	1	He who eats my bread lifted up his heel against me	The phrase, **The one eating bread with me**, here is an idiom that refers to someone who acts like a friend would act. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “The one who has acted like he is my friend” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	13	18	wr0c	figs-idiom	ἐπῆρεν ἐπ’ ἐμὲ τὴν πτέρναν αὐτοῦ	1	He who eats my bread lifted up his heel against me	Here, **lifted up his heel** is an idiom that refers to someone who has become an enemy. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “has turned against me” or “has become my enemy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-JHN	13	19	qd39	figs-ellipsis	ἀπ’ ἄρτι λέγω ὑμῖν	1	I tell you this now before it happens	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “From this moment I tell you this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	13	19	qd39	figs-ellipsis	ἀπ’ ἄρτι λέγω ὑμῖν	1	I tell you this now before it happens	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	13	19	gg19	figs-explicit	ἐγώ εἰμι	1	I AM	See how you translated **I am** in [8:24](../08/24.md), and also see the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes for Chapter 8. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	13	20	di3t	figs-doublet	ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly, truly	Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this is in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-JHN	13	20	zcyh	figs-doublet	ὁ λαμβάνων…λαμβάνει…λαμβάνων…λαμβάνει	1		In this verse, **receiving** and **receives** mean to accept a person into one’s presence with friendliness. See how you translated this word in [1:12](../01/12.md). Alternate translation: “the one accept him” or “did not welcome him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+JHN	13	20	zcyh	figs-doublet	ὁ λαμβάνων…λαμβάνει…λαμβάνων…λαμβάνει	1		In this verse, **receiving** and **receives** mean to accept or welcome a person into one’s presence with friendliness. See how you translated this word in [1:12](../01/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	13	20	ksfj	figs-explicit	τὸν πέμψαντά με	1		Here, **the one who sent me** refers to God. See how you translated it in [4:34](../04/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	13	21	bq84	figs-explicit	ἐταράχθη τῷ πνεύματι	1	troubled	See how you translated a similar phrase in [11:33](../11/33.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	13	21	j7x1	figs-doublet	ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly, truly	Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this is in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -1867,7 +1867,7 @@ JHN	13	23	z8ze	translate-unknown	ἀνακείμενος	1	lying down at the tab
 JHN	13	23	p2ee	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ κόλπῳ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	Jesus’ side	In Jesus’ culture, lying with one’s head **against** the side of another person when having a meal was considered to be a sign that the two people had a very close friendship. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “closely beside Jesus as a close friend” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	13	24	eido	figs-explicit	τούτῳ	1	Jesus’ side	Here, **this one** refers to John, who calls himself the disciple “whom Jesus loved” in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the disciple whom Jesus loved” or “to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	13	25	iqcj	figs-explicit	ἐκεῖνος…λέγει	1	Jesus’ side	Here, **that one** refers to John, who calls himself the disciple “whom Jesus loved” in [verse 23](../13/23.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “that disciple whom Jesus loved says” or “I say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	13	25	kqza	figs-explicit	λέγει	1	Jesus’ side	[Verse 28](../13/28.md) indicates that the disciples did not know why Jesus spoke to Judas in the way he did. This means that they must not have heard the conversation in this verse and the next, because John and Jesus were speaking quietly. If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “said in a quite voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	13	25	kqza	figs-explicit	λέγει	1	Jesus’ side	[Verse 28](../13/28.md) indicates that the disciples did not know why Jesus spoke to Judas in the way he did. This means that they must not have heard the conversation in this verse and the next, because John and Jesus were speaking quietly. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “said in a quite voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	13	25	b22k	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	Jesus’ side	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	13	26	qpj8	translate-names	Ἰούδᾳ Σίμωνος Ἰσκαριώτη	1		See how you translated this phrase in [6:71](../06/71.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	13	27	r8lk	figs-ellipsis	καὶ μετὰ τὸ ψωμίον	1	Then after the bread	John is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “And after Judas took the bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -1901,7 +1901,7 @@ JHN	13	38	qp88	figs-rquestion	τὴν ψυχήν σου ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ θ
 JHN	13	38	juha	figs-doublet	ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω σοι	1		Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this is in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	13	38	sp7p		οὐ μὴ ἀλέκτωρ φωνήσῃ, ἕως οὗ ἀρνήσῃ με τρίς	1	the rooster will not crow before you have denied me three times	If your readers would misunderstand this negative statement, you could express it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “you will surely deny me three times before the rooster crows”
 JHN	13	38	ef9n	figs-metonymy	οὐ μὴ ἀλέκτωρ φωνήσῃ, ἕως οὗ	1	the rooster will not crow before you have denied me three times	Jesus is referring figuratively to a certain time of day. Roosters crow just before the sun appears in the morning. In other words, Jesus is referring to dawn. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “before another morning begins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-JHN	13	38	ui2h	translate-unknown	ἀλέκτωρ	1		A **rooster** is a bird that calls out loudly around the time the sun comes up. If your readers would not be familiar with this bird, you could use the name of a bird in your area that calls out or sings just before dawn, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the birds that sing in the morning may certainly not sing before which you will deny three times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+JHN	13	38	ui2h	translate-unknown	ἀλέκτωρ	1		A **rooster** is a bird that calls out loudly around the time the sun comes up. If your readers would not be familiar with this bird, you could use the name of a bird in your area that calls out or sings just before dawn, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the bird that sings in the morning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 JHN	13	38	kfze	figs-genericnoun	ἀλέκτωρ	1		Jesus is not speaking of one particular **rooster** but of roosters in general. Alternate translation: “the roosters” or “the birds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 JHN	14	intro	kv6m			0		# John 14 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>1. Jesus says he is the way to the Father (14:1–14)<br>2. Jesus promises that the Holy Spirit will come (14:15–31)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### “My Father’s house”<br><br>Jesus used these words to refer to heaven, where God dwells. It does not refer to any temple in Jerusalem or to a church building. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]])<br><br>### The Holy Spirit<br><br>Jesus told his disciples that he would send the Holy Spirit to them. He called the Holy Spirit the Helper ([14:16](../14/16.md)), who is always with God’s people to help them and to speak to God for them. Jesus also called him the Spirit of Truth ([14:17](../14/17.md)), who tells God’s people what is true about God so they know him better and serve him well. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])
 JHN	14	1	a2xv			0	Connecting Statement:	The part of the story from the previous chapter continues in this chapter. Jesus reclines at the table with his disciples during the evening meal and continues to speak to them.
@@ -1915,14 +1915,14 @@ JHN	14	3	sadi	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐὰν πορευθῶ	1		Jesus i
 JHN	14	4	ir1d	figs-extrainfo	τὴν ὁδόν	1	the way	Here Jesus uses **the way** figuratively. This could refer to: (1) himself as the means by which people can go to God in heaven, which is clearly the meaning for **the way** in [verse 6](../14/06.md). (2) a manner of life that will eventually lead someone to be with God in heaven. Since the disciples did not understand this when Jesus said it, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 JHN	14	5	aode	translate-names	Θωμᾶς	1		See how you translated the name **Thomas** in [11:16](../11/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	14	5	o21d	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-JHN	14	5	j2go	figs-rquestion	πῶς δυνάμεθα τὴν ὁδὸν εἰδέναι	1		**Thomas** is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We surely do not know the way!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+JHN	14	5	j2go	figs-rquestion	πῶς δυνάμεθα τὴν ὁδὸν εἰδέναι	1		Thomas is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We surely do not know the way!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	14	6	jdwf	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	the truth	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	14	6	qoc0	figs-metaphor	ἡ ὁδὸς	1		Here Jesus uses **the way** figuratively to indicate that he is the means by which people can go to God, who is in heaven. Trusting in Jesus is the only way to have access to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who gives people access to the Father” or “the means by which one may come to the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	14	6	i8le	figs-metaphor	ἡ ἀλήθεια	1	the truth	Jesus uses **the truth** figuratively to indicate that he is the one who reveals God’s truth to people. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who reveals God’s truth” or “the means by which people can know God’s truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	14	6	z9tr	figs-metaphor	ἡ ζωή	1	the life	Jesus uses **the life** figuratively to indicate that he is the means by which people can receive eternal **life**. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who makes people spiritually alive” or “the means by which one may receive eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	14	6	g5hn	figs-explicit	οὐδεὶς ἔρχεται πρὸς τὸν Πατέρα, εἰ μὴ δι’ ἐμοῦ	1	no one comes to the Father except through me	Here, **through me** means that a person can come to God only by trusting Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “No one comes to the Father except by believing in me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	14	6	f95q	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατέρα	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-JHN	14	7	wx89	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ ἐγνώκατε με	1	Father	Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If you have known me, and you have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+JHN	14	7	wx89	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ ἐγνώκατε με	1	Father	Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If you have known me, and you have known me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 JHN	14	8	wwv7	translate-names	Φίλιππος	1		See how you translated the name **Philip** in [1:43](../01/43.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	14	8	fy8b	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	14	8	kum1	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Κύριε, δεῖξον ἡμῖν τὸν Πατέρα	1	Lord, show us the Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
@@ -1930,7 +1930,7 @@ JHN	14	9	q2iy	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	I have been with you for so long a
 JHN	14	9	mr1a	figs-rquestion	τοσοῦτον χρόνον μεθ’ ὑμῶν εἰμι, καὶ οὐκ ἔγνωκάς με, Φίλιππε?	1	I have been with you for so long and you still do not know me, Philip?	**Jesus** is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “So long a time I am with you, and you should know me, Philip!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	14	9	vx5b	figs-you	ὑμῶν…σὺ	1		The first occurrence of **you** in this verse is plural, but the second occurrence is singular. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 JHN	14	9	l3s8	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Πατέρα	1	Whoever has seen me has seen the Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-JHN	14	9	x1uh	figs-rquestion	πῶς σὺ λέγεις, δεῖξον ἡμῖν τὸν Πατέρα?	1	How can you say, ‘Show us the Father’?	**Jesus** is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize what he is saying to **Philip**. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You really should not say, ‘Show us the Father!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+JHN	14	9	x1uh	figs-rquestion	πῶς σὺ λέγεις, δεῖξον ἡμῖν τὸν Πατέρα?	1	How can you say, ‘Show us the Father’?	Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize what he is saying to Philip. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You really should not say, ‘Show us the Father!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	14	10	hc1z	figs-rquestion	οὐ πιστεύεις ὅτι ἐγὼ ἐν τῷ Πατρὶ, καὶ ὁ Πατὴρ ἐν ἐμοί ἐστιν?	1	Do you not believe … in me?	Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize what he is saying to Philip. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You really should believe that I am in the Father, and the Father is in me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	14	10	li33	figs-idiom	ἐγὼ ἐν τῷ Πατρὶ, καὶ ὁ Πατὴρ ἐν ἐμοί ἐστιν	1	Do you not believe … in me?	See how you translated this expression in [10:38](../10/38.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	14	10	e4se	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατρὶ…ὁ Πατὴρ…Πατὴρ	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
@@ -1939,13 +1939,13 @@ JHN	14	10	pgk6	figs-metonymy	τὰ ῥήματα	1	The words that I say to you I
 JHN	14	10	seon	figs-explicit	ἀπ’ ἐμαυτοῦ	1		See how you translated **from myself** in [5:30](../05/30.md). Alternate translation: “on my own authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	14	10	e3li	figs-explicit	τὰ ἔργα	1		See how you translated **work** in [7:3](../07/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	14	11	ew6g	figs-idiom	ἐγὼ ἐν τῷ Πατρὶ, καὶ ὁ Πατὴρ ἐν ἐμοί	1	I am in the Father, and the Father is in me	See how you translated this in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-JHN	14	11	r2w8	figs-explicit	τὰ ἔργα	1		See how you translated **works** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	14	11	r2w8	figs-explicit	τὰ ἔργα	1		See how you translated **work** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	14	12	gh64	figs-doublet	ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν,	1	Truly, truly	Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this is in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	14	12	icjc	figs-infostructure	ὁ πιστεύων εἰς ἐμὲ, τὰ ἔργα ἃ ἐγὼ ποιῶ, κἀκεῖνος ποιήσει	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “the one believing in me will also do the works that I do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 JHN	14	12	h2rh	figs-explicit	τὰ ἔργα	1		See how you translated **works** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	14	12	ui5t	figs-ellipsis	καὶ μείζονα τούτων ποιήσει	1		Jesus is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply the word from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “and he will do greater works than these” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	14	12	cn14	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατέρα	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-JHN	14	13	bn30	figs-ellipsis	ὅ τι ἂν αἰτήσητε	1	Whatever you ask in my name	Jesus is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “whatever you might ask God” or “whatever you might ask me”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	14	13	bn30	figs-ellipsis	ὅ τι ἂν αἰτήσητε	1	Whatever you ask in my name	Jesus is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “whatever you might ask God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	14	13	n2id	figs-idiom	ὅ τι ἂν αἰτήσητε ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου	1	Whatever you ask in my name	Here, **ask in my name** could mean: (1) to request something as the representative of Jesus or as if Jesus himself were requesting it. Alternate translation: “whatever you might ask as if I were asking” or “whatever you might ask that I would ask” (2) to request something with the authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “whatever you ask with my authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	14	13	i138	figs-activepassive	ἵνα δοξασθῇ ὁ Πατὴρ ἐν τῷ Υἱῷ	1	so that the Father will be glorified in the Son	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The one that may do the action could be: (1) Jesus, in which case **in the Son** would mean “by the Son.” Alternate translation: “so that the Son may glorify the Father” (2) everyone who experiences the result of what has been asked. Alternate translation: “so that everyone may glorify the Father in the Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	14	13	j6nh	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατὴρ…Υἱῷ	1	Father … Son	**Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
@@ -1956,14 +1956,14 @@ JHN	14	16	tu1e	figs-explicit	Παράκλητον	1	Comforter	**Helper** here re
 JHN	14	17	sc6r	figs-explicit	τὸ Πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας	1	Spirit of truth	The **Spirit of Truth** refers to the Holy Spirit. See the discussion of this term in the General Notes for this chapter. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Holy Spirit of Truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	14	17	ms9g	figs-possession	τὸ Πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας	1	Spirit of truth	Jesus is using **of** to describe the **Spirit** who teaches people the **Truth** about God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the Spirit that teaches God’s truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JHN	14	17	i2v7	figs-metonymy	ὃ ὁ κόσμος οὐ δύναται λαβεῖν	1	The world cannot receive him	Here Jesus uses **world** figuratively to refer to the people in the **world** who oppose God. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whom the people in this world who oppose God are not able to receive” or “whom those who oppose God are not able to receive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-JHN	14	17	clz3	figs-explicit	ἐν ὑμῖν ἔσται	1	The world cannot receive him	Jesus uses the future tense **will** to indicate that the Holy **Spirit** would be inside Jesus’ disciples at a future point in time. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “will be in you at a future time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	14	17	clz3	figs-explicit	ἐν ὑμῖν ἔσται	1	The world cannot receive him	Jesus uses the future tense **will** to indicate that the Holy **Spirit** would be inside Jesus’ disciples at a future point in time. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “will be in you at a future time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	14	18	hy8v	figs-metaphor	οὐκ ἀφήσω ὑμᾶς ὀρφανούς	1	leave you alone	Jesus uses **orphans** figuratively to refer to people who have no one to care for them. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will not leave you with no one to care for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	14	18	k5bs	figs-pastforfuture	ἔρχομαι	1		Here Jesus uses the present tense **I am coming** to refer to something that will happen in the near future. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the future tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “I will come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	14	19	r5q8	figs-metonymy	ὁ κόσμος	1	the world	See how you translated **the world** in [verse 17](../14/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	14	19	yjsl	figs-explicit	ὅτι ἐγὼ ζῶ, καὶ ὑμεῖς ζήσεσθε	1	the world	In this verse, Jesus uses **live** to refer to living forever after one’s resurrection. Because Jesus will live forever after his death and resurrection, so too will his disciples life forever after they die and are resurrected. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Because I live forever, you will also life forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	14	19	cil5	figs-pastforfuture	ὅτι ἐγὼ ζῶ	1	the world	Here Jesus uses the present tense **I live** to refer to when he comes back to life after his death. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the future tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “Because I will live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	14	20	ckki	figs-explicit	ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ	1	you will know that I am in my Father	**On that day** here refers to the time that Jesus’ disciples would see him again after his resurrection. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “When you see me again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	14	20	b87j	figs-explicit	ἐγὼ ἐν τῷ Πατρί μου, καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐν ἐμοὶ, κἀγὼ ἐν ὑμῖν	1	you will know that I am in my Father	In this verse Jesus uses **in** to indicate being united with someone. If this might confuse your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am united with my Father, and you are united with me, and I am united with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	14	20	b87j	figs-explicit	ἐγὼ ἐν τῷ Πατρί μου, καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐν ἐμοὶ, κἀγὼ ἐν ὑμῖν	1	you will know that I am in my Father	In this verse Jesus uses **in** to indicate being united with someone. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am united with my Father, and you are united with me, and I am united with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	14	20	he2a	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατρί μου	1	my Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	14	20	ht8z	figs-doublet	ὑμεῖς ἐν ἐμοὶ, κἀγὼ ἐν ὑμῖν	1	you are in me, and that I am in you	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize the unity between Jesus and his disciples. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “you and I are just like one person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	14	21	rw8n	figs-metaphor	ὁ ἔχων τὰς ἐντολάς μου	1		Jesus speaks figuratively of **commandments** as if they were an object that someone could possess. If your readers would not speak of knowing **commandments** in this way, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “The one knowing my commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1983,7 +1983,7 @@ JHN	14	23	h9tl	figs-explicit	καὶ μονὴν παρ’ αὐτῷ ποιησ
 JHN	14	24	dj2n	figs-metonymy	τοὺς λόγους μου…τηρεῖ	1		See how you translated a similar phrase in [8:51](../08/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	14	24	c3ju	figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος	1	The word	Here, **word** refers to what Jesus has just said in the preceding verses. If this would confuse your readers, you could express that meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “these things I have just said” or “this statement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	14	24	d7ay	figs-explicit	οὐκ ἔστιν ἐμὸς	1	that you hear	Here, **mine** refers to the source of what Jesus has said. What Jesus has said did not come from himself, but from God. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “does not come from me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	14	24	ke2f	figs-possession	τοῦ πέμψαντός με Πατρός	1		Jesus is using **of** to describe the source of **the word**. If this is not clear in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “has come from the Father who sent me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+JHN	14	24	ke2f	figs-possession	τοῦ πέμψαντός με Πατρός	1		Jesus is using **of** to describe the source of **the word**. If this is not clear in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “has come from the Father who sent me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JHN	14	24	az71	figs-explicit	τοῦ πέμψαντός με Πατρός	1		Here this phrase refers to God. See how you translated it in [5:23](../05/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	14	24	jhdc	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ…Πατρός	1		**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	14	26	lbgf	figs-infostructure	ὁ δὲ Παράκλητος, τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, ὃ πέμψει ὁ Πατὴρ ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου, ἐκεῖνος ὑμᾶς διδάξει πάντα, καὶ ὑπομνήσει ὑμᾶς πάντα ἃ εἶπον ὑμῖν.	1	Father	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of the phrases in this verse. Alternate translation: “Now the Helper will teach you everything, and he will remind you of everything that I said to you. He is the Holy Spirit, whom the Father will send in my name.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
@@ -2000,7 +2000,7 @@ JHN	14	27	m6qq	figs-metaphor	μὴ ταρασσέσθω ὑμῶν ἡ καρδ
 JHN	14	28	s8bx	figs-quotesinquotes	ἐγὼ εἶπον ὑμῖν, ὑπάγω καὶ ἔρχομαι πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1		If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “I said to you that I am going away, and I will come back to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 JHN	14	28	ayiy	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ ἠγαπᾶτέ με, ἐχάρητε ἄν	1		Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he knows that the condition is not true. Jesus knows that at this point his disciples don’t truly love him in the way that they should. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If you loved me, but you don’t, you would be glad, but your aren’t” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
 JHN	14	28	s3t3	figs-explicit	πορεύομαι πρὸς τὸν Πατέρα	1	I am going to the Father	Here Jesus implies that he will return to his **Father**. Alternate translation: “I am going back to the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	14	28	gtk5	figs-explicit	ὁ Πατὴρ μείζων μού ἐστιν	1	the Father is greater than I	Here Jesus could mean: (1) that the Father has greater authority than the Son while the Son is on the earth. Alternate translation: “the Father has greater authority than I have here” (2) that Jesus functions in a subordinate role to the Father for all time. Alternate translation: “the Father has a superior role than I have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	14	28	gtk5	figs-explicit	ὁ Πατὴρ μείζων μού ἐστιν	1	the Father is greater than I	Here Jesus could mean: (1) that the Father has greater authority than the Son while the Son is on the earth. Alternate translation: “the Father has greater authority than I have here” (2) that Jesus functions in a subordinate role to the Father for all time. Alternate translation: “the role of the Father is superior to the role that I have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	14	28	ymq4	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Πατέρα…ὁ Πατὴρ	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	14	29	cj9y	figs-ellipsis	εἴρηκα ὑμῖν	1	Father	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “I have told you this” or “I have told you what will happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	14	30	ah3s	figs-explicit	ὁ τοῦ κόσμου ἄρχων	1	ruler of this world	Here, **the ruler of this world** refers to Satan. See how you translated this phrase in [12:31](../12/31.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2025,7 +2025,7 @@ JHN	15	4	qvv9	figs-explicit	μείνατε ἐν ἐμοί, κἀγὼ ἐν ὑ
 JHN	15	5	mw4t	figs-metaphor	ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ ἄμπελος; ὑμεῖς τὰ κλήματα	1	I am the vine, you are the branches	See how you translated **vine** in [verse 1](../15/01.md) and “branch” in [verse 2](../15/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	15	5	r4di	figs-explicit	ὁ μένων ἐν ἐμοὶ κἀγὼ ἐν αὐτῷ	1	He who remains in me and I in him	See how you translated this similar expression in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	15	5	hzh4	figs-metaphor	οὗτος φέρει καρπὸν πολύν	1	he bears much fruit	See how you translated **bears fruit** in [verse 2](../15/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	15	5	b1qd	figs-explicit	ποιεῖν οὐδέν	1	he bears much fruit	Here Jesus uses **nothing** to refer to doing **nothing** that pleases God or to lack any spiritual fruit. It does not refer to doing **nothing** at all. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “do nothing that pleases God” or “do nothing acceptable to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	15	5	b1qd	figs-explicit	ποιεῖν οὐδέν	1	he bears much fruit	Here Jesus uses **do nothing** to refer to doing **nothing** that pleases God. It does not refer to doing **nothing** at all. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “do nothing that pleases God” or “do nothing acceptable to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	15	6	fgnm		ἐὰν μή τις μένῃ ἐν ἐμοί, ἐβλήθη ἔξω ὡς τὸ κλῆμα καὶ ἐξηράνθη, καὶ συνάγουσιν αὐτὰ καὶ εἰς τὸ πῦρ βάλλουσιν, καὶ καίεται	1		In the middle of this verse, Jesus changes from referring to the **branch** in a singular form to a plural form. If this change would be confusing in your language, you could change the singular forms into plural forms. Alternate translation: “If people do not remain in me, they are thrown outside like branches and are dried up, and they gather them into the fire, and they are burned up”
 JHN	15	6	d5mt	figs-explicit	μένῃ ἐν ἐμοί	1		See how you translated **remain in me** in the previous two verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	15	6	h6cu	figs-activepassive	ἐβλήθη ἔξω ὡς τὸ κλῆμα καὶ ἐξηράνθη	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the farmer throws him outside like a branch, and he dries up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -2037,7 +2037,7 @@ JHN	15	7	lpzq	figs-idiom	τὰ ῥήματά μου ἐν ὑμῖν μείνῃ
 JHN	15	7	m38f	figs-ellipsis	ὃ ἐὰν θέλητε, αἰτήσασθε	1	ask whatever you wish	Jesus is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “ask God whatever you desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	15	7	mcz5	figs-activepassive	γενήσεται ὑμῖν	1	it will be done for you	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will do it for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	15	8	pq2t	figs-pastforfuture	ἐν τούτῳ ἐδοξάσθη ὁ Πατήρ μου	1	My Father is glorified in this	Jesus is figuratively using the past tense in order to refer to something that will happen in the future. He is doing this to show that the event will certainly happen. If this is confusing in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “My Father will be glorified in this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-JHN	15	8	yq67	figs-activepassive	ἐν τούτῳ ἐδοξάσθη ὁ Πατήρ μου	1	My Father is glorified in this	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You glorify my Father in this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+JHN	15	8	yq67	figs-activepassive	ἐν τούτῳ ἐδοξάσθη ὁ Πατήρ μου	1	My Father is glorified in this	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You have glorifed my Father in this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	15	8	z1ww	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατήρ μου	1	My Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	15	8	wpa6	figs-metaphor	καρπὸν πολὺν φέρητε	1	that you bear much fruit	See how you translated a similar expression in [verse 5](../15/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	15	8	vtg5		γένησθε ἐμοὶ μαθηταί	1	are my disciples	Alternate translation: “show that you are my disciples” or “demonstrate that you are my disciples”
@@ -2058,7 +2058,7 @@ JHN	15	16	kc4z	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα ὅ τι ἂν αἰτήσητ
 JHN	15	16	bcy1	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Πατέρα	1	the Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	15	16	acqo	figs-idiom	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου	1		See how you translated **in my name** in [14:13](../14/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	15	17	rib2		ταῦτα	1		Here, **These things** could refer to: (1) the commands Jesus referred to in the previous verses. Alternate translation: “These commands” (2) the command in the second half of this verse. Alternate translation: “This”
-JHN	15	18	ntzw	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ ὁ κόσμος ὑμᾶς μισεῖ	1	the world	Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If the world hates you, and it does” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+JHN	15	18	ntzw	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ ὁ κόσμος ὑμᾶς μισεῖ	1	the world	Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If the world hates you, and it does hate you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 JHN	15	18	d5ff	figs-metonymy	ὁ κόσμος	1	the world	Here Jesus uses **world** figuratively to refer to the people in the **world** who oppose God. See how you translated this in [14:17](../14/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	15	19	aj8s	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου ἦτε	1	the world	Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that his disciples are not **from the world**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If you were from the world, but you are not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
 JHN	15	19	x6q8	figs-metonymy	τοῦ κόσμου…ὁ κόσμος…τοῦ κόσμου…τοῦ κόσμου…ὁ κόσμος	1	the world	See how you translated **the world** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -2074,7 +2074,7 @@ JHN	15	22	uble	figs-metaphor	ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ εἴχοσαν	1	If I ha
 JHN	15	22	uj4o	figs-explicit	ἁμαρτίαν…ἁμαρτίας	1	If I had not come and spoken to them, they would not have sin, but now they have no excuse for their sin	Here, Jesus uses **sin** to refer specifically to the **sin** of rejecting Jesus and his teachings. It does not refer to **sin** in general, because everyone is guilty of **sin**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the sin of rejecting me and my teachings … sin of rejecting me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	15	23	u9u7	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Πατέρα	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	15	24	bd47	figs-doublenegatives	εἰ τὰ ἔργα μὴ ἐποίησα ἐν αὐτοῖς ἃ οὐδεὶς ἄλλος ἐποίησεν, ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ εἴχοσαν…δὲ	1	If I had not done the works that no one else did among them, they would have no sin, but	If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “Because I have done the works that no one else did among them, they have sin, and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-JHN	15	24	rnt4	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ τὰ ἔργα μὴ ἐποίησα ἐν αὐτοῖς ἃ οὐδεὶς ἄλλος ἐποίησεν, ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ εἴχοσαν	1	If I had not done the works that no one else did among them, they would have no sin, but	Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he knows that the condition is not true. He has done **works that no one else did** among the people. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If I had not done the works that no one else did among them, but I did, they would have no sin, but they do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
+JHN	15	24	rnt4	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ τὰ ἔργα μὴ ἐποίησα ἐν αὐτοῖς ἃ οὐδεὶς ἄλλος ἐποίησεν, ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ εἴχοσαν	1	If I had not done the works that no one else did among them, they would have no sin, but	Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he knows that the condition is not true. He has done **works that no one else did** among the people. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If I had not done the works that no one else did among them, but I did, they would have no sin, but they do have sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
 JHN	15	24	v23s	figs-metaphor	ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ εἴχοσαν	1	they would have no sin	See how you translated this in [15:22](../15/22.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	15	24	z6we	figs-ellipsis	καὶ ἑωράκασιν	1		The object of the verb **seen** could be: (1) **the works** referred to earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “they have both seen the works” (2) Jesus and the **Father**, referred to at the end of the verse. Alternate translation: “they have both seen me and my Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	15	24	v6pt	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Πατέρα μου	1	they have seen and hated both me and my Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
@@ -2087,16 +2087,16 @@ JHN	15	26	eexc	figs-explicit	ὁ Παράκλητος	1		See how you translated
 JHN	15	26	tpw6	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατρός…Πατρὸς	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	15	26	tzi9	figs-explicit	τὸ Πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας	1	the Spirit of truth	See how you translated **the Spirit of Truth** in [14:17](../14/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	15	27	ew2v	figs-metonymy	ἀρχῆς	1	the beginning	Here Jesus uses **beginning** figuratively to refer to the first days of his ministry. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the very first days when I began teaching the people and doing miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-JHN	16	intro	wb8v			0		# John 16 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>1. Jesus promises that his disciples will be persecuted (15:18–16:4)<br>2. Jesus describes the work of the Holy Spirit (16:5–15)<br>3. Jesus says that he will return to his Father (16:16–28)<br>4. Jesus says that his disciples will soon abandon him (16:29–33)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### The Holy Spirit<br><br>Jesus told his disciples that he would send the Holy Spirit to them. The Holy Spirit is the Helper ([14:16](../14/16.md)) who is always with God’s people to help them and to speak to God for them. He is also the Spirit of Truth ([14:17](../14/17.md)) who tells God’s people what is true about God so they know him better and serve him well. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])<br><br>### “The hour is coming”<br><br>Jesus used these words to begin prophecies about events that could be shorter or longer than sixty minutes. “The hour” in which people would persecute his followers ([16:2](../16/02.md)) lasted for many years. However, “the hour” in which his disciples would scatter and leave him alone ([16:32](../16/32.md)) was less than sixty minutes long. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Simile<br><br>Jesus said that just as a woman is in pain when she gives birth to a baby, so also his followers would be sad when he died. But just as the woman is happy after the baby is born, so also his followers would be happy when Jesus became alive again. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+JHN	16	intro	wb8v			0		# John 16 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>1. Jesus promises that his disciples will be persecuted (15:18–16:4)<br>2. Jesus describes the work of the Holy Spirit (16:5–15)<br>3. Jesus says that he will return to his Father (16:16–28)<br>4. Jesus says that his disciples will soon abandon him (16:29–33)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### The Holy Spirit<br><br>Jesus told his disciples that he would send the Holy Spirit to them. The Holy Spirit is the Helper ([14:16](../14/16.md)) who is always with God’s people to help them and to speak to God for them. He is also the Spirit of Truth ([14:17](../14/17.md)) who tells God’s people what is true about God so they know him better and serve him well. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])<br><br>### “The hour is coming”<br><br>Jesus used the words, “the hour is coming,” to begin prophecies about events that were about to occur. He is not referring to the 60 minute hour, but to a point in time when these prophecies will be fulfilled. “The hour” in which people would persecute his followers ([16:2](../16/02.md)) lasted for many years. However, “the hour” in which his disciples would scatter and leave him alone ([16:32](../16/32.md)) was less than sixty minutes long. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Simile<br><br>Jesus said that just as a woman is in pain when she gives birth to a baby, so also his followers would be sad when he died. But just as the woman is happy after the baby is born, so also his followers would be happy when Jesus became alive again. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 JHN	16	1	pbc8			0	Connecting Statement:	The part of the story from the previous chapter continues. Jesus continues to speak to his disciples either at the end of their evening meal or after they have finished that meal and are walking to Gethsemane. It is unclear whether or not they left immediately after Jesus said “Let us go from here” at the end of the Chapter 14 ([John 14:31](../14/31.md)).
 JHN	16	1	hn4j			0	Connecting Statement:	Verses 1–4 are part of the same topic Jesus began in [15:18](../15/18.md). He is speaking about the persecution that his disciples will experience.
 JHN	16	1	kz43	figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1		Here, **these things** refers to what Jesus has just said in [15:18–25](../15/18.md) about the coming persecution of his disciples. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the warnings that you will be hated by everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	16	1	vui6	figs-explicit	μὴ σκανδαλισθῆτε	1	you will not fall away	Here, Jesus uses **fall away** figuratively to refer to no longer trusting in him or no longer being his disciple. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “you might not stop trusting me” or “you might not stop being my disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	16	2	hhgj	figs-metaphor	ἀποσυναγώγους	1	the hour is coming when everyone who kills you will think that he is offering a service to God	See how you translated a similar phrase in [9:22](../09/22.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	16	2	i79b	figs-metonymy	ἔρχεται ὥρα	1	the hour is coming when everyone who kills you will think that he is offering a service to God	See how you translated this in [4:21](../04/21.md) and see the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to Chapter 4. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-JHN	16	2	xueq	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἵνα πᾶς ὁ ἀποκτείνας ὑμᾶς	1		Here, **for** could indicate: (1) time, as in the UST. (2) an explanation of to what **an hour** refers. Alternate translation: “that everyone who kills you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+JHN	16	2	xueq	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἵνα πᾶς ὁ ἀποκτείνας ὑμᾶς	1		Here, **for** could indicate: (1) time, as in the UST. (2) an explanation of to what **an hour** refers. Alternate translation: “that everyone who kills you wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 JHN	16	3	k4r6	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατέρα	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-JHN	16	4	b8z1	figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1		Here, **these things** refers to what Jesus has just said in [16:2–3](../16/02.md) regarding what the Jews will do to his disciples. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “that you the Jews will persecute you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	16	4	b8z1	figs-explicit	ταῦτα λελάληκα ὑμῖν	1		Here, **these things** refers to what Jesus has just said in [16:2–3](../16/02.md) regarding what the Jews will do to his disciples. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “I have told you that the Jews will persecute you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	16	4	blb2	figs-metonymy	ὅταν ἔλθῃ ἡ ὥρα αὐτῶν	1	when their hour comes	See how you translated **hour** in [verse 2](../16/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	16	4	dh5i	figs-metonymy	ἐξ ἀρχῆς	1	in the beginning	See how you translated **beginning** in [15:27](../15/27.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	16	5	gbpt	figs-explicit	τὸν πέμψαντά με	1		Here, **the one who sent me** refers to God. See how you translated this phrase in [4:34](../04/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2113,9 +2113,9 @@ JHN	16	8	gihm	figs-explicit	περὶ δικαιοσύνης	1	world	Here, **rig
 JHN	16	9	v4hk		περὶ ἁμαρτίας μέν, ὅτι οὐ πιστεύουσιν εἰς ἐμὲ	1	about sin, because they do not believe in me	Alternate translation: “about their sinfulness, because they are guilty of sin by not believing in me”
 JHN	16	10	t4qe	figs-explicit	περὶ δικαιοσύνης	1	about righteousness, because I am going to the Father, and you will no longer see me	See how you translated the phrase **about righteousness** in [verse 8](../16/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	16	10	r121	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατέρα	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-JHN	16	10	fmk5	figs-explicit	οὐκέτι θεωρεῖτέ με	1	Father	Jesus uses this phrase to imply that anyone who could **see** him saw true righteousness. If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you will no longer see my righteous example” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	16	10	fmk5	figs-explicit	οὐκέτι θεωρεῖτέ με	1	Father	Jesus uses this phrase to imply that anyone who could **see** him saw true righteousness. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you will no longer see my righteous example” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	16	11	l71y	figs-explicit	περὶ…κρίσεως	1		See how you translated the phrase **about judgment** in [verse 8](../16/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	16	11	x2z1	figs-explicit	ὁ ἄρχων τοῦ κόσμου τούτου	1	the ruler of this world	Here, **the ruler of this world** refers to Satan. See how you translated this in [12:31](../12/31.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	16	11	x2z1	figs-explicit	ὁ ἄρχων τοῦ κόσμου τούτου	1	the ruler of this world	Here, **the ruler of this world** refers to Satan. See how you translated this in [12:31](../12/31.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	16	11	dp4r	figs-activepassive	ὁ ἄρχων τοῦ κόσμου τούτου κέκριται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “God has judged the ruler of this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	16	11	llxw	figs-pastforfuture	κέκριται	1		This could mean: (1) Satan has already been condemned to future judgment. Alternate translation: “has already been condemned” (2) Satan’s future judgment is so certain that Jesus uses the past tense. Alternate translation: “will be judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	16	13	j7gr	figs-explicit	τὸ Πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας	1	the Spirit of Truth	See how you translated the phrase **the Spirit of Truth** in [14:17](../14/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2134,8 +2134,8 @@ JHN	16	17	zd1n		μικρὸν καὶ οὐ θεωρεῖτέ με; καὶ πά
 JHN	16	17	w3kp		ὅτι ὑπάγω πρὸς τὸν Πατέρα	1		See how you translated this statement in [verse 10](../16/10.md).
 JHN	16	17	sz1v	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Πατέρα	1	the Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	16	18	mmdm		τὸ μικρόν	1		See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse.
-JHN	16	19	j7wv	figs-rquestion	περὶ τούτου ζητεῖτε μετ’ ἀλλήλων, ὅτι εἶπον, μικρὸν καὶ οὐ θεωρεῖτέ με; καὶ πάλιν μικρὸν καὶ ὄψεσθέ με?	1	Are you seeking among yourselves concerning this because I said, ‘A little while and you do not see me, and again a little while and you will see me’?	**Jesus** is using this question to get his disciples to focus on what he has just told them so that he can give an explanation. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are seeking among yourselves concerning this, that I said, ‘A little while and you do not see me, and again a little while and you will see me.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-JHN	16	19	rwoq	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὅτι εἶπον	1		The word **that** introduces a clause that explains to what the preceding **this** refers. Use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation or elaboration in your language. Alternate translation: “name, that I said,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+JHN	16	19	j7wv	figs-rquestion	περὶ τούτου ζητεῖτε μετ’ ἀλλήλων, ὅτι εἶπον, μικρὸν καὶ οὐ θεωρεῖτέ με; καὶ πάλιν μικρὸν καὶ ὄψεσθέ με?	1	Are you seeking among yourselves concerning this because I said, ‘A little while and you do not see me, and again a little while and you will see me’?	Jesus is using this question to get his disciples to focus on what he has just told them so that he can give an explanation. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are seeking among yourselves concerning this, that I said, ‘A little while and you do not see me, and again a little while and you will see me.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+JHN	16	19	rwoq	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὅτι εἶπον	1		The word **that** introduces a clause that explains to what the preceding **this** refers. Use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation or elaboration in your language. Alternate translation: “namely, that I said,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 JHN	16	19	ya90		μικρὸν καὶ οὐ θεωρεῖτέ με; καὶ πάλιν μικρὸν καὶ ὄψεσθέ με	1		See how you translated this statement in [verses 16](../16/16.md).
 JHN	16	20	jx6s	figs-doublet	ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly, truly, I say to you	Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this is in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	16	20	p9x1	figs-metonymy	ὁ δὲ κόσμος χαρήσεται	1	but the world will be glad	Here Jesus uses **world** figuratively to refer to the people in the **world** who oppose God. See how you translated this is [14:17](../14/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -2175,9 +2175,9 @@ JHN	16	33	k6d6	figs-explicit	ἵνα ἐν ἐμοὶ εἰρήνην ἔχητ
 JHN	16	33	wraa	figs-metaphor	εἰρήνην ἔχητε…θλῖψιν ἔχετε	1	so that you will have peace in me	Here, Jesus speaks figuratively of **peace** and **troubles** as if they were objects that someone can possess. If these uses of **peace** and **troubles** might confuse your readers, you could use different expressions. Alternate translation: “you might be peaceful … you experience troubles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	16	33	ysh6	figs-idiom	ἐν ἐμοὶ	1	so that you will have peace in me	Here, **in me** refers to being united with Jesus or having a close relationship with him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “because of your relationship with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	16	33	z7wj	figs-metonymy	ἐγὼ νενίκηκα τὸν κόσμον	1	I have conquered the world	Here Jesus uses **world** figuratively to refer to the people in the **world** who oppose God. See how you translated this is [14:17](../14/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-JHN	17	intro	nb2a			0		# John 17 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>This chapter is one long prayer that can be divided into three parts according to the topics of Jesus’ prayer requests:<br><br>1. Jesus prays for himself (17:1–5)<br>2. Jesus prays for his disciples (17:6–19)<br>3. Jesus prays for all Christians (17:20–26)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Glory<br><br>Scripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, bright light that visually represents how great God is. When people see this light, they are afraid. In this chapter Jesus asks God to show his followers his true glory ([17:1](../17/01.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]])<br><br>### Jesus is eternal<br><br>Jesus existed before God created the world ([17:5](../17/05.md)). John wrote about this in [1:1](../01/01.md).<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Prayer<br><br>Jesus is God’s one and only Son ([3:16](../03/16.md)), so he could pray differently from the way other people pray. He used many words that might seem to be commands. Your translation should make Jesus sound like a son speaking with love and respect to his father and telling him what the father needs to do so that the father will be happy.
+JHN	17	intro	nb2a			0		# John 17 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>This chapter is one long prayer that can be divided into three parts according to the topics of Jesus’ prayer requests:<br><br>1. Jesus prays for himself (17:1–5)<br>2. Jesus prays for his disciples (17:6–19)<br>3. Jesus prays for all Christians (17:20–26)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Glory<br><br>Scripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, bright light that visually represents how great God is. When people see this light, they are afraid. In this chapter Jesus asks God to show his followers his true glory ([17:1](../17/01.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]])<br><br>### Jesus is eternal<br><br>Jesus existed before God created the world ([17:5](../17/05.md)). John wrote about this in [1:1](../01/01.md).<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Prayer<br><br>Jesus is God’s one and only Son ([3:16](../03/16.md)), so he could pray differently from the way other people pray. He used many words that might seem to be commands. Your translation should make Jesus sound like a son speaking with love and respect to his father and telling him what the father needs to do so that the father will be honored.
 JHN	17	1	uf8z			0	Connecting Statement:	The part of the story from the previous chapter continues. Jesus had been speaking to his disciples, but now he begins to pray to God.
-JHN	17	1	an1o	figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1		Here, **these things** refers to everything that Jesus told his disciples in [chapters 13–16](../13/01.md). If this use of **these things** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “that things about what would happen to him and his disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	17	1	an1o	figs-explicit	ταῦτα ἐλάλησεν	1		Here, **these things** refers to everything that Jesus told his disciples in [chapters 13–16](../13/01.md). If this use of **these things** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “described what would happen to him and his disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	17	1	b4pj	figs-idiom	ἐπάρας τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτοῦ	1	he lifted up his eyes to the heavens	See how you translated this idiom in [6:5](../06/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	17	1	k7tb	figs-explicit	εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν	1	heavens	Here, **heaven** refers to the sky. The Jews believed that **heaven**, the place where God dwells, was located above the sky. If this use of **heaven** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “beyond the sky toward God in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	17	1	l8sa	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πάτερ…Υἱὸς	1	Father … Son	**Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
@@ -2225,7 +2225,7 @@ JHN	17	16	pw1m	figs-explicit	ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου οὐκ εἰσὶν, κ
 JHN	17	17	qtld	figs-imperative	ἁγίασον	1	Set them apart by the truth	**Sanctify** is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please sanctify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 JHN	17	17	y53e	figs-explicit	ἁγίασον αὐτοὺς ἐν τῇ ἀληθείᾳ	1	Set them apart by the truth	The phrase **by the truth** could refer to: (1) the means by which Jesus’ disciples would be sanctified. Alternate translation: “Sanctify them by means of the truth” (2) the realm in which Jesus’ disciples would be sanctified. Alternate translation: “Sanctify them in the truth” (3) both the means and realm of the disciples’ sanctification. Alternate translation: “Sanctify them by means of and in the truth” See the discussion of John’s use of double meaning in Part 3 of the Introduction to this book. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	17	17	y5qx	figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος ὁ σὸς	1	Your word is truth	See how you translated **your word** in [verse 6](../17/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-JHN	17	18	bh1a	figs-metonymy	εἰς τὸν κόσμον…εἰς τὸν κόσμον	2	into the world	Here, **the world** refers to the people who live in the world. See how you translated **the world** in [1:29](../01/29.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+JHN	17	18	bh1a	figs-metonymy	εἰς τὸν κόσμον	-1	into the world	Here, **the world** refers to the people who live in the world. See how you translated **the world** in [1:29](../01/29.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	17	19	zam3	figs-explicit	ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν ἐγὼ ἁγιάζω ἐμαυτόν	1		Jesus uses the phrases **for their sakes** and **sanctified** together to refer to his sacrificial death on the cross. If this clause might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “for their sakes I have sanctified myself to die as a sacrifice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	17	19	z4z8	figs-activepassive	ἵνα ὦσιν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἡγιασμένοι ἐν ἀληθείᾳ	1	so that they themselves may also be set apart in truth	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that they may also sanctify themselves in truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	17	19	x08k	figs-explicit	ἡγιασμένοι ἐν ἀληθείᾳ	1	so that they themselves may also be set apart in truth	The phrase **in truth** could refer to: (1) the means by which Jesus’ disciples would be sanctified. Alternate translation: “sanctified by means of truth” (2) the nature or degree of their sanctification. Alternate translation: “truly sanctified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2236,8 +2236,8 @@ JHN	17	21	yt2w	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πάτερ	1	Father	**Father** is a
 JHN	17	21	v6i7		ἵνα ὁ κόσμος πιστεύῃ ὅτι σύ με ἀπέστειλας	1		Here, **so that** could indicate: (1) that what follows is the purpose for believers to be united to Jesus and God the Father, as in the UST. (2) that what follows is the result of believers being united to Jesus and God the Father. Alternate translation (with a comma preceding): “with the result that the world would believe that you have sent me”
 JHN	17	21	nef9	figs-metonymy	ὁ κόσμος	1	the world	Here, **the world** is used figuratively to refer to all the people in **the world**. See how you translated **the world** in [1:29](../01/29.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	17	22	p4mj	figs-infostructure	κἀγὼ τὴν, δόξαν ἣν δέδωκάς μοι, δέδωκα αὐτοῖς	1	The glory that you gave me, I have given to them	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “I have also given to them the glory that you gave to me” or “I have honored them just as you have honored me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-JHN	17	23	yznz	figs-explicit	ἐγὼ ἐν αὐτοῖς	1	that they may be brought to complete unity	This verse explains the statement “they would be one, just as we are one,” which is in the previous verse. If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I mean that I am in them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	17	23	fld5	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα ὦσιν τετελειωμένοι εἰς ἕν	1	that they may be brought to complete unity	Here, **so that** indicates that this is the second purpose for Jesus giving the glory he received from God to those who believe in him, which he stated in the previous verse. If this use of **so that** might confuse your readers, you could say this explicitly by repeating the idea from the previous verse and starting a new sentence. Alternate translation: “I have given them your glory so that they may be completely united” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+JHN	17	23	yznz	figs-explicit	ἐγὼ ἐν αὐτοῖς	1	that they may be brought to complete unity	This verse explains the statement “they would be one, just as we are one,” which is in the previous verse. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I mean that I am in them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	17	23	fld5	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα ὦσιν τετελειωμένοι εἰς ἕν	1	that they may be brought to complete unity	Here, **so that** indicates that this is the second purpose for Jesus giving the glory he received from God to those who believe in him, which he stated in the previous verse. If this use of **so that** might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly by repeating the idea from the previous verse and starting a new sentence. Alternate translation: “I have given them your glory so that they may be completely united” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 JHN	17	23	spot	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα γινώσκῃ ὁ κόσμος ὅτι σύ με ἀπέστειλας	1	that they may be brought to complete unity	Here, **so that** could refer to: (1) the purpose for those who believe in Jesus being **complete as one**. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of the world knowing that you send me” (2) a third purpose for Jesus giving the glory he received from God to those who believe in him. This interpretation would require making a new sentence. Alternate translation: “I have also given them your glory so that the world may know that you sent me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 JHN	17	23	s7ph	figs-metonymy	ὁ κόσμος	1	that the world will know	See how you translated **the world** in [verse 21](../17/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	17	23	mm2f	figs-explicit	ἠγάπησας αὐτοὺς	1		Here, **them** refers to those who believe in Jesus, just like **them** does at the beginning of the verse. These believers are also the main subject of Jesus’ prayer in [verses 20–26](../17/20.md). If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “you loved those who believe in me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2253,10 +2253,10 @@ JHN	17	26	gk2j	figs-metaphor	ἡ ἀγάπη ἣν ἠγάπησάς με, ἐν
 JHN	17	26	ilzj	figs-idiom	κἀγὼ ἐν αὐτοῖς	1	love … loved	Here, Jesus uses the word **in** to express the close personal relationship between himself and those who believe in him. See how you translated a similar phrase in [10:38](../10/38.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	18	intro	ltl2			0		# John 18 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>1. Soldiers and guards arrest Jesus (18:1–11)<br>2. The priests question Jesus, and Peter denies Jesus (18:12–27)<br>3. Pilate questions Jesus (18:28–40)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### “It is not lawful for us to put any man to death”<br><br>The Roman government did not allow the Jews to kill criminals, so the Jews needed to ask Pilate, the governor, to kill him ([18:31](../18/31.md)).<br><br>### King of the Jews<br><br>When Pilate asked if Jesus were the King of the Jews ([18:33](../18/33.md)), he was asking if Jesus were claiming to be a political leader like King Herod, whom the Romans allowed to rule Judea. When he asked the crowd if he should release the King of the Jews ([18:39](../18/39.md)), he is mocking the Jews, because the Romans and Jews hated each other. He was also mocking Jesus, because he did not think that Jesus was a king at all. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
 JHN	18	1	sq3t	writing-background		0	General Information:	[Verses 1–2](../18/01.md) give background information for the events that follow. Verse 1 says where the events took place. Verse 2 gives background information about Judas. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-JHN	18	1	cxz8	writing-newevent	ταῦτα εἰπὼν, Ἰησοῦς	1	After Jesus spoke these words	John uses this phrase to mark the beginning of a new event that happened soon after the events that the story has just told. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Soon after Jesus spoke these words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
+JHN	18	1	cxz8	writing-newevent	ταῦτα εἰπὼν, Ἰησοῦς	1	After Jesus spoke these words	John uses this phrase to mark the beginning of a new event that happened soon after the events that the story has just told. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Soon after Jesus spoke these words, he” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 JHN	18	1	pxtm	figs-possession	τοῦ χειμάρρου τοῦ Κεδρὼν	1	Kidron Valley	John is using **of** to describe a **brook** that is called **Kidron**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the Kidron Brook” or “the brook that people called ‘Kidron’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JHN	18	1	z9bw	translate-names	τοῦ χειμάρρου τοῦ Κεδρὼν	1	Kidron Valley	**Kidron** is a valley in Jerusalem that is between the Temple Mount and the Mount of Olives. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-JHN	18	1	w3zx	figs-explicit	ὅπου ἦν κῆπος	1	where there was a garden	The word translated **garden** can refer to a place with flowers, vegetables, or trees. [Matthew 26:36](../../mat/26/36.md) and [Mark 14:32](../../mrk/14/32.md) indicate that the **garden** that Jesus and his disciples went to was a grove of olive trees. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “where there was a grove of olive trees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	18	1	w3zx	figs-explicit	ὅπου ἦν κῆπος	1	where there was a garden	The word translated **garden** can refer to a place with flowers, vegetables, or trees. [Matthew 26:36](../../mat/26/36.md) and [Mark 14:32](../../mrk/14/32.md) indicate that the **garden** that Jesus and his disciples went to was a grove of olive trees. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “where there was a grove of olive trees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	18	3	j08o		ὑπηρέτας	1		See how you translated this word in [7:32](../07/32.md).
 JHN	18	3	h1u5	figs-pastforfuture	ἔρχεται	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	18	4	sh2u	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰδὼς πάντα τὰ ἐρχόμενα ἐπ’ αὐτὸν	1	Then Jesus, who knew all the things that were happening to him	Here, **knowing** introduces a clause that indicates the reason why Jesus went out to meet the soldiers and guards. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “since he knew all things happening to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -2265,7 +2265,7 @@ JHN	18	5	qxyj	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense
 JHN	18	5	fd9y	figs-ellipsis	ἐγώ εἰμι	1	I am	This could mean: (1) Jesus is just answering their question. In this case he is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Alternate translation: “I am he” or “I am whom you are looking for” (2) Jesus is not only answering their question but also identifying himself as Yahweh, who identified himself to Moses as “I AM” in [Exodus 3:14](../../exo/03/14.md). Alternate translation: “I am God” or “I am the I AM” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	18	5	g4hx	writing-background	ἵστήκει δὲ καὶ Ἰούδας, ὁ παραδιδοὺς αὐτὸν, μετ’ αὐτῶν	1	who betrayed him	In this sentence John provides background information about Judas’ location when he was **betraying** Jesus. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Now Judas was also there with them to betray Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	18	6	b8tl	figs-ellipsis	ἐγώ εἰμι	1	I am	See how you translated **I am** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-JHN	18	6	w38n	figs-explicit	ἔπεσαν χαμαί	1	fell to the ground	Here John implies that the men fell to the ground involuntarily because of Jesus’ power. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “fell to the ground because of Jesus’ power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	18	6	w38n	figs-explicit	ἔπεσαν χαμαί	1	fell to the ground	Here John implies that the men fell to the ground involuntarily because of Jesus’ power. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “fell to the ground because of Jesus’ power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	18	7	uf85	translate-names	Ἰησοῦν τὸν Ναζωραῖον	1	Jesus of Nazareth	See how you translated **Jesus the Nazarene** in [verse 5](../18/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	18	8	xdp8	figs-ellipsis	ἐγώ εἰμι	1		See how you translated **I am** in [verse 5](../18/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	18	9	l8as	writing-background		0		In this verse John provides some background information about Jesus fulfilling Scripture. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
@@ -2278,7 +2278,7 @@ JHN	18	11	ghz6	figs-rquestion	τὸ ποτήριον ὃ δέδωκέν μοι 
 JHN	18	11	m4f3	figs-metaphor	τὸ ποτήριον ὃ δέδωκέν μοι ὁ Πατὴρ, οὐ μὴ πίω αὐτό	1	the cup	Here Jesus uses **cup** figuratively to refer to the sufferings he will soon experience as if they were a **cup** of bitter-tasting liquid that God would give him to **drink**. If this use of **cup** and **drink** would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “My suffering which the Father wants me to endure, should I certainly not endure it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	18	11	cjx7	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατὴρ	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	18	12	cl3f	figs-synecdoche	τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	the Jews	Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-JHN	18	12	i6bz	figs-explicit	ἔδησαν αὐτὸν	1	seized Jesus and tied him up	The soldiers **tied** Jesus’ hands together in order to prevent him from escaping. If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “tied his hands to prevent him from escaping” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	18	12	i6bz	figs-explicit	ἔδησαν αὐτὸν	1	seized Jesus and tied him up	The soldiers **tied** Jesus’ hands together in order to prevent him from escaping. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “tied his hands to prevent him from escaping” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	18	13	tiki	translate-names	Ἅνναν…τοῦ Καϊάφα	1		**Annas** and **Caiaphas** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	18	13	je4z	figs-explicit	πρὸς Ἅνναν πρῶτον, ἦν γὰρ πενθερὸς τοῦ Καϊάφα, ὃς ἦν ἀρχιερεὺς τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ ἐκείνου	1		Usually there would only have been one high priest, but at this time the Romans were appointing the high priests for Judea, and it caused a controversy. One Roman official had appointed **Annas**, but ten years later another official deposed him and caused **Caiaphas** to be **high priest** instead. However, the Jews still considered Annas to be **high priest**. It would probably be best to state the matter as simply as possible for your readers. Alternate translation: “first to the high priest Annas, for he was the father-in-law of Caiaphas, who was the other high priest that year” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	18	14	kzvh	writing-background		0		In this verse John interrupts the main storyline in order to provide some background information about Caiaphas. This information helps the reader understand why they took Jesus to Caiaphas. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
@@ -2295,8 +2295,8 @@ JHN	18	17	xw8d	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει…λέγει	1		Here John uses the
 JHN	18	17	r82l	figs-rquestion	μὴ καὶ σὺ ἐκ τῶν μαθητῶν εἶ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τούτου?	1	Are you not also one of the disciples of this man?	The **female servant** is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that she believes **Peter** is one of Jesus’ **disciples**. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are certainly also from the disciples of this man!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	18	18	hbw6	writing-background		0		In this verse John interrupts the main storyline in order to provide some background information about the people who were warming themselves around the fire. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	18	18	g8xj	figs-infostructure	ἵστήκεισαν δὲ οἱ δοῦλοι καὶ οἱ ὑπηρέται, ἀνθρακιὰν πεποιηκότες, ὅτι ψῦχος ἦν, καὶ ἐθερμαίνοντο	1	Now	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “Now because it was cold, the servants and the officers had made a charcoal fire and were standing there, warming themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-JHN	18	18	bbe9	figs-explicit	οἱ δοῦλοι	1	Now the servants and the officers were standing there, and they had made a charcoal fire, for it was cold, and they were warming themselves	Here, **the servants** refers to the personal **servants** of the high priest. If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the servants of the high priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	18	19	e8h3	figs-explicit	ὁ…ἀρχιερεὺς	1	The high priest	According to [18:13](../18/13.md) the **high priest** here is Annas. He would later send Jesus to Caiaphas in [verse 24](../18/24.md). If this use of **high priest** might confuse your readers, you could say who the person is explicitly. Alternate translation: “Annas, the high priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	18	18	bbe9	figs-explicit	οἱ δοῦλοι	1	Now the servants and the officers were standing there, and they had made a charcoal fire, for it was cold, and they were warming themselves	Here, **the servants** refers to the personal **servants** of the high priest. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the servants of the high priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	18	19	e8h3	figs-explicit	ὁ…ἀρχιερεὺς	1	The high priest	According to [18:13](../18/13.md) the **high priest** here is Annas. He would later send Jesus to Caiaphas in [verse 24](../18/24.md). If this use of **high priest** might confuse your readers, you could state who the person is explicitly. Alternate translation: “Annas, the high priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	18	20	h2kj	figs-metonymy	τῷ κόσμῳ	1	I have spoken openly to the world	Here Jesus uses **the world** figuratively to refer to all of the people in the world. If this use of **world** would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	18	20	ltlp	figs-hyperbole	ἐγὼ παρρησίᾳ λελάληκα τῷ κόσμῳ	1		Here, **to the world** is an exaggeration that Jesus uses to emphasize that he spoke publicly. If this would confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows emphasis. Alternate translation: “I have spoken openly to the people” or “I have spoken openly for everyone to hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 JHN	18	20	s4k6	figs-genericnoun	ἐν συναγωγῇ	1		Jesus is speaking of synagogues in general, not of one particular **synagogue**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “in synagogues” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
@@ -2309,7 +2309,7 @@ JHN	18	22	szv3	figs-rquestion	οὕτως ἀποκρίνῃ τῷ ἀρχιερ
 JHN	18	23	d76y		μαρτύρησον περὶ τοῦ κακοῦ	1	testify about the wrong	Alternate translation: “tell me what I said that was wrong”
 JHN	18	23	r8dy	figs-rquestion	εἰ δὲ καλῶς, τί με δέρεις?	1	if rightly, why do you hit me?	**Jesus** is using the form of a question to add emphasis to what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “but if rightly, you should not strike me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	18	24	mojw	figs-explicit	ὁ Ἅννας…πρὸς Καϊάφαν τὸν ἀρχιερέα	1	if rightly, why do you hit me?	For political reasons both **Annas** and **Caiaphas** were high priests at this time. See how you translated these names in [verse 13](../18/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	18	25	ki76	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	ἦν δὲ Σίμων Πέτρος ἑστὼς καὶ θερμαινόμενος	1	Now	**Now** here indicates that John is changing topics to return to the story about Peter in the high priest’s courtyard. [Verses 25–27](../18/25.md) describe what Peter was doing in the courtyard while the high priest was questioning Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “In the meantime” or “While Jesus was being questioned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
+JHN	18	25	ki76	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	δὲ	1	Now	**Now** here indicates that John is changing topics to return to the story about Peter in the high priest’s courtyard. [Verses 25–27](../18/25.md) describe what Peter was doing in the courtyard while the high priest was questioning Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “In the meantime,” or “While Jesus was being questioned,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
 JHN	18	25	l2bj	figs-rquestion	μὴ καὶ σὺ ἐκ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ εἶ?	1	Are you not also one of his disciples?	Someone in the high priest’s courtyard is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that he believes **Peter** is one of Jesus’ **disciples**. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are certainly also from the disciples of this man!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	18	26	oka8	figs-rquestion	οὐκ ἐγώ σε εἶδον ἐν τῷ κήπῳ μετ’ αὐτοῦ?	1		One of the high priest’s **servants** is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that he believes **Peter** is one of Jesus’ disciples. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I surely saw you in the garden with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	18	26	jfba	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
@@ -2317,36 +2317,35 @@ JHN	18	26	pj7v	figs-explicit	τῷ κήπῳ	1		See how you translated **garden*
 JHN	18	27	msy6	figs-explicit	πάλιν οὖν ἠρνήσατο Πέτρος	1	Peter then denied again	Here **it** refers to **Peter** knowing and being with Jesus. If this use of **it** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Peter then denied again that he knew Jesus or had been with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	18	27	jww8	translate-unknown	ἀλέκτωρ	1	immediately the rooster crowed	See how you translated **rooster** in [13:38](../13/38.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 JHN	18	28	a6e7			0	General Information:	Here John changes topics from describing what Peter was doing to describing what was happening to Jesus. In the next section, Jesus’ accusers bring him to Caiaphas to be questioned by him.
-JHN	18	28	r4fk	writing-pronouns	ἄγουσιν	1		Here, **they** refers to the Jewish leaders and temple guards who were accusing Jesus. If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “They the Jewish authorities and their guards led” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-JHN	18	28	ija7	figs-explicit	ἄγουσιν οὖν τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἀπὸ τοῦ Καϊάφα	1	Then they led Jesus from Caiaphas	Here John implies that they are leading Jesus away from Caiaphas’ house. If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then they led Jesus from Caiaphas’ house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	18	28	fyx3	figs-explicit	εἰς τὸ πραιτώριον	1		The **governor’s palace** refers to the headquarters of the Roman governor. The next verse indicates that the Roman governor’s name was Pilate. If this would confuse your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the house of the Roman governor, Pilate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	18	28	r4fk	writing-pronouns	ἄγουσιν	1		Here, **they** refers to the Jewish leaders and temple guards who were accusing Jesus. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish authorities and their guards led” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	18	28	ija7	figs-explicit	ἄγουσιν οὖν τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἀπὸ τοῦ Καϊάφα	1	Then they led Jesus from Caiaphas	Here John implies that they are leading Jesus away from Caiaphas’ house. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then they led Jesus from Caiaphas’ house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	18	28	fyx3	figs-explicit	εἰς τὸ πραιτώριον	1		The **governor’s palace** refers to the headquarters of the Roman governor. The next verse indicates that the Roman governor’s name was Pilate. If this would confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the house of the Roman governor, Pilate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	18	28	v6e4	writing-background	ἦν δὲ πρωΐ. καὶ αὐτοὶ οὐκ εἰσῆλθον εἰς τὸ πραιτώριον, ἵνα μὴ μιανθῶσιν, ἀλλὰ φάγωσιν τὸ Πάσχα	1		In this sentence John interrupts the main storyline in order to provide some background information about why the Jewish people with Jesus did not enter the **governor’s palace**. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	18	28	h3vx	figs-doublenegatives	αὐτοὶ οὐκ εἰσῆλθον εἰς τὸ πραιτώριον, ἵνα μὴ μιανθῶσιν, ἀλλὰ φάγωσιν τὸ Πάσχα	1	they did not enter the government headquarters so that they would not be defiled	If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “they remained outside the governor’s palace so that they would remain ceremonially clean, and might eat the Passover” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 JHN	18	28	f47s	figs-explicit	αὐτοὶ οὐκ εἰσῆλθον εἰς τὸ πραιτώριον, ἵνα μὴ μιανθῶσιν, ἀλλὰ φάγωσιν τὸ Πάσχα	1		Pilate, the Roman governor, was not a Jew. The Jewish leaders believed that they would become ceremonially unclean if they entered the house of someone who was not a Jew. If they became ceremonially unclean, then they would not be allowed to celebrate the Passover festival. Therefore, the Jewish leaders did not enter the governor’s palace. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain this in the simplest way possible. Alternate translation: “they themselves did not enter into the governor’s palace because the governor was a Gentile. They believed that entering a Gentile’s home would defile them, so that they would not be allowed to eat the Passover.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	18	28	bj1x	figs-metonymy	τὸ Πάσχα	1		John is using the name of this part of the festival, **Passover**, to refer figuratively to the meal that people shared on that occasion. If your readers might not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Passover meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	18	29	g7jo	translate-names	ὁ Πειλᾶτος	1		**Pilate** is the name of a man. He was the Roman governor. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-JHN	18	40	ovim	translate-names	τὸν Βαραββᾶν…ὁ Βαραββᾶς	1		**Barabbas** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-JHN	18	29	c9aj	figs-abstractnouns	τίνα κατηγορίαν φέρετε κατὰ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τούτου	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **accusation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “What crime do you accuse this man of doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+JHN	18	29	c9aj	figs-abstractnouns	τίνα κατηγορίαν φέρετε κατὰ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τούτου	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **accusation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “What crime do you accuse this man of committing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	18	30	j9w3	figs-explicit	οὗτος	1		Here the Jewish leaders say **this one** as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus without saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “this so-and-so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	18	30	pup9	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ μὴ ἦν οὗτος κακὸν ποιῶν, οὐκ ἄν σοι παρεδώκαμεν αὐτόν	1	If this man was not an evildoer, we would not have given him over to you	The Jewish leaders are making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but they are already convinced that the condition is not true. They have concluded that Jesus is an evildoer. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If this one were not an evildoer, but he is, we would not have handed him over to you, but we are (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
+JHN	18	30	pup9	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ μὴ ἦν οὗτος κακὸν ποιῶν, οὐκ ἄν σοι παρεδώκαμεν αὐτόν	1	If this man was not an evildoer, we would not have given him over to you	The Jewish leaders are making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but they are already convinced that the condition is not true. They have concluded that Jesus is an evildoer. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If this one were not an evildoer, but he is, we would not have handed him over to you, but we did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
 JHN	18	30	gj5s	figs-doublenegatives	εἰ μὴ ἦν οὗτος κακὸν ποιῶν, οὐκ ἄν σοι παρεδώκαμεν αὐτόν	1	If this man was not an evildoer, we would not have given him over to you	If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “This man is an evildoer, so we have brought him to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 JHN	18	31	ln9s	figs-synecdoche	εἶπον αὐτῷ οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	The Jews said to him	Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-JHN	18	31	ph54	figs-explicit	ἡμῖν οὐκ ἔξεστιν ἀποκτεῖναι οὐδένα	1	It is not lawful for us to put any man to death	According to Roman law, the Jews could not **put anyone to death**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “According to Roman law, it is not lawful for us to put anyone to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	18	31	ph54	figs-explicit	ἡμῖν οὐκ ἔξεστιν ἀποκτεῖναι οὐδένα	1	It is not lawful for us to put any man to death	According to Roman law, the Jews could not **put anyone to death**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “According to Roman law, it is not lawful for us to put anyone to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	18	32	s3l4	writing-background		0	General Information:	In this verse John interrupts the main storyline in order to provide some background information about Jesus predicting how he would die. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	18	32	ta7m	figs-activepassive	ἵνα ὁ λόγος τοῦ Ἰησοῦ πληρωθῇ	1	so that the word of Jesus would be fulfilled	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “This happened in order to fulfill the word of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	18	32	tu3c	figs-explicit	σημαίνων ποίῳ θανάτῳ ἤμελλεν ἀποθνῄσκειν	1	to indicate by what kind of death he would die	Here, **kind of death** refers to the manner in which Jesus would die. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “to indicate in what manner he was about to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	18	33	tr28	figs-explicit	ἐφώνησεν τὸν Ἰησοῦν	1		Here, **summoned** implies that **Pilate** ordered some of his soldiers to bring Jesus to him inside his headquarters. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “ordered his soldiers to bring Jesus inside to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	18	34	liov	figs-explicit	ἀπὸ σεαυτοῦ	1		Here, **from** indicates the origin of Pilate’s question. Jesus is asking Pilate if the question Pilate asked in the previous verse was his own idea. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “based on your own idea” or “on your own initiative” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	18	34	liov	figs-explicit	ἀπὸ σεαυτοῦ	1		Here, **from** indicates the origin of Pilate’s question. Jesus is asking Pilate if the question Pilate asked in the previous verse was his own idea. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “based on your own idea” or “on your own initiative” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	18	35	kfq5	figs-rquestion	μήτι ἐγὼ Ἰουδαῖός εἰμι?	1	I am not a Jew, am I?	**Pilate** is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that he was not interested in Jewish religious disagreements. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Well I am certainly not a Jew, and I have no interest in these matters!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	18	35	en38	figs-metonymy	τὸ ἔθνος τὸ σὸν	1	Your own people	Here, **nation** refers to the people who were part of the Jewish **nation**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Your fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-JHN	18	36	wsd9	figs-explicit	ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου τούτου…ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου τούτου	2	My kingdom is not of this world	See how you translated **from this world** in [8:23](../08/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	18	36	gq19	figs-metonymy	τοῦ κόσμου τούτου…τοῦ κόσμου τούτου…ἐντεῦθεν	2	My kingdom is not of this world	In this verse, Jesus uses **this world** and **here** figuratively to refer to everything in the universe that has been corrupted by sin and is hostile to God. See how you translated a similar use of **this world** in [8:23](../08/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+JHN	18	36	wsd9	figs-explicit	ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου τούτου	-1	My kingdom is not of this world	See how you translated **from this world** in [8:23](../08/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	18	36	gq19	figs-metonymy	τοῦ κόσμου τούτου…τοῦ κόσμου τούτου…ἐντεῦθεν	1	My kingdom is not of this world	In this verse, Jesus uses **this world** and **here** figuratively to refer to everything in the universe that has been corrupted by sin and is hostile to God. See how you translated a similar use of **this world** in [8:23](../08/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	18	36	bf3i	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου τούτου ἦν ἡ βασιλεία ἡ ἐμή, οἱ ὑπηρέται οἱ ἐμοὶ ἠγωνίζοντο ἄν, ἵνα μὴ παραδοθῶ τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις	1	My kingdom is not of this world	Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he already knows that the condition is not true. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If my kingdom were from this world, but it is not, my servants would fight so that I would not be handed over to the Jews, but they do not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
 JHN	18	36	s2lq	figs-activepassive	ἵνα μὴ παραδοθῶ τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις	1	so that I would not be given over to the Jews	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that someone would not have handed me over to the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	18	36	pu8j	figs-synecdoche	τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις	1	the Jews	Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	18	37	pfgj	figs-extrainfo	σὺ λέγεις ὅτι βασιλεύς εἰμι	1	I have come into the world	Here Jesus is probably answering Pilate’s question in the affirmative. However, since he doesn’t clearly say, ‘Yes, I am a king,’ you do not need to explain the meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
-JHN	18	37	wt50	figs-parallelism	ἐγὼ εἰς τοῦτο γεγέννημαι, καὶ εἰς τοῦτο ἐλήλυθα εἰς τὸν κόσμον	1	I have come into the world	These two phrases mean the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Jesus came to the earth to tell people the truth about God. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “For this reason I came here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-JHN	18	37	ug7i	figs-explicit	τὸν κόσμον	1	I have come into the world	Here, **world** refers to the universe that God created. It does not refer only to the people in the world or only to the earth. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the universe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	18	37	wt50	figs-parallelism	ἐγὼ εἰς τοῦτο γεγέννημαι, καὶ εἰς τοῦτο ἐλήλυθα εἰς τὸν κόσμον	1	I have come into the world	These two phrases mean the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Jesus came to the earth to tell people the truth about God. If stating the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “For this reason I came here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+JHN	18	37	ug7i	figs-explicit	τὸν κόσμον	1	I have come into the world	Here, **world** refers to the universe that God created. It does not refer only to the people in the world or only to the earth. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the universe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	18	37	gl3k	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἀληθείᾳ	1	bear witness to the truth	Here, **truth** refers to what Jesus reveals about God, which would include his plan for forgiving sinful people through Jesus’ death on the cross. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to the true things about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	18	37	ltn9	figs-idiom	ὁ ὢν ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας	1	who belongs to the truth	This phrase is an idiom that refers to someone who believes the **truth** about God. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “who believes the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	18	37	b8gv	figs-metaphor	ἀκούει	1	who belongs to the truth	Here, **hears** means to listen to something with the intent to heed it and respond appropriately. See how you translated this word in [8:43](../08/43.md). Alternate translation: “heeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -2356,15 +2355,17 @@ JHN	18	38	zbm5	figs-rquestion	τί ἐστιν ἀλήθεια?	1	What is truth?
 JHN	18	38	lcrg	figs-abstractnouns	ἀλήθεια	1	What is truth?	Here, **truth** refers to any true information. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “What is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	18	38	rma7	figs-synecdoche	τοὺς Ἰουδαίους	1	the Jews	Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	18	38	h1b8	figs-metaphor	ἐγὼ οὐδεμίαν αἰτίαν εὑρίσκω ἐν αὐτῷ	1		**Pilate** speaks figuratively of **guilt** as if it were an object that can be inside a person. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “I find no evidence that he is guilty of any crime” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	18	39	nhqn	figs-explicit	ἕνα ἀπολύσω ὑμῖν	1		Pilate implies that he would **release** a prisoner when the Jewish leaders asked him to do so. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would release one prisoner to you at your request” or “I would release one prisoner to you when you asked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	18	39	fm16	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ Πάσχα	1		Here, **the Passover** refers to the entire **Passover** festival. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the Passover festival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	18	39	nhqn	figs-explicit	ἕνα ἀπολύσω ὑμῖν	1		Pilate implies that he would **release** a prisoner when the Jewish leaders asked him to do so. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would release one prisoner to you at your request” or “I would release one prisoner to you when you asked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	18	39	fm16	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ Πάσχα	1		Here, **the Passover** refers to the entire **Passover** festival. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the Passover festival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	18	40	xdxz	writing-quotations	ἐκραύγασαν…πάλιν λέγοντες	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “they cried out again and said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	18	40	a7pl	figs-ellipsis	μὴ τοῦτον, ἀλλὰ τὸν Βαραββᾶν	1	Not this man, but Barabbas	The Jewish leaders are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Do not release this one, but release Barabbas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	18	40	qy3p	figs-explicit	τοῦτον	1	Not this man, but Barabbas	Here the Jewish leaders say **this one** as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus without saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “this so-and-so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	18	40	h11k	writing-background	ἦν δὲ ὁ Βαραββᾶς λῃστής	1	Now Barabbas was a robber	In this sentence John provides background information about **Barabbas**. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
+JHN	18	40	ovim	translate-names	τὸν Βαραββᾶν…ὁ Βαραββᾶς	1		**Barabbas** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	18	40	gq8w		λῃστής	1	Now Barabbas was a robber	The word usually translated **robber** can also refer to an insurrectionist, as is indicated by the description of **Barabbas** in [Mark 15:7](../../mrk/15/07). Alternate translation: “an insurrectionist”
-JHN	19	intro	u96u			0		# John 19 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>1. Soldiers beat and mock Jesus (19:1–3)<br>2. The Jewish leaders convince Pilate to crucify Jesus (19:4–16)<br>3. Soldiers crucify Jesus (19:17–27)<br>4. Jesus dies on the cross (19:28–37)<br>5. Jesus’ friends put his body in a tomb (19:38–42)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text in order to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [19:24](../19/24.md), which are words from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### “Purple garment”<br><br>Purple is a color like red or blue. The soldiers mocked Jesus by putting him in a purple garment. This was because kings wore purple garments. They spoke and acted like they were giving honor to a king, but everyone knew that they were doing it because they hated Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])<br><br>### “You are not Caesar’s friend”<br><br>Pilate knew that Jesus was not a criminal, so he did not want to have his soldiers kill him. But the Jews told him that Jesus was claiming to be a king, and anyone who did that was breaking Caesar’s laws ([19:12](../19/12.md)).<br><br>### Ancient Jewish burial customs<br><br>According to the burial customs of that time, a dead person’s family would wrap the dead body with many strips of linen cloth and place it on a table inside a tomb. The tomb was either a cave or a room cut out of the side a large rock. According to Jewish tradition, the body was left to decompose in the tomb for one year. Then the family would then place the bones in a stone box. If your readers would be unfamiliar with these burial customs, then you may need to provide explanations in your translation or in a note for [verses 39–42](../19/39.md).<br><br>### The tomb<br><br>The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([19:41](../19/41.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Sarcasm<br><br>The soldiers were insulting Jesus when they said, “Hail, King of the Jews.” Pilate was insulting the Jews when he asked, “Should I crucify your king?” He was probably also insulting both Jesus and the Jews when he wrote, “Jesus of Nazareth, King of the Jews.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Gabbatha, Golgotha<br><br>John explained the meanings of these two Aramaic words (“The Pavement” and “The Place of a Skull”). Then he used Greek letters to express the sound of these words. You should also use the letters of your language to express the sounds of these Aramaic words.
+JHN	19	intro	u96u			0		# John 19 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>1. Soldiers beat and mock Jesus (19:1–3)<br>2. The Jewish leaders convince Pilate to crucify Jesus (19:4–16)<br>3. Soldiers crucify Jesus (19:17–27)<br>4. Jesus dies on the cross (19:28–37)<br>5. Jesus’ friends put his body in a tomb (19:38–42)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text in order to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [19:24](../19/24.md), which are words from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### “Purple garment”<br><br>Purple is a color that is from a mixture of red and blue. The soldiers mocked Jesus by putting a purple garment on him. This was because kings wore purple garments. They spoke and acted like they were giving honor to a king, but everyone knew that they were doing it because they hated Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])<br><br>### “You are not Caesar’s friend”<br><br>Pilate knew that Jesus was not a criminal, so he did not want to have his soldiers kill him. But the Jews told him that Jesus was claiming to be a king, and anyone who did that was breaking Caesar’s laws ([19:12](../19/12.md)).<br><br>### Ancient Jewish burial customs<br><br>According to the burial customs of that time, a dead person’s family would wrap the dead body with many strips of linen cloth and place it on a table inside a tomb. The tomb was either a cave or a room cut out of the side a large rock. According to Jewish tradition, the body was left to decompose in the tomb for one year. Then the family would then place the bones in a stone box. If your readers would be unfamiliar with these burial customs, then you may need to provide explanations in your translation or in a note for [verses 39–42](../19/39.md).<br><br>### The tomb<br><br>The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([19:41](../19/41.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Sarcasm<br><br>The soldiers were insulting Jesus when they said, “Hail, King of the Jews.” Pilate was insulting the Jews when he asked, “Should I crucify your king?” He was probably also insulting both Jesus and the Jews when he wrote, “Jesus of Nazareth, King of the Jews.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Gabbatha, Golgotha<br><br>John explained the meanings of these two Aramaic words (“The Pavement” and “The Place of a Skull”). Then he used Greek letters to express the sound of these words. You should also use the letters of your language to express the sounds of these Aramaic words.
 JHN	19	1	u3gi			0	Connecting Statement:	The part of the story from the previous chapter continues. Pilate has been speaking outside his headquarters with the Jewish leaders who are accusing Jesus.
+JHN	19	1	v3ea	translate-names	ὁ Πειλᾶτος	1		See how you translated **Pilate** in [18:29](../18/29.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	19	1	yay2	figs-synecdoche	τότε οὖν ἔλαβεν ὁ Πειλᾶτος τὸν Ἰησοῦν καὶ ἐμαστίγωσεν	1	Then Pilate took Jesus and whipped him	**Pilate** himself did not whip Jesus. John uses **Pilate** to refer to the soldiers whom Pilate ordered to whip Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Pilate then ordered his soldiers to take Jesus and whip him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	19	2	mzrb	figs-synecdoche	πλέξαντες στέφανον ἐξ ἀκανθῶν	1		John uses **thorns** to refer to small branches with **thorns** on them. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “twisted together a crown from thorny branches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	19	2	f1rj	figs-explicit	ἐπέθηκαν αὐτοῦ τῇ κεφαλῇ, καὶ ἱμάτιον πορφυροῦν περιέβαλον αὐτόν	1		In Roman culture, a **crown** and **purple garment** were worn by kings. The soldiers put a **crown** made from thorns and a **purple garment** on Jesus in order to mock him. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. See the discussion of this idea in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “They put it on his head and put a purple garment on him in order to ridicule him by pretending that he was a king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2372,7 +2373,7 @@ JHN	19	3	u4vw	figs-irony	καὶ ἔλεγον, χαῖρε, ὁ Βασιλεὺ
 JHN	19	4	hn1f	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	19	4	zd8v	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1		The pronoun **them** refers to the Jewish leaders who had brought Jesus to Pilate. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the Jewish authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	19	4	c6v2	figs-metaphor	αἰτίαν ἐν αὐτῷ οὐχ εὑρίσκω	1	I find no guilt in him	See how you translated a similar clause in [18:38](../18/38.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	19	5	wyql	figs-go	ἐξῆλθεν	1		Your language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+JHN	19	5	wyql	figs-go	ἐξῆλθεν	1		Your language may state “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 JHN	19	5	t9wn	figs-explicit	τὸν ἀκάνθινον στέφανον καὶ τὸ πορφυροῦν ἱμάτιον	1	crown of thorns … purple garment	See how you translated **crown**, **thorns**, and **purple garment** in [verse 2](../19/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	5	i2ay	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	19	6	pgs5	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
@@ -2383,24 +2384,24 @@ JHN	19	7	vr7p	figs-idiom	Υἱὸν Θεοῦ ἑαυτὸν ἐποίησεν	1
 JHN	19	7	xt93	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὸν Θεοῦ	1	Son of God	**Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	19	8	lw3u	figs-metonymy	τοῦτον τὸν λόγον	1		Here, **word** refers to what the Jewish leaders said in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “what they said about Jesus claiming to be the Son of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	19	8	nx2u	figs-ellipsis	μᾶλλον ἐφοβήθη	1		John is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he grew even more afraid of condemning Jesus” or “he grew even more afraid than before of what might happen to him if he condemned Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-JHN	19	9	seyo	figs-explicit	εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ πραιτώριον πάλιν, καὶ λέγει τῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		John implies that the soldiers brought Jesus back into the governor’s palace so Pilate could speak with him. If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “he entered into the governor’s palace again and told the soldiers to bring Jesus back inside. Then he says to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	19	9	seyo	figs-explicit	εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ πραιτώριον πάλιν, καὶ λέγει τῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		John implies that the soldiers brought Jesus back into the governor’s palace so Pilate could speak with him. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “he entered into the governor’s palace again and told the soldiers to bring Jesus back inside. Then he says to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	9	lb11	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	19	10	wcm8	figs-rquestion	ἐμοὶ οὐ λαλεῖς?	1	Are you not speaking to me?	**Pilate** is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize his surprise that Jesus does not answer his question. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I cannot believe you are refusing to speak to me!” or “Answer me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	19	10	iap3	figs-rquestion	οὐκ οἶδας ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχω ἀπολῦσαί σε, καὶ ἐξουσίαν ἔχω σταυρῶσαί σε?	1	Do you not know that I have power to release you, and power to crucify you?	**Pilate** is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should know that I am able to release you or to order my soldiers to crucify you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	19	11	x2as	figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ εἶχες ἐξουσίαν κατ’ ἐμοῦ οὐδεμίαν, εἰ μὴ ἦν δεδομένον σοι ἄνωθεν	1	You do not have any power over me except for what has been given to you from above	If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “You only have authority over me because that authority has been given to you from above” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-JHN	19	11	fxu9	figs-metaphor	εἰ μὴ ἦν δεδομένον σοι ἄνωθεν	1		Here, **above** is used figuratively to refer to God who dwells in heaven **above**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this plainly. Alternate translation: “from heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	19	11	fxu9	figs-metaphor	εἰ μὴ ἦν δεδομένον σοι ἄνωθεν	1		Here, **above** is used figuratively to refer to God who dwells in heaven **above**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “from heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	19	11	i7nu	figs-activepassive	εἰ μὴ ἦν δεδομένον σοι ἄνωθεν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “except for what God has given to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	19	11	vc79	figs-ellipsis	μείζονα ἁμαρτίαν ἔχει	1	gave me over	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “has a greater sin than your sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	19	11	kbrx	figs-metaphor	μείζονα ἁμαρτίαν ἔχει	1	gave me over	Jesus speaks figuratively of **sin** as if it were an object that a person could possess in varying amounts. If this use of **sin** might be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “are more sinful” or “has committed worse sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	19	12	a39p	figs-explicit	ἐκ τούτου	1	At this answer	Here, **this** refers to Jesus’ answer. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “When Pilate heard Jesus’ answer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	19	12	a39p	figs-explicit	ἐκ τούτου	1	At this answer	Here, **this** refers to Jesus’ answer. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “When Pilate heard Jesus’ answer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	12	q1vq	figs-synecdoche	οἱ…Ἰουδαῖοι	1		Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	19	12	r8va	figs-explicit	τοῦτον	1		The Jewish leaders say **this one** as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus and to avoid saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “this so-and-so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	12	p6j4	writing-quotations	ἐκραύγασαν λέγοντες	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “cried out and said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	19	12	g9xj		οὐκ εἶ φίλος τοῦ Καίσαρος	1	you are not a friend of Caesar	Alternate translation: “you do not support Caesar” or “you are opposing the emperor”
 JHN	19	12	bhl3	figs-idiom	βασιλέα ἑαυτὸν ποιῶν	1	makes himself a king	See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 7](../19/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	19	13	o54h	figs-metonymy	τῶν λόγων τούτων	1	he brought Jesus out	Here, **these words** refers to what the Jewish leaders had said in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “what the Jewish leaders said to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-JHN	19	13	xr6b	figs-explicit	ὁ…Πειλᾶτος…ἤγαγεν ἔξω τὸν Ἰησοῦν	1	he brought Jesus out	John implies that **Pilate**ordered his soldiers to bring Jesus out. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “commanded the soldiers to bring Jesus out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	19	13	il9r	figs-explicit	ἐκάθισεν	1	he brought Jesus out	Since a person would sit down to teach or make official statements, the phrase **sat down** here implies that Pilate was going to speak to the people about what he had decided to do with Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he sat down to judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	19	13	xr6b	figs-explicit	ὁ…Πειλᾶτος…ἤγαγεν ἔξω τὸν Ἰησοῦν	1	he brought Jesus out	John implies that **Pilate**ordered his soldiers to bring Jesus out. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “commanded the soldiers to bring Jesus out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	19	13	il9r	figs-explicit	ἐκάθισεν	1	he brought Jesus out	Since a person would sit down to teach or make official statements, the phrase **sat down** here implies that Pilate was going to speak to the people about what he had decided to do with Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he sat down to judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	13	qhu4	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπὶ βήματος	1	in the judgment seat	The **judgment seat** was a special chair in which a leader sat when he was making an official judgment. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgment**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in the seat used for judging people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	19	13	g8h4	figs-activepassive	εἰς τόπον λεγόμενον Λιθόστρωτον	1	in a place called “The Pavement,” but	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in a place the people called ‘The Pavement’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	19	13	v2ss	figs-explicit	Ἑβραϊστὶ	1	in a place called “The Pavement,” but	See how you translated this phrase in [5:2](../05/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2411,8 +2412,8 @@ JHN	19	14	qi7t	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	the sixth hour	Here John uses the
 JHN	19	14	lc5y	figs-synecdoche	λέγει τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις	1	Pilate said to the Jews	Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	19	15	vi6h	figs-explicit	ἆρον! ἆρον!	1	Should I crucify your King?	**Take him away** here implies taking a person away to be executed. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Take him away to be killed! Take him away to be killed!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	15	krld	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-JHN	19	15	tlj2	figs-explicit	τὸν βασιλέα ὑμῶν σταυρώσω	1	Should I crucify your King?	Pilate uses **I** to imply that he would order his soldiers to crucify Jesus. Pilate himself did not crucify people. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Should I command my soldiers to crucify your King” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	19	15	osy8	figs-irony	λέγει αὐτοῖς ὁ Πειλᾶτος, τὸν βασιλέα ὑμῶν σταυρώσω?	1	Should I crucify your King?	**Pilate** does not believe that Jesus is a king. He actually means to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of his words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could provide a brief explanation. Alternate translation: “Pilate says to them in a mocking manner, ‘Should I crucify your King’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
+JHN	19	15	tlj2	figs-explicit	τὸν βασιλέα ὑμῶν σταυρώσω	1	Should I crucify your King?	Pilate uses **I** to imply that he would order his soldiers to crucify Jesus. Pilate himself did not crucify people. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Should I command my soldiers to crucify your king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	19	15	osy8	figs-irony	λέγει αὐτοῖς ὁ Πειλᾶτος, τὸν βασιλέα ὑμῶν σταυρώσω?	1	Should I crucify your King?	**Pilate** does not believe that Jesus is a king. He actually means to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of his words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could provide a brief explanation. Alternate translation: “Pilate says to them in a mocking manner, ‘Should I crucify your king’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
 JHN	19	16	t3yb	writing-pronouns	τότε…παρέδωκεν αὐτὸν αὐτοῖς, ἵνα σταυρωθῇ	1	Then Pilate gave Jesus over to them to be crucified	In this verse, the pronouns **them** and **they** refer to the Roman soldiers who would crucify Jesus. These pronouns do not refer to “the chief priests” in the previous verse because they did not crucify people. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	19	16	dw2m	figs-activepassive	ἵνα σταυρωθῇ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that the soldiers might crucify him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	19	16	j6jg	figs-explicit	ἀπήγαγον	1		The phrase **led him away** implies that the soldiers led Jesus away in order crucify him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “and led him away to be crucified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2424,16 +2425,16 @@ JHN	19	19	cx5s	figs-explicit	ἔγραψεν…καὶ τίτλον ὁ Πειλ
 JHN	19	19	ziak	figs-explicit	ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ	1	Pilate also wrote a sign and put it on the cross	Here, **the cross** refers specifically to **the cross** on which Jesus was crucified. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the cross they used to crucify Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	19	gk8e	figs-activepassive	ἦν…γεγραμμένον, Ἰησοῦς ὁ Ναζωραῖος, ὁ Βασιλεὺς τῶν Ἰουδαίων.	1	There it was written: JESUS OF NAZARETH, THE KING OF THE JEWS	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that person wrote on it these words: Jesus the Nazarene, the King of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	19	20	ke3t	figs-activepassive	ὁ τόπος…ὅπου ἐσταυρώθη ὁ Ἰησοῦς	1	the place where Jesus was crucified	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the place where they crucified Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	19	20	k3mp	figs-explicit	τῆς πόλεως	1	the place where Jesus was crucified	Here, **the city** refers to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the city called Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	19	20	k3mp	figs-explicit	τῆς πόλεως	1	the place where Jesus was crucified	Here, **the city** refers to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the city called Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	20	mgb7	figs-activepassive	καὶ ἦν γεγραμμένον Ἑβραϊστί, Ῥωμαϊστί, Ἑλληνιστί	1	The sign was written in Hebrew, in Latin, and in Greek	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The one who prepared the sign wrote the words in three languages: Hebrew, Latin, and Greek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	19	20	bzub	figs-explicit	Ἑβραϊστί	1		See how you translated this phrase, **in Hebrew**, in [5:2](../05/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	19	20	w41e	figs-explicit	Ῥωμαϊστί	1	Latin	**Latin** was the language spoken by the Roman government and Roman soldiers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the language spoken by the Romans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	19	21	qk7w	figs-explicit	ἔλεγον οὖν τῷ Πειλάτῳ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	Then the chief priests of the Jews said to Pilate	The chief priests had to go back to Pilate’s headquarters in order to speak to him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then the chief priests of the Jews went back to Pilate and said to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	19	20	w41e	figs-explicit	Ῥωμαϊστί	1	Latin	**Latin** was the language spoken by the Roman government and Roman soldiers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the language spoken by the Romans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	19	21	qk7w	figs-explicit	ἔλεγον οὖν τῷ Πειλάτῳ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	Then the chief priests of the Jews said to Pilate	The chief priests had to go back to Pilate’s headquarters in order to speak to him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then the chief priests of the Jews went back to Pilate and said to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	21	js2b	figs-explicit	ἐκεῖνος	1	Then the chief priests of the Jews said to Pilate	The Jewish leaders say **That one** as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus and to avoid saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “That so-and-so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	21	ixay	figs-quotesinquotes	ἐκεῖνος εἶπεν, Βασιλεὺς εἰμι τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	Then the chief priests of the Jews said to Pilate	If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “That one said that he is the King of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
-JHN	19	22	sus9	figs-explicit	ὃ γέγραφα, γέγραφα	1	What I have written I have written	**Pilate** implies that he will not change the words on the notice. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I have written what I wanted to write, and I will not change it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	19	22	sus9	figs-explicit	ὃ γέγραφα, γέγραφα	1	What I have written I have written	**Pilate** implies that he will not change the words on the notice. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I have written what I wanted to write, and I will not change it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	22	vgn9	figs-explicit	ὃ γέγραφα, γέγραφα	1	What I have written I have written	**Pilate** uses **I** to imply that he ordered his soldiers to write the title and put it on the cross. Pilate probably would not have done this himself. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “What I told them to write is what they have written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	19	23	s74c	figs-explicit	καὶ τὸν χιτῶνα	1	also the tunic	The next verse implies that the soldiers kept the tunic separate from the clothes that they divided. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the tunic they did not divide” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	19	23	s74c	figs-explicit	καὶ τὸν χιτῶνα	1	also the tunic	The next verse implies that the soldiers kept the tunic separate from the clothes that they divided. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the tunic they did not divide” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	23	lis8	writing-background	δὲ	1		There is a break from the main storyline that begins with the word **Now** and continues to the end of the next verse. In this break John tells us how this event fulfills Scripture. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	19	23	sk7l	figs-activepassive	ὑφαντὸς δι’ ὅλου	1	also the tunic	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone had woven it in one piece” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	19	24	ks7m	figs-ellipsis	λάχωμεν περὶ αὐτοῦ, τίνος ἔσται	1	let us cast lots for it to decide whose it will be	The soldiers are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. The soldiers will **cast lots** and the winner will receive the shirt. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “we should cast lots for it in order to decide whose it will be” or “we should cast lots for it and the winner will get to keep it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -2442,9 +2443,8 @@ JHN	19	24	us8x	writing-quotations	ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ ἡ λ
 JHN	19	24	j1f9	figs-activepassive	ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ ἡ λέγουσα	1	so that the scripture would be fulfilled which said	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “This fulfilled the scripture that said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	19	24	yrxw	figs-quotemarks	διεμερίσαντο τὰ ἱμάτιά μου ἑαυτοῖς, καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν ἱματισμόν μου ἔβαλον κλῆρον	1	so that the scripture would be fulfilled which said	In these phrases, John quotes [Psalm 22:19](../../psa/22/19.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 JHN	19	25	octl	figs-possession	τῷ σταυρῷ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1		John is using **of** to describe **the cross** on which the soldiers had crucified Jesus. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the cross on which Jesus was crucified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-JHN	19	1	v3ea	translate-names	ὁ Πειλᾶτος	1		See how you translated **Pilate** in [18:29](../18/29.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	19	25	b38l	translate-names	Μαρία ἡ Μαγδαληνή	1		**Mary** is the name of a woman, and **Magdalene** most likely means that she came from the town of Magdala. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-JHN	19	26	gkf1	figs-explicit	τὸν μαθητὴν…ὃν ἠγάπα	1	the disciple whom he loved	See how you translated a similar phrase in [13:23]((./13/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	19	26	gkf1	figs-explicit	τὸν μαθητὴν…ὃν ἠγάπα	1	the disciple whom he loved	See how you translated a similar phrase in [13:23](./13/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	26	mva3	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	19	26	cxlv		γύναι	1	Woman, see, your son	See how you translated **Woman** in [2:4](../02/04.md).
 JHN	19	26	t7tc	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ, ὁ υἱός σου	1	Woman, see, your son	Here, Jesus uses **son** figuratively to indicate that he wants his disciple, John, to be like a **son** to his mother. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “here is the man who will act like a son to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -2460,7 +2460,7 @@ JHN	19	28	w999	writing-quotations	ἵνα τελειωθῇ ἡ Γραφὴ	1		H
 JHN	19	28	ezfy	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	19	29	x1cy	figs-activepassive	σκεῦος ἔκειτο ὄξους μεστόν	1	A container full of sour wine was placed there	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Someone had placed there a container full of sour wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	19	29	x8z8	figs-explicit	ὄξους…τοῦ ὄξους	1	A container full of sour wine was placed there	Here, **sour wine** refers to the inexpensive **wine** that common people in Jesus’ culture would usually drink to quench thirst. Therefore, the person who gave Jesus this **sour wine** was acting kindly and responding to what he had said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of common wine … of that wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	19	29	gh7n	figs-explicit	σπόγγον οὖν μεστὸν τοῦ ὄξους ὑσσώπῳ περιθέντες	1	A container full of sour wine was placed there	John implies that someone dipped the **sponge** into the container full of sour wine so that the **sponge** would be **full of the sour wine**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “so having dipped a sponge in the container so that it was full of sour wine, they put it on a hyssop” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	19	29	gh7n	figs-explicit	σπόγγον οὖν μεστὸν τοῦ ὄξους ὑσσώπῳ περιθέντες	1	A container full of sour wine was placed there	John implies that someone dipped the **sponge** into the container full of sour wine so that the **sponge** would be **full of the sour wine**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “so having dipped a sponge in the container so that it was full of sour wine, they put it on a hyssop” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	29	y2eg	translate-unknown	σπόγγον	1	a sponge	A **sponge** is a small object that can soak up and hold liquid that comes out of it when the **sponge** is squeezed. If your readers would not be familiar with this thing, you could use the name of something your readers would use for soaking up liquid, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “something to soak up liquid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 JHN	19	29	mg3t	translate-unknown	ὑσσώπῳ	1	on a hyssop staff	Here, **hyssop** refers to the stalk from a plant that grows in Israel. Matthew and Mark called this stalk a “reed” in [Matthew 27:48](../../mat/27/48.md) and [Mark 15:36](../../mrk/15/36.md). If your readers would not be familiar with this plant, you could use the name of a plant in your area that has stalks or reeds, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a reed of a plant called hyssop” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 JHN	19	30	u8xq	figs-explicit	τὸ ὄξος	1	He bowed his head and gave up his spirit	See how you translated this phrase, **the sour wine**, in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2469,9 +2469,9 @@ JHN	19	30	vz56	figs-idiom	παρέδωκεν τὸ πνεῦμα	1	He bowed his
 JHN	19	31	jtq9	figs-infostructure	οἱ οὖν Ἰουδαῖοι, ἐπεὶ παρασκευὴ ἦν, ἵνα μὴ μείνῃ ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ τὰ σώματα ἐν τῷ Σαββάτῳ (ἦν γὰρ μεγάλη ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκείνου τοῦ Σαββάτου), ἠρώτησαν τὸν Πειλᾶτον, ἵνα κατεαγῶσιν αὐτῶν τὰ σκέλη, καὶ ἀρθῶσιν	1	the Jews	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “Then, because it was the day of preparation, the Jews asked Pilate that the men’s legs would be broken and they would be taken away, so that the bodies would not remain on the cross during the Sabbath (for that Sabbath was an especially important day)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 JHN	19	31	zuk9	figs-synecdoche	οἱ…Ἰουδαῖοι	1	the Jews	Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	19	31	c49h	figs-explicit	παρασκευὴ	1	day of preparation	Here, **day of preparation** refers to the day when the Jewish people prepared for both the Passover festival and the Sabbath. See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 14](../19/14.md). Alternate translation: “the day when the Jews prepared for both the Passover festival and the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	19	31	h3j1	figs-explicit	ἵνα μὴ μείνῃ ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ τὰ σώματα ἐν τῷ Σαββάτῳ	1	day of preparation	According to Jewish religious law, dead bodies could not remain on crosses during the Sabbath. Therefore, the Jewish leaders wanted Pilate to order his soldiers to kill the three men on crosses and remove their bodies before the Sabbath began at sundown. If this clause might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that the bodies would not remain on the cross during the Sabbath, which the Jewish law forbids” or “so that the bodies would not remain on the cross during the Sabbath and thereby violate Jewish law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	19	31	oeeb	figs-genericnoun	ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ	1		John is speaking of the three crosses on which the men were hanging, not of one particular cross. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “on the three crosses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
-JHN	19	31	rodw	figs-explicit	ἦν γὰρ μεγάλη ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκείνου τοῦ Σαββάτου	1		John notes that this **Sabbath** was **an especially important day** because it was a **Sabbath** day that occurred at the same time as the Passover festival. If this statement would confuse your readers, express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “for that Sabbath was especially important because it occurred during the Passover festival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	19	31	h3j1	figs-explicit	ἵνα μὴ μείνῃ ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ τὰ σώματα ἐν τῷ Σαββάτῳ	1	day of preparation	According to Jewish religious law, dead bodies could not remain on crosses during the Sabbath. Therefore, the Jewish leaders wanted Pilate to order his soldiers to execute the three men on crosses and remove their bodies before the Sabbath began at sundown. If this clause might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that the bodies would not remain on the cross during the Sabbath, which the Jewish law forbids” or “so that the bodies would not remain on the cross during the Sabbath and thereby violate Jewish law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	19	31	oeeb	figs-genericnoun	ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ	1		John is speaking of the three crosses on which the men were hanging. He is not referring to one particular **cross**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “on the three crosses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+JHN	19	31	rodw	figs-explicit	ἦν γὰρ μεγάλη ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκείνου τοῦ Σαββάτου	1		John notes that this **Sabbath** was **an especially important day** because it was the first day of the Passover celebration. If this statement would confuse your readers, express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “for that Sabbath was especially important because it occurred during the Passover festival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	31	f96h	figs-activepassive	ἵνα κατεαγῶσιν αὐτῶν τὰ σκέλη, καὶ ἀρθῶσιν	1	to break their legs and to remove them	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to have someone break their legs and take them away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	19	31	gz48	figs-explicit	κατεαγῶσιν αὐτῶν τὰ σκέλη, καὶ ἀρθῶσιν	1	to break their legs and to remove them	The Jewish leaders wanted Pilate’s soldiers to break the legs of the men who were hanging on crosses because doing that would cause the men to die quickly. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “their legs would be broken so that they would die quickly and their bodies could be taken away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	32	q2yq	figs-activepassive	τοῦ ἄλλου τοῦ συνσταυρωθέντος αὐτῷ	1	who had been crucified with Jesus	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “of the other man with whom they had crucified him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -2480,23 +2480,23 @@ JHN	19	35	bs5s	figs-123person	ὁ ἑωρακὼς…αὐτοῦ…ἐκεῖν
 JHN	19	35	c9q7	figs-ellipsis	ἵνα καὶ ὑμεῖς πιστεύητε	1	so that you would also believe	John is leaving out some of the words that this clause would need in many languages in order to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “so that you would also believe that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	19	36	wid6	writing-background		0	General Information:	[Verses 36–37](../19/36.md) are another break from the main storyline in which John tells us that the two events in [verses 33–34](../19/33.md) made some prophecies in scripture come true. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	19	36	uyvo	writing-quotations	ἐγένετο…ταῦτα, ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ	1	in order to fulfill scripture	Here John uses **that the scripture would be fulfilled** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Psalm 34:20](../../psa/34/20.md)). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “these things happened in order that what is written in the Psalms might be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-JHN	19	36	l8zi	figs-explicit	ἐγένετο…ταῦτα	1	in order to fulfill scripture	Here, **these things** refers to the two events described in [verses 33–34](../19/33.md). If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the soldiers did not break Jesus’ legs but pierced his side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	19	36	l8zi	figs-explicit	ἐγένετο…ταῦτα	1	in order to fulfill scripture	Here, **these things** refers to the two events described in [verses 33–34](../19/33.md). If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the soldiers did not break Jesus’ legs but pierced his side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	36	qwl5	figs-activepassive	ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ	1	in order to fulfill scripture	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in order to fulfill the words that someone wrote in scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	19	36	bm8y	figs-quotemarks	ὀστοῦν οὐ συντριβήσεται αὐτοῦ	1	in order to fulfill scripture	This sentence is a quotation from [Psalm 34:20](../../psa/34/20.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 JHN	19	36	b1kx	figs-activepassive	ὀστοῦν οὐ συντριβήσεται αὐτοῦ	1	Not one of his bones will be broken	This is a quotation from [Psalm 34:20](../../psa/34/20.md). If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “No one will break even one of his bones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	19	37	h4kq	writing-quotations	ἑτέρα Γραφὴ λέγει	1		Here John uses **another scripture says** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Zechariah 12:10](../../zec/12/10.md)). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Zechariah wrote in another scripture that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+JHN	19	37	h4kq	writing-quotations	ἑτέρα Γραφὴ λέγει	1		Here John uses **another scripture says** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Zechariah 12:10](../../zec/12/10.md)). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “the prophet Zechariah wrote in another scripture that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	19	37	lnmt	figs-quotemarks	ὄψονται εἰς ὃν ἐξεκέντησαν	1		This sentence is a quotation from [Zechariah 12:10](../../zec/12/10.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 JHN	19	38	ca0b	writing-newevent	μετὰ…ταῦτα	1		**After this** introduces a new event that happened soon after the events the story has just told. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “soon afterward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 JHN	19	38	xtva	figs-explicit	Ἰωσὴφ ὁ ἀπὸ Ἁριμαθαίας	1	Joseph of Arimathea	Since [Luke 23:50](../../luk/23/50.md) indicates that **Joseph** was a member of the Sanhedrin, he was likely dwelling in Jerusalem. Therefore, John would mean here that **Joseph** was originally **from Arimathea**. **Joseph** had not come **from Arimathea** to Jerusalem for this occasion. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Joseph, who was originally from Arimathea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	38	nbg2	translate-names	Ἰωσὴφ	1	Joseph of Arimathea	**Pilate** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	19	38	d3hz	translate-names	Ἰωσὴφ ὁ ἀπὸ Ἁριμαθαίας	1	Joseph of Arimathea	**Arimathea** was a city in Judea. Alternate translation: “Joseph who was from the city called Arimathea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-JHN	19	38	e3ap	figs-possession	διὰ τὸν φόβον τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	for fear of the Jews	John is using **of** to describe the **fear** that **Joseph** felt for the Jewish leaders. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “because of his fear for the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+JHN	19	38	e3ap	figs-possession	διὰ τὸν φόβον τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	for fear of the Jews	John is using **of** to describe the **fear** that **Joseph** felt for the Jewish leaders. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “because he feared the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JHN	19	38	h7ra	figs-synecdoche	διὰ τὸν φόβον τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	for fear of the Jews	Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-JHN	19	38	t22g	figs-explicit	ἵνα ἄρῃ τὸ σῶμα τοῦ Ἰησοῦ…ἦρεν τὸ σῶμα αὐτοῦ	1	if he could take away the body of Jesus	John implies that **Joseph** wanted to **take away the body of Jesus** in order to bury it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “that he might take away the body of Jesus in order to bury it … took away and buried his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	19	38	ojo8	figs-explicit	ἐπέτρεψεν ὁ Πειλᾶτος	1	if he could take away the body of Jesus	John implies that **Pilate** gave **Joseph** permission to take away Jesus’ body. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Pilate gave him permission to take away the body of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	19	38	t22g	figs-explicit	ἵνα ἄρῃ τὸ σῶμα τοῦ Ἰησοῦ…ἦρεν τὸ σῶμα αὐτοῦ	1	if he could take away the body of Jesus	John implies that **Joseph** wanted to **take away the body of Jesus** in order to bury it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “that he might take away the body of Jesus in order to bury it … took away and buried his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	19	38	ojo8	figs-explicit	ἐπέτρεψεν ὁ Πειλᾶτος	1	if he could take away the body of Jesus	John implies that **Pilate** gave **Joseph** permission to take away Jesus’ body. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Pilate gave him permission to take away the body of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	39	mjy8	translate-names	Νικόδημος	1	Nicodemus	**Nicodemus** was one of the Pharisees who respected Jesus. See how you translated this name in [3:1](../03/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-JHN	19	39	gqkc	figs-explicit	ὁ ἐλθὼν πρὸς αὐτὸν νυκτὸς τὸ πρῶτον	1	Nicodemus	This clause refers to the meeting between Jesus and Nicodemus that is described in [chapter 3](../03/01.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who had met Jesus before when he visited him at night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	19	39	ekyu	figs-explicit	φέρων μίγμα σμύρνης καὶ ἀλόης	1	Nicodemus	According to the burial customs of Jesus’ time, people prepared this **mixture** in order to put it on Jesus’ body as a way to honor him and to counteract the smell of decay. If this would confuse your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “bringing a mixture of myrrh and aloes to put on Jesus’ body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	19	39	gqkc	figs-explicit	ὁ ἐλθὼν πρὸς αὐτὸν νυκτὸς τὸ πρῶτον	1	Nicodemus	This clause refers to the meeting between Jesus and Nicodemus that is described in [chapter 3](../03/01.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who had met Jesus before when he visited him at night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	19	39	ekyu	figs-explicit	φέρων μίγμα σμύρνης καὶ ἀλόης	1	Nicodemus	According to the burial customs of Jesus’ time, people prepared this **mixture** in order to put it on Jesus’ body as a way to honor him and to counteract the smell of decay. If this would confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “bringing a mixture of myrrh and aloes to put on Jesus’ body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	39	d3d2	translate-unknown	σμύρνης καὶ ἀλόης	1	myrrh and aloes	This **mixture of myrrh and aloes** consisted of pleasant-smelling substances that were mixed together into an ointment that was put on a dead body in order to counteract the smell of decay. If your readers would not be familiar with these substances, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “of pleasant-smelling substances” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 JHN	19	39	xks9	translate-bweight	ὡς λίτρας ἑκατόν	1	about one hundred litras in weight	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this weight in terms of modern measurements either in the text or a footnote. One **litra** is about one third of a kilogram or three quarters of a pound. Alternate translation: “about 33 kilograms in weight” or “weighing about thirty-three kilograms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
 JHN	19	40	m9k6	translate-unknown	ἔδησαν αὐτὸ ὀθονίοις μετὰ τῶν ἀρωμάτων	1		Wrapping a dead body in strips of cloth was the burial custom in this culture. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. If your readers would not be familiar with such a custom, you could describe it more specifically, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “wrapped strips of linen cloth around his body and put spices under the strips of cloth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -2504,11 +2504,11 @@ JHN	19	41	fb25	writing-background		0		In this verse John interrupts the main sto
 JHN	19	41	uib1	figs-activepassive	ἦν δὲ ἐν τῷ τόπῳ ὅπου ἐσταυρώθη κῆπος	1	Now in the place where he was crucified there was a garden	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Now in the place where they crucified Jesus there was a garden” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	19	41	qd1a	figs-activepassive	ἐν ᾧ οὐδέπω οὐδεὶς ἦν τεθειμένος	1	in which no person had yet been buried	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in which people had not yet buried anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	19	41	bx6g	figs-doublenegatives	οὐδέπω οὐδεὶς ἦν τεθειμένος	1	in which no person had yet been buried	The phrase **no one had yet** translates two negative words in Greek. John uses them together to emphasize that the tomb had never been used. If your language can use two negatives together for emphasis without them cancelling each other to create a positive meaning, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-JHN	19	42	nr4r	figs-explicit	διὰ τὴν παρασκευὴν τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	Because it was the day of preparation for the Jews	According to Jewish law, no one could work after sundown on **the day of preparation** because sundown marked the beginning of the Sabbath and Passover. This meant that they had to bury Jesus’ body quickly. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because the Passover and Sabbath were about to begin that evening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	19	42	nr4r	figs-explicit	διὰ τὴν παρασκευὴν τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	Because it was the day of preparation for the Jews	According to Jewish law, no one could work after sundown on **the day of preparation** because sundown marked the beginning of the Sabbath and Passover. This meant that they had to bury Jesus’ body quickly. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because the Passover and Sabbath were about to begin that evening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	42	c70e	figs-infostructure	ἐκεῖ…διὰ τὴν παρασκευὴν τῶν Ἰουδαίων, ὅτι ἐγγὺς ἦν τὸ μνημεῖον, ἔθηκαν τὸν Ἰησοῦν	1	Because it was the day of preparation for the Jews	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “they laid Jesus there because of the day of preparation of the Jews and because the tomb was close by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 JHN	19	42	jsyu	figs-explicit	τὴν παρασκευὴν τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1		See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 14](../19/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	42	jtfz	figs-euphemism	ἔθηκαν τὸν Ἰησοῦν	1	Because it was the day of preparation for the Jews	John is referring to putting Jesus’ dead body in a tomb as laying him down. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant, and it accurately describes the Jewish burial practice of laying a dead body on a table inside the tomb. See how you translated a similar expression in [11:34](../11/34.md). Alternate translation: “they entombed Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
-JHN	20	intro	nm1y			0		# John 20 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>1. Mary Magdalene, Peter, and John go to Jesus’ tomb and find it empty (20:1–10)<br>2. Mary Magdalene meets Jesus (20:11–18)<br>3. Ten disciples meet Jesus (20:19–25)<br>4. Thomas meets Jesus (20:26–29)<br>5. John states the purpose for this Gospel (20:30–31)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### The tomb<br><br>The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([20:1](../20/01.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was a room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could look inside or enter.<br><br>### “Receive the Holy Spirit”<br><br>If your language uses the same word for “breath” and “spirit,” be sure that the reader understands that Jesus was performing a symbolic action by blowing air out of his mouth, and that Jesus was referring to the Holy Spirit, not his breath. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Rabboni<br><br>John used Greek letters to express the sound of this Aramaic word. Then he explained that the word means “Teacher.” You should also use the letters of your language to express the sounds of the Aramaic word.<br><br>### Jesus’ resurrection body<br><br>We do not know what Jesus’ body looked like after he became alive again. His disciples knew he was Jesus because they could see his face and touch the places where the soldiers had put the nails through his hands and feet and pierced his side. However, he could also walk through solid walls and doors and sometimes people didn’t recognize him. It is best not to say more than what the ULT says about Jesus’ resurrection body.<br><br>### Two angels in white<br><br>Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about angels in white clothing with the women at Jesus’ tomb. Two of the authors called them men, but that is only because the angels appeared in human forms. Two of the Gospel authors wrote about two angels, but the other two authors wrote about only one of them. It is best to translate each of these passages as it appears in the ULT rather than trying to make the passages all say the exact same thing. (See: [Matthew 28:1-2](../../mat/28/01.md) and [Mark 16:5](../../mrk/16/05.md) and [Luke 24:4](../../luk/24/04.md) and [John 20:12](../../jhn/20/12.md))
+JHN	20	intro	nm1y			0		# John 20 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>1. Mary Magdalene, Peter, and John go to Jesus’ tomb and find it empty (20:1–10)<br>2. Mary Magdalene meets Jesus (20:11–18)<br>3. Ten disciples meet Jesus (20:19–25)<br>4. Thomas meets Jesus (20:26–29)<br>5. John states the purpose for this Gospel (20:30–31)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### The tomb<br><br>The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([20:1](../20/01.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was a room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could look inside or enter.<br><br>### “Receive the Holy Spirit”<br><br>If your language uses the same word for “breath” and “spirit,” be sure that the reader understands that Jesus was performing a symbolic action by blowing air out of his mouth, and that Jesus was referring to the Holy Spirit, not his breath. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Rabboni<br><br>John used Greek letters to express the sound of this Aramaic word. Then he explained that the word means “Teacher.” You should also use the letters of your language to express the sounds of the Aramaic word.<br><br>### Jesus’ resurrection body<br><br>We do not know what Jesus’ body looked like after he became alive again. His disciples knew he was Jesus because they could see his face and touch the places where the soldiers had put the nails through his hands and feet and pierced his side. However, he could also walk through solid walls and doors and sometimes people didn’t recognize him. It is best not to say more than what the ULT says about Jesus’ resurrection body.<br><br>### Two angels in white<br><br>Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about angels in white clothing with the women at Jesus’ tomb. Two of the authors called them men, but that is only because the angels appeared in human forms. Two of the Gospel authors wrote about two angels, but the other two authors wrote about only one of them. It is best to translate each of these passages as it appears in the ULT rather than trying to make the passages all state the exact same thing. (See: [Matthew 28:1-2](../../mat/28/01.md) and [Mark 16:5](../../mrk/16/05.md) and [Luke 24:4](../../luk/24/04.md) and [John 20:12](../../jhn/20/12.md))
 JHN	20	1	a8vl	figs-explicit	τῇ…μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων	1	first day of the week	John uses **first** to imply the **first** day of the week. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the first day of the week” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	20	1	sb4m	translate-ordinal	τῇ…μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων	1	first day of the week	Here John is actually using a cardinal number, “one,” to mean **first**. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can also use a cardinal number here in your translation. Alternate translation: “on day one of the week” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 JHN	20	1	qj3j	translate-names	Μαρία ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ	1		See how you translated **Mary Magdalene** in [19:25](../19/25.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -2526,7 +2526,7 @@ JHN	20	3	g0ky	writing-pronouns	ἤρχοντο	1	the other disciple	If you trans
 JHN	20	3	jgzx	figs-123person	ἤρχοντο	1	the other disciple	If you translated **the other disciple** in the previous verse with a first person singular form, then you will need to use the first person plural “we” here. Alternate translation: “we went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	20	4	c5kr	figs-123person	ἔτρεχον…οἱ δύο ὁμοῦ, καὶ ὁ ἄλλος μαθητὴς προέδραμεν τάχειον	1	the other disciple	If you translated **the other disciple** with a first person form in [verse 2](../20/02.md), then you will need to use first person pronouns in this verse. Alternate translation: “we were running together, and I quickly ran ahead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	20	4	sc6u	figs-explicit	ὁ ἄλλος μαθητὴς	1	the other disciple	See how you translated **the other disciple** in [verse 2](../20/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	20	5	jbbz	figs-123person	βλέπει…οὐ μέντοι εἰσῆλθεν	1	linen cloths	If you translated **the other disciple** with a first person form in the previous verse, then you will need to use first person pronouns in this verse. Alternate translation: “I see … but I did not enter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN	20	5	jbbz	figs-123person	βλέπει…οὐ μέντοι εἰσῆλθεν	1	linen cloths	If you translated **the other disciple** with a first person form in the previous verse, then you will need to use first person pronouns in this verse. Alternate translation: “I saw … but I did not enter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	20	5	wm6r	figs-pastforfuture	βλέπει	1	linen cloths	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	20	5	m9qn	translate-unknown	ὀθόνια	1	linen cloths	Wrapping a dead body in strips of cloth was the burial custom in this culture. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for Chapter 19. If your readers would not be familiar with such a custom, you could describe it more specifically, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the linen cloths in which they had wrapped Jesus’ body for burial” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 JHN	20	6	gw25	figs-pastforfuture	ἔρχεται…θεωρεῖ	1	linen cloths	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
@@ -2546,7 +2546,7 @@ JHN	20	10	p5um	figs-explicit	ἀπῆλθον…πάλιν πρὸς αὑτο
 JHN	20	11	kmzj	figs-explicit	Μαρία	1		**Mary** here refers to **Mary** Magdalene. See how you translated this name in [19:25](../19/25.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	20	12	bl51	figs-pastforfuture	θεωρεῖ	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	20	12	p9aw	figs-explicit	δύο ἀγγέλους ἐν λευκοῖς	1	She saw two angels in white	Here, **white** refers to the color of the clothing that the angels were wearing. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “two angels in white clothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	20	12	vzkb	figs-explicit	ἕνα πρὸς τῇ κεφαλῇ, καὶ ἕνα πρὸς τοῖς ποσίν, ὅπου ἔκειτο τὸ σῶμα τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	She saw two angels in white	Here, **at the head** and **at the feet** refer to the locations in the tomb where Jesus’ head and feet used to be. If this might confuse your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “one at the place of his head and one at the place of his feet where the body of Jesus had been” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	20	12	vzkb	figs-explicit	ἕνα πρὸς τῇ κεφαλῇ, καὶ ἕνα πρὸς τοῖς ποσίν, ὅπου ἔκειτο τὸ σῶμα τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	She saw two angels in white	Here, **at the head** and **at the feet** refer to the locations in the tomb where Jesus’ head and feet used to be. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “one at the place of his head and one at the place of his feet where the body of Jesus had been” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	20	12	r6yy	figs-activepassive	ἔκειτο	1	She saw two angels in white	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone had laid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	20	13	v5uj	figs-pastforfuture	λέγουσιν…λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	20	13	hjqb		γύναι	1		See how you translated the similar use of **Woman** in [2:4](../02/04.md) and [4:21](../04/21.md).
@@ -2554,19 +2554,19 @@ JHN	20	13	hmx8	figs-synecdoche	τὸν Κύριόν μου…αὐτόν	1	Becau
 JHN	20	15	le9x	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει…λέγει	1	Jesus said to her	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	20	15	jti2		γύναι	1		See how you translated the word **Woman** in the previous verse.
 JHN	20	15	ml7c	figs-synecdoche	αὐτόν…αὐτόν…αὐτὸν	1		Here, Mary speaks of Jesus’ dead body as if it were Jesus himself. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “my Lord’s body … it … it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-JHN	20	15	a5z2	figs-explicit	κἀγὼ αὐτὸν ἀρῶ	1	I will take him away	Here Mary Magdalene implies that she would **take** Jesus’ body **away** and bury it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and I will take him away and bury him again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	20	15	a5z2	figs-explicit	κἀγὼ αὐτὸν ἀρῶ	1	I will take him away	Here Mary Magdalene implies that she would **take** Jesus’ body **away** and bury it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and I will take him away and bury him again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	20	16	p9v0	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει…λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	20	16	kepb	figs-infostructure	Ἑβραϊστί, Ραββουνεί (ὃ λέγεται, Διδάσκαλε)	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “‘Rabboni’ (which means ‘Teacher’ in Hebrew)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 JHN	20	16	dgjf	figs-explicit	Ἑβραϊστί	1		See how you translated **in Hebrew** in [5:2](../05/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	20	16	k468		Ραββουνεί	1	Rabboni	Here John writes out the sounds of this Jewish Aramaic word with Greek letters. Since John translates the meaning later in the verse, you should write out this word using the most similar sounds in your language.
 JHN	20	17	dzs7	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	20	17	q3x5	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Πατέρα…τὸν Πατέρα μου…Πατέρα ὑμῶν	1	my Father and your Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-JHN	20	17	whh9	figs-explicit	τοὺς ἀδελφούς μου	1	brothers	Jesus used the word **my brothers** here to refer to his disciples. If this might confuse your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “my disciples, who are like brothers,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	20	17	whh9	figs-explicit	τοὺς ἀδελφούς μου	1	brothers	Jesus used the word **my brothers** here to refer to his disciples. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “my disciples, who are like brothers,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	20	17	dokk	figs-quotesinquotes	εἰπὲ αὐτοῖς, ἀναβαίνω πρὸς τὸν Πατέρα μου, καὶ Πατέρα ὑμῶν, καὶ Θεόν μου, καὶ Θεὸν ὑμῶν	1	brothers	If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “say to them that I go up to my Father and your Father, and my God and your God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 JHN	20	17	hogb	figs-pastforfuture	ἀναβαίνω	1	I will go up to my Father and your Father, and my God and your God	Here Jesus uses the present tense **I go up** to refer to something that will happen in the near future. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the future tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “I will go up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	20	17	xbr1	figs-doublet	πρὸς τὸν Πατέρα μου, καὶ Πατέρα ὑμῶν, καὶ Θεόν μου, καὶ Θεὸν ὑμῶν	1	I will go up to my Father and your Father, and my God and your God	These two long phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize to whom Jesus will return. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “to God, who is my Father and your Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	20	18	unzu	figs-pastforfuture	ἔρχεται	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-JHN	20	18	m6xn	figs-go	ἔρχεται Μαριὰμ ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ	1	Mary Magdalene came and told the disciples	Your language may say “goes” rather than **comes** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “Mary Magdalene goes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+JHN	20	18	m6xn	figs-go	ἔρχεται Μαριὰμ ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ	1	Mary Magdalene came and told the disciples	Your language may state “goes” rather than **comes** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “Mary Magdalene goes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 JHN	20	18	zf17	figs-ellipsis	ἔρχεται Μαριὰμ ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ	1	Mary Magdalene came and told the disciples	John is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Mary Magdalene comes to where the disciples were staying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	20	19	qj6n	figs-explicit	τῇ μιᾷ σαββάτων	1	that day, the first day of the week	See how you translated **the first of the week** in [verse 1](../20/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	20	19	hh2g	translate-ordinal	τῇ μιᾷ σαββάτων	1	that day, the first day of the week	Here John is actually using a cardinal number, “one,” to mean **first**. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can also use a cardinal number here in your translation. Alternate translation: “on day one of the week” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
@@ -2580,7 +2580,7 @@ JHN	20	20	nb0v	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἰδόντες τὸν Κύριον
 JHN	20	21	ylp8	figs-idiom	εἰρήνη ὑμῖν	1	Peace to you	See how you translated **Peace to you** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	20	21	env3	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατήρ	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	20	21	hw1z	figs-infostructure	καθὼς ἀπέσταλκέν με ὁ Πατήρ, κἀγὼ πέμπω ὑμᾶς	1	Father	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “I send you just as the Father has sent me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-JHN	20	21	vhzq	figs-ellipsis	ἀπέσταλκέν…πέμπω	1		Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “has sent me into the world … send you into the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	20	21	vhzq	figs-ellipsis	ἀπέσταλκέν με…πέμπω ὑμᾶς	1		Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “has sent me into the world … send you into the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	20	22	vjs8	translate-symaction	ἐνεφύσησεν	1		When Jesus **breathed on them**, he did this symbolic action in order to show that he would give his disciples the **Holy Spirit** in the near future. If this would be helpful to your readers, you could explain its significance. Alternate translation: “he breathed on them as a symbolic action” or “he breathed on them to symbolically show that he was going to give them the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 JHN	20	22	avgi	figs-explicit	ἐνεφύσησεν	1		Here, **breathed on** refers to Jesus blowing air out of his mouth. It does not refer to the normal act of inhaling and exhaling air into one’s lungs. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “he blew air on them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	20	22	v9el	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
@@ -2593,32 +2593,32 @@ JHN	20	24	krgw	figs-activepassive	ὁ λεγόμενος Δίδυμος	1	Didymu
 JHN	20	24	x8jz	translate-names	Δίδυμος	1	Didymus	See how you translated **Didymus** in [11:16](../11/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	20	25	n8vc	figs-infostructure	ἐὰν μὴ ἴδω ἐν ταῖς χερσὶν αὐτοῦ τὸν τύπον τῶν ἥλων, καὶ βάλω τὸν δάκτυλόν μου εἰς τὸν τύπον τῶν ἥλων, καὶ βάλω μου τὴν χεῖρα εἰς τὴν πλευρὰν αὐτοῦ, οὐ μὴ πιστεύσω	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “I will certainly not believe unless I see in his hands the mark of the nails and put my finger into the mark of the nails and put my hand into his side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 JHN	20	25	i7ex	figs-doublenegatives	ἐὰν μὴ ἴδω ἐν ταῖς χερσὶν αὐτοῦ τὸν τύπον τῶν ἥλων, καὶ βάλω τὸν δάκτυλόν μου εἰς τὸν τύπον τῶν ἥλων, καὶ βάλω μου τὴν χεῖρα εἰς τὴν πλευρὰν αὐτοῦ, οὐ μὴ πιστεύσω	1	Unless I see … his side, I will not believe	If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “I will believe only if I see in his hands the mark of the nails and put my finger into the mark of the nails and put my hand into his side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-JHN	20	25	ss17	figs-possession	τὸν τύπον τῶν ἥλων…τὸν τύπον τῶν ἥλων	2		In both of these occurrences, Thomas is using **of** to describe **mark** made by **nails**. He is referring to the holes in Jesus’ hands that were made by the nails that soldiers used to crucify him. Alternate translation: “the marks made by nails … those marks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+JHN	20	25	ss17	figs-possession	τὸν τύπον τῶν ἥλων	-1		In both of these occurrences, Thomas is using **of** to describe **mark** made by **nails**. He is referring to the holes in Jesus’ hands that were made by the nails that soldiers used to crucify him. Alternate translation: “the marks made by nails … those marks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JHN	20	25	xasr	figs-metonymy	εἰς τὴν πλευρὰν αὐτοῦ	1		See how you translated **his side** in [verse 20](../20/20md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	20	25	iqn0	figs-ellipsis	οὐ μὴ πιστεύσω	1		Thomas is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “I will certainly not believe that Jesus has become alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	20	26	vzm5	figs-pastforfuture	ἔρχεται	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	20	26	r3iz	figs-activepassive	τῶν θυρῶν κεκλεισμένων	1	while the doors were closed	See how you translated this phrase in [verse 19](../20/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	20	26	m5tl	figs-idiom	εἰρήνη ὑμῖν	1	Peace to you	See how you translated **Peace to you** in [verse 19](../20/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	20	27	j85h	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-JHN	20	27	xgwl	figs-explicit	ὧδε	1		Jesus uses **here** to refer to the places on his **hands** where there were holes. These holes in Jesus’ **hands** were made by the nails that soldiers used to crucify him. If this might confuse your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in these holes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	20	27	xgwl	figs-explicit	ὧδε	1		Jesus uses **here** to refer to the places on his **hands** where there were holes. These holes in Jesus’ **hands** were made by the nails that soldiers used to crucify him. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in these holes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	20	27	ai73	figs-metonymy	τὰς χεῖράς μου	1		Jesus uses **my hands** to refer to the holes in Jesus’ **hands** that were made by the nails that soldiers used to crucify him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the nail marks in my hands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	20	27	tax6	figs-metonymy	τὴν πλευράν μου	1		Jesus uses **my side** to refer to the wound that a Roman soldier made in his **side** with a spear. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the spear wound in his side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	20	27	ncc3	figs-doublet	μὴ γίνου ἄπιστος, ἀλλὰ πιστός	1	Do not be unbelieving, but believe	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Jesus wants Thomas to believe that he has become alive again. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you absolutely must believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	20	27	n4pi	figs-ellipsis	μὴ γίνου ἄπιστος, ἀλλὰ πιστός	1	believe	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “do not be unbelieving that I have become alive again, but believe it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	20	29	zgv1	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-JHN	20	29	q81m	figs-ellipsis	πεπίστευκας…πιστεύσαντες	1	you have believed	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “you have believed that I have become alive again … having believed it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	20	29	q81m	figs-ellipsis	πεπίστευκας…πιστεύσαντες	1	you have believed	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “you have believed that I have become alive again … having believed that I have become alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	20	29	sax7	figs-activepassive	μακάριοι οἱ μὴ ἰδόντες	1	you have believed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God blesses those not having seen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	20	29	q9fb	figs-ellipsis	μὴ ἰδόντες	1	who have not seen	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “not having seen me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	20	30	yd1j	writing-endofstory		0	General Information:	In [verses 30–31](../20/30.md) John comments about the story he has written in chapters 1 through 20. He also states his reason for writing this book. He does this in order to indicate that the story is almost finished. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
 JHN	20	30	azxu		σημεῖα	1		See how you translated the term **signs** in [2:11](../02/11.md). See also the discussion of **signs** in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracles”
 JHN	20	30	xz6j	figs-activepassive	ἃ οὐκ ἔστιν γεγραμμένα ἐν τῷ βιβλίῳ τούτῳ	1	signs that have not been written in this book	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Since John wrote this Gospel, you should use the first person pronoun “I” to indicate who did the action. Alternate translation: “which I have not written in this book” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	20	31	zlc5	figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1		Here, **these things** could mean: (1) the miraculous signs that John wrote about in his Gospel and mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “these signs” (2) everything that John wrote about in his Gospel. Alternate translation: “everything in this book” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	20	31	am9l	figs-activepassive	ταῦτα δὲ γέγραπται	1	but these have been written	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but the author wrote about these signs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+JHN	20	31	am9l	figs-activepassive	ταῦτα δὲ γέγραπται	1	but these have been written	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but the author wrote about these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	20	31	mlqg	figs-you	πιστεύητε…ἔχητε	1	but these have been written	In this verse **you** is plural and could refer to: (1) people who are reading this Gospel and do not trust in Jesus for salvation. Alternate translation: “you might believe … you might have” (2) people who are reading this Gospel and already believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “you would continue believing … you would continue to have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 JHN	20	31	p5k4	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Son of God	**Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	20	31	uem2	figs-ellipsis	πιστεύοντες	1	life in his name	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “believing that Jesus is the Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-JHN	20	31	ip1i	figs-explicit	ζωὴν	1	life	Here, **life** refers to eternal **life**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	20	31	vgwe	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ	1		Here, **in** indicates the means by which people can have eternal **life**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of his name” <br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	20	31	ip1i	figs-explicit	ζωὴν	1	life	Here, **life** refers to eternal **life**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	20	31	vgwe	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ	1		Here, **in** indicates the means by which people can have eternal **life**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of his name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	20	31	qxdy	figs-synecdoche	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ	1	life in his name	Here, **his name** could refer to: (1) Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “through union with him” or “by the power of his person” (2) calling on Jesus’ name for salvation. Alternate translation: “by calling on his name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	21	intro	e1bg			0		# John 21 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>1. Jesus eats breakfast with his disciples (21:1–14)<br>2. Jesus restores Peter as his disciple (21:15–19)<br>3. Jesus and Peter speak about John (21:20–23)<br>4. John concludes his Gospel (21:24–25)<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### The metaphor of sheep<br><br>Before Jesus died, he spoke of himself taking care of his people as if he were a good shepherd taking care of sheep ([10:11](../10/11.md)). After he became alive again, Jesus commanded Peter to take care of other believers in the same way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### “The disciple whom Jesus loved”<br><br>The apostle John referred to himself as the disciple “whom Jesus loved” twice in this chapter ([21:7](../21/07.md), [20](../21/20.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. If this is the case, then you will need to use a first person pronoun for these references and the other references to John throughout this chapter. You would also need to use first person plural pronouns in this chapter for all references to the disciples as a group, since John was one of them. If your language can retain the third person references, then you may want to make these references to John explicit by adding “John” next to them. See the discussion of this in Part 1 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/johntheapostle]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])<br><br>### Different words for “love”<br><br>In [verses 15–17](../21/15.md), Jesus and Peter speak to each other using two different words in the original language that could both be translated as “love.” These words are often used interchangeably. However, when they are used together, as in [verses 15–17](../21/15.md), they can have slightly different meanings. One word can refer to a type of love that is based on affection and friendship, but the other word can refer to a type of love that is based on sincere devotion and high esteem for the person being loved. Although the UST translates both of these words as “love,” the notes will provide more specific alternatives.
 JHN	21	1	x44v	writing-newevent	μετὰ ταῦτα	1	General Information:	This phrase introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
@@ -2630,12 +2630,12 @@ JHN	21	2	xyiv	figs-explicit	οἱ τοῦ Ζεβεδαίου	1		This phrase refe
 JHN	21	2	e1qx	translate-names	Ζεβεδαίου	1		**Zebedee** is the name of a man. He was the father of the disciples John and James ([Matthew 4:21](../../mat/04/21.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	21	3	pqlw	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει…λέγουσιν	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	21	3	zow1	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1		When the disciples say **we**, they are speaking of themselves without Peter, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-JHN	21	3	p8f0	figs-go	ἐρχόμεθα	1		Your language may say “going” rather than **coming** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “are going” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+JHN	21	3	p8f0	figs-go	ἐρχόμεθα	1		Your language may state “going” rather than **coming** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “are going” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 JHN	21	3	l2s6	figs-explicit	ἐνέβησαν εἰς τὸ πλοῖον	1		Here, **got in a boat** implies that they also took the boat out on the Sea of Tiberias in order to fish. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “got into a boat and went fishing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	21	4	j7jx	figs-pastforfuture	ἐστιν	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	21	5	jrth	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	21	5	wgd7	figs-metaphor	παιδία	1		Here Jesus uses the word **Children** figuratively as an affectionate way to address his disciples. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “My dear friends” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	21	5	o62p	figs-explicit	μή τι προσφάγιον ἔχετε?	1		Jesus asks this question in a way that expects a negative response. He knows that the disciples did not catch any fish. If your language has a question form that assumes a negative response, you should use it here. Alternate translation: “you surely do not have any fish to eat, am I right?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	21	5	o62p	figs-explicit	μή τι προσφάγιον ἔχετε?	1		Jesus asks this question in a way that expects a negative response. He knows that the disciples did not catch any fish. If your language has a question form that assumes a negative response, you should use it here. Alternate translation: “you were not able to get any fish to eat, were you?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	21	6	l2jd	figs-explicit	εὑρήσετε	1	you will find some	Here, **some** refers to fish. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “you will find some fish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	21	7	u5c3	figs-explicit	ὁ μαθητὴς ἐκεῖνος ὃν ἠγάπα ὁ Ἰησοῦς	1	loved	This phrase refers to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. See the discussion of this phrase in Part 1 of the Introduction to the Gospel of John and the General Notes for this chapter. See also how you translated similar phrases in [13:23](../13/23.md), [18:15](../18/15.md), and [20:2](../20/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	21	7	kfh9	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	loved	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
@@ -2658,7 +2658,7 @@ JHN	21	14	tp3i	translate-ordinal	τρίτον	1	the third time	If your language
 JHN	21	14	nz9d	figs-activepassive	ἐφανερώθη	1	the third time	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “showed himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	21	14	q55e	figs-activepassive	ἐγερθεὶς ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	the third time	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God having raised him from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	21	14	y94q	figs-idiom	ἐγερθεὶς ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	the third time	Here, **raised from the dead** is an idiom that refers to a dead person becoming alive again. See how you translated a similar phrase in [20:9](../20/09.md). Alternate translation: “having become alive after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-JHN	21	15	avdf		λέγει…λέγει…λέγει	1	do you love me	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
+JHN	21	15	avdf	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει…λέγει…λέγει	1	do you love me	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	21	15	xwxd	figs-explicit	ἀγαπᾷς με…φιλῶ σε	1	the third time	The two occurrences of **love** in this verse are two different words in the original language. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could show this in your translation. See the discussion of this concept in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “do you love me with great esteem … I love you with affection” or “do you love me deeply… I love you like a friend” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	21	15	t1uj	figs-explicit	πλέον τούτων	1		Here, **these** could refer to: (1) the other disciples who were there with Jesus and Peter. This meaning would indicate Jesus is asking Peter if he loves Jesus more than the other disciples love him. Alternate translation: “more than these disciples love me” (2) the fish, boat, and other equipment that were used for catching fish, which was Peter’s former job. Alternate translation: “more than these fishing tools” or “more than your former job” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	21	15	qja3	figs-metaphor	βόσκε τὰ ἀρνία μου	1	Feed my lambs	Jesus uses **Feed my lambs** figuratively to refer to providing for the spiritual needs of people who trust in Jesus. Here Jesus is commanding Peter to take care of other believers in the same way that Jesus took care of them while he was with them. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “Take care of the people who believe in me like a shepherd feeds lambs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -2692,16 +2692,16 @@ JHN	21	22	dvts	figs-idiom	μοι ἀκολούθει	1		See how you translated t
 JHN	21	23	wmzo	figs-metonymy	οὗτος ὁ λόγος	1		Here, **this word** refers to what **the brothers** say about John’s future in the next clause. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the following report about John’s future” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	21	23	np23	figs-metaphor	ἐξῆλθεν…οὗτος ὁ λόγος	1		John uses **spread** figuratively to refer to **this word** being repeated among the believers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this word was repeated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	21	23	c2cr	figs-gendernotations	τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	the brothers	Although the term **brothers** is masculine, John is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “the fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-JHN	21	23	chsq	figs-explicit	ὁ μαθητὴς ἐκεῖνος	1		Here, **that disciple** refers to the apostle John. If this might confuse your readers, you could say that explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	21	23	chsq	figs-explicit	ὁ μαθητὴς ἐκεῖνος	1		Here, **that disciple** refers to the apostle John. If this might confuse your readers, you could state that explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	21	23	wb7e	figs-pastforfuture	οὐκ ἀποθνῄσκει…ὅτι οὐκ ἀποθνῄσκει	1	the brothers	John is using the present tense in order to refer to something that will happen in the future. If this might confuse your readers, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “will not die … that he will not die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-JHN	21	23	cs14	writing-pronouns	αὐτῷ	1	the brothers	The pronoun **him** here refers to Peter. If this might confuse your readers, you could say that explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-JHN	21	23	elmi	writing-pronouns	ὅτι οὐκ ἀποθνῄσκει…αὐτὸν	1	the brothers	The pronouns *he** and **him** here refer to John. If this might confuse your readers, you could say that explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	21	23	cs14	writing-pronouns	αὐτῷ	1	the brothers	The pronoun **him** here refers to Peter. If this might confuse your readers, you could state that explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	21	23	elmi	writing-pronouns	ὅτι οὐκ ἀποθνῄσκει…αὐτὸν	1	the brothers	The pronouns **he** and **him** here refer to John. If this might confuse your readers, you could state that explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	21	23	qxqr		ἐὰν αὐτὸν θέλω μένειν ἕως ἔρχομαι, τί πρὸς σέ	1		See how you translated this sentence in the previous verse.
 JHN	21	24	s5bp	writing-endofstory		0	General Information:	In [verses 24–25](../21/24.md) John indicates the end of his Gospel by giving a closing comment about himself and what he has written in this book. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
 JHN	21	24	d6t5	figs-123person	οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ μαθητὴς ὁ μαρτυρῶν περὶ τούτων, καὶ ὁ γράψας ταῦτα, καὶ οἴδαμεν ὅτι ἀληθὴς αὐτοῦ ἡ μαρτυρία ἐστίν	1	the disciple	In this verse John is speaking about himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “I am the disciple who testifies about these things and who wrote these things, and we know that my testimony is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	21	24	f7ww	figs-explicit	τούτων…ταῦτα	1	who testifies about these things	In this verse, **these things** refers to everything that John has written in this Gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “everything in this book … all these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	21	24	h5i9	figs-exclusive	οἴδαμεν	1	we know	Here the pronoun **we** is exclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-JHN	21	24	l03o	figs-extrainfo	οἴδαμεν	1	we know	Here, **we** could refer to: (1) John and the other eyewitnesses to the earthly life of Jesus, as in [1:14](..01/14.md) and [1 John 1:2–7](../../1jn/01/02.md). Alternate translation: “We eyewitnesses of Jesus’ life know” (2) the elders in the church at Ephesus where John lived at the end of his life. Alternate translation: “We elders of the church at Ephesus know” However, since who **we** refers to is uncertain, it would be best not to explain the meaning further. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
+JHN	21	24	l03o	figs-extrainfo	οἴδαμεν	1	we know	Here, **we** could refer to: (1) John and the other eyewitnesses to the earthly life of Jesus, as in [1:14](../01/14.md) and [1 John 1:2–7](../../1jn/01/02.md). Alternate translation: “We eyewitnesses of Jesus’ life know” (2) the elders in the church at Ephesus where John lived at the end of his life. Alternate translation: “We elders of the church at Ephesus know” However, since who **we** refers to is uncertain, it would be best not to explain the meaning further. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 JHN	21	25	l3hz	figs-activepassive	ἐὰν γράφηται καθ’ ἕν	1	If each one were written down	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “if someone wrote down each one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	21	25	i9n8	figs-hyperbole	οὐδ’ αὐτὸν…τὸν κόσμον χωρήσειν τὰ γραφόμενα βιβλία	1	even the world itself could not contain the books	John exaggerates to emphasize that Jesus did very many good things. If this would confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your language to show this emphasis. Alternate translation: “a very large amount of books about these miracles would be written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 JHN	21	25	h3zw	figs-metonymy	τὸν κόσμον	1	even the world itself could not contain the books	Here, **the world** refers to either the surface of the earth or the universe. Either meaning would achieve John’s purpose. If your language does not have a general expression for **world**, you could use an alternate expression. Alternate translation: “the whole earth” or “the whole universe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
diff --git a/en_tn_46-ROM.tsv b/en_tn_46-ROM.tsv
index 82bf7ab639..0829b10062 100644
--- a/en_tn_46-ROM.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_46-ROM.tsv
@@ -416,7 +416,7 @@ ROM	2	27	w7u3	figs-ellipsis	σὲ τὸν	1		A word is left out here in the orig
 ROM	2	27	pree	figs-metaphor	σὲ τὸν διὰ γράμματος καὶ περιτομῆς παραβάτην νόμου	1		Paul speaks figuratively of the uncircumcised person as if he were a judge that condemns the Jew who transgresses **the law**, by using evidence from their own law against them. Paul means that the uncircumcised Gentile who obeys the law is actually better off than a circumcised Jew who violates the law. If your readers would not understand what **through letter and circumcision** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “transgress the law, even though you know what the law requires for the circumcised person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br>
 ROM	2	27	zwh8	figs-metaphor		1		
 ROM	2	27	q795	figs-abstractnouns	παραβάτην νόμου	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **transgressor** with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “someone who transgresses the law” or “someone who breaks God’s law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	2	27	nxa1	figs-metonymy	γράμματος\n\n	1		Paul is figuratively describing **the law** by association with the letters that make up **the law**. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the written law code” or “God’s written law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ROM	2	27	nxa1	figs-metonymy	γράμματος	1		Paul is figuratively describing **the law** by association with the letters that make up **the law**. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the written law code” or “God’s written law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	2	28	bl6h	figs-parallelism		1	merely outward in the flesh	These two clauses mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to clarify who is not a true member of God’s people. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “Certainly the outward marks of circumcision on the body do not reveal who is a true Jew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 ROM	2	28	g2vh	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	outwardly	Here, **For** indicates that what follows is Paul’s conclusion to his arguments in [2:25-27](../02/25.md). Alternate translation: “In fact” or “Truly” or “This is because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	2	28	s44m	figs-synecdoche	ἐν σαρκὶ	1	flesh	Paul refers figuratively to **the flesh** to mean “the whole body.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “on the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@@ -592,7 +592,7 @@ ROM	3	26	b1xa	figs-possession	πρὸς τὴν ἔνδειξιν τῆς δικ
 ROM	3	26	v1c9	figs-idiom	ἐν τῷ νῦν καιρῷ	1		Here, the phrase **at the present time** is an idiom meaning “at this time in history” or “currently.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “at this time in history” or “currently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	3	26	jjwq	figs-idiom	εἰς τὸ εἶναι αὐτὸν	1		This phrase is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God now demonstrates **his righteousness**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order that he would be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 ROM	3	26	ab0w	figs-possession	τὸν ἐκ πίστεως Ἰησοῦ	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **faith** that is related to **Jesus**. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Here, **from faith** could refer to: (1) A person who trusts in Jesus. Alternate translation: “the person who trusts in Jesus” (2) God’s faithfulness demonstrated in Jesus. Alternate translation (place a comma after **making righteous**): “he does this through the faithfulness of Jesus” or “God is the one who demonstrates his righteousness by how faithful Jesus was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-ROM	3	26	ea49	figs-ellipsis	τὸν\n\n	1		A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **is** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “of the one who is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ROM	3	26	ea49	figs-ellipsis	τὸν	1		A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **is** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “of the one who is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	3	27	fjm4	figs-rquestion		0	Where then is boasting? It is excluded	In [3:27–31](../03/27.md), Paul asks a series of rhetorical questions to emphasize that God makes people righteous through **a law of faith**. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	3	27	pub7	figs-abstractnouns	ποῦ οὖν ἡ καύχησις	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **boasting**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “Who then can boast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	3	27	jvnx	figs-ellipsis	 ποῦ οὖν	1		A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **is** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Where then is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv
index 72c18dace5..4cf4c79b4e 100644
--- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv
@@ -1240,7 +1240,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	9	24	mq1d	figs-exmetaphor	οἱ ἐν σταδίῳ τρέχοντες, πάντες μὲν τρέχουσιν, εἷς δὲ λαμβάνει τὸ βραβεῖον? οὕτως τρέχετε, ἵνα καταλάβητε	1	run	Here Paul begins using athletic metaphors, metaphors he will use throughout [9:24–27](../09/24.md). In this verse, he focuses on footraces. In his culture, only the runner who finished first would receive **the prize**. The **prize** might be many things, but often it was a “wreath” of leaves (see [9:25](../09/25.md)). Paul’s point is that the runner who wished to win had to work and train hard to be the best. Paul wants the Corinthians to approach their Christian lives with this mindset, the mindset of a successful athlete. Translate this verse in a way that clearly connects the Christian life to a footrace. Alternate translation: “only one runner receives the prize after a race? You should live your lives like a runner who focuses on receiving the prize” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
 1CO	9	24	gb46		οἱ ἐν σταδίῳ τρέχοντες, πάντες μὲν τρέχουσιν	1	run	Alternate translation: “in a race everyone runs”
 1CO	9	24	mh8z	translate-unknown	βραβεῖον	1	So run in such a way that you might obtain it	Here, **prize** refers to what a runner would receive after winning the race. In Paul’s culture, this would often be a “wreath” of leaves ([9:25](../09/25.md)) and sometimes money. Use a word in your culture that refers generally to what an athlete receives after winning a contest. Alternate translation: “trophy” or “reward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1CO	9	25	l334	translate-unknown	πᾶς…ὁ ἀγωνιζόμενος	1	a wreath that is perishable … one that is imperishable	Here, **everyone competing in the games** refers generally to any athlete who participates in a competition, not just runners as in the last verse. Use a word or phrase in your language that refers to athletes who compete in any sport or competition. Alternate translation: “every competitor in athletic competitions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translatve/translate-unknown]])
+1CO	9	25	l334	translate-unknown	πᾶς…ὁ ἀγωνιζόμενος	1	a wreath that is perishable … one that is imperishable	Here, **everyone competing in the games** refers generally to any athlete who participates in a competition, not just runners as in the last verse. Use a word or phrase in your language that refers to athletes who compete in any sport or competition. Alternate translation: “every competitor in athletic competitions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	9	25	mypo	translate-unknown	ἐγκρατεύεται	1	a wreath that is perishable … one that is imperishable	Here Paul specifically has in mind the way an athlete only eats certain foods, trains their body in difficult ways, and behaves differently than most other people. All of this requires **self-control**. He implies at the end of the verse that **we** too must exercise **self-control**. If possible, use a word or phrase that refers to athletic training but that can be applied to the Christian life as well. Alternate translation: “disciplines themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	9	25	rqey	figs-ellipsis	ἐκεῖνοι μὲν οὖν ἵνα	1	a wreath that is perishable … one that is imperishable	Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. If your language needs these words, you could supply them from the first sentence in the verse. Since English needs these words, the ULT has supplied them in brackets. Alternate translation: “They therefore {exercise self-control} in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	9	25	s0n2	figs-explicit	φθαρτὸν στέφανον	1	a wreath that is perishable … one that is imperishable	Here, the **wreath** refers to a crown made out of leaves gathered from a plant or a tree. This **wreath** was given to an athlete who won a contest as a symbol of their victory. Since the **wreath** was made out of leaves, it was **perishable**. If your readers would misunderstand **perishable wreath**, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that refers to what a winning athlete receives while still emphasizing that this prize is **perishable**. Alternate translation: “a breakable medal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1735,7 +1735,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	12	31	vb1m	figs-imperative	ζηλοῦτε	1	earnestly desire the greater gifts.	Here, the word translated **earnestly desire** could be: (1) an command from Paul. Alternate translation: “you should earnestly desire” (2) a statement about what the Corinthians are doing. Alternate translation: “you are earnestly desiring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 1CO	12	31	jjly	figs-irony	τὰ χαρίσματα τὰ μείζονα	1	earnestly desire the greater gifts.	Here, **greater** could indicate: (1) what Paul thinks are **greater gifts**, which would be the ones that most benefit other believers. Alternate translation: “the gifts that are greater” or “the gifts that help others” (2) what the Corinthians think are the **greater gifts**, which Paul may disagree with. The Corinthians would probably include speaking in tongues as a **greater gift**. If you choose this option, you will need to express **earnestly desire** as a statement, not as an imperative. Alternate translation: “what you think are greater gifts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
 1CO	12	31	r4hl	figs-pastforfuture	ὑμῖν δείκνυμι	1	earnestly desire the greater gifts.	Here Paul introduces what he will tell the Corinthians in the next chapter. Use a natural verb tense in your language for referring to what a person is about to say. Alternate translation: “I am going to show you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-1CO	13	intro	abcg			0		# 1 Corinthians 13 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>8. On spiritual gifts (12:1–14:40)<br>      * (13:1–3)<br>      * (13:4–7)<br>      * (13:8–13)<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Love<br><br>Love is the most important characteristic of the believer. This chapter fully describes love. Paul tells why love is more important than the gifts of the Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/love]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Metaphor<br><br>Paul uses many different metaphors in this chapter. He uses these metaphors to instruct the Corinthians, especially on difficult topics. Readers often need spiritual discernment to understand these teachings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO	13	intro	abcg			0		# 1 Corinthians 13 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n8. On spiritual gifts (12:1–14:40)\n      * The necessity of love (13:1–3)\n      * The characteristics of love (13:4–7)\n      * The enduring nature of love (13:8–13)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Love\n\nPaul’s main topic in this chapter is love. He speaks about how important it is, what it is like, and how it will endure forever. Much of the time, it seems that he is emphasizing love for other people. However, he likely also has love for God in mind. See the notes for ways to translate the abstract noun “love” if your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/love]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Hypothetical situations\n\nIn [13:1–3](../13/01.md), Paul provides three hypothetical situations. He uses these situations to show how essential love is: no matter what other great things a person can do, they must have love. He uses himself as the character in the situations to avoid making someone else an example of a person who does not have love. Consider natural ways to speak about hypothetical situations in your language. If your readers would be confused when Paul uses “I” in the hypothetical situations, you could use a generic reference to a “person” or “someone” instead. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])\n\n### Personification\n\nIn [13:4–8a](../13/04.md), Paul speaks about love as if it were a person who could do things. He speaks in this way because it makes the abstract idea of “love” easier to think about. If your readers would be confused when Paul speaks about love as a person, you could express the idea in another way. See the notes on those verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])\n\n### Child analogy\n\nIn [13:11](../13/11.md), Paul again uses himself as an example. This time he speaks about what he did as a child and what he does as an adult. He speaks in this way to illustrate how some things are appropriate for specific times. For example, speaking like a child is appropriate when one is a child, but it is not appropriate when one is an adult. Paul wishes the Corinthians to apply this reasoning to spiritual gifts and to love. Spiritual gifts are appropriate until Jesus comes back, but then they will no longer be appropriate. On the other hand, love is always appropriate. \n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Non-exhaustive lists\n\nIn [13:4–8a](../13/04.md), Paul provides a list of love’s characteristics. While he mentions many things, he does not intend the list to completely define every characteristic of love. Instead, he wishes to show the Corinthians what love is like. Make sure that your translation does not imply that the characteristics that Paul lists are the only characteristics that love has.\n\n### First person singular and plural\n\nIn [13:1–3](../13/01.md), [11](../13/11.md), [12b](../13/12.md), Paul speaks of himself in the first person singular. In [13:9](../13/09.md), [12a](../13/12.md), Paul includes the Corinthians and other believers with himself by using the first person plural. However, the alternation between singular and plural, especially in [13:11–12](../13/11.md), shows that Paul is not drawing any distinctions between his own experiences and those of other believers. Rather, Paul uses himself as an example, but he also wishes to speak about believers in general. If your readers would find switching between first person singular and first person plural to be confusing, you could use the first person plural throughout. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])\n
 1CO	13	1	n8lm	figs-hypo	ἐὰν ταῖς γλώσσαις τῶν ἀνθρώπων λαλῶ καὶ τῶν ἀγγέλων, ἀγάπην δὲ μὴ ἔχω	1	Connecting Statement:	Here Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Corinthians. He wants them to imagine that he could **speak with tongues of men and of angels** but also that he did **not have love**. He uses himself in this hypothetical situation so that he does not offend the Corinthians by using them as an example of people without **love**. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Suppose that I could speak with the tongues of men and of angels, but also suppose that I did not have love.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 1CO	13	1	cm2n	figs-metonymy	ταῖς γλώσσαις	1	the tongues of … angels	Here, **tongues** refers to something that one does with one’s “tongue,” which is speaking a language. If your readers would misunderstand that **tongues** is a way of speaking about “languages,” you could use a comparable term or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “with the languages” or “in the words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1CO	13	1	axzw	translate-unknown	ταῖς γλώσσαις τῶν ἀνθρώπων…καὶ τῶν ἀγγέλων	1	the tongues of … angels	Here Paul refers to two specific categories of **tongues**: those **of men** and those **of angels**. He does not mean that these are the only kinds of **tongues** that exist, but he does think that these two kinds do exist. If your readers would misunderstand **tongues of men and of angels**, you could use a normal way to refer to various human languages and then also modify it so that you can use it for angelic languages. Alternate translation: “foreign languages and angelic languages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -1744,28 +1744,86 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	13	1	o4y7	figs-doublet	χαλκὸς ἠχῶν ἢ κύμβαλον ἀλαλάζον	1	a clanging cymbal	Here Paul refers to two different loud, metal instruments in his culture. If your culture does not have two different loud, metal instruments, you could refer to just one here. Further, if your culture does not use metal instruments, you could refer to two or one instruments that make a loud noise. Alternate translation: “a noisy cymbal” or “a loud drum” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1CO	13	1	krt1	translate-unknown	χαλκὸς ἠχῶν	1	gong	Here, **a noisy gong** refers to the sound that comes when someone hits a metal object. A **gong** is a metal instrument that someone hits to make a deep, booming sound. You could use a word that identifies a metal instrument in your culture, especially if it makes a loud sound. Alternate translation: “a loud bell” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	13	1	qbx6	translate-unknown	κύμβαλον ἀλαλάζον	1	a clanging cymbal	A **cymbal** is a thin, round metal plate that someone hits with a stick or another **cymbal** to create a loud crashing sound (**clanging**). You could use a word that describes another metal instrument in your culture, especially if it makes a loud, harsh sound. Alternate translation: “loud percussion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1CO	13	2	yx9k	figs-hypo	καὶ ἐὰν ἔχω προφητείαν, καὶ εἰδῶ τὰ μυστήρια πάντα, καὶ πᾶσαν τὴν γνῶσιν, καὶ ἐὰν ἔχω πᾶσαν τὴν πίστιν, ὥστε ὄρη μεθιστάναι, ἀγάπην δὲ μὴ ἔχω	1	a clanging cymbal	
-1CO	13	2	qedk	figs-hyperbole	οὐθέν εἰμι	1	a clanging cymbal	
-1CO	13	3	ar2q	figs-explicit	παραδῶ τὸ σῶμά μου	1	I give my body	The phrase **had over my body** refers to giving up one’s own body to be abused or killed. Alternate translation: “I allow people to persecute or kill me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	13	4	m671	figs-personification	ἡ ἀγάπη μακροθυμεῖ, χρηστεύεται; ἡ ἀγάπη οὐ ζηλοῖ; ἡ ἀγάπη οὐ περπερεύεται, οὐ φυσιοῦται	1	Love is patient and kind … It is not arrogant	Here Paul speaks about **Love** as if it were a person who could do these actions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-1CO	13	5	cp6x	figs-personification		0	Connecting Statement:	Paul continues speaking about love as if it were a person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-1CO	13	5	xt3v	figs-activepassive	οὐ παροξύνεται	1	It is not easily angered	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “no one will be able to make it angry quickly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1CO	13	6	wl5y	figs-personification		0	Connecting Statement:	Paul continues speaking about love as if it were a person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-1CO	13	6	tpz6	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ χαίρει ἐπὶ τῇ ἀδικίᾳ, συνχαίρει δὲ τῇ ἀληθείᾳ	1	It does not rejoice in unrighteousness. Instead, it rejoices in the truth	You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “It rejoices only in righteousness and truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-1CO	13	7	vf6x	figs-personification		0	Connecting Statement:	Paul continues speaking about love as if it were a person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-1CO	13	12	bn3h		βλέπομεν γὰρ ἄρτι δι’ ἐσόπτρου ἐν αἰνίγματι	1	For now we see indirectly in a mirror	In Paul’s day, a **mirror** was made of polished metal rather than glass and provided a dim, vague reflection.
-1CO	13	12	w2eu		βλέπομεν…ἄρτι	1	now we see	This could mean: (1) they now see Christ. (2) they now see God.
-1CO	13	12	xx1g	figs-ellipsis	τότε δὲ πρόσωπον πρὸς πρόσωπον	1	but then face to face	The words “we will see” are implied here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-1CO	13	12	tjq9	figs-synecdoche	τότε δὲ πρόσωπον πρὸς πρόσωπον	1		Here, **face to face** means that we will be physically present with Christ. Alternate translation: “but then we will see Christ face to face” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-1CO	13	12	qp7g	figs-ellipsis	ἐπιγνώσομαι	1	I will know fully	The word “Christ” is understood. Alternate translation: “I will know Christ fully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-1CO	13	12	i28w	figs-activepassive	καθὼς καὶ ἐπεγνώσθην	1	just as I have also been fully known	You can state this as active. Alternate translation: “just as Christ has known me fully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1CO	13	13	nt1y	figs-abstractnouns	πίστις, ἐλπίς, ἀγάπη	1	faith, hope, and love	The abstract nouns **faith**, **hope**, and **love** can be expressed in phrases with verbs. Alternate translation: “we must trust the Lord, be confident that he will do what he has promised, and love him and others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	14	intro	abch			0		# 1 Corinthians 14 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>In this chapter, Paul returns to discussing spiritual gifts.<br><br>Some translations set what is quoted from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the words of verse 21.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Tongues<br><br>Scholars disagree on the exact meaning of the gift of tongues. Paul describes the gift of tongues as a sign for unbelievers. It does not serve the whole church, unless someone interprets what is spoken. It is very important that the church uses this gift properly.<br><br>### Prophecy<br><br>Scholars disagree on the exact meaning of prophecy as a spiritual gift. Paul says prophets can build up the entire church. He describes prophecy as a gift for believers. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])
-1CO	14	1	vl57			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul wants them to know that though teaching is more important because it instructs people, it must be done with love.
-1CO	14	1	x938	figs-personification	διώκετε τὴν ἀγάπην	1	Pursue love	Paul speaks of **love** as if it were a person. Alternate translation: “Follow after love” or “Work hard to love people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-1CO	14	1	ki3l		μᾶλλον…ἵνα προφητεύητε	1	especially that you may prophesy	“work especially hard to be able to prophesy”
-1CO	14	3	r1nx	figs-metaphor	οἰκοδομὴν	1	to build them up	Here, **building up** represents helping people become mature and strong in their faith. See how you translated “builds up” in [1 Corinthians 8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “for strengthening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1CO	14	4	b2mg	figs-metaphor	ἑαυτὸν οἰκοδομεῖ	1	builds up	Here, **builds up** represents helping himself become mature and strong in their faith. See how you translated “builds up” in [1 Corinthians 8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “strengthens himself in the faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO	13	2	yx9k	figs-hypo	καὶ ἐὰν ἔχω προφητείαν, καὶ εἰδῶ τὰ μυστήρια πάντα, καὶ πᾶσαν τὴν γνῶσιν, καὶ ἐὰν ἔχω πᾶσαν τὴν πίστιν, ὥστε ὄρη μεθιστάναι, ἀγάπην δὲ μὴ ἔχω, οὐθέν εἰμι.	1	a clanging cymbal	Here, just as in [13:1](../13/01.md), Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Corinthians. He wants them to imagine that he could **have prophecy and understand all mysteries and all knowledge** and that he could **have all faith so as to remove mountains** but that he did **not have love**. He uses himself in this hypothetical situation so that he does not offend the Corinthians by using them as an example of people without love. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “And suppose that I had all prophecy and understood all mysteries and knowledge, and suppose that I had all faith so as to remove mountains, but also suppose that I did not have love. In that case, I would be nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
+1CO	13	2	st5i	figs-abstractnouns	ἔχω προφητείαν	1	a clanging cymbal	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **prophecy**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “prophesy.” Alternate translation: “I can prophesy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	13	2	d4n5	figs-abstractnouns	τὰ μυστήρια πάντα, καὶ πᾶσαν τὴν γνῶσιν	1	a clanging cymbal	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **mysteries** and **knowledge**, you could express the ideas in another way, such as with adjectives or verbs. Alternate translation: “everything that is secret and worth knowing” or “all that is hidden and all that there is to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	13	2	os3b	figs-abstractnouns	ἔχω πᾶσαν τὴν πίστιν	1	a clanging cymbal	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Paul implies that this is **faith**in God. Alternate translation: “I trust God completely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	13	2	kssy	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε ὄρη μεθιστάναι	1	a clanging cymbal	Here, **so as to** introduces a description of what could result from the **faith**. Paul here uses an extreme example to define how great the **faith** is. If your readers would misunderstand how **remove mountains** relates to **faith**, you could make it clearer that Paul identifies **remove mountains** as an extreme example of what the **faith** can lead to. Alternate translation: “so that I can even remove mountains” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+1CO	13	2	g0pq	figs-abstractnouns	ἀγάπην…μὴ ἔχω	1	a clanging cymbal	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “love.” Alternate translation: “I do not love people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	13	2	qedk	figs-hyperbole	οὐθέν εἰμι	1	a clanging cymbal	Here Paul says that he, if the hypothetical situation were true, would be **nothing**. The Corinthians would have understood him to mean that none of the great things he could do would be worth anything, and he himself would gain no honor or glory from them. Paul does not mean that he would not exist. If your readers would misunderstand **I am nothing**, you could qualify Paul’s claim or indicate that it refers to honor or value. Alternate translation: “I have no value” or “I gain nothing from those great things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+1CO	13	3	d0f4	figs-hypo	κἂν ψωμίσω πάντα τὰ ὑπάρχοντά μου, καὶ ἐὰν παραδῶ τὸ σῶμά μου, ἵνα καυχήσωμαι, ἀγάπην δὲ μὴ ἔχω, οὐδὲν ὠφελοῦμαι	1	I give my body	Here, just as in [13:1–2](../13/01.md), Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Corinthians. He wants them to imagine that he could **give away all** his **possessions** and that he could **hand over** his **body so that** he **might boast** but that he did **not have love**. He uses himself in this hypothetical situation so that he does not offend the Corinthians by using them as an example of people without love. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “And suppose that I gave away all my possessions, and suppose that I handed over my body so that I might boast, but also suppose that I did not have love. In that case, I would gain nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
+1CO	13	3	ar2q	figs-explicit	παραδῶ τὸ σῶμά μου	1	I give my body	Here, **hand over my body** refers to willingly accepting bodily suffering and even death. If your readers would misunderstand **hand over my body**, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “I allow others to hurt my body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	13	3	hjuf	translate-textvariants	καυχήσωμαι	1	I give my body	In Paul’s language, **I might boast** and “I might be burned” look and sound very similar. While many later manuscripts have “I might be burned” here, the earliest manuscripts have **I might boast**. Unless there is a good reason to translate “I might be burned,” it is best to follow the ULT here and translate **I might boast**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+1CO	13	3	g5o3	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἵνα καυχήσωμαι	1	I give my body	Here, **so that** could introduce: (1) a result that comes from “handing over one’s body.” Alternate translation: “that I might then boast” (2) a purpose of “handing over one’s body.” Alternate translation: “in order that I might boast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+1CO	13	3	z8yk	figs-abstractnouns	ἀγάπην…μὴ ἔχω	1	I give my body	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “love.” Alternate translation: “I do not love people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	13	4	m671	figs-personification	ἡ ἀγάπη μακροθυμεῖ, χρηστεύεται; ἡ ἀγάπη οὐ ζηλοῖ; ἡ ἀγάπη οὐ περπερεύεται, οὐ φυσιοῦται	1	Love is patient and kind … It is not arrogant	Here Paul speaks as if **love** were a person who could be **patient**, **kind**, without **envy**, without “boasting,” and **not arrogant**. Paul speaks in this way to describe the abstract idea of **love** in more concrete ways that are easier to think about. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could make Paul’s description of **love** more concrete in another way, such as by speaking about the “people” who **love**. Alternate translation: “If you love others, you are patient {and} kind; you do not envy; you do not boast, you are not arrogant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+1CO	13	4	cr57	figs-ellipsis	μακροθυμεῖ, χρηστεύεται	1	Love is patient and kind … It is not arrogant	Here Paul does not connect **is patient** and **is kind** with any other words. He does this because he wants the Corinthians to think of these two ideas as closely connected. Since English speakers would misunderstand this connection, the ULT has added “and” to clarify that these two ideas are connected. If your readers would also misunderstand the connection, you could add a connecting word like the ULT does or you could express **is kind** as its own thought. Alternate translation: “is patient; it is kind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1CO	13	4	lhwa	figs-doublet	οὐ περπερεύεται, οὐ φυσιοῦται	1	Love is patient and kind … It is not arrogant	Here, **boast** refers to how people try to draw attention to how great they are, often with words. On the other hand, **arrogant** refers to how people think about themselves. If your language has words that fit with these distinctions, you could use them here. If your language does not have words that fit with these distinctions, you could use one general word for “arrogance” or “pride.” Alternate translation: “is not proud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+1CO	13	5	cp6x	figs-personification	οὐκ ἀσχημονεῖ, οὐ ζητεῖ τὰ ἑαυτῆς, οὐ παροξύνεται, οὐ λογίζεται τὸ κακόν	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, just like in [13:4](../13/4.md), Paul speaks as if “love” were a person. Continue to follow the translation strategies you chose in that verse. Alternate translation: “If you love others, you are not rude; you are not seeking your own; you are not easily angered; you do not keep a count of wrongs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+1CO	13	5	l8l6	translate-unknown	οὐκ ἀσχημονεῖ	1	It is not easily angered	Here, **rude** refers to behavior that is shameful or disgraceful. If your readers would misunderstand **rude**, you could use a word that refers to shameful or disgraceful behavior. Alternate translation: “It does not do disgraceful things” or “it is not inappropriate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+1CO	13	5	rj3v	figs-idiom	οὐ ζητεῖ τὰ ἑαυτῆς	1	It is not easily angered	Here, **its own** refers to what is good oneself. In other words, seeking **its own** would mean that “love” is trying to do what is best for itself, not for others. If your readers would misunderstand **it does not seek its own**, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea with a word such as “selfish.” Alternate translation: “it is not selfish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1CO	13	5	xt3v	figs-activepassive	οὐ παροξύνεται	1	It is not easily angered	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive here to focus on the person who is **angered** rather than the one provoking them. If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or generic subject. Alternate translation: “others do not anger them easily” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1CO	13	5	eem0	figs-metaphor	οὐ λογίζεται τὸ κακόν	1	It is not easily angered	Here Paul speaks as if someone could keep **count** of each and every bad thing that others have done as if they were writing them down and adding them up. He speaks in this way to describe how people remember **wrongs** and do not forgive them. If your readers would misunderstand **keep a count of wrongs**, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “it does not hold onto wrongs” or “it is not resentful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO	13	6	wl5y	figs-personification	οὐ χαίρει ἐπὶ τῇ ἀδικίᾳ, συνχαίρει δὲ τῇ ἀληθείᾳ;	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, just like in [13:4–5](../13/4.md), Paul speaks as if “love” were a person. Continue to follow the translation strategies you chose in those verses. Alternate translation: “If you love others, you do not rejoice in unrighteousness, but you rejoice in the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+1CO	13	6	tpz6	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ χαίρει ἐπὶ τῇ ἀδικίᾳ, συνχαίρει δὲ τῇ ἀληθείᾳ;	1	It does not rejoice in unrighteousness. Instead, it rejoices in the truth	Here Paul uses two negative words, **not** and **unrighteousness**, to indicate a positive meaning. If your language does not use two negative words like this, you could instead use one positive word. If you do so, you will have to make the second half a connection instead of a contrast. Alternate translation: “It rejoices in righteousness and in the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+1CO	13	6	koaf	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπὶ τῇ ἀδικίᾳ	1	It does not rejoice in unrighteousness. Instead, it rejoices in the truth	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **unrighteousness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “unrighteous” or an adverb such as “unrighteously.” Alternate translation: “unrighteous acts” or “in what people do unrighteously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	13	6	g57e	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἀληθείᾳ	1	It does not rejoice in unrighteousness. Instead, it rejoices in the truth	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **truth**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “true.” Alternate translation: “in true things” or “things that are true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	13	7	vf6x	figs-personification	πάντα στέγει, πάντα πιστεύει, πάντα ἐλπίζει, πάντα ὑπομένει	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, just like in [13:4–6](../13/4.md), Paul speaks as if “love” were a person. Continue to follow the translation strategies you chose in those verses. Alternate translation: “If you love others, you bear all things, believe all things, hope all things, endure all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+1CO	13	7	ksy2	figs-idiom	πάντα στέγει, πάντα πιστεύει, πάντα ἐλπίζει, πάντα ὑπομένει	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, **all things** refers primarily to the situation or time in which “love” **bears**, **believes**, **hopes**, and **endures**. The phrase **all things** does not mean that “love” **believes** everything it hears or **hopes** for everything that could happen. Rather, the point is that “love” **believes** in every situation and **hopes** at all times. If your readers would misunderstand **all things**, you could express the idea in a way that more clearly refers to time or situation. Alternate translation: “It bears up in every situation, believes in every situation, hopes in every situation, endures in every situation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1CO	13	7	y5dm	figs-explicit	πάντα στέγει, πάντα πιστεύει, πάντα ἐλπίζει, πάντα ὑπομένει	1	Connecting Statement:	If you follow the previous note and understand **all things** as referring to time or situation, then **bears**, **believes**, **hopes**, and **endures** do not have stated objects. Paul does not state the objects because he wants the description to be general and easily applied to many situations. If you must express objects, the verbs **bears** and **endures** imply that a person **bears** and **endures** bad things that other people do. The verbs **believes** and **hopes** imply that a person **believes** and **hopes** that God will do what he has promised to do. Alternate translation: “It bears what others do in every situation; believes God in every situation; hopes in God in every situation; endures what others do in every situation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	13	7	oamf	figs-parallelism	πάντα στέγει, πάντα πιστεύει, πάντα ἐλπίζει, πάντα ὑπομένει	1	Connecting Statement:	Here Paul repeats **all things** and the same structure in four straight clauses. This was rhetorically powerfully in his culture. If your readers would misunderstand why Paul repeats words and structure, and if it would not be rhetorically powerful in your culture, you could eliminate some or all of the repetition and make the statements rhetorically powerful in another way. Alternate translation: “It bears, believes, hopes, and endures all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+1CO	13	7	lfoo	translate-unknown	στέγει	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, **bears** could refer to: (1) holding something back, like the sides of a ship hold back the water. The point here would be that “love” is able to “bear” or withstand bad or frustrating things that other people do. Alternate translation: “It bears with” or “It tolerates” (2) covering something, like a roof covers a house. The point here would be that “love” protects or shields other people from bad things. Alternate translation: “It protects” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+1CO	13	8	o6tv	figs-personification	ἡ ἀγάπη οὐδέποτε πίπτει	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, just like in [13:4–7](../13/4.md), Paul speaks as if **love** were a person. Continue to follow the translation strategies you chose in those verses. Alternate translation: “If you love others, you will never stop doing so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+1CO	13	8	sb1a	figs-doublenegatives	οὐδέποτε πίπτει	1	Connecting Statement:	Here Paul uses two negative words, **never** and **fails**, to indicate a positive meaning. If your language does not use two negative words like this, you could instead use a strong positive word. Alternate translation: “always keeps going” or “love always continues” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+1CO	13	8	jlan	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἴτε…προφητεῖαι, καταργηθήσονται; εἴτε γλῶσσαι, παύσονται; εἴτε γνῶσις, καταργηθήσεται	1	Connecting Statement:	Here Paul uses the conditional form to identify what he is speaking about. He does not think that **prophecies**, **tongues**, and **knowledge** are possibilities. He thinks that they all exist, but he uses **if** to identify each one as the topic of the rest of the clause. If your readers would misunderstand Paul’s use of **if** here, you could express the idea by using a contrast word such as “although” or by simplifying the clauses so that they do not use **if**. Alternate translation: “although {there are} prophecies, they will pass away; although {there are} tongues, they will cease; although {there is} knowledge, it will pass away” or “prophecies will pass away; tongues will cease; knowledge will pass away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+1CO	13	8	ytoy	figs-ellipsis	εἴτε…προφητεῖαι, καταργηθήσονται; εἴτε γλῶσσαι, παύσονται; εἴτε γνῶσις, καταργηθήσεται.	1	Connecting Statement:	Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. If you need these words, you could supply a phrase such as “there are” or “there is.” Since English does need these words in the first clause, the ULT supplies them. You could supply them in just the first clause or in all of the clauses. Alternate translation: “if {there are} prophecies, they will pass away; if {there are} tongues, they will cease; if {there is} knowledge, it will pass away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1CO	13	8	ahfm	figs-metonymy	γλῶσσαι	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, **tongues** refers to something that one does with one’s “tongue,” which is speaking a language. If your readers would misunderstand that tongues is a way of speaking about “languages,” you could use a comparable term or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “special languages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1CO	13	8	wvjp	translate-unknown	γλῶσσαι	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, **tongues** has the same meaning it had in [12:10](../12/10.md), [28](../12/28.md), [30](../12/30.md); [13:1](../13/01.md). Translate it the same way you did in those verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+1CO	13	8	lvov	figs-abstractnouns	γνῶσις, καταργηθήσεται	1	Connecting Statement:	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **knowledge**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “know.” Alternate translation: “secret things that people know, they will pass away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	13	9	ntg7	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, **For** introduces Paul’s reason for saying that prophecies, tongues, and knowledge will pass away. If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a comparable word that introduces a reason why someone has made a claim. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “That is because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+1CO	13	9	es9w	figs-idiom	ἐκ μέρους	-1	Connecting Statement:	Here, **in part** refers to how something is only a **part** of a larger whole. If your readers would misunderstand **in part**, you could use a comparable expression that indicates that something is only part of a larger whole. Alternate translation: “partially … partially” or “imperfectly … imperfectly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1CO	13	10	ezjx	figs-metaphor	ἔλθῃ τὸ τέλειον	1	Connecting Statement:	Here Paul speaks as if **the perfect** could “come,” by which he means that people experience **the perfect**. He uses this metaphor because he uses the verb **comes** also for Jesus’ return (see [4:5](../04/05.md); [11:26](../11/26.md)), and he wishes to identify the coming of **the perfect** with the coming of Jesus. When **the perfect comes** will be when Jesus comes back. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively and connect **the perfect** to Jesus’ return in another way. Alternate translation: “we experience the perfect at Jesus’ return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO	13	10	rt4m	figs-explicit	τὸ τέλειον, τὸ ἐκ μέρους	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, **that which {is} partial** refers back to the “knowing” and “prophesying” in [13:9](../13/09.md). The phrase **the perfect** contrasts with **partial**, so **the perfect** refers to full knowledge and experience of God and of what God says. If your readers would misunderstand what **perfect** and **partial** refer to, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “the perfect experience of God … the partial experience of God, including knowledge and prophecy,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	13	11	tn5r	figs-123person	ὅτε ἤμην νήπιος, ἐλάλουν ὡς νήπιος, ἐφρόνουν ὡς νήπιος, ἐλογιζόμην ὡς νήπιος; ὅτε γέγονα ἀνήρ, κατήργηκα τὰ τοῦ νηπίου	1	Connecting Statement:	Here Paul uses the first person **I** to describe himself as an example, but he implies that most people experience what he describes here. If your readers would misunderstand **I**, you could use a form that provides a general example. Alternate translation: “When people were children, they spoke like children, they thought like children, they reasoned like children. When they became adults, they put away childish things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+1CO	13	11	dx63	figs-parallelism	ἐλάλουν ὡς νήπιος, ἐφρόνουν ὡς νήπιος, ἐλογιζόμην ὡς νήπιος	1	Connecting Statement:	Here Paul repeats **like a child** and the same structure in three straight clauses. This was rhetorically powerfully in his culture. If your readers would misunderstand why Paul repeats words and structure, and if it would not be rhetorically powerful in your culture, you could eliminate some or all of the repetition and make the statements rhetorically powerful in another way. Alternate translation: “I spoke, thought, and reasoned like a child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+1CO	13	11	msy8		γέγονα ἀνήρ	1	Connecting Statement:	Alternate translation: “I became an adult”
+1CO	13	11	sp79	figs-metaphor	κατήργηκα τὰ τοῦ νηπίου	1	Connecting Statement:	Here Paul speaks as if he took **childish things** and **put** them **away** in a box or a closet. He means that he stopped doing **childish things**, such as “speaking,” “thinking,” or “reasoning” **like a child**. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I got rid of childish things” or “I stopped doing childish things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO	13	12	w2eu	figs-explicit	βλέπομεν	1	now we see	Here Paul does not state what it is that **we see**. The Corinthians would have inferred that he meant that **we see** God. If your readers would misunderstand this implication, you could express the idea explicitly. Alternate translation: “we see God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	13	12	mtw1	figs-metaphor	δι’ ἐσόπτρου ἐν αἰνίγματι	1	now we see	Here Paul speaks as if **we** were looking at **a mirror** and could see a reflection **unclearly**. With this metaphor, Paul could be expressing the idea: (1) that **now** we can **see** God only indirectly, like a reflection **in a mirror** is an indirect image. Alternate translation: “an indirect reflection of God, as if we were looking in a mirror” (2) that **now** we can only **see** some things about God, like a **mirror** only imperfectly reflects an image. Alternate translation: “imperfectly, as if we were looking at a vague reflection in a mirror” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO	13	12	bn3h	translate-unknown	δι’ ἐσόπτρου	1	For now we see indirectly in a mirror	In Paul’s culture, **a mirror** was often made of polished metal. Often, these mirrors were relatively high quality and could reflect images well. Use a word in your language that describes something that reflects an image. Alternate translation: “in a looking glass” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+1CO	13	12	xx1g	figs-ellipsis	τότε δὲ πρόσωπον	1	but then face to face	Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul omits these words because he stated them explicitly in the previous clause (**we see**). If your language does need these words, you can supply them from that clause, but in the future tense. Alternate translation: “but then, we will see face” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1CO	13	12	tjq9	figs-idiom	τότε δὲ πρόσωπον πρὸς πρόσωπον	1		Here, **face to face** identifies an action or situation as something that takes place in person. In other words, a person can actually see the other person’s **face**. If your readers would misunderstand **face to face**, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “but then, eye to eye” or “but then, in God’s direct presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1CO	13	12	x54w	figs-explicit	τότε	-1		Here, **then** refers to the time when Jesus comes back and what happens after that. If your readers would misunderstand what **then** refers to, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “then, when Jesus returns, … then, when Jesus returns,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	13	12	mgd5	writing-pronouns	ἄρτι γινώσκω ἐκ μέρους; τότε δὲ ἐπιγνώσομαι, καθὼς καὶ ἐπεγνώσθην	1		Here Paul switches from first person plural to first person singular. Since he is using himself as an example for every believer, there is no special meaning behind the switch. Rather, Paul changes from plural to singular because it was good style in his culture. If your readers would misunderstand the change from plural to singular, you could express this verse in first person plural as well, or you could include words that clarify that Paul is using himself as an example. Alternate translation: “Now I, for example, know in part, but then I will know fully, just as I also have been fully known” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+1CO	13	12	qp7g	figs-explicit	γινώσκω…ἐπιγνώσομαι	1	I will know fully	Again, Paul does not state what it is that **I know**. The Corinthians would have inferred that he meant that **I know** God. If your readers would misunderstand this implication, you could express the idea explicitly. Alternate translation: “I know God … I will know God fully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	13	12	acp3	figs-idiom	ἐκ μέρους	1	I will know fully	Here, just as in [13:9](../13/09.md), **in part** refers to how something is only a **part** of a larger whole. If your readers would misunderstand **in part**, you could use a comparable expression that indicates that something is only **part** of a larger whole. Alternate translation: “partially” or “imperfectly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1CO	13	12	i28w	figs-activepassive	καὶ ἐπεγνώσθην	1	just as I have also been fully known	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive here to focus on the person who is **known** rather than the one doing the “knowing.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God has also fully known me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1CO	13	13	peiw	grammar-connect-words-phrases	νυνὶ	1	faith, hope, and love	Here, **now** could function to: (1) introduce a summary statement about how things are. Alternate translation: “as it is,” (2) give the time during which **these three remain**. Alternate translation: “in the present,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+1CO	13	13	jblt		μένει…τὰ τρία ταῦτα	1	faith, hope, and love	This could indicate that: (1) **these three** will **remain** forever, even after Jesus comes back, in contrast to prophecies, tongues, and knowledge in [13:8](../13/08.md), which will “pass away.” Alternate translation: “these three will never pass away” (2) **these three remain** in the present life of believers. Alternate translation: “these three continue on”
+1CO	13	13	yzuz	figs-infostructure	μένει πίστις, ἐλπίς, ἀγάπη, τὰ τρία ταῦτα	1	faith, hope, and love	Here Paul introduces **these three** and then goes on to name them at the end of the sentence. If your readers would misunderstand this structure, you could rearrange pieces of the sentence. Alternate translation: “faith, hope, {and} love remain, these three” or “three things, faith, hope, {and} love, remain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+1CO	13	13	nt1y	figs-abstractnouns	πίστις, ἐλπίς, ἀγάπη	1	faith, hope, and love	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **faith**, **hope**, and **love**, you could express ideas by using verbs. If you do so, you may need to specify objects for those verbs. Paul implies that **faith** is in God, **hope** is in what God has promised, and **love** is for God and others. Alternate translation: “trusting in God, hopefully waiting for God to act for us, and loving people and God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	13	13	iw8o	figs-ellipsis	πίστις, ἐλπίς, ἀγάπη	1	faith, hope, and love	Here Paul simply lists the three things without using connecting words. Since English speakers expect a connecting word before the last item in a list, the ULT has included **and** here. If your readers would also expect one or several connecting words in a list, you could include them. Alternate translation: “faith and hope and love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1CO	13	13	l4wx	figs-explicit	μείζων…τούτων	1	faith, hope, and love	Here Paul does not explicitly say why **love** is **the greatest**. He could imply that: (1) loving God and others is the most important thing to do. Alternate translation: “the most significant of these” (2) **love** is the only one of the **three** that continues after Jesus comes back, and so it is the only one that lasts. Alternate translation: “the most enduring of these” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	13	13	pw69	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἀγάπη	1	faith, hope, and love	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “love.” Paul implies that the **love** is for God and others. Alternate translation: “{is} loving people and God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	14	intro	abch			0		# 1 Corinthians 14 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n8. On spiritual gifts (12:1–14:40)\n      * (14:1–25)\n      * (14:26–40)\n\nSome translations set what is quoted from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the words of verse 21.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Tongues\n\nScholars disagree on the exact meaning of the gift of tongues. Paul describes the gift of tongues as a sign for unbelievers. It does not serve the whole church, unless someone interprets what is spoken. It is very important that the church uses this gift properly.\n\n### Prophecy\n\nScholars disagree on the exact meaning of prophecy as a spiritual gift. Paul says prophets can build up the entire church. He describes prophecy as a gift for believers. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])\n\n### Building up\n\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Holy Spirit or human spirit?\n\n### Woman or wife?\n
+1CO	14	1	vl57	figs-metaphor	διώκετε	1	Connecting Statement:	Here Paul speaks as if he wants the Corinthians to run after and try to capture **love**. He speaks in this way because he wants them to act in **love** as persistently as someone who “pursues” someone or something. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “Consistently act in” or “Chase after” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO	14	1	nuf8	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἀγάπην	1	Connecting Statement:	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “love.” Paul implies that the object of **love** is other people. Alternate translation: “loving others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	14	1	n7ac	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ζηλοῦτε δὲ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, **but** introduces the next topic that Paul wishes to speak about. If your readers would misunderstand **but** and think that Paul is contrasting **Pursue love** and **be zealous for spiritual gifts**, you could use another word that introduces a new topic, or you could start a new sentence here. If you use the second alternate translation, you may need to add period before it. Alternate translation: “and be zealous for” or “Be zealous for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+1CO	14	1	x938	translate-unknown	ζηλοῦτε	1	Pursue love	Here, to **be zealous for** something means that one seeks after it or desires it. If your readers would misunderstand **be zealous for**, you could use a comparable expression. Alternate translation: “set your heart on” or “seek after” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+1CO	14	1	ki3l		μᾶλλον	1	especially that you may prophesy	Here, **especially** could mean: (1) that prophecy is the best **gift** to **be zealous** for. Alternate translation: “above all” (2) that prophecy is better than **spiritual gifts**. Alternate translation: “more than that,”
+1CO	14	2	bdhf	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	especially that you may prophesy	Here, **For** introduces the reasons why Paul wants the Corinthians to especially desire to prophesy. These reasons are found in [14:2–4](../14/02.md). If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a comparable way to introduce reasons for a claim. Alternate translation: “Here is why you should be zealous for prophecy:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+1CO	14	2	ii60	figs-genericnoun	ὁ…λαλῶν γλώσσῃ	1	especially that you may prophesy	Paul is speaking of people “who speak in tongues” in general, not of one particular person. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could use a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “anyone who speaks in a tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+1CO	14	2	ftxf	translate-unknown	γλώσσῃ	1	especially that you may prophesy	Here and throughout this chapter, translate **tongue** and “tongues” as you did in [13:1](../13/01.md), [8](../13/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+1CO	14	2	q21u	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώποις…δὲ λαλεῖ	1	especially that you may prophesy	Although the words **men** and **he** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “to humans … but he or she speaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+1CO	14	2	uvxu	figs-abstractnouns	μυστήρια	1	especially that you may prophesy	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **mysteries**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “secret” or “mysterious.” Alternate translation: “mysterious words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	14	2	oiai		πνεύματι	1	especially that you may prophesy	Here, **spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, which enables or empowers the person to speak in the **tongue**. Alternate translation: “in God’s Spirit” or “by the power of God’s Spirit” (2) the person’s spirit, which refers to the interior life of a person. It is from this interior life that the **tongue** originates. Alternate translation: “in his spirit”
+1CO	14	3	iw24	figs-genericnoun	ὁ…προφητεύων	1	to build them up	Paul is speaking of people “who prophesy” in general, not of one particular person. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could use a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “anyone who prophesies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+1CO	14	3	up3s	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώποις	1	to build them up	Although **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If your readers would misunderstand **men**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “to humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+1CO	14	3	r1nx	figs-metaphor	οἰκοδομὴν	1	to build them up	Paul here speaks as if believers were a building that one “builds up.” With this metaphor, he emphasizes that **the one who prophesies** helps other believers become stronger and more mature, just like the one who builds a house makes it strong and complete. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. See how you translated this metaphor in [8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “for growth” or “for edification” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO	14	3	zv5l	figs-doublet	παράκλησιν, καὶ παραμυθίαν	1	to build them up	Here, **encouragement** refers primarily to “encouraging” others to act or think in a specific way. On the other hand, **consolation** refers primarily to “comforting” others in grief or pain. If your language has words that fit with these distinctions, you could use them here. If your language does not have words that fit with these distinctions, you could use one general word for “exhortation” or **encouragement**. Alternate translation: “exhortation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+1CO	14	3	ypx0	figs-abstractnouns	παράκλησιν, καὶ παραμυθίαν	1	to build them up	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **encouragement** and **consolation**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “encourage” and “console.” Alternate translation: “encouraging and consoling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	14	4	k612	figs-genericnoun	ὁ λαλῶν γλώσσῃ…ὁ…προφητεύων	1	builds up	Here, just as in [14:2–3](../14/02.md), Paul is speaking of people “who prophesy” and people “who speak in tongues” in general, not of two particular people. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could use a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “Anyone who speaks in a tongue … anyone who prophesies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+1CO	14	4	b2mg	figs-metaphor	ἑαυτὸν οἰκοδομεῖ…ἐκκλησίαν οἰκοδομεῖ	1	builds up	Just as in [14:3](../14/03.md), Paul here speaks as if believers were a building that one **builds up**. With this metaphor, he emphasizes that **The one who speaks in a tongue** helps himself or herself become stronger and more mature, while **the one who prophesies** helps other believers become stronger and more mature, just like the one who builds a house makes it strong and complete. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “helps himself grow … helps the church grow” or “edifies himself … edifies the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	14	5	z5my	figs-synecdoche	μείζων δὲ ὁ προφητεύων	1	Now the one who prophesies is greater	Paul is emphasizing that the gift of prophecy is greater than the gift of speaking in tongues. Alternate translation: “The one who prophesies has a greater gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 1CO	14	5	g9k1		διερμηνεύῃ	1	he would interpret	This means to tell what someone has said in a language to others who do not understand that language. See how this is translated in [1 Corinthians 2:13](../02/13.md).
 1CO	14	6	l71k	figs-rquestion	ἐὰν ἔλθω πρὸς ὑμᾶς γλώσσαις λαλῶν, τί ὑμᾶς ὠφελήσω, ἐὰν μὴ ὑμῖν λαλήσω, ἢ ἐν ἀποκαλύψει, ἢ ἐν γνώσει, ἢ ἐν προφητείᾳ, ἢ διδαχῇ?	1	how will I benefit you?	This can be a statement. Alternate translation: “if I come to you speaking in tongues, I will not benefit you, unless I speak to you either in revelation or in knowledge or in prophecy or teaching.” or “if I come to you speaking in tongues, I will not have done anything that helps you, unless I speak to you either in revelation or in knowledge or in prophecy or teaching.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
diff --git a/en_tn_52-COL.tsv b/en_tn_52-COL.tsv
index 64b018c85c..7b2c7fec36 100644
--- a/en_tn_52-COL.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_52-COL.tsv
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ COL	1	11	xqlu	figs-hendiadys	ὑπομονὴν καὶ μακροθυμίαν	1
 COL	1	11	uqtt	figs-abstractnouns	πᾶσαν ὑπομονὴν καὶ μακροθυμίαν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **endurance** and **patience**, you could express the ideas with verbal phrases. Alternate translation: “endure always and wait patiently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 COL	1	11	jzk9		πᾶσαν ὑπομονὴν καὶ μακροθυμίαν μετὰ χαρᾶς	1		Here, **with joy** could describe (1) the way that the Colossians are to have endurance and patience (2) the way that the Colossians are to give thanks in verse 12. Alternate translation: “all endurance and patience”
 COL	1	12	zsdp		εὐχαριστοῦντες	1	who has made you able to share	Some Bible versions connect the phrase “with joy” at the end of verse 11 to the phrase at the beginning of verse 12, instead of connecting it to verse 11. Alternate translation: “with joy giving thanks”
-COL	1	12	t5lw	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τῷ Πατρὶ	1	who has made you able to share	\*\*Father\*\* is an important title that describes the relationship between God and Jesus, and it also describes the relationship between God and believers, who are adopted children. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+COL	1	12	t5lw	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τῷ Πατρὶ	1	who has made you able to share	**Father** is an important title that describes the relationship between God and Jesus, and it also describes the relationship between God and believers, who are adopted children. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 COL	1	12	lt2q		ἱκανώσαντι ὑμᾶς	1	who has made you able	Alternate translation: “who has qualified you”
 COL	1	12	ss5g	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς τὴν μερίδα τοῦ κλήρου τῶν ἁγίων	1		This is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God made the Colossians **able**. In your translation, follow the conventions of your language for purpose clauses. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “so that you can share the inheritance of the saints” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 COL	1	12	r2zw	figs-possession	τὴν μερίδα τοῦ κλήρου	1	the inheritance	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **share** that is characterized by **inheritance**. If your language does not use this form to express that meaning, you could use a verbal phrase like “receive your portion of” or “take part in.” Alternate translation: “to take part in the inheritance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
diff --git a/en_tn_67-REV.tsv b/en_tn_67-REV.tsv
index ce577e73fa..3cfd6e582d 100644
--- a/en_tn_67-REV.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_67-REV.tsv
@@ -1,93 +1,123 @@
 Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNote
-REV	front	intro	xx8l			0		# Introduction to Revelation\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of Revelation\n\n1. Opening (1:1-20)\n2. Letters to the seven churches (2:1-3:22)\n3. Vision of God in heaven, and a vision of the Lamb (4:1-11)\n4. The seven seals (6:1-8:1)\n5. The seven trumpets (8:2-13:18)\n6. Worshipers of the Lamb, the martyrs, and the harvest of wrath (14:1-20)\n7. The seven bowls (15:1-18:24)\n8. Worship in heaven (19:1-10)\n9. The Lamb’s judgment, the destruction of the beast, the thousand years, the destruction of Satan, and the final judgment (20:11-15)\n10. The new creation and the new Jerusalem (21:1-22:5)\n11. Jesus’ promise to return, the witness from the angels, John’s closing words, Christ’s message to his church, the invitation and the warning (22:6-21)\n\n### Who wrote the Book of Revelation?\n\nThe author identified himself as John. This was probably the Apostle John. He wrote the Book of Revelation while on the island of Patmos. The Romans exiled John there for teaching people about Jesus.\n\n### What is the Book of Revelation about?\n\nJohn wrote the Book of Revelation to encourage believers to remain faithful even when they are suffering. John described visions he had of Satan and his followers fighting against and killing believers. In the visions God causes many terrible things to happen on the earth to punish wicked people. In the end, Jesus defeats Satan and his followers. Then Jesus comforts those who were faithful. And the believers will live forever with God in the new heavens and earth.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by one of its traditional titles, “Revelation,” “The Revelation of Jesus Christ,” “The Revelation to Saint John,” or “The Apocalypse of John.” Or they may choose a possibly clearer title, such as “The Things that Jesus Christ Showed to John.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n### What type of writing is the Book of Revelation?\n\nJohn used a special style of writing to describe his visions. John described what he saw by using many symbols. This style of writing is called symbolic prophecy or apocalyptic literature. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### Are the events of Revelation past or future?\n\nSince early Christian times, scholars have interpreted Revelation differently. Some scholars think John described events that happened during his time. Some scholars think John described events happening from his time until the return of Jesus. Other scholars think John described events that will happen in a short period of time just before Christ returns.\n\nTranslators will not need to decide how to interpret the book before they translate it. Translators should leave the prophecies in the tenses that are used in the ULT.\n\n### Are there any other books in the Bible like Revelation?\n\nNo other book of the Bible is like the Book of Revelation. But, passages in Ezekiel, Zechariah, and especially Daniel are similar in content and style to Revelation. It may be beneficial to translate Revelation at the same time as Daniel since they have some imagery and style in common.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### Does one need to understand the Book of Revelation to translate it?\n\nOne does not need to understand all of the symbols in the Book of Revelation to translate it properly. Translators should not give possible meanings for the symbols or numbers in their translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])\n\n### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in Revelation in the ULT?\n\nThe scriptures use these words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating Revelation into English, the ULT uses the following principles:\n\n*   The meaning in two passages indicates moral holiness. Here, the ULT uses “holy.” (See: 14:12; 22:11)\n*   Usually the meaning in Revelation indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 5:8; 8:3, 4; 11:18; 13:7; 16:6; 17:6; 18:20, 24; 19:8; 20:9)\n*   Sometimes the meaning implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “sanctify,” “set apart,” “dedicated to,” or “reserved for.”\n\nThe UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.\n\n### Periods of time\n\nJohn referred to various periods of time in Revelation. For example, there are many references to forty-two months, seven years, and three and a half days. Some scholars think these time periods are symbolic. Other scholars think these are actual time periods. The translator should treat these time periods as referencing actual periods of time. It is then up to the interpreter to determine their significance or what they may represent.\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Revelation?\n\nFor the following verses, some modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.\n\n*   “‘I am the alpha and the omega,’ says the Lord God, ‘the one who is, and who was, and who is to come, the Almighty’” (1:8). Some versions add the phrase “the Beginning and the End.”\n*   “the elders prostrated themselves and worshiped” (5:14). Some older versions read, “the twenty-four elders prostrated themselves and worshiped the one who lives forever and ever.”\n*   “so that a third of it \\[the earth\\] was burned up” (8:7). Some older versions do not include this phrase.\n*   “the one who is and who was” (11:17). Some versions add the phrase “and who is to come.”\n*   “they are blameless” (14:5). Some versions add the phrase “before the throne of God” (14:5).\n*   “the one who is and who was, the Holy One” (16:5). Some older versions read, “O Lord, the One who is and who was and who is to be.”\n*   “The nations will walk by the light of that city” (21:24). Some older versions read, “The nations that are saved will walk by the light of that city.”\n*   “Blessed are those who wash their robes” (22:14). Some older versions read “Blessed are those who do his commandments.”\n*   “God will take away his share in the tree of life and in the holy city” (22:19). Some older versions read, “God will take away his share in the book of life and in the holy city.”\n\n(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-REV	1	intro	u1e2			0		# Revelation 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThis chapter explains how the Book of Revelation records the vision John received on the island of Patmos.\n\nSome translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words in verse 7.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Seven churches\n\nJohn wrote this book to seven actual churches in Asia Minor, which is now the country of Turkey.\n\n### White\n\nThe Bible often speaks of something that belongs to a person as being “white.” This is metaphor and metonym for that person living rightly and pleasing God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])\n\n### “Him who is, and who was, and who is to come”\n\nGod exists now. He has always existed. He will always exist. Your language may have a different way of saying this.\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Blood\n\nBlood is a metonym for death. Jesus “has released us from our sins by his blood.” John means that Jesus saved us from our sins by dying for us. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “He is coming with the clouds”\n\nJesus went into the clouds when he went up to heaven after God raised him from the dead. When Jesus returns, he will also be “with the clouds.” It is not clear whether he will be sitting or riding on clouds or coming in the clouds or “with the clouds” in some other way. Your translation should express this in a way that is natural in your language.\n\n### “One like a son of man”\n\nThis refers to Jesus. You should translate the words “son of man” using the same words as you did in the Gospels for when Jesus called himself the “Son of Man.”\n\n### “The angels of the seven churches”\n\nThe word “angels” here can also mean “messengers.” This might refer to heavenly beings, or to the messengers or leaders of these seven churches. John uses the same word “angel” (singular) in verse 1 and in many other places throughout the book. Your translation should also use the same word.
-REV	1	1	kv41	translate/translate-names	ἀποκάλυψις Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	General Information:	This is an introduction to the book of Revelation. It explains that it is a revelation from Jesus Christ and it gives a blessing to those who read it. Translators may choose to call this book by one of its traditional titles, "Revelation," "The Revelation of Jesus Christ," "The Revelation to Saint John," or "The Apocalypse of John." Alternatively, translators also can choose a more explanatory title, such as "The Things that Jesus Christ Showed to John" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-REV	1	1	ik5v		τοῖς δούλοις αὐτοῦ	1	his servants	Here, **his slaves** refers to people who believe in Jesus Christ. Alternative translation: "his servants"
+REV	front	intro	xx8l			0		# Introduction to Revelation<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of the Book of Revelation<br><br>1. Opening (1:1-20)<br>2. Letters to the seven churches (2:1-3:22)<br>3. Vision of God in heaven, and a vision of the Lamb (4:1-11)<br>4. The seven seals (6:1-8:1)<br>5. The seven trumpets (8:2-13:18)<br>6. Worshipers of the Lamb, the martyrs, and the harvest of wrath (14:1-20)<br>7. The seven bowls (15:1-18:24)<br>8. Worship in heaven (19:1-10)<br>9. The Lamb’s judgment, the destruction of the beast, the thousand years, the destruction of Satan, and the final judgment (20:11-15)<br>10. The new creation and the new Jerusalem (21:1-22:5)<br>11. Jesus’ promise to return, the witness from the angels, John’s closing words, Christ’s message to his church, the invitation and the warning (22:6-21)<br><br>### Who wrote the Book of Revelation?<br><br>The author identified himself as John. This was probably the Apostle John. He wrote the Book of Revelation while on the island of Patmos. The Romans exiled John there for teaching people about Jesus.<br><br>### What is the Book of Revelation about?<br><br>John wrote the Book of Revelation to encourage believers to remain faithful even when they are suffering. John described visions he had of Satan and his followers fighting against and killing believers. In the visions God causes many terrible things to happen on the earth to punish wicked people. In the end, Jesus defeats Satan and his followers. Then Jesus comforts those who were faithful. And the believers will live forever with God in the new heavens and earth.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by one of its traditional titles, “Revelation,” “The Revelation of Jesus Christ,” “The Revelation to Saint John,” or “The Apocalypse of John.” Or they may choose a possibly clearer title, such as “The Things that Jesus Christ Showed to John.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>### What type of writing is the Book of Revelation?<br><br>John used a special style of writing to describe his visions. John described what he saw by using many symbols. This style of writing is called symbolic prophecy or apocalyptic literature. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### Are the events of Revelation past or future?<br><br>Since early Christian times, scholars have interpreted Revelation differently. Some scholars think John described events that happened during his time. Some scholars think John described events happening from his time until the return of Jesus. Other scholars think John described events that will happen in a short period of time just before Christ returns.<br><br>Translators will not need to decide how to interpret the book before they translate it. Translators should leave the prophecies in the tenses that are used in the ULT.<br><br>### Are there any other books in the Bible like Revelation?<br><br>No other book of the Bible is like the Book of Revelation. But, passages in Ezekiel, Zechariah, and especially Daniel are similar in content and style to Revelation. It may be beneficial to translate Revelation at the same time as Daniel since they have some imagery and style in common.<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### Does one need to understand the Book of Revelation to translate it?<br><br>One does not need to understand all of the symbols in the Book of Revelation to translate it properly. Translators should not give possible meanings for the symbols or numbers in their translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])<br><br>### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in Revelation in the ULT?<br><br>The scriptures use these words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating Revelation into English, the ULT uses the following principles:<br><br>* The meaning in two passages indicates moral holiness. Here, the ULT uses “holy.” (See: 14:12; 22:11)<br>* Usually the meaning in Revelation indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 5:8; 8:3, 4; 11:18; 13:7; 16:6; 17:6; 18:20, 24; 19:8; 20:9)<br>* Sometimes the meaning implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “sanctify,” “set apart,” “dedicated to,” or “reserved for.”<br><br>The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.<br><br>### Periods of time<br><br>John referred to various periods of time in Revelation. For example, there are many references to forty-two months, seven years, and three and a half days. Some scholars think these time periods are symbolic. Other scholars think these are actual time periods. The translator should treat these time periods as referencing actual periods of time. It is then up to the interpreter to determine their significance or what they may represent.<br><br>### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Revelation?<br><br>For the following verses, some modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.<br><br>* “‘I am the alpha and the omega,’ says the Lord God, ‘the one who is, and who was, and who is to come, the Almighty’” (1:8). Some versions add the phrase “the Beginning and the End.”<br>* “the elders prostrated themselves and worshiped” (5:14). Some older versions read, “the twenty-four elders prostrated themselves and worshiped the one who lives forever and ever.”<br>* “so that a third of it \\[the earth\\] was burned up” (8:7). Some older versions do not include this phrase.<br>* “the one who is and who was” (11:17). Some versions add the phrase “and who is to come.”<br>* “they are blameless” (14:5). Some versions add the phrase “before the throne of God” (14:5).<br>* “the one who is and who was, the Holy One” (16:5). Some older versions read, “O Lord, the One who is and who was and who is to be.”<br>* “The nations will walk by the light of that city” (21:24). Some older versions read, “The nations that are saved will walk by the light of that city.”<br>* “Blessed are those who wash their robes” (22:14). Some older versions read “Blessed are those who do his commandments.”<br>* “God will take away his share in the tree of life and in the holy city” (22:19). Some older versions read, “God will take away his share in the book of life and in the holy city.”<br><br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+REV	1	intro	u1e2			0		# Revelation 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>### Outline of Chapter One of Revelation<br><br>I. The Introduction to Revelation<br><br>A. The Prologue (1:1-8)<br><br>1. The Preface (1:1-3)<br>2. The Address and the Doxology (1:4-6)<br>3. The Book’s Theme (1:7-8)<br><br>II. John’s Vision of Christ<br><br>B. John’s Appointment to Write the Book of Revelation (1:9-20)<br><br>1. The Initial Appointment to Write (1:9-11)<br>2. The Source of the Appointment (1:12-16)<br>3. The Appointment Repeated and Elaborated (1:17-20)<br><br>This chapter explains how the Book of Revelation records the vision John received on the island of Patmos.<br><br>Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words in verse 7.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Seven churches<br><br>John wrote this book to seven actual churches in Asia Minor, which is now the country of Turkey.<br><br>### White<br><br>The Bible often speaks of something that belongs to a person as being “white.” This is metaphor and metonym for that person living rightly and pleasing God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])<br><br>### “Him who is, and who was, and who is to come”<br><br>God exists now. He has always existed. He will always exist. Your language may have a different way of saying this.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Blood<br><br>Blood is a metonym for death. Jesus “has released us from our sins by his blood.” John means that Jesus saved us from our sins by dying for us. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### “He is coming with the clouds”<br><br>Jesus went into the clouds when he went up to heaven after God raised him from the dead. When Jesus returns, he will also be “with the clouds.” It is not clear whether he will be sitting or riding on clouds or coming in the clouds or “with the clouds” in some other way. Your translation should express this in a way that is natural in your language.<br><br>### “One like a son of man”<br><br>This refers to Jesus. You should translate the words “son of man” using the same words as you did in the Gospels for when Jesus called himself the “Son of Man.”<br><br>### “The angels of the seven churches”<br><br>The word “angels” here can also mean “messengers.” This might refer to heavenly beings, or to the messengers or leaders of these seven churches. John uses the same word “angel” (singular) in verse 1 and in many other places throughout the book. Your translation should also use the same word.
+REV	1	1	rkh9	figs-abstractnouns	ἀποκάλυψις Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **revelation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “What God disclosed to Jesus Christ” or “The matters that God revealed to Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+REV	1	1	kv41	figs-possession	ἀποκάλυψις Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	General Information:	This phrase could mean: (1) this book is **revelation** that came to Jesus from God. Alternate translation: “revelation to Jesus Christ” (2) this book is **revelation** that came from Jesus to the author of the book, namely John. Alternate translation: “revelation from Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+REV	1	1	ik5v	figs-explicit	τοῖς δούλοις αὐτοῦ	1	his servants	Here, **his servants** refers to people who believe in Jesus Christ and serve him as their Lord. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternative translation: “those who serve him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 REV	1	1	x8bu		ἃ δεῖ γενέσθαι ἐν τάχει	1	what must soon take place	Alternate translation: “the events that must happen soon”
-REV	1	1	kez4	writing-pronoun	ἐσήμανεν	1	made it known	Alternate translation: “He communicated it.” The subject of the sentence is a pronoun that refers to Jesus Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronoun]])
-REV	1	1	pb4u	figs-123person	τῷ δούλῳ αὐτοῦ, Ἰωάννῃ	1	to his servant John	The Apostle **John** wrote this book and was referring to himself here. Alternate translation: “to me, John, his servant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-REV	1	2	tgts	writing-pronoun	ὃς ἐμαρτύρησεν	1		Alternate translation: “He affirmed.” The subject of the sentence is a relative pronoun that refers to the author John. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronoun]])
-REV	1	2	va4c		τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the word of God	Alternate translation: “the message that God spoke”
-REV	1	2	b5se		τὴν μαρτυρίαν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	the testimony of Jesus Christ	Here, the **personal attestation** refers to the testimony that Jesus Christ has given about the personal revelation received directly from God to show to the servants of Christ, such as the author John in this case.
-REV	1	3	le65	figs-genericnoun	ὁ ἀναγινώσκων	1	the one who reads aloud	Here, **the one who reads** does not refer to a specific person. It refers to anyone **who reads** the words of the prophecy aloud or in public. Alternate translation: “anyone who reads aloud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
-REV	1	3	cbzn		μακάριος	1		Here, **Fortunate** and **Happy** both refer to someone who is happy as a result of God blessing that individual. A person who is blessed becomes happy as a result of God greatly benefiting that individual. Alternate translation: "Blessed"
+REV	1	1	kez4	writing-pronouns	ἐσήμανεν	1	made it known	The pronoun **he** here refers to **Jesus Christ**. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus communicated it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+REV	1	1	hz2w	translate-names	Ἰωάννῃ	1		**John** is the name of a man who was Jesus’ disciple and one of the original twelve apostles. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+REV	1	1	pb4u	figs-123person	τῷ δούλῳ αὐτοῦ, Ἰωάννῃ	1	to his servant John	The Apostle **John** is referring to himself in the third person here. If this is confusing in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “to me, John, his servant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+REV	1	2	tgts	writing-pronoun	ὃς ἐμαρτύρησεν	1		The subject of this sentence is the author John. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “John testified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronoun]])
+REV	1	2	va4c	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the word of God	Here, John uses **word** figuratively to refer to the message that God said by using words. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message that God spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+REV	1	2	wb7z	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν μαρτυρίαν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **testimony**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what Jesus Christ testified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+REV	1	2	b5se	figs-possession	τὴν μαρτυρίαν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	the testimony of Jesus Christ	John is using the possessive form to describe the **testimony** that **Jesus Christ** has given about the personal revelation received directly from God and then given in prophecy by the book’s author John. If this is not clear in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the testimony that Jesus Christ has given him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+REV	1	3	le65	figs-genericnoun	ὁ ἀναγινώσκων	1	the one who reads aloud	Here, **the one who reads** does not refer to a specific person. It refers to anyone **who reads** the words of the prophecy aloud or in public. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “anyone who reads aloud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 REV	1	3	h37b	figs-activepassive	τηροῦντες τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ γεγραμμένα	1	obey what is written in it	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “who keep what John has written in it” or “who obey what they read in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-REV	1	3	t0q3		τῆς προφητείας	1		Here, **this prophecy** refers to the book of John's apocalypse mentioned in verse 1:1. A **prophecy** represents an act of a prophet declaring the words of God's message towards the intended audience to which God directs his prophet to speak the prophecy's contents. Prophecies relate to matters that are both within the present and also in the future, as the book of Revelation itself demonstrates. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])
-REV	1	3	dwt8		ὁ…καιρὸς ἐγγύς	2	the time is near	Here, **the chosen moment** represents the appointed time that God will make all the things which are mentioned in John's book of prophecy to happen within a schedule which will occur very soon, which is to say, quickly. Alternate translation: “the things that must happen will soon happen”
-REV	1	4	vw1t		Ἰωάννης ταῖς ἑπτὰ ἐκκλησίαις ταῖς ἐν τῇ Ἀσίᾳ	1	General Information:	This is the beginning of John’s letter. Here, John names himself as the book's author and also greets seven churches in the Roman province of Asia, which is now in southwestern Turkey, to whom he is writing the letter.
-REV	1	4	y9yh	figs-abstractnouns	χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ ὁ ὢν, καὶ ὁ ἦν, καὶ ὁ ἐρχόμενος, καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν ἑπτὰ πνευμάτων, ἃ ἐνώπιον τοῦ θρόνου αὐτοῦ	1	May grace be to you and peace from the one who is … and from the seven spirits	The expression is a wish or blessing. John speaks as if **Grace** and **peace** were things that God could give, although they are really ways in which he hopes God will act for his people. Alternate translation: "May the one who is, and who was, and who is coming, and the seven spirits who are before his throne treat you kindly and enable you to live peacefully and securely" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
-REV	1	4	unul	writing-pronouns	ἀπὸ ὁ ὢν	1		Here, **the one** refers to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could translate the pronoun as God explicitly. (See: [[rc://en\\_ta/translate/writing-pronouns/01.md]])
-REV	1	4	qsu6	figs-metaphor	ὁ ἐρχόμενος	1	who is to come	Existing in the future is spoken of as **coming**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-REV	1	4	x38p	writing-symlanguage	ἑπτὰ πνευμάτων	1	seven spirits	The number **seven** is a symbol of completeness and perfection. The **seven spirits** refers either to the Spirit of God or to seven spirits who serve God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
-REV	1	5	w24x		καὶ ἀπὸ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	and from Jesus Christ	This verse continues the blessing from [Revelation 1:4](../01/04.md). Alternate translation: "and may grace be to you and peace also from Jesus Christ."
-REV	1	5	l3h8		ὁ πρωτότοκος τῶν νεκρῶν	1	the firstborn from the dead	Alternate translation: “the first person to be raised from death”
-REV	1	5	j1xp		τῶν νεκρῶν	1	from the dead	The phrase **the dead** describes all dead people together in the underworld. To come back **from** among them speaks of becoming alive again.
-REV	1	5	u6v7		λύσαντι ἡμᾶς	1	has released us	Alternate translation: “has set us free”
-REV	1	6	jszo	writing-pronoun	καὶ ἐποίησεν ἡμᾶς βασιλείαν, ἱερεῖς	1		Alternate translation: “He has separated us for his rule, he has made us priests…”. The subject of the sentence, as well as of the contents of this entire verse, is Jesus. Thus, the UST makes the subject of Jesus explicit throughout the entire verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronoun]])
-REV	1	6	ne7x		τῷ Θεῷ καὶ Πατρί αὐτοῦ	1	his God and Father	Here, **God** and **Father** refers to one person. Alternate translation: “for God, his Father”
-REV	1	6	c77q	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατρί	1	Father	Here, **Father** is an important title for God that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-REV	1	6	qd74	figs-abstractnouns	αὐτῷ ἡ δόξα καὶ τὸ κράτος	1	to him be the glory and the power	This is a wish or prayer. This could mean: (1) John prays that people honor his **glory** and **power**. (2) John prays that Jesus will be honored and will be able to rule completely over everyone and everything. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-REV	1	6	vc5g		τὸ κράτος	1	the power	Here, **the power** probably refers to Jesus’ authority as king.
-REV	1	7	ldv8		ἰδοὺ, ἔρχεται μετὰ τῶν νεφελῶν, καὶ ὄψεται αὐτὸν πᾶς ὀφθαλμὸς, καὶ οἵτινες αὐτὸν ἐξεκέντησαν, καὶ κόψονται ἐπ’ αὐτὸν πᾶσαι αἱ φυλαὶ τῆς γῆς	1	General Information:	In verse 7, John is quoting from Daniel and Zechariah. For how to translate quotations of other scripture contents, read the following link. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-REV	1	7	bbqj	writing-pronoun	ἔρχεται μετὰ τῶν νεφελῶν   	1		Alternate translation: “He approaches on the clouds.” The subject of the clause is Jesus. Thus, the UST makes the subject of Jesus explicit here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronoun]])
+REV	1	3	t0q3		τῆς προφητείας	1		Here, **this prophecy** refers to this whole book that John is writing. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of this book of prophecy”
+REV	1	3	fjfo	τηροῦντες τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ γεγραμμένα	figs-activepassive	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “who keep what John has written in it” or “who keep what they read in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+REV	1	3	dwt8	figs-explicit	ὁ γὰρ καιρὸς ἐγγύς	1	the time is near	Here, **the time** refers specifically to the appointed time when God will make the prophecies in this book come true. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the time when what is written in this book is near” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+REV	1	3	myem	figs-metaphor	ὁ γὰρ καιρὸς ἐγγύς	1		Here, John speaks figuratively of **time** as if it could be **near** something. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the time will be soon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+REV	1	4	vw1t	figs-123person	Ἰωάννης ταῖς ἑπτὰ ἐκκλησίαις ταῖς ἐν τῇ Ἀσίᾳ	1	General Information:	In this culture, letter writers would give their own names first, and they would refer to themselves in the third person. If that would be confusing in your language, you could use the first person. If your language has a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, you could also use that. Alternate translation: “I, John, am writing this letter” or “From John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+REV	1	4	apl8	figs-123person	ταῖς ἑπτὰ ἐκκλησίαις ταῖς ἐν τῇ Ἀσίᾳ	1		In this culture, after giving their own names, letter writers would then say to whom they were writing, naming those people in the third person. If that would be confusing in your language, you could use the second person. Alternate translation: “to you who are members of the seven church that are in Asia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+REV	1	4	y9yh	translate-blessing	χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ ὁ ὢν, καὶ ὁ ἦν, καὶ ὁ ἐρχόμενος	1	May grace be to you and peace from the one who is … and from the seven spirits	In this culture, letter writers would offer a good wish for the recipient before introducing the main business of the letter. Use a form in your language that makes it clear that this is a greeting and blessing. Alternate translation: “May the one who is, and who was, and who is coming give you grace and peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
+REV	1	4	lsun	figs-abstractnouns	χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ ὁ ὢν, καὶ ὁ ἦν, καὶ ὁ ἐρχόμενος	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **grace** and **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “May the one who is, and who was, and who is coming treat you kindly and give you peaceful relationships” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+REV	1	4	unul	figs-explicit	ὁ ὢν	1		These three phrases all refer to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the God who is, and who was, and who is coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+REV	1	4	qsu6	figs-metaphor	ὁ ἐρχόμενος	1	who is to come	Here, **is coming** has two possible connotations. The expression could refer to the the physical act of coming, when God will be present on earth for a final judgment. Alternatively, the phrase indicates the future tense, which seems more likely given the prior context describing the past and present times of God's existence. In other words, John uses **is coming** figuratively to state that God will exist in the future. If this would confuse your readers, you could say the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who will still exist in the future” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+REV	1	4	x38p	writing-symlanguage	ἑπτὰ πνευμάτων	1	seven spirits	The number **seven** is often used in the Bible as a symbol for completeness and perfection. Here, the **seven spirits** could refer to: (1) the Spirit of God, which is described with seven attributes in [Isaiah 11:2](../../isa/11/02.md). Alternate translation: “the sevenfold Holy Spirit” (2) seven individual spirits who serve God, which might be the “seven angels” in [8:2](../08/02.md). Alternate translation: “the seven spirit beings” or “the seven angelic spirits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
+REV	1	5	w24x		καὶ ἀπὸ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	and from Jesus Christ	The first half of this verse continues the sentence from the previous verse. If you make this a new sentence, then you will need to repeat some of the information from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “And may grace be to you and peace also from Jesus Christ”
+REV	1	5	gz2n		ὁ μάρτυς ὁ πιστός	1		This phrase **the faithful witness** is a title describing Jesus Christ. The expression is probably an allusion to [Psalm 89](../../psa/89/01.md), specifically to [Psalm 89:37](../../psa/89/37.md). Likewise, every title that is describing Jesus Christ in this verse alludes to a portion of Psalm 89, including: **the firstborn from the dead** and **the ruler of the kings of the earth**. All the titles in this verse describe Jesus Christ as the one who completes God’s promises given to David in [2 Samuel 7](../../2sa/07/01.md) and then affirmed again within [Psalm 89](../../psa/89/01.md) later. Therefore, the translator can indicate the presence of an Old Testament quotation or allusion here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+REV	1	5	l3h8	figs-idiom	ὁ πρωτότοκος τῶν νεκρῶν	1	the firstborn from the dead	This phrase **the firstborn from the dead** is an idiom meaning “the first person to die and become alive again”. The term **firstborn** commonly refers to the first child actually to be born to parents and, therefore, the primary recipient of the parents’ inheritance. The idiomatic expression apparently alludes to [Psalm 89:27](../../psa/89/27.md). However, every title describing Jesus Christ in this verse alludes to portions of Psalm 89, including: **the faithful witness** and **the ruler of the kings of the earth**. If your readers would not understand the phrase **the firstborn from the dead**, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “the first person to be raised from death” or “the first person to come back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+REV	1	5	j1xp	grammar-collectivenouns	τῶν νεκρῶν	1	from the dead	The word **dead** is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “from those who are dead” or “from those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
+REV	1	5	gqw8	grammar-collectivenouns	καὶ ὁ ἄρχων τῶν βασιλέων τῆς γῆς	1		This phrase **the ruler of the kings of the earth** is a title of Jesus Christ that describes his future dominion over the earth. The expression **the ruler of the kings of the earth** alludes to [Psalm 89:27](../../psa/89/27.md). However, every title describing Jesus Christ in this verse alludes to portions of [Psalm 89](../../psa/89/01.md), including: **the faithful witness** and **the firstborn from the dead**. All the titles in this verse describe Jesus Christ as the one who completes God’s promises given to David in [2 Samuel 7](../../2sa/07/01.md), which are then affirmed again in\n[Psalm 89](../../psa/89/01.md) later. Therefore, the translator can indicate the presence of an Old Testament quotation or allusion here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+REV	1	5	ttqn		τῷ ἀγαπῶντι ἡμᾶς	1		The second half of this verse begins a doxology that continues through the rest of this verse and all of the next verse. The doxology directly praises Jesus Christ personally. If you make this a new sentence, then you will need to state some of the information from the following verse that will then be repeated in verse 1:6 once again. Alternate translation: “May Jesus Christ, who loves us, receive glory and power always”
+REV	1	5	u6v7	figs-metaphor	λύσαντι ἡμᾶς ἐκ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν	1	has released us	Here John uses **released** figuratively of forgiving people for their **sins**. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “has forgiven us for our sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+REV	1	5	jpnq	figs-metonymy	ἐκ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν	1		John uses **sins** figuratively to refer to the punishment for **sins**. He means that Jesus causes people who believe in him to escape eternal punishment for their sins. If this would confuse your readers, you could say the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “has released us from the punishment for our sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+REV	1	5	q64f	figs-metonymy	τῷ αἵματι αὐτοῦ	1		Here, **blood** figuratively represents the death of Christ on the cross. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a comparable word that stands for death or express the idea in non-figurative language. Alternate translation: “his death on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+REV	1	6	jszo	writing-pronoun	καὶ ἐποίησεν ἡμᾶς βασιλείαν, ἱερεῖς	1		The subject of the sentence, as well as of the contents of this entire verse, is Jesus Christ. Thus, the UST makes the subject of Jesus explicit throughout the entire verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronoun]])
+REV	1	6	nhfb	figs-metaphor	βασιλείαν, ἱερεῖς	1		Here, **a kingdom, priests** is a pair of nouns functioning as two metaphors for the service that believers give to God the Father. Believers in Jesus Christ serve God like citizens serve their ruling king. Likewise, believers in Jesus also benefit God like priests attended to God in the temple or the tabernacle of the Old Testament. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+REV	1	6	p8j5	figs-metaphor	ἱερεῖς	1		Here, **a kingdom, priests** is a pair of nouns functioning as two metaphors for the service that believers give to God the Father. Believers in Jesus Christ serve God like citizens serve their ruling king. Likewise, believers in Jesus also benefit God like priests attended to God in the temple or the tabernacle of the Old Testament. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+REV	1	6	nesy	writing-pronoun	βασιλείαν, ἱερεῖς τῷ Θεῷ καὶ Πατρί αὐτοῦ— αὐτῷ ἡ δόξα καὶ τὸ κράτος	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **kingdom**, **priests**, **glory**, and **power** in other ways. Alternate translation: “he has created us to aid him in his program and to be household custodians serving God, his Father. May Jesus have proper honor and recognized authority always” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+REV	1	6	ne7x		τῷ Θεῷ καὶ Πατρί αὐτοῦ	1	his God and Father	Here, **God** and **Father** refers to two persons of the Godhead, who exists in essence as a trinity of individual persons. The name **Father** is an important title for God that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. Alternate translation: “for God, his Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+REV	1	6	qd74	figs-abstractnouns	αὐτῷ ἡ δόξα καὶ τὸ κράτος	1	to him be the glory and the power	This is a wish or prayer. This could mean: (1) John prays that people honor Jesus Christ in light of or with respect to his **glory** and **power**. (2) John prays that Jesus Christ will be honored and will be able to rule completely over everyone and everything. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+REV	1	6	vc5g		τὸ κράτος	1	the power	Here, **the power** probably refers to Jesus Christ’s authority as king. Alternate translation: “the dominion”
+REV	1	7	ldv8		ἰδοὺ, ἔρχεται μετὰ τῶν νεφελῶν, καὶ ὄψεται αὐτὸν πᾶς ὀφθαλμὸς, καὶ οἵτινες αὐτὸν ἐξεκέντησαν, καὶ κόψονται ἐπ’ αὐτὸν πᾶσαι αἱ φυλαὶ τῆς γῆς	1	General Information:	In verse 7, John is quoting from Daniel and Zechariah. For how to translate quotations of other scripture contents, read this following link. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+REV	1	7	mx1c	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1		Here, **Behold** is a word that focuses the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. The word literally means “look” or “see”. However, in this case, the expression denotes the act of seeing figuratively by means of giving notice and attention. Alternate translation: “Listen carefully!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+REV	1	7	bbqj	writing-pronoun	ἔρχεται μετὰ τῶν νεφελῶν	1		Alternate translation: “He approaches on the clouds.” The subject of the clause is Jesus Christ. Jesus will come to the earth from above, or from the sky above, as seen originally in [Daniel 7:14](../../dan/11/02.md) and [Daniel 7:27](../../dan/11/02.md). Thus, the UST makes the subject of Jesus Christ explicit here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronoun]])
 REV	1	7	hb4i	figs-synecdoche	πᾶς ὀφθαλμὸς	1	every eye	Since people see with their eyes, the word **eye** is used to refer to people. Alternate translation: “every person” or “everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-REV	1	7	t16v		καὶ οἵτινες αὐτὸν ἐξεκέντησαν	1	including those who pierced him	Alternate translation: “even those who pierced him will see him”
-REV	1	7	ndf6	figs-metonymy	αὐτὸν ἐξεκέντησαν	1	pierced him	Jesus’ hands and feet were **pierced** when he was nailed to the cross. Here it refers to the people who killed him. Alternate translation: “killed him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-REV	1	7	lqs9		ἐξεκέντησαν	1	pierced	Alternate translation: “who made a hole in”
-REV	1	8	mm9z	figs-metaphor	τὸ Ἄλφα καὶ τὸ Ὦ	1	the alpha and the omega	The first and last letters of the Greek alphabet are **alpha** and **omega**. This could mean: (1) Christ is the one who began all things and who will end all things. (2) Christ is the one who has always lived and who always will live. If your readers would misunderstand this, you may consider using the first and last letters of your alphabet. Alternate translation: “the A and the Z” or “the first and the last.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-REV	1	8	t0ga	translate-textvariants		1		"'I am the alpha and the omega,' says the Lord God, 'the one who is, and who was, and who is to come, the Almighty'" (1:8). Some versions add the phrase "the Beginning and the End." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-REV	1	8	l1ss	figs-merism	τὸ Ἄλφα καὶ τὸ Ὦ	1		Here, **the alpha and the omega** refers to the eternal nature of Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
-REV	1	8	in5e	figs-metaphor	ὁ ἐρχόμενος	1	who is to come	Existing in the future is spoken of as **coming**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+REV	1	7	ndf6	figs-metonymy	καὶ οἵτινες αὐτὸν ἐξεκέντησαν	1	pierced him	Jesus’ hands and feet were **pierced** when he was nailed to the cross. Here it refers to the people who killed him. Alternate translation: “even those who bore a hole in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+REV	1	7	ewtl	figs-ellipsis	καὶ οἵτινες αὐτὸν ἐξεκέντησαν	1		Here, **even those who pierced him** assumes the prior action verb of every eye seeing Jesus Christ come with the clouds. However, the writer leaves out the repetition of the action verb of seeing here, although the act of seeing is assumed. This is type of omission is known as ellipsis. The translator may wish to state explicitly the action of seeing once again here in this context. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+REV	1	7	enuz	grammar-collectivenouns	πᾶσαι αἱ φυλαὶ τῆς γῆς	1		The phrase **all the tribes of the earth** describes all types of the earth’s peoples by the category of every single **tribe**. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “every ethnicity of the earth” or “every racial type of the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
+REV	1	7	s0rd		ναί! ἀμήν!	1		Here, the phrase **Yes, Amen** represents a stronger or more assertive form of simply the word **Amen**. The word **Yes** affirms, emphasizes, and strengthens the following word **Amen**. Alternate translations: “Certainly it shall be thus!” or “Yes indeed, may this truly be so!”
+REV	1	8	mm9z	figs-metaphor	τὸ Ἄλφα καὶ τὸ Ὦ	1	the alpha and the omega	The first and last letters of the Greek alphabet are **alpha** and **omega**. This could mean: (1) God the Father or Jesus Christ is the one who began all things and who will end all things. (2) God the Father or Jesus Christ is the one who has always lived and who always will live. If your readers would misunderstand this, you may consider using the first and last letters of your language’s alphabet. Alternate translation: “the A and the Z” or “the first thing and the last thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+REV	1	8	l1ss	figs-merism	τὸ Ἄλφα καὶ τὸ Ὦ	1		Here, **the alpha and the omega** refers by merism to the eternal nature of God the Father or that of Jesus Christ. A merism gives a sense of a totality by a description that references two extreme parts of a concept’s whole. In this case, the parts at the extremities of the concept’s whole are the first (**alpha**) and last (**omega**) letters of the Greek alphabet. The Greek alphabet is a type of metaphor for eternity, which has a beginning and a end normally in time, although here the idea is that of the eternal existence of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
+REV	1	8	t0ga	translate-textvariants	τὸ Ἄλφα καὶ τὸ Ὦ, λέγει Κύριος	1		“‘I am the alpha and the omega,’ says the Lord God, ‘the one who is, and who was, and who is to come, the Almighty’” (1:8). Some versions add the phrase “the Beginning and the End” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+REV	1	8	in5e	figs-metaphor	ὁ ἐρχόμενος	1	who is to come	Here, the phrase **who is coming** figuratively signifies that God exists in the future. If this would confuse your readers, you could say the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who will still exist in the future” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 REV	1	8	c96p	writing-quotations	λέγει Κύριος, ὁ Θεός	1	says the Lord God	Some languages would move **says the Lord God** to the beginning or the end of the whole sentence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-REV	1	9	up7y			0	General Information:	John explains how his vision began and the instructions the Spirit gave him.
-REV	1	9	mg1k	figs-you	ὑμῶν	1	your	Here, **your** refers to the believers in the seven churches. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+REV	1	9	qyu1	figs-123person	ἐγὼ Ἰωάννης, ὁ ἀδελφὸς ὑμῶν, καὶ συνκοινωνὸς ἐν τῇ θλίψει, καὶ βασιλείᾳ, καὶ ὑπομονῇ, ἐν Ἰησοῦ	1		The Apostle **John** refers to himself in the third person here in this verse. If this is confusing in your language, you could translate this in the first person primarily or predominantly. Alternate translation: “I … am experiencing affliction with you …” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 REV	1	9	p7ii		ἐγὼ Ἰωάννης, ὁ ἀδελφὸς ὑμῶν, καὶ συνκοινωνὸς ἐν τῇ θλίψει, καὶ βασιλείᾳ, καὶ ὑπομονῇ, ἐν Ἰησοῦ, ἐγενόμην	1	I, John—your brother and the one who shares with you in the suffering and kingdom and patient endurance that are in Jesus—was	You can state this as a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “I, John, am your brother who shares with you in God’s kingdom and also suffers and patiently endures trials along with you because we belong to Jesus. I was”
-REV	1	9	c1a9		διὰ τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	because of the word of God	Alternate translation: “because I told others the word of God”
-REV	1	9	j5rg		τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the word of God	Translate this as in [Revelation 1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “the message that God spoke”
-REV	1	9	sim8		τὴν μαρτυρίαν Ἰησοῦ	1	the testimony about Jesus	Translate this as in [Revelation 1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “the testimony that God has given about Jesus”
-REV	1	10	s2sw	figs-idiom	ἐγενόμην ἐν Πνεύματι	1	I was in the Spirit	John speaks of being influenced by God’s Spirit as if he were **in the Spirit**. Alternate translation: “I was influenced by the Spirit” or “The Spirit influenced me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-REV	1	10	lnj2		τῇ Κυριακῇ ἡμέρᾳ	1	the Lord’s day	Here, **the Lord's day** refers to the day of worship for believers in Christ.
-REV	1	10	fa68	figs-simile	φωνὴν μεγάλην ὡς σάλπιγγος	1	loud voice like a trumpet	The **voice** was so **loud** that it sounded **like a trumpet**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
-REV	1	10	dn8e		σάλπιγγος	1	trumpet	A **trumpet** is an instrument for producing music or for calling people to gather together for an announcement or meeting.
-REV	1	11	kq6x	translate-names	Σμύρναν…Πέργαμον…Θυάτειρα…Σάρδεις…Φιλαδέλφιαν…Λαοδίκιαν	1	Smyrna … Pergamum … Thyatira … Sardis … Philadelphia … Laodicea	These are names of cities in the region of western Asia that today is modern Turkey. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-REV	1	12	dkp1			0	Connecting Statement:	John begins to explain what he saw in his vision.
-REV	1	12	r89l	figs-synecdoche	τὴν φωνὴν ἥτις	1	whose voice	The **voice** refers to the person speaking. Alternate translation: “who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-REV	1	13	xmx7	figs-metaphor	Υἱὸν Ἀνθρώπου	1	son of man	The expression **son of man** describes a human figure, someone who looks human. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-REV	1	13	y6qk		ζώνην χρυσᾶν	1	a golden sash	A **sash** was a strip of cloth worn around the chest. This one may have been woven from golden threads.
-REV	1	14	qc12	figs-simile	ἡ…κεφαλὴ αὐτοῦ καὶ αἱ τρίχες λευκαὶ, ὡς ἔριον λευκόν ὡς χιών	1	His head and hair were as white as wool—as white as snow	Here, **wool** and **snow** are examples of things that are very **white**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
-REV	1	14	mg7r	figs-doublet	λευκαὶ, ὡς ἔριον λευκόν ὡς χιών	1		The repetition of **white as** emphasizes that they were very white. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-REV	1	14	j9w4		ἔριον	1	wool	The word **wool** refers to the hair of a sheep or goat. It was known to be very white.
-REV	1	14	vp4t	figs-simile	οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ αὐτοῦ ὡς φλὸξ πυρός	1	his eyes were like a flame of fire	John describes **his eyes** as being full of light like **a flame of fire**. Alternate translation: “his eyes were glowing like a flame of fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
-REV	1	15	u551	figs-simile	οἱ πόδες αὐτοῦ ὅμοιοι χαλκολιβάνῳ ὡς	1	His feet were like polished bronze	Objects made of **bronze** are **polished** to make them shine and reflect light. Alternate translation: “his feet were very shiny like polished bronze” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
-REV	1	15	d6je	figs-events	ὅμοιοι χαλκολιβάνῳ ὡς ἐν καμίνῳ πεπυρωμένης	1	like polished bronze, like bronze that had been refined in a furnace	The **bronze** would be **refined** first by melting it in a **furnace**, and then polished. Alternate translation: “like bronze that has been purified in a hot furnace and polished” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
-REV	1	15	ldx7		καμίνῳ	1	furnace	Here, **furnace** refers to a strong container for holding a very hot fire. People would put metal in it, and the hot fire would melt away any impurities that were in the metal.
-REV	1	15	izg6		ἡ φωνὴ αὐτοῦ ὡς φωνὴ ὑδάτων πολλῶν	1	the sound of many rushing waters	The **sound** of **his voice** was very loud, like the sound of a large, fast flowing river, of a large waterfall, or of loud waves in the sea.
-REV	1	16	pp58		ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ ῥομφαία δίστομος ὀξεῖα ἐκπορευομένη	1	a sword … was coming out of his mouth	The blade of the **sword** was sticking out of his mouth. The sword itself was not in motion.
-REV	1	16	zy4d		ῥομφαία δίστομος ὀξεῖα	1	a sword with two sharp edges	This refers to a **sword** that is sharpened on both edges so it can cut in both directions.
-REV	1	17	twy9	figs-simile	ἔπεσα πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ, ὡς νεκρός	1	fell at his feet like a dead man	John lay down facing the ground. He was probably very frightened and was showing Jesus great respect. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
-REV	1	17	jw5r		ἔθηκεν τὴν δεξιὰν αὐτοῦ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ	1	He placed his right hand on me	Alternate translation: “he touched me with his right hand”
-REV	1	17	uc3d	figs-merism	ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ πρῶτος καὶ ὁ ἔσχατος	1	I am the first and the last	Here, **the first and the last** refers to the eternal nature of Jesus—he existed before anything else and will continue to exist after everything else is gone. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
-REV	1	18	a4e2	figs-metaphor	ἔχω τὰς κλεῖς τοῦ θανάτου καὶ τοῦ ᾍδου	1	I have the keys of death and of Hades	Having the power over something is spoken of as having **the keys** to it. Alternate translation: “I have the power over death and over Hades” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-REV	1	18	pgql	figs-explicit	ἔχω τὰς κλεῖς τοῦ θανάτου καὶ τοῦ ᾍδου	1		The implied information is that he can give life to those who have died and let them out of **Hades**. Alternate translation: “I have the power to give life to people who have died and to let them out of Hades” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-REV	1	20	d6ez	writing-symlanguage	τῶν ἑπτὰ ἀστέρων	1	stars	These **stars** are symbols that represent the **seven** angels of the **seven** churches. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
-REV	1	20	fl5d	writing-symlanguage	λυχνίας	1	lampstands	These **lampstands** are symbols that represent the seven churches. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:12](../01/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
-REV	1	20	eek9		ἄγγελοι τῶν ἑπτὰ ἐκκλησιῶν	1	the angels of the seven churches	Here, **angels** could refer to: (1) heavenly angels who protect the seven churches. (2) human messengers to the seven churches, either messengers who went from John to the churches or the leaders of those churches.
-REV	1	20	e25n		τῶν ἑπτὰ ἐκκλησιῶν	1	seven churches	This refers to **seven churches** that actually existed in Asia Minor at that time. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:11](../01/11.md).
-REV	2	intro	zps2			0		# Revelation 2 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Chapters 2 and 3 together are usually called the “seven letters to the seven churches.” You may wish to set each letter apart. The reader can then easily see that they are separate letters.<br><br>Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 27.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Poverty and wealth<br><br>The Christians in Smyrna were poor because they did not have much money. But they were rich spiritually because God would reward them for their suffering. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])<br><br>### “The devil is about to”<br><br>People were about to take some of the Christians in Smyrna and throw them into prison and even kill some of them ([Revelation 2:10](../rev/02/10.md)). John does not say who these people were. But he does speak of them harming the Christians as if Satan himself were harming them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])<br><br>### Balaam, Balak, and Jezebel<br><br>Balaam, Balak, and Jezebel were people who lived long before Jesus was born. They all tried to harm the Israelites either by cursing them or by making them want to stop obeying God.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### “Let the one who has an ear, hear what the Spirit is saying to the churches”<br><br>The writer knew that almost all of his readers had physical ears. The ear here is a metonym for hearing what God says and desiring to obey him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### “The angel of the church”<br><br>The word **angel** here can also mean “messenger.” This might refer to the messenger or leader of the church. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../rev/01/20.md).<br><br>### “The words of the one who”<br><br>The verses with these words can be difficult to translate. They do not make complete sentences. You may need to add “These are” to the beginning of these verses. Also, Jesus used these words to speak of himself as if he were speaking of another person. Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking of other people. Jesus began speaking in [Revelation 1:17](../rev/01/17.md). He continues to speak through the end of Chapter 3.
-REV	2	1	mn8x			0	General Information:	This is the beginning of the Son of Man’s message to the angel of the church in Ephesus.
-REV	2	1	kq5r		τῷ ἀγγέλῳ	1	the angel	Here, **angel** could refer to: (1) a heavenly angel who protects this church. (2) a human messenger to the church, either a messenger who went from John to the church or the leader of the churches. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md)
-REV	2	1	i92a	writing-symlanguage	ἀστέρας	1	stars	These **stars** are symbols. They represent the seven angels of the seven churches. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:16](../01/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
-REV	2	1	ugs3	writing-symlanguage	τῶν ἑπτὰ λυχνιῶν τῶν χρυσῶν	1	lampstands	The **golden lampstands** are symbols that represent the seven churches. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:12](../01/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
-REV	2	2	jg1u	figs-abstractnouns	οἶδα…τὸν κόπον καὶ τὴν ὑπομονήν σου	1	I know … your hard labor and your patient endurance	If your readers would misunderstand the abstract nouns **labor** and **endurance**, you can express them with the verbs “work” and “endure.” Alternate translation: “I know … that you work very hard and that you endure patiently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-REV	2	2	szc1		καὶ οὐκ εἰσίν	1	but are not	Alternate translation: “but are not apostles”
-REV	2	2	ka9e		εὗρες αὐτοὺς ψευδεῖς	1	you have found them to be false	Alternate translation: “you have recognized that those people are false apostles”
-REV	2	3	muq8	figs-metonymy	διὰ τὸ ὄνομά μου	1	because of my name	Here, **name** is a metonym for the person of Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “because of me” or “because you believe in my name” or “because you believe in me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-REV	2	3	j46d	figs-metaphor	οὐ κεκοπίακες	1	you have not grown weary	Being discouraged is spoken of as growing **weary**. Alternate translation: “you have not become discouraged” or “you have not quit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-REV	2	4	j7gz		ἔχω κατὰ σοῦ, ὅτι	1	I have against you the fact that	Alternate translation: “I disapprove of you because” or “I am angry with you because”
-REV	2	4	kx98	figs-metaphor	τὴν ἀγάπην σου τὴν πρώτην ἀφῆκες	1	you have left behind your first love	To stop doing something is spoken of as leaving it **behind**, and **love** is spoken of as if it is an object that can be left behind. AT “you have stopped loving me as you did at the beginning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-REV	2	5	sfw2	figs-metaphor	πόθεν πέπτωκας	1	from where you have fallen	No longer loving as much as they used to is spoken of as haven **fallen**. Alternate translation: “how much you have changed” or “how much you used to love me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+REV	1	9	mg1k	figs-you	ὑμῶν	1	your	Here, **your** refers to the believers assembled among the seven churches mentioned in the book of Revelation (i.e. chapters one, two, and three). The seven assemblies of believers mentioned in Revelation were in the modern area of southwestern Turkey today. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+REV	1	9	ikek	figs-abstractnouns	βασιλείᾳ	1		Here, **kingdom** expresses the idea that Christ rules and will rule over the lives of believers. One might translate **kingdom** with the idea behind the abstract noun by some phrase that uses the verb “rule.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+REV	1	9	c1a9	figs-metonymy	διὰ τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	because of the word of God	Here, **the word of God** refers to both the preaching of the gospel as well as the proclamation of this book of Revelation’s prophecy by the author John through the direct attestation of Jesus Christ personally to him. John uses **word** figuratively to refer to the message that God said by using words. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “because I communicated to others the message that God spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+REV	1	9	sim8	figs-possession	τὴν μαρτυρίαν Ἰησοῦ	1	the testimony about Jesus	John is using the possessive form to describe the **testimony** that **Jesus** has given about the personal revelation received directly from God and then given in prophecy by the book’s author John. If this is not clear in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the testimony that Jesus has given me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+REV	1	10	s2sw	figs-idiom	ἐγενόμην ἐν Πνεύματι	1	I was in the Spirit	Here, **in the Spirit** might signify the state of being influenced by God’s Spirit. However, on the other hand, **in the spirit** might be an idiomatic expression which employs the word **spirit** as a general reference to the human spirit. Therefore, this phrase **in the Spirit** could mean: (1) God’s Holy Spirit (i.e. God himself) took control of John so as to somehow influence John to receive divine revelation, or (2) God caused John to be in a spiritual state so that he could perceive revelation. Alternate translation: “I was influenced by the Spirit of God” or “God’s Spirit took control of me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+REV	1	10	lnj2		τῇ Κυριακῇ ἡμέρᾳ	1	the Lord’s day	Here, **the Lord’s day** refers specifically to Sunday, which was the weekday for the public gathering of Christian believers for corporate worship during this time of John’s writing the book of Revelation. Some argue that the phrase **the Lord’s day** refers to a future day that is depicted in the book of Revelation. However, although John was inspired in an ecstatic state, he was not transported physically through time into a future eschatological time which is depicted in the book of Revelation. Rather, God merely gave John a vision of the future time depicted in the book of Revelation.
+REV	1	10	fa68	figs-simile	φωνὴν μεγάλην ὡς σάλπιγγος	1	loud voice like a trumpet	The **voice** was very **loud** so that the noise sounded **like a trumpet**. Alternate translation: “a voice as loud as a trumpet being blown” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+REV	1	10	ggph	figs-metonymy	φωνὴν μεγάλην	1		Here, **a loud voice** figuratively refers to the person speaking the **voice**, which is later revealed in the context to be the divine voice of Jesus Christ. This figure of speech is what is known as a metonymy of effect in that the person who speaks and utters a voice is represented by his **voice**. Alternate translation: “a great sound of one speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+REV	1	10	dn8e		σάλπιγγος	1	trumpet	A **trumpet** is a wind instrument for producing music or for calling people to gather together for an announcement or meeting. In the Old Testament, a **trumpet** was a ram’s horn, but in the New Testament time period the wind instrument evolved into a metallic form for the trumpet, just like it exists now in modern times. The translator must decide, if translating in a culture that has no trumpets, whether there exists some other equivalent wind instrument or simply some other means of gathering people for a public gathering.
+REV	1	11	y4ab	writing-pronouns	λεγούσης	1		Here, **saying** refers to the **voice** of the previous verse 1:10, although the **voice** is only implied and not stated explicitly. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “it said to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+REV	1	11	d87d		βιβλίον	1		Here, **a scroll** refers to a roll made up of sliced fibers from the papyrus plant. Papyrus was actually less expensive in comparison to parchment, which was made of animal skins.
+REV	1	11	kq6x	translate-names	Σμύρναν…Πέργαμον…Θυάτειρα…Σάρδεις…Φιλαδέλφιαν…Λαοδίκιαν	1	Smyrna … Pergamum … Thyatira … Sardis … Philadelphia … Laodicea	These are names of cities in the region of western Asia Minor that are in the modern area of southwestern Turkey today. The logic of the order seems to begin with Ephesus, the most important city at the time and then proceed to move clockwise until it reaches the city that is the furthest south at Laodicea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+REV	1	12	r89l	figs-metonymy	τὴν φωνὴν ἥτις	1	whose voice	The **voice** refers to the person speaking. The person who utters the voice is subsequently said to be Jesus Christ himself. The voice represents the person who speaks the voice in a figure of speech known as metonymy. Alternate translation: “who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+REV	1	12	flem		ἑπτὰ λυχνίας χρυσᾶς	1		Here, **seven golden lampstands** refers to seven golden lamp holders that are place holding stands for portable oil lamps. These seven lamp holders are made of gold or, at the very least, were plated with gold. Apparently these lamp holders represent the seven assemblies of believers in the seven cities mentioned in the previous verse of Revelation 1:11. The number **seven** is often used in the Bible as a symbol for completeness and perfection, although the context would simply suggest that the number is required by the amount of the churches addressed in Revelation chapters two and three. Alternate translation: “seven golden portable oil lamp-holding stands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
+REV	1	13	xmx7	figs-simile	ὅμοιον Υἱὸν Ἀνθρώπου	1	son of man	The expression **like a son of man** describes a human figure, someone who looks human. The figure of speech is that of a comparison by a simile. Alternate translation: “a being that looked like a man” or “a figure that resembled a human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+REV	1	13	kyx9		ὅμοιον Υἱὸν Ἀνθρώπου	1		Here, **like a son of man** is a phrase that recalls the same Aramaic phrase in Daniel 7, specifically within [Daniel 7:13](../../dan/07/13.md). Jesus, assuming the reference in Daniel 7, takes the phrase **a son of man** as a personal title so as then to be translated often as “the Son of Man” in the gospel references. Therefore, the translator can indicate the presence of an Old Testament quotation or allusion here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+REV	1	13	y6qk		ζώνην χρυσᾶν	1	a golden sash	A **sash** was a strip of cloth worn around the chest. This one may have been woven from golden threads. Clearly **sash** is not a belt that is worn around the waist specifically. Alternate translation: “strap” or “band”
+REV	1	14	qc12	figs-simile	ἡ δὲ κεφαλὴ αὐτοῦ καὶ αἱ τρίχες λευκαὶ, ὡς ἔριον λευκόν ὡς χιών	1	His head and hair were as white as wool—as white as snow	Here, **wool** and **snow** are examples of things that are very **white**. The double comparison between hair of the head with both **wool** and **snow** represents the figure of speech known as a simile. Although the phrase **his head and hair** literally refers to both the head and hair, the idea must be to the hair being white on the head, which is then compared in a simile’s manner of comparison to both **wool** and **snow**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+REV	1	14	mg7r	figs-doublet	λευκαὶ, ὡς ἔριον λευκόν ὡς χιών	1		The repetition of **white as** emphasizes that they were very white. The doubling of **white* indicates a figure of speech known as a doublet. A doublet provides emphasis by means of repetition. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+REV	1	14	j9w4		ἔριον	1	wool	The word **wool** refers to the hair of a sheep or goat. In this simile comparison, the **wool** is considered to be very white.
+REV	1	14	vp4t	figs-simile	οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ αὐτοῦ ὡς φλὸξ πυρός	1	his eyes were like a flame of fire	John describes **his eyes** as being full of light and very bright like **a flame of fire**. Alternate translation: “his eyes were glowing like a flame of fire” or “his eyes blazed like a flame of fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+REV	1	15	u551	figs-simile	οἱ πόδες αὐτοῦ ὅμοιοι χαλκολιβάνῳ	1	His feet were like polished bronze	Here, **like polished bronze** describes the appearance of the figure’s feet in a manner of comparison known as simile. Objects made of **bronze** are **polished** to make them shine and reflect light. Alternate translation: “his feet were very shiny like polished bronze” or “his feet were reflecting light like polished bronze” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+REV	1	15	d6je	figs-events	ὅμοιοι χαλκολιβάνῳ ὡς ἐν καμίνῳ πεπυρωμένης	1	like polished bronze, like bronze that had been refined in a furnace	The **bronze** would be **refined** first by melting it in a **furnace**, and then polished. Here, **furnace** refers to a strong container for holding a very hot fire. People would put metal in it, and the hot fire would melt away any impurities that were in the metal. A translation should not imply that the bronze was first polished and then refined in a furnace, thereby reversing the actual order of events. Alternate translation: “like bronze that has been purified in a hot furnace and then polished” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
+REV	1	15	izg6	figs-simile	ἡ φωνὴ αὐτοῦ ὡς φωνὴ ὑδάτων πολλῶν	1	the sound of many rushing waters	The **sound** of **his voice** was very loud, like the sound of a large and fast flowing river or of a large waterfall with loud waves of constant water flow. This figurative expression is a comparison by a simile. The idea is simply of a great noise caused by a large volume of water, so that something like a river or waterfall could describe the notion for comparison of the voice’s great force. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+REV	1	16	qu9h	writing-pronouns	καὶ ἔχων	1		Here, the subject of **and having** should be assumed from earlier in verse [1:13](../01/13.md) rendered one **like a son of man**. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “he was holding” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+REV	1	16	udj5	writing-symlanguage	καὶ ἔχων ἐν τῇ δεξιᾷ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ ἀστέρας ἑπτά	1		The number **seven** is often used in the Bible as a symbol for completeness and perfection, although the context would simply suggest that the number is required by the amount of the churches addressed in Revelation chapters two and three. Hence, the **seven stars** refer to **the angels of the seven churches** as stated explicitly in [1:20](../01/20.md). The symbolism of Jesus Christ holding stars could have two possible connotations, namely: (1) Christ having absolute authority over the stars in the heavens as a divine person, or (2) Christ keeping the churches symbolized in the stars secure and safe from death or evil so as to have eternal life as described in [John 10:28](../../joh/10/28.md). The translator does not need to specify one interpretation over the other one. Alternate translation: “and keeping seven stars in his right hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
+REV	1	16	pp58		καὶ ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ ῥομφαία δίστομος ὀξεῖα ἐκπορευομένη	1	a sword … was coming out of his mouth	Here, the **sword** refers to a sword that is sharpened on both edges so that it can cut in both directions on both sides. Only the blade of the sword protruded from Christ’s mouth since the imagery is most likely a metaphor for the spoken word as being figuratively sharp and able to pierce things. The symbolism was probably inspired by the fact that Roman **double-edged** swords were shaped like human tongues in their forms. Thus, **double-edged** swords in the shape of human tongues apparently signify spoken words coming from the human mouth. The translator may wish to indicate this imagery in his translation of the symbolism. Alternate translation: “a sharp, double-edged sword was protruding from his mouth”
+REV	1	16	cb26	figs-simile	ὡς ὁ ἥλιος φαίνει ἐν τῇ δυνάμει αὐτοῦ	1		Here, the simile in the phrase **shining as the sun at its strength** expresses a very bright appearance. Thus, the face of Jesus Christ appeared very bright in a similar manner to the way that the sun shines in its full force during the middle of the day. Alternate translation: “shining as bright as the noonday sun” or “shining as bright as the mid-day sun” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+REV	1	17	twy9	translate-symaction	ἔπεσα πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ, ὡς νεκρός	1	fell at his feet like a dead man	John lay down facing the ground in a common gesture that expresses a deferential respect for a person before whom one bows down before. This symbolic action or cultural gesture of obeisance signifies great respect, reverential awe, and maybe even some fear at the person who receives the symbolic gesture of the bow. John was probably very frightened and was showing Jesus great respect by the customary act of a dramatic bow before the presence of Jesus. If the translator has a similar symbolic action or cutlural gesture to indicate obeisance in the culture of the target language, then perhaps the similar cultural action should be incorporated in the translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
+REV	1	17	vz4u	translate-symaction	καὶ ἔθηκεν τὴν δεξιὰν αὐτοῦ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ	1		Here, the subject of **and he placed his right hand on me** should be assumed from earlier in the context at verse [1:13](../01/13.md). Verse [1:13](../01/13.md) mentions one **like a son of man** as a description of Jesus Christ. If this might confuse your readers, you could explicitly state the subject as Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus placed his right hand on me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+REV	1	17	jw5r	translate-symaction	καὶ ἔθηκεν τὴν δεξιὰν αὐτοῦ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ	1	He placed his right hand on me	Here, the phrase **and he placed his right hand on me** signifies a cultural gesture or symbolic action that expresses comfort and assurance for the person who is need of encouragement at the moment of fear. The symbolic action has the accompanying verbal expression of **Do not be afraid** so as to illustrate the significance and symbolism of the cultural gesture. Alternate translation: “and he touched me with his right hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
+REV	1	17	uc3d	figs-merism	ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ πρῶτος καὶ ὁ ἔσχατος	1	I am the first and the last	Here, **the first and the last** refers to the eternal nature of Jesus in a figure of expression known as a merism. This is to say, Jesus Christ exists in nature eternally in that he existed before anything else and he will continue to exist after everything else is gone. A merism gives a sense of a totality by a description that references two extreme parts of the entirety of a concept. In this case, the parts at the extremities of the entirety of the concept are the ordinals **first** and **last**. However, in the prior verse of [1:8](../01/08.md), the metaphor for eternity was described in terms of the Greek alphabet. In other words, the parts at the extremities of the entirety of the concept are the first (**alpha**) and last (**omega**) letters of the Greek alphabet. Yet, in this context here, the parts at the extremities are simply the ordinal numbers **first** and **last**. The translator may wish to find an equivalent phrase to express a merism in the culture of his target language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
+REV	1	18	zm05		καὶ ὁ ζῶν καὶ ἐγενόμην νεκρὸς	1		Here, the phrase **the one who lives** is a common description of God in both the Old and New Testaments. Essentially this common divine title is a phrase which communicates the notion that God has immortal life in his essential nature. In contrast to God, who lives in immortal essence and in his very being as the living God, mortal humans die because of their sinful nature. The translator may wish to find an equivalent description of God to express his immortal or eternal life as part of his essence or being. Alternate translation: “the living one” or “the one who gives life”
+REV	1	18	cc7c	figs-metaphor	καὶ ἰδοὺ	1		Here, **Behold** is a word that focuses the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. The word literally means “look” or “see”. However, in this case, the expression denotes the act of seeing figuratively by means of giving notice and attention. Alternate translation: “Listen carefully!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+REV	1	18	a4e2	figs-metaphor	ἔχω τὰς κλεῖς τοῦ θανάτου καὶ τοῦ ᾍδου	1	I have the keys of death and of Hades	Here, the phrase **I have the keys of death and of Hades** indicates a common metaphorical expression that symbolizes authority or power with the imagery of **keys**. This is to say, the idea of having the power over something is spoken of as having **the keys** to it. Alternate translation: “I have the power over death and over Hades” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+REV	1	18	pgql	figs-explicit	ἔχω τὰς κλεῖς τοῦ θανάτου καὶ τοῦ ᾍδου	1		The implied information is that he can give life to those who have died and let them out of **Hades**. As stated in the previous note, **keys** are a symbol of power or authority over something, since keys represent the ability to control a door, whether to open it or to lock it. The translator may wish to make the symbolic and cultural implications of having **keys** explicit by indicating the power or authority of controlling such items. Alternate translation: “I have the power to give life to people who have died and to let them out of Hades” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+REV	1	18	acrx	translate-transliterate	τοῦ θανάτου καὶ τοῦ ᾍδου	1		Here, **Hades** in the phrase **of death and of Hades** denotes the world of the dead and is commonly transliterated directly from the Greek language and its cultural mythology, as here in the ULT translation. The word **Hades** signifies the place or location where deceased individuals go after their death within the cultural world of Greek mythology. The distinction between death and **Hades** is not great, but there is a slight difference. Death indicates the state of being dead. However, **Hades** represents the place of death. Thus, the translator might indicate the slight differences between the two words in this verse here when translating the expression. Alternate translation: “of death’s state and of death’s location” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
+REV	1	19	eupc	figs-litany	ἃ εἶδες, καὶ ἃ εἰσὶν, καὶ ἃ μέλλει γενέσθαι μετὰ ταῦτα	1		Here, the entire clause **what you have seen and what is and what is about to happen after these things** represents the three-part division of the entire Book of Revelation. This three-part division of the Book of Revelation is an example of the figure of speech known as a litany. A litany expresses a comprehensive notion so as to be inclusive of all without exceptions. In other words, The command to John requires that John write everything down in the book with no exceptions from what he is required to include in his work of composition. The translator may wish to indicate the use of this verse here as a natural three-part division of the book of Revelation. Alternatively, the translator may wish to reflect this actual reality in the translation of the three different clauses with their different tenses of verbs. Alternate translation: “that which you are seeing, that which exists now, and that which will happen afterwards” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]])
+REV	1	20	ytmk		τὸ μυστήριον τῶν ἑπτὰ ἀστέρων	1		Here, **the mystery** means “the secret meaning” or “the symbolic meaning” in the sense of the inner meaning of a symbolic vision. The word **mystery** represents a matter that is hidden or secret. The notion of a **mystery** also implies that there exists a symbolic meaning that the Holy Spirit can allow one to understand and interpret correctly. The translator may wish to convey some of the nuances explained in this note that are inherent in the notion of the word **mystery**. Alternate translation: “the secret meaning of the seven stars”
+REV	1	20	d6ez	writing-symlanguage	τῶν ἑπτὰ ἀστέρων	1	stars	These **stars** are symbols that represent the **seven** angels of the **seven** churches or assemblies of believers. The number **seven** is often used in the Bible as a symbol for completeness and perfection. However, here the number **seven** simply refers to the number of churches addressed in chapters two and three of the Book of Revelation. Alternate translation: “the seven celestial bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
+REV	1	20	fl5d	writing-symlanguage	λυχνίας	1	lampstands	These **lampstands** are symbols that represent the seven churches or assemblies of believers mentioned in chapters two and three of the book of Revelation. Note the previous translation of this imagery in verse [Revelation 1:12](../01/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
+REV	1	20	eek9		ἄγγελοι τῶν ἑπτὰ ἐκκλησιῶν	1	the angels of the seven churches	Here, the phrase **the angels of the seven churches** could refer to: (1) heavenly angels who protect the seven churches. Alternatively, **the angels of the seven churches** are (2) human messengers who are sent to the seven churches. If **the angels** are human messengers, then, they could either be leaders of the seven churches or they could be the actual messengers who went from John bearing the Book of Revelation to the seven churches mentioned in verse [Revelation 1:11](../01/11.md). The translator should keep the apparent ambiguity of the symbolism and not try to specify either option of interpretation over the other.
+REV	1	20	e25n		τῶν ἑπτὰ ἐκκλησιῶν	1	seven churches	Here, the **seven churches** refers to seven assemblies of believers which actually existed in southwestern Asia Minor when John wrote the Book of Revelation. Note the translation of these **seven churches** in verse [Revelation 1:11](../01/11.md).
+REV	2	intro	zps2			0		# Revelation 2 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>### Outline of Chapters Two and Three of Revelation<br><br>I. The Current Condition of the Churches (2:1-3:22)<br><br>A. The Letter to Ephesus (2:1-7)<br><br>B. The Letter to Smyrna (2:8-11)<br><br><br>C. The Letter to Pergamum (2:12-17)<br><br><br>D. The Letter to Thyatira (2:18-29)<br><br><br>E. The Letter to Sardis (3:1-6)<br><br><br>F. The Letter to Philadelphia (3:7-13)<br><br><br>G. The Letter to Laodicea (3:14-22)<br><br><br>Chapters 2 and 3 together are usually called the “seven letters to the seven churches.” You may wish to set each letter apart. The reader can then easily see that they are separate letters.<br><br>Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 27.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Poverty and wealth<br><br>The Christians in Smyrna were poor because they did not have much money. But they were rich spiritually because God would reward them for their suffering. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])<br><br>### “The devil is about to”<br><br>People were about to take some of the Christians in Smyrna and throw them into prison and even kill some of them ([Revelation 2:10](../rev/02/10.md)). John does not say who these people were. But he does speak of them harming the Christians as if Satan himself were harming them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])<br><br>### Balaam, Balak, and Jezebel<br><br>Balaam, Balak, and Jezebel were people who lived long before Jesus was born. They all tried to harm the Israelites either by cursing them or by making them want to stop obeying God.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### “Let the one who has an ear, hear what the Spirit is saying to the churches”<br><br>The writer knew that almost all of his readers had physical ears. The ear here is a metonym for hearing what God says and desiring to obey him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### “The angel of the church”<br><br>The word **angel** here can also mean “messenger.” This might refer to the messenger or leader of the church. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../rev/01/20.md).<br><br>### “The words of the one who”<br><br>The verses with these words can be difficult to translate. They do not make complete sentences. You may need to add “These are” to the beginning of these verses. Also, Jesus used these words to speak of himself as if he were speaking of another person. Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking of other people. Jesus began speaking in [Revelation 1:17](../rev/01/17.md). He continues to speak through the end of Chapter 3.
+REV	2	1	kq5r		τῷ ἀγγέλῳ	1	the angel	Here, **angel** could refer to: (1) a heavenly angel which protects the church at Ephesus. Alternatively, this **angel** is (2) a human messenger which is sent to the seven churches. If **the angel** is a human messenger, then it could refer to a leader of the church at Ephesus or, perhaps, to the actual messenger who went from John bearing the Book of Revelation to the church at Ephesus. Note that verse [Revelation 1:11](../01/11.md) would suggest the need for messengers to be sent to each of the seven churches in their seven cities. The translator should keep the apparent ambiguity of the symbolism and not try to specify either option of interpretation over the other. Note the translation of **angel** in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md).
+REV	2	1	mn8x	translate-names	τῷ ἀγγέλῳ τῆς ἐν Ἐφέσῳ ἐκκλησίας γράψον	1	General Information:	This is the beginning of Jesus Christ’s message to the angel of the church in Ephesus. Ephesus is the name of one of the **seven churches**, or seven assemblies of believers, which existed in southwestern Asia Minor when John wrote the Book of Revelation. Note the translation of the **seven churches** in verse [Revelation 1:11](../01/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+REV	2	1	q1ck	writing-pronouns	ὁ κρατῶν τοὺς ἑπτὰ ἀστέρας ἐν τῇ δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ, ὁ περιπατῶν ἐν μέσῳ τῶν ἑπτὰ λυχνιῶν τῶν χρυσῶν	1		Here, the implied subject of the two clauses is Jesus Christ. Jesus Christ is the assumed subject from the context established in the previous chapter one. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the intended reference to Jesus Christ explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus Christ, the one who holds the seven stars in his right hand, who walks in the midst of the seven golden lampstands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+REV	2	1	i92a	writing-symlanguage	ἀστέρας	1	stars	These **stars** are symbols. The **stars** represent the seven angels of the seven churches. Note the translations of **stars** in [Revelation 1:16](../01/16.md) and [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md). The figure of speech is that of symbolic language which is common to the Book of Revelation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
+REV	2	1	ugs3	writing-symlanguage	τῶν ἑπτὰ λυχνιῶν τῶν χρυσῶν	1	lampstands	The **golden lampstands** are symbols that represent the seven churches, or seven assemblies of believers. See how you translated **lampstands** in [Revelation 1:12](../01/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
+REV	2	2	jg1u	figs-abstractnouns	οἶδα…τὸν κόπον καὶ τὴν ὑπομονήν σου	1	I know … your hard labor and your patient endurance	If your readers would misunderstand the abstract nouns **labor** and **endurance**, you can express them with the verbs “work” and “endure.” Alternate translation: “I know … that you laboured very hard and that you patiently suffered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+REV	2	2	l6mv	figs-youcrowd	τὰ ἔργα σου, καὶ τὸν κόπον καὶ τὴν ὑπομονήν σου, καὶ ὅτι οὐ δύνῃ βαστάσαι κακούς; καὶ ἐπείρασας τοὺς λέγοντας ἑαυτοὺς ἀποστόλους, καὶ οὐκ εἰσίν, καὶ εὗρες αὐτοὺς ψευδεῖς	1		The second person pronouns and the second person individuals addressed throughout this verse are all singular in their number but plural in their references. In other words, all the second person references in the verbs and the pronouns, although singular in their literal sense, are plural in their implied references to the believers of the church at Ephesus. If the singular form of the second person address and the second person verbal references would not be natural in your language, then perhaps the translator could use the plural forms of the second person, or “you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
+REV	2	2	sxbf	figs-nominaladj	κακούς	1		Here, **evil people** translates directly an adjective in the Greek that signifies simply “wicked” or **evil**. Thus, the translator must supply a noun that the adjective is describing through an assumed implication. The natural assumption for the noun to be supplied would be human individuals who were people in the surrounding community of those being addressed here. Alternate translation: “wayward people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+REV	2	2	ka9e		εὗρες αὐτοὺς ψευδεῖς	1	you have found them to be false	Here, **you have found them** indicates the literal translation of the Greek. However, the sense of **found** is something like "to understand" or simply to come to the knowledge about a certain reality. The understood reality is actually the falsehood of the claim of certain people to be apostles. Alternate translation: “you have recognized those people to be false apostles”
+REV	2	3	nn01	figs-explicit	καὶ ὑπομονὴν ἔχεις	1		Here, **and you have patient endurance** implies a missing affirmation of **I know** from the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternative translation: “I realize that you have patient endurance” or "I recognize that you have patient endurance" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+REV	2	3	muq8	figs-metonymy	διὰ τὸ ὄνομά μου	1	because of my name	Here, **name** is a metonym for the person of Jesus Christ, since Jesus uses **name** here to refer to  himself. The believers in Ephesus are suffering persecution and difficult circumstances for the sake of Jesus Christ as believers in him. The assembly in Ephesus suffers for the sake of the person and message of Jesus Christ within their society. Alternate translation: “because of me” or “because you believe in my name” or “because you believe in me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n
+REV	2	3	j46d	figs-metaphor	οὐ κεκοπίακες	1	you have not grown weary	Being discouraged is spoken of as growing **weary**. The metaphor relates the notion of quitting an action with becoming tired since often people stop an action if they are tired. Alternate translation: “you have not become discouraged” or “you have not quit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+REV	2	3	mg3z	figs-litotes	οὐ κεκοπίακες	1		Here, **have not grown weary** is a litotes expression that expresses emphasis by negating the opposite statement. In this case, Jesus emphasizes the act of persevering and not giving up despite obstacles by stating the opposite notion. The believers at Ephesus had persevered in trials but did not give up. Thus, they did not grow **weary** or become tired, but rather they continued to try hard. See the previous note about the metaphor in the figure of speech. Alternate translation: “you have not grown tired” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
+REV	2	4	j7gz		ἔχω κατὰ σοῦ, ὅτι	1	I have against you the fact that	Here **I have against you that** indicates a negative, critical sentiment. It expresses the idea of a critical attitude in the person speaking, meaning something like: "I have something against you" or "there is something about you that I disapprove of". The Greek does not supply what Jesus is angry about, but the following clause describes the matter of contention. Alternate translation: “I disapprove of you because” or “I have a criticism to make of you"
+REV	2	4	kx98	figs-metaphor	τὴν ἀγάπην σου τὴν πρώτην ἀφῆκες	1	you have left behind your first love	To stop doing something is spoken of as leaving it **behind**, and **love** is spoken of as if it is an object that can be left behind. Alternate translation: “you have stopped loving me as you did at the beginning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+REV	2	5	sfw2	figs-metaphor	πόθεν πέπτωκας	1	from where you have fallen	The notion of the church no longer loving as much as they used to love is spoken of as having **fallen** in the sense of "how far you have fallen from your original location". Here, "falling" from a standing location is a metaphor for abandoning an earlier love and devotion for a person, in this case Jesus. The metaphorical figure of speech describes a tremendous decline in the love for Jesus among the Christians at Ephesus. Alternate translation: “how much you have changed” or “how much you used to love me” or "how far you have fallen" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 REV	2	5	j6p5		εἰ δὲ μή	1	Unless you repent	Alternate translation: “If you do not repent”
-REV	2	5	j8p5	writing-symlanguage	κινήσω τὴν λυχνίαν σου	1	remove your lampstand	The **lampstands** are symbols that represent the seven churches. See how you translated “lampstand” in [Revelation 1:12](../01/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
+REV	2	5	j8p5	writing-symlanguage	κινήσω τὴν λυχνίαν σου	1	remove your lampstand	The **lampstand** is a symbol that represents one of the seven churches. See how you translated “lampstand” in [Revelation 1:12](../01/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
 REV	2	6	cvi5	translate-names	τῶν Νικολαϊτῶν	1	Nicolaitans	The **Nicolaitans** were people who followed the teachings of a man named Nicolaus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 REV	2	7	s3qg	figs-metonymy	ὁ ἔχων οὖς, ἀκουσάτω	1	Let the one who has an ear, hear	Jesus is emphasizing that what he has just said is important and may take some effort to understand and put into practice. Here, the phrase **has an ear** is a metonym for the willingness to understand and obey. Alternate translation: “Let the one who is willing to listen, listen to” or “The one who is willing to understand, let him understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 REV	2	7	ft48	figs-123person	ὁ ἔχων οὖς, ἀκουσάτω	1	Let the one … hear	Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. Alternate translation: “If you are willing to listen, listen to” or “If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
@@ -160,7 +190,7 @@ REV	2	28	c1zc		καὶ δώσω αὐτῷ	1	I will also give him	Here, **him**
 REV	2	28	g5iy	writing-symlanguage	τὸν ἀστέρα τὸν πρωϊνόν	1	morning star	This is a bright **star** that sometimes appears early in the **morning** just before dawn. It was a symbol of victory. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
 REV	2	29	ilk8	figs-metonymy	ὁ ἔχων οὖς, ἀκουσάτω	1	Let the one who has an ear, hear	Jesus is emphasizing that what he has just said is important and may take some effort to understand and put into practice. Here, the phrase **has an ear** is a metonym for the willingness to understand and obey. See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “Let the one who is willing to listen, listen to” or “The one who is willing to understand, let him understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 REV	2	29	ikm8	figs-123person	ὁ ἔχων οὖς, ἀκουσάτω	1	Let the one … hear	Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “If you are willing to listen, listen to” or “If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-REV	3	intro	q1l9			0		# Revelation 3 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Chapters 2 and 3 together are usually called the “seven letters to the seven churches.” You may wish to set each letter apart. The reader can then easily see that they are separate letters.<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 7.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Seven spirits of God<br><br>These spirits are the seven spirits of [Revelation 1:4](../rev/01/04.md).<br><br>### Seven stars<br><br>These stars are the seven stars of [Revelation 1:20](../rev/01/20.md).<br><br>## Important metaphors in this chapter<br><br>### Look, I am standing at the door and am knocking<br><br>Jesus speaks of his desire to have the Christians in Laodicea obey him as if he were a man asking people in a house to allow him to enter and eat with them ([Revelation 3:20](../rev/03/20.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>### “Let the one who has an ear, hear what the Spirit is saying to the churches”<br><br>The speaker knew that almost all of his readers had physical ears. The ear here is a metonym for hearing what God says and desiring to obey him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### “The angel of the church”<br><br>The word **angel** here can also mean “messenger.” This might refer to the messenger or leader of the church. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../rev/01/20.md).<br><br>### “The words of the one who”<br><br>The verses with these words can be difficult to translate. They do not make complete sentences. You may need to add “These are” to the beginning of these verses. Also, Jesus used these words to speak of himself as if he were speaking of another person. Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking of other people. Jesus began speaking in [Revelation 1:17](../rev/01/17.md). He continues to speak through the end of Chapter 3.
+REV	3	intro	q1l9			0		# Revelation 3 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>### Outline of Chapters Two and Three of Revelation<br><br><br>I. The Current Condition of the Churches (2:1-3:22)<br><br>A. The Letter to Ephesus (2:1-7)<br><br>B. The Letter to Smyrna (2:8-11)<br><br>C. The Letter to Pergamum (2:12-17)<br><br>D. The Letter to Thyatira (2:18-29)<br><br>E. The Letter to Sardis (3:1-6)<br><br>F. The Letter to Philadelphia (3:7-13)<br><br>G. The Letter to Laodicea (3:14-22)<br><br><br><br>Chapters 2 and 3 together are usually called the “seven letters to the seven churches.” You may wish to set each letter apart. The reader can then easily see that they are separate letters.<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 7.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Seven spirits of God<br><br>These spirits are the seven spirits of [Revelation 1:4](../rev/01/04.md).<br><br>### Seven stars<br><br>These stars are the seven stars of [Revelation 1:20](../rev/01/20.md).<br><br>## Important metaphors in this chapter<br><br>### Look, I am standing at the door and am knocking<br><br>Jesus speaks of his desire to have the Christians in Laodicea obey him as if he were a man asking people in a house to allow him to enter and eat with them ([Revelation 3:20](../rev/03/20.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>### “Let the one who has an ear, hear what the Spirit is saying to the churches”<br><br>The speaker knew that almost all of his readers had physical ears. The ear here is a metonym for hearing what God says and desiring to obey him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### “The angel of the church”<br><br>The word **angel** here can also mean “messenger.” This might refer to the messenger or leader of the church. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../rev/01/20.md).<br><br>### “The words of the one who”<br><br>The verses with these words can be difficult to translate. They do not make complete sentences. You may need to add “These are” to the beginning of these verses. Also, Jesus used these words to speak of himself as if he were speaking of another person. Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking of other people. Jesus began speaking in [Revelation 1:17](../rev/01/17.md). He continues to speak through the end of Chapter 3.
 REV	3	1	k6b7			0	General Information:	This is the beginning of the Son of Man’s message to the angel of the church in Sardis.
 REV	3	1	u1zs		τῷ ἀγγέλῳ	1	the angel	Here, **the angel** could refer to: (1) a heavenly angel who protects this church. (2) a human messenger to the church, either a messenger who went from John to the church or the leader of the churches. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md).
 REV	3	1	q7n9	translate-names	Σάρδεσιν	1	Sardis	**Sardis** is the name of a city in the western part of Asia that today is modern Turkey. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:11](../01/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -546,7 +576,7 @@ REV	13	intro	c9mw			0		# Revelation 13 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and for
 REV	13	1	su49			0	General Information:	John begins to describe a beast who appears in his vision. Here, **I** refers to John.
 REV	13	2	k6qh	writing-symlanguage	δράκων	1	dragon	The **dragon** was a large, fierce reptile, like a lizard. For Jewish people, it was a symbol of evil and chaos. The dragon is also identified as “the devil or Satan.” See how you translated this in [Revelation 12:3](../12/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
 REV	13	2	xa3a		ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ ὁ δράκων τὴν δύναμιν αὐτοῦ	1	The dragon gave his power to it	The **dragon** made the beast as powerful as he was. He did not lose **his power**, however, by giving it to the beast.
-REV	13	2	c4wx		ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ ὁ δράκων τὴν δύναμιν αὐτοῦ, καὶ τὸν θρόνον αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐξουσίαν μεγάλην	1	his power … his throne, and his great authority to rule	The words **power**, **throne**, and **authority** are three ways of referring to the dragon's authority, and together they emphasize that the authority was great.
+REV	13	2	c4wx		ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ ὁ δράκων τὴν δύναμιν αὐτοῦ, καὶ τὸν θρόνον αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐξουσίαν μεγάλην	1	his power … his throne, and his great authority to rule	The words **power**, **throne**, and **authority** are three ways of referring to the dragon’s authority, and together they emphasize that the authority was great.
 REV	13	2	gyv9	figs-metonymy	τὸν θρόνον αὐτοῦ	1	his throne	Here, **throne** refers to the dragon’s authority to rule as king. Alternate translation: “his royal authority” or “his authority to rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 REV	13	3	yt22	figs-activepassive	καὶ ἡ πληγὴ τοῦ θανάτου αὐτοῦ ἐθεραπεύθη	1	but its fatal wound was healed	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “but its fatal wound healed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 REV	13	3	ba2z		ἡ πληγὴ τοῦ θανάτου	1	fatal wound	This is an injury that is serious enough to cause a person to die. Alternate translation: “deadly wound”
diff --git a/manifest.yaml b/manifest.yaml
index 34f48e989f..2b1a4bfd83 100644
--- a/manifest.yaml
+++ b/manifest.yaml
@@ -369,30 +369,30 @@ dublin_core:
   description: "Open-licensed exegetical notes that provide historical, cultural, and linguistic information for translators. It provides translators and checkers with pertinent, just-in-time information to help them make the best possible translation decisions."
   format: 'text/tsv'
   identifier: 'tn'
-  issued: '2022-05-02'
+  issued: '2022-06-07'
   language:
     direction: 'ltr'
     identifier: 'en'
     title: 'English'
-  modified: '2022-05-02'
+  modified: '2022-06-07'
   publisher: 'unfoldingWord'
   relation:
-  - 'en/ult?v=35'
-  - 'en/ust?v=34'
-  - 'hbo/uhb?v=2.1.24'
-  - 'el-x-koine/ugnt?v=0.24'
-  - 'en/ta?v=27'
-  - 'en/tq?v=32'
-  - 'en/tw?v=30'
+  - 'en/ult?v=36'
+  - 'en/ust?v=35'
+  - 'hbo/uhb?v=2.1.25'
+  - 'el-x-koine/ugnt?v=0.25'
+  - 'en/ta?v=28'
+  - 'en/tq?v=33'
+  - 'en/tw?v=31'
   rights: 'CC BY-SA 4.0'
   source:
   - identifier: 'tn'
     language: 'en'
-    version: '59'
+    version: '60'
   subject: 'TSV Translation Notes'
   title: 'unfoldingWord® Translation Notes'
   type: 'help'
-  version: '60'
+  version: '61'
 checking:
   checking_entity:
   - 'unfoldingWord'